From the collection of the
3 98
STRAND
$ 1
n
m
o Prelinger
library
P
slin
JJ
San Francisco, California
2006
STRRND PRICE $15.
LIBRflRY OF C/GUIDE TO THE STUI
11-S9-06338-X ffE&Stf 9/1
STRflND BOOK STORE
A GUIDE TO THE STUDY OF
Representative Books Reflecting the Development of
American Life and Thought
Supplement
1956-1965
Prepared Under the Direction of Roy P. Easier
by Oliver H. Orr, Jr., and the Staff of the
Bibliography and Reference Correspondence Section
GENERAL REFERENCE AND BIBLIOGRAPHY DIVISION • REFERENCE DEPARTMENT
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS • Washington: 1976
Library of Congress Cataloging in Publication Data (Revised)
United States. Library of Congress. General Reference and Bibliography
Division.
A guide to the study of the United States of America.
Supplement, 1956-1965.
Includes index.
Supt. of Docs, no.: LC 2.8:Un3/supp.
i. United States — Bibliography. I. Mugridge, Donald Henry. II. McCrum,
Blanche Prichard, 1887- . III. Orr, Oliver Hamilton.
21215^53 Suppl. [£156] 016.973 60—60009
ISBN 0—8444—0164—1
FOR SALE BY THE SUPERINTENDENT OF DOCUMENTS, U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20402 - PRICE $12
STOCK NUMBER 030-010-00042-7
Contents
Introduction
CHAPTER I
Page IX
hem Nos.
i-33
34-57
58—220
221-499
500-717
718-1110
Literature (1607-1965)
A. The Thirteen Colonies (1607—1763)
B. The Revolution and the New Nation
(1764-1819)
C. Nationalism, Sectionalism, and Schism
(1820—1870)
D. The Gilded Age and After
(1871-1914)
E. The First World War and the Great
Depression (1915—1939)
F. The Second World War and the
Atomic Age (1940—1965)
CHAPTER H
Language
A. Dictionaries 1111—1114
B. Grammars and General Studies 1115—1119
C. Dialects, Regionalisms, and Foreign
Languages in America 1120—1123
D. Miscellaneous 1124—1126
CHAPTER III
Literary History and Criticism
A. Anthologies and Series 1127—1156
B. History and Criticism 1157—1264
C. Periodicals 1265—1270
CHAPTER IV
Biography and Autobiography 1271-1303
CHAPTER v Item Nos.
Periodicals and Journalism
A. Newspapers: General 1304—1308
B. Newspapers: Periods, Regions, and
Topics 1309—1314
C. Individual Newspapers 1315—1318
D. Newspapermen 1319—1330
E. Foreign-Language Periodicals 1331—1332
F. The Practice of Journalism J333— J342
G. Magazines: General J343— J345
H. Individual Magazines 1346—1348
I. The Press and Society 1349—1352
CHAPTER VI
Geography
A. General and Physical Geography J353— !
B. Geology and Soil 1358—1361
C. Climate and Weather 1362—1364
D. Plants and Animals 1365-1371
E. Historical Geography and Atlases 1372—1375
F. Polar Exploration 1376—1378
CHAPTER VII
The American Indian
A. General Works
B. Archeology and Prehistory 1386—1391
C. Tribes and Tribal Groups 1392—1395
D. Religion, Art, and Folklore 1396—1398
E. The White Advance 1399—1406
F. The Twentieth Century 1407—1410
IV / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Item Nos.
CHAPTER VIII
General History
A. Historiography 1411—1425
B. General Works 1426—1445
C. The New World 1446-1450
D. The Thirteen Colonies 1451-1469
E. The American Revolution 1470—1483
F. Federal America (1783—1815) 1484—1496
G. The "Middle Period" (1815—60) 1497—1511
H. Slavery, the Civil War, and
Reconstruction (to 1877) 1512—1536
I. Grant to McKinley (1869—1901) 1537—1546
J. Theodore Roosevelt to Wilson
(1901-21) 1547-1557
K. Since 1920 1558—1570
CHAPTER IX
Diplomatic History and
Foreign Relations
A. Diplomatic History
Ai. General Works 1571-1590
Aii. Period Studies 1591—1600
Aiii. Personal Records 1601
Aiv. The British Empire 1602—1607
Av. Russia 1608
Avi. Other European Nations 1609—1612
Avii. Latin America: General 1613
Aviii. Latin America: Individual
Nations 1614—1617
Aix. Asia, Africa, and the
Middle East 1618-1628
B. Foreign Relations
Bi. Administration 1629—1636
Bii. Democratic Control 1637—1641
Biii. Policies 1642—1645
Biv. Economic Policy 1646—1647
CHAPTER X
Military History and the Armed Forces
hem Nos.
D. The Air Force 1666—1667
E. Wars of the United States
Ei. The Revolution 1668—1671
Eii. 1798-1848 1672-1673
Eiii. The Civil War 1674—1684
Eiv. The Spanish- American War 1685
Ev. World War I 1686-1688
Evi. World War II 1689-1694
Evii. The Korean War 1695—1697
CHAPTER XI
Intellectual History
A. General Works
B. Periods
C. Topics
D. Localities
E. International Influences: General
1698—1701
1702—1706
1707-1714
1715—1716
1717—1720
F. International Influences: By Country 1721—1722
A. General Works
B. The Army
C. The Navy
1648—1654
1655-1659
1660—1665
CHAPTER XII
Local History : Regions, States, Cities
A. General Works, Including Series 1723—1726
B. New England: General 1727-1728
C. New England: Local 1729—1737
D. The Middle Atlantic States 1738-1759
E. The South: General 1760-1772
F. The South Atlantic States: Local 1773-1781
G. The Old Southwest: General 1782-1785
H. The Old Southwest: Local 1786-1795
I. The Old Northwest: General 1796-1801
J. The Old Northwest: Local 1802-1809
K. The Far West 1810-1825
L. The Great Plains: General 1826-1829
M. The Great Plains: Local 1830-1835
N. The Rocky Mountain Region:
General 1836-1838
O. The Rocky Mountain Region: Local 1839-1846
P. The Far Southwest: General 1847-1848
Q. The Far Southwest: Local 1849-1856
R. California 1857-1862
S. The Pacific Northwest: General 1863-1865
T. The Pacific Northwest: Local 1866-1868
CONTENTS / V
U. Alaska and Hawaii
V. Overseas Possessions
Item Nos.
1869-1871
1872-1874
CHAPTER XIII
Travel and Travelers
A. General Works
B. 19 Selected Travelers, 1754—1898
(chronologically arranged by the
date of their travels)
CHAPTER XIV
Population, Immigration, and
Minorities
A. Population
B. Immigration: General
C. Immigration: Policy
D. Minorities
E. Negroes
F. Jews
G. Orientals
H. North Americans
I. Scandinavians
J. Other Stocks
CHAPTER XV
Society
A. Some General Views
B. Social History: Periods
C. Social History: Topics
D. Social Thought
E. General Sociology; Social Psychology
F. The Family
G. Communities: General
H. Communities: Rural
I. Communities: Urban
J. City Planning; Housing
K. Social Problems; Social Work
L. Dependency; Social Security
M. Delinquency and Correction
1875-1877
1878—1915
1916—1921
1922—1925
1926—1928
1929-1934
1935-1954
1955-1959
1960—1962
1963-1965
1966
1967-1975
1976-1983
1984-1985
1986—1994
1995-1999
2000—2006
2007—2014
2015—2017
2018—2020
2021—2027
2028—2034
2035—2041
2042—2046
2047—2056
CHAPTER XVI
Communications
A. The Post Office; Express Companies
B. Telegraph, Cable, Telephone
C. Radio, Television: Broadcasting
D. Radio, Television: The Audience
E. Government Regulation
F. Mass Communications
CHAPTER XVII
Science and Technology
A. General Works
B. Particular Sciences
C. Individual Scientists
D. Science and Government
E. Invention
F. Engineering
Item Nos.
2057—2060
2061—2063
2064—2076
2077—2079
2080—2081
2082—2086
2087—2099
2100—2105
2106—2113
2114—2118
2119—2120
2121—2124
CHAPTER XVIII
Medicine and Public Health
A. Medicine in General
B. Physicians and Surgeons
C. Psychiatry
D. Other Specialties
E. Hospitals and Nursing
F. Medical Education
G. Public Health
H. Medical Economics
CHAPTER XIX
Entertainment
A. General Works
B. The American Stage
Bi. History
Bii. Criticism
Biii. Particular Stage Groups,
Theaters, Movements, etc.
Biv. Biography: Actors and
Actresses
Bv. Biography: Directors,
Producers, etc.
2125—2131
2132-2139
2140—2143
2144—2146
2147—2151
2152-2154
2155—2164
2165—2168
2169—2172
2173-2177
2178—2180
2181—2184
2185-2189
2190—2193
VI / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Item Nos.
C. Motion Pictures
Ci. History 2194—2197
Cii. Special Aspects and Analyses 2198—2202
Ciii. Biography: Actors and
Actresses 2203
Civ. Biography: Directors,
Producers, etc. 2204
D. Other Forms of Entertainment
Di. Radio and Television 2205
Dii. The Dance in America 2206—2208
Diii. Vaudeville and Burlesque 2209—2210
Div. Showboats, Circuses, etc. 2211—2213
CHAPTER XX
Sports and Recreation
A. General 2214—2220
B. Community and Scholastic Activities 2221—2224
C. Particular Sports and Recreations
Ci. Auto-Racing and Motoring 2225—2227
Cii. Baseball 2228—2235
Ciii. Boating 2236—2240
Civ. Boxing 2241—2247
Cv. Football 2248—2254
Cvi. Golf and Tennis 2255—2258
Cvii. Horse-Racing 2250—2260
Cviii. Miscellaneous 2261—2267
D. General Field Sports 2268—2274
CHAPTER XXI
Education
A. General Works
Ai. Historical and Descriptive 2275—2282
Aii. Philosophical and Theoretical 2283—2289
B. Primary and Secondary Schools
Bi. General and Historical Works 2290—2296
Bii. Preschool and Primary
Grades 2297—2298
Biii. Secondary Schools 2299—2302
C. Colleges and Universities
Ci. General and Historical Works 2303—2318
Cii. Individual Institutions 2319—2323
D. Education of Special Groups 2324—2327
E. Teachers and Teaching 2328—2332
F. Methods and Techniques 2333—2338
hem Nos.
G. Contemporary Problems and Con-
troversies 2339—2348
H. Periodicals and Yearbooks 2349—2353
CHAPTER XXII
Philosophy and Psychology
A. Philosophy: General Works 2354-2366
B. Representative Philosophers 2367—2403
C. Psychology 2404
CHAPTER XXIII
Religion
A. General Works
B. Period Histories
C. Church and State
D. Religious Thought; Theology
E. Religious Bodies
F. Representative Leaders
G. Church and Society
H. The Negro's Church
CHAPTER XXIV
Folklore, Fol^ Music, Foll^ Art
A. Legends and Tales: General
B. Legends and Tales: Local
C. Folksongs and Ballads: General
D. Folksongs and Ballads: Local
E. Folk Art and Crafts
2405-2417
2418—2421
2422—2430
2431-2436
2437-2450
2451-2456
2457-2465
2466
2467-2473
2474-2487
2488-2498
2499—2506
2507—2510
CHAPTER XXV
Music
A. General Histories and Reference
Works 2511—2516
B. Contemporary Surveys and Special
Topics 2517—2521
C. Localities 2522—2523
D. Religious Music 2524
E. Popular Music 2525—2530
F. Jazz 2531-2534
G. Orchestras and Bands 2535
H. Opera 2536-2540
I. Choirs
J. Music Education
K. Individual Musicians
hem Nos.
2541
2542-2543
2544-2546
M. Labor: General
N. Labor: Special
CONTENTS / VII
Item Nos.
2724-2732
2733-2738
CHAPTER XXVI
Art and Architecture
A. The Arts 2547-2554
B. Architecture: General 2555—2560
C. Architecture: Special 2561—2568
D. Interiors 2569—2571
E. Sculpture 2572—2573
F. Painting 2574—2583
G. Painting: Individual Artists 2584—2594
H. Prints and Photographs 2595—2596
I. Decorative Arts 2597—2600
J. Museums 2601—2602
CHAPTER XXVII
Land and Agriculture
A. Land 2603—2609
B. Agriculture: History 2610—2616
C. Agriculture: Practice 2617—2622
D. Agriculture: Government Policies 2623—2627
E. Forests and Forestry 2628—2632
F. Animal Husbandry 2633—2637
G. Conservation: General 2638—2641
H. Conservation: Special 2642—2649
CHAPTER XXVIII
Economic Life
A. General Works: Histories 2650—2657
B. Other General Works 2658-2662
C. Industry: General 2663—2664
D. Industry: Special 2665—2671
E. Transportation: General 2672
F. Transportation: Special 2673—2683
G. Commerce: General 2684—2686
H. Commerce: Special 2687—2693
I. Finance: General 2694—2698
J. Finance: Special 2699—2710
K. Business: General 2711-2715
L. Business: Special 2716—2723
CHAPTER XXIX
Constitution and Government
A. Political Thought
B. Constitutional History
C. Constitutional Law
D. Civil Liberties and Rights
E. Government: General
F. The Presidency
G. Congress
H. Administration: General
I. Administration: Special
J. State Government
K. Local Government
CHAPTER XXX
Law and Justice
A. History: General
B. History: The Supreme Court
C. General Views
D. Digests of American Law
E. Courts and Judges
F. The Judicial Process
G. Administrative Law
H. Lawyers and the Legal Profession
CHAPTER XXXI
Politics, Parties, Elections
A. Politics: General
B. Politics: Special
C. Political Parties
D. Local Studies
E. Machines and Bosses
F. Pressures
G. Elections: Machinery
H. Elections: Results
I. Reform
2739-2747
2748-2755
2756-2761
2762—2772
2773—2780
2781-2786
2787-2796
2797-2799
2800—2803
2408-2807
2808-2812
2813-2817
2818-2834
2835—2841
2842
2843-2850
2851-2859
2860-2862
2863-2870
2871-2873
2874-2881
2882—2900
2901—2906
2907—2909
2910—2912
2913—2916
2917—2922
2923
VIII / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
hem Nos. Item Nos.
CHAPTER xxxn D. Book Selling and Collecting 2933~2935
j T -L E- Libraries 2936-2937
and Libraries R Librarianship and Library Use
A. Printing and Publishing: General 2924—2926
B. Individual Publishers 2927-2930 p
C. Book Production: Technology and
Art 2931-2932 Index 479
Introduction
WHEN A Guide to the Study of the United States
yf America was published in 1960, the Library
anticipated updating it with supplements or revi-
sions. A supplement covering books published dur-
ing the decade 1956-65 was decided upon, and a
guideline limiting its contents to approximately half
the number of entries contained in the 1960 Guide
was adopted.
With only occasional exceptions, the Supplement's
designated time period, 1956-65, has been adhered
to throughout. A few works appearing before 1956
are mentioned in annotations and headnotes because
of their special relevance to the numbered entries,
but they themselves are not regarded as entries in
the formal sense. A few other pre-1956 publications
are entered as parts of series or multivolume studies
that began before 1956 and continued into the
decade encompassed here. Also included in some
instances are reprints or revisions, containing newly
contributed annotations, bibliographies, textual al-
terations, or biographical or critical essays, of works
first published before 1956. Although occasional pro-
jected works are referred to in the Supplement's
annotations, no books published after 1965 are men-
tioned, and no events occurring subsequent to that
date are noted. Various chapters in the 1960 Guide
describe books that appeared after its theoretical
cutoff date of 1955; those books are excluded from
the Supplement.
"Selected Readings in American Studies," an ap-
pendix to the 1960 Guide, has been omitted from the
Supplement, inasmuch as scholarship in this field
has begun to develop its own surveys and bibliogra-
phies.
The reader who seeks information about the
origins of this bibliographic project, the manner in
which books are selected for inclusion, and the na-
ture of the bibliographic style and the annotations,
should consult the -general introduction in the 1960
Guide and the individual introductions to each of
its chapters. The slight modifications in the 1960
Guide's structure that were adopted in the Supple-
ment are explained in the introductions to the chap-
ters affected. The index follows the pattern of the
one in the 1960 Guide.
The 1960 Guide lists a few publications that were
not represented in the collections of the Library of
Congress at the time the volume was compiled. All
numbered entries in the Supplement are held by the
Library, and the catalog card number and classifica-
tion number or location are given for each.
No listing of names along with units of work
accomplished can accurately reflect the contribution
made by each of the many staff members of the
General Reference and Bibliography Division who
participated in the compilation of this Supplement.
Some performed multiple piecemeal tasks (selecting
books, writing portions of chapters, substituting new
annotations for old); others concentrated on a few
large undertakings, in many instances compiling en-
tire chapters. Those given piecemeal tasks collec-
tively compiled five chapters — VIII, General
History; XV, Society; XVII, Science and Technol-
ogy; XVIII, Medicine and Public Health; and
XXVIII, Economic Life; they also contributed in
one way or another to virtually every part of the
Supplement. Foremost among them were Edward
P. Cambio, Judith R. Farley, Betsy M. Fleet, Baiba
Garoza, Stefan M. Harrow, John W. Kimball, Mar-
vin W. Kranz, Sandra N. Pantages, Marie Schilling,
Jerome L. Segal, Richard N. Sheldon, and Ruth E.
Wennersten. Miss Garoza also prepared the index.
The basic content of each of the following chap-
ters was determined by the person or persons indi-
cated: I, Literature, Judith L. Richelieu and Donald
H. Cresswell; II, Language, Dan O. Clemmer; III,
Literary History and Criticism, Katherine M.
Hanna; IV, Biography and Autobiography, Evalyn
K. Shapiro; V, Periodicals and Journalism, Lucia J.
Rather; VI, Geography, Suzy M. Slavin; VII, The
American Indian, Lucia J. Rather; IX, Diplomatic
History and Foreign Relations, Joyce Holland; X,
Military History and the Armed Forces, Victor P.
Margolin; XI, Intellectual History, William J. Stu-
der; XII, Local History, Donald A. Baskerville;
XIII, Travel and Travelers, Evalyn K. Shapiro;
XIV, Population, Immigration, and Minorities, the
late Donald H. Mugridge; XVI, Communications,
William J. Studer; XIX, Entertainment, Lucia J.
Rather; XX, Sports and Recreation, William J.
Studer; XXI, Education, Natalie L. Miller; XXII,
Philosophy and Psychology, Rande B. Langdon;
IX
X / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
XXIII, Religion, Lucia J. Rather; XXIV, Folklore,
Folk Music, Folk Art, Gail Shulman; XXV, Music,
Alma S. Mather; XXVI, Art and Architecture,
Lucia J. Rather; XXVII, Land and Agriculture,
Suzy M. Slavin; XXIX, Constitution and Govern-
ment, Henry J. Silverman; XXX, Law and Justice,
Joyce Holland and John J. Beall; XXXI, Politics,
Parties, Elections, Joyce Holland; and XXXII, Books
and Libraries, Evelyn M. Timberlake.
Members of the Library staff outside the General
Reference and Bibliography Division offered pre-
liminary suggestions and criticized portions of the
bibliography as the work progressed. Particularly
helpful were personnel in the following offices:
American-British Law Division, Law Library; Eco-
nomics Division, Education and Public Welfare
Division, and Senior Specialist Division, Congres-
sional Research Service; and Geography and Map
Division, Manuscript Division, Music Division,
Prints and Photographs Division, and Science and
Technology Division, Reference Department.
From outside the Library came the thoughtful
assistance of Robert H. Walker, Professor of Amer-
ican Civilization, George Washington University,
on Chapter I, Literature; Robert W. Burchfield,
Editor, Oxford English Dictionary Supplement, Ox-
ford, England, on Chapter II, Language; John
Blake, Chief, History of Medicine Division, Na-
tional Library of Medicine, on Chapter XVIII,
Medicine and Public Health; Nelson R. Burr, au-
thor of bibliographical and historical works on
religion in America and a retired LC staff member,
on Chapter XXIII, Religion; and Benjamin A. Bot-
kin, author and compiler of numerous books on
folklore and a former LC staff member, on Chapter
XXIV, Folklore, Folk Music, Folk Art.
The Specialist in American History in the Gen-
eral Reference and Bibliography Division functioned
as the editor of the Supplement. Donald H. Mug-
ridge, co-compiler of the 1960 Guide, held the posi-
tion of specialist until his death in November 1964.
He was succeeded by James E. O'Neill, who re-
signed in August 1965. Oliver H. Orr, Jr., replaced
O'Neill and, although he transferred to the Manu-
script Division in 1969, served as editor until the
Supplement was completed.
Helen D. Jones, Head of the Bibliography and
Reference Correspondence Section, rendered inval-
uable help to the Supplement staff as general critic,
as authority on bibliographical procedures and style,
and — especially after the death of Mr. Mugridge
— as repository of information about the compila-
tion of the 1960 Guide. After Mrs. Jones' retirement
in January 1969, her successor as Head of the Bibli-
ography and Reference Correspondence Section,
Ruth S. Freitag, was a constant source of encour-
agement, advice, and bibliographical expertise. The
Supplement's index was prepared under the succes-
sive supervision of Mrs. Jones and Miss Freitag.
A second supplement, covering books published
during the decade 1966-75, is now being compiled
under the editorship of Marvin W. Kranz, the cur-
rent Specialist in American History.
As Director of the Reference Department and,
after October 1968, in my present capacity, I was
able to devote to every chapter of the Supplement,
at each stage of development, the same overall edi-
torial attention that I gave to the 1960 Guide. I
would be remiss, however, if I failed to acknowledge
that chief credit for sustained accomplishment must
go to Dr. Orr, and to the late Mr. Mugridge. The
bridge between their respective terms was ably held
by Dr. O'Neill. I would also be remiss if I failed to
acknowledge that Robert H. Land, Chief of the
General Reference and Bibliography Division, gave
the best of supervision to the labors of all concerned,
and I am sure he will join in a declaration that both
the 1960 Guide and this Supplement are a monu-
ment to the special talent of Donald Mugridge,
whose work enlightened both.
Roy P. Easier
Chief, Manuscript Division
i
Literature (1607-1965)
The Thirteen Colonies (1607—1763) i— 33
The Revolution and the New Nation (1764—1819) 34— 57
Nationalism, Sectionalism, and Schism (1820—1870) 58— 220
The Gilded Age and After (1871—1914) 221— 499
The First World War and the Great Depression (1915—1939) 500— 717
The Second World War and the Atomic Age (1940—1965) 718—1110
OF THE 1960 Guide's 340 authors in Chapter I, 233 are represented here. Nineteen new
authors who achieved prominence during the years 1956-65 have been added to Section
F, which retains its original title except for an extension of the coverage dates from 1940-55
to 1940-65. The new authors, entered alphabetically among the others in Section F, are Edward
Albee, John Earth, William Burroughs, John Cheever, James Dickey, Lawrence Ferlinghetti,
Allen Ginsberg, Herbert Gold, Jack Kerouac, Bernard Malamud, James Michener, Vladimir
Nabokov, Howard Nemerov, Flannery O'Connor,
Philip Roth, Isaac Bashevis Singer, M. B. Tolson,
John Updike, and Kurt Vonnegut. The criteria for
their selection are those stated on page i in the 1960
Guide.
Headnotes for the new authors appear in the Sup-
plement as they do for each author in the 1960
Guide. Some pre-1956 publications of the new
authors are mentioned in their headnotes, but only
their 1956—65 works are listed as formal entries.
No headnotes are offered in the Supplement for the
authors carried over from the 1960 Guide; instead,
the entry numbers for their respective headnotes in
the 1960 Guide are supplied.
Whereas the 1960 Guide usually omits biograph-
ical and critical works, referring the reader to in-
clusive publications such as the Literary History of
the United States (no. 1214 in the Supplement) and
The Literature of the American People (no. 2496 in
the 1960 Guide), the Supplement seeks to be as
representative of biographical and critical studies as
of literary works. The chief reason for this change
in policy is that the above-mentioned general his-
tories are outdated for our purposes. The biblio-
graphy in the Literary History of the United States
terminates with the year 1958 and The Literature of
the American People has not been revised since its
publication in 1951.
From the large number of reprints and revised
editions of literary works, we have attempted to
select those accompanied by such significant contri-
butions as textual revisions, annotations, bibliogra-
phies, or essays about the author or the work. If the
earlier edition appeared in the 1960 Guide, its entry
number is supplied. From the biographical and
critical studies, we have tried to choose those that
develop fresh interpretations or provide syntheses of
scholarship, or both.
Sections C and D, covering the periods often
called the "American Renaissance" and the "Gilded
Age," respectively, include large numbers of analyt-
ical works reflecting the influence of the New
Criticism. More biographical and critical studies
appear in these two sections than in the other four
sections combined. Section F is distinctive for its
understandable shortage of critical writings and its
great body of new books by living authors.
The arrangement of entries under each author's
name follows the pattern described on page 2 of the
1960 Guide.
2 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
A. The Thirteen Colonies (1607-1763)
1. ANNE DUDLEY BRADSTREET, 1612?-
1672
No. 7 in 1960 Guide.
2. Piercy, Josephine K. Anne Bradstreet. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1965] 144 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 72)
64-20722 PS7I2.P5
Bibliographical notes: p. 121—128. Bibliography:
p. 129-137.
Mrs. Bradstreet's poetry and prose are examined
as reflections of her spiritual and artistic develop-
ment.
3. WILLIAM BYRD, 1674-1744
No. 12 in 1960 Guide.
4. The London diary, 1717-1721, and other writ-
ings. Edited by Louis B. Wright and Marion
Tinling. New York, Oxford University Press, 1958.
647 p. illus. 57-10389 F229.B9685
Bibliographical footnotes.
CONTENTS.— The life of William Byrd of Vir-
ginia, 1674-1744.— The secret diary of William
Byrd of Westover from December 13, 1717, to May
19, 1721. — History of the dividing line. — A journey
to the land of Eden. — A progress to the mines.
The third section of Byrd's diary, the other two
sections of which are no. 15 and 16 in the 1960
Guide, is published here for the first time, contain-
ing "all the passages that can be deciphered."
Transcribed from a shorthand notebook in the
library of the Virginia Historical Society, it portrays
London under George I and describes life in Vir-
ginia during the development of its agrarian aris-
tocracy. The last three works in the volume appear
in an abridged text based on The Westover Manu-
scripts (1841), no. 13 in the 1960 Guide.
5. JOHN COTTON, 1584-1652
No. 17 in 1960 Guide.
6. Emerson, Everett H. John Cotton. New York,
Twayne Publishers [1965] 176 p. (Twayne's
United States authors series, 80)
65-13000 BX726o.C79E5
Bibliographical notes: p. 159-162. Bibliography:
p. 163-170.
Cotton's treatises, sermons, pamphlets, and other
writings are examined to indicate their literary and
cultural significance within a historical context.
7. Ziff, Larzer. The career of John Cotton: Puri-
tanism and the American experience. Prince-
ton, N. J., Princeton University Press, 1962. 280 p.
62-7415 6X7260.07975
"Bibliographical note": p. 261—271.
A sociopolitical biography treating Cotton's career
in England and America, his times, and his works.
8. JONATHAN EDWARDS, 1703-1758
No. 21 in 1960 Guide.
9. The mind; a reconstructed text by Leon How-
ard. Berkeley, University of California Press,
1963. 151 p. (University of California publica-
tions. English studies, 28) 63-64061 6871^5
Appendix: The essays "Of Being" and "Of the
Prejudices of Imagination": p. 137—148.
Note on sources: p. 149.
Using the holograph index to a lost manuscript,
Howard has rearranged the earliest printed edition
of Edwards' collection of notes entided "The Mind."
The reader is guided by an introduction, running
commentary, and conclusion.
10. Works. Perry Miller, general editor. [New
Haven, Yale University Press] 1957—59. 2 v-
57-2336 6X71 17X3 1957
CONTENTS. — v. i. Freedom of the will. — v. 2.
Religious affections.
The 1754 edition of volume i and the 1746 edi-
tion of volume 2 are no. 26 and 25, respectively, in
the 1960 Guide.
11. The select works of Jonathan Edwards; with
an account of his life by Iain H. Murray.
[London] Banner of Truth Trust [1958-61] 3 v.
59-2646 BX7H7.E3 1958
Bibliography: v. i, p. 60—62.
CONTENTS.— v. i'. Memoir, by I. H. Murray. A
narrative of surprising conversions. Sermons. — v. 2.
Sermons. — v. 3. Treatise concerning the religious
affections.
The 1737 edition of A Faithful Narrative of the
Surprizing Worf( of God in the Conversion of Many
Hundred Souls ... is no. 22 in the 1960 Guide, and
the 1746 edition of A Treatise Concerning Religious
Affections is no. 25.
12. Select works, v. i. London, Banner of Truth
Trust [1965] 244 p.
66-4638 BX7H7.E3 1965
The Distinguishing Mar\s of a Wor\ of the Spirit
of God and An Account of the Revival of Religion
in 'Northampton, 1740-1742 have been added to
this edition of volume i, and Iain H. Murray's
"Memoir" has been omitted.
13. Aldridge, Alfred O. Jonathan Edwards. New
York, Washington Square Press [1964] 181 p.
(The Great American thinkers series, W88i)
65-935
Bibliography: p. 167—172.
A study of Edwards' philosophy in relation to the
intellectual currents of his time.
14. El wood, Douglas J. The philosophical theol-
ogy of Jonathan Edwards. New York, Colum-
bia University Press, 1960. 220 p.
60—12503 BX726o.E3E5 . 1960
"Bibliography of Jonathan Edwards": p. [199]—
202. Bibliography: p. [203]— 214.
Whereas other studies tend to concentrate on
either the religion or the philosophy of Edwards,
this one combines analyses of both.
15. COTTON MATHER, 1663-1728
No. 40 in 1960 Guide.
1 6. The diary of Cotton Mather, D.D., F.R.S. for
the year 1712. Edited, with an introduction
and notes, by William R. Manierre, II. Charlottes-
ville, University Press of Virginia [1964] xxvii,
143 p. 64—13720 F67.M42I4
This portion of Mather's diary had never before
been printed in its entirety, although extracts ap-
peared in the Panoplist and Missionary Magazine
between 1816 and 1820.
17. Wendell, Barrett. Cotton Mather; the Puritan
priest. New York, Harcourt. Brace & World
[1963] xxxi, 248 p. (A Harbinger book)
63-12740 F67.M452 1963
Bibliography: p. [231 3-233.
Alan Heimert's introduction reveals the continu-
ing significance of this biography, first published in
1891.
1 8. SAMUEL SEW ALL, 1652-1730
No. 56 in 1960 Guide.
19. Winslow, Ola E. Samuel Sewall of Boston.
New York, Macmillan [Ci964] 235 p. illus.
63-16140 ^67.8547
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 3
Bibliographical notes: p. 209—220. Bibliography:
p. 221—224.
A narrative biography stressing material found in
Sewall's Diary (no. 57 in the 1960 Guide).
20. JOHN SMITH, 1579/80-1631
No. 66 in 1960 Guide.
21. Barbour, Philip L. The three worlds of Cap-
tain John Smith. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1964. xix, 553 p. illus. 64-10543 F229.S7I45
Bibliographical notes: p. [397]— 490. Bibliog-
raphy: p. [4931-527.
Smith's career as adventurer, colonist, and promo-
ter is examined in the light of hints and clues pre-
viously ignored.
22. Wharton, Henry. The life of John Smith,
English soldier. Translated from the Latin
manuscript with an essay on Captain John Smith in
seventeenth-century literature by Laura Polanyi
Striker. Chapel Hill, Published for the Virginia
Historical Society by the University of North Caro-
lina Press [1957] 101 p. illus.
57-13884 F229.S7W4
Bibliographical footnotes.
Written in 1685, Wharton's manuscript is pub-
lished here for the first time in English translation.
An essay on "Early American Interest in Wharton's
Manuscript," by Richard Beale Davis, is included.
23. EDWARD TAYLOR, 1642-1729
No. 72 in 1960 Guide.
24. Christographia. Edited by Norman S. Grabo.
New Haven, Yale University Press, 1962.
xlviii, 507 p. 62—10317 6X7117^3
Bibliographical footnotes.
A series of 14 related sermons, delivered between
1701 and 1703, with correlative meditations in verse.
The editor's introduction provides both history and
interpretation.
25. Poems. Edited by Donald E. Stanford, with
a foreword by Louis L. Martz. New Haven,
Yale University Press, 1960. Ixii, 543 p.
60—6432 PS850.T2A6 1960
Bibliographical references included in appendixes.
The complete text of the author's major work,
Preparatory Meditations, is printed here for the
first time.
26. Grabo, Norman S. Edward Taylor. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1962, Ci96i] 192
p. (Twayne's United States authors series, 8)
61-15668 6X7260/12867 1962
4 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Bibliographical notes: p. 174—182. Bibliography:
p. 183-187.
27. MICHAEL WIGGLES WORTH, 1631-1705
No. 79 in 1960 Guide.
28. Crowder, Richard. No featherbed to heaven,
a biography of Michael Wiggles worth, 1631—
1705. [East Lansing] Michigan State University
Press [1962] 299 p. 61—16933 6X7260^4807
Bibliographical notes: p. 271—282. Bibliography:
p. 283-293.
29. ROGER WILLIAMS, ca. 1603-1683
No. 84 in 1960 Guide.
30. Complete writings. New York, Russell & Rus-
sell, 1963. 7 v.
63-11034 BX6495.W55A2 1963
Volumes i— 6 are reprints of the Narragansett
edition, no. 89 in the 1960 Guide. Volume 7 con-
tains five tracts not printed in that edition, together
with an introductory essay.
CONTENTS. — v. 7. Roger Williams: An essay
in interpretation by Perry Miller. Christenings make
not Christians. Experiments of spiritual life and
health. The fourth paper presented by Major But-
ler. The hireling ministry none of Christs. The
examiner — defended in a fair and sober answer.
31. Winslow, Ola E. Master Roger Williams, a
biography. New York, Macmillan, 1957. 328
P- 57-10016 F82.W692
Bibliographical notes: p. 293—312. Bibliography:
p. 313-316.
Miss Winslow seeks to avoid the myths, legends,
and exaggerations surrounding her subject, for "His
story is better as he lived it." Sources include Wil-
liams' letters and sermons, his Worlds (published in
six volumes of the Narragansett Club Publications,
no. 89 in the 1960 Guide), colony records, personal
accounts of contemporaries, and pamphlet literature
of the 1640'$ and 1650'$.
32. JOHN WINTHROP, 1588-1649
No. 90 in 1960 Guide.
33. Morgan, Edmund S. The Puritan dilemma;
the story of John Winthrop. Edited by Oscar
Handlin. Boston, Little, Brown [1958] 224 p.
(The Library of American biography)
58-6029 F67.W798
Bibliographical notes: p. [207]— 215.
Interprets Winthrop's answer to the central Puri-
tan problem involving man's responsibility to soci-
ety. The author's principal sources are the 1853
edition of Winthrop's Journal (no. 91 in the 1960
Guide) and the Winthrop Papers (see biographical
note, no. 90 in the 1960 Guide).
B. The Revolution and the New Nation (1764-1819)
34. JOEL BARLOW, 1754-1812
No. 101 in 1960 Guide.
35. Woodress, James L. A Yankee's odyssey; the
life of Joel Barlow. Philadelphia, Lippincott
[1958] 347 P- 58-11128 PS705.W6
Bibliographical notes: p. 309—328.
A full-scale narrative biography. Primary sources
include the major collection of Barlow manuscripts
in the Harvard University Library. An appendix
contains examples of Barlow's poetry.
36. HUGH HENRY BRACKENRIDGE, 1748-
1816
No. 105 in 1960 Guide.
37
Modern chivalry, containing the adventures of
Captain John Farrago and Teague O'Regan,
his servant. Edited for the modern reader by Lewis
Leary. New Haven, College & University Press
335 p. (The Masterworks of literature
series) 65—28257 PZ3.B7233Mo6
Reproduces the first four volumes of Modern
Chivalry, published in 1792, 1793, and 1797. Subse-
quent additions and revisions have been omitted,
although spelling and punctuation have been regu-
larized and, when appropriate, modernized. See
no. 106—108 in the 1960 Guide.
38.
39
CHARLES BROCKDEN BROWN, 1771-
1810
No. 109 in 1960 Guide.
Arthur Mervyn; or, Memoirs of the year 1793.
Edited, with an introduction, by Warner
Berthoff. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston
[1962] 430 p. (Rinehart editions, 112)
62-9499 PZ3.B8i4Ar8
Bibliography: p. xxv-xxvii.
The text is based on that of the original edition,
published in two parts, 1799—1800 (no. 116 in the
1960 Guide). Minor changes have been made in the
interest of typographic uniformity and orthographic
consistency.
40. BENJAMIN FRANKLIN, 1706-1790
No. 122 in 1960 Guide.
41. The autobiography of Benjamin Franklin.
Edited by Leonard W. Labaree [and others].
New Haven, Yale University Press, 1964. 351 p.
illus. 64—12653 E302.6.F7A2 1964
Bibliography: p. 323—325.
Edited from the original manuscript in the Henry
E. Huntington Library and Art Gallery. Aids to
the reader include an introduction, footnotes, a
Franklin chronology, Franklin's oudine, and bio-
graphical notes concerning persons mentioned in the
Autobiography. Descriptions of other editions may
be found under no. 123—127 in the 1960 Guide.
42. Representative selections, with introduction,
bibliography, and notes, by Chester E. Jorgen-
son and Frank Luther Mott. Rev. ed. New York,
Hill & Wang [1962] clxxxix, 544 p. (American
century series. American writers, ACW48)
62-9491 PS745.A3M7 1962
Bibliography: p. cli-clxxxix.
A revised edition of no. 131 in the 1960 Guide.
"The Dissertation on Liberty and Necessity, Pleasure
and Pain, never before printed in an edition of
Franklin's works or in a book of selections, is here
printed from the London edition of 1725, retaining
his peculiarities of italics, capitalization, and punc-
tuation."
43. Amacher, Richard E. Benjamin Franklin.
New York, Twayne Publishers [1962] 192 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 12)
61—18069 PS75I.A5
Bibliographical notes: p. 159-178. Bibliography:
p. 179-187.
A study of Franklin the writer, treating represen-
tative works in various literary genres, among them
scientific papers, political journalism, and religious
and philosophical tracts.
44. Granger, Bruce I. Benjamin Franklin; an
American man of letters. Ithaca, N.Y., Cornell
University Press [1964] 264 p.
64—23360 PS75I.G7
Bibliographical footnotes. "Bibliographical note":
p. 253-255.
Assesses Franklin's achievement in the world of
letters, focusing "on those writings that have belle-
tristic qualities, not on scientific and official papers
except as they are treated incidentally."
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 5
45. THOMAS JEFFERSON, 1743-1826
No. 149 in 1960 Guide.
46. Notes on the State of Virginia. Introduction
to the Torchbook ed. by Thomas Perkins
Abernethy. New York, Harper & Row [1964]
228 p. (Harper Torchbooks. The University li-
brary) 64-2956 F230.J5I02 1964
Bibliographical footnotes.
A reprint of the edition published as part of
volume 8 of The Writings of Thomas Jefferson
(New York, H. W. Derby, 1861), edited by Henry
A. Washington. Information regarding other edi-
tions is contained in the introduction and in no.
150—153 in the 1960 Guide.
47. THOMAS PAINE, 1737-1809
No. 154 in 1960 Guide.
48. Thomas Paine; representative selections, with
introduction, bibliography, and notes, by Harry
Hayden Clark. Rev. ed. New York, Hill & Wang
[1961] clxiii, 436 p. (American century writers,
ACW43) 61-16873 JCi77.A5 1961
Bibliography: p. cxxv-clxiii.
The bibliography has been updated in this re-
printing of no. 158 in the 1960 Guide.
49. Gimbel, Richard. Thomas Paine, a biblio-
graphical check list of Common sense, with an
account of its publication. New Haven, Yale Uni-
versity Press, 1956. 124 p. 56-5942 28654.65
Facsimiles of title pages from various editions of
Common Sense illustrate the detailed introductory
account. The checklist describes editions of the
pamphlet and contains a list of materials relating to it.
50. SUSANNA HASWELL ROWSON, 1762-
1824
No. 161 in 1960 Guide.
51. Charlotte Temple, a tale of truth. Edited for
the modern reader by Clara M. and Rudolf
Kirk. New York, Twayne Publishers [1964] 163
p. (Twayne's United States classics series)
64-14446 PZ3.R799C35
Originally published by William Lane at his Mi-
nerva Press, London, in 1791, the first edition is
reprinted here with an address entided "To Ladies
and Gendemen, Patrons of Entertaining Literature"
as preface. Two other editions are no. 162—163 ^n
the 1960 Guide.
52. JOHN TRUMBULL, 1750-1831
No. 165 in 1960 Guide.
6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
53. Satiric poems: The progress of dulness and
M'Fingal. With illustrations from engravings
by E. Tisdale. Edited, with a preface and notes, by
Edwin T. Bowden. Austin, University of Texas
Press [1962] 229 p. 61—15829 PS852.P7 1962
Presents "for the first time, an accurate reproduc-
tion of the first complete edition of each poem."
The Progress of Dulness was first published in New
Haven, Conn., in 1772—73. The text of M'Fingal
is taken from the first complete version, published
by Hudson and Goodwin, Hartford, Conn., in 1782.
A revised edition of Trumbull's Poetical Worths ap-
peared in 1820 (no. 167 in the 1960 Guide).
54. MASON LOCKE WEEMS, 1759-1825
No. 171 in 1960 Guide.
55. The life of Washington. Edited by Marcus
Cunliffe. Cambridge, Mass., Belknap Press of
Harvard University Press, 1962. Ixii, 226 p. illus.
(The John Harvard library)
62—20253 E31 2^3893
Bibliographical footnotes.
The text is based on that of the ninth edition,
published in 1809 (other editions are no. 172-176 in
the 1960 Guide). An extensive introduction honors
Weems and his work, providing biographical and
critical comment as well as a detailed publishing
history of The Life of Washington.
56. JOHN WOOLMAN, 1720-1772
No. 178 in 1960 Guide.
57. Cady, Edwin H. John Woolman. New York,
Washington Square Press [1965] 182 p.
(The Great American thinkers series)
65-1754 6X7795^703
Bibliography: p. 173—178.
A sympathetic evaluation of Woolman, illustra-
ting his contributions to American culture in the
20th century as well as in his own time.
C. Nationalism, Sectionalism, and Schism (182.0-1870)
58. LOUISA MAY ALCOTT, 1832-1888
No. 1 88 in 1960 Guide.
59. Hospital sketches. Edited by Bessie Z. Jones.
Cambridge, Belknap Press of Harvard Univer-
sity Press, 1960. xliv, 91 p. (The John Harvard
library) 60—13289 £621^34 1960
Reprinted from a copy of the first edition (1863)
in the Houghton Library of Harvard University.
The sketches are based on Miss Alcott's brief experi-
ences as a volunteer nurse at a Georgetown, D.C.,
hospital during the Civil War.
60. Worthington, Marjorie M. Miss Alcott of
Concord, a biography. Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1958. 330 p. 58—11330 PSioi8.W6
Bibliography: p. 323—326.
61. TIMOTHY SHAY ARTHUR, 1809-1885
No. 190 in 1960 Guide.
62. Ten nights in a bar-room, and what I saw
there. Edited by Donald A. Koch. Cam-
bridge, Belknap Press of Harvard University Press,
1964. Ixxxiii, 240 p. (The John Harvard library)
64—25051 PZ3-A79Teio
The editor's introduction discusses Arthur's life
and work in relation to the 19th-century temperance
crusade. The text is a facsimile reprint of an 1854
edition bearing the combined imprint of L. P.
Crown, Boston, and J. W. Bradley, Philadelphia.
Another 1854 edition carries only the Bradley im-
print (no. 191 in the 1960 Guide).
63.
64.
ROBERT MONTGOMERY BIRD, 1806-
1854
No. 20 1 in 1960 Guide.
Dahl, Curtis. Robert Montgomery Bird. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1963] 144 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 31)
62—19475 PSio99.B5Z62
Bibliographical notes: p. 128—131. Biblography:
p. 132—140.
Sources include the collection of Bird manuscripts
at the University of Pennsylvania as well as previ-
ously published biographical and critical material.
65.
66.
CHARLES FARRAR BROWNE ("ARTE-
MUS WARD"), 1834-1867
No. 209 in 1960 Guide.
Austin, James C. Artemus Ward. New York,
Twayne Publishers [1964] 141 p. (Twayne's
United States authors series, 51)
63-20610 PSii43-A9
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 7
Bibliographical notes: p. 122—131. Bibliography:
p. 132-138.
An examination of Browne's career as a journal-
ist, satiric lecturer, and letter-writer, demonstrating
his contribution to the American comic tradition.
67. WILLIAM CULLEN BRYANT, 1794-1878
No. 216 in 1960 Guide.
68. McLean, Albert F. William Cullen Bryant.
New York, Twayne Publishers [1964] 159
p. ( Twayne 's United States authors series, 59)
64—13955 PSn8i.M3
Bibliographical notes: p. 139—148. Bibliography:
p. 149-151.
The author contends "that William Cullen
Bryant, as a poet, is far different from the gentle-
manly man-of-letters handed down to us by his
nineteenth-century admirers."
69. WILLIAM ELLERY CHANNING, 1780-
1842
No. 230 in 1960 Guide.
70. Brown, Arthur W. Always young for liberty;
a biography of William Ellery Channing.
[Syracuse, N.Y.] Syracuse University Press [1956]
268 p. 56-9464 6X9869.04684
Reappraises Channing, focusing on his life and
work "for a generation which knows him almost
solely by association with other, more familiar
names." Lacks footnotes but contains a critical
essay on "Literature and Sources" (p. 245—261).
71. Rice, Madeleine H. Federal Street pastor; the
life of William Ellery Channing. New York,
Bookman Associates [1961] 360 p.
61-15676 BX9869.C4R5
Bibliographical notes: p. 303—332. Bibliography:
P- 333-345-
The sources consulted by the author of this com-
prehensive study include manuscript collections,
magazines, newspapers, published letters, diaries,
and memoirs.
72. LYDIA MARIA FRANCIS CHILD, 1802-
1880
No. 239 in 1960 Guide.
73
Baer, Helene G. The heart is like heaven; the
life of Lydia Maria Child. Philadelphia, Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania Press [1964] 339 p. illus.
64—10895 £449.05383
Bibliography: p. 317—333.
Emphasizes Mrs. Child's efforts for social reform
and the abolition of slavery, examining her relation-
ships with prominent figures within these move-
ments.
74. Meltzer, Milton. Tongue of flame; the life of
Lydia Maria Child. New York, Crowell
[1965] 210 p. 65-14903 £449.05393
Bibliography: p. [197]— 204.
A narrative account based chiefly on Mrs. Child's
books, articles, and correspondence. Unpublished
letters and scrapbooks were also consulted.
75. JOHN ESTEN COOKE, 1830-1886
No. 245 in 1960 Guide.
76. Outlines from the outpost. Edited by Richard
Harwell. Chicago, Lakeside Press, 1961.
xxxiv, 413 p. (The Lakeside classics, 59)
62—6657 £470.2.072
Bibliographical footnotes.
A collection of Civil War sketches and narratives,
planned as a book that was described in the author's
diary but never published. Many of the "Outlines"
originally appeared in The Southern Illustrated
News; others first appeared in Wearing of the Gray
(1867), which also contained revised versions of
sketches published earlier. One essay is printed here
for the first time.
77. JAMES FENIMORE COOPER, 1789-1851
No. 252 in 1960 Guide.
78. The bravo. Edited for the modern reader by
Donald A. Ringe. New York, Twayne Pub-
lishers [Ci963] 382 p. (Twayne's United States
classics series) 63—17405 PZ3-C786Br3o
Bibliographical footnotes.
Cooper examines the relative values of democratic
and autocratic governments in a romance of i8th-
century Venice. Modern practice has been followed
with regard to spelling and punctuation in a text
based on that of the first American edition (Phila-
delphia, Carey & Lea, 1831. 2 v.).
79. The crater; or, Vulcan's Peak. Edited by
Thomas Philbrick. Cambridge, Belknap Press
of Harvard University Press, 1962. xxx, 471 p.
(The John Harvard library)
62-11397 PZ3.C786Cri5
Bibliographical footnotes.
The establishment of a Utopian community in the
Pacific provides the background for an explication
of Cooper's views concerning socialism and democ-
racy. The text is that of the first edition (New
York, Burgess, Stringer, 1847. 2 v.). Minor typo-
8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
graphical errors have been corrected and the spelling
of foreign words regularized.
80. Letters and journals. Edited by James Frank-
lin Beard. Cambridge, Belknap Press of Har-
vard University Press, 1960—64. 4 v. illus.
60-5388 PS 1 43 1. A3 1960
CONTENTS. — v. i. 1800—1830. — v. 2. 1830—1833.
— v. 3. 1833—1839. — v. 4. 1840—1844.
Bibliographical footnotes.
Complete texts of all available letters and journals
are included, as well as letters to editors and brief
articles or notes written for newspapers and periodi-
cals. Approximately two-thirds of the material has
not been previously published. Entries are grouped
in accordance with the periods of Cooper's life and
are arranged chronologically.
8 1. Philbrick, Thomas. James Fenimore Cooper
and the development of American sea fiction.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1961. 329 p.
illus. 61—15276 PSi442.S4P45 1961
Considers the nautical novels of Cooper and his
contemporaries up to 1851, when Moby-Die ^ was
published; includes explanatory notes (p. [287] —
326) and an extensive bibliography (p. [2691-286).
82. Ringe, Donald A. James Fenimore Cooper.
New York, Twayne Publishers [1962] 175 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, n)
61-18068
Bibliographical notes: 157—164. Bibliography:
p. 165—171.
The author concentrates on Cooper's later novels,
stressing "the thematic interpretation of his tales
and the means, sometimes highly successful, by
which he gave his themes expression." Biographical
and historical information is kept to a minimum.
83. RICHARD HENRY DANA, 1815-1882
No. 274 in 1960 Guide.
84. Two years before the mast; a personal narra-
tive of life at sea. Edited from the original
manuscript and from the first ed., with journals and
letters of 1834—1836 and 1859—1860, and notes by
John Haskell Kemble. With original illustrations
by Robert A. Weinstein, and illustrated from con-
temporary paintings, prints, and charts. Los
Angeles, Ward Ritchie Press, 1964. 2 v. illus. (part
col.) 64—20444 6540.02 1964
The 1840 edition is no. 275 in the 1960 Guide.
85. Shapiro, Samuel. Richard Henry Dana, Jr.,
1815—1882. [East Lansing] Michigan State
University Press, 1961. xi, 251 p.
61—13704 £415.9.01585
Bibliographical notes: p. 199—240. Bibliography:
p. 241-244.
Literature played a relatively minor role in Dana's
life, as it does in this biography. Although his legal
and political careers receive major emphasis, his
literary achievement is spotlighted in the final chap-
ter, "The History of a Book." The author's princi-
pal source is the collection of Dana papers divided
between the Massachusetts Historical Society in
Boston and the Longfellow House in Cambridge.
86. JOHN WILLIAM DE FOREST, 1826-1906
No. 277 in 1960 Guide.
87. Kate Beaumont. With an introduction by
Joseph Jay Rubin. [State College, Pa., Bald
Eagle Press, 1963] 424 p. (Monument edition, 3)
63-753 i PZ3-D363Kat
This realistic portrayal of life in South Carolina
before the Civil War first appeared in serial form in
The Atlantic Monthly, January-December 1871; a
book set from the corrected sheets was issued the
following year. De Forest then added his own
changes and revisions, and the text printed here is
from this third and final version. The editor used
a photostat of the novelist's corrected copy in the
Yale University Library.
88. Honest John Vane. With an introduction by
Joseph Jay Rubin. [State College, Pa., Bald
Eagle Press, 1960] 232 p. (Monument edition, i)
60-5478 PZ3.D363H02
This indictment of political corruption in Wash-
ington during the Grant administration first ap-
peared in five installments in The Atlantic Monthly
in 1873. With the exception of minor mechanical
changes, the present text is that of the only book
edition, published by Richmond & Patten, New
Haven, 1875.
89. Playing the mischief. With an introduction
by Joseph Jay Rubin. [State College, Pa.,
Bald Eagle Press, 1961] 452 p. (Monument edi-
tion, 2) 61-10502 PZ3-D363P1
This sequel to Honest John Vane began appearing
serially in Fran\ Leslie's Chimney Corner in 1874.
Harper & Brothers printed the book the following
year, and De Forest revised it, as was his custom.
The text printed here is based on Yale University's
copy containing the author's corrections.
90. Light, James F. John William De Forest.
New York, Twayne Publishers [1965] 192 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 82)
65-13002
Bibliographical notes: p. 178—183. Bibliography:
p. 184-188.
De Forest's major works are analyzed at length in
a study which attempts "to reveal the relationship
between the life and the work and by doing so to
exhibit each a little more clearly." Primary sources
include the De Forest materials in the Yale Collec-
tion of American Literature.
91. RALPH WALDO EMERSON, 1803-1882
No. 280 in 1960 Guide.
92. Selections from Ralph Waldo Emerson. Edited
by Stephen E. Whicher. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin [1957] 517 p. (Riverside editions, Ai3)
57—14108 PSi6o3-W45
Includes an introduction, a chronology, and full
bibliographical notes (p. 469—510). The text is
based on several previous publications, including
the centenary edition of Emerson's Complete Wor\s
(no. 297 in the 1960 Guide) and Ralph L. Rusk's
edition of the Letters (no. 296 in the 1960 Guide).
Selections from the Journals (no. 294 in the 1960
Guide) have been corrected and amplified from
manuscript sources.
93. Early lectures. Edited by Stephen E. Whicher
and Robert E. Spiller. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1959—64. 2 v.
59-5160 PS 1 602. W5
Bibliographical footnotes. Bibliography: v. i, p.
389-391; v. 2, p. 367-368.
CONTENTS. — v. i. 1833—1836. — v. 2. 1836—1838.
This collection is newly edited from the Emerson
papers in Harvard's Houghton Library. Publica-
tion of the lectures delivered through 1847 is con-
templated for this edition.
94. Journals and miscellaneous notebooks. Edited
by William H. Oilman [and others] Cam-
bridge, Belknap Press of Harvard University Press,
1960—65. 5 v. illus. 60—11554 PS 1 63 1. A3 1960
Bibliographical footnotes.
Planned for completion in approximately 16 vol-
umes, this edition is based on the Emerson papers
in Harvard's Houghton Library. Regular journals,
composition books, collections of quotations, and
volumes on special topics will be included, the order
of publication favoring personal and intellectual
records. The first five volumes cover the years
1819—38 and include such items as a "Pocket Diary"
and a "Catalogue of Books Read" in addition to the
regular journals. The text "represents what Emer-
son wrote, in the way he wrote it, including can-
cellations, revision, and variants." An earlier
edition, containing many alterations and deletions,
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 9
was edited by Emerson's son, Edward Waldo, and
his nephew, Waldo Emerson Forbes, and was pub-
lished during the years 1909—14 (no. 294 in the 1960
Guide).
95. The correspondence of Emerson and Carlyle.
Edited by Joseph Slater. New York, Columbia
University Press, 1964. 622 p. illus.
63-17539
Bibliography: p. [591]— 60 1.
Treating the letters "as if they were sacred scrip-
ture," the editor presents unaltered texts based on
manuscript copies, most of which are owned by the
Ralph Waldo Emerson Memorial Association. A
broad introduction (p. [31—94) adds biographical
and historical information.
96. Berry, Edmund G. Emerson's Plutarch.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1961.
337 P- 61-7389 PS 163 1. 84
Bibliographical notes: p. [2931—323. Bibliog-
raphy: p. [2891—292.
Plutarch's works often provided anecdotes, expres-
sions, and topics for Emerson's essays. Berry en-
deavors to "explore the exact extent of the influence
of Plutarch on Emerson," maintaining that it ex-
tends to literary form as well as content.
97. Bishop, Jonathan. Emerson on the soul.
Cambridge, Mass., Harvard University Press,
1964. 248 p. 64—25052 PS 1 642^465
98. Nicoloff, Philip L. Emerson on race and his-
tory; an examination of English traits. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1961. 315 p.
61—7361 PSi6o7-N5 1961
Bibliographical notes: p. [2731—295. Bibliog-
raphy: p. [2961—300.
The author argues that "English Traits was not
just an eccentric production contemporaneous with
the great lecture series 'The Conduct of Life,' but
an important complement to that series and a sig-
nificant philosophical adventure in its own right."
99. TIMOTHY FLINT, 1780-1840
No. 307 in 1960 Guide.
100. Folsom, James K. Timothy Flint. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1965] 191 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 83)
65—13003
Bibliographical notes: p. 171—179. Bibliography:
p. 180-186.
Analyzes Flint's current reputation in relation to
the excessive praise accorded his works during his
lifetime.
10 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1 01. (SARAH) MARGARET FULLER (MAR-
CHESA D'OSSOLI), 1810-1850
No. 313 in 1960 Guide.
102. Margaret Fuller: American Romantic; a selec-
tion from her writings and correspondence;.
Edited by Perry Miller. Garden City, N.Y., Double-
day, 1963. 319 p. (Anchor books)
63—13082 PS2502.M5
Manuscripts in the Harvard University Library
and the Boston Public Library were used in the
preparation of this work. Holographs were fol-
lowed whenever possible, with minimal editing. A
biographical essay and a bibliography are included.
103. Brown, Arthur W. Margaret Fuller. New
York. Twayne Publishers [1964] 159 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 48)
63—20612 PS25o6.B77
Bibliographical notes: p. 135—147. Bibliography:
p. 148-153.
Attempts to soften the harsh judgments of Mar-
garet Fuller's contemporaries by basic reevaluation.
104. JAMES HALL, 1793-1868
No. 319 in 1960 Guide.
105. Randall, Randolph C. James Hall: spokes-
man of the new West. [Columbus] Ohio
State University Press [1964] 371 p.
63-18578 PSi779.Hi6Z86
Bibliographical notes: p. [281]— 321. Bibliog-
raphy: p. [3231-358.
Undertakes "to correct errors and misunderstand-
ings in previous accounts, to present knowledge
from hundreds of manuscripts not used before in
studies of Hall, and to add nearly three hundred
items to the list of his known writings."
1 06. NATHANIEL HAWTHORNE, 1804-1864
No. 333 in 1960 Guide.
107. The scarlet letter; an annotated text, back-
grounds and sources, essays in criticism.
Edited by Sculley Bradley, Richmond Groom Beatty
[and] E. Hudson Long. New York, Norton
[1962] 375 p. (Norton critical editions, ^03)
62—9570 PZ3.H3i8Sc95
A critical edition containing the novel in a first-
edition text, as well as Hawthorne's preface to the
second edition, records of primary sources, and arti-
cles by noted scholars. Editions of 1850, 1947, and
1950 are no. 341—344 in the 1960 Guide.
1 08. The scarlet letter, a romance. Edited, with
an introduction by Larzer ZifT. Indianapolis,
Bobbs-Merrill [1963] 247 p. (The Library of
literature, i) 62-21260 PZ3.H3i8Sc97
The centenary edition text (no. no below) is re-
printed here, with a Hawthorne chronology, a bibli-
ography, and the author's preface to the second
edition.
109. The house of the seven gables. With an in-
troduction and newly edited text by Hyatt H.
Waggoner. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1964]
xlvi, 281 p. (Riverside editions, A89)
64-55765 PZ3.H3i8Ho78
Bibliography: p. xlv— xlvi.
An entirely new critical text, produced by collat-
ing the manuscript with the first edition. Primary
authority is given the manuscript, located in the
Houghton Library at Harvard. Earlier editions are
no. 345—347 in the 1960 Guide.
no. The centenary edition of the works of
Nathaniel Hawthorne. [Editors: William
Charvat, and others. Columbus, Ohio State Univer-
sity Press, 1963—65, Ci962— 65] 3 v.
63-750 PSi85o.F63
Bibliographical footnotes.
CONTENTS. — v. i. The scarlet letter. — v. 2. The
house of the seven gables. — v. 3. The Blithedale
romance. Fanshawe.
The centenary edition provides established texts
of the romances, tales, and shorter works in un-
modernized form. The texts have been constructed
through comparative critical use of early editions
and examination of extant manuscripts. Historical
and explanatory material is included in each vol-
ume, as well as a literary and textual introduction
to each work.
in. Bell, Millicent. Hawthorne's view of the
artist. [Albany] State University of New
York [1962] 214 p. " 62-13566 PSi888.B4
Bibliographical footnotes.
The frequent appearance of the artist within
Hawthorne's fictional framework is examined with
reference to 19th-century Romanticism.
112. Fogle, Richard H. Hawthorne's fiction: the
light & the dark. [Rev. ed.] Norman, Uni-
versity of Oklahoma Press [1964] 240 p.
64-23334 PSi888.F6 1964
This revised edition of no. 361 in the 1960 Guide
is enlarged with two new essays. The bibliography
which appeared in the first edition has been dropped
in declared deference to Walter Blair's survey of
Hawthorne scholarship, supplemented by J. Chesley
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / II
Mathews, in a new edition of Eight American
Authors (see no. 1253 in this Supplement).
113. Hoeltje, Hubert H. Inward sky; the mind
and heart of Nathaniel Hawthorne. Dur-
ham, N.C., Duke University Press, 1962. 579 p.
illus. 62—10052 PSi88i.H6 1962
Bibliography: p. 563—571.
The entire range of Hawthorne's writing is ex-
amined, including letters, journals, and fiction, in
an effort to correlate his inner thought patterns with
the facts of his outward experience — "to disclose, as
far as possible, the whole man."
114. Male, Roy R. Hawthorne's tragic vision.
Austin, University of Texas Press [1957]
187 p. 57-7560 PSi888.M3
Bibliographical footnotes.
Although an essentially tragic view of life is ex-
pressed in Hawthorne's fiction, "the final mood of
Hawthorne's tragedy is a tempered hopefulness."
This study indicates the variety of technique and
metaphor to be found in Hawthorne's work but
stresses the unity and organic wholeness of its de-
sign.
115. Martin, Terence. Nathaniel Hawthorne.
New York, Twayne Publishers [1965] 205
p. (Twayne's United States authors series, 75)
64-20725 PSi88i.Ma8
Bibliographical notes: p. 181—184. Bibliography:
p. 185—201.
Evaluates Hawthorne's literary achievement by
exploring "the contours and issues of his career as
a writer," his "method of imaginative creation," and
"the pervasive thematic concerns" of his tales. The
four major romances and six representative tales re-
ceive individual treatment.
1 1 6. Wagenknecht, Edward C. Nathaniel Haw-
thorne: man and writer. New York, Oxford
University Press, 1961. 233 p.
61-6301 PS 1 88 1. W3
Bibliographical notes: p. 203—220. Bibliography:
221—223.
This account of Hawthorne's character and per-
sonality, based on his writings, letters, and journals,
is described by the author as a psychograph, "neither
a chronological biography nor a critical study."
117. Waggoner, Hyatt H. Hawthorne: a critical
study. Rev. ed. Cambridge, Mass., Belknap
Press of Harvard University Press, 1963. 278 p.
63-17215 PSi888.W3 1963
Bibliographical footnotes.
Extensive revisions, including the addition of one
entirely new chapter, have been made in this new
edition of no. 364 in the 1960 Guide.
1 1 8. OLIVER WENDELL HOLMES, 1809-1894
No. 368 in 1960 Guide.
119. The autocrat's miscellanies. Edited by Albert
Mordell. New York, Twayne Publishers
[1959] 356 p. 59-8382 PSi952.A8
A group of 30 previously uncollected articles on
diverse topics, reflecting the kaleidoscopic aspects
of Holmes' character and career. The editor's notes
provide bibliographical and anecdotal information.
120. Small, Miriam R. Oliver Wendell Holmes.
New York, Twayne Publishers [1963, Ci962]
176 p. (Twayne's United States authors series, 29)
62—19473 PSi98i.S5 1963
Bibliographical notes: p. 154—165. Bibliography:
p. 166—172.
Holmes' public image as a writer is chronologi-
cally examined in relation to his professional career
and private life. The author consulted published
and unpublished materials, including the rich hold-
ings of the Harvard University Library.
121. WASHINGTON IRVING, 1783-1859
No. 381 in 1960 Guide.
122. A history of New York. Edited for the
modern reader by Edwin T. Bowden. New
York, Twayne Publishers 1/1964] 352 p.
(Twayne's United States classics series)
64—19644 Fi22.i.I835 1964
Bibliography: p. 21—22.
Irving's first major revision of this work appeared
in the second edition, published in New York and
Philadelphia in 1812. As reprinted here, the second
edition contains new material but preserves "the
youthful drive and daring and nerve of the first."
No. 382 in the 1960 Guide has information concern-
ing the first edition (1809); a much later edition
(1927) is described in no. 383. For the present text,
spelling has been modernized and punctuation al-
tered in the interest of clarity.
123. A tour on the prairies. Edited, with an in-
troductory essay, by John Francis McDermott.
Norman, University of Oklahoma Press [1956]
xxxii, 214 p. (The Western Frontier library [7])
56—11232 F697.I743 1956
Bibliographical footnotes.
Irving's brief circuit of the Oklahoma prairies in
1832 provided the material for this frontier narra-
tive. Based on the 1859 text, this edition includes
12 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the author's original introduction to the American
edition of 1835.
124. Astoria; or, Anecdotes of an enterprise beyond
the Rocky Mountains. [New ed.] Edited
and with an introduction by Edgeley W. Todd.
Norman, University of Oklahoma Press [1964] xlix,
556 p. illus. (The American exploration and travel
series, 44) 64—20765 F88o.l75
Bibliographical footnotes. Bibliography: p. 524—
534-
The text is that of the author's revised edition
(1860— 61), which has been collated with the first
edition of 1836 (no. 391 in the 1960 Guide); differ-
ences between the two are indicated in the footnotes.
The author's introduction and a lengthy prefatory
essay by the editor are included.
125. The adventures of Captain Bonneville, U.S.A.,
in the Rocky Mountains and the Far West,
digested from his journal. Edited and with an in-
troduction by Edgeley W. Todd. Norman, Univer-
sity of Oklahoma Press [1961] liv, 424 p. illus.
(The American exploration and travel series, no. 34)
61—15144 F592.I73 1961
Bibliographical footnotes. Bibliography: p. 401—
408.
Based on Captain Benjamin de Bonneville 's rec-
ords of his Northwest travels, 1832—35, this sequel
to Astoria was first published in 1837. The text of
the author's revised edition is reprinted here, re-
taining Irving's footnotes and appendix. The maps
which appeared in the first edition are also reprinted.
126. Hedges, William L. Washington Irving: an
American study, 1802—1832. Baltimore,
Johns Hopkins Press, 1965. 274 p. (The Goucher
College series) 65-11663 PS2o8i.H35
Bibliographical footnotes.
Attempts to define Irving's major literary contri-
butions in relation to the context and influence of
his intellectual environment. Claiming that, after
1832, Irving "kept on writing but not developing as
a writer," Hedges does not treat the final 27 years
of his subject's life.
127. Reichart, Walter A. Washington Irving and
Germany. Ann Arbor, University of Michi-
gan Press [1957] 212 p. (University of Michigan
publications. Language and literature, v. 28)
57-7102 PS2o8i.R4
Bibliographical notes: p. 165—191.
In 1822—23, Irving toured Germany and Austria
to collect materials for a "German Sketch Book,"
which became Tales of a Traveller (no. 390 in the
1960 Guide). The background of this tour and its
influence on his subsequent work are examined in
depth. An appendix contains related material,
including a catalog of the German books at Sunny-
side, the Irving estate in Tarrytown, N. Y.
128. Wagenknecht, Edward C. Washington Irv-
ing: moderation displayed. New York, Ox-
ford University Press, 1962. 223 p.
62-9833 PS2o8i.W2
Bibliographical notes: p. 191—205. Bibliography:
p. 207—212.
This literary portrait explores Irving's personality,
which the author sees as "considerably more com-
plicated than it is generally supposed to have been."
Wagenknecht consulted manuscript material in the
collections of several libraries, including the New
York Public Library and the Sterling Library of
Yale University.
129. JOHN PENDLETON KENNEDY, 1795-
1870
No. 405 in 1960 Guide.
130. Swallow barn; or, A sojourn in the Old Do-
minion. With introduction and notes by
William S. Osborne. Illustrations by Strother.
New York, Hafner Pub. Co., 1962. Iv, 506 p.
(Hafner library of classics, no. 22)
62—11037 PZ3.K-383S 15
Bibliography: p. [xliv]— xlv.
Follows the text of the revised second edition of
1851 and includes the preface to the first edition, a
letter of dedication to William Wirt, and Wirt's
reply. Published here for the first time are two
fragments from Kennedy's Swallow Barn manu-
script: "An Inn" and "Hoppergallop House." The
first and second editions mentioned above are no.
406 and 407 respectively in the 1960 Guide; a 1929
reprint of the second edition is no. 408.
131. Rob of the bowl; a legend of St. Inigoe's.
Edited for the modern reader by William S.
Osborne. New Haven, College & University Press
[1965] 363 p. (The Masterworks of literature
series) 65—25630 PZ3.K383R 5
Bibliographical footnotes.
The editor has supplied an introduction (p. 5—27)
and has corrected printer's errors in this text of the
revised second edition of 1854. Later editions are
no. 412—413 in the 1960 Guide.
132. Bohner, Charles H. John Pendleton Ken-
nedy, gentleman from Baltimore. Baltimore,
Johns Hopkins Press [1961] 266 p.
61—10735 £415.9X3566
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 13
Bibliography: p. 238—241. Bibliographical notes:
p. [2431-258.
A comprehensive biography surveying Kennedy's
literary, political, and business careers. The major
source consulted is a collection of 130 volumes of
John Pendleton Kennedy papers in the Peabody
Institute, Baltimore.
133. CAROLINE MATILDA STANSBURY
KIRKLAND, 1801-1864
No. 415 in 1960 Guide.
134. A new home — who'll follow? Glimpses of
western life. Edited for the modern reader
by William S. Osborne. New Haven, College &
University Press [1965] 233 p. (Masterworks of
literature series) 65—25629 PZ3-K635N 10
Bibliography: p. 25.
The first edition of this work is no. 416 in the
1960 Guide, followed by a 1953 edition as no. 417.
The 1840 text of the second edition, incorporating
revisions made by the author, is followed here. The
editor's introduction appears on p. 5—24.
135. ABRAHAM LINCOLN, 1809-1865
No. 419 in 1960 Guide.
136. Warren, Louis A. Lincoln's Gettysburg decla-
ration: "A new birth of freedom." Fort
Wayne, Lincoln National Life Foundation, 1964.
xix, 236 p. illus. 64-56025 £475.55^39
Bibliography: p. [215]— 222.
A detailed chronology of the events surrounding
the writing, delivery, and reception of Lincoln's
most famous address. An appendix contains the
comparatively long oration delivered by Edward
Everett, who preceded Lincoln on the platform at
Gettysburg.
137. DAVID ROSS LOCKE ("PETROLEUM
V. NASBY"), 1833-1888
No. 422 in 1960 Guide.
138. The struggles of Petroleum V. Nasby
[pseud.] Original illustrations by Thomas
Nast. Abridged ed. selected, edited, and with
an introduction by Joseph Jones. Notes to the
chapters by Gunther Earth. Boston, Beacon Press
[1963] 246 p. (Beacon paperback)
63—8275 PN6i6i.L6373 1963
Bibliography: p. 246.
An abridged version of The Struggles (Social,
Financial and Political) of Petroleum V. Nasby,
no. 425 in the 1960 Guide. This abridgment con-
tains one of the lectures, a selection of the illustra-
tions, and approximately one-third of the letters
published in the original collection of 1872.
139. Austin, James C. Petroleum V. Nasby
(David Ross Locke). New York, Twayne
Publishers [1965] 159 p. (Twayne's United States
authors series, 89) 65—18908 PS2248.L8Z59
Bibliographical notes: p. 141—147. Bibliography:
p. 148-154.
Emphasizing analysis rather than biography, the
author offers an overall view of Locke's works,
illustrated by quotations from the collected and un-
collected writings.
HENRY WADSWORTH LONGFELLOW ,
1807-1882
No. 427 in 1960 Guide.
141. Kavanagh, a tale. Edited for the modern
reader by Jean Downey. New Haven, Col-
lege & University Press [1965] 125 p. (Master-
works of literature series)
65-25631 PZ3.L86K 15
Bibliography: p. 22.
An introduction has been added and minor tech-
nical corrections have been made in the text, which
is based on that of the first edition (no. 430 in the
1960 Guide).
142. Arvin, Newton. Longfellow: his life and
work. Boston, Little, Brown [1963] 338 p.
63-8312 PS228i.A6
143. Williams, Cecil B. Henry Wadsworth Long-
fellow. New York, Twayne Publishers
(Twayne's United States authors series, 68)
[Ci964] 221 p. (Twayne's United States authors
series, 68) 64-20718 PS228i.W47
Bibliographical notes: p. 201—207. Bibliography:
p. 211—214.
Hoping to present "a truer picture of the real
man and writer than any available hitherto," Wil-
liams explores the shifting nature of Longfellow's
image and reputation. Both biography and criti-
cism are offered, with emphasis on the interrelation-
ship between Longfellow's literary and academic
careers.
144. HERMAN MELVILLE, 1819-1891
No. 470 in 1960 Guide.
145. Moby-Dick; or, The whale. Edited, with an
introduction and annotation, by Charles
Feidelson, Jr. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill [1964]
xlv, 730 p. illus. (The Library of literature, 5)
64-16178 PZ3.M498Mo 73
14 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Bibliography: p. xxv-xxvi.
The first American edition of Moby-DicJ^ ap-
peared in November 1851. With the exception of
typographical changes, its text has been followed,
supplemented by one short passage published in the
first English edition of October 1851. The editor's
notes define terms and expressions, explain allusions,
explicate obscure or difficult passages, and suggest
relationships among images and ideas. Editions of
Moby-Dic\ and works of critical commentary are
described in no. 481—483 in the 1960 Guide.
146. The confidence-man: his masquerade. Edited,
with an introduction, by Hennig Cohen.
New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston [1964}
xxxiii, 275 p. (Rinehart editions, 126)
64—12514 PZ3.M498Cp 5
Bibliography: p. xxxi-xxxiii.
The text follows that of the original American
edition (no. 485 in the 1960 Guide), with typo-
graphical errors corrected and spelling and punctua-
tion emended for the sake of consistency.
147. Battle-pieces; [poems]. Edited, with intro-
duction and notes, by Hennig Cohen. New
York, T. Yoseloff [1963] 302 p. illus.
62—14910 PS2384.B3 1963
Bibliography: p. [297]— 299.
The first-edition text, published in 1866 under the
title Battle-Pieces and Aspects of the War (no. 486
in the 1960 Guide), is reproduced and illustrated
with contemporary Civil War drawings, principally
from the Waud Collection in the Library of Con-
gress.
148. Clarel, a poem and pilgrimage in the Holy
Land. Edited by Walter E. Bezanson. New
York, Hendricks House, 1960. cxvii, 652 p.
61—569 PS2384.C5 1960
CONTENTS. — Jerusalem . — The wilderness. — Mar
Saba. — Bethlehem.
The text of the first American edition of 1876 is
followed, with minor changes and with Melville's
own revisions incorporated for the first time. The
editor's long introduction is supplemented by maps,
a chronology, a critical index of characters, and
numerous explanatory and textual notes.
149. Billy Budd, sailor (an inside narrative).
Reading text and genetic text, edited from the
manuscript, with introduction and notes, by Harri-
son Hayford and Merton M. Sealts, Jr. [Chicago]
University of Chicago Press [1962] 431 p.
62-17135 PZ3.M498B1
Bibliography: p. 203—212.
Through interpretive analysis of the manuscript
in Harvard's Houghton Library, the editors have
prepared an annotated text for the general reader
as well as a second text for the scholar. Notes to
the reading text appear on p. 133—202, and the
genetic text is accompanied by elaborate commen-
tary and detailed description of the manuscript.
The first edition of Billy Budd is no. 487 in the
1960 Guide.
150. The letters of Herman Melville. Edited by
Merrell R. Davis and William H. Gilman.
New Haven, Yale University Press, 1960. xxxi,
398 p. illus. 60-7822 PS2386.A57
This edition of 271 letters presents Melville's re-
coverable correspondence, whether in manuscript or
printed form, including "letters to the editor," frag-
ments, and first drafts. Fifty-fivt letters are pub-
lished in full for the first time, and 42 are previously
unpublished. Aids to the reader include an intro-
duction, a checklist of unlocated letters, and exten-
sive textual notes.
151. Selected poems. Edited by Hennig Cohen.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1964. xvi,
259 p. (Anchor books) 63—18037 PS2382.C6
In establishing this text, first editions were ex-
amined, as well as manuscripts in Harvard's Hough-
ton Library. Selections were made on the basis of
literary distinction. "Poems of lesser merit have
been included, however, because they show Mel-
ville's artistic development, the range of his ideas,
or important relationships to his prose."
152. Baird, James. Ishmael. Baltimore, Johns
Hopkins Press, 1956. xxxviii, 445 p.
56-8064 PN56.P7B3
Bibliographical footnotes.
An exploratory study of "modern primitivism,"
emphasizing Melville's focal role as a symbolistic
writer.
153. Berthoff, Warner. The example of Melville.
Princeton, N. J., Princeton University Press,
1962. 218 p. 63—7065 PS2386.B4
Bibliographical footnotes.
Shunning the special concerns of literary criti-
cism and scholarship, the author of this general
study takes a direct look at Melville's exactness,
explicitness, and urgency as defining elements of
his artistic significance.
154. Bowen, Merlin. The long encounter; self
and experience in the writings of Herman
Melville. [Chicago] University of Chicago Press
[1960] 282 p. 60—7232 PS2387.B6 1960
Considers Melville's works in the light of a per-
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 15
vading concern with the problem of self-discovery
and self-realization, which influenced his choice of
subject matter, his imagery, and the shape of his
narratives.
155. Brodtkorb, Paul. Ishmael's white world; a
phenomenological reading of Moby Dick.
New Haven, Yale University Press, 1965. 170 p.
(Yale publications in American studies, 9)
65-11176 PS2384.M62B7
Bibliography: p. 149—150. Bibliographical notes:
p. [i5i]-i66.
Within the critical framework of phenomenology,
Ishmael's consciousness is analyzed as "the vessel
that contains the book."
156. Finkelstein, Dorothee M. Melville's Orienda.
New Haven, Yale University Press, 1961.
317 p. illus. (Yale publications in American
studies, 5) 61-6312 PS2386.F5
Bibliographical footnotes. Bibliography: p.
[2831-302.
Explores Melville's use of material and sources
relating to the Near East, which in Mardi he called
"old Orienda."
157. Fogle, Richard H. Melville's shorter tales.
Norman, University of Oklahoma Press
[1960] 150 p. 60—7741 PS2387.F6
Bibliographical footnotes.
A collection of critical essays offering general and
individual analyses of the tales. Among those
treated are "Bartleby," "The Encantadas," and
"Benito Cereno."
158. Hetherington, Hugh W. Melville's reviewers,
British and American, 1846—1891. Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press [1961]
304 p. illus. 61—12305 PS2387.H45
Bibliographical footnotes.
Examines numerous reviews which appeared dur-
ing Melville's lifetime, demonstrating contemporary
critical response to six major novels, including
Moby-Diet^.
159. Hillway, Tyrus. Herman Melville. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1963] 176 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 37)
63—10954 PS2386.H5
Bibliographical notes: p. 154—161. Bibliography:
p. 162—170.
Without attempting to identify and answer the
many questions surrounding Melville and his writ-
ing, Hillway presents a body of authentic informa-
tion, a review of recent literature, and a summary of
his critical judgment.
1 60. Sealts, Merton M. Melville as lecturer. Cam-
bridge, Mass., Harvard University Press,
1957. 202 p. illus. 58—5542 PS2386.S4
Bibliographical footnotes.
Following his Mediterranean trip of 1856 and
1857, Melville traveled in the United States as a
lecturer for three seasons. The lectures themselves
were not printed after delivery, and the manuscripts
have apparently been destroyed. Sealts analyzes
this period of Melville's career and presents lecture
texts reconstructed and annotated on the basis of
contemporary newspaper reports.
161. Stern, Milton R. The fine hammered steel
of Herman Melville. Urbana, University of
Illinois Press, 1957. 297 p. 57—6959 PS2387.S7
Bibliographical footnotes. Bibliography: p.
[2511-291.
Traces thematic and perceptual patterns devel-
oped throughout Melville's work, classifying his
writings as "naturalistic" on the basis of interpreta-
tions of Typee, Mardi, Pierre, and Billy Budd. The
comprehensive checklist of Melville studies includes
dissertations.
162. JAMES KIRKE PAULDING, 1778-1860
No. 511 in 1960 Guide.
163. Letters. Edited by Ralph M. Aderman.
Madison, University of Wisconsin Press,
1962. xxiv, 631 p. illus.
62—17397 PS2528.A45 1962
Includes all of the "available significant surviving
correspondence," transcribed from manuscript
sources when possible.
164. EDGAR ALL AN POE, 1809-1849
No. 520 in 1960 Guide.
165. Selected writings. Edited, with an introduc-
tion and notes, by Edward H. Davidson.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1956! xxxii, 508 p.
(Riverside editions, An) 56—13895 PS2602.D3
Bibliography: p. xxix. Bibliographical notes: p.
487—506.
In addition to a selection of poems, essays, and
criticism, this volume contains 16 tales and The
Narrative of Arthur Gordon Pym of Nantuc\et.
In most cases, the individual writings appear in
texts bearing Poe's final revisions or approval, with
exceptions indicated in the notes.
1 66. Poems. Edited, with an introduction, variant
readings, and textual notes, by Floyd Stovall.
Charlottesville, University Press of Virginia [1965]
xxxvii, 361 p. 65—23455 PS26o5.Ai 19653
l6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
The poems are chronologically arranged accord-
ing to the date of first publication, insofar as that is
known. Bibliographical notes and variant read-
ings, constituting a history of the textual changes in
the poems, appear on p. [147]— 298. The com-
plete text of Poe's poetic drama, Politian — A Trage-
dy, is included in an appendix.
167. Buranelli, Vincent. Edgar Allan Poe. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1961] 157 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 4)
61-9855 PS263I.B8
Bibliographical notes: p. 134—143. Bibliography:
p. 144-151.
1 68. Davidson, Edward H. Poe, a critical study.
Cambridge, Belknap Press of Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1957. 296 p. 57—12965 PS2638.D3
Bibliographical notes: p. [263]— 290.
Poe's mind and writings are examined within the
philosophic context of 19th-century Romantic
thought, with particular reference to the esthetic
principles of Coleridge.
169. Moss, Sidney P. Poe's literary battles: the
critic in the context of his literary milieu.
Durham, N. C., Duke University Press, 1963.
266 p. 63—9010 PS2638.M6 1963
Bibliographical footnotes.
The author focuses on Poe's journalistic conflicts
and their effect upon his characteristics and re-
sponses as a literary critic.
170. Parks, Edd W. Edgar Allan Poe as literary
critic. Athens, University of Georgia Press
[1964] 114 p. (Eugenia Dorothy Blount Lamar
memorial lectures, 1964) 64—25841 PS2638.P3
Bibliographical notes: p. 97—108.
Maintaining that Poe's critical theories grew out
of his work as a magazine editor and reviewer, the
author discusses the development and nature of
Poe's demand for a rhythmic harmony and unified
design in literature.
171. Quinn, Patrick F. The French face of Edgar
Poe. Carbondale, Southern Illinois Univer-
sity Press, 1957. 310 p. 56-10476 PS2638.Q5
Bibliographical notes: p. 279—293. Bibliography:
p. 295-299.
This interpretation of the French response to Poe
is mainly concerned with his importance as a
writer of tales. Emphasis is placed upon the role
played by Baudelaire and later French critics in
revealing Poe to a European audience.
172. WILLIAM GILMORE SIMMS, 1806-1870
No. 546 in 1960 Guide.
173. The Yemassee; a romance of Carolina.
Edited, with an introduction and notes, by
C. Hugh Holman. Boston, Houghton Mifflin
[1961] xxxi, 377 p. (Riverside editions, A65)
61-66407
"Bibliographical note": p. [xxv]— xxvii.
Reprints the "new and revised" third edition of
1853, retaining the author's original punctuation
with slight editorial changes indicated and ex-
plained. A Simms chronology and his poem "The
Last of the Yemassees" are included. Other editions
of The Yemassee are no. 548—549 in the 1960 Guide.
174. Edited for the modern reader by
Joseph V. Ridgely. New York, Twayne
Publishers [1964] 415 p. (Twayne's United
States classics series) 62—10274 PZ3-S592Yn 42
The text of the 1853 edition is again followed,
with some alterations in spelling and punctuation.
Simms' career is discussed in the editor's introduc-
tory essay.
175. Views and reviews in American literature,
history and fiction: first series. Edited by
C. Hugh Holman. Cambridge, Belknap Press of
Harvard University Press, 1962. xliii, 292 p. (The
John Harvard library) 62—17226 PS2850.V52
Bibliographical footnotes.
A reprint of the 1845 edition of n essays origin-
ally published in southern literary journals in the
1 840'$. The editor's notes identify individuals,
places, and quotation sources whenever possible.
A one-volume edition of the first and second series
of this work is no. 551 in the 1960 Guide.
176. Woodcraft; or, Hawks about the dovecote; a
story of the South at the close of the Revolu-
tion. Introduction by Richmond Groom Beatty.
New York, Norton [1961] xvi, 518 p. (The
Norton library, ^07) 61-8921 PZ3-S592Wo 8
Bibliography: p. xv-xvi.
Reprinted from the revised edition of 1854, this
work was first published in 1852 under the tide
The Sword and the Distaff.
177. Letters. Collected and edited by Mary C.
Simms Oliphant, Alfred Taylor Odell [and]
T. C. Duncan Eaves. Introduction by Donald
Davidson. Biographical sketch by Alexander S.
Salley. Columbia, University of South Carolina
Press, 1952—56. 5 v. illus.
52—2352 PS2853.A4 1952
Bibliographical footnotes.
This edition of Simms' letters, no. 554 in the
1960 Guide, was completed with the publication in
1956 of volume 5, covering the period 1867-70.
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / IJ
178. Parks, Edd W. William Gilmore Simms as
literary critic. Athens, University of Georgia
Press, 1961. 152 p. (University of Georgia mono-
graphs, no. 7) 61-9795 PS2854.P3
Bibliographical notes: p. 114—144.
This monograph is the first of a three-volume
study of antebellum southern critics; the final vol-
ume is Edgar Allan Poe as Literary Critic (no. 170
above). Parks examines Simms' criticism of fic-
tion, poetry, and drama, concluding that "he was a
good but not a great critic."
179. Ridgely, Joseph V. William Gilmore Simms.
New York, Twayne Publishers [Ci962] 144
p. ( Twayne 's United States authors series, 28)
62-16823 PS2853.R5
Bibliographical notes: p. 131-137. Bibliography:
p. 138—141.
Treats Simms as a celebrator of the South who
tried to create through fiction "the vision of an ideal
Southern social structure." Biographical, historical,
and source materials are reduced to a minimum.
1 80. HARRIET BEECHER STOWE, 1811-1896
No. 562 in 1960 Guide.
181. Uncle Tom's cabin; or, Life among the lowly.
Edited by Kenneth S. Lynn. Cambridge,
Mass., Belknap Press, 1962. xxviii, 460 p. (The
John Harvard library) 62—9431 PZ3.S89Un 85
The text is that of the first American edition,
published in Boston by J. P. Jewett, 1852 (no. 563
in the 1960 Guide; later editions are no. 564—567).
The editor has contributed a lengthy introduction,
a textual history, and a chronology of Mrs. Stowe's
life.
182. The annotated Uncle Tom's cabin. Edited,
with an introduction, by Philip Van Doren
Stern. New York, P. S. Eriksson [1964] 591 p.
illus. 64-15781 PZ3.S89An
Mrs. Stowe and her celebrated novel are dis-
cussed in the introduction, p. 7—37, and informative
notes appear on p. 562—591. A selection of illustra-
tions from the original edition is included.
183. Adams, John R. Harriet Beecher Stowe.
New York, Twayne Publishers [Ci963]
172 p. (Twayne's United States authors series, 42)
63-17370 PS2956.A6
Bibliographical notes: p. 143—158. Bibliography:
p. 159-167.
"In a resolute effort to avoid myth-making,"
Adams focuses attention on Mrs. Stowe's writings
(including more than 200 uncollected articles and
stories).
184. Wagenknecht, Edward C. Harriet Beecher
Stowe; the known and the unknown. New
York, Oxford University Press, 1965. 267 p.
65-15615 PS2956.W3
Bibliographical notes: p. 221—251. Bibliography:
p. 253-258.
This psychograph or character study of Mrs.
Stowe regards her principally within the context of
her familial relationships. The author has had
access to a wide array of unpublished letters, many
of which are contained in the collection of Stowe
papers in the Women's Archives at Radcliffe
College.
185. HENRY DAVID THOREAU, 1817-1862
No. 585 in 1960 Guide.
1 86. A week on the Concord and Merrimack
Rivers. Edited, with introduction and notes,
by Walter R. Harding. New York, Holt, Rinehart &
Winston [1963] xxiii, 340 p. (Rinehart editions)
63-7886 F72.M7T5 1963
Bibliography: p. [xix]— xx.
The first edition of this work was published by
James Munroe of Boston in 1849 (no. 587 in the
1960 Guide', a 1921 edition is no. 588). A "new
and revised edition," published in 1868 by Ticknor
& Fields, is followed here, with small revisions
carefully noted.
187. The variorum Walden. Annotated and with
an introduction by Walter R. Harding. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1962] 320 p.
62-10273 PS3048.A1 19623
Bibliographical notes: p. 267-319. Bibliography:
p. 320.
The text is based on that of the first edition
(Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1854), no. 589 in the
1960 Guide. The editor's notes provide a collation
of Thoreau scholarship and incorporate for the first
time all the corrections made by Thoreau in his
personal copy of Walden. Selected editions of this
work are no. 590—593 in the 1960 Guide.
1 88. Walden and Civil disobedience. Edited,
with an introduction and notes, by Sherman
Paul. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1960] xlvi, 266 p.
(Riverside editions, Ai4)
60-16148 PS3048.A1 1960
Bibliography: p. [xlv]-xlvi.
The Walden text printed here follows the 1889
Riverside edition (Boston, Houghton Mifflin),
which first included many of Thoreau's corrections
and revisions. The reader is guided by an ex-
tended introduction, a Thoreau chronology, and a
brief essay on the composition of Walden. Charles
l8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Lane's article, "Life in the Woods," from The Dial,
April 1844, has been appended.
189. Consciousness in Concord; the text of
Thoreau's hitherto "lost journal," 1840—1841,
together with notes and a commentary by Perry
Miller. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1958. 243 p.
58—7303 PS3053.A26
Bibliographical notes: p. 221—240.
Based on a manuscript owned by the J. Pierpont
Morgan Library, the text retains Thoreau's revisions
and often eccentric punctuation, with textual vari-
ants indicated in the notes.
190. Correspondence. Edited by Walter R. Hard-
ing and Carl Bode. [New York] New York
University Press, 1958. xxi, 665 p.
58-11447 PS3053.A3 1958
The first inclusive edition of Thoreau's corre-
spondence, chronologically arranged, contains
"every available surviving letter written by and to
Thoreau." The texts are based on original manu-
scripts whenever possible, with sources identified
in the annotations.
191. Collected poems. Edited by Carl Bode. Enl.
ed. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1964.
xxii, 413 p. 64—12730 PS3O4I.B6 1964
This enlarged edition of no. 598 in the 1960
Guide incorporates the miscellaneous poems which
have appeared since the original volume was pub-
lished in 1943. Textual and explanatory notes
appear on p. 281—377, with notes for the added
poems on p. 400—404.
192. Christie, John A. Thoreau as world traveler.
New York, Columbia University Press with
the cooperation of the American Geographical So-
ciety, 1965. 358 p. illus. 65—24586 PS3056.C4
Bibliographical notes: p. [275]— 310.
Christie traces Thoreau's vicarious global adven-
tures, exploring the influence and reflection of his
"travel" through reading. The long bibliography
of travel works read by Thoreau is partial evidence
of the author's painstaking research.
193. Harding, Walter R. The days of Henry
Thoreau. New York, Knopf, 1965. xvi,
472 p. 65—18766 PS3O53.H3
Bibliographical footnotes. Bibliography: p. 471—
472.
A general and comprehensive biography, with
"no thesis to present, no axe to grind." The text is
augmented by a number of illustrations, including
reproductions of photographs, daguerreotypes, and
sketches.
194. Harding, Walter R. A Thoreau handbook.
[New York] New York University Press,
1959. 229 p. 59—9918 PS3O53.H32
This guide to Thoreau scholarship is divided into
five sections, summarizing Thoreau's life, his works,
the sources of his ideas, the ideas themselves, and
the course of his fame. Each section presents an
evaluation of previous work on the subject and in-
cludes an extended bibliography of related materials.
A Thoreau chronology and a list of Thoreau bib-
liographies are included.
195. Meltzer, Milton, and Walter R. Harding, eds.
A Thoreau profile. New York, Crowell
[1962] 310 p. 62—16548 PS3053.M4
Bibliographies: p. 294—297.
A pictorial biography featuring every known life
portrait of Thoreau in addition to photographs, car-
toons, news clippings, drawings, maps, and charts.
The text is mainly derived from Thoreau's own
writings, occasionally supplemented by the writings
of his contemporaries.
196. Paul, Sherman. The shores of America:
Thoreau's inward exploration. Urbana, Uni-
versity of Illinois Press, 1958. 433 p.
58-6998 PS3053.P3
Bibliographical footnotes.
Through an examination of Thoreau's inner life,
which was guided by the tenets of Transcendental-
ism, the author presents a work which "might be
called a spiritual biography or a biography of voca-
tion."
197. Shanley, James L. The making of Walden,
with the text of the first version. [Chicago]
University of Chicago Press [1957] 207 p.
57—6990 PS3048.S5
Bibliographical footnotes.
Having established the proper manuscript order
of Thoreau's first version of Walden, written in
1846—47, the author indicates how the work was
rewritten and reshaped between 1848 and its publi-
cation in 1854. The text of the first version printed
here is a transcript from the Huntington Library
manuscript.
198. Stoller, Leo. After Walden; Thoreau's chang-
ing views on economic man. Stanford, Calif.,
Stanford University Press, 1957. 163 p.
57—12516 PS3O53-S8
Bibliographical footnotes. Bibliography: p.
[i57]-i63.
Traces the evolution of Thoreau's economic philo-
sophy and the development of his views concerning
social legislation during the years following his stay
at Walden Pond.
LITERATURE (1607-1965) /
199. THOMAS BANGS THORPE, 1815-1878
No. 612 in 1960 Guide.
200. Rickels, Milton. Thomas Bangs Thorpe:
humorist of the Old Southwest. Baton
Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1962. 275
p. illus. 62-8018 PS3o6i.T6R5
Bibliographical footnotes. Bibliography: p.
[257] -267.
A comprehensive biography of a versatile and
lively observer of the mid- 19th-century South.
201. HENRY TIMROD, 1828-1867
No. 614 in 1960 Guide.
202. Collected poems. A variorum ed. edited by
Edd Winfield Parks and Aileen Wells Parks.
Athens, University of Georgia Press [1965] 206 p.
65—25289 PS3O70.A2 1965
The primary textual source is the memorial edi-
tion of Timrod's poems (no. 617 in the 1960 Guide),
which in turn was based on the 1873 edition (no.
616 in the 1960 Guide). The notes appearing on
p. 142—203 contain the publication record of each
poem, explanatory comments, and variant readings.
203. Parks, Edd W. Henry Timrod. New York,
Twayne Publishers [1964] 158 p. (Twayne's
United States authors series, 53)
63—20607 PS3O73.P3
Bibliographical notes: p. 117—145. Bibliography:
p. 146-149.
A blend of biography and criticism, relating Tim-
rod's life to the literary activities of Charleston in
the 1850'$.
204. WALT WHITMAN, 1819-1892
No. 619 in 1960 Guide.
205. Leaves of grass, ist (1855) ed. Edited, with
an introduction, by Malcolm Cowley. New
York, Viking Press, 1959. xxxvii, 145 p.
59—13502 PS32OI 1959
A reprint of the 1855 text (no. 620 in the 1960
Guide), with obvious typographical errors corrected.
Facsimiles of the first-edition frontispiece and tide
page are included, as well as Whitman's prose in-
troduction.
206. Leaves of grass. With an introduction by Roy
Harvey Pearce. Facsim. ed. of the 1860 text.
Ithaca, N.Y., Great Seal Books [1961] li, 467 p.
61—14850 PS320I i86ob
A cross-index of the 1860 and 1892 poems has
been added to this facsimile reprint of the third edi-
tion (no. 622 in the 1960 Guide).
207. Leaves of grass. Edited by Harold W. Blod-
gett and Sculley Bradley. Comprehensive
reader's ed. [New York] New York University
Press, 1965. Iviii, 768 p. illus. (The Collected
writings of Walt Whitman)
65—1625 PS320I 1965
Bibliographical footnotes.
This edition contains the 1891—92 text (no. 626
in the 1960 Guide), with typographical errors cor-
rected in the footnotes. In addition, the editors have
included the annexes, prefaces, "A Backward Glance
O'er Travel'd Roads," "Old Age Echoes," and un-
collected and excluded poems and fragments. Var-
ious editions of Leaves of Grass are no. 620—630 in
the 1960 Guide.
208. Memoranda during the war [&] Death of
of Abraham Lincoln. Edited, with an intro-
duction, by Roy P. Easier. Bloomington, Indiana
University Press, 1962. 1 v. (various pagings)
62-8978 PS32i6.Ai 1962
Memoranda During the War, published in 1875—
76, is reproduced in facsimile along with the text
which Whitman used in delivering his lecture on
Lincoln. Additional facsimiles of letters, manu-
scripts, and related material illustrate the volume.
The introduction outlines the literary and historical
background of each work.
209. Complete poetry and selected prose. Edited,
with an introduction and glossary, by James
E. Miller, Jr. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1959]
516 p. (Riverside editions, A34)
59-2805 PS3200.F59
Contains all of the poetry written and published
as Leaves of Grass, including the 29 poems which
Whitman rejected from edition to edition. The text
of the 1891—92 version is followed. Democratic
Vistas and several of Whitman's prefaces are printed
as prose selections.
210. The correspondence. Edited by Edwin Havi-
land Miller. [New York] New York Uni-
versity Press, 1961—64. 3 v. illus. (The Collected
writings of Walt Whitman)
65-9834 PS323I.M48
Bibliographical footnotes.
CONTENTS.— v. i. 1842-1867.— v. 2. 1868-1875.
-v. 3. 1876-1885.
This edition includes all available letters, post
cards, and notes, published in unabridged form and
in chronological sequence, through 1885. The ma-
jority of the letters are based on original manu-
scripts, with editorial modifications made in the
interest of readability. Additional materials include
checklists of lost letters, manuscript sources, and
letters written to Whitman.
2O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
211. The early poems and the fiction. Edited by
Thomas L. Brasher. [New York] New York
University Press, 1963. xxii, 352 p. (The Collected
writings of Walt Whitman) 65—3935 PS32O3.B7
Bibliographical footnotes.
Most of Whitman's early poems were published
between 1838 and 1850 in New York or Long Island
newspapers; his 24 tales appeared in periodicals be-
tween 1841 and 1848. The texts in this volume are
based on Whitman's last printed versions, with vari-
ants indicated in the footnotes.
212. Prose works, 1892. Edited by Floyd Stovall.
[New York] New York University Press,
1963—64. 2 v. illus. (The Collected writings of
Walt Whitman) 65—3934 PS3202 1963
Bibliographical footnotes.
CONTENTS. — v. i. Specimen days. — v. 2. Collect
and other prose.
Except for the juvenile pieces, these two volumes
contain all the material printed in Whitman's Com-
plete Prose Worlds of 1892 (no. 638 in the 1960
Guide). The text of the 1892 edition is followed,
with variant readings recorded in the notes and the
appendix. A collection of prefaces, notes, and arti-
cles not in the earlier work has been added to this
edition.
213. Allen, Gay W. Walt Whitman as man, poet,
and legend. With a check list of Whitman
publications, 1945—1960, by Evie Allison Allen.
Carbondale, Southern Illinois University Press
[1961] 260 p. 61-10924 PS323I.A698
Bibliographical notes: p. [247]— 260.
Several of the essays in this collection are reprints
or adaptations of previously published material.
The comprehensive checklist records translations,
theses, and uncollected writings, in addition to books
and articles by and about Whitman. A number of
notable letters concerning Whitman, the majority
of which are in the Slocum Library of Ohio Wes-
leyan University, are printed in full for the first
time.
214. Asselineau, Roger. The evolution of Walt
Whitman. Cambridge, Belknap Press of
Harvard University Press, 1960—62. 2 v.
60—13297 PS323I.A833
Bibliographical notes: v. i, p. [2733—362; v. 2,
p. [2731-379. Bibliography: v. 2, p. [26i]-27i.
CONTENTS. — v. i. The creation of a personality.
— [v. 2] The creation of a book.
The English translation of a work originally pub-
lished in French in 1954. The first volume, trans-
lated by Richard P. Adams and the author, is
essentially biographical; the second, translated by
Burton L. Cooper and the author, is devoted to
criticism of Whitman's work.
215. Dutton, Geoffrey. Whitman. New York,
Grove Press [1961] 120 p. (Evergreen pilot
books EPi2) 61-17200 P£>323i.D8 1961
Bibliographical footnotes. Bibliography: p.
118—120.
Divided into three sections, this concise study
treats Whitman biographically in relation to his
prose, analyzes his poetry, and discusses the reac-
tions of individual critics.
216. Miller, James E. A critical guide to Leaves
of grass. [Chicago] University of Chicago
Press [1957] 268 p. 57-6982 PS3238.M5
Focusing on poetic structure, Miller's individual
analyses of 10 Whitman poems and a panoramic
view of Leaves of Grass "help dispel the common
notion that Whitman was a formless, even a chaotic
poet."
217. Miller, James E. Walt Whitman. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1962] 188 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 20)
62-13674 PS323I.M5
Bibliographical notes: p. 165—175. Bibliography:
p. 176—181.
"Entrances" to Whitman's poetry are provided
through discussions of its language, imagery, struc-
ture, wit, and wisdom.
218. JOHN GREENLEAF WHITTIER, 1807-
1892
No. 662 in 1960 Guide.
219. Leary, Lewis G. John Greenleaf Whittier.
New York, Twayne Publishers [1962, '1961]
189 p. (Twayne's United States authors series, 6)
61-15667 PS3288.L4 1962
Bibliographical notes: p. 172—179. Bibliography:
p. 180—184.
This review of his major poetry seeks "to discover
what Whittier, who spoke so clearly to his own
time, has to say to ours."
220. Pickard, John B. John Greenleaf Whittier,
an introduction and interpretation. New
York, Barnes & Noble [1961] 145 p. illus.
(American authors and critics series, AC4)
61-14752 PS328i.P48
Bibliography: p. 135—137.
Appraises Whittier's poetic achievement, correlat-
ing his literary, political, and humanitarian activities.
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 21
D. The Gilded Age and After (1871-1914)
221. ANDY ADAMS, 1859-1935
No. 683 in 1960 Guide.
222. Why the Chisholm Trail forks, and other tales
of the cattle country. Edited by Wilson M.
Hudson. With illustrations by Malcolm Thurgood.
Austin, University of Texas Press, 1956. 296 p.
56-11769 PZ3.A2iWh
Includes previously unpublished material.
223. Hudson, Wilson M. Andy Adams, his life
and writings. Dallas, Southern Methodist
University Press, 1964. xv, 274 p. illus.
64—16632 PS35oi.D2i52H8
Bibliographical notes: p. 227-258. Bibliography:
p. 259-265.
Describes Adams' friendships with Walter Pres-
cott Webb, J. Frank Dobie, Emerson Hough, and
Eugene Manlove Rhodes and evaluates his place in
western fiction.
224.
225
HENRY ADAMS, 1838-1918
No. 688 in 1960 Guide.
A Henry Adams reader. Edited and with an
introduction by Elizabeth Stevenson. Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1958. xvi, 392 p. (Double-
day anchor books) 58-5929 AC8.A22
A selection from his letters, essays, biographies,
histories, and poetry.
226. Hochfield, George. Henry Adams, an intro-
duction and interpretation. New York,
Barnes & Noble [1962] 150 p. illus. (American
authors and critics series, AC5)
62-15370 £175.5^1749
Bibliography: p. 145—147.
227. Levenson, Jacob C. The mind and art of
Henry Adams. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
X957- 43° P- iUus. 57-6946 £175.5^1765
228. Samuels, Ernest. Henry Adams; the major
phase. Cambridge, Belknap Press of Harvard
University Press, 1964. xv, 687 p.
64-21790 £175.5^1776
"The writings of Henry Adams from 1892":
P- [59r]-594- Bibliographical notes: p. [595]-
660. Bibliography: p. [66 1]— 667.
Concludes Samuels' three-volume biography of
Adams.
229. Samuels, Ernest. Henry Adams; the middle
years. Cambridge, Belknap Press of Har-
vard University Press, 1958. 514 p.
58-12975 £175.5^1777
The writings of Henry Adams, 1878-1891": p.
[423] -426. Bibliographical notes: p. [427] -488.
Bibliography: p. [489]— 497.
This sequel to Samuels' The Young Henry
Adams (Cambridge, Harvard University Press,
1948. 378 p.) concentrates on Adams' life from 1877
to 1890.
230. GEORGE ADE, 1866-1944
No. 701 in 1960 Guide.
231. Artie, and Pink Marsh; two novels. Draw-
ings by John T. McCutcheon. Introduction
by James T. Farrell. Chicago, University of Chi-
cago Press [1963] 224 p. (Chicago in fiction)
63-22584
232. The America of George Ade, 1866—1944;
fables, short stories, essays. Edited, with an
introduction, by Jean Shepherd. New York, Put-
nam [1960] 284 p. illus.
60—8120 PSioo6.A6A6 1960
233. Coyle, Lee. George Ade. New York,
Twayne Publishers [1964] 159 p. (Twayne's
United States authors series, 63)
64-20713 PSioo6.A6Z6
Bibliographical notes: p. 141-149. Bibliography:
p. 150-153.
Devotes considerable space to Ade's previously
neglected career as a playwright.
234. JAMES LANE ALLEN, 1849-1925
No. 716 in 1960 Guide.
235. Bottorff, William K. James Lane Allen.
New York, Twayne Publishers [1964] 176
p. (Twayne's United States authors series, 56)
63-20615 PSi036.B6
Bibliographical notes: p. 156—166. Bibliography:
p. 167-172.
22 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
236. EDWARD BELLAMY, 1850-1898
No. 726 in 1960 Guide.
237. Bowman, Sylvia E., and others. Edward Bel-
lamy abroad; an American prophet's influ-
ence. Preface by Maurice Le Breton. New York,
Twayne Publishers [1962] xxv, 543 p. illus.
61-15672 HX8o6.B68
Bibliographical notes: p. 449—478. Bibliography:
p. 479-528.
238. Bowman, Sylvia E. The year 2000: a critical
biography of Edward Bellamy. New York,
Bookman Associates [1958] 404 p. illus.
A 58-3939 HX84.B37B6
Bibliographical notes: p. 317—344. Bibliography:
P- 345-393-
239. AMBROSE (GWINNETT) BIERCE, 1842-
1914?
No. 732 in 1960 Guide.
240. Ambrose Bierce's Civil War. Edited and
with an introduction by William McCann.
Chicago, Gateway Editions; distributed by H. Reg-
nery Co. [1956] 257 p. (A Gateway edition,
6015) 56—3957 £601.6594
CONTENTS. — War memoirs. — War stories.
241. The sardonic humor of Ambrose Bierce.
Edited by George Barkin. New York, Dover
Publications [1963] 232 p.
63—19487 PS 1 097. A6 1963
A new collection of verses and prose sketches
selected from The Collected Worf(s of Ambrose
Bierce (New York, Neale Pub. Co., 1909—12. 12 v.).
242. Ghost and horror stories. Selected and intro-
duced by E. F. Bleiler. New York, Dover
Publications [1964] xxi, 199 p.
64—13459 PZ3-B479Gh
A new collection of short stories selected from The
Collected Worlds of Ambrose Bierce (New York,
Neale Pub. Co., 1909—12. 12 v.).
243. Woodruff, Stuart C. The short stories of
Ambrose Bierce, a study in polarity. [Pitts-
burgh] University of Pittsburgh Press [1965, '1964]
193 p. (Critical essays in modern literature)
64—22147 PS 1 097.25 W6
Bibliographical notes: p. 165—180. Bibliography:
p. 181—191.
Analyzes representative works.
244. GEORGE WASHINGTON CABLE, 1844-
1925
No. 745 in 1960 Guide.
245. Butcher, Charles P. George W. Cable. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1962] 189 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 24)
62-16819 PSi246.B78
Bibliographical notes: p. 168—177. Bibliography:
p. 178—181.
246. WINSTON CHURCHILL, 1871-1947
No. 762 in 1960 Guide.
247. Titus, Warren I. Winston Churchill. New
York, Twayne Publishers [Ci963] 173 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 43)
63—17371
Bibliographical notes: p. 151—162. Bibliography:
p. 163—168.
248. SAMUEL LANGHORNE CLEMENS
("MARK TWAIN"), 1835-1910
No. 768 in 1960 Guide.
249. Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, an anno-
tated text, backgrounds and sources, essays in
criticism. Edited by Sculley Bradley, Richmond
Groom Beatty [and] E. Hudson Long. New Yofk,
Norton [1962] 451 p. (Norton critical editions,
N304) 62-9571 PZ3.C59A68
Bibliography: p. 449—451.
A photographic reproduction of the first Ameri-
can edition, no. 788 in the 1960 Guide, with an-
notated corrections of typographical errors. Other
editions are no. 787 and 789—793.
250. The adventures of Colonel Sellers, being Mark
Twain's share of The gilded age [ist ed., ist
issue] , a novel which he wrote with Charles Dudley
Warner. Now published separately for the first
time and comprising, in effect, a new work. Edited
and with an introduction and notes by Charles
Neider. New York, Doubleday, 1965. 244 p.
65-11053 PZ3.C59Ac
The Gilded Age is no. 775-777 in the 1960 Guide.
251. The complete short stories of Mark Twain.
Now collected for the first time. Edited, with
an introduction, by Charles Neider. Garden City,
N.Y., Hanover House, 1957. xxiv, 676 p.
57-5536
252. The complete humorous sketches and tales of
Mark Twain. Now collected for the first
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 23
time. Edited and with an introduction by Charles
Neider. Drawings by Mark Twain. Garden City,
N.Y., Hanover House [1961] 722 p.
61—6503 PSi303.N37
253. The complete essays of Mark Twain. Now
collected for the first time. Edited and with
an introduction by Charles Neider. Drawings by
Mark Twain. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday,
1963. xxv, 705 p. 63—7714 PS 1 302 .N3 8
254. The complete novels of Mark Twain. Edited,
with an introduction, by Charles Neider.
Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1964. 2 v.
64-19239 PZ3.C59Cg
The text of each novel is that of its first American
edition. Minor changes have been made in the text
where necessary, as in the case of obvious typo-
graphical errors.
255. Mark Twain of the Enterprise; newspaper
articles & other documents, 1862—1864.
Edited by Henry Nash Smith with the assistance of
Frederick Anderson. Berkeley, University of Cali-
fornia Press, 1957. 240 p. illus.
57-6543 PS 1 302.85
Bibliographical notes: p. 209—224. Bibliography:
p. 232-234.
256. Traveling with the innocents abroad; Mark
Twain's original reports from Europe and
the Holy Land. Edited by Daniel Morley Mc-
Keithan. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press
[1958] xviii, 324 p. 58-6858 PSi33i.A3 1958
These journalistic sketches and letters, largely
written for the San Francisco Daily Alta California,
provided the raw material for The Innocents Abroad,
no. 769—771 in the 1960 Guide.
257. Mark Twain-Howells letters; the correspon-
dence of Samuel L. Clemens and William D.
Howells, 1872—1910. Edited by Henry Nash Smith
and William M. Gibson with the assistance of Fred-
erick Anderson. Cambridge, Belknap Press of
Harvard University Press, 1960. 2 v. (xxv, 948 p.)
illus. 60—5397 PSi33i.A3H6
Bibliographical references included in "Note on
editorial practice" (v. i, p. xxi— xxv). "Calendar of
letters": v. 2, p. 883—903. "Index of works by
Samuel L. Clemens and William D. Howells": v. 2,
p. 943-948-
258. The travels of Mark Twain. Edited, with an
introduction and notes, by Charles Neider.
New York, Coward-McCann [1961] 448 p.
61—5434
Selected descriptions from American and foreign
travels.
259. Life as I find it. Essays, sketches, tales, and
other material, the majority of which is now
published in book form for the first time. Edited,
with an introduction and notes, by Charles Neider.
Garden City, N.Y., Hanover House [1961] xvii,
411 p. 61—15327 PSi302.N4
Bibliography: p. [3971-399.
260. Letters from the earth. Edited by Bernard
De Voto. With a preface by Henry Nash
Smith. New York, Harper & Row [1962] 303 p.
62—14550 PSi33i.A3 1962
"Bibliographical note": p. 303.
A selection of Twain's unfinished writings.
261. Blair, Walter. Mark Twain & Huck Finn.
Berkeley, University of California Press, 1960.
436 p. illus. 59— 15693 PSi305-B5
Bibliographical notes: p. 389—422. Bibliography:
p. 423-427.
Depicts the creation of Twain's Adventures of
Huckleberry Finn, no. 787—793 in the 1960 Guide,
by discussing the author's life, his reading, his think-
ing, and his writing between 1874 and 1884.
262. Leary, Lewis G., ed. A casebook on Mark
Twain's wound. New York, Crowell [1962]
351 p. (Crowell literary casebooks)
62—10282 PSi33i.L42
Bibliographical footnotes. Bibliography: p.
337-346-
Van Wyck Brooks' The Ordeal of Marf( Twain
(1920) portrays Twain as a genius who was
wounded and handicapped by his frontier environ-
ment. Bernard De Veto's Mar\ Twain's America
(1932) argues that Twain profited from his Western
heritage and utilized it in creating his literary art.
Leary offers a selection from each of these books,
together with comments by other critics upon the
two conflicting views.
263. Long, Eugene Hudson. Mark Twain hand-
book. New York, Hendricks House [Ci958]
454 p. 58—2265 PS 1 33 1. L6
Bibliographical footnotes. Bibliographies at ends
of chapters.
Summarizes and evaluates Twain scholarship.
264. Meltzer, Milton. Mark Twain himself, a pic-
torial biography. New York, Crowell [1960]
303 p. 60—11545 PSi33i.M38
"Picture sources": p. 295—297.
Among the pictures reproduced are daguerreo-
24 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
types, tintypes, stereographs, photographs, prints,
drawings (including Twain's), paintings, broad-
sides, posters, cartoons, caricatures, illustrations from
first editions, maps, news clippings, holographs, and
even Twain's handprint.
265. Smith, Henry Nash. Mark Twain: the de-
velopment of a writer. Cambridge, Belknap
Press of Harvard University Press, 1962. 212 p.
62—19224 PSi33i.S55 1962
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. [i89]-2o8).
266. STEPHEN CRANE, 1871-1900
No. 821 in 1960 Guide.
267. The red badge of courage, an annotated text,
backgrounds and sources, essays in criticism.
Edited by Sculley Bradley, Richmond Groom Beatty
[and] E. Hudson Long. New York, Norton
[1962] 344 p. (Norton critical editions, ^05)
62-9572 PZ3.C852R 27
Bibliography: p. 342—344. Bibliographical foot-
notes.
Uses the text of the 1895 edition, no. 825 in the
1960 Guide. Other editions are no. 826—829.
268. Complete short stories & sketches. Edited,
with an introduction, by Thomas A. Gulla-
son. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1963. 790 p.
63-20507
269. Stephen Crane: letters. Edited by R. W.
Stallman and Lillian Gilkes. With an intro-
duction by R. W. Stallman. [New York] New
York University Press, 1960. xxx, 366 p.
59—15192 PSi449.C85Z54
Bibliographical footnotes.
Reproduces 184 letters and autographs for the first
time.
270. The war dispatches of Stephen Crane. Edited
by R. W. Stallman and E. R. Hagemann.
[New York] New York University Press, 1964.
xv, 343 p. illus. 64—12559 PSi449.C85Z5
Bibliographical footnotes.
Narratives by Crane and his contemporaries from
the Greco-Turkish War, the Spanish- American War,
and the South African War.
271. Hoffman, Daniel G. The poetry of Stephen
Crane. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1957 [Ci956] 304 p.
57-11017 PSi449.C85Z65
"Further uncollected poems of Stephen Crane":
p. [281]— 284. Bibliography: p. [285]— 295.
272. EMILY DICKINSON, 1830-1886
No. 838 in 1960 Guide.
273. Complete poems. Edited by Thomas H.
Johnson. Boston, Little, Brown [1960] 770
p. 60—11646 PSi54i.Ai 1960
The editor has selected one form of each poem
from the variorum edition (no. 846 in the 1960
Guide) and has corrected some obvious textual
errors.
274. Letters. Edited by Thomas H. Johnson. As-
sociate editor: Theodora Ward. Cambridge,
Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 1958.
3 v. (xxvii, 999 p.) illus.
58-5594 PS 1 54 1. Z5 A3 1958
This companion to Poems (no. 846 in the 1960
Guide) collects all of the letters known to have sur-
vived, including about 100 that are published for
the first time.
275. Anderson, Charles R. Emily Dickinson's
poetry: stairway of surprise. New York,
Holt, Rinehart & Winston [1960] xviii, 334 p.
60-9546 PSi54i.Z5A63
Analysis of selected poems.
276. Blake, Caesar R., and Carlton F. Wells, eds.
The recognition of Emily Dickinson; selected
criticism since 1890. Ann Arbor, University of
Michigan Press [1964] xvi, 314 p.
64—10612
277. Gelpi, Albert J. Emily Dickinson: the mind
of the poet. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1965. 201 p. 65—13844 PS 1541^564
Bibliography: p. 179—180. Bibliographical notes:
p. 181—195.
Analysis of the ideas of Emily Dickinson in rela-
tion to American imaginative thought.
278. Leyda, Jay. The years and hours of Emily
Dickinson. New Haven, Yale University
Press, 1960. 2v. illus. 60—11132 PSi54i.Z5L4
"The sources": v. 2, p. 485—4818. "Locations of
manuscripts, illustrations, memorabilia": v. 2, p.
489-503.
A collection of chronologically arranged docu-
ments from manuscript and printed sources.
279. FINLEY PETER DUNNE
DOOLEY"), 1867-1936
No. 862 in 1960 Guide.
("MR.
280. Mr. Dooley on ivrything and ivrybody. Se-
lected and with an introduction by Robert
Hutchinson. New York, Dover Publications [1963]
244 p. 63-2652 PN6i6i.D8257
281. EDWARD EGGLESTON, 1837-1902
No. 867 in 1960 Guide.
282. Randel, William P. Edward Eggleston.
New York, Twayne Publishers [Ci963] 190
p. (Twayne's United States authors series, 45)
63-'7373 PSis83.R28
Bibliographical notes: p. 160-171. Bibliography:
p. 172-187.
283. HAMLIN GARLAND, 1860-1940
No. 890 in 1960 Guide.
284. Crumbling idols; twelve essays on art dealing
chiefly with literature, painting, and the
drama. Edited by Jane Johnson. Cambridge, Bel-
knap Press of Harvard University Press, 1960.
xxxi, 150 p. (The John Harvard library)
60-7994 PS1 732.07 J96o
A new text (accompanied by explanatory and
bibliographical footnotes and biographical glossary)
recognizing variations in the periodical, lecture, and
book versions. Earlier editions are no. 896-897 in
the 1960 Guide.
285. Holloway, Jean. Hamlin Garland, a biog-
raphy. Austin, University of Texas Press
[1960] 346 p. illus. 59-8124 PSi733.H6
"Chronology of major Garland publications": p.
[3 M] -332. Bibliography: p. 333-334.
Presents in chronological sequence the genesis
and composition of Garland's various works and
the critical reactions of his contemporaries.
286. LAFCADIO HEARN, 1850-1904
No. 945 in 1960 Guide.
287. Children of the levee. Edited by O. W.
Frost. Introduction by John Ball. [Lexing-
ton] University of Kentucky Press [1957] in p.
illus 57-5834 F499.C5H39
Newspaper sketches of Negro life on the Ohio
River from the Cincinnati Enquirer and Cincinnati
Commercial during the period 1874-77.
288. Mordell, Albert. Discoveries: essays on Laf-
cadio Hearn. [Tokyo] Orient/ West [1964]
240 p. 64-47174 PSi9i8.M6
Bibliographical footnotes.
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 25
289. Stevenson, Elizabeth. Lafcadio Hearn. New
York, Macmillan, 1961. xvi, 362 p.
61-10337 PSi9i8.S75
A biography.
290. Yu, Beongcheon. An ape of gods; the art
and thought of Lafcadio Hearn. Detroit,
Wayne State University Press, 1964. 346 p.
64-10090 PSi9i8.Y8
Bibliographical notes: p. [2951—324. Bibliogra-
phy: p. [3251-336.
291. ROBERT HERRICK, 1868-1938
No. 956 in 1960 Guide.
292. Nevius, Blake. Robert Herrick; the develop-
ment of a novelist. Berkeley, University of
California Press, 1962. xvi, 364 p.
62—17569 PSi923.N4
Bibliographical notes: p. [3451-351. Bibliogra-
phy: p. [3521-357.
293. EDGAR WATSON HOWE, 1853-1937
No. 959 in 1960 Guide.
294. The story of a country town. Edited by
Claude M. Simpson. Cambridge, Belknap
Press of Harvard University Press, 1961. xxxi,
347 p. (The John Harvard library)
61-13736 PZ3.H8364S 12
Bibliography: p. xxxi.
The text is that of the 1884 edition published by
J. R Osgood & Company of Boston. The editor
has corrected misprints, normalized contractions,
and made slight changes in punctuation. Other
editions are no. 960-963 in the 1960 Guide.
295. WILLIAM DEAN HO WELLS, 1837-1920
No. 964 in 1960 Guide.
296. Complete plays. [Edited, with an introduc-
tion, byl Walter J. Meserve. Under the gen-
eral editorship of William M. Gibson and George
Arms. [New York] New York University Press,
1960. xxxiii, 649 p. 59-15239 PS2026.Ai 1960
Bibliography: p. 641—643.
"With the exception of the unpublished plays,
which are printed here in what seems the most
readable form, the texts of the plays in this volume
are taken from the last American versions which
Ho wells had an opportunity to revise."— Intro-
duction.
297. Criticism and fiction, and other essays.
Edited, with introductions and notes, by
Clara Marburg Kirk and Rudolf Kirk. [New
26 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
York] New York University Press, 1959. xix,
413 p. 59—6248 PN345I.H6
Bibliographical notes: p. 385-395.
Reprints the 1891 edition of Criticism and Fic-
tion, no. 977 in the 1960 Guide, together with essays
in criticism from numerous other sources.
298. Brooks, Van Wyck. Howells, his life and
world. New York, Dutton, 1959. 296 p.
illus. 59-10782 PS2033-B7
Bibliographical footnotes.
An impressionistic study.
299. Cady, Edwin H. The road to realism; the
early years, 1837-1885, of William Dean
Howells. [Syracuse] Syracuse University Press
[1956] 283 p. 56-11892 PS2033.C25
"Bibliographical notes": p. 247—276.
A study of Howells' emergence as an artist.
300. Cady, Edwin H. The realist at war; the ma-
ture years, 1885-1920, of William Dean
Howells. [Syracuse] Syracuse University Press
[1958] 299 p. 58-13106 PS2033.C23
"Bibliographical notes": p. 273—292.
Concentrates on Howells' achievements and sig-
nificance.
301. Eble, Kenneth E., ed. Howells; a century of
criticism. Dallas, Southern Methodist Uni-
versity Press [1962] 247 p.
62-13275 PS2034.E2
Bibliographical notes at the ends of articles.
A collection of articles showing trends in the
critical appraisal of Howells' work since 1860.
302. Kirk, Clara M. W. D. Howells and art in his
time. New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers Uni-
versity Press [1965] xvi, 336 p. illus.
64—24736 PS2O33.K49
Bibliographical notes at the ends of chapters.
Analysis of the interrelationship between Howells'
views on social questions and his attitudes toward
the various art theories of his day.
303. Kirk, Clara M. W. D. Howells, Traveler
from Altruria, 1889-1894. New Brunswick,
N. J., Rutgers University Press [1962] 148 p.
illus. 62-13762 PS2025/T72K5
Bibliographical notes at the ends of chapters.
A study of Howells' social and religious attitudes
during the period of his association with the
Church of the Carpenter in Boston.
304. HENRY JAMES, 1843-1916
No. 986 in 1960 Guide.
305. Confidence, 1880. Now first edited from the
manuscript. With notes, introduction, and
bibliography by Herbert Ruhm. With contempo-
rary reviews, and excerpts from the notebooks.
New York, Grosset & Dunlap [1962] 238 p.
(The Universal library, ULi46)
62-52943 PZ3.j234Co 5
The text of James' fifth novel is taken from one
of the two complete surviving manuscripts of his
novels.
306. The ambassadors: an authoritative text, the
author on the novel, criticism. Edited by
S. P. Rosenbaum. New York, Norton [1963,
Ci964] 486 p. (Norton critical editions)
63-8035 PZ3.j234Amb 17
"Bibliographies": p. 485—486.
The text is taken from Novels and Tales, New
York edition, no. 1004 in the 1960 Guide. Rosen-
baum contributes textual notes and an essay, "Edi-
tions and Revisions." Other editions of The Am-
bassadors are no. 998—999 in the 1960 Guide.
307. The complete tales of Henry James. Edited,
with an introduction, by Leon Edel. Phila-
delphia, Lippincott [1962—65, Ci964] 12 v.
62—11335 PZ3.J234C1 2
Reproduces the first texts to be published in book
form.
308. The house of fiction, essays on the novel.
Edited, with an introduction, by Leon Edel.
London, R. Hart-Davis, 1957. 286 p.
58-1584 PN3499.J28
Bibliographical footnotes. Bibliography: p. 281.
309. Literary reviews and essays, on American,
English, and French literature. Edited by
Albert Mordell. New York, Twayne Publishers
["1957] 409 p. 58-249 PS2I20.L5 1957
Bibliographical notes: p. 354—402.
Contains criticism by James never collected
before.
310. Parisian sketches; letters to the New York
tribune, 1875-1876. Edited, with an intro-
duction, by Leon Edel and Use Dusoir Lind. [New
York] New York University Press, 1957. xxxvii,
262 p. 57-79*4 DC735-J3
311. Anderson, Quentin. The American Henry
James. New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers Uni-
versity Press, 1957. 369 p.
57-6220 PS2I24.A43 1957
Bibliographical footnotes. Bibliography: p.
[3551-36I.
An analysis of James' works as a reflection of his
father's philosophy.
312. Cargill, Oscar. The novels of Henry James.
New York, Macmillan, 1961. xviii, 505 p.
61—7434 PS2I24.C25
Bibliographical notes at the ends of chapters.
Reviews "the best that has been said and written"
about James' major fiction and contributes addi-
tional analysis.
313. Crews, Frederick C. The tragedy of man-
ners; moral drama in the later novels of
Henry James. New Haven, Yale University Press,
1957. 114 p. (Yale University. Undergraduate
prize essays, v. 10) 57—10151 PS2I24.C7
314. Edel, Leon. Henry James. Philadelphia,
Lippincott [1953—62] 3 v. illus.
53-5421 PS2I23.E33
Bibliographical notes at end of each chapter.
CONTENTS.— [i] The untried years, 1843-1870.
— [2] The conquest of London, 1870—1881. — [3]
The middle years, 1882—1895.
Volume i is no. 1020 in the 1960 Guide. The
author has continued the story of James' life and
times. Two additional volumes are in preparation.
315. Geismar, Maxwell D. Henry James and the
Jacobites. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1963.
463 p. 63-10550 PS2I23.G4
Bibliographical footnotes.
A vigorously adverse criticism of James and his
admirers.
316. Holland, Laurence B. The expense of vision,
essays on the craft of Henry James. Prince-
ton, N. J., Princeton University Press, 1964. 414 p.
63-18644 PS2I24.H64
Bibliographical footnotes.
Formal analysis of the interaction among James,
his characters, and his audience.
317. Krook, Dorothea. The ordeal of conscious-
ness in Henry James. Cambridge [Eng.]
University Press, 1962. 422 p.
62-5617 PS2I24.K7
Bibliographical footnotes.
A "collection of purely elucidatory studies of a
selected number of James's works, connected by the
theme of 'being and seeing' — the exploration and
definition of consciousness in James's particular
meaning of the term."
318. Lebowitz, Naomi. The imagination of lov-
ing; Henry James's legacy to the novel. De-
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 27
troit, Wayne State University Press, 1965. 183 p.
65—14595 PS2I28.L4
Bibliographical notes: p. 161—176. Bibliography:
p. 177—180.
319. Stone, Edward. The battle and the books:
some aspects of Henry James. Athens, Ohio
University Press [1964] 234 p.
64-22886 PS2I24.S79
Bibliographical notes: p. [221]— 228.
Reviews the critical battles over James and ex-
amines selected works by him and his contempor-
320. Vaid, Krishna B. Technique in the tales of
Henry James. Cambridge, Mass., Harvard
University Press, 1964. 285 p.
64—22723 PS2I24.V3 1964
Bibliographical notes: p. 267—281.
321. Wright, Walter F. The madness of art, a
study of Henry James. Lincoln, University
of Nebraska Press [1962] 269 p.
62-14665 PS2I42.W7
Bibliographical footnotes. Bibliography: p. 255—
266.
Presents a theory of the creative process in James'
work and analyzes the ways in which ideas take
form in the novels.
322. SARAH ORNE JEWETT, 1849-1909
No. 1023 in 1960 Guide.
323. Letters. Edited, with an introduction and
notes, by Richard Gary. Waterville, Me.,
Colby College Press, 1956. 117 p. illus.
57—181 PS2I33.A3 1956
"Books by Sarah Orne Jewett": p. [16] Biblio-
graphical footnotes.
Ninety-four letters; more than half appear in
print for the first time.
324. The world of Dunnett Landing, a Sarah Orne
Jewett collection. Edited by David Bonnell
Green. Lincoln, University of Nebraska Press
[1962] 420 p. (A Bison book, 66147)
A62-8703 PZ3.J55Wo
The 1896 edition of The Country of the Pointed
Firs (no. 1029 in the 1960 Guide) is reprinted, to-
gether with four additional sketches. The second
part of the book contains critical essays about Miss
Jewett by Martha H. Shackford, Mary Ellen Chase,
Hyatt H. Waggoner, Warner Berthhoff, and David
B. Green.
28 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
325. JACK (JOHN GRIFFITH) LONDON,
1876-1916
No. 1048 in 1960 Guide.
326. Stories of Hawaii. Edited by A. Grove Day.
New York, Appleton-Century [1965] 282 p.
65-11682
327. Letters from Jack London, containing an un-
published correspondence between London
and Sinclair Lewis. Edited by King Hendricks and
Irving Shepard. New York, Odyssey Press [1965]
502 p. illus. 65—22039 1*83523.046253
Selections from London's voluminous correspond-
ence.
328. O'Connor, Richard. Jack London, a biogra-
phy. Boston, Little, Brown [1964] 430 p.
64-21486 PS3523.O46Z84
Bibliography: p. [411]— 414. Bibliographical
notes: p. [415]— 419.
329. JOHN MUIR, 1838-1914
No. 1072 in 1960 Guide.
330. Smith, Herbert F. John Muir. New York,
Twayne Publishers [1965] 158 p. (Twayne's
United States authors series, 73)
64—20723 PS2447-M5Z85
Bibliographical notes: p. 148—151. Bibliography:
p. 152-153-
331. (BENJAMIN) FRANK(LIN) NORRIS,
1870—1902
No. 1089 in 1960 Guide.
332. Letters. Edited by Franklin Walker. San
Francisco, Book Club of California, 1956.
98 p. 56-31 56 PS2473.A45 1956
333. Literary criticism. Edited by Donald Pizer.
Austin, University of Texas Press [1964]
xxiv, 247 p. 63-17618 PN99.U5N6
"Bibliographical note and Checklist of Norris'
literary criticism": p. [2333—240.
A thematic survey, with interpretive introduc-
tions, covering the full range of Norris' critical
writings.
334. French, Warren G. Frank Norris. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1962] 160 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 25)
62—16820 PS2473.F7
Bibliographical footnotes: p. 142—147. Bibliogra-
phy: p. 148-154.
335. WILLIAM SYDNEY PORTER ("O.
HENRY"), 1862-1910
No. mi in 1960 Guide.
336.
Current-Garcia, Eugene. O. Henry (William
Sydney Porter). New York, Twayne Pub-
lishers [1965] 192 p. (Twayne's United States
authors series, 77) 65—12997 PS2649-P5Z64
Bibliographical notes: p. 167—181. Bibliography:
p. 182-187.
Analyzes representative stories and summarizes
the growth and decline of O. Henry's reputation.
337. Langford, Gerald. Alias O. Henry; a biog-
raphy of William Sydney Porter. New York,
Macmillan, 1957. xix, 294 p.
57—8270 PS2649-P5Z7I26
Bibliographical notes: p. 259—286.
Concentrates on O. Henry's life.
338. OWEN WISTER, 1860-1938
No. 1145 in 1960 Guide.
339. Owen Wister out west: his journals and let-
ters. Edited by Fanny Kemble Wister.
[Chicago] University of Chicago Press [1958]
xix, 269 p. illus. 58—9609 PS3346.A3
"A Wister bibliography": p. 262—264.
A biographical introduction and the previously
unpublished western memoirs provide a personal
background to the writing of The Virginian (no.
1146—1148 in the 1960 Guide).
340. CONSTANCE FENIMORE WOOLSON,
1840—1894
No. 1 149 in 1960 Guide.
341. Moore, Rayburn S. Constance Fenimore
Woolson. New York, Twayne Publishers
[1963] 173 p. (Twayne's United States authors
series, 34) 62-19478 PS3363-M6
Bibliographical footnotes: p. 143-162. Bibliog-
raphy: p. 163—165.
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 29
E. The First World War
and the Great Depression (1915-1939)
342. SAMUEL HOPKINS ADAMS, 1871-1958
No. 1155 in 1960 Guide.
343. Tenderloin. New York, Random House
[Cl959] 372P- 59-5702
A novel set in New York City in the 1890'$.
344. CONRAD POTTER AIKEN, 1889-
No. 1161 in 1960 Guide.
345. Mr. Arcularis, a play. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1957. 83 p.
57-13535 PS35oi.I5M5
346. Sheepfold Hill, fifteen poems. New York,
Sagamore Press [1958] 62 p.
58-9145 PS350I.I5S45
347. A reviewer's ABC; collected criticism of Con-
rad Aiken from 1916 to the present. Intro-
duced by Rufus A. Blanshard. [New York] Meri-
dian Books [1958] 414 p. (Greenwich editions)
58-12328 PR99.A46
"Checklist of Conrad Aiken's critical writings":
P- [395]-4°8.
Selections and excerpts representing the critical
writing that Aiken wished to preserve.
348. Collected short stories. Preface by Mark
Schorer. Cleveland, World Pub. Co. [1960]
566 p. 60-10537 PZ3.A29i2Ck
349. The morning song of Lord Zero, poems old
and new. New York, Oxford University
Press, 1963. 130 p. 63-11915
350. Collected novels: Blue voyage, Great circle,
King Coffin, A heart for the gods of Mexico
[and] Conversation. Introduction by R. P. Black-
mur. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston [1964]
575 p. 63-20431
351. Hoffman, Frederick J. Conrad Aiken. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1962] 172 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 17)
62-13671 PS350I.I5Z68
Bibliographical notes: p. 156—163. Bibliography:
p. 164-168.
352. Martin, Jay. Conrad Aiken: a life of his art.
Princeton, N. J., Princeton University Press,
1962. 280 p. 62-11958 PS350I.I5Z75
Bibliographical notes: p. 251—258.
353. MAXWELL ANDERSON, 1888-1959
No. 1172 in 1960 Guide.
354. Bailey, Mabel D. Maxwell Anderson; the
playwright as prophet. London, New York,
Abelard-Schuman [1957] 200 p.
57—6380 PS350I.N256Z57 1957
Bibliographical footnotes.
The first full-length evaluation of Anderson,
structured with reference to his dramatic themes.
355. SHERWOOD ANDERSON, 1876-1941
No. 1178 in 1960 Guide.
356. Winesburg, Ohio. Introduction by Malcolm
Cowley. [New ed.] New York, Viking
Press, 1960. 247 p. 60—10867 PZ3-A55Win 7
The first new trade edition of this book of short
stories since its original publication in 1919 (no.
1179 in the 1960 Guide).
357. Short stories. Edited and with an introduc-
tion by Maxwell Geismar. New York, Hill
& Wang [1962] xxiii, 289 p. (American century
series, AC52) 62—15213 PZ3.A55SJ
Bibliography: p. [291].
Stories first published in earlier collections such
as The Triumph of the Egg (no. 1181 in the 1960
Guide).
358. Burbank, Rex J. Sherwood Anderson. New
York, Twayne [1964] 159 p. (Twayne's
United States authors series, 65)
64—20715 PS35OI.N4Z55
Bibliographical notes: p. 144—147. Bibliography:
p. 148—152.
359. SAMUEL NATHANIEL BEHRMAN,
1893-
No. 1204 in 1960 Guide.
30 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
360. The cold wind and the warm, a play. Sug-
gested by his New Yorker series and book,
The Worcester account. New York, Random
House [1959] 142 p. ill us. (A Random House
play) 59-9484 PS3503.E37C6
361. Lord Pengo; a comedy in three acts. Sug-
gested by his New Yorker series, The days
of Duveen. New York, Random House [1963]
132 p. illus. 63—14141 PS3503.E37L6
362. But for whom Charlie. New York, Random
House [1964] 150 p.
64-17944 PS3503.E37B8
A play in three acts.
363. The suspended drawing room. New York,
Stein & Day [1965] 253 p.
65-22989 PS3503.E37S8
Essays.
364. STEPHEN VINCENT BENET, 1898-1943
No. 1222 in 1960 Guide.
365. Selected poetry and prose; edited, with an
introduction, by Basil Davenport. New York,
Rinehart [1960] 336 p. (Rinehart editions, 100)
60—5174 PS35O3.E5325A6 1960
Bibliography: p. xiv.
366. Selected letters. Edited by Charles A. Fen-
ton. New Haven, Yale University Press,
1960. 436 p. 60—11231 PS35O3.E5325Z54
367. Fenton, Charles A. Stephen Vincent Benet;
the life and times of an American man of
letters, 1898-1943. New Haven, Yale University
Press, 1958. xv, 436 p. illus.
58-11252 PS3503. £5325262
Bibliographical notes: p. 375—409.
368. KAY BOYLE, 1903-
No. 1242 in 1960 Guide.
369. Generation without farewell. New York,
Knopf, 1960 [Ci959] 300 p.
59-11822 PZ3.B69796Gc
A novel about occupied Germany after World
War II.
370. Collected poems. New York, Knopf, 1962.
105 p. 62—14759 PS3503.C«9357Ai7 1962
Poems from the periods 1954—61 and 1926—43.
372. Imperial woman, a novel. New York, J.
Day Co. ['1956] 376 p.
55— TI37°
373. Letter from Peking, a novel. New York,
J. Day Co. [1957] 252 p.
57-9389 PZ3.B8555Le
374. Command the morning, a novel. New York,
J. Day Co. [1959] 317 p.
59-7169
375. Fourteen stories. New York, John Day Co.
[1961] 250 p. 61—12716
376. A bridge for passing. New York, John Day
Co. [1962] 256 p.
62—10937 PS35°3-Ui98Z53 1962
The filming in Japan of her novel The Big Wave
(1948) provides a basis for Miss Buck's comments
on contemporary Japanese life.
377. The living reed, a novel. New York, John
Day Co. [1963] 478 p.
63-10220
378. Doyle, Paul A. Pearl S. Buck. New York,
Twayne Publishers [1965] 175 p. (Twayne's
United States authors series, 85)
65-18904 PS3503.Ui98Z64
Bibliographical notes: p. 157—168. Bibliography:
p. 169—170.
379. JAMES BRANCH CABELL, 1897-1958
No. 1261 in 1960 Guide.
380. Between friends; letters of James Branch
Cabell and others. Edited by Padraic Colum
and Margaret Freeman Cabell. With an introduc-
tion by Carl Van Vechten. New York, Harcourt,
Brace & World [1962] xvi, 304 p.
60—10935 PS35°5-Ai53Z53
"Books by James Branch Cabell": p. 291—292.
Correspondence between Cabell and various liter-
ary figures, including Sinclair Lewis, F. Scott Fitz-
gerald, and Hugh Walpole.
381. Davis, Joe L. James Branch Cabell. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1962] 174 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 21)
62—16816 PS35O5.Ai53Z62
Bibliographical notes: p. 152—161. Bibliography:
p. 162—166.
371. PEARL SYDENSTRICKER BUCK, 1892-
No. 1252 in 1960 Guide.
382. ERSKINE CALDWELL, 1903-
No. 1270 in 1960 Guide.
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 3!
383. Gulf coast stories. Boston, Little, Brown
[1956] 248 p. 56-10634
384. Men and women; twenty-two stories selected
and with an introduction by Carvel Collins.
Boston, Little, Brown [1961] 313 p.
61-12810
385. Around about America. Drawings by Vir-
ginia M. Caldwell. New York, Farrar,
Straus [1964] 224 p. 64—16620 Ei69.Ci6
Observations and impressions recorded during a
journey from St. Johnsbury, Vt., to Rheem Valley,
Calif.
386. WILLA SIBERT GATHER, 1873-1947
No. 1276 in 1960 Guide.
387. Willa Gather in Europe; her own story of the
first journey. With an introduction and
incidental notes by George N. Kates. New York,
Knopf, 1956. 178 p. 56—10906 PS3505.A87Z53
Essays written for newspaper publication during
the author's 1902 European tour.
388. April twilights (1903); poems. Edited, with
an introduction, by Bernice Slote. Lincoln,
University of Nebraska Press [1962] xxxxviii,
72 p. 62-8899 PS3505.A87A8 1962
Bibliographical notes: p. 53-58. Bibliography:
p. 59-72.
The origins of Willa Gather's first book are dis-
cussed in the introduction, which also examines her
poems in relationship to her prose. The first-edition
text, published in Boston by Richard G. Badger, is
reprinted.
389. Willa Gather's collected short fiction, 1892—
1912. Introduction by Mildred R. Bennett.
Lincoln, University of Nebraska Press [1965]
xli, 594 p. 65-10547 PZ3.C2858Wi
Bibliography: p. 593—594.
CONTENTS. — The Bohemian girl. — The troll gar-
den. — On the Divide. — Appendix: Pseudonymous
stories.
Forty-four early stories, only three of which were
included by the author in the "Library Edition" of
her work (no. 1277 in the 1960 Guide).
390. Bennett, Mildred R. The world of Willa
Gather. New ed. with notes and index.
Lincoln, University of Nebraska Press, 1961. 285
p. illus. (A Bison book, BB 1 12)
61-7235 PS3505.A87Z58 1961
A revised edition of no. 1279 in the 1960 Guide.
391. Bloom, Edward A., and Lillian D. Bloom.
Willa Gather's gift of sympathy. With a
preface by Harry T. Moore. Carbondale, Southern
Illinois University Press [1962] 260 p. (Cross-
currents: modern critiques)
62-7231 PS3505.A87Z583
The authors draw on the full Gather canon in
examining her major themes: the frontier spirit,
materialistic threats to that spirit, and the nature of
the artist. Death Comes for the Archbishop re-
ceives special attention.
392. Randall, John H. The landscape and the
looking glass; Willa Gather's search for value.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1960. 425 p. illus.
60-6225 PS3505.A87Z78
Bibliographical notes: p. 381—410. Bibliography:
p. 413-415.
Applying techniques associated with the New
Criticism, Randall analyzes theme, structure, tone,
and imagery in Willa Gather's work in relation to
the cultural influences of her time.
393. MARY ELLEN CHASE, 1887-
No. 1284 in 1960 Guide.
394. The edge of darkness. New York, Norton
[i957] 235 P- 57-Io637 PZ3-C39oiEd
A novel.
395. The lovely ambition, a novel. New York,
Norton [1960] 288 p.
60—5843
396. A journey to Boston, a novel. New York,
Norton [1965] 114 p.
64-23875
397. Westbrook, Perry D. Mary Ellen Chase.
New York, Twayne Publishers [1965] 176
p. (Twayne's United States authors series, 86)
65-18905 PS3505.H48Z96
Bibliographical notes: p. 163—165. Bibliography:
p. 166—171.
398. JAMES GOULD COZZENS, 1903-
No. 1298 in 1960 Guide.
399. By love possessed. New York, Harcourt,
Brace [1957] 570 p.
57-10062
A novel.
32 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
400. Children and others. New York, Harcourt,
Brace & World [1964] 343 p.
64-22665 PZ3.C83983Ch
Short stories.
401. Bracher, Frederick G. The novels of James
Gould Cozzens. New York, Harcourt,
Brace [1959] 306 p. 59—10245 PS35O5.O99Z57
Bibliographical notes: p. 283—292. Bibliography:
p. 293-297.
Evaluates Cozzens' achievement as a novelist with
reference to his style, form, and point of view.
402.
403.
HART CRANE, 1899-1932
No. 1303 in 1960 Guide.
Quinn, Vincent G. Hart Crane. New York,
Twayne Publishers [1963] 141 p. (Twayne's
United States authors series, 35)
63—10952 PS3505-R272Z78
Bibliographical notes: p. 129—134. Bibliography:
p. 135-138-
A survey of the themes of Crane's major poems,
his attitudes toward poetry, and the opinions of his
principal critics.
404. EDWARD ESTLIN CUMMINGS, 1894-
1962
No. 1309 in 1960 Guide.
405. 95 poems. New York, Harcourt, Brace
[1958] 95 p.
58-10909 PS3505.U334N5 1958
406. 73 poems. New York, Harcourt, Brace &
World [1963] i v. (unpaged)
63-20271 PS3505.U334S4
407. A selection of poems. With an introduction
by Horace Gregory. New York, Harcourt,
Brace & World [1965] xiv, 194 p. (A Harvest
book) 65—24992 PS3505-U334Ai7 1965
408. E. E. Cummings: a miscellany revised.
Edited, with an introduction and notes, by
George J. Firmage. Foreword by the author. New
York, October House [1965] 335 p. illus.
64—13163 PS35O5.U334Ai6 1965
A collection of short pieces originally published in
a 1958 limited edition, reprinted with corrections
and additions, including previously unpublished
line drawings by the author.
409. Baum, Stanley V., ed. 'E<m: e e c; E. E.
Cummings and the critics. East Lansing,
Michigan State University Press [1962] 220 p.
61-13699 PS3505.U334Z56
Bibliography: p. 195—203.
A collection of essays by various writers, includ-
ing Edmund Wilson, R. P. Blackmur, Karl Sha-
piro, and Randall Jarrell, designed to indicate the
diversity of critical opinion concerning Cummings'
work.
410. Friedman, Norman. E. E. Cummings; the
growth of a writer. With a preface by
Harry T. Moore. Carbondale, Southern Illinois
University Press [1964] 193 p. (Crosscurrents:
modern critiques) 64—11165 PS3505-U334Z66
Bibliography: p. [187]-: 88.
411. Norman, Charles. E. E. Cummings, the
magic-maker. [Rev. ed.] New York,
Duell, Sloan & Pearce [1964] 246 p.
64-12438 PS3505.U334Z8 1964
Bibliographical footnotes.
This revised and somewhat abridged version of
Norman's 1958 biography conveys a profound affec-
tion for and knowledge of Cummings as writer and
painter.
412. HAROLD LENOIR DAVIS, 1896-1960
No. 1314 in 1960 Guide.
413. The distant music. New York, Morrow,
1957. 311 p. 57-5424 PZ3.D29355Di
A novel.
414. Kettle of fire. New York, Morrow, 1959.
189 p. 59—11706 F88i.2.D3
History, nature, and personal reminiscence are
combined in a collection of essays on Oregon and
the Northwest.
415. HILDA DOOLITTLE, 1886-1961
No. 1319 in 1960 Guide.
416. Selected poems. New York, Grove Press
[1957] 128 p.
57-8646 PS3507.O726Ai7 1957
417. Bid me to live, a madrigal. New York,
Grove Press [1960] 184 p.
60-6345 PZ4.D688Bi
418. Helen in Egypt. Introduction by Horace
Gregory. New York, Grove Press [1961]
315 p. 61—12764
A poem.
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 33
419. Swann, Thomas B. The classical world of
H. D. Lincoln, University of Nebraska Press,
1962. 217 p. 62-16782 PS3507.O726Z87
Bibliographical notes: p. 195—199. Bibliography:
p. 201—206.
Investigates H. D.'s life and work in relation to
her classical background, settings, and characters.
420. JOHN RODERIGO DOS PASSOS, 1896-
No. 1325 in 1960 Guide.
421. The great days. New York, Sagamore Press
[1958] 312 p. 58-6966 PZ3.D74Gt
A novel.
422. Midcentury. Boston, Houghton, Mifflin,
1961. 496 p. 61—5359 PZ3.D74Mi
A novel.
423. Occasions and protests. [Chicago] H. Reg-
nery Co., 1964. 323 p.
64-7914 PS3507.O743O25
Essays and observations on the American socio-
political situation between 1936 and 1964.
424. Wrenn, John H. John Dos Passes. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1962, Ci96i] 208
p. (Twayne's United States authors series, 9)
61-15669 PS3507.O743Z93 1962
Bibliographical notes: p. 188—197. Bibliography:
p. 198—205.
425. THEODORE DREISER, 1871-1945
No. 1333 in 1960 Guide.
426. Sister Carrie. Edited, with an introduction,
by Claude Simpson. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin [1959] xxi, 418 p. (Riverside editions, A36)
59-1819 PZ3.D8i4S 31
A contents page has been added to the text of the
first edition (no. 1334 in the 1960 Guide) and
minor misprints have been corrected.
427. Letters of Theodore Dreiser: a selection.
Edited, with preface and notes, by Robert H.
Elias. Consulting editors: Sculley Bradley and
Robert E. Spiller. Philadelphia, University of Penn-
sylvania Press [1959] 3V. (1067 p.) illus.
58-8203 PS3507.R55Z54
Selects nearly 600 letters, written between 1897
and 1945, primarily from the Dreiser collection in
the University of Pennsylvania Library. The let-
ters chosen "should contribute to an understanding
in particular of Dreiser as writer — that is, to
Dreiser as man thinking."
428. Shapiro, Charles. Theodore Dreiser: our
bitter patriot. With a preface by Harry T.
Moore. Carbondale, Southern Illinois University
Press [1962] xv, 137 p. (Crosscurrents: modern
critiques) 62-16696 PS35O7.R55Z83
Bibliographical notes: p. [1241—129.
Examines Dreiser's sprawling novels of hope and
failure in the quest for the American dream.
429. Swanberg, W.A. Dreiser. New York,
Scribner [1965] xvii, 614 p. illus.
65-13661 PS3507.R55Z84
Bibliographical notes: p. 535—581.
A comprehensive biography of "one of the most
incredible of human beings, a man whose enormous
gifts warred endlessly with grievous flaws."
430. RICHARD EBERHART, 1904-
No. 1350 in 1960 Guide.
431. Great praises. New York, Oxford University
Press, 1957. 72 p.
57-2572 PS3509.B456G7
Poems.
432. Collected poems, 1930—1960, including 51
new poems. New York, Oxford University
Press, 1960. 228 p.
60—14636 PS35O9.B456A6 1960
433. Collected verse plays. Chapel Hill, Univer-
sity of North Carolina Press [1962] 167 p.
62—16088 PS35O9.B456Ai9 1962
434. The quarry, new poems. New York, Oxford
University Press, 1964. 114 p.
64-15009 PS3509.B456Q3
435. Selected poems, 1930—1965. [New York]
New Directions [1965] 115 p. (A New Di-
rections paperbook, NDPi98)
65—17453 PS35O9.B456A6 1965
436. THOMAS STEARNS ELIOT, 1888-1965
No. 1357 in 1960 Guide.
437. On poetry and poets. New York, Farrar,
Straus & Cudahy, 1957. 308 p.
57-12154 PN5ii.E435
A collection of 16 essays written during the
period 1926—56. Eliot's Selected Essays is no. 1358
in the 1960 Guide.
438. The elder statesman, a play. New York,
Farrar, Straus & Cudahy [1959] 134 p.
59-6590 PS3509.L43E4
34 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
439- Collected plays. London, Faber & Faber
[1962] 355 p.
63—3627 PS35O9-L43Ai9 1962
CONTENTS.— Murder in the cathedral.— The fam-
ily reunion.— The cocktail party.— The confidential
clerk. — The elder statesman.
440. Collected poems, 1909—1962. New York,
Harcourt, Brace & World [1963] 221 p.
63—21424 PS3509.L43Ai7 1963
441. Knowledge and experience in the philosophy
of F. H. Bradley. New York, Farrar, Straus
[1964] 216 p. 63—12865 Bi6i8.B74E48 1964
Bibliographical notes: p. 170—176. Bibliography:
p. 208—213.
Originally submitted to Harvard University in
1916 as a doctoral dissertation entitled Experience
and the Objects of Knowledge in the Philosophy of
F. H. Bradley. Eliot did not complete the require-
ments for a doctor's degree, although his dissertation
was officially approved. Two 1916 essays on Leib-
niz are included in this volume.
442. To criticize the critic, and other writings.
New York, Farrar, Straus & Giroux [1965]
188 p. 65-25139 PS3509-L43T6
CONTENTS. — To criticize the critic. — From Poe to
Valery. — American literature and the American
language. — The aims of education. — What Dante
means to me. — The literature of politics. — The
classics and the man of letters — Ezra Pound: his
metric and poetry. — Reflections on Vers libre.
443. Howarth, Herbert. Notes on some figures
behind T. S. Eliot. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1964. 396 p. 62-8139 PS3509.L43Z684
Bibliographical notes: p. [3431—386.
444. Jones, Genesius. Approach to the purpose;
a study of the poetry of T. S. Eliot. New
York, Barnes & Noble [1965, Ci964] 351 p.
65-3788 PS3509.L43Z686 1965
Bibliography: p. 342—346.
445. Kenner, Hugh. The invisible poet: T. S.
Eliot. New York, McDowell, Obolensky
[1959] 346 p. 59—7118 PS3509.L43Z69
Contends that "opinion concerning the most in-
fluential man of letters of the twentieth century has
not freed itself from a cloud of unknowing. He is
the Invisible Poet in an age of systematized literary
scrutiny, much of it directed at him."
446. Kenner, Hugh, ed. T. S. Eliot; a collection
of critical essays. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.,
Prentice-Hall [1962] 210 p. (A Spectrum book:
Twentieth century views, S— TC— 2)
62—9290 1*83509^4376913
447. Smith, Carol H. T. S. Eliot's dramatic theory
and practice, from Sweeney Agonistes to The
elder statesman. Princeton, N. J., Princeton Uni-
versity Press, 1963. 251 p.
63-7161 PS3509.L43Z867
Bibliography: p. 241—246.
448. Thompson, Eric. T. S. Eliot, the metaphysi-
cal perspective. With a preface by Harry T.
Moore. Carbondale, Southern Illinois University
Press [1963] 186 p. (Crosscurrents: modern
critiques) 62-16697 PS3509.L43Z877
Bibliographical notes: p. [161]— 180.
An exploration of Eliot's doctoral dissertation on
F. H. Bradley (no. 441 above), tracing Bradley's
influence on Eliot's poetry.
449. JAMES THOMAS FARRELL, 1904-
No. 1372 in 1960 Guide.
450. A dangerous woman, and other stories. New
York, Vanguard Press [1957] 160 p.
57—12256
451. The silence of history. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1963. 372 p.
61—12518 PZ3-F2465SJ
A novel.
452. What time collects. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1964. 421 p.
64-11695 PZ3.F2465Wf
A novel.
453. Selected essays. Edited by Luna Wolf. With
an introduction by Don M. Wolfe. New
York, McGraw-Hill [1964] xxiii, 199 p.
64—16289 PS35ii.A738Ai6 1964
Bibliographical footnotes.
454. The collected poems of James T. Farrell.
New York, Fleet Pub. Corp. [1965] 82 p.
65—16314 PS35ii.A738Ai7 1965
455. WILLIAM FAULKNER, 1897-1962
No. 1379 in 1960 Guide.
456. As I lay dying. [New ed.] New York,
Random House [1964, Ci957] 250 p.
64—12609 PZ3.F272As 3
Contains corrections based on a collation of the
first edition (no. 1384 in the 1960 Guide) with
Faulkner's original manuscript and typescript.
457. The town. New York, Random House
[J957] 371 P- 57-6656 PZ3.F272To
The second volume of the "Snopes" trilogy.
458. New Orleans sketches. Introduction by
Carvel Collins. New Brunswick, N. J., Rut-
gers University Press, 1958. 223 p.
57-12807 PZ3.F272Ne
Sixteen short pieces first published in 1925 in the
New Orleans Times-Picayune and a group of
sketches printed during the same year in a New
Orleans literary magazine, The Double Dealer.
459. The mansion. New York, Random House
[1959] 436 p. 59—10811 P
The third volume of the "Snopes" trilogy.
460. The reivers, a reminiscence. New York,
Random House [1962] 305 p.
62-10335 PZ3.F272Re
A novel.
461. William Faulkner: early prose and poetry.
Compilation and introduction by Carvel Col-
lins. Boston, Little, Brown [1962] 134 p.
62—17953 PS35H.A86A6 1962
Bibliographical notes: p. 123—134.
Material published during the author's years at
the University of Mississippi and shortly thereafter.
Includes numerous drawings by Faulkner.
462. The hamlet. [3d ed.] New York, Random
House [1964] 366 p.
64—7972 PZ3.F272Ham 6
Earlier errors have been corrected through a col-
lation of the author's typescript with the first edition
of 1940 (no. 1391 in the 1960 Guide) and the sec-
ond edition of 1956. The Hamlet is the first volume
of Faulkner's "Snopes" trilogy.
463. The marble faun, and A green bough. New
York, Random House [1965] 51, 67 p.
65—27492 PS35U.A86M3 1965
Faulkner's two volumes of poetry reproduced
from the original editions published in 1924 (The
Marble Faun) and 1933 (A Green Bough).
464. Brooks, Cleanth. William Faulkner; the
Yoknapatawpha country. New Haven, Yale
University Press, 1963. xiv, 499 p.
63-17023 PS35H.A86Z64
Bibliographical footnotes.
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 35
465. Hoffman, Frederick J., and Olga W. Vickery,
eds. William Faulkner: three decades of
criticism. [1960 ed. East Lansing] Michigan State
University Press, 1960. 428 p.
60-11481 PS35U.A86Z8 1960
Bibliography: p. 393—428.
A revised and updated edition of no. 1399 in the
1960 Guide.
466. Howe, Irving. William Faulkner: a critical
study. 2d ed., rev. and expanded. New
York, Vintage Books [1962] 299 p.
62—2290 PS35H.A86Z84 1962
A new edition of no. 1400 in the 1960 Guide.
467. Runyan, Harry. A Faulkner glossary. New
York, Citadel Press [1964] 310 p.
64—15959 PS35H.A86Z965
An alphabetical guide to titles, characters, and
places in Faulkner's writings. Seven appendixes
offer critical and genealogical information as well
as detailed bibliographies.
468. Tuck, Dorothy. Crowell's handbook of
Faulkner. Lewis Leary, advisory editor.
New York, Crowell [1964] xx, 259 p. (A Cro-
well reference book) 64—16536 PS35H.A86Z978
Bibliography: p. [247]— 250.
469. Vickery, Olga W. The novels of William
Faulkner; a critical interpretation. [Rev. ed.
Baton Rouge] Louisiana State University Press
[1964] 318 p. 64-23150 PS35H.A86Z98 1964
470. Waggoner, Hyatt H. William Faulkner:
from Jefferson to the world. [Lexington]
University of Kentucky Press [1959] 279 p.
59-13268 PS35H.A86Z985
Bibliographical notes: p. [267]— 274.
"The most significant meanings in Faulkner all
start in Jefferson and radiate outward to meanings
as various and as inexhaustible as myth."
471. EDNA FERBER, 1887-
No. 1403 in 1960 Guide.
472. Ice Palace. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
1958. 411 p. 58-5936 PZ3.F38oIc
A novel.
473. A peculiar treasure. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1960. 383 p. illus.
60-8865 PS35H.E46Z5 1960
Autobiography.
36 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
474. A kind of magic. Garden City, N. Y., Dou-
bleday, 1963. 335 p.
63—18030 PS35H.E46Z52
Sequel to A Peculiar Treasure.
475. DOROTHEA FRANCES CANFIELD
FISHER, 1879-1958
No. 1411 in 1960 Guide.
476. A harvest of stories, from a half century of
writing. New York, Harcourt, Brace [1956]
352 p. 56-11298 PZ3-F53Har
477. VARDIS ALVERO FISHER, 1895-
No. 1420 in 1960 Guide.
478. Jesus came again, a parable. Denver, A.
Swallow [1956] 359 p. (His The Testa-
ment of man [8] ) 56-13625
479. A goat for Azazel; a novel of Christian
origins. Denver, A. Swallow [1956] 368 p.
(His The Testament of man [9] )
56-14254 PZ3.F539G1
480. Pemmican; a novel of the Hudson's Bay
Company. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
1956. 319 p. 56-7740
481. Peace like a river; a novel of Christian asceti-
cism. Denver, A. Swallow [1957] 316 p.
(His The Testament of man [10] )
58-16346
482. My holy satan; a novel of Christian twilight.
Denver, A. Swallow [1958] 326 p. (His
The Testament of man [n] )
58—13022
483. Tale of valor; a novel of the Lewis and
Clark Expedition. Garden City, N. Y., Dou-
bleday, 1958. 456 p. 58-7356 PZ3.F539Tal
484. Love and death; the complete stories of Vardis
Fisher. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
1959. 2ii p. 59—10666
485. Orphans in Gethsemane; a novel of the past
in the present. Denver, A. Swallow [1960]
987 p. (His The Testament of man [12] )
60-6113
486. Mountain man; a novel of male and female in
the early American West. New York, Mor-
row, 1965. 372 p. 65—22970
487. Flora, Joseph M. Vardis Fisher. New York,
Twayne Publishers [1965] 158 p. (Twayne's
United States authors series, 76)
65—12996 PS35H.I744Z63
Bibliographical notes: p. 145—148. Bibliography:
p. 149-152.
488. FRANCIS SCOTT KEY FITZGERALD,
1896—1940
No. 1425 in 1960 Guide.
489. Afternoon of an author, a selection of uncol-
lected stories and essays. With an introduc-
tion and notes by Arthur Mizener. Princeton,
Princeton University Library, 1957. 226 p. illus.
58-3 PS35U.I9A6 1957
490. Six tales of the jazz age, and other stories.
New York, Scribner [1960] 192 p.
60-6410 PZ3.F5754Si
Written between 1920 and 1924, these stories de-
pict the era Fitzgerald named.
491. The Pat Hobby stories. With an introduc-
tion by Arnold Gingrich. New York, Scrib-
ner [1962] 159 p. 62-16655 PZ3.F5754Pat
These 17 previously uncoil ected stories provide
a full-length portrait of one of Fitzgerald's tragi-
comic characters.
492. The Fitzgerald reader. Edited by Arthur
Mizener. New York, Scribner [1963] 509 p.
62-9632 PS35H.I9A6 1963
Presents the entire text of The Great Gatsby (no.
1428 in the 1960 Guide) and portions of Tender Is
the Night (included in The Portable F. Scott Fitz-
gerald, no. 1429 in the 1960 Guide) and The Last
Tycoon, a novel left unfinished at Fitzgerald's
death. A selection of stories, two novelettes, and
four essays complete the anthology.
493. Letters. Edited by Andrew Turnbull. New
York, Scribner [1963] xviii, 615 p. illus.
63-16755 PS35H.I9Z54
A selection.
494. Miller, James E. F. Scott Fitzgerald, his art
and his technique. [New York] New York
University Press, 1964. xiv, 173 p.
64-16900 PS35H.I9Z688
Bibliography: p. 163—165.
495. Mizener, Arthur. The far side of paradise,
a biography of F. Scott Fitzgerald. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1965. xxviii, 416 p. illus. (Sen-
try edition, 46) 65-19307 PS35H.I9Z7 1965
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 37
Bibliographical notes: p. [3531—399- Bibliogra-
phy: p. [400] -407.
A new edition of no. 1431 in the 1960 Guide, re-
vised to include material made available since 1951,
when the work was originally published.
496. Piper, Henry D. F. Scott Fitzgerald, a criti-
cal portrait. New York, Holt, Rinehart &
Winston [1965] 334 p. 65-14435 PS35 11.19282
Bibliographical notes: p. 301—323.
Focuses on Fitzgerald's career as an author and
sheds light on the position of the professional Ameri-
can writer during the twenties and thirties.
497. Trunbull, Andrew. Scott Fitzgerald. New
York, Scribner [1962] 364 p. illus.
62-9315 PS35H.I9Z88
A full-scale biography.
498. WALDO DAVID FRANK, 1889-
No. 1445 in 1960 Guide.
499. Bittner, William R. The novels of Waldo
Frank. Philadelphia, University of Pennsyl-
vania Press [1958] 222 p.
58-6449 PS35H.R258Z57 1958
Includes bibliography.
500. ROBERT FROST, 1874-1963
No. 1451 in 1960 Guide.
501. In the clearing. New York, Holt, Rinehart
& Winston [1962] 101 p.
62-11578 PS35ii.R94l5
Poems.
502. The letters of Robert Frost to Louis Unter-
meyer. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Win-
ston [1963] 388 p. 63-15383 PS35U.R94Z53
503. Selected letters. Edited by Lawrance Thomp-
son. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston
[1964] Ixiv, 645 p. illus.
64-10767 PS35H.R94Z52 1964
504. Cook, Reginald L. The dimensions of Robert
Frost. New York, Rinehart [1958] 241 p.
58-9351 PS35ii.R94Z585
A personal interpretation of Frost's poetry by a
close friend and director of the Bread Loaf School
of English at Middlebury, Vt.
505. Cox, James M., ed. Robert Frost; a collection
of critical essays. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.,
Prentice-Hall [1962] 205 p. (A Spectrum book:
Twentieth century views, S— TC— 3)
62-9283 PS35H.R94Z588
506. Lynen, John F. The pastoral art of Robert
Frost. New Haven, Yale Univeristy Press,
1960. 208 p. (Yale studies in English, v. 147)
60-7826 PS35H.R94Z77
Bibliography: p. 191—202.
507. Mertins, Marshall Louis. Robert Frost; life
and talks-walking. Norman, University of
Oklahoma Press [1965] 450 p. illus.
65-11238 PS35H.R94Z786
A portrait of Frost constructed from conversations
which occurred over a period of 30 years.
508. Sergeant, Elizabeth S. Robert Frost; the trial
by existence. New York, Holt, Rinehart &
Winston [1960] xxvii, 451 p. illus.
60—8792 PS35H.R94Z92
A biography with frequent quotations from
Frost's works.
509. ZONA GALE, 1874-1938
No. 1453 in 1960 Guide.
510. Simonson, Harold P. Zona Gale. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1962] 157 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 18)
62-13672 PS35I3-A34Z85
Bibliographical footnotes: p. 141—146. Bibliogra-
phy: p. 147-150.
511. ELLEN ANDERSON GHOLSON GLAS-
GOW, 1874-1945
No. 1460 in 1960 Guide.
512. Collected stories. Edited by Richard K.
Meeker. [Baton Rouge] Louisiana State
University Press [1963] 254 p.
63—13240
513. McDowell, Frederick P. W. Ellen Glasgow
and the ironic art of fiction. Madison, Uni-
versity of Wisconsin Press, 1960. 292 p.
60—9551 PS35I3-L34Z68
514. CAROLINE GORDON, 1895-
No. 1464 in 1960 Guide.
515. The malefactors. New York, Harcourt,
Brace [Ci956] 312 p.
56-6653
A novel.
38 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
516. Old Red, and other stories. New York,
Scribner [1963] 256 p.
63-17607 PZ3.G6525<Di
517. PAUL ELIOT GREEN, 1894-
No. 1473 in 1960 Guide.
518. The Confederacy; a symphonic outdoor drama
based on the life of General Robert E. Lee.
New York, S. French [1959] 123 p.
59-2086 PS35I3.R452C65
519. The Stephen Foster story, a symphonic drama
based on the life and music of the composer.
New York, French [1960] 107 p.
60-1922 PS35I3.R452S83
520. HORACE VICTOR GREGORY, 1898-
No. 1482 in 1960 Guide.
521. Collected poems. New York, Holt, Rinehart
& Winston [1964] 226 p.
64—14359 PS35I3.R558A6 1964
522. ALFRED BERTRAM GUTHRIE, 1901-
No. 1488 in 1960 Guide.
523. These thousand hills. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1956. 346 p.
56-13458 PZ3.G95876Th
A novel.
524. The blue hen's chick; a life in context. New
York, McGraw-Hill [1965] 261 p.
64-66368 PS35 13.1185575
Autobiography.
525. MOSS HART, 1904-1961
No. 1491 in 1960 Guide.
526. Act one, an autobiography. New York, Ran-
dom House [1959] 444 p.
59-10813 PN2287.H27A3
527. ERNEST HEMINGWAY, 1899-1961
No. 1494 in 1960 Guide.
528. A moveable feast. New York, Scribner
[1964] 2ii p. illus.
64-15441 PS35i5.E37Z525
Sketches of the author's life in Paris, 1921—26.
529. Baker, Carlos H., ed. Hemingway and his
critics, an international anthology. Edited,
with an introduction and a checklist of Hemingway
criticism. New York, Hill & Wang [1961] 298 p.
(American century series, AC36)
61-7565 PS35i5.E37Z577
Includes bibliography.
530. Baker, Carlos H. Hemingway: the writer as
artist. [3d ed.] Princeton, N. J., Princeton
University Press, 1963. xx, 379 p.
63-25656 PS35I5.E37Z58 1963
Bibliographical footnotes. "A working check-list
of Hemingway's prose, poetry, and journalism, with
notes": p. [3491—366.
A revised edition of no. 1502 in the 1960 Guide.
531. Hemingway, Leicester. My brother, Ernest
Hemingway. Cleveland, World Pub. Co.
[1962] 283 p. illus. 62-9043 PS35I5.E37Z62
532. Weeks, Robert P., ed. Hemingway; a col-
lection of critical essays. Englewood Cliffs,
N. J., Prentice-Hall [1962] 180 p. (Twentieth
century views. A Spectrum book, S— TC— 8)
62—13652 PS35I5-E37Z94
Bibliography: p. 179—180.
533. JOSEPH HERGESHEIMER, 1880-1954
No. 1506 in 1960 Guide.
534. Martin, Ronald E. The fiction of Joseph
Hergesheimer. Philadelphia, University of
Pennsylvania Press [1965] 288 p.
65—22570 PS35I5.E628Z74
Bibliography: p. [271]— 283.
535. ROBERT SILLIMAN HILLYER, 1895-
1961
No. 1515 in 1960 Guide.
536. The relic & other poems. New York, Knopf,
J957- 93 P- 57-10308 PS35i5.I69R4
537. Collected poems. New York, Knopf, 1961.
235 p. 61-8531 PS35i5.I69Ai7 1961
538. LANGSTON HUGHES, 1902-
No. 1521 in 1960 Guide.
539. I wonder as I wander; an autobiographical
journey. New York, Rinehart [1956] 405 p.
56-7254
540. Simple stakes a claim. New York, Rinehart
[1957] 191 p. 57-9628 PS35 1 511274854
Short stories.
54i- The Langston Hughes reader. New York,
G. Braziller, 1958. 501 p.
58-7871 PS35I5.U274A6 1958
542. Selected poems. Drawings by E. McKnight
Kauffer. New York, Knopf, 1959. 297 p.
58—10967 PS35 1 5.1)274 A6 1959
543. Ask your mama: 12 moods for jazz. New
York, Knopf, 1961. 92 p.
61—15039 PS35I5/U274A8
A poem.
544. Five plays. Edited, with an introduction, by
Webster Smalley. Bloomington, Indiana
University Press [1963] 258 p.
63-7169 PS35i5.U274Ai9 1963
CONTENTS. — Mulatto. — Soul gone home. — Little
Ham. — Simply heavenly. — Tambourines to glory.
545. Simple's Uncle Sam. New York, Hill &
Wang [1965] 1 80 p.
65-24717 PS35I5.U274S6
Short stories.
546. FEDERICO SCHARMEL IRIS, 1889-
No. 1530 in 1960 Guide.
547. The seven hills of the dove. With a foreword
by Padraic Colum. Boston, Bruce Humphries
[1957] 72 p. illus. 56-6558 PS35I7.R5S4
Poems.
548. A singing reed. [Chicago] R. F. Seymour
[1963] 64 p. 64-444 PS35I7-R5S5
Poems.
549. ROBINSON JEFFERS, 1887-1962
No. 1532 in 1960 Guide.
550. The beginning & the end, and other poems.
New York, Random House [1963] 74 p.
63-9347
551. Squires, James Radcliffe. The loyalties of
Robinson Jeffers. Ann Arbor, University of
Michigan Press [1956] 202 p.
56-11031 PS35I9.E27Z78
Bibliographical notes: p. 192-198. Bibliography:
p. 199-202.
552. MACKINLAY KANTOR, 1904-
No. 1541 in 1960 Guide.
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 39
553. Spirit Lake. Cleveland, World Pub. Co.
[1961] 957 p. 61-8164 PZ3.Ki42Sp
A novel.
554. OLIVER LA FARGE, 1901-1963
No. 1551 in 1960 Guide.
555. A pause in the desert; a collection of short
stories. Boston, Hough ton Mifflin, 1957.
235 p. 57-6381 PZ3.Li29Pau
556. The door in the wall, stories. With a fore-
word by William Maxwell. Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1965. 303 p.
64—24641
557. RING WILMER LARDNER, 1885-1933
No. 1554 in 1960 Guide.
558. Elder, Donald. Ring Lardner, a biography.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1956. 409 p.
illus. 56-7656 PS3523.A7Z65
559. SINCLAIR LEWIS, 1885-1951
No. 1559 in 1960 Guide.
560. Schorer, Mark. Sinclair Lewis, an American
life. New York, McGraw-Hill [1961] 867
p. illus. 61-12961 PS3523-E94Z78
Bibliography: p. 815—826.
561. Schorer, Mark, ed. Sinclair Lewis, a collec-
tion of critical essays. Englewood Cliffs,
N. J., Prentice-Hall [1962] 174 p. (Twentieth
century views. A Spectrum book, S-TC-6)
62—93 1 1
562. NICHOLAS VACHEL LINDSAY, 1879-
i93i
No. 1580 in 1960 Guide.
563. Ruggles, Eleanor. The west-going heart; a
life of Vachel Lindsay. New York, Norton
[1959] 448 p. 59~II337 PS3523.I58Z76
"Sources and acknowledgments": p. 437—441.
564. AMY LOWELL, 1874-1925
No. 1583 in 1960 Guide.
565. Gregory, Horace. Amy Lowell; portrait of
the poet in her time. Edinburgh, New York,
T. Nelson [1958] 213 p. illus.
58-1 1 247 PS3523.O88Z67
40 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
566. ARCHIE ALDMAcLEISH, 1892-
No. 1585 in 1960 Guide.
567. J. B., a play in verse. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1958. 153 p.
58-1148 PS3525.A27J2 1958
568. Poetry and experience. Cambridge, Riverside
Press, 1961 [Ci96o] 204 p.
60—12742 PNio3i.M33
Criticism.
569. JOHN PHILLIPS MARQUAND, 1893-
1960
No. 1589 in 1960 Guide.
570. Stopover: Tokyo. Boston, Little, Brown
[Ci957] 313 p. 57-5508 PZ3.B34466St
A novel.
571. Women and Thomas Harrow. Boston, Lit-
tle, Brown [1958] 497 p.
58-10691 PZ3.M34466Wo
A novel.
572. Gross, John J. John P. Marquand. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1963] 191 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 33)
62-19477 PS3525.A6695Z68
Bibliographical notes: p. 176-180. Bibliography:
p. 181-185.
573. HENRY LOUIS MENCKEN, i88o-I956
No. 1602 in 1960 Guide.
574. The bathtub hoax, and other blasts & bravos
from the Chicago tribune. Edited, with an
introduction and notes, by Robert McHugh. New
York, Knopf, 1958. xvi, 286 p.
58-12629 PS3525-E43B3
575. Letters. Selected and annotated by Guy J.
Forgue. With a personal note by Hamilton
Owens. New York, Knopf, 1961. xxxviii, 506,
xxii p. 61-12312 PS3525.E43Ai6 1961
576. The American scene, a reader. Selected and
edited and with an introduction and com-
mentary by Huntington Cairns. New York, Knopf,
1965. xxvii, 542 p.
65—11127 PS3525.E43A75 1965
Bibliography: p. 541—542.
577. HENRY MILLER, 1891-
No. 1611 in 1960 Guide.
578. Big Sur and the oranges of Hieronymus
Bosch. [New York, New Directions, 1957]
404 p. illus. 57-5542 PS3525-I5454B5
Partly autobiographical nonfiction.
579. The Henry Miller reader. Edited by Lawr-
ence Durrell. [New York] New Directions
['9591 397 P- 59-I5°22 pS3525-I5454A°" 1959
Bibliography: p. 395—397.
580. Stand still like the hummingbird. [Norfolk,
Conn.] New Directions [1962] 194 p.
62—10408 PS3525.I5454S75
Essays.
581. The rosy crucifixion. New York, Grove
Press [Ci965] 3 v.
65-23919 PZ3.M6i468Ro
Autobiographical.
CONTENTS.— Book i. Sexus.— Book 2. Plexus.
— Book 3. Nexus.
582. Letters to Anai's Nin. Edited and with an
introduction by Gunther Stuhlmann. New
York, Putnam [1965] xxvi, 356 p.
65-10859 PS3525.l5454Z57
Covers the period 1931—46.
583. MARGARET MITCHELL, 1900-1949
No. 1618 in 1960 Guide.
584. Farr, Finis. Margaret Mitchell of Adanta,
the author of Gone with the wind. New
York, Morrow, 1965. 244 p.
65-22974 PS3525.I972Z67
585. MARIANNE MOORE, 1887-
No. 1620 in 1960 Guide.
586. A Marianne Moore reader. New York, Vik-
ing Press, 1961. 301 p.
61-17409
587. Engel, Bernard F. Marianne Moore. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1964] 176 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 54)
63-20613 PS3525.O56i6Z65
"Notes and references": p. 165—166. Bibliogra-
phy: p. 167—169.
588. MERRILL MOORE, 1903-1957
No. 1623 in 1960 Guide.
589. The hill of Venus; poems of men and women
reacting to, puzzled by, and suffering from
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 4!
love, its fulfillments and its frustrations. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1957] 71 p.
57-4764 PS3525.O563H5
590. Poems of American life. With an introduc-
tion by Louis Untermeyer. New York, Philo-
sophical Library [1958] 275 p.
58-3315 PS3525.0563P63
591. OGDEN NASH, 1902-
No. 1629 in 1960 Guide.
592. You can't get there from here. Drawings by
Maurice Sendak. Boston, Little, Brown
[1957] 190 p. 57-7838 PS3527.A637Y6
Poems.
593. Everyone but thee and me. Illustrated by
John Alcorn. Boston, Little, Brown [1962]
60 1. Falk, Doris V. Eugene O'Neill and the
tragic tension; an interpretive study of the
plays. New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University
Press, 1958. 211 p. 58—10830 PS3529.N5Z64
A combination of psychological analysis and liter-
ary criticism.
602. Gassner, John, ed. O'Neill; a collection of
critical essays. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.,
Prentice-Hall [1964] 180 p. (A Spectrum book.
Twentieth century views, S— TC— 39)
64-19679 PS3529.N5Z648
Bibliography: p. 177—180.
603. Gelb, Arthur, and Barbara Gelb. O'Neill.
New York, Harper [1962] 970 p. illus.
61-13602 PS3529.N5Z653
A biography.
171 p.
Poems.
62-16957 PS3527.A637E85 604. Raleigh, John H. The plays of Eugene
O'Neill. With a preface by Harry T. Moore.
Carbondale, Southern Illinois University Press
[1965] xvi, 304 p. (Crosscurrents: modern cri-
tiques) 65-12387 PS3529.N5Z79
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. [286] -297).
594. Marriage lines; notes of a student husband.
Illustrated by Isadore Seltzer. Boston, Little,
Brown [1964] 108 p.
64—17471 PS3527.A637M35
Poems.
595. ROBERT GRUNTAL NATHAN, 1894-
No. 1635 in 1960 Guide.
596. The Mallot diaries. New York, Knopf,
1965. 174 p. 65-17384 PZ3.Ni95Mal
A novel.
597. EUGENE GLADSTONE O'NEILL, 1888-
'953
No. 1647 in 1960 Guide.
598. Long day's journey into night. New Haven,
Yale University Press, 1956 [Ci955] 176 p.
56-5944 PS3529.N5L6
A play.
599. A touch of the poet. New Haven, Yale
University Press, 1957. 182 p.
57-6342 PS3529.N5T6 1957
A play.
600. Cargill, Oscar, Nathan Bryllion Fagin, and
William J. Fisher, eds. O'Neill and his
plays; four decades of criticism. [New York] New
York University Press, 1961. 528 p.
61-17631 PS3529.N5Z576
Bibliography: p. 487—517.
605. KATHERINE ANNE PORTER, 1894-
No. 1659 in 1960 Guide.
606. Ship of fools. Boston, Little, Brown [1962]
497 p. 62—9557 PZ3-P82i5Sh
A novel.
607. Collected stories. New York, Harcourt, Brace
& World [1965] 495 p.
65-14706
608. Hendrick, George. Katherine Anne Porter.
New York, Twayne Publishers [1965] 176
p. (Twayne's United States authors series, 90)
65-18909 PS353I.O752Z68
Bibliographical notes: p. 156—160. Bibliography:
p. 161—171.
609. Nance, William L. Katherine Anne Porter
& the art of rejection. Chapel Hill, Universi-
ty of North Carolina Press [1964] 258 p.
64—22525 PS353I.O752Z79 1964
Bibliography: p. [2511—253.
610. EZRA LOOMIS POUND, 1885-
No. 1664 in 1960 Guide.
42 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
611. Section: rock drill, 85—95 de los cantares.
[New York, J. Laughlin, 1956] 107 p. (A
New Directions book)
56-4113 PS353i.O8aS4 1956
Half tide: Cantos 85—95 °f Ezra Pound.
612. Thrones; 96—109 de los cantares. [New
York] New Directions [1959] 126 p.
59-13172 PS353I.O82T5
Half title: Cantos 96—709 of Ezra Pound.
613. Translations. With an introduction by Hugh
Kenner. [Enl. ed. Norfolk, Conn.] New
Directions [1963] 448 p. (A New Directions
paperbook, 145) 64-1552 PN6o2O.P6 1963
An updated edition of no. 1667 in the 1960
Guide. Includes some original poems, with trans-
lations on opposite pages.
614. Da vie, Donald. Ezra Pound: poet as sculp-
tor. New York, Oxford University Press,
1964. 261 p. 64-24860 PS353I.O82Z58
Bibliographical footnotes.
A critical discussion of Pound's works.
615. Dekker, George. The cantos of Ezra Pound,
a critical study. New York, Barnes & Noble
[1963] xvi, 207 p.
63-23827 PS353 1. 0826284 1963
First published in 1963 under title: Sailing After
Knowledge.
Bibliographical footnotes.
6 1 6. Norman, Charles. Ezra Pound. New York,
Macmillan, 1960. 493 p.
60-13141 PS353 1. 0827785
Notes: p. 469—477,
A critical biography.
617. Stock, Noel. Poet in exile: Ezra Pound.
New York, Barnes & Noble [1964] 273 p.
64-4258 PS353I.O82Z84
Bibliography: p. 261—266.
6 1 8. JOHN CROWE RANSOM, 1 888-
No. 1675 in 1960 Guide.
619. Selected poems. [2d] rev. and enl. ed. New
York, Knopf, 1963. no p.
63-12791 PS3535.A635A6 1963
A revised edition of Selected Poems (1945), men-
tioned in no. 1679 in the 1960 Guide.
620. MARJORIE KINNAN RAWLINGS, 1896-
'954
No. 1680 in 1960 Guide.
621. The Marjorie Rawlings reader. Selected and
edited with an introduction by Julia Scribner
Bingham. New York, Scribner [1956] 504 p.
56—10198 PS3535.A845A6 1956
622. EUGENE MANLOVE RHODES, 1869-
'934
No. 1686 in 1960 Guide.
623. A Bar Cross man; the life & personal writings
of Eugene Manlove Rhodes [by] W. H.
Hutchinson. Norman, University of Oklahoma
Press [1956] xix, 432 p. illus.
56-6001 PS3535.H68Z54
"Check list of Eugene Manlove Rhodes' writing":
p. 392-407.
624. ELMER L. RICE, 1892-
No. 1688 in 1960 Guide.
625. Cue for passion, a play in five scenes. New
York, Dramatists Play Service [1959] 121 p.
illus. 59—4693 PS3535-I224C8
626. Minority report, an autobiography. New
York, Simon & Schuster, 1963. 473 p.
63-15364 PS3535.I224Z5
627. Hogan, Robert G. The independence of
Elmer Rice. With a preface by Harry T.
Moore. Carbondale, Southern Illinois University
Press [1965] 164 p. (Crosscurrents: modern cri-
tiques) 65-16535 PS3535.I224Z68
Bibliography: p. [155]— 157.
628. CONRAD MICHAEL RICHTER, 1890-
No. 1691 in 1960 Guide.
629. The lady. New York, Knopf, 1957. 191 p.
57—5660 PZ3-R4i7Lad
A novel.
630. The waters of Kronos. New York, Knopf,
1960. 175 p. 60-7297 PZ3-R4i7Wat
A novel.
631. ELIZABETH MADOX ROBERTS, 1886-
1941
No. 1697 in 1960 Guide.
632. McDowell, Frederick P. W. Elizabeth Madox
Roberts. New York, Twayne Publishers
[1963] 176 p. (Twayne 's United States authors
series, 38) 63—10955
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 43
Bibliographical notes: p. 164-168. Bibliography:
p. 169—172.
633. Rovit, Earl H. Herald to chaos; the novels of
Elizabeth Madox Roberts. [Lexington] Uni-
versity of Kentucky Press [1960] i 80 p.
60—13722 PS3535.Oi72Z8
Bibliography: p. [165] -169. Bibliographical
notes: p. [171]- 178.
634. EDWIN ARLINGTON ROBINSON,
1869-1935
No. 1713 in 1960 Guide.
635. Selected early poems and letters. Edited by
Charles T. Davis. New York, Holt, Rinehart
& Winston [Ci96o] 238 p. (Rinehart editions,
107) 60—15097 PS3535-O25A6 1960
636. Selected poems. Edited by Morton Dauwen
Zabel. With an introduction by James
Dickey. New York, Macmillan [1965] xxviii,
257 P- 65-23550 PS3535.O25A6 1965
"Editor's note and bibliography": p. 247—254.
637. Smith, Chard P. Where the light falls; a
portrait of Edwin Arlington Robinson. New
York, Macmillan [1965] xx, 420 p. illus.
65-11479 PS3535.025Z85
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(P- 39I-4°8)-
638. ARCHIBALD HAMILTON RUTLEDGE,
1883-
No. 1724 in 1960 Guide.
639. Santee paradise. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill
Co. [1956] 232 p.
56—13274 F279.H25R82
Autobiographical.
640. Deep river, the complete poems. Columbia,
S.C., R. L. Bryan Co. [1960] 635 p.
61—280 PS3535.U87Ai7 1960
641. CARL SANDBURG, 1878-
No. 1727 in 1960 Guide.
642. The Sandburg range. New York, Harcourt,
Brace [1957] 459 p. illus.
57-12373 PS3537.A6i8A6 1957
Selections from the author's works.
643. Honey and salt. New York, Harcourt, Brace
& World [1963] in p.
63-9836 PS3537.A6i8H63
Poems.
644. Crowder, Richard. Carl Sandburg. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1964] 176 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 47)
63-20606 PS3537.A6i8Z555
Bibliographical notes: p. 159—162. Bibliography:
p. 163—168.
645. ROBERT EMMET SHERWOOD, 1896-
'955
No. 1749 in 1960 Guide.
646. Brown, John Mason. The worlds of Robert
E. Sherwood; mirror to his times, 1896—1939.
New York, Harper & Row [1965] xviii, 409 p.
illus. 65—20424 PS3537.H825Z63
"Works of Robert E. Sherwood": p. 387—390.
647. Shuman, Robert Baird. Robert E. Sherwood.
New York, Twayne Publishers [1964] 160
p. (Twayne's United States authors series, 58)
64-13954 PS3537.H825Z87
Bibliographical notes: p. 147—150. Bibliography:
p. 151-156.
648. UPTON BEALL SINCLAIR, 1878-
No. 1754 in 1960 Guide.
649. My lifetime in letters. Columbia, University
of Missouri Press [1960] xxi, 412 p.
59-14141
650. Autobiography. New York, Harcourt, Brace
& World [1962] 342 p. illus.
62-19592
651. LILLIAN EUGENIA SMITH, 1897-
No. 1759 in 1960 Guide.
652. One hour. New York, Harcourt, Brace
[1959] 440 p. 57-5299 PZ3-S6536On
A novel.
653. GERTRUDE STEIN, 1874-1946
No. 1766 in 1960 Guide.
654. The Yale edition of the unpublished writings
of Gertrude Stein. [Under the general edi-
torship of Carl Van Vechten. New Haven, Yale
University Press, 1951—58] 8 v.
51-6628 PS3537/T323A6
CONTENTS. — v. i. Two: Gertrude Stein and her
44 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
brother, and other early portraits, 1908—12. — v. 2.
Mrs. Reynolds, and five earlier novelettes. — v. 3.
Bee time vine, and other pieces, 1913—1927. — v. 4.
As fine as Melanctha, 1914—1930. — v. 5. Painted
lace, and other pieces, 1914—1937. — v. 6. Stanzas
in meditation, and other poems, 1929—1933. — v. 7.
Alphabets and birthdays. — v. 8. A novel of thank
you.
The first volume of this edition is no. 1772 in the
1960 Guide.
655. Brinnin, John M. The third rose; Gertrude
Stein and her world. Boston, Litde, Brown
[1959] 427 p. illus. 59-13732 PS3537.T323Z57
"A selected bibliography of the works of Ger-
trude Stein": p. 411—413.
656. Reid, Benjamin L. Art by subtraction; a dis-
senting opinion of Gertrude Stein. Norman,
University of Oklahoma Press [1958] 224 p. illus.
58-6852 PS3537.T323Z79
Bibliography: p. 209—216.
657. JOHN STEINBECK, 1902-
No. 1775 in 1960 Guide.
658. Travels with Charley; in search of America.
New York, Viking Press [1962] 246 p.
62—12359 £169.882
A travel account.
659. French, Warren G., ed. A companion to The
f rapes of wrath. New York, Viking Press
. ._ . 243 P- 63-17069 PS3537/T3234G85
Bibliography: p. 229—235.
660. Lisca, Peter. The wide world of John Stein-
beck. New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers Uni-
versity Press, 1958. 326 p.
57-10965 PC3537.T3234Z72
Includes bibliography.
A biographical and critical study which analyzes
symbolism, style, and structure in Steinbeck's works.
661. WALLACE STEVENS, 1879-1955
No. 1782 in 1960 Guide.
662. Opus posthumous. Edited, with an introduc-
tion, by Samuel French Morse. New York,
Knopf, 1957. 300 p.
57-7548 PS3537.T4753A6 1957
Poems, plays, and prose.
adelphia, Lippincott [1962] 287 p.
62-10543 t PS3537-T4753Z62
"For further reading: a bibliography of books
and articles about Wallace Stevens and selected re-
views of his work": p. 271—287.
664. Fuchs, Daniel. The comic spirit of Wallace
Stevens. Durham, N. C., Duke University
Press, 1963. 201 p. 63—9008 PS3537/T4753Z64
Bibliography: p. [1931—196.
665. Pearce, Roy Harvey, and Joseph Hillis Miller,
eds. The act of the mind, essays on the poetry
of Wallace Stevens. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins
Press [1965] 287 p.
65-11666 PS3537.T4753Z75
Bibliographical footnotes.
666. Riddel, Joseph N. The clairvoyant eye; the
poetry and poetics of Wallace Stevens. Baton
Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1965. 308
p. 65-24679 PS3537.T4753Z76
"Index to Stevens tides": p. 299—303.
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 279-298).
667. RUTH SUCKOW, 1892-1960
No. 1796 in 1960 Guide.
668. The John Wood case, a novel. New York,
Viking Press [1959] 314 p.
59—8615
669. NEWTON BOOTH TARKINGTON,
1869—1946
No. 1802 in 1960 Guide.
670. On plays, playwrights, and playgoers; selec-
tions from the letters of Booth Tarkington to
George C. Tyler and John Peter Toohey, 1918—
1925. Edited by Alan S. Downer. Princeton,
N. J., Princeton University Library, 1959. 100 p.
illus. (Occasional publications sponsored by the
Friends of the Princeton Library)
59-15575 PS2973.A38
67 1 . ALLEN T ATE, 1 899-
No. 1809 in 1960 Guide.
672. Collected essays. Denver, A. Swallow [1959]
578 p. 59-i5664 PN37.T27
663. Brown, Ashley, and Robert S. Haller, eds.
The achievement of Wallace Stevens. Phil-
673. Poems. New York, Scribner, 1960. 224 p.
62-3826 PS3539-A74P56
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 45
674. Meiners, R. K. The last alternatives; a study
of the works of Allen Tate. Denver, A.
Swallow [1963] 2 17 p.
63-14649 PS3539.A74Z7
Bibliography: p. 207—214.
675. S AR A TEASD ALE, 1884-1933
No. 1813 in 1960 Guide.
676. Carpenter, Margaret H. Sara Teasdale, a bi-
ography. New York, Schulte Pub. Co., 1960.
377 p. illus. 60-9646
677. JAMES GROVER THURBER, 1894-1961
No. 1815 in 1960 Guide.
678. Alarms and diversions. New York, Harper
[1957] 367 p. illus.
57-8181 PS3539.H94A7
Essays, parables, stories, and drawings, some of
which appear here in book form for the first time.
679. The years with Ross. With drawings by the
author. Boston, Little, Brown [1959] 310 p.
58-11443 PN4874.R65T5
A biography which describes the close personal
and working relationships between the author and
Harold Ross, founding editor of The New Yorker.
680. Lanterns & lances. New York, Harper
[1961] 215 p. illus.
61—6444 PS3539-H94L3
Selected short pieces.
68 1. Morsberger, Robert E. James Thurber. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1964] 224 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 62)
64-13958 PS3539.H94Z77
Bibliographical notes: p. 200—206. Bibliography:
p. 207—218.
682. MARK ALBERT VAN DOREN, 1894-
No. 1823 in 1960 Guide.
683. Autobiography. New York, Harcourt, Brace
[1958] 371 p. illus.
58-10897 PS3543.A557Z52
684. The last days of Lincoln, a play in six scenes.
New York, Hill & Wang, 1959. 152 p.
59-6708 PS3543.A557L27
685. The happy critic, and other essays. New
York, Hill & Wang [1961] 177 p.
61-14476 PS3543.A557H3
686. Collected stories. New York, Hill & Wang
[1962-65] 2 v. 62-15221 PZ3.V28686Co
687. Collected and new poems, 1924—1963. New
York, Hill & Wang [1963] 615 p.
63-18480 PS3543.A557Ai7 1963
688. Narrative poems. New York, Hill & Wang
[1964! 335 P- 64-24238 PS3543.A557N3
CONTENTS. — Jonathan Gentry. — A winter diary.
— The eyes. — The Mayfield deer. — Mortal sum-
mer. — Anger in the room.
689. CARL VAN VECHTEN, 1880-1964
No. 1828 in 1960 Guide.
690. Lueders, Edward G. Carl Van Vechten,
New York, Twayne Publishers [1965] 158
p. (Twayne's United States authors series, 74)
64—20724 PS3543-A653Z79
Bibliographical notes: p. 143—147. Bibliography:
p. 148—152.
691. GLENWAY WESCOTT, 1901-
No. 1839 in 1960 Guide.
692. Rueckert, William H. Glenway Wescott.
New York, Twayne Publishers [1965] 174
p. (Twayne's United States authors series, 87)
65-18906 PS3545.E827Z86
Bibliographical notes: p. 157—162. Bibliography:
p. 165—171.
693. NATHANAEL WEST, 1902-1940
No. 1842 in 1960 Guide.
694. Complete works. New York, Farrar, Straus
& Cudahy [1957] 421 p.
57-6259 PS3545.E8334 1957
695. Light, James F. Nathanael West; [an in-
terpretative study. Evanston, 111., Northwest-
ern University Press, 1961] 220 p.
61-8746 PS3545.S8334Z75
696. EDITH NEWBOLD JONES WHARTON,
1862—1937
No. 1845 in 1960 Guide.
697. Best short stories. Edited, with an introduc-
tion by Wayne Andrews. New York, Scrib-
ner [1958] 292 p. 58—10825
698. Bell, Millicent. Edith Wharton & Henry
James, the story of their friendship. New
46 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
York, G. Braziller [1965] 384 p.
65—10196
Includes bibliographical references.
699. Howe, Irving, ed. Edith Wharton; a collec-
tion of critical essays. Englewood Cliffs,
N. J., Prentice-Hall [1962] 181 p. (A Spectrum
book. Twentieth century views, S— TC— 20)
63-7990
700. Lyde, Marilyn J. Edith Wharton: conven-
tion and morality in the work of a novelist.
Norman, University of Oklahoma Press [1959]
194 p. illus. 59-7965
701. JOHN HALL WHEELOCK, 1886-
No. 1857 in 1960 Guide.
702. The gardener, and other poems. New York,
Scribner [1961] 94 p.
61-11582 PS3545.H33G3
703. ELWYN BROOKS WHITE, 1899-
No. 1859 in 1960 Guide.
704. The points of my compass; letters from the
East, the West, the North, the South. New
York, Harper & Row [1962] 240 p.
62-15724 PS3545.H5i87P6
Contains articles originally published in The New
Yorker and an essay which first appeared in The
Yale Review.
705. THORNTON NIVEN WILDER, 1897-
No. 1864 in 1960 Guide.
706. Burbank, Rex J. Thornton Wilder. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1961] 156 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 5)
61-9854 PS3545.I345Z57
Bibliographical notes: p. 146—149. Bibliography:
P-
708. Paterson. [New York, New Directions,
1946-58] 5 v. 46-5910 PS3545.I544P3
The fifth volume completes this poem, the first
four volumes of which are no. 1876 in the 1960
Guide.
709. Pictures from Brueghel, and other poems;
including The desert music & Journey to love.
[Norfolk, Conn., J. Laughlin, 1962] 184 p. (A
New Directions paperbook, 118)
62—10410 PS3545.I544P45
710. The collected later poems. Rev. ed. [New
York] New Directions [1963] 276 p.
62-19398 PS3545.l544Ai7 1963
707. WILLIAM CARLOS WILLIAMS, 1883-
1963
No. 1872 in 1960 Guide.
711. Selected letters. Edited, with an introduction,
by John C. Thirlwall. New York, McDowell,
Obolensky [1957] 347 p.
57-121 12 PS3545.I544Z53
712. THOMAS WOLFE, 1900-1938
No. 1887 in 1960 Guide.
713. Short novels. Edited, with an introduction
and notes, by C. Hugh Holman. New York,
Scribner [1961] xx, 323 p.
61-7212 PZ3.W83i4Sh
CONTENTS. — A portrait of Bascom Hawke. —
The web of earth. — No door. — "I have a thing to
tell you." — The party at Jack's.
714. Kennedy, Richard S. The window of mem-
ory; the literary career of Thomas Wolfe,
Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press
[1962] 461 p. 62—16110 PS3545.O337Z737
Includes bibliography.
715. Nowell, Elizabeth. Thomas Wolfe, a biog-
raphy. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1960.
456 p. illus. 60—8689 PS3545.O337Z74
716. MARY A ZATURENSKA, 1902-
No. 1905 in 1960 Guide.
717. Collected poems. New York, Viking Press
[1965] 210 p.
65-23955 PS3549.A77Ai7 1965
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 47
F. The Second World War and the Atomic Age (1940-1965)
718. JAMES AGEE, 1909-1955
No. 1907 in 1960 Guide.
719. A death in the family. New York, McDow-
ell, Obolensky [1957] 339 p.
57-12114
A novel.
720. Letters of James Agee to Father Flye. New
York, G. Braziller, 1962. 235 p.
62—16270 PS35OI.G35Z54 i962
721. EDWARD FRANKLIN ALBEE, 1928-
Albee's first one-act plays brought him im-
mediate recognition as a spokesman for the symbolic
and satiric theater of the absurd. His major themes,
often veiled in obscure yet potent symbolism, are
self-deception, hypocrisy, and alienation. Both The
Zoo Story and The Death of Bessie Smith had their
premieres in Berlin; The Sandbox was first pro-
duced in New York. Full length, three-act dra-
mas by Albee, including adaptations of fictional
works by other writers, have appeared regularly on
the Broadway stage.
722. The zoo story; The death of Bessie Smith;
The sandbox; three plays, introduced by the
author. New York, Coward-McCann [1960]
158 p. 60-12478 PS35oi.Li78Z3
723. The American dream, a play. New York,
Coward-McCann [1961] 93 p. [Coward-
McCann contemporary drama, CM-6]
61—15067
724. Who's afraid of Virginia Woolf? A play.
New York, Atheneum, 1962. 242 p.
62-17691
725. The play, The ballad of the sad cafe. Carson
McCullers' novella adapted to the stage by
Edward Albee. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1963.
150 p. 63-23325
726. Tiny Alice, a play. New York, Atheneum,
1965. 190 p. 65-15904
728. The great world and Timothy Colt. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1956. 285 p.
56-9384 PZ3.A898Gr
A novel.
729. Venus in Sparta. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1958. 280 p. 58-9052 PZ3.A898Ve
A novel.
730. Pursuit of the prodigal. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1959. 292 p.
59-9633 PZ3.A898Pu
A novel.
731. The house of five talents. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1960. 369 p.
60-8761 PZ3.A898Ho
A novel.
732. Portrait in brownstone. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1962. 371 p.
62-8116 PZ3.A898Po
A novel.
733. Powers of attorney. Boston, Houghton Miff-
lin, 1963. 280 p. 63—9077 PZ3.A898Pq
Short stories.
734. The rector of Justin. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1964. 341 p.
64-14523 PZ3.A898Re
A novel.
735. JAMES BALDWIN, 1924-
No. 1914 in 1960 Guide.
736. Giovanni's room, a novel. New York, Dial
Press, 1956. 248 p. 56-12125 PZ4.Bi8Gi
737. Another country. New York, Dial Press,
1962. 436 p. 61-7367 PZ4.Bi8An2
A novel.
738. Blues for Mister Charlie, a play. New York,
Dial Press, 1964. 121 p.
64-15223
727. LOUIS AUCHINCLOSS, 1917-
No. 1909 in 1960 Guide.
739. Going to meet the man. New York, Dial
Press, 1965. 249 p.
65-15331
Short stories.
/ A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
CONTENTS.— The rockpile.— The outing.— The
man child. — Previous condition. — Sonny's blues. —
This morning, this evening, so soon. — Come out
the wilderness.— Going to meet the man.
740. SHIRLEY FRANCES BARKER, 1911-1965
No. 1916 in 1960 Guide.
741. Swear by Apollo. [New York] Random
House [1958] 306 p. illus.
58-5282 PZ3.B2457Sw
A novel.
742. The last gentleman. New York, Random
House [1960] 341 p.
60-6377 PZ3.B2457Las
A novel.
743. Strange wives. New York, Crown Publish-
ers [1963] 377 p.
63—12062 PZ3. 6245781
A novel.
744. JOHN SIMMONS BARTH, 1930-
Barth's native Maryland, past or present, is
often chosen as the setting for his fiction, which has
been received with fascination, confusion, admira-
tion, and occasional distaste. His curious plots,
filled with digressions and sparked by Rabelaisian
humor, are considered unique and undeniably the
product of a masterful imagination. Earth's writ-
ing is concerned with matters of choice, value, and
meaning in man's life, even when it takes the form
of parody.
745. The floating opera. New York, Appleton-
Century-Crofts [1956] 280 p.
56-10340 PZ4.B284F1
A novel.
746. The end of the road. Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1958. 230 p.
58-9381 PZ4.B284En
A novel.
747. The sot-weed factor. Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1960. 806 p.
60-9467
A novel.
748. SAUL BELLOW, 1915-
No. 1921 in 1960 Guide.
749. Seize the day, with three short stories and a
one-act play. New York, Viking Press, 1956.
211 p. 56-10686 PS3503.E4488S4
Seize the Day is a brief novel previously published
in Partisan Review.
750. Henderson, the rain king; a novel. New
York, Viking Press, 1959. 341 p.
59-5649
751. Herzog. New York, Viking Press [1964]
341 p. 64-19794 PZ3.B4i937Hh
A novel.
752. The last analysis, a play. New York, Viking
Press [1965] 118 p.
65-16904 PS3503.E4488L3
753. JOHN BERRYMAN, 1914-
No. 1923 in 1960 Guide.
754. Homage to Mistress Bradstreet. With pic-
tures by Ben Shahn. New York, Farrar,
Straus & Cudahy [1956] 1 v. (unpaged)
56-6168 PS3503.E744H6
A poem.
755- 77 dream songs. New York, Farrar, Straus
[1964] 84 p. 64—14107 PS35O3-E744S4
Poems.
756. ELIZABETH BISHOP, 1911-
No. 1925 in 1960 Guide.
757. Questions of travel. New York, Farrar,
Straus & Giroux [1965] 95 p.
65-22553 PS3503.l785Q4
Poems.
758. PAUL FREDERIC BOWLES, 1910-
No. 1927 in 1960 Guide.
759. A hundred camels in the courtyard. [San
Francisco] City Lights Books [1962] 63 p.
62-51513 PZ3.B6826Hu
Short stories.
760. RAY BRADBURY, 1920-
No. 1932 in 1960 Guide.
761. Dandelion wine, a novel. Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1957. 281 p.
57—7824
762. Something wicked this way comes, a novel.
New York, Simon & Schuster, 1962. 317 p.
62—9604 1^3.67245380
763. The vintage Bradbury; Ray Bradbury's own
selection of his best stories. With an intro-
duction by Gilbert Highet. New York, Vintage
Books [1965] 329 p. 65-18936 PZ3.B72453Vi
764. GWENDOLYN BROOKS, 1917-
No. 1937 in 1960 Guide.
765. The bean eaters. New York, Harper [1960]
71 p. 60-7521 PS3503.R7244B4
Poems.
766. Selected poems. New York, Harper & Row
[1963] 127 p.
63-16503 PS3503.R7244A6 1963
767. WILLIAM SEWARD BURROUGHS,
1914-
Burroughs discarded the conventional style of his
first novel, Junkie (1953), to adopt the radical sur-
realistic approach which has characterized his
subsequent work. He achieved international promi-
nence as a result of the controversy surrounding
The Nafed Lunch, a novel first published in Paris
in 1959. This account of the protagonist's years as
a drug addict has been condemned as the vilest
pornography by some critics and acclaimed as the
greatest innovation in recent literature by others.
The Soft Machine (1961) and Nova Express (1964)
continued Burrough's freestyle approach to the
novel, while The Yage Letters (1963) established
his affinity with the beat writers.
768. Naked lunch. New York, Grove Press
[i962,ci959] 255 p.
60-11097
769. The soft machine. Paris, Olympia Press
[1961] 181 p. (The Traveller's companion
series, no. 88) 64-5780
770. The yage letters [by] William Burroughs &
Allen Ginsberg. [San Francisco] City
Lights Books [Ci963] 68 p. illus.
63-12222 PS3552.U75Y3
CONTENTS.— In search of yage, 1953: William
Burroughs to Allen Ginsberg.— Seven years later,
1960: Allen Ginsberg to William Burroughs. Bur-
roughs' reply.— Epilogue, 1963.
771. Nova express. New York, Grove Press
[1964] 187 p. 64-10597
A novel.
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 49
772. TRUMAN CAPOTE, 1924-
No. 1944 in 1960 Guide.
773. Breakfast at Tiffany's, a short novel and three
stories. New York, Random House [1958]
179 p. 58-10956 PZ3.Ci724Br
774. JOHN CHEEVER, 1912-
A novelist and prolific writer of stories,
Cheever observes contemporary urban and suburban
life with facility and sophisticated style. He chal-
lenges the standards of a materialistic society in
cynical, melancholy, and sometimes humorous
tones. Early collections of his stories, which have
appeared in Esquire and The New Yorker, include
The Way Some People Live (1943) and The Enor-
mous Radio (1953). Cheever won a National Book
Award in 1958 for his first novel, The Wapshot
Chronicle. The further adventures of this New
England family were traced in The Wapshot Scan-
dal, a sequel published in 1964.
775. The Wapshot chronicle. New York, Harper
[1957] 307 p. 56-11100 PZ3.C3983Wap
A novel.
776. The housebreaker of Shady Hill, and other
stories. New York, Harper [1958] 185 p.
58-11397
777. Some people, places, and things that will not
appear in my next novel. New York, Harper
[1961] 175 p. 61-7597 PZ3.C3983So
Short stories.
778. The brigadier and the golf widow. New
York, Harper & Row [1964] 275 p.
64—20543 PZ3.C3983Br
Short stories.
779. The Wapshot scandal. New York, Harper
& Row [Ci964] 309 p.
63-20301 PZ3.C3983War
A novel.
780. JOHN CIARDI, 1916-
No. 1948 in 1960 Guide.
781. I marry you; a sheaf of love poems. New
Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers University Press,
1958. 44 p. 58-9102 PS3505.I27I2
782. 39 poems. New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers
University Press, 1959. 86 p.
59-15628 PS3505.I27T5
50 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
783. In the stoneworks. New Brunswick, N.J.,
Rutgers University Press [1961] 83 p.
61—10256 PS35O5.Ia7l5
Poems.
784. In fact. New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers Uni-
versity Press [1962] 68 p.
62-18947 PS35<>5.l27l48
Poems.
785. Dialogue with an audience. Philadelphia,
Lippincott [1963] 316 p.
63—15440 PNio64.C5
All but two of the articles collected here appeared
in The Saturday Review.
786. Person to person. New Brunswick, N.J.,
Rutgers University Press [1964] 83 p.
64-18873 PS3505.I27P4
Poems.
787. AUGUST WILLIAM DERLETH, 1900-
No. 1959 in 1960 Guide.
788. The house on the mound. New York, Duell,
Sloan & Pearce [1958] 335 p.
58-5563 PZ3.D445Hq
This novel is a sequel to Bright Journey, no. 1962
in the 1960 Guide.
789. The hills stand watch. New York, Duell,
Sloan & Pearce [1960] 337 p.
60—5450 PZ3-D445Hi
A novel.
790. West of morning. Francestown, N.H., Gold-
en Quill Press [1960] 64 p.
60-16459 PS3507.E69W4
Poems.
791. Walden West. Woodcuts by Grisha Dot-
zenko. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce
[1961] 262 p. 61-14127 PS3507.E69W3
Vignettes of village life in Sac Prairie, Wis.
792. Wisconsin in their bones. New York, Duell,
Sloan & Pearce [1961] .
61-6918 PZ3.D445Wk
Short stories.
793. Countryman's journal. Illustrated by Grisha
Dotzenko. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce
[1963] 215 p. 63-16819
Descriptions of life in Sac Prairie, Wis.
794. The shadow in the glass. New York, Duell,
Sloan & Pearce [1963] 471 p.
A novel.
62-8520
795. Wisconsin country; a Sac Prairie journal.
With decorations by Frank Utpatel. New
York, Candlelight Press, 1965. 232 p. illus.
65-4011 F589.P83D4
796. JAMES LAFAYETTE DICKEY, 1923-
Dickey is a personal poet who looks into
ordinary experience to re-create incidents from life.
Free-verse images of his youth in the South, motor-
cycle-riding, World War II, Korea, hunting, and
other aspects of his past are used to create what he
calls a "stripped kind of simplicity in verse in order
to make effective statements." Dickey's first col-
lection of poetry, "Into the Stone, and Other Poems,"
was published in Poets of Today, v. 7 (New York,
Scribner, [1960]), p. 33—92, and he has since en-
joyed an unusually successful career. The Wesleyan
University Press has published several volumes of
his poetry, the most acclaimed of which is Euc\-
dancer's Choice (1965). Dickey is also noted for
his strong opinions as a critic.
797. Drowning with others, poems. Middletown,
Conn., Wesleyan University Press [1962]
96 p. 62-10570 PS3507-I268D7
798. Helmets, poems. Middletown, Conn., Wes-
leyan University Press [1964] 93 p.
64-13610 PS3507.I268H4
799. The suspect in poetry. [Madison, Minn.]
Sixties Press, 1964. 120 p.
62-21968 PS324.D5
Essays on recent poetry and poets.
800. Buckdancer's choice, poems. Middletown,
Conn., Wesleyan University Press [1965]
79 p. (The Wesleyan poetry program)
65-21079 PS3507.I268B8
801. RALPH ELLISON, 1914-
No. 1966 in 1960 Guide.
802. Shadow and act. New York, Random House
[1964] xxii, 317 p.
64-18928 PSi53.N5E4 1964
Essays.
803. PAUL HAMILTON ENGLE, 1908-
No. 1968 in 1960 Guide.
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 5!
804. For the Iowa dead. [Iowa City] State Uni-
versity of Iowa, 1956. [24] p.
56—27481 PS3509-N44F6
Poems.
805. Poems in praise. New York, Random House
[J959] 97 P- 59—10822 PS3509.N44P6
806. A woman unashamed, and other poems.
New York, Random House [1965] 109 p.
65-11277 PS3509.N44W53
807. HOWARD MELVIN FAST, 1914-
No. 1973 in 1960 Guide.
808. The story of Lola Gregg. New York, Blue
Heron Press [1956] 219 p.
56—3199 PZ3.F265Ss
A novel.
809. Moses, Prince of Egypt. New York, Crown
Publishers [1958] 303 p.
58-8324 PZ3.F265Mo
A novel.
810. The Winston affair. New York, Crown Pub-
lishers [1959] 221 p.
59-14020 PZ3.F265Wi
A novel.
8 1 1. April morning, a novel. New York, Crown
Publishers [1961] 184 p.
61—10306
812. Power, a novel. Garden City, N. Y., Double-
day, 1962. 378 p. 62—15943
813. The hill, an original screenplay. Garden
City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1964. 123 p.
64-11381 PS35U.A784H5
814. LAWRENCE FERLINGHETTI, 1919-
After receiving a doctoral de I'universite from
the Sorbonne, Ferlinghetti returned to the United
States, where he became a founder of the San Fran-
cisco City Lights Bookstore, reportedly the Nation's
first all-paperback shop. He has been both an
advocate and a practitioner of experimentation with
literary forms and oral presentation of poetry. His
first book of poems was Pictures of the Gone World
(I955)- An editor as well as a poet, he became
the leading publisher of writers identified with the
beat generation. Howl of the Censor (San Carlos,
Calif., Nourse Pub. Co. [1961], 144 p.), a tran-
script of the trial in which he defended himself
against charges of publishing obscene literature,
indicates his concept of the poet's role in society.
815. A Coney Island of the mind, poems. [New
York] New Directions [1958] 93 p. (New
Directions paperbook no. 74)
58-7150 PS35H.E557C6
Includes new poems as well as selections from
Pictures of the Gone World.
8 1 6. Her. [New York, New Directions, 1960]
156 p. (New Directions paperbook no. 88)
60-9221 PZ4.F357He
A novel.
817. Starting from San Francisco. [Norfolk,
Conn.] New Directions [1961] 79 p. and
phonodisc (2 s. 7 in. 33^3 rpm. microgroove) in
pocket. 61-14897 PS35U.E557S8
Poems.
8 1 8. Unfair arguments with existence, seven plays
for a new theatre. [New York, New Direc-
tions Books, 1963] 118 p. (A New Directions
paperbook ND 143)
63-21384 PS35H.E557U5 1963
819. Routines. [New York, Published for J.
Laughlin by New Directions Pub. Corp.,
52 p. (A New Directions paperbook
NDPi87) 64-23652 PS35H.E557R6
Experimental plays.
820. JEAN GARRIGUE, 1912-
No. 1981 in 1960 Guide.
821. A water walk by Villa d'Este. New York,
St. Martin's Press [1959] 96 p.
59-15274
Poems.
822. Country without maps. New York, Macmil-
lan [1964] 82 p.
64-22600 PS35I3-A72I7C6
Poems.
823. ALLEN GINSBERG, 1926-
Ginsberg has been considered the leading
poet of the beat generation. In a first prophetic
volume entitled Howl, and Other Poems (1956), he
used loosely structured lines, mystical obscurity, and
a vocabulary sometimes selected for its shock value
to discuss drug addiction, sex, jazz, alcohol, suicide,
and materialism in American life. He has con-
tinued writing and publishing, especially in radical
52 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
magazines, and has become widely known for his
nonconformist views as well as for his poetry.
824. Howl, and other poems. San Francisco, City
Lights Pocket Bookshop [1956] 44 p. (The
Pocket poets series, No. 4)
56-8587 PS35I3.I74H6
825. Kaddish, and other poems, 1958-1960. [San
Francisco] City Lights Books [1961] 100 p.
(The Pocket poets series, no. 14)
60-14775
826. Empty mirror, early poems. Introduction by
William Carlos Williams. [New York]
Totem Press [1961] 47 p.
61-14983
827. Reality sandwiches, 1953-60. [San Francis-
co] City Lights Books; [distributed by Paper
Editions Corp., 1963] 98 p. (The Pocket poets
series, no. 18) 63-12219 PS35I3.I74R4
828. HERBERT GOLD, 1924-
Gold has gained widespread critical acclaim
for his novels, short stories, and essays dealing with
modern American life. In his first novel, Birth of a
Hero (1951), Gold experimented with a stream-of-
consciousness technique. His second novel, The
Prospect Before Us (1954), exhibits his skill with
colorful, colloquial language. In general, his writ-
ing has tended to emphasize theme and feeling over
plot and structure.
829. The man who was not with it. Boston, Little,
Brown [1956] 314 p.
56-5623 PZ4.G6i8Man
A novel.
830. The optimist, a novel. Boston, Little, Brown
[J959J 395 P- 59-6475 PZ4.G6i8Op
831. Love & like. New York, Dial Press, 1960.
307 p. 60-8397 PZ4.G6i8Lo
Short stories.
CONTENTS.— The heart of the artichoke.— Su-
sanna at the beach.— A celebration for Joe.— The
burglars and the boy.— Encounter in Haiti.— Ti-
Moune. — Paris and Cleveland are voyages. — Aris-
totle and the hired thugs. — The panic button. —
Sello. — What's become of your creature? — Love
and like. — A tale of two husbands. — Jim the man.
— Postface: An aftermath about these stories.
832. Therefore be bold, a novel. New York, Dial
Press, 1960. 256 p. 60-13431 PZ4.G6i8Th
833. The age of happy problems. New York, Dial
Press, 1962. 238 p. 62—16333 £169.1.658
Essays.
834. Salt, a novel. New York, Dial Press, 1963.
318 p. 63-10553 PZ4.G6i8Sal
835. WILLIAM GOYEN, 1915-
No. 1984 in 1960 Guide.
836. The faces of blood kindred, a novella and ten
stories. [New York] Random House
[1960] 167 p. 60-12124
837. The fair sister, a novel. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1963. 104 p.
63-17274
838. LILLIAN FLORENCE HELLMAN, 1905-
No. 1988 in 1960 Guide.
839. Toys in the attic, a new play. New York,
Random House [1960] u6p. illus.
60—12144 PS35I5.E343T6
840. My mother, my father and me. Based on
Burt Blechman's novel How much? New
York, Random House [1963] 98 p. illus.
63—20244 PS35I5-E343M9
A play.
84 1 . JOHN RICH ARD HERSE Y, 1914-
No. 1992 in 1960 Guide.
842. A single pebble. New York, Knopf, 1956.
181 p. 56—7209 PZ3.H4385Si
A novel.
843. The war lover. New York, Knopf, 1959.
404 p. 59~I3I77 PZ3.H4385War
A novel.
844. The child buyer; a novel in the form of hear-
ings before the Standing Committee on Edu-
cation, Welfare, & Public Morality of a certain State
Senate, investigating the conspiracy of Mr. Wissey
Jones, with others, to purchase a male child. New
York, Knopf, 1960. 257 p.
60-13850
845. Here to stay. New York, Knopf, 1963
[Ci962] 335 p. 63-9123 0525^43 1963
A selection of previously published articles.
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 53
846. White lotus. New York, Knopf, 1965.
683 p. 65-11104 PZ3.H4385WH
A novel.
847. WILLIAM MOTTER INGE, 1913-
No. 1995 in 1960 Guide.
848. The dark at the top of the stairs, a new play.
With an introduction by Tennessee Williams.
New York, Random House [1958] 108 p. illus.
58-8057 PS35I7.N265D3
849. A loss of roses, a new play. With a foreword
by the author. New York, Random House
[1960] 127 p. illus. 60-8376 PS35I7.N265L6
850. Splendor in the grass, a screenplay. New
York, Bantam Books [1961] 121 p. (A
Bantam book, 72204) 61-65785 PS35I7.N265S6
851. Summer brave, and eleven short plays. New
York, Random House [1962] 299 p.
62-12730 PS35I7.N265P5 1962
The lead play in this volume is the rewritten ver-
sion of the author's Picnic, no. 1997 in the 1960
Guide.
852. Natural affection. New York, Random
House [1963] 115 p.
63-16855 PS35I7.N265N3
A play.
853. RANDALL JARRELL, 1914-1965
No. 1999 in 1960 Guide.
854. The woman at the Washington Zoo, poems
& translations. New York, Atheneum, 1960.
65 p. 60-11039 PS35I9.A86W6
855. A sad heart at the supermarket, essays &
fables. New York, Atheneum, 1962. 211 p.
62-11681 PS35I9.A86S3
856. Selected poems, including The woman at the
Washington Zoo. New York, Atheneum,
1964. xxii, 205, vii— viii, 65 p. (Atheneum paper-
backs, 66) 64-54618 PS35I9-A86A6 1964
857. The lost world. New York, Macmillan
[ci965J 69 p. 64—20736 PS35I9.A86L63
Poems.
858. JAMES JONES, 1921-
No. 2003 in 1960 Guide.
859. The pistol. New York, Scribner [1959,
Ci958] 158 p. 59-5785 PZ4-J77Pi
A novel.
860. The thin red line. New York, Scribner
[1962] 495 p. illus.
62—12099
A novel.
861. JOHN ("JACK") KEROUAC, 1922-
Kerouac's fiction has taken the form of a
series of autobiographical novels and reminiscences.
His first work, The Town & the City (1950), is
the story of a Massachusetts family during the pe-
riod from 1910 through the years of World War II.
Additional episodes from his youth form the basis
for Doctor Sax (1959) and Visions of Gerard
(1963). American beat life is portrayed in his most
famous work, On the Road (1957), an episodic
novel about the aimless wanderings of an author.
Later works about the beat generation, a term
Kerouac is credited with coining, are The Dharma
Bums (1958), The Subterraneans (1958), Big Sur
(1962), and Desolation Angels (1965).
862. On the road. New York, Viking Press, 1957.
310 p. 57-9425
A novel.
863.
. The Dharma bums. New York, Viking
8 2 .
Press, 1958. 244 p
58-11734
5-11734 3.459
A novel of the beat generation's search for a state
of mind approximating the Buddhist concept of
Dharma.
864. The subterraneans. New York, Grove Press
[1958] 1 1 1 p. (Evergreen books, £-99)
58-6703 PZ3.K4596Su
A novel.
865. Mexico City blues. New York, Grove Press
[1959] 244 p. 59-12222 PS352I.E735M4
Poems of a "jazz poet."
866. Doctor Sax; Faust part three. New York,
Grove Press [1959] 245 p.
59-9806 PZ3.K4596Do
A novel.
867. Excerpts from Visions of Cody. [New York,
New Directions, 1959, Ci96o] 128 p.
60—4490 PZ3-K4596Ex
A character study of the renamed hero of On the
Road.
54 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
868. Big Sur. New York, Farrar, Straus & Cud-
ahy [1962] 241 p.
62-14957 PZ3-K4596Bi
A novel.
869. Visions of Gerard. New York, Farrar, Straus
[1963] 151 p. illus.
63-16472 PZ3.K4596Vi 3
A novel.
870. Desolation angels, a novel. Introduction by
Seymour Krim. New York, Coward-McCann
[1965] xxviii, 366 p.
65-17524 PZ3.K.4596De
871. ROBERT LOWELL, 1917-
No. 2007 in 1960 Guide.
872. Life studies. New York, Farrar, Straus, &
Cudahy [1959] 90 p.
59-9174 PS3523.O89L5
Verse and prose.
873. Imitations. [New York, Noonday Press,
1962?] 149 p. (Noonday 233)
62-52845 PS3523.O89I4
Poems.
874. For the Union dead. New York, Farrar,
Straus & Giroux [1964] 72 p.
64-21495 PS3523.O89F6
Poems.
875. The Old Glory. New York, Farrar, Straus
& Giroux [1965] xix, 193 p. illus.
65-24026 PS3523.O89O4
"Theater trilogy . . . based on stories by Haw-
thorne and a novella by Melville."
CONTENTS. — Introduction, by Robert Brustein. —
Director's note, by Jonathan Miller. — Endecott and
the red cross. — My kinsman, Major Molineux. —
Benito Gereno.
876. Mazzaro, Jerome. The poetic themes of
Robert Lowell. Ann Arbor, University of
Michigan Press [1965] 145 p.
65-20349 PS3523.O89Z77
Bibliography: p. 137—140.
877. ROBERT JAMES COLLAS LOWRY,
1919-
No. 201 1 in 1960 Guide.
878. What's left of April. Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1956. 247 p.
56-9399
A novel.
879- New York call girl. Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1958. 237 p.
58—10029 PZ3-L9564Ne
Short stories.
880. MARY THERESE McC ARTH Y, 1912-
No. 2017 in 1960 Guide.
881. Memories of a Catholic girlhood. New York,
Harcourt, Brace [1957] 245 p.
57-8842
Memoirs.
882. The group. New York, Harcourt, Brace &
World [1963] 378 p.
63-15316
A novel.
883. Theatre chronicles, 1937—1962. New York,
Farrar, Straus [1963] xxi, 248 p.
63—18449 PN2277.N5M22 1963
Most of the selections were originally published in
Partisan Review and also in the author's Sights and
Spectacles, 1937—1956 (1956).
884. CARSON SMITH McCULLERS, 1917-
No. 2023 in 1960 Guide.
885. The square root of wonderful, a play. Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1958. 159 p.
58-6501
886. Clock without hands. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1961. 241 p.
61-10351
A novel.
887. Evans, Oliver W. Carson McCullers; her life
and work. London, P. Owen [1965] 220 p.
66-45393 PS3525.Ai772Z6 1965
Bibliographical footnotes.
888. NORMAN MAILER, 1923-
No. 2025 in 1960 Guide.
889. Advertisements for myself. New York, Put-
nam [1959] 532 p.
59—1 1 020 PS3525- A4 1 52Z52
Short stories, articles, and essays, connected by an
autobiographical narrative.
890. BERNARD MALAMUD, 1914-
In much of his fiction Malamud has drawn
heavily upon his familiarity with Jewish culture,
traditions, and folkways in America. The social
implications of his work are by no means limited
to a single ethnic group, however. His first novel,
The Natural, was published in 1952. The critical
response to this comic treatment of a baseball hero's
attempt to achieve the American dream was mixed.
He received the 1959 National Book Award for The
Magic Barrel (1958), a volume of short stories, and
has since won other prizes as well as popular
acclaim for his novels and short stories.
891. The assistant, a novel. New York, Farrar,
Straus & Cudahy [1957] 246 p.
57-7397
892. The magic barrel. New York, Farrar, Straus
& Cudahy [1958] 214 p.
58-6841 PZ4.M23yMag
Short stories.
CONTENTS. — The first seven years. — The mourn-
ers.— The girl of my dreams.— Angel Levine.—
Behold the key.— Take pity.— The prison.— The
lady of the lake.— A summer's reading.— The bill.
—The last Mohican.— The loan.— The magic
barrel.
893. A new life. New York, Farrar, Straus &
Cudahy [1961] 367 p.
61-11416 PZ4.M237Ne
A novel.
894. Idiots first. New York, Farrar, Straus [1963]
212 p. 63—19562 PZ4-M237ld
Short stories and a scene from a play.
CONTENTS.— Idiots first. — Black is my favorite
color.— Still life.— The death of me.— A choice of
profession.— Life is better than death.— The Jew-
bird.— Naked nude.— The cost of living.— The
maid's shoes. — Suppose a wedding (a scene of a
play). — The German refugee.
895. WILLIAM KEEPERS MAXWELL, 1908-
No. 2029 in 1960 Guide.
896. The chateau. New York, Knopf, 1961.
401 p. 61—7125
A novel.
897. THOMAS MERTON, 1915-
No. 2034 in 1960 Guide.
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 55
898. The strange islands, poems. [New York,
New Directions, 1957] 102 p.
57-8600 PS3525.E7I74S8
899. Secular journal. New York, Farrar, Straus
& Cudahy [1959] 270 p.
59-6588 BX4705.M542A28
A previously unpublished journal written by
Merton before he became a Trappist monk.
900. Disputed questions. New York, Farrar,
Straus & Cudahy [1960] 297 p.
60-12636 6X89 1. M45
Essays.
901. The behavior of Titans. [New York] New
Directions [1961] 106 p.
60-10879 PS3525.E7I74B4
Meditations.
902. New seeds of contemplation. [Norfolk,
Conn.] New Directions [1962, Ci96i]
297 p. 61-17869 6X2350.2^46
A revised edition of no. 2038 in the 1960 Guide.
903. A Thomas Merton reader. Edited by Thom-
as P. McDonnell. New York, Harcourt,
Brace & World [1962] 553 p.
62-16737 PS3525.E7I74A6 1962
904. Emblems of a season of fury. [Norfolk,
Conn., J. Laughlin, 1963] 149 p. (A New
Directions paperbook, no. 140)
63-18635 PS3525.E7I74E4
Poems.
905. Seeds of destruction. New York, Farrar,
Straus & Giroux [1965, Ci964] xvi, 328 p.
64-19595 BT734.2.M4
CONTENTS. — Black revolution: Letters to a white
liberal. The legend of Tucker Caliban.— The
diaspora: The Christian in world crisis. The
Christian in the diaspora. A tribute to Gandhi. —
Letters in a time of crisis.
906. The way of Chuang-tzu. [New York] New
Directions [1965] 159 p.
65—27556 BLi9oo.C483M4
Bibliography: p. 158.
Free renderings of selections from various trans-
lations of the works of Chuang-tzu.
907. JAMES ALBERT MICHENER, 1907-
Much of Michener's work has been based
upon his studies of the islands in the Pacific. His
first book of short stories, Tales of the South
Pacific (1947), won the Pulitzer Prize for fiction in
56 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1948. A series of novels followed. Michener de-
scribed Return to Paradise (1951) as "half fiction,
half hard reporting," The Bridges at To\o-ri (1953)
as "an intense, bitterly controlled novel," and
Sayonara (1954), as "a novella in an antique style."
His epic work, Hawaii (1959), is a saga about the
island complex and its inhabitants from geological
beginnings to the present. In recent years, Mich-
ener has expanded his scope to include the Near
and Middle East.
908. Hawaii. New York, Random House [1959]
937 p. 59-10815
909. Caravans, a novel. New York, Random
House [1963] 341 p.
63-16152 PZ3.M583Car 2
Set in Afghanistan.
910. The source, a novel. New York, Random
House [1965] 909 p.
65-11255 PZ3.M583So
Set in Israel.
911. ARTHUR MILLER, 1915-
No. 2043 in 1960 Guide.
912. A view from the bridge, a play in two acts.
With a new introduction. New York, Vik-
ing Press [1960] 86 p. (Compass books, 073)
60-4782 PS3525.I5I56V5 1960
A revised and enlarged edition of the tide play in
no. 2049 in the 1960 Guide.
913. The misfits. New York, Viking Press
[1961] 132 p. 61-6089 PZ3.M6i224Mi
A "story conceived as a film." An earlier version
appeared as a short story in Esquire.
914. After the fall, a play. [Rev. final stage ver-
sion] New York, Viking Press [1964]
114 p. 66—1903 PS3525.I5I56A66 19643
915. Incident at Vichy, a play. New World, Vik-
ing Press [1965] 70 p.
65-12025 PS3525.I5I56I5
916. Huftel, Sheila. Arthur Miller: the burning
glass. New York, Citadel Press [1965]
256 p. 65-15492 PS3525.I5I56Z7
A critical account of Miller's plays.
917. Welland, Dennis S. R. Arthur Miller. New
York, Grove Press [1961] 124 p. (Ever-
green pilot books, EPn)
61-12358 PS3525. I5I56Z95 1961
Bibliography: p. 123—124.
A brief biography with criticism.
918. WRIGHT MORRIS, 1910-
No. 2052 in 1960 Guide.
919. The field of vision. New York, Harcourt,
Brace [1956] 251 p.
56-8525 PZ3.M8346Fi
A novel.
920. Love among the cannibals. New York, Har-
court, Brace [1957] 253 p.
57-10060 PZ3.M8346Lo
A novel.
921. Ceremony in Lone Tree. New York, Athen-
eum, 1960. 304 p.
60-7775 PZ3.M8346Ce
A novel.
922. What a way to go. New York, Atheneum,
1962. 310 p. 62-17278 PZ3.M8346Wh
A novel.
923. One day. New York, Atheneum, 1965.
433 p. 65—12403 PZ3.M8346On
A novel.
924. Madden, David. Wright Morris. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1965, Ci964] 191
p. (Twayne's United States authors series, 71)
64-20721 PS3525.O7475Z7
Bibliographical notes: p. 172-176. Bibliography:
p. 177-184.
925. VLADIMIR VLADIMIROVICH NABO-
KOV, 1890-
Nabokov left Russia in 1919, acquired his higher
education in England, resided at various times in
Berlin and Paris, and came to the United States in
1940. His early works were written in Russian. His
first novel in English, The Real Life of Sebastian
Knight (1941), is the story of a Russian emigre in
Paris. Nabokov taught in various universities while
continuing to publish works such as Bend Sinister
(1947), a novel; Conclusive Evidence (1951), an
autobiography (entided Spea\, Memory in Eng-
land); and Poems 1929-1951 (1952). His novel
Lolita, first published in Paris in 1955, became an
overwhelming success. In all his works — novels,
short stories, poems, translations, biography, and
autobiography — Nabokov has displayed unusual
skill in the creative use of language. His composi-
tional acrostics represent a delightful challenge to
many of his readers.
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 57
926. Pnin. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1957.
191 p. 57—6299 PZ3.Ni2iPn
A novel.
927. Lolita. New York, Putnam [1958, Ci955]
319 p. 58—10755 PZ3.Ni2iLo 2
A novel.
928. Nabokov's dozen, a collection of thirteen
stories. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1958.
214 p. 58—10032 PZ3.Ni2iNab
Includes those published in Nine Stories (New
York, New Directions, 1947. 126 p.).
929. Invitation to a beheading. Translated by
Dmitri Nabokov in collaboration with the
author. New York, Putnam [1959] 223 p.
59—11024 PZ3.Ni2iIn
A novel originally written in Russian in 1938,
translated by the author's son.
930. Poems. Drawings by Robin Jacques. Gar-
den City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1959. 43 p.
59-10681
931. Pale fire, a novel. New York, Putnam
[1962] 315 p. 62—7351 PZ3.Ni2iPal
932. The gift, a novel. Translated from the Rus-
sian by Michael Scammell with the collabora-
tion of the author. New York, Putnam [1963]
378 p. 63-9667 PZ3.Ni2iGi
The first Russian version appeared in Sovre-
mennyia zapisty, annales contemporaines (Paris),
ir» I935-36-
933. The defense, a novel. Translated by Michael
Scammell in collaboration with the author.
New York [1964] 256 p.
64-13017 PZ3.Ni2iDc
Originally written in Russian in 1930.
934. HOWARD NEMEROV, 1920-
Nemerov is a versatile writer of novels, short
stories, plays, poetry, and criticism. His novels —
The Melodramatists (1949), Federigo; or, The
Power oj Love (1954), and The Homecoming
Game (1957) — have satirized various aspects of life
in America. In his poems, on the other hand, he
treats such universal themes as life and death, the
mind and science, nature and man, and myth and
reality. Early volumes of his poetry include The
Image and the Law (1947), Guide to the Ruins
(1950), and The Salt Garden (1955).
935. The homecoming game, a novel. New York,
Simon & Schuster, 1957. 246 p.
57-5679 PS3527.E5H6
936. Mirrors & windows, poems. [Chicago]
University of Chicago Press, 1958. 101 p.
58-5683 PS3527.E5M5
937. A commodity of dreams & other stories. New
York, Simon & Schuster, 1959. 245 p.
59-6015
938. New & selected poems. [Chicago] Uni-
versity of Chicago Press, 1960. 115 p.
60-14236 PS3527-E5Ai7 1960
939. The next room of the dream, poems and two
plays. [Chicago] University of Chicago
Press [1962] 143 p. 62-22328 PS3527.E5N4
940. Poetry and fiction, essays. New Brunswick,
N. J., Rutgers University Press
381 p. 63-16301
Critical lectures and book reviews.
941. JOHN FREDERICK NIMS, 1913-
No. 2060 in 1960 Guide.
942. Knowledge of the evening: poems, 1950—
1960. New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers Uni-
versity Press [1960] 96 p.
60-11524 PS3527.I863K6
943. FLANNERY O'CONNOR, 1925-1964
Miss O'Connor's work is admired for its
acute sense of irony, insight, and comic nuance.
Her Southern gothic tales of the macabre and gro-
tesque, although seldom pleasant, are greatly re-
vealing of character and setting. An overtone of
religious conflict permeates her fiction. Wise Blood,
which first appeared in 1952, is described in the
author's preface to the second edition as "a comic
novel about a Christian malgre lui, and as such,
very serious, for all comic novels that are any good
must be about matters of life and death." Miss
O'Connor's 1955 collection of short stories, A Good
Man Is Hard To Find, was published in London
under the title The Artificial Nigger (1957).
944. The violent bear it away. New York, Farrar,
Straus & Cudahy [1960] 243 p.
60-6752 PZ4.Oi83Vi
A novel.
945. Wise blood. [2d ed.] New York, Farrar,
Straus & Cudahy [1962] 232 p.
62-5776 PZ4.Oi83Wi 5
58 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
946. Everything that rises must converge. New
York, Farrar, Straus & Giroux [1965] xxxiv,
269 p. 65-13726 PZ4.Oi83Ev
A memoir by Robert Fitzgerald introduces this
collection of short stories.
947. CLIFFORD ODETS, 1906-1963
No. 2063 in 1960 Guide.
948. Shuman, Robert Baird. Clifford Odets.
New York, Twayne Publishers [Ci962] 160
p. (Twayne's United States authors series, 30)
62—19474 PS3529-D46Z87
Bibliographical notes: p. 149-151. Bibliography:
p. 152-155.
949. JOHN HENRY O'HARA, 1905-
No. 2069 in 1960 Guide.
950. A family party. New York, Random House
[1956] 64 p. 56-10932 PZ3.O3677Fam
A short story.
951. From the terrace, a novel. New York, Ran-
dom House [1958] 897 p.
58-12336
952. Ourselves to know, a novel. New York,
Random House [1960] 408 p.
60-5528
953. Sermons and soda-water. New York, Ran-
dom House [1960] 3 v.
60-16572 PZ3.O3677Sg
Three related novellas.
CONTENTS. — v. i. The girl on the baggage truck.
— v. 2. Imagine kissing Pete. — v. 3. We're friends
again.
954. Assembly. New York, Random House
[1961] 429 p. 61-12172 PZ3.O3677As
Short stories.
955. Five plays. New York, Random House
[1961] xiv, 473 p.
61-14888 PS3529.H29Ai9 1961
CONTENTS. — The farmers hotel. — The searching
sun. — The champagne pool. — Veronique. — The
way it was.
956. The Cape Cod lighter. New York, Random
House [1962] 425 p.
62-8455
Short stories.
957. Elizabeth Appleton, a novel. New York,
Random House [1963] 310 p.
63—14140 PZ3.O3677E1
958. The hat on the bed. New York, Random
House [1963] 405 p.
63—20247 PZ3-O3677Hat
Stories.
959. The horse knows the way. New York, Ran-
dom House [1964] 429 p.
64-7751 PZ3.O3677Hr
Twenty-eight short stories.
960. KENNETH PATCHEN, 1911-
No. 2079 in 1960 Guide.
961. When we were here together. [New York]
New Directions [1957] 112 p.
57-13081 PS353I.A764W5
Poems.
962. Selected poems. Enl. ed. [New York] New
Directions [1958, Ci957] 145 p. illus.
(The New classics series)
58—590 PS353I.A764A6 1958
A revised and enlarged edition of no. 2083 in the
1960 Guide.
963. FREDERIC PROKOSCH, 1908-
No. 2087 in 1960 Guide.
964. A ballad of love. New York, Farrar, Straus
& Cudahy [1960] 311 p.
60—12517 PZ3-P9424Bal
A novel.
965. The seven sisters. New York, Farrar, Straus
& Cudahy [1962] 405 p.
62-18414 PZ3.P9424Sc
A novel.
966. The dark dancer. New York, Farrar, Straus
[1964] 305 p.
64-11268 PZ3.P9424Dar
A novel.
967. Squires, James Radcliffe. Frederic Prokosch.
New York, Twayne Publishers [1964] 158
p. (Twayne's United States authors series, 61)
64-13957 PS353i.R78Z87
Bibliographical notes: p. 148-150. Bibliography:
p. 151-152.
968. KENNETH REXROTH, 1905-
No. 2098 in 1960 Guide.
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 59
969. In defense of the earth. [New York] New
Directions [1956] 93 p.
56-13352 PS3535.T923l48
Poems.
970. Natural numbers; new and selected poems.
[Norfolk, Conn.] New Directions, 1963.
119 p. 63—18636 PS3535.E923Ai7 1963
97 1 . THEODORE ROETHKE, 1 908-1 963
No. 2103 in 1960 Guide.
972. Words for the wind, the collected verse. Gar-
den City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1958. 212 p.
58—10039 PS3535.O39W6 1958
973. The far field. Garden City, N. Y., Double-
day, 1964. 95 p. 64-12105 PS3535-O39F3
Poems.
974. On the poet and his craft; selected prose.
Edited with an introduction by Ralph J. Mills,
Jr. Seattle, University of Washington Press, 1965.
xvi, 154 p. 65—22387 PNio64.R6
975. Stein, Arnold S., ed. Theodore Roethke;
essays on the poetry. Seattle, University of
Washington Press [1965] xx, 199 p.
65-23914
976. PHILIP MILTON ROTH, 1933-
Roth received a National Book Award in 1960
for his first book, Goodbye, Columbus. Containing
five short stories as well as the title novella, this
collection conveys Roth's sharp sense of the pathos
and humor in Jewish middle-class life in America.
Roth has since become well known for his distinc-
tive portrayals of this milieu.
977. Goodbye, Columbus, and five short stories.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1959. 298 p.
59-7579 PZ4.R8454Go
978. Letting go. New York, Random House
[1962] 630 p. 62-8472 PZ4-R8454Le 2
A novel.
979. MURIEL RUKEYSER, 1913-
No. 2105 in 1960 Guide.
980. One life. New York, Simon & Schuster,
:957- 33° P- 57-5680 E748.W7R8
An imaginative work about Wendell Willkie,
containing a blend of stories, poems, documents,
and newspaper quotations.
981. Body of waking. New York, Harper [1958]
n8p. 57-11788 PS3535.U4B6
Poems.
982. Waterlily fire: poems, 1935—1962. New
York, Macmillan, 1962. 200 p.
62-13595
983. JEROME DAVID SALINGER, 1919-
No. 2107 in 1960 Guide.
984. Franny and Zooey. Boston, Litde, Brown
[1961] 201 p. 61—14542 PZ4.Si65Fr 3
Two stories previously published in The New
Yorker.
985. Raise high the roof beam, carpenters, and
Seymour — an introduction. Boston, Litde,
Brown [1963, Ci959] 248 p.
63-8969 PZ4.Si65Rai 5
Two stories previously published in The New
Yorker.
986. French, Warren G. J. D. Salinger. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1963] 191 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 40)
63—10957 PS3537.A426Z6
Bibliographical notes: p. 171—178. Bibliography:
p. 179—186.
987. Grunwald, Henry A., ed. Salinger; a critical
and personal portrait. New York, Harper
[1962] 287 p. 62-11222 PS3537.A426Z62
988. Laser, Marvin, and Norman Fruman, eds.
Studies in J. D. Salinger: reviews, essays, and
critiques of The catcher in the rye, and other fiction.
New York, Odyssey Press [1963] 272 p.
63-14023 PS3537.A426Z7
Includes bibliography.
989. WILLIAM SAROYAN, 1908-
No. 21 10 in 1960 Guide.
990. The whole voyald, and other stories. Boston,
Little, Brown [1956] 243 p. (An Adantic
Monthly Press book) ' 56-10653
991. Mama, I love you. Boston, Little, Brown
[1956] 245 p. 56—7051 PZ3.S246Mam
A novel.
992. Papa, you're crazy. Boston, Litde, Brown
[1957] 165 p. 57-7840 PZ3.S246Pap
A novel.
60 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
993. The cave dwellers, a play. New York, Put-
nam [1958] i 87 p.
58-8902 PS3537.A826C3
994. Here comes, there goes, you know who.
New York, Simon & Schuster, 1961. 273 p.
61-17926 PS3537.A826Z53
Autobiography.
995. After thirty years: the daring young man on
the flying trapeze. New York, Harcourt,
Brace & World [1964] 312 p.
64-7446 PZ3.S246Af
Saroyan's reminiscences of his life since the 1930'$,
together with a reprint of The Daring young Man
on the Flying Trapeze and Other Stories.
996. One day in the afternoon of the world. New
York, Harcourt, Brace & World [1964]
245 p. 64—20194 PZ3.S246On
A novel.
997. MAY SARTON, 1912-
No. 2123 in 1960 Guide.
998. The birth of a grandfather. New York,
Rinehart [1957] 277 p.
57—9630 PZ3.S249Bi
A novel.
999. In time like air, poems. New York, Rinehart
[1958] Sop. 58-5012 PS3537.A832I45
1000. I knew a phoenix; sketches for an autobiog-
raphy. New York, Rinehart [1959] 222 p.
59-6569
1001. Cloud, stone, sun, vine: poems, selected and
new. New York, Norton [1961] 144 p.
61-13040 PS3537.A832C55
1002. The small room, a novel. New York, Nor-
ton [1961] 249 p.
61—11347
1003. Mrs. Stevens hears the mermaids singing, a
novel. New York, Norton [1965] 220 p.
65-18016 PZ3.S249Mi
1004. DELMORE SCHWARTZ, 1913-
No. 2133 in 1960 Guide.
1005. Summer knowledge: new and selected
poems, 1938—1958. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1959. 240 p.
59-10689 PS3537.C79S8
1006. Successful love, and other stories. New
York, Corinth Books, 1961. 242 p.
61—14981 PZ3.S405Su
1007. KARL JAY SHAPIRO, 1913-
No. 2139 in 1960 Guide.
1008. In defense of ignorance. New York, Ran-
dom House [1960] 338 p.
60—5607 PS3537.H27I5
Essays in literary criticism.
1009. The bourgeois poet. New York, Random
House [1964] 1 20 p.
64-10356 PS3537.H27B6
An autobiographical prose poem.
1010. IRWIN SHAW, 1913-
No. 2145 in 1960 Guide.
ion. Lucy Crown, a novel. New York, Random
House [1956] 339 p.
55-8168
1012. Tip on a dead jockey, and other stories.
New York, Random House [1957] 242 p.
57-5382 PZ3.S5357Ti
1013. Two weeks in another town. New York,
Random House [1960] 372 p.
60-5560
A novel.
1014. Voices of a summer day. New York, Dis-
tributed by the Dial Press [1965] 223 p.
65-13414 PZ3.S5357Vo
A novel.
1015. ISAAC BASHEVIS SINGER, 1904-
Singer was educated at a rabbinical school
in Warsaw, Poland. He came to the United States
in 1935. His novels and short stories, written in
Yiddish, convey a picture of the vanished world of
Polish Jewry. His first work to be translated into
English was The Family Masqat (1950), a conven-
tional narrative about a family of Polish Jews during
the period from the late i9th century until World
War II. In 1955 he published a translation of Satan
in Goray, a novel written in 1935. This work intro-
duced his American audience to the elements of
fantasy, irrationality, and the grotesque that pervade
much of Singer's fiction.
1 01 6. Gimpel the fool, and other stories. New
York, Noonday Press [Ci957] 205 p.
58-1234
Translated by Saul Bellow and others.
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 6l
1017. The magician of Lublin. Translated from
the Yiddish by Elaine Gottlieb and Joseph
Singer. New York, Noonday Press [1960] 246 p.
60—10006 PZ3.S6i657Mag
A novel.
1018. The Spinoza of Market Street. New York,
Farrar, Straus & Cudahy [1961] 214 p.
61-13676 PZ3.S6i657Sp 3
Short stories, translated by Martha Glicklich and
others.
1019. The slave, a novel. Translated from the
Yiddish by the author and Cecil Hemley.
New York, Farrar, Straus & Cudahy [1962] 311 p.
62-10501
1 020. Short Friday, and other stories. New York,
Farrar, Straus & Giroux [1964] 243 p.
64-23122
Translated by Joseph Singer and Roger Klein.
1021. HARRY ALLEN SMITH, 1907-
No. 2149 in 1960 Guide.
1022. The pig in the barber shop. Boston, Little,
Brown [1958] 316 p.
58—11441
A humorous account of a journey in Mexico.
1023. Let the crabgrass grow; H. Allen Smith's
suburban almanac. Illustrated by Donald
Madden. [New York] B. Geis Associates; dis-
tributed by Random House [1960] 256 p.
60-10125 PS3537*M4655L4
Anecdotes of suburban life.
1024. How to write without knowing nothing; a
book largely concerned with the use and
misuse of language at home and abroad. Boston,
Little, Brown [1961] 179 p.
61-12813 PN6i62.S65733
Essays.
1025. To hell in a handbasket. Garden City,
N. Y., Doubleday, 1962. 341 p. ill us.
62-7680 PN4874.S56A26
Autobiography.
1026. A short history of ringers, and other state
papers. Illustrated by Leo Hershfield.
Boston, Little, Brown [1963] 301 p.
63-17425
A collection of articles.
1027. JEAN STAFFORD, 1915-
No. 2156 in 1960 Guide.
1028. Bad characters. New York, Farrar, Straus
[1964] 276 p. 64-23037 PZ3.S7783Bad
Short stories.
1029. WALLACE EARLE STEGNER, 1909-
No. 2161 in 1960 Guide.
1030. The city of the living, and other stories.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1956. 206 p.
56-12088 PZ3.S8i8Ci
1031. A shooting star. New York, Viking Press,
1961. 433 p. 61-7037 PZ3.S8i8Sh
A novel.
1032. JESSE STUART, 1907-
No. 2166 in 1960 Guide.
1033. The year of my rebirth. Illustrated by Bar-
ry Martin. New York, McGraw-Hill
[1956] 342 p. 56-12275 RC682.S8
A journal kept while recovering from a heart
attack.
1034. Plowshare in heaven, stories. New York,
McGraw-Hill [1958] 273 p. illus.
58-11194 PZ3.S9306P1
1035. God's oddling; the story of Mick Stuart, my
father. New York, McGraw-Hill [1960]
266 p. 60-15006 P$3537.T925i6G6
Biographical stories.
1036. Hold April, new poems. Woodcuts by Wal-
ter Ferro. New York, McGraw-Hill [1962]
114 p. 61—18440 PS3537-T925i6H6 1962
1037. Daughter of the legend. New York, Mc-
Graw-Hill [1965] 249 p.
65—25553 PZ3.S93o6Dau
A novel.
1038. WILLIAM STYRON, 1925-
No. 2174 in 1960 Guide.
1039. Set this house on fire. New York, Random
House [1960] 507 p.
60-5568 PZ4.S938Se
A novel.
1040. PETER HILLSMAN TAYLOR, 1917-
No. 2176 in 1960 Guide.
62 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1041. Tennessee Day in St. Louis, a comedy. New
York, Random House [1957] 177 p.
57-6463 PS3539.A9633T4
A play.
1042. Happy families are all alike, a collection of
stories. New York, McDowell, Obolensky
[1959] 305 p. 59-!5376 PZ3.T2i767Hap
1043. Miss Leonora when last seen, and fifteen
other stories. New York, I. Obolensky
[•=1963] 398 p. 63-20872
1049. The same door, short stories. New York,
Knopf, 1959. 241 p.
59-9776
1044. MELVIN BEAUNORUS TOLSON, 1900-
In an introduction to Tolson's Harlem Gal-
lery, Karl Shapiro states: "A great poet has been
living in our midst for decades and is almost totally
unknown, even by the literati, even by poets."
Tolson was born in Missouri, won a national poetry
competition of the American Negro Exposition at
Chicago in 1940, and published his first book of
poems, Rendezvous with America, in 1944. He was
named Poet Laureate of Liberia in 1947 and was
commissioned to write the Libretto for the Republic
of Liberia celebrating that country's centennial.
Poetry magazine (Chicago) published a section of
the poem in 1950; in a preface to the book (1953),
Allen Tate expresses his appreciation of Tolson's
talent, saying that "there is a great gift for language,
a profound historical sense, and a first-rate intelli-
gence at work in this poem from first to last."
Tolson received Poetry magazine's Bess Hokin
prize in 1951 for his poem "E. & O. E."
1045. Harlem gallery. With an introduction by
Karl Shapiro. Book i. The curator. New
York, Twayne [1965] 173 p.
64-25063 PS3539.C-334H3
1046. JOHN HOYER UPDIKE, 1932-
Since the first appearance of his stories,
sketches, and verse in The New Yorker, Updike has
been hailed as a master stylist and precocious tech-
nician. His fiction, which is often set in the small
Pennsylvania town of his childhood, displays a
special understanding of the sorrows of youth and
old age. His novel The Centaur (1963) won the
1964 National Book Award.
1047. The carpentered hen, and other tame crea-
tures, poems. New York, Harper [1958]
82 p. 58-6158 PS354I.P47C3
1048. The poorhouse fair. New York, Knopf,
»959 [Ci958l 185 P-
59-5431
Updike's first novel.
1050. Rabbit, run. New York, Knopf, 1960.
307 p. 60-12552 PZ4-U64Rab
A novel.
1051. Pigeon feathers, and other stories. New
York, Knopf, 1962. 278 p.
61-17831
1052. The centaur. New York, Knopf, 1963.
302 p. 63-7873 PZ4.U64Ce 2
1053. Telephone poles, and other poems. New
York, Knopf, 1963. 83 p.
63—1 1 047 PS354 1 .
IO54- Of the farm. New York, Knopf, 1965.
173 p. 65-18763 PZ4.U64Of
A novel.
1055. Assorted prose. New York, Knopf, 1965.
326 p. 65-13460 PS354i.P47Ai6 1965
Collected nonfiction, including parodies, personal
reports, and book reviews, most of which originally
appeared in The New Yorker.
1056. GORE VIDAL, 1925-
No. 2180 in 1960 Guide.
1057. A thirsty evil, seven short stories. New
York, Zero Press, 1956. 154 p.
56-11329 PZ3.V6668Th
1058. Visit to a small planet, and other television
plays. Boston, Litde, Brown [1956] 278 p.
57-5030 PS3543.I26V5
The title play of this volume was expanded for
theatrical production and published as Visit to a
Small Planet; a Comedy A\in to a Vaudeville
(Boston, Litde, Brown [1957] 158 p.).
1059. The best man; a play about politics. Boston,
Little, Brown [1960] 168 p. illus.
60-13970 PS3543.I26B4
1060. Rocking the boat. Boston, Litde, Brown
[1962] 300 p. 62—13912 PS3543.I26R6
Essays.
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 63
1 06 1. Julian, a novel. Boston, Little, Brown
[1964] 503 p.
64-15048 PZ3.V6668Jw 2
Bibliography: p. 503.
1062. The city and the pillar revised, including
an essay: Sex and the law, and An afterword.
[Rev. ed.] New York, Dutton, 1965. 249 p.
65-18637 PZ3.V6668Ci 2
A revised edition of a novel mentioned in no.
2180 of the 1960 Guide.
1063. Messiah. [Rev. ed.] Boston, Little, Brown
[1965] 243 p.
65-17660 PZ3.V6668Me 3
A revised edition of no. 2188 in the 1960 Guide.
1064. PETER ROBERT EDWIN VIERECK,
1916—
No. 2189 in 1960 Guide.
1065. The persimmon tree, new pastoral and lyri-
cal poems. New York, Scribner [1956]
80 p. 56—10206 PS3543-I325P4
1066. The tree witch, a poem and play (first of all
a poem). New York, Scribner [1961]
126 p. 61—7221 PS3543.I325T7 1961
A verse play.
1067. KURT VONNEGUT, 1922-
In his first novel, Player Piano (1952),
Vonnegut established the science-fiction approach to
location and situation which has characterized much
of his subsequent work. His fusion of satire with
serious morality has appealed to an increasingly
wide circle of readers.
1068. The sirens of Titan. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1961 [Ci959] 319 p.
61-6895 PZ4-V948Si 2
A novel.
1069. Cat's cradle. New York, Holt, Rinehart &
Winston [1963] 233 p.
63-10930 PZ3.V948Cat
A novel.
1070. God bless you, Mr. Rose water; or, Pearls
before swine. New York, Holt, Rinehart &
Winston [1965] 217 p. 65-16434
A novel.
1071. ROBERT PENN WARREN, 1905-
No. 2193 in 1960 Guide.
1072. Promises: poems 1954—1956. New York,
Random House [1957] 84 p.
57-7894
1073. Selected essays. New York, Random House
[1958] 305 p. 58-7674 PSi2i.W3
1074. The cave. New York, Random House
[1959] 403 p. 59-5719 PZ3.W2549Cav
A novel.
1075. All the king's men, a play. New York,
Random House [1960] 134 p.
60—8377 PS3545-A748A7 1960
Based on the 1946 novel of the same name, no.
2197 in the 1960 Guide.
1076. You, emperors, and others: poems, 1957—
1960. New York, Random House [1960]
81 p. 60-12123 PS3545.A748Y6
1077. Wilderness; a tale of the Civil War. New
York, Random House [1961] 310 p.
61-6248 PZ3.W2549W1
A novel.
1078. Flood; a romance of our time. New York,
Random House [1964] 440 p.
64-10357 PZ3.W2549F1
A novel.
1079. Casper, Leonard. Robert Penn Warren:
the dark and bloody ground. Seattle,
University of Washington Press, 1960. 212 p.
60-14114 PS3545.A748Z65
A critical survey of Warren's novels and poems.
1080. Longley, John L., ed. Robert Penn Warren,
a collection of critical essays. [New York]
New York University Press, 1965. xix, 259 p.
65-13207 PS3545.A748Z77
Bibliography: p. 247—257.
1081. Strandberg, Victor H. A colder fire; the
poetry of Robert Penn Warren. [Lex-
ington] University of Kentucky Press [1965]
292 p. 65—27009 PS3545-A748Z87
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. [283]-285).
1082. EUDORA WELTY, 1909-
No. 2202 in 1960 Guide.
1083. Appel, Alfred. A season of dreams; the
fiction of Eudora Welty. Baton Rouge,
64 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Louisiana State University, 1965. xvi, 274 p.
(Southern literary studies)
65-20298 PS3545.E6Z56
Bibliography: p. 265—267.
1084. Vande Kieft, Ruth M. EudoraWelty. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1962] 203 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 15)
62-10272 PS3545.E6Z9
Bibliographical notes: p. 191—194. Bibliography:
p. I95-I99-
1085. JESSAMYN WEST, 1907-
No. 22 1 o in 1960 Guide.
1086. South of the Angels. New York, Harcourt,
Brace [1960] 564 p.
60-6714 PZ3.W5i903So
A novel.
1087. RICHARD PURDY WILBUR, 1921-
No. 2215 in 1960 Guide.
1088. Things of this world, poems. New York,
Harcourt, Brace [1956] 50 p.
56—6655
1089. Advice to a prophet, and other poems. New
York, Harcourt, Brace & World [1961]
64 p. 61-15813
1090. TENNESSEE WILLIAMS, 1914-
No. 2218 in 1960 Guide.
1091. Baby Doll: the script for the film, incor-
porating the two one-act plays which sug-
gested it: 27 wagons full of cotton [and] The long
stay cut short; or, The unsatisfactory supper. [New
York] New Directions [1956] 208 p.
56-13347 PS3545.l5365B3 1956
1092. In the winter of cities, poems. [Norfolk,
Conn.] New Directions [1956] 117 p.
56-13961 PS3545.l5365Ai7 1956
1093. Orpheus descending, with Battle of angels;
two plays. [New York] New Directions
[1958] 238 p. 57-i3°83 PS3545.I5365C-7
1094. Suddenly last summer. [New York] New
Directions [1958] 90 p.
58-9512
A play.
1095. Sweet birth of youth. [New York] New
Directions [1959] 114 p.
59-9492 PS3545.l5365S87
A play.
1096. Period of adjustment; high point over a
cavern, a serious comedy. [New York]
New Directions [1960] 120 p.
60-53248
1097. The night of the iguana. [New York]
New Directions, 1962 [Ci96i] 128 p.
62-10409 P$3545. 15365^
A play.
1098. The eccentricities of a nightingale, and Sum-
mer and smoke; two plays. [New York,
New Directions Pub. Corp., 1964?] 248 p. (A
New Directions book)
64-23654 PS3545.I5365E2 1964
1099. The milk train doesn't stop here anymore.
[Norfolk, Conn.] New Directions, 1964.
118 p. 63—13641 PS3545.I5365M5 1964
A play.
noo. Falk, Signi L. Tennessee Williams. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1962, Ci96i]
224 p. (Twayne's United States authors series, 10)
61—15670 PS3545-I5365Z64 1962
Bibliographical notes: p. 191—205. Bibliography:
p. 206— 221.
noi. Jackson, Esther M. The broken world of
Tennessee Williams. Madison, University
of Wisconsin Press, 1965. xxiii, 179 p. illus.
64-8489 PS3545.l5365Z7
Works of Tennessee Williams: p. 161—163. Bib-
liography: p. 165—169.
An Aristotelian analysis which places Williams'
major dramas in a perspective with the theater of
the Western World.
1 1 02. Tischler, Nancy M. P. Tennessee Williams:
rebellious Puritan. New York, Citadel Press
[1961] 319 p. 61-16975 PS3545.I5365Z85
A biography, with discussions of Williams' works
and summaries of the plots of his major plays.
1103. HERMAN WOUK, 1915-
No. 2229 in 1960 Guide.
1104. Nature's way, a comedy in two acts. Gar-
den City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1958. 134 p.
58-8463 PS3545.O98N3
LITERATURE (1607-1965) / 65
1105. Youngblood Hawke, a novel. Garden City, 1108. The long dream, a novel. Garden City,
N.Y., Doubleday, 1962. 783 p. N.Y., Doubleday, 1958. 384 p.
62-7698 PZ3.W923Yo 58-12059
1106. Don't stop the carnival. Garden City, N.Y., II09. Eight men. Cleveland, World Pub. Co.
Doubleday, 1965. 395 p. [I96j] 250 p.
64-22324. PZ3.W923Do 61-5636
A novel. Short stories.
"°7' RICQHARD NATHANIEL WRIGHT, mo> Lawd today New Yofk> Walkef
189 p. 63-11769 PZ3.W9352Law
No. 2232 in 1960 Guide. A novel.
II
Language
A. Dictionaries
B. Grammars and General Studies
C. Dialects, Regionalisms, and Foreign Languages in America
D. Miscellaneous
1111—1114
1115—1119
1120—1123
1 124—1 126
PERHAPS the most significant trend in recent studies of American English has been the shift
away from a normative grammatical approach toward an acceptance of wide variation
within standard English. The validity of the traditional Latin-based English grammar is being
questioned by those who favor an exposition of the language within the framework of Ameri-
can structural linguistics. The linguists have contended that grammar should be descriptive
rather than prescriptive and have included in their analyses "substandard" constructions and
"incorrect" words which are in common usage. In
so doing, they have encountered opposition from haps most clearly discernible in Webster's Third
those who consider that a grammar should represent New International Dictionary of the English Lan-
a standard to be followed. The new trend is per- guage (no. 1114).
A. Dictionaries
mi. Evans, Bergen, and Cornelia Evans. A dic-
tionary of contemporary American usage.
New York, Random House [1957] 567 p.
57-5379 PE2835.E84
"Designed for people who speak standard English
but are uncertain about some details," this lucid dic-
tionary of current English in the United States
comments on grammar, idiomatic expressions, dis-
puted usage, and common errors. The authors'
approach is based on the findings of modern linguis-
tic investigation, which reveal wide variations in
standard English. Evans and his sister categorize
usages with phrases such as "generally preferred,"
"acceptable in this country," and "nonstandard in
the United States." Their preferences are influenced,
however, by an admitted prejudice in favor of the
forms used by the great writers of English rather
than those found only in technical journals. Al-
though Current American Usage (New York, Funk
& Wagnalls [1962] 290 p.), edited by Margaret M.
66
Bryant, is narrower in scope and contains fewer
entries than A Dictionary of Contemporary Ameri-
can Usage, it is based on a similar approach and has
citations to sources of quotations and to scholarly
studies.
1 1 12. Nicholson, Margaret. A dictionary of
American-English usage, based on Fowler's
Modern English usage. New York, Oxford Uni-
versity Press, 1957. 671 p. 57-5560 PE2835.N5
Miss Nicholson's dictionary is intended as an
adaptation of, not a replacement for, H. W. Fowler's
monumental A Dictionary of Modern English
Usage, first published in 1926. Many of the long
articles have been shortened, and entries for words
and expressions which occur rarely in American
usage have been entirely omitted. New words and
idioms that have come into the language since the
initial publication of Modern English Usage have
been added, as well as discussions of differences
LANGUAGE /
between American and 'British spelling and pro-
nunciation not recorded by Fowler.
1113. Thornton, Richard H. An American glos-
sary; being an attempt to illustrate certain
Americanisms upon historical principles. With an
introduction by Margaret M. Bryant. New York,
F. Ungar Pub. Co. [1962] 3 v.
61-13641 PE2835.T6 1962
The separately published parts of no. 2240 in the
1960 Guide are here united in a three-volume set.
1 1 14. Webster's third new international dictionary
of the English language, unabridged. A
Merriam-Webster. Editor in chief: Philip Babcock
Gove and the Merriam-Webster editorial staff.
Springfield, Mass., G. & C. Merriam Co. [1961]
563, 2662 p. illus. 61—65336 PEi625.W36 1961
Both denounced and praised by reviewers for its
attitude toward pronunciation and usage, this dic-
tionary marks a significant shift of direction in
American lexicography. It assumes that change in
language is continuous and normal and that "cor-
rectness" can be based only on usage, which itself is
continuously changing. Consequently, the editors
attempt to describe rather than prescribe current
usage and pronunciation and to indicate acceptable
variations. The definitions are based chiefly on
examples collected since publication of the second
edition (see the annotation for no. 2236 in the 1960
Guide) in 1934. In an attempt to provide "precise,
sharp defining," the editors have developed a new
dictionary style of "completely analytical one-phrase
definitions." Various labels — "slang," "substand-
ard," "nonstandard," "dialect" — are used, but the
label "colloquial," which appeared in the second
edition, has been dropped. Many of the reviews
which greeted the arrival of the third edition are
collected in Dictionaries and That Dictionary; a
Caseboo]^ on the Aims of Lexicographers and the
Targets of Reviewers (Chicago, Scott, Foresman
[1962] 273 p.), edited by James H. Sledd and
Wilma R. Ebbitt. The most recent edition of ~Fun\
& W agnails New Standard Dictionary of the Eng-
lish Language (New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 1963.
2816 p.) incorporates slight changes that distinguish
it from the 1952 edition noted in the discussion of
no. 2236 in the 1960 Guide.
B. Grammars and General Studies
1115. Francis, Winthrop N. The structure of
American English. With a chapter on
American English dialects by Raven I. McDavid, Jr.
New York, Ronald Press Co. [1958] 614 p. illus.
58-5647 PE28n.F67
Bibliography: p. 598—602.
A textbook for a graduate or undergraduate in-
troductory course in the structure of English, par-
ticularly American English. Although Francis
presents some original material, his stated purpose
is to synthesize the work of many other structural
linguists in order to bring it together in one volume.
An introductory chapter entitled "Language, Lan-
guages, and Linguistic Science" is followed by
others on phonetics, phonemics, morphemics, gram-
mar, graphics, and the use of linguistics by teachers
of English. McDavid contributes a chapter sum-
marizing the work on a projected linguistic atlas of
the United States and Canada, to be composed of
several regional atlases (see the annotation for no.
1123 in this Supplement). Henry A. Gleason's
Linguistics and English Grammar (New York,
Holt, Rinehart & Winston [1965] 519 p.) is de-
signed to interpret linguistics to teachers of English.
1116. Marckwardt, Albert H. American English.
New York, Oxford University Press, 1958.
194 p. illus. 58—5374 PE28o8.M3
A popular historical account of the development
of English in the United States. The first English-
speaking colonists tended to preserve words, mean-
ings, and pronunciations long after they had dropped
out of use in England. American English moved
even further away from British English as it was
supplemented by words borrowed from the Ameri-
can Indians, the early explorers, and immigrant
groups. In addition, Marckwardt suggests, the vig-
or, the disregard for convention, and the ingenuity
of the frontiersmen were among the factors con-
tributing to the creation of many compound forma-
tions ("carpetbagger," "land office") and "mouth-
filling" terms ("rambunctious," "cata wampus").
The author also discusses the American tendency to
glorify the commonplace ("saloon," "opera house"),
to extend indiscriminately the use of honorifics
("doctor," "professor," and "honorable"), and to
find euphemisms for delicate topics ("comfort sta-
tion," "unmentionables," and "mortician").
68 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1 1 17. Mencken, Henry L. The American lan-
guage; an inquiry into the development of
English in the United States. The 4th ed. and the
two supplements, abridged, with annotations and
new materials, by Raven I. McDavid, Jr., with the
assistance of David W. Maurer. New York, Knopf,
1963. xxv, 777, cxxiv p. 63—13628 PE28o8.M43
Bibliographical footnotes.
A one-volume abridgement, condensation, and
updating of Mencken's three volumes (no. 2248 in
the 1960 Guide). Most of the editorial commentary
and new material is enclosed in brackets. Aspects
of American English (New York, Harcourt, Brace
& World [1963] 272 p. Harbrace sourcebooks),
compiled by Elizabeth M. Kerr and Ralph M. Ader-
man, is a collection of essays on the historical,
regional, literary, colloquial, and social aspects of
American English by authorities in these fields.
1118. Myers, Louis M. Guide to American En-
lish. 3d ed. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,
Prentice-Hall, 1962. 446 p.
63—9823 PEi in .M954 1 962
A thoroughly updated edition of no. 2249 in the
1960 Guide. The major revisions were made in the
second edition, published in 1959.
1119. Roberts, Paul. Understanding English.
New York, Harper [1958] xvii, 508 p.
illus. 58—5110 PEiin.R736
Offered as a college text for freshman composi-
tion, this book also serves as an introduction to the
analysis of American English. Roberts' point of
view is that of linguistic science, and his writing is
informal and frequently humorous. Among the
various topics discussed are phonetics, the idiosyn-
crasies of English spelling, the approach of tradi-
tional grammarians, sentence patterns, punctuation,
speech communities, disputed usage, slang, and
etymology.
C. Dialects, Regionalisms, and Foreign Languages in America
1 1 20. American Dialect Society. Publication, no.
i + Apr. 1944+ University, Ala. [etc.]
Published for the Society by the University of
Alabama Press [etc.] 2 no. a year (irregular)
72—1707 PEi7O2.A5
A continuation of no. 2254 in the 1960 Guide.
Two of the longest publications appearing in the
1956-65 period are Dwight L. Bolinger's Interroga-
tive Structures of American English: The Direct
Question (1957 [i.e. 1958] 184 p. no. 28) and
Einar I. Haugen's Bilingualism in the Americas:
A Bibliography and Research Guide (1956. 159 p.
no. 26). Among the topics covered in the other 18
publications issued during the period are expres-
sions from Herman Melville and words and
expressions designated in Webster's Third New
International Dictionary of the English Language
as nonstandard, substandard, or chiefly substandard.
1 121. Atwood, Elmer Bagby. The regional vo-
cabulary of Texas. Austin, University of
Texas Press [1962] 273 p. illus.
62-9784 PE3IOI.T4A85
Bibliographical footnotes.
A study of the vocabulary of rural Texans of
middle age and older. The data were collected by
several of Atwood's advanced graduate students,
who employed a questionnaire of items taken from
the worksheets of the linguistic atlas of the United
States and Canada (see the annotation for no. 1123
in this Supplement} as well as items designed to
elicit vocabulary used mainly in the Southwest.
Responses to the questionnaire are recorded in a
chapter entitled "Topical Survey of the Vocabulary."
On the basis of a comparison of vocabulary usage
in Texas with that in eastern areas, it is concluded
that the "regional vocabulary of Texas is basically
Southern, with some admixture of Midland words
and a considerably smaller proportion of Northern
ones." Vocabulary occurrences are shown in a
"Word Atlas," consisting of more than 120 pages
of maps of Texas and surrounding States.
1 1 22. Eliason, Norman E. Tarheel talk; an his-
torical study of the English language in
North Carolina to 1860. Chapel Hill, University of
North Carolina Press [1956] 324 p. maps.
56-58593 PE3IOI.N76E4
Written for both the linguist and the general
reader, this book is based on a study of manuscript
materials — legal papers, commercial accounts, plan-
tation records, church records, letters, children's
writings, student writings, diaries, and journals.
Usage since 1860, Eliason asserts, can best be de-
rived from living informants. The chapter entitled
"Language Attitudes and Differences" reveals a
concern, among the writers represented in the manu-
scripts, for good English, particularly correct spell-
LANGUAGE / 69
ing, but also shows that very few of them comment
on the differences in pronunciation and vocabulary
which they have encountered. The central chapter
on vocabulary includes discussions of Americanisms,
names, forbidden words, euphemisms, tides, and
obsolete, slang, and local terms. A 5o-page section
on usage of some five hundred words is appended.
1123. Kurath, Hans, and Raven I. McDavid. The
pronunciation of English in the Adantic
States; based upon the collections of the linguistic
adas of the Eastern United States. Ann Arbor,
University of Michigan Press [1961] 182 p.
(Studies in American English, 3)
60—5671 PE28o2.M53 v. 3
This study of speech in the Eastern United States
focuses on the pronunciation of both cultured and
uncultured speakers from Maine to South Carolina.
Materials are drawn from the collections of the
linguistic adas of the Eastern States, part of the
planned linguistic adas of the United States and
Canada. This latter atlas project was begun in
1930 and has resulted thus far in one publication,
Linguistic Atlas of New England (no. 2268 in the
1960 Guide), edited by Kurath. In The Pronuncia-
tion of English in the Atlantic States, symbols repre-
senting sounds are based on the International
Phonetic Alphabet. Dialects, U.S.A. (Champaign,
111., National Council of Teachers of English [1963]
62 p.), by Jean Malmstrom and Annabel Ashley, is
a brief survey intended primarily for students in
secondary schools but useful as well for the
general reader.
D. Miscellaneous
1124. Bronstein, Arthur J. The pronunciation of
American English; an introduction to pho-
netics. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts [1960]
320 p. illus. 60-6750 PEi 137.677
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
Part i deals with the International Phonetic
Alphabet, the sound system, phonemes, dialects,
and standard and disputed usage. Consonants,
vowels, and complex consonant and vowel clusters
are discussed in part 2. Part 3 covers the nature
and types of sound change, pronunciation and influ-
ences affecting pronunciation; pitch levels, stress,
and pause; and the melodies of American English.
A brief historical survey of the development of the
English language is appended. A comparison of
the chief regional types of cultivated American pro-
nunciation with standard British English can be
found in Hans Kurath's brief survey of American
English phonetics, A Phonology and Prosody of
Modern English (Ann Arbor, University of Michi-
gan Press [1964] 158 p.). Claude M. Wise's
Applied Phonetics (Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Pren-
tice-Hall, 1957. 546 p.) is a wide-ranging survey
of the most important characteristics of general,
southern, and eastern American speech; standard
southern British speech; British regional dialects;
American provincial dialects; and dialects of Eng-
lish spoken by foreigners or related to foreign
languages.
1125. Evans, Bergen. Comfortable words. Illus-
trated by Tomi Ungerer. New York, Ran-
dom House [1962] 379 p.
62-10775 PEi46o.E9
The author provides provocative comments on
usage, pronunciation, etymology, idioms, and often-
confused words in American English. He insists
throughout on reason and naturalness in the use of
language and eschews both artificiality and slavish
obedience to norms. The entries are arranged
alphabetically by the keywords in the phrases.
1126. Wentworth, Harold, and Stuart B. Flexner.
Dictionary of American slang. New York,
Cro well [1960] xviii, 669 p.
60-6237 PE3729.U5\V4
A scholarly treatment of American slang, "the
body of words and expressions frequendy used by or
intelligible to a rather large portion of the general
American public, but not accepted as good, formal
usage by the majority." The authors consider all
slang used in the United States to be "American,"
regardless of its origin. Many quotations are pro-
vided, with dates, to indicate usage for various
meanings. The source of each quotation is cited,
and, when the citation is abbreviated, fuller infor-
mation is given in an extensive bibliography. Vari-
ous wordlists are appended.
Ill
Literary History and Criticism
A. Anthologies and Series
B. History and Criticism
C. Periodicals
1127—1156
1157-1264
1265—1270
A LTHOUGH American literature of the 20th century is the major concern of recent literary
-L\- scholarship, every period, many themes, and a wide variety of categories of writing
receive attention in the books chosen for this chapter.
Among the broad categories of literature, fiction is the subject of the largest number of
books. The novel of violence, the college novel, the social novel, the grotesque novel, the
Negro novel, the realistic novel, and the short story — each of these is the topic of individual
studies. Other specialized works deal with such
themes as homicide in American fiction, the quest
for paradise in American literature, human isola-
tion and the American novel, psychoanalysis and
American fiction, love and death in the American
novel, and technology and the pastoral ideal in
American literature. Poetry is examined in fewer
works than fiction but in a similar manner. Gen-
eral appraisals are complemented by scrutinies of
rhetoric and poetry, the influence of music on
poetry, social themes in poetry, and the continuity
of poetry. Recent drama is analyzed for, among
other attributes, its political themes. Criticism and
literary history are themselves the objects of critical
review.
Regional studies concentrate on, for example, the
early novel of the Southwest, the western farm
novel, antebellum northern views of the South, and
writers of the modern South. Cross-cultural ties
with other nations are traced in studies of the
Japanese tradition in British and American litera-
ture, the influence of German culture on American
literature, the Mexican in American literature,
American writers and artists in Italy, and Soviet
attitudes toward American writing.
A. Anthologies and Series
1127. Allen, Donald M., ed. The new American
poetry, 1945—1960. New York, Grove Press
[1960] 454 p. 60-6342 PS6i4.A59
The 44 poets represented in this collection make
up "our avant-garde, the true continuers of the
modern movement in American poetry." Their
unity, according to Allen, lies in their "total rejection
of all those qualities typical of academic verse." The
editor has divided the 44 poets into five groups:
those identified with the magazines Origin and
Elac\ Mountain Review; those of the 1947—49 San
Francisco renaissance, such as Lawrence Ferlinghetti
70
and Brother Antoninus; the poets of the "beat
generation," including Allen Ginsberg and Jack
Kerouac; the New York poets; and, finally, those
who fit into no particular group. Concluding sec-
tions feature autobiographical notes from each of
the poets, individual bibliographies, and statements
on poetics.
1128.
William Van
New York,
American literary forms.
O'Connor, general editor.
Crowell [1959—60] 5 v.
Those specific attitudes, topics, and qualities re-
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 71
vealed in outstanding authors and legitimately re-
ferred to as "American" are studied in this series.
Each volume, edited by a distinguished literary
personality, is both a critical introduction to the
literary history of a particular genre and an anthol-
ogy which illustrates creative directions from coloni-
al days to the mid-20th century. The volumes are
as follows: American Short Novels ( [1960] 398 p.
60-6314 PZ i. 656 Am), edited by Richard P.
Blackmur; American Drama ([1960] 261 p. 60—
6315 PS625.D6), edited by Alan S. Downer;
American Literary Essays ([1960] 318 p. 60—
6316 PS682.L4), edited by Lewis G. Leary; Amer-
ican Poetry ([1960] 265 p. 60—6317 PS586.S43),
edited by Karl J. Shapiro; and American Short
Stories ( [Ci959] 267 p. 60-6318 PZi.W^Am),
edited by Ray B. West.
1129. Auden, Wystan Hugh, ed. The Criterion
book of modern American verse. New
York, Criterion Books [1956] 336 p.
56-11366 PS6i4.A8
An anthology of 82 poets of the 2oth century,
arranged chronologically according to date of birth,
from Edwin Arlington Robinson to Anthony Hecht.
Although many of the poets are well known,
several are minor figures who, in Auden's opinion,
have achieved a measure of success in one or two
poems. The poems represent a personal choice by
the compiler and are often among the poet's less
widely known works. Comparing English poets
with those of the United States, Auden asserts that
"from Bryant on, there is scarcely one American
poet whose work, if unsigned, could be mistaken for
that of an Englishman." The book appeared in
England under the title The Faber Boo^ of Modern
American Verse (London, Faber & Faber [1956]
336 p.)-
1130. Best American plays, [ist] + ser.; 1939+
New York, Crown Publishers.
51-12830 PS634.B4
Title varies: ist ser., Twenty Best Plays of the
Modern American Theatre. — 2d ser., Best Plays
of the Modern American Theatre.
Editor: ist-4th ser., John Gassner.
Supplementary volume, 1918—1958.
Edited, with introduction, by John Gassner. New
York, Crown Publishers [1961] xvi, 687 p.
PS634.B4I2
The first three series of Best American Plays are
no. 2333-2335 in the 1960 Guide.
CONTENTS of the fourth series. — Introduction:
and still it moves, by John Gassner. — I am a camera,
by John Van Druten. — Cat on a hot tin roof, by
Tennessee Williams. — The rose tattoo, by Tennes-
see Williams. — A moon for the misbegotten, by
Eugene O'Neill. — A hatful of rain, by Michael V.
Gazzo. — Picnic, by William Inge. — Bus stop, by
William Inge. — Tea and sympathy, by Robert
Anderson. — A view from the bridge, by Arthur
Miller. — The crucible, by Arthur Miller. — Inherit
the wind, by Jerome Lawrence and Robert E. Lee.
— The Caine mutiny court-martial, by Herman
Wouk. — The fourposter, by Jan de Hartog. — The
seven year itch, by George Axelrod. — The Match-
maker, by Thornton Wilder. — No time for ser-
geants, by Ira Levin and Mac Hyman. — The solid
gold Cadillac, by George S. Kaufman and Howard
Teichmann. — A selective bibliography. — A sup-
plementary list of plays.
CONTENTS of the supplementary volume. — Intro-
duction, by John Gassner. — Clarence, by Booth
Tarkington. — Rain, by John Colton. — The adding
machine, by Elmer Rice. — Green grow the lilacs,
by Lynn Riggs. — The house of Connelly, by Paul
Green. — Children of darkness, by Edwin Justus
Mayer. — Biography, by S. N. Behrman. — On bor-
rowed time, by Paul Osborn. — Morning's at seven,
by Paul Osborn. — Ethan Frome, by Owen Davis
and Donald Davis. — Men in white, by Sidney
Kingsley. — Yellow jack, by Sidney Howard. —
Awake and sing!, by Clifford Odets. — Here come
the clowns, by Philip Barry. — Harvey, by Mary
Chase. — The teahouse of the August moon, by
John Patrick. — The diary of Anne Frank, by
Frances Goodrich and Albert Hackett.
1131. Blair, Walter, Theodore Hornberger, and
Randall Stewart, eds. The United States in
literature. Introduction to modern poetry by Paul
Engle. Composition guide by Don Otto. Novel
discussion guides by Kenneth Sickal. Chicago,
Scott, Foresman [1963] 820 p.
63—773 PS507-B527 1963
A revised edition of no. 2323 in the 1960 Guide.
1132. Bradley, Edward Sculley, Richmond C.
Beatty, and Eugene Hudson Long, eds.
The American tradition in literature. Rev. New
York, Norton [1961] 2 v.
61—8916 PS5O7-B74 1961
CONTENTS. — v. i. Bradford to Lincoln. — v. 2.
Whitman to the present.
A new edition of no. 2324 in the 1960 Guide,
revised to include two full-length novels — The
Scarlet Letter and The Adventures of Huckleberry
Finn — and additional selections from the writings
of Melville, James, Emerson, Whitman, Howells,
Jonathan Edwards, and others. Robert Lowell,
Richard Eberhart, Muriel Rukeyser, Richard Wil-
bur, and Marianne Moore are among those included
in a new section on mid-2Oth-century poets.
72 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1133. Brooks, Cleanth, and Robert Penn Warren,
eds. Understanding fiction. 2d ed. New
York, Appleton-Century-Crofts [1959] 688 p.
59-12844 PN3335.B7 1959
A revised edition of the influential teaching an-
thology mentioned in the annotation for no. 2378
in the 1960 Guide. The same publisher issued a
shortened version in 1960 under the title, The Scope
of Fiction (336 p.).
1134. Cerf, Bennett A., ed. Six American plays
for today. Selected and with biographical
notes by Bennett Cerf. New York, Modern Library
[1961] 599 p. (The Modern library of the
world's best books [38] ) 61-11189 PS634.C4i8
CONTENTS. — Camino Real, by Tennessee Wil-
liams.— The dark at the top of the stairs, by William
Inge. — Sunrise at Campobello, by Dore Schary. —
A raisin in the sun, by Lorraine Hansberry. — The
tenth man, by Paddy Chayefsky. — Toys in the attic,
by Lillian Hellman.
Paul Kozelka has edited 75 American One-Act
Plays (New York, Washington Square Press [1961]
308 p. The ANTA series of distinguished plays),
which includes "Thursday Evening," by Christo-
pher Morley, "The Devil and Daniel Webster," by
Stephen Vincent Benet, "Red Carnations," by Glenn
Hughes, and "Trifles," by Susan Glaspell. Two
anthologies of period plays from the Laurel Drama
Series are Famous American Plays of the 1930$
([New York, Dell Pub. Co., Ci959] 480 p.),
edited by Harold Clurman, and Famous American
Plays of the i^os ([New York, Dell Pub. Co.,
1960] 447 p.), edited by Henry Hewes.
1135. Edel, Leon, and others, eds. Masters of
American literature. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin [1959] 2 v. 59-1824 PS507.E3
According to the editors, the student of literature
profits more through "close familiarity with a few
writers than through superficial acquaintance with
many." Further, "he will profit more from regard-
ing the works he reads to be studied and enjoyed
on their own terms than he will from viewing them
as illustrations of the course of literary or cultural
history." This anthology offers substantial selec-
tions from the works of writers from Jonathan
Edwards to Faulkner and Frost.
1136. Elliott, George P., ed. Fifteen modern
American poets. New York, Rinehart
[1956] 315 p. (Rinehart editions, 79)
56-7952 PS6i4.E55
"This book aims," the editor noted in his 1956
preface, "to represent the middle generation of
American poets," all of whom "have been known
for several years." The oldest of the 15 poets is
Richard Eberhart and the youngest Richard Wilbur.
Short biobibliographical notes on poets and poems
are appended. Selections from the works of 82
poets are presented in The Modern Poets, an
American-British Anthology (New York, McGraw-
Hill [1963] 427 p.), edited by John M. Brinnin
and Bill Read, with 80 photographic portraits by
Rollie McKenna.
1137. Engle, Paul, ed. Midland; twenty-five years
of fiction and poetry selected from the writ-
ing workshops of the State University of Iowa.
New York, Random House [1961] 600 p.
60—12132 PS536.E55
The university workshop in creative writing, a
comparatively recent phenomenon, has caused con-
siderable controversy among people interested in
literature. The editor's introduction to this collec-
tion praises a pioneering institution in this field, but
the anthology itself is the more convincing argu-
ment. Flannery O'Connor, Jean Stafford, Wallace
Stegner, William Dickey, Jean Garrigue, Anthony
Hecht, Donald Justice, W. D. Snodgrass, Leonard
Unger, and Tennessee Williams are among the
writers who have been associated with the program
at the State University of Iowa during the last 25
years. Engle and Joseph Langland are the editors
of Poet's Choice (New York, Dial Press, 1962.
303 p.), the result of an invitation to each of a hun-
dred poets to select a favorite or crucial poem from
his works and to comment about his selection.
1138. Fiedler, Leslie A. , ed. The art of the essay.
Edited with introductions, notes and exercise
questions. New York, Crowell [1958] 640 p.
58-7917 PS682.F5
In this anthology, the editor aspires to restore the
essay to its rightful place among literary forms. A
noted practitioner of the art himself, Fiedler pref-
aces the general sections of his book with remarks
on the history of the essay in Western culture.
Letters, book reviews, extracts from lengthy prose
works, and articles are arranged chronologically
from Montaigne through such 20th-century Ameri-
can masters as Lionel Trilling, Constance Rourke,
and Jacques Barzun. Each of the 60 essays is
preceded by a short introduction to the author and
his work.
1139. Foerster, Norman, ed. American poetry and
prose. 4th ed., complete. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin [1957] 1664 p.
57—13836 PS507-F6 1957
A revised edition of no. 2331 in the 1960 Guide,
including additional works of substance by major
authors, fewer selections from minor authors, and
fuller notes accompanying individual selections.
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 73
Foerster and Robert P. Falk are coeditors of an
abridged and revised edition, American Poetry and
Prose (Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1960] 1223 p.).
1140. Foerster, Norman, and Robert P. Falk, eds.
Eight American writers, an anthology of
American literature. New York, Norton [Ci963]
xvi, 1610 p. 62-20920 PS535.F6
Bibliography: p. 1589—1605.
Selections from the works of eight authors whom
the editors regard as constituting the classic core of
American writing. The eight are Poe, Emerson,
Thoreau, Hawthorne, Melville, Whitman, Mark
Twain, and Henry James. Famous poems, stories,
notebooks, letters, and chapters are reprinted here,
along with substantial scholarly introductions to
each author. A wider but still basic selection of
standard figures is presented in Classic American
Writers (Boston, Little, Brown [1962] 620 p.),
edited by Harrison Hayford. The writers listed
above are supplemented by Edward Taylor,
Jonathan Edwards, Irving, Bryant, Longfellow,
Whittier, Holmes, James Russell Lowell, Emily
Dickinson, and Howells.
1141. Gordon, Caroline, and Allen Tate, eds. The
house of fiction; an anthology of the short
story, with commentary. 2d ed. New York, Scrib-
ner [1960] 469 p. 60—6360 PZi.G653Ho
Includes bibliography.
The formalist technique of textual analysis is
demonstrated in this anthology of 23 stories. Each
story is accompanied by a commentary on the fiction-
al techniques at work in the selection, and a 20-page
appendix explains the approaches used in the fore-
going text. American short stories include "Young
Goodman Brown," by Nathaniel Hawthorne; "The
Fall of the House of Usher," by Edgar Allan Poe;
"The Beast in the Jungle," by Henry James; "The
Open Boat," by Stephen Crane; "Haircut," by Ring
Lardner; "Old Mortality," by Katherine Anne
Porter; "Spotted Horses," by William Faulkner;
"Lions, Harts, Leaping Does," by J. F. Powers;
"The Headless Hawk," by Truman Capote; "A
Good Man Is Hard To Find," by Flannery
O'Connor; "The Killers," by Ernest Hemingway;
"Where a Man Dwells," by Herbert Gold; and
"The Proud Suitor," by James Buechler. Another
short-story anthology is A New Southern Harvest
(New York, Bantam Books [1957] 294 p. A
Bantam book, Fi556), edited by Robert Penn
Warren and Albert Erskine and featuring famous
stories by recent southern writers.
1142. Hall, Donald, ed. Contemporary American
poetry. Baltimore, Penguin Books [1963,
Ci962] 201 p. (Penguin poets)
63—1971 PS6i4-H23 1963
Robert Lowell and Richard Wilbur are viewed as
marking "the real beginning of postwar American
poetry because they are the culmination of past
poetries." In addition to the two mainstreams of
modern poetry identified with William Carlos
Williams and T. S. Eliot, Hall perceives the emer-
gence of "a new kind of imagination" distinguished
by a subjective attitude directed toward the external
world. The postwar poets represented in this
collection include John Ashbery, Reed Whittemore,
Howard Nemerov, Robert Creeley, W. D. Snod-
grass, Robert Lowell, and James Wright. With
Robert Pack and Louis A. M. Simpson, Hall co-
edited New Poets of England and America (New
York, Meridian Books, 1957. 351 p. Meridian
books, M5o). In New Poets of England and Amer-
ica: Second Selection (Cleveland, Meridian Books
[1962] 384 p. Meridian books, Mi35), Hall
edited the English poets and Pack the American.
Sixteen poets under the age of 40 are represented in
American Poems; a Contemporary Collection (Car-
bondale, Southern Illinois University Press [1964]
200 p. Crosscurrents; modern critiques), edited by
Jascha F. Kessler.
1143. Jones, LeRoi, ed. The moderns; an anthol-
ogy of new writing in America. New York,
Corinth Books, 1963. xvi, 351 p.
63-11408 PS536.J6
Bibliographical references included in "Acknowl-
edgments" (p. [vii-viii]).
The contemporary American poet who gathered
these selections states that he has had more in mind
a "prose medium" and quality of excitement than
a record of a generation. The writers in this vol-
ume, says Jones, "exist out of a continuing tradition
of populist modernism that has characterized the
best of twentieth-century American writing."
Rather than categorize the writers, Jones empha-
sizes the general and common qualities of the selec-
tions, which together make up "a body of work that
seeks its identification and delineation as a depar-
ture from the main body of popular American
fiction." Among the "moderns" included are
William Eastlake, Edward Dorn, John Rechy,
Michael Rumaker, Paul Metcalf, Robert Creeley,
Diane Di Prima, Hubert Selby, and William Bur-
roughs. Some of the same writers are represented
in Writers in Revolt, an Anthology ( [New York]
Berkley Pub. Corp. [1965, Ci963] 384 p. A
Berkley medallion book), edited by Richard Seaver,
Terry Southern, and Alexander Trocchi.
1144. Malin, Irving, and Irwin Stark, eds. Break-
through: a treasury of contemporary
74 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
American-Jewish literature. New York, McGraw-
Hill [1964] 376 p. 63-13261 PS508.J4M3
Ranges from Howard Nemerov and Allen Gins-
berg to Philip Rahv, Alfred Kazin, and Philip Roth.
An introductory essay on Jewish literature in the
United States offers an abbreviated version of the
ideas discussed in Malin's Jews and Americans
(Carbondale, Southern Illinois University Press
[1965] 193 p. Crosscurrents: modern critiques).
1145. Hill, Herbert, ed. Soon, one morning; new
writing by American Negroes, 1940—1962.
Selected and edited, with an introduction and bio-
graphical notes, by Herbert Hill. New York,
Knopf, 1963. 617 p. 62-15567 PS5o8.N3H5
Essays, fiction, and poetry. Among the writers
included are Ralph Ellison, James Baldwin,
Langston Hughes, Richard Wright, Ann Petry,
Gwendolyn Brooks, LeRoi Jones, and J. Saunders
Redding. Arna Bontemps has edited an anthology,
American Negro Poetry (New York, Hill & Wang
[1963] 197 p.), showing the accomplishments of
numerous Negro poets, including James Weldon
Johnson, Paul Laurence Dunbar, Claude McKay,
Jean Toomer, Countee Cullen, Margaret Walker,
and Richard Wright.
1 146. Miller, Perry, ed. Major writers of America.
New York, Harcourt, Brace & World [1962]
2 v. 62-12181 PS507.M48
To "vindicate the study of American literature,"
this anthology includes those writers who have made
their mark on world literature. Twenty-three noted
literary specialists have individually edited chapters
on 28 men of letters from William Bradford to
William Faulkner. There are lengthy introduc-
tions for each author, generous selections from his
shorter works, and suggestions for further reading.
Among the editors and their subjects are Samuel
Eliot Morison on William Bradford; Marius Bewley
on Cooper and Bryant; R. W. B. Lewis on Whit-
man; Richard Wilbur on Poe; Richard Chase on
Melville; Northrop Frye on Emily Dickinson; Eric
Bentley on Eugene O'Neill; R. P. Blackmur on
T. S. Eliot; and Irving Howe on Faulkner. Miller
has also edited materials for The Golden Age of
American Literature (New York, G. Braziller,
1959. 514 p.). He contends that a "golden age"
in American literature was an actuality for the two
decades prior to the Civil War and supports his
contention with selections from Poe, Emerson,
Thoreau, Hawthorne, Melville, and Whitman.
1147. Miller, Perry, and Thomas H. Johnson, eds.
The Puritans. Rev. ed. New York, Harper
& Row [1963] 2 v. (Harper torchbooks. The
Academy library) 63—1710 PS53I.M5 1963
A revised edition of no. 2345 in the 1960 Guide,
with bibliographies updated by George McCandlish.
1148. Olson, Elder, ed. American lyric poems,
from colonial times to the present. New
York, Appleton-Century-Crofts [1964] 166 p.
(Goldentree books) 64—17762 PS593-L8O53
Observations on the qualities and history of
American lyric poetry precede a collection of lyrics
by 79 American poets. Olson traces the develop-
ment of this poetic form from Edward Taylor and
Anne Bradstreet to present-day lyricists.
1149. Partisan review. The Partisan review an-
thology. Edited by William Phillips and
Philip Rahv. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston
[1962] 490 p. 62—12136 AC5.P35
The first anthology of writings in the Partisan
Review to draw selections from its entire history,
beginning in 1937. Included are stories by Delmore
Schwartz, Saul Bellow, Bernard Malamud, James
Purdy, and others; among the American poets repre-
sented are Karl Shapiro, William Carlos Williams,
Robert Penn Warren, Robert Lowell, and Elizabeth
Bishop. Essays and reviews on literature and so-
ciety are by Lionel Trilling, Irving Howe, T. S.
Eliot, James Baldwin, Alfred Kazin, Daniel Aaron,
and Leslie Fiedler. Anthologies of writings in other
periodicals listed in the 1960 Guide have also been
published recently: Jubilee; One Hundred Years of
the Atlantic (Boston, Little, Brown [1957] 746 p.),
selected and edited by Edward Weeks and Emily
Flint; Gentlemen, Scholars, and Scoundrels; a
Treasury of the Best of Harper's Magazine From
1850 to the Present (New York, Harper [1959]
696 p.), edited by Horace Knowles; Opinions and
Perspectives From The New Yorf^ Times Boof(
Review (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1964. 441 p.),
edited by Ernest Francis Brown; The Saturday
Review Gallery (New York, Simon & Schuster,
1959. 481 p.), compiled by Jerome Beatty, Jr., and
the editors of the Saturday Review. "Little maga-
zine" anthologies include Anthology (New York,
Vintage Books [1961] 461 p. A Vintage book,
V— 197), compiled by Frederick Morgan from The
Hudson Review; The Chicago Review Anthology
([Chicago] University of Chicago Press [1959]
251 p.), edited by David Ray; and A Country in the
Mind; an Anthology of Stories and Poems From
The Western Review (Sausalito, Calif., Contact
Editions [1962] 290 p. Contact editions, 2),
edited by Ray B. West.
1150. Solomon, Eric, ed. The faded banners; a
treasury of nineteenth-century Civil War
fiction. New York, T. Yoseloff [1960] 336 p.
60-6839 PZi.S688Fad
1151. Steinmetz, Lee, ed. The poetry of the
American Civil War. [East Lansing]
Michigan State University Press [1960] 264 p.
59—15220 £647.885
The change from a romantic idealization of battle
to the grudging acceptance or hostile rejection of
the realities of war is captured in Solomon's an-
thology of Civil War fiction. Literary merit was
the first criterion for the selections included; there
is no unity of viewpoint or sectional preference, and
most of the works focus on the combat itself and
the psychological impact of civil war upon ordinary
Americans. Lee Steinmetz, in his anthology, has
chosen 30 representative poems from among more
than 200 poems written by Americans during the
i86o's. He gives preference to the less familiar
poets and emphasizes subject matter and theme
more than esthetic quality. Each of five sections
contains a general introduction to the subject matter
of the poems and the historical background of the
poetry, and each poem is, in addition, also related to
the whole body of Civil War poetry.
1152. Twayne's United States authors series.
Sylvia E. Bowman, editor. New York,
Twayne Publishers, 19614-
A series of more than a hundred biographical and
critical volumes, each approximately 175—200 pages
in length, which discuss the accomplishments, repu-
tation, and themes of a wide variety of American
authors. Most of the books in the series have been
written by professors at American colleges and uni-
versities and include selected bibliographical refer-
ences and biographical chronologies. Each text is
shaped according to the individual author being
studied. For a little-known author, the Twayne
authors series volume is often the only general bio-
graphical and critical treatment available. In the
case of writers about whom many works have been
published, the Twayne volume frequently serves to
synthesize known facts and previously expressed in-
terpretations. Many volumes in the Twayne series,
each volume of which is separately cataloged, are
listed under the individual authors in Chapter i,
"Literature," in this Supplement.
1153. University of Minnesota pamphlets on
American writers. William Van O'Connor,
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 75
Allen Tate, and Robert Penn Warren, editors.
Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1959+
A growing series of brief, inexpensive paperbacks
which treat major and minor American authors and
literary forms. Although most of the volumes are
devoted to individual authors, some cover general
topics, for example, Glauco Cambon's Recent
American Poetry ([1962] 48 p. no. 16. 62—62784
PS324-C27), Alan S. Downer's Recent American
Drama ([1961] 46 p. no. 7. 61-62514 PS35I.
063), Jack B. Ludwig's Recent American Novelists
([1962] 47 p. no. 22. 62-63700 PS379.L82),
and The American Short Story ( [1961] 47 p.
no. 14. 61—63843 PS374-S5R6 1961), by Danforth
R. Ross.
1154. Untermeyer, Louis, ed. The Britannica li-
brary of great American writing. Edited,
with historical notes and a running commentary.
Chicago, Britannica Press; and distributed in asso-
ciation with J. B. Lippincott, Philadelphia [1960]
2 v. (xvii, 1764 p.) 60—14545 PS507-U5
Excerpts from the narratives, short stories, poems,
and essays of American men of letters. Untermeyer
has also edited Modern American Poetry \_an<£\
Modern British Poetry, a combined new and en-
larged edition (New York, Harcourt, Brace &
World [1962] 701, 541 p.).
1155. Weber, Brom, ed. An anthology of Ameri-
can humor. New York, Crowell [1962]
584 p. 62-10284 PN6i62.W4
Includes bibliography.
1156. Carlisle, Henry C., ed. American satire in
prose and verse. New York, Random House
[1962] 464 p. 62—12727 PN623I.S2C3
American literary humor from the colonial period
to the late 1950*5 is represented in Weber's compila-
tion. Benjamin Franklin, Mark Twain, James
Thurber, and George Washington Harris are among
the widely recognized humorists included. Special
attention is devoted to the humor of the masters of
classic literature, including Hawthorne, Melville,
Poe, James, Eliot, and Hart Crane. The writers
represented in Carlisle's collection were chosen pri-
marily for their skill in unmasking American folly
and revealing the incongruities in American char-
acter and institutions. Selections range from the
pre-Civil-War period to the present and are ar-
ranged according to objects of satirical criticism.
76 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
B. History and Criticism
1157. Aaron, Daniel. Writers on the left; episodes
in American literary communism. New
York, Harcourt, Brace & World [1961] xvi, 460 p.
(Communism in American life)
61-13349 PS228.C6A2
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 401-448).
In his "social chronicle" of American literary
radicalism between 1912 and the early 1940'$, Aaron
traces the infatuation and ultimate disenchantment
of a selected group of American writers with left-
wing movements and ideologies. The earliest
rebels, rooted in the tradition of Emerson and Whit-
man, rejected intellectual socialism and looked hope-
fully to the anarchism and syndicalism of the day
for salvation. World War I and the Bolshevik
Revolution ended this phase and opened a 2O-year
period of dalliance with communism, shattered only
by the Russo-German pact of 1939. Although
Aaron sees few writers or critics unaffected by com-
munism between the wars, he regards his story as
but "one more turn" in the longer cycle of literary
revolt — like the others, beginning in hope and end-
ing in disillusion.
1158. Allen, Walter E. Tradition and dream; the
English and American novel from the twen-
ties to our time. London, Phoenix House [1964]
xxii, 346 p. 64—4173 PR88i.A42 1964
The "dream" in Allen's tide belongs to America;
the "tradition," to England. The English writer of
the 2Oth century has been constantly reminded, says
the author, of his personal limitations and of his
indebtedness to a mature literary and cultural heri-
tage, while the American writer seems to have been
impressed instead by his independence, his loneli-
ness, his cultural isolation. Notable American ex-
ceptions have been regionalists like Ellen Glasgow
and William Faulkner and, more recently, fiction
writers examining America's Jewish and Negro
communities, such as Saul Bellow and Ralph Ellison.
1159. Alvarez, Alfred. Stewards of excellence;
studies in modern English and American
poets. New York, Scribner [1958] 191 p.
58—12492 PR6o3.A4 1958
The London edition (Chatto & Windus) has the
title The Shaping Spirit.
A young British critic, in comparing eight out-
standing figures in modern American and British
poetry, stresses the differences between the two
traditions and the effect of cultural dissimilarities on
poetic tradition. Yeats, Auden, Empson, and
Lawrence are the English poets compared with
Eliot, Pound, Hart Crane, and Stevens.
1160. Bewley, Marius. The eccentric design; form
in the classic American novel. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1959. 327 p.
59-13769 PS37I.B4
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 3 14-324).
Having made a number of controversial state-
ments in an earlier work, The Complex Fate (1952),
the author devotes this study to detailing "the ec-
centric design" of the fate shared by major Ameri-
can writers. Abstraction and intelligence are the
main characteristics of this tradition, and no room
is left for "the so-called realists and naturalists"
whose symbols are "exterior frosting." John Adams,
Hamilton, and Jefferson are interpreted as being the
first great figures who sought to resolve the conflicts
inherent in American society.
1161. Bigelow, Gordon E. Rhetoric and Ameri-
can poetry of the early national period.
Gainesville, University of Florida Press, 1960. 77 p.
(University of Florida monographs. Humanities,
no. 4) 60-63133 PS3I4.B5
Includes bibliography.
A literary history of American poetry and rhetoric
from 1775 to 1815, concentrating on the major
poets of the period. The author cites the rhetorical
devices in the poetry of Freneau and other literary
figures to support his charge that the young Nation
encouraged politics and philosophies incompatible
with "the emotional and imaginative insight which
are necessary to poetic expression." A major part
of the discussion concerns the relationship of poetry
to rhetoric, the history of rhetoric, and the attitudes
of the populace to these two disciplines.
1162. Blanck, Jacob N. Bibliography of American
literature. New Haven, Yale University
Press, 1955-63. 4 v. 54-5283 71225.655
A monumental undertaking in American bibliog-
raphy, supervised by the Bibliographical Society of
America. Four volumes of the projected eight-
volume series, to encompass American authors who,
"in their own time at least, were known and read,"
had appeared by 1965. Some 35,000 items will ulti-
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 77
mately be included. The entries are limited to writ-
ings by the selected authors, who are arranged
alphabetically. The coverage of the first four vol-
umes extends from Henry Adams through Joseph
H. Ingraham. Blanck's preface in volume i de-
scribes the plan of the bibliography.
1163. Bode, Carl. The half-world of American
culture; a miscellany. Preface by C. P. Snow.
Carbondale, Southern Illinois University Press
[1965] xii, 259 p. 64-20257 PSi2i.B596
In this volume of essays, the author writes chiefly
about popular literature, analyzing such subjects as
19th-century pornography and the 20th-century
"parish" of Lloyd C. Douglas. While serving as
cultural attache to the American embassay in Lon-
don, Bode organized two series of lectures in which
noted American scholar-critics discussed prominent
figures and topics in American literature. The
lectures were edited for publication by Bode and
appeared as The Young Rebel in American Litera-
ture (New York, Praeger [1960, Ci959] 170 p.
Books that matter) and The Great Experiment in
American Literature (New York, Praeger [1961]
151 p. Books that matter). Bode is also the author
of The American Lyceum (New York, Oxford Uni-
versity Press, 1956. 275 p.).
1164. Bone, Robert A. The Negro novel in
America. New Haven, Yale University
Press, 1958. 268 p. (Yale publications in American
studies, 3) 58-11249 PSi53.N5B6
Bibliography: p. 233—250.
The author believes that there is a distinctly
"Negro" novel existing within and yet apart from
the broader traditions of American fiction and de-
riving its distinctiveness from the uniqueness of the
Negro experience in America. His book discusses
Negro novelists from 1890 to 1952 and divides the
subject into four distinct periods: 1890—1920, when
the rising middle class dominated Negro literature;
1920-30, the days of the "Negro Renaissance" and
the formation of a Negro intelligentsia; 1930—40, a
period dominated by the weight of the depression,
the flirtation with communism, the little magazines,
and the Federal writers' projects; and 1940-52, when
the Richard Wright school, raceless novels, and
portrayals of Negro life and culture all occurred
simultaneously and resulted in a flowering of the
Negro novel. An appendix ranks the novelists
from each of the four periods; a bibliography of 103
full-length Negro novels is included for specialists.
The American Negro Writer and His Roots (New
York, American Society of African Culture, 1960.
70 p.) comprises selected papers from the first Con-
ference of Negro Writers, held in New York in
March 1959, and features addresses by leading
Negro writers.
1165. Bowden, Edwin T. The dungeon of the
heart; human isolation and the American
novel. New York, Macmillan, 1961. 175 p.
61-8262 PS374.I8B6
Twelve American works of fiction which "form
together an extended essay" on human isolation
within American life are discussed, and the cultural
conditions on which they are based are reviewed.
They are The Deerslayer; The Scarlet Letter; Huc\-
leberry Finn; Moby DicI^; My Antonia; The
Portrait of a Lady; The Rise of Silas Lapham;
Winesburg, Ohio; The Grapes of Wrath; Loo\
Homeward, Angel; Light in August; and The
Catcher in the Rye.
1166. Brooks, Cleanth. The hidden God; studies
in Hemingway, Faulkner, Yeats, Eliot, and
Warren. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1963.
136 p. 63-9308 PS228.C5B7
Lectures originally delivered in 1955 to the Con-
ference in Theology for College Faculty at Trinity
College, Hartford, Conn. Although they were de-
signed for a Christian audience, the emphasis is not
upon Christian writers in any orthodox sense but
upon the religious vision implicit within some litera-
ture which has been criticized as amoral or im-
moral. Brooks illustrates the kinship of these
writers with the Christian theologian Paul Tillich
and with the French existentialists: the theme com-
mon to all is a protest against the dehumanization
of man and against the denial of free will.
1167. Brooks, Van Wyck. Days of the phoenix;
the nineteen-twenties I remember. New
York, Dutton, 1957. 193 p.
57-5335
1168. Brooks, Van Wyck. From the shadow of
the mountain; my post-meridian years. New
York, Dutton, 1961. 202 p.
61—11417 PS3503.R7297Z5
The first volume of Brooks' autobiography, Scenes
and Portraits: Memories of Childhood and Youth
(one of the tides listed in the annotation for no.
2380 in the 1960 Guide), began the life story of
this pioneer in the study of a national literature.
Days of the Phoenix continues the story through the
1920'$ and is particularly notable for the account of
the days he spent in a mental institution. The final
volume of the trilogy, From the Shadow of the
Mountain, begins in 1931 with his emergence from
the institution and continues to his 75th year.
Essays, aphorisms, sketches, and reminiscences, most
/
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
of them previously out of print, were published in
From a Writer's Noteboo^ (New York, Dutton,
1958. 182 p.).
1169. Brooks, Van Wyck. The dream of Arcadia;
American writers and artists in Italy, 1760—
1915. New York, Dutton, 1958. 272 p.
58-9597 DG457.A6B7
As a repository of Old World culture, Italy stimu-
lated the minds and imaginations of generations of
American artists and intellectuals who found there
the "just taste" still wanting in the youthful United
States. Through a discussion of mid-i8th-century
visits by painters and the later travels of Irving,
Cooper, Longfellow, Hawthorne, James, Howells,
and others, Brooks re-creates the scenes and atmos-
phere as they registered upon the impressionable
minds of eager Americans who drew upon their
Italian experiences in their writing. Nathalia
Wright treats more directly the appearance of these
influences in the fiction of American writers in her
study American Novelists in Italy (Philadelphia,
University of Pennsylvania Press [1965] 288 p.).
1170. Broussard, Louis. American drama; con-
temporary allegory from Eugene O'Neill to
Tennessee Williams. Norman, University of Okla-
homa Press [1962] 145 p. 62—16479 PS35I.B7
Includes bibliography.
A study of 20th-century American reenactments
of the "Everyman" theme by 10 "expressionistic"
dramatists. Although focusing upon a limited num-
ber of plays, the author also touches on other plays
which embody similar allegorical themes and on
other art forms concerned with the same problems
and conclusions. Following an introductory chap-
ter on "The Motivating Force of Expressionism,"
the study examines playwrights Eugene O'Neill,
Elmer Rice, John Howard Lawson, Philip Barry,
T. S. Eliot, Thornton Wilder, Robert Sherwood,
Tennessee Williams, Arthur Miller, and Archibald
MacLeish.
1171. Brown, Deming B. Soviet attitudes toward
American writing. Princeton, N.J., Prince-
ton University Press, 1962. 338 p.
62-11954 PSi59-R8B7
Includes bibliography.
A broad and authoritative investigation by a pro-
fessor of Slavic literature and languages who also
holds a degree in American literature. Brown made
two trips to the USSR while gathering information
on Soviet criticism of American literature. The
book has several uses. It offers a description of the
publication and reception of American books in the
USSR, discussing censorship, the popularity of dif-
ferent American authors, and Soviet critical evalua-
tion of books from the 1920*5 to 1960; it presents
ideological, esthetic, and political aspects of Soviet
criticism, summarizes its strengths and weaknesses,
and considers the effectiveness of critical propaganda
in dictating esthetic choice to the reading public of
the Soviet Union; and, finally, it evaluates the
effectiveness of American writers in communicating
a cultural understanding of the United States within
a country where avowed opposition to American
culture and values has been a virtue.
1172. Cambon, Glauco. The inclusive flame;
studies in American poetry. Bloomington,
Indiana University Press [1963] 248 p.
63-16612 PS305.C3I3
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. [2291-245).
This work was originally published in 1956 as
an introduction to American poetry for an Italian
audience. The author translated his volume into
English and has offered it to American readers as
a scholarly contribution expressing the personal
viewpoints of a native Italian who became a pro-
fessor of comparative literature at Cambridge.
Cambon takes his title from the effort of American
poets to capture the totality of American experience
through poetry. Nine American poets from Poe
to Robert Lowell are studied in this search for
"Americanness."
1173. Chase, Richard V. The American novel
and its tradition. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1957. 266 p. (Doubleday anchor
books, An6) 57-11412 PS37I.C5
Includes bibliography.
A study in the comparative traditions of fiction
in England and the United States. Although the
American tradition inevitably sprang from its Brit-
ish parent, it is seen as coming under the influence
of the romantic French and Russian writers during
the i88o's and i89o's. The author's purpose is to
assess "the significance of the fact that since the
earliest days the American novel, in its most original
and characteristic form, has worked out its destiny
and defined itself by incorporating an element of
romance." The result is a "freer, more daring,
more brilliant fiction that contrasts with the solid
moral inclusiveness and massive equability of the
English novel." The romanticism of Brockden
Brown, Cooper, Hawthorne, Melville, James, Mark
Twain, Fitzgerald, Frank Norris, and Faulkner is
studied in 10 essays. Two appendixes enlarge upon
the text.
1174. Contemporary authors; the international bio-
bibliographical guide to current authors and
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 79
their works, v. i+ Detroit, Gale Research, 1962+
62—52046 Z 1 224.06
A compendium of information on major and
minor living authors in fields other than science and
technology. Arranged alphabetically by author, the
sketches are based on responses to questionnaires.
Both personal and professional information is in-
cluded, as well as lists of published writings and
works in progress. Fourteen volumes had been
published by the end of 1965. Indexes are cumula-
tive, and information on authors is updated when
new works appear.
1175. Cowley, Malcolm, ed. After the genteel
tradition; American writers, 1910—1930.
With a preface by Harry T. Moore. Carbondale,
Southern Illinois University Press [1964] 210 p.
(Crosscurrents; modern critiques)
64—11608 PS22I.C645 1964
This revised edition of no. 2406 in the 1960 Guide
includes a new foreword, an expanded "literary
calendar" for the years 1911—30, and a new chapter
on Robinson, written by the editor.
1176. Cunliffe, Marcus. The literature of the
United States. [Rev. ed.] Baltimore, Pen-
guin Books [1961] 384 p. (Pelican books, A2&9)
62-788 PS92.C8 1961
A critical-historical account of American litera-
ture from colonial times through the 1 950*5, written
by an English scholar sympathetic to literary tradi-
tions in both Britain and the United States. Noting
that his British readers often find the notion of a
distinctly American literature difficult to accept,
he makes a point of stressing the peculiarly Ameri-
can qualities of our national letters. In addition to
discussing the traditional genres, the author shows
enthusiasm for the history of American criticism,
especially in its efforts to claim certain characteristics
as peculiarly American.
1177. Davis, David B. Homicide in American
fiction, 1798—1860; a study in social values.
Ithaca, N.Y., Cornell University Press [1957]
xviii, 346 p. 57-4688 PS374.H6D3
Bibliography: p. 315—340.
A study of American attitudes toward homicide
as evidenced in both popular and classical novels of
the 1 9th century. The author states in his preface
that "this is a historical analysis of certain ideas as-
sociated with homicide, including beliefs concerning
the origin and development of human evil, the ex-
tent of freedom and responsibility, the nature of
mental and emotional abnormality, the influence of
American social forces on violence, and the morality
of capital punishment."
1178. Deutsch, Babette. Poetry in our time; a
critical survey of poetry in the English-
speaking world, 1900 to 1960. 2d ed., rev. and enl.
Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1963. 457 p.
(Anchor books) 63-8763 PR6o 1.043 1963
Babette Deutsch was one of the first critics and
historians of modern poetry and has been publish-
ing and updating her studies for the last three
decades. The best known of these is her Poetry in
Our Time, no. 2414 in the 1960 Guide, which first
appeared in 1952. The new edition is a revision
and enlargement of the entire volume, written with
the conviction that nothing can deal with the real-
ities of the 2oth century as meaningfully as the
poetry of this century. Also revised and enlarged
is her Poetry Handboof^ (New York, Funk & Wag-
nails [1962] 181 p.), a "dictionary of the terms
used in discussing verse techniques and some of the
larger aspects of poetry, together with examples of
poetic practice."
1179. Dickinson, A. T. American historical fic-
tion. New York, Scarecrow Press, 1958.
3 14 P-. 58-7803 PS374.H5D5
Bibliography: p. 225-230.
An annotated bibliography of 1,909 American
novels, including classic works, popular narratives,
regional tales, diaries, and chronicles. Annotations
are objective rather than critical. Robert A. Lively's
Fiction Fights the Civil War (Chapel Hill, Univer-
sity of North Carolina Press [1957] 23° P-) is a
study of over five hundred novels about the war.
1 1 80. Downer, Alan S., ed. American drama and
its critics; a collection of critical essays. Chi-
cago, University of Chicago Press [1965] xxi, 258
p. (Gemini books. Patterns of literary criticism)
65-24424 PS35i.D59
Selections ranging from James A. Herne's end-of-
the-century commentary to the more recent views of
Eric Bentley, Tom Driver, and Robert Brustein are
included in an anthology intended to indicate "the
variety of critical experiences that accompanied the
development of the modern American theater." A
similar collection written from the viewpoint of the
playwright is American Playwrights on Drama
(New York, Hill & Wang [1965] 174 p. A
Dramabook), edited by Horst Frenz and featuring
22 statements by 14 dramatists, including O'Neill,
Maxwell Anderson, Thornton Wilder, Tennessee
Williams, William Inge, Archibald MacLeish, Lor-
raine Hansberry, and Edward Albee.
1 181 . Dusenbury, Winifred L. The theme of lone-
liness in modern American drama. Gaines-
ville, University of Florida Press, 1960. 231 p.
60-10228 PS338.L6D8 1960
80 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Twenty-six major American plays since 1920 are
discussed as they exemplify the theme of loneliness
in American life. The criteria for the selection of
plays required that they "meet the test of a truthful
portrayal of American life" and "through their aes-
thetic heightening of the truth, have significance for
modern audiences." The plays are categorized ac-
cording to the cause of loneliness: personal failure,
homelessness, an unhappy family life, the failure of
a love affair, socioeconomic forces, a conflict be-
tween the material and the spiritual, the isolation of
a hero, and unhappiness in the South. Arthur Mil-
ler, Eugene O'Neill, Carson McCullers, John Stein-
beck, Tennessee Williams, William Saroyan, and
William Inge are among the 20 playwrights repre-
sented.
1182. Eisinger, Chester E. Fiction of the forties.
Chicago, University of Chicago Press [1963]
392 p. 63—20904 PS379-E4
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
368-383).
The writers of a troubled decade and their search
for meaning in a rapidly changing world are dis-
cussed. The author believes that fiction mirrored
the innermost fears and urges of the American peo-
ple during the Second World War and the years
immediately following. Naturalism, liberalism,
conservatism, the "gothic spirit," and existentialism
all found their best expression in the personal inter-
pretations which juxtaposed self and society in a
desperate struggle to discover both. The writers
examined most closely include John Dos Passes,
Nelson Algren, Eudora Welty, Truman Capote,
James Gould Cozzens, and William Faulkner. An
appendix gives a chronological listing of some 150
fiction titles published from 1939 to 1953.
1183. Falk, Robert P. The Victorian mode in
American fiction, 1865—1885. [East Lans-
ing] Michigan State University Press, 1965 [Ci964]
1 88 p. 64—21643 PS377.F3
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 167-182).
Victorian realism is interpreted as coloring a dis-
tinct literary period, existing within its own life
cycle, and moving from a hesitant Victorian roman-
ticism to a mature "vision of reality." Falk places
the novel at the center of his account. Henry James,
William Dean Howells, John W. De Forest, and
Mark Twain, the major practitioners of the craft at
this time, are discussed in relation to the movement
toward literary realism. Warner BerthofFs The
Ferment of Realism; American Literature, 1884—
79/9 (New York, Free Press [1965] 330 p.), at-
tempts to trace the effects of realism in literary, so-
cial, intellectual, and historical works of a later
period. The Realistic Movement in American Writ-
ing (New York, Odyssey Press [1965] 678 p. The
Odyssey surveys of American writing), compiled by
Bruce R. McElderry, is an anthology of fiction pub-
lished during the period 1865—1900.
1184. Fiedler, Leslie A. Love and death in the
American novel. New York, Criterion
Books [1960] 603 p. 59-12195 PS374.L6F5
Fiedler draws upon the depth psychology of Freud
and Jung to explain what he regards as a basic fea-
ture of American letters. Reflecting American so-
ciety, the novel retreated into a fanciful world of
nature and boyhood adventure, avoiding a conscious
confrontation of sex and savagery. Submerged into
the subconscious, these primeval forces have found
symbolic expression in the repeated occurrence of
thinly veiled homosexuality and demonic violence
in American fiction. Mark Twain's Huck and Jim,
along with Ishmael and Queequeg in Moby Dicf(,
are thus seen as manifestations of repressed libido,
while Cooper's tales become an outlet for the sav-
agery lying beneath the surface of American life.
Fiedler has also written numerous individual essays
on literature, some of which have been collected in
No! In Thunder (Boston, Beacon Press [1960] 336
p.). His Waiting for the End (New York, Stein &
Day [1964] 256 p.) contains reflections on the
present and future of American letters.
1185. Floan, Howard R. The South in northern
eyes, 1831—1861. Austin, University of
Texas Press [1958] 198 p.
57-8824 F2I3.F55 1958
Bibliographical footnotes.
The psychological conditioning for the "irrepres-
sible" Civil War is studied through an examination
of the views of major northern literary figures in the
years prior to the conflict. The general pattern dis-
cerned is one of opposition to the South on the part
of New England writers, balanced to some extent by
sympathy among certain New Yorkers. To support
his conclusions, the author cites the New England
literary and general magazines as well as various
regional writers, including Longfellow, Holmes,
Hawthorne, Emerson, Thoreau, Lowell, Whittier,
Garrison, and Wendell Phillips. Melville, Bryant,
and Whitman express the partially sympathetic
viewpoint of the New York area toward the South.
1 1 86. Fraiberg, Louis B. Psychoanalysis & Amer-
ican literary criticism. Detroit, Wayne State
University Press, 1960. 263 p.
59-11980 PS78.F7
The author discusses the use of Freudian theories
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 8 1
of psychoanalysis and art by various prominent
American critics, including Van Wyck Brooks, Jo-
seph Wood Krutch, Ludwig Lewisohn, Edmund
Wilson, Kenneth Burke, and Lionel Trilling. Tril-
ling is interpreted as adhering most faithfully to
psychoanalytic findings.
1187. Frohock, Wilbur M. The novel of violence
in America. [2d ed., rev. and enl.] Dallas,
Southern Methodist University Press [1958, Ci957]
238 p. 57-!4767 PS379.F7 1958
A substantial revision of no. 2427 in the 1960
Guide, featuring a new preface and a "radical alter-
ation" in the treatment of Faulkner and Heming-
way. Three new chapters have been included: "Mr.
Warren's Albatross," criticizing Robert Penn War-
ren's fiction for evasion of the actual; "James Agee
- The Question of Wasted Talent," on the loss of
potential novelists to film and magazine writing;
and "The Menace of the Paperback," in which the
relation of paperback "gimmick" fiction to the fu-
ture of the novel is discussed.
1 1 88. Frohock, Wilbur M. Strangers to this
ground; cultural diversity in contemporary
American writing. Dallas, Southern Methodist
University Press [1961] i8op.
61-17183 PS22I.F7
That national fiction affirms national diversity is
the thesis established in this study of seven writers.
The author believes that leaving home and begin-
ning life in a new region and a different cultural
environment constitute the decisive experience most
Americans face — the "Great American Topos."
Numerous novelists are cited as dealing with this
problem, but Frohock concentrates on Fitzgerald,
Pound, Emily Dickinson, Edna St. Vincent Millay,
James Gould Cozzens, Lionel Trilling, and Jack
Kerouac. The concluding essay considers the chal-
lenge to literary critics within the universities to
relate literature, broadly conceived, to the cultural
variety existing in American life.
1189. Fuller, Edmund. Man in modern fiction;
some minority opinions on contemporary
American writing. New York, Random House
[1958] 171 p. 58-7664 PS379.F8
Writing from the viewpoint of the Judeo-Christian
moral tradition, Fuller challenges the tendencies to
depict deviates as representative of modern man and
to view man as a godless, depraved creature whose
life lacks both meaning and nobility. Writers
singled out to illustrate the "destructive and anti-
social" nature of much modern fiction and criticism
include James Jones, Jack Kerouac, John Steinbeck,
Norman Mailer, Tennessee Williams, and Nelson
Algren. In BooJ^s With Men Behind Them (New
York, Random House [1962] 240 p.), Fuller offers
his candidates for "a renewed literature in the great
tradition" of man as a rational, free, responsible, and
purposeful creature of God: C. S. Lewis, C. P. Snow,
Alan Paton, Thornton Wilder, Gladys Schmitt,
J. R. R. Tolkien, and Charles Williams.
1 190. Fussell, Edwin S. Frontier: American liter-
ature and the American West. Princeton,
N. J., Princeton University Press, 1965. xv, 450 p.
64-12181 PSi69.W4F8
Bibliographical footnotes.
The author contends that the frontier was "the
ideal mimesis for the mid-nineteenth century Amer-
ican literary problem, an almost perfect instrument
for blending the most realistic native materials with
the most far-reaching social criticism, moral com-
mentary, or philosophical speculation." Accord-
ingly, in penetrating the meaning of early American
literature, "the word West, with all its derivatives
and variants, is the all but inevitable key." Fussell
begins by tracing possible origins for the various
metaphors of the West and illustrating how the
frontier metaphor developed and declined in the
writings of major American authors. He alludes to
the many uses of western names and places in the
writings of Cooper, Hawthorne, Poe, Thoreau, Mel-
ville, and Whitman and finds the frontier metaphor
a central factor in each. Wilson O. Clough, in The
Necessary Earth; Nature and Solitude in American
Literature (Austin, University of Texas Press [1964]
234 p.), offers conjectures on the frontier as a favo-
rite source of native myth and on the extent to
which this metaphor is influential in the 2oth
century.
1191. Gaston, Edwin W. The early novel of the
Southwest. [Albuquerque] University of
New Mexico Press [1961] xiii, 318 p.
60—11693 PS277.G3
"Related studies": p. 288—291. Bibliography: p.
292—302.
A critical history of representative southwestern
fiction written in the period 1819—1918 by authors
who either lived in or had firsthand knowledge of
the Southwest. A study of 40 novels leads to the
conclusion that the general development of the early
regional novel follows the romantic tradition of the
mainstream of American fiction, evolving from the
naive to the complex and mature. A general
survey of the novels is followed by studies of plot
types, techniques, character portrayal, impressions
of geography, and intellectual or philosophical con-
cepts. Appendixes contain synopses of the novels
and biographical data on the authors.
82 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1192. Gohdes, Clarence L. F. Bibliographical
guide to the study of the literature of the
U.S.A. ad ed., rev. and enl. Durham, N.C., Duke
University Press [1963] 125 p.
63—18575 Zi225.G6 1963
The author's 35 selective lists cover the methodol-
ogy and technique of literary studies and American
literary history and criticism as well as the authori-
tative works in such areas of Americana as biog-
raphy, art, religion, and comparative literature.
Brief annotations cover the scope and significance of
the more than 700 books listed. A useful comple-
ment is James L. Woodress' Dissertations in Amer-
ican Literature, 1891—1955, With Supplement, 1956—
1961 (Durham, N.C., Duke University Press, 1962.
138 p.).
1193. Gossett, Louise Y. Violence in recent south-
ern fiction. Durham, N.C., Duke Univer-
sity Press, 1965. xi, 207 p. 65—13656 PS26i.G6
That violence is the dominating element in south-
ern fiction since 1930 is the contention advanced in
this study of the work of n writers, from the pre-
1940 writings of William Faulkner, Erskine Cald-
well, and Thomas Wolfe to the post-i94o work of
William Styron, Flannery O'Connor, and Eudora
Welty. Noting that recent southern fiction has been
discussed in studies of the grotesque by William
Van O'Connor and Irving Malin, Miss Gossett
emphasizes the violence that often accompanies the
incongruities and distortions. She sees violence as
"part of the total response of creative artists to
jarring changes in man's view of himself" and as
an expression of the complicated history of the
South.
1194. Haraszti, Zoltan. The enigma of the Bay
Psalm Book. [Chicago] University of Chi-
cago Press [1956] 143 p. facsims., port.
56—5128 651440.6415^13
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
119-139).
As only 1 1 copies of the original Bay Psalm Boof^
of 1640 survive — and only five of these are complete
— the University of Chicago issued The Bay Psalm
Boof(, a Facsimile Reprint of the First Edition of
1640 ( [295] p.) in 1956. In this companion vol-
ume, Haraszti has examined the famous book as a
literary object and has uncovered important facts
and rectified misconceptions. He notes that, con-
trary to the usual assumption, John Cotton rather
than Richard Mather wrote the preface. Haraszti
also challenges earlier speculations concerning the
authorship of the Puritan translation and discusses
the historical background of the translation, the
text of the book, and problems for the scholar in
uncovering further clues to the authorship of indi-
vidual passages.
1195. Hassan, Ihab H. Radical innocence; studies
in the contemporary American novel.
Princeton, N.J., Princeton University Press, 1961.
362 p. 61-7416 PS379.H32
Fiction after Hemingway and Faulkner is viewed
as having created a new fictional hero, possessed by
"radical innocence." As an existentialist who tries
responsibly to reconcile himself to destructive en-
counters with experience, this victimized, innocent
hero struggles to overcome defeat as he is initiated
into the contradictions of his culture. After devel-
oping his metaphor for modern literature, Hassan
considers nine novelists: William Styron, Harvey
Swados, Norman Mailer, Frederick Buechner, Ber-
nard Malamud, Ralph Ellison, Herbert Gold, John
Cheever, and J. P. Donleavy. The last section dis-
cusses the synthesis between art and meaningful
reality in the fiction of Carson McCullers, Truman
Capote, J. D. Salinger, and Saul Bellow.
1196. Hicks, Granville, ed. The living novel, a
symposium. New York, Macmillan, 1957.
230 p. 57-12221 PS379.H5
As a reply to those who regard the American
novel as dead or dying, 10 contemporary novelists
have written essays on their occupation. Although
the tone varies from anger to detached and critical
introspection, an intense devotion to craft is empha-
sized. The contributors are Saul Bellow, Flannery
O'Connor, Herbert Gold, Ralph Ellison, Mark
Harris, Paul Boles, John Brooks, Wright Morris,
Harvey Swados, and Jessamyn West. Hicks con-
cludes the volume with an afterword on "The
Enemies of the Novel."
1197. Hoffman, Daniel G. Form and fable in
American fiction. New York, Oxford Uni-
versity Press, 1961. 368 p. 61—8371 PS377-H6
Ten romances and tales are analyzed to show how
folklore and mythology expressed the themes of
19th-century prose and affected the form and con-
tent of American fiction. Irving, Hawthorne, Mel-
ville, and Mark Twain, in their attempts to define
the underlying themes of national life, are said to
have turned inevitably toward the common arche-
typal patterns of journey, quest, and initiation. The
meaning of the term "romance" is amplified and
explored as Hoffman stresses the significant impact
of magic, ritual, myth, and folklore upon our writers.
1198. Hoffman, Frederick J. Freudianism and
the literary mind. 2d ed. Baton Rouge,
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 83
Louisiana State University Press, 1957. 350 p.
57-11542 PN49.H6 1957
Bibliography: p. 331—341.
A complete revision of a 1945 publication men-
tioned in the annotation for no. 2440 in the 1960
Guide. Although the substance of the original
volume remains, Hoffman advises in his preface
that he has amplified, cut, updated, and refined the
language. In addition, he has included a detailed
study of Fitzgerald's Tender Is the Night and an
appendix reprinting an essay entitled "Psychology
and Literature," first published in the Kenyan
Review in 1957.
1199. Hoffman, Frederick J., ed. Marginal man-
ners; the variants of bohemia. Evanston,
111., Row, Peterson [1962] 182 p.
62-4798 PS536.H6
A collection of essays, stories, and poems defining
and describing the history of the socially dissident,
the nonconformist, and the economic failure.
Among these "marginal men" are beatniks, bo-
hemians, expatriates, hipsters, bums, hoboes, and
outsiders — types the author has distinguished from
one another and related to the social history of
different periods. Excerpts and essays are used to
show that each group is identifiable on the basis of
its language, values, and experiences.
1200. Hoffman, Frederick J., ed. Perspectives on
modern literature. Evanston, 111., Row,
Peterson [1962] 242 p. 62—4217 PR473-H6
A selection of readings arranged under such
topics as "Culture and the Intellectual," "The
Dignity and Responsibility of Art," "The 1930*5 —
The Survival Values of Tradition," "The Leftist
Imperative," and "The Revolt against Ideology."
Among the authors represented are H. L. Mencken,
Ezra Pound, Hart Crane, William Faulkner, and
Norman Mailer.
1 20 1. Howard, Leon. Literature and the Ameri-
can tradition. Garden City, N.Y., Double-
day, 1960. 354 p. 60—5933 PS88.H65
A survey of American literature from the time of
the Puritan and transcendental influences to the
present, written to answer the question, "Does the
literary history of America reveal the existence of
an attitude of mind consistent and durable enough
to be called an aspect of the national character?"
Stressing the traditional periods and movements,
Howard concludes that the key to the best in Amer-
ican literature lies in the attitude of Faulkner and
Hemingway — their belief in "the creative power of
the human spirit to endure and prevail and to
exist in the meanest and queerest of individuals."
1202. Hubbell, Jay B. South and Southwest; liter-
ary essays and reminiscences. Durham,
N.C., Duke University Press, 1965. 369 p.
65-26839 PSi2i.H83
"Publications of Jay B. Hubbell": p. 365-369.
Sixteen essays, including reminiscences based
upon the author's experiences as a teacher, editor,
and author, as well as historical and literary studies
supplementing the materials presented in his earlier
publications. Among the essays are recollections of
his years as editor of Southwest Review, 1924—27, as
visiting professor in American literature at the
University of Vienna, 1949—50, and as one of the
founders of American Literature, for which he
served as chairman of the board of editors from
1928 to 1954. In his Southern Life in Fiction
(Athens, University of Georgia Press [1960] 99 p.
Eugenia Dorothy Blount Lamar memorial lectures,
1959), Hubbell comments upon images of the South
in literature and history, protesting that the South
has often been misrepresented in fiction.
1203. Hungerford, Edward B., ed. Poets in pro-
gress; critical prefaces to ten contemporary
Americans. [Evanston, 111.] Northwestern Uni-
versity Press, 1962. 213 p. 62-10612 PS324.H8
Bibliography: p. [209]— 213.
Ten American poets who have won critical ac-
claim since World War II are discussed by current
or former English professors at Northwestern Uni-
versity. Each of the contributors writes about a
personal favorite, and several have previously writ-
ten longer critical works on their subjects. The
poets considered are Theodore Roethke, Robert
Lowell, Stanley Kunitz, Richard Wilbur, Richard
Eberhart, W. D. Snodgrass, Howard Nemerov, J. V.
Cunningham, Randall Jarrell, and W. S. Merwin.
1204. Hyman, Stanley E. The promised end;
essays and reviews, 1942—1962. Cleveland,
World Pub. Co. C0^] 380 p.
63-18586 PN5ii.H9
These miscellaneous essays, dating from 1942 to
1962, treat a wide variety of themes and contexts
but reflect Hyman's steady interest in American
folk traditions, mythology, and contemporary writ-
ing and culture. The author has corrected errors
of fact in the essays as they were initially published
and has occasionally noted his disagreement with his
own original opinions. Some of the writers who
figure prominently in the essays are John Steinbeck,
John Peale Bishop, Herman Melville, David
Daiches, Isaac Babel, Richard Wright, and Ralph
Ellison; general topics include "American Negro
Literature and Folk Tradition," "Some Trends in
/ A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the Novel," "Stances Toward Mass Culture," and
"The Child Ballad in America."
1205. Jones, Howard Mumford. History and the
contemporary; essays in nineteenth-century
literature. Madison, University of Wisconsin Press,
1964. 176 p. 64—14505 PS2OI.J58
Includes bibliographical references.
Nine essays emphasizing the lasting qualities in
the works of some 19th-century men of letters whom
the author believes contemporary literary historians
are apt to neglect. Jones holds that the intellectual
giants of the igth century assumed a responsibility
for culture and the perpetuation of a literary tradi-
tion, whereas 20th-century writers have not. Coop-
er and Thoreau are interpreted as philosophic
moralists, the former interested in cultural dilem-
mas and the latter sensitive to human nature.
Holmes is evaluated as a free-ranging intellectual
concerned with the great philosophical problems of
history, while Poe is reread as offering an exercise
in the psychology of a standard 19th-century hero.
Whittier reconsidered is found to have given the
best American expression of faith in the goodness of
God and to have achieved lasting beauty in his
poetry.
1206. Jones, Howard Mumford. The theory of
American literature. Reissued, with a new
concluding chapter and rev. bibliography. Ithaca,
N.Y., Cornell University Press [1965] 225 p.
66-272 PS3I.J6 1965
Bibliography: p. 207—215.
An updated edition of no. 2446 in the 1960 Guide.
The third edition of Guide to American literature
and Its Backgrounds Since /Spo (Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1964. 240 p.), compiled
by Jones and Richard M. Ludwig, is a revised and
enlarged edition of no. 2447 in the 1960 Guide.
1207. Kaul, A. N. The American vision; actual
and ideal society in nineteenth-century fic-
tion. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1963.
340 p. (Yale publications in American studies, 7)
63-9309 PS374.S7K3 1963
Bibliography: p. 325—334.
A study of the social themes in the fiction of
Melville, Hawthorne, Cooper, and Mark Twain.
The author examines the dialectic between the real
society which formed the background for each
writer and the idealized society which each envi-
sioned. A concluding note discusses "Social Real-
ity and the Form of American Fiction."
1208. Kazin, Alfred. Contemporaries. [Essays]
Boston, Little, Brown [1962] 513 p.
62—10528 PS352I.A995C6
A catholic collection of literary essays, many pre-
viously published and well known, edited and
arranged to indicate the intellectual heritage of
modern American literature. Initial chapters dis-
cuss the relevance of the American past and the
19th-century classic writers. Saul Bellow, Robert
Lowell, Norman Mailer, Karl Shapiro, Nelson
Algren, James Agee, J. F. Powers, J. D. Salinger,
Truman Capote, James Baldwin, Kenneth Rexroth,
and Bernard Malamud are among the 20th-century
writers included. Other chapters comment on
"The European Current," "Freud and His Conse-
quences," "The Puzzle of Modern Society," and
"The Critic's Task."
1209. Klein, Marcus. After alienation; American
novels in mid-century. Cleveland, World
Pub. Co. [1964] 307 p. 63-19731 PS379-K5
Bibliography: p. 305— 307.
1210. Baumbach, Jonathan. The landscape of
nightmare: studies in the contemporary
American novel. [New York] New York Univer-
sity Press, 1965. 173 p. 65—11761 PS379.B35
Bibliography: p. 171—173.
These two studies of the American novel in the
post- World- War-II period share the conviction that
the possibility of total annihilation, in combination
with the alternative of dehumanized existence, has
created a climate of terror which is reflected in
recent fiction. Klein discusses five writers — Saul
Bellow, Ralph Ellison, James Baldwin, Bernard
Malamud, and Wright Morris — who have had to
create a "literature of accommodation." Baumbach
views the imaginative vision of nine modern novels
in "a world which accommodates evil." The novels
selected are All the King's Men, The Victim, The
Catcher in the Rye, Invisible Man, Wise Blood, The
Assistant, Lie Down in Darkness, The Pawnbroker,
and Ceremony in Lone Tree. Sidney W. Finkel-
stein, in Existentialism and Alienation in American
Literature (New York, International Publishers
[1965] 314 p.), traces the philosophical develop-
ment of existentialism in Europe through its mani-
festations in American literature.
121 1. Kostelanetz, Richard, ed. On contemporary
literature; an anthology of critical essays on
the major movements and writers of contemporary
literature. [New York, Avon Books, 1964] 638 p.
64—55294 PN77 1 .K6
Includes bibliographies.
A collection of more than 50 general essays on the
major writers and movements in American, Canadi-
an, and European literature since World War II.
The initial 16 essays cover developments in the
leading literary forms in seven countries; the rest
of the book contains essays on individual writers,
mostly American. Among the contributors are
Ihab Hassan, Alfred Kazin, Norman Podhoretz,
Leslie Fiedler, Randall Jarrell, Walter Allen, R. W.
B. Lewis, William Barrett, Irving Howe, Eric
Bentley, and Stanley Edgar Hyman. Individual
authors discussed include Vladimir Nabokov, James
Purdy, Theodore Roethke, William Styron, Robert
Penn Warren, James Baldwin, Edward Albee, and
Joseph Heller. Other anthologies of recent criti-
cism on modern writing are The Creative Present
(Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1963. 265 p.),
edited by Nona Balakian and Charles Simmons,
and Contemporary American Novelists (Carbon-
dale, Southern Illinois University Press [1964]
232 p. Crosscurrents: modern critiques), edited by
Harry T. Moore.
1212. Lenhart, Charmenz S. Musical influence
on American poetry. Athens, University of
Georgia Press [1956] 337 p.
56-7980 PS3IO.M8L4
Bibliography: p. 314—326.
Walt Whitman, Sidney Lanier, and Edgar Allan
Poe are the central figures in this study of the
poetic and musical arts in America during the i7th,
1 8th, and igth centuries. To support his thesis
that the "kinds of poetry written in a century often
have depended upon the kinds of music heard in
that century," the author identifies poems contain-
ing direct references to music, imitations of such
musical forms as the symphony, and attempts to
create the impression of music in poetry. The first
chapter is devoted to a brief history of American
music during three centuries; the following three
chapters consider lyrical poetry and musical forms.
The final chapters of the book discuss Whitman,
Lanier, and Poe in detail.
1213. Levin, Harry. The power of blackness:
Hawthorne, Poe, Melville. New York,
Knopf, 1958. 263 p. 58-5826 PSi888.L4
Bibliography: p. 249-255.
The author demonstrates the preoccupation of
three eminent writers with evil and examines the
symbols they used. His Contexts of Criticism
(Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1957. 294
p. Harvard studies in comparative literature, 22)
consists of academic essays on a wide variety of
literary topics, including "Observations on the
Style of Ernest Hemingway," "Don Quixote and
Moby Dick," and "Criticism in Crisis."
1214. Literary history of the United States. Edi-
tors: Robert E. Spiller [and others] 3d ed.,
rev. New York, Macmillan, 1963. 2 v.
63-17511 PS88.L522
Bibliography: v. i, p. 1446—1481.
CONTENTS. — [i] History. — [2] Bibliography.
In the third edition of this now standard work,
no. 2460—2461 in the 1960 Guide, the story of
American letters is continued through the early
1960'$. The second volume comprises the compre-
hensive bibliography published with the first edi-
tion in 1948 and the bibliographical supplement
published in 1959, with a common index. Fifty-
seven American scholars contributed the 83 chap-
ters. In the revised "postscript" chapter for the
third edition, Willard Thorp and Robert E. Spiller
evaluate writers whose careers ended between the
World Wars, and Ihab Hassan estimates the
achievements of those who emerged after 1945 (in-
cluding recent novelists, dramatists, poets, and
literary critics) and the forces that have dominated
literature in the postwar world.
1215. Litz, A. Walton, ed. Modern American
fiction; essays in criticism. New York,
Oxford University Press, 1963. 365 p. (A Galaxy
book, GB roo ) 63-11919 PS379.L5
Critics representing a multiplicity of approaches
to literature comment on the modern novel from
Stephen Crane to Robert Penn Warren. Eleven
essays are devoted to Fitzgerald, Hemingway, and
Faulkner; others deal with Dreiser, Lewis, Dos
Passes, Wolfe, Steinbeck, Sherwood Anderson, and
Gertrude Stein. Theories of fiction which orig-
inated in the 19th-century with James, Howells, and
Garland are balanced by the more recent specula-
tions of Malcolm Cowley, Ihab Hassan, and Wright
Morris. Maxwell D. Geismar's American Moderns,
From Rebellion to Conformity (New York, Hill &
Wang [1958] 265 p.) is a collection of critical
essays from various periods. In The Modern Novel
in America (Chicago, Gateway Editions; distrib-
uted by H. Regnery Co. [1956] 227 p. A Gateway
edition, 6035), an earlier edition of which is no.
2360 in the 1960 Guide, Frederick J. Hoffman
demonstrates the effects of artistic philosophy and
technique upon the novel.
1216. Ludwig, Richard M., ed. Aspects of Ameri-
can poetry; essays presented to Howard
Mumford Jones. [Columbus] Ohio State Univer-
sity Press [1963, Ci962] 335 p.
62-16217 PS305.L8
Includes bibliography.
After 43 years of leadership as a teacher, scholar,
and humanist, Howard Mumford Jones retired in
1962 as Abbott Lawrence Lowell Professor of the
Humanities at Harvard University. For the occa-
sion, friends and former students supplied this
86 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
festschrift of 12 essays on American poetry, along
with a bibliography of Jones' writings. Contribu-
tors and essays are as follows: "The Meter-Making
Argument," by Edwin Fussell; "Some Varieties of
Inspiration," by G. Ferris Cronkhite; "Poe: Journal-
ism and the Theory of Poetry," by William Char vat;
"The Problem of Structure in Some Poems by
Whitman," by Marvin Felheim; "Ezra Pound's
London Years," by Richard M. Ludwig; "Robert
Frost and Man's 'Royal Role,' " by Claude M.
Simpson; "Sherwood Anderson's Mid-American
Chants," by Walter B. Rideout; "The Bridge and
Hart Crane's 'Span of Consciousness,' " by Albert
Van Nostrand; "Wallace Stevens' Ice-Cream," by
Richard Ellmann; "The Situation of Our Time:
Auden in His American Phase," by Frederick P. W.
McDowell; "Mr. Tate: Whose Wreath Should Be
a Moral," by Radcliffe Squires; and "Deliberate
Exiles: The Social Sources of Agrarian Poetics," by
Wallace W. Douglas.
1217. Lyons, John O. The college novel in Amer-
ica. With a preface by Harry T. Moore.
Carbondale, Southern Illinois University Press
[1962] 208 p. (Crosscurrents: modern critiques)
62-17619 PS374.U52L9
Includes bibliography.
In this first full-length treatment of the college
novel as a special literary genre, the author con-
siders over 200 academic novels whose main char-
acters are either students or professors. The
orientation of the study is toward literary history
rather than qualitative selection, although a critical
approach is taken in the discussions of trends and
types.
1218. Malin, Irving, ed. Psychoanalysis and
American fiction. New York, Dutton, 1965.
316 p. (A Dutton paperback, Di62)
65-2415 PS37I.M26
Includes bibliographical references.
Fifteen essays in which the insights of psycho-
analysis are applied to American writings. Cooper,
James, Willa Gather, Erskine Caldwell, Faulkner,
Mark Twain, Poe, Melville, and Frank Norris are
among the writers considered; the critics include
Simon Lesser, Patrick Quinn, Richard Chase, Leslie
Fiedler, Edmund Wilson, Maxwell Geismar, and
Leon Edel. In his New American Gothic (Carbon-
dale, Southern Illinois University Press [1962]
175 p. Crosscurrents: modern critiques), Malin
treats the private visions of six contemporary au-
thors: Carson McCullers, Flannery O'Connor, John
Hawkes, J. D. Salinger, Truman Capote, and
James Purdy.
1219. Marx, Leo. The machine in the garden;
technology and the pastoral ideal in Amer-
ica. New York, Oxford University Press, 1964.
392 p. 64—24864 £169.1.1^35
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(P- 367-384)-
The author seeks "to describe and evaluate the
uses of the pastoral ideal in the interpretation of
American experience." After discussing the pas-
toral ideal in general, he examines its relationship
to technology as depicted in the writings of Robert
Beverley, Jefferson, Cooper, Thoreau, Melville,
Mark Twain, Fitzgerald, Faulkner, and others.
1220. Maxwell, Desmond E. S. American fiction:
the intellectual background. London, Rout-
ledge & K. Paul [1963] 306 p.
64—1077 PS37I.M3 19633
Bibliographical footnotes.
The idea that the American novel is a charac-
teristic expression of romantic individualism, emerg-
ing from a shallow social order incapable of
sustaining realistic fiction, is challenged in this
account of the American social and literary scene
from pre-Revolutionary days to the present. Ameri-
can politics, customs, laws, and social patterns are
viewed as part of an intellectual dialectic, interact-
ing with the classical European imagination to form
a native American tradition more urban and
civilized than the romantic, revolutionary tradition
of American fiction. Edward Taylor, Philip Fre-
neau, Edgar Allan Poe, James Fenimore Cooper,
Herman Melville, Nathaniel Hawthorne, Mark
Twain, Ernest Hemingway, John Dos Passos, F.
Scott Fitzgerald, William Faulkner, and James
Gould Cozzens are among the writers whose
receptivity to European thought is examined.
1 22 1. Meyer, Roy W. The middle western farm
novel in the twentieth century. Lincoln,
University of Nebraska Press [1965] 265 p.
64—17221 PS374.F3M4 1965
"An annotated bibliography of middle western
farm fiction, 1891—1962": p. 200—242.
Bibliography: p. 243—252.
A study of 140 novels dealing with rural life
in the Middle West and published from 1891 to
1962. The author considers that "farm" fiction is
significant primarily as a social commentary rather
than as part of the mainstream of artistic fiction.
He notes that "the use of rural life as the substance
of serious fiction was delayed until about the time
when the United States changed from a predomi-
nantly rural to a predominandy urban country."
Beginning with the initial efforts of Joseph Kirk-
land and Hamlin Garland, the farm novel as a
genre grew slowly until after World War I, when
suddenly it burgeoned.
1222. Millgate, Michael. American social fiction:
James to Cozzens. New York, Barnes &
Noble [1964] 217 p. 64—5659 PS379.M48
Bibliographical footnotes.
The author evaluates the quality of the social
novel in America from 1877 to X957 anc^ defends
its right to acclaim. Among the writers whose
works he examines are Henry James, F. Scott
Fitzgerald, William Dean Howells, Frank Norris,
Edith Wharton, Theodore Dreiser, Sherwood An-
derson, Sinclair Lewis, John Dos Passes, and James
Gould Cozzens.
1223. Miner, Earl R. The Japanese tradition in
British and American literature. Princeton,
Princeton University Press, 1958. 312 p.
57—11934 PRi29.J3M5
Includes bibliography.
An extended analysis of Japan's influence on
American literature. The author notes that Ameri-
can impressionism, imagism, realism, and symbol-
ism are all indebted to Japan for important features.
The movements in the second decade of the 2Oth
century toward a "new poetry" are carefully ex-
plored for the influence of the Japanese haiJ(u. Ac-
cording to Miner, "Before Japanese poetry became
known to the West, few poets would have felt they
dared to write such a short poem about a moth and
the moon unless they could discover a suitable moral
to draw from the description." He is careful to
differentiate between the roles of Pound, Amy
Lowell, and John Gould Fletcher in the imagist
movement and to delineate the place of Lafcadio
Hearn in transmitting poetic influences. Frost,
Williams, MacLeish, Aiken, Wilder, and Stevens
are other figures judged to have made use of Japan-
ese traditions.
1224. Mizener, Arthur. The sense of life in the
modern novel. Boston, Hough ton Mifflin,
1964 [Ci963] 291 p. 62—11483 PS37I.M59
The responsibilities of novelists and critics in
creating and assessing the realistic novel are dis-
cussed in this study of English and American
writers since the mid- 1 gth century. Hemingway,
Faulkner, Dos Passes, and Cozzens are emphasized.
The problem for the writer is to reconcile his often
eccentric sense of personal life with the social
reality in which fiction must be rooted; the critic's
problem is to compare the life represented in the
novel to the actual patterns and deviations of society
rather than to an abstract theory of "reality."
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 87
1225. More, Paul E. Shelburne essays on Ameri-
can literature. Selected and edited by Daniel
Aaron. New York, Harcourt, Brace & World
[Ci963] 280 p. 63-19640 PSi2i.M6
CONTENTS. — Paul Elmer More: biographical and
bibliographical note. — Paul Elmer More: introduc-
tion.— The spirit and poetry of early New England.
— Jonathan Edwards. — Benjamin Franklin. —
Philip Freneau. — The origins of Hawthorne and
Poe. — A note on Poe's method. — The solitude of
Nathaniel Hawthorne. — Hawthorne: looking be-
fore and after. — The centenary of Longfellow. —
Whittier the poet. — Emerson. — The influence of
Emerson. — A hermit's notes on Thoreau. — Thor-
eau's Journal. — Walt Whitman. — Charles Eliot
Norton. — Henry Adams.
From the n volumes of Shelburne Essays (1904—
21 ) and The New Shelburne Essays (1928), Daniel
Aaron has selected and introduced this collection of
More's writings on American letters. The essays
exemplify More's neohumanist approach and the
coherent critical philosophy by which he judged
literature.
1226. Morris, Wright. The territory ahead. [New
York] Harcourt, Brace [1958] 231 p.
58-10892 PS88.M6
The sense of the past as it dominated and trans-
formed literature is the basis of this study of Thor-
eau, Whitman, Melville, Mark Twain, James, Wolfe,
Hemingway, Fitzgerald, and Faulkner. Morris
contends that a long line of major American novel-
ists evaded their immediate present and sought
refuge in a nostalgic past, which each translated
through the genius of his craft. Only Henry James
is considered to have approached the present with
intellectual alertness and to have used raw materials
and technique to fuse past and present effectively.
1227. O'Connor, William Van. The grotesque:
an American genre, and other essays. With
a preface by Harry T. Moore. Carbondale, South-
ern Illinois University Press [1962] 231 p. (Cross-
currents: modern critiques) 62—15004 PSi2i.C*2
In 1 8 essays the author attempts to reveal the
ethical philosophy concealed behind the apparent
grotesqueness and nihilism of many American
novels. There are discussions of Frost, Stevens,
Emily Dickinson, Mark Twain, Hemingway, Haw-
thorne, Faulkner, Eliot, and Caroline Gordon, in
addition to general essays on traditions in fiction,
the relationship of the writer to his environment,
and modern criticism. The concluding essay is an
imaginative dialogue entitled "The Hawthorne
Museum."
/ A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1228. Ostroff, Anthony, ed. The contemporary
poet as artist and critic; eight symposia.
Boston, Little, Brown [1964] 236 p.
64-18766 PS324.O83
CONTENTS.— On Richard Wilbur's "Love calls us
to the things of this world." — On Theodore Roeth-
ke's "In a dark time."— On Stanley Kunitz's "Father
and son." — On Robert Lowell's "Skunk hour." —
On John Crowe Ransom's "Master's in the garden
again."— On Richard Eberhart's "Am I my neigh-
bor's keeper?"— On W. H. Auden*s "A change of
air." — On Karl Shapiro's "The bourgeois poet." —
Notes and bibliography (p. 217-236).
A series of symposia, each consisting of an im-
portant contemporary poem, three critiques of the
poem by fellow poets, and the poet's response to his
critics' interpretations. Poets who act as critics, in
addition to the poets above, are Muriel Rukeyser,
W. D. Snodgrass, Leonie Adams, Louise Began,
William Dickey, John Berryman, and Babette
Deutsch. More general comments by another group
of American poets may be found in The Sullen Art
(New York, Corinth Books, 1963. 95 p.), by
David Ossman.
1229. The Paris review. Writers at work, the
Paris review interviews. Edited and with
an introduction, by Malcolm Cowley. New York,
Viking Press, 1958. 309 p. illus.
58-6046 PN453.P3 1963
In the spring of 1953, a group of young Ameri-
cans in Paris launched the first issue of The Paris
Review, an international literary quarterly contain-
ing fiction, poetry, literary documents, portfolios,
and articles. Among the most popular contribu-
tions was a series of interviews with famous writers.
This collection includes interviews with James
Thurber, William Faulkner, Robert Penn Warren,
and Truman Capote. Writers at Wor\, the Paris
Review Interviews, Second Series (New York,
Viking Press [1963] 368 p.) offers interviews with
Robert Frost, T. S. Eliot, Katherine Anne Porter,
Ernest Hemingway, and Robert Lowell, among
others.
1230. Parkinson, Thomas F., ed. A casebook on
the beat. New York, Crowell [1961] 326
p. (Crowell literary casebooks)
60-9938 PS536.P25
Includes bibliography.
Selections from the writings of nine spokesmen of
the beat generation are combined with criticism and
commentary. Among the authors are Allen Gins-
berg, Jack Kerouac, William Burroughs, Lawrence
Ferlinghetti, and Gregory Corso. The commen-
tators include Kenneth Rexroth, Norman Podhoretz,
Henry Miller, Herbert Gold, John Ciardi, and
Thomas Parkinson.
1231. Pearce, Roy Harvey. The continuity of
American poetry. Princeton, N.J., Prince-
ton University Press, 1961. xv, 442 p.
61—7424 PS303.P4
Bibliographical footnotes.
In this effort to "comprehend as a continuing
series" the texts of major poems in America, the
author synthesizes esthetic criticism and cultural
history and ends by forecasting a break in con-
tinuity after three centuries of poetry in the Puritan
tradition. The "Adamic" and "mythic" perspec-
tives of American poetic genius have been con-
stant, he argues, but Wallace Stevens and T. S. Eliot
have taken these traditions to their farthest limit.
In reaching his conclusions, the author follows
poetic development from Edward Taylor and the
Puritans to Emerson and Whitman. From this
point, all American poetry becomes "in essence, if
not in substance, a series of arguments with Whit-
man.
1232. Pochmann, Henry A. German culture in
America; philosophical and literary influ-
ences, 1600—1900. With the assistance of Arthur R.
Schultz and others. Madison, University of Wis-
consin Press, 1957. xv, 865 p.
55—6791 E 1 69.1^596
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 495-799).
A professor of American literature at the Univer-
sity of Wisconsin assesses the role of German intel-
lectual and cultural movements in the shaping of
American civilization. The book's scope is broad,
and Pochmann attempts to balance the German
contributions with those of native American or
British origin. Two books which study the German
reaction to American writing are Harvey W.
Hewett-Thayer's American Literature as Viewed
in Germany, 1818—1861 (Chapel Hill, University of
North Carolina Press [1958] 83 p. University of
North Carolina studies in comparative literature, no.
22) and The American Novel in Germany (Ham-
burg, Cram, De Gruyter, 1960. 116 p. Britannica
et Americana, Bd. 7), by Anne M. Springer, who
examines the critical reception of 20th-century
novelists between the two world wars.
1233. Podhoretz, Norman. Doings and undoings;
the fifties and after in American writing.
New York, Farrar, Straus [1964] 371 p.
64-12385 PS22I.P6
In keeping with his belief that "literature is not
an end in itself" but "a mode of public discourse
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM /
that either illuminates or fails to illuminate the
common ground on which we live," the editor of
Commentary, in this collection of occasional essays
written over a period of some 10 years, strikes a
middle ground between the critic-scholars and the
journalists. In the opening section, Podhoretz con-
trasts the early and current reputations and accom-
lishments of six American men of letters. The
other two sections encompass literary, political, and
social affairs. Among the many writers evaluated
are Edmund Wilson, James Baldwin, John Updike,
Norman Mailer, Joseph Heller, and Philip Roth.
1234. Rabkin, Gerald. Drama and commitment;
politics in the American theatre of the thir-
ties. Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1964.
322 p. 64-63003 PS338.P6R3
Bibliography: p. 297—300.
1235. Himelstein, Morgan Y. Drama was a
weapon: the left-wing theatre in New York,
1929—1941. With a foreword by John Gassner.
New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers University Press
[1963] 300 p. 62—21161 PN2277.N5H5
Includes bibliography.
Two scholarly analyses of American drama from
1929 to 1941, stressing the political and social themes
prominent in that period. Rabkin's book is of
wider scope and purpose, treating all the manifesta-
tions of political activity, whereas Himelstein con-
centrates upon "leftist" (notably Communist) in-
fluence. A study of the years 1890—1959 is Caspar
H. Nannes' Politics in the American Drama (Wash-
ington, Catholic University of America Press, 1960.
256 p.).
1236. Rahv, Philip, ed. Literature in America; an
anthology of literary criticism. New York,
Meridian Books, 1957. 452 p. Meridian giant
original, MGn) 57—10840 PSi2i.R2
Includes bibliography.
A collection of 40 essays describing how literary
figures have utilized native materials and reacted
to the American heritage, illustrating the close re-
lationship of talent to native bias. According to
Rahv, the use of indigenous materials does not mean
"allegiance simple, uniform, and thoughtless" but
rather an emotional and intellectual involvement
which often results in acute criticism. The histori-
cal scheme of the book permits the reader to witness
changes in emphasis and problems of the American
writer; for instance, whereas early writers often
complained about the absence of cultural institu-
tions, the later writers discovered that the prolifera-
tion of institutions outdistanced the progress made
by the arts, creating unforeseeable problems.
1237. The Reader's encyclopedia of American lit-
erature, by Max J. Herzberg and the staff
of the Thomas Y. Crowell Co. New York, Crowell
[1962] 1280 p. 62—16546 PS2I.R4
A comprehensive index to authors, titles, per-
sonages, literary and historical movements, and
other matters useful in the study of American liter-
ature. Both the United States and Canada, from
colonial times to 1962, are covered in articles by
scholars; many of the longer and more detailed
essays are signed by the contributors, among whom
are George Arms, Cleanth Brooks, Lewis Leary,
Oscar Cargill, Max Lerner, Robert Stallman, and
Ernest Leisy. Other useful reference works for
American literature published or appearing in a
new edition during the 1956—65 period include
American Authors and Boofy, 1640 to the Present
Day (New York, Crown Publishers [1962] 834
p.), by William J. Burke and Will D. Howe, no.
2391 in the 1960 Guide, now augmented and revised
by Irving R. Weiss; The Oxford Companion to
American Literature, 4th ed. (New York, Oxford
University Press, 1965. 991 p.), by James D. Hart;
The Reader's Encyclopedia, 2d ed. (New York,
Crowell [1965] 1118 p.), edited by William R.
Benet; and A Library of Literary Criticism: Modern
American Literature, 3d ed. (New York, F. Ungar
[1964] 620 p.), edited by Dorothy Nyren.
1238. Robinson, Cecil. With the ears of strangers;
the Mexican in American literature. Draw-
ings by H. Beaumont Williams. Tucson, University
of Arizona Press, 1963. 338 p.
63-11971 PSi73.M4R6
Bibliography: p. 325—330.
The result of the collision of the American mind
with the alien temperament of Mexico has been re-
corded in a history of hostility softening to interested
inquiry. Although many early journals, diaries,
and novels discounted Mexicans as unclean, back-
ward, and sensual, by the end of the i9th century
writers were nostalgically recalling the beauty of
the old mission culture and the Mexican traditions
which had colored the Hispanic Southwest. Robin-
son illustrates, through a wide selection of novels
and nonfictional accounts, the dawning realization
that in this people sprung from Indian and Spanish
progenitors lay a valuable literary source for con-
tinental myth and tradition. Whitman, Prescott,
William Carlos Williams, Willa Gather, John Stein-
beck, and Archibald MacLeish have been among
the writers who showed interest in America's Mexi-
can heritage; in addition, a score of enthusiasts have
recorded in regional literature their hope for the
fusion of Mexican and U.S. cultures.
90 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1239. Rosenthal, Macha L. The modern poets; a
critical introduction. New York, Oxford
University Press, 1960. 228 p.
60—13204 PR6oi.R6
Includes bibliography.
Poetry and the modern "crisis of personality,"
which created a need for new idioms and voices, are
related in this study of 20th-century poetry. Follow-
ing an opening chapter on the poet and the reader
and a comparison of past and present poetic sensi-
bilities, Rosenthal devotes three chapters to the
roles of Yeats, Pound, and Eliot as germinal figures
in modern verse. He then analyzes the "rival
idioms of the great generation" of poets, concentrat-
ing on Robinson, Frost, Williams, Stevens, Moore,
Cummings, Sandburg, and JefTers. Contemporary
poets, ranging from Robert Lowell and Theodore
Roethke to Allen Ginsberg and Charles Olson, are
discussed in the final chapters.
1240. Rubin, Louis D. The faraway country;
writers of the modern South. Seattle, Uni-
versity of Washington Press, 1963. xiv, 256 p.
63-19632 PS26i.R63
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 241-247).
"The faraway country" is the country of the
imagination whose special population consists of
displaced Southerners who transcend and transform
the actual Southern society through writing fiction.
Three generations of novelists and poets, from
George Washington Cable to William Styron, are
interpreted as products of a specific time and place;
changes in outlook from one generation of writers
to the next are seen as indicative of changing South-
ern experiences. Other studies of Southern writers
are contained in Rinaldo C. Simonini's anthology,
Southern Writers: Appraisals in Our Time (Char-
lottesville, University Press of Virginia [1964]
191 p.), and John M. Bradbury's Renaissance in the
South; a Critical History of the Literature, 7920—
7960 (Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina
Press [1963] 222 p.).
1241. Rubin, Louis D., and John R. Moore, eds.
The idea of an American novel. New York,
Crowell [1961] 394 p. 61-6174 PS37I.R8
Includes bibliography.
An unusual collection of "literary documents that
bear on our intense and long-standing self-conscious-
ness about the American novel." This history
stretches back to early days of the Republic and first
becomes visible as a conscious "call for a national
literature" articulated by such prominent figures as
Cooper, Emerson, Hawthorne, Melville, Whitman,
and Poe. The dialogue increases in complexity and
scope after the initial challenge has been met:
writers in subsequent sections give their views on
"The Scope of the 'Great American Novel' "; "The
American Novel and 'Reality' "; "The American
Character"; "Ideals for the American Novel"; and
"American Art and American Experience." A long
final section contains statements about 17 novelists
from Cooper to William Styron and Robert Penn
Warren. Throughout the text, commentaries from
the works of distinguished authors or publications
are presented.
1242. Sanford, Charles L. The quest for paradise;
Europe and the American moral imagina-
tion. Urbana, University of Illinois Press, 1961.
282 p. 61—6539 £169.1.8245
Bibliographical footnotes.
An interdisciplinary study of the origins and de-
veloping traits of the American moral imagination,
based on a historical theme of mental regression to
an imaginative former state of paradise. The first
five chapters describe a "journey pattern of modern
history" involving an imaginative transfer of para-
dise from heaven to earth; the last eight essays ex-
pand the theory and describe its repercussions in
American literature, society, and foreign and
domestic affairs. Industrialism, science, the "Ameri-
can cult of newness," and ideals of nature are among
the topics related to moral philosophy and in turn
to literature. The reform movement is studied
through the writings of Thoreau, Hawthorne, Whit-
man, Bellamy, Lincoln Steffens, Mark Twain, and
John Steinbeck. Henry James' theme, presented in
his international novels, is explained to be "the
meaning of the fall from paradise as the condition
of a greater humanity."
1243. Schneider, Robert W. Five novelists of the
progressive era. New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1965. 290 p. 65—12110 PS379-S36
Bibliographical references included in "Notes
(p. [259]-28i).
An attempt to reconstruct the intellectual history
of the years 1890—1917. The author studies five
representative novelists and demonstrates that the
pull of traditional thought and Victorian attitudes
was as strong an influence as the new scientific
thought, which many literary historians have claimed
resulted in a drastic intellectual revolution. Stephen
Crane, Frank Norris, and Theodore Dreiser con-
sciously accepted the new thought but unconsciously
clung to many conventional attitudes. The early
novels of William Dean Howells and the bestselling
novels of Winston Churchill are regarded as more
accurate mirrors of popular thought, which was not,
according to the author, as progressive as is often
claimed.
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM /
1244. Sensabaugh, George F. Milton in early
America. Princeton, N.J., Princeton Uni-
versity Press, 1964. 320 p. 63—9997 PR3588.S45
Bibliographical footnotes.
The influence of the English poet John Milton
upon the intellectual, spiritual, and moral life of
early America is systematically explored. The
author concludes that "for a while in American
history Milton moved through the whole cultural
community, impressing not only poets but also edi-
tors and free-lancers, statesmen and lawyers, school-
masters and doctors and clerics." He is considered
by Sensabaugh to be a greater influence than other
writers and philosophers because he affected Amer-
ican speech, attitudes, institutions, and ideals, aiding
the colonies and the early Republic in the search for
national identity and standards of behavior. The
study proceeds chronologically from the first 25
years of the Republic, when Milton's influence was
greatest, concluding with his diminution of stature
during the Romantic movement that swept the
country in the middle years of the i9th century.
1245. Shapiro, Karl J., ed. Prose keys to modern
poetry. Evanston, 111., Row, Peterson [1962]
260 p. 62—4795 PNi 136.846
An anthology of critical essays, prefaces, and other
prose selections designed to assist the reader in
understanding modern poetry. The selections are
divided into the classical and romantic traditions.
The former includes pieces by Poe, Eliot, and Pound;
the latter begins with Whitman and ends with D.
H. Lawrence. A chronology of significant events
in poetry between 1817 and 1960 is appended.
1246. Spencer, Benjamin T. The quest for na-
tionality; an American literary campaign.
[Syracuse, N.Y.] Syracuse University Press, 1957.
xv, 389 p. 57-12017 PS88.S58
Bibliography: p. 341—372.
As a history of "the national literary will," Spen-
cer's study charts the explicit and conscious attempts,
from 1607 to 1892, to forge a national literature dis-
tinctly separate from British or European literature.
The American writer's growing awareness of native
themes and materials is emphasized, and the author
notes that "scarcely a native author of any impor-
tance before 1900 failed to engage in the inquiry
and to declare himself publicly on its issues." Al-
though the maturing of the sense of nationality led
to a shift in emphasis, there remained a dedication
to commemorate a common heritage and to estab-
lish a "voice of a nation which for the first time in
history had manifestly embraced a belief in both
God and Reason."
1247. Spender, Stephen, and Donald Hall, eds.
The concise encyclopedia of English and
American poets and poetry. New York, Hawthorn
Books [1963] 415 p. illus. 63—8015 PRi9.S6
Bibliography: p. 367—392.
Articles on specific poets and poetic terms are in-
terspersed with lengthier essays pursuing general
topics in a compendium useful to both scholar and
student. The editors have endeavored to represent
complementary or opposing viewpoints where they
exist. Portraits of many important poets are includ-
ed in the text. Among the contributors are Marius
Bewley, Glauco Cambon, Northrop Frye, Hugh
Kenner, John Crowe Ransom, and Richard Wilbur.
1248. Spiller, Robert E. The third dimension;
studies in literary history. New York, Mac-
millan, 1965. 245 p. 65—13122 PSi2i.S6 1965
The author considers that, in the interpretation of
literature, the first dimension lies in understanding
the text, the second in discovering the cultural and
social patterns of the society, and the third in the
perspective of history, particularly literary history.
The 1 6 essays included here were written between
1929 and 1963, when Spiller was editing the liter-
ary History of the United States, and express his
views on the problems of writing American literary
history. The essays are reprinted as they were orig-
inally conceived and are presented as historical
documents of a major movement in American liter-
ary scholarship. Lewis G. Leary has edited a col-
lection of papers on various aspects of literary studies
during the past 30 years entitled Contemporary Lit-
erary Scholarship: A Critical Review (New York,
Appleton-Century-Crofts [1958] 474 p.), spon-
sored by the Committee on Literary Scholarship and
the Teaching of English of the National Council of
Teachers of English.
1249. Stallman, Robert W. The houses that James
built, and other literary studies. [East Lans-
ing] Michigan State University Press, 1961. xii,
254 p. 60-53548 PS379.S7
Includes bibliographical references.
As a critic, Stallman has assimilated the methods
of Henry James, T. S. Eliot, and the New Critics.
He concentrates on the text of an individual work
and then looks for linked analogies and ideas —
such as confused identity — which can relate novels
seemingly unrelated. His aim is to "illuminate the
given work's hidden world, the substructure of mul-
tiple inter-relationships." He concentrates on the
major novels of seven writers — Fitzgerald, Hem-
ingway, Faulkner, Crane, James, Hardy, and Con-
rad — in addition to the New Critics and the
"Marxist" critics, notably Philip Rahv. Essays are
92 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
published for the first time on Maggie, Tender Is
the Night, The Snows of Kilimanjaro, and As I Lay
Dying. Many of the other studies have been ex-
panded or substantially revised for this collection.
1250. Stepanchev, Stephen. American poetry since
1945; a critical survey. New York, Harper
& Row [1965] 216 p. 65—20440 PS324-S68
Bibliography: p. 211—213.
A general survey of recent trends in poetry, with
brief introductions to the main characteristics of the
work of 21 poets. Stepanchev discerns five distinct
movements in poetry since World War II, starting
with a period of involvement in the horrors of war
and moving in the late fifties and early sixties into
the projective verse of Charles Olson and his con-
temporaries and the autobiographical rehearsals of
the "confessional school." Among the poets dis-
cussed are Robert Lowell, Randall Jarrell, Elizabeth
Bishop, Denise Levertov, James Wright, John Ash-
bery, James Dickey, Alan Dugan, LeRoi Jones,
Louis Simpson, William Stafford, and May Swenson.
1251. Stewart, John L. The burden of time: the
Fugitives and Agrarians; the Nashville
groups of the 1920'$ and 1930'$, and the writing of
John Crowe Ransom, Allen Tate, and Robert Penn
Warren. Princeton, N.J., Princeton University
Press, 1965. xi, 551 p. 65—12994 PS255.N3Sy
Bibliographical footnotes.
A historical and biographical study of the impor-
tant Nashville writers in the twenties and thirties,
with an analysis of the work of outstanding individ-
uals in the group. Louise S. Cowan, in her literary
history The Fugitive Group (Baton Rouge, Louisi-
ana State University Press [1959] 277 p.), care-
fully distinguishes between the Fugitives and the
Agrarians and confines her study to the 16 poets
who, "having no particular program, met frequently
from 1915 to 1928 for the purpose of reading and
discussing their own work." The Fugitives, a
Critical Account (Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press [1958] 300 p.), by John M. Brad-
bury, uses textual analysis to evaluate the poetry,
fiction, and criticism of the group on the basis of
published critical consensus rather than personal
opinion, devoting most attention to Ransom, Tate,
Warren, Davidson, and Cleanth Brooks.
1252. Stewart, Randall. American literature &
Christian doctrine. Baton Rouge, Louisi-
ana State University Press [1958] 154 p.
58-7936 PSi66.S8
As a latter-day exponent of a moral measure for
literature, the author challenges the view of man
implicit in the American doctrines of rationalism,
exaggerated individualism, and naturalism. He
criticizes the works of Jefferson, Emerson, and
Whitman, along with the modern naturalist literary
school, as forsaking the responsibility to relate art
to ethics and religion. Contrasted to the philoso-
phy of these Americans, he finds Christian princi-
ples in the works of Hawthorne, Melville, James,
Gather, Eliot, Faulkner, and Warren. Different
conclusions are reached from a similar perspective
by a group of Catholic scholars who evaluate 19th-
century American writers in American Classics
Reconsidered (New York, Scribner [1958] 307
p.), edited by Harold C. Gardiner. The ethics of
critical theory from still another viewpoint — that
of the neohumanist — are considered in The Moral
Measure of Literature (Denver, A. Swallow [1961]
137 p.), by Keith F. McKean.
1253. Stovall, Floyd, ed. Eight American authors,
a review of research and criticism, by Jay B.
Hubbell [and others] . Bibliographical supplement
by J. Chesley Mathews. New York, Norton [1963]
466 p. (The Norton library [Ni78] )
70-8568 PS20I.S8 1963
Intended for advanced students and scholars, this
collection of bibliographical essays describes the
scholarly and critical writings on eight classic Amer-
ican authors. Poe is discussed by Jay Hubbell,
Emerson by Floyd Stovall, Hawthorne by Walter
Blair, Thoreau by Lewis Leary, Melville by Stanley
Williams, Whitman by Willard Thorp, Mark Twain
by Harry Hayden Clark, and James by Robert Spil-
ler. J. Chesley Mathews' supplement is a selective
checklist of works published between 1955 and
1962.
1254. Sutton, Walter E. Modern American criti-
cism. Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall,
1963. 293 p. (The Princeton studies, humanistic
scholarship in America)
63-8462 PN99.U5S8
A survey of the tendencies in 20th-century Amer-
ican criticism, combining a historical approach and
a plea for the integration of formalist concerns with
historical fact, cultural experience, and language
studies. Movements surveyed include those of the
New Humanists, the Marxist critics, the New Crit-
ics, the neo-Aristotelians, and the psychological and
myth critics. Learners and Discerners; a Newer
Criticism ( Charlottes ville, University Press of Vir-
ginia [1964] 177 p.), edited by Robert E. Scholes,
contains five papers originally presented as Peters
Rushton seminar lectures at the University of Vir-
ginia. Stephen G. Nichols has edited a collection
of Rene Wellek's essays on literary theory, criticism,
and history; entitled Concepts of Criticism (New
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 93
Haven, Yale University Press, 1963. 403 p.), the
volume contains 13 essays on various methods of
literary study, several of which relate specifically to
American literature.
1255. Thorp, Willard. American writing in the
twentieth century. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1960. 353 p. (The Library of
Congress series in American civilization)
59—14739 PS22I.T48
Includes bibliography.
A survey of the standard themes and periods of
recent literary history. Emphasis is placed on de-
tailed studies of 10 major writers associated with
various periods and trends: Edith Wharton, Frost,
Robinson, O'Neill, Willa Gather, Dos Passes, Hem-
ingway, Stevens, Faulkner, and Eliot. Lively ac-
ounts of the "critical wars" and the Southern ren-
lissance — two areas on which the author is an
uthority — are included, along with a discussion
f naturalism in American fiction.
256. The Times literary supplement. American
writing today: its independence and vigor.
Edited by Allan Angoff. [New York] New York
University Press, 1957. 433 p.
56—10779 PS22I.T5 1957
From a special issue published on Sept. 17, 1954,
The Times Literary Supplement, London's distin-
guished literary weekly, selected 69 essays designed
to present "as accurate a picture as we could paint of
the state of writing in America today." General
essays on all aspects of the literary scene are bal-
anced with reprints of reviews on American books
that made literary history, including Spoon River
Anthology, The Great Gatsby, An American Trag-
edy, A Farewell to Arms, Loo\ Homeward, Angel,
Soldier's Pay, Dodsworth, and Manhattan Transfer.
Most of the selections are unsigned, following the
tradition of anonymity long established for regular
issues. The American Imagination (New York,
Atheneum, 1960. 209 p.) and The Critical Mo-
ment: Literary Criticism in the ig6os (New York,
McGraw-Hill [1964] 164 p. McGraw-Hill paper-
backs) are other anthologies selected from The
Times Literary Supplement.
1257. Walcutt, Charles C. American literary na-
turalism; a divided stream. Minneapolis,
University of Minnesota Press [Ci956] 332 p.
56-12465 PS379.W28
A study of naturalism as a literary genre, reconcil-
ing the romantic and scientific attitudes which ap-
parently collide in critical descriptions of the genre.
The tension that results from asserting the compati-
bility of science and intuition has produced an area
of friction in naturalistic literature, a fact which
leads Walcutt to trace the genre to its parent philos-
ophy, American transcendentalism. Both philoso-
phies run in a "divided stream," one branch ap-
proaching life scientifically, the other intuitively.
Zola, Hemingway, Dos Passes, Steinbeck, and
Faulkner are among the authors studied.
1258. Walker, Robert H. The poet and the gilded
age; social themes in late i9th century Amer-
ican verse. Philadelphia, University of Pennsyl-
vania Press [1963] xviii, 387 p.
62-11268 PS3IO.S7W3 1963
The author contends that the poets of the last
quarter of the i9th century display a social aware-
ness, an opinion contrary to that held by most liter-
ary historians. He supports his conclusion by
analyzing, both verbally and statistically, the con-
tent of verse written by secondary poets. The sub-
ject matter of the poetry, rather than its esthetic
value or internal form, is the primary criterion in
this analysis. A more traditional literary review,
one based on biographical treatment and poetic
tradition, is Carlin T. Kindilien's American Poetry
in the Eighteen Nineties (Providence, Brown Uni-
versity Press, 1956. 223 p. Brown University
studies, v. 20).
1259. Warren, Austin. New England saints. Ann
Arbor, University of Michigan Press [1956]
192 p. 56-9721 F3.W3
Includes bibliography.
A collection of portraits of saintly New England
writers — "men I recognize and celebrate as those
to whom reality was the spiritual life, whose spiri-
tual integrity was their calling and vocation." The
author, himself a native New Englander, writes this
hagiography with a deep affection for the spiritual
heritage of the region, finding a continuity in New
England philosophy and attitudes through four cen-
turies. The subjects treated include the 17th-century
Puritan poets, the 18th-century parsons, Bronson
Alcott and Emerson, the French Catholic Fenelon,
the elder Henry James, the mariner Methodist
preacher Edward Taylor, the agnostic Charles Eliot
Norton, the neohumanist Irving Babbitt, and the
poet John Brooks Wheelwright.
1260. Weales, Gerald C. American drama since
World War II. New York, Harcourt, Brace
& World [1962] 246 p. 62-14467 PS35I.W4
Virtually every recent playwright with a claim to
importance is dealt with in this critical survey of
American drama, 1945—60. The author, an aca-
demic critic, analyzes the literary substance of drama
and touches only incidentally upon the political or
94 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
cultural scene, box-office economics, or play-produc-
tion. Dramatists are grouped, when possible, ac-
• cording to genre, and chapters discuss the various
groups: poets and novelists who write for the thea-
ter; "video boys" who write serious drama; play-
wrights of the 1920'$ and 1930*5 who kept writing
after World War II; dramatists who specialize in
the adaptation of fiction to the stage; and play-
wrights who write for a particular audience. Arthur
Miller and Tennessee Williams receive special
attention. Another critical history of modern
American drama, one which is more personal and
evaluative in tone, is Allan Lewis' American Plays
and Playwrights of the Contemporary Theatre
(New York, Crown Publishers [1965] 272 p.).
1261. Witham, W. Tasker. The adolescent in the
American novel, 1920—1960. New York,
Ungar [1964] 345 p. 63-8849 PS374-Y6W5
Bibliography: p. 285-300. "Chronological list of
American novels dealing with problems of adoles-
cents": p. 301—332.
Some 500 American novels with plots built around
adolescent problems form the basis for this study.
After summarizing the genteel attitudes which dom-
inated adolescent fiction during the first two dec-
ades of the century, the author traces the gradual
acceptance of a new realism in the 1 920*5. Topical
chapters offer brief discussions of novels whose
theme or plot concerns sexual awakening, rebellion
against parents and society, delinquency, educa-
tional and vocational adjustments, the influence of
environment, and some "special problems," includ-
ing mental and physical handicaps, alcohol, drugs,
and the effects of war. The survey demonstrates
that most novels with juvenile protagonists are first
novels and largely autobiographical and that more
than 90 percent of the best of such books center on
boys.
1262. Wright, Austin M. The American short
story in the twenties. [Chicago] University
of Chicago Press [1961] 425 p.
61-14535 PS379.W7
Includes bibliography.
The author compares short-story writers from
1890 to 1919 with those of the 1920*5 and concludes
that the experimental genius of the latter group
created the short story's most brilliant period. Over
200 stories are analyzed on the basis of subject mat-
ter, form, and technique; 13 appendixes explain the
criteria used in selection and evaluation. The writ-
ers of the 1920*5 whose work is considered here in-
clude Fitzgerald, Faulkner, Hemingway, Anderson,
and Katherine Anne Porter. The earlier period is
represented by James, Dreiser, Stephen Crane, Am-
brose Bierce, and others. The American Short Story
(Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1964. 213 p.), by Wil-
liam H. Peden, analyzes the general themes and
techniques of some 100 writers from 1940 to 1963.
1263. Yates, Norris W. The American humorist:
conscience of the twentieth century. Ames,
Iowa State University Press [1964] 410 p.
63-22161 PS438.Y3
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(P- 363-39i )•
This study of 20th-century humor is primarily
concerned with the social values and attitudes of 15
major humorists. Allowing these writers to speak
for themselves, Yates offers a picture of an essen-
tially middle-class America of cracker-barrel philoso-
phers, "solid" citizens, and "little men" tyrannized
by the natural facts of matrimony and sex and the
unnatural facts of technology and science. Humor-
ists treated include George Ade, Mr. Dooley, Will
Rogers, H. L. Mencken, Ring Lardner, Don Mar-
quis, Clarence Day, Robert Benchley, Dorothy
Parker, James Thurber, E. B. White, and S. J.
Perelman.
1264. Zabel, Morton D., ed. Literary opinion in
America; essays illustrating the status, meth-
ods, and problems of criticism in the United States
in the twentieth century. 3d ed., rev. New York,
Harper & Row [1962] 2 v. (Harper torchbooks,
TB3OI3— 3014. The University library)
62-52885 PN77I.Z2 1962
A revised edition of no. 2550 in the 1960 Guide.
The second edition was distinguished by six biblio-
graphical lists on recent American criticism up to
1951; to these have been added a list covering the
period 1951—62. The only other changes are the
inclusion of an essay on Fitzgerald by Arthur Miz-
ener and the substitution of a critique by Irving
Howe on Sherwood Anderson for another essay on
that same writer which appeared in the second
edition.
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 95
C. Periodicals
1265. Book week. Sept. 15, 1963+ [New York,
World Journal Tribune]
66—6410 21007.671685
Distributed with the Sunday editions of the New
Yorl( Herald Tribune, The Washington Post, and
the San Francisco Examiner.
A weekly intended to provide "a national literary
magazine that has the space and the distribution to
talk about books and those who write and publish
them with the high standards they deserve."
1266. Critique; studies in modern fiction, v. i+
winter 1956+ [Minneapolis]
64—32236 PN35O3.C7
Vol. 4, no. 2—3 published by the Bolingbroke So-
ciety; v. 5+ distributed by B. De Boer, Nudey, N.J.
Designed "to notice the best in contemporary fic-
tion and to throw light on that recent fiction which
has not received its rightful share of attention from
perceptive critics." Published three times a year,
Critique features book reviews and articles on both
specific and general topics. Special issues have been
devoted to individual writers, among them Flannery
O'Connor, J. F. Powers, Wright Morris, and Saul
Bellow.
1267. The New York review of books, v. i+
[Feb. 25, 1963 ?] + [Milford, Conn., A. W.
Ellsworth] 68-6716 AP2.N655
Running tide, Jan. 14, 1964+: The New Yorf(
Review.
During the 1963 newspaper strike in New York
City, a group of well-known critics and scholars
wrote reviews for the first issue of the sort of liter-
ary journal which the editors and contributors felt
was needed in America. In the first issue, Robert
B. Silvers and Barbara Epstein, editors, note the in-
tention to allocate neither time nor space to "books
which are trivial in their intentions or venal in their
effects, except occasionally to reduce a temporarily
inflated reputation or to call attention to a fraud."
A biweekly, The New Yorf( Review encourages
contributors to treat the book review as a literary
genre in its own right, using all the passion, pre-
cision, and intelligence they can muster.
1268. Poetry northwest, v. i+ June 1959+
[Seattle, University of Washington]
65-32672 AP2.P746
Vol. 4, no. 3/4+ distributed by B. De Boer, Nut-
ley, N.J.
A quarterly hospitable to "the young and inexpe-
rienced, the neglected mature, the rough major
talents and the fragile minor ones." Translations,
drawings, and notes on contributors and poetry
meetings are included.
1269. Twentieth century literature; a scholarly and
critical journal, v. i+ Apr. 1955+ [Den-
ver, Swallow Press] 56—1944 PN2.T8
Published quarterly, with the purpose of gleaning
from all sources "the most significant of scholarly
and critical writing dealing with literature of the
first half of our century" and featuring an annotated
bibliography of articles appearing in a wide range
of periodicals.
1270. Wisconsin studies in contemporary litera-
ture, v. i+ winter 1960-4- [Madison,
Wis.] University of Wisconsin.
64-6922 PN2.W55
Published three times a year and primarily de-
voted to a consideration of the new literature which
has emerged since World War II on both sides of
the Atlantic.
IV
Biography and Autobiography
tP^ "fc-*l
4^ Nos. 1271-1303 JL
THIS chapter includes biographical works which do not fit precisely into other chapters but
are considered useful for the study of American history and culture. It also encompasses
the genre of biography and autobiography on the basis of its value as Americana, as history,
and as literature. The works found appropriate to this chapter were disproportionately fewer
in number than in the 1960 Guide because the Supplement covers only a lo-year period and
because, in that period, fewer professional biographers were writing scholarly works. Since
the chapter is thus limited in scope, the index should
be used to ascertain whether a specific biography or
autobiography has been included elsewhere in the
Supplement.
1271. DEAN GOODERHAM ACHESON, 1893-
Dean Acheson, lawyer and public official,
was Secretary of State from 1949 to 1953 and a
major proponent of the containment policy imple-
mented partially by the Marshall Plan and NATO.
He is the author of A Citizen LooJ^s at Congress
(1957), Power and Diplomacy (1958), and Sketches
From Life of Men I Have Known (1961).
, 1272. Morning and noon. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1965. 288 p. ill us.
65—19308 £748. A 15 A3
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. [2311-278).
Reminiscences which are "autobiographical but
not an autobiography," concerning the author's early
life and career to 1940. Acheson's strong sense of
integrity and commitment is apparent in his recol-
lections of an eventful life among the politically
famous. He gives an account of his boyhood in
Middletown, Conn., and his arrival in Washington
in 1919 as Justice Louis D. Brandeis' law clerk.
From 1921 to 1933 he practiced law with the firm of
Covington, Burling, & Rublee, after which he re-
ceived a succession of Federal appointments, includ-
ing that of Under Secretary of the Treasury.
1273. ALFRED OWEN ALDRIDGE, 1915-
A professor of English and comparative liter-
96
ature in various universities in the United States and
abroad, he is the author of Franklin and His French
Contemporaries (1957) and Jonathan Edwards
(1964).
1274. Man of reason, the life of Thomas Paine.
Philadelphia, Lippincott [1959] 348 p.
illus. 59-7777 JCi78.V2A8
This new study contains information from a large
number of recently discovered letters and essays by
Paine, as well as from French, English, and Amer-
ican documents that were largely unknown to his
previous biographers.
1275. IRVING HENRY BARTLETT, 1923-
Head of the history department at the Car-
negie Institute of Technology; author of From Slave
to Citizen (1953).
1276. Wendell Phillips, Brahmin radical. Boston,
Beacon Press [1961] 438 p.
61—10570 £449^5594
Bibliographical references included in "Notes":
p. 402-432.
Radical abolitionist, intellectual, and eloquent
crusader, Wendell Phillips (1811-1884) held strong
Calvinist beliefs. Although born a Boston Brahmin
and graduated a Harvard lawyer, he repudiated his
aristocratic background to agitate for social and
moral reform. His wife introduced him to the abo-
lition movement, his religious convictions commit-
ted him to support it, and his masterful oratory
soon made him a leader in the cause. He also used
his rhetorical gifts to work for the immediate en-
franchisement of the Negro, for women's rights, for
the common laborer, and for currency reform.
From Bartlett's biography emerges the multifaceted
personality of a radical who unrelentingly criticized
the institutions of American democracy out of a
firm belief in the worth of the American way of life.
1277. FRANCIS BEVERLEY BIDDLE, 1886-
Francis Biddle, lawyer, author, and public
official, was Attorney General under President
Franklin D. Roosevelt from 1941 to 1945 and a
member of the International Military Tribunal at
Nuremberg from 1945 to 1946. He was active in
the defense of civil liberties and chairman of several
national organizations.
1278. A casual past. Garden City, N.Y., Double-
day, 1961. 408 p. illus.
61-9480 KF373.B5A3
1279. In brief authority. Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1962. 494 p. illus.
62-16744 KF373.B5A32
Two volumes of reminiscences, published a year
apart. In A Casual Past, Biddle brings to life some
of the odd, lovable, and often eccentric individuals
who peopled his background and youth. Here are
the Randolphs of Virginia and the Biddies from the
North, two families who represent the main lines in
his American heritage and of whom he is proud.
He writes of his years at Groton and Harvard and
of his appointment as private secretary to Justice
Holmes upon graduation. The volume ends with a
review of his 20 years of law practice. In Brief
Authority outlines Biddle's public work in associa-
tion with Franklin D. Roosevelt, whom he first saw
as a schoolboy at Groton. His characterization of
President Roosevelt and other New Dealers includes
numerous witty insights. Biddle also reports on the
Nuremberg trial of German war criminals, at which
he was the only American member of the Interna-
tional Military Tribunal.
1280. CATHERINE DRINKER BOWEN, 1897-
No. 2606 in 1960 Guide.
Xi28i. Adventures of a biographer. Boston, Little,
Brown [1959] 235 p.
50-11888 PS3503.O8i4Z52
Recollections from a career spanning 40 years of
continuous and successful publication. Mrs. Bowen
discusses the people she has encountered on her re-
search travels, the places she has visited, and the
problems of biographical research.
BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 97
1282. WILLIAM ORVILLE DOUGLAS, 1898-
No. 2664 in 1960 Guide.
1283. My wilderness: the Pacific West. Illustra-
tions by Francis Lee Jaques. Garden City,
N.Y., Doubleday, 1960. 206 p.
60-13519
1284. My wilderness: east to Katahdin. Illustra-
tions by Francis Lee Jaques. Garden City,
N.Y., Doubleday, 1961. 290 p.
61-12207 QHio4.D68
These volumes reflect Justice Douglas' intimate
knowledge and love of the wilderness. East to
Katahdin concerns some of his favorite places in
the Southwest, South, and East, including Babo-
quivari in Arizona, the Everglades, the Smoky
Mountains, and Mt. Katahdin. The Pacific West
covers the Brooks Range in Alaska, the Olympic
Mountains, and the High Sierras, as well as other
natural areas that have a special appeal for him.
1285. MARTIN B. DUBERMAN, 1930-
Professor of American history at Princeton.
His Charles Francis Adams won the Bancroft Prize
in 1962, and his In White America, a Documentary
Play (1964) won the Vernon Rice Award for 1963—
64.
1286. Charles Francis Adams, 1807—1886. Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1961 [Ci96o] 525
p. illus. 61-5366 £467.1^208
Bibliography: p. 401—421.
A biography concentrating chiefly on Adams'
career as Massachusetts State representative and sen-
ator, U.S. Congressman, Minister to Great Britain
during the Civil War, and leader of the Liberal
Republican Party in 1872. A straightforward and
exacting work, aided by the availablity of the Adams
papers, this is the first biography of Adams pub-
lished since Charles Francis Adams (1900), by
Charles Francis Adams, Jr. (see no. 2581 in the
1960 Guide).
1287. RAYMOND ELAINE FOSDICK, 1883-
Brother of the spiritual leader Harry Emer-
son Fosdick, Raymond B. Fosdick was born in Buf-
falo, N.Y., into an unusually religious and joyous
household. In his autobiography he presents a por-
trait of family life in a rural town before the turn of
the century, together with accounts of his years at
college, his career as a lawyer and public servant,
and his friendship with Woodrow Wilson. He also
describes his role in the League of Nations and his
presidency of the Rockefeller Foundation. There
/ A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
are glimpses, sometimes brief and at other times
lingering, of prominent people such as Edward H.
House, Newton D. Baker, and Franklin D. Roose-
velt.
1288. Chronicle of a generation, an autobiography.
New York, Harper [1958] 306 p.
58—11 047 £748^69 A3
1289. JOHN ARTHUR GARRATY, 1920-
John A. Garraty teaches history at Columbia
University and is the author of several biographies.
He has also edited The Unforgettable Americans
(1960).
1290. Right-hand man; the life of George W. Per-
kins. New York, Harper [1960] 433 p.
illus. 60—10404
George Perkins (1862-1920) was one of the most
successful and controversial Americans of the early
20th century. Self-made, without a high school
education, he displayed so much ability and energy
that at his death it was facetiously said he had lived
400 years in his span of 58. He revolutionized the
insurance business, guided the International Har-
vester Corporation, and became J. P. Morgan's
right-hand man. He helped organize the Progres-
sive Party with Theodore Roosevelt, using the same
methods he had applied to effect business reforms
but with less success. He was engaged in voluntary
organizational work in World War I.
1291. DICK GREGORY, 1932-
Dick Gregory, the entertainer and civil rights
leader, whose full name is Richard Claxton Greg-
ory, was born in St. Louis. His autobiography,
entided Nigger (he insists upon the use of the word
to break the taboo), is representative of the struggle
of American Negroes to escape from crippling pov-
erty, although he makes the distinction that he was
"not poor, just broke." One of six children reared
by a mother who had been deserted by her husband,
Gregory tells of the abuses and deprivations he en-
dured. At school he was successful in athletics and
distinguished himself in track. Later he chose en-
tertainment as a career and became a successful
comedian. He then began to devote an increasing
amount of his time and money to the cause of civil
rights. His book is a testament to his mother, who
inspired him but did not live to see his many
achievements.
1292. Nigger; an autobiography, by Dick Gregory
with Robert Lipsyte. New York, Dutton,
1964. 224 p. illus. 64—11067 PN2287-G68A3
1293. STERLING HAYDEN, 1916-
Sterling Hayden is a seafaring actor who at
22, in his first command, took a schooner success-
fully around the world. His autobiography is an
extremely personal account of a man in search of
reason and self. It is a defiant, questioning, occa-
sionally stumbling, and honest work that derives
much of its intensity from Hay den's ties to the sea.
The story begins in 1959 when, in violation of a
court order, Hayden takes his children on a long sea
voyage. His previous life emerges in a series of
sometimes confusing flashbacks.
1294. Wanderer. New York, Knopf, 1963. 434
p. 63—20142 PN2287.H34A3
1295. ELEANOR ROOSEVELT ROOSEVELT,
1884—1962
Eleanor Roosevelt's autobiography includes
abridged selections from three volumes of memoirs
— This Is My Story (1937), This I Remember
(1949), and On My Own (1958) — and several
additional chapters that bring her account up to
date. She writes of her childhood, the early years
of growing up, and her marriage to her cousin,
Franklin Delano Roosevelt. She gives a picture of
her ever-broadening activites, from wife and mother
to political helpmate and First Lady. As a widow,
Mrs. Roosevelt became the chairman of the Human
Rights Commission of the United Nations and a
delegate to its General Assembly. This is a por-
trait of a shy young girl developing into a famous
woman who, in accepting the numerous opportuni-
ties that life afforded her, contributed immeasurably
to the cause of world peace and to the improvement
of race relations.
1296. Autobiography. New York, Harper [1961]
454 p. illus. 61—12222 £807.1^35
1297. ISHBEL ROSS, 1897-
Mrs. Ross, a former editor of the New Yor^
Herald-Tribune, is a professional biographer and
author whose works include Proud Kate, Portrait
of an Ambitious Woman (1953), Angel of the Bat-
tlefield; the Life of Clara Barton (1956), and The
General's Wife; the Life of Mrs. Ulysses S. Grant
(i959)-
1298. Grace Coolidge and her era; the story of a
President's wife. New York, Dodd, Mead,
1962. 370 p. illus. 62—8017 E792.I.C6R6
Bibliography: p. 353-355-
BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 99
Grace Goodhue Coolidge (1879—1957) emerges
as the perfect complement to her famous but reticent
husband Calvin Coolidge. She was poised, un-
affected, natural, and at ease in difficult situations.
Mrs. Ross' detailed study takes up Mrs. Coolidge 's
lifelong interest in the deaf. The book also con-
tributes to our understanding of the personality of
the 30th President of the United States.
1299. LOUISE HALL THARP, 1898-
Author of several biographies, including
Until Victory: Horace Mann and Mary Peabody
(1953), mentioned in the annotation for no. 5125 in
the 1960 Guide.
1300. Adventurous alliance; the story of the Agas-
siz family of Boston. Boston, Little, Brown
1^959] 354 P- illus- 59-11886 QH3I.A2T5
Includes bibliography.
A biography of the Agassiz family in 19th-century
New England. The Swiss-born scientist, Louis
Agassiz (1807—1873), whose studies ranged from
fish to glaciers and who revolutionized the teaching
of natural history at Harvard, came to the United
States in 1846. He married Elizabeth Cabot Gary
in 1850, after the death of his first wife. It was a
successful union of two creative intellects. Includ-
ed in their circle were such friends as Longfellow,
William James, and Emerson. Mrs. Tharp follows
the Agassiz' productive lives closely and includes
information on their children and nearest relatives.
The details of the founding of Radclifle College by
Elizabeth Agassiz, who became its first president,
are presented.
1301. NORBERT WIENER, 1894-1964
Norbert Wiener was born in Columbus,
Mo., and is best known for his theory of cybernetics,
which he explained in Cybernetics; or, Control and
Communication in the Animal and the Machine
(1948). He won the National Book Award in 1965
for God and Golem, Inc. (1964).
1302. I am a mathematician; the later life of a
prodigy, an autobiographical account of the
mature years and career of Norbert Wiener and a
continuation of the account of his childhood in Ex-
prodigy. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1956.
380 p. 56-5598 QA29.W497A35
This is a companion volume to Ex-Prodigy (1953)
but can be read independently. Wiener begins
with what he terms his "mature years," when he
arrived at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
in 1919 at the age of 24. He remained there until
his death in 1964. He concentrates on his career as
scientist and mathematician and avoids the personal
details of his life, which he preferred to keep private.
THURMAN WILKINS
1303. Clarence King, a biography. New York,
Macmillan, 1958. 441 p. illus.
58-6965 QE22.K5W5
Bibliography: p. 357—378.
A biography of the "debonair adventurer," Clar-
ence King (1842—1901), founder of the U.S. Geo-
logical Survey, explorer, mountaineer, mining ex-
pert, and good friend of William Dean Howells and
Henry Adams. Some of his scientific achievements
are described in his well-known Mountaineering in
the Sierra Nevada (1872), no. 4210 in the 1960
Guide. Wilkins attempts to piece together the story
of King's entire life from letters, papers, diaries,
fieldbooks, reminiscences, memoirs, court records,
and contemporary newspapers and periodicals.
V
Periodicals and Journalism
A. Newspapers: General
B. Newspapers: Periods, Regions, and Topics
C. Individual Newspapers
D. Newspapermen
E. Foreign-Language Periodicals
F. The Practice of Journalism
G. Magazines: General
H. Individual Magazines
I. The Press and Society
1304-1308
1309-1314
1315-1318
1319-1330
1331-1332
I333~I342
1343-1345
1346-1348
1349-1352
ITS RIGHT to free expression guarded by the Constitution, the press in the United States has
traditionally served as a trustee of moral values. Another of its major functions is per-
haps dual in nature: to explain the world we live in and to prepare us for change in that
world. According to authors entered in Sections A and F, the press no longer adequately
fulfills these roles; rather, journalism has become big business. Newspaper monopolies,
some observers fear, by their very nature threaten diversity and freedom of opinion and lower
the quality of the content of their papers; yet spiral-
Less thorny aspects of journalism are covered in
Section D, comprising biographies of newspaper-
men who have made significant contributions to the
field, and Sections G and H, devoted to histories of
magazines which have, except for the political
ing production costs and labor demands appear to
encourage monopolies. Section I raises another
problem, that of the delicate relationship between
government and the press. Two of the authors
stress the tendency of governmental bodies and
agencies on all levels to become increasingly secre-
tive about their activities and to withhold informa-
tion from reporters.
journals, been largely concerned with entertainment,
culture, and noncontroversial information.
A. Newspapers: General
1304. Emery, Edwin. The press and America, an
interpretative history of journalism. 2d ed.
Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall, 1962. 80 1 p.
illus. (Prentice-Hall journalism series)
62—15294 PN4855-E6 1962
An updated edition of no. 2845 in the 1960 Guide.
1305. Lindstrom, Carl E. The fading American
newspaper. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday,
1960. 283 p. 60—13541 PN4867-L55
A critical survey of the newspaper industry in
America today, based on the ideas that the journal-
istic function has migrated to other communications
media and that "the major problem for the news-
paper journalist is to keep his readers from migrat-
ing too." The author, formerly managing editor
of The Hartford Times and currently a professor of
journalism at the University of Michigan, trenchant-
ly attacks those aspects of newspaper practice
which he considers to be anachronistic, wasteful, or
shortsighted. He particularly condemns the futile
effort to publish the latest news in the shortest time,
100
PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 101
a race already lost to the radio and television indus-
try; the failure to follow up yesterday's news story,
thus abandoning a rich field to other journalistic
media; the lack of competent reviewers in the fields
of literature and the arts; and the disappearance of
controversy as a result of the growth of newspaper
chains and monopolies.
1306. Mott, Frank Luther. American journalism,
a history, 1690—1960. 3d ed. New York,
Macmillan [1962] 901 p. illus.
62-7157 PN4855-M63 1962
An updated edition of no. 2847 in the 1960 Guide.
1307. Tebbel, John W. The compact history of
the American newspaper. New York, Haw-
thorn Books [1963] 286 p.
63-16771 PN4855.T4
"Suggested reading": p. 269—274.
A popular treatment by a former newspaperman
and editor who is now chairman of the Department
of Journalism at New York University. The author
views the history of the American newspaper as "a
record of the Establishment's effort to control the
news and of private individuals to disclose it with-
out restriction." From the colonial period to the
1830'$, the American newspaper was essentially a
propaganda device; the establishment of James
Gordon Bennett's New Yor% Herald in 1835 began
what the author calls "the era of personal journal-
ism." During the colorful period from 1865 to
1900, the newspaper enjoyed its heyday, far surpas-
sing in influence and popularity other printed media.
Out of the "gaudy struggle" between Pulitzer and
Hearst emerged the concept of the newspaper as a
business institution, and a new era began. The
author sees three formidable problems which are
causing a crisis in the press today; these are monop-
oly control (destroying the diversity of viewpoint
which is the real strength of democracy), the auto-
mation of the industry (making monopoly control
a business necessity), and a loss of purpose (the
proper function of the newspaper being to explain
the world to the people who live in it by significant
news, rather than to multiply advertisements and
entertainment features).
1308. Weisberger, Bernard A. The American
newspaperman. Chicago, University of Chi-
cago Press [1961] 226 p. illus. (The Chicago
history of American civilization)
61-8647 PN4855.W4
Since the appearance in 1690 of the first and only
issue of Public}^ Occurrences Both Forreign and
Domestic^, the American newspaper has evolved
from a printer's sideline into a multimillion-dollar
business. Accompanying this process has been a
transformation of the functions of the individuals
engaged in daily journalism. Weisberger examines
the social, political, and technological factors which
produced the age of the printer, the age of the
partisan editor, the age of the publisher and per-
sonalized journalism, and the age of the reporter
and columnist. In the concluding chapter he con-
siders the public relations boom as a threat to the
integrity and independence of the newspaperman.
A section of "Suggested Reading" (p. 207—216)
provides a brief annotated survey of selected litera-
ture in the field.
B. Newspapers: Periods, Regions, and Topics
1309. Becker, Stephen D. Comic art in America;
a social history of the funnies, the political
cartoons, magazine humor, sporting cartoons, and
animated cartoons. With an introduction by Rube
Goldberg. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1959. xi,
387 p. illus. 59—13140 NCi420.B4
Political cartoons became a regular feature of
newspapers in the latter part of the i9th century,
and sports cartoons and comic strips followed short-
ly thereafter. The author presents a chronological
history of the comic strip, from The Yellow Kid to
Pogo and Peanuts, and also reviews other forms of
comic art. Although emphasis is placed on social
history, Becker shows a considerable knowledge of
the artistic and technical problems involved as well.
More critical discussions, as well as an extensive
bibliography, can be found in The Funnies, an
American Idiom ( [New York] Free Press of Glen-
coe [1963] 304 p.), an anthology edited by David
Manning White and Robert H. Abel, which in-
cludes both original and reprinted essays.
1310. Crozier, Emmet. American reporters on the
Western Front, 1914—1918. New York, Ox-
ford University Press, 1959. 299 p.
59-10968 0632^72
Military censorship of the news probably reached
an all-time high during World War I. During the
102 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
first half of the war, the British and French armies
allowed little or no press coverage, and news was
derived from the official communique, from rumor,
or occasionally from the unauthorized exploits of
enterprising newsmen. The Allied armies even-
tually allowed a few accredited reporters to cover
the war but kept tight control on their dispatches.
The author, a retired newspaperman, relates the
activities of such American correspondents as Her-
bert Corey, Floyd Gibbons, Westbrook Pegler, John
T. McCutcheon, and Heywood Broun. Crozier
employed a similar approach in Yankee Reporters,
1861—65 (New York, Oxford University Press,
1956. 441 p.), accompanying it with nine unusual
Civil War maps which show the disposition and
movements not of troops but of reporters.
1311. Forsyth, David P. The business press in
America, [v. i] 1750—1865. Philadel-
phia, Chilton Books [Ci964] xx, 394 p. illus.
64-10959 PN4784.CyF6
Bibliography: v. i, p. 363—370.
This study, the first in a projected set, traces busi-
ness publications from their origins as broadside
price-currents just before the Revolution down to
the period preceding their greatest growth. The
record shows increasing diversification as commer-
cial, railroad, and banking journals make their ap-
pearance, and Forsyth discusses each type of paper
against a background of American economic his-
tory. A chronological list is given of papers pub-
lished from 1750 to 1865, with their inclusive dates
of publication, and it is noted that their survival
rates have been higher than those of general or
literary magazines.
1312. Hohenberg, John. Foreign correspondence;
the great reporters and their times. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1964. xix, 502 p.
64-22762 PN4784.F6H6
Bibliography: p. [475]— 480.
The author, a professor at Columbia University's
Graduate School of Journalism, explores "the effect
of the foreign correspondent on his times and the in-
fluence he has exerted on the jagged course of inter-
national relations." The study is organized into a
series of short narratives which together portray the
origin and evolution of news-gathering abroad.
Although the study is worldwide in scope, emphasis
is placed on the United States, which with England
has been a leader in developing an independent for-
eign correspondence. Considerable attention is de-
voted to the growth of the Associated Press, the
United Press, and the foreign reporting sponsored
by The New Yorl( Times, the New Yor\ Herald,
The World (New York), and The Chicago Daily
News.
1313. Hohenberg, John, ed. The Pulitzer prize
story; news stories, editorials, cartoons, and
pictures from the Pulitzer prize collection at Colum-
bia University. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1959. 375 p. illus. 59—7702 PS647.N4H6
The Pulitzer Prize was established by Joseph
Pulitzer in 1903 for the "encouragement of public
service, public morals, American literature and the
advancement of education." Since the bestowal of
the prizes was contingent upon the opening of the
Columbia University School of Journalism, no
awards were conferred until 1917, six years after
Pulitzer's death. Awards are made in letters,
music (since 1943), and in eight fields of journal-
ism. Compiled by the executive secretary of the
Pulitzer Prize Advisory Board, this anthology con-
tains 64 news stories and editorials which won jour-
nalism prizes. Notes providing the background of
the article and biographical information on the
journalists precede each piece. The material is ar-
ranged under n general subject headings and is
accompanied by some of the prize-winning cartoons
and photographs. An appendix contains a brief
history of the prize and a complete list of the awards
made in all fields since 1917. The complete series
of Pulitzer Prize cartoons, with commentary, is re-
produced in The Lines Are Drawn; American Life
Since the First World War as Reflected in the Pul-
itzer Prize Cartoons (Philadelphia, Lippincott
[1958] 224 p.), by Gerald W. Johnson.
1314. Knight, Oliver. Following the Indian wars;
the story of the newspaper correspondents
among the Indian campaigners. Norman, Univer-
sity of Oklahoma Press [1960] 348 p.
60-8751 £83.866X58
Bibliography: p. 331—338.
A history of the newspapermen who reported
the military campaigns against the Indians in the
West from the close of the Civil War to the Battle
of Wounded Knee, S. Dak. in 1890. Most of these
campaigns were conducted by small units far from
their base of supply, and the correspondents perforce
became members of the expeditions. A professor of
journalism and former newspaperman, Knight has
concentrated on the 20 identifiable correspondents,
accredited between 1867 and 1881, of whom Henry
M. Stanley is the best known. The treatment is
chronological by campaign and includes information
on the reporters' backgrounds. The battles them-
selves are described and the accuracy of the reporting
is evaluated.
PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 103
C. Individual Newspapers
1315. Canham, Erwin D. Commitment to free-
dom; the story of The Christian Science
Monitor. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1958. 454 p.
illus. 58-9055 PN4899.B65C53
The Christian Science Monitor is considered to
rank among the most influential papers published in
the United States today. It was established in Bos-
ton in 1908 by mandate of Mary Baker Eddy, the
founder of Christian Science, who intended it to be
a regular newspaper with the "spiritual mission" of
supplying accurate information and interpretation
of current events to Christian Scientists and others.
A policy of "meaningful journalism" has been main-
tained by the paper. Crime, disaster, and scandal
are reported only when a "necessary social purpose"
is involved. This history of the Monitor, written
by the man who has served as editor since 1945, is
uncritical of policies and performance but supplies
much inside information revealing how and why
the Monitor, "which is to professionals a kind of
daily astonishment," has grown and developed the
reputation it holds today.
1316. Conrad, William C., Kathleen F. Wilson,
and Dale Wilson. The Milwaukee Journal:
the first eighty years. With a foreword by Arthur
Ochs Sulzberger. Madison, University of Wiscon-
sin Press, 1964. xv, 232 p. illus.
64—19175 PN4899-M37J67
The Milwaukee Journal was founded in 1882
and, under the capable editorship of Lucius W.
Nieman, soon rose to a position of leadership in
Wisconsin. Through most of its existence the
Journal has been a fiercely independent paper,
often to the point of supporting candidates from op-
posing parties in the same election. Before and
during World War I, the paper attacked the propa-
ganda published by the German-language news-
papers of the area and solidly backed the Nation's
efforts to prosecute the war. For this crusade in a
predominantly German area, it won the Pulitzer
Prize for public service in 1919. In the thirties, the
paper supported the New Deal; in the fifties it op-
posed Senator McCarthy in his own State. Today
the Journal is frequently ranked among the first five
papers in the Nation on the basis of typographic ex-
cellence as well as widespread news coverage and
independence in viewpoint. Appropriately, the his-
tory of this employee-owned paper is written by
three former staff members in the simple but posi-
tive style characteristic of the paper itself.
1317. Hart, Jim Alice. A history of the St. Louis
Globe-Democrat. Columbia, University of
Missouri Press [1961] 298 p. illus.
61-12425 PN4899.S27G55 1961
Bibliography: p. 281—290.
The St. Louis Globe-Democrat had its origins in
the Daily Missouri Democrat, founded in 1852.
After its merger with the St. Louis Globe in 1875,
the paper achieved great .influence under the editor-
ship of Joseph B. McCullagh. "Little Mack," who
considered the essence of running a newspaper to be
"the art of guessing where hell is likely to break
loose next," spent more for telegraphed and cabled
news than any of his editorial contemporaries and,
when there was no local news, set about creating it
by means which have subsequently been imitated by
the American press as a whole. After McCullagh 's
suicide in 1896 and a brief fling with yellow journal-
ism, the paper settled down into conservative, pe-
destrian ways and by 1950 was overshadowed by the
more imaginative and hard-driving St. Louis Post-
Dispatch. In 1955 the Globe-Democrat was sold to
the Newhouse chain and, despite a crippling strike
in 1959, seemed to be emerging as a crusading news-
paper.
1318. Perkin, Robert L. The first hundred years;
an informal history of Denver and The
Rocf^y Mountain News. With a foreword by Gene
Fowler. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1959.
624 p. illus. 59—9786 PN4899.D45R6
The Rocf(y Mountain News was established in
1859, during the Pike's Peak gold rush. The paper
changed hands many times, with corresponding al-
terations in political and journalistic philosophy.
The News was purchased by the Scripps-Howard
Newspapers in 1926, and Roy Howard immediately
engaged in a newspaper war — referred to as the
"battle of the century" — with Fred Bonfils and the
profitmaking vehicle of his yellow journalism, The
Denver Past. The exhausted publishers finally
signed a truce in 1928. Today the News is a
thriving local tabloid with a lively journalistic style.
The growth of another western newspaper is de-
scribed in John Middagh's Frontier Newspaper: The
El Paso Times (El Paso, Texas Western Press, 1958.
333 P-)-
104
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
D. Newspapermen
^/ 1319. Baillie, Hugh. High tension; the recollec-
tions of Hugh Baillie. New York, Harper
[1959] 300 p. illus. 59-6299 PN4874.B24A3
The United Press (now United Press Interna-
tional) was founded in 1907 by E. W. Scripps to
compete with the Associated Press, which provided
news service only to its member newspapers. The
UP sold news on a contract basis to any newspaper
that wished to subscribe. The UP was forced to
scramble for news, and Hugh Baillie, its president
from 1935 to 1955, lacking the well-established pipe-
lines of the more sedate AP, maintained a vigorous,
aggressive agency. Baillie was a writing executive
who, whenever possible, covered the news himself,
and this book is an account of his journalistic ex-
periences, emphasizing his interviews with many
famous personalities.
v 1320. [Cockerill] King, Homer W. Pulitzer's
prize editor; a biography of John A. Cock-
erill, 1845—1896. Durham, N.C., Duke University
Press, 1965. xx, 336 p. illus.
64-7798 PN4874.C6Z7
Bibliography: p. [3241-329.
The New York World was not exclusively the
product of Joseph Pulitzer's inspiration and effort.
When Pulitzer installed John A. Cockerill as man-
aging editor of the St. Louts Post-Dispatch, the
"Colonel" had had a distinguished record of edi-
torial work on The Cincinnati Enquirer, The Wash-
ington Post, which he founded with Stilson Hutch-
ins, and the Baltimore Gazette. Cockerill and
Pulitzer were in accord in their crusading zeal to
publish a fearless, factual, provocative newspaper.
Pulitzer purchased The World in 1883 and made
Cockerill managing editor. The latter's willingness
to experiment throughout his career won him the
appellation, "father of the new journalism." A
pioneer in the use of pictures and editorial cartoon
caricatures and in starting a Sunday newspaper for
all the family, he discovered and developed Bill
Nye, Nellie Ely, and Lafcadio Hearn.
1321. Cooper, Kent. Kent Cooper and the Asso-
ciated Press, an autobiography. New York,
Random House [1959] 334 p. illus.
59-6640 PN4874.C685A3
Kent Cooper (1880-1965) joined the Associated
Press in 1910 and was its general manager and exec-
utive director from 1925 to 1951. Under his leader-
ship the AP was transformed from a cautious,
conservative news agency for the United States into
a dynamic organization serving papers all over the
world. In this account Cooper covers the many
tributes which he received from prominent members
of the press over the years and also singles out many
AP staff members for special mention. Photographs
are included of many well-known editors, publish-
ers, and reporters. Cooper's views on government
intervention in the communications field are set
forth in his book The Right to Know; an Exposi-
tion of the Evils of News Suppression and Propa-
ganda (New York, Farrar, Straus & Cudahy [1956]
335 P-)-
1322. Daniels, Jonathan. They will be heard;
America's crusading newspaper editors.
New York, McGraw-Hill [1965] 336 p.
64-66019 PN4855.D3
Bibliography: p. 325—330.
The continuing fight by zealous editors for a free
press is the underlying theme of this work. The
author dramatizes the persistent struggle to exercise
—in the words used by Andrew Hamilton in the
famous libel case against John Peter Zenger — "the
liberty both of exposing and opposing arbitrary
Power by speaking and writing Truth." The dis-
cussion begins with Benjamin Harris' newspaper,
Public^ Occurrences Both Forreign and Domestic^,
which appeared on September 25, 1690, with the
announced purpose of exposing false rumors.
Among the later editors who receive attention are
Edmund Ruffin, Horace Greeley, Joseph Pulitzer,
and William Allen White. The concluding anec-
dote concerns the efforts of Carl McGee, against
vigorous resistance from Secretary of the Interior
Albert B. Fall, to expose the corruption in the Tea-
pot Dome oil leases in 1922.
1323. [Daniels] Morrison, Joseph L. Josephus
Daniels says . . . An editor's political odyssey
from Bryan to Wilson and F. D. R., 1894—1913.
Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press
[1962] 339 p. 62-53249 PN4874.D33M6
Bibliography: p. [3201—332.
Josephus Daniels (1862—1948), publisher of The
Neu/s and Observer (Raleigh, N.C.) for more than
50 years, was a spokesman for the "New South"
and the Democratic Party. Through his brand of
PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 105
personal journalism, the paper gained the largest
circulation in the State and, although later sur-
passed by the Charlotte Observer, has remained the
most influential political voice in eastern North
Carolina. Daniels was a loyal and liberal Democrat
who fought against the railroad interests and child
labor and championed State-supported education and
nationwide prohibition. He worked for economic
and educational progress for the Negro while con-
tinuing to support white supremacy. Morrison has
confined his attention to Daniels' early career as an
editor, from the time he took control of The News
and Observer to his appointment as Wilson's Secre-
tary of the Navy. Emphasis is placed on his politi-
cal activities and the controversies in which he and
the newspaper became involved.
1324. [Davis] Burlingame, Roger. Don't let
them scare you; the life and times of Elmer
Davis. Philadelphia, Lippincott [1961] 352 p.
61-8669 PN4874.D36B8
Elmer Davis (1890—1958) was a newspaperman,
freelance writer, novelist, public official, and radio
commentator. Born in a small Indiana town, he
never lost his midwestern twang or his ability to
express complicated ideas and events in language
which was simple, uncommonly clear, and forceful.
After 10 years with The New Yorf^ Times, he
turned to freelance writing for Collier's, Harper's,
and other prominent journals. As World War II
approached, Davis returned to reporting, this time
as a news analyst for CBS. During the war, he
served as head of the Office of War Information and
became engaged in well-publicized disagreements
with Robert Sherwood and a group of OWI writers,
including Henry F. Pringle and Arthur M. Schles-
inger, Jr. As a radio commentator for ABC in the
early 1950*5, he was highly critical of the tactics of
the late Senator Joseph McCarthy. The author ex-
presses considerable admiration for Davis' broad-
casting. The professional experiences of another
newspaperman and radio commentator are related
in Raymond Swing's "Good Evening!" A Profes-
sional Memoir (New York, Harcourt, Brace &
World [1964] 311 p.).
I 1325. [Hearst] Swanberg, W.A. Citizen Hearst;
a biography of William Randolph Hearst.
New York, Scribner [1961] 555 p. illus.
61-7220 PN4874.H4S83
Controversy characterized most of William Ran-
dolph Hearst's life (1863—1951), and this book, the
latest and largest of the many Hearst biographies,
has itself been a storm center. In 1962, it was unani-
mously nominated by the Pulitzer Advisory Board
for the biography award, but in an unprecedented
action the trustees of Columbia University vetoed
the nomination and declined to give any prize for
biography. Swanberg's account is generally ac-
knowledged to be an uncommonly thorough analysis
of this contradictory personality. Although unable
to gain access to the greater part of the Hearst cor-
respondence, Swanberg nevertheless amassed a vast
amount of information through research in news-
papers, secondary sources, and hundreds of personal
interviews.
1326. [Lippmann] Childs, Marquis W., and
James B. Reston, eds. Walter Lippmann
and his times. New York, Harcourt, Brace [1959]
246 p. 59—10255 PN4874.L45C5
Bibliographical footnotes.
A volume of 12 essays honoring Walter Lipp-
mann (b. 1889) in his 7oth year. Lippmann has
been writing and commenting on the political scene
since 1914, when he joined Herbert Croly on The
New Republic. After World War I he became
editor of the New York World and, after that
paper's demise, he undertook a syndicated column
for the New Yor% Herald Tribune. Two-thirds of
these essays deal with Lippmann's life, ideas, and
influence, and the remainder with aspects of foreign
policy or the democratic press suggested by his
work. Marquis Childs and James Reston provide
an introduction to Lippmann the political analyst
and a picture of Lippmann the man. Allan Nevins
writes of Lippmann's years at The World, Frank
Moraes discusses the columnist's influence in Asia,
and Arthur M. Schlesinger, Jr., treats him as a case
study in the relationship of the intellectual to prac-
tical politics. Whereas Lippmann operates from an
Olympian viewpoint, Joseph and Stewart Alsop
practice personal and often emotional involvement
with international events. A description of their
mode of operation is provided in the first five chap-
ters of their work, The Reporter's Trade (New
York, Reynal [1958] 377 p.); the remainder of
the volume is made up of representative selections
from their published columns, 1946—57.
1327. Newton, Virgil M. Crusade for democracy.
Ames, Iowa State University Press [1961]
316 p. 61-10549 PN4899.T35T75
An account of the newspaper campaigns fought
by The Tampa Tribune and its editor, Virgil M.
(Red) Newton, Jr. Newton joined the Tribune in
1930 and became its managing editor in 1943. Un-
der his leadership, the paper inaugurated a series of
crusades that helped turn out the corrupt govern-
ment which had dominated Tampa for 17 years,
exposed the existence of a flourishing gambling
underworld, and aroused public opinion on sub-
IO6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
standard schools. With Tampa on the road to re-
form, Newton turned to State government and
trenchandy attacked abuses in the prison system,
campaigned for reapportionment of the legislature,
and exposed graft and corruption among high offi-
cials. In 1953 Newton became chairman of the
Freedom of Information Committee of Sigma Delta
Chi and thereupon turned his indefatigable energy
to an investigation of secrecy in the Federal Govern-
ment, in particular that surrounding the expendi-
ture of public funds. A man of strong opinion,
Newton displays an almost total confidence in the
righteousness of the causes he has espoused.
, 1328. [Pegler] Pilat, Oliver R. Pegler, angry
man of the press. Boston, Beacon Press
[1963] 288 p. illus. 63-11391 PN4874.P43?5
In an age when newspapers strive to present the
news impartially, personal journalism has survived
in the writings of the syndicated columnists who
are allowed wide scope in giving their own inter-
pretation of the significance of current events. As a
sportswriter and nationally known columnist, West-
brook Pegler took advantage of this freedom to
write a column notorious for its unrestrained attacks
on well-known contemporaries. Pegler made his
reputation in the 1930*5 as an uncompromising op-
ponent of fascism. During this period, he won a
Pulitzer Prize for articles on abuses in organized
labor. His political beliefs subsequently shifted to
the right, and in the 1950'$ he was a supporter of
Senator Joseph McCarthy. His columns became
increasingly intemperate, and in 1962 he terminated
his contract with King Features as a result of their
censorship of his column. Later he wrote a monthly
column for American Opinion, owned and edited
by Robert Welch of the John Birch Society. This
biography by an editor of the New Yor\ Post at-
tempts to provide a rounded and objective picture of
the controversial journalist. Pilat describes many of
Pegler 's more famous attacks and his libel suits in
some detail and tries to show how far the columnist's
accusations were justified and wherein they were dis-
torted. The result is a portrayal of a sensitive, emo-
tional, and vindictive man who sees himself as "the
reporter who tells the truth and walks alone."
1329. Seltzer, Louis B. The years were good.
Introduction by Bruce Catton. Cleveland,
World Pub. Co. [1956] 317 p.
56-10431 PN4874.S427A3
The Cleveland Press, established in 1878 by E. W.
Scripps, was the first newspaper in what was to be-
come the Scripps-Howard chain. Since 1928 the
Press has been edited by Louis B. Seltzer (b. 1897),
and under his leadership it has maintained its posi-
tion as a hard-hitting, crusading newspaper. Seltzer
left school at 13 to become an office boy for The
Cleveland Leader. He was city editor of the Cleve-
land Press at 19 and had become its editor before he
was 31. Through the years, he and the paper
have become identified with the development,
growth, and improvement of the city. In crisp
journalistic style, this autobiography describes Selt-
zer's personal philosophy of journalism, as well as
many of the paper's crusades and campaigns.
1330. [Swope] Kahn, Ely J. The world of
Swope. New York, Simon & Schuster
[1965] 510 p. illus.
65-11976 CT275.S9874K3
Bibliography: p. 476—482.
An anecdotal, authorized biography by a long-
time staff writer for The New Yorker. The son of
German-Jewish parents, Herbert Bayard Swope
(1882—1958) was a flamboyant figure of many
facets. He began his newspaper career at the age of
17 on the St. Louis Post-Dispatch; he served the
New York World from 1909 to 1925 with ingenuity
and distinction. He disclaimed having any rules
for success but offered a sure formula for failure:
"Try to please everyone." He was most successful
in making money and in seeming to know everyone
of consequence. Woodrow Wilson, Alfred E.
Smith, Franklin D. Roosevelt, and Bernard Baruch
sought and accepted his advice. High-salaried con-
sultant of large corporations, member of civic com-
mittees, founder and director of Freedom House,
New York Racing Commissioner, consultant to the
Secretary of War during World War II, he was
referred to as a "creator of statesmen" and "editor
emeritus of public opinion."
E. Foreign -Language Periodicals
1331. Arndt, Karl J. R., and May E. Olson.
German-American newspapers and periodi-
cals, 1732-1955; history and bibliography. 2d rev.
ed. New York, Johnson Reprint Corp. [1965]
810 p. facsims. 66—2897 Z6953-5.G3A7 1965
Added t.p.: Deutsch-ameri}(anische Zeitungen
und Zeitschrijten, 1732-1955.
German-language newspapers and periodicals
PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 107
have probably been the greatest in number and in-
fluence among America's foreign-language press.
They flourished at the turn of the century but suf-
fered a disastrous blow during World War I, when
public sentiment caused many to cease publication.
In some cases back issues were even destroyed, and
with them a great deal of source material on local
history was lost. To fill this gap, the authors have
sought to compile a complete bibliography of
German-language papers published in the United
States and to locate files of these publications when-
ever possible. In some cases complete holdings
could only be found in European libraries. About
5,000 titles are included, arranged by State and city.
Each entry includes dates of publication, changes of
title, names of editors and publishers, and often a
brief commentary. The section for each State
begins with a short introductory summary giving
statistics of the German element. The main body
of the work is followed by a tide index, an extensive
bibliography, and an appendix listing 1 1 1 additional
serials, mostly prisoner-of-war camp papers.
1332. Hunter, Edward. In many voices; our
fabulous foreign-language press. Norman
Park, Ga., Norman College [1960] 190 p.
60-3673 PN4884.H8
The foreign-language press is not the influential
voice in America today that it was 50 years ago
before curbs were placed on immigration, but it is
still a factor in American political life and a re-
minder of the diverse national origins of American
citizens. In 1960, there were 65 daily foreign-
languge newspapers and more than 200 weeklies in
33 languages. Since second- and third-generation
Americans have tended to lose interest in their an-
cestral lands and languages, many of the surviving
papers have accepted sponsorship by nationality
societies or religious groups or have shifted to pub-
lication in English. A small number are under
Communist control. Individual publications are
discussed briefly in this survey, which is the first
attempt at a general view since The Immigrant
Press and Its Control (1922), by Robert E. Park,
no. 2897 in the 1960 Guide.
F. The Practice of Journalism
1333. Arnold, Edmund C. Functional newspaper
design. New York, Harper [1956] 340 p.
illus. 56—6442 Z253-A7
Attractive packaging is one of the most important
factors in promoting sales of any commodity, and
newspapers are no exception. The author, who is
editor of The Linotype News, states that today's
papers "must make reading as easy as possible and
make it appear even easier" in order to meet the
stiff competition from the electronic media. The
"tools" in the hands of the newspaper designer are
typography and layout. Both have been modern-
ized and improved in the 20th century, the most
notable changes being a larger and simpler typeface,
tabloid size ("five columns by approximately 15
inches"), and style. Topics discussed include type-
face in headlines and in the body of the text, pic-
tures, layouts in general and on the specialized
pages, and recent technological changes. Although
this volume is intended as a manual for professional
newsmen, its clear style, explanation of technical
terms, and numerous illustrations make it accessible
to the nonprofessional reader.
1334. Brucker, Herbert. Journalist, eyewitness to
history. New York, Macmillan [1962]
21 r p. (Career book series)
62-14794 PN4775.B735
A description of the journalistic profession today.
The author is editor of The Hartford Courant
and a former professor of journalism at Columbia
University. The discussion covers all types of jour-
nalism, including radio and television, photo-
journalism, public relations, and in particular, news-
paper work. Much of the book is devoted to
practical advice on educational preparation, job
availability, and advancement. Opportunities for
women entering the field are noted, and the re-
quirements, rewards, and sacrifices of day-to-day
reporting are oudined. Brucker also analyzes the
rights involved in the freedom of the press and dis-
cusses the decline in the number of newspapers, the
rise in costs, the competition from other journalistic
media, and the control of the press by businessmen
rather than editors.
1335. Byerly, Kenneth R. Community journal-
ism. Philadelphia, Chilton Co., Book Divi-
sion [1961] 435 p. 61-7188 PN4784-C73B9
The term "country weekly" has become passe,
the cracker-barrel philosopher-editor has disap-
peared, and the number of smalltown newspapers
IO8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
has decreased by more than 40 percent in the last
50 years, but community journalism nonetheless
remains a thriving aspect of the newspaper profes-
sion. The total size and circulation of the surviving
papers have increased, and new papers are being
started in the rapidly growing suburban areas. This
is a practical textbook on how to run a community
newspaper, written by a newspaperman with many
years' experience as owner and editor of weekly
and daily papers in the South and West. Byerly
considers that the two major functions of a com-
munity paper are to provide local news and to serve
as "an influence, voice, and builder" in stimulating
thought and action on projects and issues. Such
papers "must be written with more intimacy and
more concern about the reader's reception" than city
dailies; they constitute the "last stronghold of per-
sonal journalism in America." The book's final
section is devoted to the newspaper as a business,
with emphasis on public relations and sound ac-
counting methods.
1336. Casey, Ralph D., ed. The press in perspec-
tive. Baton Rouge, Louisiana State Univer-
sity Press [1963] 217 p. 63—16657 PN4857.C27
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 207-213).
A collection of annual lectures financed by the
Newspaper Guild of the Twin Cities and delivered
at the University of Minnesota School of Journalism
from 1947 to 1962. The lecturers included James
Reston, Elmer Davis, Pierre Salinger, James Hag-
erty, John Fischer, Gerald W. Johnson, Eric Seva-
reid, Herbert Block, Joseph Alsop, Reinhold
Niebuhr, and Henry S. Commager. In general, the
series attempts to define the place of the press
"within a social context." Recurrent themes are that
the press should devote more emphasis to the back-
ground and interpretation of the news and should
improve its own performance "as a trustee of the
public interest."
1337. Elfenbein, Julien. Business journalism. 2d
rev. ed. New York, Harper [1960] 352 p.
60-5712 PN4784.C7E4 1960
An updated edition of no. 2902 in the 1960 Guide.
1338. Hohenberg, John. The professional jour-
nalist; a guide to modern reporting practice.
New York, Holt [1960] 423 p.
60-7795 PN4775.H44
A basic textbook on the problems and techniques
of reporting the news for newspapers and wire
services, including sections on the techniques of
newswriting, newsgathering, and specialized re-
porting. Emphasis is placed on reporting as a
public service, but the ethical aspects of determining
how news is to be gathered and what news is to be
printed are discussed realistically in the light of
present practices. Hohenberg's approach is practi-
cal and detailed; there are several chapters on "news-
paper style," showing the difference between the
English found in the newspapers and everyday
written and spoken English. Hillier Krieghbaum's
Facts in Perspective (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,
Prentice-Hall, 1956. 518 p. Prentice-Hall journal-
ism series') is a practical guide to editorial writing
and news interpretation. Roland E. Wolseley's
Critical Writing for the Journalist (Philadelphia,
Chilton Co., Book Division [1959] 207 p.) pre-
sents a discriminating view of literary and artistic
criticism as practiced in news media today.
1339. MacDougall, Curtis D. Newsroom prob-
lems and policies. [Rev. and enl. ed.] New
York, Dover Publications [1963] viii, 493 p.
63—17910 PN473I.M27 1963
An updated edition of no. 2905 in the 1960 Guide.
MacDougall has also published a slightly modified
version of the updated text under the title The
Press and Its Problems (Dubuque, Iowa, W. C.
Brown Co. [1964] 532 p. Journalism series).
1340. Nieman reports. Reporting the news; selec-
tions from Nieman reports. Edited, with an
introduction, by Louis M. Lyons. Cambridge, Bel-
knap Press of Harvard University Press, 1965.
443 p. 65-19825 PN4853.N5
Louis M. Lyons, who for 25 years was curator
of the Nieman Fellowships for newspapermen at
Harvard University, selected and edited Reporting
the News from the quarterly publication of the
Nieman Fellows. The fellowships provide experi-
enced newspapermen with a year at Harvard to
pursue studies of their choice and to attend discus-
sions on journalism with their colleagues. Nieman
Reports has based its philosophy on the concept of
"the responsibility of the press." The articles re-
printed here are objective, realistic, and often
penetrating.
1341. Rucker, Frank W., and Herbert Lee Wil-
liams. Newspaper organization and man-
agement. 2d ed. Ames, Iowa State University
Press [1965] xv, 544 p. illus.
65-!0573 PN4775.R8 1965
Bibliography: p. 529—534.
An updated edition of no. 2909 in the 1960 Guide.
1342. Woods, Allan. Modern newspaper produc-
tion. New York, Harper & Row [1963]
PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 109
238 p. illus. 63-12054 PN4734.W6
A clear and sometimes witty explanation of the
technical side of newspaper publishing. The
author, a former production manager of Newsday,
considers such subjects as printers' unions, the flow
of work through the composing room and press-
room, high-speed machines, problems of newsprint
supply, and the photoengraving processes. The
final chapter concerns the crisis caused by spiraling
costs. Woods describes the search for new and
cheaper production methods as exemplified by the
Teletypesetter and offset printing. He concludes
that since most of these new cost-cutting devices can
only be used effectively for smaller issues, the re-
sult may be a rise in the number of small local
papers after many of the large papers have priced
themselves out of the field. This volume is in-
tended to familiarize journalism students with the
technical side of the newspaper business. It is
written in language which can be understood by
the nonspecialist, and all technical terms are itali-
cized the first time they appear and explained in an
extensive glossary at the end (p. 193—223).
G. Magazines: General
1343. Davenport, Walter, and James C. Derieux.
Ladies, gentlemen, and editors. Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1960. 386 p.
60—11379 PN487I.D3
Includes bibliography.
Biographical essays on some of the more interest-
ing editors and publishers of the i9th and early
20th centuries. The authors, former editors of
Collier's, have chosen strong personalities, without
regard for the relative merits of their magazines.
No living editors and no appraisals of existing mag-
azines in their present form are included. Having
ruled out all reasonable possibilities of legal re-
prisal, the authors have produced a collection of
uninhibited accounts of such people as William
d'Alton Mann of Town Topics, William Cowper
Brann of The Iconoclast, William Marion Reedy of
The Mirror, and Richard Kyle Fox of The Police
Gazette, as well as such well-known editors as
Edward William Bok, Sarah Josepha Hale, William
Lloyd Garrison, and George Horace Lorimer.
Scholarship has been blended with a racy conversa-
tional style, replete with colloquial expressions and
incomplete sentences. An account of Reedy and
the influence of his St. Louis magazine on American
literature during the period 1890—1920 can be
found in The Man in the Mirror (Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1963. 351 p.), by Max
Putzel. Brann's controversial life and violent death
are described against the background of Waco, Tex.,
in the 1890*5 in Charles Carver's Brann and The
Iconoclast (Austin, University of Texas Press
[1957] 196 p.).
1344. Ferguson, Rowena. Editing the small mag-
azine. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1958. 271 p. 57-10746 PN4775.F4
Small magazines or specialized journals with
limited circulation constitute 95 percent of the
magazines published in this country. Generally
issued by or for organized agencies, these publica-
tions reflect the needs and interests of the parent
body and its members. Because of their small size
and limited budgets, they are often edited by staff
members with little editorial experience or training.
This book is designed as a how-to-do-it manual for
such editors. The first half is a detailed breakdown
of the technical aspects of editorial work; the second
section is concerned with the executive functions
of the editor. There is a brief bibliographic essay
(p. 259—264) on books useful to beginning and
experienced editors alike. A discussion is included
of the "litde magazine," a specific type of literary
magazine appealing to a small, sophisticated audi-
ence. Reed Whittemore's Little Magazines (Min-
neapolis, University of Minnesota Press [1963]
47 p. University of Minnesota pamphlets on
American writers, no. 32) is a critical and witty
essay on the aims, influence, and future of this
class of publication, with which the author has been
actively concerned during most of his life.
1345. Peterson, Theodore B. Magazines in the
twentieth century. [2d ed.] Urbana, Uni-
versity of Illinois Press, 1964. 484 p. illus.
64-18668 PN4877.P4 1964
An updated edition of no. 2918 in the 1960 Guide.
Roland E. Wolseley's Understanding Magazines
(Ames, Iowa State University Press, 1965. 451 p.)
is a revision, with a different theme and a new
plan of organization, of The Magazine World
(1951), which is described in the annotation for
no. 2919 in the 1960 Guide.
110 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
H. Individual Magazines
1346. Lyon, Peter. Success story; the life and
times of S. S. McClure. New York, Scrib-
ner [1963] 433 p. ill us.
63-16757 PN4874-M35L9
"Author's note and bibliography": p. 413—422.
Samuel S. McClure (1857—1949), an Irish im-
migrant of brilliant mind but erratic personality,
organized one of the first successful syndicates for
the sale of popular fiction to city newspapers when
he was only 28. In 1893 ne founded McClure 's
Magazine, which was priced at 15 cents a copy and
contained high-quality fiction and well-written arti-
cles on topics of current interest. By 1900 McClure' s
had the second highest circulation among general
magazines and had revolutionized the periodical
world. The January 1903 issue, with articles by
Ida Tarbell, Ray Stannard Baker, and Lincoln
Steffens, marked the beginning of the muckraking
era and the pinnacle of McClure 's success. By
1912, however, McClure had been ousted from the
editorship and the magazine had begun the slow
decline which ended with its demise in 1929. Lyon
maintains that McClure was "the greatest magazine
editor this country had yet produced" and that
McClure' s from 1895 to 1910 was "probably the
best general magazine ever to be published any-
where." McClure's My Autobiography (New York,
Ungar [1963] 266 p. American classics) is a re-
print, with an introduction by Louis Filler, of the
original 1914 work ghostwritten by Willa Gather.
1347. Skipper, Ottis C. }. D. B. De Bow, maga-
zinist of the Old South. Athens, University
of Georgia Press [1958] 269 p. ill us.
58-9172 PN4874.D395S53
Bibliography: p. 248—258.
James Dun woody Brownson De Bow (1820—1867)
founded and edited De Bow's Review, for some
years the most influential and widely circulated
magazine of the ante bellum South. The Review,
founded in 1846 in New Orleans, was primarily a
commercial and statistical magazine, although from
time to time it included articles on literature and
history. De Bow was a zealous advocate of slavery
and, by the middle 1850'$, was proposing secession
as the only method of preserving Southern unity.
A year after the outbreak of the Civil War, the
Review suspended publication because of a lack of
funds. De Bow revived it in 1866 but died the fol-
lowing year; the Review was continued irregularly
by other publishers until 1 880. Its chief importance
today lies in its value as "interpreter of the ante-
bellum South." Skipper, a professional historian,
concludes that the Review was a reflection of the
thinking of the times rather than an influence upon
them.
1348. Turner, Susan J. A history of The Free-
man, literary landmark of the early twen-
ties. New York, Columbia University Press, 1963.
204 p. 63—19075 PN49OO.F7T85
Bibliography: p. [187]— 197.
Few periodicals that have lasted for so short a
time as The Freeman (New York) of 1920—24
have lingered so persistently in memory. In 1917
Francis Neilson, an English single-taxer who had
broken with the Liberal Party, married Mrs. Helen
Swift Morris of the wealthy Chicago meatpacking
family. Two years later, since the Nation could
not be purchased, she established The Freeman to
serve as his vehicle. Neilson allowed most of the
work of editing and writing to pass into the hands
of an American single-taxer, Albert Jay Nock, but
became quite resentful at the outcome. The politi-
cal viewpoint of The Freeman approached philo-
sophical anarchism: the state was to wither away
as the development of ideas left it high and dry.
This view was uncongenial to the American left of
the day, however, and the subscribers never ex-
ceeded 10,000. The magazine's brilliant literary
department, headed by Van Wyck Brooks, Harold
Stearns, and Lewis Mumford and aided by a corps
of reviewers that looks impressive 40 years later,
won general admiration but did not make up for
the failure to attract a political following. When
the Neilsons withdrew support at the end of the
fourth year, The Freeman ceased publication.
PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / III
I. The Press and Society
1349. Cater, Douglass. The fourth branch of gov-
ernment. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1959.
194 P- 59-7616 PN4738.C3
A study of the interaction between the national
government and the Washington press corps. The
author, a former special assistant to the Secretary
of the Army and Washington correspondent for
The Reporter, maintains that the influence of the
press is such that it constitutes a fourth branch of
government. With the proliferation of agencies
since 1933, the reporter has become "the indispen-
sable broker and middleman among the subgovern-
ments." Cater contends that the new generation of
politicians uses the press to build national reputa-
tions which are sometimes unrelated to legislative
accomplishment; officials, on the other hand,
jealously guard new programs against the glare of
public exposure until policy has become so set that
public opinion can no longer affect it. Since the
press is thus forced to obtain information in un-
systematic fashion, news is often incomplete and its
treatment unbalanced. The press itself exercises
great power by deciding what constitutes important
news and what will be relegated to the inside pages
or omitted entirely. Cater offers few panaceas, but
his postscript describing reporting in Moscow makes
it clear that conditions could be worse.
1350. Pollard, James E. The Presidents and the
press, Truman to Johnson. Washington,
Public Affairs Press [1964] 125 p.
64-8753 JK5i8.P6
"References": p. 121—125.
This supplement to no. 2930 in the 1960 Guide
treats the press relations of recent U.S. Presidents.
The author traces the initiation and development of
the White House news conference, which originated
in President Wilson's administration and has been
continued with varying success to the present time.
Franklin D. Roosevelt, who extended the news
conference with his "fireside chats" by radio, was
"unsurpassed in the uses to which he put the device
or in his skill in managing it." His methods were
continued and expanded by Harry S. Truman.
Pollard states that Dwight D. Eisenhower appeared
to endure the news conferences rather than to enjoy
them, but was the first to extend them to television.
John F. Kennedy was convivial, quick in response,
and ready with word or fact in reply to a question.
Lyndon B. Johnson proved informal and im-
promptu; news conferences were likely to be held
in unusual places and under unaccustomed condi-
tions— at the "L.B.J." ranch, for example, or in a
rapid walking tour of the White House grounds.
Another book on the same subject, Presidential
Leadership of Public Opinion (Bloomington, In-
diana University Press, 1965. 370 p.), by Elmer E.
Cornwell, traces relations between President and
press from Theodore Roosevelt through John F.
Kennedy.
1351. Wiggins, James R. Freedom or secrecy?
New York, Oxford University Press, 1956.
242 p. 56-11115 JC599-U5W53
A discussion of the increasing secrecy in govern-
ment— national. State and local, legislative, judicial,
and executive alike — which the author believes is
threatening freedom of the press. Wiggins, who
is executive editor of The Washington Post, finds
that after three centuries of progress in making in-
formation available to the people events now appear
to be moving in the opposite direction. He com-
plains that committees of Congress hold their execu-
tive sessions behind doors closed to press and public;
all Federal and many State courts exclude cameras
from the courtroom; records of the expenditure of
millions of dollars of Federal funds are held con-
fidential and privileged; and the military estab-
lishments keep spreading the cover of security over
matters to which it has small if any relevance. The
several elements of freedom of information and the
press are reviewed, and the history of these rights
is traced from their beginnings in English law to
their present status in America, with illustrations
from pertinent legal cases. The last chapter is
concerned with various criticisms of newspaper
practice today. After an analysis of each charge,
Wiggins concludes that "the professed fears that
information furnished by government will be dis-
torted by the press or misunderstood by the people
are fears that spring from a lack of faith in demo-
cratic institutions and beliefs."
1352. Zenger, John Peter, defendant. A brief nar-
rative of the case and trial of John Peter
Zenger, printer of the New Yor^ Weekly Journal.
By James Alexander. Edited by Stanley Nider
Katz. Cambridge, Mass., Belknap Press of Har-
vard University, 1963. 238 p. (The John Harvard
library) 63—19133 KF223-Z4K38 1963
112 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Bibliographical notes: 205—232.
The trial and acquittal of John Peter Zenger
(1697?— 1746), printer of the New Yor\ Weekly
Journal, for criminal libel in 1736 has traditionally
been considered a foundation stone in the establish-
ment of freedom of the press in this country. Re-
cent investigation has brought about a more cautious
evaluation. Katz reviews the proceedings in their
contemporary context, notes that the decision was
considered at the time to be "a politically motivated
legal anomaly," and concludes that "the reformation
of the law of libel and the associated unshackling
of the press came about, when they did, as if Peter
Zenger had never existed." The importance of the
case lies in allowing us "to see in dramatic detail
the nature of the forces developing in the early
eighteenth century which would end, two genera-
tions later, in the transformation of both politics and
the law." Katz points out that the Brief Narrative,
ostensibly by Zenger, was probably written by James
Alexander, the actual editor of the Journal. The
Trial of Peter Zenger ( [New York] New York
University Press, 1957. 152 p.), edited by Vincent
Buranelli, presents the text in abridged form, pref-
aced by a lengthy introduction in which the editor
describes the trial and takes the traditional view in
attributing far-reaching consequences to Zenger's
acquittal.
VI
Geography
A. General and Physical Geography
B. Geology and Soil
C. Climate and Weather
D. Plants and Animals
E. Historical Geography and Atlases
F. Polar Exploration
'353-I357
1358-136
1362—1364
1365-1371
:1
1376-1378
BASIC to an understanding of American civilization is the study of the natural setting in
which it arose and on which it must depend for sustenance. This chapter contains works
which describe the physical features of the Anglo-American continent and others which
examine the reciprocal relationship between continent and human culture. Although entry
no. 1355 in Section A treats geography as a discipline — listing variations in American method-
ology from environmentalism to economic geography — the other selections in the section deal
with specific aspects of the Nation's environment,
of Chapter XXVII, Land and Agriculture, in which
works devoted to the conservation of wildlife have
been placed. As in the 1960 Guide, the brevity of
Section E indicates that few geographers have ap-
proached the specialty of historical geography per se.
such as the diversity of landforms or the cultural
use of the land.
Climate and weather are perennial topics; the
entries in Section C each study an extreme manifes-
tation: aridity, hurricanes, and hailstorms, respec-
tively. The books on plants and animals in Section
D are supplemented by others in Sections G and H
There are, however, accounts of historic explorations
in the polar regions in Section F.
A. General and Physical Geography
1353. American heritage. The American heritage
book of natural wonders, by the editors of
American heritage, the magazine of history. Editor
in charge: Alvin M. Josephy. [New York] Ameri-
can Heritage Pub. Co.; book trade distribution by
Simon & Schuster [1963] 384 p.
63—17026 £169^496
1354. Farb, Peter. Face of North America; the
natural history of a continent. Illustrations
by Jerome Connolly. New York, Harper & Row
[1963] 316 p. 62—14598 QHio4.F3
Readings: p. 299—305.
The editors of American Heritage present the
spectacular in the American landscape. Each of
eight writers — Peter Matthiessen, William O.
Douglas, Jan de Hartog, Bruce Catton, Paul Engle,
Wallace Stegner, George R. Stewart, and Harold
Gilliam — characterizes, with his own particular
emphasis and personal enthusiasm, a broad region
of the United States by the dimensions of landscape,
the diversity of place names, and local color. The
illustrations are a notable contribution of this vol-
ume and combine historic American prints and
paintings, maps and drawings by the early natural-
ists, and photographs of wildlife, landscapes, and
natural resource development. Face of North
America complements the wondrous and remark-
able in the American landscape with an introduc-
tory study of the diversity of landforms that label
114 / A GUIDE To ™E UNITED STATES
and link the regions of this continent. Concentra-
tion on the geological development and ecological
cooperation involved in the cycle of land formation
emphasizes impermanence and change, the constant
"rise and fall of the land." Each section considers a
broad landform, which is further defined in the sub-
sections. Numerous drawings and photographs
clarify the process of development visually. An ap-
pendix lists the "Outstanding Natural Areas of
North America, by State and Province."
1355. Platt, Robert S., ed. Field study in Ameri-
can geography; the development of theory
and method exemplified by selections. Chicago,
1959. 405 p. (University of Chicago. Dept. of
Geography. Research paper no. 61)
60—205 H3I.C5I4 no. 61
This volume was compiled on the assumption
that successive methods of field work during the
last 150 years of American geography, although
varying in content from environmentalism to eco-
nomics, have been progressive and cumulative in
the development of geographic knowledge. Chosen
as representative mileposts in geographic research
where there is direct contact between researcher and
subject, these selections are drawn from diverse
sources. The work as a whole is designed for spe-
cialists and categorizes the materials with such
terms as "exploratory traverse," "explanatory phys-
ical," and "analytical economic." At the same
time, the excerpts themselves are often appropriate
for the layman, representing, as they do, such read-
able authors as Lewis and Clark and Ellen C.
Semple. An introduction places each study and its
author in historical perspective. William Warntz'
Geography Now and Then; Some Notes on the His-
tory of Academic Geography in the United States
(New York, American Geographical Society, 1964.
162 p. American Geographical Society research
series, no. 25) is a survey of the characteristics and
role of geography as a discipline in this country since
its colonial beginnings.
1356. Thornbury, William D. Regional geomor-
phology of the United States. New York,
Wiley [1965] 609 p. illus. 65—12698 QEjj.T<5
Chapter references.
A reference and textbook incorporating new re-
search data to update Nevin M. Fenneman's Physi-
ography of Western United States (1931) and
Physiography of Eastern United States (1938), no.
2935 and 2936, respectively, in the 1960 Guide.
This study combines the origin of landforms with
the regional distribution and geomorphic histories
of landscapes. Limited in length, the treatment is
necessarily selective and economical in comparison
with its predecessors but follows the same general
classification. Geomorphology Before Dams ( [Lon-
don] Methuen; [New York] Wiley [1964] 678
p.), the first volume of The History of the Study of
Landforms, by Richard J. Chorley, Anthony J.
Dunn, and Robert P. Beckinsale, is an account of
the evolution of European and American ideas "re-
lating to the development of the physical landscape,"
enriched by many excerpts from original sources.
1357. White, Charles Langdon, Edwin J. Foscue,
and Tom L. McKnight. Regional geogra-
phy of Anglo-America. 3d ed. Englewood Cliffs,
N. J., Prentice-Hall [1964] xvii, 524 p. illus.
64—10071 £169^54 1964
References at the ends of chapters.
An updated edition of no. 2940 in the 1960
Guide. Two other textbooks are Earl B. Shaw's
Anglo- Am erica, a Regional Geography (New York,
Wiley [1959] 480 p.), a brief and selective survey,
emphasizing economic geography, and James Wre-
ford Watson's North America, Its Countries and
Regions ([London] Longmans [1963] 854 p.
Geographies for advanced study), which stresses
historical settlement and cultural use of the land.
B. Geology and Soil
1358. Clark, Thomas H., and Colin W. Stearn.
The geological evolution of North America;
a regional approach to historical geology. New
York, Ronald Press Co. [1960] 434 p.
60-6154 QE7I.C55
1359. King, Philip B. The evolution of North
America. Princeton, N.J., Princeton Univer-
sity Press, 1959. 189 p. illus. 59—5598 QE7I.K.54
Reference material: p. vii-ix.
These two volumes treat the progressive growth
of North America by region. The first, a textbook
for students familiar with physical geology, presents
the three major structural units of the continent: the
bordering geosynclines, the stable interior, and the
Canadian Shield. Maps and diagrams are unclut-
tered and well integrated. The evolution of life is
discussed in a final section, and appendixes sum-
GEOGRAPHY / 115
marize the biological classifications. The Evolu-
tion of North America, by a geologist with the U.S.
Geological Survey, was compiled from a lecture
series for a college course. It does not aim to be
comprehensive but gives detailed consideration to
selected regions which illustrate principles of the
continent's development. The book retains the in-
formality of its original oral delivery.
1360. Eardley, Armand J. Structural geology of
North America. 2d ed. New York, Harper
& Row [Ci962] xv, 743 p. illus. (Harper's geo-
science series) 62—17482 QE7i.Ei7 1962
Bibliography: p. 709—738.
A revised edition of no. 2942 in the 1960 Guide.
1361. Wright, Herbert E., and David G. Frey, eds.
The Quaternary of the United States: a re-
view volume for the VII Congress of the Interna-
tional Association for Quaternary Research. Prince-
ton, N.J., Princeton University Press, 1965. 922 p.
illus. 65—14304 QE696.W93
Bibliographical footnotes.
A scholarly and technical interdisciplinary report
on the era of geologic time covering the last ice age
to the present. This period, which includes the
evolution of modern man, is "unique among the
geologic periods for the relative perfection of its
stratigraphic record." On a basis of uniformitarian-
ism, the unusual stratigraphy permits a broad selec-
tion of American scholars in representative fields of
scientific learning to collaborate in detailing and
analyzing development. The four major sections
are devoted to geology, biogeology, archeology, and
miscellany; subsections defined principally by region
contain detailed chronological description, summa-
ries, extensive references, and brief notes on the
authors' credentials.
C. Climate and Weather
1362. American Association for the Advancement
of Science. Committee on Desert and Arid
Zones Research. Aridity and man; the challenge of
the arid lands in the United States. Carle Hodge,
editor; Peter C. Duisberg, associate editor. Wash-
ington, American Association for the Advancement
of Science, 1963. xx, 584 p. illus. ([American
Association for the Advancement of Science] Pub-
lication no. 74) 63—22003 GB6i4-A5
Bibliography: p. 555-560.
One-third of the 48 contiguous States of the
United States are deficient in moisture. This vol-
ume, composed of case histories and chapters on
the relationship of aridity to weather, terrain, vege-
tation, soils and minerals, and historical settlement
and development, portrays the sum of U.S. experi-
ence in arid lands. Conceived as a working tool
for a UNESCO symposium on arid zones research,
this interdisciplinary study, scholarly but readable,
useful to researchers as well as to administrative
and governmental leaders, emphasizes arid zones
where development has failed. In a more general
introduction, The North American Deserts (Stan-
ford, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1957. 308
p.), by Edmund C. Jaeger, combines regional de-
scriptions of the five North American deserts with
a field guide of common desert flora and fauna.
1363. Dunn, Gordon E., and Banner I. Miller.
Atlantic hurricanes. [Rev. ed. Baton
Rouge] Louisiana State University Press [1964]
xx, 377 p. illus. 64—21598 QC945-D8 1964
Bibliography: p. 299—301, 363—368.
Through meteorological work at the National
Hurricane Center in Florida, the authors acquired
experience and familiarity with "the most destruc-
tive of all weather phenomena." Serving both as an
explanation for the layman and an analytical
description for the student, this treatment of the
tropical storm supplies information on current
scholarship, as well as on climatology, physical
processes, tracking, forecasting, hazard intensity,
and historical storms of the 2oth century. A thor-
oughly documented specialized study is David M.
Ludlum's Early American Hurricanes, 1492—1870
(Boston, American Meteorological Society [Ci963]
198 p. The History of American weather, no. i).
1364. Flora, Snowden D. Hailstorms of the
United States. Norman, University of Okla-
homa Press [1956] 201 p. illus.
56-11231 QC929.HiF4
Because "hail is even more destructive than tor-
nadoes," the author has supplemented an earlier
volume, Tornadoes of the United States (1954), no.
2948 in the 1960 Guide, with a comprehensive gen-
eral introduction emphasizing the why, when, and
where of hailstorms. Employing devices of content
and format similar to those used in his previous
work, the author here tabulates damage and risk
according to States, notes the phenomenal, records
the past effectiveness of forecasting, and advises on
the practicalities of insurance.
Il6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
D. Plants and Animals
1365. Bent, Arthur C. Life histories of North
American blackbirds, orioles, tanagers, and
allies. Order: Passeriformes; families: Proceidae,
Icteridae, and Thraupidae. Washington, Smithson-
ian Institution, 1958. 549 p. (U.S. National Mu-
seum. Bulletin 211 ) 58-60425 Qu.U6 no. 211
Bibliography: p. 510—531.
This is the iyth and final title of Bent's unique
series of life histories of North American birds.
Issued by the Smithsonian Institution in a total of
20 volumes over a period of almost 40 years, the
studies together have been described as the "most
comprehensive, most complete, and most-used sin-
gle source of information" on the birds of North
America. In this volume, as in the others, the
author interweaves easy narrative with terse facts
and blends his own findings with those of other
observers. The text is both readable and useful
and is accompanied by a section of black and white
photographic illustrations. Dover Publications has
reprinted, in paperback, the entire set as it was
originally issued, complete with pictures. Henry
H. Collins, Jr., has edited a two-volume abridge-
ment to which he has given the title Life Histories
of North American Birds (New York, Harper
[1960]).
1366. National Geographic Society, Washington,
D.C. Boof( Service. Natural science library.
Washington, National Geographic Society, 1960—
65. 6 v.
Entries no. 1367 through 1370 below describe
four of the six volumes thus far published in this
series. The two volumes omitted are devoted to
domesticated nature (one is on dogs, the other on
gardens) rather than to life still relatively wild and
free. As the titles indicate, three of the four vol-
umes listed concern birds and fishes; the book on
animals is restricted to mammals. All of these vol-
umes combine informative text with drawings,
paintings, and photographs that are esthetic as well
as instructive. Two other National Geographic So-
ciety publications resembling the Natural Science
Library in subject and presentation are Stalling
Birds With Color Camera [2d rev. ed.] ([1963]
351 p.), by Arthur A. Allen and others, and The
Boo% of Fishes ([1961] 339 p.), edited by John
O. La Gorce.
1367. Wetmore, Alexander, and others. Song and
garden birds of North America. Foreword
by Melville Bell Grosvenor. [1964] 400 p.
64-23367 QL68i.W46
"Acknowledgments and reference guide": p.
"Bird songs of garden, woodland and meadow,
by Arthur A. Allen and Peter Paul Kellogg" (12 p.
and phonodiscs: 12 s. 7 in. 33/3 rpm.) in pocket.
1368. Wetmore, Alexander, and others. Water,
prey, and game birds of North America.
Foreword by Melville Bell Grosvenor. [1965] 464
p. 65-24605 QL68i.W48
Bibliographical references included in "Acknowl-
edgments" (p. 463).
"Bird sounds of marsh, upland, and shore, by
Peter Paul Kellogg" (12 p. and phonodiscs: 12 s.
7 in. 33!/3 rpm.) in pocket.
1369. National Geographic Society, Washington,
D.C. Boof( Service. Wild animals of North
America. Foreword by Melville Bell Grosvenor.
[1960] 400 p.
60-15019 QL7I5-N3
1370. National Geographic Society, Washington,
D.C. Wondrous world of fishes. [Editor-
in-chief, Melville Bell Grosvenor. Washington,
1965] 366 p. 65-11482 QL625.N33
1371. Shelf ord, Victor E. The ecology of North
America. Urbana, University of Illinois
Press, 1963. xxii, 610 p. illus.
63-7255 QH 1 02.85
Bibliography: p. 495—531.
An extension of a previous work sponsored by
Nature Conservancy (formerly Committee on the
Preservation of Natural Conditions, Ecological So-
ciety of America) and edited by Shelford: Natural-
ist's Guide to the Americas (1926), no. 2956 in the
1960 Guide. In the new study, Shelford presents a
comprehensive picture of plant and animal com-
munities in 16th-century North America. He
describes the continent's forest regions in terms of
their component biomes — ecological formations of
living organisms in their physical environments.
Biomes are identified on the basis of their character-
istic flora. This is a technical reference work,
founded on research data from a vast array of
sources. A useful tool for conjunctive study is Au-
GEOGRAPHY / 1 17
gust W. Kiichler's Potential Natural Vegetation of
the Conterminous United States (New York, Ameri-
can Geographical Society, 1964. col. map 95 x 149
cm. Special publication no. 36) with its Manual To
Accompany the Map (36, 116 p.), which discusses
plant-life regions of the United States in a visual
format with interpretive photographs and descrip-
tive data. The Natural Geography of Plants (New
York, Columbia University Press, 1964. 420 p.),
by Henry A. Gleason and Arthur Cronquist, is an
introductory discussion of the distribution and clas-
sification of plants in the United States.
E. Historical Geography and Atlases
1372. Lunny, Robert M. Early maps of North
America. Newark, New Jersey Historical
Society, 1961. 48 p. 62—13718 GA40I.L8
"Check list of an exhibition: Early maps of North
America, December 12, 1961— January 20, 1962 at
the New Jersey Historical Society": p. 47—48.
1373. Rand, McNally and Company. Pioneer
atlas of the American West; containing fac-
simile reproductions of maps and indexes from the
1876 first edition of Rand, McNally & Company's
Business atlas of the great Mississippi Valley and
Pacific slope; together with contemporary railroad
maps and travel literature. Historical text by Dale
L. Morgan. Chicago [1956] 51 p.
Map 57—5 61380^35 1956
Two map publishers have celebrated company an-
niversaries with the publication of these volumes of
maps commemorating historical epochs of setde-
ment. In the first, C. S. Hammond and Company,
in cooperation with the New Jersey Historical So-
ciety, has reproduced maps from a variety of private
and institutional sources. Lunny's accompanying
text, although it contains many historical biblio-
graphical references, is primarily a brief, descrip-
tive, cartographic history with diverse notes on each
plate. The maps themselves are revealing examples
of how the early French, Dutch, English, and Span-
ish explorers interpreted the New World. Rand,
McNally and Company, which early specialized in
railroad mapping, has reproduced an 1876 gazetteer,
the "first atlas which frankly embraced the West."
A sketch of the early history of the firm, a historical
outline of mapping in the transcontinental West,
detailed maps of 16 Western States with individual
essays on setdement and mapping, and decorative
maps, posters, and timetables — all of these empha-
size the role of the railroad in the human geography,
development, and expansion of the West.
1374. Rand, McNally and Company. Commercial
atlas and marketing guide. 96th ed. Chi-
cago, 1965. 508, 65A p. Map 6-9 Gioi9.R22
Revised annually, this large volume is probably
the most widely known and used cartographic ref-
erence that emphasizes economically oriented geo-
graphical information on the United States. Its
maps, tables, and indexes pertaining to the 50 states
and the territories are supplemented with world
maps and maps of foreign countries.
1375. Stewart, George R. Names on the land; a
historical account of place-naming in the
United States. Rev. and enl. ed. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1958, 511 p. illus.
57-10780 £155.88 1958
Notes and references: p. 442—482.
An updated edition of no. 2976 in the 1960
Guide. Two additional reference volumes further
delineate the influences of historical antecedents and
contemporary commerciality on the geography of
the United States. In The American Counties, rev.
ed. (New York, Scarecrow Press, 1962. 540 p.),
Joseph N. Kane supplies information on each of the
Nation's 3,072 counties. Kane is also coauthor with
Gerard L. Alexander of Nicknames of Cities and
States of the U.S. (New York, Scarecrow Press,
1965. 341 p.).
Il8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
F. Polar Exploration
1376. Caswell, John E. Arctic frontiers; United
States explorations in the Far North. Nor-
man, University of Oklahoma Press [ 1956] 232 p.
56-11235 G630.A5C3
Bibliography: p. 216—225.
1377. Mitterling, Philip I. America in the Ant-
arctic to 1 840. Urbana, University of Illinois
Press, 1959. 201 p. illus. 59—10555 G87O.M67
Essay on sources: p. 169—186.
Two historical surveys of 19th-century polar ex-
ploration, each well documented and concise. The
first describes northern polar expeditions between
1850 and 1909, the period when, as Vilhjalmur
Stefansson has written, "explorers tended to become
pioneers of science if not martyrs of science." After
brief introductory mention of earlier European
polar thrusts, this volume emphasizes the historical
continuity, including the chain of friendships, in
expeditions from Edwin Jesse De Haven to Robert
E. Peary and the cumulatively increasing data base
of scientific knowledge that resulted. Photographs,
drawings, and maps of persons and places increase
the historical perspective of Caswell's text. The
bulk of Mitterling's material covers early 19th-
century discovery of the South Atlantic islands and
the coastal rim of a new continent. A synthesis of
many private papers, this chronological narrative
stresses the motivations of the explorers, who varied
widely in purpose, ranging from those who sought
profits in the fur-seal trade to those who pursued
information and understanding on scientific and
governmental missions. In an extensive bibliogra-
phy, the author evaluates the sources of his facts.
1378. Siple, Paul. 90° South; the story of the
American South Pole conquest. New York,
Putnam [-1959] 384 p.
59—11029 6850 1957.85
Paul Siple made his first trip to Antarctica as the
Boy Scout chosen to accompany the Richard E.
Byrd Expedition of 1928—30. This reminiscence,
an intimate and descriptive review of American
Antarctic exploration in the 20th century, first sur-
veys the author's five expeditions with Byrd and
then comprehensively details the 18 months Siple
spent at the South Pole as the scientific leader of 17
men undertaking investigations for the U.S. con-
tribution to the International Geophysical Year.
An informal narrative, 90° South reveals the prob-
lems of physical existence in the "deepfreeze" as
well as the emotional and intellectual reactions it
provokes. Photographs intensify the description of
a stark and frigid life. A general historical account
of the search for the South Pole, by a New Yor^
Times correspondent who took part in three expedi-
tions, is Walter Sullivan's Quest for a Continent
(New York, McGraw-Hill [Ci957] 372 p.).
VII
The American Indian
A. General Worths
B. Archeology and Prehistory
C. Tribes and Tribal Groups
D. Religion, Art, and Folklore
E. The White Advance
F. The Twentieth Century
1386—1391
1392-1395
1396-1398
1399—1406
1407—1410
T TNTIL the 20th century, the general attitude toward the American Indian was characterized
LJ by the self-contradictory term "noble savage." On the one hand, the Indian was roman-
ticized through such writings as Longfellow's "Song of Hiawatha." On the other hand,
public policy, framed on the basis of conquest and premised on the belief that the Indian was
either a barbarian or a child, became a source of national embarrassment. Neither attitude
encouraged the objective study of the Indian's ancient cultural heritage.
Despite increasing governmental efforts, the
American Indian has continued to fare very poorly.
He has been deprived of the opportunity to live in
the manner of his inherited culture and at the same
time has been denied privileges in the white com-
munity. Historians, social scientists, and profes-
sional writers interested in the Indian have, how-
ever, been more enlightened than the general public.
Underlying most of the following selections, which
range from scientific analyses to artistic descriptions
of various Indian groups, is the assumption that
American Indians from Alaska to the southern tip
of South America possess cultural and tribal identi-
ties which are, in many cases, very rich.
Among the selections are archeological and an-
thropological studies; histories, both of tribes and of
Indian affairs as a continuing aspect of American
history; critiques of governmental policy toward the
Indians; and studies of various aspects of Indian
culture and life.
A. General Works
1379. The Civilization of the American Indian
series. Norman, University of Oklahoma
Press, 1932—65. 79 v.
This long, continuing series "has as its purpose
the reconstruction of American Indian civilization
by presenting aboriginal, historical, and contempo-
rary Indian life." The volumes, some of which are
unnumbered, range from informal autobiographical
accounts to scholarly monographs. Several of them
are entered by subject in the 1960 Guide. Others
appear elsewhere in this Supplement. Representa-
tive new volumes reflecting the scope of the series
are listed below as no. 1380 through 1382.
1380. Hassrick, Royal B. The Sioux; life and cus-
toms of a warrior society. In collaboration
with Dorothy Maxwell and Cile M. Bach. [1964]
337 p. illus. (no. 72) 64—11331 £99.0^3
Bibliography: p. 314—319.
1381. Newcomb, Franc ]. Hosteen Klah, Navaho
medicine man and sand painter. [1964]
119
120 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
xxxiii, 227 p. illus. (no. 73)
Bibliography: p. 221.
1382.
64-20759 E99.N3N37
Young, Mary E. Redskins, ruffleshirts, and
rednecks; Indian allotments in Alabama and
Mississippi, 1830-1860. [1961] 217 p. illus. (no.
61) 61-15150 £98.1,3 Y6
1383. Driver, Harold E. Indians of North Amer-
ica. [Chicago] University of Chicago Press
[1961] 667 p. illus. 61-5604 £58.068
Bibliography: p. 613—633.
In the history of North American Indian groups,
the high points of cultural development vary con-
siderably, ranging from the i6th century for the
Indians in Mexico to the i9th century for those of
Canada and parts of the United States. Driver dis-
cusses the primary aspects of these cultural peaks for
tribes from Central America to Alaska. Topical
chapters on such subjects as subsistence patterns,
education, religion, and language are subdivided
into geographic areas of culture; this arrangement
facilitates a comparative survey. Thirty-seven maps
showing the geographic relationships of various cul-
tural patterns are included. The Native Americans:
Prehistory and Ethnology of the North American
Indians (New York, Harper & Row [1965] 539
p.), by Robert F. Spencer and seven other anthro-
pologists, covers essentially the same subject but
offers less comparative analysis of the cultural
groups. In 1964, Driver edited a short anthology,
The Americas on the Eve of Discovery (Englewood
Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall [1964] 179 p. The
Global history series, 8—93), portraying Indian life
at the time the New World was penetrated by
Europeans.
1384. La Farge, Oliver. A pictorial history of the
American Indian. New York, Crown Pub-
lishers [1956] 272 p. 56-11375 £77.1245
A comprehensive collection of pictures of the
North American Indian, with accompanying ex-
planatory text. It reproduces drawings by John
White, paintings by George Catlin and Frederic
Remington, stylized illustrations by contemporary
Indian artists, 19th-century pictures of reluctant In-
dian subjects, and colorful publicity photographs of
contemporary reservation Indians. Other illustra-
tions show a wide range of artifacts and primitive
art. The author, a trained anthropologist who lived
and worked with the Indians, divides his subject by
geographical area and concludes with a general
account of the problems facing the Indians today.
1385. Mead, Margaret, and Ruth L. Bunzel, eds.
The golden age of American anthropology.
New York, G. Braziller, 1960. 630 p. illus.
60-11668 £77^48
"Suggestions for further reading": p. 629—630.
The editors of this anthology have selected the
years 1880 to 1920 as the "golden age" for anthro-
pological studies of the United States. A period in
which the first attempts at systematic and scientific
study were made, it was also a time when anthro-
pologists could base their investigations on firsthand
accounts from Indians who had experienced pat-
terns of living that have now disappeared. The
selections actually cover a much greater timespan
than this 4o-year interval. They begin with reports
of the early Spanish explorers, continue through ac-
counts of American missionaries, traders, and art-
ists, and conclude with anthropological studies of
the early part of the 2oth century. In general, the
articles are written in nontechnical language, and
short introductory paragraphs place the authors of
the selections in historical context. Particular atten-
tion is paid to Franz Boas, who dominated Ameri-
can anthropology for more than 40 years.
B. Archeology and Prehistory
1386. Gladwin, Harold S. A history of the ancient
Southwest. Portland, Me., Bond Wheel-
wright Co., 1957. 383 p. 57-6941 £78.87642
Bibliography: p. 363—372.
The story of the inhabitants of Colorado, Utah,
New Mexico, Arizona, and parts of Mexico, em-
phasizing the period from 200 to 1450. Based pri-
marily on 30 years of research performed by an
eminent amateur archeologist and his associates, the
study is chronologically arranged and is accompan-
ied by numerous drawings, photographs, and maps.
A number of Gladwin's theories are at variance
with the orthodox ideas of professional scholars, but
he is careful to point out these controversial areas.
1387. Hibben, Frank C. Digging up America.
New York, Hill & Wang [1960] 239 p.
illus. 60-10518 £58^49
THE AMERICAN INDIAN / 121
"A suggested list of further readings in American
archaeology": p. 227—228.
Systematic study of prehistoric man in America
did not really begin until the last of the frontiers
vanished. Since that time, extensive investigations
have been inaugurated under the auspices of Gov-
ernment agencies and educational institutions.
Delicate techniques of excavation and increasingly
accurate methods of determining age have been
developed. In a popular style, Hibben describes
the theories formulated and then discarded, the
monumental discoveries, and the uncharted areas
yet to be explored. He discusses the problems of
when and from where the first men came, the
origins of agriculture, the mystery of the mounds,
the pueblos of the Southwest, the recent discoveries
of ancient Eskimo cultures, and the highly devel-
oped Incan, Mayan, and Aztec civilizations.
1388. Quimby, George I. Indian life in the Upper
Great Lakes, 11,000 B.C. to A.D. 1800.
[Chicago] University of Chicago Press [1960]
182 p. 60-11799 £78.67(35
Bibliography: p. 166—176.
When the glaciers disappeared from the region
around Lakes Superior, Michigan, and Huron and
the land became habitable, Indians settled there.
The first half of Quimby's book describes the pre-
historic period of those settlements and examines
the evidence relating to them. In the second half,
he devotes his attention to the i7th- and i8th-
century cultures of the Miami, Sauk, Fox, Winne-
bago, Menominee, Chippewa, Huron, Ottawa, and
Potawatomi tribes. The book is directed toward
the general reader or beginning student and includes
a large number of maps and illustrations and a
glossary.
1389. Vaillant, George C. Aztecs of Mexico:
origin, rise, and fall of the Aztec Nation.
Rev. by Suzannah B. Vaillant. Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1962. 312 p. illus.
62—10466 Fi2i9.Vi3 1962
Bibliography: p. [257]— 297.
An updated edition of no. 2997 in the 1960 Guide.
1390. Wauchope, Robert. Lost tribes & sunken
continents; myth and method in the study of
American Indians. [Chicago] University of Chica-
go Press [1962] 155 p. illus.
62—18112 E6i.W33
Bibliography: p. [139]— 145.
The origins of the American Indians have not
only been fiercely disputed by scholars but have also
been the basis for unchecked theorizing by amateur
anthropologists and archeologists. Some of the am-
ateurs' theories hold that the earliest inhabitants of
the New World migrated from ancient Egypt or
from the lost continents of Atlantis or Mu. Others
identify the Indians as the Lost Tribes of Israel, or as
descendants of sailors from the fleets of Alexander
the Great. Wauchope summarizes the basic argu-
ments supporting these notions, refutes them, and
describes their sometimes eccentric proponents in
informal fashion. In No Stone Unturned, an Alma-
nac of North American Prehistory (New York,
Random House [1959] 370 p.), Louis A. Brennan
accepts the orthodox premise that the first inhabi-
tants arrived by way of Siberia and the Bering
Strait but argues for an earlier arrival than is gen-
erally advanced by professional scholars.
1391. Wedel, Waldo R. Prehistoric man on the
Great Plains. Norman, University of Okla-
homa Press [1961] xviii, 355 p. illus.
61—9002 E78.W5W4
Bibliography: p. 312—340.
Until as recently as 35 years ago, little was known
about the prehistoric occupants of the Great Plains;
there was, indeed, some doubt as to their existence.
In the last three decades, however, a wealth of evi-
dence relating to ancient cultures in that region has
been uncovered. The work-relief agencies of the
1930*5 conducted systematic investigations, and
Federal dam-building projects have prompted in-
tensive studies in areas slated to be inundated. A
summary of the information revealed by these ac-
tivities, Wedel's volume is designed to serve both
scholar and general reader. An introductory chap-
ter describes the tools used by the archeologist; later
chapters deal with the prehistory of the various
subareas within the Great Plains.
C. Tribes and Tribal Groups
1392. Ewers, John C. The Blackfeet; raiders on
the Northwestern Plains. Norman, Univer-
sity of Oklahoma Press [1958] xviii, 348 p. illus.
(The Civilization of the American Indian series,
49) 58-7778 E99.S54E78
Bibliography: p. 329—336.
122 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Blackfeet is a group name for the Piegan, Kainah,
and Siksika tribes who occupied the northern por-
tions of the Midwest. This historical and ethnolog-
ical account depicts the progress of these tribes from
stone-age men who traveled on foot to mobile buf-
falo hunters on horseback. It also narrates their
subsequent decline as the white settlers moved into
their lands and the buffalo vanished. Ewers has com-
bined recollections of elderly Indians on reservations
with Government reports, newspaper accounts, and
scholarly articles to provide a balanced, nontechnical
survey.
1393. Hughes, Charles C. An Eskimo village in
the modern world. With the collaboration
of Jane M. Hughes. Ithaca, N.Y., Cornell Univer-
sity Press [1960] xiv, 419 p. illus. (Cornell
studies in anthropology) 60—2605 E99.EyH95
Bibliography: p. 399—410.
In 1940 Alexander H. Leighton and Dorothea C.
Leighton made an anthropological survey of Eski-
mo life in Gambell, a small and isolated village on
St. Lawrence Island off the coast of Alaska. In
1955 Hughes studied the sociological changes which
had occurred during the intervening 15 years, a
period in which the U.S. Government established
air and military bases in the vicinity and the people
of the island came into close contact with the
Alaskan mainland. This volume contains the re-
sults of that study. The author begins with a short
history of the village and then discusses population
growth, economic factors, and cultural change and
breakdown. A glossary of Eskimo terms is ap-
pended. A similar study of Barrow, Alaska, can be
found in The North Alaskan Eskimo; a Study in
Ecology and Society (Washington, U.S. Govt. Print.
Off., 1959. 490 p. [U.S.] Bureau of American
Ethnology. Bulletin 171), by Robert F. Spencer.
1394. Josephy, Alvin M. The patriot chiefs; a
chronicle of American Indian leadership.
New York, Viking Press, 1961. 364 p. illus.
61-17039 £89.178
Bibliography: p. 349—356.
The story of nine chiefs — Hiawatha, King Philip,
Pope, Pontiac, Tecumseh, Osceola, Black Hawk,
Crazy Horse, and Chief Joseph — who tried to help
their people retain their liberty and cultural integ-
rity. Of special interest is Josephy's chapter on Hia-
watha, an Iroquois chief who inspired his people
to form a confederation based on democratic prin-
ciples a hundred years before the first white explor-
ers appeared. The author, an editor of American
Heritage, has taken his information from secondary
sources, most of which are listed in an extensive
bibliography. Maps at the beginning of each chap-
ter indicate location of the principal tribes and the
more significant battles. Full-length biographies of
many of these chiefs have already been published.
One of the more recent is Merrill D. Beal's "I Will
Fight No More Forever"; Chief Joseph and the
Nez Perce War (Seattle, University of Washington
Press, 1963. 366 p.).
1395. Newcomb, William W. The Indians of
Texas, from prehistoric to modern times.
With drawings by Hal M. Story. Austin, Univer-
sity of Texas Press [ 1961] 404 p.
60—14312 E78.T4N4
Bibliography: p. 365—377.
This anthropological study of the 10 Indian
tribes known to have occupied the area now called
Texas was written to help substantiate the thesis
that all races have basically the same capabilities.
Tribal differences, Newcomb asserts, were caused
by varying cultural environments which evolved
slowly and perpetuated themselves. He describes
the early savages: Coahuiltecans and Karankawas;
the horseback-riding warriors: Lipan Apaches, Ton-
ka was, Comanches, and Kiowas; and the primitive
farmers: Jumanos, Wichitas, Caddo Confederacies,
and Atakapans. One chapter is devoted to each
tribe, with descriptions of appearance, material cul-
ture, social organization, and religious beliefs. The
last chapter is a historical account of the defeat and
extermination of the tribes as the whites moved into
the area. Newcomb's study is a synthesis of mate-
rial taken from such primary sources as the journals
of explorers, soldiers, missionaries, and captives and
from secondary materials which included scholarly
ethnological articles and monographs.
D. Religion, Art, and Folklore
1396. Dockstader, Frederick J. Indian art in Graphic Society [1961]
America; the arts and crafts of the North
American Indian. Greenwich, Conn., New York
224 p.
60—8921
Bibliography: p. 222—224.
H98.A7D57
THE AMERICAN INDIAN / 123
Indian artifacts and decorations presented in 250
photographs, some of which are in color. The
author, director of the Museum of the American
Indian, Heye Foundation, has limited the survey to
North America, but he tries to show examples from
every important region and of all major artistic
techniques. The plates are divided into two sec-
tions, prehistoric and historic, which are subdi-
vided roughly by geographic area. Each illustra-
tion is accompanied by a brief description indicat-
ing where and approximately when the article was
made and its size, significance, and present location
(usually the Museum of the American Indian).
Especially striking are the colorful carved masks
and statues made by the tribes of the northern Pa-
cific coast and the stylized watercolors painted by
contemporary artists. These watercolors are repro-
duced and discussed more extensively in Clara L.
Tanner's Southwest Indian Painting (Tucson, Uni-
versity of Arizona Press [1957] 157 p.).
1397. Miles, Charles. Indian and Eskimo artifacts
of North America. Chicago, H. Regnery
Co., 1963. 224 p. 62—19386 £77^62
Bibliography: p. 238—239.
Drawing heavily on his personal collection, Miles
has compiled an illustrated catalog of North Ameri-
can Indian artifacts. He includes items of native
design, such as tools, clothing, personal decorations,
musical instruments, toys, and pipes, but omits arti-
facts inspired by the white man's culture — modern
Southwestern pottery, for example. The objects
are arranged by function into chapters, each of
which is preceded by an informative introduction.
No attempt is made to identify each item by date
and origin because the evidence needed for reliable
identification is usually unavailable.
1398. Schoolcraft, Henry Rowe. Indian legends
from Algic researches (The myth of Hia-
watha, Oneota, the red race in America) and his-
torical and statistical information respecting the In-
dian tribes of the United States; edited by Mentor
L. Williams. [East Lansing] Michigan State Uni-
versity Press, 1956. xxii, 322 p.
55-11688 E98.F6S32
Bibliography: p. 320—322.
Schoolcraft (1793—1864) was an explorer, geolo-
gist, Indian agent, and pioneer ethnologist (see
biographical sketch, entry no. 2892 in the 1960
Guide). In 1823 he married a halfblood Chippewa.
From his numerous Indian acquaintances and rela-
tives by marriage he collected legends and folklore
of the Algonquian tribes in the Northeast. Long-
fellow drew upon Schoolcraft's writings for his
tales of Hiawatha, as did several authors of chil-
dren's books. Today it is recognized that School-
craft's informants were sometimes confused in their
renditions of the tales and also that his transcriptions
were not always completely faithful. His collection,
however, remains one of the most authentic avail-
able. Williams has selected for this volume the
principal legends from Schoolcraft's major works.
He provides a short critical history of Schoolcraft's
life and writings and supplies new footnotes to the
tales. A collection of California Indian legends
rewritten with skill can be found in The Inland
Whale (Bloomington, Indiana University Press
[1959] 205 p.), by Theodora Kroeber.
E. The White Advance
1399. Andrist, Ralph K. The long death; the last
days of the Plains Indian. Maps by Rafael
D. Palacios. New York, Macmillan [1964] 371 p.
64-12545 £78^5X593
Bibliography: p. 355-357.
An account of the Indian wars on the Great Plains
from the establishment of the boundary of a "per-
manent" Indian country in 1840 to the massacre at
Wounded Knee Creek in 1890. This is a bloody
tale of broken promises and betrayals by the whites
and savage atrocities by the Indians who fought to
save their lands and way of life. Andrist is sympa-
thetic toward the Indians, and he marshals his facts
in support of his ideas. He describes the Sioux, wars
in Minnesota in 1862, Chivington's massacre of the
Cheyennes at Sand Creek in 1864, the annihilation
of Captain Fetterman and his men at Fort Philip
Kearny in 1866, the Modoc War, Custer and the
Battle of Little Bighorn, and the last stand of the
Nez Perces under the leadership of Chief Joseph.
Numerous maps enhance the value of this study.
Another well-mapped history is The Military Con-
quest of the Southern Plains (Norman, University
of Oklahoma Press [1963] 269 p.), by William H.
Leckie, which is amply footnoted and includes an
extensive bibliography. The Modocs and Their
War (Norman, University of Oklahoma Press
[1959] 346 p. The Civilization of the American
124 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Indian series, 52), by Keith A. Murray, is a detailed
account of the Indian war in which Gen. Edward
R. S. Canby was killed by Indians while he was
negotiating with them.
1400. Flexner, James T. Mohawk baronet: Sir
William Johnson of New York. New York,
Harper [1959] 400 p. illus.
59-10581 Ei95-J659
Bibliography: p. 362—368.
Johnson (1715—1774) was an Irish emigrant who
came to the New World in the late 1730'$ to man-
age his uncle's estate on the Mohawk River. He
quickly gained the friendship of the Indians in
New York and for most of his life played a dual
role as both adopted Mohawk and Iroquois chief
and British superintendent of Indian affairs. He
was responsible in large part for keeping the Iro-
quois on the English side in the French and Indian
wars and received an English baronetcy in recogni-
tion of his services. He opened the Mohawk Valley
for colonization and at his death was one of the
largest landowners in the Colonies. Johnson tried
to create a situation in which the Iroquois tribes
could have stabilized holdings, but he failed to fore-
see the wave of white settlers who, soon after his
death, would clamor for more and more land.
Based on extensive research, this biography provides
a vivid picture of one of the most influential figures
in the long history of relations between the Indian
and the white man.
1401. Hagan, William T. American Indians.
[Chicago] University of Chicago Press
[1961] 190 p. illus. (The Chicago his-
tory of American civilization)
61-1555 £93^2
"Suggested reading": p. 175—183.
The author provides a brief but lucid introduc-
tion to the complex history of the American Indian.
He graphically portrays the Indian tribes fighting to
save a way of life, the whites continually pressing
for more land, and the Government repeatedly fail-
ing to establish permanent protective boundaries.
The last chapter is devoted to recent public policy.
The Indian and the White Man (Garden City,
N.Y., Anchor Books, 1964. 480 p. Documents in
American civilization series), edited by Wilcomb E.
Washburn, is a collection of annotated primary
sources useful for supplementary reading.
1402. Leach, Douglas E. Flintlock and toma-
hawk; New England in King Philip's War.
New York, Macmillan, 1958. 304 p. illus.
58—5467 £83.67.1.4
Bibliography: p. 271—290.
1403. Vaughan, Alden T. New England frontier;
Puritans and Indians, 1620—1675. Boston,
Little, Brown [1965] 430 p. illus.
65—20736 F7-V3
Bibliography: p. [401]— 420.
In June 1675, after years of comparative peace, a
number of the Algonquian tribes submerged their
historic feuds and combined in an uneasy con-
federation led by King Philip, a Wampanoag chief,
in an effort to drive out the English settlers. Many
of the frontier towns were destroyed and more than
a thousand settlers killed, but by August 1676 King
Philip was dead and the uprising crushed. Leach's
study, based on extensive research in primary
sources, supplies a well-rounded picture of the
desperate struggle. Vaughan focuses on the rela-
tionships between Puritan and Indian in the years
from the settlement at Plymouth up to this destruc-
tive war. He concludes that, contrary to the widely
held view of white oppression, the Puritans were
more enlightened than most of their contemporaries
and "followed a remarkably humane, considerate,
and just policy in their dealings with the Indians."
1404. Pearce, Roy Harvey. The savages of Amer-
ica; a study of the Indian and the idea of
civilization. Rev. ed. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins
Press, 1965. xv, 260 p. illus.
65—2719 £93 .P4 1965
Bibliographical footnotes.
An updated edition of no. 3031 in the 1960 Guide.
1405. Prucha, Francis P. American Indian policy
in the formative years: the Indian trade and
intercourse acts, 1790—1834. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1962. 303 p.
62—9428 £93^965
"Bibliographical note": p. [279]— 292.
The early Indian policy of the U.S. Government
consisted of a body of law designed to promote a
gradual and peaceful westward advance of the
white settlers and at the same time to reserve to
the Indians specified liberties and land areas.
Prucha has studied the emergence, implementation,
and modification of that policy. He reveals the
way in which it developed in response to the pres-
sures of Indians and whites and the manner in
which it was either executed successfully by the
Government or frustrated by the land-hungry fron-
tiersmen. Other studies of the attempts to regulate
the Indian affairs at various times include Allen W.
Trelease's Indian Affairs in Colonial New Yor\:
The Seventeenth Century (Ithaca, N.Y., Cornell
University Press [1960] 379 p.) and The Move-
ment for Indian Assimilation, 1860—1890 (Philadel-
phia, University of Pennsylvania Press [1963] 244
p.), by Henry E. Fritz.
1406. Spicer, Edward H. Cycles of conquest; the
impact of Spain, Mexico, and the United
States on the Indians of the Southwest, 1533-1960.
Drawings by Hazel Fontana. Tucson, University
of Arizona Press [ 1962] 609 p.
61-14500 £78.8786
"Bibliographic notes to chapters": p. 587—599.
As the Governments of Spain, Mexico, and the
United States successively obtained political control
of the Southwest, they attempted, with varying de-
grees of success, to impose their cultural patterns
on the Indians. Basing his conclusions on the
THE AMERICAN INDIAN / 125
works of historians and anthropologists who have
studied individual tribes in detail, Spicer analyzes
the effects of interethnic contact and shows how the
impact of European civilization on Indian culture
resulted in changes unexpected by both Indians and
whites. He traces the instances of contact and con-
quest as they occurred, examines the policies of the
conquering groups, and describes the political, lin-
guistic, social, and economic developments that fol-
lowed. The Indian Traders (Norman, University
of Oklahoma Press [ 1962] 393 p.), by Frank Mc-
Nitt, describes the American traders in the South-
west, who provided much of the firsthand contact
between the Indians and the whites.
F. The Twentieth Century
1407. Fey, Harold E., and D'Arcy McNickle. In-
dians and other Americans; two ways of life
meet. New York, Harper [1959] 220 p. illus.
58-10368 E93.F37
The National Government did not, according to
authors Fey and McNickle, adopt a policy designed
to meet the needs of the Indians in a constructive
and realistic fashion until the Meriam survey of
1926—28 (the report of the survey is no. 3038 in the
1960 Guide} and the Indian Reorganization Act of
1934. The new approach called for promoting
tribal organization, assisting in economic develop-
ment, improving educational facilities, and reviving
Indian cultures. This program did not endure
long, however. Its opponents strongly favored de-
creasing public responsibility for the Indians' wel-
fare. In the 1950'$ the Government began to reduce
its support and to plan for the eventual division of
all Indian lands into individual allotments. The
authors condemn this trend as premature and urge
continued aids and controls until the Indians, eco-
nomically and socially, reach a stage of development
at which they can contend equally in the white
communities that will assimilate them.
1408. Kroeber, Theodora. Ishi in two worlds; a
biography of the last wild Indian in North
America. Berkeley, University of California Press,
1961. 255 p. illus. 61-7530 £90.18X7
Bibliography: p. [245]— 255.
Ishi, the last surviving member of the Yahi tribe,
was found trapped by barking dogs in a corral on a
farm near Oroville, Calif., in August 1911. Unable
to speak or understand English and with no direct
knowledge of the whites, Ishi was a man of the
Stone Age. Two young anthropologists, T. T. Wa-
terman and Alfred L. Kroeber, brought him to the
Museum of Anthropology in San Francisco. Ishi
adjusted with unexpected ease to 20th-century life.
The museum paid him a small salary and permit-
ted him to live in its own quarters. He described
his primitive early existence to anthropologists and
ethnologists and patiendy entertained thousands of
museum visitors by building fires and chipping ar-
rowheads. By the time of his death in 1916, he had
made many close friends among the staff members
of the museum and the people of the city, in which
he had learned to travel alone. Mrs. Kroeber tells
with warmth and insight the poignant story of Ishi
and the demise of the Yahi tribe.
1409. Lange, Charles H. Cochiti: a New Mexico
pueblo, past and present. Austin, Univer-
sity of Texas Press [1960, Ci959] xxiv, 618 p.
illus. 58—10852 E99.C84L3
Bibliography: p. [5751-585.
A study in depth of contemporary life and cus-
toms in a single New Mexican pueblo. The author
spent several summers in Cochiti and has here com-
bined his observations with information gleaned
from the reports of anthropologists who studied the
pueblo between 1880 and 1950. Lange describes
the village's current economic situation, ceremonial
life, and social structure and relates them to the
past, showing the impact of European civilization.
He also compares the cultural characteristics of
Cochiti with those of neighboring pueblos in the
Rio Grande Valley. Extensive appendixes include
statistics, rosters of members of religious societies,
pictures of costumes used in religious ceremonies,
126 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
and choreography and music for ritualistic dances.
An analysis of European influence on six western
Indian groups may be found in Perspectives in
American Indian Culture Change ( [Chicago]
University of Chicago Press [1961] 549 p.), edited
by Edward H. Spicer for the Interuniversity Sum-
mer Research Seminar held at the University of
New Mexico in 1956.
1410. Wilson, Edmund. Apologies to the Iroquois.
With a study of The Mohawks in high steel
by Joseph Mitchell. New York, Farrar, Straus &
Cudahy [1960] 310 p. illus.
59-9177 E99.I7W56
Well known for his versatility as an author, Wil-
son became interested in the Iroquois in 1957, when
their attempts to reclaim their historic tribal lands
received newspaper publicity. In ensuing years he
visited reservations in New York and Canada and
talked with many Indian leaders. This small vol-
ume contains a collection of articles which he wrote
as a result of his investigations and which originally
appeared in The New Yorker. Wilson summarizes
the history of the Iroquois Confederation, discusses
the life of the tribes today, describes some of their
ceremonies, and analyzes the growth of the Iroquois
nationalist movement. His detailed accounts of re-
cent Indian struggles to prevent the preemption of
their lands for public works projects are of special
interest. Mitchell's brief contribution is an essay
on the unexpected fondness and talent Indians in
the New York area have shown for working on the
high steel frameworks of bridges and buildings.
VIII
General History
A. Historiography
B. General Worths
C. The New World
D. The Thirteen Colonies
E. The American Revolution
F. Federal America (1783—1815)
G. The "Middle Period" (1815-60)
H. Slavery, the Civil War, and Reconstruction (to 1877)
I. Grant to McKinley (1869-1901)
J. Theodore Roosevelt to Wilson (1901—21)
K. Since 1920
1411—1425
1426-1445
1446—1450
1451-1469
1470-1483
1484—1496
1497-1511
1512—1536
I537-J546
I547-I557
1558-1570
THE INTERPRETIVE essay which introduces this chapter in the 1960 Guide places in perspec-
tive the concept of "general history" as it evolved and as it has been applied in this
country since its origin. The chapter's entries survey the whole range of historical develop-
ment in that "portion of the earth's surface which is now the United States" and, in the
process, take account of the changing attitudes of mind by which successive generations of
historians conceived their task of recording that development.
The concept that the historian's approach to his
subject and his selection and use of materials under-
go a continuing process of review and revision is
one which the Supplement also follows with an eye
to recognizing the shifting currents of historical
scholarship. This chapter is partly a review of the
history of history. Section A contains works de-
voted to historiography, and the remaining selec-
tions show the increased velocity with which the
change in viewpoint is taking place, corresponding
to the rapidly rising volume of historical writing.
The selections also contain the implications, with
which few historians today would quarrel, that
historical perspective in any given period is aligned
to and conditioned by the social, political, economic,
and cultural milieu in which it operates and that the
presuppositions which guide historians in any age
tend to develop in a process of reaction to the mode
and temper of their predecessors.
In the developmental process, for example, that
began with the birth of "scientific history" before
the turn of the century, there eventually emerged,
from the eclecticism of its university environment, a
corrective — "New" — history, intended to widen the
scope of the discipline's purview, to relate it to the
present, and to link it with the social sciences. The
new historians, writing through the 1920'$ and
1930'$, viewed their subject with an abiding sense
of change and progress and a growing awareness of
the social and economic conflicts that characterized
and motivated their own times. In some, this ex-
perience hardened into an economic determinism.
Others reacted with a heightened interest in the
role of contending ideas, ideals, and values as
dynamic factors in the growth and progress of the
Nation. With the rise of intellectual history and
biography, the historian's task moved far beyond
its traditional preoccupation with military and polit-
ical events, brought into play a still wider spectrum
of the social sciences, and extended the burgeoning
accumulation of historical source material.
Since the early 1950'$, it has been evident that
another modification is under way. In some quar-
127
128 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ters the seeming internal contradictions in postwar
affairs have diminished the status of the liberal faith
in the idea of progress. The pendulatory swing has
favored a search for stability, continuity, and tradi-
tion in American life, a search that is reflected in
the way historians contemplate the past. In this
view, sectional divisiveness and class and ethnic
cleavages are seen to have been more apparent than
real, and scholars search for national unity and for
the nature and efficacy of something called the na-
tional character.
Just as the complexity of historical thought and
introspection has increased, so the phenomenal
growth of historical source materials imposes an
awesome burden on the modern writer, as the books
in this chapter reveal. His conscious or uncon-
scious involvement with the social sciences, new
techniques of quantitative analysis, and the output
of data processing requires a painful duty in merely
"keeping up." The "new self-consciousness" re-
ferred to in the 1960 Guide now concerns itself with
the historian's ability to use this pyramiding body of
research and fact and with the quality and purpose
of the history he is producing. Journal articles and
convention papers testify to the profession's desire
to sustain standards of literary artistry and read-
ability. The fragmentation and specialization of
historical inquiry have created conditions that are
not conducive to the production of what was for-
merly defined as "general history." The grand de-
sign is today seldom attempted by an individual;
rather, it is normally the aim of ventures in coopera-
tive authorship and of works in series under pivotal
editorship.
Yet the fact remains that the zo-year period under
review has perhaps produced an unprecedented ar-
ray of skillfully researched, engagingly written, and
handsomely presented historical works. They pro-
vide for the bibliographer a new challenge in selec-
tion and organization. The divisions of labor in
American historical writing are becoming less dis-
tinct and more difficult to define. The point where
intellectual history merges into historiography or
with the philosophy of history is that point at which
we attempt to place selections accurately either in
this chapter or in Chapter XI, Intellectual History,
or Chapter XXII, Philosophy and Psychology. Bio-
graphy poses a special dilemma. The vasdy in-
creased popularity of this genre has resulted in many
scholarly and well-written — even prize-winning —
biographies of relatively minor figures often within
the context of regional or local history. The stature
of the subject, rather than the excellence of his
biographer, must often guide us here, and a great
many worthy studies must be omitted. Many bio-
graphical works are placed in chapters on other
topics or in Chapter IV, Biography and Autobiogra-
phy. In the section on historiography we have at-
tempted to choose the broader surveys and represen-
tative biographies of historians that will make the
problems and purposes of the craft intelligible to
those outside. The reader may find that some of
the books he expects to encounter in this chapter are
in Chapter XII, Local History. History is being
writ small, but in microcosm; nearly all, be it noted,
is posed within the larger framework of national
relevance.
A. Historiography
1411. America, history and life. v. i+ July 1964+
[Santa Barbara, Calif.] Published by Clio
Press for American Bibliographical Center.
64—25630 Z 1 236^48
Four numbers a year, one of which is the annual
index.
Editor: Eric H. Boehm.
A bibliographic review and abstracting service,
which surveys about 500 U.S. and Canadian period-
icals for articles within the entire range of American
and Canadian history and on current American and
Canadian life. Abstracts are grouped by topic.
1412. Beers, Henry P. The French & British in
the Old Northwest; a bibliographical guide
to archive and manuscript sources. Detroit, Wayne
State University Press, 1964. 297 p.
64—13305 F478.2.B4
The area covered by this guide includes Michi-
gan, Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Wisconsin, Minnesota,
and the Dakotas, with some reference to the west-
ern portions of Pennsylvania and New York. It
presents "an historical account of the acquisition,
preservation, and publication by American and
Canadian institutions of the original records created
by French and British officials in the Old Northwest
(the region south of the Great Lakes) chiefly during
the eighteenth century, and of officials and govern-
ing bodies of Canada relating to that region." His-
torical notes and introductions also provide descrip-
GENERAL HISTORY /
tions of the government of the region, the land-
grant system, and ecclesiastical organizations. The
nature, extent, and location of all important archival
and manuscript materials are recorded, and the
existence of copies or transcripts is noted. The
concluding chapter is a 6 1 -page list of bibliograph-
ical sources.
1413. Borning, Bernard C. The political and
social thought of Charles A. Beard. Seattle,
University of Washington Press, 1962. xxv, 315 p.
62—12129 £175.5.8382
Bibliography: p. 257—295.
The author, a political scientist at the University
of Idaho, systematically explores the development
of Beard's ideas from 1898 to 1948. His purpose is
to describe Beard's impact on the political opinion
of his time and, by a careful study of his writings
and the response of his contemporaries, to relate
the significance of his ideas to the prevailing intel-
lectual environment. The analytical techniques of
the social sciences are applied to both Beard and
Frederick Jackson Turner in Lee Benson's Turner
and Beard; American Historical Writing Reconsid-
ered (Glencoe, 111., Free Press [1960] 241 p.).
Benson reviews their economic writings against a
background of European influences, in particular
that of the Italian economist, Achille Loria. He
finds that the two historians' economic theories tend
to converge and takes to task not their ideas but
rather the mistaken conclusions of thir critics. In
The Pragmatic Revolt in American History: Carl
Becker and Charles Beard (New Haven, Yale Uni-
versity Press, 1958. 182 p. Yale historical publica-
tions. The Wallace Norstein essays, no. 3), Gush-
ing Strout poses Beard against yet another historian.
Two temperamentally dissimilar iconoclasts are
brought together for their common attacks on the
scientifically oriented historical positivism of their
times and are carefully examined, in alternating
chapters, for the internal merits or practical inade-
quacies of the pragmatic relativism which each
espoused.
1414. Cartwright, William H., and Richard L.
Watson, eds. Interpreting and teaching
American history. Washington, National Council
for Social Studies, a Dept. of the National Educa-
tion Association [1961] xvi, 430 p. (National
Council for the Social Studies. Yearbook, 3ist,
1961) 31—6192 H62.AiN3 v. 31, 1961
Directed toward improving the teaching of
American history at all levels, this book is designed
to update the Council's i7th yearbook, The Study
and Teaching of American History (1946), no.
3059 in the 1960 Guide. The greater part of the
book consists of a series of bibliographical essays on
all major aspects of American history. Arranged in
chronological order and intended to balance, in each
period, interpretation with bibliographical refer-
ences, the essays seek to introduce the student to a
wide variety of interpretations by relating these to
the works and to the scholars responsible. Three
contributions to this section originally appeared in
virtually the same form, in the similarly oriented
pamphlet series published by the Service Center for
Teachers of History of the American Historical
Association.
1415. Curd, Merle E. The making of an Ameri-
can community; a case study of democracy
in a frontier county. With the assistance of Robert
Daniel [and others]. Stanford, Calif., Stanford
University Press, 1959. 483 p. maps, diagrs.
59-5051 HN79.W62T73
"Bibliographical notes": p. 467—469.
Frederick Jackson Turner (1861—1932) advanced
the theory that the frontier experience fostered the
development of a democratic way of life in America.
Curti examines Turner's thesis by applying it to a
specific case, the settling of Trempealeau County
in western Wisconsin. He is of the opinion that
Turner perhaps underestimated the tremendous
obstacles to the acquisition of frontier land, over-
emphasized the frontier as a promoter of democracy,
and neglected the role of other factors such as indus-
trialism. Curti believes that Turner probably saw
more democracy in the relations among frontier
people than was really there but concludes that, if
Trempealeau County was a typical frontier area,
then this investigation bears out Turner's thesis.
He notes in particular the fostering of such "demo-
cratic traits" as self-reliance, social equality, and
tolerance of personal differences. In honor of the
centennial of Turner's birth, the Wisconsin State
Historical Society published Wisconsin Witness to
Frederict( Jackson Turner; a Collection of Essays
on the Historian and the Thesis (Madison, 1961.
204 p.), compiled by O. Lawrence Burnette, Jr.
Frederic^ Jackson Turner's Legacy; Unpublished
Writings in American History (San Marino, Calif.,
Huntington Library, 1965. 217 p. Huntington
Library publications), edited by Wilbur R. Jacobs,
is a selection of speeches, essays, lectures, and
memorandums.
1416. Doughty, Howard. Francis Parkman. New
York, Macmillan, 1962. 414 p.
61—12191 £175.51*212
Bibliographical note: p. 402—403.
A deeply sensitive examination of Parkman's life
and work, composed with an architecture and style
130 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
very much like Parkman's own. It is primarily with
Parkman as a man of letters that the author is
concerned, and his critical appreciation of the his-
torian's literary gifts is displayed in a minute tex-
tual analysis of his works. Parkman's heritage,
early life, studies, wilderness excursions, and phys-
ical frailty are described in their manifold relations
to the development of his narrative artistry. More
than 400 Parkman letters are annotated and pub-
lished in Letters of Francis Parkman (Norman,
University of Oklahoma Press [1960] 2 v.), edited
by Wilbur R. Jacobs. Two works more conven-
tional in their biographical approach to eminent his-
torians are Abraham S. Eisenstadt's Charles Mc-
Lean Andrews, a Study in American Historical
Writing (New York, Columbia University Press,
1956. 273 p. Columbia studies in the social sci-
ences, no. 588) and Jacob E. Cooke's Frederic Ban-
croft, Historian (Norman, University of Oklahoma
Press [1957] 282 p.), which contains three of Ban-
croft's previously unpublished essays on the coloni-
zation of American Negroes from 1801 to 1865.
Milton Berman's John Fis\e; the Evolution of a
Popularizer (Cambridge, Harvard University Press,
1961. 297 p. Harvard historical monographs, 48)
portrays a less original but lucid and immensely
popular historian.
1417. Posner, Ernst. American State archives.
Chicago, University of Chicago Press [1964]
xiv, 397 p. 64-23425 CD3024.P6
"Basic bibliography of writings on public archives
administration in the United States": p. 377—386.
The published results of a study of State archival
programs sponsored by the Society of American
Archivists under a grant from the Council on Li-
brary Resources, Inc. On the basis of written ques-
tionnaires and survey visits to each State, Posner pre-
sents a State-by-State analysis of the background
development, organization, and legal status of the
archival and records programs of all 50 States and
Puerto Rico. The individual State evaluations are
preceded by a chapter on "The Genesis and Evolu-
tion of American State Archives" and followed by a
chapter entitled "A Summary of Findings" and
another on "Standards for State Archival Agencies."
In Support of Clio; Essays in Memory of Herbert A.
Kellar (Madison, State Historical Society of Wis-
consin, 1958. 214 p.), edited by William B. Hessel-
tine and Donald R. McNeil, offers a more selective
evaluation of prevailing aids to historical study in a
collection of essays by prominent scholars on such
topics as the Historical Records Survey, manuscript
collecting, public archives, mechanical aids in his-
torical research, foundations and the study of his-
tory, and historical organizations as aids to history.
1418. Saveth, Edward N., ed. American histo
and the social sciences. [New York] Fn
Press of Glencoe [1964] 599 p.
64—20308 £175.8;
Bibliographical references included in "Note
(P- 537-591)-
A selection of essays arranged to illustrate ar
evaluate the implications of the current confluen
of history and the social sciences in American schc
arship. To systematize the essays' mutual scrutii
of method and approach, the editor has divided tb
large and close-packed volume into five parts. Tl
first defines the problem — the "difference betwet
the professional climates of history and the soci
science disciplines" — in terms of what is involv<
in the social science approach and its relationsh
to adjacent areas of traditional historiography. Tl
second part presents views by representatives of tl
disciplines, and the third deals with a wide range <
social science concepts, defined for their relevan
to historical inquiry and illustrating their applic
tion to the data of American history. Part 4 co
centrates on "quantitative concepts and machii
processes applied to historical research." The fin
part allows selected historians the right of reply
defining from their own experience the "limits
the social science approach." Among the contrib
tors to the volume are Walt W. Rostow, Margar
Mead, Richard Hofstadter, Oscar and Mary Han
lin, Henry Steele Commager, Merle Curti, Jot
Higham, Gushing Strout, and Arthur M. Schlc
inger, Jr.
1419. Sheehan, Donald H., and Harold C. Syrei
eds. Essays in American historiograph
papers presented in honor of Allan Nevins. Ne
York, Columbia University Press, 1960. 320 p.
60-8187 £175.8.
CONTENTS. — Allan Nevins: an appreciation, I
John A. Krout. — Scientific history in Americ
eclipse of an idea, by Edward N. Saveth. — Though
on the Confederacy, by Robert C. Black, III.-
Radical Reconstruction, by Donald Sheehan. — Tl
New South, by Jacob E. Cooke. — American histo
ians and national politics from the Civil War to tl
First World War, by James A. Rawley. — Reflectioi
on urban history and urban reform, 1865—1915, 1
Mark D. Hirsch. — The idea of the robber barons i
American history, by Hal Bridges. — Some aspec
of European migration to the United States, I
Carlton C. Qualey. — The evolution controversy, 1
Joseph A. Borome. — Pragmatism in America, t
Sidney Ratner. — Populism: its significance i
American history, by Everett Walters. — Imperialisi
and racism, by James P. Shenton. — The mud
rakers: in flower and in failure, by Louis Filler.-
GENERAL HISTORY
A cycle of revisionism between two wars, by Harry
W. Baehr. — An interpretation of Franklin D.
Roecpvelt; by Bernard Bellush.
1420. Social Science Research Council. Committee
on Historical Analysis. Generalization in
the writing of history; a report. Edited by Louis
Gottschalk. [Chicago] University of Chicago Press
[1963] 255 p. 63-13064 013.8595
This third report of the Social Science Research
Council on the nature of history is a set of essays
dealing with the problem of generalization by the
historian in several different contexts and from
several varying points of view. The first report,
Theory and Practice in Historical Study (1946), is
no. 3065 in the 1960 Guide. The second is The
Social Sciences in Historical Study (1954).
CONTENTS. — Reflections upon the problem of gen-
eralization, by Chester G. Starr. — Generalizations
in ancient history, by M. I. Finley. — On the uses of
generalization in the study of Chinese history, by
Arthur F. Wright. — Comments on the paper of
Arthur F. Wright, by Derk Bodde. — Generaliza-
tions about revolution: a case study, by Robert R.
Palmer. — Generalizations about national character:
an analytical essay, by Walter P. Metzger. — The
historian's use of social role, by Thomas C. Cochran.
— Categories of historiographical generalization, by
Louis Gottschalk. — The genealogy of historical
generalizations, by Roy F. Nichols. — Notes on the
problem of historical generalization, by William O.
Aydelotte. — Explicit data and implicit assumptions
in historical study, by David M. Potter. — Summary,
by Louis Gottschalk. — Bibliography of writings on
historiography and the philosophy of history, by
Martin Klein.
1421. Van Tassel, David D. Recording America's
past; an interpretation of the development of
historical studies in America, 1607—1884. [Chica-
go] University of Chicago Press [1960] 222 p.
60—14404 £175^3 1960
Bibliography: p. 191—212.
1422. Higham, John, Leonard Krieger, and Felix
Gilbert. History. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,
Prentice-Hall [1965] xiv, 402 p. (The Princeton
studies: humanistic scholarship in America)
64-23563 Di3.H43
Bibliographical footnotes.
Viewed by the author himself as a mere chapter
in what a full history of the "whole range of
American historical studies" could be, Recording
America's Past explores such developments as the
colonial origins and formative role of the local
historian; the early genesis of historical societies on
the frontier; the impetus for the writing of com-
munity, territorial, and State history; and, finally,
the rise of national history. Most striking is the
author's recognition of the services of the amateur
historian in broadening the scope of historical in-
quiry beyond the conventional limits of European
precedents and in shaping and recording the growth
and historical sense of the Nation. Whereas Van
Tassel concludes with the triumph of national his-
tory, Higham begins with the accession of the pro-
fessional historian. Their narratives overlap with
the founding of the American Historical Associa-
tion in 1884 and the subsequent institutionalization
of historical study in the universities. From this
point, Higham and his colleagues seek to interpret
the progress and present status of the professional
historians in America in terms of their theories,
general conceptions, and motivation. Particular
merits of their work are its broad erudition and the
large body of information that is packed into a
volume of reasonable size.
1423. Whitehill, Walter Muir. Independent his-
torical societies, an enquiry into their re-
search and publication functions and their financial
future. [Boston] Boston Athenaeum; distributed
by Harvard University Press, 1962. xviii, 593 p.
63—1190 £172^5
Bibliographical footnotes.
Under the auspices of the Council on Library
Resources, Inc., the author visited "three quarters of
the fifty states" to probe a considerably wider
range of subjects than is indicated by the title. The
principal independent historical societies are de-
scribed and their historical background and evolu-
tion are outlined. Other allied organizations are
presented more briefly, with emphasis on their
present activities. The final chapters, often marked
by a frank irreverence and wit, concern such topics
as State-supported societies, historical associations,
manuscript collections and Presidental libraries,
genealogists, museums, and State archives. Keepers
of the Past (Chapel Hill, University of North Caro-
lina Press [1965] 241 p.), edited by Clifford L.
Lord, offers a series of biographical essays devoted to
key figures in various fields of historical preserva-
tion who pioneered and "made notable things hap-
pen" in developing historical societies, public ar-
chives, museums, special collections, and historic
sites.
1424. Wilkins, Burleigh T. Carl Becker; a bio-
graphical study in American intellectual his-
tory. Cambridge, M.I .T. Press, 1961. 246 p.
61-7870 Di5.B33W5
Described by the author "mainly as an exercise in
132 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
historical understanding," this biography is, in addi-
tion, a sensitive, perceptive, and at times critical
study of the intellectual development of this
philosopher-historian and of the changing dimen-
sions of his mind in relation to the emerging pat-
tern of his life. "By relating his 'thoughts' to his
'environment,'" Wilkins has "tried to see Becker
'whole' while at the same time discriminating be-
tween the major and minor aspects of his work."
The elements of the environment are found by the
author in Becker's family, its religion and politics;
in the conditioning influence of a prolonged college
and university milieu; and in the remarkable circle
of eminent friends with whom he corresponded all
his life. The alchemy of these forces, the impact
of the times in which he lived, the shifting tides of
political and historical philosophy, the disturbing
effect of two world wars, and the elements in his
own character are carefully examined. Charlotte
W. Smith's Carl Becker: On History & the Climate
of Opinion (Ithaca, N.Y., Cornell University Press,
1956. 225 p.) centers on American historiography
and Becker's historical relativism.
1425. Wish, Harvey. The American historian; a
social-intellectual history of the writing of
the American past. New York, Oxford University
Press, 1960. 366 p. 60—13202 Ei75/W5
Bibliographic notes: p. 351—360.
In a general survey devoted to examining the
social and intellectual assumptions underlying vari-
ous stages of American historical writing, the
author studies representative historians from Wil-
liam Bradford to Allan Nevins. The traditional
biographical approach is subordinated to an explora-
tion of the subjective factors which emerge from a
study of their writings and of the critical secondary
literature their writings have evoked. A closer
look at the environmental influences of the i9th
century on historical scholarship is provided in each
of three widely dissimilar but equally incisive works.
In History as Romantic Art: Bancroft, Prescott,
Motley, and Part(man (Stanford, Calif., Stanford
University Press, 1959. 260 p. Stanford studies in
language and literature, 20), David Levin examines
the relationship between four historians' assump-
tions and their literary techniques. Wendell
Holmes Stephenson's Southern History in the Mat(-
ing; Pioneer Historians of the South ([Baton
Rouge] Louisiana State University Press, 1964. 294
p.), a companion volume to his The South Lives in
History (mentioned in the annotation for no. 3057
in the 1960 Guide}, contains detailed studies of nine
historians of the South. In The German Historical
School in American Scholarship; a Study in the
Transfer of Culture (Ithaca, Cornell University
Press [1965] 262 p.), Jurgen Herbst examines the
rise and decline of the German historical school of
social science in the United States between 1876 and
1914.
B. General Works
1426. Adams, James Truslow, ed. Dictionary of
American history. James Truslow Adams,
editor in chief; R. V. Coleman, managing editor.
2d ed. rev. New York, Scribner, 1942—61. 6 v.
44—1876 £174^43 1942
On title page of v. 6: Supplement i; issued with-
out edition statement.
Supplement i adds new, revised, and updated ma-
terial to the five-volume set entered as no. 3071 in
the 1960 Guide. Also revised and updated is the
Index Volume (New York, Scribner [1963] 266 p.).
The Concise Dictionary of American History (New
York, Scribner [1962] 1156 p.) is a condensed
version of the Dictionary of American History,
including Supplement i. Michael R. Martin and
Leonard Gelber have written The New Dictionary
of American History (New York, Philosophical
Library [1965] 714 p.), revised by Arthur W.
Littlefield, which includes brief biographical studies.
1427. The Adams papers. L. H. Butterfield, editor
in chief. Cambridge, Belknap Press of Har-
vard University Press, 1961—65. n v.
When publication is completed, the Adams pa-
pers will consist of 80 to roo volumes. As of 1965,
the volumes were divided into three principal
series: the Adams Diaries, the Adams Family Cor-
respondence, and General Correspondence and
Other Papers. The following volumes had then
been published in the Adams Diaries: John Adams'
Diary and Autobiography (1961. 4 v. 60—5387
£322. A3), edited by Butterfield, and the first two
of an estimated 18 volumes of Charles Francis
Adam's Diary (1964. 64—20588 E467.i.A2Ai5),
edited by ATda D. Donald and David H. Donald.
The first two volumes of the Adams Family Corre-
spondence (1963. 63—14964 £322.1^27), also
edited by Butterfield, had appeared. The initial
volumes in the third series are the Legal Papers of
John Adams (1965. 3 v. 65-13855 Law), edited by
L. Kinvin Wroth and Hiller B. Zobel.
1428. Berger, Josef, and Dorothy Berger, eds.
Diary of America; the intimate story of our
nation, told by 100 diarists — public figures and
plain citizens, natives and visitors — over the five
centuries from Columbus, the Pilgrims, and George
Washington to Thomas Edison, Will Rogers, and
our own time. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1957.
621 p. 57-10976 £173.638
"Sources and acknowledgments": p. 618—621.
An assemblage of diary selections spanning
American history from Columbus to General Jo-
seph W. ("Vinegar Joe") Stilwell. The diarists
include persons from all walks of life, whose re-
corded experiences range from family matters and
love affairs to travel, entertainment, and politics.
The American Spirit; United States History as
Seen by Contemporaries (Boston, Heath [1963]
964 p.), edited by Thomas A. Bailey, is another col-
lection of writings, including selections from "let-
ters, diaries, autobiographies, editorials, propaganda
leaflets, public debates, and interviews."
1429. Billington, Ray Allen. Westward expan-
sion; a history of the American frontier by
Ray Allen Billington, with the collaboration of
James Elaine Hedges. 2d ed. New York, Mac-
millan [1960] xv, 893 p. illus.
60—5482 £179.5.663 1960
"Bibliographical note": p. 759—854.
An updated edition of no. 3074 in the 1960 Guide,
incorporating new viewpoints on the frontier. In
A Concise Study Guide to the American Frontier
(Lincoln, University of Nebraska Press, 1964. 269
p.), Nelson Klose discusses the leading theories of
the frontier, explains different types of frontiers, and
analyzes problems of the frontier in general. The
early history of the West is recounted by Francis S.
Philbrick in The Rise of the West, 1754—1830
(New York, Harper & Row [1965] 398 p. New
American Nation series).
1430. Boorstin, Daniel J. The Americans: the
colonial experience. New York, Random
House [1958] 434 p. 58-9884 £188.672
"Bibliographical notes": p. 375—421.
1431. Boorstin, Daniel J. The Americans: the
national experience. New York, Random
House [1965] 517 p. 65—17440 £301.66
"Bibliographical notes": p. 433—495.
In these two volumes, Boorstin attempts to show
how the experience of settling the United States
created a unique American character. Together
GENERAL HISTORY / 133
they review and interpret American history up to
the Civil War. The author emphasizes nonpolitical
history, tracing the development of such activities
as law, medicine, agriculture, science, warfare, and
business.
1432. Carruth, Gorton. The encyclopedia of
American facts and dates. Edited by Gorton
Carruth and associates. 3d ed. New York, Cro-
well [1962] 758 p. (A Crowell reference book)
62—14453 Ei74-C3 1962
An updated edition of no. 3076 in the 1960 Guide.
1433. Commager, Henry Steele, ed. Documents
of American history. 7th ed. New York,
Appleton-Century-Crofts [1963] 632/739 p.
63—9300 Ei73-C66 1963
A revised and updated edition of no. 3079 in the
1960 Guide.
A Documentary History of the United States
([New York] New American Library [1965]
336 p. A Mentor 6ook, MT6o5), edited by Richard
D. Heffner, is a revised and expanded edition of a
work mentioned in the annotation for no. 3079 in
the 1960 Guide.
1434. Dictionary of American biography, pub-
lished under the auspices of the American
Council of Learned Societies. New York, Scribner,
1943—58. 22 v. 44—41895 £176.0562
Volume 22, Supplement Two, an addition to no.
3080 in the 1960 Guide, contains biographies of
585 persons who died between 1936 and 1940. The
Concise Dictionary of American Biography (New
York, Scribner [1964] 1273 p.) is a short version
of the Dictionary of American Biography, including
both supplements, and provides an entry, varying in
length from "minimal" to "extended," for each
biographical sketch in the larger work.
1435. Eisenstadt, Abraham S., ed. American his-
tory: recent interpretations. New York,
Crowell [1962] 2 v. 62-10281 Ei78.6.E44
Designed to meet the need for supplementary
readings in college courses, these two volumes con-
tain articles by reputable historians covering various
aspects and periods of the American past. The ar-
ticles, most of which were published in scholarly
journals after 1945, have been selected to represent
new viewpoints in the interpretation of American
history. The American Past; Conflicting Interpre-
tations of the Great Issues, 2d ed. (New York,
Macmillan [1965] 2 v.), edited by Sidney A. Fine
and Gerald S. 6rown, is another collection of read-
ings, including both journal articles and selections
from books.
134 / A GUIDE To ™E UNITED STATES
1436. Kull, Irving S., and Nell M. Kull. An
encyclopedia of American history. Newly
enl. and updated by Stanley H. Friedelbaum. New
York, Popular Library [1965] 637 p. (Eagle
books, 725) 65-1251 £174.5X8 1965
An enlarged and updated edition of no. 3077 in
the 1960 Guide. The previous edition was entitled
A Short Chronology of American History, 1492—
7950.
1437. Morison, Samuel Eliot, and Henry Steele
Commager. The growth of the American
Republic. [5th ed., rev. and enl.] New York,
Oxford University Press [1962] 2 v. illus.
61—13567 £178^85 1962
Includes bibliographies.
A revised and enlarged edition of no. 3103 in
the 1960 Guide. Other notable two-volume college
texts include A History of the American People, 2d
ed., rev. (New York, Knopf, 1960—61), by Harry
J. Carman, Harold C. Syrett, and Bernard W.
Wishy; The Federal Union; a History of the United
States to 1877, 4th ed. (Boston, Houghton Mifflin
[1964] 729 p.), by John D. Hicks, George E.
Mowry, and Robert E. Burke, and The American
Nation; a History of the United States From /86<>
to the Present, 4th ed. (Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1965. 832 p.), a revised edition of no. 3436 in the
1960 Guide, by the same authors; Empire for Lib-
erty: The Genesis and Growth of the United States
of America (New York, Appleton-Century -Crofts
[1960]), by Dumas Malone and Basil Rauch; and
A History of the United States, 2d ed., rev. (New
York, Knopf, 1964), by Thomas Harry Williams,
Richard N. Current, and Frank Freidel.
1438. Morison, Samuel Eliot. The Oxford his-
tory of the American people. New York,
Oxford University Press, 1965. xxvii, 1150 p. illus.
65-12468 £178^855
A history of the United States for the general
reader. Morison does not slight politics but puts
equitable emphasis on social and economic develop-
ment. He also includes a brief account of Canadian
history. Two other broad histories for the general
reader are A New History of the United States
(New York, G. Braziller, 1958. 474 p.), by Wil-
liam Miller, who provides a balanced narrative, and
The Americans; a New History of the People of the
United States (Boston, Little, Brown [1963] 434
p.), by Oscar Handlin, who features the role of the
immigrant in American life.
1439. Morris, Richard B., ed. Encyclopedia of
American history. Updated and rev. New
York, Harper & Row [1965] xiv, 843 p. illus.
65—22859 £174.5.1^847 1965
An updated edition of no. 3072 in the 1960 Guide.
1440. Parkes, Henry Bamford. The United States
of America, a history. 2d ed., rev. New
York, Knopf, 1959. 783 p. illus.
59—6118 £178^25 1959
Bibliography: p. 779—783.
An updated edition of no. 3104 in the 1960 Guide.
Among other one-volume college texts are The
American Pageant; a History of the Republic (Bos-
ton, Heath [1956] 1007 p.), by Thomas A. Bailey;
The Stream of American History, 3d ed. (New
York, American Book Co. [1965] 832 p.), by
Leland D. Baldwin and Robert L. Kelley; The
United States; a History of a Democracy, 2d ed.
(New York, McGraw-Hill, 1960. 713 p. McGraw-
Hill series in American history), edited by Wesley
M. Gewehr and others; and A History of American
Life and Thought; Revision of A Short History of
American Life (New York, McGraw-Hill, 1963.
622 p. McGraw-Hill series in American history),
by Nelson M. Blake.
1441. Problems in American civilization; readings
selected by the Department of American
Studies, Amherst College. Boston, Heath, 1949—
[65] 45 v.
Sixteen new volumes, as well as four revised edi-
tions, have been added to this series (no. 3107 in the
1960 Guide). Among the added volumes are The
Causes of the American Revolution, rev. ed. ( [ 1962]
131 p. 62—3817 E2io.W3 1962), edited by John
C. Wahlke; The Debate Over Thermonuclear Stra-
tegy ([1965] 114 p. 65—6618 UA23-W362), edit-
ed by Arthur I. Waskow; and Desegregation and
the Supreme Court ([1958] 116 p. 58—2326
Law), edited by Benjamin M. Ziegler.
1442. Riegel, Robert E., and Robert G. Athearn.
America moves west. 4th ed. New York.
Holt, Rinehart & Winston [1964] xiv, 651 p. illus.
64—19649 F59I.R53 1964
Includes bibliographies.
An updated edition of no. 3137 in the 1960 Guide.
1443. Schlesinger, Arthur M. Paths to the present.
With a foreword by Arthur M. Schlesinger,
Jr., Rev. and enl. Boston, Houghton Hifflin, 1964.
viii, 293 p. (Sentry edition, 36)
64—2185 £178.833 1964
"For further reading": p. [265]— 289.
An updated edition of no. 3140 in the 1960 Guide.
1444- U.S. Bureau of the Census. The statistical
history of the United States from colonial
times to the present. Stamford, Conn., Fairfield
Publishers; distributed by Horizon Press, New York
[1965] xxiv, 789 p. illus.
65—21873 HA202.A385 1965
"Up-dated edition, containing two reference
works prepared by 125 distinguished scholars under
the direction of the U.S. Bureau of the Census with
the cooperation of the Social Science Research Coun-
cil: Historical statistics of the United States, colonial
times to 1957, published 1960, and Continuation to
1962 and revisions, published in 1965."
The objective of this work is to combine in a
single volume historical statistics from a multiplic-
GENERAL HISTORY / 135
ity of sources. Text annotations refer to sources of
more detailed information. Broad in scope, the
book is divided into 24 chapters, among which are
"Population," "Labor," "Construction and Hous-
ing," "Agriculture," and "Colonial Statistics."
1445. Wish, Harvey. Society and thought in
America, v. 2. Society and thought in
modern America; a social and intellectual history
of the American people from 1865. 2d ed. New
York, D. McKay Co. [1962] 644 p. illus.
61—18349 £169.1^652, v. 2
Bibliography: p. 607—629.
An updated edition of v. 2 of no. 3150 in the
1960 Guide.
C. The New World
1446. Bolton, Herbert E. Bolton and the Spanish
borderlands. Edited and with an introduc-
tion by John Francis Bannon. Norman, University
of Oklahoma Press [1964] xi, 346 p.
64—11336 £123.669
"A Bolton bibliography": p. 333—341.
A collection of essays, many of them previously
unpublished or relatively inaccessible, by Herbert E.
Bolton (1870—1953), one of the pioneer historians
of the Spanish influence in the Southwest and Flor-
ida. Bannon has included essays written between
1911 and 1939, each of which covers one specific
aspect of the Spanish settlement of the North
American frontier. Among the topics chosen are
the initial exploration, the strategic importance of
the Borderlands, and the mission as a frontier insti-
tution. The introductory essay defines Bolton's
place in American historiography. Maurice G.
Holmes' From New Spain by Sea to the California*,
1519-1668 (Glendale, Calif., A. H. Clark Co., 1963.
307 p. Spain in the West, 9), a study of the Span-
ish politics behind the exploration of California, is
based on much research in Spain.
1447. Morison, Samuel Eliot, ed. and tr. Jour-
nals and other documents on the life and
voyages of Christopher Columbus. Illustrated by
Lima de Freitas. New York, Printed for the mem-
bers of the Limited Editions Club, 1963, xv, 417 p.
64-1683 Ein.M865
Bibliography included in "Abbreviations used in
introductions to documents and in footnotes" (p.
xvi).
This edition of Columbian documents is an out-
growth of several years of research. While work-
ing on his biography of Columbus, Admiral of the
Ocean Sea, no. 3164 in the 1960 Guide, Morison
discovered that most of the translations of the docu-
ments were untrustworthy. In his own transla-
tions he chose to sacrifice modern literary style to
literal accuracy. For inclusion in this work he
selected those documents which seemed "the most
informing, interesting, and significant" in his own
work on the life of Columbus. Many of these have
not appeared in other collections. The arrange-
ment is chronological, with emphasis on the estab-
lishment of Columbus' identity and on the four
voyages. Benjamin Keen has translated, with anno-
tations, Fernando Colon's Historic del S. D. Fer-
nando Colombo (1571) under the title of The Life
of the Admiral Christopher Columbus by His Son,
Ferdinand (New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers Univer-
sity Press [1959] 316 p.).
1448. Williamson, James A. The age of Drake.
4th ed. London, A. & C. Black [1960]
viii, 399 p. maps. (The Pioneer histories)
63-4459 DA355-W484 1960
Imprint covered by label: New York, Barnes &
Noble.
A revised edition of no. 3173 in the 1960 Guide.
Williamson has updated parts of the section on the
events of 1588 and 1589 and has made many minor
corrections.
1449. Williamson, James A. The Cabot voyages
and Bristol discovery under Henry VII.
With the cartography of the voyages by R. A. Skel-
ton. Cambridge [Eng.] Published for the Hakluyt
136 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Society at the University Press, 1962. xvi, 332 p.
illus. (Hakluyt Society. Works, 2d ser., no. 120)
63— T95 Gi6i.H2 2<i ser. no. 120
"Documents": p. [173]— 291.
Bibliography: p. xv-xvi.
Although in this volume Williamson uses much
material from his earlier work, The Voyages of the
Cabots and the English Discovery of North Amer-
ica under Henry VII and Henry VIII (no. 3174
in the 1960 Guide), 30 years of scholarly research
on the voyages prompted him to make substantial
changes in the text. The present volume is limited
primarily to a discussion of the voyages of various
Bristol merchants and of John Cabot and his son
Sebastian between 1480 and 1509. The author ex-
pands his discussion of the background of the Cabot
voyages, with emphasis on the significance of Bristol
as a stimulus for exploration. He includes docu-
ments which were unavailable when he did his
earlier work and adds an essay, "The Cartography
of the Voyages," which Raleigh A. Skelton wrote
expressly for this volume.
1450. Wright, Louis B. The Elizabethans' Amer-
ica; a collection of early reports by English-
men on the New World. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1965. 295 p. (The Stratford-upon-
A von library) 65-8877 £141^7
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 282-295).
A collection of early British descriptions of North
America as recorded by explorers, traders, privateers,
and settlers. Most of the accounts selected were
written during the last quarter of the i6th century
and the first quarter of the i7th century. Because
one of Wright's principal criteria in making selec-
tions was the propaganda value of the reports in
promoting colonization and development of the
New World, the documents indicate the early image
of America in Britain, both accurate and inaccu-
rate. In the introduction, the editor discusses the
importance of such propaganda in helping to create
in the British Isles an attitude favorable to the
colonization of North America.
D. The Thirteen Colonies
1451. Akers, Charles W. Called unto liberty; a
life of Jonathan Mayhew, 1720—1766. Cam-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1964. xii, 285 p.
illus. 64-21783 6X9869.1^45 A7
"Bibliography of Jonathan Mayhew, with short
tides used in the Notes": p. [238]— 241. Biblio-
graphical references included in "Notes" (p. [243]
-272).
As the minister of the West Church in Boston
from 1747 to 1766, Jonathan Mayhew excited con-
troversy in both England and New England by
preaching a rational brand of theology and the
political doctrine of inalienable rights. By 1765,
when he delivered a sermon against the Stamp Act,
he was recognized as one of the leaders of colonial
dissent. Akers' biography of Mayhew is primarily
intellectual; he explores his religious and political
views against the background of controversies both
within New England and between New England
and the mother country. John A. Schultz' William
Shirley: King's Governor of Massachusetts (Chapel
Hill, Published for the Institute of Early American
History and Culture at Williamsburg, Va., by the
University of North Carolina Press [1961] 292 p.)
is a biography of a Massachusetts Governor (1741-
56) whose administration "brought an era of rela-
tive good feeling" to the colony.
1452. Barck, Oscar T., and Hugh T. Lefler. Co-
lonial America. New York, Macmillan
[1958] 767 p. illus. 58-5913 £188.626
Bibliography: p. 731—747.
This textbook, which covers the period from the
first colonization to the ratification of the Constitu-
tion, is organized primarily as a chonological nar-
rative with occasional chapters devoted to topical
problems. Other textbooks are A History of Colo-
nial America, 3d ed. (New York, Harper [1961]
745 p. Harper's historical series), by Oliver P.
Chitwood; The Roots of American Civilization, 2d
ed. (New' York, Appleton-Century-Crofts [1963]
748 p.), by Curtis P. Nettels; and A History of
Colonial America, rev. ed. (New York, Holt,
Rinehart & Winston [1964] 701 p.), written by
Max Savelle and revised by Robert Middlekauff.
1453. Bronner, Edwin B. William Penn's holy
experiment; the founding of Pennsylvania,
1681—1701. New York, Temple University Publi-
cations; distributed by Columbia University Press,
1962. 306 p. illus. 62—14819 Fi52.B84
Includes bibliography.
A chronological study of Pennsylvania politics
between 1681, when Charles II granted the original
charter to William Penn, and 1701, when the Gen-
eral Assembly of Pennsylvania adopted the Charter
of Privileges. In probing the reasons behind the
failure of Pennsylvania to become the Quaker
Utopia envisaged by Penn and its success in estab-
lishing itself within 20 years as a viable political
and economic entity, Bronner examines three sets of
factors: religious, economic, and political dissen-
sions; relations between William Penn and the colo-
nials; and the position of Pennsylvania within the
colonial system as subject to British-French balance-
of-power politics. In War Comes to Quaker Penn-
sylvania, 1682—1756 (New York, Published for
Temple University Publications by Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1957. 245 p.), Robert L. D. Davidson
focuses on the external pressures from the Indians
and the French which corroded Quaker pacifism
and resulted in Pennsylvania's entry into war in
1756. Joseph E. Illick's William Penn, the Politi-
cian: His Relations with the English Government
(Ithaca, N.Y., Cornell University Press [1965]
267 p.) ascribes much of Penn's success in establish-
ing a proprietary colony to his political acumen in
dealing with the English Government.
1454. Brown, Richard M. The South Carolina
Regulators. Cambridge, Belknap Press of
Harvard University Press, 1963. xi, 230 p. illus.
(A publication of the Center for the Study of the
History of Liberty in America, Harvard University)
63-7589 F272.B75
Bibliography: p. 161—177.
The Regulator movement consisted of a well-
organized vigilante group formed in 1767 to put
down outlawry in the back country of South Caro-
lina. It assumed virtually full control over back-
country affairs during the next two years and was
squelched in 1769 by the Moderators, a movement
organized for the specific purpose of ending Regu-
lator domination. Although the Regulators often
employed terroristic methods, they were instru-
mental in bringing law and order into the back
country, which was both socially chaotic and out-of-
touch with the colonial government in Charleston.
1455. Dunn, Richard S. Puritans and Yankees;
the Winthrop dynasty of New England,
1630—1717. Princeton, N.J., Princeton University
Press, 1962. xi, 379 p. illus.
62-7400 F67-W7957
"Bibliographical note": p. 359-361. Bibliograph-
ical footnotes.
One of the central themes in the history of early
New England is the discrepancy between the relig-
ious ideals of its founders and the secular institu-
tions which they developed. Dunn's study of four
members of the first three generations of Win-
GENERAL HISTORY / 137
throps, who were "indisputably the first family of
New England," shows how this dynasty reflected
the secularization of life there. The careers of John
Winthrop (1588-1649), John Winthrop, Jr. (1606-
1676), and two of the latter's sons, Fitz J. Win-
throp (1638-1707) and Wait S. Winthrop (1642—
1717), were integrally bound up with a dual devel-
opment: the transition of New England from domi-
nation by a Puritan ethos to domination by a secular
ethos and the gradual acceptance of a dependent
status within the British Empire. In Winthrop 's
Boston; Portrait of a Puritan Town, 1630—1649
(Chapel Hill, Published for the Institute of Early
American History and Culture at Williamsburg,
Va., by the University of North Carolina Press
[1965] 324 p.), Darrett B. Rutman considers the
same problem through an examination of the de-
veloping institutions of Boston.
1456. Franklin, Benjamin. Papers. Leonard W.
Labaree, editor. Whitfield J. Bell, Jr., asso-
ciate editor. Helen C. Boatfield and Helene H.
Fineman, assistant editors. New Haven, Yale Uni-
versity Press, 1959—65. 8 v. illus.
59—12697 E3O2.F82 1959
"Sponsored by the American Philosophical Soci-
ety and Yale University."
Bibliographical footnotes.
CONTENTS. — v. r. Jan. 6, 1706, through Dec. 31,
1734. — v. 2. Jan. i, 1735, through Dec. 31, 1744. —
v. 3. Jan. i, 1745, through June 30, 1750. — v. 4.
July i, 1750, through June 30, 1753.— v. 5. July i,
1753, through Mar. 31, 1755.— v. 6. Apr. i, 1755,
through Sept. 30, 1756. — v. 7. Oct. i, 1756, through
Mar. 31, 1758.— v. 8. Apr. i, 1758, through Dec.
Projected as a 4O-volume work, this comprehen-
sive edition is planned to contain the full text of
every document, signed or unsigned, known to have
been written by Franklin or by Franklin with
others. Volume i includes an introduction and a
genealogy; each volume is indexed and contains a
chronology. In Benjamin Franklin, Philosopher &
Man (Philadelphia, Lippincott [1965] 438 p.),
Alfred O. Aldridge attempts to "synthesize all that
is known about Franklin's life and character." In
Benjamin Franklin and Pennsylvania Politics (Stan-
ford, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1964. 239
p.), a study of Pennsylvania local politics from 1750
to 1776, William S. Hanna concludes that Franklin,
as well as other Pennsylvania public leaders, acted
on practical expedients as often as on idealistic
objectives.
1457. Gipson, Lawrence H. The British Empire
before the American Revolution. Caldwell,
138 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Id., Caxton Printers, 1936—65. 12 v. illus.
36-20870 DA500.G5
Vols. 4—12 have imprint: New York, A. A.
Knopf.
Bibliographical footnotes.
Volumes 10—12 are a continuation of no. 3188 in
the 1960 Guide.
CONTENTS. — v. 10. The triumphant Empire:
Thunder-clouds gather in the west, 1763—1766. — v.
ii. The triumphant Empire: The rumbling of the
coming storm, 1766—1770. — v. 12. The triumphant
Empire: Britain sails into the storm, 1770—1779.
In these three volumes, Gipson continues his
analysis of American colonial development as it was
affected both by internal circumstances and by the
relative position of the Colonies within the British
Empire. Revised editions of v. 1—3 have been pub-
lished by A. A. Knopf, 1958—60.
1458. Green, Jack P. The quest for power; the
lower houses of assembly in the Southern
Royal Colonies, 1689-1776. Chapel Hill, Published
for the Institute of Early American History and
Culture at Williamsburg, Va., by the University of
North Carolina Press [1963] xi, 528 p.
63—21077 JK2
"Bibliographical essay": p. [496]— 504.
An institutional analysis of the development of
the lower houses of Virginia, the two Carolinas,
and Georgia from 1689 to 1783. Greene bases his
study on an anlaysis of the basic issues of power be-
tween Great Britain and each colony: control over
finances, the civil list, legislative proceedings, and
executive affairs. Although the colonial burgesses
were apparently not primarily motivated by abstract
principles of government, their pragmatic assump-
tion of power prepared them to become the back-
bone of responsible government after the break from
Great Britain.
1459. Hall, Michael G. Edward Randolph and
the American Colonies, 1676—1703. Chapel
Hill, Published for the Institute of Early American
History and Culture by the University of North
Carolina Press [1960] 241 p.
60—16352 Ei9i.H29
"Bibliographical essay": p. 224—230. Biblio-
graphical footnotes.
Edward Randolph served the Crown as a British
agent to the Colonies from 1676 to 1703. As a rep-
resentative of the King, he antagonized the Colo-
nies by trying to enforce unpopular trade laws and
by trying to bring the Colonies directly under the
political control of the King. On the basis of an
examination of the numerous Crown-colony legal
cases which Randolph either instigated or in which
he was implicated, Hall argues that Randolph was
one of the chief architects of a uniform pattern of
commercial and legal administration. The Glorious
Revolution in America; Documents on the Colonial
Crisis of 1689 (Chapel Hill, Published for the Insti-
tute of Early American History and Culture at
Williamsburg, Va., by the University of North
Carolina Press [1964] 216 p. Documentary prob-
lems in early American history), edited by Michael
G. Hall, Lawrence H. Leder, and Michael G. Kam-
men, includes British and colonial documents, both
public and private, which demonstrate the effects of
the Glorious Revolution on internal colonial ad-
ministration and on Crown-colony relations.
1460. Labaree, Benjamin W. The Boston Tea
Party. New York, Oxford University Press,
1964. 347 p. 64-18337 £215.7.1.3
Bibliography: p. 317—330.
The author portrays the Boston Tea Party as the
catalyst which brought on the Revolution. It was a
violent incident that broke the relatively calm rela-
tions between Britain and America and gave the
Thirteen Colonies a common cause. The dumping
of the tea in Boston harbor resulted from the
American conviction that the East India Company's
sale of tea — temptingly cheap in price but subject
to a duty — was part of a British conspiracy to
achieve colonial acceptance of Parliament's right to
tax. Britain's reaction to the Tea Party was ex-
treme, and she punished Massachusetts with the
tyrannical Coercive Acts, which the colonists viewed,
according to the author, as raising the question of
whether they had any rights at all. The hardships
inflicted on Boston by these measures aroused sym-
pathy throughout the Colonies and inspired a fear
that freedom throughout America was threatened.
Eighteen months after the Boston Tea Party, the
colonists united in war against Britain.
1461. Leder, Lawrence H. Robert Livingston,
1654—1728, and the politics of colonial New
York. Chapel Hill, Published for the Institute of
Early American History and Culture at Williams-
burg, Va., by the University of North Carolina
Press [1961] xii, 306 p. illus.
61—62687 Fi22.L43
"Bibliographical note": p. 293—297. Bibliograph-
ical footnotes.
Robert Livingston, the son of a Scotch Calvinist
who had emigrated to Holland to avoid religious
persecution, came to Albany in 1674 at the age of
20. He began his political career as a town clerk
and secretary of the board of commissioners for
Indian affairs in Albany and rose, through marriage,
land acquisition, commercial activity, and political
acumen, to become one of the leading merchants
and public servants of New York. When he died,
he left a political dynasty which remained influential
until the mid-ipth century. Leder explores Living-
ston's career against the background of the complex
social, economic, and political activities of the New
York aristocracy and its relationship to the British
colonial government.
1462. Merrens, Harry R. Colonial North Carolina
in the eighteenth century; a study in histor-
ical geography. Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press [1964] 293 p.
64-J3555 F257.M4
Bibliography: p. [266] -288.
In this study of the human ecology of North
Carolina from 1750 to 1775, Merrens discusses the
changing economic patterns resulting from the in-
terplay of geographic, demographic, and production
factors. He emphasizes the following features of
development: the land, immigration and population
distribution, commerce and the production of naval
stores, agriculture, and the function of the town as
a commercial center for rural areas. The work
presents a picture of North Carolina as a colony in
which there were many diverse patterns of economic
development. In The Lower Cape Fear in Colonial
Days (Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina
Press [1965] 334 p.), Enoch Lawrence Lee ana-
lyzes the economic and political development of an
important commercial area of North Carolina from
the first settlement in 1665 until the end of the
Revolution.
1463. Morton, Richard L. Colonial Virginia.
Chapel Hill, Published for the Virginia Historical
Society by the University of North Carolina Press,
1960. 2 v. (xiv, 883 p.) illus.
60—51846 F229.M75
Bibliography: p. 401—408, 833—844.
CONTENTS. — v. i. The Tidewater period, 1607—
1710. — v. 2. Westward expansion and prelude to
Revolution, 1710—1763.
A comprehensive chronological narrative with
emphasis on political events. In examining the
evolution of Virginia from a series of scattered and
uncertain British settlements to a politically and
economically mature colony which produced a large
number of revolutionary leaders, Morton empha-
sizes the significance of Virginia's contributions to
the formation of the United States. In Give Me
Liberty; the Struggle for Self-Government in Vir-
ginia (Philadelphia, American Philosophical Society,
1958. 275 p. Memoirs of the American Philoso-
phical Society, v. 46), an interpretive essay, Thomas
J. Wertenbaker traces the evolution of self-
GENERAL HISTORY / 139
government and the mounting struggle of the Vir-
ginians for their rights as Englishmen. William
Fitzhugh and his Chesapeake World, 1676-1701;
the Fitzhugh Letters and Other Documents (Chapel
Hill, Published for the Virginia Historical Society
by the University of North Carolina Press, 1963.
399 p. Virginia Historical Society [Richmond]
Documents, v. 3), edited by Richard B. Davis, pro-
vides much firsthand information about the life of a
lawyer, planter, and public servant who emigrated
from England to Virginia in the early 1670*5.
1464. Peckham, Howard H. The colonial wars,
1689-1762. Chicago, University of Chicago
Press [1964] 239 p. illus. (The Chicago history
of American civilization) 64—12606 £195^4
Bibliography: p. 226—231.
In this survey of the major military and diplo-
matic events of the four colonial wars, Peckham
distinguishes between those aspects of the wars
which were determined by European power con-
flicts and those aspects which were endemic to colo-
nial relationships with the Indians and the French
colonials in Canada. He emphasizes two closely
related peculiarities of colonial warfare: the develop-
ment of a nonmilitaristic attitude and the adaptation
of methods of war to the American environment.
As a result of British colonial military organization,
the Colonies built up a foundation for intercolonial
cooperation and a bias against the British yoke. In
The French and Indian Wars; the Story of Battles
and Forts in the Wilderness (Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1962. 318 p. Mainstream of America
series), Edward P. Hamilton emphasizes the condi-
tions of war in the frontier regions. Harrison Bird's
Battle for a Continent (New York, Oxford Univer-
sity Press, 1965. 376 p.) is a detailed narrative of
military events on the Canadian frontier during the
Seven Years' War, 1756—63.
1465. Powell, Sumner C. Puritan village; the
formation of a New England town. Middle-
town, Conn., Wesleyan University Press [1963]
xx, 215 p. illus. 63-8862 F74-S94P74
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
[149]— 161). Bibliography: p. [197]— 211.
An analysis of the development of Sudbury, Mass.,
from 1638, when the land grant for the town was
made, until 1655—57, when a large number of the
younger generation seceded to form a new town
which was in many ways a replica of Sudbury.
Powell began his research with a fairly complete set
of town records from Sudbury and was able to trace
the English backgrounds of 13 of the 16 original
selectmen and of 79 percent of the first land grant-
ees. On the basis of a comparison of the diverse
140 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
experiences of the settlers in England with their
activities in Sudbury, especially with respect to the
three basic institutions of land system, town meet-
ing, and town church, Powell concludes that, al-
though the New England town in some respects
resembled the English village, the settlers succeeded
in creating a new kind of political community.
Charles S. Grant's Democracy in the Connecticut
Frontier Town of Kent (New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1961. 227 p. Columbia studies in the
social sciences, no. 601) is a study of economic op-
portunity and democracy in Kent from its initial
settlement in 1739 to the end of the i8th century.
1466. Reese, Trevor R. Colonial Georgia; a study
in British imperial policy in the eighteenth
century. Athens, University of Georgia Press
[1963] 172 p. 63-17349 F289.R4
Includes bibliography.
An examination of British colonial policy as it
was worked out by the administrators in Georgia
between 1732, when the initial charter was granted,
and 1765, roughly when Georgia began to enter her
revolutionary phase. The author focuses on three
strands of British policy: commercial, strategic, and
social. Because British policy often operated against
the interest of the Georgia settlers, the colonial ad-
ministration was in part responsible for establishing
conditions conducive to revolutionary agitation.
Other works on the history of the colonial govern-
ment of Georgia are The Journal of the Earl of Eg-
mont; Abstract of the Trustees Proceedings for
Establishing the Colony of Georgia, 1732—1738
(Athens, University of Georgia Press [1962] 414
p. Wormsloe Foundation. Publications, no. 5),
edited by Robert G. McPherson; The Journal of
William Stephens (Athens, University of Georgia
Press [1958-59] 2 v. Wormsloe Foundation.
Publications, no. 2-3.), edited by Ellis Merton Coul-
ter; and The Royal Governors of Georgia, 1754—
/775 (Chapel Hill, Published for the Institute of
Early American History and Culture at Williams-
burg by the University of North Carolina Press
[1959] 198 p.), by William W. Abbot.
1467. TePaske, John J. The governorship of
Spanish Florida, 1700—1763. Durham,
N.C., Duke University Press, 1964. xiii, 248 p.
64—18659 F3I4/T3
Bibliography: p. [234]— 238.
An institutional analysis of the administration of
Spanish Florida from 1700, when control of Spain
shifted from the Habsburg to the Bourbon dynasty,
to 1763, when Florida became a British possession.
The author treats his subject as a case study of insti-
tutional development on the frontier. By examin-
ing such problems as finance, Indian policies, the
church, and balance-of-power politics, he shows how
the colonial administration functioned primarily as
a strategic outpost of the Spanish Government in the
New World. Because internal colonial policies were
subordinate to Spanish military considerations,
Spain failed to develop a viable economic and politi-
cal unit in Florida.
1468. Ver Steeg, Clarence L. The formative years,
1607—1763. New York, Hill & Wang
[1964] 342 p. illus. (The Making of America)
64-14682 Ei88.V49
"Bibliographical essay": p. 307—336.
A survey of colonial development from the found-
ing of the Colonies until the end of the fourth
French and Indian War and the beginning of the
series of incidents which precipitated the War for
Independence. The author traces the evolution of
transplanted British and European social, economic,
political, and religious attitudes and institutions into
their peculiarly American forms. Although the geo-
graphic and chronological scope of the survey is
broad, the developments which characterized indi-
vidual colonies are taken into consideration. Chang-
ing patterns in the relationships between the Col-
onies and Great Britain within the context of the
European balance-of-power system are also analyzed.
1469. Wainwright, Nicholas B. George Croghan,
wilderness diplomat. Chapel Hill, Published
for the Institute of Early American History and
Culture at Williamsburg by the University of North
Carolina Press [1959] 334 P-
59-2353 F483.C76W3
"Bibliographical essay": p. [311]— 316. Biblio-
graphical footnotes.
George Croghan came from Ireland to Pennsyl-
vania in 1741 to escape a potato famine. Within a
few years he established himself as a prominent In-
dian trader and mediator between Pennsylvania and
the Indian tribes in the Ohio Valley. He was one of
the major architects of Pennsylvania's Indian policy,
which consisted of attempts to draw the Indians
away from French influence through treaties and
gifts. Sir William Johnson's deputy superintendent
of Indian affairs from 1756 to 1772, he served as the
principal negotiator between the British Empire and
the Indians of the Northwest. He later became in-
volved in the organization of a number of Western
land companies. Wainwright's biography, based
on Croghan's personal papers, places his colorful
career in the perspective of colonial frontier develop-
ment and British-French rivalry.
GENERAL HISTORY / 14!
E. The American Revolution
1470. Bailyn, Bernard, ed. Pamphlets of the
American Revolution, 1750—1776, edited by
Bernard Bailyn, with the assistance of Jane N. Gar-
rett. v. i. 1750-1765. Cambridge, Belknap Press
of Harvard University Press, 1965. 771 p. illus.
(The John Harvard library) 64—21784 £203.63
Much of the important characteristic writing of
the American Revolution appeared, originally or
ultimately, in pamphlet form. The pamphlets were
initially concerned with political problems related
to the conflict with Britain but eventually dealt with
broader issues. Although the pamphleteers looked
to past theorists for sources and traditions to but-
tress their contention that British measures amount-
ed to an active conspiracy of power against liberty,
they not only created what is most original in Amer-
ican political thought but also helped develop the
American radicalism of the Revolution, a radicalism
which was unique in that it sought not to change or
overthrow but to establish in principle the way of
life that was an existing reality. This is the first
volume of a planned four-volume set. It covers the
period 1750—65 and contains a 2OO-page general in-
troduction by Bailyn as well as reprints of 14
pamphlets, from Jonathan Mayhew's A Discourse
Concerning Unlimited Submission (1750) to John
Dickinson's The Late Regulations (1765), each with
a critical essay by the editor. A useful companion
work is Thomas R. Adam's American Indepen-
dence: The Growth of an Idea; a Bibliographical
Study of the American Political Pamphlets Printed
Between 1764 and 7776 Dealing With the Dispute
Between Great Britain and Her Colonies (Provi-
dence, Brown University Press, 1965. 200 p.
Brown University bicentennial publications: studies
in the fields of general scholarship).
1471. Gary, John H. Joseph Warren: physician,
politician, patriot. Urbana, University of
Illinois Press, 1961. 260 p.
61—62763 E263.M4W234
Bibliography: p. 227—243.
Although Warren (1741—1775) has been known
chiefly as the man who sent Paul Revere on his mid-
night ride to Lexington, he played a major role as a
propagandist in Massachusetts during the critical
years that culminated in the outbreak of the Revo-
lutionary War. He was an important figure in the
incidents following the seizure of John Hancock's
sloop Liberty in 1768, as well as in the events leading
to the Boston Tea Party in 1773. He also wrote the
influential Suffolk Resolves in 1774 and was presi-
dent of the Provincial Congress of Massachusetts in
1775. Appointed a major general, he went to Bunk-
er Hill to observe and was killed while heroically
assisting in the fruitless effort to hold the redoubt on
Breed's Hill.
1472. Commager, Henry Steele, and Richard B.
Morris, eds. The spirit of 'seventy-six; the
story of the American Revolution as told by partici-
pants. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill [1958] 2 v.
(1348 p.) illus. 58-12330 £203X^69
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 1297—1319.
A collection of contemporary writings dating from
1773 to 1783 and drawn from orations, essays, songs,
ballads, journals, diaries, private correspondence,
and British and American official papers. Cam-
paigns and battles receive the most generous treat-
ment, but material is included on the coming of the
war and on political and other nonmilitary aspects
of the war years. Source collections bearing on lim-
ited phases of the Revolution are The Road to Inde-
pendence; a Documentary History of the Causes of
the American Revolution: 7765—7776 (New York,
Putman [1963] 314 p.), by John Braeman, and
The American Revolution Through British Eyes
(Evanston, 111., Row, Peterson [1962] 180 p.),
edited by Martin Kallich and Andrew MacLeish,
which helps to show "how England really felt about
America."
1473. Donoughue, Bernard. British politics and
the American Revolution; the path to war,
1773—75. London, Macmillan; New York, St. Mar-
tin's Press, 1964 [i.e. 1965] 323 p. (England in
the age of the American Revolution)
64—21438 E2io.D6 1965
Bibliography: p.295~ 309.
From the Boston Tea Party to the outbreak of the
Revolution, the Ministry of Lord North received the
support of both King and Commons. Confident
that effective opinion was behind them, the Minis-
ters met the challenge of the Boston Tea Party with
a policy based on the belief that the total subordina-
tion of America was necessary for the maintenance
of the Empire. The Americans, however, refused
to be coerced and resorted instead to an organized
resistance that led to war. In The Chatham Ad-
ministration, 1766—1768 (London, Macmillan; New
142 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
York, St. Martin's Press, 1956. 400 p. England in
the age of the American Revolution), John Brooke
tells of the earlier failure of William Pitt, Earl of
Chatham, to maintain the initial acceptance of his
Ministry by both King and Commons. This failure
led to the hardening of political parties into the
forms they assumed during the Revolution. In The
End of North's Ministry, 1780—1782 (London, Mac-
millan; New York, St. Martin's Press, 1958. 428 p.
England in the age of the American Revolution), Ian
R. Christie discusses the undermining and collapse
of the North Ministry following news of the British
defeat at Yorktown.
1474. Ferguson, Elmer James. The power of the
purse; a history of American public finance,
1776-1790. Chapel Hill, Published for the Institute
of Early American History and Culture at Williams-
burg, Va., by the University of North Carolina Press
[1961] 358 p. 61-325 HJ247.F4
"Bibliographical essay": p. [344]— 347. Biblio-
graphical footnotes.
The traditionally unfavorable view of Revolution-
ary finance has been based on the writings of the
19th-century scholars who were "sound money" men
involved in currency controversies. From his 20th-
century viewpoint, Ferguson accepts fiat money and
regulated economies as the norm and portrays Revo-
lutionary finance as "reasonable if not inevitable."
The Federal income for the first five years of the
war came primarily from paper money. This policy
was based upon the similar and generally successful
financial system employed during colonial times.
The problems of public finance were also of major
importance during the postwar years as they in-
fluenced the new Nation's political and constitution-
al development. The question of whether the States
or Congress should pay the domestic and foreign
debt, mostly acquired during the latter years of the
war, was intimately involved in the movement to
strengthen the Federal Government, a development
which led to the adoption of the Constitution and
the rise of political parties.
1475. Knollenberg, Bernhard. George Washing-
ton: the Virginia period, 1732—1775. Dur-
ham, N.C., Duke University Press, 1964. 238 p.
64—24989 £312.2X56
Bibliography: p. [197]— 210.
This biographical treatment of Washington's
early life is based solely on contemporary evidence.
Knollenberg examines Washington's own writings
critically and finds much in his early career which is
not wholly praiseworthy. In order to clarify Wash-
ington's diverse activities, a topical rather than a
chronological approach is taken.
1476. Knollenberg, Bernhard. Origin of the Amer-
ican Revolution: 1759—1766. New York,
Macmillan, 1960. 486 p. 59—10990 £210X65
Bibliography: p. 397—452.
The author argues that "while the British Stamp
Act of 1765 greatly contributed to and touched off
the colonial uprising of 1765—1766, the colonists had
been brought to the brink of rebellion by a number
of other provocative British measures from 1759 to
1764, most of which persisted after the Stamp Act
was repealed in 1766 and contributed to the mount-
ing colonial discontent culminating in the American
Revolution of 1775—1783." The first of these acts
was the Privy Council's order (1759) that any bill
passed by the Virginia legislature repealing or
amending an existing act must contain a clause sus-
pending its operation until approved by the Privy
Council in England. This order was soon followed
by the application of the same requirement to Mas-
sachusetts and South Carolina and by other mea-
sures, such as general writs of assistance. In 1764,
new colonial revenue legislation came under the
jurisdiction of the British vice-admiralty courts in
America. In The Vice- Admiralty Courts and the
American Revolution (Chapel Hill, Published for
the Institute of Early American History and Cul-
ture, Williamsburg, Va., by the University of North
Carolina Press, 1960. 242 p.), Carl Ubbelohde tells
of the colonists' opposition to these courts, which
he considers "a minor, but persistent, cause of the
American Revolution."
1477. Main, Jackson Turner. The social structure
of revolutionary America. Princeton, N.J.,
Princeton University Press, 1965. 330 p.
65—17146 HN57-M265
Bibliographical footnotes.
This statistical study of the American social struc-
ture from 1763 to 1788 reveals an economic class
system which was based upon inequalities in proper-
ty and income and reflected a concentration of
wealth and great disparity between rich and poor.
Yet because of material abundance and the absence
of legal impediments for whites, the system was re-
markably mobile. Also dependent upon economic
inequalities was the social hierarchy. It was charac-
terized by a consciousness of class distinctions and a
prestige order but was relatively democratic in that it
set up no barriers that property could not surmount.
Main concludes that the Revolution at least tempo-
rarily reversed a long-term trend toward social and
economic inequality and more marked class distinc-
tions.
1478. Morison, Samuel Eliot. John Paul Jones, a
sailor's biography. With charts and diagrs.
by Erwin Raisz and with photos. Boston, Little,
Brown [1959] xxii, 453 p. 59-5285 E2oj.]jM6
Bibliography^ p. [431] -443.
"Commodore" Jones (1747—1792), whose official
naval rank was captain, has been the subject of much
romance and controversy but has received relatively
little scholarly attention. Morison, a retired admiral
as well as a historian, wrote this Pulitzer-Prize-
winning biography of Jones in order to tell "what
a sailor has to say about him." The author presents
the Commodore's career in the Continental Navy
and describes in detail the famous battle between
the Bonhomme Richard and the Serapis in 1779.
The book also offers a full picture of Jones' personal
life, including his several romances, and clears away
longstanding myths, especially those created by a
few previous biographers whose works Morison con-
siders to be largely fictional.
1479. Nelson, William H. The American Tory.
Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1961. 194 p.
62-8 E277.N48
The author discusses the Tory's quarrel with his
fellow Americans and the totality of his defeat.
During the years of argument before 1775, the Tory
leaders were unable to gain sufficient support in the
Colonies to secure power. With the outbreak of
hostilities they became Loyalists because they con-
tinued to hold social or political opinions that could
be realized in America only with British assistance.
The war brought disenchantment and defeat to the
Loyalists. The British neither gave them sufficient
support nor put down the rebellion, and as a result
these Americans suffered silencing and expulsion.
The role of the Loyalists in British military policy
is described in Paul H. Smith's Loyalists and Red-
coats (Chapel Hill, Published for the Institute of
Early American History and Culture at Williams-
burg, Va., by the University of North Carolina Press
[1964] 199 p.). The King's Friends (Providence,
Brown University Press, 1965. 411 p.), by Wallace
Brown, is a study of the Loyalists through an inves-
tigation of the extant records of the claims commis-
sion set up by the British to indemnify these Ameri-
cans for losses caused by the Revolution. A Tory's
hostile view of the Revolution is presented in Peter
Oliver's Origin & Progress of the American Rebel-
lion (San Marino, Calif., Huntingdon Library, 1961.
173 p. Huntington Library publications), edited by
Douglass Adair and John A. Schutz from a pre-
viously unpublished manuscript by a prosperous
colonial Massachusetts judge.
1480. Quarles, Benjamin. The Negro in the
American Revolution. Chapel Hill, Pub-
lished for the Institute of Early American History
GENERAL HISTORY / 143
and Culture, Williamsburg, Va., by the University
North Carolina Press [1961] xiii, 231 p.
61—66795 E269-N3Q3
Bibliography: p. [201]— 223.
Supporting whichever side locally invoked the
image of liberty, Negroes in the Revolution fought
with both British and American forces and benefited
from an era which Quarles believes "marked out an
irreversible path toward freedom." The Americans
were slow to make more than limited use of the
Negro because of an unwillingness to deprive a
master of his apprenticed servant or chattel slave
and from a fear of arming people who, for the most
part, were not free. Although free Negroes fought
in the North from the beginning, it took a shortage
of white manpower plus British appeals to the blacks
to force Congress and the Northern States to re-
cruit slaves and grant them freedom as the reward
for faithful service. The South resisted for a time,
but all the plantation States except South Carolina
and Georgia eventually used free Negroes as soldiers
or sailors, and Maryland provided for the enlistment
of slaves. The British employed runaway slaves
and free Negroes primarily as military laborers,
evacuating them along with the regular troops at
the end of the war.
1481. Schlesinger, Arthur M. Prelude to inde-
pendence; the newspaper war on Britain,
1764—1776. New York, Knopf, 1958 [Ci957] 318,
xvi p. 57—12068 PN486i.S3
"Bibliographical note": p. 316—318. Bibliograph-
ical footnotes.
Schlesinger's purpose is to "assess the role of the
newspaper in undermining loyalty to the mother
country and creating a demand for separation."
Many factors from the Sugar Act onward helped
provoke the Revolution, but the movement would
have failed had not the patriot editors vehemently
championed the American cause at every crisis and
personally participated in subversive activities.
Through the use of propaganda, these editors kept
the people in constant opposition to Britain while
preparing them for armed rebellion. In addition to
fostering the movement toward independence,
Schlesinger concludes, the Revolutionary newspa-
pers promoted a freedom of utterance that has
proved to be a boon to American journalism and the
democratic process.
1482. Shy, John W. Toward Lexington; the role
of the British Army in the coming of the
American Revolution. Princeton, N.J., Princeton
University Press, 1965. 463 p. maps.
65—17160 £210.85
Bibliographical footnotes.
144 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
In responce to the demands of defense, imperial
regulation, and especially Indian affairs, the British
maintained a large army on the American frontier
during the years of peace that followed the Seven
Years' War. The author notes that this reasonable
military policy antagonized the colonists and helped
bring on a constitutional crisis when Parliament de-
cided to tax the Colonies for part of the soldiers'
upkeep. In 1768 most of the troops were moved to
the East, where their presence in peacetime con-
vinced Americans that the British wanted an army
not "o defend but to control the Colonies. By this
tinru the colonial challenge to Parliament's sover-
eignty was a major problem. Although the British
we :e united in their refusal to negotiate on the issue
of parliamentary authority, they were divided on the
question of the army's role in the Colonies and were
unable to decide between the alternatives of remov-
ing the army in adherence to Whig concepts of mili-
tarism or using it against the colonists. The events
of 1775 made the decision for them.
1483. Sosin, Jack M. Agents and merchants; Brit-
ish colonial policy and the origins of the
American Revolution, 1763—1775. Lincoln, Uni-
versity of Nebraska Press, 1965. xvi, 267 p. illus.
65—13913 £210.873
Bibliography: p. 235—250.
On the eve of the Revolution, Britain's policy on
colonial America was influenced by the efforts of
two groups: agents retained by various Colonies to
represent their interests in London and English
merchants who traded with the Colonies. Because
they believed that the prosperity of Britain depended
upon the well-being of the American Colonies, the
merchants worked with the colonial agents to modi-
fy measures considered obnoxious in America. This
lobby was especially successful during the years fol-
lowing the French and Indian War. It could count
among its important accomplishments the repeal of
both the Stamp Act and the Townshend duties.
Yet the combination of agents and merchants was
ultimately unsuccessful. According to the author,
it failed primarily because the American challenge
to British authority expanded from a simple ques-
tion of taxation, on which compromise was possible,
to one of Parliament's sovereignty, which was not
negotiable from Britain's point of view. In White-
hall and the Wilderness; the Middle West in British
Colonial Policy, 7760—7775 (Lincoln, University of
Nebraska Press, 1961. 307 p.), Sosin again ex-
pounds British administration and policy.
F. Federal America (1783-1815)
1484. Bernhard, Winfred E. A. Fisher Ames,
Federalist and statesman, 1758—1808. Chap-
el Hill, Published for the Institute of Early Ameri-
can History and Culture at Williamsburg, Va., by
the University of North Carolina Press [1965] xiii,
372 p. illus. 65—23142 £302.6^564
"A note on the sources": p. 355—360.
The appearance of a number of political bio-
graphies of early second-rank Federalist leaders has
increased understanding of the formation of Amer-
ica's first political party and of its attempts to estab-
lish a balance between local and national interests.
One of the most notable of such leaders was Fisher
Ames, Harvard graduate and lawyer, who entered
politics in 1788 as a member of the Massachusetts
convention called to consider ratification of the Con-
stitution. A year later, Ames was elected to the U.S.
House of Representatives, where he maintained a
position of leadership by virtue of his legislative and
oratorical skills until his retirement in 1797. Al-
though Ames never wholly accepted the party sys-
tem, he served as a major spokesman for Hamilton's
fiscal and economic policies and supported the pre-
dominandy Federalist view that a centralized gov-
ernment should foster native commerce and indus-
try. Biographies of other Federalist leaders who
had careers in Congress from Connecticut, Massa-
chusetts, and South Carolina, respectively, are as
follows: Chester M. Destler's Joshua Coit, Ameri-
can Federalist: 1 758— 1798 (Middletown, Conn.,
Wesleyan University Press [1962] 191 p.), Richard
E. Welch's Theodore Sedgwicl^, Federalist; a Politi-
cal Portrait (Middletown, Conn., Wesleyan Univer-
sity Press [1965] 276 p.), and George C. Rogers'
Evolution of a Federalist: William Loughton Smith
of Charleston (1758—1812) (Columbia, University
of South Carolina Press, 1962. 439 p.).
1485. Brant, Irving. James Madison. Indianapo-
lis, Bobbs-Merrill [1941—61] 6 v. illus.
41-19279 £342.67
Includes bibliographies.
CONTENTS— [i] The Virginia revolutionist.
— [2] The nationalist, 1780-1787.— [3] Father of
GENERAL HISTORY / 145
the Constitution, 1787—1800. — [4] Secretary of
State, 1800—1809. — [5] Tne President, 1809—1812.
— [6] Commander in Chief, 1812—1836.
The first five volumes of this six-volume biogra-
phy are no. 3282 in the 1960 Guide. The final vol-
ume carries Madison's career from 1812, the fourth
year of his first term as President, to his death in
1836. More a narrative of the critical events of
Madison's Presidency than a full-scale biographical
treatment, this volume heavily emphasizes the mili-
tary and political strategies and issues of the War of
1812. Brant's overall assessment of Madison's ad-
ministration is that it strengthened and consolidated
the Union without weakening the instruments of
self-government. The first four volumes of Madi-
son's Papers ( [Chicago] University of Chicago
Press [1962-65]), edited by William T. Hutchin-
son and William M. E. Rachal, cover the years from
his birth in 1751 to July 1782, when he represented
Virginia in the Continental Congress.
1486. Brown, Roger H. The Republic in peril:
1812. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1964. 238 p. 64—12498 £357.688
Bibliographical references included in "Notes":
P. [I971-231;
On the basis of his analysis of the papers of Re-
publican Congressmen, Brown presents the thesis
that by 1812 war was the only alternative to com-
mercial submission to Great Britain. Beginning
with Jefferson, the Republican administration based
its policy on the premise that the proof of republi-
canism as a viable form of government depended on
the maintenance of self-regulated commercial enter-
prise. War was the logical consequence of Great
Britain's unwillingness to negotiate commercial
peace despite repeated American pressures on the
British Government and British commerce. The
options, as the Republican leadership understood
them, were either to submit to British domination,
thus destroying the Republican Party and admitting
the failure of the republican experiment, or to de-
clare war.
1487. Dangerfield, George. Chancellor Robert R.
Livingston of New York, 1746—1813. New
York, Harcourt, Brace [1960] 532 p.
60—10924 £302.6X7203
"A bibliographical note": p. 441—450.
Robert Livingston's political career began in 1775
when he became a member of the New York pro-
vincial convention and of the Second Continental
Congress. In 1777 he was chosen to be the first
chancellor of the State of New York, a position he
held until 1801. He was influential in domestic
politics at the local, State, and national levels and
held a number of important diplomatic posts, in-
cluding that of Minister to France from 1801 until
1805, when he retired from politics. Dangerfield
deals with his subject almost as the New York an-
alog of Thomas Jefferson. His picture of Living-
ston as an aristocratic Republican who based his
political attitudes on the agrarian ideal and on the
belief in property rights supports his thesis that dur-
ing the Federalist period the New York aristocracy
became both more republican and less democratic in
resistance to the democratic attempt to purge Amer-
ican society of aristocratic elements.
1488. Fischer, David H. The revolution of Amer-
ican conservatism; the Federalist party in the
era of Jeffersonian democracy. New York, Harper
& Row [1965] xx, 455 p. 65—14680 £331^5
Bibliographical footnotes.
The author analyzes Federalist organization be-
tween 1800 and 1816 in order to shed further light
on the democratization of politics during Jefferson's
administration. His data, much of which is drawn
from a study of relatively younger Federalist lead-
ers, supports his contention that political organiza-
tion killed the Federalist movement. Fischer sug-
gests that, whereas the Federalists began as an inter-
est group based on elitist concepts of political leader-
ship, the necessity of building up a power base
against the Jeffersonians forced the adoption of Jef-
fersonian techniques of party organization. In the
process of borrowing methods of mass political
appeal such as the use of conventions, electioneering,
and widespread publicity, the Federalists were forced
to compromise their elitist ideals. During the Jef-
fersonian period, they were unable to find an orga-
nizing issue strong enough to replace elitism.
1489. Hamilton, Alexander. Papers. Harold C.
Syrett, editor; Jacob E. Cooke, associate edi-
tor. New York, Columbia University Press, 1961—
65. 9 v. illus. 61-15593 £302^247
CONTENTS. — v. i. 1768—1778. — v. 2. 1779—1781.
— v. 3. 1782-1786.— v. 4. Jan. i787-May 1788.—
v. 5. June 1788— Nov. 1789. — v. 6. Dec. 1789—
Aug. 1790. — v. 7. Sept. 1790— Jan. 1791. — v. 8.
Feb. i79i-July 1791.— v. 9. Aug. i79i-Dec. 1791.
These volumes contain letters and documents by
Hamilton, letters to him, and some additional docu-
ments that directly concern him. Many routine
items are simply calendared. In Number 7: Alex-
ander Hamilton's Secret Attempts to Control Amer-
ican Foreign Policy (Princeton, N.J., Princeton Uni-
versity Press, 1964. 166 p.), Julian P. Boyd uses
documents from his edition of the Jefferson Papers
(no. 1491 below) to indict Hamilton on the grounds
146 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
that he deliberately tried to subvert George Wash-
ington's policy toward England.
1490. Jackson, Donald D., ed. Letters of the Lewis
and Clark Expedition, with related docu-
ments, 1783-1854. Urbana, University of Illinois
Press [1962] xxi, 728 p. illus.
62-7119 F592.7.Ji4
Bibliography: p. 681—694.
Includes letters written by members of the Lewis
and Clark expedition and by others who were di-
rectly interested in it. Most of the letters were writ-
ten between 1801 and 1816 and cover the details of
the expedition, its purposes and findings, and for-
eign reaction to it. More than half the 428 items
were previously unpublished. Richard H. Dillon's
biography, Meriwether Lewis (New York, Coward-
McCann, 1965. 364 p.), focuses on the role of Lewis
as the commander of the expedition and uses the
journals and other contemporary literature to de-
scribe the conditions of exploration.
1491. Jefferson, Thomas, Pres. U.S. Papers. Juli-
an P. Boyd, editor; Lyman H. Butterfield
and [others] , associate editors. Princeton, Princeton
University Press, 1950—65. 17 v. illus.
58-7486 £302^63
Volumes 1—13 of this multivolume edition and
the first volume of the Index are no. 3292 in the
1960 Guide.
CONTENTS. — v. 14. 8 Oct. 1788 to 26 Mar. 1789.
— v. 15. 27 Mar. 1789 to 30 Nov. 1789. — v. 16.
30 Nov. 1789 to 4 July 1790.— v. 17. 6 July 1790
to 3 Nov. 1790.
A second volume of the Index (Princeton, Prince-
ton University Press, 1958. 207 p.), compiled by
Elizabeth J. Sherwood, covers v. 7—12 of the Papers.
1492. Malone, Dumas. Jefferson and his time.
Boston, Little, Brown, 1948—62. 3 v. illus.
48—5972 £332^25
Includes bibliographies.
CONTENTS. — v. i. Jefferson the Virginian. — v. 2.
Jefferson and the rights of man. — v. 3. Jefferson and
the ordeal of liberty.
The first two volumes of this multivolume biog-
raphy are no. 3295 in the 1960 Guide. Volume 3
covers the period from 1792 to 1801, during which
Jefferson served for three years as George Washing-
ton's Secretary of State and for four years as Vice
President under John Adams. Jefferson is viewed as
a democratic child of the Enlightenment, a philos-
opher-turned-statesman who was guided by the de-
termination that "men should be set free and kept
free in order to move forward in the light of ever-
expanding knowledge." He was branded as a rank
opportunist by some critics and as an impractical
idealist by others; Malone answers both charges.
Although Jefferson was a founder and leader of the
Republican Party, Malone considers that he was a
reluctant partisan who used the party only in the
service of unity and democracy. Alexander Ba-
linky's Albert Gallatin: Fiscal Theories and Policies
(New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers University Press,
1958. 275 p.) concludes that Gallatin, as Jefferson's
Secretary of the Treasury, "subordinated fiscal con-
siderations and principles to the political and eco-
nomic (though nonfiscal) objectives of his party."
1493. Miller, John C. The Federalist era, 1789—
1 80 1. New York, Harper [1960] 304 p.
(The New American nation series)
60—15321 £310^5
Bibliography: p. 279—298.
This chronological survey of the chief political
and diplomatic events during the Presidencies of
George Washington and John Adams focuses on
the issues and personalities from which the first
American party system originated. Two themes
dominate the study: the search for national unity
and the demand for individual liberty. In tracing
the development of these themes, Miller follows with
special care the activities of Alexander Hamilton
and to a lesser extent those of Thomas Jefferson. In
The Nation Ta1(es Shape, 1789-1837 ([Chicago]
University of Chicago Press [1959] 222 p. The
Chicago history of American civilization), a de-
scriptive and interpretive essay, Marcus Cunliffe
briefly surveys the critical years between the adop-
tion of the Constitution and the end of Andrew
Jackson's Presidency.
1494. Mitchell, Broadus. Alexander Hamilton.
New York, Macmillan, 1957—62. 2 v. illus.
57-5506 E302.6.H2M6
Bibliography: p. 775—792.
CONTENTS.— [i] Youth to maturity, 1755-1788.
— [2] The national adventure, 1788—1804.
Volume i of this biography is no. 3291 in the
1960 Guide. Most of the second volume is a de-
tailed analysis of Hamilton's economic theories and
an examination of his fiscal policies. Hamilton was
motivated by a sense of national honor translated
into the moral imperative of respecting and dis-
charging national monetary obligations. As Secre-
tary of the Treasury, he established public credit
and introduced order into finance, with the result
that when he left the Treasury in 1795, the Nation
was solvent. In Alexander Hamilton: Portrait in
Paradox (New York, Harper [1959] 659 p.), the
result of more than a decade of research, John C.
Miller presents a broader analysis, showing Hamil-
GENERAL HISTORY / 147
ton's behavior in relation to the intricate political
and diplomatic events of Washington's Presidency.
1495. Monroe, James, Pres. U.S. Autobiography.
Edited, and with an introduction, by Stuart
Gerry Brown, with the assistance of Donald G.
Baker. [Syracuse] Syracuse University Press
[1959] xi, 236 p. illus. 59—13117 £372^3
Brown considers James Monroe (1758—1831) to
be the first important professional politician in the
United States. Monroe began his autobiography
in 1827 but died before completing it. The manu-
script, a fragmentary rough draft, covers Monroe's
career until 1807, by which time he had seen mili-
tary service in the Revolution and had been a U.S.
Senator, Governor of Virginia, and Minister to
France and Great Britain. Nearly half of the auto-
biography is devoted to his first mission to France,
1794-96.
1496. Smith, Page. John Adams. Garden City,
N.Y., Doubleday, 1962. 2 v. (xx, 1170 p.)
illus. 63-7188 £322.864
Includes bibliographical references.
CONTENTS. — v. i. 1735—1784. — v. 2. 1784—
1826.
The author is the first biographer of John Adams
to have access to the complete papers of the Adams
family, which provided the basis for his painstaking
reconstruction of Adams' life, both private and
public. He has chosen a narrative style and, through
a copious use of direct quotations, allows Adams to
tell much of the story. Since it was the author's
intention to depict John Adams as a three-dimen-
sional figure and his world as he himself perceived
and experienced it, the subject matter is arranged
chronologically rather than topically. The result is
a constant juxtaposition of slight personal incidents
and events of major historical significance. Lester
J. Cappon has edited The Adams-Jefferson Letters;
the Complete Correspondence Between Thomas Jef-
ferson and Abigail and John Adams (Chapel Hill,
Published for the Institute of Early American His-
tory and Culture at Williamsburg, Va., by the Uni-
versity of North Carolina Press [1959] 2 v.).
G. The "Middle Period" (1815-60)
1497. Benson, Lee. The concept of Jacksonian
democracy; New York as a test case. Prince-
ton, N.J., Princeton University Press, 1961. 351 p.
61—6286 Fi23.B49
Bibliographical footnotes.
A study of the relevance of Jacksonian democracy
to New York State politics, 1816 through 1844,
coupled with an investigation of group voting pat-
terns that crystallized in the 1844 presidential elec-
tion. Benson argues that the traditional portrayal
of the Jackson Party as a democratic movement op-
posed by aristocratic, antiegalitarian Whigs is his-
torically inaccurate. Because the Jacksonian Demo-
crats adhered to the doctrines of States rights and
negative government, the Whigs came "closer than
the Democrats to satisfying the requirements of
historians in search of nineteenth-century precursors
to twentieth-century New Dealers." The author
also finds that New York voters in 1844 were in-
fluenced by ethnocultural and religious factors rath-
er than by campaign issues. Jacksonian Democracy
in Mississippi (Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press, 1960. 192 p. The James Sprunt
studies in history and political science, v. 42), by
Edwin A. Miles, and The Jacksonian Heritage;
Pennsylvania Politics, 1833—1848 (Harrisburg, Penn-
sylvania Historical and Museum Commission, 1958.
256 p.), by Charles M. Snyder, treat the diverse
characteristics of Jacksonian politics in these indi-
vidual States.
1498. Capers, Gerald M. John C. Calhoun, op-
portunist; a reappraisal. Gainesville, Uni-
versity of Florida Press, 1960. 275 p.
60-15788 E34o.Ci5C25
"Bibliographical Note": p. 267—269.
The author interprets Calhoun (1782—1850) as a
politician motivated by presidential aspirations. Cal-
houn, South Carolina legislator, Congressman, Sec-
retary of War in Monroe's Cabinet, and Vice Presi-
dent under John Quincy Adams and Andrew Jack-
son, is portrayed as clearly revealing this motive in
his career. First announcing his candidacy in 1821,
he actively sought the nomination in later presiden-
tial campaigns. Calhoun emerges here as a self-
seeking politician, a nationalist turned sectionalist,
advocating nullification and States' rights as his prin-
ciples of government. The first two volumes of the
projected multivolume set of Calhoun's Papers (Co-
lumbia, Published by the University of South Caro-
lina Press for the South Caroliniana Society, 1959—
63), edited by the late Robert L. Meri wether and
William Edwin Hemphill, contain chronologically
148 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
arranged letters, speeches, comments, and reports
of Calhoun from 1801 through July 1818.
1499. Clarke, D wight L. Stephen Watts Kearny,
soldier of the West. Norman, University of
Oklahoma Press [1961] xv, 448 p. illus.
61—15148 £403.1X205
"Notes on sources": p. 401—426.
The 36-year Army career of Stephen Watts Kear-
ny (1794—1848) began with his enlistment at the
outbreak of the War of 1812 and lasted through the
Mexican War. Kearny served mainly in the West
and founded many frontier posts. In 1846 he com-
manded the Army of the West and led the expedi-
tion to invade and seize New Mexico. His success-
ful campaign resulted in annexation, and Kearny
became the first Governor of the territory. Clarke
believes that Kearny has become a neglected figure
in history because he brought court-martial charges
against Lt. John C. Fremont, the popular son-in-law
of Senator Thomas Hart Benton, and because he
was too taciturn to defend himself adequately at the
time and did not leave records that could be used by
historians for that purpose.
1500. Clay, Henry. Papers. James F. Hopkins,
editor; Mary W. M. Hargreaves, associate
editor. [Lexington] University of Kentucky Press
[ci959-63] 3 v- illus- 59-J36o5 £337.8.0597
CONTENTS. — v. i. The rising statesman, 1797—
1814. — v. 2. The rising statesman, 1815—1820. — v.
3. Presidential candidate, 1821—1824.
These three volumes are part of a projected 10-
volume edition. Included are the texts of letters
written by Clay and of selected letters received by
him, as well as speeches, financial papers, and other
documents relating to his career. The first volume
treats Clay's career through the signing of the Treaty
of Ghent, the second covers the period when he
emerged as an influential politician, and the third
reveals him in his first unsuccessful presidential cam-
paign and as Speaker of the House of Representa-
tives.
1501. Dangerfield, George. The awakening of
American nationalism, 1815—1828. New
York, Harper & Row [Ci965] 331 p. illus. (The
New American Nation series) 64—25112 £338.03
"Bibliographical essay": p. 303—321. Bibliograph-
ical footnotes.
The author characterizes the period between the
signing of the Treaty of Ghent in December 1814
and the election of Jackson as President in 1828 as
a conflict between economic nationalism and demo-
cratic nationalism. Andrew Jackson emerges tri-
umphant over Henry Clay, John Quincy Adams,
and their adherents. In his synthesis Dangerfield
treats presidential elections, the Presidents and their
Cabinets, the Monroe Doctrine, and the politics of
the Missouri Compromise, as well as the panic of
1819, Clay's American system, and the Tariff of
Abominations.
1502. Goetzmann, William H. Army exploration
in the American West, 1803—1863. New
Haven, Yale University Press, 1959. xx, 509 p.
illus. (Yale publications in American studies, 4)
59—12694 F59I.G6
"Bibliographical essay": p. 461—480. Bibliograph-
ical footnotes.
The author is. primarily interested in the record
of the Corps of Topographical Engineers from its
creation by Congress in 1838 until it merged into
the Corps of Engineers in 1863. The Topographical
Engineers led the way in observing, surveying, and
mapping trails, rivers, and mountain passes in the
trans-Mississippi West. They also supervised the
construction of roads, built dams, laid out coastal
fortifications, and collected, cataloged, and inven-
toried scientific information.
1503. Hamilton, Holman. Prologue to conflict;
the crisis and Compromise of 1850. [Lex-
ington] University of Kentucky Press [1964] 236
p. 64—13999 £423^2
"Bibliographical essay": p. [209]— 216. Biblio-
graphical footnotes.
A comprehensive analysis of the personalities and
politics connected with the adoption of the Com-
promise of 1850. Researches in the Congressional
Globe, manuscript collections, and newspapers re-
veal the complex legislative maneuvers involved in
securing passage of the compromise as five separate
acts. The author highlights the roles played by
President Fillmore and Stephen A. Douglas. He
also emphasizes the influence of banker William W.
Corcoran, whose lobbying for Federal assumption
of the Texas debt strengthened support for the com-
promise. Tables showing rollcall votes in the House
and Senate on the compromise measures are ap-
pended.
1504. Kirwan, Albert D. John J. Crittenden; the
struggle for the Union. [Lexington] Uni-
versity of Kentucky Press [1962] 514 p. illus.
62—19380 E34O.C9K5
"Critical essay on authorities": p. 481—491.
In his 5O-year career in Kentucky and national
politics as a State legislator, Governor, Congressman,
Senator, and three-time Cabinet member, John J.
Crittenden (1787—1863) witnessed the major polit-
ical events of the ante bellum period. A member
GENERAL HISTORY
/ 149
of the Whig Party, he learned the art of politics
from his fellow Kentuckian Henry Clay. Clay's
prominence and influence obscured Crittenden until
the mid- 1 840*5, when he emerged as a capable party
leader. Well-versed in the tactics of compromise,
Crittenden sought a settlement of the slavery con-
troversy to prevent the dissolution of the Union.
His proposals for settling the issue through consti-
tutional amendments failed, but he was instrumental
in keeping Kentucky in the Union.
1505. Klein, Philip S. President James Buchanan,
a biography. University Park, Pennsylvania
State University Press [1962] xviii, 506 p. illus.
62—12623 £437X53
Bibliography: p. 473—490.
With the demise of the Federalist Party, James
Buchanan (1791—1868) became a conservative Dem-
ocrat. Buchanan served as a Congressman and Sen-
ator, as Minister to Russia and Great Britain, as
Secretary of State in Folk's Cabinet, and as i5th
President of the United States. In 1854 Buchanan
helped draw up the Ostend Manifesto calling for the
acquisition of Cuba as slave territory. Hostile oppo-
sition, however, forced President Pierce to repudiate
the proposal, and Buchanan was discredited. As
President, Buchanan's efforts at compromise between
North and South merely alienated extremists of
both sides. Buchanan lacked the initiative needed,
Klein believes, to handle the secession crisis.
1506. Merk, Frederick. Manifest destiny and
mission in American history; a reinterpre-
tation. With the collaboration of Lois Bannister
Merk. New York, Knopf, 1963. 265 p.
63—8204 £179.5^4
Includes bibliography.
The author explores in depth the configuration of
the ideas, prevalent in America during the years
1840 through 1890, that resulted in the general na-
tional spirit of manifest destiny. Proponents of
manifest destiny, Merk points out, were primarily
concerned with the extension of the continental lim-
its of the United States. Later, when this idea was
transformed into a defense of Caribbean and inter-
national expansion, involving the assimilation of
non-Anglo-Saxon people, the doctrine lost its in-
tense emotional vogue and its political importance.
1507. Nichols, Roy F. Franklin Pierce, Young
Hickory of the Granite Hills. [2d ed., com-
pletely rev.] Philadelphia, University of Pennsyl-
vania Press [1958] xvii, 625 p. illus.
58-7750 £432^63 1958
Bibliography: p. 577—593.
An updated edition of no. 3347 in the 1960 Guide.
1508. Rayback, Robert J. Millard Fillmore; biog-
raphy of a President. Buffalo, Published for
the Buffalo Historical Society by H. Stewart, 1959.
xiv, 470 p. illus. (Publications of the Buffalo His-
torical Society, v. 40) 59—14009 Fi29.B8B88, v. 40
Bibliography: p. [4471-457.
Upon the death of Zachary Taylor after 16 months
in office, Millard Fillmore (1800—1874) became the
1 3th President of the United States. As a Whig
politician from Buffalo, N.Y., Fillmore shared the
limelight with Thurlow Weed and William H.
Seward and served in the State Assembly and in
Congress. Rayback notes that, in his desire to pre-
serve the Union and to enforce the Compromise of
1850, particularly the Fugitive Slave Law, Fillmore
alienated both the North and the South. He failed
to gain antislavery Whig support and thus lost the
presidential nomination in 1852 to General Winfield
Scott. Fillmore ran in 1856, however, as the candi-
date of the American (Know-Nothing) Party.
After the Civil War, he retired from politics and
worked for Buffalo's economic, educational, and
cultural betterment.
1509. Seager, Robert. And Tyler too; a biography
of John & Julia Gardiner Tyler. New York,
McGraw-Hill [1963] xvii, 68 1 p.
63-14259 £397.84
Bibliography: p. 647—654.
At the death of his first wife after 29 years of
marriage, John Tyler (1790—1862) took as his bride
Julia Gardiner, 30 years his junior. Their life in
the White House and at their Virginia plantation,
"Sherwood Forest," together with their seven chil-
dren, is the subject of this informal biography. Cor-
respondence of the proud and ambitious Gardiner
family reveals both the private and public sides of
the Tyler-Gardiner alliance. Against the backdrop
of "the political and sectional history of the United
States from 1810 to 1890," John Tyler and Julia
Gardiner are revealed as distinctly warm and sym-
pathetic individuals. Claude H. Hall's Abel Parser
Upshur, Conservative Virginian, 1790—1844 (Madi-
son, State Historical Society of Wisconsin, 1963 [i.e.
1964] 271 p.) examines the career of the man who
served Tyler first as Secretary of the Navy and then
as Secretary of State.
1510. Spencer, Ivor D. The victor and the spoils;
a life of William L. Marcy. Providence,
Brown University Press, 1959. 438 p. illus.
59-6898 E4i5.9.Mi8S6
Includes bibliography.
William L. Marcy (1786—1857), prominent poli-
tician from New York State, began his long service
in government as a founder of the "Albany Regen-
I5O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
cy," the political machine opposing De Witt Clinton.
As a loyal Jacksonian Democrat in the U.S. Senate,
Marcy uttered his statement that "to the victor
belong the spoils" while defending the confirmation
of Martin Van Buren as Minister to England.
Three times Governor of New York, Marcy ably
met the financial and banking problems of the era.
He served as Secretary of War in Folk's Cabinet and
demonstrated administrative acumen during the
Mexican War. His statesmanship in negotiating
the Gadsden Purchase, improving trade relations,
and dealing with England in Central America
capped his career.
v 1511. Van Deusen, Glyndon G. The Jacksonian
era, 1828-1848. New York, Harper [1959]
291 p. illus. (The New American Nation series)
58-13810 £338^2
"Bibliographical essay": p. 267—283. Bibliograph-
ical footnotes.
A survey of American politics from the election
of Andrew Jackson through that of Zachary Taylor.
Van Deusen's main emphasis is on national events,
issues, and personalities. In his analysis the author
frequently compares and contrasts Whig and Jack-
sonian political methods and practices. He points
out that, although the Jacksonian Party understood
the needs and aspirations of the common man, it
lacked an adequate economic program. The Whigs,
on the other hand, had a clear and comprehensive
program for the economic development of the coun-
try, but they did not have the means at their dis-
posal to win the support of the people. Jacksonian
Democracy and the Wording Class, a Study of the
New Yorf( Worfongmen's Movement, 1829—1837
(Stanford, Stanford University Press, 1960. 286 p.
Stanford studies in history, economics, and political
science, 19), by Walter E. Hugins, examines the
labor movement and its leaders and their relation-
ship to the Jacksonian Party and program.
H. Slavery, the Civil War, and Reconstruction (to 1877)
^71512. Brodie, Fawn M. Thaddeus Stevens:
scourge of the South. New York, Norton
[1959] 448 p. illus. 59—9236 £415.9.88467
Bibliography: p. 401—433.
A member of the U.S. House of Representatives
during 1849—53 and 1859—68, Thaddeus Stevens is
acknowledged as the father of the i4th amendment
and the leading architect of Republican Reconstruc-
tion policy. Mrs. Brodie applies two analytical
methods in her study of Stevens' tempestuous career.
In the first quarter of the book, she explores the cir-
cumstances of Stevens' childhood and early career in
order to determine the psychological factors behind
his uncompromising idealism and extreme radical-
ism. She devotes the remainder of the volume to a
discussion of the political, social, and economic tem-
per of the times, with emphasis on those conditions
which made it possible for Stevens to play a domi-
nant role.
1513. Cain, Marvin R. Lincoln's Attorney Gen-
eral: Edward Bates of Missouri. Columbia,
University of Missouri Press [1965] 361 p. illus.
65—13690 £415.9. B2C3
Bibliography: p. 334—352.
Although Edward Bates' diary of the war years
has long been an important source of information on
the Lincoln administration, Cain is the first historian
to write a full-scale biography of this conservative
political leader from Missouri. Cain's study of
Bates (1793—1869), whom historians have regarded
as relatively colorless and unimportant, focuses on
the transitional rather than the turbulent elements
of the Civil War decade. According to the author,
Bates represented a generation "caught between the
agrarian idealism of Jeffersonian society and the ma-
terial promise of young America and facing for-
midable problems engendered by slavery, section-
alism, and the industrial awakening." Although he
was not one of the more influential members of
Lincoln's Cabinet, he did effect some legal and ad-
ministrative restraints on radical military activity.
1514. Carter, Hodding. The angry scar; the story
of Reconstruction. Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1959. 425 p. (Mainstream of America
series) 5&-9377 E668.C3
Bibliography: p. [411]— 414.
The author, a Southern journalist, takes as his
point of departure the current conflicts between
North and South. His study is "essentially an in-
terpretive synthesis of a considerable body of writing
on the Reconstruction period," with emphasis on the
effects of post-Civil-War Republican policy on fu-
ture generations rather than on explanations for the
failure of Reconstruction to achieve its objectives.
Carter believes that, instead of uniting the American
GENERAL HISTORY
/
people, Reconstruction rigidified Southern white
culture and hardened Southern opposition to change
far into the 2oth century.
1515. Donald, David H. Charles Sumner and the
coming of the Civil War. New York,
Knopf, 1960. 392 p. illus. 60—9144 £415.9.8906
Bibliographical footnotes.
A biography of the Boston lawyer who was one of
the leading proponents of abolition in the U.S. Sen-
ate. From 1845, when his antislavery idealism
brought him actively into Massachusetts politics over
the issue of the annexation of Texas, until his death,
Charles Sumner (1811—1874) gained a reputation
as a doctrinaire moral crusader and radical extrem-
ist. Donald approaches his subject primarily as a
problem of understanding the complex personality
of a man who was successful in both the intellectual
circles and the political arenas of mid-i9th-century
America. The analysis of Sumner's intellectual and
emotional development is based partly on a study of
his speeches and writings and the reactions of his
contemporaries. The volume ends with the year
1861; a companion volume covering Sumner's later
career is projected.
1516. Douglas, Stephen A. Letters. Edited by
Robert W. Johannsen. Urbana, University
of Illinois Press, 1961. xxxi, 558 p. illus.
61-62768 E4I5.9.D73A4
A complete collection of the known correspon-
dence of Stephen A. Douglas (1813-1861), an Il-
linois Democrat whose politics were based on his
belief in manifest destiny and popular sovereignty.
The letters cover his active political years (1833—61)
during which he held many State and national of-
fices, including those of Representative and Senator
in the U.S. Congress, and was an unsuccessful can-
didate for the Presidency in 1860. This volume is
intended in part to serve as a corrective balance to
Douglas' historical image as a rigid supporter of
States rights, a reputation which he gained in part
through his debates with Lincoln in 1858.
1517. Duberman, Martin B., ed. The antislavery
vanguard; new essays on the abolitionists.
Princeton, N.J., Princeton University Press, 1965.
508 p. 65-10824 £449.084
Bibliographical footnotes.
A collection of 17 essays which reexamine and re-
define abolitionism. The essays represent a revision-
ist swing away from the long-prevalent interpreta-
tion of the abolitionists as cranks and fanatics. The
editor notes that, although "most of the contributors
to this volume may be said to be sympathetic to the
abolitionists, they have not seen their function as one
of vindication or special pleading"; the "large ma-
jority have dealt in neutral terms of analysis." The
essays cover a wide range of approaches, including
moral, social, political, and psychological. In The
Bold Brahmins; New England's War Against Slav-
ery, 1831—1863 (New York, Dutton, 1961. 318 p.),
Lawrence Lader presents a study of that part of the
antislavery movement which originated and cen-
tered in Boston.
1518. Duff, John }. A. Lincoln: prairie lawyer.
New York, Rinehart [1960] 433 p. illus.
60-5228 £457.2.08
Bibliography: p. 403—413.
A study of Lincoln's legal career from 1837, when
he was sworn in before the Illinois bar and com-
menced practice in Springfield, the State capital,
until his election as President in 1860. The author
considers Lincoln's legal career against the back-
ground of the legal profession in the Middle West
during the period when that region was passing
from frontier status to political and social maturity.
Primary emphasis is given to Lincoln's use of his
legal practice as preparation for his political career
and his years in the Presidency. Duff draws much
of his evidence from an examination of the cases,
many of which were politically relevant, that Lin-
coln argued before Illinois and Federal courts, as
well as from a scrutiny of Lincoln's law partners,
John T. Stuart, Stephen T. Logan, and William H.
Herndon.
1519. Franklin, John Hope. Reconstruction: after
the Civil War. [Chicago] University of
Chicago Press [1961] 258 p. illus. (The Chicago
history of American civilization)
61—15931 E668.F7
"Suggested reading": p. 232—242.
A survey of Reconstruction policy and its political,
economic, and social effects during the post-Civil-
War decade. The author treats the emergence of
the New South, with its cities, factories, and racial
problems, in the context of the larger national prob-
lems posed by industrialization. Much of the vol-
ume centers on the decline of old socioeconomic
groups, the emergence of new groups, and the shift-
ing political interactions between groups. Franklin
concludes that the failure of Reconstruction was due
as much to Northern acquiescence in Southern pre-
judices as to Southern attitudes.
1520. Gara, Larry. The liberty line; the legend of
the underground railroad. Lexington, Uni-
versity of Kentucky Press [1961] 201 p.
61—6552 £450.622
Bibliographical footnotes.
152 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
The author dissects the legend of the underground
railroad and poses its elements against the reality of
escape from slavery. In his attempt to separate fact
from fancy, Gara examines abolitionist memoirs and
contemporary newspapers, both Northern and
Southern. Finding little reason for acceptance of
the romantic notion of the underground as a well-
organized conspiracy in which the white abolitionist
played the hero, he assigns primary importance to
the legend as propaganda. Even though the under-
ground railroad was less instrumental in facilitating
escape than is commonly supposed, the propagation
of the myth of its utility was an important ingredi-
ent of abolitionist agitation.
1521. Genovese, Eugene D. The political economy
of slavery; studies in the economy & society
of the slave South. New York, Pantheon Books
[1965] xiv, 304 p. 65-14583 £442.645
"Bibliographical note": p. 289—292. Bibliograph-
ical footnotes at the ends of chapters.
The slaveholding system was at the basis of a civ-
ilization which was not only different from but also
antagonistic to the more industrially oriented North-
ern States and European nations. The South was
thus increasingly put in a defensive posture, but the
relative inefficiency of its agrarian economic system
undermined the viability of its institutions. In Slav-
ery; a Problem in American Institutional and Intel-
lectual Life ( [Chicago] University of Chicago Press
[1959] 247 p.), Stanley M. Elkins uses psychologi-
cal analogies and comparative institutional analyses
to discuss the effects of slavery on the Negro in
America.
1522. McKitrick, Eric L. Andrew Johnson and
Reconstruction. [Chicago] University of
Chicago Press [1960] 533 p.
60-5467 E668.Mi56
"Selected bibliography, with notes": p. 511—521.
This analysis of Federal Reconstruction policy
from 1865 to 1869 traces the development of the
conflict between Andrew Johnson and Congress
within the context of partisan politics. McKitrick
argues that the President, by virtue of his uncom-
promising nonpartisanship, bore major responsibil-
ity for the inability of the Federal Government to
achieve a moderate solution for the problems of the
South. By promulgating Reconstruction policies
which were unacceptable to his own party, Johnson
failed to conciliate the South and at the same time
alienated the North. Politics, Principle, and Prej-
udice, 1865—1866; Dilemma of Reconstruction
America ([New York] Free Press of Glencoe
[1963] 294 p.), by La Wanda C. F. Cox and John
H. Cox, examines the development of power blocs
within the Democratic and Republican Parties dur-
ing the first year of Johnson's Presidency.
1523. McPherson, James M. The struggle for
equality; abolitionists and the Negro in the
Civil War and Reconstruction. Princeton, N.J.,
Princeton University Press, 1964. 474 p. illus.
63—23411 £449^176
"Bibliographical essay": p. 433—450.
A study of the abolitionist movement in the North
from 1860 to the ratification of the i5th amendment
in 1870. McPherson contends that the abolitionists,
in their struggle for racial equality, served as the
conscience of the radical Republicans. He traces
the activities of a number of groups and individuals,
many of them either Garrisonian or derivative from
the Garrison movement, which stood for immediate,
unconditional, and universal abolition of slavery in
1860. The Negro's Civil War; How American
Negroes Felt and Acted During the War for the
Union (New York, Pantheon Books [1965] 358
p.), also by McPherson, is a collection of documents
arranged in narrative form, with connecting inter-
pretive and factual information.
1524. Merrill, Walter M. Against wind and tide,
a biography of Wm. Lloyd Garrison. Cam-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1963. xvi, 391 p.
illus. 63—10871 £449.62557
Bibliographical references included in "Introduc-
tion" (p. xiii— xvi) and in "Notes" (p. 335—377).
A biography inspired by the author's discovery
and acquisition of an extensive group of manuscripts
relating to Garrison. Basing his story on these pa
pers and the publicly available collections, Merril
undertakes to "re-evaluate the character and per
sonality of Garrison the man, and to afford a solk
basis for appraisal of his position in the American
antislavery movement." He places Garrison in th
context of his family and his closest associates, "
side of Garrison neglected by other biographers,
and describes "the fiery radical, the orator, the poli-
tician, the writer of florid editorials as well as th
man of family, the kindhearted father and friend,
the vain and humorous punster, and the writer oi
bad verse." He replies to his subject's recent critics,
concluding that "As editor and personality, Garrison
remains the chief symbol of the abolition crusade.'
1525. Nevins, Allan. The War for the Union
New York, Scribner [1959—60] 2 v. illus
(His The Ordeal of the Union, v. 5—6)
59—3690 £468 .N4;
Includes bibliographical references.
CONTENTS. — v. i. The improvised war, 1861-
1862. — v. 2. War becomes revolution, 1862—1863.
GENERAL HISTORY / 153
A continuation of The Ordeal of the Union, the
first four volumes of which are no. 3398—3399 in the
1960 Guide. The primary theme of these two vol-
umes, which cover slightly more than the first two
years of the conflict, is the impact of the war on na-
tional character. The author contends that the Civil
War forged a new unity in a nation of individualists
and that the military exigencies of popular warfare
demanded new forms of administrative, industrial,
transportation, political, and social organization.
Tragic Years, 1860—1865; a Documentary History
of the American Civil War (New York, Simon &
Schuster, 1960. 2 v.), by Paul M. Angle and Earl
Schenck Miers, uses contemporary accounts to re-
veal the social revolution which occurred during the
Civil War.
1526. Nichols, Roy F. The stakes of power, 1845—
1877. New York, Hill & Wang [1961] 246
p. illus. (The Making of America)
61-7560 £415.7^5
"Bibliographical note": p. 231—240.
A survey organized around the theme of the
struggle between North and South for the control
of the political and economic power of the Federal
Government. The author notes that, as America
expanded and as Americans made more demands
on the Federal Government, the stakes of power
grew higher and politics became a serious struggle
between those who wanted power and those who
were afraid of losing it. The Civil War and the
bitterness of Reconstruction, according to Nichols,
were logical consequences of the "either/or" char-
acter of national politics during the 1840'$ and
1 850*5 and the inability to compromise on the issues
of ideology and lifestyle.
1527. Quarles, Benjamin. Lincoln and the Negro.
New York, Oxford University Press, 1962.
275 p. illus. 62—9829 £457.2.03
Bibliography: p. 251—264.
Lincoln brought to the Presidency in 1860 "a
grasp of the political and constitutional aspects of
slavery unsurpassed by any public person of his
day." Negroes have almost universally regarded
him as the hero-liberator of their race, the author
indicates, and the act of emancipation is one of the
foundation stones of the Lincoln legend. Lincoln's
attitude toward the Negro and toward slavery was
not as consistent as the legend would suggest, how-
ever. Quarles' study of the development of Lin-
coln's attitudes toward the Negro issue over his life-
time reveals a man of "complex and many-sided
character" and of political astuteness.
1528. Randall, James G., and David H. Donald.
The Civil War and Reconstruction. 2d ed.
Boston, Heath [1961] 820 p. illus.
61—10357 £468^26 1961
Bibliography: p. 703—788.
An updated, revised edition of no. 3408 in the
1960 Guide. Donald, a student of Randall's, has
made most of the major changes in the Reconstruc-
tion section, shifting the emphasis from sectional to
national problems and issues. The Tragic Conflict;
the Civil War and Reconstruction (New York, G.
Braziller, 1962. 528 p. The American epochs ser-
ies), edited by William B. Hesseltine, is a collection
of contemporary accounts documenting a variety of
attitudes toward the war. Two works dealing
primarily with structural and political weaknesses
in the Confederacy are Why the North Won the
Civil War ([Baton Rouge] Louisiana State Univer-
sity Press [1960] 128 p.), a collection of essays
edited by Donald, and War Within a War; the
Confederacy Against Itself (Philadelphia, Chilton
Books [1965] 177 p.), by Carleton Beals.
1529. Sewell, Richard H. John P. Hale and the
politics of abolition. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1965. 290 p.
65—13849 £415.9^1584 1965
Includes bibliographies.
Many recent studies of individual abolitionists
have contributed to an understanding of the com-
plexity and variety of motivations, attitudes, and
activities which have been grouped together under
the generic term "abolition movement." One such
work is Sewell's biography of John P. Hale (1806—
1873), New Hampshire lawyer, politician, and dip-
lomat, who gained a national reputation as an anti-
slavery spokesman. Other studies of prominent
abolitionists are Hinton Rowan Helper, Abolitionist-
Racist (University, University of Alabama Press
[1965] 256 p. Southern historical publications, no.
7), by Hugh C. Bailey, and Elijah P. Lovejoy,
Abolitionist Editor (Urbana, University of Illinois
Press, 1961. 190 p.), by Merton L. Dillon.
\ 1530. Sharkey, Robert P. Money, class, and party;
an economic study of Civil War and Recon-
struction. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1959.
346 p. (The Johns Hopkins University studies in
historical and political science, ser. 77, no. 2)
59—15423 H3I.J6 ser. 77, no. 2
Bibliography: p. 312—333.
An analysis of the financial views of various
economic and political groups from 1865 to 1870.
The author accepts Charles A. Beard's general in-
terpretation that the major historical significance of
the Civil War and Reconstruction lies in the pro-
found social revolution which they brought about.
Sharkey concludes, however, that close examination
154 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
of the activities of manufacturers, farmers, laborers,
bankers, and various subgroups within the Repub-
lican and Democratic Parties with respect to the
greenback, tariff, and banking issues does not bear
out Beard's thesis that the crux of the revolution was
the political overthrow of the Southern planter aris-
tocracy by a Northern and Eastern capitalist-Repub-
lican group. The theory of monolithic class revolu-
tion, Sharkey believes, does not adequately represent
the diversity and complexity of the economic and
political groupings of post-Civil-War society.
1531. Stampp, Kenneth M. The era of Recon-
struction, 1865-1877. New York, Knopf,
1965. 228, [i] p. 64—13447 £668.879
"Bibliographical note": p. 217— [229].
A synthesis of revisionist scholarship on the Re-
construction period. The author's purpose is to
dispel the lingering notion that the post-Civil-War
South was the scene of almost unbridled licentious-
ness and brutality perpetrated by a group of
irresponsible Republican politicians who dictated
Reconstruction policy. The weaknesses and failures
of Reconstruction leaders are exposed, but their lofty
intentions and genuine accomplishments, particular-
ly the adoption of the i4th and i5th amendments,
are credited with enduring significance. The pro-
visional governments established in the South by
Johnson are blamed for introducing the patterns of
segregation and discrimination.
1532. Stern, Philip Van Doren. When the guns
roared; world aspects of the American Civil
War. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1965. 385 p.
illus. 65-12826 £469.89
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(P- r353]-372).
A study of the international impact of the Civil
War and of the effect of foreign attitudes on the
outcome of the war. On the basis of an analysis of
official and unofficial diplomacy and of popular re-
actions, the author concludes that the balance of in-
ternational opinion remained on the side of the
North. The Confederacy's defeat was in part due
to her failure to gain England, and hence other na-
tions, as an ally to her cause. Abroad, the Civil
War appeared primarily as a conflict between good
and evil, freedom and slavery, and the Confederacy
could not overcome this disadvantage.
1533. Thomas, Benjamin P., and Harold M. Hy-
man. Stanton; the life and times of Lin-
coln's Secretary of War. New York, Knopf, 1962.
642 p. illus. 61—17829 E467.I.S8T45
Bibliographical footnotes.
A biography of the Ohio lawyer (1814—1869) who
moved into the Federal Government as Buchanan's
Attorney General in 1860 and served as Secretary of
War under Lincoln and Johnson from 1862 to 1868.
The authors devote most of their study to Stanton's
activities in the Lincoln and Johnson Cabinets. As
Civil War administrator of the Army, he was one of
the key figures in the reorganization of the Govern-
ment to meet the demands of military supply. As
a radical reconstructionist in the Johnson Cabinet,
he was one of the leaders of the movement to im-
peach the President.
1534. Wade, Richard C. Slavery in the cities; the
South, 1820-1860. New York, Oxford Uni-
versity Press, 1964. 340 p.
64—22366 £443 .W3
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
[2871-323).
The author traces the decline of the institution of
slavery from 1820 to 1860. On the basis of his ex-
amination of various aspects of urban slavery, Wade
concludes that it began to deteriorate in most South-
ern cities between 1835 and 1845. Although slavery
remained as viable economically as it had been be-
tween 1820 and 1840, when the slave population had
grown proportionately with the white population, it
became increasingly difficult to discipline slaves dur-
ing their off-work hours. As a result, cities began
to devise schemes for decreasing black populations
and for exercising rigid controls on Negroes who re-
mained in the city.
1535. Warren, Robert Penn. The legacy of the
Civil War; meditations on the centennial.
New York, Random House [1961] 109 p.
61—7261 £649^27
An impressionistic and discursive essay by the poet
and novelist. Warren identifies the Civil War as
the formative American experience. His essay,
which has both poetic and metaphysical overtones,
represents an excursion into the national psyche.
The legacy of the Civil War cannot be cost-account-
ed; there is no way of balancing the industrialization
of the North against the backwardness of the South.
The historical significance of the Civil War contin-
ues through the mid-2oth century because it serves
as the American restatement of the classic conflict
as yet unresolved, between will and inevitability, anc
because "we see how the individual men, despite
failings, blindness, and vice, may affirm for us the
possibility of the dignity of life."
1536. Welles, Gideon. Selected essays. Compiled
by Albert Mordell. New York, Twaync
Publishers [1959-60] 2 v. 60-11329 £458^4
CONTENTS. — [i] Civil War and Reconstruction
— [2] Lincoln's administration.
GENERAL HISTORY / 155
A collection of essays by the man who served as
Secretary of the Navy under Lincoln and Johnson.
Gideon Welles (1802-1878) came to the Cabinet
with a background in journalism and politics.
These essays, which originally appeared as articles
in the Galaxy and the Atlantic Monthly during
1870—78, were intended in part to correct contem-
porary misconceptions about Lincoln's administra-
tion and in part to vindicate the author's Cabinet
activities. They serve as a source of information on
the methods by which Lincoln arrived at some of
the crucial decisions of the Civil War.
I. Grant to McKinley (1869-1901)
1537. Diamond, Sigmund, ed. The Nation trans-
formed; the creation of an industrial society.
New York, G. Braziller, 1963. xiv, 528 p.
63-17876 HN57.D53
Bibliography: p. 524—528.
A selection of writings on the Gilded Age, stress-
ing its economic, social, and intellectual develop-
ments. The accelerated growth of industry altered
the existing environment and created numerous
problems in American society. At the turn of the
century, the American people realized that orga-
nized programs were needed to cope with the chang-
ing economy and the glaring inequalities that it had
produced. The Nationalizing of American Life,
iSjj—iqoo (New York, Free Press [1965] 338 p.
Sources in American history, 6), edited by Ray Ging-
er, is another series of excerpts pertaining to the
political, economic, social, and cultural problems of
the age. The Gilded Age, a Reappraisel ( [Syra-
cuse, N.Y.] Syracuse University Press, 1963. 286
p.), edited by Howard Wayne Morgan, consists of
essays by 10 historians on American life during this
period. John S. Blay's After the Civil War; a Pic-
torial Profile of America from 1865 to 7900 (New
York, Crowell [1960] 312 p.), reflects the trans-
formation of the United States during this 35-year
span.
1538. Faulkner, Harold U. Politics, reform, and
expansion, 1890—1900. New York, Harper
[1959] 312 p. illus. (The New American Nation
series) 56—6022 E66i.F3
Bibliography: p. 281—304.
A descriptive history, concentrating on the politi-
cal, economic, social, and expansionist activities of
the United States. Faulkner notes that the shift
from a predominantly rural and agricultural en-
vironment to an urban and industrial society caused
profound changes in the economic and social struc-
ture of the Nation. During this decade reform
movements were initiated to cope with the prob-
lems of a modern industrial state, and the country
moved from a position of relative isolation to one of
involvement in world politics. The victory over
Spain and the imperialism which resulted from it,
according to Faulkner, signaled the dawn of a new
age. The 1890'$ were a watershed separating "not
only two centuries but two eras in American
history."
1539. Glad, Paul W. McKinley, Bryan, and the
people. Philadelphia, Lippincott [1964]
222 p. (Critical periods of history)
64—11853 £710.655
"Bibliographical essay": p. 211—218.
During the campaign of 1896 both William Jen-
nings Bryan, the Democratic and Populist nominee,
and William McKinley, the Republican candidate,
emerged as spokesmen for a particular economic or-
der and the social values connected with it. Mc-
Kinley was a representative of business and industry
and subscribed to the concept of the "self-made
man." William Jennings Bryan represented an
agrarian ideal that stressed the role of the indepen-
dent yeoman farmer in the tradition of Jefferson.
The author considers that the election of 1896 sig-
nified the triumph of industrialism over agrarian-
ism. Henceforth farmers would no longer play
their previously powerful role in American politics.
1540. Hayes, Rutherford B., Pres. U.S. Hayes:
the diary of a President, 1875—1881, cover-
ing the disputed election, the end of Reconstruction,
and the beginning of civil service. Edited by T.
Harry Williams. New York, D. McKay Co. [1964]
329 p. 64-10784 E682.H48
The diary of Rutherford Birchard Hayes (1822—
1893) C(>vers his nomination for the Presidency, the
1876 campaign, the controversial election and its
outcome, and his record as Chief Executive. Not a
day-to-day journal, it is significant for Hayes' com-
ments on the end of Reconstruction, the Republican
Party, reform in the Gilded Age, the role of the
President, and his relations with Congress. There
is much detail on Hayes' views on the money and
currency question, civil service, and the struggle
156 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
with Congress over the rider bills. The diary also
depicts the social activities of President Hayes and
his wife. This edition, based on a typed copy of the
original manuscript, includes an introduction, a
chronology of Hayes' administration, and biograph-
ical notes on his contemporaries. In Hayes of the
Twenty-third; the Civil War Volunteer Officer
(New York, Knopf, 1965. 324 p.), T. Harry
Williams studies Hayes' four-year service in the
Twenty-third Ohio Volunteer Infantry.
1541. Hays, Samuel P. The response to indus-
trialism, 1885-1914. [Chicago] University
of Chicago Press [1957] 210 p. (The Chicago
history of American civilization)
57-6981 HCio5.H35
The period discussed in this work was marked by
vast changes in the American economic system.
Technological innovation and industrial expansion
greatly altered traditional functions of work and
employment. The author states that industrialism
provided for every American an opportunity to en-
joy a higher standard of living, but it also demanded
drastic changes in his life. "It forced upon every
one a new atmosphere, a new setting, to which he
had to adjust in his thought, play, worship, and
work." During these years new political parties,
such as the Populists, Progressives, and Socialists,
sought in their programs to reform a society increas-
ingly regimented and dehumanized by industrial-
ism. Ray Ginger's Age of Excess; the United States
From 1877 to igi4 (New York, Macmillan [1965]
386 p.) aims at synthesizing the economic, social,
cultural, and political issues of the Gilded Age.
1542. Merrill, Horace S. Bourbon leader: Grover
Cleveland and the Democratic Party. Edited
by Oscar Handlin. Boston, Little, Brown [1957]
224 p. (The Library of American biography)
57—12002 £697^4
"A Note on the sources": p. [209]— 210.
A critical biography reappraising Grover Cleve-
land (1837—1908). The first Democratic President
after the Civil War, Cleveland took office in 1885
but lost to Benjamin Harrison in 1888. He regained
the Presidency in the election of 1892. During his
early years in New York State politics, Cleveland
had acquired a reputation for efficiency and honesty
as an elected official. In 1884 he was the choice of
the Bourbon Democrats, the most influential men
in the party, to receive the presidential nomination.
The Bourbon Democrats, "the conservative spokes-
men of business," backed Cleveland during both of
his administrations. By following Bourbon strategy,
Cleveland ran two successful presidential campaigns
on the platform of ending corruption and waste in
governmental operations. The Cabinet Diary of
William L. Wilson, 1896-1897 (Chapel Hill, Uni-
versity of North Carolina Press [1957] 276 p.),
edited by Festus P. Summers, is a private account of
the last 14 months of Cleveland's second adminis-
tration from the viewpoint of his Postmaster Gen-
eral. In "I Am a Democrat"; the Political Career
of David Bennett Hill ([Syracuse, N.Y.] Syracuse
University Press, 1961. 315 p.), Herbert J. Bass
concentrates on Hill's career as Governor of New
York State, 1885—91, and his subsequent influence
in the Democratic Party as U.S. Senator, 1892—97.
1543. Morgan, Howard Wayne. William McKin-
ley and his America. [Syracuse, N.Y.]
Syracuse University Press, 1963. 595 p. illus.
63—19723 E7U.6.M7
Bibliographical references included in "Notes to
chapters."
This biography presents William McKinley
(1843—1901) as a transitional figure in the history
of the American Presidency. He had neither the
conservative views of Cleveland, his predecessor,
nor the modern ones of Theodore Roosevelt, who
followed him. The author places special emphasis
on McKinley's 3O-year career in national politics and
illustrates his role as an internationalist in the for-
mulation of American foreign policy. He also shows
that, contrary to current historical interpretations,
McKinley sympathized with labor and outlived his
rigid conservatism on the tariff question. The
25th President, Morgan maintains, was of much
stronger moral and political vision than is usually
recognized. McKinley Republicanism helped re-
store confidence and prosperity to a depression-
stricken generation. In the Days of McKinley
(New York, Harper [1959] 686 p.), by Margaret
Leech, is a detailed review of McKinley's first
administration.
1544. Nye, Russel B. Midwestern progressive
politics; a historical study of its origins and
development, 1870-1958. [East Lansing] Michi-
gan State University Press [1959] 398 p.
58-9111 F354.N8 1959
An updated edition of no. 3446 in the 1960 Guide.
In The Populist Response to Industrial America;
Midwestern Populist Thought (Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1962. 166 p.), Norman Pol-
lack considers Populism as "a progressive social
force" and the Populist Party as a group seeking to
alleviate the economic and social inequalities createc
by industrialism. Ignatius Donnelly; the Portrait
of a Politician ([Chicago] University of Chicago
GENERAL HISTORY / 157
Press [1962] 427 p.), by Martin Ridge, is a full-
length treatment of the Minnesota reformer and
Congressman.
1545. Sage, Leland L. William Boyd Allison; a
study in practical politics. Iowa City, State
Historical Society of Iowa, 1956. 401 p. illus.
56—63186 £664^4383
"Bibliography: manuscript collections": p. 333—
334. Bibliographical references included in "Foot-
notes" (p. 335-383)-
William Boyd Allison (1829—1908) represented
the State of Iowa in the U.S. Congress for 43 years.
His political career began in 1863 with his election
as a Republican to the House of Representatives,
where he served for eight years. He was elected
Senator in 1872 and continued in that office for six
terms. Allison maintained a high standing in the
Republican Party and was a serious contender for
the presidential nomination in 1888. He was of-
fered Cabinet positions during the administrations
of Garfield, Harrison, and McKinley but chose to
retain the chairmanship of the Appropriations Com-
mittee instead. The Iowa Senator is perhaps best
remembered for the bill bearing his name, the
Bland- Allison Act of 1878, which provided for the
coinage of silver dollars. Shelby M. Cullom, Prairie
State Republican (Urbana, University of Illinois
Press, 1962. 328 p. Illinois studies in the social
sciences, v. 51), by James W. Neilson, is a biography
of the U.S. Senator from Illinois who was instru-
mental in establishing the Interstate Commerce
Commission.
1546. Sievers, Harry J. Benjamin Harrison. In-
troduction by Hilton U. Brown. Chicago,
H. Regnery Co., 1952— [59] 2 v. illus.
67—27226 £702.854
Vol. 2 has imprint: New York, University Pub-
lishers.
Bibliography at end of each volume.
CONTENTS. — i. Hoosier warrior, 1833—1865. —
2. Hoosier statesman; from the Civil War to the
White House, 1865-1888.
The first two volumes of this projected three-
volume study of Benjamin Harrison (1833—1901)
chronicle his rise from local political leadership in
Indiana to his election as the 23d President in
1888. Volume i covers Harrison's early life
through his Civil War service as a Union officer.
After the war Harrison returned to his law prac-
tice in Indianapolis and reentered State politics. He
was defeated in the gubernatorial election of 1876
but was elected U.S. Senator five years later. Har-
rison was nominated as the Republican presidential
candidate in 1888 to run against Grover Cleveland.
Although Cleveland received a plurality of the
popular vote, Harrison was elected with a majority
of the electoral votes. A second edition, revised, of
the first volume of this biography, Hoosier Warrior;
Through the Civil War Years, 1833-1865 (New
York, University Publishers [Ci96o] 374 p.) con-
tains a new preface and an enlarged index.
J. Theodore Roosevelt to Wilson (1901-11)
1547. Barck, Oscar T., and Nelson M. Blake.
Since 1900; a history of the United States in
our times. 4th ed. New York, Macmillan [1965]
963 p. illus. 65—14074 £741.634 1965
An updated edition of no. 3452 in the 1960 Guide.
1548. Coletta, Paolo E. William Jennings Bryan,
v. i. Political evangelist, 1860—1908. Lin-
coln, University of Nebraska Press, 1964. 486 p.
64—11352 E664.B87C55
Bibliography: p. 446—477.
The first volume of this projected multivolume
biography deals with the political career of William
Jennings Bryan (1860—1925) and his effects on the
domestic and foreign policies of the Nation. Three
times defeated as the Democratic candidate for
President, Bryan exemplified agrarian America in
an era of rapid industrial growth. The author's
study of published and unpublished material pro-
vides new insights into Bryan's personality and
political style. Viewing political and economic
questions in moral terms, Bryan maintained a pro-
vincial outlook. He urged, however, that the Fed-
eral Government play a greater role in the solution
of national problems, particularly in matters of cur-
rency reform. In The Trumpet Soundeth; William
Jennings Bryan and His Democracy, 1896—1912
([Lincoln] University of Nebraska Press, 1960.
242 p.), Paul W. Glad studies Bryan during the
most important period of his leadership. Defender
of the Faith: William Jennings Bryan; the Last
Decade, 79/5—7925 (New York, Oxford University
Press, 1965. 386 p.), by Lawrence W. Levine, traces
Bryan's career after his resignation as Secretary of
State in 1915.
1549- Daniels, Josephus. The Cabinet diaries of
Josephus Daniels, 1913—1921. Edited by
E. David Cronon. Lincoln, University of Nebraska
Press [1963] 648 p. illus.
62-7874 £766.029 1963
Josephus Daniels (1862—1948), Secretary of the
Navy in both of President Wilson's administrations,
took office on March 5, 1913, and kept a diary for
the duration of his service. Diary entries for the
years 1914 and 1916, however, are missing. Daniels'
diaries record and comment upon Cabinet delibera-
tions, fellow Cabinet members, and other prominent
officials, including Franklin D. Roosevelt, his As-
sistant Secretary of the Navy. Notations are fullest
for Wilson's second administration, emphasizing
the debates on preparedness; wartime problems; and
postwar domestic and foreign issues.
1550. Grantham, Dewey W. Hoke Smith and the
politics of the New South. Baton Rouge,
Louisiana State University Press, 1958. 396 p.
illus. (Southern biography series)
58-9209 £748.866367
"Critical essay on authorities": p. 372—377. Bib-
liographical footnotes.
As lawyer, newspaper publisher, and politician,
Hoke Smith (1855—1931) served and represented
his adopted State of Georgia. Professional and fin-
ancial success as a damage-suit lawyer turned Smith
toward politics. The vigorous support of his news-
paper, The Atlanta Journal, for Grover Cleveland
brought Smith the Cabinet position of Secretary of
the Interior in 1893. His belief in sound money,
however, meant exile from the Democratic Party's
national leadership for the decade after 1896. Smith
was inaugurated Governor of Georgia in 1907; he
failed to win the nomination in 1908 but won again
in 1910. He resigned from the governorship in
November 1911 in order to take a seat in the U.S.
Senate, where he served until 1921. Grantham
concludes that, from the days of the Bourbon Demo-
crats through the Progressive Era, Hoke Smith's
career in Georgia and Washington politics was con-
structive but marked with "far greater promise than
fulfillment."
1551. Link, Arthur S. Wilson. Princeton, Prince-
ton University Press, 1947—65. 5 v. illus.
47-3554 £7671.65
Includes bibliographies.
CONTENTS. — [i] The road to the White House.
— [2] The new freedom. — [3] The struggle for
neutrality, 1914—1915. — [4] Confusions and crises,
1915—1916. — [5] Campaigns for progressivism
and peace, 1916—1917.
Volumes i and 2 of this multivolume biography
are no. 3472 in the 1960 Guide. Volumes 3—5 exam-
ine Wilson's transformation from a national leader
interested primarily in domestic reform to an inter-
national leader in a world on the brink of war. In
Woodrow Wilson and the Politics of Morality (Bos-
ton, Litde, Brown [1956] 215 p. The Library of
American biography), John M. Blum stresses the
role of Wilson's Calvinist principles in shaping his
views of domestic and international affairs. In An
Affair of Honor; Woodrow Wilson and the Occupa-
tion of Veracruz ( [Lexington] Published for the
Mississippi Valley Historical Association [by] Uni-
versity of Kentucky Press [1962] 184 p.), Robert
E. Quirk details Wilson's decision in 1914 to send
American troups to Veracruz and the consequences
of this aggressive act against Mexico.
..-.•
1552. Lorant, Stefan. The life and times of Theo-
dore Roosevelt. Garden City, N.Y., Double-
day [1959] 640 p. illus. 58-10732 £757^85
Bibliography: p. 635.
A pictorial history of Theodore Roosevelt (1858—
1919) and his era. Reproductions of photographs,
cartoons, letters, and diary entries, coupled with
textual information, depict Roosevelt in his youth,
his early political campaigns, his Presidency, and
his triumphs and defeats after 1909. This graphic
presentation shows the diversity of Roosevelt's in-
terests, re-creating his love for politics, world travel,
nature, and family.
1553. Maxwell, Robert S. La Follette and the rise
of the Progressives in Wisconsin. [Madi-
son] State Historical Society of Wisconsin [1956]
271 p. illus. 56—58533 E664-Li6M3
Bibliography: p. 245—255.
A concise history of "the development, the course,
and the results of the Progressive Movement in
Wisconsin during its initial phase, the years from
1900 to 1915." Robert M. La Follette (1855—1925),
first as Governor and then as U.S. Senator, domi-
nated Wisconsin progressivism and inauguratec
comprehensive political, economic, and social reform
measures. His political program, known as the
Wisconsin Idea, served as a model of enlightened
Midwestern progressivism. Hoyt L. Warner's Pro-
gressivism in Ohio, iSyj—iqij ([Columbus] Ohio
State University Press for the Ohio Historical Soci-
ety [1964] 556 p.) provides a specialized study o
the Progressive Movement in Ohio.
1554. Mowry, George E. The era of Theodore
Roosevelt, 1900—1912. New York, Harpei
[1958] 330 p. illus. (The New American Nation
series) 58-8835 £756^85
GENERAL HISTORY / 159
Bibliography: p. 297—316.
This survey includes an analysis of the origins and
nature of progressivism and a reevaluation of the
role of Theodore Roosevelt during this period. The
author describes the Progressive Movement as "a
compound of many curious elements" and Theo-
dore Roosevelt as its foremost national spokesman.
Roosevelt emerges as a constructive, capable Presi-
dent, responsive to the changes in the political, eco-
nomic, and social structure of the Nation. In
Governor Theodore Roosevelt; the Albany Appren-
ticeship, 7898-7900 (Cambridge, Harvard Univer-
sity Press. 1965. 335 p.), G. Wallace Chessman ap-
praises Roosevelt's governorship and the many
reforms he inaugurated in New York State.
1555. Peterson, Horace C., and Gilbert C. Fite.
Opponents of war, 1917—1918. Madison,
University of Wisconsin Press, 1957. xiii, 399 p.
illus. 57—5239 £780^4
Bibliography: p. 351—371.
This studv, completed by Fite after Peterson's
death, describes "what individuals or groups op-
posed the war, why they acted as they did, and what
happened to them." Antiwar sentiment bred by the
Socialists, the Industrial Workers of the World, con-
scientious objectors, pacifists, and religious groups
was met with repression and reprisals in the United
States. Minority groups and aliens as well as the
clergy, teachers, and the press were subject to vio-
lations of civil rights and intimidation. The intol-
erance directed against those who professed antiwar
beliefs demonstrates how fundamental liberties were
ignored during this time of crisis.
1556. Preston, William. Aliens and dissenters:
Federal suppression of radicals, 1903—1933.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1963. 352 p.
63-10873 £743.5^7
"Bibliographical note": p. [2791-286. Biblio-
graphical references included in "Notes": p.
[287]-345-
Since the late i9th century, according to Preston,
aliens and radicals living in the United States have
suffered violations of their personal and political
liberties. He notes that nativism, born of economic
depression, social conflict, and international uncer-
tainties, manifested itself in antidemocratic actions
by local and Federal authorities. The "red scare"
of 1919—20, culminating in the "Palmer raids" in
those years under the direction of Attorney General
A. Mitchell Palmer, was merely one episode in the
history of intolerance and retaliation against radi-
cals. Stanley Cohen's A. Mitchell Palmer: Politician
(New York, Columbia University Press, 1963. 351
p.) treats Palmer as a political opportunist who led
the Department of Justice to take repressive action
against radicals in the hope of winning the presi-
dential nomination of 1920.
1557. Wish, Harvey. Contemporary America, the
national scene since 1900. 3d ed. New
York, Harper [1961] 776 p. illus.
61-6391 £741^78 1961
Bibliography: p. 747—762.
An updated edition of no. 3474 in the 1960 Guide.
K. Since i
92.0
1558. Baruch, Bernard M. Baruch. New York,
Holt [1957—60] 2 v. illus.
'; 57—11982 E748.B32A3
Vol. 2 published by Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
CONTENTS. — [i] My own story. — [2] The
public years.
In these two volumes of autobiography, Bernard
Baruch (1870-1965) traces the course of his de-
velopment as a financier, philanthropist, and in-
fluential adviser to Presidents Wilson, Roosevelt, and
Truman. In the first volume he recounts his early
years in South Carolina, his college days in New
York, and his subsequent career as a Wall Street
financier. Volume 2 is devoted to his years in public
service, which began when he was asked by Presi-
dent Wilson to take charge of mobilizing America's
industrial resources during World War I. Also
included in this volume is an account of the author's
service on the United Nations Atomic Energy
Commission after World War II, in the course of
which he proposed a plan for the international con-
trol of atomic energy. A biography of Baruch based
on extensive research is Margaret L. Coit's Mr.
Baruch (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1957. 784 p.).
1559. Blum, John M. From the Morgenthau dia-
ries. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1959—65.
2v. illus. 59-8853 HJ257.B6
CONTENTS. — [i] Years of crisis, 1928—1938. —
[2] Years of urgency, 1938—1941.
The first two volumes of a three-volume biography
of Henry Morgenthau (1891—1967), who served as
l6o / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Franklin Roosevelt's Secretary of the Treasury from
1934 to 1945. Blum's biography is based primarily
on Morgenthau's diaries, which provide a detailed
account of his career. Volume i covers the period
during which Morgenthau worked in the New
York State government, headed the Farm Credit
Administration, and served as Secretary of the
Treasury. Volume 2 discusses Morgenthau's years
as Secretary of the Treasury. In Minister of Relief;
Harry Hopkins and the Depression ([Syracuse,
N.Y.] Syracuse University Press, 1963. 286 p.),
Searle F. Charles discusses Hopkins' administration
of three major Federal relief agencies during the
New Deal years. Rexford Tugwell and the New
Deal (New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers University
Press [1964] 535 p.), by Bernard Sternsher, con-
tains a general discussion of Tugwell's thought as
well as an account of his role during Roosevelt's
first administration.
1560. Eisenhower, Dwight D., Pres. U.S. The
White House years. Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1963—65. 2 v. illus.
63-18447 E835.E47
CONTENTS. — [i] Mandate for change, 1953—
1956.— [2] Waging peace, 1956-1961.
Dwight D. Eisenhower's personal memoirs of his
Presidency. Volume i, which includes an account
of the 1952 presidential campaign, covers the first
term, and volume 2, which begins with the 1956
campaign, covers the second. Written in an infor-
mal style, the memoirs provide insight into Eisen-
hower's responses to the many significant events
with which he was confronted as President. Among
these were the increase and decline of Senator Joseph
McCarthy's influence, the formation of the South-
east Asian Treaty Organization (SEATO), the
launching of Sputnik, and the sending of Federal
troops into Little Rock. The former President also
describes his personal life during these years.
1561. Hicks, John D. Republican ascendancy,
1921-1931. New York, Harper [1960]
318 p. illus. (The New American Nation series)
».,,. 60-7528 E784.H5
Bibliography: p. 281-301.
1562. Leuchtenburg, William E. The perils of
prosperity, 1914-32. [Chicago] University
of Chicago Press [1958] 313 p. (The Chicago
history of American civilization)
58-5680 HCio6.3.L3957
Bibliography: p. 277-297.
Hicks sees the years 1921-33 as an interlude char-
acterized by a lack of strong political leadership in
domestic and foreign affairs. A business mentality
dominated, and the United States experienced the
most severe economic crisis in its history. Emphasis
is placed on the economic and political history of
the period, but Hicks also gives due attention to
problems of foreign policy. In The Perils of Pros-
perity, 1914—32, Leuchtenburg describes the transi-
tion from Wilson's New Freedom to the policies of
the succeeding Republican years. He then shows
how various trends came to a head at the end of the
1920'$ and resulted in the stock market crash, which
"was taken as a judgement pronounced on the
whole era."
1563. Leuchtenburg, William E. Franklin D.
Roosevelt and the New Deal, 1932—1940.
New York, Harper & Row [1963] 393 p. illus.
(The New American Nation series)
63-12053 £806^475
Bibliography: p. 349—363.
The author provides an overview of the New
Deal years, beginning with Franklin Roosevelt's
campaign for the Presidency in 1932 and ending
with his reelection to a third term in 1940. He de-
votes considerable attention to the political and social
events of the period and offers insight into such
phenomena as party politics, social conditions, and
prominent personalities. Roosevelt's administrative
programs and his appointees such as Hopkins, Lili-
enthal, and Tugwell are also discussed. In addition
to the domestic scene, Leuchtenburg deals with
events abroad and shows how American foreign
policy developed during these years in response to
the threat of involvement in another world war.
1564. Lilienthal, David E. The journals of David
E. Lilienthal. Introduction by Henry Steele
Commager. New York, Harper & Row [1964]
2 v- ill"*. 64-18056 E748.L7A33
CONTENTS.— v. i. The TVA years, 1939-1945.
— v. 2. The atomic energy years, 1945-1950.
Among his various achievements, David Lilien-
thal (b. 1899) led in the development of the Ten-
nessee Valley Authority, became the first Chairman
of the Atomic Energy Commission, and, later, be-
gan to put the TVA idea to work in the develop-
ing regions of the world. Volume i of his Journals
contains an account of the early development of
TVA and includes selected journal entries from pre-
ceding years. Volume 2 deals primarily with Lilien-
thal's years as AEC chairman. In Men and Deci-
sions (Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1962. 468
p.), Lewis L. Strauss surveys his life in business and
public service, emphasizing his association with the
AEC and his tenure as Chairman during the Eisen-
hower administration.
GENERAL HISTORY / l6l
1565. Link, Arthur S. American epoch, a history
of the United States since the 1890*5. With
the collaboration of William B. Catton. 2d ed., rev.
and rewritten. New York, Knopf, 1963. xxiv, 917,
xiii p. illus. 63-12398 £741X55 1963
Bibliography: p. [885]— 917.
A revised and enlarged edition of no. 3489 in the
1960 Guide. The authors adopt a broad perspective
and include economics, politics, diplomatic relations,
and the arts. The entire text has been rewritten,
and new information and interpretations have been
incorporated. The Shaping of Twentieth-Century
America; Interpretive Articles (Boston, Little,
Brown [1965] 682 p.), edited by Richard M.
Abrams and Lawrence W. Levine, is a collection of
journal articles which deal with various aspects of
American history from the late i9th century to the
mid-i96o's. John Braeman, Robert H. Bremner,
and Everett Walters have edited Change and Con-
tinuity in Twentieth-Century America ( [Colum-
bus] Ohio State University Press [1965, Ci964]
287 p. Modern America, no. i), a selection of
scholarly essays related to the theme of tradition and
innovation. The Urban Nation, 7920—7960 (New
York, Hill & Wang [ 1965] 278 p. The Making of
America), by George E. Mowry, offers an introduc-
tion to the period between the wars, with emphasis
on the interrelation between urban development
and politics.
1566. Morison, Elting E. Turmoil and tradition;
a study of the life and times of Henry L.
Stimson. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1960. 686 p.
illus. 60-10132 E748.S883M6
Bibliography: p. 657—662.
As a lawyer and statesman, Henry L. Stimson
(1867—1950) was active in public life for more than
50 years. He served as Governor General of the
Philippines and in the Cabinets of three Presidents.
Under Hoover he was Secretary of State, and under
Taft and Franklin D. Roosevelt he was Secretary of
War. Stimson was President Roosevelt's chief ad-
viser on atomic energy policy during World War II
and later served President Truman in the same
capacity. Morison's detailed biography covers Stim-
son's entire life. Although the emphasis is on Stim-
son's career and the events in which he was involved,
the author also describes his family background and
school years.
1567. Schlesinger, Arthur M., Jr. The age of
Roosevelt. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1957—
60. 3 v. 56—10293 £806.834
Includes bibliographies.
CONTENTS.— [i] The crisis of the old order,
1919-1933.— 2. The coming of the New Deal.—
3. The politics of upheaval.
Volume i of this projected multivolume work is
no. 3500 in the 1960 Guide. In the second and
third volumes, Schlesinger concentrates on Roose-
velt's domestic policy during his first term. Volume
2 is devoted mainly to domestic events which oc-
curred during 1933 and 1934, although the narra-
tive is continued into the following years when
necessary. In volume 3, the author recounts the
Roosevelt administration's history through the 1936
election. Foreign policy during the first term will
be treated in a later volume. Thomas H. Greer's
What Roosevelt Thought; the Social and Political
Ideas of Franklin D. Roosevelt ([East Lansing]
Michigan State University Press, 1958. 244 p.) is
an examination of Roosevelt's views on a variety of
subjects, including human rights, the Constitution,
and the role of the President. In Roosevelt and
Howe (New York, Knopf, 1962. 479 p.), Alfred B.
Rollins tells the story of Roosevelt's relationship with
Louis Howe, his secretary and assistant for more
than 20 years.
1568. Sorensen, Theodore C. Kennedy. New
York, Harper & Row [1965] 783 p.
65—14660 £841.86
15683. Schlesinger, Arthur M., Jr. A thousand
days; John F. Kennedy in the White House.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1965. xiv, 1087 p.
65—20218 £841.83
As former Kennedy staff members, the authors
of these two books about President Kennedy (1917—
1963) were personally involved in many of the
events which they discuss. Both volumes are based
on a combination of firsthand knowledge and ex-
tensive research. Sorensen concentrates on Ken-
nedy's years in the White House, but also provides
ample coverage of the late President's Senate career
and the 1960 presidential campaign. His account
of the Kennedy Presidency is, in general, most vivid
when he deals with domestic affairs. In Schles-
inger's history of the Kennedy administration,
which deals in less detail with the events leading up
to Kennedy's election, the emphasis is on foreign
policy.
1569. U.S. President. Public papers of the Presi-
dents of the United States, containing the
public messages, speeches, and statements of the
President. [Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off.,
1958] -65. 20 v. 58-61050 J8o.A283
Published by the Office of the Federal Register of
the National Archives and Records Service.
A continuing series, based on White House re-
l62 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
leases and transcripts of news conferences. The
material ranges from informal statements to nation-
wide broadcasts. Official documents such as proc-
lamations and Executive orders are not included,
however, since they are published elsewhere. As of
1965, published volumes contained the papers of
Harry S. Truman, 1945—51 (7 v.); Dwight D.
Eisenhower, 1953-61 (8 v.); John F. Kennedy,
1961—63 (3 v.); and Lyndon B. Johnson, 1963—64
(2V.).
1570. Warren, Harris G. Herbert Hoover and
the great depression. New York, Oxford
University Press, 1959. 372 p.
59-5663 E8oi.W28
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(P- 305-352).
The author has attempted a balanced appraisal of
the Hoover Presidency and seeks to avoid the ex-
treme praise or deprecation which has dominated
much of the literature on Hoover's career. A politi-
cal and economic history of the Hoover administra-
tion, the book covers not only events in which
Hoover played a dominant role but also matters in
which his influence was minor. Warren concludes
that Hoover's conduct in public office, both as Secre-
tary of Commerce and as President of the United
States, indicates that he was "the greatest Republican
of his generation." Albert U. Romasco's The Pover-
ty of Abundance; Hoover, the Nation, the Depres-
sion (New York, Oxford University Press, 1965.
282 p.) also deals with the years of Hoover's Presi-
dency and emphasizes the ways in which the depres-
sion caused the Nation's leaders to change existing
institutions in order to solve the economic crisis.
IX
Diplomatic History and Foreign Relations
A. Diplomatic History
Ai. General Worlds
Aii. Period Studies
Aiii. Personal Records
Aiv. The British Empire
Av. Russia
Avi. Other European Nations
Avii. Latin America: General
Aviii. Latin America: Individual Nations
Aix. Asia, Africa, and the Middle East
Foreign Relations
Bi. Administration
Bii. Democratic Control
Biii. Policies
Biv. Economic Policy
B.
1571-1590
1591—1600
1601
1602—1607
1608
1609—1612
1613
1614—1617
1618-1628
1629—1636
1637—1641
1642—1645
1646—1647
THE DUAL title and organization of this chapter are consistent with the general approach
established for the 1960 Guide. The books classified as Diplomatic History (Section A)
are primarily but not exclusively retrospective and deal with political relations between the
United States and other nations from the beginning of the American Revolution to the
present. Publications on the growing American involvement in Africa and the Middle East
have been placed under Subsection Aix, the title for which has been changed from Asia to
Asia, Africa, and the Middle East. The entries in
Section B, Foreign Relations, deal almost entirely eign policy within the framework of the U.S. politi-
with the process of formulating and executing for- cal system.
A. Diplomatic History
Ai. GENERAL WORKS
1571. The American foreign policy library. Cam-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1947—64.
19 v.
A continuation of no. 3501 in the 1960 Guide.
Five of the original 15 volumes, no. 3502—3516 in
the 1960 Guide, have been revised, and four new
volumes have been added to the series. These nine
works are listed as no. 1572—1580 below.
1572. Brown, William Norman. The United
States and India and Pakistan. Rev. and
enl. ed. 1963. 444 p.
63-13807 08480.84.673 1963
Bibliography: p. [403]— 418.
163
164 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
A revised edition of no. 3503 in the 1960 Guide.
1573. Cline, Howard F. The United States and
Mexico. Rev. ed., enl. New York, Athen-
eum, 1963. 484 p. (Atheneum paperbacks, 40)
63-24587 Fi226.C6 1963
"Suggested reading": p. [444]~453- "A biblio"
graphical supplement, 1953-1962": p. [4541-4.71-
A revised edition of no. 3504 in the 1960 Guide.
1574. Fairbank, John King. The United States
and China. New ed., completely rev. and
enl. 1958. 365 p. 58-11552 DS735-F3 i958
"Suggested reading": p. [321] -344.
A revised edition of no. 3506 in the 1960 Guide.
1575. Gallagher, Charles F. The United States
and North Africa: Morocco, Algeria, and
Tunisia. 1963. 275 p. 63-20766 DTi94.Gi5
Bibliography: p. [2573-263.
1576. Grattan, Clinton Hardey. The United States
and the Southwest Pacific. 1961. 273 p.
61-5583 DU30.G7
1577. Hughes, Henry Stuart. The United States
and Italy. Rev. ed. 1965. 297 p.
65-13845 DG577.H8 1965
"Suggested reading": p. [276]— 286.
A revised editon of no. 3507 in the 1960 Guide.
1578. Polk, William R. The United States and
the Arab world. 1965. xiv, 320 p.
65-16688 DS63.2.U5P6
"Suggested reading": p. [297]— 311.
1579. Reischauer, Edwin O. The United States
and Japan. 3d ed. 1965. xxv, 396 p.
64-8057 Ei83.8.J3R4 1965
Bibliography: p. [382] -384.
A revised edition of no. 3510 in the 1960 Guide.
1580. Safran, Nadav. The United States and Is-
rael. 1963. 341 p. 63-17212 £183.8.1782
Bibliography: p. [3191-332.
1581. Bailey, Thomas A. A diplomatic history of
the American people. 7th ed. New York,
Appleton-Century-Crofts [1964] 973 p.
64-10909 £183.7.629 1964
Bibliography: p. 912-947.
A revised edition of no. 3517 in the 1960 Guide.
^582. Bartlett, Ruhl J., ed. The record of Amer-
ican diplomacy; documents and readings in
the history of American foreign relations. 4th ed.
enl. New York, Knopf, 1964. xxiv, 892, xxii p.
64-23887 £183.7.635 1964
Bibliography: p. 891-892.
A revised edition of no. 3518 in the 1960 Guide.
1583. Bemis, Samuel Flagg. American foreign
policy and the blessings of liberty, and other
essays. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1962.
423 p. 62-16561 £183.7.644
A selection of works written since 1918 by the
noted diplomatic historian. The tide essay poses the
question whether the diplomatic history of the
United States can "strengthen our judgment in
facing problems today which include nothing less
than the survival of our nation." This the author
answers in the affirmative. Today's problems, ac-
cording to Bemis, must be understood in the context
of their origin and development. Specifically,
Americans need to relate current policy to historical
tradition and to the fundamental human values of
"life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness." As
might be expected from the author of two such im-
portant studies as Jay's Treaty, 2d ed. (1962. 526
p.) and Pincfoey's Treaty, rev. ed. (1960. 372 p.),
both published in New Haven by the Yale Univer-
sity Press, most of the other essays relate to Amer-
ican diplomacy in the early days of the United States.
A chronologically arranged bibliography of Bemis'
writings from 1913 to 1962 is included (p. 417-
423)-
1584. Bemis, Samuel Flagg, ed. The American
Secretaries of State and their diplomacy, v.
11-14. Robert H. Ferrell, editor. New York,
Cooper Square Publishers, 1963—65. 4 v.
62-20139 £183.7.6462
Includes bibliographies.
For a description of the first 10 volumes, see no.
3519 in the 1960 Guide. Volumes 11—14 cover tbe
administrations of Frank B. Kellogg (1925—29),
Henry L. Stimson (1929—33), Cordell Hull (1933—
44), Edward R. Stettinius, Jr. (1944—45), and James
F.Byrnes (1945-47).
1585. 6emis, Samuel Flagg. A diplomatic history
of the United States. 5th ed. New York,
Holt, Rinehart & Winston [1965] 1062 p. ill us.
65-11841 £183.7.64682 1965
6ibliographical footnotes.
A revised edition of no. 3520 in the 1960 Guide.
1586. De Conde, Alexander. A history of Amer-
ican foreign policy. New York, Scribner
[1963] 914 p. 63-7615 £183.7.04
"Supplementary readings": p. 863—896.
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 165
A survey of American diplomatic history from
colonial times to the Kennedy administration, em-
phasizing the influence of political, social, and eco-
nomic developments on foreign policy. A third of
the book is devoted to the U.S. role in the cold war
and to contemporary American policy toward the
Far East, Latin America, the Middle East, Europe,
and Africa. Useful features of this book are its
extensive appendixes and a bibliography arranged
by chapter. A brief introduction to the whole scope
of American diplomatic history is Ruhl J. Bartlett's
concise and lucid Policy and Power (New York,
Hill & Wang [1963] 303 p.).
1587. Graebner, Norman A., ed. Ideas and dip-
lomacy; readings in the intellectual tradition
of American foreign policy. New York, Oxford
University Press, 1964. 892 p.
64—15011 £173.078
Bibliographical footnotes.
These documents on American diplomacy were
chosen for the importance of the concepts and ideas
they express rather than for their relevance to spe-
cific historical problems. Although the general stu-
dent may be unfamiliar with some of the readings,
as a group they serve to portray the intellectual con-
flict over diplomacy that has confronted the United
States since the i8th century. Graebner considers
that two functional concepts have determined the
American diplomatic response: the analytical ap-
proach to diplomacy, corresponding roughly to the
realism of the i8th- and 19th-century diplomatic
tradition, and the ideological approach, exemplified
in the idealism that has characterized the 2Oth cen-
tury. A short introduction precedes each of the 12
divisions of the book and indicates the major theme
of the readings.
1588. Leopold, Richard W. The growth of Amer-
ican foreign policy, a history. New York,
Knopf, 1962. xxii, 848, xxix p.
62—13894 £183.7X47
"Bibliographical essay": p. [819]— 848.
A survey designed for the general reader and col-
lege student. The principles and practices of the
first century of U.S. foreign policy are briefly de-
scribed. Detailed coverage begins with the inaugu-
ration of Benjamin Harrison in 1889, and the book
concludes with seven chapters on the diplomacy of
the Eisenhower administration. Featured through-
out are character portrayals of the Presidents, their
Secretaries of State, and congressional leaders in-
volved in the making of foreign policy.
1589. Perkins, Dexter. The American approach
to foreign policy. Rev. ed. Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1962. 247 p.
62-11400 Ei83.7.P46 1962
Bibliography: p. 233—237.
A revised edition of no. 3523 in the 1960 Guide.
1590. Smith, Daniel M., ed. Major problems in
American diplomatic history: documents
and readings. Boston, Heath [1964] 677 p. maps.
63-22521 £183.7.856
Includes bibliographies.
Smith divides the history of American foreign
policy into two successive phases: the country's ex-
pansion until 1889 and its subsequent emergence as
a great world power. The documents are organized
around 20 diplomatic problems, each of which is
discussed in an interpretive essay. Among the prob-
lems presented are those concerning the Jefferson-
Hamilton rivalry, the Monroe Doctrine, the Mexi-
can War, the rejection of the Versailles Treaty, and
the agreements reached at the Yalta Conference .
The final chapter considers "currents in American
foreign policy since 1952" and ends with selections
from President Kennedy's statements relating to the
confrontation with the Soviet Union over offensive
missiles in Cuba and his replies to De Gaulle's chal-
lenges to American leadership in Europe.
Aii. PERIOD STUDIES
1591. Davids, Jules. America and the world of
our time; United States diplomacy in the
twentieth century. New York, Random House
[1960] 597 p. 60-5563 £744.025
Bibliography: p. 563—599.
A general introduction that seeks to place 20th-
century American foreign policy in the context of
world affairs. Two main themes of the book are
the growth of American power and influence in the
world and the reluctant shift from isolationism to
internationalism. Emphasis is placed on "the cir-
cumstances which contributed to America's involve-
ment in power politics; the great changes that were
brought about by World War II; and the diplomatic
background of the Cold War." The neutrality leg-
islation of the 1930*5 — the zenith in American iso-
lationism in the 2Oth century — is examined by Rob-
ert A. Divine in The Illusion of Neutrality ( [Chi-
cago] University of Chicago Press [1962] 370 p.).
Two other general studies of American diplomacy
since World War I are Jean B. Duroselle's From
Wilson to Roosevelt (Cambridge, Harvard Univer-
sity Press, 1963. 499 p.), translated by Nancy L.
Roelker, and Dexter Perkins' Foreign Policy and the
American Spirit, Essays (Ithaca, N.Y., Cornell Uni-
versity Press [1957] 254 p.), edited by Glyndon
G. Van Deusen and Richard C. Wade.
l66 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1592. Feis, Herbert. Between war and peace; the
Potsdam Conference. Princeton, N.J.,
Princeton University Press, 1960. 367 p. maps.
60-12230 0734.64 i945ad
Bibliography: p. 355-357-
1593. Feis, Herbert. Churchill, Roosevelt, Stalin;
the war they waged and the peace they
sought. Princeton, N.J., Princeton University Press,
1957. 692 p. maps. 57-5470 0748^4
Bibliographical footnotes.
Two studies in sequence that examine the war-
time relations between Great Britain, the United
States, and the Soviet Union. Using a chronological
approach in the first volume, the author threads his
way through the complex diplomatic crises taking
place between 1940 and the German surrender in
May 1945. He presents a balanced and penetrating
account of such Allied wartime decisions as the
doctrine of unconditional surrender, the Normandy
invasion, and allowing Berlin to fall to the Russians.
The Yalta Agreement and the corrosion within the
coalition thereafter are analyzed carefully and dis-
passionately. The second volume begins by de-
scribing the events surrounding Germany's surren-
der to the Allies. Feis then traces the flow of dissen-
sion which subsequently exposed the long-developing
fractures within the alliance. With the groundwork
thus laid, the proceedings at Potsdam are reviewed,
as unfavorable circumstances pitted two relatively
inexperienced Western negotiators, Truman and
Attlee, against the shrewd and intransigent Stalin.
In an often arresting narrative, the author describes
the hammering out of the vital questions of Ger-
many's future, while the grand alliance collapsed
and the cold war began. Briefer and more concise
than Feis' studies are two volumes in the America
in Crisis series: The Reluctant Belligerent; American
Entry Into World War II (New York, Wiley [1965]
172 p.), by Robert A. Divine, and Gaddis Smith's
American Diplomacy During the Second World
War, 1941-1945 (New York, Wiley [1965] 194
p.). Important source materials for these works
were the proceedings compiled by the U.S. Depart-
ment of State: The Conferences at Malta and Yalta,
1945 (Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1955.
1032 p. Foreign relations of the United States: dip-
lomatic papers) and The Conference of Berlin; the
Potsdam Conference, 1945 (Washington, U.S. Govt.
Print. Off., 1960. 2 v. Foreign relations of the
United States: diplomatic papers), issued as De-
partment of State Publications 6199 and 7015,
respectively.
1594. Ferrell, Robert H. American diplomacy in
the great depression; Hoover-Stimson foreign
policy, 1929—1933. New Haven, Yale University
Press, 1957. 319 P- (Yale historical publications.
Studies, 17) 57-11913 E8oi.F4
"Bibliographical essays": p. 283-308.
The second volume of a projected three-volume
history of American diplomacy from 1927 to 1937.
The initial work, Peace in Their Time; the Origins
of the Kellogg-Briand Pact (New Haven, Yale Uni-
versity Press, 1952. 293 p. Yale historical publi-
cations. Miscellany, 55), is a study of the period
1927—29 and the efforts to establish a basis for last-
ing peace through treaty pledges. In this middle
volume, U.S. foreign policy under President Hoover
and Henry L. Stimson, his Secretary of State, is
examined. Drawing much of his material from the
diaries of William Castle, the Under Secretary of
State, Ferrell depicts the effect of the great depres-
sion on the maintenance of world order as cata-
strophic and declares that never was an economic
disaster so evident in the shaping of American dip-
lomacy. Although the crisis explains much of the
country's policy, the author finds American diplo-
matic principles of the 1920'$, based on isolationism
and "moral" leadership, inadequate to meet the in-
creasingly intricate international problems confront-
ing the Hoover-Stimson administration. Lewis
Ethan Ellis notes similar inadequacies in the period
preceding the Hoover Presidency in his book Fran^
B. Kellogg and American Foreign Relations, 1925—
1929 (New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers University
Press [1961] 303 p.). Robert H. Ferrell's Amer-
ican Diplomacy, a History (New York, Norton
[1959] 576 p.) is a general introduction to these
and other periods of U.S. foreign policy.
1595. LaFeber, Walter. The new empire; an in-
terpretation of American expansion, 1860—
1898. Ithaca, N.Y., Published for the American
Historical Association [by] Cornell University Press
[1963] 444 p. 63-20868 E66i.7.L2
Bibliography: p. 418—426.
This study of the major period of U.S. overseas
expansion emphasizes the economic forces motivat-
ing commercial and territorial aggrandizement. Al-
though many accounts interpret American expan-
sionist activity as accidental and spur-of-the-moment,
LaFeber views it as a natural culmination within a
maturing nation of the impetus created by the in-
dustrial revolution. Characterizing Secretary of
State Seward as one of the great statesmen of the
era, the author also emphasizes the impact of the
ideas of such men as Frederick Jackson Turner and
Alfred Thayer Mahan on the attitudes of the time.
Foster Rhea Dulles has written a general study of
the period: Prelude to World Power; American Dip-
lomatic History, 1860-1900 (New York, Macmillan
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 167
[1965] 238 p. History of American foreign policy
series). A concise account of the Spanish- American
War period is Howard Wayne Morgan's American
Road to Empire (New York, Wiley [1965] 124 p.
America in crisis), which, in support of LaFeber, in-
terprets the expansionism of 1898 as the culmination
of a generation's tendencies in world affairs.
1596. Link, Arthur S. Wilson the diplomatist; a
look at his major foreign policies. Baltimore,
Johns Hopkins Press, 1957. 165 p. (The Albert
Shaw lectures on diplomatic history, 1956)
57—12120 £767X66
The author, a noted Wilson scholar, attempts to
answer major questions concerning the President's
diplomatic role in World War I. Link states that
until 1917 Wilson was better able to accept the
Allied maritime blockade than German submarine
warfare because the former threatened American
neutrality less than the latter. The Peace Confer-
ence is seen as a clear clash of Wilsonian idealism
and Allied ambitions, and the author absolves Wil-
son of blame for those aspects of the Versailles
Treaty that failed to fulfill his idealistic aspirations.
The book concludes with a discussion of the "Great
Debate" over the acceptance of the League of Na-
tions by the American people and the Senate. Be-
cause of his intransigence over compromise on the
Covenant, Wilson is seen as a "prophet" rather than
a statesman. The Inquiry; American Preparations
for Peace, 79/7— 79/9 (New Haven, Yale University
Press, 1963. 387 p.), by Lawrence E. Gelfand, re-
ceives its title from the name of a little-known Gov-
ernment agency, created by the President in 1917 to
plan and gather information for the forthcoming
peace.
1597. May, Ernest R. Imperial democracy; the
emergence of America as a great power.
New York, Harcourt, Brace & World [1961] 318
p. 61—13354 E66i.M34
Bibliography: p. 273—299.
Until the late i88o's, according to the author, the
United States was dealt with as a second-rate power,
but by the early 20th century Europe was beginning
to look upon American strength with increased
respect and concern. Although concentrating pri-
marily on the events of the Spanish-American War,
the author amply illustrates a wide range of causes
contributing to the emergence of the United States
as a great power. Showing the American people
themselves as a driving force in this development,
the book becomes a social and economic history as
well as one of foreign relations. Of considerable
interest are the varying views of European govern-
ments and statesmen toward American imperialism
and growth during the period. Equally interesting
is America's ambivalence, which is demonstrated
during this time of intense nationalism by the coun-
try's desire to find ways for bringing about peace-
ful settlement of international conflicts. America's
efforts to maintain world peace are examined by
Calvin D. Davis in The United States and the
First Hague Peace Conference (Ithaca, N.Y., Pub-
lished for the American Historical Association [by]
Cornell University Press [1962] 236 p.). In The
Awkward Years; American Foreign Relations Un-
der Garfield and Arthur (Columbia, University of
Missouri Press [ci962J 381 p.), David M. Fletcher
shows that the foreign policies of the i88o's, al-
though inadequately shaped, "foreshadowed atti-
tudes and expedients of later imperialist years."
1598. May, Ernest R. The World War and Amer-
ican isolation, 1914—1917. Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1959. 482 p. (Harvard his-
torical studies, v. 71) 58—12971 0619^383
"Bibliographical essay": p. [439]— 466.
Dealing with the familiar story of President Wil-
son's dilemma as he reluctantly committed his Na-
tion to war, this book emphasizes both the domestic
politics of the United States and the diplomacy of
the Allies and the Central Powers. Primary in the
discussion are submarine warfare, the blockading of
sea transport, and the interaction of Britain's policies
toward her French and Russian allies with her pol-
icies toward the United States. Crucial in the
making of America's decision to join the Allies was
the triumph in Germany of the proponents of un-
limited submarine warfare while British leaders
maintained restraint in executing maritime policies
that adversely affected the United States.
1599. Morris, Richard B. The peacemakers; the
great powers and American independence.
New York, Harper & Row [1965] xviii, 572 p.
illus. 65-20435 E249.M68
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 467-552).
An extensive account of the complicated diplom-
acy surrounding negotiations for the Treaty of Paris
which resolved the American Revolutionary War.
With scholarly care and precision, Morris traces the
intricate steps by which the American peace com-
missioners attacked their central problem, that of
cutting the bonds of the French alliance in order to
arrive at a settlement with Great Britain. By the
terms of the peace, the author contends, the United
States emerged as an undisputed sovereign nation,
accomplishing possibly "the greatest victory in the
annals of American diplomacy." In describing the
l68 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
endeavor, he explores the motivations and objectives
of the major European powers, as well as their ma-
neuvers and intrigues. A major part of the story is
revealed through portraits of the principal diplo-
matic personalities: American commissioners John
fay, John Adams, Henry Laurens, and Benjamin
Franklin; England's Richard Oswald and the Earl
of Shelburne; the French Foreign Minister, the
Comte de Vergennes; and Spain's Ambassador to
France, the Conde de Aranda. Short sketches of
innumerable opposition leaders, spies, intriguers,
and self-appointed advisers complete the gallery.
Further insight and flavor are added to the account
by occasional glimpses into the "backstairs diplom-
acy" which characterized relations among European
nations in this period.
1600. Varg, Paul A. Foreign policies of the found-
ing fathers. [East Lansing] Michigan State
University Press, 1963 [i.e. 1964, Ci963] 316 p.
63—19117 £310.7. ¥3
In a topical narrative tracing the development of
American foreign policy from 1773 to 1812, the
author attempts to demonstrate the close relationship
between domestic and foreign issues in the conduct
of the Nation's diplomacy. Varg considers that
foreign affairs played a major role in undermining
the Government under the Articles of Confedera-
tion and later, under the Constitution, became a
focal point of debate that resulted in the rise of
political parties. During the Jefferson administra-
tion, the viewpoint on relations abroad shifted, the
author maintains, from the preeminence of Hamil-
tonian realism toward an increasing idealism. In
his book To the Farewell Address (Princeton, N.J.,
Princeton University Press, 1961. 173 p.), Felix
Gilbert approaches the early development of Amer-
ican foreign policy from the vantage point of intel-
lectual history, focusing on the interrelationship be-
tween the European heritage of the Enlightenment
and the American colonial experience.
Aiii. PERSONAL RECORDS
1 60 1. Murphy, Robert D. Diplomat among war-
riors. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1964.
47J p. 64-11305 E744.M87
in this nrsthand account the author reviews some
of the most important historical events of the 2oth
century. A diplomat in the Department of State
for more than 40 years, Murphy went in 1921 to
Munich, where he met Hitler and other members of
the Nazi leadership and observed their early careers.
Serving in Paris during the period 1930-40, he
witnessed ^the fall of France and was then assigned
as Charge d'Affaires to the Vichy Government.
President Roosevelt made Murphy his personal rep-
resentative in Africa, where he conducted exploratory
missions and made preparations for the entry of
French West Africa into the war. The author was
present during the important Casablanca Confer-
ence in 1942, helped negotiate the Italian surrender
in 1943, and served as political adviser to the Su-
preme Headquarters of the Allied Expeditionary
Force in Europe (SHAEF) in planning and carry-
ing out the occupation of Germany. During the
Eisenhower administration, this experienced diplo-
mat, serving as Deputy Under Secretary and then
Under Secretary of State for Political Affairs, took
part in policy decisions relating to events such as
the Korean armistice, the Suez crisis, and the U-2
incident. Because of his role as a participant,
Murphy is able to present many facts never before
publicly revealed.
Aiv. THE BRITISH EMPIRE
1602. Allen, Harry C. Conflict and concord; the
Anglo-American relationship since 1783.
New York, St. Martins Press [1960, Ci959] 247 p.
illus. 59~155^5 Ei 83.8.67 A47 1960
A revised and enlarged edition of part i of Great
Britain and the United States; a History of Anglo-
American Relations, 1783— 1952, no. 3551 in the
1960 Guide.
1603. Campbell, Charles S. Anglo-American un-
derstanding, 1898-1903. Baltimore, Johns
Hopkins Press [1957] 385 p.
57-9518 £183.8.67028
"Bibliographical note": p. 369-374. Bibliograph-
ical footnotes.
Great Britain and the United States, realizing that
a comprehensive understanding was in the interest
of both, resolved a striking number of outstanding
differences during the relatively brief period encom-
passed by this study. Under the leadership of Secre-
tary of State John Hay and British Ambassador
Pauncefote, settlement was reached on the boundary
dispute in southeastern Alaska and on hunting
rights in the Bering Sea, and the basis was laid for
a final agreement on fishing rights off Newfound-
land's outer banks. In addition, the two nations
mutually consented in 1899 to partition Samoa, and
in 1901 Britain signed the Hay-Pauncefote Treaty
renouncing all joint rights with the United States to
an Isthmian Canal. Although disagreements were
to arise later, Campbell notes that the Anglo-Amer-
ican understanding achieved in this period created
a firm and enduring basis for the relations of the
two nations in the 2oth century.
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 169
1604. Gelber, Lionel M. America in Britain's
place; the leadership of the West and Anglo-
American unity. New York, Praeger [1961] 356
p. (Books that matter) 61—11059 £744.645
A Canadian's analysis of Anglo-American unity,
written in the light of the shift in Western leader-
ship from Britain to the United States since World
War II. Constructively critical toward both coun-
tries, this work attempts to set American policies in
contemporary perspective. The author notes the
deep-rooted capacity of the two countries for work-
ing together and sees in their unity the basic element
in the Western alliance. While allowing for diver-
gence in attitudes and interpretation between Lon-
don and Washington, Gelber demonstrates, through
his discussion of the Hungarian and Suez crises in
1956, the dangers inherent in any wide misunder-
standing. Another book dealing with much the
same theme is Herbert G. Nicholas' Britain and the
U.S.A. (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1963. 191
p. The Albert Shaw lectures on diplomatic history,
1961). In The Debatable Alliance (London, New
York, Oxford University Press, 1964. 130 p. Chat-
ham House essays, 3), Coral Bell, an Australian,
considers the Anglo-American relationship as an
element in the central international balance of
power.
1605. Perkins, Bradford. Prologue to war; Eng-
land and the United States, 1805-1812.
Berkeley, University of California Press, 1961. 457
P- 61-14018 E357.P66
"Notes on the sources": p. 439—446. Bibliograph-
ical footnotes.
1606. Perkins, Bradford. Castlereagh and Adams;
England and the United States, 1812-1823.
Berkeley, University of California Press, 1964. 364
P- 64-19696 £358^4
Includes bibliographical references.
Two of three volumes that the author has de-
voted to the study of Anglo-American relations in
the critical 30 years after 1795. The initial volume,
The First Rapprochement (Philadelphia, University
of Pennsylvania Press, 1955. 257 p.), dealt with the
lo-year period of generally happy relations between
the two countries following ratification of Jay's
Treaty. The second and third volumes are orga-
nized around the central theme of America's search
for "national respectability and true independence
from Europe." Although accepting the common
interpretation that the War of 1812 finally erupted
after repeated British violations of American sover-
eignty on the high seas, Perkins contends that too
little attention has been given to the influences of
national pride, sensitivity, and frustration. His
argument is bolstered by evidence from many here-
tofore unexploited British sources, especially news-
papers. As America groped for identity after the
end of the war, England demonstrated an increasing
willingness to accept the former colony as a truly
independent and sovereign nation. Perkins main-
tains that both countries, wary of ambitious, auto-
cratic Europe, recognized the mutual benefits to be
gained from reconciliation. Through the capable
and bold diplomacy of Castlereagh and Adams, a
new relationship of cooperation was built.
1607. Winks, Robin W. Canada and the United
States: the Civil War years. Baltimore,
Johns Hopkins Press [1960] xviii, 430 p.
60—14699 £469^5
"A note on sources": p. 382—397. Bibliographical
footnotes.
Writing on a virtually ignored aspect of Civil
War diplomacy, the author intersperses scenes of
Confederate intriguers sipping mint juleps in Mon-
treal with general analyses of Canadian and Amer-
ican attitudes and their effects on the delicate prob-
lems of Anglo-American relations. Of special
impact was a southern guerrilla raid on St. Albans,
Maine, launched from across the Canadian border.
The book also deals with various aspects of British
colonial administration and with the consolidation
of Canada as a nation. John S. Dickey has edited
for the American Assembly a concise background
study on historical and contemporary American-
Canadian relations, The United States and Canada
(Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall [1964] 184
p. A Spectrum book, S— A A— 12). A narrower pe-
riod is investigated by Robert C. Brown in Canada's
National Policy, 1883-1900 (Princeton, N.J., Prince-
ton University Press, 1964. 436 p.), which places
heavy emphasis on Canadian domestic politics but
treats diplomacy as well.
Av. RUSSIA
1608. Kennan, George F. Soviet- American rela-
tions, 1917—1920. Princeton, N.J., Princeton
University Press, 1956—58. 2 v. illus.
56-8382 Ei83.8.R9K4
Includes bibliographies.
CONTENTS. — v. i. Russia leaves the war. — v. 2.
The decision to intervene.
An intricate appraisal of Soviet-American diplo-
matic relations in a critical period. The initial vol-
ume deals with events between the November
Revolution of 1917 and Russia's final departure
from the war in March 1918, following the Brest-
Litovsk peace agreement with Germany. Kennan
iyO / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
states that, failing to understand the true motiva-
tions, needs, and intent of the Bolsheviks, the United
States and the Western Allies maneuvered to keep
the Russians in the war as the Russians in turn
sought an expedient peace which would permit
them to consolidate their position within. Volume
2 deals with the first consolidation of the Commu-
nist forces, British intervention, Japanese activities
in Siberia, the saga of the Czech Legion, and finally
the decision of the United States to send troops into
Russia. This decision, asserts Kennan, was made
principally in deference to the pressures of the West-
ern Allies against the better judgment of President
Wilson. Although ostensibly directed against pos-
sible German encroachment, the intervention as-
sumed an anti-Bolshevik character and laid the
foundations of relations between the West and Rus-
sia for the next 25 years and beyond. Kennan's
Russia and the West Under Lenin and Stalin (Bos-
ton, Little, Brown [1961] 411 p.) is a compre-
hensive history of these relations. In The Ignorant
Armies (New York, Harper [1960] 232 p.), Ern-
est M. Halliday describes the experience of U.S.
troops in Russia during 1918 and argues that the
commitment was both unwitting and unfortunate,
since Allied intent to intervene in Russian internal
affairs must have been evident to Wilson, if not to
other American leaders.
Avi. OTHER EUROPEAN NATIONS
1609. Beloff, Max. The United States and the
unity of Europe. Washington, Brookings
Institution [1963] 124 p.
63—15630 01065^564
Includes bibliography.
In this concise study the author describes the main
currents of U.S. official policy and public opinion
concerning the movement toward an integrated
European community since World War II. The
central force of this concerted effort on the part of
France, Germany, Italy, and the Benelux nations
was derived from three initial arrangements: the
European Coal and Steel Community, the European
Economic Community, and the European Atomic
Energy Community. According to Beloff, Ameri-
can opinion toward European union moved through
fluctuating phases until 1962, when a position of
clear commitment to continental integration was
assumed.
1610. Blumenthal, Henry. A reappraisal of
Franco-American relations, 1830—1871.
Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press
[1959] xiv, 255 p. 59-65128 Ei83.8.F8B55
Bibliography: p. [212]— 242.
"The myth of the uninterrupted historic friend-
ship between France and the United States has been
perpetuated in spite of the overwhelming evidence
against it." Using this idea as his main theme, the
author explores the diplomatic history of Franco-
American relations from the July Revolution in
France through the American Civil War and the
Maximilian affair, ending with the neutral stance
of the United States during the Franco-Prussian
War. A growing rivalry, chiefly commercial in
nature but heightened by secondary ideological and
religious suspicions, impelled the two countries to
the brink of war on several occasions. Influential in
this increasingly negative relationship was the com-
petitiveness of the other European powers: Britain,
Russia, and the emerging German nation.
1611. De Conde, Alexander. Entangling alliance;
politics & diplomacy under George Wash-
ington. Durham, N.C., Duke University Press,
1958. xiv, 536 p. 58-8500 £311.04
Bibliographical footnotes.
An extensive monograph centering on the Amer-
ican alliance with France during President Wash-
ington's administration. Through a synthesis of
the themes of foreign policy and domestic politics,
the author shows how the early bonds of friendship
between the two countries were weakened and de-
stroyed, bringing the nations close to war. At the
same time, this heavily documented study details
the partisan response of French supporters in Amer-
ica to the Hamilton-inspired, British-oriented policy,
a conflict which helped to lay the foundations for
the formation of political parties. The roles of Jef-
ferson, Madison, and Monroe are analyzed with
particular care.
1612. Kertesz, Stephen D., ed. The fate of East
Central Europe: hopes and failures of Amer-
ican foreign policy. Notre Dame, Ind., University
of Notre Dame Press, 1956. 436 p. (International
studies of the Committee on International Relations,
University of Notre Dame)
56-9731 D376.U6K4
Bibliographical footnotes.
Although Americans have long maintained a sym-
pathetic concern for the fate of Central Europe,
this region has been historically regarded as remote
from the national interest. As a result, Kertesz
maintains, "the United States has seldom had a
comprehensive foreign policy for East Central Eu-
rope." The authors whose works are included in
this volume examine the breadth and scope of
American policy in the area through the years, the
post- 1 945 political history of the individual coun-
tries, the economic problems between the Soviet and
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS /
non-Soviet worlds, and economic trends in the "cap-
tive countries." Attention is also given to earlier
postwar relations between the Soviet bloc and non-
Soviet areas. Contemporary U.S. efforts in the re-
gion are examined by John C. Campbell in Amer-
ican Policy Toward Communist Eastern Europe:
The Choices Ahead (Minneapolis, University of
Minnesota Press [1965] 136 p.). In the 19.63-64
Elihu Root lectures, On Dealing With the Commu-
nist World (New York, Published for the Council
on Foreign Relations by Harper & Row [1964] 57
p.), George F. Kennan discusses pertinent considera-
tions of an American-Soviet coexistence policy in
central Europe.
Avii. LATIN AMERICA: GENERAL
1613. Munro. Dana G. Intervention and dollar
diplomacy in the Caribbean, 1900—1921.
Princeton, N.J., Princeton University Press, 1964.
553 p. 63-18647 Fi4i8.M92
Bibliographical footnotes.
"The problems that confronted the United States
in the Caribbean in the first two decades were much
like the problems that confront us there today."
Within the framework of the disorder and economic
backwardness which existed in these unstable Latin
nations, the author traces the evolution of the United
States intervention policy in the early 20th century.
Maintaining that the motivations were more politi-
cal than economic, he examines pertinent aspects of
the Roosevelt Corollary: the military occupation of
Nicaragua, Haiti, and the Dominican Republic;
Wilson's doctrine of nonrecognition of revolutionary
governments; and the use of dollar persuasion.
Access to Department of State records and Presi-
dential papers of the time greatly facilitated this
study of the effects of U.S. policy on diplomatic re-
lations in the Western Hemisphere.
Aviii. LATIN AMERICA: INDIVIDUAL
1614. Carey, James C. Peru and the United States,
1900—1962. [Notre Dame, Ind.] University
of Notre Dame Press, 1964. 243 p. (International
studies of the Committee on International Relations,
University of Notre Dame)
64-23666
Includes bibliographical references.
Relations with Peru are examined as representing
a middle ground in the development of U.S. policy
toward Latin American countries. Rather than of-
fering a recital of treaty negotiations, the author
reviews the history of both public and private activ-
ities, between which, he notes, there has been no dis-
tinct line. According to Carey, the incidents during
Vice President Richard M. Nixon's 1958 visit to
Peru, at which time he was subjected to demonstra-
tions of hostility against the United States, repre-
sented a turning point in the course of relations be-
tween the two countries. The Peruvian unrest, in
Carey's view, was generated by the longstanding
need for internal reform and by heavy U.S. invest-
ment control in the economy. It is noted that, a
year before the Nixon visit, the newspaper El Mundo
called upon the U.S. Government to talk less lyri-
cally and act more forcefully with respect to an eco-
nomic program to help eliminate misery in Peru so
that the chances of communist growth would be
lessened.
1615. Clendenen, Clarence C. The United States
and Pancho Villa; a study in unconventional
diplomacy. Ithaca, N.Y., Published for the Amer-
ican Historical Association [by] Cornell University
Press [1961] 352 p. illus.
61—18097 Fi234-C64 1961
Bibliography: p. 323—339.
Choosing not to emphasize the more colorful and
romantic aspects of Villa's life, the author regards
the Mexican revolutionary leader as one whose ac-
tivities and policies affected events far beyond the
borders of his own country. The Mexican revolu-
tion and its leaders are treated primarily for their
impact on the formulation and conduct of U.S.
external policy. The elements of President Wilson's
policy of "watchful waiting" toward Mexico, coin-
ciding with his efforts to keep the United States
neutral during the early years of World War I, are
traced in the tangled and uncertain diplomatic rela-
tions south of the border. From contemporary in-
terviews, news correspondents, and diplomatic and
consular archives, the author has drawn the ma-
terials which he uses to examine the sources of
Villa's influence and to interpret the motives and
designs behind his varied relationships with U.S. en-
voys. The American response to such issues as
expropriation, intervention, and recognition is placed
within the context of the larger Wilsonian foreign
policy. The author strongly suggests — while ad-
mitting that the evidence is circumstantial — that
because of the disturbed relations between the United
States and Mexico, Germany was in some measure
encouraged to embark upon its policy of unrestricted
submarine warfare.
1616. Peterson, Harold F. Argentina and the
United States, 1810-1960. [Albany] State
University of New York; [University Publishers,
New York, sole distributors] 1964. xxii, 627 p.
illus. 62-21414
Bibliography: p. 553—582.
172 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
According to the author, the dominant character-
istic of a century and a half of relationships between
Argentina and the United States has been more
often rivalry and estrangement than friendship and
cooperation. He describes the development of these
discordant relations in detail, stressing conflicts over
economic competition, the infiltration of ideological
totalitarianism into Argentina, and the recent fail-
ure of American diplomacy to construct a system of
inter-American solidarity.
1617. Pike, Fredrick B. Chile and the United
States, 1880-1962; the emergence of Chile's
social crisis and the challenge to United States di-
plomacy. [Notre Dame, Ind.] University of Notre
Dame Press, 1963. 466 p. (International studies
of the Committee on International Relations, Uni-
versity of Notre Dame) 63-9097 Ei83.8.C4P5
Bibliographical footnotes.
Citing Chile as unique in Latin America for its
history of political stability, this interpretive account
begins at 1880 because, according to the author,
diplomatic relations between Chile and the United
States were relatively unimportant before that date.
Through 1933, the discussion is devoted to confer-
ences, minor incidents, and treaty exchanges. From
1933 to the 1960*5, the study of Chilean internal de-
velopment is emphasized, and great importance is
attributed to the role of Chilean social ferment as an
influence on relations with the United States.
Aix. ASIA, AFRICA, AND THE
MIDDLE EAST
1618. American Assembly. The United States
and Africa. Edited by Walter Goldschmidt.
Rev. ed. New York, Praeger [1963] xvi, 298 p.
illus. 63-20154 DT38.A65 1963
Originally prepared as background reading for
participants in the American Assembly, 1958.
Problems of the new African nations and U.S.
policy toward them are discussed in this collection
of essays. Noting the great diversity among the
peoples and states of Africa and the pressures work-
ing upon them, the authors stress that a uniform
policy toward the continent as a whole would be an
unrealistic approach. An appendix provides a sum-
mary of operations of U.S. Government agencies,
including the Department of State, the Agency for
International Development, the U.S. Information
Agency, and the Peace Corps, in Africa. The prob-
lems and U.S. alternatives in southern Africa are
examined by Waldemar A. Nielsen in African Bat-
tleline (New York, Published for the Council on
Foreign Relations by Harper & Row [1965] 155 p.
Policy book series of the Council on Foreign
Relations).
1619. Darling, Frank C. Thailand and the United
States. Washington, Public Affairs Press
[1965] 243 p. 65-16717 Ei83.8.T4D3
Bibliography: p. 229-239.
An assessment of the influence of American for-
eign policy on the evolution of Thailand's political
system since 1945. The author discusses the history
of 20th-century constitutional government in the
Southeast Asian nation, with emphasis on the strug-
gle between civilian liberalism and military rule.
Darling considers that U.S. policies have often had
the effect of weakening civilian governments but
concludes that much has been done to enhance Thai-
land's national security. The administration of for-
eign aid and the role of the Southeast Asia Treaty
Organization (SEATO) are outlined and suggestions
for future U.S. policies are offered.
1620. DeNovo, John A. American interests and
policies in the Middle East, 1 900-1 939. Min-
neapolis, University of Minnesota Press [1963]
447 p. maps. 63-21129 0863.2.^04
Bibliography: p. 397—410.
1621. Campbell, John C. Defense of the Middle
East; problems of American policy. Rev.
[i.e. 2d] ed. New York, Published for the Council
on Foreign Relations by Harper, 1960. 400 p.
illus. 60-9110 DS63.2.U5D3 1960
The Middle East was not an area of primary
diplomatic involvement for the United States until
the end of World War II. DeNovo contends, how-
ever, that important cultural and economic ties de-
veloped over four decades before the war and so
conditioned the American approach as to compli-
cate adjustments to a more serious commitment in
the region after 1945. While the area was domi-
nated by Ottoman rulers and by the European power
struggle, official American activities were restricted
to fostering and protecting the cultural and com-
mercial interests of her citizens. After a brief ven-
ture into Middle Eastern politics following World
War I, the United States acknowledged the area to
be a British sphere of influence. A major exception
was the strong American support given to an "open
door" principle on oil exploitation. Campbell dis-
cusses U.S. diplomacy in the area since the end of
World War II. With British and French power
dramatically reduced, the United States assumed a
larger role in time to encounter the emotions of ris-
ing nationalism and Arab hostility engendered by
the Palestine issue. Campbell asserts that, as a newly
emerging diplomatic leader in the Middle East, the
United States fumbled for a policy which would
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 173
help maintain Western presence in this unstable
area. He seeks a basis for successful American ini-
tiative, exploring questions of military policy, eco-
nomic assistance, and conflict with the Soviet Union.
The United States and the Middle East (Englewood
Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall [1964] 182 p. A Spec-
trum book), an American Assembly publication
prepared under the editorial supervision of Georgi-
ana G. Stevens, is of value for general background.
1622. Dulles, Foster Rhea. Yankees and samurai;
America's role in the emergence of modern
Japan: 1791-1900. New York, Harper & Row
[1965] 275 p. illus. 65-20427 £183.8.13084
"Bibliographical notes": p. 255—268.
The year 1791 marked the first recorded contact
between "the Red Hairs from a Land called Amer-
ica" and feudal Japan. It was not until 1853, how-
ever, that Commodore Matthew Perry anchored in
Yedo (Tokyo) Bay and successfully opened the
door to commercial and political intercourse between
the two countries. The author relies on personal
diaries and accounts of seamen, visitors, and diplo-
mats, as well as official records and logs of the per-
iod, to relate the unusual and highly significant
courtship that ultimately "helped shape the entire
course of subsequent Far Eastern history." Empha-
sis is placed on cultural contact, and care is taken to
separate legend from fact. A general history which
brings the subject up to the time of the U.S. occupa-
tion following World War II is William L. Neu-
mann's America Encounters Japan; From Perry to
Mac Arthur (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1963.
353 p. The Goucher College series).
1623. Evans, Laurence. United States policy and
the partition of Turkey, 1914—1924. Balti-
more, Johns Hopkins Press [1965] 437 p. (Johns
Hopkins University. Studies in historical and po-
litical science, ser. 82, no. 2)
65-11660 Ei83.8.T8E9
Bibliography: p. 418—420.
Based on extensive investigation of official docu-
ments, memoirs, and personal papers of partici-
pants, this study is presented from the viewpoint of
the President and the Secretary of State as the pri-
mary formulators of foreign policy. Evans traces
the development of the U.S. position on the Middle
East from complete noninvolvement during World
War I to intense concern during the Peace Con-
ference and back to noninvolvement following the
Senate's rejection of the Versailles Treaty. He
discusses in detail the relationships of the United
States with the main protagonists: the major powers
of Europe, the Turks, and the Arabs. President
Wilson had a deep concern for the mandate solu-
tion in the Middle East and, according to Evans,
performed exceptionally well on the matter at Paris.
Nevertheless, the ultimate settlement was the prod-
uct of European rather than Middle Eastern political
factors. After 1920, the U.S. Department of State's
interest was directed more toward an "open door"
for commercial exploitation and the protection of
rights for American citizens than toward the wel-
fare of the former Turkish possessions.
1624. Fifield, Russell H. Southeast Asia in United
States policy. New York, Published for the
Council on Foreign Relations by Praeger [1963]
488 p. 63-20144 08518.8^48
"Bibliographical note": p. 441—472.
In this study of American policy in Southeast
Asia since World War II, Fifield argues that the
immediate problem is to mobilize effective oppo-
sition to the indirect aggression being waged against
the nations there. At the same time, Communist
China must be convinced that it cannot accomplish
its major objective of ultimate supremacy in this
area through the threat or use of force. Much of
the book covers the background of a wide range of
issues influencing U.S. policy, such as problems of
economic growth and political stability in South-
east Asia, as well as the role of the Southeast Asia
Treaty Organization (SEATO). Of particular note
is the discussion projecting the future influence that
Indian and Japanese political and economic growth
might exert in counteracting aggression in the area.
The role of the Soviet Union and Communist China
in this region is summarized by Oliver Edmund
Clubb in The United States and the Sino-Soviet
Bloc in Southeast Asia (Washington, Brookings
Institution f^^2] 173 p.), where numerous alter-
native U.S. policies are suggested and briefly ap-
praised. A detailed study of the policies of the
Southeast Asian countries may be found in Russell
H. Fifield's The Diplomacy o/ Southeast Asia:
1945-10,58 (New York, Harper [1958] 584 p.).
1625. Rappaport, Armin. Henry L. Stimson and
Japan, 1931—33. Chicago, University of
Chicago Press [1963] 238 p.
63-18847 Ei83.8.J3R3
"A note on the sources": p. 233—234. Biblio-
graphical footnotes.
1626. Borg, Dorothy. The United States and the
Far Eastern crisis of 1933—1938; from the
Manchurian incident through the initial stage of the
undeclared Sino-Japanese war. Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1964. 674 p. (Harvard
East Asian series, 14)
64-13421 08784.665 1964
Bibliography: p. [547]— 561.
174 / A GUIDE T0 ™E UNITED STATES
In summarizing a significant episode in the diplo-
matic origins of World War II, Rappaport at-
tempts to explain why the United States and Great
Britain did nothing to stop Japan in Manchuria be-
tween 1931 and 1933. He views the U.S. doctrine
of nonrecognition as essentially "the pistol which,
unhappily, was not loaded," concluding that the
fault lay not with Stimson but with public opinion
both in America and abroad. Neither here nor in
Europe were people willing to become responsibly
involved in the affairs of the Far East. Dorothy
Borg examines the crucial years of American-
Japanese relations between 1933 and 1938. Rejecting
the frequently expressed allegation that Roosevelt's
intransigence was a major cause of the break-
down of peaceful relations, she underscores the
President's tendency to look for a means of reaching
an understanding with Japan. At the same time,
she demonstrates Roosevelt's clear concern over the
threat of Japanese imperialism to international order
and reveals his tendency toward the creation of a
stiffer policy, which became increasingly manifest
after the outbreak of the Sino- Japanese War in 1937.
1627. Taylor, George E. The Philippines and the
United States: problems of partnership.
New York, Published for the Council on Foreign
Relations by Praeger [1964] 325 p.
64-12080 DS672.8.T3 1964
Bibliographical footnotes.
A history of U.S. relations with the Philippines as
a U.S. colony and as an independent nation. Al-
though several aspects of the experiment with colo-
nialism were commendable, Taylor asserts that the
American Government made no serious or effective
effort to build a sound economic base for political
democracy in the islands during its half century of
rule. Thus, until Communist aggressions and con-
quests in Asia altered the American outlook and
approach, the colonial policy was generally unsatis-
factory and contributed to the serious economic and
political crises which followed achievement of Phil-
ippine independence in 1946. The search for Phil-
ippine national identity, with its concomitant ten-
sions between newly introduced democratic political
institutions and traditional value systems, is viewed
as the single most important problem affecting the
two countries.
1628. Tsou, Tang. America's failure in China,
1941—50. [Chicago] University of Chicago
Press [1963] 614 p. 63-13072 DS777-53.T866
According to the author, an unwillingness to use
military power and an adherence to idealistic objec-
tives formed the basis of U.S. policy in China. In
turn, this dual policy was responsible for the mis-
judgments and faulty assumptions regarding the
Nationalist Government, the Soviet Union, and the
Chinese Communists and denied to America any
chance for lasting success in China. The author
was born and raised in China and received his
Ph.D. degree in political science from the University
of Chicago, where he later taught. The conception
that American interests in China were not worth a
war on the mainland, Tsou believes, had its roots
in the tradition of the "open door." He emphasizes
policy decisions which put limited military objec-
tives above broad political goals, names Chiang as
the single person most responsible for those deci-
sions, and traces America's failures at each major
stage. In an effort to promote a general under-
standing of contemporary problems and policies in
the area, the American Assembly has issued The
United States and the Far East, 2d ed. (Englewood
Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall [1962] 188 p. A Spec-
trum book, S— A A— 6), edited by Willard L. Thorp.
B. Foreign Relations
Bi. ADMINISTRATION
1629. Dulles, Allen Welsh. The craft of intelli-
gence. New York, Harper & Row [1963]
277 p. illus. 63-16507 UB270.D8
Bibliography: p. 265—267.
The author, a former director of the Central In-
telligence Agency, traces the evolution of intelli-
gence work from the Israelites in Canaan to the
present. After justifying the creation and continu-
ing work of the CIA, Dulles describes the collection
of information, counterintelligence methods, and
administrative aspects. He also draws a composite
picture of the American agent and devotes a chapter
to defectors, whom he prefers to call volunteers, and
the information they provide. Reflecting the Amer-
ican concern over communism, Dulles discusses the
Soviet espionage network, the intelligence services
of the European satellites and Red China, the utili-
zation of intelligence by policymakers in the Depart-
ments of State and Defense, and the role of intelli-
gence in the cold war era. By explaining the place
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 175
of the CIA in the Government hierarchy and the
controls and limitations on its activities, he attempts
to refute charges that our intelligence system can
become a threat to our freedoms.
1630. Dyer, Murray. The weapon on the wall;
rethinking psychological warfare. Balti-
more, Johns Hopkins Press [ 1959] 269 p.
59-14234 E744.D93
The author outlines the role and nature of psy-
chological warfare, now used by many nations as a
major instrument of foreign policy, and discusses
its major premises and operating principles. The
American people, he believes, have a distorted con-
ception of this type of propaganda and thus are
reluctant to accept it as an appropriate instrument
of foreign relations. Striving to create a realistic
perspective, Dyer traces the origins of psychological
warfare, the difficulties presented by its use, and
the requirements for developing it as an effective
and responsible weapon. In Strategic Psychological
Operations and American Foreign Policy ( [Chica-
go] University of Chicago Press [1960] 243 p.),
a study illustrated with case histories, Robert T.
Holt and Robert W. Van de Velde also express the
opinion that Americans have never fully under-
stood the nature of psychological warfare.
1631. Graebner, Norman A., ed. An uncertain
tradition; American Secretaries of State in
the twentieth century. New York, McGraw-Hill,
1961. 341 p. (McGraw-Hill series in American
history) 61-8654 E744-G7
Bibliography: p. 309—327.
A symposium of essays on the careers of 14 Sec-
retaries of State, from John Hay to John Foster
Dulles. The first essay, "The Year of Transition,"
sets the tone for the collection, depicting 1898 as a
crucial turning point. In that year, the United
States shifted from a relatively unblurred diplomatic
tradition of 19th-century realism to a less easily char-
acterized viewpoint. The new attitude was shaped
on the one hand by the complexities of world poli-
tics and on the other by the American sense of moral
obligation for the whole world. The essays vary
according to the importance of each Secretary and
the length of his term in office. Among the Secre-
taries included, in addition to Hay and Dulles, are
Elihu Root, Robert Lansing, George Marshall, and
Dean Acheson. A bibliographical note for each
man is appended. A brief historical introduction to
the office of Secretary of State is Alexander De
Conde's The American Secretary of State: An Inter-
pretation (New York, Praeger [1962] 182 p.
Books that matter).
1632. Ilchman, Warren F. Professional diplo-
macy in the United States, 1779-1939; a study
in administrative history. [Chicago] University of
Chicago Press [1961] 254 p.
61-11991 JXi705.l4
"Bibliographical essays": p. 244-248. Biblio-
graphical footnotes.
Part of a larger study by Ilchman on the growth
of professional U.S. diplomacy, this volume traces
the evolution of a career service for conducting
foreign affairs. The diplomatic service is shown to
have been characterized until the i88o's by the re-
fusal of the Government either to consider overseas
missions as permanent or to regard the members of
a mission as part of a career diplomatic corps. As
early as the i86o's, however, the demands of Civil
War diplomacy and the later campaign for admin-
istrative reform in government caused a noticeable
change. Ultimately, the emergence of the United
States as a world power at the turn of the i9th
century stimulated a professionalization of the serv-
ice, which largely culminated in reorganization
under the Rogers Act in 1924. Since then, democ-
ratization and specialization have been the char-
acteristic trends. The contemporary organization
and functions of the Department of State are exam-
ined by Robert E. Elder in The Policy Machine
( [Syracuse, N.Y.] Syracuse University Press, 1960.
238 p.).
1633. Ransom, Harry H. Central intelligence and
national security. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1958. xiv, 287 p.
58-12972 JK468.I6R3
Bibliography: p. 233—256.
Noting that "one simply can not apply to this
subject the usual rigorous standards of data gather-
ing and documentation," Ransom seeks to clarify
the essential nature of a widely misunderstood field.
In so doing, he describes the growth and function of
intelligence as an aspect of U.S. national policy and
investigates the complex organizational structure,
which, in addition to the Central Intelligence
Agency, includes a separate intelligence branch for
each of the armed services and the Department of
State and requires shared responsibilities with the
National Security Agency, the Federal Bureau of
Investigation, and the Atomic Energy Commis-
sion. Besides the problems of coordination that in-
variably arise, the author analyzes the delicate ques-
tion of surveillance by Congress. Paul W. Black-
stock concentrates on the theory and practice of
covert political operations abroad in The Strategy of
Subversion (Chicago, Quadrangle Books, 1964.
35i P.)-
176 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1634. Scott, Andrew M., and Raymond H. Daw-
son, eds. Readings in the making of Ameri-
can foreign policy. New York, Macmillan [1965]
551 p. 65-13587 £183.7.839
Includes bibliographical references.
This volume brings together analytic essays on
the formulation and execution of American foreign
policy. The authors — some represented by other
entries in this chapter— examine the problems of
public opinion, pressure groups, and consensus
within our system. The role of Congress is
treated, as are the organization, functions, and re-
sponsibilities within the executive branch. The im-
pact of military, intellectual, scientific, and research
communities on policy is also investigated.
1635. Thompson, Kenneth W. American diplo-
macy and emergent patterns. [New York]
New York University Press, 1962. 273 p. (James
Stokes lectureship on politics, New York Univer-
sity, Stokes Foundation)
62-14654 1X1705/1*47
Includes bibliography.
Maintaining that the patterns of American di-
plomacy are not fixed but evolving, Thompson at-
tempts to determine what part of the Nation's past
experience is relevant to the present. Topics dis-
cussed include the philosophy of diplomacy and
politics, American professionalism, the flexible role
of the Executive as outlined by the Constitution,
and the evolution of diplomatic practice throughout
the Nation's history. The last chapter is devoted to
diplomacy in a changing world.
1636. Warren, Sidney. The President as world
leader. Philadelphia, Lippincott [1964]
480 p. 64—22183 E744/W295
Bibliographical references included in "Chapter
notes" (p. 439—457). Bibliography: p. 458—470.
The expansion of Presidential powers over the
years has resulted primarily "from the impact of
the great Presidents who gave the office new dimen-
sions, invigorated it and provided a legacy that even
weaker men could not dissipate." In the 2Oth
century the expansion has occurred notably in the
conduct of foreign affairs, according to the author.
Beginning with the administration of Theodore
Roosevelt, Warren examines the effect each Presi-
dent has had on this aspect of Executive power,
particularly through his responses to specific inter-
national emergencies. He points out that, in the
current era of almost perpetual crisis, a distinction
can no longer be made between a wartime and a
peacetime head of state.
Bii. DEMOCRATIC CONTROL
1637. Carroll, Holbert N. The House of Repre-
sentatives and foreign affairs. Pittsburgh,
University of Pittsburgh [ 1958] 365 p.
58-10705
Bibliography: p. 35r-357-
The Constitution assigns to the House of Repre-
sentatives a much smaller role in foreign relations
than is granted to the Senate. The author main-
tains, however, that the House, beginning in World
War II, has assumed increased responsibilities.
Much of this new power, he points out, has evolved
out of the monetary needs created by complex inter-
national policies requiring legislative action. The
purpose of this book is to analyze the nature of this
expanding role and its influence on the formula-
tion of U.S. foreign policy. A short history of the
House precedes a thorough discussion of the or-
ganization and operation of its internal power struc-
ture. Particular importance is attached to the
relationship between the Appropriations and the
Foreign Affairs Committees. Two short chapters
are devoted to the external relations of the House
of Representatives with the Senate and the President.
1638. Cohen, Bernard C. The press and foreign
policy. Princeton, N.J., Princeton Univer-
sity Press, 1963. 288 p. 63-12668 PN4745.C6
Bibliographical footnotes.
A systematic investigation of foreign affairs re-
porting in Washington, D.C., based on extensive
interviews with reporters and foreign policy officials.
The author emphasizes a basic conflict between the
two groups. On the one hand, policymakers stress
the need to conduct delicate negotiations in private;
on the other, the press maintains the right of the
people to be informed of the decisions being con-
sidered before they become irrevocable. The result-
ing climate of suspicion gives rise to reporting
which is "spasmodic, piecemeal, impressionistic,
and oversimplified, sometimes inaccurate and gar-
bled." Although limited in scope, the book is a
pioneer study in an increasingly important field.
1639. Crabb, Cecil V. Bipartisan foreign policy:
myth or reality? Evanston, 111., Row, Peter-
son [1957] 279 P- 57~TI349 E744.C8
Bibliography: p. 264—270.
An examination of the intricate role played by
party politics in the formulation of American foreign
policy. Although agreeing that important programs
would have failed at the outset without bipartisan
support, the author contends that the advantages of
such an approach may at times be outweighed by
more serious disadvantages. Using case studies of
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 177
major postwar programs developed on a bipartisan
basis, Crabb discusses difficulties which are some-
times created by conducting foreign affairs in this
manner. In Senatorial Politics & Foreign Policy
( [Lexington] University of Kentucky Press [Ci962]
214 p.), Malcolm E. Jewell seeks to illustrate the
transformation that can occur in the voting records
of both parties when the representative majority
shifts from one party to the other.
1640. Robinson, James A. Congress and foreign
policy-making; a study in legislative influ-
ence and initiative. Homewood, 111., Dorsey Press,
1962. 262 p. (The Dorsey series in political
science) 62—11289 JKio8i.R6
Bibliography: p. 235—253.
The author states that at present the influence of
Congress upon foreign policy is "primarily (and in-
creasingly) one of legitimating and amending poli-
cies initiated by the executive." To a significant
degree, according to Robinson, this situation is
attributable to "the changing character of the infor-
mation or intelligence needs in modern policy-
making." This trend, he maintains, is not inevitable
or irreversible, and as one means of offsetting it
he suggests a more centralized leadership in the
House and Senate. Reviewing congressional in-
volvement in major foreign policy decisions since
the 1930*5, he discusses the concept and use of con-
gressional influence, legislative-executive liaison on
foreign policy, and the communications network
between Congress and the Department of State.
1641. Thomson, Charles A., and Walter H. C.
Laves. Cultural relations and U.S. foreign
policy. Bloomington, Indiana University Press
[1963] 227 p. 63-7167 £744.5/15 1963
Bibliographical footnotes.
Evolving largely from an initial effort in 1938 to
counteract Nazi-Fascist penetration in Latin Amer-
ica, cultural exchange is a rapidly growing facet of
U.S. foreign relations. This book examines both the
evolution of the Government's programs and the
role that cultural activities play in American diplo-
macy. The authors discuss the often heated de-
bates surrounding the programs, which by their
nature tend to generate apprehensions and misun-
derstandings. The final chapter suggests guidelines
to increase future effectiveness. Philip H. Coombs
briefly surveys the same subject in The Fourth
Dimension of Foreign Policy; Educational and Cul-
tural Affairs (New York, Published for the Council
on Foreign Relations by Harper & Row [1964]
158 p. Policy books).
Biii. POLICIES
1642. Bloomfield, Lincoln P. The United Nations
and U.S. foreign policy; a new look at the
national interest. Boston, Little, Brown [1960]
276 p. 60-15453 1X1977.2^5662
A study initiated for the purpose of reevaluating
the United Nations from the standpoint of U.S.
national interests. Among these interests are the
broad categories of political and military security,
stability and welfare, and world order. The author
finds that there are important political advantages
to be gained by supporting programs of the world
organization which are consistent with overall
American policies. The national interest is also
central to the theme of Richard N. Gardner's In
Pursuit of World Order; U.S. Foreign Policy and
International Organization (New York, Praeger
[1964] 263 p.). Gardner sees in the United Na-
tions a unique opportunity for debate, negotiation,
and action. In United Nations and U.S. Foreign
Economic Policy (Homewood, 111., R. D. Irwin,
1962. 235 p. Irwin series in economics), Benjamin
H. Higgins discusses multilateral versus bilateral
economic aid for underdeveloped countries and
urges the channeling of more American aid through
the agencies of the United Nations.
1643. Kissinger, Henry A. Nuclear weapons and
foreign policy. New York, Published for
the Council on Foreign Relations by Harper, 1957.
455 p. illus. 57—7801 UA23.K.49
"Mastery of the challenges of the nuclear age will
depend on our ability to combine physical and
psychological factors, to develop weapon systems
which do not paralyze our will, and to devise
strategies which permit us to shift the risks of
counteraction to the other side." The author con-
tends that, with the nature of warfare vastly changed
by the technology of nuclear weapons, the basic
challenge to the United States is to formulate a
sound strategic doctrine. Topics discussed include
the dilemma of American security, all-out war and
limited war, the contemporary challenge to diplo-
macy, the obsolescence of some traditional military
concepts, the complexities of disarmament and in-
ternational inspection, and Sino-Soviet strategic
thought.
1644. Osgood, Robert E. NATO, the entangling
alliance. [Chicago] University of Chicago
Press [1962] 416 p. 62-8348 UA646.3.O8
Bibliographical footnotes.
A history of the North Atlantic Treaty Organiza-
tion from its inception in 1949, this study examines
one phase of contemporary U.S. foreign policy as
178 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
transformed by the changing conditions of the
postwar era. Osgood notes that new political, eco-
nomic, and military developments have either invali-
dated or introduced complexities into the original
assumptions upon which the NATO alliance was
built. Among these changes are the economic re-
surgence of Europe, the active reassertion of sep-
arate European purposes, and the growth of Soviet
power. With these in mind, the author attempts to
define the role of military power in a nuclear age
and to assess the alliance within the overall political
and military purposes of the West. Recognizing
the continued need for allied cooperation, Osgood
asks for an enlarged contribution from Europe on
behalf of its own defense. A study which presents
both American and European views on the major
issues confronting the Adantic community is NATO
in Quest of Cohesion (New York, Published for the
Hoover Institution on War, Revolution, and Peace
by Praeger [1965] 476 p. Hoover Institution pub-
lications), edited by Karl H. Cerny and Henry W.
Briefs. The problems surrounding effective uses
of military power in the nuclear age are examined
by Osgood in Limited War; the Challenge to Ameri-
can Strategy ([Chicago] University of Chicago
Press [1957] 315 p.).
1645. Spanier, John W. American foreign policy
since World War II. Rev. ed. New York,
Praeger [ 1962] 275 p.
62—13739 £744.88 1962
Bibliography: p. 259—267.
This critical analysis of U.S. policy in the cold
war is based on the thesis that an intense distaste
for power politics has hindered an adequate response
by American policymakers to the ideological, social,
and strategic challenges of our age. According to
the author, this underlying national belief that
power is an immoral, antidemocratic instrument has
produced an inadequate answer to the Soviet threat
of expansionism. Supporting this thesis, Spanier
examines decisions and actions relevant to such
policy issues as the Truman Doctrine, the North
Adantic Treaty Organization, the Korean War, the
Middle East, Cuba, and Berlin. As a solution, the
author advocates a foreign policy which recognizes
the mutual relationship between power and diplo-
macy and a new attempt to understand the social
changes underlying the "revolution of rising expec-
tations" throughout the developing areas. In a col-
lection of essays entitled The Impasse of American
Foreign Policy ([Chicago] University of Chicago
Press [1962] 312 p.), the second volume of Politics
in the Twentieth Century, Hans J. Morgenthau
criticizes U.S. policy for remaining static since the
Korean War and failing to meet the new circum-
stances of the Soviet challenges in various areas of
the world. In The United States in the World
Arena (New York, Harper [1960] 568 p. Mas-
sachusetts Institute of Technology. Center for
International Studies. American project series)
Walt W. Rostow seeks to evaluate the manner in
which the Nation's overall evolution has affected its
military and foreign policy performance over the
last 25 years.
Biv. ECONOMIC POLICY
1646. Feis, Herbert. Foreign aid and foreign pol-
icy. New York, St. Martin's Press [1964]
246 p. 64-18364 HC6o.F35
Bibliographical footnotes.
The author discusses the need for comprehensive
planning in American foreign-aid programs, empha-
sizing the fact that achievement of economic growth
in the developing areas requires fundamental social
changes as well as capital investment. Feis provides
a general review of the evolution of foreign aid and
notes a growing affiliation between U.S. aid and
diplomacy, showing the complexities involved in
pursuing political aims while maintaining feasible
and balanced economic programs. In The New
Statecraft; Foreign Aid in American Foreign Policy
([Chicago] University of Chicago Press [1960]
246 p.), George Liska counsels the use of foreign aid
in such a way that optimum control will rest with
the aid-giving country. Edward S. Mason, in For-
eign Aid and Foreign Policy (New York, Published
for the Council on Foreign Relations by Harper &
Row [1964] 118 p. The Elihu Root lectures,
1962-63), outlines basic aid principles and gives a
concise description and interpretation of the Alli-
ance for Progress program in action.
1647. Ranis, Gustav, ed. The United States and
the developing economies. New York, Nor-
ton [1964] xx, 174 p. (Problems of the modern
economy) 63-21712 HC6o.R2
Bibliography: p. 173—174.
A series of essays which investigate the rationale,
significance, and effectiveness of foreign-aid pro-
grams. Following a general descriptive introduc-
tion, "The Poor Nations," by Barbara Ward, the
book is divided into three major parts: "The De-
veloping Economies: A New Commitment," "Aid
Instruments and Allocation Criteria," and "The
Economics of Foreign Assistance." In addition to
the contributions of such authorities as Milton Fried-
man, Robert Asher, and Thomas Schelling, a selec-
tion is included from the 1963 Clay Committee
Report examining American assistance programs
In Witness for AID (Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 179
1964. 273 p.), Frank M. Coffin, former Deputy purpose of foreign aid in U.S. policy and stresses
Administrator of the Agency for International De- the vital need for a working consensus to back the
velopment, notes the continuing confusion over the program.
X
Military History and the Armed Forces
A. General Worths
B. The Army
C. The Navy
D. The Air Force
E. Wars of the United States
Ei. The Revolution
Eii. 1798-1848
Eiii. The Civil War
Eiv. The Spanish-American War
Ev. World War 1
Evi. World War II
Evii. The Korean War
1648—1654
1655-1659
1660-1665
1666—1667
1668-1671
1672—1673
1674—1684
1685
1686-1688
1689—1694
1695—1697
BOTH the quality and variety of the books chosen for this chapter reflect the growing interest
in military affairs evident since the end of World War II. From university study centers,
the historical units of the armed services, and the commercial presses, come books which
define and clarify the American military establishment: what it has been, what it is, and
what it may become.
Of the three gaps in the literature that were noted in the 1960 Guide, two remain
unfilled in spite of the current upsurge in scholar-
is now Section E, Wars of the United States, a new
subdivision covers the Korean war. Because of a
dearth of appropriate material in the period covered
by this Supplement, no subsection is devoted to the
ship. There is still no adequate general history of
the Army or comprehensive operational history of
World War I. But the military history of the
Revolutionary War, comparatively neglected before,
has recently begun to receive attention.
The arrangement of the sections follows the order
of the 1960 Guide, with two exceptions: a section
on the Air Force (D) has been added; and in what
Vietnam conflict. As in the 1960 Guide, this chap-
ter includes more works on the Civil War than on
any other, indicating the continuing fascination with
this era in the Nation's history.
A. General Works
1648. Hammond, Paul Y. Organizing for de-
defense; the American military establishment
in the twentieth century. Princeton, N.J., Prince-
ton University Press, 1961. 403 p.
61-7398
Bibliographical footnotes.
180
This study of defense administration relates the
organization and functioning of the armed services
departments to their public and political environ-
ment. Major emphasis is placed on the roles of
Congress and the President in influencing the struc-
ture of military administration. The author covers
MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES / l8l
organizational changes and developments from
about 1900 to 1960. Particular attention is devoted
to departmental operations during World Wars I
and II, when important principles of administration
were tested, and to the unification of the services in
the Department of Defense in 1947. A briefer work
on defense organization is The Management of
Defense; Organization and Control of the U.S.
Armed Services (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press
[1964] 228 p.), by John C. Ries.
1649. Huntington, Samuel P. The soldier and the
state; the theory and politics of civil-
military relations. Cambridge, Belknap Press of
Harvard University Press, 1957. xiii, 534 p.
57-6349 UA23.H95
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 469-517)-
The author looks at civil-military relations as a
system which involves a complex equilibrium be-
tween the authority of military and nonmilitary
groups in a society. The premise of the book is
that a general theory of the nature and purpose of
military institutions can be used to analyze the
civil-military relations of any society and to deter-
mine the degree to which those relations affect
military security. The first part of the book con-
tains a theoretical and historical discussion of mili-
tary institutions and the state in the Western World.
In the second and third parts the author applies his
theories to a historical analysis of civil-military rela-
tions in the United States. His focus is on the
officer corps, whose relation to the state, he believes,
reflects the general relations between the military
and the rest of society. In The Civilian and the
Military (New York, Oxford University Press, 1956.
340 p.), Arthur A. Ekirch examines the traditional
American tendency to oppose a conscript army and
a large military establishment.
1650. Janowitz, Morris. The professional soldier,
a social and political portrait. Glencoe, 111.,
Free Press [1960] 464 p. 60-7090 UBi47.J3
Includes bibliography.
One of the few sociologists to study the American
military environment, Janowitz examines the mili-
tary profession as it has evolved during the first half
of this century. Using sociological concepts, he
studies the officer corps as a professional group and
analyzes the social origins of the officers as well as
their career motivations, political beliefs, and style
of life. There is a new emphasis, he states, on the
military professionals' capacity for critical judgment.
Furthermore, developments in technology have
created the need for an increasing number of tech-
nical specialists in the military. Overall, the differ-
ences between military and nonmilitary organiza-
tions have been greatly reduced.
1651. Kaufmann, William W. The McNamara
strategy. New York, Harper & Row [1964]
339 P- 64-12672 UA23.K.37
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
320-334).
Under President Kennedy, Robert McNamara, as
Secretary of Defense, accomplished significant
changes in defense administration and policy. His
strategic concept of "multiple options" emphasized
preparation for both nuclear and nonnuclear war.
Through the application of a "planning-program-
ming-budgeting system" within the Defense De-
partment, he increased the degree of control which
the Secretary could maintain over the formulation
and execution of defense policy and initiated a
large-scale program of cost reduction. Kaufmann
reviews Secretary McNamara's tenure throughout
the Kennedy administration, quoting at length from
the Secretary's speeches as well as from those of
other officials. Arnold A. Rogow's James Forrestal,
a Study of Personality, Politics, and Policy (New
York, Macmillian [Ci963] 397 p.) is a "psycholog-
ical portrait" of the Secretary of the Navy who be-
came the first Secretary of Defense.
1652. Millis, Walter. Arms and men; a study in
American military history. New York, Put-
nam [1956] 382 p. 56—10240 Ei8i.M699
Bibliography: p. 367—371.
A commentary on the history of American mili-
tary policy. The author concludes that military
force can no longer be "brought rationally to bear
upon the decision of any of the political, economic,
emotional or philosophical issues by which men still
remain divided." American Military Policy, Its
Development Since 1775, 2d ed. (Harrisburg, Pa.,
Military Service Division, Stackpole Co. [1961]
548 p.), by C. Joseph Bernardo and Eugene H.
Bacon, is a slightly revised edition of no. 3643 in the
1960 Guide. Two other pertinent works are
American Defense Policy in Perspective, From
Colonial Times to the Present (New York, Wiley
[1965] 377 p.), a collection of readings edited by
Raymond G. O'Connor, and The Minute Man in
Peace and War; a History of the National Guard
(Harrisburg, Pa., Stackpole Co. [1964] 585 p.),
by Jim D. Hill.
1653. Millis, Walter. Arms and the state; civil-
military elements in national policy, by Walt-
er Millis, with Harvey C. Mansfield and Harold
Stein. New York, Twentieth Century Fund, 1958.
436 p. 58-11837 £744^56
l82 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Bibliography: p. 415-420.
This volume is part of a Twentieth Century Fund
study of civil-military relations in the United States.
The period from 1930 to the end of World War II
is discussed by Mansfield and Stein. The postwar
period is treated by Millis, who describes defense
reorganization, the development of the cold war,
and the war in Korea. American Civil-Military
Decisions; a Boo\ of Case Studies ([University,
Ala.] Published in cooperation with the Inter-
University Case Program by University of Alabama
Press, 1963. 705 p.), edited by Harold Stein, is
another volume in The Twentieth Century Fund's
project. It offers discussions of separate incidents
exemplifying civilian and military participation in
the process of decisionmaking. In The Common
Defense; Strategic Programs in National Politics
(New York, Columbia University Press, 1961. 500
p.), Samuel P. Huntington analyzes changes in
American military policy between 1945 and 1960.
1654. U.S. Military Academy, West Point. Dept.
of Military Art and Engineering. The West
Point atlas of American wars. Chief editor: Vincent
J. Esposito. With an introductory letter by Dwight
D. Eisenhower. New York, Praeger [1959] 2 v.
col. maps. (Books that matter)
59—7452 Gi2oi.SiU5 1959
Includes bibliographies.
CONTENTS.— v. i. 1689-1900.— v. 2. 1900-1953.
Designed initially for use by cadets at the U.S.
Military Academy, this atlas provides detailed maps
of battles and campaigns of all wars, up to and in-
cluding the Korean war, in which the United States
has taken part. Although American actions are
featured, each war is treated as a whole, and en-
gagements in which the United States did not par-
ticipate, as well as those undertaken with allies, are
traced. Because air and naval operations do not
lend themselves to the type of portrayal used in this
work, the maps, with few exceptions, depict the
operations of land forces.
B. The Army
1655. Dupuy, Richard Ernest. The compact his-
tory of the United States Army. Illustrated
by Gil Walker. New and rev. ed. New York,
Hawthorn Books [1961] 318 p. illus.
61-7827 £181.078 1961
Bibliography: p. 297—300.
Colonel Dupuy brings to his work many years of
experience in the Army and writes with enthusiasm
about his subject. The book covers, in a popular
fashion, the various wars and campaigns in which
the United States has been engaged. Uncommon
Valor; the Exciting Story of the Army (Chicago,
Rand McNally [1964] 512 p.), edited by James M.
Merrill, contains a selection of first-hand accounts
of army life from 1775 to 1962, culled from such
sources as personal letters, diaries, official corre-
spondence, and unit histories. A Guide to the
Military Posts of the United States, 1789-180,5
(Madison, State Historical Society of Wisconsin,
1964. 178 p.), by Francis P. Prucha, consists mainly
of regional maps with post locations and a catalog
of the posts established during this period.
1656. Ginzberg, Eli, and others. The ineffective
soldier; lessons for management and the
nation. New York, Columbia University Press,
1959. 3 v. illus. 59-7701 UB323.G5 1959
Includes bibliographies.
CONTENTS. — i. The lost divisions. — 2. Breakdown
and recovery. — 3. Patterns of performance.
Prepared by the staff of the Conservation of
Human Resources Project at Columbia University.
A major objective was to discover why, during
World War II, about 2.5 million men were rejected
from the Army or, having been accepted, were
then prematurely separated because of mental or
emotional disorders. Another significant objective
was to examine the postwar adjustment of these
men and to seek to determine why some men re-
covered early, others after a delay, and some not at
all. The study was based primarily on medical
and personnel records, and the volumes include
both statistical data and case material.
1657. Progue, Forrest C. George C. Marshall,
[v. i] Education of a general, 1880-1939.
With the editorial assistance of Gordon Harrison.
Foreword by Omar N. Bradley. New York, Vik-
ing Press [1963] xvii, 421 p. illus.
63~l8373 E745.M37P6
The first volume of a projected three-volume
biography of George C. Marshall (1880-1959),
who was chairman of the Allied Chiefs of Staff
during World War II and who served as Secretary
of State and Secretary of Defense under President
Truman. It covers the first 60 years of Marshall's
MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES
life, during which time he carried out various mili-
tary assignments in the Philippines, France, China,
and the United States. It ends with his appoint-
ment as U.S. Army Chief of Staff in 1939. Soldier:
The Memoirs of Matthew B. Ridgway (New York,
Harper [1956] 371 p.), by General Ridgway as
told to Harold H. Martin, is an autobiographical
account of 38 years of military service, ending with
the general's retirement as U.S. Army Chief of
Staff in 1955.
1658. Risch, Erna. Quartermaster support of the
Army; a history of the corps, 1775—1939.
Washington, Quartermaster Historian's Office, Of-
fice of the Quartermaster General, 1962. xvii, 796
p. illus. 62-60012 UC34.R5
Bibliography: p. [7491—766.
Prepared as part of the Quartermaster Corps'
historical program, this substantial volume traces
the growth and evolution of the Corps from 1775,
the date of its establishment, to 1939. Miss Risch
shows how an organization that was to a large
extent civilian in character developed into a mili-
tarized corps with permanent headquarters in Wash-
ington. The author also emphasizes the Quarter-
master Corps' support operations during five major
wars, from the Revolution through World War I.
Another contribution to Army administrative his-
tory is The Story of the U.S. Army Signal Corps
(New York, F. Watts [1965] 305 p. The Watts
landpower library), edited by Max L. Marshall. A
popular account of the artillery is Fairfax D.
Downey's Sound of the Guns; the Story of Ameri-
can Artillery From the Ancient and Honorable
Company to the Atom Cannon and Guided Missile
(New York, D. McKay Co. [1956] 337 p.).
1659. Weigley, Russell F. Towards an American
army; military thought from Washington to
Marshall. New York, Columbia University Press,
1962. 297 p. 62-15388 UA25.W4
Bibliography: p. [2771—285.
A history of ideas concerning the formation of an
American army. The author discusses and con-
trasts the concepts of a number of men, mostly in
military life, from the time of the American Revo-
lution to the mid-20th century. The debate has cen-
tered primarily on whether the United States should
maintain a professional army or rely on a well-
trained citizen militia, and Weigley shows that this
problem has not yet been fully resolved. Stephen E.
Ambrose's Upton and the Army (Baton Rouge,
Louisiana State University Press, 1964. 190 p.) is a
study of Emory Upton (1839—1881), a career officer
whose writings had a profound influence on the de-
velopment of a modern army in the United States.
The early years of the War Department are de-
scribed in The Department of War, 7757—7795
([Pittsburgh] University of Pittsburgh Press [1962]
287 p.), by Harry M. Ward.
C. The Navy
1660. Albion, Robert G., and Robert H. Connery.
Forrestal and the Navy. With the collabo-
ration of Jennie Barnes Pope. New York, Colum-
bia University Press, 1962. 359 p. illus.
62-9974 E748.F68A6
Bibliography: p. [335]-342.
An account of the career of James Forrestal
(1892—1949) as Secretary of the Navy from 1944 to
1947. Combining biographical material with naval
administrative history, the authors present a case
study of a civilian executive in charge of a military
service. They discuss the Navy Department and
Navy organization during this period and also an-
alyze the problems of interservice coordination and
unified theater commands in World War II. For-
restal's views on postwar military preparedness, as
well as his role in the movement for a unification of
the armed forces, are examined. When the new
position of Secretary of Defense was created in 1947,
he was chosen to fill it.
'1661. Braisted, William R. The United States
Navy in the Pacific, 1897—1909. Austin,
University of Texas Press [1958] 282 p. fold, map
(in pocket) 57-12530 £182.673
Bibliography: p. 247—262.
The author examines the relation between Ameri-
can naval and diplomatic policies in the Pacific from
the beginning of the Spanish-American War through
the end of Theodore Roosevelt's second administra-
tion. During this expansionist period, the United
States, pursuing its economic and strategic interests
in the Far East, formulated basic foreign policies
which were to make increasing demands on the
Navy in the years to come. In Prelude to Pearl
Harbor; the United States Navy and the Far East,
7927—7957 (Columbia, University of Missouri Press
[1963] 212 p.), Gerald E. Wheeler describes the
manner in which the Navy was readied for action
during the 1920'$ and the development of its Far
Eastern policies during that period. Robert E. John-
184 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
son's Thence Round Cape Horn; the Story of
United States Naval Forces on Pacific Station, 1818—
1923 (Annapolis, United States Naval Institute
[ 1 963 ] 276 p. ) chronicles the increasing importance
of the eastern Pacific Ocean to the Navy and discus-
ses the policies responsible for the Navy's presence
there.
X 1662. Heinl, Robert D. Soldiers of the sea; the
United States Marine Corps, 1775-1962.
Foreword by B. H. Liddell Hart. Annapolis, Unit-
ed States Naval Institute [1962] 692 p. illus.
61-18078 VE23.H4
Bibliography: p. 649—659.
Combining sea, land, and air action, the Marine
Corps represents the prototype of an integrated
fighting force. Colonel Heinl traces the evolution
of the Corps from its origin in 1775 to 1962. The
Marines have served in every major war in Amer-
ican history and in numerous minor encounters and
skirmishes. The author amply covers their activi-
ties, especially in World War II. Taking a broad
approach to military history, he deals with "plan-
ning, policy, command, administration, traditions
and personalities," as well as with battle accounts.
A more condensed general history of the Marines,
written by Philip N. Pierce and Frank O. Hough,
is The Compact History of the United States Marine
Corps, new and rev. ed. (New York, Hawthorn
Books [1964] 334 p.).
1663. Pratt, Fletcher. The compact history of the
United States Navy. Revised by Hardey E.
Howe. Illustrated by Louis Priscilla. New and rev.
ed. New York, Hawthorn Books [1962] 350 p.
62-9039 £182^84 1962
A popular history of the Navy's formation and
growth. In addition to describing batdes and en-
gagements, the book tells the story of the American
sailor — "who he has been and who he is today;
where he came from at first and where he comes
from today; what he has done to the Navy; and
what the Navy has done to him." In the Picture
History of the U.S. Navy, From Old Navy to New,
1776-1897 (New York, Scribner, 1956. i v., un-
paged), by Theodore Roscoe and Fred Freeman,
more than 1,000 prints, photographs, maps, and
other visual materials are reproduced. Marshall
Smelser, in The Congress Founds the Navy, 1787—
1798 ([Notre Dame, Ind.] University of Notre
Dame Press, 1959. 229 p.), focuses on the political
origins of the Navy and shows that partisan politics
was the major influence on naval decisions in the
Federalist period. The Navy League of the United
States (Detroit, Wayne State University Press, 1962.
271 p.), by Armin Rappaport, is the history of an
organization founded in 1902 and dedicated to the
promotion of a "big navy."
1664. U.S. Naval History Division. Dictionary of
American naval fighting ships. Washington,
1959—63. 2 v. illus. 60—60198 VA6i.A53
The first two volumes in a multivolume series in-
tended to present historical and statistical data on
more than 10,000 ships which have formed part of
the Continental and U.S. Navies since 1775. The
information, arranged alphabetically by name of
ship, includes such data (whenever available) as the
name of the builder, identity of sponsor, launching
date, tonnage or displacement, length, speed, class,
armament, and operational history. The second
volume carries the list of ships through the letter
"F" and contains appendixes on aircraft carriers
and on vessels of the Confederate Navy.
1665. The Watts histories of the United States
Navy. New York, Watts [1965] 4 v.
Four volumes planned as part of a coordinated
history of the Navy. In A Chronology of the U.S.
Navy, 1775-1965 (471 p. 65-21636 £182^73),
David M. Cooney provides brief descriptions of sig-
nificant events in the history of both the Navy and
the Marine Corps. Daniel J. Garrison, in The Navy
From Wood to Steel, 1860—1890 (186 p. 65—11939
£591^3), concentrates on the role of the Navy in
the Civil War. Brayton Harris, in The Age of the
Battleship, 1890-1922 (212 p. 65-21634 £182.-
H25), follows the Navy through an expansionist
period, which ended with the convening in Wash-
ington of the International Conference on the Limi-
tation of Naval Armaments. The United States
Nuclear Navy (199 p. 65-21635 VM3 17.65), by
Herbert J. Gimpel, features the development of naval
technology since World War II.
D. The Air Force
1666. Goldberg, Alfred, ed. A history of the Unit-
ed States Air Force, 1907-1957. Princeton,
N.J., Van Nostrand [1957] 277 p. illus.
UG633.G6
"Select bibliography": p. 259—263.
Members of the USAF Historical Division pre-
pared this profusely illustrated volume to mark the
5oth anniversary of military aviation in the United
States, and the loth anniversary of the establishment
of the Department of the Air Force. Because of
space limitations and the fact that other Air Force
publications have covered or are planned to cover
the period through World War II in detail, the book
emphasizes the period after 1947. The Compact
History of the United States Air Force (New York,
Hawthorn Books [1963] 339 p.), by Carroll V.
Glines, is a general narrative. The United States
Army Air Arm, April 1861 to April igij ([Mont-
gomery, Ala.] USAF Historical Division, Research
Studies Institute, Air University, 1958. 260 p.
USAF historical studies, no. 98), by Juliette A.
Hennessy, is the first of three monographs which
will take the history to 1939.
1667. Wagner, Ray. American combat planes.
Garden City, N.Y., Hanover House, 1960
MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES / 185
[i.e. 1961] 447 p. illus.
60-14913
This history of military aircraft covers all combat
planes built in the United States or purchased abroad
for the American Army, the Air Force, and Navy.
The book contains photographs of the planes as well
as information about their dimensions, weight, and
performance. Two works on specific types of planes
are United States Army and Air Force Fighters,
1916-1961 (Letchworth, Herts, Harleyford Publi-
cations, 1961. 256 p.), compiled by Kimbrough S.
Brown and others, and Flying Fortress; the Illus-
trated Biography of the B-ijs and the Men Who
Flew Them (Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1965.
362 p.), by Edward Jablonski. In A History of the
U.S. Air Force Ballistic Missiles (New York, Praeg-
er [1965] 264 p.), Ernest G. Schwiebert describes
the development of the Air Force ballistic missile
program between 1954 and 1964.
E. Wars of the United States
Ei. WARS: THE REVOLUTION
1668. Billias, George A., ed. George Washington's
generals. New York, W. Morrow, 1964.
xvii, 327 p. illus. 64—12038 £206.65
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
A collection of essays reexamining the careers of
the most important Continental Army commanders,
including Washington himself, in the light of recent
scholarship. The other generals discussed are
Charles Lee, Philip Schuyler, Horatio Gates, Na-
thanael Greene, John Sullivan, Benedict Arnold,
Benjamin Lincoln, the Marquis de Lafayette, Henry
Knox, Anthony Wayne, and Daniel Morgan, all of
whom were selected on the basis of the significance
of their contributions to the war effort and the fact
that they served with Washington in some capacity.
Three of the book's contributing historians have also
published full-length biographies of their subjects:
Henry Knox (New York, Rinehart [1958] 404 p.),
by North Callahan; Daniel Morgan (Chapel Hill,
Published for the Institute of Early American His-
tory and Culture at Williamsburg, Va., by the Uni-
versity of North Carolina Press [1961] 239 p.), by
Don Higginbotham; and A General of the Revolu-
tion, John Sullivan of New Hampshire (New York,
Columbia University Press, 1961. 317 p.), by
Charles P. Whittemore.
1669. Mackesy, Piers. The war for America,
1775—1783. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1964. xx, 565 p. illus.
64-2777
Bibliography: p. [5281—535.
With sympathy for the difficulties faced by the
Ministers, Mackesy examines the making and exe-
cution of England's strategy in the American Revo-
lution and judges the War Ministry according to
circumstance rather than results. Problems related
to space, time, and weather were often complicated
by uncertainty, miscalculation, and poor communi-
cations across the Atlantic, and an adequate number
of ships were not detached to America because of
the fear that England and her Mediterranean gar-
risons might be attacked. There were leadership
problems also. A Ministry divided between aggres-
siveness and timidity did not have wide popular
support, and except for Cornwallis the generals
were characterized by their lack of the boldness
needed for victory. William B. Willcox' Portrait
of a General: Sir Henry Clinton in the War of In-
dependence (New York, Knopf; [distributed by
Random House] 1964. 534 p.), is a biography of
the English commander in chief (1778—81) whose
personal shortcomings contributed to the British
defeat.
1670. Peckham, Howard H. The War for Inde-
pendence, a military history. [Chicago]
University of Chicago Press [1958] 226 p. (The
Chicago history of American civilization)
58-5685 £230^36
l86 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Includes bibliography.
Following a brief survey of the causes for conflict
between Britain and the Colonies, Peckham sum-
marizes the military aspects of the Revolution from
Lexington and Concord in 1775 to the evacuation
of British troops eight years later. He contends that
the American victory was primarily due to high
troop morale, new tactics, and dedication and per-
severance of a few leaders, and the role of George
Washington, whose character "prevented the Revo-
lution from either failing or from ending in tyranny
and excess." In This Glorious Cause (Princeton,
N.J., Princeton University Press, 1958. 254 p.),
Herbert T. Wade and Robert A. Lively relate the
day-to-day experiences of two Massachusetts com-
pany officers in the Continental Army from 1775 to
1779. Hugh F. Rankin, in The American Revolu-
tion (New York, Putnam [1964] 382 p.), presents
materials from correspondence, journals, and diaries
that relate to the land war. Primary sources for the
first year of the war at sea are found in the U.S.
Naval History Division's Naval Documents of the
American Revolution, v. i (Washington [For sale
by the Supt. of Docs., U.S. Govt. Print. Off.] 1964.
1451 p.), edited by William Bell Clark.
1671. Thayer, Theodore G. Nathanael Greene;
strategist of the American Revolution. New
York, Twayne Publishers, 1960. 500 p. illus.
60—8546 £207.69X48
Bibliography: p. 477—486.
From a provincial middle-class Quaker home in
Potowomut, R.I., Nathanael Greene (1742—1786)
rose to become a major general in the Continental
Army. The author portrays Greene as the master-
mind of Washington's campaigns in the North and
the executor of such brilliant Southern victories as
those at Guilford Court House, N.C., and in South
Carolina, where Cornwallis was shut within the
narrow limits of Charleston and the immediate
neighborhood. Greene was an ardent nationalist
whose personal ambitions did not impair his loyalty
to his country's cause or to his commander and
whose insight into America's political, economic,
and constitutional problems inspired him to advocate
the kind of strong central government embodied in
the Constitution after his death. M. F. Treacy's
Prelude to Yorfyoivn; the Southern Campaign of
Nathanael Greene, 1780-1781 (Chapel Hill, Uni-
versity of North Carolina Press [1963] 261 p.)
pictures Greene as an excellent planner but one who
demonstrated a lack of self-assurance and personal
force.
Eii. WARS: 1798-1848
1672. Forester, Cecil S. The age of the fighting
sail; the story of the naval War of 1812.
Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1956. 284 p.
(Mainstream of America series)
56 — 7741 £360^69
A narrative of the naval War of 1812 by the
author of the Horatio Hornblower stories and other
novels of the sea. Forester discusses American un-
preparedness for war and the lassitude with which
the Executive administration and the Congress built
an effective fleet. Despite these handicaps, the new
Nation won memorable victories before an exasper-
ated England began to even the score. The book
has no table of contents or chapter titles, but an
index provides access to specific names and inci-
dents. The war on the Great Lakes and in Canada
is the focus for The Incredible War of 1812; a Mili-
tary History ( [Toronto] University of Toronto Press
[1965] 265 p.), written from a Canadian viewpoint
by J. Mackay Hitsman. The War of 1812 (Chicago,
University of Chicago Press [1965] 298 p. The
Chicago history of American civilization), by Harry
L. Coles, is an introduction to the war with an
emphasis on military aspects.
1673. Singletary, Otis A. The Mexican War.
[Chicago] University of Chicago Press
[1960] 181 p. illus. (The Chicago history of
American civilization) 60—7248 £404.85
"Suggested reading": p. 166—168.
A very brief introduction to the first offensive war
launched by the United States. Singletary concen-
trates on the military aspects of the war but includes
brief summaries of the causes of the conflict and of
the diplomacy preceding and following it. The
author devotes a chapter each to Zachary Taylor's
victories in northern Mexico, to the occupation of
New Mexico and California, and to Winfield Scott's
capture of Mexico City. The dissension between
President Polk, a Democrat, and his two ambitious
Whig generals, Scott and Taylor, is described, with
none of them emerging untarnished. Further dis-
cord is the topic of the chapter entitled "The Hid-
den War." Here the author describes the jealousy
and rivalry between Scott and Taylor, the hostility
between the well-trained regular soldiers and the
undisciplined volunteers, and the friction generated
by joint operations of the Army and the Navy.
Eiii. WARS: THE CIVIL WAR
1674. Barrett, John G. Sherman's march through
the Carolinas. Chapel Hill, University of
MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES / 1 87
North Carolina Press, 1956. 325 p.
56-14242 £477.7.63
Bibliography: p. [282]— 309.
Although less well known than the march to the
sea, Gen. William Tecumseh Sherman's march from
Savannah to Raleigh — much of it over dangerous
terrain — was an outstanding military accomplish-
ment. The Army traveled through swamps, often
in rainy weather, building bridges and corduroy
roads as it progressed northward. Sherman con-
ducted a campaign of "total war," and the destruc-
tion of the Carolinas was executed with a high de-
gree of efficiency. Much of this scholarly study is
based on diaries and correspondence of eyewitnesses.
A narrative of Sherman's famous marches is Those
163 Days; a Southern Account of Sherman's March
from Atlanta to Raleigh (New York, Coward-
McCann [1961] 317 p.), by John M. Gibson.
From the Cannons Mouth: the Civil War Letters
of General Alpheus S. Williams (Detroit, Wayne
State University Press, 1959. 405 p.), edited by
Milo M. Quaife, is a record of the general who com-
manded the 2Oth Corps in Sherman's Army.
1675. Catton, Bruce. The centennial history of
the Civil War. E. B. Long, director of re-
search. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1961-65.
3 v. col. illus. 61—12502 £468X^29
Includes bibliographies.
CONTENTS. — v. i. The coming fury. — v. 2. Ter-
rible swift sword. — v. 3. Never call retreat.
A general history of the Civil War. The first
volume opens with the Democratic presidential con-
vention of 1860 and ends after the first Battle of
Bull Run. Volume 2 continues the narrative
through Antietam and its aftermath in the fall of
1862. The final volume concludes with the sur-
render at Appomattox and Lincoln's assassination.
The American Heritage Picture History of the Civil
War (New York, American Heritage Pub. Co.;
book trade distribution by Doubleday [1960] 630
p.), edited by Richard M. Ketchum and with text
by Bruce Catton, reproduces drawings, paintings,
maps, and photographs. Also by Catton are This
Hallowed Ground: the Story of the Union Side of
the Civil War (Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1956.
437 p. Mainstream of America series) and Grant
Moves South (Boston, Little, Brown [1960] 564
p.), a continuation of Lloyd Lewis' Captain Sam
Grant, mentioned in the annotation for no. 3696
in the 1960 Guide.
1676. Cornish, Dudley T. The sable arm; Negro
troops in the Union Army, 1861-1865. New
York, Longmans, Green, 1956. 337 p.
56-6219 E540.N3C77
Bibliography: p. 316—332.
A history of the use of Negro troops in the Union
Army. Attempts to allow Negroes to serve, even as
volunteers, failed at first. As the war progressed,
however, the Negro was accepted as a fighting sol-
dier and "was permitted to do more for the freedom
of his race than drive a supply wagon, cook for
white soldiers, or labor on fortifications." Conse-
quently, problems in administrative policy and army
practice arose. Cornish examines how the Negro
was recruited, trained, armed, employed, and com-
pensated for his service in the Union Army and
assesses his contribution to the war's outcome.
1677. Foote, Shelby. The Civil War, a narrative.
New York, Random House [1958—63] 2 v.
maps. 58-9882 £468^7
CONTENTS. — i. Fort Sumter to Perry ville. — 2.
Fredericksburg to Meridian.
The first volume traces events from the firing on
Fort Sumter to the battle at Perryville, Ky., in Oc-
tober 1862, and the second proceeds from the Fred-
ericksburg campaign through Grant's appointment
to command of all the Federal Armies. A third
and concluding volume is projected. Another gen-
eral survey is The Compact History of the Civil
War (New York, Hawthorn Books [1960] 445
p.), by Richard Ernest Dupuy and Trevor N.
Dupuy. The Civil War Dictionary (New York, D.
McKay Co. [1959] 974 p.), by Mark M. Boatner,
is an alphabetically arranged reference work on all
aspects of the war.
1678. Jones, Archer. Confederate strategy from
Shiloh to Vicksburg. Baton Rouge, Louisi-
ana State University Press [1961] xxi, 258 p.
61—7085 £470.8. J6 1961
Bibliography: p. 241—249. Bibliographical foot-
notes.
The author analyzes the efforts of Jefferson Davis,
his Secretaries of War George W. Randolph and
James A. Seddon, and his commanders in the field
to devise a plan for Confederate operations, particu-
larly in the West. Southern strategy, based primar-
ily on territorial defense, called for the creation of
departments, each charged with defending a specific
area. Jones concludes that Davis was not "a narrow
and ignorant despot" but a leader who formulated
strategy in harmony with the States' rights philoso-
phy and the limited logistical means at the Con-
federacy's disposal. Lee's Mavericl^ General, Daniel
Harvey Hill (New York, McGraw-Hill [1961] 323
p.), by Leonard Hal Bridges, and General William
J. Hardee: Old Reliable (Baton Rouge, Louisiana
State University Press [1965] 329 p. Southern
biography series), by Nathaniel C. Hughes, concen-
l88 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
trate on the Civil War careers of their respective
subjects.
1679. Jones, Virgil C. The Civil War at sea.
Foreword by E. M. Eller. New York, Holt,
Rinehart, Winston [1960-62] 3 v.
60-14457 £591. J6
Includes bibliographies.
CONTENTS.— v. i. The blockaders, January 1861-
March 1862.— v. 2. The river war, March 1862-
July 1863.— v. 3. The final effort, July 1863-
November 1865.
This trilogy describes the naval operations of the
Union and Confederate forces, emphasizing battles,
blockade and coastal activities, tactics, and techno-
logical developments. Volume i is focused on the
blockade against the South and the Monitor-Merri-
mac\ engagement. In the second volume Jones
considers the effects of superior Northern sea power
as it was used to tighten the blockade, patrol the
coast, control the inland waterways, and combine
operations with the Army. Volume 3 carries the
narrative through the end of the war at sea, when
the Confederate cruiser Shenandoah landed in Liv-
erpool months after the South's surrender. Infernal
Machines; the Story of Confederate Submarine and
Mine Warfare ([Baton Rouge] Louisiana State Uni-
versity Press [1965] 230 p.), by Milton F. Perry,
details the technological advances effected by the
Confederacy in naval warfare. Mr. Lincoln's Ad-
mirals (New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 1956. 335
p.), by Clarence E. N. Macartney, and Mr. Lincoln's
^ Navy (New York, Longmans, Green, 1957. 328
p.), by Richard S. West, concentrate on Northern
naval operations.
1680. Lamers, William M. The edge of glory; a
biography of General William S. Rosecrans,
U.S.A. New York, Harcourt, Brace [1961] 499 p.
illus. 61-7688 E467.iR7L3
Bibliography: p. 453—471.
The author devotes most of his biography on "Old
Rosy" to a study of the general and his battles.
Rosecrans was an able, although tacdess, command-
er. His notable victories at Murfreesboro (Decem-
ber 31, 1862— January 3, 1863) and in the Tulla-
homa campaign (1863) demonstrated his compe-
tence on the battlefield. His Army of the Cumber-
land suffered severely at Chickamauga, and he was
subsequendy removed from command. The author
goes into detail on the circumstances of Rosecrans'
dismissal, which he views as partly stemming from
the personal animosity of Grant and Secretary of
War Edwin M. Stanton toward Rosecrans. A biog-
raphy of the general who assumed command of
Rosecrans' Army is Education in Violence: The Life
of George H. Thomas and the History of the Army
of the Cumberland (Detroit, Wayne State Univer-
sity Press, 1961. 530 p.), by Francis F. McKinney.
1681. Lee, Robert E. The wartime papers of R. E.
Lee. Clifford Dowdey, editor; Louis H.
Manarin, associate editor. With connective narra-
tives by Clifford Dowdey and maps by Samuel H.
Bryant. Virginia Civil War Commission. Boston,
Little, Brown [1961] xiv, 994 p. illus. (Virginia
Civil War centennial, 1961-1965)
6i-5737 £4701-49
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
[9431-968).
A collection of 1,006 letters, dispatches, orders,
and reports. The papers are arranged chronologi-
cally, beginning with Lee's resignation from the U.S.
Army on April 20, 1861, and ending with his letter
to Jefferson Davis on April 20, 1865, calling for the
"suspension of hostilities and the restoration of
peace." Also included are letters to his wife and
family. Three recent books on Lee are Burke
Davis' Gray Fox: Robert E. Lee and the Civil War
(New York, Rinehart [1956] 466 p.) and Clifford
Dowdey's two studies, Lee (Boston, Little, Brown
[1965] 781 p.) and Lee's Last Campaign; the
Story of Lee and His Men Against Grant— 1864
(Boston, Little, Brown [1960] 415 p.).
1682. Warner, Ezra J. Generals in blue; lives of
the Union commanders. [Baton Rouge]
Louisiana State University Press [1964] xxiv, 679,
[i] p. illus. 64-21593 £467^29
Bibliography: p. 673— [680],
Biographical sketches and portraits of the 583
men appointed to the rank of general officer in the
Union Army. Appended are the names of the gen-
erals grouped together by State or country of birth,
a roster of brevetted generals, and an alphabetical
list of campaigns and battles. Warren W. Hassler's
Commanders of the Army of the Potomac (Baton
Rouge, Louisiana State University Press [1962]
281 p.) examines the careers of the seven Union
generals from McDowell to Grant who led the
Army of the Potomac. Hassler has also written a
biography of the most controversial commander of
the Army of the Potomac: General George B. Mc-
Clellan, Shield of the Union (Baton Rouge, Louisi-
ana State University Press [1957] 350 p.). Quar-
termaster General of the Union Army; a Biography
of M. C. Meigs (New York, Columbia University
Press, 1959. 396 p.), by Russell F. Weigley, is an
account of the supply services of the Union Army
and the man who presided over the sprawling
system.
MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES / l!
1683. Warner, Ezra J. Generals in gray; lives
of the Confederate commanders. [Baton
Rouge] Louisiana State University Press [1959]
xxvii, 420 p. illus. 58—7551 £467.^3
Bibliography: p. 401—420.
Biographical sketches and portraits of the 425
men commissioned to the rank of general officer in
the Confederate Army. Appended are a roster of
officers assigned to duty in the Trans-Mississippi
area but not officially appointed by Jefferson Davis
and a list of campaigns and battles. Full-length
biographies of Confederate generals are Stonewall
]ac\son (New York, W. Morrow, 1959. 2 v.), by
Lenoir Chambers; A Different Valor, the Story of
General Joseph E. Johnston, C.S.A. (New York,
Bobbs-Merrill [1956] 470 p.), by Gilbert E. Govan
and James W. Livingood; and General Leonidas
Polk^, C.S.A.: The Fighting Bishop ( [Baton Rouge]
Louisiana State University Press [1962] 408 p.
Southern biography series), by Joseph H. Parks.
• '1684. Williams, Kenneth P. Lincoln finds a gen-
eral; a military study of the Civil War.
With maps by Clark Ray. New York, Macmillan,
1949-59- 5 y. 49-II53<> £470^765
Includes bibliographies.
The first three volumes of this multivolume study
are no. 3706 in the 1960 Guide. Volume 4 covers
the campaigns from luka to Vicksburg. The author
died during the preparation of the final volume; he
had concluded the ninth chapter, which carries the
account to Chickamauga. His notes indicate that
he had planned two additional chapters, which
would have continued the story to March 1864,
when Grant was made commander in chief of the
Union armies. Stephen E. Ambrose's Hallec\: Lin-
coln's Chief of Staff (Baton Rouge, Louisiana State
University Press [1962] 226 p.) portrays Gen.
Henry W. Halleck as an able administrator and
organizer but a poor field commander. Freeman
Cleaves' Meade of Gettysburg (Norman, University
of Oklahoma Press [1960] 384 p.) defends Gen.
George G. Meade against criticism for having failed
to pursue Lee after the battle of Gettysburg.
Eiv. WARS: THE SPANISH- AMERICAN WAR
^1685. Freidel, Frank B. The splendid little war.
Boston, Little, Brown [1958] 314 p. illus.
58-10069 £715^7
Bibliography: p. 313—314.
A pictorial history of the Spanish-American War,
the conflict which John Hay, Ambassador to Eng-
land at the time, called "a splendid little war." Frei-
del asserts that, although it may have been "splen-
did" for those at home reading newspaper accounts
of the battles, it was as grim and bloody as any war
in history. Furthermore, it was "litde" only because
of the ineptitude of the Spaniards and the good luck
of the Americans. Some 300 reproductions of pho-
tographs, sketches, and paintings show the toll of
war on men and the land as well as the more com-
monplace aspects of military life. Among the pho-
tographers and artists represented are James Burton,
Dwight L. Elmendorf, Frederic Remington, and
Howard Chandler Christy. Whenever possible, the
author has used the words of participants and war
correspondents to tell the story.
Ev. WARS: WORLD WAR I
1686. Mason, Herbert M. The Lafayette Esca-
drille. New York, Random House [1964]
340 p. illus. 64—20035 0603^34
Bibliography: p. 326—329.
The Lafayette Escadrille was a fighter squadron
created by American fliers who served as volunteers
in the French Air Corps in the early years of World
War I while the United States remained neutral.
The author describes the flamboyant spirit of these
men and narrates their daring escapades against the
Germans. The book portrays military aviation in
its infancy and illustrates the technical problems
faced by the first fighter pilots. Mason includes many
anecdotes about the Escadrille's members, their oper-
ations, and their exploits aloft and on the ground.
Appended are a list of confirmed victories, the La-
fayette Flying Corps Roster, and aids to understand-
ing the language of aerial warfare. Memoirs of
World War I: "From Start to Finish of Our Greatest
War" (New York, Random House [1960] 312 p.)
is the wartime diary of Brig. Gen. William ("Billy")
Mitchell.
^1687. Stallings, Laurence. The Doughboys; the
story of the AEF, 1917-1918. Maps by
Harry Scott. New York, Harper & Row [1963]
404 p. 62-14547 0570.875
"A reader's guide": p. 383-390.
An account of the American Expeditionary Force
in Europe from the average soldier's viewpoint.
The author, a veteran of World War I, details the
adventures of the AEF, its difficulties and achieve-
ments, its battlescarred heroes and grim casualties.
The accounts of Cantigny, Chateau-Thierry, Saint-
Mihiel, and Meuse-Argonne illustrate the problems
of command, the strategy of operations, and the ex-
periences of the men at the front. Over There; the
Story of America's First Great Overseas Crusade
(Boston, Little, Brown [1964] 385 p.), by Frank
/ A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
B. Freidel, is a pictorial history of the AEF. In At
Belleau Wood (New York, Putnam [1965] 375
p.), Robert B. Asprey details the tactics of this
American offensive of June 1918.
1688. Trask, David F. The United States in the
Supreme War Council; American war aims
and inter-Allied strategy, 1917—1918. Middletown,
Conn., Wesleyan University Press [1961] 244 p.
61-14237 0544/17
The Supreme War Council, organized in 1917,
coordinated the political and military strategies of
England, France, Italy, and the United States. As
military representative on the Council, Gen. Tasker
H. Bliss devoted great energy to assist in arranging
an inter-Allied military strategy against the Central
Powers. Bliss refused to approve Allied proposals
when they warranted military commitments that
would jeopardize President Wilson's plan for peace.
The author charts the Wilson administration's course
in supporting the Allies and at the same time striv-
ing to avoid diplomatic entanglements.
Evi. WARS: WORLD WAR II
1689. Buchanan, Albert R. The United States and
World War II. New York, Harper & Row
[1964] 2 v. (xvii, 635 p.) illus. (New American
Nation series) 63-20287 0769.68
Bibliography: p. 595-612. Bibliographical foot-
notes.
The author covers the battles and campaigns in
all theaters, matters of policy and strategy, and war
mobilization at home. Another overall history of
the war is Kenneth S. Davis' Experience of War:
the United States in World War II (Garden City,
N.Y., Doubleday, 1965. Mainstream of America
series). In Pearl Harbor; Warning and Decision
(Stanford, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1962.
426 p.), Roberta Wohlstetter analyzes the United
States' lack of preparedness for the Pearl Harbor
attack.
1690. Morison, Samuel Eliot. History of United
States naval operations in World War II.
Boston, Little, Brown, 1947—62. 15 v. illus.
47-I57I D773.M6
Bibliographical footnotes.
Five additional volumes conclude this i5-volume
work; the first 10 volumes are no. 3721 in the 1960
Guide. Morison has also written The Two-Ocean
War, a Short History of the United States Navy in
the Second World War (Boston, Little, Brown
li903J 6"n p.), which is not a condensation of his
larger study but rather a narrative of the Navy's
most important battles and campaigns. Other as-
pects of U.S. sea operations during the war are cov-
ered in Felix Riesenberg's Sea War; the Story of the
U.S. Merchant Marine in World War II (New York,
Rinehart [1956] 320 p.) and The U.S. Coast
Guard in World War II (Annapolis, United States
Naval Institute [1957] 347 p.), by Malcolm F.
Willoughby.
1691. Ryan, Cornelius. The longest day: June 6,
1944. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1959.
350 p. illus. 59-9499 D756.5.N6R9
Bibliography: p. 336—339.
This account of the Normandy invasion centers
on the events of a single day. Ryan describes the
landings of the Allied airborne armies and the as-
sault on the five invasion beaches along the Nor-
mandy coast. Another book on the Normandy in-
vasion is Samuel L. A. Marshall's Night Drop; the
American Airborne Invasion of Normandy (Boston,
Little, Brown [1962] 425 p.). In The Duel for
France, 1944 (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1963.
432 p.), Martin Blumenson covers the fighting in
France from July to September 1944. John Toland's
Battle, the Story of the Bulge (New York, Random
House [1959] 400 p.) describes one of the major
battles of the war.
1692. U.S. Air Force. USAF Historical Division.
The Army Air Forces in World War II.
Prepared under the editorship of Wesley Frank
Craven [and] James Lea Gate. [Chicago] Univer-
sity of Chicago Press [1948-58] 7 v. illus.
. 48-3657 D79o.A47
1 he hrst six volumes of this history are no. 3727
in the 1960 Guide. Volume 7, Services Around the
World, describes nontactical units such as the Air
Transport Command, the Aviation Engineers, and
the AAF Weather Service. Also included are chap-
ters on medical services and women in the AAF.
1693. U.S. Dept. of the Army. Office of Military
History. United States Army in World
War II. Washington, 1947-65. 62 v. illus., maps.
47-46404 0769^533
A continuation of no. 3726 in the 1960 Guide.
More than 85 volumes were planned for this series,
and 62 have been published thus far. New sub-
series added since the publication of the 1960 Guide
include The Western Hemisphere and The Medi-
terranean Theater of Operations. The Master Index:
Readers Guide II (1960. 145 p.) contains brief
summaries of all volumes in the series as well as
some projected volumes. American Strategy in
World War II: A Reconsideration (Baltimore, Johns
Hopkins Press, 1963. 145 p.), by Kent R. Green-
field, chief historian of the Department of the Army
MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES /
from 1946 to 1958, deals with such subjects as
Anglo-American strategy, Roosevelt as commander
in chief, and strategy and air power. Greenfield is
also the editor of Command Decisions (Washing-
ton, 1960. 565 p.), a collection of articles Issued
by the U.S. Department of the Army, Office of the
Chief of Military History, analyzing various stra-
tegic decisions made by the Allied and Axis powers
during the war.
1694. U.S. Marine Corps. History of U.S. Ma-
rine Corps operations in World War II.
[Washington] Historical Branch, G-3 Division,
Headquarters, U.S. Marine Corps [1958—63] 2 v.
illus. 58—60002 0769.369^53
The first two volumes in a projected five-volume
series. Volume i outlines the development of the
Marine Corps' amphibious mission and describes
the defense of Wake Island, the campaign in the
Philippines, the fight for Midway, and the battle for
Guadalcanal. The focus in the second volume is on
the drive to occupy Rabaul. Also described are the
occupation of the New Georgia Islands, operations
in the northern Solomons, and the New Britain
campaign. Robert Leckie's Strong Men Armed:
The United States Marines Against Japan (New
York, Random House [1962] 563 p.) is a popular
history of Marine Corps operations in the Pacific
during World War II.
Evii. WARS: THE KOREAN WAR
1695. Appleman, Roy E. South to the Naktong,
north to the Yalu; June-November 1950.
Washington, Office of the Chief of Military History,
Department of the Army, 1961. xxiv, 813 p. illus.
(United States Army in the Korean War, i)
60—60043 08918^5246 vol. i
Bibliographical footnotes.
The first volume in the U.S. Army's official his-
tory, United States Army in the Korean War. The
activities of other branches of the military service in
Korea are described in The United States Air Force
in Korea, 1950-1953 (New York, Duell, Sloan &
Pearce [1961] 774 p.), by Robert F. Futrell; James
A. Field's History of United States Naval Opera-
tions: Korea (Washington [U.S. Govt. Print. Off.]
1962. 499 p.); and the first four volumes of a pro
posed five-volume Marine Corps publication, U.S.
Marine Operations in Korea, 1950—1953 (Washing-
ton, Historical Branch, 6-3, Headquarters, U.S.
Marine Corps, 1954 [i.e. 1955]— 62).
1696. Leckie, Robert. Conflict; the history of the
Korean War, 1950-53. New York, Putnam
[1962] 448 p. illus. 62-10975 08918.1.36
Bibliography: p. 431—434.
An account of the Korean War for the general
reader. The author traces the course of the war and
provides detailed descriptions of the battles and
operations as well as a discussion of the strategy
involved. A more scholarly history of the war is
Korea: The Limited War (New York, St. Martin's
Press, 1964. 511 p.), by David Rees, a British his-
torian. Rees discusses the development of American
policy toward Korea, amply covers the military
operations, and deals with the British response to
the war. In Por\ Chop Hill; the American Fight-
ing Man in Action, Korea, Spring, 1953 (New
York, Morrow, 1956. 315 p.), Samuel L. A. Mar-
shall analyzes in detail an encounter in which the
Americans won an important victory.
1697. Spanier, John W. The Truman-Mac Arthur
controversy and the Korean War. Cam-
bridge, Mass., Belknap Press, 1959. 311 p. illus.
59—12976 08919.862
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
281—297). Bibliography: p. 298—306.
A major issue during the early part of the Korean
War was the policy disagreement between President
Truman and General MacArthur which subse-
quently led to MacArthur's dismissal from all of
his commands. Spanier traces the origins of the
policy differences between the two men and shows
how and why these differences developed to the
point at which Truman had no alternative but to
relieve MacArthur of his duties. The author, in
addition, uses the controversy to analyze the prob-
lem of civil-military relations during a limited war.
A briefer interpretation of the disagreement be-
tween Truman and MacArthur is Trumbull Hig-
gins' Korea and the Fall of MacArthur; a Precis in
Limited War (New York, Oxford University Press,
1960. 229 p.).
XI
Intellectual History
A. General Worlds
B. Periods
C. Topics
D. Localities
E. International Influences: General
F. International Influences: By Country
1698—1701
1702—1706
1707-1714
1715—1716
1717—1720
1721—1722
A TTEMPTS to impose accurate limits upon the scope of intellectual history frequently end in
L\. frustration. Only a thin line of demarcation separates this chapter from those concerned
with literature, society, politics, philosophy, and history, all of which may be regarded as
supplementary. The books described here portray the development and transition of the
American intellectual and cultural scene from its beginnings, when a knowledge of the
classics was a prerequisite for being regarded as an intellectual and when the colonists looked
to Europe as the source of civilization and culture.
In general, the influence of European thinkers on
the American mind was overwhelming in the early
years, but after the American Revolution the flow
of ideas moved in both directions.
Diverse and independent trends developed as this
country went its own way and manifested an in-
creasing inclination to divorce itself from the tradi-
tionalism of European countries. The authors
represented in this chapter display a wide range of
opinion concerning the people and ideas that have
most profoundly influenced American thought.
Many writers have selected Jefferson as a major
figure in this field, but in his time he was often
denounced as an atheist and a divisive influence in
his political concepts. Writing of the decades
between 1800 and 1860, Perry Miller (no. 1705)
draws attention to the importance of the drive
toward moral uplift as a primary force in maintain-
ing "the grand unity of national strength." The
Bohemian revolt against narrow middle-class re-
spectability and convention during the first quarter
of the 20th century was succeeded in the 1950*5 by
the beat generation's more sweeping rejection of
contemporary American life and values. Richard
Hof stacker (no. 1699) traces a tradition of hostility
to intellectualism throughout American history.
A. General Works
1698. Curti, Merle, E. The growth of American
thought. 3d ed. New York, Harper & Row
[1964] xx, 939 p. illus.
64-12796 £169.1.087 1964
Bibliography: p. 797—900.
An updated edition of no. 3729 in the 1960
Guide.
102
1699. Hofstadter, Richard. Anti-intellectualism in
American life. New York, Knopf, 1963.
434, xiii p. 63—14086 £169.1.1174
Bibliographical footnotes.
Hostility to intellectualism in America, Hofstad-
ter maintains, is older than the Nation; it reached
a cyclical peak in the 1950'$ in an attack led by
Senator Joseph R. McCarthy. The launching of
Sputnik by the Soviets shocked the American public
into a reappraisal of the school system and a protest
against the slackness of American education. The
author defines and explains his concept of intel-
lectualism and traces some of the social movements
in our history in which "intellect has been dissev-
ered from its co-ordinate place among the human
virtues and assigned the position of a special kind
of vice." He believes the United States possesses the
only educational system whose vital segments have
fallen into the hands of people who proclaim their
hostility to intellect and identify with children who
show the least intellectual promise.
1700. Lerner, Max. America as a civilization; life
and thought in the United States today.
New York, Simon & Schuster, 1957. 1036 p.
57—10979 £169.1. L.532
Bibliography: p. 955-998.
A monumental study and interpretation, the pur-
pose of which is to grasp "the pattern and inner
meaning of contemporary American civilization and
its relationship to the world today." .It is not in-
tended as a history or mere description of life in
America; neither is it "a celebration of 'the Amer-
ican way' or a lament about it." In an effort to
arrive at a composite picture, Lerner has carried
through an encyclopedic investigation of society and
its institutions in the United States, ranging from
religion and cultural patterns to economics and
political power. Particularly interesting chapters
dissect "Class and Status in America," the "Life
Cycle of the American," "Character and Society,"
and "The Arts and Popular Culture." His detailed
inquiries have led him to conclude that conformism,
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY / 193
fanaticism, and rigidity have not dried up the native
sources of creativity. He sees "still in the American
potential the plastic strength that has shaped a great
civilization." Gerald N. Grob and Robert N. Beck
have compiled and edited the writings of theo-
logians, philosophers, political theorists, statesmen,
and historians under the title American Ideas;
Source Readings in the Intellectual History of the
United States ( [New York] Free Press of Glencoe
[1963] 2 v.).
1701. Whittemore, Robert C. Makers of the
American mind. New York, Morrow, 1964.
497 p. 64-12525 6851^48
Bibliographical references at the ends of chapters.
This book is neither a history of philosophy nor
an interpretation of American civilization. Rather
it is a careful effort "to present in compact form,
and as much as possible in their own words, the
essentials of the philosophy of those thinkers and
doers whose influence upon our culture is, or has
been, such as justify calling them the makers of the
American Mind." The author, a professor of
philosophy at Tulane University, traces the shapers
of our national consciousness from John Cotton to
Alfred North Whitehead. Along with the familiar
names of Franklin, Jefferson, Emerson, Thoreau,
Santayana, and John Dewey are those of such less
widely known men as Solomon Stoddard, Theodore
J. Frelinghuysen, Charles Chauncey, Cadwallader
Golden, and Abner Kneeland. The author con-
cludes that no thinker comparable to any of the men
whose thought he reviews here is "on the scene"
today and laments what he believes to be a current
hostility to intellectual excellence.
B. Periods
1702. American Studies Association. American
perspectives; the national self-image in the
twentieth century. Edited by Robert E. Spiller and
Eric Larrabee; associate editors: Ralph Henry Gab-
riel, Henry Nash Smith [and] Edward N. Waters.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1961. 216 p.
(Library of Congress series in American civilization)
61—8841 Ei69.i.A49
This volume was planned to synthesize the di-
verse aspects of American culture treated in the rest
of the Library of Congress series and to answer the
question, "What do we think of ourselves?" It
includes essays by specialists in history, literature,
philosophy, politics, economics, sociology, art, music,
popular arts, and the mass media. The authors
express diverse and independent viewpoints in
attempting to impart "a general impression of the
emotional and intellectual trends which America
experienced while living through the vast ideolog-
ical and technological changes of this half century."
1703. Gummere, Richard M. The American co-
lonial mind and the classical tradition; essays
in comparative culture. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1963. 228 p. 63-20767 Ei62.G88
Bibliography and notes: p. [2Oi]-223.
194 / A GUIDE To ™E UNITED STATES
A scholarly account of the impact of Greek and
Roman ideas on the lives and thought of the Amer-
ican colonists. The author makes it clear that the
foundations of this country were laid by men who
possessed sound scholarship; the majority were
college-educated or were well grounded in the clas-
sics, from which they derived wisdom and idealism.
The religious motive was very strong, and the rights
of the individual under the English law were as-
sumed. The Bible, the English common law, and
the classics were basic for the education of the
colonists, who applied them to illustrate their own
ideas and to deal with their own problems.
1704. May, Henry F. The end of American inno-
cence; a study of the first years of our own
time, 1912—1917. New York, Knopf, 1959. 412 p.
59—11236 £169.1^496
An examination of American thought as expressed
in various areas of the social sciences and humanities
from politics to philosophy. The author seeks to
demonstrate that the cultural upheaval and intel-
lectual revolt commonly associated with the 1920'$
and attributed to the disillusioning experiences of
World War I were already present beneath the sur-
face of an illusive Victorian calm during the five
years before the United States entered the conflict.
The "standard American culture" or consensus
made up of idealism, moralism, progressivism, and
optimism was even then crumbling in a ferment
generated by the ideas of Darwin, Marx, Nietzsche,
Freud, Shaw, Veblen, John Dewey, Dreiser, Lincoln
Steffens, and many others. The voices of dissent
filled such journals as The Smart Set, Little Review,
The New Republic, The Masses, and Glebe. The
final chapter considers the war and its aftermath,
which accelerated the disintegration of the old
consensus.
1705. Miller, Perry. The life of the mind in
America, from the Revolution to the Civil
War. New York, Harcourt, Brace & World [1965]
338 p. 65-19065 Ei69.i.M6273
The author planned an extensive work divided
into nine books. He wrote book i, on religious
revivalism and morality, and book 2, on the law,
but had finished only the first chapter of book 3, on
science, at the time of his death. The completed
portions are published here along with a working
script for the projected chapters of book 3 and a list
of the six unwritten books. Miller explores the
search for a character and a national identity worthy
of the opportunities in the new and unexploited land
to which the European colonists came. "To elevate
the moral condition of our race," he concludes, was
the objective carried out with missionary zeal in
early 19th-century America. It dominated every
facet of American life and was the prime force in
maintaining the "grand unity of national strength."
1706. Sanford, Charles L., ed. Quest for America,
1810-1824. Garden City, N.Y., Anchor
Books, 1964. xxxvii, 474 p. illus. (Documents in
American civilization series) 64—11311 £165.825
"Suggested readings": (p. [47i]~474).
This novel sourcebook presents the cultural his-
tory of the period through 108 "documents," 41 of
which consist of one or more illustrations with a
page or so of explanatory or interpretative text.
Through them and a 23-page introduction, the edi-
tor seeks to depict his book's 15 years as peculiarly
a period of transition, with 1815 as a turning point
at which America's homogenous and stable agrarian
society began to break up. Hugh S. Legare's Fourth
of July oration delivered at Charleston, S.C., in 1823,
is chosen to express the view that America, by restor-
ing the republican simplicity of the classical era, had
divorced herself from "the antiquated and corrupt
systems of the old world." Word and image are
drawn upon to illustrate expressions of national feel-
ing in^ war and peace, in art (especially John Trum-
bull's "The Declaration of Independence," the large
version of which was completed in 1818), science,
political economy, foreign relations, education, and
literature. The search for a characteristic American
style is exemplified in the designs of steam engines
and steamboats, bridges, and plows.
C. Topics
1707. Bode, Carl. The anatomy of American
popular culture, 1840-1861. Berkeley, Uni-
versity of California Press, 1959. 292 p. illus.
59-8759 £169.1.8657
A synthetic treatment of American culture during
a period when such factors as the mass production
of printed matter, the advent of general literacy, and
a rising prosperity were molding that culture into
its modern shape. The author's aim is to depict the
popular arts, identify and display the most prom-
inent varieties of the printed word, and suggest how
the American character revealed itself through its
cultural preferences. He finds four sets of qualities
manifested in the American character in this era: a
somewhat chauvinistic patriotism counterbalanced
by a reluctant belief in Europe's cultural superiority;
an aggressiveness, combined with optimism and rest-
lessness, which emphasized the importance of mate-
rial success; a religiosity evidenced by reverence for
the Bible, a revival of Puritanism, and a humani-
tarian zeal for reform; and a sentimental preoccupa-
tion with love, both romantic and filial.
1708. Churchill, Allen. The improper bohemians;
a re-creation of Greenwich Village in its hey-
day. New York, Dutton, 1959. 349 p. illus.
58-9604 Fi28.68.G8C45
Bibliography: p. 339-343.
Drawing on the personal reminiscences of sur-
vivors of the period, magazine articles, and some 50
retrospective books, the author has put together an
anecdotal account of Greenwich Village life from
1912 to 1930. This was the golden era when such
revolutionary magazines as The Masses, The Seven
Arts, and The Quill were born and flourished and
when Mrs. Mabel Dodge (later Mrs. Luhan of
Taos) played hostess to the Village intelligentsia,
whose names read like a who's who in American
art and letters for these years. The final chapter
describes the Village's rapid loss of artistic eminence
after 1930.
1709. Cleveland, Harlan, Gerard J. Mangone, and
John C. Adams. The overseas Americans.
New York, McGraw-Hill [1960] 316 p. (The
Carnegie series in American education)
60—10598 £169.1^56
A survey by three members of the Maxwell Grad-
uate School of Citizenship and Public Affairs of
Syracuse University, undertaken to assess the prob-
lems of overseas living confronting the more than a
million and a half American businessmen, mission-
aries, Armed Forces personnel, government employ-
ees, teachers, and students employed abroad. After
analyzing data collected from interviews with 244
Americans of various professions residing in six
foreign countries, the authors suggest five elements
pertinent to successful living abroad: technical skill,
belief in one's mission, cultural empathy, a sense of
politics, and organizing ability. The latter portion
of the book is devoted to an examination of defi-
ciencies and needed improvements in existing educa-
tional programs for prospective overseas Americans.
The lack of competence in foreign languages is
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY / 195
emphasized as a particularly serious and widespread
handicap; it is also desirable that Americans plan-
ning to be abroad should know their own country
well.
1710. Hofstadter, Richard. Social Darwinism in
American thought. Rev. ed. New York,
G. Braziller, 1959 [Ci955] 248 p.
59-9543 HM22.U5H6 1959
Bibliography: p. [205]— 216.
An updated edition of no. 3755 in the 1960 Guide.
1711. Kiger, Joseph C. American learned soci-
eties. Washington, Public Affairs Press
[1963] 291 p. 63—16497 AS25.K5
Bibliography: p. 246—261.
This study of the 60 foremost learned societies
and of four councils and five institutes (national
associations of related learned societies) in the United
States "is an attempt to set forth and interpret the
historical development of these organizations, pro-
vide a compendium on them [origins, purpose, his-
tory, organization, activities, publications, member-
ship, etc.], and to shed light on their operations
and relationships to each other and to other domes-
tic and international organizations concerned with
scientific and cultural advancement." The author
takes into account the changing roles of philan-
thropic foundations, government, industry, and uni-
versities as the societies' sources of financial support,
and he notes that a gradual broadening of scope
has led to widespread participation by the societies
in relevant international conferences and congresses
since World War II. In the final chapter, four ma-
jor future trends are predicted: an ever-increasing
involvement with international affairs; a growing
awareness that national needs must be served; agree-
ment on the necessity of greater financial support
from the Federal Government and from industry
for humanistic and social science societies and coun-
cils; and an increase in the number and scope of
organizations established for the purpose of bridg-
ing outmoded barriers between disciplines.
1712. Lipton, Lawrence. The holy barbarians.
New York, Messner [1959] 318 p. illus.
59-7135 £169.1.1.547
The author, who conducts a poetry and jazz
workshop in Venice, Calif., and who has associated
intimately with this particular "community of dis-
affiliates," has produced a sympathetic analysis of
beat life. By means of vivid dialogs and case his-
tories, Lipton reveals many aspects of the beat
generation's bizarre life and the beats' attitudes
toward love, sex, morals, art, music, literature, gov-
ernment, and drugs. He discusses some reasons for
196 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
their rebellion against a society which they regard
as dominated by materialism and militarism and
compares the present-day beats with the bohemians
of former eras. He concludes that "this is not just
another alienation. It is a deep-going change, a
revolution under the ribs."
1713. Parry, Albert. Garrets and pretenders; a
history of bohemianism in America. Rev.
ed. New York, Dover Publications [Ci96o] 422 p.
iilus. 61-549 PSi38.Ps 1960
Bibliography: p. 397-406.
A revised edition of no. 3757 in the 1960 Guide,
including a new introduction, addenda which serve
to correct or elaborate the original text, and two
additional chapters: "Greenwich Village Revisited:
1948," by the author, and "Enter Beatniks: the
Boheme of 1960," by Harry T. Moore.
1714. Wolfe, Don M. The image of man in
America. Dallas, Southern Methodist Uni-
versity Press [1957] 482 p.
57-14766 Ei69.i.W68
Bibliography: p. 441—462.
Discusses a variety of American answers to the
question of whether the environmental or the
genetic factor is dominant in shaping human na-
ture. The author does not attempt to prove or dis-
prove these theories but instead analyzes the views
of such writers as Jefferson, Emerson, Lincoln, Mark
Twain, William James, John Dewey, and Theodore
Dreiser and examines the social climates and per-
sonal backgrounds that gave rise to their beliefs.
D. Localities
1715. Davis, Richard Beale. Intellectual life of
Jefferson's Virginia, 1790-1830. Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press [1964]
507 p. 64-13548 F230.D3
"Bibliography and notes": p. [4391—482.
The author explores the reasons why the period
between 1790 and 1830 in what he calls Jefferson's
Virginia "held a political and intellectual primacy
which was acknowledged and often envied by her
sister states and indeed by much of the European
world." Born to privileges, the Virginia planter
was required by his code of conduct to have .the
ability to dance, to fence, to know Latin and Greek,
to be well grounded in the classics, and to be con-
versant in the theories of law and government.
Reared under the concept of noblesse oblige, he oc-
cupied a social position that exacted the acceptance
of civic responsibilities. He was interested in good
architecture, fine furniture, religion, educating his
children, and collecting books. He was especially
interested in good government. With his fellow
ferson Image in the American Mind (New York,
Oxford University Press, 1960. 548 p.), by Merrill
D. Peterson, is a scholarly treatment of a century of
interpretation, misinterpretation, and reinterpreta-
Virginians he was prompted to fulfill the destiny
for which the forefathers had sacrificed. The Jef-
tion of Jefferson's ideas and of how they have af-
fected his image and American intellectual develop-
ment from the time of his death through the 1930'$.
1716. Eaton, Clement. The freedom-of-thought
struggle in the Old South. New York, Har-
per & Row [1964] xiii, 418 p. ill us. (Harper
torchbooks. The Academy library, TB 1150)
65—321 F2O9.Ei5 1964
Bibliographical footnotes.
A new edition of no. 3766 in the 1960 Guide,
with a modified title, a new preface, and three
chapters added on censorship of the mails, freedom
of conscience in politics, and American nationalists
in the prewar South.
E. International Influences: General
1717. Boorstin, Daniel J. America and the image
of Europe: reflections on American thought.
New York, Meridian Books [1960] 192 p. (Me-
ridian books, M8g) 60-6769 £169.1.675
Eight essays treating the misconceptions which
Americans harbor about their relationship to Euro-
pean culture, their history, and their national char-
acter. Boorstin is concerned with showing what is
unique and distinct about the United States. He
contends that Americans should stop judging their
culture by decreasingly relevant European stan-
dards and should instead view themselves in the
perspective of the non-European civilizations of
Asia and Africa, in order to present a clearer image
of their country to themselves and to the world.
1718. Jones, Howard Mumford. O strange new
world; American culture: the formative
years. New York, Viking Press [1964] xiv, 464 p.
illus. 64-15062 £169.1.7644 1964
"Reference notes": p. 397—449.
Awarded the 1965 Pulitzer Prize in the general
nonfiction category, this book is the first of a pro-
jected two-volume study of the effect of the Old
World civilizations on the New. Beginning with
Christopher Columbus' first report from the Nina
in 1493 and continuing to the 1840*5, the author
traces European influences on the development of
American culture. "The Old World projected into
the New a rich, complex, and contradictory set of
habits, forces, practices, values, and presuppositions;
and the New World accepted, modified, or rejected
these or fused them with inventions of its own."
Tones marshals large bodies of detailed information
in illustration of a wide range of provocative ideas.
Reviewing the economic, political, religious, literary,
artistic, and sociological aspects of the classical
Greek and Roman civilizations, he relates them to
the Spanish, English, Dutch, Portuguese, German,
and French cultures which contributed to the Amer-
ican mind.
1719. Joseph, Franz M., ed. As others see us; the
United States through foreign eyes. With
contributions by Raymond Aron [and others]
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY / 197
Princeton, N.J., Princeton University Press, 1959.
360 p. 59-13872 £169.1. J67
These essays by visitors from 20 nations on five
continents resulted from a project of the American
European Foundation and were written more or
less simultaneously in 1957. Each author seeks to
convey his impressions of the United States and to
relate them to the image of this country which is
generally held by his countrymen. The depth and
perceptive qualities of the analyses are uneven and
there is a remarkable sameness in much of the
commentary, but valuable questions are posed, in-
sights into our national character are offered, and
the impact of modern America on these writers and
their countries is illustrated.
1720. Skard, Sigmund. The American myth and
the European mind; American studies in
Europe, 1776—1960. Philadelphia, University of
Pennsylvania Press [1961] 112 p. (Studies in
American civilization) 61—15199 £175.8.864
Four lectures which summarize and comment
upon the author's two-volume American Studies in
Europe: Their History and Present Organization
(Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press,
1958), cited on page 1081 in the 1960 Guide. He
divides his subject into four periods, ending with
1865, 1918, 1945, and 1960, respectively, and in each
describing the major developments in writing about
America and the teaching of American subjects in
the several European nations and concluding each
chapter with thumbnail sketches of representative
figures such as Johan Kortiim, M. Y. Ostrogorsky,
and Charles Cestre. He stresses the degree to which
radical or conservative sentiment has determined
the fortunes of the subject and shows how American
studies have been a symbolic issue in the efforts of
European minds to transcend traditionalism and
understand the modern world and their place in it.
F. International Influences: By Country
1721. Chisolm, Lawrence W. Fenollosa: the Far
East and American culture. New Haven,
Yale University Press, 1963. 297 p. (Yale publica-
tions in American studies, 8)
63-17024 N8375.F375C5
Bibliography: p. [ 2553-277.
The author has written the first full-length biog-
raphy of Ernest Francisco Fenollosa (1853-1908),
philosopher, historian, and reforming prophet, who
"searched the cultures of East and West for the
outlines of an emerging world civilization." After
interpreting Japanese art to the Japanese while
resident professor of Western philosophy, Fenollosa
returned to the United States to interpret Far
Eastern civilization to Westerners and to work vig-
orously toward the fusion of East and West. Con-
sidered the world's leading authority on the history
of Japanese art, he is remembered by art historians
for his pioneer Far Eastern studies; in literary
circles for his influence, as a translator of Chinese
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
poetry and Japanese drama, on Ezra Pound and
William Butler Yeats; and by museum curators for
his role in developing the Freer collections now in
the Smithsonian Institution. He taught Confucius'
theory of the fundamental relation of art to char-
acter and to the state: "to keep the soul free through
art."
1722. Thistlethwaite, Frank. The Anglo-Ameri-
can connection in the early nineteenth
century. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania
Press [1959] 222 p. (Dept. of American Civiliza-
tion, Graduate School of Arts and Sciences,
University of Pennsylvania. Studies in American
civilization) 57~ir957 £183.8.07X4
Based on lectures delivered at the University of
Pennsylvania while the author was visiting profes-
sor of American civilization, this volume explores
the economic, political, social, educational, and hu-
manitarian interrelationships between Britain and
the United States which bound the two countries
into a closely tied "Atlantic community" between
the Peace of Ghent and the American Civil War.
This interchange of goods, ideas, and people flour-
ished despite the conspicuous animosities on the
political level. The author notes, however, that the
connection was limited in America to the Northern
States and in Britain to the elements seeking to
overturn the establishment and that it disappeared
as a result of the vast displacement of forces brought
about by the Civil War.
XII
Local History: Regions, States, and Cities
A. General Worths , Including Series
B. New England: General
C. New England: Local
D. The Middle Atlantic States
E. The South: General
F. The South Atlantic States: Local
G. The Old Southwest: General
H. The Old Southwest: Local
I. The Old Northwest: General
}. The Old Northwest: Local
K. The Far West
L. The Great Plains: General
M. The Great Plains: Local
N. TheRocf(y Mountain Region: General
O. The Roct(y Mountain Region: Local
P. The Far Southwest: General
Q. The Far Southwest: Local
R. California
S. The Pacific Northwest: General
T. The Pacific Northwest: Local
U. Alaska and Hawaii
V. Overseas Possessions
1723—1726
1727-1728
1729-1737
1760-1772
1 773-i 78 1
1782-1785
1786-1795
1796—1801
1802—1809
1810—1825
1826-1829
1830—1835
1836-1838
1847-1848
1849—1856
1857-1862
1863-1865
1866-1868
1869-1871
1872-1874
THE EFFLORESCENCE of local and regional history is one of the most striking developments in
the field of historical writing during the period under review. As the production of
large-scale general studies has declined, regional history in particular has attracted the interests
of writers and provided them with a forum for a variety of special interests. (The movement
away from comprehensive national histories has been remarked in the introduction to Chapter
VIII, where it is noted that the mounting array and diversity of source materials increasingly
recommends the smaller unit of history and the
application. Similarly, academic historians are find-
ing an inexhaustible mine of neglected problems
and forgotten data as subjects for scholarly research.
Further, the resources of regional history offer a
convenient testing site for the resolution of a prob-
selective view.)
As this generation proceeds to explore and rein-
terpret the elements of American growth and civili-
zation, it is carefully choosing its ground. The
unexplored areas of local development and the more
familiar territory of sectional controversy both pro-
vide manageable targets for the revisionists and may
be examined in isolation or as a pattern for wider
lem that is affecting the historian with increasing
urgency: the need to evaluate the contribution of
the social sciences to historical inquiry. The reac-
199
200 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
dons of professional historians range from defensive
skepticism to wholehearted acceptance of the demo-
graphic probes, statistical methods, and behavioral
studies that appear in carefully selected and con-
trolled areas of investigation.
Whether these activities are pursued for their
own sake or are the logical— perhaps inevitable —
extension of the historian's craft, they add to the
total experience and understanding, and, in the proc-
ess, local and regional history become at once the
source and the consumer of an expanding accumu-
lation of historical knowledge. Somewhat paradox-
ically, at a time of increasing specialization in
historical scholarship, the scope of local and espe-
cially regional studies is being extended. Old
geographical boundaries become less confining and
political boundaries less meaningful as common
cultural, economic, ethnic, historical, and social
factors are assembled to plot an area distinct in
itself. Just as the county has all but lost its signifi-
cance for some types of study, so the history of
States has assumed additional dimensions. Seldom
does an author's preface in a modern State history
fail to indicate that he has attempted to relate the
internal affairs of his subject with the larger issues
of national development.
The many adjacent areas between the pursuits
of local and national history indicate a greater
mutual contribution than is perhaps immediately
apparent. The integrity of this exchange depends
ultimately on the vision, skill, and purposes of the
individual historian. And, in this regard, the selec-
tions that follow here offer considerable promise.
More and more, the field is being populated with
prominent and established historians, social scien-
tists, journalists, and other writers, who are proving
that history can be both popular and accurate and
that, in the confluence of many disciplines and in
concert with the literary and pictorial arts, oppor-
tunities for variety in selection, approach, and pre-
sentation are virtually endless.
This aspect of a rapidly expanding branch of
history inevitably caused difficulties in the compila-
tion of the present chapter. With traditional divi-
sions of labor falling into disregard and new
guidelines scarcely envisaged by the profession itself,
the categorization of books becomes almost arbi-
trary. Tides immediately betray the calculated vio-
lations of disciplinary lines. Period studies often
achieve significance by virtue of their regional
importance. The problem of determining whether
a closely focused study is to be classified as local,
general, intellectual, economic, or social history, or
as one of a number of other categories, can often
be decided only on the basis of the author's declared
intent. Works on local history may therefore be
found elsewhere in this Supplement, in topical
chapters more appropriate to their special emphases.
Overseas Possessions, Section U in the 1960 Guide,
has been changed to Section V in the Supplement
in order to make room for a new Section U, cover-
ing Alaska and Hawaii.
A. General Works, Including Series
1723. American guide series. [Compiled and writ-
ten by the Federal Writers' Project and the
Writers' Program] 1936-43. 155 v.
Entry no. 3786 in the 1960 Guide describes the
compilation of this series; the volumes are listed as
no. 3787-3941, with new editions and reprints
substituted for original publications. Two substan-
tially revised editions which have appeared since
1955 are entered below as no. 1724 and 1725.
1724. Oklahoma; a guide to the Sooner State,
compiled by Kent Ruth and the staff of the
University of Oklahoma Press, with articles by lead-
ing authorities and photographic sections arranged
by J. Eldon Peek. [Rev. ed.J Norman, University
of Oklahoma Press [1957] xxxv, 532 p. illus.
57-7333 F694.R8
Bibliography: p. 504—511.
A revised edition of no. 3908 in the 1960 Guide.
1725. New Mexico; a guide to the colorful State.
Compiled by workers of the Writers' Pro-
gram of the Work Projects Administration in the
State of New Mexico. New and completely revised
edition by Joseph Miller; edited by Henry G. Als-
berg. New York, Hastings House, 1962. xxxii,
472 p. illus. 62-53065 F794-3.W7 1962
Bibliography: p. 436—440.
A revised edition of no. 3924 in the 1960 Guide.
1726. The Rivers of America; as planned and
started by Constance Lindsay Skinner [vari-
ous editors] New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston,
'937-[65] 56 v.
LOCAL HISTORY: REGIONS, STATES, AND CITIES / 201
For a description of this scries, a listing of 51
volumes, and an identification of editors, see no.
3969-4025 in the 1960 Guide. Carl Carmer, who
edited the last seven volumes entered in the Guide,
has continued as the series editor. The volumes
issued before 1962 bear the imprint of Rinehart as
publisher; thereafter the name is Holt, Rinehart &
Winston. Volumes appearing since 1955 include
The Genesee ([1963] 338 p. 63-12079 Fi27.-
G2C5), by Henry W. Clune; The St. Croix: Mid-
west Border River ([1965] 309 p. 65-14452
F6i2.S2D78), by James Taylor Dunn; The Merri-
mac\ ([1958] 306 p. 58-10701 F72.M6H6), by
Raymond P. Holden; The Minnesota: forgotten
River ([1962] 306 p. 62-8340 F6i2.M4J6), by
Evan Jones; and The Cape Fear ([1965] 340 p.
65-22461 F262.C2R6), by Malcolm H. Ross.
B. New England: General
1727. Dodge, Ernest S. New England and the
South Seas. Cambridge, Mass., Harvard
University Press, 1965. xv, 216 p. illus.
65-19823 DU28.3.D6
Bibliography: p. 199—204.
The director of the Peabody Museum of Salem
employs the resources of his institution's distin-
guished collection and that of the Essex Institute to
sketch the history of Yankee trade in the Pacific
during the i9th century. Based on a series of
lectures delivered in 1962 at the Lowell Institute,
Boston, the book is devoted primarily to the open-
ing of the South Seas trade by the merchants and
seamen of Massachusetts and Connecticut and to the
dissemination of Yankee products and civilization
throughout the South Pacific islands. Emphasizing
"the common facets of New England and South
Sea history, and the economic, cultural, religious,
and political effect of the one region upon the other
— but especially of Yankee influence in the Pacific,"
the author traces the continuing impact of mission-
ary zeal, the political influence of commercial agents,
and the mutual legacy of native and New England
artifacts. Selections drawn primarily from the same
Massachusetts collections have been edited by Nor-
man R. Bennett and George E. Brooks in New
England Merchants in Africa; a History Through
Documents, 1802 to 1865 ([Brookline, Mass.] Bos-
ton University Press, 1965. 576 p. Boston Univer-
sity. African research studies, no. 7).
1728. Holbrook, Stewart H. The Old Post Road;
the story of the Boston Post Road. New
York, McGraw-Hill [1962] 273 p. illus. (Ameri-
can trails series) 62—9989 F5-H6
Bibliography: p. 261—263.
An affectionate and nostalgic "account of selected
places, people, things, and events which seem to
have been of some special significance in the life of
the first post road in the present United States."
Beginning with the first post rider who was dis-
patched from New York on January 22, 1673, and
reached Boston on February 5, the historical and
geographical milestones of early New England
coach travel are traced through four States. In
reality, three post roads branched off at New Haven
to proceed independently to Boston. The original,
or Old Boston Post Road, went by way of Hartford,
Springfield, and Worcester; the Lower Road led
through New London, Bristol, and Attleboro; and
the Middle Road forked at Hartford past Coventry,
Pomfret, and Uxbridge. On the basis of his own
travels and local inquiry, the author takes the reader
over each, stage by stage, in the manner of a
historical and biographical Baedeker.
C. New England: Local
NEW HAMPSHIRE AND VERMONT
1729. Hill, Ralph Nading. Yankee kingdom : Ver-
mont and New Hampshire. Illustrations by
George Daly. New York, Harper [1960] 338 p.
(A Regions of America book) 60—7529 F49.H555
Bibliography: p. 311—324.
The author takes exception to Arnold Toynbee's
dismissal of this northeast corner of the United
States as beyond the line of optimum response and
2O2 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
as populated with "certain woodmen, watermen,
and hunters." Hill sets out to establish that the
region not only has bred some rather singular
qualities in its inhabitants, but has also supplied a
high percentage of remarkable figures whose influ-
ence has been felt far beyond its borders. There fol-
lows a series of pointed biographical sketches of such
men as Daniel Webster, Horace Greeley, Stephen A.
Douglas, Franklin Pierce, and Thaddeus Stevens
within the context of the historical, geographical,
and social milieu from which they emerged. A
particular merit of the work is in the author's
unusual selection of his material. Something, for
example, of the laconic quality of the legendary
Yankee is evident in his portrayal of the religious
independence of the region through incisive ac-
counts of the Shaker society and the career of Mary
Baker Eddy.
MASSACHUSETTS
1730. Howe, Henry F. Massachusetts: there she
is — behold her. Illustrations and maps by
John O'Hara Cosgrave II. New York, Harper
[1960] 290 p. (A Regions of America book)
60-13447 F64.H75
Bibliography: p. 269—277.
With pride and a measure of nostalgia, a
physician-historian offers a social and economic ac-
count of the State. Written for the general reader,
the story is told through a selection of "typical
incidents and general discussion of characteristic
problems in each period." Massachusetts' participa-
tion in the Nation's affairs is presented largely
through notes on the lives of its great leaders; the
democratic virtues of its local government are con-
sidered in relation to the tradition of the town
meeting. Howe's perspective is extensive, and he
is at ease in dealing with the i7th and i8th cen-
turies. He deplores the impact of urbanization and
suburbanization on the Yankee smalltown culture.
A studied corrective to the Boston-dominated his-
tories of the State, his wider view embraces the
local self-education and self-government and the
economic arrangements of the peripheral areas: the
south coast, western Massachusetts, and the Con-
necticut valley.
1731. Kirker, Harold, and James Kirker. Bui-
finch's Boston, 1787-1817. New York, Ox-
ford University Press, 1964. 305 p. illus.
64—24862 F73.44-K.5
"Bibliographical notes": p. 275—298.
When Charles Bulfinch sailed for his grand
European tour in 1785, not a single important
building had been constructed in Boston for the
previous 25 years. Thirty years later, according to
the authors, it was "the most perfect architectural
city in the nation." This is the story of the archi-
tectural transformation of Boston in the Federal
period and of one man's involvement in its local
affairs for three decades. A product of the aristo-
cratic Province House set — Palladian in taste and
Royalist in sentiment— Bulfinch brought the neo-
classical revival from the London of Robert Adam
and the Whig aristocrats. The loss of his own
fortune was the origin of his participation and
leadership— as chairman of the Board of Selectmen
and as chief of police — in the politics, society, plan-
ning, and education, as well as in the artistic develop-
ment, of Boston. The measure of his achievement
is in his ability to translate the new architectural
form, along with his own vision and taste, into a
style appropriate for the meager circumstance and
reluctant atmosphere of the small colonial town
then dominated by the commercial Essex Junto.
1732. Whitehill, Walter Muir. Boston, a topo-
graphical history. Cambridge, Belknap Press
of Harvard University Press, 1959. xxix, 244 p.
illus. 59-12978 F73-3-W57
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. [2071-233).
A series of eight lectures delivered in 1958 by
the director and librarian of the Boston Athenaeum.
The author traces the physical evolution and archi-
tectural growth of Boston from its founding in
1630 to the present. The illustrations — maps, draw-
ings, prints, and photographs — were chosen pri-
marily to explain this process of change. The
designs of Charles Bulfinch receive special attention.
The author has also written Boston: Portrait of a
City (Barre, Mass., Barre Publishers, 1964. 112 p.),
illustrated with Katharine Knowles' photographs of
the city's present-day appearance in all seasons.
RHODE ISLAND
1733. Coleman, Peter J. The transformation of
Rhode Island, 1790—1860. Providence, Brown
University Press, 1963. xiv, 314 p. illus.
63—14420 F83-C6
Bibliographical footnotes.
On the basis of a thorough demographic analysis,
Coleman identifies the central factor in Rhode
Island's history as the "extraordinary disparity from
one town to another." Anchoring his interpreta-
tions in the locally diverse reaction to changing con-
ditions, he traces the State's transformation from a
maritime to an industrial society. In the colonial
period, he notes, a severely limited area, a peculiar
pattern of population development, and a restricted
LOCAL HISTORY: REGIONS, STATES, AND CITIES / 203
agricultural potential forced the people to wrest a
livelihood from the sea. Early in the i9th century a
manufacturing economy began to emerge. The
entrepreneurial class, despite its reputation for sharp-
ish, even piratical, business practices, is credited
with having responded creatively to the challenge of
declining sea trade. By 1860, Rhode Island was
the most highly industrialized State in the Union.
Numerous tables and maps fortify the author's
statistical approach and deliberately narrow treat-
ment.
1734. Lippincott, Bertram. Indians, privateers,
and high society; a Rhode Island sampler.
Philadelphia, Lippincott [1961] 301 p. illus.
61-8683 F79-L5
Bibliography: p. 289—294.
"Little Rhode Island packs more bizarre and in-
credible history per square foot than any other
state in the Union." Lippincott's historical sketches
"attempt to give highlights and sidelights on the
career of this hectic little state, from the earliest
times to the present." He has assembled a collec-
tion of episodes that serve to reinforce his view of
Rhode Island's singular development. His style is
informal and his selections are governed by an
ironic humor and a sense of the dramatic.
CONNECTICUT
1735. Van Dusen, Albert E. Connecticut. New
York, Random House [1961] 470 p.
61—6263 F94.V3
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 421-461).
A general history written by the State historian
at the request of the State Library Committee.
Surveying a period of 325 years, it begins with the
persecution of the Puritans in England and the
emigration of Thomas Hooker and his followers to
the New World and concludes with the economic
and industrial expansion occurring after World
War II. The arrangement is chronological, and
the treatment balances political, economic, and
social aspects. The author traces the strong spirit
of self-reliance and independence that characterized
the founding of the theocratic colonies along the
Connecticut River and that is manifest in the politi-
cal behavior of the modern State. A generous
selection of contemporary illustrations accompanies
the text.
MAINE
1736. Rich, Louise Dickinson. The coast of
Maine, an informal history. Rev. ed. New
York, Cro well [1962] 340 p. illus.
62—12804 Fi9-R5 1962
17363. Morison, Samuel Eliot. The story of
Mount Desert Island, Maine. Boston, Lit-
tle, Brown [1960] 81 p. ilius.
60-9352 F27.M9M6
Originally published in 1956, Mrs. Rich's re-
vised and enlarged volume is a modern guidebook
as well as a light, anecdotal, historical narrative.
Her material on the coastal towns, islands, and re-
sorts of Maine has been selected with an eye for
the eccentric and the picturesque and is presented
with a frank, warm, personal attachment. She
begins with the earliest prehistoric formation of the
region and thereafter becomes chiefly concerned
with latter-day rusticators and the beauty and
charm of coastal living accumulated and preserved
to the present time. Similar in approach; Morison's
The Story of Mount Desert Island, Maine is a short,
informal history and personal reminiscence of life
— mostly summer life — on the rocky island at the
mouth of the Penobscot River. As the author
indicates, his small book is a labor of love. The
island's varied inhabitants are described with a wit
and amiability usually reserved for friends and
neighbors.
1737. Rich, Louise Dickinson. State o' Maine.
Illustrations by Aldren A. Watson. New
York, Harper & Row [1964] xvi, 302 p. (Regions
of America) 64—12679 F 19^52
Bibliography: p. 291—292.
A history of Maine as a way of life emerging
from the remote and unique environment. Maine
was a province for a considerably longer period of
time than it has been a State, and fully half the
book is devoted to this prolonged formative period.
For many facets of Maine life, the characteristics of
this period have continued into statehood. The
author probes the thin layer of modernity to expose
the rough-hewn qualities that persist today. There
are few commercial statistics, and scant attention is
given to urban development, closely fought elections,
or machine politics. Instead, the broad currents of
historical development — or lack of it — are traced
against the larger movements of the world outside.
In an uneven topical arrangement, which in each
case goes back to beginnings, the effects of geog-
raphy, climate, occupation, and hoary tradition upon
the singular deportment of the inhabitants are de-
scribed and illustrated.
2O4 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
D. The Middle Atlantic States
NEW YORK
1738. Carmer, Carl L., ed. The tavern lamps are
burning; literary journeys through six re-
gions and four centuries of New York State. New
York, D. McKay Co. [1964] xix, 567 p. illus.
64-13201 PS548.N7C3
A personal literary anthology that is unusual in
its scope and design and in the experience and
authority of its editor. Carmer has devoted the
greater part of his own study and writings to Ameri-
can regional history and to the history of New York
State in particular. That "Upstate" New York
possesses a unique quality has long been contended
by many of its residents. Partly in an effort to prove
this point, Carmer here presents a collection of
imaginative writings — fiction, nonfiction, and verse
— culled from his own wide reading on the subject.
The selections are grouped according to six geo-
graphical areas and arranged chronologically within
each group. The use of the term "literary journeys"
in the volume's subtide is amply justified; included
are pieces by Washington Irving, James Fenimore
Cooper, William Cullen Bryant, Edna St. Vincent
Millay, Francis Parkman, Herman Melville, Na-
thaniel Hawthorne, Theodore Dreiser, and Mark
Twain, among many others.
1739. Ellis, David M., and others. A short history
of New York State. Ithaca, N.Y. Pub-
lished in co-operation with the New York State
Historical Association by Cornell University Press
[1957] 705 p. 57-4J53 Fii9.E46
A well-balanced and closely knit summary of
State history since 1609, prepared over a lo-year
period by four New York scholars. Coauthors with
Ellis are James A. Frost, Harold C. Syrett, and
Harry J. Carman. Book i, divided into three time
periods, tells the story of New York to 1865. Book
2, covering the years since the Civil War, is organ-
ized into three topical divisions, political, economic,
and cultural, among which the division on economic
growth is the longest. The volume has an exten-
sive critical bibliographical essay (p. 655-690).
1740. Gordon, John, and L. Rust Hills, eds. New
York, New York; the city as seen by masters
of art and literature. New York, Shorecrest
[1965] 403 p. 65-23717 PS509.N5G6
More than 100 paintings, watercolors, and draw-
ings of New York City scenes have been selected by
John Gordon, curator of the Whitney Museum of
American Art; many are presented in color.
Although they are chosen for their intrinsic worth,
their chronological arrangement indicates an evolu-
tion not only of form but of artistic perception and
temperament. The progression from an early wood
engraving to abstract painting includes the romantic,
the impressionist, and the surrealist. In his selec-
tion of short stories by a group of well-known
American writers, L. Rust Hills, fiction editor for
the Saturday Evening Post, illustrates a number of
common themes evoked by life in the big city.
Behind the variety of mood and approach he finds
a recurring emphasis, for example, on the discrep-
ancies that emerge between dream and reality and
between the hope of freedom and opportunity and
the actuality of loneliness and indifference.
1741. McKelvey, Blake. Rochester: an emerging
metropolis, 1925—1961. Rochester, N.Y.,
Christopher Press, 1961. 404 p. illus. (Rochester
Public Library. Kate Gleason Fund publications.
Publication 4) 61-18763 Fi29-R7M228
Few cities in the United States have been studied
as carefully by a reliable scholar as has Rochester.
This volume concludes McKelvey's four-volume ac-
count. The first three are no. 4050—4052 in the
1960 Guide. In his preface the author warns readers
not to be misled by the tide: he has not attempted,
as one might expect, a synthetic study of the nature
and evolution of a metropolis. His purpose, he
insists, is to present a "biographical review of the
experiences of a particular community in the throes
of such a transformation." The dividing line is a
thin one, however, and he deliberately steps across
it in the fifth and concluding part of the book,
where he discusses Rochester's attainment of metro-
politan economy, government, and culture.
NEW JERSEY
1742. The New Jersey historical series. Edited by
Richard M. Huber [and] Wheaton J. Lane.
Princeton, N. J., Van Nostrand, 1964-65. 31 v.
This series was conceived by a committee of Jer-
seymen— Julian P. Boyd, Wesley Frank Craven,
John T. Cunningham, David S. Davies, and Rich-
ard P. McCormick — and published under the aus-
pices of the New Jersey Tercentenary Commission.
Twenty-six numbered volumes and five supplements
had appeared by the end of 1965. Issued at a rapid
LOCAL HISTORY: REGIONS, STATES, AND CITIES / 205
rate, the series contains both chronological surveys
and topical studies. Two major themes are com-
mon to almost all of the volumes: the elements of
unity in the historical development of an otherwise
heterogeneous population and the special identity
of New Jersey as separate from New York and
Pennsylvania. Seven of the more general historical
works are no. 1743 through 1749 below.
1743. (Vol. i) McCormick, Richard P. New
Jersey from Colony to State, 1609-1789.
1964. xv, 191 p. illus. 64-17954 Fi37.M2
"Bibliographical note": p. 176—178.
A general survey of State history from Hudson's
voyage of discovery through the ratification of the
Federal Constitution.
1744. (Vol. 2) Miers, Earl Schenck, ed. New
Jersey and the Civil War: an album of con-
temporary accounts. 1964. 135 p. illus.
64-2652 E52I.M5
Collected from letters, diaries, newspapers, and
other sources, this work begins with Lincoln's visit
to New Jersey as President-elect in February 1861
and concludes with a New Jersey officer's description
of the tragedy at Ford's Theater.
1745. (Vol. 3) Craven, Wesley Frank. New
Jersey and the English colonization of North
America. 1964. 114 p. illus.
64-2612 Fi37.C896
"Bibliographical note": p. 103—108.
The founding of East and West New Jersey is
discussed in relation to the history of the middle
Colonies and England's developing interest in
North America.
1746. (Vol. 9) Pomfret, John E. The New Jer-
sey proprietors and their lands, 1664—1776.
1964. xviii, 135 p. illus. 64-7009 Fi37.P72
"Bibliographical note": p. 124—128.
Relates the essentially feudal character of the
proprietary land system to the persistent and con-
tinuing struggle by the colonists to preserve their
local assemblies, courts, and rights of protest and
petition.
1747. (Vol. 10) Leiby, Adrian C. The early
Dutch and Swedish settlers of New Jersey.
1964. xiv, 139 p. illus. 64—22336 Fi45-D9L4
"Bibliographical note": p. 122—129.
The Dutch and Swedish did not settle in New
Jersey until after the advent of British rule and
came from other Colonies in America rather than
from overseas. The origins of their communities
are discussed, therefore, within the context of the
history of New Netherland and New Sweden.
1748. (Vol. n) Bill, Alfred Hoyt. New Jersey
and the Revolutionary War. 1964. 117 p.
illus. 64-23965 £263^565
Bibliography: p. 106—109.
An appraisal of the contribution of this bitterly
and almost equally divided State (the "cockpit of
the Revolution") amid the pressures and conflicting
loyalties of its neighbors.
J749- (v°l- 21 ) Burr, Nelson R. A narrative
and descriptive bibliography of New Jersey.
1964. xxii, 266 p. illus. 65-862 21313.68
This bibliography is drawn from the Library of
Congress catalogs, periodical indexes, abstracts of
dissertations, Writings on American History, and
the bibliographies in general histories. The author
sets these references in a running commentary,
which might stand alone as a brief history of the
State.
1750. Pomfret, John E. The Province of West
New Jersey, 1609—1702; a history of the
origins of an American colony. Princeton, N. J.,
Princeton University Press, 1956. xii, 298 p. (The
Princeton history of New Jersey series)
55-6700 Fi37.P74
Bibliographical footnotes.
1751. Pomfret, John E. The Province of East
New Jersey, 1609—1702, the rebellious pro-
prietary. Princeton, N. J., Princeton University
Press, 1962. x, 407 p. (The Princeton history of
New Jersey series) 62—7045 Fi 37^73
Bibliographical footnotes.
Devoting a separate volume to each of the two
setdements that were united by the Crown in 1702,
Pomfret emphasizes their individual historical iden-
tities. The West Jersey proprietary, a Quaker col-
ony, developed with deliberation and in relative
tranquility. It remained essentially a rural society,
based upon the family unit, with a simple system of
land tenure. Individual farms were widely dis-
persed and government was diffused. The West
Jerseymen had more in common with their Quaker
neighbors in Pennsylvania than with their partners
to the east. By sharp contrast, East Jersey was com-
posed of a heterogeneous population compactly set-
tled in townships where local government, influenced
by Puritan and Calvinist religious views, was cen-
tered. The two areas suffered in common a period
of slow growth, imposed largely by the uncertain-
ties and contradictions within the proprietary sys-
tem. The union resulting from the surrender of
proprietary charters in 1702 was far from complete.
West Jersey was largely a part of the hinterland of
2O6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Philadelphia, and East Jersey was dominated by the
port of New York.
PENNSYLVANIA
1752. Burt, Nathaniel. The perennial Philadel-
phians; the anatomy of an American aristoc-
racy. Boston, Little, Brown [1963] xiv, 625 p.
illus. 63-14956 Fi58.3.B97
Bibliography: p. 604—608.
This book "does not pretend to be a full-length
study or portrait," the author insists. "This particu-
lar portrait is of the head only— of Philadelphia's
upper class; a head of such importance in the city
that the portrait turns out to be a rather elaborate
one. It can be justified on the assumption that
Philadelphia, even more than most places, is char-
acterized and dominated by its head — that is, its
upper class, the 'Old Philadelphians'; what they
are, how they got that way. But it is not a thesis;
it is not meant to prove or demonstrate, merely to
present, to introduce." The author, a novelist and
poet, portrays this social oligarchy in all its charm
and parochialism and with its "tinge of decadence."
1753. Lorant, Stefan, ed. Pittsburgh; the story of
an American city. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday [1964] 520 p.
64-23508 Fi59.P6L68
Bibliography: p. 507-512.
CONTENTS. — Forts in the wilderness, by Henry
Steele Com mager.— Gateway to the West, by Stefan
Lorant. — The city grows, by Oscar Handlin.— The
Civil War and its aftermath, by J. Cutler Andrews.
— The hearth of the Nation, by Sylvester K. Stev-
ens.— Problems of labor, by Henry David.— The
entrepreneurs, by John Morton Blum.— The muck-
raking era, by Gerald W. Johnson. — Between two
wars, by Stefan Lorant.— Rebirth, by David L.
Lawrence (as told to John P. Robin and Stefan
Lorant).
The editor devoted 10 years to collecting the
more than a thousand illustrations — reproducing
maps, sketches, contemporary prints and photo-
graphs, and original art work— and has brought
together a group of contributors whose combined
chapters form a unified history of the city. A 50-
page chronology of events, compiled by Mel Seiden-
berg, Lois Mulkearn, and James W. Hess, con-
cludes the volume.
1754. O'Meara, Walter. Guns at the forks. En-
glewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall [1965]
275 p. illus. (The American forts series)
65-12921 Fi59.P604
Bibliography: p. 259-263.
On the site of today's "Golden Triangle" in Pitts-
burgh, Fort Duquesne and then Fort Pitt guarded
three river routes of frontier travel: the Allegheny,
connecting with Lake Erie by way of a chain of
French forts; the Monongahela, leading toward the
Potomac Valley; and the Ohio, opening to the
Mississippi and the wide frontier beyond. O'Meara's
book is an account of the part these forts played
in the French and British colonial rivalry during
the French and Indian War (Seven Years' War).
The story begins in 1753 with young Major George
Washington's mission demanding a peaceful depar-
ture of all French from the Ohio. Most of the nar-
rative thereafter concerns the immediate conse-
quences of that ultimatum within a limited area.
The shifting fortunes of small armies reach a cli-
max with the victory of British troops under Col.
Henry Bouquet at the Battle of Bushy Run in 1760.
An epilogue briefly traces the history of Fort Pitt
from the end of the war to the present.
1755. Stevens, Sylvester K. Pennsylvania, birth-
place of a nation. New York, Random
House [1964] 399 p. illus. 64—18930 Fi49.S77
"What to read about Pennsylvania": p. 379—390.
The executive director of the Pennsylvania His-
torical and Museum Commission, a former State
historian, wrote this volume to meet his State's
need for a "good and sound history." Earlier his-
torical surveys of Pennsylvania, including his own
lengthy work, Pennsylvania, the Keystone State
(New York, American Historical Co. [1956] 2 v.),
were viewed by the author as inadequate. In the
new study, Stevens places major emphasis upon the
Pennsylvania story since 1865; three chapters center
on the history of the State since 1900. The discus-
sion covers the "growth and even the temporary
decline of the economy of Pennsylvania," as well as
social and cultural affairs. The text is extensively
illustrated, and the appendix contains a detailed
chronology, a historical sketch of Pennsylvania coun-
ties, a list of State executives, and a bibliographical
essay. Stevens also served as coeditor, with Donald
H. Kent, of the Historical and Museum Commis-
sion's Bibliography of Pennsylvania History, 2d ed.
(Harrisburg, 1957. 826 p.), compiled by Norman
B. Wilkinson. Also written for the general reader
by another member of the commission, Paul A. W.
Wallace's Pennsylvania: Seed of a Nation (New
York, Harper & Row [1962] 322 p. A Regions
of America book) is a history of the State from its
geological beginnings to the present.
LOCAL HISTORY: REGIONS, STATES, AND CITIES / 207
DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA
1756. Aikman, Lonnelle. We, the people; the
story of the United States Capitol, its past
and its promise. [3d ed.] Washington, United
States Capitol Historical Society, 1965. 143 p.
65—20721 F204-C2A45 1965
17563. The White House; an historic guide.
Washington, White House Historical As-
sociation, 1962. 129 p. 62—18058 F204-W5W6
We, the People, which has an introduction by
Allan Nevins, is the story of the building and site
where Congress meets. Through the generous use
of illustrations and the words of eminent law-
makers, the Capitol is presented as a continuing
inspiration and a "symbol in stone of the success of
our republic." The White House is the first official
guidebook to the Executive Mansion. Mrs. John N.
Pearce, curator of the White House, wrote the text
and selected the illustrations. Mrs. Jacqueline Ken-
nedy states in the foreword that the guidebook was
originally planned for children, but "as research
went on and so many little-known facts were
gleaned from forgotten papers, it was decided to
make it a book that could be of profit to adults and
scholars also." Both these volumes were published
in cooperation with the National Geographic So-
ciety, which lent the photographic and production
skills of its staff and — for no. 1756 — the services of
Mrs. Aikman of the Senior Editorial Staff as
author.
1757. Carpenter, Frank G. Carp's Washington.
Arranged and edited by Frances Carpenter.
Introduction by Cleveland Amory. New York,
McGraw-Hill [1960] 314 p. 60-9844 Fi96.C3
A collection of early articles by Frank G. Carpen-
ter, a Washington correspondent for the Cleveland
Leader who wrote a widely copied column of gossip
and social commentary on the Washington scene.
Preserved in scrapbooks by his wife, the articles are
here arranged and edited by his daughter and pub-
lished in book form for the first time. Beginning in
1882 and continuing into "Ben Harrison's era,"
Carpenter's reporting covered the trivia as well as
the potentially momentous news of Capitol Hill, the
White House, and both high and low society.
"Whether considering President Cleveland's love-
life, the low-cut evening gowns of Washington
hostesses, the Congressmen's spittoons, or women
'enameling' themselves, Carp does so with a con-
temporary, present-tense style that brilliantly brings
his era to life," Amory asserts in his introduction.
1758. Green, Constance McLaughlin. Washing-
ton. Princeton, N. J., Princeton University
Press, 1962—63. 2 v. 62—7402 Fi94.G7
Bibliography: v. i, p. 405-427; v. 2, p. 513-529.
CONTENTS — v. i. Village and Capital, 1800-1878.
— v. 2. Capital City, 1879—1950.
Mrs. Green was awarded the Pulitzer Prize for
the first volume of this history of the Nation's
Capital. The overall purpose of the study is to de-
velop "a better understanding of the nature of
urban growth in the United States and its place in
American history." The author examines the evo-
lution of race relations and problems posed by the
city's delicate position between North and South;
the "psychological impermanence" of its inhabitants
that continues to impede the organization of civic
energies and is aggravated by the absence of the
vote and of local participation in city government;
and above all, the problem of municipal manage-
ment in a city unable to tax its largest landowner.
Because of the nature of the source material avail-
able for the period before 1878, Mrs. Green notes,
the first volume is "more narrative than analytical."
The second volume benefits from 20th-century com-
munity and urban studies and, in drawing upon
interviews with contemporaries, becomes progres-
sively more incisive.
1759. Smith, Arthur Robert, and Arnold Eric
Sevareid. Washington: magnificent capital.
Photography by Fred J. Maroon. Garden City,
N. Y., Doubleday, 1965. 248 p.
65—24912 F200.S63
A volume of brief, pithy essays by two Washing-
ton correspondents on the sights, institutions, life,
culture, and government of the Nation's Capital.
Topics discussed include the legislators and the
halls of Congress, the President and his mansion,
the diplomats on "Embassy Row" and their social
haunts, the military and its citadel, members of the
press, Supreme Court Justices, and both high and
low society. Full-page photographs — many of them
in color — illustrate the chapters.
2O8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
E. The South: General
1760. Clark, Thomas D. The emerging South.
New York, Oxford University Press, 1961.
317 p. 61-8368 F209.C58
"Selected bibliography": p. 287—303.
The author, a Mississippian by birth, reviews the
changes in Southern life since the 1920*5. Aside
from the sources listed in his bibliography, he writes
effectively from his own experience. Observations
from the i9th century travel accounts of Frederick
Law Olmsted are followed by Clark's analyses of
such subjects as public health, education, popula-
tion and the urban movement, the growth of the
tourist trade, racial integration, agricultural depres-
sion, and the rise of industry. Although the rapid
expansion of modern industry is conveyed as the
most pervasive economic development since the de-
pression, agriculture receives a larger share of
attention. Political history is omitted. "The South
in Cultural Change" was contributed by Clark as
one of eight papers presented to the 1962 confer-
ence at Duke University on "The Impact of Political
and Legal Change in the Postwar South." These
papers were edited by Allan P. Sindler and pub-
lished under the title Change in the Contemporary
South (Durham, N. C., Duke University Press,
1963. 247 p.).
1761. Eaton, Clement. The growth of Southern
civilization, 1790-1860. New York, Harper
[1961] xvii, 357 p. illus. (The New American
Nation series) 61-12219 F2i3.Ei8
Bibliography: p. 325-344.
A study of the structure of Southern society as
"a federalism of cultures— the Creole civilization,
the lowland and the upland cultures, the mores of
the black belts and of the pinelands of the South-
west, and city life." In an introductory chapter,
Eaton reviews the ubiquity of the ideal of the
English country gentleman and sets the stage for
the rise of the cotton kingdom. Despite his affec-
tion for the Old South, the author reveals its para-
doxes, its restrictions on thought, its determination
to retain slavery, its pursuit of profits, its self-
centeredness, and its self-esteem. Political history
after the Jackson era and intellectual history in gen-
eral are left for other authors in the New American
Nation Series. A useful supplement to this volume
is Eaton's book The Mind of the Old South
r *?n RouSe] Louisiana State University Press
11964] 271 p.), which is based on the Fleming
Lectures in Southern History which he delivered at
Louisiana State University in 1961.
1762. 'Ezell, John S. The South since 1865. New
York, Macmillan [1963] 511 p. illus.
63-13126 F2I5.E94
Bibliography: p. 479—492.
Underlying the task of reintegrating the defeated
South into the Union after 1865 were "the twin
problems of the South's attitude toward its new
citizens — the freed Negro slaves who composed
one-third of the population — and its feelings for
the nation it had tried to destroy. What the mini-
mum changes were which the North would accept,
as well as what concessions the South would make
voluntarily, were the core of Southern history after
1865 and are the theme of this book." The author
asserts that, although the legacies of the past were
still regional characteristics of the South, "the evi-
dence was clear that the South was moving back
into the 'mainstream' of American life." He traces
developments in the realms of urbanization, race,
religion, education, and politics that have "brought
the South in line with the prevailing national cul-
ture to a greater degree than ever before in its
history."
1763. Hesseltine, William B., and David L. Smiley.
The South in American history. 2d ed.
Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall, 1960. 630 p.
illus. 60-6880 F209.H48 1960
A revised edition of no. 4071 in the 1960 Guide.
The "Selected bibliography" appearing at the end
of each chapter in the first edition has been deleted.
1764. A history of the South. Edited by Wendell
Holmes Stephenson and E. Merton Coulter.
Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press,
1947-61. 8 v.
Entry no. 4072 in the 1960 Guide describes this
series. The first six volumes issued are no. 4073—
4078. The two volumes that appeared after 1955
are listed below as no. 1765 and 1766.
1765. (Vol. 3) Alden, John R. The South in
the Revolution, 1763—1789. 1957. xv, 442
P-j( illus. 57-12096 F2I3-A4
"Critical essay on authorities": p. 401—426.
The author, James B. Duke Professor of History
at Duke University, stresses four principal themes:
"the role of the Southerners (not yet generally
LOCAL HISTORY: REGIONS, STATES, AND CITIES / 209
called by that name) in the struggle for indepen-
dence; the rise of sectional controversy between
North and South, which is as old as the nation; the
internal reformation below the Mason-Dixon line
that proceeded from the contest with Britain; and
the part taken by the South in the making of the
Federal union formed at the end of the Revolution-
ary time."
1766. (Vol. 4) Abernethy, Thomas P. The South
in the new nation, 1789—1819. 1961. xvi,
529 p. illus. 61-15488 F2I3.A2
"Critical essay on authorities": p. 476—499.
The frontier, the international power politics that
played upon it, the pattern and process of settle-
ment, and the side-by-side growth of a democracy
and a landed gentry receive the emphasis in this
volume. Sectionalism is a secondary theme, and
for social and economic development the reader is
referred to the succeeding volume in the series
(entry no. 4074 in the 1960 Guide).
1767. Kane, Harnett T., ed. The romantic South.
New York, Coward-McCann [1961] 385 p.
(American vista series) 61—5424 F2O9-K33
Author of more than 20 books on the South,
Kane has here compiled an attractively produced
literary album of this "most regional of American
regions." In discussing the South's literary heritage,
he attempts to represent "all or most schools of
thought and writing" and "to strike a balance be-
tween classic material and the less familiar." The
volume as a whole is chronological, but the selec-
tions are divided into six categories, some of which
overlap or parallel each other in time, and the
writers are entered by subject. For example, part i,
entitled "Finders and Founders," covers the period
from the explorations of the i6th century through
the age of Jefferson; the writers range in time from
Giovanni da Verrazzano to Marshall Fishwick.
Parts 2-6 deal respectively with "flush times" in
the Southeast, 1815-1860; plantation life in the
deep South and the Southwest; the rise of Texas;
Civil War and Reconstruction; and the recent
South. Part 6 reflects the high literary productivity
of Southerners in the 2Oth century.
1768. Sellers, Charles G., ed. The Southerner as
American. Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press [1960] 216 p. 60—4104 F2O9.S44
Bibliographical notes: p. 203—216.
CONTENTS.— "As for our history . . . ," by John
Hope Franklin. — Americans below the Potomac,
by Thomas P. Go van. — The travail of slavery, by
Charles Grier Sellers, Jr. — The Southerner as a
fighting man, by David Donald. — Reconstruction:
index to Americanism, by Grady McWhiney. — The
central theme revisited, by George B. Tindall. — The
Negro as Southerner and American, by L. D. Red-
dick. — An American politics for the South, by
Dewey W. Grantham, Jr. — The Southerner as
American writer, by C. Hugh Holman.
Nine writers who "share a common approach to
Southern history" reexamine the region's traditions
and institutions and attempt to determine the extent
to which they are compatible with the "American
way of life." The rationale for this cooperative
effort is briefly as follows: the South is facing a
period of severe crisis; the manner in which it
responds to this crisis depends to a large degree upon
its image of itself; in the past historians have con-
tributed to a distorted image by a preoccupation
with the differentness of the South; historians must
now help the South to form a new image, one in
which the region's bonds with the Nation are high-
lighted.
1769. Simkins, Francis Butler. A history of the
South. 3d ed. New York, Knopf, 1963.
xiii, 675, xxiv p. 63—16714 F2O9.J>5 1963
Bibliography: p. 635—675.
1770. Simkins, Francis Butler. The everlasting
South. [Baton Rouge] Louisiana State Uni-
versity Press [1963] xv, 103 p.
63—20407 F2O9.S488
A History of the South is a revised edition of no.
4082 in the 1960 Guide. In The Everlasting South,
a volume of five brief essays, Simkins renders
explicit and succinct his conservative statement of
the South's position that is the pervading theme of
his textbook and appeals for the continued realiza-
tion of the South's identity as a region with a dis-
tinct culture and behavior of its own. "Indeed," he
asserts, "it can be argued that the region, despite
many changes, is as much different from the rest
of the United States today as it was in 1860."
1771. Southern Historical Association. The pur-
suit of Southern history; presidential ad-
dresses of the Southern Historical Association, 1935-
1963. Edited by George Brown Tindall. Baton
Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1964. xxi,
541 p. 64-21595 F209.S74
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(P- 495-534)-
Although all of the addresses are devoted to the
history of the South, they were not planned to be
related in content. Tindall's introduction places
them in perspective and reveals that most of them
fall into three basic categories: historiography, sec-
tionalism, and life in the Southern States. The
210 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
origins of southern historiography are discussed by
E. Merton Coulter, Philip M. Hamer, Joseph G.
de Roulhac Hamilton, and Wendell H. Stephenson.
Sectionalism is most explicit in Frank L. Owsley's
discourse on the Northeast's "egocentric sectional-
ism" as the fundamental cause of the Civil War.
Charles S. Sydnor, Fletcher M. Green, James W.
Patton, and Walter B. Posey provide glimpses into
the life of the Old South. Thomas D. Clark, Rem-
bert W. Patrick, Clement Eaton, and James W.
Silver discuss society in the New South. Silver's
"Mississippi: The Closed Society," which received
wide newspaper coverage and appeared in expand-
ed form as a book with the same title (no. 1795 in
this Supplement), is a primary source in itself. As
a group, Tindall notes in his introductory essay,
these presidential addresses touch upon points in a
wide spectrum and suggest areas for further explo-
ration. Although they devote little attention to sub-
jects such as Reconstruction, economic development,
intellectual history, and the race problem from the
Negro's point of view, they "constitute a remark-
ably broad and distinguished cross-section of south-
ern historical scholarship over a period of three
decades."
1772. Woodward, Comer Vann. The burden of
southern history. Baton Rouge, Louisiana
State University Press [1960] 205 p.
60—13169 F2O9-W6
Eight essays reflecting the author's search for
identifying elements in the Southern character. All
but one, "A Southern Critique for the Gilded Age,"
have previously appeared in periodicals. Wood-
ward seeks to isolate and understand qualities in the
Southern mind which have made the inhabitants of
the South distinctive or have combined to produce
a "regional essence." These elements he finds in
the Southern past. He examines selected historical
incidents in which the "collective experience" of the
Southern people differs essentially from that of the
rest of America. By a series of contrasts he con-
cludes that the difTerentness is derived in large part
from the Southern experience with poverty, defeat,
and the tragic evil of slavery. In a Nation where
"success and victory are still national habits of
mind," he sees the effects of the South's frustration
and failure. Against the legend of American inno-
cence and moral complacency — untainted by the
Old World evils of feudalism and monarchism — is
posed the South's "un-American adventure in feudal
fantasy" and its experience with the realities of
human tragedy and bondage.
F. The South Atlantic States: Local
VIRGINIA
1773. Bodine, A. Aubrey. The face of Virginia.
Baltimore, Bodine [1963] 176 p. (chiefly
illus.) 63-19830 F227.B6
A collection of photographs taken over a period
of some 30 years by a photographer. In an intro-
duction, Virginius Dabney states that the book por-
trays "Virginia, both old and new, with a balance,
range, artistry and charm which in my opinion has
never been equalled in any portfolio of views on
the Old Dominion." Credit is also given to J.
Albert Caldwell and Son and to what the author
describes as their "amazing process" of Unitone
lithography. Bodine's views do equal justice to the
natural beauty of the Virginia landscape, the State's
wealth of historic and educational buildings, the
impingement of recent military installations, and
the wide variety of economic enterprise. The pres-
ent volume is the latest in a series that also includes
The Face of Maryland (Baltimore, Bodine; distrib-
uted by Viking Press, New York [1961] 144 p.).
1774. Fish wick, Marshall W. Virginia: a new
look at the Old Dominion. New York,
Harper [1959] 305 p. illus. (A Regions of Amer-
ica book) 58—6148 F226.F49
"Bibliographical note": p. 282—283.
An analysis of the nature and persistence of the
"Virginia tradition" and its effect upon the social
and political views of successive generations of Vir-
ginians. The author pursued this theme earlier in
a brief work, The Virginia Tradition (Washington,
Public Affairs Press [1956] in p.). His later and
longer account shows Virginians caught up in a
self-perpetuating mythology: "What Virginians
think they are has a lot to do with what they have
become." Legend becomes historical fact when
viewed as a pervasive influence in the development
of regional culture. Probing life in the Allegheny
cabin or the tidewater plantation, among the poor
whites or the "First Families of Virginia," the author
balances early glories and modern frustrations. To
the familiar predicament of Virginia's position in
the Union — the pull between North and South —
LOCAL HISTORY: REGIONS, STATES, AND CITIES / 211
are added the disturbing implications of the internal
tensions generated by the east-west divisions of the
State. A final chapter offers a comparative review
of historical writing in Virginia.
1775. Wertenbaker, Thomas J. Norfolk: historic
Southern port. 2d ed., edited by Marvin W.
Schlegel. Durham, N.C., Duke University Press
[1962] 417 p. illus.
62-10054 F234-N8W4 1962
A revised edition of no. 4088 in the 1960 Guide.
Wertenbaker's death interrupted the work of revi-
sion; Schlegel edited the manuscript and wrote
parts of two chapters on the post-World-War-II
period.
WEST VIRGINIA
1776. Ambler, Charles H., and Festus P. Sum-
mers. West Virginia, the Mountain State.
2d ed. Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall, 1958.
584 p. illus. 57—12033 F24I.A523 1958
"Bibliographical note": p. 562—564.
A revised edition of no. 4089 in the 1960 Guide.
Beginning chapters are recast, those covering the
period since 1870 have been entirely rewritten, and
additions bring the story up to the present. Special
studies of the State's history are The Smokeless Coal
Fields of West Virginia; a Brief History (Morgan-
town, West Virginia University Library, 1963. 106
p.), by W. P. Tarns, and Roy B. Clarkson's abun-
dantly illustrated Tumult on the Mountains; Lum-
bering in West Virginia, 7770-7920 (Parsons,
W.Va., McClain Print. Co., 1964. 410 p.).
NORTH CAROLINA
1777. Lefler, Hugh T., and Albert Ray Newsome.
North Carolina, the history of a Southern
State. Rev. ed. Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press [1963] 756 p.
63-3932 F254.L39 J963
Bibliography: p. [681 1-713.
A revised edition of no. 4090 in the 1960 Guide.
Lefler has reorganized and rewritten that portion of
the book dealing with the period after 1896. He
has also edited a fourth edition of his North Caro-
lina History Told by Contemporaries (Chapel Hill,
University of North Carolina Press [1965] 580 p.).
A helpful array of facts and figures about the State,
past and present, is North Carolina; an Economic
and Social Profile (Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press [1958] 380 p.), by Samuel Hunt-
ington Hobbs.
SOUTH CAROLINA
1778. Guess, William Francis. South Carolina:
annals of pride and protest. Illustrations and
maps by John O'Hara Cosgrave, II. New York,
Harper [1960] 337 p. illus. (A Regions of Amer-
ica book) 58-12450 F269.G85
Bibliography: p. 325-329.
As in many of the volumes in the Regions of
America series, this history of South Carolina is
introduced by a personal prologue establishing the
author's relationship and approach to his subject
and setting the style of the work. Directed toward
the general reader, the book is a broad episodic
review of the South Carolinian ethos from colonial
times to the present, rich in biography, literary allu-
sion, and regional pride and idiom. Selections he
makes from contemporary diaries and letters pro-
vide insight into "the marvelously informing drama
of acute and archetypal minds at grips with crucial
experience." Guess leans heavily on Ulrich B. Phil-
lips' assertion that white supremacy was the "central
theme" in Southern history. The effect of the
Negro's presence within the fabric of South Caro-
lina's social, political, and economic affairs is a con-
stant ingredient in his discussion of the State's
development.
GEORGIA
1779. Averitt, Jack N. Georgia's coastal plain.
New York, Lewis Historical Pub. Co.
['1964] 3 v. 65-2086 F286.A9
A formidable two-volume history (accompanied
by a third volume of biographical sketches) of the
original coastal counties of southeastern Georgia.
The author includes an account of the region's con-
tribution to the development of the State and its
influence on the role played by the State in national
affairs. Georgia's colonial history is almost entirely
confined to these southeastern counties. Conspicu-
ous early traits were a pattern of political unity and
conservatism and a tendency toward a predominant
interest in economic affairs, accompanied by a cul-
tural and artistic cosmopolitanism surrounding the
port of Savannah. The first volume is largely a
narrative of events from Oglethorpe's first settle-
ment to the eve of the Civil War. Volume 2 begins
with a discussion of Georgia in the Civil War and
the Reconstruction period and then follows a pri-
marily topical arrangement, tracing in turn the
southeastern region's agricultural, political, financial,
industrial, and cultural development to the present
time. In all, attention is devoted to a range of
individuals and details which tend to be neglected
in general histories. A final chapter describes briefly
each of the 40 modern counties in the area today.
212 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1780. Coulter, Ellis Merton. Georgia, a short his-
tory. Rev. and enl. ed. Chapel Hill, Uni-
versity of North Carolina Press [1960] 537 p.
60-16233 F286.C78 1960
An updated edition of no. 4094 in the 1960 Guide.
FLORIDA
1781. Covington, James W. The story of south-
western Florida. New York, Lewis Histor-
ical Pub. Co., 1957. 2 v. illus.
58-880 F3u.C67
Vol. 2 has subtitle: Family and Personal History.
Includes bibliographical references.
A general account of the development of south-
western Florida from the earliest times to the pres-
ent, based largely on secondary sources and local
newspaper files. Nearly half the work deals with
the 20th century. Arranged topically, it describes
the area's rapid expansion following each of the two
world wars. The progress of activities that make
up a large part of Florida's regional image— real
estate promotion, the tourist trade, citrus and fish-
ing industries, baseball's winter quarters — is fully
explored, as are such standard ingredients of region-
al history as flora, fauna, scenery, transportation,
communication, religion, and education.
G. The Old Southwest: General
1782. Arnow, Harriette L. S. Seedtime on the
Cumberland. New York, Macmillan, 1960.
xviii, 449 p. 60-7414 F442.2.A7
Bibliographical footnotes.
1783. Arnow, Harriette L. S. Flowering of the
Cumberland. New York, Macmillan [1963]
xviii, 441 p. 63-15672 F442.2.A69
Bibliographical footnotes.
The author, a novelist, has produced two nonfic-
tion volumes on pioneer life in the valley of the
Cumberland from 1780 to 1803. Together they
represent the culmination of a lifetime of collection
and assimilation. Her facts come from a wide
range of local records, memoirs, and other written
sources and from her own cultural inheritance in
her native Kentucky. "This work," she writes in
the acknowledgments in the first volume, "is not a
history, nor is it concerned with the lives of famous
men and women, nor does it pretend to be an
exhaustive study of the pioneer. I have tried to
re-create a few of the more important aspects of
pioneer life as it was lived on the Cumberland by
ordinary men and women." The same statements
apply equally well to the second volume. Different
themes, more than different time periods, distin-
guish the two volumes. Seedtime emphasizes the
settler's ability to conquer a new environment,
whereas Flowering is concerned chiefly with his
success in transplanting Old World culture. With-
in this dual arrangement the organization is essen-
tially esthetic; the end result is considerably more
than a historical scrapbook. Both themes are de-
veloped with an intimate familiarity and an easy
narrative style.
1784. Daniels, Jonathan. The devil's backbone;
the story of the Natchez Trace. With
map and headpieces by the Dillons. New York,
McGraw-Hill [1962] 278 p. illus. (The Ameri-
can trails series) 61-18131 F34I.D24
"Sources and acknowledgments": p. 259-267.
The Natchez Trace was used mostly in one direc-
tion—from the Mississippi River at the future site
of Natchez northward through the lands of the
Choctaws and the Chickasaws, and across Tennessee
to the Cumberland River at Nashville. It was the
road back for traders and boatmen who freighted
their products downstream by barge, keelboat, and
raft along the Cumberland, Ohio, and Mississippi
Rivers from Kentucky, Indiana, and Pennsylvania.
The author populates this ancient pathway, which
followed roughly an old Indian trail, with a wide
spectrum of figures and tells the early histories of
such various personalities as Abraham Lincoln,
General James Wilkinson, Aaron Burr, Meriwether
Lewis, and, in particular, Andrew Jackson, who
rode on his wedding journey down the Trace with
Rachel Donelson and later marched down it to the
Battle of New Orleans.
1785. Havighurst, Walter. Voices on the river;
the story of the Mississippi waterways. New
York, Macmillan [1964] 310 p. illus.
64-11761 HE630.M6H35
Bibliography: p. 287—297.
"A survey of three centuries of transportation on
the Mississippi system, from Indian canoes to the
barge fleets that now dwarf the vanished steamboat
traffic." The author traces the course of river craft
LOCAL HISTORY: REGIONS, STATES, AND CITIES / 213
by the cry of the steersman on raft or keelboat, the
pitch of a steamboat whistle, or the varied sounds
of a ship's bell signaling the passage of time and the
rivalries of commerce. More a collection of storied
lore than a history of transport, the book makes its
subject — "the everlasting river" — the setting for
travelers' tales, the pageant of explorer, fur trader,
and peddler, and the romance of steamboat travel.
H. The Old Southwest: Local
LOUISIANA
1786. Davis, Edwin Adams. Louisiana, a narra-
tive history, zd ed. Baton Rouge, Claitor's
Book Store, 1965. 394 p.
65—3751 F369-D24 1965
Bibliography: p. 385—394.
First published in 1961, this sizable history — of
greater dimensions than the usual textbook — is
used as a general reading and study guide on the
college level. With some justice, the author repeat-
edly characterizes the story of Louisiana history as
a "fabulous saga." The political, legal, and social
aspects of Louisiana's French and Spanish origins
reflect an experience not shared by other States.
During the "War for Southern Independence" and
the military occupation that followed, Louisiana
suffered more and longer than most of her neigh-
bors. This era is presented with an undisguised
regret and mordancy. Another of the State's unique
adventures is related in a clear and balanced account
of the rise of Huey Long. A closeup view of New
Orleans and its flamboyant growth after the Louisi-
ana Purchase is found in Albert E. Fossier's New
Orleans; the Glamour Period, 1800-1840 (New
Orleans, Pelican Pub. Co. [Ci957] 520 p.).
ARKANSAS
1787. White, Lonnie J. Politics on the Southwest-
ern Frontier: Arkansas Territory, 1819—
1836. Memphis, Memphis State University Press,
1964. 219 p. illus. 64-55971 F4H.W49
Bibliography: p. [206]— 212.
A minutely documented, factual account, largely
from local newspaper sources, of the rise of faction-
alism in territorial politics during a period when
alignments were often based upon personalities
rather than issues and political differences were
sometimes settled at the dueling grounds. The
author's principal objective is to examine the politi-
cal foundations which were established for the
future State of Arkansas during the 17 years of terri-
torial status. The successive elections during this
period are examined in detail as the training ground
for future political leaders under statehood.
TENNESSEE
1788. Folmsbee, Stanley J., Robert E. Corlew, and
Enoch L. Mitchell. History of Tennessee.
New York, Lewis Historical Pub. Co., 1960. 4 v.
illus., maps. 61—2736 F436.F64
Vols. 3—4 have subtitle: Family and Personal
History.
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 395—430.
Two weighty volumes of history, supplemented
by two volumes of biographical sketches. The three
authors share about equally the task of relating the
storv of the State's progress from the earliest times
to the present day. Folmsbee introduces the work
with a topographical chapter that is especially useful
in view of the later stormy territorial and statehood
boundary problems. He also discusses the entry of
the State into the Union and recounts its role in the
War of 1812. Corlew covers the I9th century, with
particular reference to the Jacksonian era and the
deep divisions caused by the Civil War and Recon-
struction. Tennessee's development in the 2Oth
century is recounted by Mitchell, who examines the
course of politics, education, religion, and conserva-
tion and describes society and culture at midcentury.
1789. Govan, Gilbert E., and James W. Livingood.
The Chattanooga country, 1540-1962; from
tomahawks to TVA. [Rev. ed.] Chapel Hill, Uni-
versity of North Carolina Press [1963] 526 p.
63—4206 F444-C4G6 1963
Bibliography: p. 495—512.
A revised edition of no. 4104 in the 1960 Guide.
KENTUCKY
1790. Clark, Thomas D. A history of Kentucky.
[Rev. ed.] Lexington, Ky., John Bradford
Press, 1960. 516 p. 61-1846 F45I.C63 1960
Bibliography: p. 461—493.
A revised edition of no. 4106 in the 1960 Guide.
1791. Moore, Arthur K. The frontier mind; a cul-
tural analysis of the Kentucky frontiersman.
214 / A GUIDE To ™E UNITED STATES
[Lexington] University of Kentucky Press [1957]
264 p. 57-IJ379 F454.M65
Includes bibliographies.
The author approaches the Kentucky frontiers-
man through his reflection in literature and the tall
tale; his study is more a report of what nonfrontiers-
men thought about this "buckskin hero" or "play-
ful savage" than a penetration of his mind and cul-
ture. Moore reverses the well-known thesis of
Frederick Jackson Turner, stating that frontier
democracy had its origins not in the forest but in
the European heritage. What emerged from the
forest was the "alligator-horse" (yet another sobri-
quet for the frontiersman, after a familiar myth),
"invested with all the rights and privileges of repub-
lican citizenship and ill prepared to exercise them."
Regarding the myths of the earthly paradise and the
noble savage as operative factors in the occupation
and development of Kentucky, the author has pro-
duced a lively polemic against primitivism, charging
that it underlies the inadequacies of midwestern
culture, both in the age of settlement and consider-
ably later.
MISSOURI
1792. Kirschten, Ernest. Catfish and crystal. Bi-
centenary edition of the St. Louis story.
Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday [1965] 508 p.
65-22575 F474.S2K5 1965
A history of the "Gateway City" by an editorial
writer for the St. Louis Post-Dispatch. First pub-
lished in 1960, this book in its bicentenary edition
begins with French control and ends with a post-
script chapter which, among other new items, an-
nounces another world series for the Cardinals. A
fast-moving parade of anecdotes, historical asides,
and personality sketches make up the St. Louis
"story." Reports on machine politics, backroom
deals, social scandal, tenderloin, baseball, and brew-
eries are culled from the files, as well as tales of
explorers, traders, missionaries, settlers, civic lead-
ers, churches, and art societies as the constituent
elements in the growth and progress of a great
crossroads city.
1793. McReynolds, Edwin C. Missouri; a history
of the Crossroads State. Norman, Univer-
sity of Oklahoma Press [1962] xiv, 483 p. illus.
62-18052 F466.M2
Bibliography: p. 459—466.
Beginning with the early Spanish explorers and
the national rivalries and first settlements in the
Mississippi Valley, McReynolds presents a com-
pressed factual narrative of the acquisition of the
Missouri Territory in the Louisiana Purchase of
1803 and its subsequent rise to statehood in 1821.
From this point forward, emphasis is upon Mis-
souri's place in the history of the United States.
The Missouri regional strategy in the opening of
the Far West, the central role of the State in western
railroad development, and the national attention
drawn to the Missouri Compromise are covered.
With a secessionist Governor and a unionist popu-
lation, the State mirrored the national agony on the
eve of the Civil War. The State's agricultural
development and the granger, populist, isolationist,
and reform movements are described within the
context of the policies and fortunes — and the long
successive tenures — of the Democratic and Republi-
can Parties. Prominent Missourians are discussed
in the context of their appearance on the national
scene and in the tangle of national party politics.
Particular reference is made to figures such as
Thomas Hart Benton, David Barton, and the
younger Francis P. Blair, as well as to the Pender-
gast politics of the 1930*5, and the rise of Harry S.
Truman.
1794. Meyer, Duane G. The heritage of Missouri,
a history. Saint Louis, State Pub. Co., 1963.
843 p. illus. 63—1213 F466.M578
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
"The scope of the book is broad; the social, eco-
nomic, and political development of Missouri is re-
viewed from the era of the mastodon to the age of
the missile." Written as a comprehensive text, this
work is enhanced by its abundant illustrations and
clear chronological organization. The author de-
fines and evaluates the State's historical legacy in
terms of its geographical position as the pioneer
center of river, rail, and air transportation; the
varied national and racial elements of its popula-
tion that precluded the growth of a clear-cut region-
al image; and its dual economy — commercial and
agricultural — characterized by financial conserva-
tism and the lack of dramatic economic develop-
ment. The region along the Missouri River has
historically been a center of activity, and the State's
wealth, political power, and cultural life are concen-
trated along the axis between Kansas City and St.
Louis. The mid-State area's predominant role dur-
ing the formative period receives closer scrutiny in
Andrew Theodore Brown's Kansas City to i8jo
(Columbia, Mo., University of Missouri Press [1964,
ci963J 235 p.), the first volume of his Frontier
Community.
MISSISSIPPI
1795. Silver, James W. Mississippi: the closed
society. New York, Harcourt, Brace &
LOCAL HISTORY: REGIONS, STATES, AND CITIES / 215
World [1964] xxii, 250 p. 64-19939 F345.S5
Bibliographical footnotes.
An expansion of the author's 1963 presidential
address before the Southern Historical Association.
It examines historically certain political and racial
parallels between the slavery era in Mississippi and
the subsequent regime of white supremacy in that
State. The immediate occasion for the address and
this volume was Silver's experience as an eyewitness
to the mob violence which attended the court-
ordered admission of James Howard Meredith, a
Negro, to the University of Mississippi on Septem-
ber 30, 1962. The author has set down a strong
indictment of Mississippi society, laws, and govern-
ment officials in relation to the past, to other States,
to the Federal Government, and to the laws of the
land. He asserts that in its racial arrangements
since the Civil War Mississippi has continuously
perpetuated a system of exclusion, in defense of
which its highest officials invoke an elaborate struc-
ture of historical myth, political and social pressure,
and legal oppression. "Today the closed society of
Mississippi imposes on all its people acceptance
of and obedience to an official orthodoxy almost
identical with the one developed in the middle
of the i gth century. In fact the philosophical
basis for slavery has become the catechism of white
supremacy."
I. The Old Northwest: General
1796. Hatcher, Harlan H., and Erich A. Walter.
A pictorial history of the Great Lakes, by
Harlan Hatcher and Erich A. Walter, assisted by
Orin W. Kaye, Jr. New York, Crown Publishers
p963] 344 P- 63-12068 F55I.H37
Bibliography: p. 338.
Hatcher, the author of The Great La\es (1944)
and The Western Reserve (1949), no. 4114 and
4118, respectively, in the 1960 Guide, has joined
with Walter and Kaye in arranging a collection of
illustrations, including reproductions of photo-
graphs, museum prints, and maps, in a striking
companion to his earlier works. The full range
and development of lake shipping is portrayed in
detail — even to an unusual poster of the standard
stack colors of the Great Lakes fleets. Early and
modern scenes appear together, and views of locks,
canals, lighthouses, bridges, cities, and industrial
centers sustain the theme of a vigorous maritime
and commercial expansion. A compact narrative
carries the coverage to the opening of the St. Law-
rence Seaway in 1959.
1797. Havighurst, Walter. The Heartland: Ohio,
Indiana, Illinois. Illustrations by Grattan
Condon. New York, Harper & Row [1962] 400
p. (A Regions of America book)
62-14531 F479.H28
Bibliography: p. 379—388.
Readers who have followed Havighurst's excur-
sions into the history of the Old Northwest will find
many familiar landmarks here: the early Indian
treaties; Fallen Timbers; the land rush that followed
the Black Hawk War; Little Turtle, Chief of the
Miami Nation; Chicago, "the upstart village"; the
coming of the railroad; and the death of smalltown
America. For the author, political boundaries dis-
appear. These three States share a common idiom,
attitude, and history, and Havighurst's view of the
land, its meteoric development and growth, its enor-
mous productive capacity in agriculture and indus-
try, is panoramic. The "Heartland" is the "center
of America's population and the source of important
currents of its political, economic, and cultural life."
The rapidity of change in the area is seen in the
fact that Ohio, Indiana, and Illinois, formed in the
early iSoo's, had by 1840 reached the end of their
frontier period. Numerous anecdotes from the his-
tory and legend of the region are included.
1798. Havighurst, Walter. Wilderness for sale;
the story of the first western land rush. New
York, Hastings House [1956] 372 p. illus.
(American procession series) 56—8123 £479^33
Bibliography: p. 359—361.
The author's purpose is "to picture the first huge
western frontier in America, and the process of its
acquisition from the Indians, its survey, sale, settle-
ment, and the beginnings of its culture and econ-
omy." The mingled pattern of farmer, squatter,
speculator, and promoter of big land schemes is
described from the first strong surge of migration
in 1800 until, 40 years later, one of Ohio's citizens
was elected President of the United States. In
episodic style the author relates the story of prairie
life, the birth of cities, the growth of river transport,
and the politics of public land administration. He
peoples his account with such characters as Tecum-
seh, Johnny Appleseed, Robert Owen, the eccentric
Harman Blennerhassett, and William Henry Har-
2l6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
rison. In Congress, Harrison drafted the land act
of 1800 that opened the floodgates of the great
migration, and his election as President in 1840
signalized its fulfillment. Havighurst has also
edited Land of the Long Horizons (New York,
Coward-McCann [Ci96o] 437 p. American vista
series: The Midwest), a volume of readings on the
history of the Midwest, illustrated with reproduc-
tions of paintings, drawings, engravings, and photo-
graphs.
1799. Murray, John J., ed. The heritage of the
Middle West. Norman, University of Okla-
homa Press [1958] xiv, 303 p. illus.
58-11607 F35I.M86
Bibliographical footnotes.
1800. McAvoy, Thomas T., ed. The Midwest:
myth or reality? A symposium. [Notre
Dame, Ind.] University of Notre Dame Press
[1961] 96 p. 61-10848 F355.M2
Includes bibliographies.
In these two anthologies midwestern scholars
attempt to define the region's geographic boundar-
ies, its heritage from the past and early develop-
ment, its modern industrial and agricultural growth,
and the character of its inhabitants as seen in their
politics, religion, education, art, and literature. Al-
though its geographical limits are inexact, the Mid-
west's existence is emphatically asserted and its
claim to a separate regional identity is upheld. Mc-
Avoy's small volume is the result of a symposium in
which the contributors of the papers respond to a
number of almost standard criticisms concerning
such topics as midwestern isolationism, farm-bloc
politics, and economic and financial relationships
with the East. The 12 contributors to The Heritage
of the Middle West make individual assessments
according to topic and the historical perspective of
each. Together these essays sketch the evolution of
an essentially conservative segment of the Nation's
population, in whom, these authors testify, the de-
mands for radical change and adjustment have
fashioned a unique and unmistakable manner and
style.
1 80 1. Van Every, Dale. Forth to the wilderness;
the first American frontier, 1754—1774. New
York, Morrow, 1961. 369 p. illus.
61—11223 £195^3
Includes bibliography.
The first of four volumes in a series which follows
the frontier across America from the Appalachian
Mountains to the west coast (1754—1845). In this
volume, Van Every focuses on the conquest of the
Appalachian Mountains and the conflicts between
the Europeans in the East and the Indians in the
West. Other volumes in the series are A Company
of Heroes; the American Frontier, /77J— 1783 (1962.
328 p.); Ar\ of Empire; the American Frontier,
1784-1803 (1963. 383 p.); and The Final Chal-
lenge; the American Frontier, 1804-1845 (1964.
378 p.)-
J. The Old Northwest: Local
OHIO
1802. Butler, Margaret Manor. A pictorial history
of the Western Reserve, 1796 to 1860. Cleve-
land, Early Settlers Association of the Western Re-
serve, 1963. xi, 155 p. (Early Settlers Association
of the Western Reserve. Publication no. 1-63)
63-19645 F486.W58 no. 117
Western Reserve Historical Society. Publication
no. 117.
Bibliography: p. 152- [153].
As official historian of the Early Settlers Associa-
tion of the Western Reserve, the author collected the
sketches, woodcuts, paintings, and photographs in-
cluded here to portray pioneer life in this northeast-
ern corner of Ohio. A historical account covering
the period between the first surveying party led by
Moses Cleveland in 1796 and the Civil War accom-
panies the illustrations of early terrain, pioneer
homes and furnishings, art, education, religion, and
recreation. Kenneth V. Lottich's New England
Transplanted, a Study of the Development of Edu-
cational and Other Cultural Agencies in the Con-
necticut Western Reserve in Their National and
Philosophical Setting (Dallas, Royal Pub. Co., 1964.
314 p.) explores the impact of the importation of
New England school and religious systems to north-
eastern Ohio upon the public educational leadership
of both the Connecticut Reserve and, ultimately, the
State of Ohio.
1803. Smith, William E., and Ophia D. Smith.
History of southwestern Ohio, the Miami
LOCAL HISTORY: REGIONS, STATES, AND CITIES / 217
Valleys. New York, Lewis Historical Pub. Co.
[1964] 3 v. illus. 65-5412 F497.M64S5
A lengthy history of the 14 counties in the water-
shed of the Great and Little Miami Rivers. Vol-
umes i and 2 are arranged into topical chapters in
chronological order, and the third volume is devoted
to personal and family history. The area's earliest
inhabitants, its flora and fauna, the emergence of the
frontier, towns, transport, industry, and learning are
covered in detail. The progress of modern institu-
tions is pursued into the 20th century and develop-
ments in banking, public education, religion, fine
arts, medicine, agriculture, politics, and municipal
government are depicted.
INDIANA
1804. Thornbrough, Emma Lou. Indiana in the
Civil War era, 1850-1880. Indianapolis,
Indiana Historical Bureau, 1965. xii, 758 p. illus.
(The History of Indiana, v. 3)
66-63323 F526.H55 vol. 3
"Bibliographical essay": p. 715—736.
CONTENTS. — Attitudes and issues at midcentury.
— Political realignments in the fifties. — Secession
and Civil War. — Military contribution. — Disunion
at home. — Politics and legislation of the Reconstruc-
tion Era.— Depression and politics, 1873-1879.—
The transportation revolution. — Agriculture. —
Foundations of industrialization: mining, manufac-
turing, banking, labor.— Education.— Population
growth and social change. — Religion. — Intellectual,
cultural, and social life.
Published in observance of the sesquicentennial of
Indiana's statehood in 1966, this is one volume in a
projected five-volume history of the State.
ILLINOIS
1805. Pease, Theodore C. The story of Illinois.
3d ed., revised by Marguerita Jenison Pease.
Chicago, University of Chicago Press [1965] xvi,
331 p. illus. 65-17299 F54I.P36 1965
Bibliography: p. 301—314.
A revised edition of no. 4133 in the 1960 Guide.
MICHIGAN
1806. Bald, Frederick C. Michigan in four cen-
turies. Line drawings by William Thomas
Woodward. Rev. and enl. ed. New York, Harper
[1961] 528 p. 61-17179 F566.B2 1961
Includes bibliography.
A revised and enlarged edition of no. 4137 in the
1960 Guide.
1807. Dunbar, Willis Frederick. Michigan: a
history of the Wolverine State. Watercolors
and drawings by Reynold Weidenaar. Grand
Rapids, W. B. Eerdmans Pub. Co. [1965] 800 p.
64-8579 F566.D84
Bibliography: p. 757—774.
A comprehensive history of the State, designed to
provide readers with "information and understand-
ing that will help them to contribute effectively to
the building of Michigan's future." Emphasis is
placed on the rich heritage of the State's many
national and racial stocks and on the sustained
efficacy of the economic motive since the early days
of settlement. Dunbar's work is divided by cen-
turies into four parts, each of which is prefaced with
a brief summary and evaluation of the period. The
discussion of the late 1901 and 2oth centuries covers
such topics as social, educational, and cultural de-
velopment; political hegemony (78 years of Repub-
lican domination that ended with the great depres-
sion); and the coming of the automobile, which at
once transformed Michigan from an extracting into
a processing economy, from an agricultural into an
industrial State.
MINNESOTA
1808. Blegen, Theodore C. Minnesota; a history
of the State. [Minneapolis] University of
Minnesota Press [1963] 688 p. illus.
63-13124 F6o6.B668
Bibliography: p. 601—624.
Blegen, the author of several scholarly mono-
graphs on Minnesota history, here offers the State's
story from its geological prehistory to the present
day for "the general public — citizens of Minnesota
and people elsewhere who may be interested." He
has produced a compactly written sourcebook of
factual information, with helpful maps and illustra-
tions. The book was sponsored by the Minnesota
Historical Society, of which the author is a former
superintendent. Blegen has also contributed an
introduction to a centennial album of essays and
illustrations: Minnesota Heritage; a Panoramic Nar-
rative of the Historical Development of the North
Star State (Minneapolis, T. S. Denison [Ci96o]
430 p.), edited by Lawrence M. Brings. William
Van O'Connor has edited A History of the Arts in
Minnesota (Minneapolis, University of Minnesota
Press [1958] 63, 40, 62 p.), a small centennial
volume on music, theater, books, authors, art, and
architecture.
1809. Minnesota history. Selections from Minne-
sota history; a fiftieth anniversary anthology.
Edited by Rhoda R. Gilman and June Drenning
2l8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Holmquist. St. Paul, Minnesota Historical Society,
1965. 369 p. illus. (Publications of the Minne-
sota Historical Society) 65-25992 F6o6.M6637
Bibliographical references included in "Footnotes"
(p. 324-352).
On the occasion of this magazine's golden anni-
versary, 26 articles from more than 500 published
over the years were selected for this anthology.
They were chosen according to four criteria: "the
importance of the subject, the breadth and depth
with which it was treated, the continuing interest
of the piece as a whole, and the readability of its
presentation. Several representative articles were
also selected, since the committee felt that the an-
thology should reflect the general contents and char-
acter of the magazine." In addition, certain topics
which have received emphasis in the magazine were
included: the fur trade, pioneer social life, immi-
gration, and third-party political movements in the
State. The articles are arranged chronologically by
subject rather than by date of publication.
K. The Far West
1 8 10. Bartlett, Richard A. Great surveys of the
American West. Norman, University of
Oklahoma Press [1962] xxiii, 408 p. illus. (The
American exploration and travel series [38] )
62-16475 ^594.628
Bibliography: p. 377—390.
After the Civil War, four geographical and geo-
logical surveys were conducted over large areas of
the West from 1867 until 1879, when the U.S. Geo-
logical Survey was founded. Two were under the
administration of the War Department: the United
States Geological Exploration of the Fortieth Par-
allel, headed by Clarence King, and the United
States Geographical Surveys West of the One Hun-
dredth Meridian, led by Lt. George Montague
Wheeler. Two others, under the Department of
the Interior, were the United States Geological and
Geographical Survey of the Territories, directed by
Ferdinand Hayden, and the United States Geo-
graphical and Geological Survey of the Rocky
Mountain Region, led by John Wesley Powell. In
an attempt to bring all four surveys under compara-
tive examination, the author presents each expedi-
tion in turn, spotlighting the achievements of the
more important scientists, journalists, painters, and
photographers and recording the most notable ac-
complishments of their extensive and varied explor-
ations. In the process, he renders a very large
subject intelligible to the general reader and opens
a fertile field of scholarship.
1811. Conference on the History of Western
America, ist, Santa Fe, N.M., 1961. Prob-
ing the American West; papers. Edited by K. Ross
Toole [and others] With an introduction by Ray
A. Billington. Santa Fe, Museum of New Mexico
Press [1962] 216 p. 62-53525 F59I.C75 1961
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 193-205).
1812. Conference on the History of Western
America. 20", Denver, 1962. The Ameri-
can West, an appraisal; papers. Edited by Robert
G. Ferris. Editorial advisers: Le Roy R. Hafen,
Allen D. Breck [and] Robert M. Utley. Introduc-
tion by Ray A. Billington. Preface by James Taylor
Forrest. Santa Fe, Museum of New Mexico Press
[Ci963] 287 p. 63-22144 F59I.C75 1962
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 226-251).
The papers presented in these two volumes reflect
new tendencies in western historical research and
writing signalized by the Santa Fe Conference on
the History of Western America and the subsequent
formation of the Western History Association,
which publishes a quarterly journal entitled The
American West. Ray A. Billington, in an introduc-
tion to the first volume and in one of the papers in
the second, heralds a new surge of activity in west-
ern studies which he sees as the latest pendular
swing in the pattern of alternating enthusiasm and
neglect that has followed Frederick Jackson Turn-
er's provocative essay "The Significance of the Fron-
tier in American History." The renewed energy
is also viewed as the spontaneous result of the rapid
changes which have occurred in western life during
the last decade. The association and these papers
represent a movement away from the provincial
antiquarian, the purveyor of western glamor, and
the highly distilled Turnerian theorist toward more
resourceful scholars who, through functional and
interpretive works, attempt to bring the frontier
past into a more meaningful relationship to the
present and to the Nation as a whole.
1813. Hart, Herbert M. Old forts of the North-
west. Illustrated by Paul J. Hartle. Seattle,
Superior Pub. Co. [1963] 192 p. (His Forts of
LOCAL HISTORY: REGIONS, STATES, AND CITIES / 219
the old West) 63-15215 UA26.N6H3
Bibliography: p. 186—188.
1814. Hart, Herbert M. Old forts of the South-
west. Drawings by Paul J. Hartle. Seattle,
Superior Pub. Co. [1964] 192 p. (His Forts of the
old West) 64-21316 UA26.S6H3
1815. Hart, Herbert M. Old forts of the Far
West. Drawings by Paul J. Hartle. Seattle,
Superior Pub. Co. [1965] 192 p. (His Forts of the
old West) 65-23448 UA26.W4H3
Bibliography: p. 186—189.
Nearly all the Army posts described in these
works on the forts of the Old West have been
visited by the author, who provides directions to the
present-day sites and a brief account of the historical
significance of each. The objective of his travels
and of the supporting research has been to redis-
cover and underline the Army's role as guardian of
the westward movement between 1850 and 1890.
Robert W. Frazer's Forts of the West; Military
Forts and Presidios, and Posts Commonly Called
Forts, West of the Mississippi River to 1898 (Nor-
man, University of Oklahoma Press [1965] 246 p.)
supplies the date of establishment, purpose, and loca-
tion of each post; the name, rank, and military unit
of the person establishing it; and its present status.
Kent Ruth's Great Day in the West: Forts, Posts,
and Rendezvous Beyond the Mississippi (Norman,
University of Oklahoma Press [1963] 308 p.)
depicts 147 important sites along the western trails
as they were at the moment of their greatest con-
tribution to western development. Each descrip-
tion is accompanied by a contemporary illustration
and a modern photograph.
1816. Hine, Robert V., and Edwin R. Bingham,
eds. The frontier experience; readings in
the Trans-Mississippi West. Belmont, Calif., Wads-
worth Pub. Co. [1963] xiv, 418 p. illus.
63-18663 F59i.H6y
Includes bibliographical references.
Two professors of American history have col-
laborated to edit an anthology of excerpts from the
journals, reports, local archives, literature, and his-
tories of the 19th-century western frontier. They
take as their theme Frederick Jackson Turner's
assertion that from the conditions of frontier life
came intellectual traits of profound importance.
Their selections are intended to illustrate the inter-
action— or contradiction — of two such traits and
their opposites: "the individualistic and the innova-
tive threads of frontier experience, versus the coop-
erative and traditional threads" in the formation of
the American character. In their chapter introduc-
tions and explanatory paragraphs the editors seek to
place each selection in its appropriate context. The
self-reliance and independence of the explorers and
the mountain men, for example, provide an insight
into the force of individual resourcefulness and the
unfettered spontaneous response to the wilderness
challenge.
1817. Lavender, David S. The fist in the wilder-
ness. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1964.
xiv, 490 p. illus. 64—16203 HD9944.U48A47
Bibliography: p. 424—480.
A contribution to the history of the American fur
trade and an understanding of the Astorian achieve-
ment. The system of barter with the Indians of the
Upper Missouri and Great Lakes region for musk-
rat, raccoon, and deer hides — and, later, buffalo
robes — was the "true foundation of the huge mer-
cantile empires that influenced the destiny of na-
tions." The author's central figure is Ramsey
Crooks, John Jacob Astor's lieutenant and "fist" in
the wilderness, whose enterprise, perception, and
energy captured the French and British trade for
the American Fur Company. Crooks was one of
that small group of wilderness entrepreneurs who
wielded an influence in world capitals out of pro-
portion to their numbers by their knowledge of
the frontier outposts and their control over the In-
dians. Ruthless, resourceful, and fiercely competi-
tive, Crooks led a continuing struggle for the op-
eration of free enterprise against governmental
restrictions. When the settlers came, and with them
the money trade, he helped to guide "the entire
transition of the fur trade from an instrument of
history to a plain business."
1818. Lavender, David S. Westward vision; the
story of the Oregon Trail. With illustra-
tions by Marian Ebert. New York, McGraw-Hill
[1963] 424 p. (American trails series)
63—16467
Bibliography: p. 401—412.
1819. Stewart, George R. The California trail, an
epic with many heroes. New York, McGraw-
Hill [1962] 339 p. illus. (American trails series)
62-18977 F59I.S83
Bibliographical notes: p. 329-332.
Much of Lavender's work is concerned with the
earliest searches for a westward passage to the Pa-
cific: the French voyageurs of the i8th century, the
British penetration in the early i9th century, and
the American exploration that began with the Lewis
and Clark expedition. From this point the author
traces in detail, using excerpts from diaries, jour-
nals, and contemporary accounts, the farflung net-
220 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
work of trails opened by the exploring, fur-trading,
or missionary ventures that often led far wide of
the eventual route to the Columbia. Only in the
final quarter of this volume does the reader glimpse
the Oregon Trail itself and the beginnings of family
migrations in the 1840'$. Stewart, for many years
a latter-day explorer of the California Trail, con-
tinues the theme begun by Lavender. The Califor-
nia—or Oregon— Trail forked at the Snake River
and was variously named according to one's desti-
nation. Following closely the diaries and journals
of this "folk movement" from 1841 to 1850, the
author presents a vivid and detailed account of the
light wagons, the oxen and mules which drew them,
the supplies carried, life on the trail, the peculiari-
ties of each stage of the journey, and the cumulative
experience gained by successive wagon trains.
1820. Monaghan, James, ed. The book of the
American West. Jay Monaghan, editor in
chief. Clarence P. Hornung, art director. Authors:
Ramon F. Adams [and others] New York, Mess-
ner ^1963] 608 p. illus. 63-17415 F59I.M76
Bibliography: p. 593-595-
Ten writers on western Americana cover the his-
tory of half a continent in this elaborately illustrated
volume. Subjects treated include the early explorers
and mountain men, transportation, mining, Indians
and soldiers, law and justice, cowboys, guns, wild-
life, folklore, and song. A final section entitled "A
Gallery of Western Art" was written by Clarence
P. Hornung. The other contributors are Dale Mor-
gan, Oscar Osburn Winther, Oscar Lewis, Don
Russell, Wayne Card, Ramon F. Adams, Robert
Easton, Natt N. Dodge, and Benjamin A. Botkin.
1821. Moody, Ralph. The old trails west. New
York, T. Y. Crowell Co. [1963] xiv, 318 p.
illus. 63—15093 F59I.M8
Bibliography: p. 303—306.
The author pursues a lifelong fascination with
the early western trails, particularly in their begin-
nings and in the circumstances that determined
their course and destination. On the theory that
few trails wander aimlessly in the primordial forest,
he inquires how and why they were first worn into
the topography of the wilderness. Prehistoric ori-
gins are traced to animal tracks leading to grazing
lands, salt licks, and water. These were later fol-
lowed as routes to rivers and through the mountain
barriers by Indians, explorers, trappers, miners,
missionaries, settlers, and armies. From the stories
of the oldtimers, his own travels, and his reading
in mainly secondary sources, the author has recon-
structed "from origin to obliteration" the progress
and proliferation of the main overland routes to the
Pacific.
1822. Morgan, Dale L., ed. Overland in 1846;
diaries and letters of the California-Oregon
Trail. Georgetown, Calif., Talisman Press, 1963.
2v. (825 p.) illus. 62-11493 F592.M7
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(v. i, p. 369-457; v. 2, p. 743-799)-
Bernard De Veto's The Year of Decision, 1846
(no. 3331 in the 1960 Guide) is taken as the point
of departure for this collection of sources, although
Morgan is concerned with only one aspect of the
total pattern of contemporary events that is the
great merit of the earlier work. Morgan has focused
on the migration along the Oregon Trail, which
reached its high point in 1846, and has collected its
contemporary records. The emigrants were intent,
for various reasons that emerge from their letters
and diaries, on getting to California and Oregon.
"How they got there, and what happened along the
way, as they themselves saw fit to record the facts,
is the business of this book."
1823. Morgan, Dale L., ed. The West of William
H. Ashley; the international struggle for the
fur trade of the Missouri, the Rocky Mountains, and
the Columbia, with explorations beyond the Conti-
nental Divide, recorded in the diaries and letters of
William H. Ashley and his contemporaries, 1822-
1838. Denver, Old West Pub. Co., 1964. liv, 341
p. illus. 63-21637 F592.M72
This very large and expensive volume fulfills
Morgan's pledge, made during his work on Jede-
diah Smith and the Opening of the West (1953), to
publish the Ashley papers. The general reader will
probably be most attracted to the biographical sketch
of Ashley in the beginning section, which covers
his early life and his interest in mining, politics, and
surveying, and to the section entitled "Fur Trade
Exploration Before the Ashley Era." Ashley's fur
trade activities are traced in the documents, com-
posed of letters, newspaper accounts, business rec-
ords, trading documents, and diaries. Morgan's
major concern is with Ashley as a dominant figure
in western history whose enterprise and energy
helped establish the fur trade permanently in the
Rockies and who introduced its distinctive Ameri-
can features.
1824. Smith, Alson J. Men against the mountains;
Jedediah Smith and the South West Expedi-
tion of 1826—1829. New York, John Day Co.
[1965] 320 p. illus. 64—14206 F592.S655
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. [2701-292).
LOCAL HISTORY: REGIONS, STATES, AND CITIES / 221
Much of the color and rambunctious energy of
the early journeys into the West is related here.
The greater aim of this book, however, is to trace
the adventure and achievement in the western
explorations of Jedediah Smith. With David Jack-
son and William Sublette, Smith purchased the fur
business of Gen. William Ashley. After the ren-
dezvous of 1826 at Cache Valley in what is now
northern Utah, Smith traveled south with a com-
pany of 17 seasoned companions to explore first to
the south and west of the Great Salt Lake, then
north to Vancouver. Although the expedition was
profitless to the firm of Smith, Jackson, and Sublette
and to the fur trade, it was a landmark in western
exploration. During the years under review Smith
piled up an impressive list of firsts. He was the
first American to reach California overland, to cross
the Sierra Nevadas, to travel all the way across the
Great Basin, to journey up the central valley of Cali-
fornia, and to enter Oregon from the south. In the
north he discovered and mapped the routes later
used by settlers in California and Oregon.
1825. Tilden, Freeman. Following the frontier
with F. Jay Haynes, pioneer photographer of
the old West. New York, Knopf, 1964. 406 p.
illus. 64-12327 TR 140^39X5
From the resources and collections of the Haynes
Museum at Boseman, Mont., Freeman Tilden has
sorted several hundred photographs that are repro-
duced in this album-c«m-biography of the remark-
able F. Jay Haynes. During a career that flour-
ished through the last quarter of the igth century,
the itinerate photographer traveled by horseback,
stagecoach, and riverboat to mining camps and In-
dian villages and with surveying parties to nearly
every section of the frontier West. As official pho-
tographer for the Northern Pacific Railroad, he
used a specially outfitted studio car that dramatic-
ally extended his range and diversity beyond that
of other pioneer photographers. Ralph W. An-
drews' Photographers of the Frontier West; Their
Lives and Wor\s, 1875 to 79/5 (Seattle, Superior
Pub. Co. [1965] 182 p.) describes and illustrates
the artistry of 12 other pioneer photographers from
a wide variety of frontier locales in the United
States and Canada. Photographer of the Southwest,
Adam Clar\ Vroman, 1856—1916 ([Los Angeles]
Ward Ritchie Press, 1961. 127 p.), edited by Ruth
I. Mahood, contains introductory materials on Vro-
man, a short piece by him, and reproductions of
more than 90 of his photographs.
L. The Great Plains: General
1826. Drago, Harry S. Great American cattle
trails; the story of the old cow paths of the
East and the longhorn highways of the plains.
New York, Dodd, Mead [1965] 274 p. illus.
65—12347 £179.5.08
Bibliography: p. 261—262.
The author has made a generous contribution to
the field of western fiction under several different
pen names. Here, as historian, he is a revisionist,
debunking and correcting old accounts, sifting fact
from a large body of legend. He enlivens the re-
telling of familiar tales by critical commentary on
the texts of other writers and in a carefully molded
popular style. In this book he explores the history
of the early New England cowpaths and the Oregon
and Northern Trails to the end of the open range
in the great "die-up" of 1886. The roads and trails
and the towns at trail's end (Abilene, Wichita, Cald-
well, Dodge City) are peopled with famous outlaws,
marshals, dancehall girls, and cowboys. Jack W.
Schaefer's Heroes Without Glory; Some Goodmen
of the Old West (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1965.
323 p.) is about 10 representative "goodmen" who
outclassed the "badmen" in skill, courage, endur-
Old West in Fact (New York, I. Obelensky [1962]
446 p.), edited by Irwin R. Blacker, is an anthology
of firsthand accounts which the editor selected as
being readable, enjoyable, and significant in the
history of the region.
1827. Lass, William E. A history of steamboating
on the Upper Missouri River. Lincoln, Uni-
versity of Nebraska Press [1962] 215 p. illus.
62—14663 HE63O.M63L3
Bibliography: p. 201—210.
"This study traces the development of commer-
cial navigation on the Upper Missouri from 1819,
when the first steam vessel entered the waters of the
Missouri, until 1936, when the last commercial nav-
igation company on the Upper Missouri went out of
existence." Based on steamboat company reports,
tonnage and wage records, business ledgers, and
government sources, the work is chiefly concerned
with the financial and managerial problems of the
222 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
river entrepreneur. Of particular value to the local
historian, however, is the ensuing analysis of river-
town economics. It traces not only the impact of
the railroads but also the effects of government ex-
ance, and gallantry "right across the board." The
penditures, through avenues such as army contracts
and Indian annuities, on the region's prosperity.
1828. Miller, Nyle H., and Joseph W. Snell. Why
the West was wild; a contemporary look at
the antics of some highly publicized Kansas cow-
town personalities. Topeka, Kansas State Historical
Society, 1963. 685 p. illus. 63-63480 F68o.M5
Bibliographical footnotes.
By their persistent adherence to contemporary
sources— State, county, and city archives, police
dockets, and especially newspapers— the authors at-
tempt to put back into perspective the stories of
seven Kansas cowtowns which have been "knocked
askew" somewhere between the doing and the tell-
ing. For the period from 1867 to 1885, the careers
of 57 lawmen and "certain other persons who were
either astraddle or outside the law" are followed
through the records without benefit of reminiscences
or secondhand coloring matter. Various figures
popularized by television, such as Wyatt Berry Stapp
Earp, James Butler Hickok, John Henry Holliday,
and William B. Masterson, emerge more or less in-
tact and suffer little for having been made credible.
There are exceptions, however, as the following in-
dex entry shows: "Dillon, Matt: no police officer by
this name ever served in early Dodge City. Sorry."
The Album of Gunfighters ([San Antonio? 1965]
236 p.), by John Marvin Hunter and Noah H. Rose,
offers a selection from the Rose Collection of "Old
Time Photographs" of frontier characters and
scenes, with a brief narrative describing the role
each played in the history of the West. A number
of subjects are photographed "laid-out" in last re-
pose complete with bullet holes, nooses, coffins, and
other terminal devices. End papers are decorated
with a variety of venomous insects and reptiles.
1829. Sandoz, Mari. Love song to the Plains.
Illustrations and map by Bryan Forsyth.
New York, Harper [1961] 303 p. (A Regions of
America book) 61—6441 F59 1.832
Bibliography: p. 277—287.
The author writes of the Great Plains with a
sweeping lyric style she has developed through
many books and articles describing the land of her
childhood and the way its people lived and died.
She attests to early maneuvering for "special rela-
tionships, special rhythm patterns" to describe this
region and the movement of the world past her own
threshold. The history of Nebraska extends geo-
graphically outward into Wyoming, Kansas, and
the Dakotas and chronologically from the Spanish
explorers to the intrusions of modern science. Miss
Sandoz' account is not a historian's history but an
impressionistic filling-in of invisible outlines with
lore, tales, and half-legends.
M. The Great Plains: Local
NORTH DAKOTA AND SOUTH DAKOTA
1830. Lamar, Howard Roberts. Dakota Territory,
1861—1889; a study of frontier politics. New
Haven, Yale University Press, 1956. 304 p. illus.
(Yale historical publications. Miscellany 64)
56—10098 F655.L25
"Bibliographical note": p. 285—291.
The author finds that Federal and local govern-
ment was a highly important factor in making set-
dement possible in the Dakota Territory. Partly
because of this experience, Dakotan miners and
farmers tended to seek political approaches to eco-
nomic problems. Patterns developed in such move-
ments as the Farmers Alliance, the Populist Party,
and the Non-Partisan League, which were neither
radical nor conservative but the product of the new
environment. Lamar sees these patterns as still be-
ing adhered to in North Dakota today. Dakota
Panorama ([Sioux Falls?] 1961. 468 p.), edit
by John Leonard Jennewein and Jane Boorman and
published by the Dakota Territory Centennial Com-
mission of South Dakota, is a collection of essays
illustrated by photographs and maps.
1831. Schell, Herbert S. History of South Dakota.
Line drawings by Jack Brodie. Lincoln,
University of Nebraska Press, 1961. 424 p.
61—7234 F65I.S29
"Supplementary reading": p. 393—404.
The centennial of the Organic Act of 1861, which
created the Dakota Territory, emphasized the need
and the possibility for a full-scale history of the
area. "The pick-and-shovel work in the vast body
of available documents and primary sources seems
to have progressed sufficiendy in most areas to war-
rant a synthesis on a wide basis." The first eight
chapters of SchelPs book constitute such a synthesis
LOCAL HISTORY: REGIONS, STATES, AND CITIES / 223
of the prehistoric sources and early explorations of
the upper Missouri River. From this point his em-
phasis is largely upon the growth of political institu-
tions during the Territorial period and the political
history of South Dakota after statehood. Political
growth is discussed within the context of the area's
unique economic problems, derived from special
aspects of pioneering in the Great Plains; the rise of
large-scale agriculture and its dependence upon
such external forces as railroad expansion, eastern
capital, and Federal land and Indian policies; and
the anomalous adoption of measures for State regu-
lation and State-owned enterprises by an essentially
agrarian and conservative population. The author
candidly includes a survey of the State's industrial
activities "with the idea of providing a backdrop
for the current campaign to attract industry to South
Dakota." He concludes with four chapters of "re-
appraisal" of the State's Indian affairs, its farm and
ranch economy, manufacturing and mining, and the
social and cultural aspects of South Dakota life.
KANSAS
1832.
Zornow, William F. Kansas; a history of
the Jayhawk State. Norman, University of
Oklahoma Press [1957] 417 p. 57—7334 F68i.Z6
Bibliography: p. 379—400.
1833. Kansas, the first century. New York, Lewis
Historical Pub. Co. [Ci956] 4 v.
57—1389 F68i.Ki93
Vols. i—2 edited by John D. Bright. Vols. 3—4
have subtitle: Family and Personal History.
Two histories of Kansas published in anticipation
of the State's centennial in 1961. An underlying
theme in each is that the story of Kansas' past, as a
worthy subject for scholarly investigation, should
consist of much more than the seven years of tur-
moil preceding the Civil War which has thus far
preoccupied historians. Both works therefore reach
back to the area's early history — to Coronado and
the quest for Quivira, to the Indians and the French
frontier — and continue their coverage up to the
present day. Zornow's history is intended as "a
general survey which traces some of the pertinent
developments in the political, economic, social, and
intellectual life of Kansas." The two volumes ed-
ited by Bright contain chapter essays by 27 contribu-
tors and follow, in greater detail, the same topical
arrangement in chronological sequence. Kansas, a
Pictorial History (Topeka, Kansas Centennial Com-
mission, 1961. 320 p.), by Nyle H. Miller, Edgar
Langsdorf, and Robert W. Richmond, is the "first
attempt to tell the story of Kansas largely through
pictures, with text to supplement the illustrations."
OKLAHOMA
1834. Litton, Gaston L. History of Oklahoma at
the golden anniversary of statehood. New
York, Lewis Historical Pub. Co., 1957. 4 v. illus.
57—3664 F694.L58
Vols. 3—4 have subtitle: Family and Personal His-
tory. Includes bibliographies.
The first comprehensive multivolume history of
the State to be written since 1929. Litton, the
former archivist of the University of Oklahoma, has
prepared a survey of imposing dimensions. The
first volume is a chronological account of the re-
gion's history from the earliest times to the election
of 1946. Volume 2, arranged topically, covers the
development of agriculture, business, transportation,
mineral resources, education, and social and reli-
gious life.
1835. Morris, John W., and Edwin C. McReynolds.
Historical atlas of Oklahoma. Norman,
University of Oklahoma Press [1965] xxvi, 70 p.
Map 65—1 Gi366.SiM6 1965
Bibliography: p. ix-xv.
The authors' purpose is to present specific aspects
of the State's history by means of a series of maps.
Each full-page map is accompanied by a brief
historical or geographical statement to explain its
importance. The first maps place the State in its
national setting and show its outstanding physical
characteristics, such as landforms, rainfall, rivers,
and lakes. Another series depicts the chronological
development of the history of the State: Indian
lands, exploration routes, forts, battles, cattle trails,
and territory, State, and county boundaries. A final
series shows the locations of incorporated communi-
ties as they were in 1960.
224 / A GUIDE r° THE UNITED STATES
N. The Rocky Mountain Region: General
1836. Athearn, Robert G. High country empire;
the high plains and Rockies. New York,
McGraw-Hill [1960] 358 p. 60-8822 F598.A8
Bibliographical essay: p. 335-352.
America's last frontier— an area which now in-
cludes the States of Montana, Wyoming, Colorado,
North and South Dakota, Nebraska, and Kansas—
is viewed as a whole "in an effort to understand its
relationship to the larger story of American growth
and to bring out any dominant highlights that char-
acterize its history." The most persistent theme is
that of exploitation carried on by remote control
from the more settled parts of America, by succes-
sive armies of mountain men, miners, cattlemen,
land speculators, timber barons, and oil wildcatters
in their role of "git-and-git-out" extractors. Settle-
ment by farmers ultimately led to a new economy
with cash crops made possible by the railroads.
Then came a realization of a gigantic cul-de-sac
and the recognition of permanent agricultural ail-
ments. Climate, the demands of eastern creditors,
and the arbitrary exactions of the railroads com-
bined to produce mass anger— the "agrarian revolt."
The 20th century has seen the development of a
full-blown stubborn tradition of political protest
against the fluctuations of a national economy and
the apparent vagaries of Federal farm policies. In
all, this book is a strong indictment of an attitude
of irresponsibility that has led to abuse of the high
country.
1837. Cline, Gloria G. Exploring the Great Basin.
Norman, University of Oklahoma Press
[1963] 254 p. (The American exploration and
travel series [39]) 63—8988 F592.C635
Bibliography: p. 217—240.
The earliest explorations of this last part of the
country to yield up its secrets are traced through
the archives of the Hudson's Bay Company, die
Canadian Archives, and the journals of explorers
and fur traders. The Great Basin, which encom-
passes parts of Utah, Wyoming, Idaho, Oregon, and
Southern California and nearly all of Nevada, lies
across the path of a long parade of travelers who
had little or no knowledge of the nature of the
terrain they sought to cross. It lured fur traders,
treasure seekers in search of legendary kingdoms,
and explorers who looked for a river system linking
America with the Pacific and the Orient. In the
1840*5 the Great Basin became a corridor to Cali-
fornia and Oregon, through which groups of emi-
grants passed with no understanding of its geo-
graphical character. In 1844, John C. Fremont
applied to the area the name of "Great Basin," an
appropriate title for a vast, unique area of interior
drainage without an outlet to the sea. Mrs. Cline's
record of the adventurers in the basin begins with
the 18th-century Spanish explorers and continues
through the mid-i9th century.
1838. Sprague, Marshall. The great gates; the
story of the Rocky Mountain passes. Boston,
Little, Brown [1964] 468 p. illus., maps.
64—13189 F72I.S76
Bibliography: p. [356]— 364.
Two thousand miles of Rocky Mountain passes,
from the San Juans in northern New Mexico to
Canada's Jasper National Park, are traced with
historical perspective. "The story opens with the
sixteenth-century Spaniards, and runs through the
pass adventures of British and American explorers
and trappers until the whole chain stood revealed
around 1830." From this point, the narrative
continues with the development of the passes by
army engineers, empire builders, gold seekers, scien-
tists, railroaders, and motorists. Sprague bases his
study on maps, photographs, archives, contemporary
accounts, railroad histories, and other documents, as
well as his own wide travels by jeep and aircraft.
Geographically, the routes are often located by ref-
erence to modern highway numbers. Historically,
the process of their discovery and exploration is
related to the continuing development of the areas
on either side of the Continental Divide. A list of
some 800 passes is included, with historical and
current travel information on each.
LOCAL HISTORY: REGIONS, STATES, AND CITIES / 225
O. The Rocky Mountain Region: Local
MONTANA
1839. Burlingame, Merrill G., and Kenneth Ross
Toole. A history of Montana. New York,
Lewis Historical Pub. Co. [1957] 3 v.
57-37892 F73i.B95
Vol. 3 has tide: A History of Montana, Family
and Personal History.
1840. Toole, Kenneth Ross. Montana: an uncom-
mon land. Norman, University of Okla-
homa Press [1959] 278 p. 59-7489 F73I.T65
"Selected bibliography": p. 259—269.
The authors of A History of Montana have as-
sembled an extensive compendium of fact. In ap-
portioning their material they have tried to avoid the
imbalance that characterizes some State histories;
familiar and popular facets of the past — such as,
in Montana's case, the early gold camps, the vigilante
movement, and political party feuds — have been
compressed to give more attention to 20th-century
economic, industrial, and social developments hither-
to neglected. The story of the open range gives way
to a fuller treatment of the livestock industry, the air
age is favored over that of the railroads, and modern
progress in health and welfare, commerce, in-
dustry, and literature is more completely examined
than is customary. In the process the authors have
provided both a basis and a stimulus for additional
historical studies. In Montana: An Uncommon
Land, Toole interprets the brief, traumatic history
of the State "in a series of roughly chronological
essays which point up the themes that course
through the years." At the same time he conveys
an impression of the immoderate variety of the land,
its people, and its history.
1841. Hamilton, James M. From wilderness to
statehood; a history of Montana, 1805—1900.
Foreword by A. L. Strand; edited by Merrill G.
Burlingame. Pen sketches by Betty G. Ryan. Port-
land, Or., Binfords & Mort [1957] 620 p.
57-9233 F73I.H28
Includes bibliographies.
Written by Hamilton several years before his
death in 1940, this work was planned as a two-
volume study of Montana's entire history. The
unfinished manuscript was finally published, the
editor explains, because of the realization that, al-
most 20 years after the author's death, materials
were not yet available from which to write a history
of the State with anything like the detail and clarity
which characterize this volume. "Detail and inter-
pretation are included here that are not available in
any other published history."
WYOMING
1842. Larson, Taft A. History of Wyoming.
Line drawings by Jack Brodie. Lincoln,
University of Nebraska Press, 1965. 619 p.
65-15277 F76i.L3
"Sources": p. 583—599.
A detailed and clearly presented treatment of
Territorial and State history. The author indicates
that this is the first critical history of Wyoming for
adult readers. The periods of explorers, fur traders,
and the California, Oregon, and Mormon trails are
briefly summarized. Emphasis is placed primarily
on political and economic events, although social
and cultural developments are adequately described.
The interrelations of these forces are highlighted in
the discussion of the impact of the railroads on the
organization of the Territory and the effect of
woman suffrage in the movement toward statehood.
COLORADO
1843. Ubbelohde, Carl. A Colorado history.
Boulder, Colo., Pruett Press ["1965] 339 p.
65-27239 F776.Ui95
Bibliographical footnotes.
A general history of Colorado, emphasizing the
political and economic development of the State.
The narrative runs from the days of the prehistoric
Indians through the present. An analysis is in-
cluded of social, religious, and educational trends
in the State.
UTAH
1844. Crampton, Charles Gregory. Standing up
country: the canyon lands of Utah and Ari-
zona. New York, Knopf, 1964. xv, 191 p,
64-20165 F788.C79
Bibliography: p. 181—191.
In this "biography of a region" Crampton por-
trays a sculptured land of 100 square miles in the
heart of the Colorado plateau. His geographical
226 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
and historical review of the canyon lands and rivers
emerged from a series of historical field studies
which were part of a cooperative venture in arche-
ology, ecology, and geology sponsored by the Na-
tional Park Service and carried out by the University
of Utah and the Museum of Northern Arizona.
The studies were prompted by the desire to ex-
amine the historical remains and physical charac-
teristics that would be jeoparidzed or destroyed by
Lake Powell, the reservoir that would result from
the building of Glen Canyon Dam on the Colorado
River. The text combines a sensitive description of
the physical wonders of the area with a history of
the successive explorers, inhabitants, and cultures:
Indian, Spanish, American, fur traders, miners,
Mormons, and scientists. The volume includes 15
full-page color plates and more than a hundred
scenes and portraits in black and white.
1845. Stegner, Wallace E. The gathering of Zion;
the story of the Mormon Trail. New York,
McGraw-Hill [1964] 331 p. illus. (American
trails series) 64-19216 F593-S85
Bibliography: p. 315—319.
"This narrative begins at Nauvoo [Illinois] in
the last months of 1845; its primary subjects are the
Mormon migration from the bank of the Mississippi
to the bank of City Creek in Salt Lake Valley, and
the Gathering of Zion that took place over essen-
tially the same route during the next twenty-two
years." The author emphasizes the supreme im-
portance today of the trail as an integral part of the
Mormon faith, sustained by an enormous literature
of diaries, journals, archives, reminiscences, and
genealogical records and exalted to a central symbol
in Mormon art and practice. In their literal belief
in the promised land and the Kingdom of God on
earth, the pioneer Mormons imposed a religious
dynamic on the prevailing westward movement of
the time; and because they were part of that move-
ment they thrived. Although their wandering in
the wilderness coincided more often than not with
the California and Oregon Trails, the exodus of the
Mormon hosts is described in terms of their religious
and social organization. "They were the most
systematic, organized, disciplined, and successful
pioneers in our history."
NEVADA
1846. Hulse, James W. The Nevada adventure, a
history. Illustrations by Don Kerr. Reno,
University of Nevada Press, 1965. 311 p.
64-8467 F84I.H8
Bibliography: p. [301]— 306.
Although State law requires the teaching of
Nevada history in the schools and universities,
there has previously been no single adequate book
upon which courses could be based. The author, a
professor of history at the University of Nevada,
has sought to supply a longstanding "need for a
short non-technical history of Nevada." Explicitly
intended as a textbook, it is nonetheless rewarding
to adult readers. Early history is covered chrono-
logically in the initial chapters; recent times are
discussed in topical chapters on mining, transporta-
tion and tourism, the impact of Federal Govern-
ment projects, political problems, and the atomic
age in Nevada.
P. The Far Southwest: General
1847. Carter, Hodding. Doomed road of empire;
the Spanish trail of conquest, by Hodding
Carter, with Betty W. Carter. Illustrations by Don
Almquist. New York, McGraw-Hill ["1963 j 408
p. (The American trails series)
63-20189 F389.C25
Bibliography: p. 375-394.
The story of "El Camino Real para los Texas,"
the route that stretched through New Spain — event-
ually from Mexico to Natchitoch.es on the Red River
at the northeastern edge of Texas. The author
notes that the road was called by various names
during the 150 years of religious conflict and na-
tional rivalries that surrounded it. Carter devotes
only minimal attention to the road itself, empha-
sizing instead a sequence of narrative episodes from
the history of colonial, borderland, and revolution-
ary Texas through the Treaty of Guadalupe Hidal-
go in 1848.
1848. Hollon, William Eugene. The Southwest:
old and new. New York, Knopf, 1961. xiv,
486, xviii p. illus. 61—9232 F786.H6
"Bibliographical notes": p. 465— [487].
The somewhat nebulous boundaries of the
"Southwest" are here taken to include the States of
Texas, Oklahoma, New Mexico, and Arizona — an
LOCAL HISTORY: REGIONS, STATES, AND CITIES / 227
area which constitutes no particular social, political,
or cultural entity but is distinguished by its variety,
contrasts, and extremes in both its physical aspects
and the behavior of its inhabitants. Hollon's ac-
count traces the history of the region as a whole
through the successive explorations and occupations
(Spanish, French, and Anglo-American), the impact
of the war with Mexico, and the Civil War. The
generally chronological arrangement of the book is
relieved by descriptive chapters depicting life in the
Texas Republic, Indian affairs, climate and topog-
raphy, the ranching industry, transportation, manu-
facturing, politics, and urbanization. The author's
synthesis frequently includes the more flamboyant
episodes and personalities — particularly in the last
half of the book, which deals with the States sever-
ally and their economic and political development
since statehood.
Q. The Far Southwest: Local
TEXAS
1849. Bainbridge, John. The super- Americans; a
picture of life in the United States, as brought
into focus, bigger than life, in the land of the
millionaires — Texas. Garden City, N.Y., Double-
day, 1961. 395 p. 61—16775 F39I.2.B3
There is deliberately little or no form or organiza-
tion to this impressionistic portrait of top-drawer
Texans. Its chapters are not tided, but two themes
persist through all of them: millionaires and money.
Millionaires come in various kinds and sizes; there
are more of them in Texan than in other States,
and they have an attitude toward money which is
difficult to define but which can be described at
length. If this segment of the State of Texas is
somewhat overdrawn, it is an indulgence justified
by the subject. "Free-wheeling," "hi-jinks," and
"wheeler-dealer" are terms repeatedly applied to the
people, the "deals," and the tax deductions; irony
is the device most frequently employed in describing
the tastes, politics, eccentricities, or way of life of
this wide-open society. Much of the material for
this work originated as a series of articles in The
New Yorker.
1850. Richardson, Rupert N. Texas, the Lone
Star State. 2d ed. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,
Prentice-Hall, 1958. 460 p. illus.
58-9834 F386.R52 1958
"Selected bibliography" at the end of each chapter.
A revised edition of no. 4194 in the 1960 Guide.
In the rewriting, "a chapter has been added on the
course of public affairs during the last fifteen years,
and the various topics have been brought up to date.
A simpler, more direct view of the period since
1876 has resulted in its condensation into fewer
chapters, providing space for new maps, charts,
and illustrations."
1851. Siegel, Stanley. A political history of the
Texas Republic, 1836—1845. Austin, Uni-
versity of Texas Press, 1956. xiv, 281 p.
56-7478 F390.S55
Bibliography: p. 259—268.
Politics in the Texas Republic were essentially
personal in character. There were no political parties
comparable to those in the United States, and
alignments on the basis of political principles did
not emerge after independence. Siegel traces the
clash of personalities over the staggering array of
problems that beset the young Nation in such areas
as finance, military defense, and foreign affairs.
Based on the letters, journals, manuscript sources,
and public documents of the period, his study of
the administrations of David Burnet, Mirabeau
Lamar, Anson Jones, and, above all, Sam Houston
is particularly concerned with their policies toward
finance, relations with Mexico, and the diplomatic
maneuvers for annexation. In a prelude to the
history of the Republic, The Last Years of Spanish
Texas, 1778—1821 (The Hague, Mouton, 1964. 156
p. Studies in American history, 4), Odie B. Faulk
offers a study of Spanish colonial administration
and reveals successes as well as failures while ex-
plaining the alienation of the settlers from the
Government.
1852. Wallace, Ernest, ed. Documents of Texas
history. With the assistance of David M.
Vigness. [Austin, Tex.] Steck Co. [1963] 293 p.
63-24468 F386.W32
Brings together the traditional literature that has
been the basis for narrative history. The materials
included are those that "most graphically illustrate
the Texas past as it unfolded" and that provide
"examples of what seems most worthy of preserva-
tion in the Texas heritage." They consist of out-
standing contemporary narratives, speeches, treaties,
State documents, proclamations, and court decisions.
228 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1853. Wisehart, Marion K. Sam Houston, Amer-
ican giant. Washington, R. B. Luce [1962]
712 p. 62—20000 F39O.H868
Bibliography: p. 681—692.
The University of Texas in 1943 completed pub-
lication of eight volumes of The Writings of Sam
Houston. In the light of that contemporary testa-
ment, the author reevaluates "the outstanding traits
of character that made him the man he was and
the following major phases of his career: (i) his
decision to go to Texas; (2) his relations as Com-
mander in Chief with the General Council, the
legislative body of the first provincial government;
(3) his plans for defending Texas without sacrific-
ing the Alamo Garrison; (4) his strategy during the
forty-day campaign which culminated in the victory
at San Jacinto; (5) his anti-war policy as President
of the Texas Republic; (6) his annexation policy;
(7) his thirteen years of service in the United
States Senate and his attempts to check the drift
toward war and to heal the breach between North
and South; and (8) his anti-secession policy as
Governor of Texas." Sue Flanagan's pictorial biog-
raphy, Sam Houston's Texas (Austin, University of
Texas Press [1964] 213 p.), adds a graphic
dimension. Traveling more than 7,000 miles in
eastern Texas, she visited and photographed "every
place where evidence indicated he had ever been."
NEW MEXICO
1854. Beck, Warren A. New Mexico; a history of
four centuries. Norman, University of Okla-
homa Press [1962] 363 p. 62—16470 F796.B4
Bibliography: p. 337—352.
"Intended for readers who want a brief yet
reasonably comprehensive treatment of the develop-
ment of the state," this is a popular but substantial
account. Early history is reviewed, with particular
attention to Territorial affairs and the Spanish rule
and heritage. About a third of the book is devoted
to a description of economic, political, urban, and
cultural advancement since statehood.
ARIZONA
1855. Cross, Jack L., Elizabeth H. Shaw, and
Kathleen Scheifele, eds. Arizona: its people
and resources. Tucson, University of Arizona
Press, 1960. 385 p. 60-15913 F8n.C79
Published by the University of Arizona as part of
Bibliography: p. 378—385.
its 75th anniversary celebration, this unusual com-
pendium is based on 64 separate topical essays
assembled by a group of specialists, most of whom
are members of the university faculty. Their con-
tributions are correlated under five subject headings
for the State: its people and their past, lands and
resources, government and social services, the econ-
omy, and cultural institutions. By this treatment
both fact and method become visible, and the
various techniques and viewpoints of natural scien-
tists, political scientists, economists, sociologists, his-
torians, and students of other disciplines are applied.
1856. Peplow, Edward H. History of Arizona.
New York, Lewis Historical Pub. Co.
[1958] 3 v. illus. 58-42516 F8u.P4
Vol. 3: Family and Personal History.
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 549—565.
The author points out that Arizona was, at the
time of his writing, the youngest State in the
Union, yet it contains what is believed to be the
oldest continuously inhabited community on the
continent. Climate and topography have made it
an ideal workshop for archeologists and anthropolo-
gists. It is, he asserts, the only State to have its
history, from wilderness to modern times, chronicled
in the newspapers, and a large number of those who
contributed to the State's growth and progress are
still alive to tell the story. From this wealth of
source material he has produced a sober and syste-
matic history of the 48th State. The first volume
opens with a discussion of the mute relics of geo-
logical times and continues chronologically through
the Indian wars and the settlement of the territory.
Volume 2 is essentially a history of the period of
statehood, recounted in topical discussions of eco-
nomic, political, and cultural developments. A much
more specialized and detailed look at the genesis
of the Arizona Territory composed on the occasion
of its centennial, is B. Sacks' Be It Enacted: The
Creation of the Territory of Arizona (Phoenix,
Arizona Historical Foundation, 1964. 200 p.) The
work is an expansion of a two-part article originally
published in Arizona and the West.
LOCAL HISTORY: REGIONS, STATES, AND CITIES / 229
R. California
1857. Caughey, John W., and LaRee Caughey, eds.
California heritage; an anthology of history
and literature. Los Angeles, Ward Ritchie Press,
1962. 536 p. illus. 62—20999 PS57I.C2C35
"Other books to read": p. 527-532.
Selections by 137 writers are brought together as
an expression of the variety of moods, lands, and
people that make up the California story. The
editors consider "some of it sober history, much of
it lyrical and analytical description, some of it
indubitably creative writing." The first and last
selections are by Robinson Jeffers; in between,
the contributors are as varied as Ambrose Bierce
and Aimee Semple McPherson, Jack London and
Lawrence Ferlinghetti. The collection is divided
according to subject matter, beginning with the
Indians and continuing to the present. A brief
introduction accompanies each section and a bio-
graphical headnote is included for each writer.
1858. Cleland, Robert Glass. From wilderness to
empire; a history of California. A com-
bined and revised edition of From wilderness to
empire, 1542—1900, & California in our time, 1900—
1940. Edited and brought down to date by Glenn S.
Dumke. New York, Knopf, 1959. 445 p. illus.
59-8037 F86i.C598
Bibliography: p. 435~445-
A combined and revised edition of no. 4203 and
4204 in the 1960 Guide.
1859. Lewis, Oscar, ed. This was San Francisco,
being first-hand accounts of the evolution of
one of America's favorite cities. New York, D.
McKay Co. [1962] 291 p. illus.
61-18348 F869-S3L6i3
Bibliography: p. 285-288.
Contemporary views and attitudes have been sort-
ed out and embedded in a narrative that covers
the San Francisco scene from the discovery of the
Bay in 1776 to the "catastrophic visitation" of April
1 8, 1906. Not a traditional anthology, the book
aims "to emphasize those phases that have long
set San Francisco apart from other cities." Lewis
offers little-known selections representing the testi-
mony of observers or participants in the events
described. His witnesses are a disparate company
of travelers and residents, including Ambrose Bierce,
Anthony Trollope, Richard H. Dana, Rudyard
Kipling, and a host of others, whose comments are
culled from the books, pamphlets, newspapers, and
magazines of the time. Another contemporary
collection, San Franicsco as It Is; Gleanings From
the Picayune (Georgetown, Calif., Talisman Press,
1964. 285 p.), edited by Kenneth M. Johnson,
offers excerpts of articles and news commentary in
the first afternoon newspaper in San Francisco from
its third issue, August 5, 1850, until its eclipse on
April 17, 1852.
1860. Pourade, Richard F. The history of San
Diego. Commissioned by James S. Copley.
[San Diego] Union-Tribune Pub. Co. [1960—65]
5 v. F869.S22H5
A venture in local history that has been expanded
to impressive scholarly and artistic proportions.
Suggested and commissioned by the publisher of
the San Diego Union and Evening Tribune, the
five volumes that have appeared contain a wealth
of source material. For the text and illustrations
the author has drawn from contemporary journals,
diaries, correspondence, and art collections located
here and abroad. Some original paintings were
commissioned for the work. The result is a set of
large, lavishly illustrated volumes, containing text
and reproductions of paintings, drawings, and
photographs. Volume i, The Explorers ([1960]
203 p. 60—53624), deals with the discovery and
settlement of California from Juan Rodriguez to
Juan Bautista de Anza. Volume 2, Time of the
Bells ([1961] 262 p. 61-14059), covers the mis-
sion period, the years of the Franciscan domination
of California from 1769 to 1835. Volume 3, The
Silver Dons (['1963] 286 p. 63-7055), encom-
passes the years 1830—65, beginning with the secu-
larization of the missions and ending with the close
of the Civil War. Volume 4, The Glory Yearf
([1964] 276 p. 64-17561), explores the "boom
and bust" period between 1865 and 1900. Volume
5, Gold in the Sun ([1965] 282 p. 65-23410),
examines the period from the turn of the century
to the roaring twenties.
1 86 1. Riesenberg, Felix. The Golden Road; the
story of California's Spanish mission trail.
New York, McGraw-Hill [1962] 315 p. illus.
(The American trails series) 62-17374 F86i.R54
Bibliography: p. 290-302.
230 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
The California Camino Real, the coastal route
from Mexico to San Diego, San Francisco, and
eventually to the Oregon border, was once com-
posed of connecting trails between the missions.
It grew into a commercial route for a rich cattle
country and carried the march of conquest in 1846.
The author uses the highway as a starting point
from which to present episodes in the development
of southern California, including the gold-rush
days, the stagecoach era, and, in 1869, the coming
of the "octopus" — the Southern Pacific Railway that
opened the floodgates of immigration. Riesenberg
notes that the 20th century began with only a few
of the Nation's 10,000 horseless carriages in Cali-
fornia. Within 20 years, however, the State had
one million automobiles and from this point travel-
ers are legion: tourists, Okies, tramps, and boot-
leggers. In 1925 the Camino Real became U.S.
Highway 101.
1862. Rolle, Andrew F. California; a history.
New York, Crowell [1963] 649 p. illus.
63-8480 F86i.R78
"Selected readings" follow each chapter.
California is noted for the diversity of its geog-
raphy, climate, history, and people. This basic
textbook succeeds in drawing together various
characteristics into an ordered and intelligible whole.
The use of short sections with meaningful headings
relieves the necessity for involved transitions and
supplies a valuable outline. The relative indepen-
dence of California's historical development from
that of the rest of the United States is noted. The
author recounts the State's history from its origins
to the present, seeking to interpret every phase of
the story without recourse to burdensome or ex-
traneous detail. His work is based in part on A
Short History of California (1929), by Rockwell D.
Hunt and Nellie Van de Grift Sanchez.
S. The Pacific Northwest: General
1863. Johansen, Dorothy O., and Charles M. Gates.
Empire of the Columbia; a history of the
Pacific Northwest. New York, Harper [1957]
xv, 685 p. illus. 56-11074 F852.J67
Bibliographical footnotes.
A collaborative study of the region that includes
the present States of Oregon, Washington, and
Idaho and, for early history, a large area to the
north as well. Dorothy lohansen covers the years
up to the period of Territorial government and
Oregon statehood in the i88o's. Gates continues
with a study of the transitional period in politics,
transportation, industry, and urban affairs and a
topical appraisal of these together with 20th-century
progress in reclamation, conservation, forestry, fish-
ing, and cultural affairs. Described as an "essay in
regional analysis," the work also relates local prob-
lems to the national and international scene. The
search for Quivira or a northwest passage and the
rivalries of the fur trade, for example, are viewed
as part of the contemporary expansion of Western
Europe. The period of explosive growth and
change between 1880 and 1910 was a part and
product of a pattern of enterprise and industrial
growth in the country as a whole.
1864. Lavender, David S. Land of giants; the
drive to the Pacific Northwest, 1750-1950.
Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1958. 468 p. illus.
(Mainstream of America series) 58—12049 F85I.L4
Bibliography: p. 447—457.
A study of the explorers, "sea peddlers," fur
traders, miners, lumbermen, and settlers who mi-
grated to the Pacific Northwest. Lavender traces
their motives, quarrels, and conquests and includes
a wealth of detail and anecdote. Particular atten-
tion is devoted to the exploits and rivalries of the
mountain men and to trade, gold, and lumber bonan-
zas. The final chapters cover 20th-century develop-
ments in forestry, reclamation, and conservation.
1865. Pomeroy, Earl S. The Pacific slope; a his-
tory of California, Oregon, Washington, Ida-
ho, Utah, and Nevada. New York, Knopf, 1965.
403, xvi p. illus. 65-11128 F85I.P57
"Notes on further reading": p. 399— [404].
Eschewing the conventional beginnings with "ex-
plorers who came when almost no one else was
there," Pomeroy places more emphasis on "Western
society that men now living can remember." He
attempts "to focus on men and events that explain
the West as a developing community, emphasizing
traits and institutions," and justifies the scope of
his work by clearly demonstrating that State boun-
daries have ignored the natural, climatic, economic,
and institutional affinities within the area. Begin-
ning in the 1830'$ and 1840'$, Pomeroy in his
interpretive approach selects formative factors upon
LOCAL HISTORY: REGIONS, STATES, AND CITIES / 231
which he imposes his own synthesis of what was
and is important. "When one approaches Western
history from the point of view of the development
of communities, traits, and institutions, farms, cities,
political parties, and social ideas loom larger than
trouble with the Indians, who were never the
barrier to settlement west of tthe Rockies that they
were to the east."
T. The Pacific Northwest: Local
WASHINGTON
1866. A very, Mary W. Washington: a history of
the Evergreen State. Seattle, University of
Washington Press [1965] 362 p.
65-4963 F89I.A82
Bibliography: p. 331—340.
A revision of the history section of the author's
History and Government of the State of Washing-
ton (Seattle, University of Washington Press, 1961.
583 p.), which was prepared as a combined text-
book for history and government courses in the
State. Intended for the general public, the present
work provides a background to more specialized
study. The narrative surveys early explorations, the
fur trade. Indian wars, and political development.
Topical discussions are included of geology, Indian
culture, industrial progress, and cultural growth,
with the exception of literature and art.
1867. Stewart, Edgar I. Washington: Northwest
frontier. New York, Lewis Historical Pub.
Co. [1957] 4 v. illus. 58-320 F89I.S87
Includes bibliographical references.
This general history traces the development of
the State from the 16th-century exploration of the
Northwest to the present. Although the author
focuses on local history, he emphasizes events and
developments which were significant within the
context of national history. The first two volumes
are historical, the last two biographical.
IDAHO
1868.
Beal, Merrill D., and Merle W. Wells. His-
tory of Idaho. New York, Lewis Historical
Pub. Co. [1959] 3v. 59-4740 F746-B335
Vol. 3 has title: History of Idaho; Personal and
Family History.
"Bibliographical essay": v. i, p. [xi]— xiv. In-
cludes bibliographical references.
Traces the development of the State from the
Lewis and Clark Expedition (1805—6) to the pres-
ent. The authors emphasize the effect of major
national events and social forces on the history of
Idaho.
U. Alaska and Hawaii
ALASKA
1869. Sherwood, Morgan B. Exploration of Alas-
ka, 1865—1900. New Haven, Yale Univer-
sity Press, 1965. xiv, 207 p. illus. (Yale Western
Americana series, 7) 65-11187 F9o8.S6
Bibliographical footnotes.
The progress of exploration is a logical and sub-
stantive theme for Alaskan history during the pe-
riod covered. Commercial affairs were limited geo-
graphically, and the sparse civilized population
precluded an emphasis on political activity. At the
time of the American purchase in 1867, Alaska was
a vast terra incognita. By 1900, as a result of Ameri-
can exploration, problems in gross geography had
largely been solved. The author's purpose is to trace
the course of exploration by variously sponsored ex-
peditions and to determine to what extent it resem-
bled the exploration phase of the stateside westward
expansion of a half century earlier. He concludes
that the institutional patterns were similar with re-
spect to commercial motive, the quest for scientific
knowledge, and governmental responsibility. In
view of the social attitudes in the United States at
the time and Alaska's infinitesimal population, the
exploration activities in these years and especially
the role played by the Federal Government can be
considered extensive.
232 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
HAWAII
1870. Day, Arthur Grove, and Carl Stroven, eds.
A Hawaiian reader. With an introduction
by James A. Michener. New York, Appleton-
Century-Crofts [1959] 363 p.
59-14048 DU620.3-D3
An anthology containing 37 selections from the
work of 30 authors who have written about Hawaii.
The excerpts are arranged chronologically according
to the date of the incidents, beginning with the
discovery of the islands by Captain James Cook. A
brief introduction precedes each selection. Included
are five pieces on ancient Hawaiian folklore and
literature. Ruling Chiefs of Hawaii (Honolulu,
Kamehameha Schools Press [1961] 440 p.), by
Samuel M. Kamakau, presents the "historical and
ethnographic record of Hawaii."
1871. Kuykendall, Ralph S., and Arthur Grove
Day. Hawaii: a history, from Polynesian
kingdom to American State. Rev. ed. Englewood
Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall [1961] 331 p. illus.
61-8894 DU625.K778 1961
This revised edition of no. 4220 in the 1960 Guide
brings the history of Hawaii up to date by docu-
menting the final steps toward statehood, achieved
in 1959. In The Hawaiian Revolution, 1893—94
(Selinsgrove, Pa., Susquehanna University Press,
X959- 372 P-) an<^ *ts secluel> The Hawaiian Repub-
lic, 1894—98 (Selinsgrove, Pa., Susquehanna Uni-
versity Press, 1961. 398 p.), William A. Russ
recounts the events which led to the annexation of
Hawaii to the United States.
V. Overseas Possessions
1872. Coulter, John W. The Pacific dependencies
of the United States. New York, Macmil-
lan, 1957. 388 p. illus. 57~9543 F97O.C6
Includes bibliographies.
A comparative study of land utilization, land
tenure, and population in the Pacific Islands under
American trusteeship, based on 13 years of research
and travel among the Pacific Islanders. Particular
attention is devoted to differences in island geog-
raphy and agricultural methods. Among the islands
discussed are Hawaii, Samoa, Guam, the Marianas,
and the Marshalls. The author concludes that, in
every South Sea area invaded by the West, native
cultures have slowly disintegrated and some of the
best and much of the worst of alien ways have
been adopted.
AMERICAN SAMOA
1873. Gray, John A. C. Amerika Samoa; a history
of American Samoa and its United States
Naval Administration. Annapolis, United States
Naval Institute [1960] 295 p. illus.
60-12080 DU8i9.AiG7
In 1899 Samoa was partitioned under American
and German rule. The first part of Gray's book
presents an anthropological and historical survey of
the islands prior to 1900; the second part is a de-
scription of "Amerika Samoa" or "Eastern Samoa"
and its progress under U.S. rule. The territory was
governed by the United States Naval Administra-
tion until 1951, when the responsibility was trans-
ferred to the Department of the Interior.
PUERTO RICO
1874. Lewis, Gordon K. Puerto Rico; freedom
and power in the Caribbean. New York
[Monthly Review Press] 1963. 626 p.
63—20065 Fi 958X4
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(P- 575~6*3)-
Contending that the literature on Puerto Rico,
an independent Commonwealth in association with
the United States, depicts it as a "tropical terminus
of the American way of life rather than as a thresh-
old to the wider Caribbean and Middle American
worlds," Lewis seeks to correct the distortion. Part
i deals with "The Past," from the voyage of Colum-
bus in the i5th century to the emergence of the
Popular Democratic Party in the 1940'$. The author
characterizes the island as a continuing neocolonial
society and the United States consequendy as a
continuing neocolonial power. The topics covered
in part 2, "The Present," offer evidence for such
portrayals and also provide further material for "an
extensive examination of the general experience of
Puerto Rican life and thought." The last purpose
of this scholarly study — to use the island as a proto-
type of the mass of new problems caused by the
mutual confrontation of the developed and under-
developed societies in the modern world — underlies
the entire volume and is given final expression in
part 3, which concerns the future for Puerto Rico
and world society.
XIII
Travel and Travelers
4
A. General Worths
I TJ ,„ C~l*-*-J T
L
79 Selected Travelers, 1754—1898
(chronologically arranged by the date of their travels)
1875-1877
1878-1915 J
No ENTRIES appropriate to the 1960 Guide's Section B, Anthologies, were located for the
decade covered by this Supplement, and the designation "B" has therefore been assigned
to the list of selected travelers, which was Section C in the original volume. The list of
travelers below is limited to 19, as compared to 50 in the initial Guide. Four of the 19 (no.
1880, 1882, 1888, and 1894) are m the tyfo Guide, and the entry numbers for their headnotes
there are provided in the Supplement. Of the 15 newly listed travelers at least six (no. i
1896, 1900, 1904, 1906, and 1914) are authors of
works previously unpublished, or published only in
part. At least three others (no. 1884, 1890, and
1898) are the authors of works not heretofore avail-
able in full in English. Although most of the trav-
els are from the period before 1865 — as in the case
of those reported in the 1960 Guide — one of them
took place in 1898, four years after the terminal date
of the final account listed in the earlier volume. In
addition to the observations of visitors from France,
Switzerland, England, Sweden, Poland, Germany,
and Spain, the new Section B also records accounts
by three native Americans.
A. General Works
1875. Clark, Thomas D., ed. Travels in the Old
South, a bibliography. Norman, University
of Oklahoma Press [1956—59] 3 v. illus. (The
American exploration and travel series, no. 19)
56-8016 71251.8704
CONTENTS. — v. i. The formative years, 1527—
1783; from the Spanish explorations through the
American Revolution. — v. 2. The expanding
South, 1750—1825: the Ohio Valley and the cotton
frontier. — v. 3. The ante-bellum South, 1825—
1860: cotton, slavery, and conflict.
1876. Clark, Thomas D., ed. Travels in the new
South, a bibliography. Norman, University
of Oklahoma Press [1962] 2 v. illus. (The
American exploration and travel series, v. 36)
62-10772 Zi25i.S7C38
In v. 2, this work is incorrectly listed as v. 37 in
the series.
CONTENTS. — v. i. The postwar South, 1865—
1900. — v. 2. The twentieth-century South, 1900 —
1955-
A two-part series of more than 2,000 annotated
entries arranged alphabetically within each chrono-
logical period, beginning with the early Spanish
travelers in the i6th century and the English settle-
ment in 1606. The years 1860—65 are omitted in
deference to Ellis Merton Coulter's Travels in the
Confederate States, a Bibliography (1948), no. 3365
in the 1960 Guide. The series attempts to appraise
and evaluate the valid aspects of the travel accounts,
including geographies, atlases, surveys, and statis-
tical reports. There is also peripheral literature of
a regional nature, but the bibliographies do not
touch on magazines, newspapers, or fugitive mis-
cellaneous publications. Seeking "to follow the
established rules of bibliography which make for
clarified usability," the compilers have devoted con-
233
234 / A GUIDE T0 THE UNITED STATES
siderable space to the annotations and to supple-
mental notes.
1877. Hubach, Robert R. Early Midwestern travel
narratives; an annotated bibliography, 1634—
1850. Detroit, Wayne State University Press, 1961.
I49 p. 60-15110 Zi25i.W5H8
The Midwest is defined as "that section of Amer-
ica as far east as the western border of Pennsylvania
and including all territory north of the Ohio River
and north of the present states of Arkansas and
Oklahoma to the Canadian border." Hubach's
bibliography includes both published and unpub-
lished materials, generously annotated and arranged
in chronological order. Exceptions to the chrono-
logical arrangement are treated in separate units.
Further notes for each chapter appear at the end
of the book.
B. 19 Selected Travelers, 1754 - i
(chronologically arranged by the date of their travels)
1878. 1754-1813. JOHN GOTTLIEB ERNEST-
US HECKEWELDER (1743-1823)
"A man on the move," Heckewelder, an Ameri-
can Moravian missionary, came to this country
from England at the age of 12 and lived and
traveled among the Indians for nearly 60 years. He
journeyed extensively through the eastern woods
and crossed the Allegheny mountains 30 times,
making numerous trips through Pennsylvania,
Ohio, and Indiana. "As a reporter of Indian life
during his time and in his vicinity he has no
superior," the editor of his journals maintains.
Heckewelder also assisted in various advisory and
administrative capacities in dealing with the Indi-
ans. Twelve edited manuscript journals of his
travels provide the major source for the narratives
presented here, which are told in an unobtrusive
and simple manner. His final years were spent in
the preparation of historical and linguistic records
of Pennsylvania tribes.
1879. Thirty thousand miles with John Hecke-
welder, edited by Paul A. W. Wallace.
[Pittsburgh] University of Pittsburgh Press [1958]
xvii, 474 p. illus. 58—6422 £163^4
Heckwelder's travel journals, gathered from vari-
ous repositories, and selections from his published
reminiscences woven into a connected story.
1880. 1773-1778. WILLIAM
(1739-1823)
No. 4247 in 1960 Guide.
BARTRAM
1 88 1. Travels. Edited with commentary and an
annotated index by Francis Harper. Natur-
alist's ed. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1958.
Ixi, 727 p. illus. 57-11916 F2I3.B2893
Bibliography: p. 668-694.
A revised edition of no. 4248—4250 in the 1900
Guide. The editor provides an introduction with
an account of Bartram's life and travels; a long
commentary principally on his geographical routes;
and an inclusive annotated index, identifying,
among other things, the plants, animals, minerals,
persons, and Indian tribes that Bartram notes or
describes.
1882. 1780-1782. FRANCOIS JEAN, MARQUIS
DE CHASTELLUX (1734-1788)
No. 4251 in 1960 Guide.
1883. Travels in North America in the years 1780,
1781, and 1782.
A revised translation with introduction and notes
by Howard C. Rice, Jr. Chapel Hill, Published
for the Institute of Early American History and
Culture at Williamsburg, Va., by the University
of North Carolina Press [ 1963] 2 v. (xxiv, 688 p.)
illus. 63-18103 £163.059 1963
"Note on bibliographic and cartographic sources":
v. 2, p. 556-561.
A drastically revised version of George Grieve's
18th-century translation, no. 4253 in the 1960 Guide,
through which Chastellux' book has been known
to English-speaking readers. Passages have been
clarified, archaisms modernized, and efforts made
to convey the exact meaning and general spirit of
the original. The journals have been divided into
chapters, and notes have been supplied at the back
of the book.
1884. 1783-1784. FRANCISCO DE MIRANDA
(1750—1816)
Miranda was born in Caracas, the son of a pros-
perous linen merchant and planter. A cultured,
enigmatic military hero, he deserted the Spanish
army in 1783 by slipping aboard an American
whaler bound for the United States from Cuba.
As a fugitive he spent his life trying to liberate the
Spanish colonies. Eventually he died in prison in
Cadiz. His diary displays a strong sense of history
and records his tour through the Carolinas, Penn-
sylvania, Delaware, New Jersey, New York, Con-
necticut, Rhode Island, Massachusetts, and New
Hampshire and most of the major communities on
the eastern coast. His intellectual interests and his
accounts of numerous influential acquaintances
have produced a description of life in America
which fills an important gap in our firsthand knowl-
edge of the period.
1885. The new democracy in America; travels of
Francisco de Miranda in the United States,
1783-84. Translated by Judson P. Wood. Edited
by John S. Ezell. Norman, University of Okla-
homa Press [1963] xxxii, 217 p. illus. (The
American exploration and travel series, 40)
63—9959 £164^673
Bibliographical references included in "Editor's
preface."
The first complete translation into English of that
portion of Miranda's diary which deals with his
travels in the United States.
1886. 1785-1798. MICHEL GUILLAUME ST.
JEAN DE CRfeVECOEUR (1735-1813)
Michel Guillaume St. Jean de Crevecoeur became
famous after the publication of his Letters From an
American Farmer (1782), no. 4500-4501 in the 1960
Guide. Often compared to Thoreau because of his
love of nature and his agrarian philosophy, Creve-
coeur demonstrates the resemblance in his Journey
Into Northern Pennsylvania and the State of New
Yort(. He uses the literary device of a "found" or
"shipwrecked" manuscript, alleging that he is mere-
ly the translator. The element of travel is second-
ary. It is in the pastoral descriptions, romantic
legends, adventure sagas, and the telling of Indian
lore that the author excels.
1887. Journey into northern Pennsylvania and the
State of New York. Translated by Clarissa
Spencer Bostelmann. Ann Arbor, University of
Michigan Press [1964] xviii, 619 p.
63—14014 Fi53-C923 1964
TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 235
and Durand Echeverria. Edited by Durand Eche-
verria. Cambridge, Mass., Belknap Press of Har-
vard University Press, 1964. xxviii, 477 p. illus.
(The John Harvard library)
64-19579 £164.689285
Bibliographical footnotes.
A new translation and a complete rendering of
the French text, no. 4259 in the 1960 Guide. No.
4260 in the 1960 Guide is a translation of the first
two of the three volumes in the original French
edition.
1890. 1797-1807. JULIAN URSYN NIEMCE-
WICZ (1758-1841)
Niemcewicz was a Polish patriot, a statesman,
and a prolific author. He was born in Lithuania
and elected to the Polish parliament in 1788. Later
he became Kosciuszko's aide-de-camp during the
insurrection of 1794 and was captured and im-
prisoned. Upon his release he left for the United
States with Kosciuszko in 1797. After living brief-
ly in Philadelphia, he settled in Elizabeth, N.J.,
where he married a prominent widow. Family
obligations recalled him to Poland in 1802, and he
remained there for two years. From 1804 to 1807
he lived again in America, keeping journals that
describe his domestic and private life and local
people and scenes. Impressionistic in nature, the
journals reflect the early and relatively unexplored
history of American-Polish cultural relations.
1891. Under their vine and fig tree; travels through
America in 1797—1799, 1805, with some
further account of life in New Jersey. Translated
and edited, with an introduction and notes, by
Metchie J. E. Budka. Elizabeth, N.J., Grassmann
Pub. Co. [1965] Ivii, 398 p. illus. (Collections
of the New Jersey Historical Society at Newark,
v. 14) 65—15378 Fi3i.N62 vol. 14
A translation of the author's manuscript note-
books, originally written in French or Polish and
first published in Polish under the title Podroze po
Ameryce, ijyj—iSoj (1959).
1888. 1788. JACQUES PIERRE BRISSOT DE
WARVILLE (1754-1793)
No. 4258 in 1960 Guide.
1889. New travels in the United States of America,
1788. Translated by Mara Soceanu Vamos
1892. 1817-1818. WILLIAM COBBETT( 1763-
1835)
In 1817 William Cobbett, one of the most unruly
figures in English literature and politics, fled to
the United States to avoid possible arrest for his
violently expressed demands for measures in behalf
of the poor. Renting a farm on Long Island, N.Y.,
he read, experimented with crops, and wrote A
Year's Residence in the United States of America.
The diary shows his journalistic skill as he describes
the customs, manners, and agricultural techniques
236 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
of the Americans and remarks upon natural phe-
nomena. His comments are frequently bare and
fragmented, but he notes conditions with precision.
He prefers "to deal a little in particular instances"
rather than in general descriptions, and his details
give veracity to the journal. Cobbett includes
Thomas Hulme's "Journal of a Tour in the West-
ern Countries of America" (p. 253—283), copied
from Hulme's manuscript, which covers his visit to
the West as far as Illinois during the period Sep-
tember 30, 1818, to August 7, 1819.
1893. A year's residence in the United States of
America: treating of the face of the country,
the climate, the soil, the products, the mode of
cultivating the land, the prices of land, of labour,
of food, of raiment; of the expenses of housekeep-
ing, and of the usual manner of living; of the
manners and customs of the people; and of the
institutions of the country, civil, political, and re-
ligious. Carbondale, Southern Illinois University
Press [1965, Ci964] 338 p. illus. (Centaur
classics) 64-14796 Ei65.C668
1894. 1833-1835. MICHEL CHEVALIER
(1806-1879)
No. 4312 in 1960 Guide,
1895. Society, manners, and politics in the United
States; letters on North America. Edited
and with an introduction by John William Ward.
Translated after the T. G. Bradford ed. Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1961. 419 p. (Anchor
books, A259) 6l~9754 £165^54 1961
Translation of Lettres sur I Amerique du Nord.
A new edition of no. 4314 in the 1960 Guide,
containing approximately 5,000 corrections of Brad-
ford's translation and supplying materials that he
omitted. According to the editor, it is the "first
complete edition of Chevalier's Lettres in English."
The footnotes from the original translation have
been omitted, since they are now deemed unneces-
sary.
1896. 1836-1837. THOMAS GATHER.
Thomas Gather, a lawyer and member of
the Royal Irish Academy from County London-
derry, was best known for his study of the Gaelic
origins of local place names. At the age of 23 he
traveled to America, accompanied by his friend
Henry Tyler. He covered some 12,000 miles in all
with visits to New York, Philadelphia, Detroit,
Baltimore, and Charleston. After a side trip to
Cuba he took a Mississippi steamer to Kentucky
and from there traveled by horseback, stagecoach
and wagon deep into the frontier, entering obser-
vations and minute details in his journals. He was
intolerant of American coarseness and passion for
money but admired the strength of the new Nation.
He foresaw the Civil War a quarter of a century
before its occurrence.
1897. Voyage to America; the journals of Thomas
Gather, edited with an introduction by
Thomas Yoseloff. Illustrated with contemporary
drawings by Harry Tyler. New York, T. Yoseloff
[1961] 176 p. illus. 60-6841 £165^35
The text of the first three months of the journal
was published in London in 1955 under the title
Journal of a Voyage to America in 1836.
1898. 1841-1858. GUSTAF ELIAS MARIUS
UNONIUS( 1810-1902)
Gustaf Unonius was a Finn who moved to Swe-
den with his family when his homeland came under
Russian domination. He studied law at Uppsala
University and became a clerk for the provincial
government at Uppsala. At 31 he emigrated to
America and took orders in the Protestant Episco-
pal Church. Seventeen years later, disappointed in
the United States and in his hopes for a Utopian
colony, he returned to Sweden and published two
volumes of his Memoirs. In the first volume he
describes his arrival in New York and his journey
by steamer and canalboat to Wisconsin, with stops
along the way at Albany, Buffalo, Detroit, and
Milwaukee. Unonius' privation as a pioneer farm-
er and minister of the gospel is faithfully detailed.
Much material of a secondary nature about Ameri-
can life in the 1850'$ has been deleted by the editor,
but nothing of autobiographical interest has been
omitted. Throughout the work, Unonius seeks to
uphold the viewpoint of the Episcopal Church and
shows bias in his judgments of other denominations.
The second volume introduces further lengthy de-
scriptions of his experiences as an immigrant in
Wisconsin and Illinois a century ago.
1899. A pioneer in Northwest America, 1841-
1858; the memoirs of Gustaf Unonius.
Translated from the Swedish by Jonas Oscar Back-
lund; edited by Nils William Olsson. With an
introduction by George M. Stephenson. Minneap-
olis, Published for the Swedish Pioneer Historical
Society by the University of Minnesota Press
[1950-60] 2 v. illus. 50-11209 £166^593
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(P- 327-342)-
The first English translation of Minnen frdn en
sjuttonarig vistelse i nordvestra America (1862.
2V.).
1900. 1842-1844- WILLIAM BOLL AERT( 1 8o7-
1876)
At 13 William Bollaert of Hampshire, England,
entered the Royal Institution as a laboratory assist-
ant; he published some of his original discoveries
when he was only 16. He later worked as an
assayer and chemist in Peru and as an agent of
diplomatic intrigue for the Carlists in Spain, where
he spent six years. In 1841 he made arrangements
to explore Texas, with the idea of possibly settling
there. He had followed the eastern coast to the
most heavily populated areas, to the low country,
and to the prairies when agitation for the annexa-
tion of Texas to the United States changed his
plans; he returned to London in 1844. His sympa-
thetic and appealing account of life in the frontier
republic is full of scientific data, portrayals of social
life, and random observations and is here accom-
panied by voluminous footnotes supplied by the
editors.
1901. William Bollaert's Texas, edited by W. Eu-
gene Hollon and Ruth Lapham Butler.
Norman, University of Oklahoma Press [1956]
xxiii, 423 p. illus. (The American exploration and
travel series, 21 ) 56—11228 F39O.B68
Bibliography: p. 390—396.
Edited from manuscripts in the Newberry
Library.
1902. 1853-1858. DAVID HUNTER STROTH-
ER ("PORTE CRAYON") (1816-1888)
Strother was born into an illustrious Virginia fam-
ily which included such literary figures as John
Pendleton Kennedy, John Esten Cooke, and Philip
Pendleton Cooke. An invalid in childhood, he
developed an early interest in the arts. When his
health subsequently improved he turned to explora-
tion and employed his talents at sketching to record
his journeys. His work eventually came to the
attention of Harper's Monthly, and he became one
of its highest paid contributors as writer and illus-
trator. His portrayals of leisurely, rural America,
the Appalachian mountaineer, and the Negro were
intended to combine instruction with amusement.
Strother 's entire career as artist, writer, soldier, and
diplomat is treated in Cecil D. Eby's "Porte Cray-
on": The Life of David Hunter Strother (Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press [1960]
258 p.).
1903. The Old South illustrated. Profusely illus-
trated by the author. Edited with an intro-
duction by Cecil D. Eby, Jr. Chapel Hill, Univer-
sity of North Carolina L°i959] xxi, 296 p.
60-687 F2I3.S87
TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 237
"Taken from ... [the author's] articles scattered
in Harper's Monthly between 1853 and 1858."
"Bibliographical appendix": p. [2935-296.
Selections from Strother's articles in Harper's
Monthly, 1853-58.
1904. 1859-1862. ISRAEL JOSEPH BENJAMIN
(1818-1864)
Benjamin was born to a traditionally orthodox
Jewish family in the Turkish province of Moldavia.
He failed as a lumber-trader at 25 and decided to
become a maggid, a type of moralistic, itinerant
preacher. He spent his life traveling, preaching,
and writing of his travels. This is a record of one
of his journeys and is one of the few accounts of
American life before 1870 by a Jewish writer. Inter-
ested primarily in moralizing, Benjamin makes no
attempt at either scholarship or accuracy and pre-
sents an entertaining and informative, if somewhat
prejudiced, description of the United States. Al-
though he remained in New York for more than a
year, he treats only California at length. The fer-
ment over slavery prevented his traveling in the
South. Oscar Handlin's introduction to the edition
entered below provides a historical setting for this
translation of Benjamin's hitherto unpublished
journal.
1905. Three years in America, 1859—1862; trans-
lated from the German by Charles Rezni-
koff, with an introduction by Oscar Handlin.
Philadelphia, Jewish Publication Society of America,
1956. 2 v. (The Jacob R. Schiff library of Jewish
contributions to American democracy)
56-7957
1906. 1859-1861. BARON SALOMON DE
ROTHSCHILD (1835-1864)
Grandson to the founder of the powerful banking
dynasty, Salomon de Rothschild came to America
from France in 1859, ostensibly on family business.
He stayed for 18 months, at the height of the debate
on slavery, and visited New York, Jamestown, Sara-
toga, Newport, Baltimore, and New Orleans. He
wrote well but in a contemptuous vein about the
provincialism of Americans. He was arrogant and
self-confident and more impressed with the failings
of the United States than with its accomplishments.
Strongly attracted to the South, he attempted unsuc-
cessfully to influence his country on behalf of the
Confederacy. He died at the age of 29, three years
after his return to Paris.
1907. A casual view of America; the home letters
of Salomon de Rothschild, 1859—1861.
238 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Translated and edited by Sigmund Diamond. Stan-
ford, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1961. 136 p.
61-14650 Ei66.R823
Translated from a manuscript volume in the
Bibliotheque Nationale.
1908. 1861. CAMILLE FERRI-PISANI
Camille Ferri-Pisani was born in Coudray,
near Paris, the son of a Corsican. He had a brilliant
career as a professional soldier, and at the time of
his visit to America in 1861 he was an aide-de-camp
to Joseph Bonaparte, Prince Napoleon. The re-
sponsibility of keeping a record of the trip, which
was regarded as a private visit, fell to Ferri-Pisani.
The tour was of two months' duration and included
a meeting with President Lincoln, excursions
through the Northern and Western States, visits to
New York, Philadelphia, Cleveland, Detroit, Boston,
Washington, Pittsburgh, and other cities. Ferri-
Pisani emphasizes the meetings with Civil War
leaders and the military and political circumstances
in which his group found itself.
1909. Prince Napoleon in America, 1861. Letters
from his aide-de-camp. Translated with a
preface by George J. Joyaux. Foreword by Bruce
Catton. Illustrated by Gil Walker. Bloomington,
Indiana University Press, 1959. 317 p. illus.
59—9248 £167^383
Translation of Lettres sur les £tats-Unis d'
Amerique (1862).
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p.
1910. 1865-1866. JOHN RICHARD DEN-
NETT (1838-1874)
Brought to Massachusetts from New Brunswick
as a child, John Richard Dennett attended Harvard,
became editor of the Harvard Magazine, and was
chosen class poet in his senior year. In 1865, when
The Nation was conceived, he was invited to join
the staff as a special correspondent covering the
South. He traveled widely in Virginia, the Caro-
linas, Georgia, Mississippi, Alabama, and Louisiana,
reporting what he saw and heard in a series of
weekly letters which captured the idiom and speech
of the day through the use of dialects. His observa-
tions were penetrating and objective, based on inter-
views in isolated rural areas as well as in urban
centers. This volume brings the Dennett letters
together in book form for the first time.
1911. The South as it is: 1865-1866. Edited and
with an introduction by Henry M. Christ-
man. New York, Viking Press [1965] 370 p.
65—19271 F2i6.E>4 1965
1912. 1876-1878. HENRYK SIENKIEWICZ
(1846-1916)
Sienkiewicz, born in Russian Poland to a family
of impoverished gentry, is best known as the author
of Quo Vadis? (1895) and recipient of the Nobel
Prize for literature (1905). At 30 he joined a Polish
group in a plan to establish a small Utopian colony
in California. Sent ahead with one companion to
choose a location, Sienkiewicz financed his journey
by writing articles for Polish newspapers. He
arrived in New York in 1876 and, after a brief stay
there, set out for California via Chicago over the
recently completed transcontinental railroad. His
reports, most of which were originally published as
a series in Gazeta polska (Warsaw), contain ac-
counts of the democratization of America and of
encounters with American customs, sensitive de-
scriptions of the land and the people, and a com-
parison between America and Europe. The colony
was founded but quickly collapsed, and Sienkiewicz
was back in Poland by 1878.
1913. Portrait of America, letters. Edited & trans-
lated by Charles Morley. New York, Co-
lumbia University Press, 1959. 300 p. illus.
59-7371 £168.55763
Translation of v. 41-42 of Listy z podrozy do
Amcryft (1947-55).
1914. 1898. BEATRICE POTTER WEBB
(1858-1943)
Beatrice Potter was born in an upper-class Vic-
torian home in Gloucester. Ill as a child, she re-
ceived her education informally at home. She mar-
ried Sidney Webb of the Fabian Society, and for 50
years they were leaders of major social and economic
reform movements in England. This journal is the
result of a trip the Webbs took to the United States
in 1898. Mrs. Webb emphasizes her investigations
of local governments in the cities of New York,
Boston, Cincinnati, Denver, Salt Lake City, and
San Francisco. Interviews with two future Presi-
dents, Theodore Roosevelt and Woodrow Wilson,
are included. Mrs. Webb's descriptions and im-
pressions of the country and of the many prominent
people she sought out are perceptive but somewhat
provincial and condescending in tone.
1915. American diary, 1898. Edited by David A.
Shannon. Madison, University of Wiscon-
sin Press, 1963. 181 p. illus. 63-8436 Ei68.W4
The first publication of a manuscript in the Brit-
ish Library of Political and Economic Science, Lon-
don School of Economics.
XIV
Population, Immigration, and Minorities
A. Population
B. Immigration: General
C. Immigration: Policy
D. Minorities
E. Negroes
F. Jews
G. Orientals
H. North Americans
I. Scandinavians
J. OMer Stocks
1916—1921
1922—1925
1926-1928
1929-1934
I935~I954
1955-1959
1960—1962
1963-1965
1966
1967-1975
SECTION A, Population, reflects the increasing concern with population growth in the United
States as a whole and in the metropolitan centers in particular. The movement to the
cities magnifies the difficulty of providing adequate housing, water supply, waste disposal,
education, medical care, transportation, police protection, and other services. What the
population explosion is doing to destroy man's natural environment is discussed in Sections
G and H of Chapter XVII, Land and Agriculture. Section A of the present chapter includes
studies which deal statistically with the character-
istics of the population as such, its geographical
distribution, age grouping, marital status, and re-
lationship to economic trends.
Since the publication of the 1960 Guide, a num-
ber of social scientists, historians, and journalists
have studied the situations of minority groups in
the large urban areas. This chapter lists both cur-
rent and historical analyses of the Negroes, Jews,
Irish, Italians, and Puerto Ricans in New York, the
Chinese in San Francisco, the Italians in Boston,
and the Negroes in Chicago. The chapter also in-
cludes books on other minority groups, such as the
Finns, Poles, Scotch-Irish, Norwegians, and Greeks.
These works are mostly historical, as are the vol-
umes on immigration. The increasing emphasis on
books by and about Negroes is reflected in the large
number of selections for Section E. A few of these
might well have been placed in the chapters cover-
ing history, labor, or housing, but they seemed most
appropriate for this chapter. Books on civil liberties
and civil rights can be found in Chapters XXIX
and XXX, and works on the Negro churches are in
Chapter XXIII. Other works on the Negro in
American society can be found through the index.
A. Population
1916. Freedman, Ronald, Pascal K. Whelpton, and
Arthur A. Campbell. Family planning, ste-
rility and population growth. New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1959. 515 p. illus. (McGraw-Hill series in
sociology) 58-14348 HQ766.5.U5F7
Precise information concerning the extent and
success in American society of "family planning" —
use of the several means, variously approved and
variously reliable, of avoiding pregnancy — has been
notoriously lacking. This book reports upon a con-
239
240 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
siderable attempt to supply such information, con-
ducted by the Scripps Foundation for Research in
Population Problems of Miami University and the
Survey Research Center of the University of Michi-
gan and largely financed by the Rockefeller Foun-
dation. It is based upon interviews with 2,713
white married women between the ages of 18 and
39, living with their husbands or separated tempo-
rarily by the latter's military service. The "sample"
was widely spread geographically and included di-
verse income levels and modes of living. The
results show that "subfecundity" and actual sterility
are very common and productive of much individ-
ual unhappiness, but that they make no great dif-
ference— at most a reduction of 10 or 15 percent —
in the total number of births. They show that fam-
ily limitation is generally approved and practiced
and that there is a notable national consensus on
family size — childlessness and a single child are
both thought undesirable, whereas from two to four
children are generally wanted and obtained. The
authors report remarkably little variation between
income levels, which may indicate that the sample
was deficient in slumdwellers and "problem" fam-
ilies. The present family ideals, however, are suf-
ficient to point toward rapid population growth and
a probable total U.S. population of 312 million by
A.D. 2000, with the present sex ratio but a larger
proportion of children under 18. Family Growth
in Metropolitan America (Princeton, N.J., Prince-
ton University Press, 1961. 433 p.), by Charles F.
Wester! and others, investigates the social and psy-
chological factors thought to relate to differences in
fertility among American couples living in the larg-
est population centers of the Nation.
1917. Hauser, Philip M. Population perspectives.
New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers University
Press [1961, Ci96o] 183 p. illus.
61-7090 HB3505.H3
Includes bibliography.
In these Brown and Haley lectures delivered at
the University of Puget Sound, Hauser discusses the
facts and consequences of three "explosions" — that
in world population, as background, and those in
U.S. total and metropolitan population, as main
themes. People who derive encouragement from
the economic stimulation provided by accelerated
population growth, he argues, are shortsighted,
missing short-run disadvantages and long-run dan-
gers alike. Growth at the present rates means
greatly reduced nonrenewable natural resources per
head, an increased proportion of dependent persons
young and old, increased pressure on virtually all
public services, a decline in the already inadequate
facilities for the aged, the spread of the lowered
quality of elementary education to the higher grades,
and the demand upon an inelastic economy for mil-
lions of additional jobs. The explosive spread of
metropolitan areas has brought about a decline of
civic responsibility, housing shortages affecting many
groups, commuter congestion, and the impossibility
of enforcing codes for building maintenance. Haus-
er also claims that the Negro's higher rate of repro-
duction and his lack of preparation for urban living
create a special set of problems. The primary ele-
ment in all these explosions, the author insists, is
"death control," the sharp reduction in mortality
rates brought about by modern public health and
medical practices; the only way to stabilize the pop-
ulation is through birth control and deliberate fam-
ily limitation. Lincoln H. Day and Alice Taylor
Day, in Too Many Americans (Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1964. 298 p.), enumerate their arguments
for seeking early attainment of population stability
in the United States and discuss how this goal might
best be achieved.
1918. Kuznets, Simon S., and Dorothy S. Thomas,
eds. Population redistribution and economic
growth: United States, 1870—1950. Prepared under
the direction of Simon Kuznets and Dorothy Swaine
Thomas. Philadelphia, American Philosophical
Society, 1957—64. 3 v. illus. (Memoirs of the
American Philosophical Society, v. 45, 51, 61)
57—10071 HBi965.K8
Bibliographical references.
CONTENTS. — i. Methodological considerations and
reference tables, by Everett S. Lee and others. — 2.
Analyses of economic change, by Simon Kuznets,
Ann R. Miller, and Richard A. Easterlin. — 3. Dem-
ographic analyses and interrelations, by Hope T.
Eldridge and Dorothy S. Thomas.
This study emphasizes "the many and close links
between economic growth and population redis-
tribution; the interdependence of the various distri-
butions and redistributions of population and of
economic opportunities; and the importance of mi-
gration as the principal mechanism by which job-
seeking elements in the population are adjusted
numerically and by characteristics to changing tem-
poral-spatial distributions of opportunities." The
discussions are accompanied by numerous tables
listing data on population growth, population move-
ment, wages, incomes, and economic activity.
1919. Maclachlan, John M., and Joe S. Floyd.
This changing South. Gainesville, Univer-
sity of Florida Press, 1956. 154 p.
56-12858 HB35U.M35
As a result of interregional migration, the popu-
lation of the South has been growing more slowly
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 24!
than that of the United States as a whole (an in-
crease of 12.7 as against 14.5 percent between 1940
and 1950), despite its higher rate of natural in-
crease. The white population in the South increased
by 16.5 percent between 1940 and 1950, while the
black population rose only 1.5 percent in the area
as a whole and decreased in six of the 13 Southern
States. The majority of the South's counties — those
predominately rural — lost population, but the re-
mainder showed rapid rates of increase, and the
cities of the South grew more rapidly than those of
"non-southern America." Income in the South,
especially in the States worst off in 1940, likewise
rose more rapidly than in other regions. A precipi-
tous decline in the agricultural labor force was offset
by a rapid rise in the white female labor force. All
these figures point to basic and irreversible changes
in the traditional patterns of Southern society.
1920. Sheldon, Henry D. The older population
of the United States. With introductory and
summary chapters by Clark Tibbitts. For the Social
Science Research Council in cooperation with the
U.S. Dept. of Commerce, Bureau of the Census.
New York, Wiley [1958] 223 p. (Census mono-
graph series) 58-6086 HB 1545 .85
Eleven special monographs were published with
the census of 1920, but depression and war prevent-
ed such studies of the censuses of 1930 and 1940.
The Social Science Research Council and the Rus-
sell Sage Foundation cooperated with the T*r reau of
the Census in ensuring the appearance of Luis Cen-
sus Monograph Series interpreting the 1950 figures.
Four of the volumes were noted in the 1960 Guide
(no. 4395), and another is no. 1921 below. During
the first half of the 2Oth century, while the popula-
tion of the United States nearly doubled, the seg-
ment aged 65 or over nearly quadrupled, rising from
3.1 million to 12.3 million. Within this older pop-
ulation, the number of males for each 100 females
declined during the period from 102.1 to 89.6.
Sheldon examines the statistical characteristics of
this group with respect to geographic distribution,
employment and occupation, living arrangements,
and income. In 1950, 42 percent of the men over
64 remained in the labor force, as compared to 68
percent in 1890. The author states that earlier re-
tirement does not necessarily mean sufficient income,
adequate housing, proper medical care, or oppor-
tunities for utilizing leisure. Statistics on housing
indicate, for example, that among households head-
ed by persons over 64 in 1950, one-third lived in
substandard housing, as against one-fourth for the
middle-aged group. The other volumes in this
series are American Families (240 p.), by Paul C.
Click, and Farm Housing (194 p.), by Glenn H.
Beyer and J. Hugh Rose, both published in New
York by Wiley in 1957.
1921. Taeuber, Conrad, and Irene B. Taeuber.
The changing population of the United
States. For the Social Science Research Council in
cooperation with the U.S. Dept. of Commerce,
Bureau of the Census. New York, Wiley [1958]
357 p. (Census monograph series)
57-13451 HB3505.T3
"Sources for national demographic statistics": p.
327—334. Bibliographical footnotes.
This most general volume of the Census Mono-
graph Series (see no. 1920 above) is concerned with
the trends of greatest significance in all the fields
covered by the census of 1950. In some instances
the First Census of 1790 is the point of departure,
but developments are more often limited to the pres-
ent century. It is noted, for example, that the over-
all density of the population had risen by 1950 to
50.7 persons per square mile. A quarter of the
population was contained in 28 of the Nation's
3,103 counties, as against 39 counties in 1910. Sig-
nificant changes in internal migration occurred in
the 20th century, and marriage became a more gen-
eral condition. The authors conclude with some
very cautious projections, the point of doubt being
whether the recent unusually high fertility rates will
be maintained. Another commentary on the census
of 1950 is provided by Donald J. Bogue in The Pop-
ulation of the United States (Glencoe, 111., Free Press
[Ci959] xix, 873 p.). Intended primarily for ref-
erence use, it has an even greater proportion of
tables, graphs, and maps than the Taeubers' volume
and seeks to interpret the changes of the 1950*5 as
revealed in the Current Population Reports of the
Bureau of the Census and elsewhere. Bogue treats
a number of topics which the Taeubers omit, includ-
ing industrial composition, unemployment, confine-
ment to institutions, religious affiliation, housing,
and the populations of Alaska and Hawaii.
242 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
B. Immigration: General
1922. Ander, Oscar Fritiof, ed. In the trek of the
immigrants, essays presented to Carl Wittke.
Rock Island, 111., Augustana College Library, 1964.
xvi, 325 p. (Augustana Library publications, no.
31) 64—19873 Ei84-AiA66
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 266—299).
CONTENTS.— Preface, by Clarence W. Sorensen.
— Introduction, by O. Fritiof Ander. — Carl Wittke,
historian, by Harvey Wish. — Four historians of im-
migration, by O. Fritiof Ander. — Immigration, emi-
gration, migration, by Carlton C. Qualey. — Bibliog-
raphy of works by Carl Wittke, by Clarence H.
Cramer. — A forgotten theory of immigration, by
Edward P. Hutchinson. — Agrarian myths of Eng-
lish immigrants, by Charlotte Erickson.— A brief
history of immigrant groups in Ohio, by Francis P.
Weisenburger.— The German in American fiction,
by John T. Flanagan. — English migration to the
American West, 1865-1900, by Oscar Osborn Win-
ther.— Saga in steel and concrete, by Kenneth O.
Bjork. — Finnish immigrant farmers in New York,
1910-1960, by A. William Hoglund.— The immi-
grant and the American national idea, by Walter O.
Forster.— British backtrailers: working-class immi-
grants return, by Wilbur S. Shepperson.— Exodus
U.S.A., by Theodore Saloutos.— The Negro in the
old Northwest, by James H. Rodabaugh.— The
American Negro: an old immigrant on a new fron-
tier, by J. Iverne Dowie.
1923. Handlin, Oscar. Boston's immigrants
[1790-1880]; a study in acculturation. Rev.
and enl. ed. Cambridge, Mass., Belknap Press of
Harvard University Press, 1959. 382 p. illus.
59-7653 F73.9.AiH3 1959
A revised edition of no. 4410 in the 1960 Guide.
1924. Jones, Maldwyn A. American immigration.
[Chicago] University of Chicago Press
[1960] 359 p. (The Chicago history of American
civilization) 60-8301 JV6450.J6
Bibliography: p. 325—341.
The author, a Welsh scholar, regards immigration
as "the most persistent and the most pervasive in-
fluence" in America's development and notes that
"as a social process it has shown little variation"
from 1607 to the present. He finds a pervasive
Americanism at work throughout the separate activ-
ities of ethnic groups and points out that the facts of
immigration have forced Americans to broaden their
concept of equality and have given a new meaning
to the national motto "E pluribus unum": "the
unity that has developed from the mingling of peo-
ples diverse in origin but sharing a common devo-
tion to liberty, democracy, and tolerance." Oscar
Handlin has compiled a selection of important read-
ings, mostly from original sources, in his Immigra-
tion as a factor in American History (Englewood
Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall, 1959. 206 p.). In A
Nation of Immigrants, rev. and enl. ed. (New York,
Harper & Row [1964] in p.), John F. Kennedy
reviews U.S. immigration history, stresses multi-
national contributions to American cultural and
economic life, and offers recommendations for im-
provements in present Government policy.
1925. Wittke, Carl F. We who built America; the
saga of the immigrant. [Rev. ed. Cleve-
land] Press of Western Reserve University [1964].
xviii, 550 p. 64-20939 JV6455.W55 1964
Includes bibliographical references.
An updated edition of no. 4417 in the 1960 Guide.
C. Immigration: Policy
1926. Bennett, Marion T. American immigration
policies, a history. Washington, Public Af-
fairs Press [1963] 362 p. 63-10815 JV6465.B4
Bibliography: p. 347-356.
This careful study by a Commissioner of the U.S.
Court of Claims deals chiefly with the McCarran-
Walter Act of 1952, which codified the scattered
legislation on immigration for the first time and con-
firmed and entrenched the restrictions inaugurated
by the quota system in 1924. Bennett summarizes
the history of immigration down to 1950 and the
legislation which it provoked, noting that the first
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 243
Federal law to restrict immigration was passed in
1875, when certain classes of orientals were exclud-
ed. He also discusses the Senate report of 1950 on
the study (authorized in 1947 and extended to
March 1950) which constituted "the first broad-
scale investigation of our immigration system by
Congress since the one in the years 1907—1911,"
which was less comprehensive. Chapters 12 and 13
present 26 detailed criticisms of the act, most of
which were voiced by Presidents Truman and
Eisenhower, with answers drawn from statements
by the cosponsors of the act and by Richard Arens,
the staff director of the Senate Subcommittee To
Investigate Immigration and Naturalization. The
several relaxations of the law in President Eisen-
hower's administration are reviewed. The quota
plan is judged to have failed in its original in-
tention, that of preserving the dominant national
origins of the American people, because of various
alternative principles admitted in the act itself and
in subsequent legislation — such as family unity,
asylum to refugees, and Western Hemisphere soli-
darity through unrestricted migration. The author
discusses problems of the future and points out that,
between the restrictionists and the antirestrictionists,
there is a large middle ground, favoring "sufficient
restrictions to bar those who have nothing worthy
to contribute to our society," yet welcoming those
who seek freedom and support American institutions.
1927. Common Council for American Unity. The
alien and the immigration law; a study of
1446 cases arising under the immigration and nat-
uralization laws of the United States. A study
under the direction of Edith Lowenstein. New
York, Oceana Publications, 1958 [ci957J 388 p.
57—12992 KF48oo.C6 1958
Shortly after publishing this study, the Common
Council for American Unity merged with another
organization to become the American Council for
Nationalities Service; one of its functions remains
the provision of legal aid to immigrants and would-
be immigrants. The study describes the difficulties
encountered, the assistance received, and the con-
clusions reached in connection with applications
since the Immigration and Nationality Act, usually
referred to as the McCarran- Walter Act, went into
effect in 1952. The cases are arranged under the
headings of Immigration, Status, Deportation,
Naturalization, and Nationality; some cases are dis-
cussed under more than one heading. Read Lewis,
the Executive Director of the Common Council,
notes that the immigration act of September n,
1957, alleviated some hardships but fails to "cover all
the situations in which administrative discretion to
ease hardship is needed." This closeup view of the
actual working of the immigration code can be
supplemented by A Research Study Concerning
Illegal Entrants and Illegal Aliens in the United
States (Carbondale, 111., Southern Illinois Univer-
sity, 1958. 199 p.), by James C. Messersmith, who
treats the problems encountered by the Immigration
and Naturalization Service in guarding the country's
borders. The author discusses factors that lead
aliens to attempt illegal entry and describes the en-
forcement activities of the four regional offices of
the Service.
1928. Higham, John. Strangers in the land; pat-
terns of American nativism, 1860—1925.
Corrected and with a new preface. New York,
Atheneum, 1963. 431 p. (Atheneum paperbacks,
32) 63-3476 Ei84.AiH5 1963
Includes bibliography.
A corrected edition of no. 4422 in the 1960 Guide.
D. Minorities
1929. Glazer, Nathan, and Daniel P. Moynihan.
Beyond the melting pot; the Negroes, Puerto
Ricans, Jews, Italians, and Irish of New York City.
Cambridge, Mass. M.I.T. Press, 1963. 360 p.
(Publications of the Joint Center for Urban Studies
of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology and
Harvard University) 63-18005 Fi28.9.AiG55
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 325-347)-
The authors examine the continuance of strong
ethnic consciousness among the large immigrant
groups of New York City and attempt to explain
why these groups have not been assimilated by the
"melting pot." Four major events or social proc-
esses of the past generation are distinguished which
have prevented the assimilation of Jews, Catholics,
Negroes, and Puerto Ricans, respectively. Oscar
Handlin concentrates on two of these groups in The
Newcomers: Negroes and Puerto Ricans in a Chang-
ing Metropolis (Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1959. 171 p. New York metropolitan region
study). The Urban Villagers: Group and Class in
the Life of Italian- Americans ([New York] Free
Press of Glencoe [1962] 367 p.), by Herbert J.
244 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Cans, is a report on life in a Boston slum about to
undergo clearance. The author concludes that the
behavior patterns and values of working-class sub-
cultures ought to be understood and taken into ac-
count by urban planners.
1930. Gossett, Thomas F. Race; the history of an
idea in America. Dallas, Southern Metho-
dist University Press, 1963. 512 p.
63-21187 Ei84.AiG6
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 461-501).
The evolution of ideas on race is traced, with
emphasis given to their impact on currents of
thought in the United States. The author discusses
race relations at the times that specific racial doc-
trines were being propagated, summarizes early
race theories, and explores the ideas that were preva-
lent in the Colonies and through the i8th, i9th, and
20th centuries. Gossett notes that significant chang-
es took place in intellectual attitudes during the
1920*5, when racists first encountered from the sci-
ences a serious check to their theories of innate
racial inferiority. Although many still believe that
character, intelligence, and human worth are often
matters of race, this attitude is rapidly losing sup-
port and the academic disciplines in general have
abandoned it. Idus A. Newby's Jim Crow's De-
fense; Anti-Negro Thought in America, 1900—1930
(Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press,
1965. 230 p.) details one era in the development
of anti-Negro racism.
1931. Handlin, Oscar. The American people in
the twentieth century. Boston, Beacon Press
[1963] 248 p. 63-2687 £169.1.1^265 1963
Bibliographical notes: p. [2371—239.
An updated edition of no. 4429 in the 1960 Guide.
1932. Javits, Jacob K. Discrimination — U.S.A.
New York, Harcourt, Brace [1960] 310 p.
60—10926 Ei84.AiJ3
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 287-300).
Senator Javits (b. 1904) vividly recalls the pov-
erty and restrictions of his boyhood in New York's
Lower East Side, noting the general advance which
has been made since 1900, when the United States
was a "white, Protestant, Anglo-Saxon country"
and an effective majority was concerned to keep it
so. After tracing the struggle for effective civil
rights legislation in Congress, he surveys the fields
in which discrimination bears most severely on
Negroes and other minorities and notes recent steps
to curb its effects. Discrimination has been worst
in employment, but since 1941 the Federal Govern-
ment has repudiated it, 16 States have passed en-
forceable laws against it, and 45 cities have adopted
ordinances to the same end. Politics, housing, the
schools, public accommodation and transportation,
and the administration of justice are other fields
where discrimination is still powerful but where
many recent checks have been imposed upon it.
The complete elimination of many types of discrim-
ination in Washington, D.C., during the preceding
decade is presented as "a clear pilot-plant operation."
The passage of the Civil Rights Act of 1960 is treat-
ed as the climax of an extended effort.
1933. Marden, Charles F., and Gladys E. Meyer.
Minorities in American society. 2d ed.
New York, American Book Co. [1962] 497 p.
(American sociology series)
62—4432 Ei84.AiM3 1962
"Suggested reading" at the end of each chapter.
A revised edition of no. 4432 in the 1960 Guide,
with a new coauthor. Recent developments in re-
lations between the various minorities and the dom-
inant group are discussed, particularly Negro-white
relations in the South since the desegregation deci-
sion of 1954. New theoretical insights and research
findings are included, especially in an added chap-
ter on "Sociological Theory and Dominant-Minority
Relations." In American Minorities; a TextbooJ{ of
Readings in Inter group Relations (New York,
Knopf, 1957. 518 p.), edited by Milton L. Barren,
are assembled 50 pieces, chiefly articles from peri-
odicals or symposia but with a few extracts from
textbooks and monographs. Editorial comments
and notes on the contributors enhance the book's
usefulness. Negro-white, Roman Catholic-Protes-
tant, and Jewish-gentile relations are given separate
chapters. The last 14 selections, arranged under the
headings "Minority Group Reactions and Adjust-
ment" and "Toward Intergroup Harmony and
Equality," are oriented toward the philosophy of
"social inclusivism."
1934. Vander Zanden, James W. American mi-
nority relations; the sociology of race and
ethnic groups. New York, Ronald Press [1963]
470 p. 63—13576 Ei84-AiV3
Bibliography: p. 515—538.
A textbook on race and minority relations in the
United States. The first part establishes a ground-
work of concepts and discusses the facts and myths
of racial knowledge. Parts 2 and 3 consider the
sources of prejudice and discrimination and their
extension into society in the form of intergroup con-
flict, segregation, and stratification. Part 4 concerns
itself with the attitudes of the disadvantaged minor-
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 245
ities. Particular attention is devoted to the reac-
tions of acceptance, aggression, avoidance, and as-
similation directed by these groups toward society.
The final chapters discuss the inevitability of social
change and the dangers inherent in a society that
seeks to remain static. A resume of the five-volume
report submitted by the U.S. Commission on Civil
Rights in 1961 is presented by Wallace Mendelson
in Discrimination (Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-
Hall [1962] 175 p. A Spectrum book, 8—45).
E. Negroes
1935. Bardolph, Richard. The Negro vanguard.
New York, Rinehart [1959] 388 p.
59-6571 £185.96.628
"Essay on authorities": p. 343—369.
1936. Lomax, Louis E. The Negro revolt. New
York, Harper [1962] 271 p.
62—7911 Ei85.6i.L668
Bardolph's book "takes as its theme several hun-
dred Negro Americans, from the days of the Amer-
ican Revolution to the present, who may fairly be
counted among the makers and shakers of Ameri-
can social history." His study begins with Crispus
Attucks, the first victim of the Boston Massacre in
1770, and concludes with Althea Gibson, who swept
the major women's tennis events at home and
abroad in 1957—58. Under the auspices of the Gug-
genheim Foundation, Bardolph interviewed 131
well-known Negro Americans, seeking to objective-
ly evaluate their achievements and to relate their
careers to social and racial circumstances. He fre-
quently asserts or implies that achievement might
have been greater if obstructions because of their
race had been fewer. Lomax discusses the "do-it-
yourself" movement among Negroes, primarily in
the South but with widespread effects throughout
the country. He assigns its beginning a precise
date, December i, 1955, when Mrs. Rosa Parks re-
fused to yield her seat on an Alabama bus to a white
man. He states that, as the folkways of segregation
were worked out and became rigid between 1880
and 1920, the Negro world became "an enclave of
terror" and the Negro masses "were trapped in
their separate hell." The author describes the suc-
cessive phases of the sit-ins and the freedom rides
and indicates that activist organizations such as the
Congress of Racial Equality are cutting into the
older, relatively conservative leadership of the
National Association for the Advancement of
Colored People. The Negro crime rate is discounted
as being the product of social conditions imposed
upon the Negro community.
1937. Brown, Claude. Manchild in the promised
land. New York, Macmillan [1965] 415 p.
65-16938 Ei85.97-B86A3
The autobiography of a Harlemite (b. 1937) who
decided at age 16 to give up street life and return
to school. The author offers his life history as rep-
resentative of that generation of Northern urban
Negroes whose parents migrated from the South
during the post-depression years. Because he was
a leader in the streets, Brown can provide keen per-
sonal insight into ghetto society and the institutions
which shape it. The Autobiography of Malcolm X
(New York, Grove Press [1965] 455 p.), written by
Malcolm Little (1925—1965) with the assistance of
Alex Haley, describes the experiences of a leader in
the Black Muslim movement.
1938. Cable, George Washington. The Negro
question; a selection of writings on civil
rights in the South. Edited by Arlin Turner.
Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1958. 286 p.
(Doubleday anchor books)
58—7796 Ei85.6i.Ci9 19583
1939. Rudwick, Elliott M. W. E. B. Du Bois; a
study in minority group leadership. Phila-
delphia, University of Pennsyvania Press [1960]
382 p. 60-6754 Ei85-97.D73R8
Bibliography: p. 350—368.
Cable (1844-1925) had fought for the Confed-
eracy and after the war became an admired writer
of Southern local-color fiction. His sense of justice
led him into controversy on behalf of Negro chil-
dren in the New Orleans public schools as early as
1875, and in 1884 he entered upon an intensive cam-
paign on behalf of the Negro's civil and political
rights. He demonstrated in a series of addresses
and essays that the full concession of such rights was
not merely just but essential to the welfare of the
white South. In consequence, he was assailed and
ostracized as the southern antislavery men had been
half a century earlier, and for the last 40 years of
his life he resided in Massachusetts. William Ed-
ward Burghardt Du Bois (1868-1963) began his
246 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
career with moderate views, but the intransigence
of the white superiority bloc soon turned him into
an advocate of protest and resistance. He initiated
the Niagara Movement in 1905 and became the
editor of The Crisis, the journal of the National
Association for the Advancement of Colored People.
After the death of Booker T. Washington in 1915,
he was long the most conspicuous figure among
Negro Americans, but he remained an individualist
and a theorist rather than an organizer. A differ-
ence on policy in the Depression led him to resign
from the NAACP in 1934. Rudwick's study de-
fines both Du Bois' doctrines and his limitations.
1940. Davis, Allison, Burleigh B. Gardner, and
Mary R. Gardner. Deep South; a social
anthropological study of caste and class. With a
new foreword by James W. Silver and a retrospect
by the authors. Abridged ed. Chicago, University
of Chicago Press [1965] xix, 364 p. (Phoenix
books, P204) 65-27759 HN79.A2D3 1965
Bibliographical footnotes.
An updated edition of no. 4438 in the 1960 Guide.
1941. Drake, St. Clair, and Horace R. Cayton.
Black metropolis; a study of Negro life in
a Northern city. Introduction by Richard Wright.
Introduction to Torchbook edition by Everett C.
Hughes. [Rev. and enl. ed.] New York, Harper
& Row [1962] 2V. (Harper torchbooks, TB 1 086—
1087. The Academy library)
62-52869 F548.9-N3D68 1962
Includes bibliography.
An updated edition of no. 4439 in the 1960 Guide.
1942. Essien-Udom, Essien U. Black nationalism;
a search for an identity in America. [Chi-
cago] University of Chicago Press [1962] 367 p.
illus. 62—12632 Ei85-6i.E75
Bibliography: p. 351—360.
An investigation of one aspect of the efforts by
American Negroes "to resolve the fundamental
problem of identity." Black nationalism, the author
asserts, provides a meaningful context for moral,
cultural, and material advancement within the limi-
tations set by American society. The study focuses
on the Nation of Islam movement headed by Elijah
Muhammad. The author outlines the tradition of
Negro nationalism and its effects on Negro thought
and social action and explains the reasons for which
Negroes join and remain in the movement. Other
chapters deal with its ideology, organization, pro-
grams, and limitations. A final section sets forth
conclusions and identifies significant trends for the
future. Charles Eric Lincoln brings together much
concrete information about the same "intensely
dedicated, tightly disciplined block" in The Blacf(
Muslims in America (Boston, Beacon Press [1961]
276 p.). In The New World of Negro Americans
(New York, John Day Co. [1963] 366 p.), Harold
R. Isaacs probes the effects of rising African na-
tionalism on Negro thought in the United States.
1943. Frazier, Edward Franklin. Black bourgeoi-
sie. With a new preface by the author.
New York, Collier Books [1962] 222 p. illus.
(Collier books, AS347)
A 62-8728 Ei85.6i.F833 1962
A "sociological analysis of the behavior, the atti-
tudes, and values" of the Negro middle class. The
first part treats economic and social status and poli-
tical, educational, and cultural backgrounds. Part 2
discusses the "world of make-believe" that the
"bourgeois" Negro has created to cope with his feel-
ings of inferiority in white America and his aliena-
tion from the Negro masses. In Transformation of
the Negro American (New York, Harper & Row
[1965] 207 p.), Leonard Broom and Norval D.
Glenn offer a sociological review of information
about the Negro in the United States and his evolv-
ing position in society through the years. A Pic-
torial History of the Negro in America, new rev. ed.
(New York, Crown Publishers [1963] 337 p.), by
Langston Hughes and Milton Meltzer, is a revised
edition of a work mentioned in the annotation for
no. 4440 in the 1960 Guide.
1944. Hughes, Langston. Fight for freedom; the
story of the NAACP. New York, Norton
[1962] 224 p. illus. 62-14352 Ei85-5.N276H8
Bibliography: p. 207—208.
A history of the National Association for the
Advancement of Colored People. Established in
1909, the NAACP waged a slow, often discouraging
battle to improve the condition of the Negro Amer-
ican. The author devotes particular attention to
the legal victories achieved over the last 50 years,
including the high point of the 1954 Supreme
Court decision which ruled segregation in the public
schools unlawful. Major campaigns conducted by
the NAACP have included efforts to ensure enforce-
ment of laws against lynching, end discrimination
in the armed services, and gain equal access to the
franchise and better housing. Hughes presents
sketches of prominent NAACP leaders and support-
ers, such as W. E. B. Du Bois and presidents Moor-
field Storey, Joel and Arthur Spingarn, and Roy
Wilkins. In The National Association for the Ad-
vancement of Colored People: A Case Study in
Pressure Groups (New York, Exposition Press
[1958] 252 p. An Exposition-university book),
Warren D. St. James investigates the problems,
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 247
effectiveness, and achievements of the organization.
In SNCC; the New Abolitionists, 2.d ed. (Boston,
Beacon Press [1965] 286 p.), Howard Zinn chron-
icles the activities of the Student Nonviolent Co-
ordinating Committee in the South between 1960
and 1964.
1945. Lewis, Anthony. Portrait of a decade; the
second American revolution [by] Anthony
Lewis and the New York Times. New York,
Random House [1964] 322 p. illus.
64-14832 £185.61^52 1964
A description of the "civil rights revolution,"
beginning with the 1954 school segregation cases
and ending with the passage of the Civil Rights Act
in 1964. Into his account Lewis weaves articles or
portions of articles written by various authors for
The New Yor^ Times. Included are reportorial
descriptions of the Montgomery, Ala., bus boycott,
James Meredith's entry into the University of Mis-
sissippi, the integration of schools in Little Rock,
Ark., and the acceleration of voter registration.
Martin Luther King's Why We Can't Wait (New
York, Harper & Row [1964] 178 p.) explains the
motivations, purposes, and aspirations of the Negro
movement. A portrait of a moderate Southern
community (Chapel Hill, N.C.) experiencing an
effort at integration is drawn by John Ehle in The
Free Men (New York, Harper & Row [1965] 340
p.). William M. McCord recounts a significant
phase of the civil rights movement during 1964 in
Mississippi: The Long Hot Summer (New York,
Norton [1965] 222 p.).
1946. Litwack, Leon F. North of slavery; the
Negro in the free States, 1790—1860. [Chi-
cago] University of Chicago Press [1961] 318 p.
61-10869 £185.91.5
Bibliographical essay: p. 280—303.
"Discrimination against the Negro and a firmly
held belief in the superiority of the white race were
not restricted to one section but were shared by an
overwhelming majority of white Americans in both
the North and the South." Public opinion, laws,
and extralegal measures restricted the Negro in the
antebellum North. Federal Government policy,
particularly in the Dred Scott decision, further re-
duced the Negro's status. Nonetheless, the North-
ern Negro was free and could work toward the
improvement of his position. He could organize
and petition, accumulate property, publish news-
papers, and engage in business. In The Negro in
the Making of America (New York, Collier Books
[1964] 288 p. A Collier books original), Ben-
jamin Quarles discusses the black man's role as
pioneer, soldier, freedman, and aspirant for civil
rights.
1947. Logan, Rayford W. The betrayal of the
Negro, from Rutherford B. Hayes to Wood-
row Wilson. New enl. ed. New York, Collier
Books [1965] 447 p.
65-23835 £185.61^64 1965
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(P- 397-430).
A revised edition of The Negro in American Life
and Thought: The Nadir, i8jj—i<)oi (1954), no.
4445 in the 1960 Guide.
1948. Meier, August. Negro thought in America,
1880—1915; racial ideologies in the age of
Booker T. Washington. Ann Arbor, University of
Michigan Press [1963] 336 p.
63-14008 Ei85.6.M5
"Bibliographical note": p. 280—282. Bibliograph-
ical references included in "Notes" (p. 283—316).
An analysis of the prevailing racial ideologies as
expressed by articulate Negroes from the post-
Reconstruction era through the outbreak of World
War I. Emphasis is on the role of Booker T.
Washington and his philosophy of self-help and
racial solidarity in influencing Negro thought in
the United States. For two decades Washington
was accepted by whites and Negroes as the spokes-
man of Negro opinion. Criticism of Washington's
leadership, however, crystallized under W. E. B.
Du Bois and led to the formation of the National
Association for the Advancement of Colored People.
Another study of Negro thought in America is The
Mind of the Negro; an Intellectual History of Afro-
Americans (Baton Rouge, La., Ortlieb Press [1961]
562 p.), by Earl E. Thorpe.
1949. Myrdal, Gunnar. An American dilemma;
the Negro problem and modern democracy.
With the assistance of Richard Sterner and Arnold
Rose. 2Oth anniversary ed. New York, Harper &
Row [1962] 1483 p. illus.
62—19706 £185.6^95 1962
Bibliography: p. 1144—1180.
This revised edition of no. 4446 in the 1960 Guide
adds a brief preface by the author and a longer
"Postscript Twenty Years Later: Social Change and
the Negro Problem" by Arnold N. Rose, Myrdal's
former assistant. Myrdal calls attention to the ac-
curacy of his prediction "that an area of more than
half a century in which there had been no funda-
mental change [in interracial relations] was ap-
proaching its close" and praises the late Frederick
P. Keppel, then president of the Carnegie Corpora-
tion, for his courage in giving the inquiry a com-
248 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
pletely free hand and in persevering with publica-
tion during the most anxious months of the war.
Rose summarizes Negro progress in several fields
and identifies the forces operative in each. "The
changes in American race relations from 1940 to
1962 appear to be the most rapid and dramatic in
world history without violent revolution," he main-
tains, predicting that in another 30 years racial
prejudice in America will have dwindled to "the
minor order of Catholic-Protestant prejudice." In
A Profile of the Negro American (Princeton, N.J.,
Van Nostrand [1964] 250 p.), Thomas F. Pet-
tigrew concludes that many Negro traits often
attributed to race have actually resulted from
environmental influences, such as poverty and
discrimination.
1950. Negro heritage library. Yonkers, N.Y.,
Educational Heritage [1964-65] 4 v.
A series on the Negro's contribution to society.
The volumes pertaining to the Negro in the United
States are Negro Heritage Reader for Young People
([Ci965] 320 p. 66-2716 PEii2i.C3) and The
Winding Road to Freedom; a Documentary Sur-
vey of Negro Experiences in America ([1965] 384
p. 65-5735 £185^14), both edited by Alfred E.
Cain; the first volume, covering the period 1619—
1900, of Profiles of Negro Womanhood ([1964]
352 p. 64-25013 £185.96.025, v. i), by Sylvia
G. L. Dannett; and A Martin Luther King Treas-
ury ([1964] 352 p. 65-391 £185.61X535).
1951. Northrup, Herbert R., and Richard L.
Rowan, eds. The Negro and employment
opportunity; problems and practices. Ann Arbor,
Bureau of Industrial Relations, Graduate School of
Business Administration, University of Michigan
[1965] 411 p. illus. 65—63900 £185.8^649
This collection of 28 papers is divided into sec-
tions on the overall job problems of Negroes, equal
opportunity legislation, representative companies,
unions, community activities, Negro employment in
the urban market, and Negro entrepreneurial activ-
ities. Employing the Negro in American Industry;
a Study of Management Practices (New York, In-
dustrial Relations Counselors, 1959. 171 p. Indus-
trial relations monographs, no. 17), by Paul H.
Norgren and others, is a pioneer study based on the
experience of 44 company and plant managements
that employ Negroes as well as whites. In The
Negro and Organized Labor (New York, Wiley
[1965] 327 p.), F. Ray Marshall analyzes the fac-
tors responsible for the evolution of union racial
practices. In The Urban Negro in the South (New
York, Vantage Press [1962] 272 p.), Wilmoth A.
Carter examines a typical Negro residential and
business district in a Southern city (Raleigh, N.C.)
and concludes that the progress of desegregation is
likely to close out Negro small businesses altogether.
1952. Silberman, Charles E. Crisis in black and
white. New York, Random House [1964]
370 p. 64-14843 £185.61.857
Bibliographical footnotes.
Silberman's primary purpose is to define what
can and cannot be accomplished by integration.
Observations are included on circumstances which
influence the Negro's family, employment oppor-
tunities, and quality of education. The author
further describes the impact of these circumstances
on individual and group motivation, direction, and
stability. From his material, Silberman evolves two
main arguments: that to achieve meaningful im-
provement in their situation, Negroes must acquire
some realistic economic and political power, and
that any successful welfare program must be exe-
cuted by Negroes as well as for them. Of added
interest is a chapter on the work and achievement
of Chicago's controversial neighborhood organizer,
Saul Alinsky. In The New Equality (New York,
Viking Press [1964] 243 p.), Nat Hentoff stresses
the close relationship between poverty and the race
problem and urges underprivileged people, white
as well as black, to unite in an effort to improve
their economic status.
1953. Taeuber, Karl £., and Alma F. Taeuber.
Negroes in cities; residential segregation and
neighborhood change. Chicago, Aldine Pub. Co.
[1965] xvii, 284 p. illus. (Population Research
and Training Center monographs)
65-12459 Ei85.89.H6T3
Bibliography: p. 267-277.
A statistical examination of urban segregation in
the United States. Using both quantitative and
empirical methods, the authors reveal that signifi-
cant variations exist in residential patterns from city
to city as well as from region to region. Important
changes are shown to have occurred throughout the
country since 1950, and evidence exposes as falla-
cious numerous beliefs regarding comparative white
and Negro residential behavior. The most impor-
tant change in the character of Negro influx into
cities is that in-migrants are former residents of an-
other city, with the rural sharecropper no longer
constituting a significant proportion. In The Negro
Population of Chicago; a Study of Residential Suc-
cession ([Chicago] University of Chicago Press
[1957] 367 p. Monograph series of the Chicago
Community Inventory of the University of Chi-
cago), Otis D. Duncan and Beverly Duncan trace
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 249
Negro population distribution and growth from
1910 to 1950 in a Northern terminal of the Negro
migration route from the South.
1954. Welsch, Erwin K. The Negro in the
United States; a research guide. Blooming-
ton, Indiana University Press, 1965. 142 p.
65-23085 Zi36i.N39W4 1965
Bibliography: p. 108—138.
The author has compiled a descriptive bibliog-
raphy of books, periodicals, and essays pertinent to
the study of the Negro in America. The book is
divided into four parts: "Science, Philosophy, and
Race," "Historical and Sociological Background,"
"The Major Issues Today," and "The Negro and
the Arts." The appendixes include a discussion of
additional bibliographies and a list of periodicals,
both of which are useful for Negro studies. Organi-
zations that issue information or try to shape public
opinion concerning the Negro are also listed.
F. Jews
1955. Levinger, Lee J. A history of the Jews in
the United States. [20th rev. ed.] New
York, Union of American Hebrew Congregations
[1961] 6i6p. illus. (Commission on Jewish Edu-
cation of the Union of American Hebrew Congre-
gations and [the] Central Conference of American
Rabbis. Union graded series)
63-39 £184.151.664 1961
Includes bibliography.
An updated edition of no. 4461 in the 1960
Guide.
1956. Rischin, Moses. The promised city; New
York's Jews, 1870-1914. Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1962. 342 p. illus.
62—11402 F
"Bibliographical note": p. [275]— 282.
1957. Gordon, Albert I. Jews in suburbia. Bos-
ton, Beacon Press [1959] 264 p.
59—12322 £184^067
The Jewish community in New York City dates
back to the mid- 1 7th century but remained small
during its first two centuries. Rischin 's volume
covers the period during which more than one-third
of the Jewish inhabitants of Russia and Rumania
left their homes and, for the most part, came to
New York's Lower East Side and took over tene-
ments from the Irish, the Germans, and other ear-
lier occupants. By 1915 they numbered nearly
1,400,000, more than New York's total population
in 1870. Although he describes the economic bases
and the abominable living conditions of this "immi-
grant Jewish cosmopolis," he is primarily concerned
with its intense intellectual life. Rischin describes
the friction between German and Russian Jews, the
spread of a Yiddish press and culture, the rise of
secular social idealism, the origin and progress of
labor unionism, the entry into municipal politics,
and the achievement of power and position by the
garment unions. The outbreak of war in Europe in
1914 not only brought the great migration to an end
but provoked a new hostility to foreigners in the
society at large, a situation which complicated the
problems of the Jewish community. American
Jewry did not remain in the Lower East Side and
other primary areas of urban concentration, how-
ever, but moved in hundreds of thousands to sub-
urban areas, especially after 1946. Gordon, who
drew on his experience as a rabbi in Minneapolis to
write Jews in Transition (1949), no 4456 in the
1960 Guide, later transferred to Temple Emmanuel
in Newton, Mass. In gathering evidence for Jews
in Suburbia he polled fellow rabbis as well as lay
leaders in 89 suburban communities, mostly in Mas-
sachusetts, New York, New Jersey, Maryland, and
California. He found that these Jews had attained
a high degree of integration with their communities
and liked their situation — as one respondent put
it: "Here, at least, we feel like people." Since
Jewish secular organizations imperfectly adapted
themselves to this exodus, the synagogue, usually a
conservative one, became the real center of suburban
Jewish life and took on secular functions without
any serious loss in religious ones. On these points
Gordon is confirmed by a study of "North City"
(presumably Minneapolis): Children of the Gilded
Ghetto; Conflict Resolutions of Three Generations
of American Jews (New Haven, Yale University
Press, 1961. 228 p.), by Judith R. Kramer and
Seymour Leventman.
1958. Sklare, Marshall, ed. The Jews; social pat-
terns of an American group. Glencoe, 111.,
Free Press [1958] 669 p. 57-9318 £184^855
CONTENTS. — The historical setting. — Demo-
graphic aspects and the factor of social mobility. —
The Jewish community: institutions, social patterns,
250 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
status structure, and levels of integration. — The
Jewish religion: aspects of continuity and change. —
Psychological aspects: group belongingness and
Jewish identification.— Some cultural aspects and
value orientations.
1959. Sherman, Charles Bezalel. The Jew within
American society; a study in ethnic individ-
uality. Detroit, Wayne State University Press, 1961.
260 p. 60-16839 £184^846
Bibliography: p. 245—249.
Sklare has assembled 33 articles, more than half
of which were specially prepared for this collection.
The articles range from the particularity of "The
Jewish Organizational Elite of Atlanta, Georgia,"
by Solomon Sutker, to the generality of "Sources of
Jewish Internationalism and Liberalism," by Law-
rence H. Fuchs. Sherman's shorter and more uni-
tary volume is based not only on published sources
but also on the author's regular visits to Jewish
communities and his attendance at the conventions
and conferences of major Jewish organizations. He
considers the recent strengthening of the Jewish
Americans' "ethnic individuality" as evidence that
they will continue as a distinct ethnic minority "on
the level of spiritual uniqueness, religious separate-
ness, ethnic consolidation and communal solidarity,
but not in a political sense."
G. Orientals
1960. Earth, Gunther P. Bitter strength; a history
of the Chinese in the United States, 1850-
1870. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1964.
305 p. (A publication of the Center for the Study
of the History of Liberty in America, Harvard Uni-
versity) 64-21785 £184X35623
"Sources": p. [223]— 231. Bibliographical refer-
ences included in "Notes" (p. [235]— 285).
An analysis of the development of race prejudice
against the Chinese, based on a study of the first two
decades of Chinese experience in America. From
an examination of the backgrounds of the sojourn-
ers, the circumstances of their arrival, and their
subsequent life in the mines, Earth concludes that
the Chinese, by their activities and attitudes, con-
tributed to the development of anti-oriental feelings
among the white people in California. Many of the
first Chinese came without the intention of becom-
ing American; they came to earn money and return
home. They were further isolated by the "credit
ticket system" which indebted them to their own
countrymen and extended the Chinese social struc-
ture to the United States. Acceptance of the Chi-
nese as Americans began to come only when they
took on the attitude of permanent settlers.
1961. Daniels, Roger. The politics of prejudice,
the anti-Japanese movement in California,
and the struggle for Japanese exclusion. Berkeley,
University of California Press, 1962. 165 p. (Uni-
versity of California publications in history, v. 71)
62-63248 Ei73.Ci5 vol. 71
Bibliography: p. 153—160.
The author traces California's struggle for more
than a quarter of a century to achieve Japanese ex-
clusion. The effort successfully culminated with
the passage of the Immigration Act of 1924 by the
U.S. Congress. The study emphasizes the policies
and actions of the "excluders" rather than the "ex-
cluded." Antipathy toward the Japanese immigrant
was to some extent a continuation of longtime agi-
tation against the Chinese. Labor interests, strong
in California, viewed the orientals as potential strike-
breakers and a threat to wage levels and working
conditions. Unlike the Chinese, the Issei, first-
generation Japanese settlers, rapidly began to chal-
lenge whites in numerous business and professional
enterprises. "Nonrational fears," stemming from
racial and cultural differences, were compounded by
the growing unpopularity of Japan and its increas-
ing militancy.
1962. Lee, Rose Hum. The Chinese in the United
States of America. [Hong Kong] Hong
Kong University Press, 1960. 465 p.
60—3959 Ei84.C5L53
Bibliography: p. [441]— 446.
"The present writer is the only American of
Chinese ancestry to head a university department
of Sociology [Roosevelt University, Chicago], and
her text-book [The City, 1955] is widely used."
Based primarily upon the author's earlier detailed
studies of the Chinese in the San Francisco area, this
work is designed to develop an "understanding of
how the process of acculturation, assimilation and
integration operates when persons with distinguish-
able physical characteristics, bearing a different cul-
ture, come into contact with people of European
origin." Professor Lee shows that the Chinese-
American communities have recently undergone
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 251
great changes: they have risen above the lower
economic strata to occupy a median position; the old
"sojourners" can no longer return to China when
their working career is over; and there are more
women, more families, and more American-born
children than ever before. The author sympatheti-
cally presents the social tensions within these com-
munities and describes the elements making for
social and personal disorganization, of which chroni-
cally inadequate housing is among the most im-
portant. Although Shien-woo Kung's Chinese in
American Life: Some Aspects of Their History,
Status, Problems, and Contributions (Seattle, Uni-
versity of Washington Press, 1962. 352 p.) does
not rival Professor Lee's book in depth or subtlety
of sociological analysis, it contains a fuller account
of recent immigration regulations and their effects
and some straightforward descriptions of Chinese
communities and their problems which usefully
supplement the larger work.
H. North Americans
1963. Berry, Brewton. Almost white. New York,
Macmillan [1963] 212 p. illus.
63-8997 Ei84.AiB43
Bibliography: p. 19 1—203.
A study of mestizos in the Eastern States. Set-
tled in largely self-contained communities, these
"triracial isolates" share an obscurity of heritage.
For the most part, the people live as outcasts sus-
pended between races, rejected by whites, margin-
ally accepted by Indians, and unwilling to identify
with Negroes. On the basis of evidence gathered
from extensive fieldwork, the author describes the
mestizos' culture and mores, the obstacles they face
as a minority people, and the attitudes toward them
among whites and Negroes.
1964. Padilla, Elena. Up from Puerto Rico. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1958.
317 p. illus. 58-7171 Fi28.9.P8P3
1965. Rand, Christopher. The Puerto Ricans.
New York, Oxford University Press, 1958.
178 p. 58-10733 Fi28.9-P8R3
Miss Padilla spent 3^2 years among the Puerto
Ricans of Manhattan's Lower East Side (which she
calls "Eastville") doing fieldwork for the Anthro-
pology Department of Columbia University. Her
results are humanely presented in chapters on group
feeling, relations with neighbors of other ethnic
backgrounds, the family and the household, child-
hood and its dangers, "cliques and the social grape-
vine" (including a considerable treatment of drug
addiction), adjustments to non-Hispano New York,
and problems of health and morale. Rand under-
took his inspection of the Puerto Ricans of East
Harlem for The New Yorker, and his chapters first
appeared, in somewhat different form, in its issues.
In the course of trying to understand this people, he
made an extended visit to Puerto Rico itself, which
Puerto Ricans leave "because there are too many of
them there." Although considerably less systematic
than Miss Padilla, Rand has a talent for penetrating
the minds and the essential situation of the migrants
"among the cold people." He evidences respect for
a group which maintains its traditions and its dig-
nity in the worst slums of the United States; he il-
lustrates, however, the peculiar problems arising
from this first airborne mass migration, whose mem-
bers show less desire to learn English, to assimilate,
or to rise in the economic scale than their prede-
cessors. Dan Wakefield's Island in the City; the
World of Spanish Harlem (Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1959. 278 p.) has much of interest in its ex-
tended and literal descriptions, but its reportage is
considerably more diffuse than Rand's. Clarence
O. Senior in The Puerto Ricans: Strangers — Then
Nieghbors (Chicago, Published in cooperation with
the Anti-Defamation League of B'nai B'rith by
Quadrangle Books [1965] 128 p.) reviews the
major aspects of life among the group and discusses
the progress achieved thus far in assimilating the
Caribbean immigrants into the mainland society.
252 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
I. Scandinavians
1966. Bjork, Kenneth. West of the Great Divide;
Norwegian migration to the Pacific Coast,
1847-1893. Northfield, Minn., Norwegian-
American Historical Association, 1958. 671 p.
illus., maps. (Publications of the Norwegian-
American Historical Association)
58-4511 £184.82648
The author surveys early Norwegian settlements
in the Rocky Mountain and Pacific Coast States,
British Columbia, Alaska, and Hawaii, down to the
panic of 1893. The earliest Scandinavian pioneers
were, in fact, a Dane and a Swede who took part in
the original Mormon trek to the Great Salt Lake in
1847; others joined in the California Gold Rush
soon thereafter. San Francisco became a haven for
Norwegian seamen, many of whom married local
girls, but the other settlements were occupied by
men and families who had stayed some time in the
Middle West before moving overland. An entire
chapter is devoted to Snowshoe Thompson (born
Jon Thoreson Rue), a remarkable figure who dur-
ing the later 1850'$ carried the mail over the Sierras
on skis. In an autobiography, Moorings Old and
New (Madison, State Historical Society of Wiscon-
sin, 1963. 276 p.), Paul Knaplund offers detailed
recollections of his life in Norway and as an immi-
grant settler in the United States.
J. Other Stocks
1967. Con way, Alan, ed. The Welsh in America;
letters from the immigrants. Minneapolis,
University of Minnesota Press [1961] 341 p.
61-7724 Ei84.W4C6
Bibliography: p. 330—332.
This collection of 97 letters or parts of letters
written between 1817 and 1895 by Welsh immi-
grants in America, usually to their friends at home.
The letters, most of which are translated from the
Welsh language, are taken from manuscripts and
from the files of 32 Welsh newspapers and non-
conformist periodicals published in Wales or, in a
few cases, in the United States. Conway employs
a flexible topical arrangement: an initial section on
the crossing; four on agricultural settlers in areas
from the Middle Atlantic States to the Pacific North-
west; three sections on Welsh migrants in coal min-
ing, in iron and steel milling, and in the frontier
mining rushes; and concluding ones on the Civil
War and the Welsh Mormons. The Welsh, being
skilled and dependable, were at first great favorites
with American mineowners, but fell from grace
when it was found that they would stand on their
rights and lead their fellow miners in strikes. The
Welsh-Americans, with their evangelical roots, were
natural abolitionists, Unionists, and Lincoln men.
Conway also notes the frustration of those who
sought to perpetuate the Welsh language and na-
tionality in America. In The Character of Early
Welsh Emigration to the United States (Cardiff,
University of Wales Press, 1957. 40 p.), Arthur H.
Dodd describes a persistent trickle of individuals
and groups during the two centuries preceding 1840,
an equal persistence of religious motivation, and a
tendency for migrating Welshmen to choose the
middle Colonies rather than New England or the
South and to move farther west as the opportunity
presented itself.
1968. Govorchin, Gerald G. Americans from
Yugoslavia. Gainesville, University of Flor-
ida Press, 1961. 352 p. 61—11312 Ei84.Y7G6
Includes bibliographical references.
The study of immigration from present-day Yugo-
slavia has a weaker statistical basis than that of other
ethnic groups, official American statistics did not
distinguish between the various national groups
within the Austro-Hungarian monarchy until the
U.S. Immigration Commission was established in
1907, and Bulgarians were counted with Serbians
until the end of World War I. Since the initial
imposition of the quota system in 1921, Southern
Slav immigration has been reduced to a trickle.
The mass of the Yugoslavs entered the United
States between 1880 and 1914: no estimated total
appears here, but the census of 1930 found the num-
ber of living immigrants just short of 470,000, and
the author puts the present Yugoslav stock of the
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 253
first three generations at a round million. Peasants
at home, in America the South Slavs largely turned
to mining and heavy industry. Thus they have
concentrated most heavily in the industrial belt of
the East North Central States and to a lesser degree
in the Middle Atlantic and the West North Central
States. Govorchin includes chapters on the Croa-
tian Fraternal Union and other ethnic societies
which combine mutual help with recreation; on the
Yugoslav press, which began in San Francisco in
1884 and still numbers 26 newspapers; and on the
general character of immigrant life, marked by a
lessening of mutual distrust among Croat, Serb, and
Slovene along with progressive Americanization.
The final chapters are devoted, in traditional style,
to Slavs of distinction, such as Nikola Tesla, Louis
Adamic, and Frank J. Lausche and to Yugoslav
contributions to America.
1969. Hoglund, Arthur W. Finnish immigrants
in America, 1880—1920. Madison, Univer-
sity of Wisconsin Press, 1960. 213 p.
60-5662 £184^51158 1960
"Sources": p. 196—203.
The author has winnowed a surprisingly large
body of Finnish-language newspapers, magazines,
and annuals in order to study cultural change
among the newcomers during the four major dec-
ades of Finnish immigration. As many as 300,000
Finns may have entered the United States during
these years. The great majority were landless per-
sons from rural areas, especially from the two south-
eastern Baltic provinces of Vaasa and Turku-Pori,
but with a remarkably small percentage of illiteracy.
The largest concentration of Finns in the United
States was attracted by the new mining areas of
Minnesota and the northwestern peninsula of Michi-
gan. Here the early immigrants won themselves a
formidable reputation for the depth of their drink-
ing and the ferocity of the brawls to which it led,
the author notes, but the Finnish community itself
developed a strong temperance movement, and a
variety of ethnic organizations urged decorous
family life and economic prudence upon their com-
patriots. As their earnings permitted, many of the
miners and workers in other industries purchased
farms and returned to the land; the census of 1920
recorded nearly 15,000 Finnish-born operators of
farms. By this time, immigration from the old
country was only a trickle, and the numerous ethnic
organizations were faced with the problem of defec-
tions among the American-born generations.
1970. Leyburn, James G. The Scotch-Irish: a
social history. Chapel Hill, University of
North Carolina Press [1962] xix, 377 p.
62—16063 £184.841^5
Bibliography: p. [3543-372.
The author, whose Frontier Folkways was pub-
lished in 1935, here seeks to bring continuity and
precision into the story of the migrations of the
Scotch-Irish. He sets out to establish the social
character of the Lowland Scots about 1600, before
the plantation of Ulster began, and notes that they
were already a dour and resistant people who lacked
the peasant mentality. During their century or
more in Ulster before the American immigration
began (1717), they passed from the feudal order of
Scotland to one in which freedom of labor and
movement were habitual, and distinctions based
upon property and leadership gave rise to a new,
homemade gentry. The migration to the United
States, which went on sporadically until the Ameri-
can Revolution, was in large part determined by the
English Parliament's legislation discriminating
against their economic enterprise and their Presby-
terianism. The final third of the book gives a very
clear outline of the course and character of their
settlements in the Thirteen Colonies and conducts
a sharply critical inquiry into what is here called
the "mythology" of the Scotch-Irish. Chiefly, how-
ever, it proves to have been an exaggeration of their
homogeneity and uniformity. Leyburn states that
the Scotch-Irish settlers who got beyond the reach of
organized Presbyterianism soon became lax or
semibarbarous in their ways and that, once the
Regulator movement in the Carolinas had been
suppressed, its Scotch-Irish participants gave small
support to the patriot cause. Yet the greater part of
the Scotch-Irish formed an intercolonial patriot
bloc, with a national rather than a provincial
patriotism.
1971. Saloutos, Theodore. The Greeks in the
United States. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1964. xiv, 445 p.
64—13428 £184.67829
Bibliography: p. [389]— 400.
A chronological study of Greek immigration and
settlement in America based on research conducted
in both the United States and Greece. Greek immi-
gration, chiefly a product of the late i9th and early
2Oth centuries, was motivated by political, economic,
cultural, and spiritual conditions in the mother
country. The immigrants, while developing quick
attachments to the United States, brought with them
a strong Greek nationalism, which emphasized the
idea of preserving a Hellenic identity. The steady
process of Americanization, however, particularly
in the second generation, gradually worked to inte-
grate the Greeks into the American community.
254
A GUIDE T0
UNITED STATES
In They Remember America; the Story of the
Repatriated GreeJ(-Americans (Berkeley, University
of California Press, 1956. 153 p.), Saloutos studies
the years 1908-24, when 168,847 of the 366,454
Greek immigrants voluntarily returned to their
native land.
1972. Schrier, Arnold. Ireland and the American
emigration, 1850-1900. Minneapolis, Uni-
versity of Minnesota Press [1958] 210 p.
58-10303 JV77H.Z79U57
"Notes and bibliography": p. 171-205.
During the six decades between 1841 and 1901,
the population of Ireland declined from 8,196,000
to 4,456,000, and the provinces of Munster and Con-
naught lost well over half their inhabitants. More
than four million Irish left their homeland, and 85
percent of them made their way to the United
States. Here they constituted nearly 43 percent of
the foreign-born in 1850, and 10 years later one
American in 20 was an Irish immigrant. Schrier
has examined the effects of this exodus upon Ire-
land itself, where it aroused a chorus of protest in
press and pulpit. Nothing was done to check it,
however, or to remedy the fundamental maladjust-
ments that had brought it about. The author attrib-
utes to emigration the consolidation of many small
landholdings and a major changeover from tillage
to pasture in the Irish economy. He describes the
"American wake," an imitative but no less bibulous
rite to mark the loss of a near relative to the New
World, and notes the steady return of $250 million
in remittances during the half century — unfortu-
nately in sums so small that, although they could
ameliorate hardship, they rarely enabled the recipi-
ents at home to put their affairs on a more pros-
perous basis. George W. Potter's To the Golden
Door; the Story of the Irish in Ireland and America
(Boston, Little, Brown [1960] 631 p.), unfinished
when its author died in 1959, was published with-
out references of any kind, a serious lack in a work
which so frequently quotes from primary sources.
A substantial section on Irish society at the begin-
ning of the emigration is followed by a shorter one,
"How They Got Across the Ocean," and, much the
longest (p. 161—631), "What Befell Them in
America." In all three the subject is developed by
brief and vivid episodes; the author would pre-
sumably have bound them more tighdy together
and provided summary views had he been able to
complete the work. As it stands, however, it is an
uncommonly sympathetic presentation of the hu-
man experience involved in the Irish colonization of
America and the nativist reaction which it pro-
voked. In The American Irish (New York, Mac-
millan [1963] 458 p.), William V. Shannon gives
special attention to elected officials and political
bosses.
1973. Shepperson, Wilbur S. Emigration and dis-
enchantment; portraits of Englishmen repa-
triated from the United States. Norman, University
of Oklahoma Press [1965] 211 p.
65-11248 £184.67848
Bibliography: p. 197—204. Bibliographical foot-
notes.
Early in the first crucial decades of settlement, the
return of immigrants to their homelands provoked
concern in the American Colonies. In this study,
Shepperson examines the magnitude and signifi-
cance of the return movement of British settlers
through 1865. In an age of rising urbanization and
industrialization, many Britons came to America in
pursuit of the economic and social betterment which
had eluded them at home. To their dismay and dis-
illusionment, they often encountered many of the
same conditions from which they had fled, as well
as new and unexpected ones. The collapse of their
often exaggerated and romanticized expectations
motivated them to return to more familiar environ-
ments.
1974. Wytrwal, Joseph A. America's Polish heri-
tage; a social history of the Poles in America.
Detroit, Endurance Press, 1961. 350 p.
60—15742
Bibliography: p. 295—309.
Poland emerged as a nation in the loth century,
disappeared after the Third Partition of 1795, and
regained independence only by the Treaty of Ver-
sailles in 1919. The census of 1790 counted 468
Poles in the United States; the recurrent uprisings
and suppressions of the i9th century had brought
some 50,000 Poles here by 1870. After that year a
larger emigration, economic rather than political in
its drive, began. Within half a century the Polish-
American community had reached an estimated
3,000,000. After a general treatment of each of
these movements, Wytrwal concentrates on the
ethnic organizations of the later period, in particu-
lar the Polish Roman Catholic Union, established
in 1873, anfl t^ie Polish National Alliance, estab-
lished in 1880, whose combined membership reaches
600,000. The special interest of the Union was to
maintain the autonomy of Polish-American Catho-
lics against the Irish-dominated American Catholic
hierarchy. The Alliance was organized to promote
the independence of the Polish homeland. The
organizations have not always worked in harmony.
An episode of the earlier period is reconstructed by
Jerzy Jan Lerski in A Polish Chapter in ]act(sonian
America; the United States and the Polish Exiles of
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 255
1831 (Madison, University of Wisconsin Press, 1958.
242 p. Poland's millennium series of the Kosci-
uszko Foundation). In documented detail it tells
the story of the American-Polish Committee in
Paris, which included James Fenimore Cooper,
Samuel Gridley Howe, and Samuel F. B. Morse, as
well as Lafayette, among its members; the reception
of some 425 Polish exiles in America; and the for-
mation of the first Polish-American organizations in
the United States.
1975. Yearley, Clifton K. Britons in American
labor; a history of the influence of the United
Kingdom immigrants on American labor, 1820—
1914. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1957. 332
p. (The Johns Hopkins University studies in his-
torical and political science, ser. 75, no. i)
57—12122 H3I.J6, ser. 75, no. i
Bibliography: p. 318—322.
The author amplifies the more general record
presented in Rowland T. BerthofFs British Immi-
grants in Industrial America, no. 4488 in the 1960
Guide. Yearley describes the numerous ties be-
tween British and American labor during the sec-
ond half of the igth century and emphasizes the
role of British organizers in the American move-
ment. Represented as sinister incendiaries by upper-
class opinion in the United States, they were actually
"in an overwhelming number of cases moderate and
constructive men." He pays particular attention to
the career of Thomas Phillips, a Lancashire shoe-
maker who came to Philadelphia in 1852 at the age
of 19, spread the cooperative ideas of G. J. Holy-
oake, and in 1862 founded the Union Co-operative
Association there. In the 2Oth century British in-
fluence in the American labor movement waned
rapidly.
XV
Society
A. Some General Views
B. Social History: Periods
C. Social History: Topics
D. Social Thought
E. General Sociology; Social Psychology
F. The Family
G. Communities: General
H. Communities: Rural
I. Communities: Urban
J. City Planning; Housing
K. Social Problems; Social Worf(
L. Dependency; Social Security
M. Delinquency and Correction
1976-1983
1984-1985
1986-1994
1995-1999
2000-2006
2007—2014
2015—2017
2018—2020
2021—2027
2028—2034
2035-2041
2042—2046
2047-2056
FOR THE most part, the writers selected for this chapter — whether they are academic sociolo-
gists, social philosophers, city planners, or social workers — seem to agree that the dominant
characteristics of American society must be analyzed within the context of urbanization,
industrialization, and technology.
A high proportion of the works in this chapter are problem centered and issue oriented.
During the decade covered by the Supplement, the social sciences in the United States appear
to have passed from a period of relative stability
entered here include the following: mass society and
alienation; egalitarianism versus status-orientation;
the crisis of the city and the function of planning;
and the question of the ability of Americans to
and complacency to one of dynamism and dissatis-
faction. The academic sociologists and social acti-
vists tend to be reformist in outlook, and this trend
is reflected in the subjects which they choose to
examine.
Topics that recur frequently among the works
plan society while maintaining a spirit of democracy,
diversity, and individuality.
A. Some General Views
1976. American heritage. The American heritage
cookbook and illustrated history of Ameri-
can eating & drinking. With chapters by Cleveland
Amory [and others]. Historical foods consultant:
Helen Duprey Bullock. Recipes editor: Helen Mc-
Cully; associate: Eleanor Noderer. [New York]
American Heritage Pub. Co.; Distribution by Simon
256
& Schuster [1964] 629 p. 64-21278 TX7O5.A65
Brillat-Savarin noted in the i9th century that the
"destiny of nations depends on how they nourish
themselves." A like view is held by the editors of
this two-part volume on the history of our Nation's
food and drink. Each part is distinct in purpose,
abundantly detailed, and separately indexed. The
first, an "Illustrated History of American Eating
and Drinking," contains historical essays and vi-
gnettes which are richly visualized with reproduc-
tions of photographs, paintings, engravings, and
sketches. The second is entirely devoted to tradi-
tional menus and dishes, some of them originating
from the Thirteen Colonies and adapted for today's
use. Background notes accompany recipes that are
of particular historical interest.
1977. Boorstin, Daniel J. The image; or, What
happened to the American dream. New
York, Atheneum, 1962 [Ci96i] 315 p.
62—7936 £169.1.6752
"Suggestions for Further Reading (and Writ-
ing)": p. 263-294.
In the United States, creating images in one form
or another is a commonplace, according to the
author, and contemporary American culture, with
its significantly complex changes, tends to substitute
the acquisition of an image for the pursuit of an
ideal. This book is about the art and practice of
self-deception and the dangers involved in hiding
reality from oneself. Boorstin notes that specious
statements or quasi-truths immerse the individual in
a sense of comfort and well-being. He places no
blame, however, but rather traces our faults to our
strengths — literacy, progress, and wealth — and
urges each of us to discover his own illusions, to
moderate his expectations, and to decide for himself
where he wants to go.
1978. Chase, Stuart. American credos. New
York, Harper [1962] 216 p.
62—9887 £169.1^4525
"Appendix of Sources": p. 203—212.
To find out what representative Americans believe
about many important issues of the day, the author
has compiled related testimony from polltakers.
Foreign policy, education, science, civil liberties, and
personal problems are some of the subjects for which
results from the various pollings are compared.
"What do the people want? How deeply do they
want it, and how long will they continue to want
it?" In trying to arrive at some answers, Chase has
organized an abundance of material. He endeavors
to show that in these polls the personal problems of
Americans, which he refers to as "privatism," seem
to outrank all others, except in time of actual war.
Concerning work, the attitude appears paradoxical.
The majority say they like their jobs, but in-depth
interviews reveal negative responses. The author
finds that automation does not bring satisfaction,
that professional workers are gaining status, and
that disarmament and the prevention of nuclear war
are very much desired.
SOCIETY / 257
1979. Gardner, John W. Excellence: Can we be
equal and excellent too? New York, Harper
[1961] 171 p. 61-6194 HMi46.G29
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 163-167).
"This book is concerned with the difficult, puz-
zling, delicate and important business of toning up
a whole society, of bringing a whole people to that
fine edge of morale and conviction and zest that
makes for greatness." The author, who was presi-
dent of the Carnegie Corporation of New York and
the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of
Teaching when this book appeared, examines two
conflicting maxims basic in American democratic
thought: "All men are created equal" and "May the
best man win." After exploring the problems inher-
ent in this paradox of equality and competitive
performance, he points out the danger of extreme
emphasis on either. Warning Americans that "the
idea for which this nation stands will not survive if
the highest goal free men can set themselves is an
amiable mediocrity," Gardner calls for a striving
toward the highest standards of performance in
every phase of life and in every occupation.
1980. Morison, Elting E., ed. The American style,
essays in value and performance; a report on
the Dedham conference of May 23—27, 1957. New
York, Harper [1958] 426 p. (Massachusetts Insti-
tute of Technology. Center for International
Studies. American project series)
58—11042 Ei69.i.M8
Includes bibliographical references.
How men cope with problems in the ordinary
course of their lives is considered to reflect a national
style. Analysis of these problem-solving activities
can be used as a basis for identification of primary
national characteristics. The classic American style
developed in the early i9th century, as the surge to
the West began and the Founding Fathers passed
from the scene. This volume is a record of a
conference on contemporary America sponsored
by the Center for International Studies at the Massa-
chusetts Institute of Technology. The explicit pur-
pose of the meeting was to examine societies and
institutions of all persuasions in the United States
and to present background papers as a framework
for debate. Some of the topics covered are the clash
between good and evil in man as a social animal,
between theory and fact, and between order and
innovation in human organization.
1981. Reissman, Leonard. Class in American so-
ciety. Glencoe, 111., Free Press [1960, Ci959]
436 p. 59-6825 HN57.R45
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
405-429).
258 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
A systematic treatment of "class" as social reality
and part of the fabric of society, with a description
of the logic and methodology used in the analysis.
Popular acceptance of class was prevented for dec-
ades by professed values of equality and equal
accessibility of opportunity. The idea of "status,"
a less materialistic and more ambiguous concept, has
been readily accepted. Reissman analyzes social
stratification and the economic processes that set the
basic molds of class distinctions. He believes that
the democratic affirmation of social equality and the
desire of most Americans "to be like everyone else"
account in large measure for the overwhelming size
of the middle class in the United States.
1982. Schlesinger, Arthur M., and Morton White,
eds.
Paths of American thought. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1963. 614 p. 63—14184 6851.837
"Notes and further reading": p. 541—592.
Essays selected to present various aspects of the
evolution of American intellectual and social life.
Dividing the Nation's history into colonial, Federal,
national, and international phases, the editors isolate
a pattern of ideas running parallel to this division.
They note that the major ideas of each age possess
internal coherence but that the degree to which
national thought corresponds to the realities of social
life in any given era varies from period to period.
The pattern of the past is reversed in the present:
today, the intellectual contends with American life
as it is, yet there is no unifying philosophy which
embodies America's convictions on basic problems.
Whatever the present and future, in the 350 years of
its germination the national mind succeeded for the
most part in adjusting society to changing economic
and moral circumstances.
1983. Smith, Bradford. Why we behave like
Americans. Philadelphia, Lippincott [1957]
322 p. 57-11954 £169.1.5596
Bibliography: p. 309-313.
There is no visible single pattern of American
character. Successive waves of immigration to the
United States have complicated our diverse racial
and cultural origins and make for puzzling contra-
dictions in American behavior. This survey of
community and family life, education, recreation,
culture, politics, economics, science, and historical
backgrounds attempts to assay the basic charac-
teristics of present-day America and its people.
Smith portrays Americans as insisting upon con-
formity in fundamentals but as being manipulative
and free in day-to-day techniques in order to
achieve success. He notes that a high value is
placed upon success, particularly that which is meas-
urable. Whether it is material reward or recogni-
tion of accomplishment, Americans never cease to
struggle for it. Erving GofTman's Behavior in Pub-
lic Places ( [New York] Free Press of Glencoe
[1963] 248 p.) is a psychological study of interac-
tion between persons confronting each other primar-
ily on social occasions.
B. Social History: Periods
1984. Lord, Walter. The good years: from 1900
to the First World War. New York, Harper
[1960] 369 p. illus. 59-10585 E756.L68
Bibliography: p. 348-354.
The author chose this title to reflect the fact that,
in the first years of the 2Oth century, "whatever the
trouble, people were sure they could fix it." His
highly selective account of American society during
that period covers such topics as reform movements,
politics, achievements, military exploits, and disas-
ters. The 1900*5 brought confidence in a glorious
new age, a confidence which survived many crises
but was finally shattered by the onset of the First
World War. The author's parade of events in-
cludes American involvement in the Boxer Rebel-
lion, the assassination of President McKinley, the
San Francisco fire, Commodore Peary's discovery
of the North Pole, the 1912 nomination of Wood-
row Wilson, and the movement to abolish child
labor.
1985. Wilson, Edmund. The American earth-
quake; a documentary of the twenties and
thirties. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1958.
576 p. (Doubleday anchor books)
58-5584 £169^658
A companion volume to Wilson's The Shores of
Light, no. 2541 in the 1960 Guide, this is a compila-
tion of almost 100 short "nonliterary" articles writ-
ten between 1923 and 1934 for various journals.
The "earthquake" of the title refers to the Great
Depression. The author's views are clearly liberal
and anticapitalist. In one of the longest articles, he
presents a grim picture of life in automotive plants
in Detroit. In another he describes the tumultuous
events surrounding the trial of the Scottsboro boys.
Other articles, political and nonpolitical, focus on
vaudeville, the movies, the theater, Sacco and Van-
SOCIETY / 259
zetti, Communist demonstrations, striking coal min-
ers in West Virigina, and the coming of the New
Deal.
C. Social History: Topics
1986. Amory, Cleveland. Who killed society?
New York, Harper [1960] 599 p. illus.
60—15314 Ei6i.A4
Bibliography: p. 553~555-
A highly detailed, anecdotal look at the Nation's
fashionable, powerful, and wealthy, from 1607 to the
present. In answer to those who bemoan the death
of "Society" and blame its demise on such causes as
the nouveaux riches, Franklin D. Roosevelt, the
servant problem, and taxes, Amory asserts that there
was no murder. If, he reasons, "people have com-
plained about Society not being what it used to be
for some 350 years, the stark, inescapable conclusion
seems to be that Society, as such, never was." Al-
though the focus is on the Northeast, the author also
discusses society in the Midwest, the Southwest, the
Far West, and the Old South. Chapters on Ameri-
can aristocracy, club life, celebrities, and Jewish so-
ciety are included. A 45-page index, mostly of
names, is appended.
1987. Baltzell, Edward Digby. The Protestant
establishment: aristocracy & caste in Amer-
ica. New York, Random House [1964] xviii, 429
p. illus. 64-14840 HN57.B26
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
388-403).
Convinced that the United States has need of an
aristocratic class to create and perpetuate a set of
traditional and authoritative standards, Baltzell
argues that such a class must be representative of the
society as a whole if it wants to stay in power. He
finds that since the early years of the aoth century
the great majority of the members of the Anglo-
Saxon Protestant establishment have been unwilling
to share their privileges by absorbing talented mem-
bers of minority ethnic groups. Ethnic minorities
have been excluded from the select social organiza-
tions, from the best educational institutions, and
from the higher levels of management, according to
the author. Consequendy, this portion of the estab-
lishment has declined in power. Baltzell focuses on
anti-Semitism to illustrate the "nature of the conflict
between the social forces of caste and aristocracy"
because he finds the prejudice against Negroes too
complex for his purposes.
1988. Burlingame, Roger. The American con-
science. New York, Knopf, 1957. 420 p.
56-5782 £169.1.6938
Bibliography: p. 407—420.
The author's premise is that American moral at-
titudes differed from those of our European ances-
tors because of a set of special determinants which
include isolation, the movement of the frontier, and
the natural wealth encountered in the march across
the continent. These combined with various secon-
dary determinants to produce the "peculiar Ameri-
can compulsion to assign moral values to every his-
torical event, economic theory, or social trend." The
author begins with the rise and fall of theocracy in
New England and follows with discussions of the
Enlightenment in the United States, the "Great
Awakening," "manifest destiny," abolition, the
struggle for land, and frontier morality. The last
chapter, "Our Most Wanton Orgy," focuses on the
shrill nativism, corruption, and contempt for law of
the 1920'$.
1989. Flexner, Eleanor. Century of struggle; the
woman's rights movement in the United
States. Cambridge, Belknap Press of Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1959. 384 p. illus.
59—9273 HQi4io.F6
"Bibliographical Summary": p. 335—338.
"Notes": p. [3391-373-
This history covers the women's rights movement
from its beginnings in the early i9th century to 1920
and the ratification of the i9th amendment giving
women the right to vote. Almost half the book
deals with woman suffrage, but the author also dis-
cusses the role of women in the abolition movement,
labor unions, and various other reform activities.
Such participation provided women with the knowl-
edge of the basic organizational skills necessary in
attempts to gain equal status with men. Miss Flex-
ner concludes by saying that suffrage did not bring
the millenium for which millions of women hoped.
Despite gains in status relative to men, women's pay
is still unequal, and only a handful have climbed to
the highest positions in government, business, edu-
cation, and the professions. In The Better Half; the
Emancipation of the American Woman (New York,
Harper & Row [1965] 401 p.), Andrew Sinclair
260 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
covers much the same ground but includes two chap-
ters on the changes — and lack of them— brought
about by woman suffrage.
1990. Habenstein, Robert W., and William M.
Lamers. The history of American funeral
directing. Rev. ed. Milwaukee, Bulfin Printers,
1962. 638 p. illus. 62-16553 GT3I50.H3 1962
Bibliographical notes.
A revised edition of no. 4527 in the 1960 Guide.
In The American Way of Death (New York, Simon
& Schuster, 1963. 333 p.), Jessica Mitford aims at
the "vast majority of ethical undertakers" for whom
"to be 'ethical' merely means to adhere to a prevail-
ing code of morality, in this case one devised over
the years by the undertakers themselves for their
own purposes." An appendix contains a directory
of memorial societies, instructions for organizing
such a society, and information about the donation
of bodies for the use of medical science.
1991. Holbrook, Stewart H. Dreamers of the
American dream. Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1957. 369 p. (Mainstream of America
series) 57-11424 HN57-H55
Bibliography: p. 350—353.
A sympathetic introductory picture of the "daft,
earnest, honest, and all but incredible lot of men and
women" — some of them little known — who dared
be "shakers of trees" when society was ripe, or al-
most ripe, for change. The efforts of Dorothea Dix,
Thomas Hopkins Gallaudet, and Samuel Gridley
Howe to secure humane and enlightened treatment
for the insane, the mute, and the blind are movingly
presented. Other subjects include controversies
over land rights and the land reform movement;
prohibition and its attack on the "viper in the glass";
the struggle for women's rights; the fight of labor-
ing men to gain acceptance for their unions; and
John Humphrey Noyes' colony of perfectionists at
Oneida, N.Y.
1992. Lynes, Russell. The domesticated Ameri-
cans. New York, Harper & Row [1963]
308 p. illus. 62—14538 Ei6i.L,9
"Sources and acknowledgments": p. 293—295.
"Partly a discussion of manners, partly an opin-
ionated critique of domestic architecture, and partly
an exercise in social history," Lynes' book focuses on
American houses inside and out and on the inability
of Americans to establish a permanent domestic
architecture. Population mobility removed the need
for structural permanence; most families stay in one
house only until they can afford to move into a bet-
ter one. As the increasing scarcity of servants dic-
tated the building of smaller houses, luxury became
associated with conveniences rather than with space.
And despite their pragmatic spirit, Americans often
sacrificed comfort and realism for romantic and sen-
timental illusions in the form of little Louvres, repli-
cas of Greek temples, and small versions of Eliza-
bethan country houses.
1993. Sinclair, Andrew. Prohibition, the era of
excess. With a preface by Richard Hofstad-
ter. Boston, Little, Brown [1962] 480 p. illus.
62-8071 HV5o89.S56
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
421—461).
A dispassionate history of the victory and subse-
quent failure of the movement to prohibit the manu-
facture and sale of alcoholic beverages. Sinclair's
thesis is that prohibition was advocated with an ex-
cess of zeal and was resisted in the same manner.
Supported most strongly by women, some feminists,
progressives, churches, and rural Americans, the
movement had all the fervor of a Protestant revival.
If the drys had been willing to compromise and ac-
cept a less stringent law — one legalizing beer and
wine, for instance — there probably would have been
less resistance. The wets were also guilty of exces-
sive zeal and helped to promote their own temporary
downfall by an unwillingness to control the liquor
traffic and close the worst saloons. The Life and
Times of the Late Demon Rum (New York, Put-
nam [1965] 381 p.), by Joseph C. Furnas, is an
account of the temperance movement from the i8th
century to about 1920. Another, more specialized,
book is The Social History of Bourbon, an Unhur-
ried Account of Our Star-Spangled American Drin\
(New York, Dodd, Mead [1963] 280 p.), an enter-
taining look at "the distinctive spirit of the United
States," by Gerald Carson.
1994. Webber, Everett. Escape to Utopia; the
communal movement in America. New
York, Hastings House Publishers [1959] 444 p.
illus. (American procession series)
58-12525 HX653.W4
Bibliography: p. 421—435.
A somewhat ironic and unsympathetic view of at-
tempts to establish and maintain Utopian communi-
ties in the United States. The author suggests that
most of the leaders and their followers were attempt-
ing to escape from the unpleasantness they found in
society. The leaders generally failed to establish
successful communities because of their blindness to
the need for organization, to economic realities, and
to the actual nature of man. "They were not men
of vision, but of visions." Few of the followers who
came to live in communes did so because of philo-
sophical or religious convictions. According to
Webber, the movement appealed mostly to the "spir-
itually and socially inept," to those who wanted to
be cared for and told what to do, and to the idle.
SOCIETY / 26l
D. Social Thought
1995. Allen, Philip J., ed, Pitirim A. Sorokin in
review. Durham, N.C., Duke University
Press, 1963. xxii, 527 p. illus. (The American
sociological forum) 63—7634 HM22.U6S6
Bibliographical footnotes.
Sorokin was among the first to apply statistical
methods to the analysis of historical processes. He
was also a pioneer contributor to the study of rural
life and became the first chairman of Harvard's de-
partment of sociology. This volume, divided into
three parts, presents a broad view of Sorokin's com-
prehensive studies of human society. The first part
contains his own account of the factors which in-
fluenced the development of his thought. The sec-
ond and major part comprises a group of critical
essays by outstanding sociologists, psychologists, and
historians who discuss aspects of Sorokin's work
from the perspectives of their various disciplines.
The third part consists of Sorokin's lengthy reply to
the critiques of his colleagues and is followed by a
chronological bibliography of his publications (p.
[497] -506). A supplementary book is Sorokin's
autobiography, A Long Journey (New Haven,
Conn., College & University Press [1963] 327 p.).
1996. Black, Max, ed. The social theories of Tal-
cott Parsons; a critical examination. Engle-
wood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall, 1961. 363 p. illus.
61-8220 HMi5.B55
Bibliographical footnotes.
A foremost theorist among contemporary Amer-
ican sociologists is Talcott Parsons, founder and
first chairman of the department of social relations
at Harvard University. In his prolific writings, he
has developed a synoptic "general theory of action"
to explain the functioning of the individual within
the social system, based on his wide knowledge of
biology, psychology, economics, political science, and
anthropology. Parsons' theories were discussed by
10 faculty members at Cornell University in a series
of public seminars; their papers, in revised form,
make up the present volume. The authors — psy-
chologists, sociologists, economists, and a philoso-
pher— subject Parsons' work to close analysis and
are divided in their estimation of its value as a
systematic theory of society. Also included in the
volume is Parsons' response to his colleagues' review
of his writings.
1997. Lipset, Seymour M., and Leo Lowenthal,
eds. Culture and social character; the work
of David Riesman reviewed. [New York, Free
Press of Glencoe, 1961] xiv, 466 p. (Continuities
in social research) 61-9169 BF755.A5R525
Bibliographical footnotes.
This work was undertaken to assess the value of
David Riesman's study The Lonely Crowd, no. 4555
in the 1960 Guide, 10 years after its initial publica-
tion. In order to achieve a balanced appraisal of the
book and its significance, the editors solicited papers
from persons with varied backgrounds. Also in-
cluded is a critical reevaluation of the book by its
author in collaboration with Nathan Glazer. The
papers are grouped into several sections, among
which are "Cultures and Societies," "Politics," and
"Personality and Education." Some of the writers,
in lieu of discussing the book's contents, provide re-
ports of original research related to its major themes.
1998. Loomis, Charles P., and Zona K. Loomis.
Modern social theories; selected American
writers. 2d ed. Princeton, N.J., Van Nostrand
[1965] xxiv, 800 p. illus. (Van Nostrand series
in sociology) 65-1947 HM24.L8 1965
Bibliography: p. 741—779.
The theories of eight leading sociologists are sys-
tematically presented. Although divergent in their
delineations of the elements which constitute a social
system, the theorists share a search for the interrela-
tionships among social phenomena. The sociolo-
gists whose work is examined are Howard Becker,
Kingsley Davis, George C. Homans, Robert K. Mer-
ton, Talcott Parsons, Pitirim A. Sorokin, Robin M.
Williams, and Alvin Gouldner. The authors out-
line each sociologist's main concerns and discuss his
theories in detail. Each discussion is based on a
conceptual model of social processes developed by
Charles P. Loomis in an earlier book, Social Systems:
Essays on Their Persistence and Change (Princeton,
N.J., Van Nostrand [1960] 349 p. The Van No-
strand series in sociology). The extensive footnotes,
as well as the charts, diagrams, and chronological
bibliographies, render this book especially relevant
to the needs of the student of sociology.
1999. Mills, Charles Wright. The sociological
imagination. New York, Oxford University
Press, 1959. 234 p. 59-7506 H6i.M5
Bibliographical footnotes.
262 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
In this study C. Wright Mills (1916-1962) seeks
to determine the relevance of social science to pres-
ent-day society. He defines the "sociological imagi-
nation" as the capacity to shift perspectives in order
to build up a total view of the social world and con-
siders that it can help men to make issues explicit
and thus identify choices for action. Mills holds
that American sociology has lost the push for reform
with which it began, because of the bias of many
sociologists toward scattered and unrelated studies
or abstract general theories. He stresses the impor-
tance of studying social problems within a historical
context, emphasizes the close relation of sociology to
other disciplines and proposes a unified social sci-
ence. A collection of Mills' essays, Power, Politics,
and People (New York, Oxford University Press,
1963. 657 p.), has been edited and introduced by
Irving L. Horowitz.
E. General Sociology; Social Psychology
2000. Goodman, Walter. All honorable men; cor-
ruption and compromise in American life.
Boston, Little, Brown [1963] 342 p.
63-13978 HN58.G6
Bibliography: p. [330] -334.
In an exploration of recent public scandals in busi-
ness, government, and the mass media, the author
discusses incidents such as price-fixing, the Sherman
Adams and Bernard Goldfine case, and TV quiz-
show rigging. Strikingly evident is the public's con-
donement, which the author feels originates deep
within our society. According to Goodman, super-
ficial allegiance to ethical convention thinly veils the
common acceptance of perverted values stemming
from the "amoral cash nexus of our age." Although
honesty prevails on an individual basis, the author
maintains that its absence is often tolerated in group
activity, where responsibility is diffused. Another
portrayal of the alleged ethical collapse is The
Pseudo-Ethic: A Speculation on American Politics
and Morals (New York, Simon & Schuster, 1963.
127 p.), by Margaret Halsey. In The Power Elite
(New York, Oxford University Press, 1956. 423
p.), C. Wright Mills concludes: "The higher immor-
ality is a systematic feature of the American elite."
Vance O. Packard alerts the reader to the wide-
spread invasion of privacy by business, government,
and other interests in The Na\ed Society (New
York, D. McKay Co. [1964] 369 p.).
2001. Hodges, Harold M. Social stratification;
class in America. Cambridge, Mass., Schenk-
man Pub. Co. [1964] 307 p.
64—13290 HN57.H538
Bibliography: p. 281-300.
A broad, humanistic treatment, intended for the
layman, in which the author claims to have shunned
"a fact-grubbing, questionnaire-type sociology."
Hodges' basic contentions are the universality of
social stratification in complex societies and the
far-reaching effects of stratification on every facet of
life. The discussion covers the theorists, novelists,
and empiricists of social class. Hodges concludes
that, in spite of the creed of classlessness, American
society is stratified, but the country nonetheless
comes closer to the ideal of an open society than
many other nations. Another account of social class
is found in The Status Seeders; an Exploration of
Class Behavior in America and the Hidden Barriers
That Affect You, Your Community, Your Future
(New York, D. McKay Co. [1959] 376 p.), by
Vance O. Packard.
2002. Keniston, Kenneth. The uncommitted; al-
ienated youth in American society. New
York, Harcourt, Brace & World [1965] 500 p.
illus. 65—19062 HMi36.K45
Bibliography: p. [4991—500.
This analysis of the complex roots of alienation is
based on a study of 12 "extremely alienated" Har-
vard undergraduates. Alienation is broadly defined
as "a response by selectively predisposed individuals
to problems and dilemmas confronting our entire
society." After analyzing the psychological origins
of the problem, the author examines basic character-
istics of American society which foster traits that
appear in their extreme in the alienated. Chronic
social change, empiricism, fragmentation, and the
"deification" of technological values are considered
to engender rootlessness, a lack of individual iden-
tity, and the subordination of emotion. The signifi-
cant implication of alienation, according to Keniston,
is seen in the heavy human toll exacted by our
technological society.
2003. Miller, Delbert C., and William H. Form.
Industrial sociology: the sociology of work
organizations. 2d ed. New York, Harper & Row
[1964] xxii, 873 p.
64—10221 HD696r.M55 1964
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
An updated edition of no. 4552 in the 1960 Guide.
The same authors explore business, labor, and com-
munity relations in Industry, Labor, and Commu-
nity (New York, Harper [1960] 739 p. Harper's
social science series). Social Mobility in Industrial
Society (Berkeley, University of California Press,
1959. 309 p.), by Seymour M. Lipset and Reinhard
Bendix, is a scholarly treatment of mobility, based on
the Labor Mobility Survey conducted in 1949 in
Oakland, Calif., and on other American and foreign
surveys. The results of the studies tend to disprove
the commonly held beliefs that social mobility is less
extensive in Europe than in the United States, that
social mobility declines as industrial societies ma-
ture, and that penetration into the business elite
becomes more difficult with increasing industrializa-
tion.
2004. Olson, Philip, ed. America as a mass society;
changing community and identity. [New
York] Free Press of Glencoe [1963] 576 p.
63-13541 HN58.04
Bibliographical notes.
The impact upon the individual of the changing
American social structure is the central theme of this
substantial anthology of representative and illustra-
tive essays. The emerging concept of "mass society"
indicates concern over a basic, historically rooted is-
sue in our culture: freedom of the individual
versus institutional control. Some view mass society
as a stultifying influence that contributes to loss of
individuality and absorption of community by the
all-engulfing, centrally controlled mass structure.
Others regard it as a liberating influence which
destroys the stifling effects of a traditional and hier-
archial social order. The predominant outlook
favors the former interpretation.
SOCIETY / 263
2005. Whyte, William H. The organization
man. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1956.
429 p. illus. 56-9926 BF697.W47
The author postulates the birth of a "Social
Ethic" in response to the modern American's attempt
to legitimize morally his seemingly inevitable sub-
jection to the pressures of industrial society charac-
terized by a growing collectivism. An "organization
man" — a doctor in a corporate clinic, a scientist in
a government laboratory, or a corporation executive
— holds the belief that the group is superior to the
individual and that "belongingness" is his basic
need. Pledging unquestioning loyalty to the organi-
zation, which he regards as benevolent, he accepts
its dictates in all spheres of his life. The author
views the increasing collectivism as a result of an
overemphasis on egalitarianism and community
spirit. To restore the balance, he advocates a return
to the primacy of the individual. "The fault is not
in organization, in short; it is in our worship of it."
In The Pyramid Climbers (New York, McGraw-
Hill [1962] 339 p.), Vance O. Packard elaborates
on the corporation executive.
2006. Williams, Robin M. American society: a
sociological interpretation. 2d ed., rev. New
York, Knopf, 1960. 575 p.
60—6472 HN57-W55 1960
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
An updated edition of no. 4558 in the 1960 Guide.
A statistical perspective of American society is pre-
sented in This U.S.A.: An Unexpected Family
Portrait of 194,067,296 Americans Drawn From the
Census (Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1965. 520
p.), by Ben J. Wattenberg in collaboration with
Richard M. Scammon.
F. The Family
2007. Bossard, James H. S., and Eleanor S. Boll.
The sociology of child development. 3d ed.
New York, Harper [1960] 706 p. illus. (Har-
per's social science series)
60-7016 HQ78i.B67 1960
Includes bibliography.
A revised edition of no. 4559 in the 1960 Guide,
containing new material as well as structural
changes. The Family, Society, and the Individual
(Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1961] 690 p.), by
William M. Kephart, is a readable textbook on the
family as a social institution. The author believes
that problems of the family frequently represent
some antipathy centering on the "needs of the indi-
vidual and the requirements of the social order."
These forces must balance in order to effect maxi-
mum social integration. A U.S. Department of
Labor publication, The Negro Family; the Case for
National Action ( [Washington, For sale by the
Supt. of Docs., U.S. Govt. Print. Off.] 1965. 78 p.),
often referred to as the Moynihan report, traces the
structural breakdown of the Negro family and
recommends national action.
2008. Coleman, James S. The adolescent society;
the social life of the teenager and its impact
on education, by James S. Coleman with the assist-
ance of John W. C. Johnstone and Kurt Jonassohn.
264 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
[New York] Free Press of Glencoe [1961] xvi,
368 p. illus. 61-14725 HQ796.C64
Bibliographical footnotes.
Ten Illinois high schools were selected for this
study on the basis of their differences rather than
their "representativeness." Students, parents, and
teachers contributed replies to written inquiries and
informal interviews. Coleman provides a creative
and thoughtful analysis of the importance and con-
sequence of student status achieved through be-
havior, dress, scholastic and social success, use of
leisure time, leadership, habits, and sports. Adoles-
cents and the Schools (New York, Basic Books
[1965] 121 p.), by the same author, contains addi-
tional material.
2009. Goode, William J. After divorce. Glencoe,
111., Free Press ['1956] xv, 381 p.
55—10992 HQ8i4-G6
Bibliographical footnotes.
This exploratory report on the "process of adjust-
ment after divorce" surveys many problems but
offers no solutions. "Sociologically, the most impor-
tant justification for the study of divorce is not that
we thereby deal with unhappiness, but that we
thereby locate and analyze points of strain, personal
and social." Four-fifths of the divorced mothers
surveyed were convinced of the necessity of separat-
ing from their former husbands and confident that
they had improved their situation.
2010. Goodman, Paul. Growing up absurd; prob-
lems of youth in the organized system.
New York, Random House [1960] 296 p.
60—12137 HQ796.G645
In this study of the present waste of human
resources, Goodman probes the connection between
the organized system of American life and the
disaffected youth of today. Believing that organ-
ized society wants not men but movable parts for
the machine, he attempts to show how difficult it is
"for an average child to grow up to be a man."
Youth is confronted with three alternatives— to ac-
cept the role of the organization man, to try to
remain in society but independent of it, or to drop
out completely. After discussing the job oppor-
tunities concomitant with these choices, the author
examines the earlier and character-molding factors
which impede growth. He cites, for example, the
stupidity, the lack of patriotism and faith, and the
sexual confusion of the "average adjusted boy." If
the youths who are trapped by the system can
recognize its evil, he asks, why cannot the adults
who perpetrated it effect a change? In The Vanish-
ing Adolescent (Boston, Beacon Press [1959] 144
p.), Edgar Z. Friedenberg also deplores the increas-
ing emphasis in schools on "adjustment" and points
to resulting difficulties which young people have in
developing self-respect and maturity.
201 1. Lifton, Robert J., ed. The woman in Amer-
ica. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1965. 293
p. illus. (The Daedalus library [3] )
65—15157
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
Pithy opinions on the changing status of women
by such authorities as Erik H. Erikson, Edna G.
Rostow, David Riesman, and Diana Trilling. Based
on a series of dialogues held at the American Acad-
emy of Arts and Sciences, the papers discuss such
topics as the enduring aspects of the extent to which
woman's psychological life is determined by her
anatomy and biology, the opportunities American
society offers to its women, and the special problems
of women. In The Feminine Mystique (New
York, Norton [1963] 410 p.), Betty Friedan
examines American woman since World War II,
emphasizing her dissatisfactions.
2012. Mudd, Emily H., and Aron M. Krich, eds,
Man and wife; a source book of family atti-
tudes, sexual behavior and marriage counseling.
New York, W. W. Norton [1957] 291 p.
57-11241 HQ734.M88
Bibliography: p. 277—279.
2013. Mudd, Emily H., Howard E. Mitchell, and
Sara B. Taubin. Success in family living.
New York, Association Press [1965] 254 p. illus.
65-11096 HQro.MS
Bibliographical footnotes.
These two collaborative efforts explore wider
areas than Emily Mudd's earlier book, The Practice
of Marriage Counseling (no. 4570 in the 1960
Guide). In Man and Wife, a series of lectures on
family attitudes and sexual behavior, marital prob-
lems and marital counseling are discussed by
psychologists, psychiatrists, religious leaders, and
lawyers. The lecturers depict the customs and
values of families with different religious faiths and
discuss practical assistance. Success in Family Liv-
ing correlates various findings of a program known
as the "All-American Family Search," sponsored
by the National Institute of Mental Health. In
1957 and again in 1960, an entire family was
selected from each State and the District of Colum-
bia to attend a conference. Led by the Grolier
Society, Inc., teams of research interviewers were in
residence with the families for the express purpose
of discovering methods for further improvement of
the family unit. Although the families' occupa-
tions, educational levels, and financial situations dif-
fered, a common denominator of a democratic way
of life seemed to emerge.
2014- Schur, Edwin M., ed. The family and the
sexual revolution; selected readings. Bloom-
ington, Indiana University Press, 1964. xv, 427 p
64-18819 HQ535.S34
Bibliography: p. 423—427.
Compiled almost a generation after the "Kinsey
Reports" (no. 4565 and 4566 in the 1960 Guide},
this collection of articles by recognized authorities
upholds its precursors' view that uninhibited dis-
cussion of sexual behavior in our time is desirable.
Part i, "Changing Sex Standards," constituting half
the volume, deals with American attitudes on the
SOCIETY / 265
relaxation of morals and speculates on why the
direction is so liberal. One of the predominant
answers given is the lifting of restrictions on maga-
zines, books, and films. The subjects of premarital
sexual experience, fidelity, and extramarital rela-
tions are discussed. Part 2, "The Woman Problem,"
and part 3, "Birth Control," discuss the social and
biological expectations of women. Part 3 also in-
cludes a history of the turbulence that has surround-
ed the subject of family planning and a summary
of its present legal status.
G. Communities: General
2015. Conkin, Paul K. Tomorrow a new world:
the New Deal community program. Ithaca,
N.Y., Published for the American Historical Asso-
ciation [by] Cornell University Press [1959] 350
p. illus. 59-65124 HDi76i.C66
"Bibliographical notes": p. 338-340. Bibliograph-
ical footnotes.
Frequently in the history of the United States
there have been efforts to establish new communities
in rural settings. These projects have been inspired
partly by a conviction that urbanization is inimical
to man's nature and partly as a solution to unem-
ployment and poverty in the cities. The author
reviews the establishment of 100 such communities
during the period 1933-38 as part of the New Deal
program. Their planning and development in-
volved a clash between the conflicting ideological
strains in New Deal thinking — collectivism and
Jeffersonian individualism. The author examines
the ideological background of the communities' cre-
ation, traces the development of each type of pro-
gram from its inception to its abandonment, and
concludes with studies of specific communities illu-
strative of each type of program.
2016. Stein, Maurice R. The eclipse of commu-
nity; an interpretation of American studies.
Princeton, N.J., Princeton University Press, 1960.
354 P- 6o-5757 HTi 23.878
Bibliography: p. 339-342.
The author attempts to present a general view of
community life in America by reviewing the find-
ings of studies of specific communities against the
background of American society as a whole. Stein
identifies an "eclipse of community," related to
the increased interdependence and decreased local
autonomy of modern life and characterized by a
discarding of traditional values when they interfere
with the pursuit of commodities or careers, destruc-
tion of community and even family ties, and a gen-
eral feeling of loneliness and existential "shipwreck."
Community Structure and Analysis (New York,
Crowell [1959] 454 p.), edited by Marvin B.
Sussman, includes selections from the works of
various specialists in the social sciences.
2017. Warren, Roland L. The community in
America. Chicago, Rand McNally [1963]
347 p. (Rand McNally sociology series)
63-8327 HTi23.W25
Bibliographical footnotes.
This introduction to the study of the community
explores the common traits of urban and rural
social units. Warren considers that the traditional
concept of the community as a group living in a
specific geographic area and having certain common
institutions and values no longer applies in the
United States. Geographic areas overlap and inter-
mingle and the sharing of community values and
customs has declined. Various manifestations of
the great change in social units are discussed, among
them the "increasing orientation of local community
units toward extracommunity systems of which they
are a part, with a corresponding decline in com-
munity cohesion and autonomy." The Communi-
ty; an Introduction to a Social System (New York,
Ronald Press Co. [1958] 431 p.), by Irwin T.
Sanders, is a useful textbook. Louis Wirth's select-
ed papers, Community Life and Social Policy
([Chicago] University of Chicago Press [1956]
431 p.), edited by Elizabeth W. Marwick and Al-
bert J. Reiss, deal with such aspects of community
life as the ghetto, rural-urban differences, and life
in the city.
266 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
H. Communities: Rural
2018. Taylor, Miller Lee, and Arthur R. Jones.
Rural life and urbanized society. New
York, Oxford University Press, 1964. xiv, 493 p.
illus. 64-11239 HN58.T3
Includes bibliographical references.
The authors contend that there are no longer any
entirely rural communities in the United States.
The country has developed a predominantly urban
society as a result of the expansion of nationwide
transportation and communications systems, scien-
tific agricultural techniques, and the tremendous
mobility of people. The diversity of the more rural
1 9th century has given way to the mass values of
modern industrial America.
2019. Vidich, Arthur J., and Joseph Bensman.
Small town in mass society; class, power, and
religion in a rural community. Princeton, Prince-
ton University Press, 1958. xvi, 329 p.
57-14576 HT43i.V5
A study of a rural community in upstate New
York, pseudonymously called "Springdale." The
relationships between such a community and mod-
ern industrial society are investigated on the basis
of an analysis of Springdale's economic and social
history, self-image, political character, and religious
affairs. Springdalers were bound to be ambivalent
toward mass society, realizing their inferior cultural
and economic opportunities but celebrating their
ability to live a rural life and yet visit the city for
its advantages. In People of Coal Town (New
York, Columbia University Press, 1958. 310 p.),
Herman R. Lantz studies a community in eco-
nomic decline, describing a depressed and cynical
people with a dim future.
2020. Wheeler, Thomas C., ed. A vanishing
America; the life and times of the small
town. Twelve regional towns by Hodding Carter
[and others]. Introduction by Wallace Stegner.
New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston [1964]
191 p. illus. 64—21932 £161.^487
Wallace Stegner describes this volume as "an
unabashed invitation to nostalgia." Twelve emi-
nent regional writers, many of whose larger works
appear elsewhere in this Supplement, record the
biographies of 12 American towns viewed as proto-
types. The essays vary in approach but share a
romantic harking back to village mores, quiet, and
natural beauty and a common rejection of encroach-
ing bigness, noise, ugliness, and pollution in the
modern metropolis. The authors and their subjects
are as follows: W. Storrs Lee — Middlebury, Vt.;
Conrad Richter — Pine Grove, Pa.; Thomas D.
Clark — Harrodsburg, Ky.; Hodding Carter — Holly
Springs, Miss.; William E. Wilson — New Har-
mony, Ind.; James Gray — Marine on St. Croix,
Minn.; John Edward Weems — Nacogdoches, Tex.;
Winfield Townley Scott — Chimayo, N. M.; Da-
vid Lavender — Telluride, Colo.; A. B. Guthrie, Jr.
— Choteau, Mont.; Oscar Lewis— Red Bluff, Calif.;
and William O. Douglas — Forks, Wash. Bio-
graphical sketches of the authors appear at the end
of the book.
I. Communities: Urban
2021. Bollens, John C., and Henry J. Schmandt.
The metropolis: its people, politics, and eco-
nomic life. New York, Harper & Row [1965]
xvi, 643 p. illus. 65-19489 JS422.B6
"A commentary on bibliography": p. [5991-608.
An introduction to the study of metropolitan
areas, with emphasis on social characteristics and
trends, economic developments, government and
politics, and the roles of citizens. The authors also
discuss problems associated with metropolitan
growth and functioning and the various attempts
to solve them. It is suggested that the role of
government is to provide an appropriate system
within which other community institutions may
work to improve the quality of urban life. In
Governing the Metropolis (New York, Wiley
[1962] 153 p.), Scott A. Greer summarizes many
studies of metropolitan areas as a basis for his
analysis of big city government.
2022. Cole, Donald B. Immigrant city: Lawrence,
Massachusetts, 1845—1921. Chapel Hill,
University of North Carolina Press [1963] 248 p.
illus. 63-3915 F74.L4C6
Bibliography: p. [2321-237. Bibliographical
footnotes.
The author believes that the 1912 textile strike of
the International Workers of the World in Law-
rence created an image of the city as un-American,
anarchistic, and impoverished and of immigrants in
general as poverty-stricken, insecure radicals. Cole
challenges these stereotypes, proposing that the for-
eign workers were not as hopelessly poor, ultra-
liberal, or insecure as was thought and that the city
was not as extreme as the activity during the strike
indicated. The book is a careful study of Lawrence
from its beginning as a city of immigrants to its
emergence as a city of Americans.
2023. Dobriner, William M. Class in suburbia.
Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall [1963]
166 p. illus. (A Spectrum book)
63-7772 HT35i.D48
Bibliographical footnotes.
The author's thesis is that all suburbs are not
alike but vary according to the class of people
living in them. He asserts that the typical image of
suburbia as a place where city dwellers are trans-
formed from working class to middle class and
from Democrats to Republicans, where they "redis-
cover religion, the PTA, and the bridge club," and
where life in general seems to become "one frenetic
garden party" is erroneous. Dobriner cites various
studies which reveal that the move from the city to
the suburb has very little effect on behavior and
notes that these stereotypes are distinctively middle
class and are not typical of working-class suburbs.
The Suburban Community (New York, Putnam
[1958] 416 p.), edited by Dobriner, is a textbook
focusing on the creation, outer forms, and internal
processes of the suburb.
2024. Duhl, Leonard J., ed. The urban condition;
people and policy in the metropolis. Edited
by Leonard J. Duhl, with the assistance of John
Powell. New York, Basic Books [1963] 410 p.
63-12844 HTi23-D76
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
Thirty-two writers from various fields attempt to
provide insights into the kind of planning needed
to achieve mental health for our urban society. A
general conclusion is that simplistic, cause-and-effect
approaches to urban problems are inadequate and
that the complexity of relationships within an urban
industrial society must be taken into consideration.
The papers are arranged into sections dealing with
new ways of thinking about urban problems; urban
renewal and the attendant dislocations and reloca-
tions; slums, public housing, poverty, and mental
illness; philosophies of social planning and social
SOCIETY / 267
action; and the ecology of the social environment.
The editors of Fortune discuss the problems of the
cities and draw attention to the process of urban
sprawl in The Exploding Metropolis (Garden City,
N.Y., Doubleday, 1958. 193 p.)
2025. Gottmann, Jean. Megalopolis; the urban-
ized northeastern seaboard of the United
States. New York, Twentieth Century Fund, 1961.
8iop. illus. 61-17298 HTi23.5.Ai2G6
Bibliographical footnotes.
A systematic analysis of the development and
present state of "Megalopolis," the string of metro-
politan regions stretching from Boston to Washing-
ton, D.C. In addition to its high population density,
Megalopolis is noteworthy for its prime role in the
Nation's political and economic activities and as one
of the largest industrial belts in the world. The
area includes pockets of wilderness and agricultural
areas that are achieving a new kind of integration
with the cities. Gottmann contends that slums and
urban crowding are growing pains and that, as a
whole, people in Megalopolis are healthier, richer,
more successful, and better off than comparable
groups elsewhere in the world. As "the cradle of a
new order in the organization of inhabited space,"
Megalopolis presents a major challenge to modern
civilization. The central findings of the study are
discussed in nontechnical language and presented in
graphic form in the Twentieth Century Fund re-
port, The Challenge of Megalopolis ( [New York?]
Macmillan, 1964. 126 p.), by Wolf Von Eckhardt.
2026. McKelvey, Blake. The urbanization of
America, 1860-1915. New Brunswick, N.J.,
Rutgers University Press [1963] 370 p. illus.
62—21248 HTi23-M23
Bibliography: p. [333]~357-
The author examines the character and causes of
city growth during the late i9th and early 2oth
centuries and its relationship to other developments
during that period. McKelvey, who has also writ-
ten an authoritative history of Rochester, N.Y.,
regards the city as a constantly changing and
developing entity in human society. After identify-
ing the "economic and demographic forces that
tended to multiply and scatter urban centers across
the land," he traces the internal civic and political
evolution of the cities and examines social and cul-
tural developments as they became embodied in
urban customs and institutions. The discussion
closes at a turning point in urban history, when
many cities were becoming complex metropolitan
centers with new and perplexing needs. Addi-
tional historical accounts of American cities are The
Urban Frontier; the Rise of Western Cities, 1790-
268 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1830 (Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1959.
362 p. Harvard historical monographs, 41), by
Richard C. Wade, and The Rise of Urban America
(New York, Harper & Row [1965] 208 p.), by
Constance McLaughlin Green. The latter book is
a brief survey of urban life from the i6oo's to the
1960'$.
2027. Vernon, Raymond. Metropolis 1985; an
interpretation of the findings of the New
York metropolitan region study. Cambridge, Mass.,
Harvard University Press, 1960. 252 p. illus.
(New York metropolitan region study 9)
60-15243 HCio8.N7V4
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. [2411-244).
The New York Metropolitan Region Study, di-
rected by Raymond Vernon, is a comprehensive
analysis of the region's major economic and demo-
graphic features, with projections to 1965, 1975, and
1985. The nine-volume study covers 22 counties in
three States. In one volume of the study, Anatomy
of a Metropolis (Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1959. 345 p.), Edgar M. Hoover and Ray-
mond Vernon discuss the changing distribution of
people and jobs within the New York metropolitan
area. Metropolis 1985, an interpretive summary of
the other eight volumes, emphasizes economic de-
velopment in projecting the region's growth for a
25-year period. Additional volumes in the series
are entered by subject elsewhere in this Supplement.
J. City Planning; Housing
2028. Abrahamson, Julia. A neighborhood finds
itself. New York, Harper [1959] 370 p.
59-7061 HN8o.C5A6
"Source Material": p. 358—360.
An eloquent story of people of all races and
creeds working together to save their ioo-year-old,
declining community. As cochairman of the Social
Order Committee of a Quaker group in Chicago,
the author helped organize the Hyde Park-Kenwood
Community conference, which became one of the
most ambitious urban renewal undertakings in the
United States. The Federal Housing and Home
Finance Agency approved its plans in 1958 and
allocated $25,835,000 for assistance. Active group
participation, with block leaders and interracial
involvement at the grassroots level, are held to be
chiefly responsible for the success of the project. In
Slums and Social Insecurity (Washington, U.S.
Govt. Print. Off. [1963] 168 p. U.S. Social Secur-
ity Administration. Division of Research and Sta-
tistics. Research report no. i), Alvin L. Schorr
evaluates housing policies in relation to the elimina-
tion of poverty.
2029. Abrams, Charles. The city is the frontier.
New York, Harper & Row [1965] 394 p.
64-25145 HTi23.A6
Bibliographical footnotes.
The author, who has been associated with the
housing program in the United States since its
inception in 1933, explores the financial, political,
and legal entanglements of the program and con-
cludes that material improvements without regard
to human relationships are inadequate. Urban re-
newal "calls for something more than tearing down
a few slums, putting up another string of public
projects, or another row of apartment houses." It
requires that the central city with all its problems
be "acknowledged as one of the vital options in
American life."
2030. Futterman, Robert A. The future of our
cities. Introduction by Victor Gruen.
Graphics and cartography by Stephen Kraft. Gar-
den City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1961. 360 p. illus.
61-8884 NA9io8.F8
The author, a successful builder and developer,
likens the city to a living organism that changes
even while it is being examined. Analyzing the
American city as a fundamentally democratic and
humanistic entity, Futterman notes that although a
dominant industry can promote a city's growth it
may simultaneously control it, and the single eco-
nomic base is thus to be avoided. He considers that
some cities flourish because of their "eternally valu-
able location" while others decline when their re-
sources are drained. The latter half of the volume
is devoted to capsule histories of 19 large cities in
the United States.
2031. Gallion, Arthur B., and Simon Eisner. The
urban pattern; city planning and design.
Chapter tide sketches by Anthony Stoner. 2d ed.
Princeton, N.J., Van Nostrand [1963] 435 p.
63—24088 NA9O3I.G3 1963
Bibliography: p. 401—423.
A revised edition of no. 4606 in the 1960 Guide,
with additional material and new photographs. In
The Making of Urban America; a History of City
Planning in the United States (Princeton, N.J.,
Princeton University Press, 1965. 574 p.), John W.
Reps documents the important influences that have
molded America's cities in the last 400 years. "To
provide a general survey and basic history of this
neglected aspect of the nation's growth," he traces
the European heritage and major design forms from
the beginning of American colonization to the start
of modern urban planning. More than 300 repro-
ductions of original plans and historic maps are
included, as well as quotations from diarists in the
late i yth century.
2032. Jacobs, Jane. The death and life of great
American cities. [New York] Random
House [1961] 458 p. 61-6262 NA9io8.J3
A critique of past and current city planning in the
United States. Citing errors that she attributes to
careless planning theories, the author concentrates
on the inner areas of the cities and the numerous
related problems of ethnic and community groups.
For her, "The pseudoscience of city planning and
its companion, the art of city design, have not yet
broken with the special comfort of wishes, familiar
superstitions, over-simplification, and symbols, and
have not yet embarked upon the adventure of prob-
ing the real world." In The Heart of Our Cities;
the Urban Crisis: Diagnosis and Cure (New York,
Simon & Schuster, 1964. 368 p.), Victor Gruen
urges wide participation in city planning.
2033. McEntire, Davis. Residence and race; final
and comprehensive report to the Commis-
sion on Race and Housing. Berkeley, University of
California Press, 1960. xxii, 409 p. ill us. (Publi-
cations of the Commission on Race and Housing)
60-13020 HD7293.M22
Bibliography: p. [381] -400.
"One of the basic liberties of citizens in a free
society is the freedom to move and to choose a
place of residence," says the author in his introduc-
tion, and he proceeds to consider the political, social,
and economic forces which influence residential
patterns in the United States. Drawn largely from
related studies by social scientists and experts on
minority housing, this report also contains consider-
able data from governmental sources. McEntire
SOCIETY / 269
finds that most private housing developments, ex-
cept those intended primarily for minority occu-
pancy, still exclude minority groups entirely. Thus,
although building and financing methods have al-
tered, traditional racial policies have remained much
as before. Asserting that his findings are "not
limited to the specific problems of housing and race
relations" but are basic to research in human be-
havior, the author concludes with constructive prin-
ciples for action. In Urban Renewal Politics; Slum
Clearance in Newar^ (New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1963. 219 p. Metropolitan politics
series, no. i), Harold Kaplan seeks to determine
what kind of local political structure is conducive to
rapid, planned change.
2034. Meyerson, Martin, Barbara Terrett, and Wil-
liam L. C. Wheaton. Housing, people, and
cities. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1962. xiv, 386 p.
illus. (ACTION series in housing and community
development) 61-16532 HD7293-M4
Bibliography: p. 355—365.
The final volume of a series sponsored by AC-
TION (The American Council To Improve Our
Neighborhoods) to investigate obstructions to the
improvement of housing and urban environment.
Under the headings, "The Setting," "The Con-
sumer," "The Producer," "The Investor," "The
Federal Government," and "The Community," the
authors measure demographic trends in family life
in the United States and the present housing needs
of the consumer. Factors determining the buying,
selling, financing, and construction of dwellings are
discussed in detail. Though disagreement over ap-
propriate involvement of the Government in future
planning remains a central issue, the authors suggest
that private enterprise and public effort should com-
plement one another in their attempts to develop
desirable community rehabilitation. Three relevant
studies on housing are Housing Martlets and Public
Policy (Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania
Press [1963] 346 p. City planning series), by
William G. Grigsby; Property Values and Race
(Berkeley, University of California Press, 1960. 256
p.), by Luigi Laurenti; and The Urban Complex;
Human Values in Urban Life (Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1964. 297 p.), by Robert C. Weaver.
K. Social Problems; Social Work
2035. Andrews, Frank Emerson. Philanthropic
foundations. New York, Russell Sage Foun-
dation, 1956. 459 p. illus. 56-5824 HV97.A3A67
Bibliography: p. 355-387.
As defined by the author, a philanthropic founda-
tion is "a nongovernmental, nonprofit organiza-
270 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
tion having a principal fund of its own, managed
by its own trustees or directors, and established to
maintain or aid social, educational, charitable, relig-
ious, or other activities serving the common wel-
fare." Essentially a 20th-century institution, the
foundation in the United States grants private funds
for public use and participates in a broad range of
social and economic activity. Andrews discusses the
operation, types, establishment, and finances of
foundations, as well as their trustees, personnel, and
administration. Criteria for grants and current
trends in this sphere of philanthropy are also out-
lined. John E. Lankford's Congress and the Foun-
dations in the Twientieth Century (River Falls, Wis-
consin State University, 1964. 142 p.) is a special-
ized study that centers on congressional investiga-
tions of the functions of foundations.
2036. Bremner, Robert H. American philan-
thropy. [Chicago] University of Chicago
Press [1960] 230 p. (The Chicago history of
American civilization) 60—7246 HV9 1.667
Bibliography: p. 198—212.
Philanthropic activities in the United States are
surveyed from the colonial period to the present,
and the principal individuals, institutions, and
movements are noted. Stating that economic devel-
opments such as industrialism and the accumulation
of great wealth influenced the nature of philan-
thropic ideas and activity in a beneficial way,
Bremner illustrates the role philanthropy has played
in the areas of humanitarian reform, charity, social
service, education, research, religion, and war relief.
In addition, he discusses the overall contribution of
philanthropy to the improvement of humanity.
Merle E. Curd's American Philanthropy Abroad: A
History (New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers University
Press [1963] 651 p.) is a comprehensive account
of the motivations, programs, and accomplishments
of American philanthropic efforts in foreign
countries.
2037. Bruno, Frank J. Trends in social work,
1874—1956; a history based on the Proceed-
ings of the National Conference of Social Work.
With chapters by Louis Towley. [2d ed.] New
York, Columbia University Press, 1957. xviii, 462 p.
57-9699 HV9i.B75 1957
Bibliographical footnotes.
An updated edition of no. 4618 in the 1960 Guide.
Two complementary books are The Heritage of
American Social Wort^; Readings in Its Philosophi-
cal and Institutional Development (New York, Co-
lumbia University Press, 1961. 452 p.), edited by
Ralph E. Pumphrey and Muriel W. Pumphrey, and
Nathan E. Cohen's Social Worf^ in the American
Tradition (New York, Dryden Press [1958] 404
p.), an analysis and evaluation of the purposes and
goals of social work.
2038. Cohen, Nathan E., ed. Social work and
social problems. New York, National Asso-
ciation of Social Workers [1964] xiv, 391 p.
64-20628 HVi5.C58
Bibliographical footnotes.
A study of the contribution of social work to the
solution of social problems. The topics covered
include poverty, marital incompatibility, child ne-
glect, deterioration of the inner city, unmarried
mothers, broken families, and racial discrimination.
A model for problem analysis is presented which
focuses attention on the relationship between actual
and ideal objectives in social work. Within this
frame of reference, a basis for action is defined.
Emphasis is placed on the need for preventive tech-
niques through which problems are anticipated and
kept from developing.
2039. Cuber, John F., William F. Kenkel, and
Robert A. Harper. Problems of American
society; values in conflict. 4th ed. New York,
Holt, Rinehart & Winston [1964] 422 p.
64-12925 HN57.C8 1964
Suggested readings at the ends of chapters.
A revised edition of no. 4619 in the 1960 Guide.
Problems of industrial and urban society in the
United States are discussed in Social Problems:
Dissensus and Deviation in an Industrial Society
(New York, Oxford University Press, 1964. 594
p.), by Russell R. Dynes and others, and Social
Problems in Our Time; a Sociological Analysis
(Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall, 1960. 600
p. Prentice-Hall sociology series), by Samuel K.
Weinberg.
2040. Cutlip, Scott M. Fund raising in the United
States; its role in America's philanthropy.
Foreword by Merle Curti. New Brunswick, N.J.,
Rutgers University Press [1965] xiv, 553 p.
64-8261 HV4i.C87
Bibliography: p. 541—546.
Focusing on 20th-century developments, the au-
thor examines the operations, techniques, and indi-
viduals involved in fundraising campaigns. The
small-scale philanthropic activities before 1900 are
discussed briefly. The book concentrates on the
evolution of fundraising into a unique business op-
eration directed by professional fundraisers and
public relations experts. Early YMCA campaigns,
Red Cross drives during World War I, community
chest activities, relief funding in the Depression,
national health campaigns, World War II appeals,
and contemporary fundraising methods are covered
in detail. Cutlip notes that America philanthropy,
now a billion-dollar enterprise, has adapted the
business methods of the modern corporation to the
task of charitable activities.
2041. Fink, Arthur E., Everett E. Wilson, and
Merrill B. Conover. The field of social
work. 4th ed. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Win-
ston [1963] 560 p. 63-11337 HV40.F5 1963
SOCIETY / 271
Includes bibliography.
An updated edition of no. 4621 in the 1960 Guide.
In The Professional Altruist; the Emergence of
Social Worf( as a Career, 1880-1930 (Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1965. 291 p. A Publi-
cation of the Center for the Study of the History of
Liberty in America, Harvard University), Roy
Lubove traces the development of social work from
a voluntary and personal service to an efficient and
bureaucratic profession.
L. Dependency; Social Security
2042. Allan, W. Scott. Rehabilitation: a commun-
ity challenge. New York, Wiley [1958]
347 p. illus. 58-7894 HV30H.A65
Bibliography: p. 226—240.
Rehabilitation of the physically handicapped en-
compasses a broad range of services, programs, per-
sonnel, and facilities. The need to rehabilitate the
greatest number of disabled persons requires coordi-
nated action among therapists, physicians, govern-
ment, and health agencies, according to Allan. To
be effective, "rehabilitation must be broad in scope,
practical in purpose and integrated in practice."
Emphasis is placed upon the importance of
community-level planning. Hearing and Deafness,
rev. ed. (New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston
[1960] 573 p.), edited by Hallowell Davis and
Sol Richard Silverman, is a comprehensive treat-
ment of the field of audiology and the problems of
deafness. In Hope Deferred; Public Welfare and
the Blind (Berkeley, University of California Press,
1959. 272 p.), Jacobus Ten Broek and Floyd W.
Matson examine major legislation to aid the blind.
2043. De Grazia, Alfred, and Ted Gurr. Ameri-
can welfare. [New York] New York Uni-
versity Press, 1961. xv, 470 p. illus.
60—14432 HV9I.D45
Bibliography: p. 451—454.
A general overview of the American welfare
system. The roles of religious groups, fraternal and
service organizations, business, labor unions, and
statewide and nationwide services are explained, as
well as the functions of local, State, and National
Governments and their relation to welfare practices.
A chapter on American welfare programs abroad is
included. In The Wasted Americans; Cost of Our
Welfare Dilemma (New York, Harper & Row
['1964] 227 p.), Edgar May describes the frustrat-
ing conditions facing welfare caseworkers and recipi-
ents alike and the problems created and perpetuated
by the system. A text combining the disciplines of
sociology and social work is Industrial Society and
Social Welfare; the Impact of Industrialization on
the Supply and Organization of Social Welfare
Services in the United States (New York, Russell
Sage Foundation, 1958. 401 p.), by Harold L.
Wilensky and Charles N. Lebeaux.
2044. Harrington, Michael. The other America;
poverty in the United States. New York,
Macmillian, 1962. 191 p. 62—8555 HV9I.H3
The author notes that national abundance often
conceals the extent and nature of poverty in the
United States. In contrast to the standards and
goals of an affluent society, the unskilled, the rural
poor, the migratory farm laborer, the aged, and
minority groups subsist in a subculture of impov-
erishment. Harrington outlines the general socio-
logical and cultural status of the millions of poor
Americans, who lack adequate food, shelter, educa-
tion, and medical care, and stresses the need for a
comprehensive program by the Federal Government
to alleviate the problems of the poor. From the
Depths; the Discovery of Poverty in the United
States (New York, New York University Press
[1956] 364 p.), by Robert H. Bremner, traces the
changing awareness of poverty as a social problem
from the mid-i9th century to the 1920*5. Poverty
in America; a Bool^ of Readings (Ann Arbor, Uni-
versity of Michigan Press [1965] 532 p.), edited
by Louis A. Ferman, Joyce L. Kornbluh, and Alan
Haber, is a selection of articles describing and ana-
lyzing the poverty problem. Poverty in America
(San Francisco, Chandler Pub. Co. [1965] 465 p.
Chandler publications in political science) is the
proceedings of the Conference on Poverty in Amer-
ica, held at the University of California at Berkeley
in 1965. These papers, edited by Margaret S.
272 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Gordon, discuss the effectiveness of current and
proposed programs and policies.
2045. Myers, Robert J. Social insurance and allied
Government programs. Homewood, 111., R.
D. Irwin, 1965. 258 p. (The Irwin series in risk
and insurance) 64—24696 HD7I25-M9
Bibliography: p. 247—254.
The book charts the growth of social insurance
and security programs since the Depression of the
1930*5 and their effect on the social, economic, and
political history of the United States. Greater em-
phasis is placed on the development of social insur-
ance than on public assistance programs. Basic
principles and provisions for administration, cover-
age, benefits, and financing are explained. In addi-
tion, the author includes a summary of social
security programs of various foreign countries. An
extensive analysis of social security problems and
policy questions is presented by Eveline M. R. Burns
in Social Security and Public Policy (New York,
McGraw-Hill, 1956. 291 p. Economics handbook
series). Edwin E. Witte's Social Security Perspec-
tives (Madison, University of Wisconsin Press, 1962.
419 p.), edited by Robert J. Lampman, traces the
evolution of Witte's thinking on social security
2046. Vedder, Clyde B., comp. Gerontology; a
book of readings. Springfield, 111., C. C.
Thomas [1963] 430 p. 62—21330 HQio6i.V4
Bibliography: p. 417—422.
A collection of reprinted articles on the sociology
of aging, with particular reference to demographic,
economic, medical, and sociocultural aspects. The
growing importance of gerontology in the social
sciences is noted and recommendations are made for
training and curricula in this field. Comprehensive
treatments of the subject are presented in the Hand-
boo\ of Aging and the Individual; Psychological
and Biological Aspects ([Chicago] University of
Chicago Press [1960] 939 p.), edited by James E.
Birren, and Handboo\ of Social Gerontology; So-
cietal Aspects of Aging ( [Chicago] University of
Chicago Press [1960] 770 p.), edited by Clark
Tibbits.
M. Delinquency and Correction
2047. Barnes, Harry E., and Negley K. Teeters.
New horizons in criminology. 3d ed. En-
glewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall, 1959. 654 p.
illus. (Prentice-Hall sociology series)
59-5873 HV6o25.B3 1959
Bibliographical footnotes.
An updated edition of no. 4639 in the 1960 Guide.
A brief study of crime and its sociological complexi-
ties is Gresham M. Sykes' Crime and Society (New
York, Random House [1956] 125 p. Random
House studies in sociology, 14). Organized Crime
in America; a Boof( of Readings (Ann Arbor,
University of Michigan Press [1962] 421 p.),
edited by Gus Tyler, is a general treatment of the
subject. Readings in Criminology and Penology
(New York, Columbia University Press, 1964. 698
p.), edited by David Dressier, includes representa-
tive selections by writers in disciplines other than
sociology.
2048. Chein, Isidor, and others. The road to H:
narcotics, delinquency, and social policy.
New York, Basic Books [1964] 482 p. illus.
63-17342 HV5822.H4C47
bibliographical footnotes.
A study of juvenile drug users in New York City,
based on research conducted from 1949 through
1954. The authors describe the social environment
and psychology of the addicts and conclude that
changes must be made in public policy dealing with
them. Although drugs users were found to be
"clearly related to the delinquent subculture," their
use of drugs did not lead to an overall increase in
the number of crimes but rather to a reduction in
crimes of physical violence and an increase in crimes
for money. At the time of this survey, most drug
users lived in high delinquency areas, were from
poor and disrupted families, and were members of
ethnic minority groups. Drugs provided a means of
escape from misery. The authors recommend that
drugs be legalized and their prescription by physi-
cians permitted.
2049. Cloward, Richard A., and Lloyd E. Ohlin.
Delinquency and opportunity; a theory of
delinquent gangs. Glencoe, 111., Free Press [1960]
220 p. 60-10892 HV9o69.C52
Bibliographical footnotes.
From a study of juvenile gangs in large cities, the
authors have developed an environmental theory of
criminology based on the principle of opportunity.
They argue that youths become delinquent because
of a lack of opportunities to succeed in normal
society and that the form of delinquency is likewise
determined by environmental opportunities. A
young delinquent gravitates to a particular type of
delinquent subculture or gang, and the norms of
conduct and patterns of delinquency of the gang
determine his subsequent adult behavior. This
theory is further explored in Irving Spergel's
Ract^etville , Slumtown, Haulburg; an Exploratory
Study of Delinquent Subcultures (Chicago, Univer-
sity of Chicago Press [1964] 211 p.).
2050. Dressier, David. Practice and theory of pro-
bation and parole. New York, Columbia
University Press, 1959. 252 p.
59—11177 HV9278.D72
Bibliographical footnotes.
This textbook is more systematic than the author's
earlier Probation and Parole (no. 4643 in the 1960
Guide} and includes an account of the origins of
probation and parole and a discussion of current
practice. The author concludes that the lack of
scientific studies in this area has made it difficult to
evaluate the effectiveness of probation and parole in
the treatment of criminals and that a more scientific
attitude must be taken toward crime and its treat-
ment.
2051. Glueck, Sheldon, and Eleanor T. Glueck.
Physique and delinquency. New York,
Harper [1956] xviii, 339 p. ill us.
56—6432 HV9o69-G54
Bibliographical footnotes.
One of a series of monographs in which the
authors explore various causes of delinquency. In
this study, based on research with 500 delinquents
and an equal number of nondelinquents, evidence is
presented that body type is a factor in delinquency.
The relationship between physique and other char-
acteristics such as personality and intelligence is also
discussed. In Family Environment and Delinquency
(Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1962] 328 p.), the
Gluecks analyze the effects of sociocultural influ-
ences on the basis of evidence from the same study.
Both works are elaborations on findings originally
described in the authors' Unraveling Juvenile De-
linquency (no. 4650 in the 1960 Guide).
2052. Shulman, Harry M. Juvenile delinquency
in American society. New York, Harper
[1961] 802 p. illus. (Harper's social science
series) 61-8555 HV9I04.S47
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
A comprehensive textbook. The author views
juvenile delinquency as a product of urban life and
considers that adults contribute to the problem by
SOCIETY / 273
forfeiting to the police and the courts many of their
parental and civic responsibilities. Topics covered
include personality, intelligence, the family, peer
groups, the legal machinery for dealing with delin-
quency, methods of group treatment, social control,
and the causes of delinquency. Comparisons be-
tween American and European delinquency are also
presented. Current theories of juvenile delinquency
are challenged in David Matza's Delinquency and
Drift (New York, Wiley [1964] 199 p.). An
extensive selection of readings on the subject is
included in The Problem of Delinquency (Boston,
Houghton Mifflin [1959] 1183 p.), edited by
Sheldon Glueck.
2053. Smith, Bruce. Police systems in the United
States. Rev. by Bruce Smith, Jr. 2d rev. ed.
New York, Harper [1960] 338 p. illus.
60-11498 HV8i38.S58 1960
Bibliographical footnotes.
An updated edition of no. 4655 in the 1960 Guide.
In Racial Factors and Urban Law Enforcement
(Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press
[1957] 209 p.), William M. Kephart analyzes inte-
gration in the Philadelphia Police Department and
interrelationships between white and Negro police-
men and offenders. The FBI Story; a Report to the
People (New York, Random House [1956] 368 p.),
by Don Whitehead, is a history of the Federal
Bureau of Investigation.
2054. Sykes, Gresham M. The society of captives;
a study of a maximum security prison.
Princeton, N.J., Princeton University Press, 1958.
144 p. 58-10054 HV9475.N52T7
Bibliographical footnotes.
The prison is presented as a small-scale totalitarian
system which can provide answers to social questions
larger than those usually posed by penology. The
major elements in this social system are two: the
adjustments made by the inmates to their various
deprivations, and the constant tension and friction
existing between the inmates and the prison staff.
The author concludes that the public should be real-
istic about prisons and prison reform. By "expect-
ing less and demanding less we may achieve more,"
he advises, "for a chronically disillusioned public is
apt to drift into indifference." Don C. Gibbons'
Changing the Lawbreaker; the Treatment of De-
linquents and Criminals (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,
Prentice-Hall [1965] 306 p.) is a brief theoretical
examination of the causes and cures of criminal
behavior. Penology: A Realistic Approach (Spring-
field, 111., C. C. Thomas [1964] 345 p.) is a book
of readings compiled and edited by Clyde B. Vedder
and Barbara A. Kay.
274 / A GUIDE To ™E UNITED STATES
2055. Wilson, Orlando W. Police administration.
ad ed. New York, McGraw-Hill [1963]
528 p. illus. (McGraw-Hill series in political sci-
ence) 63—9827 HV7935.W48 1963
A revised edition of no. 4660 in the 1960 Guide.
2056. Wolfgang, Marvin E. Patterns in criminal
homicide. Philadelphia, University of Pen-
sylvania [1958] xiv, 413 p. illus.
Bibliography: p. 341—360.
An analysis of 588 cases of criminal homicide,
based on the records of the Philadelphia Police De-
partment during the period 1948-52. The author
briefly explains the distinctions of homicidal crimes
according to Pennsylvania statutes. Specific data on
the perpetrators as well as the victims of homicide
are analyzed according to race, sex, age, weapons,
and motives. Interpersonal relationships between
victim and offender play a significant part in ex-
plaining the reasons for the crime. The author also
provides a detailed account of what happens to the
offender after the homicide. Included in the text
are statistical tabulations and research material rele-
vant to each phase of the study.
XVI
Communications
A. The Post Office; Express Companies
B. Telegraph, Cable, Telephone
C. Radio, Television: Broadcasting
D. Radio, Television: The Audience
E. Government Regulation
F. Mass Communications
2057-2060
2061—2063
2064—2076
2077—2079
2080—2081
2082—2086
RANGES occur swif tly in the communications field, and their effects go deep into the struc-
ture of American life. This chapter presents books dealing with current changes as well
as historical studies in such subject areas as the postal system, the express companies, and the
telegraph, telephone, and cable services. In addition, there are works on air and transatlantic
mail and Radio Free Europe.
The majority of books on communications concern some aspect of television : advertising,
the reaction to the real or supposed threat of govern-
widening influence of TV has added to the impulse
toward the development of an essentially new disci-
pline, the study of mass communications in general;
a new section on this subject, Section F, has been
mental restraints, the effect of TV on children, the
use of closed circuit TV in the classroom, and the
wide and growing variety of programs on noncom-
mercial broadcasting with educational, industrial,
scientific, and military applications. The ever-
added.
A. The Post Office; Express Companies
2057.
Baratz, Morton S. The economics of the
postal service. Washington, Public Affairs
Press [1962] 104 p. 62—21124 HE637I.B3
As of 1961, the U.S. Post Office comprised some
35,000 stations staffed by 580,000 employees. A
total of 65 billion pieces of mail were handled per
year. Annual expenditures were $4 billion, but
revenues were only slightly over $3 billion. This
study seeks to evaluate the economic performance of
this vast public enterprise. The author outlines the
historical evolution of fiscal policies against a back-
ground of constantly increasing demand for postal
service and sets forth the rate structure of the four
classes of mail, the concepts underlying rate differ-
entials, and the relation of costs to income within
each class. Baratz concludes that postal service must
be priced to provide "an impersonal and effective
rationing mechanism," that the amount of subsidy
which the Post Office should receive cannot be
objectively determined and may be left to the con-
gressional majority, and that, although no overall
rating system is applicable, some of the existing rate
differentials are discriminatory and inequitable.
2058. Doherty, William C. Mailman, U.S.A.
New York, D. McKay Co. [1960] 308 p.
60-14594 HD65I5.P7D6
The longtime president of the National Associa-
tion of Letter Carriers critically reviews Post Office
Department policies, most of which, he asserts, have
consistently denied the mailman a living wage, ade-
quate fringe benefits, and decent working condi-
275
276 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
tions, as well as having unnecessarily curtailed mail
service. Doherty outlines the history of the associa-
tion from its founding in 1889 and traces its cam-
paigns for pay raises, shorter working hours, job
security, and insurance benefits. The development
of postal administration is discussed, and portraits
are presented of the men who have held the position
of Postmaster General and other high offices in the
Department. The final chapter makes general
recommendations for reforms and improvements
throughout the postal system. In The Silent Investi-
gators (New York, Button, 1959. 319 p.), John N.
Makris describes a series of cases illustrating the two
primary functions of the postal inspector: "(i)
Service investigations to insure the best possible ser-
vice to the American public, and (2) criminal in-
vestigations leading to the apprehension of those
who violate postal laws."
2059. Fuller, Wayne E. RFD, the changing face
of rural America. Bloomington, Indiana
University Press [1964] xii, 361 p. illus.
64—19374 HE6455.F8
"A note on sources": p. 315—316. Bibliographical
references included in "Notes" (p. 317—350).
A history of how Rural Free Delivery promoted
and reflected a transition from the old to the new
in rural America. The RFD system, created despite
the opposition of merchants, postmasters in small
towns, and budget balancers in Washington, led to
an extension of the circulation of daily newspapers,
a phenomenal growth of mail-order houses, and the
construction of improved roads. The early rural
mailman not only delivered mail but also carried
news from farm to farm and ran errands for his
patrons. Written in a light vein but based on sound
research, the book gives an authentic picture of the
effects of RFD on U.S. society.
2060. Summerfield, Arthur E. U.S. mail: The
story of the United States postal service, by
Arthur E. Summerfield as told to Charles Hurd. j
New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston [1960]
256 p. illus. 60-10747 HE637I.S8
The Postmaster General in the Eisenhower ad-
ministration surveys the development of a postal
system in this country from the beginning of inter-
colonial mail service in 1672. Topics covered in-
clude philatelic history, the pony express, the incep-
tion of airmail service, automated post offices, fac-
simile letter-transmission, the work of postal inspec-
tors, and the problems of mail-order pornography
and mail fraud. The business and fiscal operations of
the Post Office Department are reviewed and sugges-
tions for reforms and modernization are presented.
In The Story of Pitney-Bowes (New York, Harper
[1961] 262 p.), William Cahn chronicles the orig-
in and growth of the Pitney-Bowes Company of
Stamford, Conn., best known for its development
and dissemination of the postage meter. Early de-
velopments in reciprocal postal service between
Great Britain and North America are recorded in
The Transatlantic Mail ( [Southampton] A. Coles:
New York, J. De Graff [1956] 191 p.), in which
author Frank Staff traces its progress from the
17th-century practice of depositing mail at the cof-
fee houses or taverns frequented by seamen, through
the early iSth-century introduction of packet boats
chartered by the British government to carry mail,
and as far as the mid- 19th-century advent of steam-
ships, which rapidly replaced the slower and less
regular sailing packets.
B. Telegraph, Cable, Telephone
2061. Clarke, Arthur C. Voice across the sea.
New York, Harper [1958] 208 p.
58-8868 TK56o5.C55
A general historical account of the original trans-
atlantic cable and of the laying of the first sub-
marine telephone cable between Europe and the
United States in 1955—56.
2062. Costain, Thomas B. The chord of steel; the
story of the invention of the telephone. Gar-
den City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1960. 238 p.
60-10085
A biographical study covering six years in the life
of Alexander Graham Bell, beginning with his
family's move from London to Brantford, Ontario,
in 1870. The author outlines the series of experi-
ments leading up to the inventions of the multiple
telegraph and telephone but places primary empha-
sis on Bell's personality. The reader is afforded
glimpses of the inventor's boyhood in England, his
early and continuing interest in the science of
speech, his devotion to teaching the deaf to speak,
his family life, and the great verve with which he
pursued his inventions.
2063. Harder, Warren J. Daniel Drawbaugh; the
Edison of the Cumberland Valley. Philadel-
phia, University of Pennsylvania Press [1960]
227 p. 59-9201 TK6oi8.D8H3 19^°
A portrayal of the life and work of a prolific
inventor from Pennsylvania who narrowly missed
fame by delaying his application for a patent.
Drawbaugh patented a telephone apparatus in 1880
COMMUNICATIONS / 277
and sold his rights to several men who formed the
People's Telephone Company in New York City.
The Bell Telephone Company promptly filed suit
for violation of its patent rights. Much of the book
is devoted to the ensuing eight years of litigation,
which concluded with a Supreme Court decision
dismissing Drawbaugh's claim of an original in-
vention. Several court decisions are quoted in full.
C. Radio, Television: Broadcasting
2064. Blum, Daniel C. Pictorial history of televi-
sion. Philadelphia, Chilton Co., Book Divi-
sion [1959] 288 p. 59—9640 PNi992-5.B55
Hundreds of photographs cover the major televi-
sion programs from 1939, when NBC presented
Gertrude Lawrence in scenes from the Broadway
play Susan and God, through 1959. The arrange-
ment is chronological within 22 subject categories.
A brief text gives information on the shows and
their principal performers. A Pictorial History of
Radio (New York, Citadel Press [1960] 176 p.),
by Irving Settel includes photographs illustrating
radio's technological development, as well as scenes
from a variety of programs and portraits of the
stars who made them famous. The narrative text
incorporates excerpts from actual scripts. A year-
by-year chronicle of network programing is given
in A Thirty-Year History of Programs Carried on
National Radio Networks in the United States,
7926—7956 ( [Columbus, Ohio State University]
1958. 228 p.), by Harrison B. Summers. Annual
tables list all broadcasts of 10 minutes or longer.
Information is included on the sponsor, number of
winter seasons on the air, carrying network, day
and hour of broadcast or weekly frequency, length
and popularity rating.
2065. Chester, Giraud, Garnet R. Garrison, and
Edgar E. Willis. Television and radio. 3d
ed. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts [1963]
659 p. 63—11954 TK6550.C43 1963
Bibliography: p. 631—642.
An updated edition of no. 4686 in the 1960 Guide.
2066. The Eighth art; twenty-three views of tele-
vision today. Contributors: Eugene Burdick
[and others] Introd. by Robert Lewis Shayon.
New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston [1962]
269 p. 62-18758 PNi992.5.E43
In these essays, television's purveyors and audi-
ences are the targets of an almost unbroken stream
of adverse comment by critics within the television
industry and without. The articles were originally
commissioned by the CBS Television Network for
inclusion in a projected quarterly magazine. Tele-
vision is discussed as a medium for the other seven
arts, for news, and for politics. Marya Mannes
contends that the quality of television has suffered
because intellectuals have failed to support its best
efforts. Leo Rosten, on the other hand, argues that
the mass media are meant for the masses, not for
the intellectuals. Other contributors include Walter
Cronkite, Moses Hadas, Tyrone Guthrie, George
Balanchine, Gilbert Seldes, Ashley Montagu, Rich-
ard H. Rovere, and Charles A. Siepmann.
2067. Head, Sydney W. Broadcasting in America;
a survey of television and radio. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin [1956] 502 p.
56-13974 HE8698.H4
The director of broadcasting and film services at
the University of Miami argues that our private-
enterprise, competitive, advertising-supported, and
syndicated broadcasting system is basically sound
and stable. Proceeding on this assumption, he
aims in this encyclopedic analysis of the industry
"to provide a basis for appraising American broad-
casting by standards relevant to service as it exists
here and now." The author believes that the medi-
um has been judged by irrelevant criteria developed
for other modes of mass communication. Criti-
cisms and suggestions for improvement are here
formulated within the framework of discussions
concerning such aspects as technological and organ-
izational growth, interrelationships of the various
mass media, pros and cons of government regula-
tion, the uses, kinds, and influence of advertising,
financial organization, social forces operating on
the medium, and the effects of the broadcasting
process on society. An overview of the field de-
signed for both radio and television station em-
ployees is The Modern Broadcaster: The Station
Boot( (New York, Harper [1961] 351 p.), by
Sherman P. Lawton, who concentrates on describing
278 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
overall station organization and the techniques em-
ployed in various jobs at the station level.
2068. Holt, Robert T. Radio Free Europe. Min-
neapolis, University of Minnesota Press
[1958] xii, 249 p. 58-7621 DRi.R253
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 232-242).
Established in 1949 as a division of the Free
Europe Committee, Radio Free Europe was intend-
ed to break the monopoly of the airwaves held by
the Communist governments of central and eastern
Europe. By 1957 it was operating 29 transmitters
and broadcasting nearly 3,000 hours per week to
Poland, Czechoslovakia, Hungary, Romania, and
Bulgaria. The author discusses RFE's organiza-
tional structure, program content, transmission prob-
lems, and large-scale propaganda campaigns from
1953 to 1957 and evaluates its position as an "offi-
cially nonofficial" instrument of American foreign
policy. Investigations of its effectiveness by the
Audience Analysis Section "demonstrate the domi-
nant position that RFE holds among the 'big three'
western broadcasters" (the other two being the Brit-
ish Broadcasting Corporation and the Voice of
America).
2069. Lessing, Lawrence P. Man of high fidelity:
Edwin Howard Armstrong, a biography.
Philadelphia, Lippincott [1956] 320 p.
56-11677 TK6545.A7L4
The author, who considers Armstrong (1890—
1954) to be the "single most important inventor of
modern radio," traces his life from his childhood in
New York City through his years as professor of
electrical engineering at Columbia University. Arm-
strong's experiments, which resulted in such basic
innovations as the regenerative amplifier (1912) and
frequency modulation (1933) are described, to-
gether with the ensuing bitter and expensive litiga-
tions concerning his patents. Particular attention is
devoted to Lee De Forest's claim to prior invention
of the regenerative process and RCA's disregard for
Armstrong's patent rights in the use of FM. Les-
sing depicts his subject as a stubborn and courageous
individualist who, in general, was treated unjustly
by corporations, the Patent Office, the Federal courts,
and the Federal Communications Commission.
2070. Mehling, Harold. The great time-killer.
Cleveland, World Pub. Co. [1962] 352 p.
62-9044 PNi992.3.U5M4
An indictment of commercial television and the
practices engaged in by the "networks, by sponsors
and their Madison Avenue advertising agencies, and
by the hired hands in the Hollywood laugh-laugh
mills." Topics discussed include the quiz scandals,
sponsors' taboos, advertising agency influence, the
excesses of commercials, the rating systems, the
blacklisting of TV writers, Federal regulation, and
pay-TV. Although his study recognizes some of
television's successes and its ability to carry good
programs to a vast audience when it chooses, Meh-
ling concentrates on the abuses which he considers
have made TV a "vast wasteland." A more tem-
perate appraisal of the world of television is Stan
Opotowsky's TV, the Big Picture, new, rev. ed.
(New York, Collier Books [1962] 285 p. Collier
books, AS327X). Supplementing published sources
with information gathered in interviews with pro-
fessionals of all classes, the author explores many of
the same areas as Mehling but without pronouncing
judgment.
2071. Minow, Newton N. Equal time; the private
broadcaster and the public interest. New
York, Atheneum, 1964. xvi, 316 p.
64—22102
A collection of speeches made by the author when
he was Chairman of the Federal Communications
Commission during the Kennedy administration.
Emphasizing the responsibility of public service but
recognizing that television programs are dependent
in a large measure on public approval, Minow
states that "nothing in the history of man approaches
the potential of television for information and mis-
information, for enlightenment and obfuscation, for
sheer reach and sheer impact." He points out the
failures and successes of the system of mass com-
munication in the United States and notes its impor-
tance in the cultivation of cultural values. Harry J.
Skornia's Television and Society: An Inquest and
Agenda for Improvement (New York, McGraw-
Hill [1965] 268 p.) analyzes the weaknesses of
American television and offers some proposals and
recommendations for change.
2072. Roe, Yale. The television dilemma; search
for a solution. New York, Hastings House
[1962] 184 p. (Communication arts books)
62-19678 HE8698.R6
The author, a network sales executive, considers
television to be a commercial enterprise which is
justified in making profits from mass-audience shows
but which also has a moral responsibility to provide
public-service programs that will "better inform,
better educate, better strengthen the American peo-
ple with the knowledge, the perspective, the culture,
and the values vital for a society's perseverance."
Suggested means for achieving this balance include
a self-enforced code of goals and responsibilities, a
central foundation to solicit paid sponsorship for
educational TV, tax exemptions for business invest-
ments in public-service programs, a daily or weekly
period set aside during prime viewing time for
simultaneous broadcasts in the public interest on all
networks, and a Federal Communications Commis-
sion that tempers its regulation with stimulation.
2073. Seehafer, Eugene F., and Jack W. Laemmar.
Successful television and radio advertising.
New York, McGraw-Hill, 1959. 648 p. (McGraw-
Hill series in marketing and advertising)
59—9994 HF6i46.R3S42
The tremendous growth in the scope and influ-
ence of television as an advertising medium between
1951 and 1958 and the consequent losses to radio
prompted the authors to update their Successful
Radio and Television Advertising (no. 4696 in the
1960 Guide). The present study analyzes a wide
range of advertising forms, methods, techniques,
and principles, defines the new roles of television
and radio, and seeks to show how both media can
be employed by national and local advertisers. After
describing the structure of the broadcasting system
and typical programs in the United States, the
authors concentrate on research to predict or meas-
ure the effectiveness of advertising, advertising cam-
paigns, and station management. Arthur Bellaire's
TV Advertising; a Handboot^ of Modern Practice
(New York, Harper [1959] 292 p.) is compact
and practical.
2074. Stanford University. Institute for Communi-
cation Research. Educational television, the
next ten years; a report and summary of major
studies on the problems and potential of educational
television, conducted under the auspices of the U.S.
Office of Education. Stanford, 1962. xi, 375 p.
illus. 62—13346 LBio44-7.S8
Includes bibliographies.
Educational television met with much greater
success than had been anticipated, and 56 stations
were operating in the United States by 1962. In
1960 the U.S. Office of Education commissioned
several studies designed to ascertain the plans of
educational systems and communities for the use of
educational television and to analyze potential prob-
lems in such areas as the exchange of teaching
materials, finance, program quality, personnel, and
engineering. The research was conducted by the
National Association of Educational Broadcasters,
COMMUNICATIONS / 279
the University of Nebraska, and the Institute for
Communication Research at Stanford, and the re-
sults are reported in this volume, which was edited
by Wilbur Schramm. John Walker Powell's Chan-
nels of Learning; the Story of Educational Televi-
sion (Washington, Public Affairs Press [1962] 178
p.) recounts the benefactions of the Ford Founda-
tion's Fund for Adult Education, which funneled
more than $12 million into educational TV between
1951 and 1961.
2075. Stasheff, Edward, and Rudolf Bretz. The
television program: its direction and produc-
tion. [3d ed] New York, Hill & Wang [1962]
335 p. 62—10860 PNi992.5.S8 1962
Full-length treatments of television writing have
appeared since the second edition of this work was
published (no. 4697 in the 1960 Guide), and the
authors have therefore eliminated their chapters on
writing in order to include "more material, and
more advanced material on production theory and
practice" in this much revised edition. Television
in the Public Interest (New York, Hastings House
[1961] 192 p. Communication arts books), by A.
William Bluem, John F. Cox, and Gene McPherson,
provides basic information on the planning, prepa-
ration, and performance of public service programs.
The production of educational motion-picture films
is discussed in Lewis H. Herman's Educational
Films: Writing, Directing, and Producing for Class-
room, Television, and Industry (New York, Crown
Publications [1965] 338 p.). In Television Produc-
tion; the Creative Techniques and Language of TV
Today (New York, Hastings House [1957] 231 p.
Communication arts books), Harry W. McMahan
defines more than 2,000 words and phrases used in
the television industry.
2076. Zworykin, Vladimir K., E. G. Ramberg, and
L. E. Flory. Television in science and in-
dustry. New York, Wiley [1958] 300 p. illus.
58-6089 TK668o.Z9
A nontechnical introduction to the current and
potential uses of closed-circuit television. The
authors outline the historical development of closed-
circuit TV, describe the apparatus used, and discuss
application in such fields as business and industry,
banking, transportation, the biological and physical
sciences, prison supervision, and marine salvage.
D. Radio, Television: The Audience
2077. Bogart, Leo. The age of television; a study
of viewing habits and the impact of televi-
sion on American life. 2d ed., rev. and enl. New
York, F. Ungar Pub. Co. [1958] 367 p.
58-6788 HE8698.B6 1958
An updated edition of no. 4699 in the 1960 Guide.
280 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2078. Schramm, Wilbur L., Jack Lyle, and Edwin
B. Parker. Television in the lives of our
children. With a psychiatrist's comment on the
effects of television, by Lawrence Z. Freedman.
Stanford, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1961.
324 p. 61-6533 HQy84.T4S35
"Annotated bibliography": p. 297-317.
A study based on a three-year research project
involving 6,000 children, 2,000 parents, and 300
educators from 10 communities in the United States
and Canada representing every major television
environment, "including the condition of no televi-
sion." Among the topics considered were the
changes TV has made in the child's world, the
amount and kind of TV viewed at different ages,
and the chief elements in a child's makeup that
determine what uses he makes of television. The
results suggest that "for most children, under most
conditions, most television is probably neither partic-
ularly harmful nor particularly beneficial"; they use
it primarily to satisfy a need for fantasy which was
previously fulfilled by radio, comic books, movies,
and escape magazines. The authors indicate that
some of the consequences for which TV is blamed
might properly be assigned to careless parents and
conclude with some pointed questions addressed to
broadcasters, teachers, parents, and researchers. De-
scriptions of 425 programs designed for at-home
viewing by children four to 12 years old form
the substance of For the Young Viewer; Television
Programming for Children, at the Local Level
(New York, McGraw-Hill [1962] 181 p.), edited
by Ralph Garry, Frederick B. Rainsberry, and
Charles Winick. Criteria employed in selecting the
programs were "feasibility for a broadcaster" and
"desirability for children," and the descriptions are
based on replies to questionnaires addressed to all
TV stations in the United States.
2079. Steiner, Gary A. The people look at televi-
sion; a study of audience attitudes. New
York, Knopf, 1963. xvii, 422 p.
63—9124 PNi992. 5.883
At the beginning of 1961 approximately 90 per-
cent of American homes had TV sets, and these
sets were being viewed for an average of five to six
hours each day. To determine the viewer's reaction
to, feelings about, and uses of television, the author
obtained responses from 2,500 adults to a list of
more than 100 questions concerning their viewing
habits. In addition, 300 persons who had kept
detailed diaries of their complete viewing for a
week were interviewed. The results of the surveys
are evaluated and a detailed breakdown of the data
obtained is presented.
E. Government Regulation
2080. Emery, Walter B. Broadcasting and gov-
ernment: responsibilities and regulations.
[East Lansing] Michigan State University Press
[1961] xxiv, 482 p. 60-16416 KF28o5.E4
Bibliography: p. 469—473. Includes bibliograph-
ical references.
The Federal Communications Commission and
its control of broadcasting are discussed by a former
member of the FCC legal staff. The development
of a regulatory system for broadcasting is outlined
and the policies and rules which govern various
communications systems in the United States are
reviewed. Current problems of regulation are ana-
lyzed and suggestions for clarifying legislation are
made. Extensive supplemental material is append-
ed, including relevant parts of the Communications
Act of 1934 and a documented chronology of the
FCC from 1934 to 1960. Networt^ Broadcasting
(Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1958. 737 p.
85th Congress, ad session. House report no. 1297),
a report of the House Committee on Interstate and
Foreign Commerce, incorporates the findings and
recommendations of a study initiated by the FCC
in 1955. The study's purpose was to determine
whether current network structure and practices
foster or impede competition among broadcasting
systems and whether the advent of television and
the resultant changes in the radio industry call for
revision of the chain-broadcasting rules adopted in
1943. In Broadcast Regulation and Joint Owner-
ship of Media ( [New York] New York University
Press, 1960. 219 p.), Harvey J. Levin traces the
patterns and trends of multimedia ownership and
compares its effects with those of intermedia compe-
tition. Levin concludes that the FCC's policy of
giving preference to applicants for a broadcasting
license without holdings in nonbroadcasting media
over those with such holdings, other qualifications
being equal, should be strengthened. The competi-
tion induced by this "diversification policy" can,
according to the author, improve the fairness, bal-
ance, diversity of coverage, thoroughness, and ac-
curacy of the media output.
2081. Radio and television. [Durham, N.C.]
School of Law, Duke University, 1957—58.
2 v. (Law and contemporary problems, v. 22, no.
4-v. 23, no. i) 58-1782 HE8693.U6R3
The merits and defects of radio and television are
analyzed in relation to the structure of the com-
munications industry and its regulation by the Fed-
eral Government. Part i of this symposium seeks
to present a cross section of opinion regarding the
need for greater or lesser control and the desirability
of change in the present structure, organization, and
COMMUNICATIONS / 28 1
practices of the industry. The articles in part 2
cover a broader range of issues, including the role of
the advertising lawyer in radio and television, labor
relations, and authors' and performers' rights. Free-
dom and Responsibility in Broadcasting ( [Evanston,
111.] Northwestern University Press, 1961. 252 p.),
edited by John E. Coons, contains tthe proceedings
of a conference sponsored by the Northwestern
University School of Law in August 1961 "to con-
sider the state of the broadcasting industry and the
divergent proposals for its repair."
F. Mass Communications
2082. Emery, Edwin, Phillip H. Ault, and Warren
K. Agee. Introduction to mass communica-
tions. 2d ed. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1965. 434 p.
65-15617 P90.E4 1965
Bibliography: p. 399-422.
A journalist and two professors of journalism
review such media as newspapers, magazines, radio
and television, books, and motion pictures, with
particular reference to their origins and functions;
political, economic, and social importance; and tech-
nological growth. Detailed descriptions are included
of the organization and operation of each media
industry and of such related agencies as news
syndicates and advertising and public relations
firms. Career opportunities and qualifications are
outlined and the state of education for work in mass
communications is surveyed. The Mass Communi-
cators; Public Relations, Public Opinion, and Mass
Media (New York, Harper [1959] 470 p.), by
Charles S. Steinberg, defines public relations and its
component parts of publicity, promotion, and adver-
tising and describes the principles and techniques
employed in using each of the media to inform and
create desired climates of public opinion on behalf
of social, cultural, educational, and business organi-
zations. Organizations, Publications, and Direc-
tories in the Mass Media of Communications, 2d ed.
(Iowa City, Iowa [1962] 40 p.), compiled by
Wilbur Peterson, provides an extensive listing and
description of organizations and reference materials,
including registers of State press and broadcasting
associations.
2083. Klapper, Joseph T. The effects of mass
communication. Glencoe, 111., Free Press
[1960] 302 p. (Foundations of communications
research, v. 3) 60-14402 Pgi.K^
Bibliography: p. 258—274.
A survey of the findings of some 270 "published
reports of disciplined social research" and "the con-
sidered conjectures" of informed persons on the
social and psychological effects of mass communica-
tions. The author concludes that the mass media
are not direct causes of the various social ills for
which they are blamed but rather exert only a
contributory influence on behavior among such
forces as audience predisposition, group member-
ship and norms, and personality. Similar conclu-
sions are reached by Theodore B. Peterson, Jay W.
Jensen, and William L. Rivers in The Mass Media
and Modern Society (New York, Holt, Rinehart &
Winston [1965] 259 p.).
2084. Schramm, Wilbur L., ed. Mass communi-
cations; a book of readings. [2d ed.] Ur-
bana, University of Illinois Press, 1960. 695 p.
60-8343 P90.S37 1960
"Suggestions for further reading": p. 669—678.
An introductory survey covering such diverse
topics as the history, growth, structure, economics,
functions, government control, ownership, content,
audiences, effects, and responsibilities of the mass
media. The authors include Llewellyn White, Har-
old D. Lasswell, Daniel Katz, Elihu Katz, Margaret
Mead, Frank Luther Mott, Paul F. Lazarsfeld,
Walter Lippmann, Bernard Berelson, Gilbert Seldes,
Neil H. Borden, and Leo Bogart. Richard E.
Chapin's Mass Communications; a Statistical Analy-
sis (East Lansing, Michigan State University Press
[1957] 148 p.) brings together the available sta-
tistical data for each medium from Government
publications, trade journals, and accessible research
studies.
2085. Schramm, Wilbur L. Responsibility in mass
communication. New York, Harper [1957]
xxiii, 391 p. (Series on ethics and economic life)
57-10951 P90.S383
2b2 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Bibliography: p. 370-374. Bibliographical refer-
ences included in "Notes" (p. 375—384).
The author argues that increased centralization of
the ownership and control of mass communication
industries and the resulting reduction in the number
of independent outlets for voicing differences of
opinion impose new obligations on the communi-
cators for accurate, fair, truthful, and balanced
presentations. More than 100 case histories are
discussed in an attempt to define the boundary
between responsibility and irresponsibility. The
author concludes that responsibility for media con-
tent is shared by the media themselves, the public,
and government. The general public must be alert to
media performance and vocal in expressing its needs
and judgments, and, to avoid an undesirable in-
crease in government regulations, the media must
become patently responsible.
2086. Tamiment Institute. Culture for the mil-
lions? Mass media in modern society.
Edited by Norman Jacobs; with an introduction by
Paul Lazarsfeld. Princeton, N.J., Van Nostrand
[1961] xxv, 200 p. 61-8537 P9r-T3
Fifteen papers presented at a seminar sponsored
jointly by the Tamiment Institute and Daedalus,
the journal of the American Academy of Arts and
Sciences, in 1959. Diverse opinions are expressed
concerning the origins, nature, and functions of
mass society and its culture, the role which mass
media have played in shaping the standards, values,
and tastes of this society, and the relationship of art
and the artist to the social and cultural order. A
final section records the panel discussion which fol-
lowed the formal symposium. The authors are
Paul F. Lazarsfeld, Edward Shils, Leo Lowenthal,
Hannah Arendt, Ernest van den Haag, Oscar Hand-
lin, Leo Rosten, Frank Stanton, James J. Sweeney,
Randall Jarrell, Arthur Berger, James Baldwin,
Stanley E. Hyman, H. Stuart Hughes, and Arthur
M. Schlesinger, Jr.
XVII
Science and Technology
A. General Worths
B. Particular Sciences
C. Individual Scientists
D. Science and Government
E. Invention
F. Engineering
2087—2099
2100—2105
2106—2113
2114—2118
2119—2120
2121—2124
1
SECTION A indicates diat the scientific community, frequently accused of self-containment
in recent decades, is concerning itself with the society within which and for which it is
presumably working. Section B reflects continuing need for histories of individual sciences.
As Section C demonstrates, biographical studies of scientists tend to be more appealing
to authors than general historical analyses. Invention is seldom now a matter of the work
of one lone scientist, and the books on the subject must rely largely on earlier periods
for their subject matter. Some of the major issues
which arise and are reflected throughout the selec-
tions in this chapter are the following: What kinds
of scientific research should be performed? Who
hould determine national priorities? What is the
proper role between government and science? To
what uses should research be put? Should the
scientist assume responsibility for the results of his
research ? Are science and democracy compatible ?
A. General Works
087. American men of science; a biographical
directory, roth ed. Edited by Jaques Cat-
ell. Tempe, Ariz., Jaques Cattell Press, 1960—62.
v. 6—7326 Qi4i.A47
An updated edition of no. 4712 in the 1960 Guide.
Entries for the physical and biological sciences are
ombined under one alphabet in the first four
olumes. The fifth volume covers the social and
>ehavioral sciences. Approximately 120,000 biog-
aphies are featured, representing an increase of
bout one-third over the ninth edition.
088. Bates, Ralph S. Scientific societies in the
United States. 3d ed. Cambridge, Mass.,
.Press [1965] 326 p.
65-8325 Qn.AiB3 1965
Bibliography: p. [2451—293.
This revised edition of no. 4713 in the 1960 Guide
includes new chapters on the atomic age and the
space age, an updated and enlarged bibliography,
and a chronology of science in the United States.
Industrial Research Laboratories of the United
States, i2th ed. (Washington, Bowker Associates,
1965. 746 p.), edited by William W. Buchanan,
and Scientific and Technical Societies of the United
States and Canada, 7th ed. (Washington, National
Academy of Sciences — National Research Council,
1961. 413, 54 p. National Research Council. Pub-
lication 900) are revisions of no. 4720 and 4728,
respectively, in the 1960 Guide.
2089. Brady, Robert A. Organization, automa-
tion, and society; the scientific revolution in
industry. Berkeley, University of California Press,
283
284 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1961. xiv, 481 p. (Publications of the Institute of
Business and Economic Research, University of
California) 61—7535 HD3 1.6723
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. [4251-466).
An analysis of methodologies for applying ad-
vances in science and engineering to the productive
resources of the economy. In Who Needs People?
(Washington, R. B. Luce [1963] 114 p.), Robert
E. Cubbedge discusses the possibility that the ma-
chine will one day transcend man.
2090. Bulletin of the Atomic Scientists. The
atomic age; scientists in national and world
affairs. Articles from the Bulletin of the Atomic
Scientists, 1945—1962. Edited and with introduc-
tions by Morton Grodzins and Eugene Rabinowitch.
New York, Basic Books, 1963. xviii, 616 p.
63-21583 0842.678
A collection of 65 articles reflecting the scientist's
involvement in politics since World War II. The
Bulletin was founded in 1945 in an effort to awaken
the public to the problems created by atomic power.
The material in the present work is grouped into
four sections: "Failure," dealing with the unsuc-
cessful efforts to achieve international control over
nuclear weapons after the war; "Peril," reflecting
the consequent dangers and the efforts toward arms
control and disarmament; "Fear," describing the
effects of the problem at the national level; and
"Hope," giving examples of international coopera-
tion in science and technology and presenting some
bases for improving society through peaceful appli-
cations of nuclear power.
2091. Columbia University. Seminar on Technol-
ogy and Social Change. Technology and
social change. Edited for the Columbia University
Seminar on Technology and Social Change, by Eli
Ginzberg. New York, Columbia University Press,
1964. 158 p. illus. 64—17158 HCio6.5.C6244
Six representatives from science, industry, and
education inquire into the nature and causes of
technological change and the problems of social
adaptation that it precipitates. The impact of
Science on Technology (New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1965. 221 p.), edited by Aaron W.
Warner, Dean Morse, and Alfred S. Eichner, is a
record of the Columbia University Seminar on
Technology and Social Change during its second
year of existence.
2092. Elbers, Gerald W., and Paul Duncan, eds.
The scientific revolution: challenge and
promise. Published in cooperation with the Presi-
dent's Committee on Scientists and Engineers.
Washington, Public Affairs Press [1959] 280 p.
59-6977 Q
Papers presented at a conference at Yale Univer-
sity in 1958 with the purpose of clarifying the basic
issues of the scientific challenge presented by the
launching of the first Soviet sputniks. Among the
topics discussed are the necessity of an adequate
science program, the role of science in society, the
effects of public indifference, and the urgency of
raising educational standards.
2093. Fortune. Great American scientists; Ameri-
ca's rise to the forefront of world science, by
the editors of Fortune. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,
Prentice-Hall [1961] 144 p.
61—6215 Qi27-U6F6
First published in Fortune in 1960, these articles
trace recent developments in physics, chemistry,
astronomy, and biology by describing the major
achievements of 40 living scientists. Scientific con-
cepts and discoveries are discussed in terms readily
understandable to the general reader. The Scientific
Life (New York, Coward-McCann [1962] 308 p.),
by Theodore Berland, presents the major accom-
plishments of nine prominent American scientists,
with emphasis on the personal characteristics and
philosophies of the men and their habits of work.
In This High Man: The Life of Robert H. Goddard
(New York, Farrar, Straus [1963] 430 p.), Milton
Lehman discusses the career of a pioneer in
astronautics.
2094. Gilman, William. Science U.S.A. New
York, Viking Press [1965] 499 p.
A discussion of the economic, social, and politica
aspects of science and technology in the Unitec
States. Part i, "State of the Establishment," is
concerned with the power wielded by leaders in
various fields of science and the financing of scien
tific research. Part 2, "State of the Art," covers
significant research projects in specific fields. The
author attempts to maintain an objective approach
throughout his analysis of the problems confronting
scientists but also argues that the scientific profes
.sion must be conscious of the fact that it hai
definite responsibilities to the society as a whole.
2095. Jaffe, Bernard. Men of science in America
The story of American science told througl
the lives and achievements of twenty outstandinj
men from earliest colonial times to the present daj
Rev. ed. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1958. 71
p. illus. 58-59443 Qi27-U6j27 195
"Sources and reference material": p. 654—670.
This revised edition of no. 4721 in the 1960 Guid
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
/ 285
includes a new chapter on Enrico Fermi and an
updated discussion of the future of science in
America.
2096. National Advanced-Technology Manage-
ment Conference, Seattle, 7962. Science,
technology, and management; proceedings. Edited
by Fremont E. Kast and James E. Rosenzweig.
New York, McGraw-Hill [1963] 368 p. illus.
63-11852 TAi68.N3 1962
Bibliography: p. 350-358.
The record of a conference at which some 900
representatives of various fields of science and tech-
nology discussed the development and practical ap-
plication of modern systems management. The
participants included Edward Teller, Warren G.
Magnuson, and Wernher von Braun.
2097. Reingold, Nathan, ed. Science in nineteenth-
century America, a documentary history.
New York, Hill & Wang [1964] 339 p. illus.
(American century series) 64-24830 Qi27-U6R4
Documents and commentary on the careers of
several key figures in American science, together
with a discussion of the growth of formal scientific
institutions and other facets of scientific activity
during the century in which present American
attitudes toward science were largely molded. The
author notes that Americans lagged considerably
behind their European counterparts during the i9th
century and that the early tendency to emphasize
applied research at the expense of basic research is
a persisting weakness of American science today.
Dirk Jan Struik's Yankee Science in the Mating
(New York, Collier Books [1962] 544 p. Collier
books, 6850) is an updated edition of no. 4730 in
the 1960 Guide.
2098. Resources for the Future. Science and
resources: prospects and implications of tech-
nological advance; essays by George W. Beadle
[and others] Edited by Henry Jarrett. Baltimore,
Johns Hopkins Press [1959] 250 p. illus.
59-14232
Papers presented at the Resources for the Future
Forum held in Washington, D.C. in 1959. Empha-
sis is placed on the close link between technology
and natural resources and on the impetus given to
resource technology by modern science. Six areas
in which new developments are of great significance
to resources and their utilization are discussed:
genetics, weather modification, minerals exploration,
chemical technology, nuclear energy, and space ex-
ploration. Current research in each area is re-
viewed by a leading natural scientist, and authorities
in such other fields as business, economics, and
agriculture analyze the impact of science on re-
sources from their particular perspectives.
2099. Technology and social change [by] Francis
R. Allen [and others] New York, Apple-
ton-Century-Crofts [1957] 529 p. illus. (Apple-
ton-Century-Crofts sociology series)
57—5944 HM22I.T4
Bibliographies at end of each chapter.
PARTIAL CONTENTS. — The meaning of technology,
by William F. Ogburn. — Obstacles to innovation,
by Meyer F. Nimkoff. — The automobile, by Francis
R. Allen. — Radio and television, by Delbert C. Mil-
ler.—Atomic energy, by Hornell Hart.— Influence
of technology on industry, by Delbert C. Miller.—
Technology and the family, by Meyer F. Nimkoff.
—Influence of technology on war, by Francis R.
Allen. — Technology and the practice of medicine,
by Francis R. Allen. — The hypothesis of cultural
lag: a present-day view, by Hornell Hart. — Predict-
ing future trends, by Hornell Hart. — Human ad-
justment and the atom, by Hornell Hart.
A college textbook.
B. Particular Sciences
2100. Botanical Society of America. Fifty years
of botany; golden jubilee volume of the
Botanical Society of America, edited by William
ampbell Steere. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1958.
638 p. illus. 57-14685 QK8i.B697
Bibliographies at end of each chapter.
Specialists from various branches of botanical
science discuss major developments in the field from
-he early years of the 20th century through the
95o's.
2101. Caidin, Martin. The moon: new world for
men. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill [1963]
406 p. illus. 63-14583 TL799.M6C295
A discussion of Project Apollo and the advantages
of space exploration in general. The author notes
the benefits accruing to American industry and
labor from the program, the potential discoveries,
and, in particular, the military advantages associated
with the control of space. Edwin Diamond, in The
Rise and Fall of the Space Age (Garden City, N.Y.,
286 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Doubleday, 1964. 158 p.), laments the nationalistic,
uncooperative character of the space race.
2 1 02. Clark, Paul F. Pioneer microbiologists of
America. Madison, University of Wisconsin
Press, 1961. 369 p. illus. 60—11441 QR2I.C55
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
333-355). .
A historical study of American microbiology
from the late iyth century, when Cotton Mather
became interested in inoculation against smallpox,
up to World War I. Emphasis is placed on medical
science, and both cause (micro-organisms) and ef-
fect (disease) are discussed. The dependence of
early American microbiology on European research
is noted. Clark includes various narrative episodes,
among them a vivid description of the yellow-fever
epidemic that claimed the lives of a tenth of the
population of Philadelphia in 1793.
2103. Cohen, I. Bernard. Franklin and Newton;
an inquiry into speculative Newtonian ex-
perimental science and Franklin's work in electricity
as an example thereof. Philadelphia, American
Philosophical Society, 1956. xxvi, 657 p. illus.
(Memoirs of the American Philosophical Society,
v. 43) S^-'S2^ QC7-C65
Bibliography: p. 603—650.
A study designed "to illuminate the nature of
scientific thought by considering the interaction
between the creative scientist and his scientific
environment." The author relates the personalities
of Franklin and Newton to their scientific thought
and reputations, describes aspects of Newton's scien-
tific accomplishments, analyzes the most important
Newtonian works that were studied by experimental
scientists in the i8th century, traces the formation
of Franklin's concepts in electrical science against
the background of Newtonian science, and discusses
the reception, application, and eventual influence of
those concepts.
2104. Groves, Leslie R. Now it can be told; the
story of the Manhattan project. New York,
Harper [1962] xv, 464 p. illus.
61-10208
The story of the development of the atomic bomb,
as told by the general who was in command of the
Manhattan Project. In addition to describing the
work at Los Alamos. Groves discusses the elaborate
intelligence operation conducted to determine ex-
actly how far the Germans had progressed in their
nuclear program, the selection and training of the
air units that dropped the bombs at Hiroshima and
Nagasaki, and the creation of the Atomic Energy
Commission to place peacetime atomic research
under civilian control. Robert Jungk's Brighter
Than a Thousand Suns; a Personal History of the
Atomic Scientists (New York, Harcourt, Brace
[1958] 369 p.), translated by James Cleugh, deals
with the same subject but places greater emphasis
on the lives of the scientists involved.
2105. Strauss, Anselm L., and Lee Rainwater.
The professional scientist; a study of Ameri-
can chemists, by Anselm L. Strauss and Lee Rain-
water, with Marc J. Swartz and Barbara G. Berger
and with a contribution by W. Lloyd Warner.
Foreword by Albert L. Elder. Chicago, Aldine Pub.
Co. [1962] 282 p. illus. (Social research studies
in contemporary life) 62—13512 (3039.5.88
Bibliographical footnotes.
A study of the attitudes of chemists and others
toward the profession, the role of the American
Chemical Society, and related matters, based on a
survey of members of the society conducted by
Social Research, Inc. This introspective profession-
al analysis covers such matters as the various type
of specialties within the field of chemistry, th
potential careers available to college chemistry ma
jors, and the views of laymen concerning chemists.
The Rise of the American Chemistry Profession
1850-1900 (Gainesville, University of Florida Press
1964. 76 p. University of Florida monographs
Social sciences, no. 23), by Edward H. Beardsley
traces the development of American chemistry frorr
a state of almost complete dependence on Europe tc
one of near self-sufficiency.
C. Individual Scientists
2106. [Agassiz] Lurie, Edward. Louis Agassiz:
a life in science. [Chicago] University of
Chicago Press [1960] xiv, 449 p. illus.
59-11623 QH3I.A2L8
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 391—419). "Essay on sources": p. 421—430.
An interpretation, based on the examination o
extensive manuscript materials, of the personal lif
and scientific endeavors of Louis Agassiz (1807-
1873), who "taught men to appreciate specialize*
knowledge and impressed society with the need t
support science and advance the professional statu
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
/ 287
of its practitioners." Agassiz' effectiveness in at-
tracting public support and money for his projects,
especially for the Museum of Comparative Zoology
at Harvard, was without precedent. His refusal to
accept Darwin's theory of evolution, however, al-
though popular with laymen, alienated much of the
scientific community. Correspondence Between
Spencer Fullerton Baird and Louis Agassiz — Two
Pioneer American Naturalists (Washington, Smith-
sonian Institution, 1963. 237 p. Smithsonian In-
stitution. Publication 4515), collected and edited by
Elmer C. Herber, contains the 297 known letters
between these two 19th-century scientists.
2107. [Audubon] Ford, Alice E. John James
Audubon. Norman, University of Okla-
homa Press [1964] xiv, 488 p. illus.
64—20757 QL.3i.A9F6
Bibliography: p. 451—469.
Careful research into previously inaccessible pri-
vate collections of documents, records, and letters
forms the basis of this factual biography of John
James Audubon (1785—1851), an immigrant of
French descent. Audubon's attempts at business
were numerous and unsuccessful, as he devoted
himself increasingly to being a painter and natural-
ist. In 1826 he went to England to exhibit and
publish his drawings of birds. The Birds of
America, with engravings by Robert Havell, was
published in elephant folio size between 1827 and
1838. William Macgillivray's collaboration on Orni-
thological Biography (1831—39. 5 v.) provided a
scientific treatise to accompany the engravings.
Louis Agassiz Fuertes: His Life Briefly Told and
His Correspondence (New York, Oxford University
Press, 1956. 317 p.), edited by Mary F. Boynton, is
devoted to the 20th-century painter of birds whose
i works are regarded by many as second only to
Audubon's in quality.
zio8. [Gray] Dupree, A. Hunter. Asa Gray,
1810—1888. Cambridge, Belknap Press of
iarvard University Press, 1959. x, 505 p. illus.
59-12967 QK.3i.G8D8
"Note on the sources": p. [423]— 425. Biblio-
graphical references included in "Notes" (p. [427] —
176).
A biography detailing the scientific contributions
>f Asa Gray to the descriptive botany of North
America, to plant classification, and to the field of
lant geography. Gray was appointed Fisher Pro-
essor of Natural History at Harvard in 1842 and
ounded the department of botany at that institution.
iis articles and textbooks popularized the study of
otany and provided a history of botanical develop-
icnt, and his Manual of the Botany of the Northern
United States (1848) remains a standard reference
for identifying native plant life. Gray's analysis of
the similarity between Japanese and North American
flora reinforced the theory of evolution, and his
debates on Darwinism with his colleague Louis
Agassiz captured nationwide attention. Dupree
has also edited a new edition of Gray's Darwiniana:
Essays and Reviews Pertaining to Darwinism (Cam-
bridge, Belknap Press of Harvard University Press,
1963. 327 p. The John Harvard library). John
Clayton, Pioneer of American Botany (Chapel Hill,
University of North Carolina [1963] 236 p.), by
Edmund Berkeley and Dorothy S. Berkeley, is an
account of the life and contributions of this i8th-
century botanist.
2109. [Maury] Williams, Frances L. Matthew
Fontaine Maury, scientist of the sea. New
Brunswick, Rutgers University Press [1963] xx,
720 p. illus. 63—10564 GC3O.M4W5
Bibliography: p. 659—692. "Bibliography of the
published works of Matthew Fontaine Maury": p.
693-710.
A detailed account of the life of Matthew Fon-
taine Maury (1806—1873), the first superintendent
of the U.S. Naval Observatory and Hydrographical
Office. Under Maury's direction the Navy con-
ducted scientific studies of the currents, tides, depths,
salinity, and temperatures of the sea. His publica-
tions of wind and current charts provided data for
safer and shorter sailing routes, and The Physical
Geography of the Sea, which he published in 1855,
is considered to be the first textbook of modern
oceanography. At the outbreak of the Civil War
Maury resigned his commission to work on Con-
federate naval defenses, and he later served as a
Southern agent in England. Ultimately he became
known as a crusader for international scientific
cooperation.
21 10. [Rittenhouse] Hindle, Brooke. David Rit-
tenhouse. Princeton, N.J., Princeton Uni-
versity Press, 1964. 394 p. illus.
63-23407 QB36.R4H5
"Bibliographical note": p. 367—375.
A chronological study of the life of David Ritten-
house (1732—1796), who was not only a scientist but
also a craftsman, patriot, and politician. Ritten-
house worked as a clockmaker and instrument-
maker, constructed orreries for the College of
Philadelphia and the College of New Jersey, and
established a reputation as an astronomer on the
basis of his precise observation of the transit of
Venus in 1769. A member of the American Philo-
sophical Society, he was highly respected within the
scientific and intellectual communities of the i8th
288 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
century. Knight of the White Eagle, Sir Benjamin
Thompson, Count Rumford of Woburn, Mass.
(New York, T. Y. Crowell Co. [1965, Ci964] 301
p.), by W. J. Sparrow, is an account of the multi-
faceted career of a man who was scientist, inventor,
Revolutionary War turncoat, financial wizard, phi-
lanthropist-reformer, and Bavarian general.
2111. [Van Hise] Vance, Maurice M. Charles
Richard Van Hise; scientist progressive.
Madison State Historical Society of Wisconsin, 1960.
246 p. 60—63390 LD6i25 1903^3
Bibliography: p. 223—237.
Van Hise (1857—1918) pursued a long and dis-
tinguished career at the University of Wisconsin.
His activities spanned the fields of geology, conser-
vation, and education. Having participated in the
U.S. Geological Survey at Lake Superior while still
a graduate student at Wisconsin, he subsequently
received the first academic doctoral degree awarded
by the university and accepted a professorship in the
geology department. He was an authority on pre-
Cambrian rock formations and published A Trea-
tise on Metamorphism (1904), a work noted for its
comprehensiveness and its quantative approach to
the study of geological problems. He also attended
the White House Conservation Conference in 1908,
served on the National Conservation Commission,
and wrote The Conservation of Natural Resources
in the United States (1901). As president of the
University of Wisconsin, Van Hise was a vigorous
supporter of Gov. Robert La Follette's progressive
program that soon became known as the "Wiscon-
sin idea."
21 12. [Wiley] Anderson, Oscar E. The health of
a nation; Harvey W. Wiley and the fight for
pure food. [Chicago] Published for the University
of Cincinnati by the University of Chicago Press
[1958] 332 p. illus. 58-11945 TX5i8.W5A5
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 283-321).
During his 29 years as chief chemist of the U.S.
Department of Agriculture, Wiley (1844—1930)
played a vital role in the long fight for Federal
food and drug legislation which culminated in the
passage of the Pure Food and Drug Act of 1906.
Before accepting a position in Washington, Wiley
was professor of chemistry at Purdue University,
where he established a reputation as a sugar chem-
ist through his work on sorghum. Under his lead-
ership the Department of Agriculture instituted
new techniques for the analysis of foods and their
adulterants. He published a study entitled Foods
and Their Adulteration in 1907 and continued to
campaign for enforcement of the Pure Food and
Drug Act after his retirement from Government
service in 1912.
2113. [Wilson] Cantwell, Robert. Alexander Wil-
son: naturalist and pioneer, a biography.
With decorations by Robert Ball. Philadelphia,
Lippincott [1961] 318 p. illus.
61-12246 QL3I.W7C3
"Sources": p. 306—310.
Originally a weaver by trade, Wilson ( 1766—1813)
became one of America's great ornithologists. After
emigrating from Scotland he taught school in Penn-
sylvania, where he met the naturalist William
Bartram. Bartram encourged Wilson's interest in
studying and drawing birds, and as his skill in-
creased Wilson wrote to a friend that he was begin-
ning his work of drawing "all the finest birds of
America." While working as assistant editor of
Abraham Rees' Cyclopaedia he devoted much of
his time to his ornithological research, a project that
culminated in the publication of The American
Ornithology (1808—14. 9 v-)- Mar%_ Catesby: The
Colonial Audubon (Urbana, University of Illinois
Press, 1961. 137 p.) by George F. Frick and Ray-
mond P. Stearns, is a scholarly account of the i8th-
century pioneer American naturalist.
D. Science and Government
2114. Dupree, A. Hunter. Science in the Federal
Government, a history of policies and activi-
ties to 1940. Cambridge, Mass., Belknap Press of
Harvard University Press, 1957. 460 p. illus.
57-5484 Qi27.U6D78
Includes bibliographical references.
A history of the first century and a half of Ameri-
can science and the science policies of the Federal
Government. The author notes that Government
promotion of applied science began as early as 1789.
The Lewis and Clark expedition is cited as an
example of Government-sponsored scientific explora-
ttion. The scope of applied science was consider-
ably broadened during the Civil War, and after 1865
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
/ 289
a scientific establishment arose within the Govern-
ment. In Science and State Government (Chapel
Hill [Published for the Institute for Research in
Social Science by] the University of North Carolina
Press [1959] 161 p.), Frederic N. Cleaveland pre-
sents studies of the science policies of six representa-
tive States. Science and the Nation; Policy and
Politics (Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall
[1962] 181 p. A Spectrum book, 8—25), by
Joseph Stefan Dupre and Sanford A. Lakoff, stresses
recent developments in Government sponsorship
of science.
2115. Kaplan, Norman, ed. Science and society.
Chicago, Rand McNally [1965] 615 p.
(Rand McNally sociology series)
65-26582 Qi25.K3
Bibliography: p. 581—595.
A collection of essays by journalists, scientists,
economists, sociologists, and historians on the inter-
relations of science and society. A recurrent theme
of the contributors is that science as an activity is
not separate from society as a whole. The average
citizen exerts an influence upon scientific research,
directly or indirectly, and likewise benefits from the
results of much research. Kaplan has selected these
essays with a view to placing science in a historical
context. He emphasizes the fact that an under-
standing of scientific subject matter alone is insuffi-
cient in defining the role of science in society.
2116. Kidd, Charles V. American universities and
Federal research. Foreword by Paul E.
Klopsteg. Cambridge, Mass., Belknap Press, 1959.
272 p. illus. 59—12974 Qi27.U6K.5
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 251-267).
The author's central thesis is that "large-scale
federal financing of research has set in motion
irreversible forces that are affecting the nature of
universities, altering their capacity to teach, chang-
ing their financial status, modifying the character
of parts of the federal administrative structure,
establishing new political relations, and changing
the way research itself is organized." He predicts
that large amounts of Federal money will probably
continue to be made available for research in univer-
sities and considers that this situation should be
accepted without being "immobilized by staring
fixedly into the eye of the danger of federal control."
The extent and purposes of recent Federal support
for scientific research are outlined in The National
Science Foundation: A General Review of Its First
75 Years (Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1965.
286 p.), a report prepared by the Legislative Refer-
ence Service of the Library of Congress.
2117. Price, Don K. The scientific estate. Cam-
bridge, Mass., Belknap Press of Harvard
University Press, 1965. 323 p.
65-22047 Qi27-U6P73
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(P- 279-3°5)-
The dean of the Graduate School of Public Ad-
ministration at Harvard discusses the role of the
scientist - turned - administrator, notes that abridg-
ments of liberties have occurred when science is
supported by the Government, and advocates the
separation of politics from science.
2118. Wiesner, Jerome B. Where science and poli-
tics meet. New York, McGraw-Hill [1965]
302 p. 65-16157 Qi27.U6W5
A collection of speeches and papers by the science
adviser to Presidents Kennedy and Johnson. Topics
covered include the organization of scientific re-
search, educational needs, and arms-limitation meas-
ures. Science policy is also discussed in Scientists
and National Policy-Making (New York, Columbia
University Press, 1964. 307 p.), edited by Robert
Gilpin and Christopher Wright, and The Politics of
American Science, 7959 to the Present (Chicago,
Rand McNally [1965] 287 p. Rand McNally
history series), edited by James L. Penick and others.
E. Invention
2119. De Camp, Lyon Sprague. The heroic age of
American invention. Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1961. 290 p. illus.
61—7646 T2I2.D4
"Notes": p. [2641-271. Bibliography: p. [272]-
276.
Invention flourishes, according to the author, un-
der conditions which combine the requisite mate-
rials and technical skills, a society that is receptive
to a given innovation, and a patent law that offers
the inventor sufficient protection. De Camp con-
siders that such conditions prevailed in the United
States between 1836, when the Patent Office was
reorganized, and 1917, before the profession of in-
venting became highly organized and subject to
corporate control. The lives and work of such
290 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
men as Samuel F. B. Morse, Ottmar Mergenthaler,
and Alexander Graham Bell are discussed against
this background, and the role their inventions played
in the development of modern patent law is re-
viewed.
2 1 20. Universities-National Bureau Committee for
Economic Research. The rate and direction
of inventive activity: economic and social factors; a
conference of the Universities-National Bureau Com-
mittee for Economic Research and the Committee
on Economic Growth of the Social Science Research
Council. Princeton, Princeton University Press,
1962. 635 p. illus. (National Bureau of Economic
Research. Special conference series, 13)
62-7044 HD69-I75U5
Bibliographical footnotes.
PARTIAL CONTENTS. — Inventive activity: problems
of definition and measurement. — The economics of
research and development. — Major product and
process innovations, 1920 to 1950. — Intellect and
motive in scientific inventors: implications for sup-
ply.— The link between science and invention: the
case of the transistor. — Inventive activity: Govern-
ment controls and the legal environment.
F. Engineering
21 21. Ackerman, Edward A. and George O. G.
Lof. Technology in American water devel-
opment, by Edward A. Ackerman and George O.
G. Lof, with the assistance of Conrad Seipp. Balti-
more, Published for Resources for the Future by
Johns Hopkins Press [1959]
59-10066 TD345.A25
Bibliographical footnotes. "General references":
p. 667—672.
PARTIAL CONTENTS. — The geographical nature of
water occurrence. — The general nature of water use
in the United States. — Techniques and technical
events affecting water development and its adminis-
tration: introduction. — Technical improvements
promoting the scale economies: six cases. — Technical
activities in progress and related to water use: intro-
duction.— Expanding the physical range of recov-
ery: future use of sea water and saline inland waters.
— The organization of operational management.
2122. Calhoun, Daniel H. The American civil
engineer: origins and conflict. Cambridge,
Technology Press, Massachusetts Institute of Tech-
nology; distributed by Harvard University Press,
1960. xiv, 295 p. illus. 59—15742 TA.23.C3
"Bibliographical note": p. [219]— 237.
The history of American civil engineering is traced
to the early decades of the i9th century, when the
majority of engineers were employed in the con-
struction and maintenance of canals and railroads.
The author notes that, although most of the corpo-
rate and governmental sponsors of these projects
recognized the value of engineering knowledge, the
engineer had to adjust to the organization before he
could get his job done. The development of the
profession is outlined and various crises are de-
scribed, including the panic of 1837, which left
many engineers unemployed, and investigations of
bankrupt internal improvement projects by various
State legislatures which led to attacks on the pro-
fession itself. The role of Army engineers in rail-
road construction, surveying, and river and harbor
improvement is discussed. In The Story of Engi-
neering (Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1960. 528
p. Anchor books, A2i4), James K. Finch traces
engineering in Western civilization from the build-
ing of the pyramids to the 20th century.
2123. Condit, Carl W. American building art:
the nineteenth century. New York, Oxford
University Press, 1960. xvii, 371 p. illus.
59—11752 TA.23-C56
"Notes": p 275— [344]. Bibliography: p. 345-
351-
2124. Condit, Carl W. American building art: the
twentieth century. New York, Oxford Uni-
versity Press, 1961. xviii, 427 p. illus.
61-8369 TA23.C57
"Notes": p. 307—391. Bibliography: p. 393—405.
A history of building techniques and the develop-
ment of a structural basis for modern construction.
The first volume covers wood framing, wooden
bridge trusses, iron bridge trusses, suspension
bridges, iron arch bridges, railway trainsheds, and
concrete construction, and the second deals with
steel frames, metropolitan railway terminals, steel
truss and girder bridges, suspension bridges, con-
crete building construction, concrete bridges, con-
crete dams and waterway control, and the metro-
politan parkway. The author notes that most of the
essential practices of contemporary building were
devised before 1900.
XVIII
Medicine and Public Health
A. Medicine in General
B. Physicians and Surgeons
C. Psychiatry
D. Other Specialties
E. Hospitals and Nursing
F. Medical Education
G. Public Health
H. Medical Economics
2125—2131
2132—2139
2140—2143
2144—2146
2147-2151
2152-2154
2155—2164
2165—2168
E LITERATURE on medicine in the United States reflects not only phenomenal gains in
J- medical knowledge and skills but also growing concern over the shortage of doctors
and nurses, the increasing cost of medical services, the safety and effectiveness of prescription
drugs, and the desirability of governmental participation in medical insurance.
Various aspects of the history of medicine are brought out in the works listed in Section
A. Histories of such influential institutions as the Rockefeller Foundation and the American
Medical Association are included. Section B presents
biographies of notable men and women in medicine, include works that shed light on the controversies in
and Section C covers mental health in the United such areas as the adequacy of medical care, problems
States and care for the mentally ill. Occupational of medical education, programs for public health,
health, dentistry, and pathology are the subjects of and increases in the costs that must be borne by
studies in Section D. The remaining sections the patient.
A. Medicine in General
2125. Burrow, James G. AM A: voice of Ameri-
can medicine. [Baltimore] Johns Hopkins
Press, 1963. 430 p. 63—15347 1115.69
"Bibliographical essay": p. 414—416. Biblio-
graphical footnotes.
This extensively documented history traces the
professional, social, and political activities of the
American Medical Association from its modest be-
ginnings in 1848 to its position of significant na-
tional power in the mid-2Oth century. The AMA's
continuing opposition to "socialized medicine," in
particular to compulsory health insurance plans, is
traced, as are the various programs which the asso-
ciation has undertaken to improve the quality of
medical care, support stringent Federal food and
drug laws, and provide alternatives to compulsory
health insurance. In The Troubled Calling; Crisis
in the Medical Establishment (New York, Macmil-
lan [1965] 398 p.), Selig Greenberg criticizes
private enterprise on the ground that "the doctor's
need to get paid inevitably conflicts at times with
the patient's need to get well."
2126. Corner, George W. A history of the Rocke-
feller Institute, 1901—1953; origins and
growth. New York, Rockefeller Institute Press,
1964 [1965] 635 p. illus.
64-24275 R862.R64C6
291
2p2 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
"Major documentary sources": p. [5971—598.
Bibliographical references included in "Notes on
the text" (p. [5471-573).
A detailed history of the institute established by
John D. Rockefeller in New York City in 1901 to
encourage research in the medical sciences. The
institute was organized to sponsor basic research in
areas of medicine where the achievement of prac-
tical results was uncertain and is independent of
existing hospitals or universities. In its first year of
existence, the institute achieved fame by financing
a study that related widespread infant sickness and
mortality to a high bacterial content in milk sold
in open cans to tenement dwellers in New York
City. The institute has since expanded its activi-
ties, assembled a large and distinguished staff, and
achieved a preeminent position in the United States
and the world.
2127. Lasagna, Louis. The doctors' dilemmas.
New York, Harper [1962] 306 p.
62—7906 R 1 14.1,34
"Suggested reading": p. 292—295.
A popular survey of problems encountered in the
practice of medicine today. The author discusses
such diverse topics as superstitions, quackery,
medical education, medical organizations, the drug
industry, congressional investigations, medical juris-
prudence, and the mass media's view of medicine.
Various controversial issues are discussed in The
Crisis in American Medicine (New York, Harper
[1961] 149 p.), edited by Marion K. Sanders, a
collection of n short articles, and Challenges to
Contemporary Medicine (New York, Columbia
University Press, 1956. 120 p. Bampton lectures in
America, no. 6), by Alan Gregg.
2128. Roueche, Berton. The incurable wound, and
further narratives of medical detection. Bos-
ton, Little, Brown [1958, Ci957l 177 p.
58-5653 RC66.R63
Six true accounts, all of which appeared originally
in The New Yorker. The subjects include the
discovery of rabies in North American bats, amnesia,
accidental poisonings by overexposure to chemicals
used in a drycleaning plant and through a child's
mistaking aspirin for candy, the reference service
provided by the Poison Control Center in New
York City, and an unusual reaction to cortisone.
The author has collected n additional accounts in
A Man Named Hoffman, and Other Narratives of
Medical Detection (Boston, Little, Brown [1965]
276 p.).
2129. Shryock, Richard H. Medicine and society
in America, 1660-1860. [New York] New
York University Press, 1960. 182 p. (Anson G.
Phelps lectureship on early American history)
60-6417 11148.545
Bibliographical footnotes.
Four lectures portraying medicine in its social
setting from the early colonial period to the Civil
War. The author notes that in the Colonies the
doctor served as physician, surgeon, and pharmacist,
in contrast to the division of labor practiced in
England and Scotland. The founding of hospitals
and medical schools and the beginning of medical
licensing and publication are traced, and the fact
that relatively little attention was given to medical
research in the Colonies is noted. Public health
and epidemiology are discussed, and a general re-
view is presented of the period from 1820 to 1860,
when quackery was rampant and plans for improv-
ing medical education ended in frustration. History
of American Medicine, a Symposium (New York,
MD Publications ['19591 181 p. MD internation-
al symposia, no. 5), edited by Felix Marti Ibanez, is
a collection of 14 essays, originally published in the
International Record of Medicine, on various aspects
of medicine in the United States.
2130. Shryock, Richard H. National Tuberculosis
Association, 1904—1954; a study of the volun-
tary health movement in the United States. New
York, National Tuberculosis Association, 1957. 342
p. illus. (National Tuberculosis Association. His-
torical series, no. 8) 43—1648 RC3o6.N386 no. 8
Bibliography: p. [3131-317.
A history of the National Tuberculosis Associa-
tion's campaigns for the prevention and cure of
tuberculosis. The association brought together phy-
sicians, laymen, and welfare workers to fight the
disease as a social as well as a medical problem.
The Christmas Seal program and other activities
designed to arouse public concern over tuberculosis
are reviewed. The work of several other voluntary
health societies is discussed in The Gentle Legions
(Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1961. 335 p.), by
Richard Carter.
2131. Young, James H. The toadstool million-
aires; a social history of patent medicines in
America before Federal regulation. Princeton, N.J.,
Princeton University Press, 1961. 282 p. illus.
61-7428 RM67i.AiY6
"A Note on the Sources": p. 263—269.
An account of the escapades of the most success-
ful promoters of patent medicines in the United
States up to 1906, when the Pure Food and Drug
Act was passed by Congress. Although a great
number of these promoters were outright charla-
tans, some sincerely believed that their potions were
beneficial to mankind. The author notes that
MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 293
huge fortunes were amassed through the sale of
products that seldom had any therapeutic value and
were often extremely harmful. The Golden Age
of Quackery (New York, Macmillan, 1959. 302
p.), by Stewart H. Holbrook, is a more popular
treatment of the same subject.
B. Physicians and Surgeons
2132. Blochman, Lawrence G. Doctor Squibb;
the life and times of a rugged idealist. New
York, Simon & Schuster, 1958. 371 p. illus.
58—11805 11154.873655
A biography based on Edward Robinson Squibb's
private journals, which cover more than half a cen-
tury. Squibb, who is regarded by Blochman as
"the grandfather of the Pure Food and Drug Act,"
was unable to secure nationwide regulation of drugs
in his lifetime but did write a pure food and drug
act which became law in the States of New York
and New Jersey around 1880. A year before the
Journal of the American Medical Association was
founded, Squibb established a periodical entided
An Ephemeris which described and evaluated new
medicines, apparatus, and techniques. A pioneer
in anesthesia, he invented a method for the manu-
facture of pure ether of uniform potency, studied
effective dosage, and perfected the techniques of
administration through the use of a mask instead
of an inhaler.
2133. Bluemel, Elinor. Florence Sabin; Colorado
woman of the century. Boulder, University
of Colorado Press [1959] 238 p. illus.
59-1235 Ri54.Si 15655
Bibliography: p. 223—232.
Anatomist Florence Rena Sabin (1871—1953) is
renowned for her cellular studies at the Rockefeller
Institute for Medical Research in New York and
for her struggle to improve the health laws of Colo-
rado. She was a professor at the Johns Hopkins
University School of Medicine, where she taught
the freshman course in anatomy from 1902 to 1925,
and was the first woman to be elected to life
membership in the National Academy of Sciences.
In Doctor Kate, Angel on Snowshoes (New York,
Rinehart [1956] 339 p.) Adele Comandini relates
the life story of Kate Pelham Newcomb, an out-
standing and warmhearted general practitioner in
the north woods of Wisconsin.
2134. Cohn, Isidore, and Hermann B. Deutsch.
Rudolph Matas; a biography of one of the
great pioneers in surgery. Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1960. 431 p. illus.
60—9471
A review of the personal and professional life of
the man who is regarded as the father of modern
vascular surgery, presented in the context of a
century of surgical progress in the United States.
Considerable attention is also given to Lafcadio
Hearn, who was one of the surgeon's closest friends.
An appendix lists the degrees, honorary awards,
foreign decorations, and official positions held by
Matas. Paul B. Magnuson's autobiography, Ring
the Night Bell (Boston, Little, Brown [1960]
376 p.), edited by Finley Peter Dunne, stresses the
author's interest in curative surgery and rehabilita-
tion for bone and joint disorders.
2135. Davis, Audrey W. Dr. Kelly of Hopkins:
surgeon, scientist, Christian. Baltimore,
Johns Hopkins Press [1959] 242 p. illus.
59-14235
A portrait of Howard Atwood Kelly, one of the
four surgeons who inaugurated the Johns Hopkins
Hospital and helped establish the School of Medi-
cine at the Johns Hopkins University. Kelly's
Operative Gynecology (1898) became the definitive
text in the field and also introduced the type of
vivid illustration that was to revolutionize medical
publishing. Among Kelly's numerous contributions
to gynecology, urology, and general surgery were
his introduction of the open-air method of cystos-
copy, his invention of the perineal and ovariotomy
cushions, and his development of successful pro-
cedures for operation through the abdomen. Kelly's
writings, numbering some 575 items in all, cover
a variety of medical fields. Samuel J. Crowe's
Halsted of Johns Hopkins: The Man and His Men
(Springfield, 111., C. C, Thomas [1957] 247 p.),
is an intimate view of William Stewart Halsted and
the Halsted era in surgery. Edward H. Richardson,
a surgical specialist in gynecology and urology asso-
ciated with the Johns Hopkins University School of
Medicine for 52 years, relates his experiences and
observations in A Doctor Remembers (New York,
Vantage Press [1959] 252 p.).
2136. Dunlop, Richard. Doctors of the American
frontier. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday,
1965. 228 p. illus. 65-13979 Ri52.D85
Bibliography: p. [210]— 221.
294 / A GUIDE To TOE UNITED STATES
The frontier doctor's cures were sometimes blunt
and crude, sometimes ingenious. The author re-
views the practice of medicine on the frontier and
notes that great medical achievements were some-
times made under primitive conditions. Ephraim
McDowell, for example, braved a lynch mob in
Kentucky to perform the first ovariectomy in medi-
cal history, and at a Great Lakes military outpost
William Beaumont studied human digestion through
a shotgun wound in a patient's stomach. The lives
of three pioneers of medicine in the United States
are portrayed in Daniel Dra\e, 1785-1852, Pioneer
Physician of the Midwest (Philadelphia, University
of Pennsylvania Press [1961] 425 p.), by Emmet
F. Horine; David Hosac\, Citizen of New Yor%
(Philadelphia, American Philosophical Society, 1964.
246 p. Memoirs of the American Philosophical
Society, v. 62), by Christine C. Robbins; and John
Morgan, Continental Doctor (Philadelphia, Univer-
sity of Pennsylvania Press [1965] 301 p.), by
Whitfield J. Bell.
2137. King, George S. Doctor on a bicycle. New
York, Rinehart [1958] 275 p.
58-11521 Ri54.K32A3
The autobiography of a general practitioner.
King notes the incredible progress made in medi-
cine and surgery during his 59 years of medical
service in New York but voices strong opposition to
the present trend toward specialization. He believes
that in general practice the physician is oriented
toward an overall, complete diagnosis, but that the
specialist is frequently "like the mariner who, look-
ing through his glass at the horizon, sees only the
field upon which he focuses, while the rest of the
sky escapes him." Two other autobiographies
which relate typical medical experiences of general
practitioners are One Hundred Dollars & a Horse;
the Reminiscences of a Country Doctor (New York,
Morrow, 1965 [Ci963] 272 p.), by James Gordon
Bryson, and The Last Stitch (Philadelphia, Lippin-
cott [1956] 250 p.), by William L. Crosthwait and
Ernest G. Fischer.
2138. Rackemann, Francis M. The inquisitive
physician: the life and times of George Rich-
ards Minot, A. B., M. D., D. SC. Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1956. 288 p.
56-6521 Ri54.M645R3
"References": p. 277—282.
The author, a specialist in allergy at the Massa-
chusetts General Hospital and Minot's cousin and
intimate friend, recounts the physician's distin-
guished career. Minot's life was saved as a result
of the discovery of insulin, and he in turn saved
countless other lives through his discovery, with
William P. Murphy and George H. Whipple, of the
liver treatment for pernicious anemia, an achieve-
ment that earned them the 1934 Nobel Prize in
Physiology and Medicine. In George Hoyt Whip-
pie and His Friends; the Life-Story of a Nobel Prize
Pathologist (Philadelphia, Lippincott [1963] 335
p.), George W. Corner emphasizes Whipple's re-
search on the liver, blood, iron, and proteins.
2139. Rowntree, Leonard G. Amid masters of
twentieth century medicine; a panorama of
persons and pictures. With an introduction by
George F. Lull. Springfield, 111., C. C. Thomas
[1958] 684 p. illus.
58—8432 Ri54.R77A3 1958
"Sources of bibliographical notes": p. xii-xvi.
As teacher, research worker, clinician, and medi-
cal administrator, the author was closely associated
with outstanding leaders of the medical profession
during one of the most important periods in its
history. His autobiography provides intimate por-
traits of these men and their work. Rowntree
studied at the Johns Hopkins Medical School and
subsequently served as chief of medicine of the
Mayo Foundation and medical director of Selective
Service during World War II. He was a cofounder
of the School of Medicine of the University of
Miami. Walter C. Alvarez, internist, authority on
gastroenterology, and writer of a syndicated health
column, tells the story of his life and the remarkable
developments he witnessed in medicine in Incurable
Physician, an Autobiography (Englewood Cliffs,
N.J., Prentice-Hall [1963] 274 p.).
C. Psychiatry
2140. Dain, Norman. Concepts of insanity in the
United States, 1789-1865. New Brunswick,
N.J., Rutgers University Press [1964] xv, 304 p.
63-16302 RC443.D3
"Notes": p. [211]— 261. "Selected bibliography":
p. [2631-291.
Beginning in 1789, when Benjamin Rush peti-
tioned for humanitarian reforms in the treatment of
MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 295
the mentally ill at the Pennsylvania Hospital, the
author traces the development of an increasingly
sympathetic, therapeutic approach to mental illness.
Psychiatry became a recognized specialty in medi-
cine, but by the i85o's an emphasis on heredity as
a cause of insanity had resulted in a gradual shift
from optimism to pessimism concerning curability.
Institutional neglect of the insane again became
widespread, and only after World War II was there
a significant renewal of concern for victims of
mental illness. The mental health movement and
its leaders are discussed in Mental Health in the
United States; a Fifty-year History (Cambridge,
Published for the Commonwealth Fund by Harvard
University Press, 1961. 146 p.), by Nina A. Riden-
our, and Pioneers in Mental Health (New York,
Dodd, Mead, 1961. 242 p.), by Robin McKown.
2141. Gorman, Mike. Every other bed. Cleve-
land, World [1956] 318 p.
56-5310 RC443.G6
"Acknowledgements": p. 311— 314.
Noting that one-half of the hospital beds in the
United States are in mental hospitals, the author
reviews "the parlous state of psychiatric research
and training" and contends that treatment of the
mentally ill "still smacks of superstition, negativism,
niggardliness, and unimaginativeness." The Patient
and the Mental Hospital; Contributions of Research
in the Science of Social Behavior (Glencoe, 111., Free
Press [1957] 658 p.), edited by Milton Greenblatt,
Daniel J. Levinson, and Richard H. Williams, is a
collection of papers and discussions from the Con-
ference on Socio-Environmental Aspects of Patient
Treatment in Mental Hospitals. In The Commu-
nity Mental Health Center: An Analysis of Existing
Models (Washington, 1964. 219 p.), the Joint
Information Service of the American Psychiatric
Association and the National Association for Mental
Health presents 1 1 models of successful community
mental health programs.
2142. Rolo, Charles J., ed. Psychiatry in Ameri-
can life. Boston, Little, Brown [1963]
246 p. 63—13977 RC458.R65
"Readings in psychiatry": p. [241]— 243.
Essays on diverse aspects of psychiatry. The
theory and practice of psychiatry are reviewed and
the relationship of psychiatry to society and culture
is analyzed. Americans View Their Mental Health
(New York, Basic Books [1960] 444 p. Joint
Commission on Mental Illness and Health. Mono-
graph series, no. 4), by Gerald Gurin, Joseph Veroff,
and Sheila Feld, is based on a nationwide series of
personal interviews.
2143. Winslow, Walker. The Menninger story.
Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1956. 350 p.
illus. 56-6531 Ri54-M57W5
Bibliography: p. [3381-339.
Two generations of the Menninger family are
portrayed. Charles Frederick Menninger began his
medical practice in Topeka, Kans., in 1889. His
sons Karl and William also became doctors and
Karl chose to specialize in psychiatry. The three
Menningers and their associates developed a num-
ber of important medical institutions in Topeka,
including a psychiatric clinic, a sanitarium, and a
school for mentally ill children. The Menninger
Foundation for Psychiatric Education and Research
was established in 1941 and the Menninger School
of Psychiatry in 1945. Together, these institutions
have had a worldwide influence on the teaching and
practice of psychiatry. Karl A. Menninger's writ-
ings are compiled in A Psychiatrist's World, Select-
ed Papers (New York, Viking Press, 1959. 2 v.),
edited by Bernard H. Hall.
D. Other Specialties
2144. Long, Esmond R. A history of American
pathology. Springfield, 111., C. C. Thomas
[1962] 460 p. illus. 62—10161 RBi5.L6
Bibliographical references included in "Notes":
p. 393-427.
A survey of the evolution of the discipline con-
cerned with the fundamental nature of disease.
The growth of pathology in the United States and
Canada is traced from the i6th century to the post-
World War II era, with emphasis on the contribu-
tions of various outstanding researchers and teachers
in the field.
2145. McCluggage, Robert W. A history of the
American Dental Association; a century of
health service. Chicago, American Dental Associa-
tion, 1959. 520 p. illus. 59—14780 RKi.A543M3
Bibliography: p. 442—507.
A comprehensive review of the activities of the
American Dental Association since its founding in
296 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1859. The work also serves as a general history of
the evolution of the dental profession, covering such
additional aspects as the development of local so-
cieties and journals, progress in dental education,
and the formation of national organizations.
2146. Selleck, Henry B. Occupational health in
America. In collaboration with Alfred H.
Whittaker. Detroit, Wayne State University Press,
1962. 523 p. illus. 61-16777 RC963.S42
Bibliographical references included in "Notes":
p. 469—486.
The author traces the history of the Industrial
Medical Association and provides a comprehensive
account of the development in the United States of
the medical specialty that "deals with the restoration
and conservation of health in relation to work, the
working environment, and maximum efficiency."
The activities of physicians in this specialty are
reviewed in The Physician in Industry (New York,
Blakiston Division, McGraw-Hill [1961] 290 p.),
by William P. Shepard. In Mental Health in In-
dustry (New York, Blakiston Division, McGraw-
Hill, 1958. 262 p.), Alan A. McLean and Graham
C. Taylor examine the role of psychiatry in indus-
trial medicine.
E. Hospitals and Nursing
2147. Chesney, Alan M. The Johns Hopkins
Hospital and the Johns Hopkins University
School of Medicine; a chronicle. Baltimore, Johns
Hopkins Press, 1943—63. 3 v. illus.
SG44— 2 R747.J62C5
Bibliographical footnotes.
CONTENTS. — I. Early years, 1867—1893. — II.
1893—1905. — III. 1905—1914.
The first volume of Chesney's history is no. 4845
in the 1960 Guide. The second volume covers the
12-year period from the opening of the School of
Medicine to the resignation of Dr. William Osier
as professor of medicine in the Johns Hopkins
University and as physician in chief to the Johns
Hopkins Hospital. The third volume continues the
narrative to the hospital's 25th anniversary.
2148. Faxon, Nathaniel W. The Massachusetts
General Hospital, 1935—1955. Cambridge,
Mass., Harvard University Press, 1959. 490 p. illus.
59-12968 RAo.82.B7M5i5
Bibliographical references included in "Notes":
p. 467-472.
A continuation of the historical survey begun by
Frederic A. Washburn in The Massachusetts Gen-
eral Hospital; Its Development, 1900—1935 (no. 4853
in the 1960 Guide). Faxon reviews the activities
of the hospital under his own directorship and, for
the period 1949—55, under that of his successor
Dean A. Clark. Accomplishments during the peri-
od covered include the addition of eight new
departments, construction of five major new build-
ings, establishment of a blood bank in 1942, reor-
ganization of the Nursing School, and extensive
expansion of research facilities. Particularly note-
worthy are the hospital's successful handling of the
Coconut Grove disaster in 1942 and the polio epi-
demic of 1955. In New England Hospitals, 1790—
1833 (Ann Arbor, University of Michigan Press
[1957] 282 p.), Leonard K. Eaton defines the
tradition of New England hospitals as one of
"creative conservatism." He notes that New Eng-
landers were first to accept the principle of State
responsibility for care of the indigent insane.
2149. Georgopoulos, Basil S., and Floyd C. Mann.
The community general hospital. New
York, Macmillan [1962] 693 p.
62—13440 RA963.G4
Bibliographical references at the end of each
chapter.
An examination of the structure and functions of
the short-stay community general hospital, based on
a study of 12 Michigan hospitals made by the
Institute for Social Research at the University of
Michigan. Among the topics discussed are leader-
ship and supervision, intraorganizational strain,
communication, and organizational effectiveness.
The Community and Its Hospitals; a Comparative
Analysis ([Syracuse, N.Y.] Syracuse University
Press, 1963. 234 p.), by Ivan Belknap and John G.
Steinle, stresses the importance of relating the
hospital's functions to the leadership and welfare
services of the community. Esther L. Brown's New-
er Dimensions of Patient Care (New York, Russell
Sage Foundation, 1965. 159, 194, 163 p.) focuses
on selected psychosocial and cultural aspects of
patient care.
2150. Hughes, Everett C., Helen M. Hughes, and
Irwin Deutscher. Twenty thousand nurses
tell their story; a report on studies of nursing func-
tions sponsored by the American Nurses' Asso-
ciation. With a foreword by Agnes Ohlson.
MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 297
Philadelphia, Lippincott [1958] 280 p. illus.
58-11876 RT82.H78
Bibliography: p. 278—280.
The findings of a five-year study of nursing
functions are reported and prognoses concerning
the future of nursing are presented. The authors
note that the best-educated nurses are being em-
ployed at desks and filing cabinets and in adminis-
trative positions while "it is left to practical nurses
and aides to supply the human warmth and com-
fort that so many laymen think of when they
think of ladies in white caps and uniforms." The
Story of Nursing, new ed. (Boston, Little, Brown
[1965] 244 p.), by Bertha S. Dodge, touches upon
the highlights of the heritage of American nursing.
Edna Yost's American Women of Nursing (Phila-
delphia, Lippincott [1965] 197 p.) is a revised
edition of no. 4854 in the 1960 Guide.
2151. Klarman, Herbert E. Hospital care in New
York City; the roles of voluntary and mu-
nicipal hospitals. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1963. 573 p. 62-19901 RA982.N5A88
Bibliographical notes: p. [5291—556.
A statistical analysis of hospital service in New
York City and the various influences shaping it.
The author's intent was "to assess in each hospital
system the adequacy of available resources to per-
form its share of the total task. The respective roles
of the voluntary and municipal hospital systems
were to be ascertained by comparing the character-
istics of patients served as well as trends in the
volume of services rendered. Appraisal of resources
was to include the availability of money and of real
resources, such as key personnel and physical plant,
and also their organization and coordination." In
Hospital City (New York, Crown [1957] 282 p.),
John Starr relates the history of New York's Belle-
vue Hospital, "the most famous hospital in the
world, a breeder of great men and women, of great
ideas and greater legends." Milton L. Zisowitz'
One Patient at a Time; a Medical Center at Worf^
(New York, Random House [1961] 287 p.)
describes the day-to-day activities of the New York
Hospital-Cornell Medical Center in training doctors
and nurses and in caring for the sick.
F. Medical Education
2152. Becker, Howard S., and others. Boys in
white; student culture in medical school.
[Chicago] University of Chicago Press [1961] 456
p. illus. 61—16622 R737.B4
The results of a study conducted at the University
of Kansas Medical School to determine the non-
academic effects of medical school on future doctors.
The curriculum is dealt with only as it influences
the attitudes of students toward their studies and
their future profession. The authors note that dur-
ing the four years of medical school the students
adopt a series of perspectives which they use in
orienting themselves to their work and in defining
their long-range goals. Among the students' con-
cerns are determining the relevant material for
study and dealing with the faculty members who
examine and grade them. The distinction between
the problems of the medical student and those of
the professional physician is stressed. The Student-
Physician; Introductory Studies in the Sociology of
Medical Education (Cambridge, Published for the
Commonwealth Fund by Harvard University Press,
1957. 360 p.), edited by Robert K. Merton, George
G. Reader, and Patricia L. Kendall, is a set of
reports on studies conducted by the Bureau of Ap-
plied Social Research of Columbia University.
2153. Corner, George W. Two centuries of medi-
cine; a history of the School of Medicine,
University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, Lippin-
cott [1965] 363 p. illus.
65—11358 R747-P42 1965
"Notes and references": p. 324—346.
The growth of the University of Pennsylvania
School of Medicine is traced from 1765, the year
of its founding, to 1965. In addition to detailing
many events in the school's history, the author
describes the contributions of the numerous indi-
viduals who shaped its development. In A History
of Colonial Medical Education: In the Province of
New Yor%, With Its Subsequent Development,
1767-1830 (Springfield, 111., C. C. Thomas [1962]
286 p.), Byron P. Stookey relates the early history
of the King's College Medical School, which later
became the Columbia University College of Physi-
cians and Surgeons. The influence of German, Aus-
trian, and Swiss universities on American medical
education is recounted by Thomas N. Bonner in
American Doctors and German Universities; a
Chapter in International Intellectual Relations,
1870—1914 (Lincoln, University of Nebraska Press
[1963] 210 p.).
298 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2154. Evans, Lester J. The crisis in medical edu-
cation. Ann Arbor, University of Michigan
Press [1964] 101 p. illus. ([Ann Arbor science
library] ) 64-17436 R74O.E78
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. M-IOI).
The author states that bureaucracy and specializa-
tion have prevented medical schools from including
the latest concepts of health care in their curricula
and urges the universities, as institutions with ob-
jectives broader than mere professional training, to
take the lead in shaping medical education. The
necessity of team effort in curing illness and the
importance of combining all patient care and clini-
cal activities into an integrated whole are stressed.
Evans proposes that medical education include the
humanities and social sciences as well as the tradi-
tional medical disciplines. Preparation for Medical
Education, a Restudy (New York, Blakiston Divi-
sion, McGraw-Hill [1961] 404 p.) is the report
of a survey prepared for the Association of Ameri-
can Medical Colleges to determine progress in
medical education since the publication of Prepara-
tion for Education in the Liberal Arts College,
which was mentioned in the annotation for no. 4861
in the 1960 Guide.
G. Public Health
2155. Dunning, James M. Principles of dental
public health. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1962. 543 p. illus.
62-7096 RK52.D8
"References": p. 507—530.
A textbook intended for the student and the gen-
eral practitioner of dentistry. The author includes
an introduction to the field of public health as a
whole, in addition to detailed material on the devel-
opment of dental public health programs.
2156. Freeman, Ruth B., and Edward M. Holmes.
Administration of public health services.
Philadelphia, Saunders, 1960. 507 p.
60-7455 RA393.F7
Includes bibliography.
The authors note that since the turn of the
century, when the major public health concerns
were basic sanitation and control of communicable
diseases, this field has become a complex integral
function of government with expenditures reaching
billions of dollars annually. Services have been
expanded to include the prevention and cure of
major chronic diseases, mental health problems,
drug addiction and alcoholism, control of environ-
mental pollution, medical care, and rehabilitation.
Broad support is also being given to basic and
applied research. Greater managerial and admin-
istrative skills are consequently being demanded of
public health officers, and the authors attempt to
provide guidance in the application of basic prin-
ciples of management to the problems encountered
in the administration of public health services.
Administration of Community Health Services
(Chicago, International City Managers' Association,
1961. 560 p. The International City Managers'
Association. Municipal management series), edited
by Eugene A. Confrey, is a comprehensive training
and reference manual for administrators at the city
and county level and for public health workers.
2157. Johns Hopkins University Conference on
Drugs in Our Society, /p6_j. Drugs in our
society, based on a conference sponsored by the
Johns Hopkins University. Edited by Paul Talalay,
assisted by Jane H. Murnaghan. Contributors:
Owsei Temkin [and others] Baltimore, Johns
Hopkins Press [1964] 311 p.
64—16306 RS99.J6 i963c
Bibliographical footnotes at the end of each
chapter.
The 21 papers presented at this conference by
experts in various fields form the main body of this
work. Among the chief issues discussed are drug
safety and effectiveness, the role of government, the
support of research to develop new drugs, the educa-
tion of physicians and the public in the intelligent
use of drugs, the cost of medicine, and the legal and
ethical considerations of drug use. The Impact of
the Food and Drug Administration on Our Society
(New York, MD Publications, 1956. 144 p.), edited
by Henry Welch and Felix Marti Ibanez, documents
the many contributions the FDA has made. In
The Therapeutic Nightmare (Boston, Houghton
MifHin, 1965. 590 p.), Morton Mintz states that
the testing of drugs is frequently inadequate or
fraudulent and pleads for a stronger Food and Drug
Administration. In The Real Voice (New York,
Macmillan [1964] 245 p.) Richard Harris reports
on the investigation of the drug industry by Senator
Estes Kefauver's Subcommittee on Antitrust and
Monopoly, the public support which aided his cause,
and the regulatory legislation which resulted.
MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 299
2158. Knutson, Andie L. The individual, society,
and health behavior. New York, Russell
Sage Foundation, 1965. 533 p. illus.
65—21057
Bibliographical footnotes at the end of each
chapter.
An analysis of the health behavior of the indi-
vidual, based on the concepts of social psychology.
Emphasis is placed on the role of communication
in motivating people to acquire attitudes beneficial
to society's general welfare as well as their own.
2159. Lerner, Monroe, and Odin W. Anderson.
Health progress in the United States, 1900—
1960; a report of Health Information Foundation.
Chicago, University of Chicago Press [1963] xv,
354 p. illus. 63-18854 RA445.L45
Bibliographical footnotes.
An analysis of the causes, extent, and conse-
quences of improved public health. The authors
note that although the mortality rate has dropped
sharply since 1900, chiefly because of the control of
communicable diseases, the morbidity rate has tend-
ed to rise with increasing longevity. Accurate as-
sessment of current health levels requires that both
rates be taken into consideration. Lerner and An-
derson find degenerative diseases and accidents to
be the major recent causes of death, partly owing to
the growth of urbanization and industrialization.
They also conclude that, in spite of improved health
conditions, chronic and acute illnesses are wide-
spread. Stating that "good health is now consid-
ered by many as a 'right' flowing naturally out of
the fact of common human association," the authors
observe that people are disturbed by relatively minor
manifestations of ill health and aspire to a degree
of physiological well-being that is perhaps impos-
sible of attainment.
2160. Lewis, Howard R. With every breath you
take; the poisons of air pollution, how they
are injuring our health, and what we must do
about them. New York, Crown [1965] xvii, 322
p. illus. 64—23821 RA576.L5
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 287-313).
A public health consultant views air pollution
not simply as a nuisance but as a significant and
increasingly menacing health problem. More than
43 million people in over 300 cities are reported to
be living under a major air pollution hazard. Lewis
advocates programs involving community action
groups, stepped-up research, increased Federal par-
ticipation, and stringent regulations. The hazards
of another source of pollution are explored in
Radiation, Genes, and Man (New York, Holt
[1959] 205 p.), by Bruce Wallace and Theodo-
sius G. Dobzhansky. The Committee on Environ-
mental Health Problems of the U.S. Public Health
Service, in its Report to the Surgeon General
( [Washington] U.S. Dept. of Health, Education,
and Welfare, Public Health Service, 1962. 288 p.
U.S. Public Health Service. Publication no. 908),
reviews various environmental health problems and
proposes long-range objectives.
2161. Means, Richard K. A history of health
education in the United States. Philadel-
phia, Lea & Febiger, 1962. 412 p. illus. (Health
education, physical education, and recreation series)
62—17823 RA440.3-U5M4
Bibliographical notes and suggested readings at
the end of each chapter.
Health education is presented as a distinct disci-
pline and a significant professional field. Begin-
ning with its origins in the late i8th century, the
author traces its uneven but persistent growth, high-
lighting the work of pioneers in the field, the role
of health organizations, child health conferences,
the development of a literature, and the impact of
research. Personal interviews with key figures in
the development of health education, as well as
published sources, are the basis for the study.
2162. Osborn, Barbara M. Introduction to com-
munity health. Boston, Allyn & Bacon, 1964.
xiv, 327 p. illus. 64—12894 RA427-O8
Bibliographies at the end of nearly every chapter.
An introductory college text covering such topics
as the history of public health programs, health
facilities, the functions of public and private organi-
zations, current American and world health prob-
lems, the role of the behavioral sciences in com-
munity health, and the education of the public in
good health practices. The author defines com-
munity health as "the organized effort of all agencies
working toward the promotion of the physical,
emotional, and social health of people" and notes
that underlying this effort are a concept of health
as a primary asset of the individual and conse-
quently of society as a whole and an assumption
that the highest levels of health can best be
achieved through community programs. A pano-
ramic view of the expanding public health field is
presented in Health and the Community; Readings
in the Philosophy and Sciences of Public Health
(New York, Free Press [1965] 877 p.), edited by
Alfred H. Katz and Jean S. Felton.
2163. Rosenberg, Charles E. The cholera years;
the United States in 1832, 1849, and 1866.
[Chicago] University of Chicago Press [1962]
257 p. 62-18121 RCi3i.A3R6
"Annotated bibliography": p. 235—252.
30O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Compared to malaria and tuberculosis, cholera
claimed few victims in the ipth century, but it was
nonetheless "novel and terrifying, a crisis demanding
response in every area of American life and thought."
Between 1832 and 1866, both piety and abstract
rationalism were replaced by a more critical temper
in medicine, and sanitary reform instead of morality
was recommended to ensure good health in growing
cities. The cholera epidemics were highly instru-
mental in overcoming government indifference in
the field of public health. Social, political, and
economic aspects of public health are treated in
John B. Blake's Public Health in the Town of Bos-
ton, 1630—1822 (Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1959. 278 p. Harvard historical studies, v.
72). Charles V. Chapin and the Public Health
Movement (Cambridge, Harvard University Press,
1962. 310 p.), by James H. Cassedy, traces the
contributions of a pioneer in sanitation.
2164. U.S. President's Commission on Heart Dis-
ease, Cancer and Strode. A national pro-
gram to conquer heart disease, cancer and stroke;
report to the President. [Washington] 1964—65.
2 v. illus. 65—60405 RC682.U49
Bibliography: v. i, p. 102—113.
The conclusions reached by a Commission ap-
pointed to recommend steps for prevention and
treatment of the three diseases responsible for more
than 70 percent of the deaths in the United States
today. In volume i, the summary report, the prob-
lems and available resources are examined, and 35
specific recommendations are made. A national net-
work of diagnostic and medical care, added support
for medical education and research, and a buttress-
ing of State and local programs of control are con-
sidered prime objectives. Volume 2 contains the
full reports of the eight subcommittees of the Com-
mission, as well as additional scientific and technical
documentation.
H. Medical Economics
2165. Carter, Richard. The doctor business. Gar-
den City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1958. 283 p.
59-5577 R728.C32
A criticism of the economics of medical service.
The author claims that the fee system is often arbi-
trary and unfair, that organized medicine opposes
reforms because it fears public control, and that the
public has tended to acquiesce, without protest, to
its desires. Fee-paying relations between patient
and physician are uneconomical according to Carter,
who suggests improved insurance plans as one
remedy. Describing the individual physician as gen-
erally responsible and dedicated, he places primary
blame on the professional organization with "its
largely voiceless rank and file."
2166. Follmann, Joseph F. Medical care and
health insurance; a study in social progress.
Homewood, 111., R. D. Irwin, 1963. 503 p. (The
Irwin series in risk and insurance)
63—10321 HG9396.F6
Bibliographical footnotes.
A discussion of methods for financing medical
assistance in the United States and in other coun-
tries. Emphasis is placed on recent developments in
private health insurance, including coverage of the
aged, farm residents, the temporarily unemployed,
the mentally ill, and those needing dental care.
Blue Cross and Private Health Insurance Coverage
of Older Americans (Washington, U.S. Govt. Print.
Off., 1964. 153 p.), a report by the Subcommittee
on Health of the Elderly to the Senate Special
Committee on Aging, concludes that private health
insurance is unable to provide adequate hospital
coverage for most older Americans.
2167. Somers, Herman M., and Anne R. Somers.
Doctors, patients, and health insurance; the
organization and financing of medical care. Wash-
ington, Brookings Institution [1961] xix, 576 p.
illus. 61—13235 RA4io.S6
Bibliographical footnotes.
According to the authors, personal medical care
not only has failed to keep pace with advances in
medical science and technology, but is also being
transformed "from an individual profession into a
highly organized and institutionalized industry."
Historical perspectives and current data are provided
on the structure, distribution, and financing of
health services, with emphasis on private health
insurance. The Economics of American Medicine
(New York, Macmillan [1964] 508 p.), by Seymour
E. Harris, considers the complex financial aspects of
medicine and health in the United States.
2168. Weisbrod, Burton A. Economics of public
health; measuring the economic impact of
diseases. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania
Press [1961] 127 p. illus.
61-5545 RA4IO.W4 1961
MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH
/ 301
Bibliography: p. [121]— 124.
The techniques of economics are applied to an
analysis of the costs and benefits of public health in
an attempt to provide meaningful and scientifically
defensible standards for use in evaluating benefits
accruing from various public health programs. Such
standards involve the measurement of the economic
losses to society from a disease, and the data obtained
can be used in "making a priority listing of health
projects according to anticipated economic benefits."
After developing his standards, Weisbrod applies
them in a quantitative evaluation of programs to
eliminate cancer, tuberculosis, and poliomyelitis.
The use of this type of procedure, the author hopes,
would provide legislators, public health administra-
tors, and hospital planners with a basis for resource-
allocation decisions.
XIX
Entertainment
Criticism
Particular Stage Groups, Theaters, Movements, etc.
Biography: Actors and Actresses
Biography: Directors, Producers, etc.
A. General Worths
B. The American Stage
Bi. History
Bii.
Biii.
Biv.
Bv.
C. Motion Pictures
Ci. History
Cii. Special Aspects and Analyses
Ciii. Biography: Actors and Actresses
Civ. Biography: Directors, Producers, etc.
D. Other Forms of Entertainment
Di. Radio and Television
Dii. The Dance in America
Diii. Vaudeville and Burlesque
Div. Showboats, Circuses, etc.
2169—2172
2173-2177
2178—2180
2181—2184
2185—2189
2190—2193
2194-2197
2198—2202
2203
2204
2205
2206—2208
2209—2210
2211—2213
THE OVERLAPPING subject matter of books within the area defined as "Entertainment" and
the relationship between this area and others in this Supplement are discussed in the pre-
fatory notes to Chapter XIX, Entertainment, and Chapter XX, Sports and Recreation, in the
1960 Guide. Relative to the 1960 Guide, this chapter of the Supplement contains proportion-
ately fewer works on the American stage and more on motion pictures. The number of
bibliographies of notable personalities in both fields is conspicuously smaller here. The
Supplement, like the 1960 Guide, has a subsection
in the radio and television portion of this chapter.
The section devoted to general works, consisting of
entries on comedians, tent Chautauqua, stars of
stage, screen, and television, and the relationship
between the performing arts and their critics, is al-
on radio and television, but in both bibliographies
the major works on the subject are more suitable for
inclusion in Chapter XVI, Communications, than
the chapter on entertainment. An analysis of the
personalities and the script materials of 16 comedians
who achieved eminence on television is the only entry
most equal in size to the comparable section in the
1960 Guide.
302
ENTERTAINMENT / 303
A. General Works
2169. Cahn, William. The laugh makers; a pic-
torial history of American comedians. New
York, Putnam [1957] 192 p.
57-14516 PN2285.C2
Although jokes have changed, basic joke situations
in the United States have persisted since Thomas
Wignell, the first major American comedian, enter-
tained George Washington. This brief popular
account traces the history of comedy from 1787 to
1957. Almost all the important comedians in the
history of show business, including radio, motion
pictures, and television, are mentioned. The em-
phasis is on the 20th century, and among the per-
sonalities receiving the most attention are George M.
Cohan, Will Rogers, W. C. Fields, Charlie Chaplin,
Ed Wynn, Groucho Marx, and Jimmie Durante.
2170. Harrison, Harry P. Culture under canvas;
the story of tent Chautauqua, by Harry P.
Harrison as told to Karl Detzer. New York, Hast-
ings House ["1958] 287 p.
57-12799 LC630I.C5H3
As the i9-year-old school principal in Wiota, Iowa,
the author was called upon to manage the town's
winter lyceum course. Four years later, in 1901, he
was attending Cornell College when Keith Vawter,
of Vawter's Standard Lecture Bureau, visited the
campus in search of summertime agents. Harrison
went to work for him, and in that same year Vawter
bought a third interest in the well-established Red-
path Lyceum Bureau. Closing his own agency,
Vawter assumed the position of western manager
for Redpath. Harrison became a permanent em-
ployee, rising eventually to the position of treasurer
and general manager. Here he surveys the whole
traveling lyceum and Chautauqua movement, blend-
ing historical settings with anecdotes about himself
and famous performers. In The Chautauqua Move-
ment; an Episode in the Continuing American Revo-
lution ( [New York] State University of New York,
1961. 108 p.), Joseph E. Gould discusses "the
beginnings of the most significant venture in popu-
lar education in the United States."
2171. Ross, Lillian, and Helen Ross. The player;
a profile of an art. With photographs by
Lillian Ross. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1962.
459 p. 62-16986 PN2285.R6
Biographical sketches of 55 stars of stage, screen,
and television. Most of the players were born in the
United States; all are well known for their perform-
ances in this country. The information was elicited
through informal interviews, conducted between
1958 and 1962. Twenty-one of the sketches origi-
nally appeared in The New Yorker. Each piece
traces the subject's life and career up to the time of
the interview and is accompanied by a photograph.
The interviewees include Melvyn Douglas, Hume
Cronyn, Henry Fonda, Sidney Poitier, Katherine
Cornell, Andy Griffith, Paul Newman, Rod Steiger,
Dana Andrews, Kim Hunter, Fredric March, An-
gela Lansbury, and Robert Preston.
2172. Seldes, Gilbert V. The public arts. New
York, Simon & Schuster, 1956. 303 p.
56-7488 PNi992.5.S38
In The Seven Lively Arts (1924), Seldes praised
the gaiety and vigor of popular entertainments in
the United States; in The Great Audience (1950),
no. 4895 in the 1960 Guide, he warned that the very
same entertainments could be used as mass media
to keep Americans complacent and immature. The
Public Arts is based on the author's new theory, in
which the lively arts and the mass media are viewed
as two aspects of a single phenomenon. He stresses
the desirability of an audience enticed by the enter-
tainer, instructed by the reporter-critic, and unified
and shared by both. The problems involved in
achieving this ideal are analyzed in detail by the
author. In The Performing Arts; Problems and
Prospects (New York, McGraw-Hill [1965] 258
p.), a Rockefeller Brothers Fund report on the
future of the theater, the dance, and music, the
problems of development and support on national,
State, and local levels are examined.
304 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
B. The American Stage
Bi. HISTORY
2173. Gassner, John. Theatre at the crossroads;
plays and playwrights of the mid-century
American stage. New York, Holt, Rinehart &
Winston [1960] 327 p. 60-9272 PN 185 1.63
Bibliographical note: p. 313—314.
An assessment of the New York theater in the
1950'$. The first section consists of general essays
on tragedy, social drama, the state of the theater, and
such influential playwrights as Eugene O'Neill,
Tennessee Williams, and Jean Giraudoux. The sec-
ond section is a selective "chronicle" of the theater,
on Broadway and off, for this lo-year period. The
author discusses both American and European plays,
examining them as literature and noting the degree
of effectiveness with which they were presented on
the stage.
2174. Hewitt, Barnard. Theatre U.S.A., 1668 to
1957. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1959.
528 p. 58-11982 PN222I.H4
Bibliography: p. 506—513.
Through extensive use of firsthand accounts, the
author conveys the contemporary atmosphere of the
American theater at various periods and relates
players and plays to their era. The documentation
provided for the period through 1800 consists of
playbills, newspaper advertisements, letters, and jour-
nals; critical reviews constitute the primary source
of information for the years after 1800. A connect-
ing commentary gives background information,
notes innovations and trends, and provides current
perspectives for earlier enthusiasms. A concluding
section, "The Selections and Their Authors," iden-
tifies each quotation and supplies a short biograph-
ical note for each writer.
2175. Oppenheimer, George, ed. The passionate
playgoer; a personal scrapbook. New York,
Viking Press, 1958. 623 p. 58-12377 PN2266.O6
This collection of affectionate sketches is intended
to convey that part of the theater's essence that
eludes systematically researched surveys. The au-
thor presents selections that have made the greatest
impression on him in his 40 years of involvement
with the stage. Here, among others, are essays by
Dorothy Parker on audiences, Robert Sherwood on
the Lunts, John Dos Passes on Isadora Duncan,
Tallulah Bankhead on touring shows, and Elia
Kazan on A Streetcar Named Desire. The selec-
tions are arranged loosely under general topics, but
an index provides access to individual items. The
American Drama Since 1918 [Rev. ed.] (New
York, G. Braziller, 1957. 344 p.), an updated edi-
tion of a work mentioned in the annotation for no.
4900 in the 1960 Guide, contains essays by Joseph
Wood Krutch.
2176. Rankin, Hugh F. The theater in colonial
America. Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press [1965] 239 p.
65—16333 PN2237.R3
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 203-223).
The colonial theater had obvious limitations. "It
was derivative in nature; it produced practically no
playwrights; and its stylized acting ignored the
more natural innovations introduced to the English
stage by David Garrick. But it did bring a lively
and vigorous entertainment from the Old World to
the New and demonstrated that a tiny colonial
capital, such as Williamsburg or Annapolis, could
sustain one of the important ornaments of civilized
life, a repertory theater." The first local company
was formed in 1752 by William and Lewis Hallam.
Disbanded in 1758 after a tour of the West Indies,
it was reorganized in that same year by David
Douglass. In 1775, after the Continental Congress
adopted a resolution designed to discourage, among
assorted frivolities, "exhibition of shews, plays, and
other expensive diversions," Douglass took the com-
pany to Jamaica to await the restoration of "tran-
quility." Rankin's account of these early beginnings
of the theater in the United States is based on
extensive research in the fragmentary records that
have been preserved.
2177. Taubman, Hyman Howard. The making
of the American theatre. New York, Coward
McCann [1965] 385 p. 65—20410 PN222I.T35
Although this broad survey covers the theater in
the United States from the earliest colonial touring
companies to the present, its main emphasis is on
the 20th century. The author, a former drama
critic for the New Yor\ Times, examines not only
the Broadway stage but also the experimental theater
off Broadway and the revival of local repertory
theater across the country. A Pictorial History of
the American Theatre; 100 Years: 1860—1960 (Phil-
adelphia, Chilton Co., Book Division [1960] 384
p.), by Daniel C. Blum, has small pictures arranged
together on individual pages and a brief text con-
taining information on the plays. The American
Theatre as Seen by Hirschfeld (New York, G. Bra-
ziller, 1961. unpaged) is a collection of Albert
Hirschfeld's humorous drawings that appeared in
the Sunday drama section of the New Yor^ Times.
Bii. CRITICISM
2178. Brustein, Robert S. Seasons of discontent;
dramatic opinions, 1959—1965. New York,
Simon & Schuster [1965] 322 p.
65-22268 PN2266.B73
The author, a professor of English at Columbia
University, had had little direct experience with the
American stage when he became drama critic for
The New Republic in 1959, and what he saw came
as a shock. He was "appalled at the absence of
distinguished drama" and astonished that theater
standards were "being arbitrated (often in less than
two hours of hurried scribbling) by newspaper re-
porters, many of whom had prepared for dramatic
criticism through stints in such departments as
music, foreign affairs, dining and dancing, and
sports." His writing took the form of "destructive
criticism" offered for constructive purposes. In the
essays presented here, most of which originally
appeared in The New Republic, Brustein discusses
the theater on and off Broadway, plays from abroad,
activities of companies, and a variety of other sub-
jects. Among the Broadway plays reviewed are
The Darf{ at the Top of the Stairs, by William Inge,
The Night of the Iguana, by Tennessee Williams,
and Who's Afraid of Virginia Woolf?, by Edward
Albee.
2179. Kerr, Walter. The theater in spite of itself.
New York, Simon & Schuster, 1963. 319 p.
63-11143 PN2277.N5K.4 1963
First-night reviews and other articles on the thea-
ter by the drama critic for the New Yorf^ Herald
Tribune. The author can be devastating in the
presence of a poor production, but his general out-
look on the contemporary theater is kindly. This
collection reflects his appreciative but penetrating
analytical approach. Some of Kerr's earlier reviews
appear in his Pieces at Eight (New York, Simon &
Schuster, 1957. 244 p.).
2180. Rice, Elmer L. The living theatre. New
York, Harper [1959] 306 p.
59-6317 PN2037.R5
A study of the theater as a social institution.
ENTERTAINMENT / 305
Drawing on more than 40 years' experience as
playwright, stage director, and producer, the author
describes conditions in the theater internationally
and discusses the problems peculiar to the American
stage. Among the many topics considered are the
narrow line between commercialism and art, the
theater as a business dependent upon such factors as
labor unions and real estate values, and the roles
played by critic, actor, director, designer, and audi-
ence in producing successful plays. Chapters are
included on the Federal Theatre Project of the
1930*5 and on the cooperative theater groups —
Neighborhood Playhouse, Theatre Guild, Group
Theatre, and Playwrights' Company. Rice also de-
scribes in some detail the troubles that beset the
production of his Pulitzer Prize-winning play Street
Scene.
Biii. PARTICULAR STAGE GROUPS,
THEATERS, MOVEMENTS, ETC.
2181. Blau, Herbert. The impossible theater, a
manifesto. New York, Macmillan [1964]
309 p. illus. 64—24008 PN2266.B56
A small but vocal segment of the theater of the
1950*5 and 1960*5 was engaged in the search for a
new drama concerned with the meanings of human
existence. In the vanguard of this search was the
San Francisco Actor's Workshop, founded by the
author and Jules Irving. In this "manifesto" Blau
combines a brief history of the workshop with ex-
tensive discourses on theory, relating the theater to
the existentialist, crisis-ridden world and this world
to the theater.
2182. Growl ey, Alice L. The Neighborhood Play-
house; leaves from a theatre scrapbook. New
York, Theatre Arts Books [1959] 266 p.
59—13239 PN2277.N6N42
A reminiscence by a founder of the Neighborhood
Playhouse (1912-27), which had its origins in the
festivals of the Henry Street Settlement on New
York's lower East Side. Under the generous finan-
cial support of Irene and Alice Lewisohn, it pro-
duced unusual artistic plays from all over the world.
Especially notable were the productions of the Hindu
comedy The Little Clay Cart and the Russian-
Jewish drama The Dybbu\. The playhouse also
staged modern drama, housed dance festivals, and
annually produced a satiric revue, "The Grand
Street Follies."
2183. Hodge, Francis. Yankee theatre; the image
of America on the stage, 1825—1850. Austin,
University of Texas Press [1964] 320 p.
64-19417 PN2248.H6
306 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Bibliography: p. [273]— 296.
A study of native American comedy as a reflection
of New England character. The author examines
closely the careers of four American comedians —
James H. Hackett, George H. Hill, Dan Marble,
and Joshua Silsbee — who, as the famous "Stage
Yankees," performed throughout the United States
and in London. Hodge views their eccentric dialect
humor as an "honest exploitation of the materials
of American life for an audience in search of its own
identification." Other monographs on the history
of the 19th-century theater are Reese D. James'
Cradle of Culture, 1800—1810, the Philadelphia
Stage (Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania
Press [1957] 156 p.), Margaret G. Watson's Sil-
ver Theatre, Amusements of the Mining Frontier in
Early Nevada, 1850 to 1864 (Glendale, Calif., A. H.
Clark Co., 1964. 387 p.), Joseph Gallegly's Foot-
lights on the Border; the Galveston and Houston
Stage Before /poo ('s-Gravenhage, Mouton, 1962.
262 p.), and Alice H. Ernst's Trouping in the
Oregon Country; a History of Frontier Theatre
(Portland, Oregon Historical Society [1961] 197
p.).
2184. Lifson, David S. The Yiddish theatre in
America. New York, T. Yoseloff [1965]
659 p. illus. 64—17112 PN3035.L46 1965
Bibliography: p. 626—647.
Tracing the history of the Yiddish-language dra-
matic theater from its origins in the igth century to
its decline after 1940, the author reveals its depen-
dence on Central European writers, actors, directors,
producers, and audiences and demonstrates its com-
plexities, its development of such talented performers
as Paul Muni, and its applications of the theory of
German expressionism and the methods of the Stan-
islavsky school.
Biv. BIOGRAPHY: ACTORS AND
ACTRESSES
2185. Alpert, Hollis. The Barrymores. New
York, Dial Press, 1964. xviii, 397 p. illus.
64-20278 PN2285.A45
Bibliography: p. xvii-xviii.
A collective biography of the fascinating family
that predominated in the American theater for over
50 years, by the film critic for the Saturday Review.
After briefly discussing the lives of Mrs. John Drew,
John Drew, Jr., Georgie Drew, and her husband,
Maurice Barrymore, the author concentrates on the
three Barrymore children, Lionel, Ethel, and John.
Lionel was thought by many critics to be the most
important character actor of his period; Ethel was
often referred to as the "first lady of the theater";
and John's portrayals of Richard III and Hamlet
were considered to be among the finest ever ren-
dered. Elliott Nugent's Events Leading Up to the
Comedy (New York, Trident Press, 1965. 204 p.)
is the wry, dryly humorous autobiography of an
actor who became a playwright and wrote, with
James Thurber, The Male Animal (1940).
2186. Moody, Richard. Edwin Forrest, first star
of the American stage. New York, Knopf,
1960. 415 p. illus. 60-6648 PN2287.F6M57
Notes on sources: p. 408— [416]
Forrest (1806-1872) became a star with his por-
trayal of Othello in New York at the age of 20.
Subsequently, because of his powerful portrayals of
Lear, Coriolanus, and Spartacus, his reputation
spread across the country and to Europe. His later
life was embittered by the lengthy and scandalous
divorce proceedings that he and his wife brought
against each other and by a running feud with
British actor William C. Macready, which is closely
examined by Moody in The Astor Place Riot
(Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1958. 243
p.).
2187. Overmyer, Grace. America's first Hamlet.
Washington Square [New York] New
York University Press, 1957. 439 p. illus.
56-12391 PN2287-P25O8
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
389-414).
Bibliography: p. 423—431.
A biography of John Howard Payne (1791—1852)
that reveals extensive use of manuscript materials.
Remembered chiefly as the author of the words to
"Home, Sweet Home," Payne probably considered
these verses less important than many of his other
achievements. He was successful as translator, play-
wright, and actor; he collected information about
the Cherokee Indians and defended their interests;
and he served as United States consul in Tunisia.
Appearing as Hamlet in Boston in 1809, he became
the first native American to enact the role. Miss
Overmyer's biography is based to a large extent on
manuscript materials.
2188. Robbins, Phyllis. Maude Adams; an inti-
mate portrait. New York, Putnam [1956]
308 p. illus. 56-6625 PN2287-A4R6
The great popularity of James M. Barrie's senti-
mental comedies in the first two decades of the 20th
century was due in large part to the charm and
ability of Maude Adams (1872—1953), who acted
ENTERTAINMENT / 307
a wide range of parts in the stage productions of
Barrie's works, from Lady Babbie in The Little
Minister to the title role in Peter Pan. Miss Adams'
most enduring fame still rests on her portrayal of
the latter character. The author draws heavily
upon her long friendship with her subject but never
allows sentimentality or affection to cloud the bio-
graphy. Appended to the text are a genealogy of the
actress and a chronological list of her performances.
2189. Zolotow, Maurice. Stagestruck; the romance
of Alfred Lunt and Lynn Fontanne. New
York, Harcourt, Brace & World [1965] 278 p.
65-11995 PN2287.L8Z6
When Lunt, talented young star of Booth Tark-
ington's Clarence, married British-born actress Fon-
tanne in 1922, a partnership formed that was to
illuminate the American stage for the next 25 years.
During the twenties and thirties, the Lunts were
mainstays of the Theatre Guild and provided it
with deft performances of sophisticated comedies,
including Arms and the Man, by George Bernard
Shaw, and The Guardsman, by Ferenc Molnar.
They also proved their capabilities in such dramas
as There Shall Be No Night, by Robert E. Sherwood,
and The Visit, by Friedrich Durrenmatt. Zolotow,
drama critic and personal friend of the Lunts, pre-
sents an intimate, informal account, illustrated with
photographs of the pair in their most notable roles.
A large collection of pictures is offered in The Lunts;
an Illustrated Study of Their Wor\, With a List of
Their Appearances on Stage and Screen (New York,
Macmillan, 1958 [Ci957] 134 p. Theatre world
monograph no. 10), by George Freedley.
Bv. BIOGRAPHY: DIRECTORS,
PRODUCERS, ETC.
2190. Felheim, Marvin. The theater of Augustin
Daly; an account of the late nineteenth cen-
tury American stage. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1956. 329 p. illus.
56—7214 PN2287.D254F4
Daly (1838—1899) was one of the foremost Amer-
ican theater managers of the late i9th century.
Under his autocratic direction, his companies, whose
performers included Fanny Davenport, Ada Rehan,
John Drew, and Otis Skinner, achieved a high
degree of precision and style. He favored his own
melodramatic dramas, free adaptations of French
and German plays, and bowdlerizations of Shake-
speare. The author reviews the little that is known
of Daly's private life, then offers a detailed study of
his productions. The book is indexed, but for foot-
notes and bibliography the reader is referred to
Felheim's doctoral thesis in English at 'Harvard
University, "The Career of Augustin Daly" (1948).
2191. Gilroy, Frank D. About those roses; or,
How not to do a play and succeed, and the
text of The subject was roses. New York, Random
House [1965] 210 p.
65-17873 PS35i3.I6437S87
The author states that this book is for "those who
like fairy tales." Reviewers of the book called it
the story of a "miracle." In the form of excerpts
from Gilroy's journal, it describes how his three-
character play The Subject Was Roses was brought
to Broadway in a low-budget production starring
little-known actors, with a producer, a director, a
scenic artist, and a general manager, none of whom
had ever had a Broadway show. Opening at the
end of the season in May 1964, the play received
rave reviews, was supported financially by a devoted
few until it caught the attention of the public, and
in May 1965 won the Pulitzer Prize for drama.
Gilroy, who fought successfully to maintain the
integrity of his play in the face of commercial
expediency, tells the story with verve and humor.
In The Seesaw Log; a Chronicle of the Stage Pro-
duction, With the Text, of Two for the Seesaw
(New York, Knopf, 1959. 273 p.), William Gibson
recalls the trials of bringing another successful play
to the New York stage. Less fortunate than Gilroy
in his negotiations with producers and actors, Gib-
son was forced to make changes in conflict with
his conception of his play.
2192. Helburn, Theresa. A wayward quest; the
autobiography of Theresa Helburn. Boston,
Little, Brown [1960] 344 p. illus.
60-9333 PN2287.H4I5A3
Theresa Helburn (1887-1959) was probably in-
volved in the production of more Broadway plays
than any other woman in theater history. Shortly
after the founding of the Theatre Guild in 1919,
she became its executive director and, with Lawrence
Langner, was the driving force behind it for many
years. She elected to star Alfred Lunt and Lynn
Fontanne in their first joint roles in The Guardsman
(1924), by Ferenc Molnar. She also inspired and
backed Oklahoma! (1943), by Richard Rodgers and
Oscar Hammerstein, against the advice of most of
the New York theatrical world. Her autobiography,
completed after her death by Elinore Denniston,
serves as a history of the Broadway theater for a
period of more than 20 years.
3o8 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2193. Stevens, David H., ed. Ten talents in the
American theatre. Norman, University of
Oklahoma Press [1957] 299 p.
57-5960 PN2285.S725
A collection of essays on the theater by Robert E.
Card, Paul Baker, Alan Schneider, Margo Jones,
Frederic McConnell, Barclay Leathern, Gilmor
Brown, Leslie Cheek, Jr., George C. Izenour, and
Paul Green. As a director, producer, playwright,
designer, or technician, each author has been closely
identified with the American theater for more than
20 years. Several of them have been involved with
Broadway, but in general their interests have lain
in the development of grassroots theater where each
one has pioneered in a special field of endeavor.
C. Motion Pictures
Ci. HISTORY
2194. Griffith, Richard, and Arthur Mayer. The
movies; the sixty-year story of the world of
Hollywood and its effect on America, from pre-
nickelodeon days to the present. New York, Simon
& Schuster, 1957. 422 p. illus.
57-10977
Bibliography: 6th prelim, page.
Griffith, the curator of the Museum of Modern
Art Film Library, and Mayer, a veteran of the film
industry, have combined an authoritative text with
a collection of photographs taken primarily from
the Film Library's extensive holdings. More than
half of the book is devoted to the silent era; movies
of the last three decades receive sketchy treatment.
Paul Michael's compilation The Academy Awards:
A Pictorial History (Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill
[1964] 341 p.) includes a list of the winners in
each category from 1928, the year of the first awards,
to 1963. The Western, From Silents to Cinerama
(New York, Orion Press ["1962] 362 p.), by
George N. Fenin and William K. Everson, is a
historical, critical, and pictorial survey.
2195. Hendricks, Gordon. The Edison motion
picture myth. Berkeley, University of Cali-
fornia Press, 1961. 216 p. illus.
61-7532 TR848.H4
Bibliographical footnotes.
History and tradition have generally credited the
invention of the motion picture process to Thomas
A. Edison. After extensive examination of the
records of Edison's East Orange laboratory, Hen-
dricks concluded that William Kennedy Laurie
Dickson, one of Edison's assistants, actually invent-
ed the first motion picture apparatus, the Kineto-
scope, with little help or encouragement from
Edison. A day-by-day account of Dickson's work
from 1889 up to May 1891, when the Kinetoscope
made its public debut, is presented here. Dickson's
later contributions to other motion picture processes
such as the Mutoscope and the Biograph are de-
scribed in the same author's Beginnings of the
Biograph; the Story of the Invention of the Muto-
scope and the Biograph and Their Supplying Cam-
era (New York, Beginnings of the American Film,
1964. 78 p.).
_
2196. Knight, Arthur. The liveliest art; a pano-
ramic history of the movies. New York,
Macmillan, 1957. 383 p.
57—12222 PNi993.5.AiK6
The film industry was born almost simultaneous-
ly in the major countries of Europe and in the
United States. From the beginning, filmmakers
borrowed new techniques and copied successful
themes with little regard for national boundaries.
This survey by a noted lecturer and critic for the
Saturday Review traces the growth and influence of
foreign as well as American films. Knight is pri-
marily concerned with the development of the film
as an art form. He discusses the major directors
and shows how they creatively utilized such tech-
nological innovations as sound, color, and wide
screens. The technical aspects of filmmaking are
emphasized in Behind the Screen; the History and
Techniques of the Motion Picture (New York
[Delacorte Press, 1965] 528 p.), by Kenneth
Macgowan.
2197. Wagenknecht, Edward. The movies in the
age of innocence. Norman, University of
Oklahoma Press [1962] 280 p. illus.
62—16473 PNi993-5.AiW2
Bibliographical footnotes.
A nostalgic history of the silent films by a noted
literary historian who asserts that he has not written
a definitive work. His main objective is "to record
what the first motion pictures looked like to the
generation for which they were created." Discuss-
ing primarily those stars, directors, and pictures that
appeal to him personally, he devotes almost half of
his book to D. W. Griffith, Mary Pickford, and
Lillian Gish. Joe Franklin's Classics of the Silent
ENTERTAINMENT / 309
Screen; a Pictorial Treasury (New York, Citadel
Press [1960, "1959] 255 p.) surveys 50 films and
75 stars. A previously neglected topic in the history
of the motion picture in the United States is the
subject of Kalton C. Lahue's Continued Next WeeJ^;
a History of the Moving Picture Serial (Norman,
University of Oklahoma Press [1964?] 293 p.).
Cii. SPECIAL ASPECTS AND ANALYSES
2198. Agee, James. Agee on film. Drawings by
Tomi Ungerer. [New York] McDowell,
Obolensky [1958—60] 2 v.
58—12581 PNi993.5.AiA35
In addition to his novel, A Death in the Family
(1959), for which he won a Pulitzer Prize, Agee
(1909—1955) was well known for his film criticism
and his screenplays. The first volume of this
anthology includes all his film columns appearing
in The Nation from 1942 to 1948 and selections
from his reviews for Time between 1941 and 1948.
Although Agee could be bitingly critical, he pre-
ferred to look for qualities to admire. His reviews
reveal warmth and understanding in his attempts
to comprehend the aims and limitations of each
motion picture. The second volume contains his
film scripts for Noa Noa, The African Queen, The
Night of the Hunter, The Bride Comes to Yellow
S\y, and The Blue Hotel,
2199. Bluestone, George. Novels into film. Balti-
more, Johns Hopkins Press, 1957. 237 p.
illus. 57-8449 PNi997.85.B5
Bibliography: p. 221—228.
An analysis of the essential differences between
novels and films, as art forms and as vehicles for
entertainment. The author points out that the
novel is a linguistic medium. Furthermore, its
audience is often a relatively small, well-educated
class, and its length is highly flexible. The film, on
the other hand, is primarily visual, must reach a
wide audience to be commercially successful, and is
constrained by limitations in viewing time. The
author closely examines six films based on novels —
The Informer, Wuthering Heights, Pride and Pre-
judice, The Grapes of Wrath, The Ox-Bow Incident,
and Madame Bovary — and shows what happened to
the original stories in their conversion to motion
pictures. His conclusion, sustained by these exam-
ples, is that "the filmist becomes not a translator for
an established author, but a new author in his own
right."
2200. Crowther, Bosley. The lion's share; the
story of an entertainment empire. New
York, Dutton, 1957. 320 p.
57-5325
Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer resulted from the merger
of several small struggling companies in 1924, with
Louis B. Mayer as vice president and general man-
ager in charge of film production. Through the
thirties and forties, the studio prospered with pol-
ished productions and the largest group of stars in
Hollywood, including Greta Garbo, Jean Harlow,
Lon Chancy, Norma Shearer, Clark Gable, Spencer
Tracy, Mickey Rooney, and Judy Garland. It was
not until the advent of television that this "enter-
tainment empire" began to decline, primarily be-
cause of its inability to adjust to new conditions.
Crowther, a motion-picture critic for the New Yorf(
Times, tells the colorful story of the rise of the
studio. He describes the early struggles to develop
talking pictures, the remarkable career of Mayer's
brilliant assistant Irving Thalberg, and the filming
of such notable pictures as the first Ben Hur and
Gone With the Wind. Much of the same material
can be found in the author's Hollywood Rajah; the
Life and Times of Louis B. Mayer (New York, Holt
[1960] 339 p.), which carries the account up to
the time of Mayer's death in October 1957.
2201. Hall, Ben M. The best remaining seats; the
story of the golden age of the movie palace.
New York, C. N. Potter [1961] 266 p. illus.
61-11763 NA6845.H3
With the emergence of the full-length motion
picture as entertainment for all social classes, enter-
prising showmen began to build palatial theaters in
large cities. Epitomized by the Roxy ("The Cathe-
dral of the Motion Picture"), which Samuel Lionel
Rothafel opened in New York in 1927, these lavish-
ly decorated theaters featured — along with the main
film — chorus lines, ballets, full orchestras, Wur-
litzer organs, and platoons of drilled ushers. In
addition to the Roxy, among the more spectacular
buildings were the Rivoli and the Rialto in New
York, the Paradise and the Avalon in Chicago, and
the Fox in San Francisco. Hall's account is actually
an obituary, for with the decline in movie audi-
ences, most of the palaces have been torn down.
Numerous photographs of theaters and facsimiles
of playbills, programs, and advertisements accom-
pany the text.
2202. Schumach, Murray. The face on the cutting
room floor; the story of movie and television
censorship. New York, Morrow, 1964. 305 p.
illus. 64-17880 PNi994.A2S3
Ever since the movies became a favorite American
entertainment, they have been subjected to censor-
ship by religious organizations, minority groups,
government bodies, and cautious film producers.
The author describes the scandals of the twenties that
provoked the first public demand for censorship,
3IO / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the establishment of the Motion Picture Production
Code and its implementation, the Congressional
probes of the film industry and the unacknowledged
blacklist that resulted, instances in which protesting
groups were able to have "offensive" segments of
film deleted, and instances in which ingenious
filmmakers circumvented existing prohibitions.
One chapter is devoted to television censorship,
which has often tended to discourage programs on
controversial subjects. Schumach concludes that the
Motion Picture Production Code has shown remark-
able flexibility in adjusting to the changing mores
of society; he strongly advocates, however, a volun-
tary system of classification for both movies and
television. An appendix describes censorship prac-
tices in foreign countries and includes the text of
the Production Code.
Ciii. BIOGRAPHY: ACTORS
AND ACTRESSES
2203. Noble, Peter. The fabulous Orson Welles.
London, Hutchinson [1956] 276 p.
57-580 PN2287.W456N6 1956
Welles became famous in 1938 when his Mercury
Theatre radio broadcast of The War of the Worlds
panicked many half-attentive listeners into believing
the United States had been invaded by Martians.
Later his film productions of Citizen Kane, in
which he starred, and The Magnificent Ambersons,
which he directed but in which he did not appear,
exhibited original techniques in narration, wide-
angle photography, dramatic lighting, functional
music, and overlapping dialogue. His subsequent
work as a writer, actor, director, and producer
has taken place more often in Europe than in the
United States. Although critics tend to agree that
he has never attained the creative fulfillment prom-
ised by youthful achievements, his total contribu-
tion has had a lasting impression on American
cinematic art and entertainment. This biography
conveys the energetic personality of the man, his
brilliance, his foibles, and his diversity of interests.
Civ. BIOGRAPHY: DIRECTORS,
PRODUCERS, ETC.
2204. De Mille, Cecil B. Autobiography. Edited
by Donald Hayne. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,
Prentice-Hall [1959] 465 p. illus.
59-15367 PNi998.A3D37
The motion picture career of director-producer
Cecil B. De Mille covered more than 40 years, from
The Squaw Man (1914), one of the earliest features
to be made in Hollywood, to the highly popular
film The Ten Commandments (1956). He is pri-
marily remembered as the producer of super-
spectacles replete with thousands of extras and laced
generously with sexual symbols. One of the reasons
for his phenomenal success was his uncanny ability
to sense what the general public would demand in
new films. Hayne, a longtime member of De Mille's
staff, selected and arranged materials for this auto-
biography from notes and preliminary drafts pre-
prepared by De Mille before his death. The
narrative recalls the highlights of De Mille's career
and the many prominent motion picture figures with
whom he worked. Phil A. Koury's Yes, Mr. De
Mille (New York, Putnam [1959] 319 p.)> with its
portrait of the temperamental, sometimes irascible,
director, provides a balance to De Mille's recollec-
tions.
D. Other Forms of Entertainment
Di. RADIO AND TELEVISION
2205. Allen, Steve. The funny men. New York,
Simon & Schuster, 1956. 279 p.
56—7492 PNi 992.4. A2A7
The author, a "funny man" fascinated by the art
of his profession, informally and sympathetically
analyzes the personalities and script materials of 16
successful television comedians. They are "not
necessarily the funniest or the most important" per-
formers, Allen asserts; they were selected because he
happened to have a "certain number of things to
say" about them. They are Fred Allen, Jack Benny,
Milton Berle, Red Buttons, Sid Caesar, Eddie Can-
tor, Wally Cox, Jackie Gleason, George Gobel,
Arthur Godfrey, Bob Hope, Sam Levenson, Jerry
Lewis, Groucho Marx, Phil Silvers, and Red Skelton.
John Henry Faulk's Fear on Trial (New York,
Simon & Schuster, 1964. 398 p.) is the account of
an ordeal experienced by a humorist who, upon
being blacklisted for alleged Communist activities,
lost his position as a radio performer with the Co-
lumbia Broadcasting System and who eventually,
with Louis Nizer as his attorney, won a suit for
damages.
ENTERTAINMENT / 31 1
Dii. THE DANCE IN AMERICA
2206. Maynard, Olga. The American ballet. Phil-
adelphia, Macrae Smith Co. ['1959] 353 p.
59-13260
Bibliographical footnotes: p. 337—342.
From the time of Augusta Maywood, who made
her debut in 1837, the United States produced indi-
vidual dancers of excellence; with the eventual
establishment of companies, a distinctive American
ballet emerged. The author describes the develop-
ment and operation of the New York City Ballet,
the Ballets Russes de Monte Carlo (which was
founded in Europe but moved to America in 1938),
the American Ballet Theatre, and a number of
smaller companies. She views love as the predomi-
nant theme in American ballet and supports her
opinion with discussions of Billy the Kid, Rodeo,
Fancy Free, Fall River Legend, and The Cage. Lew
Christensen, Eugene Loring, Agnes De Mille, and
Jerome Robbins serve as representative choreogra-
phers; the School of American Ballet in New York
and the American School of Dance in Hollywood
illustrate, respectively, "Classic" training and "Free-
style" training. George Balanchine, head of the
School of American Ballet and choreographer for
the New York City Ballet, is the subject of Bernard
Taper's Balanchine (New York, Harper & Row
[Ci963] 342 p.). In And Promenade Home (Bos-
ton, Litde, Brown [1958] 301 p.), Agnes De
Mille continues the autobiographical account begun
in Dance to the Piper (1952), no. 4970 in the 1960
Guide.
2207. Terry, Walter. The dance in America.
New York, Harper [1956] 248 p. illus.
56-8767
The author, veteran dance critic of the New
Herald Tribune, briefly sketches the history of the
dance from its uses by the American Indian to its
place in ballet, musical theater, motion pictures, and
television today. He emphasizes modern dance and
the influence of such artists as Isadora Duncan, Ruth
St. Denis, Ted Shawn, Martha Graham, and Doris
Humphrey. Jack Mitchell's American Dance Port-
folio (New York, Dodd, Mead [1964] 128. p.) con-
sists of black-and-white photographs from the files
of a highly acclaimed dance photographer.
2208. Terry, Walter. Isadora Duncan; her life, her
art, her legacy. New York, Dodd, Mead
[1964, Ci963] xiv, 174 p. illus.
64-10954 GVi785.D8T4
Bibliography: p. 169.
From humble beginnings in California to her acci-
dental death in Nice, Isadora Duncan lived a tempes-
tuous and rebellious life. She brought to the world
of dance a new freedom and a zest for experiment.
The author evaluates her career, her philosophy,
and her enduring influence on the modern dance.
A more detailed biography is Allan R. Macdougall's
Isadora; a Revolutionary in Art and Love (Edin-
burgh, New York, T. Nelson [1960] 296 p.). In-
formal autobiographies by two recent dance per-
formers are Ted Shawn's One Thousand and One
Night Stands (Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1960.
228 p.) and Fred Astaire's Steps in Time (New
York, Harper [1959] 338 p.).
Diii. VAUDEVILLE AND BURLESQUE
2209. McLean, Albert F. American vaudeville as
ritual. [Lexington, Ky.] University of
Kentucky Press [1965] xvii, 250 p.
65-11830 PNi968.U5M3
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
223-238).
The author examines audiences, performers, and
performances in an attempt to "make sense and
some sort of order out of the tinsel and glitter known
as vaudeville" and concludes that it was a "ritualistic
enactment charged with symbols of the social be-
liefs and attitudes of the American industrial civi-
lization." "Its place in American life was neither
that of a crude monument to national vitality and
gaiety, nor was it simply a kind of relaxation. In-
stead it served as a means of assimilation and
crystallization of very important and historically
significant value judgments upon life in an expand-
ing industrial democracy. Vaudeville, in short, was
one way by which the American people, passing
through a neoprimitive stage, sought perspectives
upon their common experience." A Pictorial His-
tory of Vaudeville (New York, Citadel Press [1961]
224 p.), by Bernard Sobel, is a nostalgic panorama
of the personalities who toured the circuits. Fred
Allen's autobiographical Much Ado About Me (Bos-
ton, Little, Brown [1956] 380 p.) covers his
years in vaudeville and theater to 1928.
02 1 o. Sobel, Bernard. A pictorial history of bur-
lesque. New York, Putnam [1956] 194 p.
56—10246 PN 1 947.86
"When it reached its peak in the early years of
this century, burlesque was a composite entertain-
ment that took its components from the minstrel
show, variety, extravaganza, comedy 'bits,' and extra
added attractions such as boxing bouts and the
hootchykootchy." Sobel's story begins with "Lydia
Thompson and her British Blondes," who came to
New York in 1869, and essentially ends with the
inability of Morton and Herbert K. Minsky to renew
their license to operate a theater in New York in
312 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1939. One of the causes of the decline of burlesque
was the appearance of revues, which the author
characterizes as "lacquered burlesque." A famous
revue is described, with many illustrations, by Mar-
jorie Farns worth in The Ziegjeld Follies (New
York, Putnam [1956] 194 p.). In Gypsy, a Mem-
oir (New York, Harper [1957] 337 p.)> Gypsy
Rose Lee, one of burlesque's most popular stars,
recalls her rise to fame. The Night They Raided
Minsk's ( [New York] Simon & Schuster, 1960.
351 p.), by Rowland Barber, combines research and
a free imagination to recapture the flamboyance of
burlesque in the mid-twenties.
Div. SHOWBOATS, CIRCUSES, ETC.
221 1. Chindahl, George L. A history of the circus
in America. Caldwell, Idaho, Caxton Prin-
ters, 1959. 279 p. illus. 58—5336 GVi8o3.C47
Bibliography: p. 272—279.
The spectacular bigness of the combination show
became the distinctive characteristic of the circus in
the United States. Beginning with the display of
wild animals in the early i8th century, the author
traces the evolution of the circus and points out
factors determining its form and quality. The book
has no index, but the table of contents is extensive,
and an appendix lists American circuses and their
dates. Robert W. G. Vail's Random Notes on the
History of the Early American Circus (Barre, Mass.,
Barre Gazette, 1956. 92 p.), drawn largely from the
rich circus research materials in the library of the
American Antiquarian Society, is devoted to the
development of the circus in the i8th and early i9th
centuries. John and Alice Durant's Pictorial History
of the American Circus (New York, A. S. Barnes
[X957] 328 P-) re-creates the story of the circus
through reproductions of photographs and circus
advertisements and artwork. The One-Horse Show
(Jamestown, N.Y. [1962] 434 p.), by John C.
Kunzog, is the biography of Dan Rice, one of Amer-
ica's first well-known clowns and a circus operator
for four decades beginning in the 1840*5.
2212. North, Henry Ringling, and Alden Hatch.
The circus kings; our Ringling family story.
Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1960. 383 p. illus.
60-8877 GVi82i.R5N6
An intimate history of the Ringlings and the
Norths and their devotion to the circus world. The
Ringling Brothers show began in 1871 in Baraboo,
Wis., with a five-cent admission price and a domestic
goat as the star performer; it became, at its zenith,
the traveling "Big Top" of Ringling Brothers-
Barnum & Bailey Combined Shows, the "Greatest
Show on Earth." Today it is an indoor spectacle
displayed for a season of n months. The key
figures in the story are John Ringling, the most fa-
mous of five brothers, and his nephew, John Ring-
ling North, who became the president of the
company in 1937 and adapted it successfully to
modern conditions. The tents were abandoned, for
example, because the increasingly congested cities had
no fields large enough to accommodate the circus, its
performers, and its equipment. Coauthor Henry
Ringling North, a brother of John Ringling North,
retired as vice president in 1958. A Ticket to the
Circus (Seattle, Superior Pub. Co. [1959] 184 p.),
by Charles P. Fox, is a pictorial history of the
"incredible Ringlings." The Fabulous Showman
(New York, Knopf, 1959. 317 p.), by Irving Wal-
lace, is a biography of the American impresario and
showman, the master of humbuggery, Phineas T.
Barnum.
2213. Russell, Don. The lives and legends of
Buffalo Bill. Norman, University of Okla-
homa Press [1960] 514 p.
60—13470 F594.C6867
Bibliography: p. 482—503.
William F. Cody was an all-round champion of
the westward expansion movement, "that great
rodeo of the plains and the mountains in the last
half of the i9th century." He was scout, Indian
fighter, cowboy, hunter, horseman, wagon driver,
dime-novel hero, and showman. In a carefully
documented biography of "a great liar in the Mark
Twain style," the author stresses the drama of
Cody's career and the melodrama of his legend.
Buffalo Bill's Wild West Show— his "historical
and educational exhibition" — was an original and
distinctly American type of entertainment. Al-
though public interest in such shows declined rapid-
ly after Cody's death in 1917, their influence lives
on in the television and motion-picture images of
cowboy and Indian.
XX
Sports and Recreation
A. General
B. Community and Scholastic Activities
C. Particular Sports and Recreations
Ci. Auto-Racing and Motoring
Cii. Baseball
Ciii. Boating
Civ. Boxing
Cv. Football
Cvi. Golf and Tennis
Cvii. Horse-Racing
Cviii. Miscellaneous
D. General Field Sports
2214—2220
2221—2224
2225—2227
2228—2235
2236—2240
2241—2247
¥
2248—2254
2255—2258
2259—2260
2261—2267
2268—2274
*•
THE SECTION devoted to general works on sports and recreation is proportionately equal in
size to the same section in the 1960 Guide and includes a study of sport as a social pheno-
menon, a pictorial sports history, the reminiscences of an eminent sportswriter, a selection of
sports writings from a popular magazine, and an introduction to outdoor sports. Also in this
section are a general history of recreation and an analysis of increasing leisure as a social
problem.
The section on community and scholastic activi-
ties has the same number of entries as the parallel
section in the 1960 Guide and thus is proportionately
larger. Community recreation, general recreation,
college athletics, and athletics at Harvard University
are the respective subjects of the four entries. The
number of entries on particular sports and recrea-
tions is also proportionately greater than the number
in the 1960 Guide. The major increases are in the
respective subsections on baseball, boating, and mis-
cellaneous sports, the last of which includes entries
on three sports — basketball, bicycling, and rowing
— not represented by separate publications in the
1960 Guide.
The section on general field sports is proportion-
ately smaller than in the 1960 Guide and is devoted
entirely to hunting and fishing.
A. General
2214. Boyle, Robert H. Sport: mirror of Ameri-
can life. Boston, Little, Brown [1963]
293 p. 63-17429 GV583.B6
"Bibliographical note": p. [2771—286.
An analysis of the social and psychological roots
of sport in the United States and its impact on daily
living. The author relates sport to such disparate
topics as social status, race relations, business life,
automobile design, clothing style, language, and
ethical values and examines such subjects as the
Negro in baseball, the hot-rod cult, the country
club, and the latest of the annual (since 1875)
313
3*4 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Harvard- Yale football contests. The final chapter
is devoted to a study of Gilbert Patten's fictional
character Frank Merriwell, the "unreal ideal" sports-
man who, from 1896 to 1914, "performed un-
matchable feats of derring-do in Tip Top Weekly,
the most widely read nickel novel" of the time.
2215. Dulles, Foster Rhea. A history of recreation;
America learns to play. 2d ed. New York,
Appleton-Century-Crofts [1965] xvii, 446 p.
65-25489 £161.0852 1965
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 401-434).
An updated edition of America Learns To Play; a
History of Popular Recreation, no. 4985 in the 1960
Guide.
2216. Durant, John, and Otto Bettmann. Pictorial
history of American sports, from colonial
times to the present. Rev. ed. [New York] Barnes
[1965] 312 p. illus.
64-21453 GV583.D85 1965
An updated edition of no. 4986 in the 1960 Guide.
2217. Larrabee, Eric, and Rolf Meyersohn, eds.
Mass leisure. Glencoe, 111., Free Press
[1958] 429 p. 58-9397 GV53.L3
"A comprehensive bibliography on leisure, 1900—
1958 ... by Rolf Meyersohn, with the assistance
of Marilyn Marc": p. 389—419.
Wealth was formerly the basis of a leisure class,
but modern mechanization has provided leisure in
varying degrees to all classes. This volume is con-
cerned with leisure as a social phenomenon and as
a problem. Such contributors as Bertrand Russell,
Margaret Mead, and Aldous Huxley, among others,
review the possibilities for using leisure fruitfully.
People interested in the opportunities for self-culti-
vation in music, literature, and the arts have no
problem, but others, lacking preparation to meet in-
creasing leisure, may be faced with a great empti-
ness. The authors discuss desirable methods of
filling this emptiness, offer statistics on the present
usage of leisure, and note the fusion of work and
leisure in the modern industrial society. Margaret
E. Mulac's Hobbies; the Creative Use of Leisure
(New York, Harper [1959] 271 p.) surveys briefly
the hobbies falling into four categories — making,
collecting, doing, and learning — and provides lists
of readings.
2218. The Saturday Evening Post. Sport U.S.A.;
the best from The Saturday Evening Post.
Edited by Harry T. Paxton. New York, Nelson
[1961] 463 p. illus. 61—12630 GV576.S3
A selection of 61 articles, stories, and autobio-
graphical sketches published between 1901 and 1961
and touching upon virtually every sport. Other
compilations are Sports: The American Scene;
Memorable Moments From the Pages of Sports Illus-
trated (New York, McGraw-Hill [1963] 283 p.),
edited by Robert M. Smith; The World of Sport,
the Best From Sport Magazine (New York, Holt,
Rinehart & Winston [1962] 358 p.), edited by Al
Silverman; Sportsu/riters' Choice; Their Best Stories,
as Selected b\ the Authors (New York, A. S.
Barnes [1958] 332 p.), edited by Richard P. Gold-
man; The Grantland Rice Award Prize Sports
Stories (Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1962. 345
p.), edited by Robert M. Smith; Best of the Best
Sports Stories (New York, Dutton, 1964. 480 p.),
edited by Irving T. Marsh and Edward Ehre; and
The Best of Red Smith (New York, J. L. Pratt
[1963] 184 p. The American sports library), by
Walter W. Smith.
2219. Sports Illustrated (New Yor^). Book of the
outdoors. Text by John O'Reilly. New
York, Golden Press [1959] 322 p. (A Ridge
Press book) 59—14665 SK6oi.S78
As the Nation's population shifts toward the en-
gulfing megalopolis, Americans show an increasing
inclination to spend their leisure time in the out-
doors. This book, containing many illustrations in
color, is designed to provide a perspective of the
broad range of recreational environments from
coastal waters to inland lakes, streams, forests, plains,
mountains, and deserts. Outdoor pastimes as diverse
in appeal as water-skiing and bird-watching are
depicted. The Spectacle of Sport, From Sports Illus-
trated (Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall, 1957.
317 p.), compiled and edited by Norton Wood,
aims at capturing the kaleidoscopic view of the wide
variety of sport. Among the authors represented
are William Saroyan (baseball), William Faulkner
(horse-racing), and A. J. Liebling (boxing).
2220. Tunis, John R. The American way in
sport. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce
[1958] i8op. 58-12268 GV583/T8
Drawing on the experiences of a lifetime spent as
a player and reporter of various sports, the author
critically examines the growth and maturity of
sport in a society that has pursued it with an inten-
sity and devotion equaled in no other. Once played
in an almost casual manner, such games as baseball,
football, basketball, and even golf and tennis have
become, at the most expert levels, big-business, mass-
spectator exhibitions. The author categorically de-
nounces "spectatoritis" and the profit motive as
having corrupted games and distorted the original
notions of their purpose in society. He is not
SPORTS AND RECREATION / 315
against competitive athletics; he is against extreme
commercialism in sport and against its deplorable
overemphasis in the educational system. He sug-
gests the possible separation of so-called amateur
athletics from education by the establishment of
training schools to turn out champion athletes for
entertainment purposes. Students interested pri-
marily in obtaining an education would attend
schools that stressed learning but permitted sports
for exercise and relaxation.
B. Community and Scholastic Activities
2221. Butler, George D. Introduction to commu-
nity recreation, prepared for the National
Recreation Association. 3d ed. New York,
McGraw-Hill, 1959. 577 p.
59-8531 GVi7i.B85 1959
An updated edition of no. 4997 in the 1960
Guide.
2222. Carlson, Reynold E., Theodore R. Deppe,
and Janet R. MacLean. Recreation in Amer-
ican life. Belmont, Calif., Wadsworth Pub. Co.
[1963] 530 p. 63-8481 GV53.C3
A textbook on recreation, "its philosophy, histori-
cal background, leadership, organization, and pro-
gram." The authors discuss the responsibility of
families, schools, voluntary youth organizations,
churches, industrial corporations, and local, State,
and Federal governments to cooperate in develop-
ing recreation opportunities and facilities. The
need for professional leadership is asserted, stand-
ards for recreation professionals are suggested,
pros and cons of program planning are outlined,
and ii categories of possible recreational activities
(from sports and outdoor recreation to drama and
music) are explored. The many facets of recreation
in an era of rapid change furnish the themes of
Spotlight on Recreation U.S.A.: Recreation in a
Mobile America ( [New York, National Recreation
Association, 1962] 135 p.) , which consists of papers
presented at the 43d National Recreation Congress
in Detroit, 1961, and Recreation in the Age of Auto-
mation (Philadelphia, American Academy of Politi-
cal and Social Science, 1957. 208 p. Its Annals,
v. 313), a volume of essays. Detailed information
on the Nation's present and potential recreational
facilities is in the U.S. Outdoor Recreation Resources
Review Commission's 27 study reports (Washing-
ton, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1962. 29 v.) and its
final assessment, Outdoor Recreation for America, a
Report to the President and to the Congress (Wash-
ington, 1962. 245 p.).
2223. Christenson, Ade. The verdict of the score-
board; a study of the values and practices
underlying college athletics today. New York,
American Press ['1958] 190 p.
58-13844 GV7o6.C47
A rhetorical plea by a 35-year veteran of college
athletics coaching and administration to change the
concept of college sports from one of professional
entertainment back to one of wholesome amateur
competition. In the author's opinion, the score-
board has become master, and overwhelming pres-
sures to win have made victory an end to be attained
by practically any means; the coach is "told to win,
asked to recruit — but not to get caught." Christen-
son firmly believes that intercollegiate sports have a
role well worth preserving, but he laments the
"establishment of scholarships, grants, free rides
[secret subsidies to student athletes] and gift con-
vertibles, as living testimony to what is considered
important in American education."
2224. Movius, Geoffrey H., ed. The second H
book of Harvard athletics, 1923—1963. Cam-
bridge, Harvard Varsity Club, 1964. xvii, 941 p.
64-17169 GV69I.H3M6
A continuation of the narrative begun in a much
earlier work, The H Boof^ of Harvard Athletics,
1852-1922 (1923), edited by John A. Blanchard.
The new volume includes articles on football, soccer,
basketball, boxing (dropped by Harvard as an inter-
collegiate sport after 1937), fencing, hockey, skiing,
squash, swimming, wrestling, baseball, crew, light-
weight crew, golf, lacrosse, rugby, sailing, tennis,
and track and cross country. Photographs, team
statistics, and a list of players awarded the major
letter "H" supplement the text. James E. Pollard's
Ohio State Athletics, 1879- 7959 ( [Columbus, 1959]
306 p.) is a detailed history of a program that is
representative, in a general way, of intercollegiate
and intramural sports programs in many large uni-
versities throughout the country.
316 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
C. Particular Sports and Recreations
Ci. AUTO-RACING AND MOTORING
2225. Bentley, John. Great American automo-
biles; a dramatic account of their achieve-
ments in competition. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,
Prentice-Hall [1957] 374 p. illus.
57—8467 GVi 029.64
Confining his scope to the first three decades of
the 2Oth century, the author offers an abundance of
semitechnical details on the various models of motor-
cars, shows the speed records set on Florida's Day-
tona Beach, and describes the numerous races of
the period, including such classic events as the Van-
derbilt Cup, the Glidden Tours, the 1908 New
York to Paris marathon, and the first Indianapolis
500. He also traces the work of the designers who
developed the American competition automobile,
among them Alexander Winton, James W. Packard,
and Harry C. Stutz. Road racing is the subject of
The Checkered Flag (New York, Scribner [1961]
178 p.), by Peter Helck, whose drawings com-
plement his narrative of the exploits of men and
machines from the first race between Chicago and
Evanston in 1895 through America's participation
in the European Bennett Race (1900—1905) into the
annual classics: the Vanderbilt Cup (1904—16) and
the American Grand Prize (1908—16). The story
of a group of enthusiasts who kept road racing alive
during the thirties and paved the way for modern
sports car racing is told in John C. Rueter's Amer-
ican Road Racing; the Automobile Racing Club of
America in the 1930'* (New York, Barnes [1963]
139 p.).
2226. Bloemker, Al. 500 miles to go; the story of
the Indianapolis Speedway. New York,
Coward-McCann [1961] 287 p. illus.
61-6839 GVio29.B55
The author, publicity director of the Speedway,
describes in detail its inception, ownership, and
management, the individual races and drivers, the
cars and their builders, and the mechanical evolu-
tion of the automobiles. He reveals that in the 44
contests staged between 1911 and 1960, the average
winning speed gradually increased from 74.59 miles
an hour to 138.78 and the duration of the race less-
ened from nearly seven hours to little more than
3.5. Additional accounts of the annual Memorial
Day spectacle and its home are provided by Brock
Yates in The Indianapolis 500; the Story of the
Motor Speedway, rev. "Golden Anniversary" ed.
(New York, Harper [1961] 182 p.), and Famous
Indianapolis Cars and Drivers (New York, Harper
[1960] 219 p.). Photographs by Bob Verlin and
a brief accompanying text by Angelo Angelopolous
have been combined in The Race (Indianapolis,
Bobbs-Merrill [1958] unpaged) to re-create the set-
ting, mood, and experiences of the modern 5oo-mile
race.
2227. Nolan, William F. Barney Oldfield; the life
and times of America's legendary speed
king. New York, Putnam [1961] 251 p. illus.
61-12739 GVio32.O4N6
During the late 1890*5 Oldfield was a successful
bicycle racer, but in 1902 victory in his first motor-
car race marked the beginning of a flamboyant
career that spread his name across the country and
helped popularize the automobile before it reached
the masses. In 1903 he became the first to drive a
gas-powered car a mile a minute, and in the next
15 years he placed his name beside almost every
record on the books and in the winning column of
almost every race. In this popular biography the
author covers Oldfield's professional racing career
and describes his turbulent nature, his weakness for
alcohol, his three marriages, his relationships with
industrialists and film actors of his time, and his
several business ventures. In May 1946 Oldfield was
honored at Detroit's Golden Jubilee as one of the
Nation's automotive pioneers; four months later he
died of a cerebral hemorrhage. The racing careers
of three of America's top drivers since World War
II are the respective subjects of the same author's
Phil Hill: Yankee Champion; First American to
Win the Driving Championship of the World (New
York, Putnam [1963, '1962] 256 p.); Challenger,
Mickey Thompson's Own Story of His Life of
Speed (Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall [1964]
237 p.), by Mickey Thompson with the assistance
of Griffith Borgeson; and Adventure on Wheels;
the Autobiography of a Road Racing Champion
(New York, Putnam [1959] 284 p.), by John
Fitch with the assistance of William F. Nolan.
Cii. BASEBALL
2228. Allen, Lee. The American League story.
Rev. ed. New York, Hill & Wang [1965]
258 p. illus. 65-17425 GV875.Ai5A45 1965
SPORTS AND RECREATION
/ 317
2229. Allen, Lee. The National League story; the
official history. Rev. ed. New York, Hill &
Wang [1965] 293 p. illus.
65-17426 GV875-A3A7 1965
The author writes of the players, managers, own-
ers, presidents, and commissioners whose abilities
and personalities have contributed to the develop-
ment and color of baseball's National League and
American League, founded in 1876 and 1901 re-
spectively. He also treats famous games, plays, and
teams, as well as the intermittent periods of glory,
tragedy, and scandal that have been the lot of both
leagues. The longstanding rivalry between two
well-known National League teams is the theme of
another book by the same author, The Giants and
the Dodgers, the Fabulous Story of Baseball's Fiercest
Feud (New York, Putnam [1964] 255 p.). The
annual postseason contest between the pennant win-
ners of each league is one of the Nation's foremost
sports spectacles; its origin and history are explored
by John Durant in Highlights of the World Series
(New York, Hastings House [1963] 187 p.) and
by Frederick G. Lieb in The Story of the World
Series (New York, Putnam [1965] 438 p.). The
notorious scandal that erupted when eight members
of the Chicago White Sox club conspired to throw
a series to the Cincinnati Reds is the subject of
Eliot Asinofs Eight Men Out; the Blac\ Sox and
the 79/9 World Series (New York, Holt, Rinehart &
Winston [1963] 302 p.).
2230. Cobb, Tyrus R. My life in baseball; the true
record, by Ty Cobb, with Al Stump. Gar-
den City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1961. 283 p. illus.
61-12504 GV865.C6A3
The author, regarded by many as the greatest
baseball player of all time, set more than 90 records
in a lengthy career (1905—28) with the Detroit
Tigers and the Philadelphia Athletics. His book
was written in part to dispel the legend that he had
been "a spike-slashing demon of the diamond with
a wide streak of cruelty in his nature." He recounts
many of his own experiences, reminisces about other
great players, and offers outspoken opinions of to-
day's game, which he regards as inferior to that of
his own time. Two other autobiographical accounts
by record-setting performers are My War With Base-
ball (New York, Coward-McCann [1962] 253 p.),
by Rogers Hornsby and Bill Surface, and Stan
Musial: "The Man's" Own Story (Garden City,
N.Y., Doubleday, 1964. 328 p.), by Stanley F. Mu-
sial as told to Robert M. Broeg. Hornsby, one of
the greatest batters in National League history,
mingles reminiscences and anecdotes with acid com-
ments on the national sport and the way it is played.
Musial, a National League star of more recent times,
is considerably less critical of the sport that made
him famous and of his fellow players than are Cobb
and Hornsby. His book is a straightforward narra-
tive of his career from obscure beginnings in a
Pennsylvania steel town to national renown.
2231. Graham, Frank. The New York Yankees,
an informal history. New and rev. ed. New
York, Putnam [1958] 352 p.
58-9514 GV875.N4G7 1958
The Yankees were not remarkably successful dur-
ing their first two decades, but between 1921 and
1959 they captured 24 pennants and 18 world cham-
pionships— a record unapproached by any other
club in baseball. Graham chronicles the founding
and fortunes of the club and sketches the personal-
ities of its chief officials and players. In The Yankee
Story (New York, Dutton, 1960. 224 p.), Thomas
Meany concentrates on the people who played domi-
nant roles in the team's history. Casey at the Bat
(New York, Random House [1962] 254 p.), by
Casey Stengel, is an account of the author's 50 years
in baseball, emphasizing his 12 years (1949—60) as
Yankee manager, during which the team won 10
pennants and seven world championships.
2232. Gregory, Paul M. The baseball player: an
economic study. Washington, Public Af-
fairs Press [1956] 213 p. 56-6598 GV88o.G7
"Baseball as a part of our American culture is
intimately related to capitalism and democracy,"
and in this study by a professor of economics at
the University of Alabama, emphasis is placed on
the "analysis and interpretation of baseball as a
game, a business, and an occupation." The author
examines the worth of a player in terms of such
standards as performance and gate appeal, discusses
the financial rewards of playing, examines the in-
dustry's legal structure with particular reference to
players' contracts and baseball law, traces the stormy
development of player-management relations from
the early unions to the present representative system,
describes the players' job opportunities after retire-
ment, and delineates theories and principles of base-
ball economics. The Long Season (New York, Har-
per [1960] 273 p.) is an informal journal of the
experiences of Jim Brosnan, a pitcher who started
the 1959 season with the St. Louis Cardinals and
finished with the Cincinnati Reds.
2233. Meany, Thomas. There've been some
changes in the world of sports. New York,
Nelson [1962] 313 p. 61—12631 GVi 91^37
The author believes that baseball, as well as most
other sports, is played better today than it was in
1923, when he began covering the Brooklyn
Dodgers. He reminisces about the many sports
318 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
events and personalities he observed in 40 years of
sports writing and he discusses the modifications in
the style of play of individual games and the dras-
tic -changes in the general environment of the world
of sport, brought about by such innovations as radio,
arc lights (permitting night play), air travel, and
television. Many sports are touched on in these
memoirs, but baseball was and is the author's forte.
Thirty-two of his magazine articles (1939—57) are
reprinted in Mostly Baseball (New York, Barnes
[1958] 441 p.); 25 of them deal with baseball
topics and the rest are scattered among hockey, golf,
football, horse-racing, boxing, and basketball. Four
baseball anthologies of varying aim and scope are
The Fireside Boot( of Baseball (New York, Simon
& Schuster, 1956. 394 p.) and The Second Fireside
Boo^ of Baseball (New York, Simon & Schuster,
1958. 395 p.), two collections of nonfiction, fiction,
and poetry that span the game's entire history, se-
lected and edited by Charles Einstein; The Best of
Baseball; the Game's Immortal Men and Moments
as Selected From Baseball Magazine (New York,
Putnam [1956] 248 p.), 38 articles (1908—56)
selected by Sidney Offit from the first magazine de-
voted exclusively to the sport; and Baseball's Un-
forgettable Games (New York, Ronald Press [1960]
362 p.), by Joe Reichler and Ben Olan, who de-
scribe 100 games judged by them to be the best
since 1870.
2234. Robinson, John R. Baseball has done it, by
Jackie Robinson. Edited by Charles Dexter.
Philadelphia, Lippincott [1964] 216 p.
64-14467 GV865.R6A2
When Branch Rickey recruited Jackie Robinson
for the Brooklyn Dodgers in 1947, he introduced
the first Negro to major league baseball and began
the assault on the sport's rigid color line. Since then
Negroes have played for every major league club
and in every minor league. Robinson tells how he
turned the other cheek in the face of countless hu-
miliations during his first two years and presents
accounts by other outstanding Negro ballplayers,
including Carl Erskine, Ernie Banks, Roy Campa-
nella, Hank Aaron, Elston Howard, and Monte
Irvin, of experience with race prejudice. In Negro
Firsts in Sports (Chicago, Johnson Pub. Co. [1963]
301 p.), by Andrew S. N. ("Doc") Young records
noteworthy accomplishments of Negro athletes, ex-
amines racial handicaps they faced, and surveys the
changed position of Negroes in today's sports world,
where they "approach closer to the democratic ideal
than in any other facet of American life."
2235. Seymour, Harold. Baseball: the early years.
New York, Oxford University Press, 1960.
373 p. 60-5799 GV863.S37
The author traces baseball from its origins in the
English game of rounders through its evolution
from a boyish pastime to an amateur sport for young
gentlemen, then to a well-organized business monop-
oly run by professional promoters, staffed with high-
ly skilled players, and performed for the entertain-
ment of paying spectators. Although Seymour gives
attention to outstanding players, teams, and records,
his emphasis is on the economic and social aspects
of baseball and how it both reflected and contributed
to the shaping of American life. He also scotches
the myth of the importance of Abner Doubleday
and Cooperstown, N.Y., in the origin of the game.
This volume carries the chronicle to 1903, and an
intended sequel will examine the 20th century.
Three general histories that follow the conventional
pattern of episodic treatment with concentration on
the exploits of teams and players are The History of
Baseball: Its Great Players, Teams and Managers
(Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall [1959]
412 p.), by Allison Danzig and Joe Reichler; The
Story of Baseball in Words and Pictures (New York,
Hastings House [1959] 298 p.), by John Durant;
and Robert M. Smith's Baseball in America (New
York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston [1961] 278 p.).
The American Diamond; a Documentary of the
Game of Baseball (New York, Simon & Schuster,
1965. 204 p.), by Branch Rickey, begins with Alex-
ander Cartwright, who is identified as the founder
of the game, continues to the present, and contains
an "All-Time Team" of 30 players.
Ciii. BOATING
2236. Brooks, Jerome E. The $30,000,000 cup; the
stormy history of the defense of the Amer-
ica's Cup. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1958.
275 p. illus. 58-10359 GV829.B87
2237. Stone, Herbert L., and William H. Taylor.
The America's Cup races. Princeton, N.J.,
Van Nostrand [1958] 254 p. illus.
58-9435 GV829.S7 1958
In the summer of 1851 the invading schooner
America badly defeated the 17 entries of the Royal
Yacht Squadron in a race around the Isle of Wight,
capturing the trophy (known then as the Hundred
Guinea Cup) that for more than a century now has
been the symbol of top-level international yachting
competition. In 1957 the owners of the America
turned the cup over to the New York Yacht Club
in trust, "to be held as a permanent challenge cup,
open to competition by any organized yacht club of
any foreign country." Between 1870 and 1937 the
cup was defended successfully against 16 challengers
from Britain or Canada. Both of these chronicles
SPORTS AND RECREATION
/ 319
describe the dramatic circumstances, events, and side-
lights of the original competition and the subsequent
races, with special attention to the people concerned.
The closest contest occurred in 1934 when the Rain-
bow crossed the finish line only five seconds ahead
of the English Endeavour. Sailing for America's
Cup (New York, Harper & Row [1964] 216 p.),
by Everett B. Morris, and The Pictorial History of
the America's Cup Races (New York, Viking Press
[1964] 194 p. A Studio book), by Robert W. Car-
rick, are primarily photographic records covering
the races through 1962 and 1964, respectively.
2238. McKeown, William T., ed. Boating in
America. New York, Ziff-Davis Pub. Co.
[1960] 303 p. 60—8224 E4I.M2
Postwar improvements in equipment (making
boating safer and more comfortable), the develop-
ment of many new lakes, reservoirs, and waterways,
the greater mobility of the population (putting wa-
ter facilities within reach of almost everyone), and
a steadily growing personal income have all com-
bined to make pleasure-boating "America's fastest
growing sport." These 44 short articles selected
from Popular Boating magazine describe boating
areas and facilities along both coastlines and across
the entire expanse of the country. Each description
is accompanied by a photograph, often an aerial
2239. Rosenfeld, Morris. The story of American
yachting, told in pictures, with photographs
by Morris Rosenfeld and text by William H. Taylor
and Stanley Rosenfeld. New York, Appleton-
Century-Crofts [1958] 276 p.
57—12332 GV8i5.R6
A work intended to provide both the new and
the veteran sailor with a panorama of American
yachting from its beginnings in the 1840'$. All but
12 of some 200 black-and-white photographs were
made by the author. The reproductions of old
prints and paintings were drawn mainly from the
collections of the New York Historical Society and
the Marine Association of Mystic, Conn. The illus-
trations were chosen to reflect the moods of the
sailors and of the sea, as well as to add visual sub-
stance and continuity to the story. The text sum-
marizes the developments in American yacht de-
sign and building, records the history of the Amer-
ica's Cup and ocean racing, and describes the con-
temporary yachting scene in the United States.
More of Rosenfeld's photographs of various classes
of yachts in all kinds of settings are collected in his
Sail Hoi Great Yachting Pictures (1947) and Un-
der Full Sail (Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall
[1957] 212 p.).
2240. Wallace, William N. The Macmillan book
of boating. New York, Macmillan [1964]
249 p. 64-19473 GV8i5.W25
Bibliography: p. 249.
A survey of American boating from the first
pleasure craft, Cleopatra's Barge (1816), to Henry
Ford II's Santa Maria, built in 1963 at a cost of
$7,000,000. "It is essentially a story of the evolution
of naval architecture, which means the interplay
between men capable of designing fine boats and
men capable of paying for them." From the begin-
ning, when a few yachts were built for the very
wealthy, boat design and construction have expanded
through the production of many classes of sail,
steam, outboard motor, and power vessels. Inter-
spersed among the discussions of designers, owners,
skippers, and yachts are numerous illustrations,
some of which are in color.
2241.
Civ. BOXING
Farr, Finis. Black champion; the life and
times of Jack Johnson. New York, Scribner
[1964] 245 p. 64-13631 GVii32.J73F3
2242. Dempsey, Jack. Dempsey, by the man him-
self, as told to Bob Considine and Bill Slo-
cum. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1960. 249 p.
60-6719
2243. Fleischer, Nathaniel S. The Louis legend;
the amazing story of the Brown Bomber's
rise to the heavyweight championship of the world
and his retirement from boxing, [n.p., '1956]
181 p. 57-3410 GVii32.L6F5
When Jack Johnson (1878-1946) defeated Tommy
Burns in 1908, he became the first Negro to wear
the heavyweight crown, and in some minds his vic-
tory transformed the title into a defiant symbol of
racial supremacy. Jim Jeffries was coaxed from re-
tirement to champion the white man's primacy, but
was defeated by "the greatest heavyweight of all
time," as Nat Fleischer has called Johnson. In
Farr's biography, Johnson's pugilistic career and his
notorious personal life are examined. Jack Demp-
sey, born in Manassa, Colo., in 1895 and originally
named William Harrison Dempsey, was a peripa-
tetic jack-of-all-trades before becoming an estab-
lished prize-fighter. On July 4, 1919, the "Manassa
Mauler" knocked out Jess Willard in three rounds
and thus became the heavyweight champion. In his
candid autobiography, Dempsey reflects not only on
his 1 6 years in the ring but also on such personal
topics as the abject poverty of his youth and his
three marriages. The Louis Legend is a biography
of Joseph Louis Barrow, who under the name of
32O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Joe Louis revitalized a sport sapped by lackluster
combatants and the Great Depression. He success-
fully defended his crown against all contenders from
1937, when he won the championship from Jim
Braddock, until 1949 when he announced his re-
tirement. Prompted by the need for money to pay
back taxes, Louis attempted a ring "comeback" and
a wrestling career in the early 1950'$ but was un-
successful at both.
2244. Fleischer, Nathaniel S. 50 years at ringside.
New York, Fleet Pub. Corp. [1958] 296 p.
58-8780 GVii25.F55
The founder and longtime editor of The Ring
magazine discusses the fighting qualities and eccen-
tricities of the top pugilists and gives glimpses of the
noncombatants closely associated with the sport's
promotion, management, matchmaking, and super-
vision. He selects the 10 alltime best fighters in
each weight division and concludes that in recent
years "fighting talent has gone into an amazing
decline." A Pictorial History of Boxing (New
York, Citadel Press [1959] 316 p.), by Fleischer
and Sam Andre, includes pictures from the two
authors' respective collections and from the files of
The Ring.
2245. Fleischer, Nathaniel S. The heavyweight
championship; an informal history of heavy-
weight boxing from 1719 to the present day. Rev.
ed. New York, Putnam [1961] 318 p.
61-5821 GVii2i.F6 1961
This updated edition of no. 5026 in the 1960
Guide continues the story through the second Floyd
Patterson-Ingemar Johansson title bout (1960), when
Patterson became the first ex-champion to win back
the heavyweight crown. In The Heavyweight
Champions (New York, Hastings House [1960]
150 p.), John Durant discusses each tideholder,
describes the growth and changes of the sport, and
reviews the matches in some detail from England's
first recognized champion, James Figg (1719), to
Johansson.
2246. Liebling, Abbott J. The sweet science. New
York, Viking Press, 1956. 306 p.
56-9224 GVi 125X5
A collection of the author's pieces in The New
Yorker on the "Sweet Science of Bruising," from the
Louis-Savold fight on June 1951 to Archie Moore's
unsuccessful bid to wrest the heavyweight crown
from Rocky Marciano in September 1955. In be-
tween are accounts of other notable ring battles, the
exploits of such minor heroes as Sandy Saddler,
and the work of trainer-seconds, whom the author
believes to be die prime movers of the efficient and
artistic pugilist. An observer of prizefighting since
1918 and a onetime amateur boxer, Liebling spices
his chronicles with retrospective comparisons of
fighters and offbeat conversations with sparring
partners, promoters, trainers, and cab drivers. His
writing is also included in The Fireside Bool^ of
Boxing (New York, Simon & Schuster, 1961. 408
p.), edited by Wilfred C. Heinz, a potpourri of fact,
fiction, and poetry, which follows the course of
boxing history since Homer's Iliad but concentrates
on the American ring.
2247. Samuels, Charles. The magnificent rube;
the life and gaudy times of Tex Rickard.
New York, McGraw-Hill [1957] 301 p.
57-8627 GVi65.R5S3
George Lewis Rickard (1875-1929), better known
as Tex, was responsible for two milestones in boxing
history: in 1921 he promoted the match between
Jack Dempsey and Georges Carpentier that drew
the first million-dollar gate; and in 1925 he built
the new Madison Square Garden. Beginning in
poverty in Texas, he rose from cowboy, town
marshal, gold prospector, gambler, and saloon-
owner in the Klondike and Nevada gold rushes to
become boxing's colorful millionaire promoter dur-
ing the 1920*5.
Cv. FOOTBALL
2248. Gottehrer, Barry. The Giants of New York;
the history of professional football's most
fabulous dynasty. New York, Putnam [1963]
319 p. illus. 63-16182 GV956.N4G65
The author traces the development and fortunes
of the Giants from the 1925 inaugural season
through the 1962 playoff against the Green Bay
Packers, which marked the club's i3th participation
in a final championship game. In a style frequently
anecdotal, Gottehrer supplies details of memorable
games and recalls such great coaches as Steve Owen
and Jim Lee Howell and such outstanding players
as Benny Friedman, Ken Strong, Mel Hein, Charlie
Conerly, and Frank Gifford. An ii-page section of
alltime records is appended. Y. A. Tittle: I Pass!
My Story as Told to Don Smith (New York, F.
Watts [1964] 290 p.) is the autobiography of a
former Giant quarterback, Yelberton A. Tittle.
2249. Johnson, Chuck. The Green Bay Packers;
pro football's pioneer team. [2d ed.] New
York, Nelson [1963, Ci96i] 171, 31 p.
63-19351 GV956.G7J6 1963
"Supplement" (31 p.) inserted at end.
The author has chronicled the vacillating fortunes
of the professional club that Earl L. (Curly) Lam-
SPORTS AND RECREATION
/ 321
beau founded in 1919 and coached until 1950.
Under the revitalizing leadership of Vince Lom-
bardi, fourth in a succession of coaches after Lam-
beau, the Packers captured the National Football
League championship in both 1961 and 1962. Run
to Daylight! (Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall
[1963] 299 p.), by Vince Lombardi with W. C.
Heinz, recounts, hour by hour, a seven-day period
in which the Packers prepared for and played a
game during the 1962 season. More than 100
photographs by Robert Riger portray the week's
happenings.
2250. Maule, Hamilton. The game, by Tex
Maule; the official picture history of the
National Football League. Rev. ed. including the
Giant-Bear championship game in color. New
York, Random House [1964] 249 p.
64-22444 GV956.N38M35 1964
After briefly summarizing the origins and devel-
opment of professional football and the National
Football League (founded in 1920), the author
provides a team-by-team history of the NFL's 14
members. More than 200 photographs (28 colored)
complement the text. The Pros (New York, Simon
& Schuster, 1960. 191 p.), by Robert Riger with
commentary by Maule, is primarily pictorial. Riger
utilizes his own drawings to depict professional
football's growth from 1920 to 1950, then uses his
photographs to create a panoramic view of the
sport as played during the decade 1950-60.
2251. Smith, Robert M. Pro football; the history
of the game and the great players. Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1963. 230 p. illus.
62-15915 GV938.S6
2252. Claassen, Harold. The history of profession-
al football. Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-
Hall [1963] 526 p. illus.
63-18119 GV938.C52
Smith surveys the professional game from its be-
ginnings in the 1890*5 as an offshoot of inter-
collegiate football. Drawing on recorded facts and
personal recollections, he explains the adaptation of
American football from English rugby and traces
the evolution of rules which changed the style of
play from an irregular free-for-all requiring mostly
brute strength to the game of today with its
emphasis on precision and specialization. He de-
scribes outstanding teams and the great players
who made them successful. The period covered by
Claassen is essentially the same as Smith's, but he
offers a more methodical, straightforward chronicle
with extensive statistical material. The history of
each team now in the National Football League is
sketched, and each championship game from 1933
to 1962 is described in detail. What it is like to
play one year of professional football — from the
off-season through training camp and exhibition
engagements to the i4-game grind of the regular
season — is depicted by Lee Grosscup in Fourth and
One (New York, Harper & Row [1963] 310 p.).
In Pro Football's Hall of Fame (Chicago, Quadran-
gle Books, 1963. 248 p.), Arthur Daley reviews the
gridiron careers of the 17 men who were the first
selections for the National Professional Football
Hall of Fame.
2253. Wallace, Francis. Knute Rockne. Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1960. 286 p. illus.
60-13749 GV939.R6W3
In his 13 years as head football coach at Notre
Dame (1918-30), Knute Rockne not only achieved a
record of five seasons without a defeat but also
played an essential role in creating the climate in
which college football grew into a national institu-
tion. The author, a sportswriter and reporter who
was also Rockne's lifetime friend and associate, has
written a biography which attempts to capture the
spirit of his subject's inspiring personality and dy-
namic energy. Rockne was born in Voss, Norway,
in 1888, spent his childhood in Chicago, and
worked briefly as a postal clerk in that city. He
attended college at Notre Dame and starred on the
gridiron. After serving as chemistry instructor and
assistant football coach, he was appointed head
coach. On March 31, 1931, an airplane crash end-
ed his brilliant career, and the spontaneous out-
pouring of grief from millions of Americans testi-
fied to the esteem and affection with which he was
regarded. A Treasury of Notre Dame Football
(New York, Funk & Wagnalls [1962] 340 p.),
edited by Gene Schoor, incorporates 66 pieces rang-
ing from historical essays and biographical sketches
to discussions of notable seasons and teams and
descriptions of memorable games and feats.
2254. Weyand, Alexander M. Football immortals.
Foreword by Earl "Red" Blaik. New York,
Macmillan [1962] 290 p. illus.
62—19433 GV939.AiW4
Biographical sketches of 55 stars of college and
professional fame. Fred Russell and George Leon-
ard describe the annual college bowl engagements in
Big Bowl Football; the Great Postseason Classics
(New York, Ronald Press [1963] 416 p.). Short
items of fact, fiction, and humor make up The
Fireside Boo\ of Football (New York, Simon &
Schuster, 1964. 347 p.), edited by Jack Newcombe.
The stories of two great coaches are told by Robert
B. Considine in The Unreconstructed Amateur; a
322 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Pictorial Biography of Amos Alonzo Stagg (San
Francisco, Amos Alonzo Stagg Foundation, 1962.
154 p.), edited by Ralph Cahn, and You Have To
Pay the Price (New York, Holt, Rinehart & Win-
ston [1960] 430 p.), an autobiography by Earl H.
Blaik with Tim Cohane.
Cvi. GOLF AND TENNIS
2255. Cummings, Parke. American tennis; the
story of a game and its people. Boston, Lit-
tle, Brown [1957] 182 p. 57-11347 GV993.C8
A profusely illustrated history of the game since
its importation into the United States from Ber-
muda in 1847. Emphasis is placed on outstanding
players from the first national champions of the
i88o's, Dick Sears and Ellen Hansell, to the major
present-day figures in national and international
competition. The author provides a background of
the changing social, political, economic, and scien-
tific environment in which tennis has developed.
A separate chapter describes the evolution of rack-
ets, courts, and costumes. Championship and
match records of the United States Lawn Tennis
Association are appended. The restless life and
career of a tennis star is reconstructed in Man With
a Racket; the Autobiography of Pancho Gonzales
(New York, Barnes [1959] 254 p.), as told to
Cy Rice by Gonzales. Born to Mexican-American
parents in Los Angeles in 1928, Gonzales became
obsessed with tennis at an early age and won the
United States singles championship when he was
only 20.
2256. Jones, Robert T. Golf is my game. Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1960. 255 p. illus.
60-13386 GV965.J63
2257. Snead, Samuel. The education of a golfer,
by Sam Snead with Al Stump. New York,
Simon & Schuster, 1962. 248 p. illus.
62-9601 GV964.S6A3
Along with suggestions on improving one's game
and one's mental approach to golf, Bobby Jones
offers autobiographical reflections on the develop-
ment of his own skills from the age of six. He
records in detail the year (1930) of his "Grand
Slam": a winning sweep of the British Amateur,
British Open, U.S. Open, and U.S. Amateur tour-
neys. He also expresses his thoughts on golf-course
design, discusses his participation in the design and
construction of the Augusta National Golf Course,
where the Masters tournament is held each spring,
and describes (with diagrams) the best ways of
playing each hole. A year-by-year chronicle (1934—
60 with the exception of the war years 1943—45) of
the Augusta Masters tournament is provided by
Tom Flaherty in The Masters; the Story of Golf's
Greatest Tournament (New York, Holt, Rinehart &
Winston [1961] 150 p.). In The Education of a
Golfer, "Slammin' Sammy" Snead (b. 1912 in Ash-
wood, Va.), who won special fame because of his
long tee shots, reveals how determined practice
coupled with a natural bent for the game enabled
him to rise from errand boy and handyman on the
courses of Virginia and West Virginia summer re-
sorts to become one of the ablest professional golfers
in the United States. He won his first tournament
in 1936; among his other victories were three
Masters Championships (1949, 1952, and 1954).
2258. Price, Charles. The world of golf; a pano-
rama of six centuries of the game's history.
Foreword by Bobby Jones. New York, Random
House [1962] 307 p. 62—16287 GV963.?7
A copiously illustrated history, in which the
author reviews the beginnings of the game in
Scotland and narrates the highlights of golf in the
United States from the founding of the first perma-
nent club, St. Andrews Golf Club of Yonkers, N.Y.,
in 1888. Price concentrates on interpretive descrip-
tions of the champions, their style of play, and the
tournaments which brought them fame. He has
also edited The American Golfer (New York, Ran-
dom House [1964] 241 p.), an anthology from
The American Golfer Magazine, 1920-35. A pic-
torial tour of 63 of the best courses across the length
and breadth of the Nation is assembled in Golfing
America (Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday [1958]
128 p.), edited by Edward A. Hamilton and Charles
Preston, with text (mostly captions) by Al Laney,
diagrams of courses, and numerous illustrations in
color.
Cvii. HORSE-RACING
2259. Robertson, William H. P. The history o:
thoroughbred racing in America. Engle-
wood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall [1964] xi, 621 p.
64—17364 SF335.U5R6
In 1610, seven horses were sent to Virginia by
the London Company, and 20 mares, "beautiful and
full of courage," arrived in 1620. From this begin-
ning, racing has developed into a highly organized,
thoroughly controlled, and jealously guarded indus-
try of coast-to-coast proportions. This book is lav-
ishly illustrated with paintings and photographs.
Extensive charts show the leading money-winners
by seasons; leading jockeys, trainers, owners, breed-
ers, and sires; yearlings sold, average prices, and
revenues to States; time records; and champions by
seasons, classified as to category.
2260. Woods, David F., ed. The fireside book of
horse racing. New York, Simon & Schuster,
1963. 341 p. illus. 63—15369 SF30I.W6
Although not entirely confined to racing in the
United States, this collection of turf fact and fiction
edited by a former racetrack publicist is an addition
to the sparse literature on one of America's foremost
spectator sports. Included in its more than 50
selections are profiles of great American horses,
descriptions of famous races, sketches of various
aspects of the racing milieu by such well-known
sports writers as Joe H. Palmer, Grantland Rice,
Red Smith, and Frank Graham, and short stories
with a racetrack setting by Donn Byrne, J. P. Mar-
quand, Damon Runyon, and Sherwood Anderson.
Cviii. MISCELLANEOUS
2261. Alama, Malcolm R. Mark of the oarsmen;
a narrative history of rowing at Syracuse
University. Syracuse, N.Y., Syracuse Alumni Row-
ing Association, 1963. 370 p. illus.
63-24968 GV8o7.S9A6
Bibliography: p. 343-344.
A chronicle of more than 60 years of rowing
history, detailing triumphs and defeats and record-
ing the deeds of the oarsmen, coxwains, coaches,
riggers, trainers, alumni, and university officials
who directed the fortunes of the Syracuse crews.
The work focuses on rowing at Syracuse and the
work of James A. Ten Eyck, coach from 1903 until
his death in 1938, but includes information on the
sport at other colleges and universities and on the
Intercollegiate Rowing Association.
2262. Bowen, Ezra. The book of American ski-
ing. Design and layout by Martin Nathan.
Philadelphia, Lippincott [1963] 229 p.
63-21412 GV8544.B6
The ski editor of Sports Illustrated has assembled
this pictorial volume, which, with accompanying
text, "is intended as a panoramic view of the sport,
with details on personalities, places, techniques,
history." A recreation which is rapidly becoming
the most popular participant winter sport in the
United States, skiing was brought to this country
long before it reached Central Europe, having been
introduced in the mid— 1 9th century by Scandi-
navian miners searching for gold in the California
mountains.
2263. Gallico, Paul. The golden people. Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1965. 315 p. illus.
65-19889 GV697.AiG3
The author has done what he vowed he never
would do when he "read and listened to the old-
SPORTS AND RECREATION / 323
timers going on about the greats of their era." He
has reminisced about the sports stars of his own
time. Selecting the outstanding athletes in many
fields, he has expanded articles he wrote from 1923
through 1936 for the Chicago Tribune and the New
York Daily News and has added touches of nostal-
gia and sentimentality. Having known and social-
ized with Babe Ruth, Gertrude Ederle, Jack
Dempsey, Gene Tunney, William T. Tilden, Knute
Rockne, Helen Wills, Tex Rickard, Ty Cobb,
Johnny Weissmuller, Babe Didrikson, Red Grange,
and Bobby Jones, he discusses their lives and char-
acters as well as their great athletic prowess. In
an article entitled "Saint Bambino" in the appendix,
he brings Babe Ruth back to advise youth on the
value and rewards of playing baseball.
2264. Kieran, John, and Arthur Daley. The story
of the Olympic games, 776 B.C. to 1964.
[Rev. ed.] Philadelphia, Lippincott [1965] 448
p. illus. 65-3495 GV23.K.5 1965
With symbolic rituals intended to recall the reli-
gious aspect of the original Greek contests, the first
of the modern games was inaugurated in 1896,
fittingly in Athens. There was no "official team"
from the United States, but the 13 American ath-
letes carried off first honors in nine of the 12 events
in track and field. This work provides, in chrono-
logical order, a record of events, participants, and
settings from 1896, when 285 athletes from 12
nations vied for honors, through 1964, when more
than 5,000 from 94 nations competed in Tokyo.
Track and field sports are emphasized, and, since
American participants have repeatedly dominated
these contests, most of the book is devoted to accom-
plishments of athletes from the United States. In
An Illustrated History oj the Olympics (New York,
Knopf [1963] 319 p.), Richard Schaap offers a
similar, albeit less detailed, chronicle containing
some 400 photographs. A brief survey concentrat-
ing on the outstanding athletes (mostly American)
and events is provided by John Durant's Highlights
of the Olympics, From Ancient Times to the
Present (New York, Hastings House [1961] 160
p.).
2265. Palmer, Arthur J. Riding high; the story of
the bicycle. New York, Dutton [1956]
191 p. 56—8322 GVio4i.P3
The original bicycle was invented in 1816 by
Baron Karl von Drais in Karlsruhe, Germany, and
was called the Draisine; it had no pedals and was
propelled by a walking-scooting motion. In 1866
the so-called velocipede was introduced into the
United States by a French inventor, Pierre Lalle-
ment. Its brief popularity led to a rapid series of
324 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
improvements during the 1870'$ and i88o's, even-
tuating in a chain-driven, rubber-tired bicycle essen-
tially the same as present-day models. During the
Gay Nineties the enthusiasm for bicycles spread
rapidly. The author devotes chapters to multicycles
(for more than one rider), early motorcycles, "oddi-
ties and offshoots" of the bicycle, and racing. The
numerous photographs and drawings include illus-
trations showing a decemtuple, a bicycle built for 10,
now in the Ford Museum, and an eight-man tricycle
that weighed il/2 tons, with two of its wheels n
feet in diameter.
2266. Weyand, Alexander M. The cavalcade of
basketball. New York, Macmillan, 1960.
271 p. illus. 60—11609 GV885.W47
Basketball was originated by Dr. James Naismith
in 1891 at the Young Men's Christian Association
Training School in Springfield, Mass.; a soccer ball
was tossed at goals consisting of peach baskets.
Extensive changes in equipment and in the original
13 rules (one of which allowed from three to 40
players per side) have taken place since then. The
author traces the game's development from its
Y.M.C.A. club beginnings to its present position as
one of the Nation's most popular spectator sports.
Although the book was designed primarily as a
season-by-season history of college basketball, recall-
ing hundreds of its outstanding organizers, coaches,
and players, its concluding chapters are devoted to
the national tournaments of the Amateur Athletic
Union since 1897, to women's basketball, which
spread from Canada to the United States, to inter-
national developments (the first major competition
occurring at the Berlin Olympics in 1936), and to
"the pro game," which has grown rapidly since
World War II.
2267. Wilson, Charles M. The magnificent scuf-
flers; revealing the great day when America
wresded the world. Illustrations by Jon Corbino.
Brattleboro, Vt., Stephen Greene Press, 1959. 105 p.
59-13812 GVii95.W5
Wrestling was introduced into colonial America
by Irish immigrants, but it was not until the mid—
1 9th century that it really took root in the upstate
communities of Vermont — the cradle of American
scufflers — which produced three stalwart champions:
Henry Dufur (born Dunn), John McMahon, and
Ed Decker. During the Civil War, the U.S. Army
adopted "collar and elbow" as a favorite recreation.
In the 1870*5 and i88o's, matches with gate receipts
of $1,000 and up were held in cities from New
England to the Midwest and Pacific coast, and in
the 1890'$ wrestling continued to spread, making its
way into the athletic programs of most secondary
schools, colleges, and universities. Although its
popularity was surpassed by other sports during the
early 2oth century, it remained well patronized until
the Great Depression. The sport revived briefly
during World War II, but by the late 1940*5 true
scufflers were being replaced by television perform-
ers whose wrestling bouts were palpable charlatan-
ism. In this study, the author discusses eminent
wrestlers, traces the evolution of wresding styles
and rules, and describes vicissitudes encountered by
the sport.
D. General Field Sports
2268. Field and Stream. The sportsman's world;
for every hunter and fisherman, a richly
illustrated guide to sport in seventeen areas of the
United States and abroad. By the editors of Field
and Stream. New York, Holt [1959] 272 p.
59713595 SK33.F386
A collection of articles originally published in
Field and Stream (1956-59). More than half the
articles (p. 104-232) pertain to the United States;
the rest deal largely with Canadian and Caribbean
areas readily accessible to Americans. Each article
elaborates on the fish and game resources of an
area; describes the natural setting; advises on the
most favorable seasons, the best means of transporta-
tion, and the most desirable equipment; and ana-
lyzes the average costs of fishing and hunting trips.
The volume is abundantly illustrated with color
photographs. In The World of "Wood, Field and
Stream," an Outdoorsman's Collection From the
Columns of the New Yorf( Times (New York,
Holt, Rinehart & Winston [1962] 177 p.), the
late outdoor editor John W. Randolph injects wit,
satire, and irony into 91 tales of his own adventures
as hunter and fisherman.
2269. Migdalski, Edward C. Angler's guide to
the fresh water sport fishes of North America.
New York, Ronald Press [1962] 431 p. illus.
62-9760 SH462.M5
An encyclopedic work on the physical appear-
SPORTS AND RECREATION / 325
ance, behavior, habitat, distribution, migration, and
reproduction of freshwater game fish. The text is
accompanied by photographs, and identification
charts (annotated outline drawings) of each species
appear at the back of the volume. Introductory
chapters note that the great increase in freshwater
fishing has occurred mainly because of the remark-
able increase during the last 20 years of manmade
bodies of water and because of improved conserva-
tion techniques. The author notes the dangers of
water pollution and urges sportsmen to support
remedial legislation. Migdalski has also written
Angler's Guide to the Salt Water Game Fishes,
Atlantic and Pacific (New York, Ronald Press
[1958] 506 p.). America's Favorite Fishing; a
Complete Guide to Angling for Panfish (New
York, Outdoor Life [1964] 285 p.), by F. Philip
Rice, is a handbook on small game fish.
2270. Outdoor Life. The story of American hunt-
ing and firearms, by the editors of Outdoor
Life, with paintings by Ralph Crosby Smith, draw-
ings by Nicholas Eggenhofer and Ray Pioch. New
York, McGraw-Hill [1959] 172 p.
59—14109 SK4I.O9
A history of hunting practices and firearms devel-
opment from the i7th century's cumbersome
muzzle-loading muskets, used to take game in the
New England forests to the variety of modern
high-velocity hunting rifles and the strictly regulated
sport of today. The early colonists used guns
imported from or designed in Europe. The first
truly American firearm was the Kentucky rifle with
a reduced bore and a lengthened barrel, which for
more than a century furnished the frontiersman
with both a hunting and a military weapon. In the
early iSoo's the breech-loader and a rudimentary
percussion system replaced the awkward process of
muzzle-loading and the undependable flint lock.
By the beginning of the Civil War, firearms were
basically similar to those in use today. This work
depicts the hunting opportunities that opened up as
the Nation expanded westward and describes the
wholesale slaughter of many species of game in the
late i gth century. Some kinds of birds and animals
were saved from extinction by the conservation laws
of the early decades of the 2oth century, but others
succumbed to hunting and the loss of favorable
habitat.
2271. Ulrich, Heinz. America's best bay, surf,
and shoreline fishing. New York, Barnes
[1960] 240 p. illus. 60-9867 SH463.U4
2272. Ulrich, Heinz. America's best lake, stream,
and river fishing. New York, Barnes
[1962] 367 p. illus. 62-10179 8^463.1742
2273. Ulrich, Heinz. America's best deep-sea fish-
ing. New York, Barnes [1963] 316 p.
illus. 63—18263 SH457-U4 1963
Three volumes which form a comprehensive guide
to saltwater and freshwater angling throughout
the United States and its coastal waters. For each
region or State discussesd, Ulrich indicates the
choicest areas and kinds of fish available, seasons for
the best catches, facilities for the visiting angler,
and sources to write to for more detailed informa-
tion. He discusses each species with regard to
edibility, identifying features, size ranges, behavior
patterns, baits that attract it, and tackle that can
land it. A final section in each book offers general
advice to both the amateur and the veteran angler
on fishing methods and gear. A pictorial cross
section of varieties of fishing in our inland and
shoreline waters is provided in Fishing America
(Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday [1958] 128 p.),
edited by Edward A. Hamilton and Charles Preston.
The Treasury of Angling (New York, Golden
Press [1963] 251 p.), by Lawrence R. Koller, is
an illustrated miscellany that presents the evolution
of sport fishing in America from the late i8th
century, describes the changing paraphernalia used
in the art of angling, discusses various species of
fish, and gives advice on how best to catch them.
2274. Walsh, Roy E. Gunning the Chesapeake;
duck and goose shooting on the Eastern
Shore. Cambridge, Md., Tidewater Publishers,
1960. 1 17 p. 60—15800 8X327 .W3
The Chesapeake Bay and the Eastern Shore of
Maryland and Virginia remain among the most
fertile hunting grounds in the country. The author
describes the life habits of the great variety of
waterfowl to be found in this maze of rivers, inlets,
ponds, marshes, creeks, sloughs, and streams. He
offers both the novice and seasoned gunner advice
on the best hunting methods and devotes individual
chapters to the carved wooden decoy and the Chesa-
peake Bay retriever, "a true specialist" who shares
his master's zeal for the hunt. Numerous photo-
graphs and drawings of the region supplement the
text, and a final section provides plates and informa-
tion designed to aid in identifying the various
species. In The Hunting Dogs of America (Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1964. 311 p.), Jeff Griffen
discusses the history, characteristics, and training of
the 44 breeds of hunting dogs used in the United
States.
XXI
Education
A. General Worlds
Ai. Historical and Descriptive
Aii. Philosophical and Theoretical
B. Primary and Secondary Schools
Bi. General and Historical Worlds
Bii. Preschool and Primary Grades
Biii. Secondary Schools
C. Colleges and Universities
Ci. General and Historical Worlds
Cii. Individual Institutions
D. Education of Special Groups
E. Teachers and Teaching
F. Methods and Techniques
G. Contemporary Problems and Controversies
H. Periodicals and Yearbooks
2275—2282
2283—2289
2290-2296
2297—2298
2299—2302
2303-2318
2319-2323
2324-2327
2328—2332
2333-2338
2349-2353
SINCE the compilation of the 1960 Guide, books on education have continued to be pub-
lished in large numbers. Although the authors of the new works have in general shared
the preoccupations of the writers represented in the 1960 Guide, the entries in Section F,
Methods and Techniques, and Section G, Contemporary Problems and Controversies, in the
Supplement reflect an intensified effort to find ways to improve the educational process. In
Section F are the report of the chairman of the Woods Hole Conference of 1959, an introduc-
tion to teaching with audiovisual aids, an analysis
of the nature of reading from the point of view of
linguistics, a study of the guidance function in the
schools, a volume of readings on team teaching, and
a textbook on measuring scholastic achievement.
Section G in the Supplement is proportionately
more than twice as large as in the 1960 Guide.
Readers interested in contemporary educational
problems will find entries devoted to familiar topics.
Among them are religion and the public schools,
Negro education, Communists and the schools, pub-
lic responsibility and the schools, the training of
teachers, the need to upgrade standards of achieve-
ment, the Federal Government's involvement in
education, reading instruction, and education and
democracy.
A. General Works
Ai. HISTORICAL AND DESCRIPTIVE
2275. Alexander, Carter, and Arvid J. Burke.
How to locate educational information and
326
data; an aid to quick utilization of the literature of
education. 4th ed., rev. New York, Bureau of
Publications, Teachers College, Columbia Univer-
sity, 1958. 419 p. 58—10058 Z7H.A37 1958
EDUCATION / 327
A revised edition of no. 5098 in the 1960 Guide.
2276. Encyclopedia of educational research; a proj-
ect of the American Educational Research
Association. Edited by Chester W. Harris, with the
assistance of Marie R. Liba. 3d ed. New York,
Macmillan, 1960. xxix, 1564 p.
60—275 LBi5.E48 1960
Includes bibliographies.
A revised edition of no. 5111 in the 1960 Guide.
2277. Good, Harry G. A history of American
education. 2d ed. New York, Macmillan
[1962] 610 p. illus.
62-8150 LA209.G58 1962
Bibliography at the end of each chapter.
Education in the United States is constantly
changing. The most massive of all the great changes
is the prodigious increase in the amount of educa-
tion offered and undertaken in the last 100 years.
Although modifications have come about as a re-
sult of external pressure or inner growth, education
itself has been alternately viewed as a means for
personal development and as an instrument of na-
tional policy. The author cautions that the two
goals are not mutually exclusive and that the recent
shift to the latter may go too far. In another text-
book, An Educational History of the American
People (New York, McGraw-Hill, 1957. 444 p.
McGraw-Hill series in education), Adolph E. Meyer
interweaves the American educational past with its
cultural context. In Education in the Forming of
American Society; Needs and Opportunities for
Study (Chapel Hill, Published for the Institute of
Early American History and Culture at Williams-
burg, Va., by the University of North Carolina Press
[1960] 147 p. Needs and opportunities for study
series), historian Bernard Bailyn maintains that the
history of American education has suffered from
narrow, slanted approaches by educational special-
ists and crusaders for professionalism. He views
education broadly, defining it as the entire process
by which a culture transmits itself across the genera-
tions and offering fresh insights into that process in
the colonial period.
2278. Gross, Richard E., ed. Heritage of Ameri-
can education. Boston, Allyn & Bacon, 1962.
544 p. 62—13069 LA2O5.G75
Bibliography at the end of each chapter.
CONTENTS. — i. Heritage of American education;
an introduction, by Richard E. Gross. — 2. Our debt
to the ancients of the Western World, by Richard
E. Gross and Arthur H. Moehlman. — 3. Judaic
roots of modern education, by Eugene B. Borowitz.
— 4. The Catholic heritage, by Bernard J. Kohl-
brenner. — 5. Islamic contributions to American
education, by Ray H. Muessig and Dwight W.
Allen. — 6. The Protestant heritage in American
education, by Joseph S. Roucek. — 7. The European
impact upon American educational history, by
Joseph S. Roucek and Richard E. Gross. — 8. Key
ideas from great foreign educational thinkers, by
William E. Drake. — 9. What do we owe to our
American neighbors? by Joseph Katz and Patricia
Grinager. — 10. Contributions from minorities, elites,
and special educational organizations, by Robert M.
Frumkin and Joseph S. Roucek. — n. What is in-
digenous in American education? by Kenneth V.
Lottich. — 12. America and education in the world,
by Richard E. Gross and Joseph S. Roucek.
Beginning in the 1930'$, interest in courses on the
history of education declined. This volume, with
an innovational approach, stresses the need for a
revival.
2279. Kursh, Harry. The United States Office of
Education: a century of service. Philadel-
phia, Chilton Books 1/1965] xvi, 192 p.
65-11513 LB28o7.K8
Bibliography: p. 139—142.
The year 1967 marks the centennial of the U.S.
Office of Education. The author's purpose is to tell
how and why the Office of Education was created,
what it does today, and how it does it. He reviews
the history of the Office, summarizes its basic
functions, and describes the duties of the Commis-
sioner, his immediate staff, and the three bureaus
under which the operating divisions of the Office
have been organized. He also discusses the agency's
role in the process of accreditation, its methods of
distributing educational information, the type of
professional personnel it employs, and some of the
major problems and issues with which it is con-
cerned. Four appendixes serve as guides to further
reading.
2280. Lee, Gordon C. An introduction to educa-
tion in modern America. Rev. ed. New
York, Holt [1957] 624 p.
57-5705 LA209.2.L43 1957
Bibliography at the end of each chapter.
A revised edition of no. 5109 in the 1960 Guide.
Public Education in America; a New Interpretation
of Purpose and Practice (New York, Harper
[1958] 212 p.), edited by George Z. F. Bereday
and Luigi Volpicelli, is the product of a symposium
undertaken with the intention of explaining Ameri-
can education to foreign audiences. The 15 con-
tributing educators explore basic educational issues
in the United States today. American Education
Today (New York, McGraw-Hill [1963] 292
p.), edited by Paul Woodring and John Scanlon,
328 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
is a collection of 30 essays taken from the "Educa-
tion in America" section of Saturday Review.
2281. Welter, Rush. Popular education and demo-
cratic thought in America. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1962. 473 p.
62—19909 LA2I2.W4
Bibliography: p. [3891-435.
An analysis of the dynamic interrelationships be-
tween two of the most characteristic American
political commitments, popular rule and public edu-
cation. The author traces the historical develop-
ment of the American belief in education in terms
of representative schools of political and social the-
ory and points out that the idea of education has
played an influential role in determining the content
of our political thought. In the 2Oth century a
significant change has occurred. The people con-
tinue to have great faith in formal education, but
their confidence in informal, democratic, political
education has weakened. In Welter's view, the
change threatens the theory of democracy. He
concludes, nevertheless, that faith in education has
been and remains America's most characteristic
political belief.
2282. Wesley, Edgar B. NEA: the first hundred
years; the building of the teaching profes-
sion. New York, Harper [1957] 419?.
56-11918 Li3.N49W4
Bibliographical footnotes.
The National Education Association of the United
States has played a major role in American life as
a builder of the teaching profession, a proponent of
educational ideas, and a disseminator of educational
information. "An account of the rise and progress
of the NEA in its broadest sense would be the
history of American education; in its narrowest
sense it would be the internal story of the growth
of a great organization." The author has chosen
the middle way between these two extremes by
selecting the Proceedings of the association from
1857 to 1956 as his main source. His account is,
therefore, the history of some aspects of American
education in which the NEA was actively involved
as a contributor. A historian and sociologist,
Wesley was chosen by the NEA to write its history
for the occasion of its centennial celebration.
Aii. PHILOSOPHICAL
AND THEORETICAL
2283. Brameld, Theodore B. H. Toward a re-
constructed philosophy of education. [New
York] Dryden Press [1956] 417 p. (Dry den
Press professional books in education)
56-13909 LB875.B724
Bibliography: p. 399—406.
The philosophy of reconstructionism in education
as conceived and developed here is essentially an
extension and a reformulation of the philosophy of
progressivism. It seeks to correct the latter's weak-
nesses and strengthen its achievements. Many con-
tributions made by the philosophies of perennialism
and essentialism are also incorporated into the re-
constructionist pattern, however. After discussing
the background and underlying philosophical be-
liefs of reconstructionism, the author elaborates on
its theory of education. In Cultural Foundations of
Education: An Interdisciplinary Exploration (New
York, Harper [1957] 330 p.), the same author
examines and interprets aspects of culture theory
that have implications for philosophy and for the
practice of education. In The Ideal and the Com-
munity; a Philosophy of Education (New York,
Harper [1958] 302 p.), Isaac B. Berkson pro-
poses a philosophy of reconstructionism more con-
servative than Brameld's. Although Berkson's
point of departure is experimentalism, he is inclined
toward the idealism that is characteristic of tradi-
tional philosophy.
2284. Johnston, Herbert. A philosophy of educa-
tion. New York, McGraw-Hill [1963]
362 p. (McGraw-Hill Catholic series in education)
62-18857 LB885.J58
Bibliographical footnotes.
A neo-Thomist exposition that proceeds from con-
siderations of the nature of man and of those
powers that make him "educable." Although the
book, written by a professor of philosophy at the
University of Notre Dame, is intentionally doc-
trinal rather than historical in character, it does
include cogent analyses of other philosophies. Ques-
tions and cases intended to stimulate philosophical
discussion are appended to each chapter. In Public
Schools and Moral Education; the Influence of
Horace Mann, William Torrey Harris, and John
Dewey (New York, Columbia University Press,
1958. 315 p.), Neil G. McCluskey, a Jesuit priest,
discusses the problem that religious pluralism poses
for the public schools in their quest for a philosophy
of values.
2285. Morris, Van Cleve. Philosophy and the
American school; an introduction to the phi-
losophy of education. Boston, Houghton Mifflin
[1961] 492 p. 61-16124 LB885.M67
Writing from the positions of experimentalism in
philosophy and progressivism in educational theory,
the author employs what he designates as the
"philosophy-to-policy-to-practice" approach to the
philosophical questions of ontology, epistemology,
EDUCATION / 329
and axiology. He explains how each question is
dealt with by exponents of idealism, realism, neo-
Thomism, experimentalism, and existentialism and
relates their views to educational theory. He also
synthesizes the various concepts into a policy for
managing American education and depicts the class-
room operation of philosophical theory and stated
policy.
2286. Phenix, Philip H. Philosophy of education.
New York, Holt [1958] 623 p.
58-6308 LB885.P5
Bibliography: p. 591—612.
A professor of educational philosophy at Teachers
College, Columbia University, analyzes a wide range
of topics in the light of variant philosophical posi-
tions. In order to prevent the reader from being
influenced except by the persuasiveness of the ideas
and arguments themselves, the author presents each
position without reference to the authorities who
have advocated it. In Education and the Common
Good; a Moral Philosophy of the Curriculum (New
York, Harper [1961] 271 p.), the same author
proposes that the content of school instruction be
based on a consideration of the major problems
facing contemporary civilization. He maintains
that the cardinal goal of instruction in all fields
should be "the development of loyalty to what is
excellent, instead of success in satisfying desires."
2287. Riesman, David. Constraint and variety in
American education. [Lincoln] University
of Nebraska Press [1956] 160 p. ([Nebraska.
University] The university lectures in the human-
ities, i) 56—13482 LA2io.R5
"To place American higher and secondary school
education in its cultural context" is the plan for the
author's three sociological essays, based on lectures
delivered at the University of Nebraska. In "The
Academic Profession," he points out the ways in
which universities imitate one another, follow na-
tional models, and tend toward "institutional homo-
genization." In "The Intellectual Veto Groups," he
focuses on the interdisciplinary problems and con-
flicts within the social sciences. "Secondary Edu-
cation and 'Counter-Cyclical' Policy" is a discussion
of the vulnerability of high schools to local pres-
sures; here Riesman presents "a theory of education
as desirably 'counter-cyclical,' that is, a theory that
education should oppose momentary booms and
busts in our cultural economy." The view of edu-
cation from the position of sociology is depicted in
greater detail by Robert J. Havighurst and Bernice
L. Neugarten in Society and Education, 2d ed.
(Boston, Allyn & Bacon, 1962. 585 p.). The per-
spective from two other social sciences is revealed
in Educational Anthropology: An Introduction
(New York, Wiley [1965] 171 p.), by George F.
Kneller, and Educational Psychology; Psychological
Foundations of Education, 2d ed. (Boston, Allyn
& Bacon, 1964. 589 p.), by James M. Sawrey and
Charles W. Telford.
2288. Ulich, Robert. Philosophy of education.
New York, American Book Co. [1961]
286 p. 61-2970 LB875-U63
Bibliography at the end of each chapter.
A Harvard University professor of education
writes from a philosophical point of view which
might be defined as a combination of idealism,
existentialism, and humanism. Examining the role
that education plays within the ever-expanding con-
tinuum of civilization, he points out the dependence
of man's progress upon his success in keeping the
apparendy contrasting aspects of life, or the polari-
ties of civilization, in constructive harmony and
balance. As the ideal basis for instruction, he pro-
poses the concept of "cosmic reverence" expressed
in Goethe's Wilhelm Meisters Wanderjahre, which
to Ulich means "not only a person's respect and
love for other persons or for a cherished idea or
institution, but a sense of the belongingness of all
created things to a common ground of life, religious-
ly expressed by such terms as God, the Father, the
Creator, or naturalistically expressed — though most-
ly with a religious overtone — by such terms as
nature, the creation, the universe, the cosmos."
Education and the Idea of Mankind (New York,
Harcourt, Brace & World [1964] 279 p.), edited
by Ulich and published under the auspices of the
Council for the Study of Mankind, views education
as a means for helping mankind realize its funda-
mental unity and brotherhood while it maintains a
diversity in ideas and beliefs.
2289. Wegener, Frank C. The organic philosophy
of education. Dubuque, Iowa, W. C.
Brown [1957] xx, 472 p.
A58-5794 LB885.W4
Bibliographical footnotes at the end of each
chapter.
An attempt to achieve a synthesis in the philoso-
phy of education. The author believes that the
arguments about educational philosophies in terms
of such dichotomies as realism versus idealism,
naturalism versus supernaturalism, and modernism
versus classicism are now anachronistic. Far from
being eclectic, the organic philosophy, with its bi-
polar theory of education, holds that the nature of
man and the world is such that the divergent views
of conservatism and progressivism are not mutually
exclusive but can and must operate side by side.
This orientation is in the tradition extending from
330 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Plato and Aristotle to Alfred North Whitehead, all
of whose writings influenced the author's thought.
After establishing his philosophical foundations,
Wegener applies his propositions to the crucial
problems of educational philosophy. Whitehead's
technical terminology, which can be troublesome to
the general reader, is defined in a special appended
glossary.
B. Primary and Secondary Schools
Bi. GENERAL AND HISTORICAL WORKS
2290. Carpenter, Charles H. History of American
schoolbooks. Philadelphia, University of
Pennsylvania Press [1963] 322 p. illus.
62—10747 LT23-C3 1963
Bibliography: p. 279—300.
An analysis of the evolution of textbooks in the
United States and "along with this, as a requisite
accompaniment, a picture of the pioneer-day school
system — this latter only insofar as it had to do with
schoolbook production and early usage." Because
of the large number of books involved, the author,
whose personal collection alone totals about 3,000,
limits his study to outstanding works. These in-
clude such elementary texts as the New England
primer, such readers as those in the McGuffey
series, and specialized subject-area works from
grammars to geographies. In Ruth M. Elson's
Guardians of Tradition; American Schoolbooks oj
the Nineteenth Century (Lincoln, University of Ne-
braska Press [1964] 424 p.), more than a thou-
sand popular texts used in the first eight grades
are examined with respect to their ideological teach-
ings on such subjects as God, nature, race, and
religion. In Old Textbooks ( [Pittsburgh] Univer-
sity of Pittsburgh Press [1961] 364 p.), John A.
Nietz surveys and analyzes some 8,000 works used
by the schools before 1900.
2291. Cremin, Lawrence A. The transformation
of the school; progressivism in American
education, 1876-1957. New York, Knopf, 1961.
387 p. 61—11000 LA2O9-C7
Bibliographical note: p. 355—387.
"The story of the progressive education move-
ment: of its genesis in the decades immediately
following the Civil War; of its widespread appeal
among the intellectuals at the turn of the century;
of its gathering political momentum during the dec-
ade before World War I; of its conquest of the
organized teaching profession; of its pervasive im-
pact on American schools and colleges, public and
private; of its fragmentation during the 1920*5 and
1930'$; and of its ultimate collapse after World War
II; is the substance of this volume." In the author's
view, progressive education was a parallel to politi-
cal progressivism; it was the educational phase of
the widespread humanitarian and political effort to
fulfill the "promise of American life."
2292. Edwards, Newton, and Herman G. Richey.
The school in the American social order.
2d ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1963] 694 p.
illus. 63—4262 LA205.E3 1963
Bibliography at the end of each chapter.
A revised edition of no. 5140 in the 1960 Guide.
2293. Gross, Neal C. Who runs our schools?
New York, Wiley [1958] 195 p.
58-12523 LB28o6.G74
In Massachusetts, 105 superintendents and 508
board members were interviewed by investigators
who asked such questions as "What are the major
obstacles you face in your efforts to do a good job
in your community?" The answers are here sum-
marized and examined, and the reader's thoughts
are directed to proposed answers to the question,
"What can be done?" In Education and the Cult
of Efficiency ( [Chicago] University of Chicago
Press [1962] 273 p.), Raymond E. Callahan
traces the origin and development of the adoption
of business values and practices in educational ad-
ministration. He protests that school administrators
have begun to consider themselves business man-
agers rather than scholars and educational philoso-
phers and urges Americans to concentrate more on
excellence than on efficiency and economy in
education.
2294. Kandel, Isaac L. American education in the
twentieth century. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1957. 247 p. (The Library of
Congress series in American civilization)
57-11658 LA209.2.K26
Bibliographical notes: p. 231—238.
"The fifty years of this century have witnessed a
radical transformation of a theory of education [i.e.,
progressivism] that has achieved notoriety both be-
cause of the vociferous claims put forward in its
behalf and because the roseate picture was painted
against a backdrop of an 'evil' educational tradi-
EDUCATION / 331
tion." In this study of public elementary and
secondary education, the author acknowledges that
the public schools in the United States have im-
proved. He maintains, however, that the improve-
ment resulted mainly from the contributions of
psychology and child study rather than from pro-
gressive or "modern" theories. Kandel takes the
traditional or "essentialist" viewpoint espoused by
William C. Bagley, whose biography he presents in
William Chandler Bagley, Stalwart Educator (New
York, Bureau of Publications, Teachers College,
Columbia University, 1961. 131 p.). Kandel also
shares with Bagley the conviction that teachers
must have thorough scholarly training as well as
high pedagogical skills.
2295. Mort, Paul R., Walter C. Reusser, and John
W. Policy. Public school finance: its back-
ground, structure, and operation. 3d ed. New
York, McGraw-Hill, 1960. 512 p. (McGraw-Hill
series in education)
59—11940 LB2825.M598 1960
Bibliography at the end of each chapter.
A revised edition of no. 5144 in the 1960 Guide.
Arvid J. Burke's Financing Public Schools in the
United States, rev. ed. (New York, Harper
[1957] 679 p. Exploration series in education) is
an updated edition of a work mentioned in the
annotation for Public School Finance in the 1960
Guide.
2296. Thayer, Vivian T. The role of the school in
American society. New York, Dodd, Mead,
1960. 530 p. 60—6781 LCi9i.T48
Bibliography at the end of each chapter.
The author considers selected assumptions and
formative ideas about education, analyzes transfor-
mations in the social and economic status of youth
that have affected the curriculum, examines the
relationship between educational theories and cur-
riculum, methods of teaching, and administrative
structure, and discusses issues currently facing the
schools. He enlarges upon one of his topics in a
subsequent work, Formative Ideas in American
Education, From the Colonial Period to the Present
(New York, Dodd, Mead, 1965. 394 p.).
Bii. PRESCHOOL AND PRIMARY GRADES
2297. Caswell, Hollis L., and Arthur Wellesley
Foshay. Education in the elementary school.
3d ed. New York, American Book Co. [1957]
430 p. illus. (American education series)
57-753 LB 1 555.035 1957
Bibliography at the end of each chapter. Bibli-
ography: p. 420—421.
A revised edition of no. 5147 in the 1960 Guide.
Nursery-Kindergarten Education (New York,
McGraw-Hill, 1958. 365 p.), edited by Jerome E.
Leavitt, is a collection of essays written by n edu-
cators to help students, teachers, and parents
become oriented to the methods, curriculum, phi-
losophy, and basic principles of nursery school and
kindergarten. Nancy M. Rambusch's Learning
How to Learn; an American Approach to Montes-
sori (Baltimore, Helicon [1963, Ci962] 183 p.)
is focused on the educational methods developed for
preschool children by Maria Montessori and on the
use of these methods in the United States. Gilbert
E. Donahue's 48i-item bibliography of writings by
and about Montessori is appended.
2298. Otto, Henry J., and David C. Sanders. Ele-
mentary school organization and administra-
tion. 4th ed. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts
[1964] 409 p. 64—11518 1^62805.076 1964
Bibliographical footnotes.
A revised edition of no. 5151 in the 1960 Guide.
Biii. SECONDARY SCHOOLS
2299. Conant, James B. The American high
school today: a first report to interested citi-
zens. New York, McGraw-Hill [1959] 140 p.
(Carnegie series in American education, i)
59—8527 LB 1 607.0647
From 1957 to 1959, the author and his staff of
four assistants, on a grant from the Carnegie Cor-
poration of America, conducted an investigation of
"comprehensive" high schools in 26 States. A
comprehensive high school is one which accommo-
dates all the high-school-age youths of a community
and is typical of American secondary education in
the United States. Having no equivalent in any
European country, "it has come into being because
of our economic history and our devotion to the
ideals of equality of opportunity and equality of
status." The main objectives of such a school,
Conant maintains, are to provide a general educa-
tion for all, a variety of nonacademic elective pro-
grams, and special arrangements for academically
talented students. Convinced that small schools
cannot attain these objectives, he urges that they
be abolished wherever possible. He also presents a
list of 21 additional recommendations concerning
the major existing weaknesses of public secondary
education. The same author's later volume, The
Child, the Parent, and the State (Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1959. 211 p.), is based on
addresses that largely grew out of the same study.
His Recommendations for Education in the Junior
High School Years; a Memorandum to School
332 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Boards (Princeton, N.J., Educational Testing Ser-
vice [1960] 46 p.) derives from a second investi-
gation conducted during the 1959—60 school year.
2300. Downey, Lawrence W. The secondary phase
of education. New York, Blaisdell Pub. Co.
[1965] xvi, 226 p. (A Blaisdell book in the social
and behavioral sciences) 64-24820 LB 1607.067
Annotated bibliography at the end of each chapter.
The author maintains that secondary education
has been characterized by a lack of order and sys-
tem. Scholarly studies in the field have not been
adequately related, and no guiding comprehensive
concept of the total process of education has been
developed. Downey's purpose is to facilitate fruit-
ful research by advancing a conceptual system for
the study of secondary education. In The Ameri-
can Secondary School Curriculum (New York, Mac-
millan [1965] 453 p.), Leonard H. Clark, Ray-
mond L. Klein, and John B. Burks describe the
background theory and present substance of the
junior and senior high school curriculum. Harl R.
Douglass has revised his two textbooks: Modern
Administration of Secondary Schools; Organization
and Administration of Junior and Senior High
Schools, 26 ed. (Boston, Ginn [1963] 636 p.),
the first edition of which is no. 5154 in the 1960
Guide, and Secondary Education in the United
States, 2d ed. (New York, Ronald Press [1964]
475 P')> tne original edition of which is entitled
Secondary Education for Life Adjustment of Amer-
ican Youth (1952) and is mentioned in the annota-
tion for no. 5224 in the 1960 Guide.
2301. Krug, Edward A. The shaping of the
American high school. New York, Harper
& Row [1964] 486 p. (Exploration series in ed-
ucation) 64-12801 LA222.K7
Bibliographical note: p. 449—466.
In the author's view, the high school assumed its
modern shape and characteristics during the period
between 1880 and 1920. Caught in a vast complex
of reform, the high school was subjected to extensive
criticism. The Report of the Committee on Sec-
ondary School Studies (1893) "aroused the educa-
tional world to discussion and controversy." Pre-
pared by a committee of the National Education
Association, it is generally referred to as the "Re-
port of the Committee of Ten." An extensive ac-
count of this document is contained in Theodore R.
Sizer's Secondary Schools at the Turn of the Cen-
tury (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1946. 304
p.). "For fifteen years after its publication," Sizer
says of the report, "it served as gospel for the cur-
riculum writers of the burgeoning high schools; in
our own time it serves as the explicit rallying point
for those who feel that our secondary schools have
forgotten their central role in training the intellect."
2302. Middlekauff, Robert. Ancients and axioms:
secondary education in eighteenth-century
New England. New Haven, Yale University Press,
1963. 218 p. (Yale historical publications. Miscel-
lany 77) 63-7941 LA222.M53
Bibliographical note: p. 196—203.
An analysis of the English educational tradition
in its New England setting. From 1700 to 1783
the Puritan, or liberal, tradition persisted in such
educational patterns as the development of private
education and the adherence to a classical curricu-
lum. From 1784 to 1800 the tradition was weak-
ened by the decline of the grammar schools and the
emergence of the academy with its addition of
higher mathematics and vocational subjects to the
curriculum. The author points out that the distinc-
tive achievements of the Puritan system are difficult
to discern, but he indicates its influence on the lives
of boys and on cultural developments in New Eng-
land. He concludes that although the liberal tra-
dition did not by itself produce a new frame of
mind, "it did reinforce tendencies already present —
a concern for this world, religious apathy, and
especially the rational strain within Puritanism."
C. Colleges and Universities
Ci. GENERAL AND HISTORICAL WORKS
2303. American Council on Education. American
universities and colleges. Edited by Allan
M. Cartter. 9th ed. Washington [1964] xv,
1339 P- 28-5598 LA226.A65
A revised edition of no. 5161 in the 1960 Guide.
Parts i and 2 and appendixes i, 4, and 6 have been
separately published under the title Higher Educa-
tion in the United States (Washington [1965]
197 p.).
EDUCATION / 333
2304. Berelson, Bernard. Graduate education in
the United States. New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1960. 346 p. (The Carnegie series in Ameri-
can education) 60—12759 1-62371.64
Bibliography: p. 265—270.
Graduate education began in the United States in
1876 with the opening of Johns Hopkins University.
The author reviews the history of that institution's
program as background for an anlysis of major cur-
rent trends and problems. In his conclusions and
recommendations he takes the position that gradu-
ate education is basically sound but can be improved
by a few adaptive changes. In Graduate Education;
a Critique and a Program (New York, Harper
[1961] 213 p.), Oliver C. Carmichael characterizes
the graduate school as the most inefficient and, in
some ways, the most ineffective division of the
modern university and suggests a specific, thor-
oughgoing program of reform and reorganization.
Graduate Education Today (Washington, American
Council on Education [1965] 246 p.), edited by
Everett Walters, consists of the views of 13 graduate
school deans.
2305. 6rick, Michael. Forum and focus for the
junior college movement: the American As-
sociation of Junior Colleges. New York, 6ureau
of Publications, Teachers College, Columbia Uni-
versity, 1964 [Ci963] 222 p. (Teachers College
studies in education) 64—14816 1^62301^2467
6ibliography: p. 209—222.
As a voluntary, national organization, the Ameri-
can Association of Junior Colleges provides leader-
ship, direction, and cohesion for the Nation's two-
year colleges. The author traces the history of the
association from its inception in 1920 through its
annual meeting in 1962 and examines the junior
college movement as a whole. In The Junior Col-
lege: Progress and Prospect (New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1960. 367 p. The Carnegie series in Ameri-
can education), Leland L. Medsker, past president
of the association, describes the effectiveness with
which the junior college performs its major func-
tions. The Open Door College: A Case Study
(New York, McGraw-Hill, 1960. 207 p. The Car-
negie series in American education), by 6urton R.
Clark, is a study of San Jose Junior College, Cali-
fornia, which is an administrative part of the local
school district and has a strong tendency toward
secondary school orientation. The Two-Year Col-
lege; a Social Synthesis (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,
Prentice-Hall [1965] 298 p. Prentice-Hall series
in education), by Clyde E. 61ocker, Robert H.
Plummer, and Richard C. Richardson, is focused
upon the relationship between the two-year college
as an institution and the society it was created to
serve.
2306. 6rubacher, John S., and Willis Rudy. High-
er education in transition; an American his-
tory, 1636—1956. New York, Harper [1958] 494
p. 58—7978 LA226.675
6ibliographical footnotes: p. 391—479.
A summing up of the development of higher edu-
cation from its beginnings in the small colonial
church-related colleges to the variety of forms it
takes today. The discussion includes the New Eng-
land hilltop college, the school of technology, the
complex municipal college or university, the com-
munity or junior college, and the large secular State
university. Each of these diverse forms represents
a significant stage in the growth of American civil-
ization. All possess the distinguishing imprint of
democracy. Endorsing Jacksonian egalitarianism,
the authors conclude that "American higher edu-
cation, far from reinforcing caste, has helped to
foster social mobility; instead of ratifying the re-
cruitment of an elite by ascription, it has thrown its
influence in the direction of the selection of a lead-
ership by achievement."
2307. Goodman, Paul. The community of scholars.
New York, Random House [1962] 175 p.
62-17163 L6232I.G63
"A little treatise in anarchist theory" is the defini-
tion given by the author to this critique of colleges
and universities in the United States. He believes
in free association and federation rather than from-
the-top management and administration and advo-
cates a revival of the ancient but neglected notion
of the community of scholars. He proposes that
groups of faculty members secede from established
institutions and create conditions under which they
can teach and learn without external obstruction
and regulation by administrators. An attempt to
develop a community of scholars within the frame-
work of the established university system is de-
scribed in a collection of n essays, A Community
of Scholars; the University Seminars at Columbia
(New York, Praeger [1965] 177 p.), edited by
Frank Tannenbaum, the founder and director of
the seminar movement at Columbia University,
where for 20 years informal groups of scholars and
intellectuals from many departments and institu-
tions have met monthly for dialog on broad sub-
jects.
2308. Harris, Seymour E. Higher education: re-
sources and finance. New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1962. xxxviii, 713 p. illus.
61—18311 L62342.H34
Bibliographical footnotes.
An economist attacks the problems of getting
more resources into higher education and utilizing
them more effectively. He reviews present trends.
334 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
projects a 1970 budget for all colleges and univer-
sities combined, and discusses such topics as tuition,
scholarships and loans, Federal and State aid, the
declining significance of endowment— fund income,
mistakes in management, costs and economies, and
the economic status of the faculty. Philanthropy in
the Shaping of American Higher Education (New
Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers University Press [1965]
340 p.), by Merle E. Curti and Roderick Nash, is
devoted to the broad question, "What difference
did the giving of billions of dollars to American
colleges and universities make?" The land-grant
movement from its beginnings to the present is the
subject of Edward D. Eddy's Colleges for Our Land
and Time; the Land-Grant Idea in American Edu-
cation (New York, Harper [1957] 328 p.).
2309. Hofstadter, Richard, and Wilson Smith, eds,
American higher education, a documentary
history. [Chicago] University of Chicago Press
[1961] 2 v. 61-15935 LA226.H53 1961
Bibliographical footnotes.
A highly readable anthology covering three cen-
turies of educational history. The selections range
from John Eliot's earnest appeal for a college in the
Massachusetts Bay Colony in 1633 to the 1947 re-
port of the President's Commission on Higher Edu-
cation and Robert M. Hutchins' critical commen-
tary on it. Many of the documents have long been
out of print and inaccessible except in the largest
libraries. Together they reveal "the diffusion of the
educational system throughout the country; the
problems created by sectarian affiliations; the char-
acter and functions of presidents and trustees; the
evolution of curricular controversies and educa-
tional ideals; the institutional position and role of
the professor and the conditions of professorial life;
the development of academic freedom." Each part
of the anthology is prefaced by an introductory es-
say identifying the documents and placing them in
context.
2310. Kerr, Clark. The uses of the university.
Cambridge, Mass., Harvard University Press,
1963. 140 p. (The Godkin lectures at Harvard
University, 1963) 63—20770 LB2325.K.43
Bibliographical footnotes: p. 127—135.
In his eight-year presidency, the author led the
University of California through a period of tre-
mendous growth and change. In this volume, based
on three lectures that he delivered at Harvard Uni-
versity in 1963, he describes recent developments in
higher education. He maintains that the university
is being reshaped by the widespread recognition
that new knowledge is the most important factor in
economic and social growth. In The Academic
President: Educator or Caretaker? (New York,
McGraw-Hill, 1962. 294 p. The Carnegie series
in American education), Harold W. Dodds, presi-
dent of Princeton University from 1933 to 1957,
stresses that a college president's prime function
should be to furnish educational leadership rather
than to devote himself to such activities as fund-
raising and public relations. In Academic Proces-
sion; Reflections of a College President (New York,
Columbia University Press, 1959. 222 p.), Henry
M. Wriston, president emeritus of Brown Univer-
sity, asserts that scholarly achievement is the prin-
cipal qualification for the head of an institution of
higher learning.
2311. McGrath, Earl J. The predominandy Negro
colleges and universities in transition. [New
York] Published for the Institute of Higher Edu-
cation by the Bureau of Publications, Teachers Col-
lege, Columbia University [1965] xv, 204 p.
(Publications of the Institute of Higher Education)
65-19733 LC28oi.M28
Bibliography: p. 194—204.
A former U. S. Commissioner of Education pre-
sents an overview of the characteristics, needs, and
prospects of 123 predominandy Negro institutions
that provide the main educational opportunity for
Negro youth. He emphasizes the necessity for mas-
sive support from private foundations, government,
and other benefactors. The Negro Woman's Col-
lege Education (New York, Teachers College, Co-
lumbia University, 1956. 163 p. TC studies in edu-
cation), by Jeanne L. Noble, is a brief discussion of
current conditions.
2312. Newcomer, Mabel. A century of higher
education for American women. New York,
Harper [1959] 266 p. 59— 13797 LCi756.N4
Bibliographical note: p. 257—259. Bibliography
at the end of each chapter.
An interpretive history of higher education for
women from its beginnings at Oberlin College in
1837. Written as a tribute to Vassar College on
the occasion of its centennial celebration, the book
emphasizes, because of the important roles they
have played, some of the older institutions, includ-
ing— in addition to Vassar — Bryn Mawr, Radcliffe,
Mount Holyoke, and Wellesley.
2313. Power, Edward J. A history of Catholic
higher education in the United States. Mil-
waukee, Bruce Pub. Co. [1958] 383 p.
58-9981 LC487.P65
Bibliography: p. 359—373.
The author centers his attention on the origins
and development of Catholic colleges for men. The
EDUCATION / 335
first four-year Catholic college for women was not
established until 1896, and it, like others that fol-
lowed, was essentially patterned after the existing
men's colleges. In addition, the men's institutions,
although they are less numerous than their counter-
parts for women, enroll four times as many students.
Appendixes provide brief historical sketches of 267
men's colleges, in order by date of founding, and
lists of men's and women's colleges, arranged by
States.
2314. Rudolph, Frederick. The American college
and university, a history. New York,
Knopf, 1962. 516 p. (Knopf publications in edu-
cation) 62—12991 LA226.Ry2
Bibliography: p. [497]— 516.
"For some time now the general reader and the
professional historian have had greater access to
the history of almost any skirmish of the Civil War
than they have had to the history of education in
the United States. This book is intended in some
way to redress the balance, as far as the American
experience with higher education is concerned."
The author draws on 300 years of educational de-
velopment to provide informed answers to the ques-
tions of how, why, and with what results colleges
and universities have developed as they have. He
discusses the role and status of faculties and admin-
istration, conflicts over the curriculum, and extra-
curricular activities. A bibliography is supple-
mented by a commentary on the historiography of
higher education and by suggestions concerning
needs and opportunities for further study in this
field.
2315. Sanford, Nevitt, ed. The American college;
a psychological and social interpretation of
the higher learning. Prepared for the Society for
the Psychological Study of Social Issues. New
York, Wiley [1962] xvi, 1084 p.
61—17362 LA228.S3
Includes bibliographies.
The editor states that the major purpose of this
volume is to help put the resources of the newer
social sciences into the service of liberal education.
The 30 contributors are social scientists who are
convinced that colleges are failing to achieve their
stated purposes and who advocate searching for
remedies through studies of the processes of college
education. Here they undertake to indicate what
has been done and what needs to be done in the
field of undergraduate education. The college is
analyzed as a complex, diverse whole, constantly in-
fluenced and changed by the society and culture in
which it exists.
2316. Schmidt, George P. The liberal arts college;
a chapter in American cultural history. New
Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers University Press, 1957.
310 p. 57-8640 LA226.S36
Bibliography: p. 297—299.
The liberal arts college was the original institu-
tion of higher learning in the United States. Its
history is traced here, from the colonial period to
the present, by a Rutgers University historian. He
views the liberal arts college as an institution that
has changed from one dominating the educational
scene to one struggling to maintain its identity and
existence. The author concludes that its future is
dependent on the continued vitality of the principle
of academic freedom. The nonconformist must be
allowed to express himself. "What was said by
them of old time contains the wisdom of the ages,
which the liberal college must preserve and trans-
mit to posterity. But whenever a prophet of new
ideals arises to speak with the authority that rests
on fullness of knowledge and conscientious convic-
tion, it is the duty of the liberal college to give him
a hearing."
2317. Veysey, Laurence R. The emergence of the
American university. Chicago, University
of Chicago Press [1965] xiv, 505 p.
65—24427 LA226.V47
Bibliography: p. 448—460.
From the Civil War until about 1890, the main
issue concerning the university in the United States
was the problem of defining its basic purpose and
function. In the nineties, the dispute centered on
the kind and degree of control to be exerted by
the administration. Accordingly, this study, cov-
ering the period from 1865 to 1910, is divided into
two parts. "The first considers in turn each of the
principal academic philosophies which vied for dom-
inance of higher learning in the United States dur-
ing the decades after 1865. Interspersed among the
accounts of these philosophies are brief analyses of
some of the individual leaders who were more or
less associated with each of them. The second part
of the study, largely devoted to developments after
1890, describes the academic structure which came
into being, the younger men who took command
of it, and its effect on a variety of professional tem-
peraments. Here again brief discussions of particu-
lar leading figures have been used to illustrate the
general themes."
2318. Wilson, Logan, ed. Emerging patterns in
American higher education. Washington,
American Council on Education [1965] 292 p.
65-19783 LB2325-W49
336 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Includes bibliographies.
Thirty-six essays, most of which were prepared for
the annual meeting of the American Council on
Education in San Francisco, October 1—2, 1964.
They are focused on the problems arising from the
growth of new patterns of organization and admin-
istration within colleges and universities. Higher
Education: Some Newer Developments (New York,
McGraw-Hill [1965] 342 p.), edited by Samuel
Baskin, is devoted to recent experimentation. In
The Citadel of Learning (New Haven, Yale Uni-
versity Press, 1956. 79 p.), James B. Conant re-
flects on the two main functions of a university,
teaching and research, and their interrelationship.
William C. De Vane, in Higher Education in
Twentieth-Century America (Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1965. 211 p. Library of Congress
series in American civilization), identifies and de-
scribes movements and trends.
Cii. INDIVIDUAL INSTITUTIONS
2319. Durkin, Joseph T. Georgetown University:
the middle years, 1840—1900. Washington,
Georgetown University Press, 1963. 333 p. illus.
63—22294 LDi96i.G52D8
"Bibliographical essay": p. 319—322.
Georgetown University was the first institution
of Catholic higher education in the United States.
Father Durkin continues the narrative begun by
Father John M. Daley, S.J., in Georgetown Univer-
sity: Origin and Early Years (Washington, George-
town University Press, 1957. 324 p.), which re-
counts the events surrounding the founding of the
college in 1789 and the subsequent 50 years of
growth. Among the major figures in Father Dur-
kin's study are Father James Ryder, during whose
presidency the medical school was opened in 1851;
Father Bernard Maguire, who in his last commence-
ment address in 1 870 announced the opening of the
law school; and Father Patrick F. Healy, who played
a dominant role in the decision to make the institu-
tion a university.
2320. Foster, Margery S. "Out of smalle begin-
ings . . ." an economic history of Harvard
College in the Puritan period (1636 to 1712). Cam-
bridge, Belknap Press of Harvard University Press,
1962. 243 p. illus. 62-13266 LD2I52.F63
Bibliography: p. [2091-216.
"The object of this study is to describe the eco-
nomic situation of Harvard College in the Puritan
Period, and to show how general economic factors
of the period influenced the College, as well as how
factors other than economic affected Harvard's eco-
nomics." The author also differentiates between
current practices that have colonial origins and those
that are new. Social Sciences at Harvard, 1860—
1920; From Inculcation to the Open Mind (Cam-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1965. 320 p.),
edited by Pearl H. Buck, consists of essays by five
graduate students who view the introduction of the
scientific method of inquiry, by which college teach-
ing changed from the revelation of a fixed body of
truth to the search for truth, as the principal im-
pulse that transformed Harvard from the classical
college of 1850 to the great university of 1900.
2321. Meigs, Cornelia L. What makes a college?
A history of Bryn Mawr. New York, Mac-
millan, 1956. 277 p. illus.
56—7323 LD7o63.M4
The history of a small, prestigious, liberal arts col-
lege for women, located near Philadelphia, Pa. The
author concludes that the institution's success has
been due to the mutual harmony of its presidents,
trustees, alumnae, faculty, and students, in short,
all who have shared in its growth. The source of
the harmony has been "an unspoken loyalty, an un-
shakable belief in the power of human learning, in
the power of men's minds as a force as great as any
that exists in a universe of infinite forces." Mar-
garet F. Thorp's Neilson of Smith (New York, Ox-
ford University Press, 1956. 363 p.) is the biog-
raphy of William A. Neilson, teacher and scholar
who, from 1917 to 1939, was president of Smith
College, another outstanding liberal arts college for
women, located in Northampton, Mass.
2322. Michigan University. The University of
Michigan, an encyclopedic survey. Wilfred
B. Shaw, editor. Ann Arbor, University of Michi-
gan Press, 1942-58. 4 v. (2066 p.) illus.
61-63636 LD3278.A242
Vols. 3—4 edited by Walter A. Donnelly and others.
Includes bibliographies.
This survey, entered as no. 5201 in the 1960
Guide, was completed with the publication of vol-
ume 4 in 1958. It has also been issued in eight
volumes. The recent history of a large Southern
State university is traced by Louis R. Wilson in
The University of North Carolina, 1900—1930; the
Making of a Modern University (Chapel Hill, Uni-
versity of North Carolina Press [1957] 633 p.)
and The University of North Carolina Under Con-
solidation, 1931—1963: History and Appraisal
(Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina, Con-
solidated Office, 1964. 483 p.). Intimately con-
nected with the university's growth since 1901 as
librarian, teacher, and founder of the institution's
library school, extension service, and press, Wilson
draws fruitfully upon personal experience in de-
veloping his narrative.
EDUCATION / 337
2323. Rudolph, Frederick. Mark Hopkins and
the log; Williams College, 1836-1872. New
Haven, Yale University Press, 1956. 267 p. illus.
(Yale historical publications. Miscellany 63)
56-5946 LD6072.7 1836^8
Bibliography: p. [2391—256.
Williams College, a small liberal arts institution
for men in northwestern Massachusetts, "has be-
come in the folklore of American education a sym-
bol of what Americans have often meant by a col-
lege education." A legend has grown up around
the figure of Mark Hopkins, who served as presi-
dent from 1836 to 1872. Many students of higher
education consider James A. Garfield's well-known
aphorism, "The ideal college is Mark Hopkins on
one end of a log and a student on the other," to be
the most satisfactory definition of what an Ameri-
can college ought to be. The author attempts to
recover Hopkins, his college, and its students from
mythology and to determine the extent to which
they and their contemporaries on other college cam-
puses influence education today.
D. Education of Special Groups
2324. Baker, Harry J. Introduction to exceptional
children. 3d ed. New York, Macmillan
[1959] 523 p. illus.
59—5106 1X^3965.632 1959
Bibliography at the end of each chapter.
A revised edition of no. 5207 in the 1960 Guide.
Special Education for the Exceptional (Boston, P.
Sargent [1955-56] 3 v.), edited by Merle E.
Frampton and Elena D. Gall, which is mentioned
in the annotation for no. 5207 in the 1960 Guide,
is now complete with the publication of volume 3.
Samuel A. Kirk's Educating Exceptional Children
(Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1962] 415 p.) is a
textbook that applies the concept of discrepancies in
growth to the study of exceptional children and has
chapters on the intellectually gifted, the mentally
retarded, the auditorily handicapped, the visually
handicapped, the speech defective, the orthopedical-
ly handicapped, and the emotionally disturbed. El-
mer W. Weber's Mentally Retarded Children and
Their Education (Springfield, 111., C. C. Thomas
[1963] 338 p.) is a study of one large category of
exceptional children.
2325. Gold, Milton J. Education of the intellec-
tually gifted. Columbus, Ohio, C. E. Mer-
rill Books [1965] 472 p- (Merrill's international
education series) 65—21168 033993.054
Bibliography: p. 446—465.
"The real issue in education of the gifted, as in
the education of children with moderate and low
intellectual ability, is individualization in content,
materials, and method." One of the problems en-
gendered by the typically comprehensive public
school is the difficulty in providing for a wide range
of individual abilities within a single classroom.
The author believes that gifted children have been
neglected, and he stresses the need for developing
programs in which the individual is the chief con-
cern. Additional works on the same subject include
Educating Gifted Children, rev. and enl. ed. ( [Chi-
cago] University of Chicago Press [1961] 362
p.), by Robert F. DeHaan and Robert J. Havig-
hurst; The Gifted Student (New York, Oxford
University Press, 1964. 296 p.), by William K.
Durr; and the National Society for the Study of
Education publication Education for the Gifted
(Chicago, NSSE; distributed by the University of
Chicago Press, 1958. 420 p. Yearbook of the Na-
tional Society for the Study of Education [new ser.]
57th, pt. 2), edited by Nelson B. Henry.
2326. Handbook of adult education in the United
States. [4th ed.] Malcom S. Knowles, edi-
tor. Chicago, Adult Education Association of the
U.S.A., 1960. 624 p. 60—7359 LC525I.H3
Bibliographies and bibliographical footnotes at
the ends of chapters.
A revised edition of no. 5209 in the 1960 Guide.
In The Adult Education Movement in the United
States (New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston
[1962] 335 p.), Malcolm S. Knowles traces the
movement's history, showing how other social forces
influenced and were influenced by it. He examines
the contributions of such organizations as the Amer-
ican Association for Adult Education, the Depart-
ment of Adult Education of the National Education
Association, and the Adult Education Association
and anticipates future trends and problems. Volun-
teers for Learning; a Study of Educational Pursuits
of American Adults (Chicago, Aldine Pub. Co.
[1965] 624 p. National Opinion Research Cen-
ter. Monographs in social research, 4) is the final
report, coauthored by John W. C. Johnstone and
Ramon J. Rivera, on the National Opinion Re-
search Center's investigation into the nature of adult
education in the United States.
338 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2327. Riessman, Frank. The culturally deprived
child. New York, Harper [1962] 140 p.
62—9915 LC4o69.S6R5
Bibliography: p. 131—133.
One of the major problems facing education today
is the lack of preparation for coping with the needs
of children who are "culturally deprived" or "dis-
advantaged." The author aims to provide teachers,
social workers, psychologists, and psychiatrists with
a picture of the deprived individual, enabling them
to work with him in a fruitful, nonpatronizing man-
ner. Riessman emphasizes what he regards as
previously ignored, positive aspects of the under-
privileged child's cultural heritage. In Slums and
Suburbs; a Commentary on Schools in Metropoli-
tan Areas (New York, McGraw-Hill [1961] 147
p.), James B. Conant contrasts high schools in the
slums of large cities with those in the wealthy
suburbs and explores the problems facing both.
Teaching the Culturally Disadvantaged Pupil
(Springfield, 111., C. C. Thomas [1965] 335 p.),
compiled and edited by John M. Beck and Richard
W. Saxe, contains suggestions concerning methods
and materials for use in improving the education
of culturally disadvantaged children in elementary
schools.
E. Teachers and Teaching
2328. Caplow, Theodore, and Recce J. McGee.
The academic marketplace. With a fore-
word by Jacques Barzun. New York, Basic Books
[1958] 262 p. 58-13156 LBi778.C3
The academic labor market is a peculiar and some-
times disillusioning operation. Faculty members
are selected on the basis of repute rather than per-
formance. "Men are hired, to put it baldly, on the
basis of how good they will look to others." When
an academic man's reputation has crystallized, the
possibilities of changing it are slight. "A man may,
for example, publish what would be, in other cir-
cumstances, a brilliant contribution to his field, but
if he is too old, or too young, or located in the minor
league, it will not be recognized as brilliant and will
not bring him the professional advancement which
he could claim if he were of the proper age and lo-
cated at the proper university." Such are some of
the conclusions arrived at by sociologists Caplow
and McGee on the basis of interviews with admin-
istrative officers and 418 professors at 10 major uni-
versities. Numerous suggestions for reform are of-
fered. In Professor; Problems and Rewards in Col-
lege Teaching (New York, Macmillan, 1961. 189
p. Macmillan career book), Fred B. Millett dis-
cusses the training, activities, and responsibilities of
the college teacher in 20th-century America.
2329. Conant, James B. The education of Ameri-
can teachers. New York, McGraw-Hill
[1963] 275 p. (Carnegie series in American edu-
cation) 63—20444 LBi7i5.C6i7 1963
Bibliographical footnotes.
The author, with the collaboration of nine emi-
nent educators, made a two-year investigation of the
education of teachers for elementary and secondary
schools. During the first year, he and his traveling
staff visited 77 "teacher-preparing" institutions in
22 States. All types and categories of institutions
were represented. In the second year of the study,
Conant focused attention on the State regulations
that place limitations on the local school board's
freedom to employ teachers. He concentrated al-
most exclusively on the 16 most populous States,
representing each geographical section of the United
States. Foremost among the author's recommenda-
tions is the shifting of responsibility for certification
from State departments of education to the 1,150
institutions which educate teachers, a move designed
to eliminate the former's "bankrupt" policies and
to invigorate the latter.
2330. Flexner, Abraham. Abraham Flexner; an
autobiography. Introduction by Allan Nev-
ins. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1960. xvi, 302
p. 60-8007 LB875.F583A3 1960
"A revision, brought up to date, of the author's I
remember, published in 1940."
The author's two major achievements were the
revolution he effected in American medical educa-
tion and the establishment of the Institute of Ad-
vanced Study at Princeton. This revision of his
autobiography was completed before his death in
1959 at the age of 92. It is not only the story of a
modest and humane scholar, told with color and
humor, but also a history of the educational develop-
ments made possible by philanthropy guided by
perceptive minds. In The Gentle Puritan; a Life
of Ezra Stiles, 7727—7795 (Published for the Insti-
tute of Early American History and Culture, Wil-
liamsburg, Va. New Haven, Yale University Press,
1962. 490 p.), Edmund S. Morgan examines the
papers of a man of extraordinary learning who
served as president of Yale from 1778 to 1795, and
EDUCATION / 339
whose journals and notebooks furnish access to the
intellectual life of 18th-century New England.
2331. Gage, Nathaniel L., ed. Handbook of re-
search on teaching; a project of the Ameri-
can Educational Research Association. Chicago,
Rand McNally [1963] 1218 p. illus.
63-7142 LB 1 028.63
"Whatever else it may be, teaching is an intrigu-
ing, important, and complex process. Because it is
intriguing, it attracts scientific attention. Because
it is important, it merits careful research. Because
it is complex, research on teaching needs many-
sided preparation. It is toward this preparation that
the Handboot^ of Research on Teaching is aimed."
The contributors collectively attempt to summarize,
analyze, and integrate the vast body of research on
teaching. Although this long volume is intended
primarily for the graduate or advanced undergradu-
ate student preparing to do research on teaching, it
can be useful to school administrators, teachers, and
citizens interested in education.
2332. Lieberman, Myron. The future of public
education. [Chicago] University of Chi-
cago Press [1960] 294 p.
59—15108 LA2i6.L5
Bibliographical footnotes.
A discussion of the structure and organization of
the teaching profession. The author maintains that
public education in the United States is much less
effective than it can and ought to be. In his opin-
ion, the most important cause of this ineffective-
ness is an anachronistic and dysfunctional power
structure, toward which he directs the attention of
teachers. "The basic educational reforms needed
in the United States will have to be initiated and
carried out by the teachers themselves. It follows
from this that the study of teachers' organizations —
their programs, leadership, political sophistication,
strategy, and tactics — must be accorded high prior-
ity by those who wish to bring about fundamental
improvements." In an earlier work entitled Educa-
tion as a Profession (Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-
Hall, 1956. 540 p.), the same author sets forth the
criteria of a profession and describes and analyzes
the status of education with respect to them.
F. Methods and Techniques
2333. Brown, James W., Richard B. Lewis, and
Fred F. Harcleroad. A-V instruction: ma-
terials and methods. 2d ed. New York, McGraw-
Hill [1964] 592 p. illus. (McGraw-Hill series
in education) 63-22154 1^61043.675 1964
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
Examples of instructional media drawn from
many subject fields and from various school levels,
kindergarten to college. Emphasis is placed upon
the interrelatedness of these materials and their mul-
tiple uses. The authors deal with readymade prod-
ucts, such as textbooks, films, television and radio
programs, globes and maps, and programmed ma-
terials, and a large group of "created" materials and
techniques. Practical guidance in the operation of
audiovisual equipment commonly found in schools
today is appended to the text. Specialized works on
two important types of audiovisual media are, re-
spectively, Teaching Machines and Programmed
Learning; a Source Boo^ ( [Washington] Dept. of
Audio- Visual Instruction, National Education As-
sociation [1960—65] 2 v.), edited by Arthur A.
Lumsdaine and Robert Glaser, and TV and Our
School Crisis (New York, Dodd, Mead, 1958. 198
p.), by Charles A. Siepmann. Administering Edu-
cational Media (New York, McGraw-Hill [1965]
357 p.), by James W. Brown and Kenneth D. Nor-
berg, is focused on the control and organization of
audiovisual materials in grade schools, high schools,
colleges, universities, and State departments of edu-
cation.
2334. Bruner, Jerome S. The process of educa-
tion. Cambridge, Harvard University Press,
1960. 97 p. 60—15235 1^6885.678
The chairman's report of the Woods Hole Con-
ference of 1959, at which some 35 scholars, scientists,
and educators discussed possible means of improv-
ing the public schools. Among the major topics
are the role of intuition in thought, the stimula-
tion of the desire to learn, the proposition that "the
foundations of any subject may be taught to any-
body at any age in some form," and the need to
teach the fundamental ideas of a subject rather than
mere facts and techniques.
2335. Fries, Charles C. Linguistics and reading.
New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston
[1963] 265 p. illus. 63—14410 L6io5o.F7
Bibliographical notes: p. 216—255.
"This book presents the first attempt to bring
together a nontechnical descriptive survey of modern
340 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
linguistic knowledge, an analysis of the nature of
the reading process in the light of that knowledge,
and a somewhat detailed linguistic examination of
the kinds of materials to which the reader must
develop high-speed recognition responses." Romal-
da B. Spalding and Walter T. Spalding explain the
Unified Phonics Method for teaching speech, writ-
ing, spelling, and reading in The Writing Road to
Reading; a Modern Method of Phonics for Teaching
Children to Read, rev. ed. (New York, Whiteside &
Morrow, 1962. 248 p.). In American Reading
Instruction (Newark, Del., International Reading
Association [1965] 449 p.), by Nila B. Smith,
and Reading in the Elementary School (Boston,
Allyn & Bacon, 1964. 356 p.), by George D. Spache,
various current methods of teaching reading are
reviewed. The Teaching of Reading, rev. ed.
(New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston [1964]
422 p.), by John J. De Boer and Martha Dallmann,
is a textbook designed to illustrate the problems of
reading instruction in the elementary school.
2336. Hutson, Percival W. The guidance func-
tion in education. New York, Appleton-
Century-Crofts [1958] 680 p. illus.
58-11064 LBI027-5.H86
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
The author, who selected references on guidance
for inclusion in The School Review (no. 5249 in the
1960 Guide) for 24 years, here draws upon a large
body of literature to present "the accumulated
understandings of the guidance function and of the
features which implement it." His gleanings from
the writings of other authors are integrated with his
own appraisals and interpretations. In Management
and Improvement of Guidance (New York,
Appleton-Century-Crofts [1965] 508 p.), George
E. Hill stresses the practical aspects of guidance in
elementary and secondary schools. In Using Tests
in Counseling (New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts
[1961] 434 p. The Century psychology series),
Leo Goldman aims to help guidance workers gain
competence in employing tests as tools in the coun-
seling process. Merle M. Ohlsen's Guidance Services
in the Modern School (New York, Harcourt, Brace
& World [1964] 515 p.) is a textbook for teach-
ers, administrators, and counselors, presenting the
basic guidance services and the relationships among
them.
2337. Shaplin, Judson T., and Henry F. Olds, eds.
Team teaching. With chapters by Judson T.
Shaplin [and others] New York, Harper & Row
["1964] xv, 430 p. (Exploration series in educa-
tion) 64—10224 1^61027.8466
Bibliography: p. 379—421.
"Team teaching is a type of instructional organi-
zation, involving teaching personnel and the students
assigned to them, in which two or more teachers are
given responsibility, wording together, for all or a
significant part of the instruction of the same group
of students." This new pattern of organization has
emerged in American education since 1954 and is
becoming a major educational movement. It is
estimated that some 1,500 teachers and 45,000 stud-
ents are now involved in team teaching projects. In
many team-taught classes, the grading of student
achievement is eliminated. The theoretical basis
and practical operation of nongraded schools is
clarified by John I. Goodlad and Robert H. Ander-
son in The Nongraded Elementary School, rev. ed.
(New York, Harcourt, Brace & World [1963]
248 p.) and by Bartley F. Brown in The Nongraded
High School (Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall
[1963] 223 p.). Innovation in Education (New
York, Bureau of Publications, Teachers College,
Columbia University, 1964. 689 p.), edited by
Matthew B. Miles, is a collection of essays on
various other new educational trends.
2338. Stanley, Julian C. Measurement in today's
schools. 4th ed. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,
Prentice-Hall [1964] xviii, 414 p. illus.
64—20454 LB 1 13 1. 874 1964
First to third editions by C. C. Ross.
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
The fourth edition of a work mentioned in the
annotation for no. 5229 in the 1960 Guide. This
basic textbook deals with fundamental principles of
measurement and with the construction and use of
measuring instruments. The Fifth Mental Meas-
urements Yearbook (Highland Park, N.J., Gryphon
Press, 1959. 1292 p.), edited by Oscar K. Euros,
supplements the editor's previous yearbooks, which
are also mentioned in the annotation for no. 5229 in
the 1960 Guide. It covers the years from 1952
through 1958 and contains a test list, test reviews,
references on the construction, use, and limitations
of specific tests, a book list, and excerpts from book
reviews. Measurement and Evaluation in the Mod-
ern School (New York, D. McKay Co. [1962]
622 p.), by Joseph Raymond Gerberich, Harry A.
Greene, and Albert N. Jorgensen, has a particularly
strong section on measuring and evaluating in school
subjects. Frederick B. Davis' Educational Measure-
ments and Their Interpretation (Belmont, Calif.,
Wadsworth Pub. Co. [1964] 422 p.) includes in
the appendixes definitions of statistical terms.
EDUCATION / 341
G. Contemporary Problems and Controversies
2339. Boles, Donald E. The Bible, religion, and
the public schools. [3d ed.] Ames, Iowa
State University Press, 1965. 408 p.
65-16369 LC 1 1 1. 655 1965
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
3457370).
Bibliography: p. 375—379.
"Two fundamental propositions basic to our public
school system are: public funds shall not be granted
to sectarian schools, and sectarian instruction shall
not be given in public schools." The author ex-
amines the second principle, presenting the argu-
ments on both side of the controversy concerning
Bible readings and related programs in the public
schools. He discusses European and colonial back-
grounds, State constitutions, statutes, and court de-
cisions, and the United States Supreme Court deci-
sions of 1962 and 1963 banning State-sponsored
prayer and State-sponsored Bible readings in the
public schools as violations of the first and i4th
amendments of the Federal Constitution. In Free-
dom of Choice in Education, rev. ed. (Glen Rock,
N.J., Paulist Press [1963] 224 p. Deus Books),
Father Virgil C. Blum, a Catholic, advocates public
financial support for private schools.
2340. Clift, Virgil A., Archibald W. Anderson,
and H. Gordon Hullfish, eds. Negro edu-
cation in America; its adequacy, problems, and
needs. New York, Harper [1962] xxiii, 315 p.
(Yearbook of the John Dewey Society, i6th)
62—9485 Lioi.U6J6 1 6th, 1962
Bibliographical footnotes.
An appraisal of education as an instrument for
helping Negroes become freely and fully function-
ing first-class citizens. Historical, anthropological,
sociological, and psychological data are provided as
background, and the Supreme Court's decision in
Brown v. Board of Education (1954), which de-
clared segregation by race in the public schools
unconstitutional, is discussed. The aftermath of the
Court's decision is the subject of Benjamin Muse's
Ten Years of Prelude: The Story of Integration
Since the Supreme Court's 1954 Decision (New
York, Viking Press [1964] 308 p.), in which
are examined the desegregation of public schools in
the South and the beginnings of the broad move-
ment against all forms of race discrimination in the
United States.
2341. Iversen, Robert W. The Communists &
the schools. New York, Harcourt, Brace
[1959] 423 p. (Communism in American life)
59—11769 LA209.I9
Bibliographical notes: p. 375—410.
Although the educational system in the United
States was not initially an object of Communist
attention, there is a record of Communist activity
relating to the schools from the 1920*5 on. The
author is concerned with the nature, magnitude,
and impact of this activity. Focusing on the 1930'$,
when Communism was at its height in this country,
he discloses that the Communists contributed little
or nothing to the philosophy of education, to edu-
cational methods, or to curriculum and textbooks.
In the area of personnel relations, evidence of influ-
ence is "inchoate and inconclusive." The Commu-
nists achieved their most significant success in stu-
dent extracurricular activities; there was also some
activity in front organizations on the faculty level.
Communist leadership was briefly influential in the
New York local of the American Federation of
Teachers. Iversen concludes that "perhaps the most
important single consequence of American Com-
munist activity in the field of education has been
the massive retaliation it provoked."
2342. Keats, John C. Schools without scholars.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1958. 202 p.
57—10790 LA2O9.2.K4
In considering the multiple question of "why we
should teach what to whom," the author contrasts
traditional and progressive methods and materials.
In his opinion, the function of the public school is
to serve its community, and the responsibility of
the public is to see that it does. Therefore, the
public rather than professional educators should
decide the content of instruction. Keats describes
what one community did to improve the quality of
its schools. He shares with Paul Goodman the
belief that Americans have been oversold on the
idea of higher education. Both men contend that
too many, not too few, high school graduates go to
college. In The Sheepskin Psychosis (Philadelphia,
Lippincott [1965] 190 p.), Keats supports the
improvement of high schools as being preferable to
the establishment of additional colleges. In Com-
pulsory Mis-education (New York, Horizon Press
[1964.1 189 p.), Goodman opposes lengthy formal
schooling as a "mass superstition" that is inept
342 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
and psychologicaly, politically, and professionally
damaging. Among the alternatives to college pro-
posed by the two writers are guided travel abroad,
practical apprentice training, work camps, little the-
aters, local newspapers, farm schools, community
service, and Army enlistment.
2343. Koerner, James D. The miseducation of
American teachers. With an introduction
by Sterling M. McMurrin. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1963. 360 p. 63-9082 LBi7i5-K6
Based on a two-year study of 63 accredited insti-
tutions with programs in teacher education, the
author's findings indicate an urgent need for re-
form. "Education as an academic discipline has
poor credentials." Koerner states that the intel-
lectual quality of the education faculty is often
inferior and that education students do not compare
favorably to other students in academic ability.
Required courses in education are excessive in quan-
tity— in the case of undergraduate elementary edu-
cation students, about 40 percent of the total course
load — and are "often puerile, repetitious, dull, and
ambiguous." At the graduate level, admission stan-
dards are low, work in a liberal arts field is seldom
included, and "dissertations, when they are done at
all, are frequently triumphs of trivia." Koerner is
executive secretary of the Council for Basic Educa-
tion, a lay-oriented group devoted to the mainte-
nance of quality in American education. He has
edited a collection of 18 essays sponsored by the
Council and entitled The Case for Basic Education;
a Program of Aims for Public Schools (Boston, Lit-
tle, Brown [1959] 256 p.). Additional argu-
ments for basic education are presented by John F.
Latimer in What's Happened to Our High Schools?
(Washington, Public Affairs Press [1958] 196
p.) and by Philip Marson in A Teacher Speaks
(New York, D. McKay Co. [1960] 230 p.).
2344. Rickover, Hyman G. Education and free-
dom. New York, Dutton, 1959. 256 p.
59-5810 LA209.2.R53
A collection of speeches, modified for book publi-
cation, by the naval officer who was the chief
figure in the experimental work that led to the
adoption of nuclear propulsion by the U.S. Navy.
Rickover maintains that massive upgrading of the
scholastic standards of the Nation's schools is nec-
essary to guarantee the future prosperity and free-
dom of the Republic. Highly critical of "life-
adjustment" concepts of education, he stresses that
youth must have vigorous mental training to ensure
flexible and versatile minds for life in a constantly
changing world. In American Education, a Na-
tional Failure; the Problem of Our Schools and
What We Can Learn From England (New York,
Dutton, 1963. 502 p.) and Swiss Schools and Ours;
Why Theirs Are Better ([Boston] Little, Brown
[1962] 219 p.), Rickover describes educational
practices abroad that merit emulation in the United
States.
2345. Rudy, Solomon Willis. Schools in an age of
mass culture; an exploration of selected
themes in the history of twentieth-century American
education. Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall
[1965] 374 p. (Prentice-Hall education series)
65—11037 LA209.2.R79
Bibliographical footnotes.
The author, a professor of history, includes among
his topics the child study movement, child-centered
schools, the concept of "adjustment" as an educa-
tional goal, parent-teacher associations, philanthropic
foundations, school segregation, and the separation
of church and state. In The Rockefeller Brothers
Fund report The Pursuit of Excellence; Education
and the Future of America (Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1958. 48 p. Its Special studies report,
5), the point is stressed that in a democracy there is
no inherent clash between equality of opportunity
and the pursuit of excellence; education can be pro-
vided for the masses and for the gifted. Mortimer
J. Adler and Milton Mayer set forth the controver-
sial issues in American education in The Revolution
in Education ( [Chicago] University of Chicago
Press [1958] 224 p.). Crucial Issues in Educa-
tion, 3d ed. (New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston
[1964] 374 p.), edited by Henry Ehlers and
Gordon C. Lee, is a revision of a work mentioned
in the annotation for no. 5236 in the 1960 Guide.
2346. U.S. Congress. House- Committee on Edu-
cation and Labor. The Federal Government
and education: [a report on a study of education
programs in which the Federal Government is in-
volved] Presented by Mrs. Green of Oregon.
Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1963. xv, 178
p. (88th Cong., ist sess. House document no. 159)
63—65276 LB2825.A452 19633
Bibliography: p. 166.
This report, prepared under the supervision of
Representative Edith Green, reviews the Federal
Government's involvement in improving facilities,
equipment, and curricula, in supporting research in
colleges and universities, in extending grants to
students, and in financing other programs at home
and abroad. Federal Assistance for Educational
Purposes (Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1963.
166 p. 87th Cong., 2d sess.), by Helen A. Miller
and Andrew J. Shea, and Federal Educational Poli-
cies, Programs and Proposals (Washington, U.S.
EDUCATION / 343
Govt. Print. Off., 1960. 3 pts. 86th Cong., ad
sess.), by Charles A. Quattlebaum, are surveys pre-
pared for the House Committee on Education and
Labor by staff members of the Legislative Reference
Service of the Library of Congress. Homer D.
Babbidge and Robert M. Rosenzweig sketch the
background and development of relations between
the Federal Government and the American higher
education community in The Federal Interest in
Higher Education (New York, McGraw-Hill, 1962.
214 p.).
2347. Walcutt, Charles C., ed. Tomorrow's illiter-
ates: the state of reading instruction today.
With an introduction by Jacques Barzun. Boston,
Little, Brown [1961] xvii, 168 p.
61—12822 LBio5o.W3
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 165-168).
A group of specialists place responsibility for the
widespread illiteracy among graduates of our public
schools on such "progressive" reading methods as
"look-and-say" or "whole word," which, together
with the vocabulary control of basal readers and the
application of such concepts as "reading readiness,"
dominated educationist thought for four decades,
[n a concluding essay, editor Walcutt, professor of
English at Queens College, describes various phonics
methods which are now being used with success.
Reading Without Dic\ and Jane (Chicago, Regnery,
1965. 1 86 p.), by Arther S. Trace, The Right to
Learn (Chicago, Regnery, 1959. 228 p.), by Glenn
McCracken, and Reading: Chaos and Cure (New
York, McGraw-Hill [1958] 285 p.), by Sibyl
Terman and Charles C. Walcutt, also advocate the
use of phonics in reading instruction.
2348. Woodring, Paul. A fourth of a nation.
New York, McGraw-Hill [1957] 255 p.
57—10232 LA2O9-2.W63
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 245-248).
The classic thesis that education is the develop-
ment of the mind is juxtaposed to the pragmatic
antithesis that education is the nurturing of the
whole child. The author's synthesis is that the
proper aim of education is to prepare the individual
to make wise decisions. "The educated man is one
who can choose between good and bad, between
truth and falsehood, between the beautiful and the
ugly, between the worthwhile and the trivial." In
Voices in the Classroom; Public Schools and Public
Attitudes (Boston, Beacon Press [1965] 292 p.),
Peter Schrag examines a variety of schools and com-
munities. In The Schools (New York, Harper
[1961] 446 p.), Martin Mayer offers for the benefit
of parents a description of what he has observed
happening in classrooms from kindergarten through
high school.
H. Periodicals and Yearbooks
2349. The Educational record, v. i+ Jan. 1920+
[Washington, The American Council on
Education] £21—40 Li 1^146
Quarterly.
The articles focus on higher education in the
United States.
2350. The Harvard educational review, v. i +
Feb. 1931+ Cambridge, Mass., Graduate
School of Education, Harvard University.
34—7870 Ln.H3
Quarterly.
Articles and book reviews by teachers, scholars,
and research workers in education.
2351. History of education quarterly, v. i + Mar.
1961+ [Pittsburgh, University of Pitts-
burgh] 63-24253 Ln.H67
Official organ of the History of Education Society.
Although the scope is worldwide, a great number of
the articles and book reviews are concerned with
education in the United States.
2352. The Phi delta kappan, a journal for the pro-
motion of research, service, and leadership in
education, v. i+ Nov. 1915+ [Homewood, 111.,
Phi Delta Kappa] 46-35485 LJi2i.P4
Published 10 times a year.
Journal of Phi Delta Kappa, professional frater-
nity for men in education; "solicits and publishes
articles designed to advance thinking in the fields
of educational research, service, and leadership." A
"Books for Leaders" column is also included.
2353. Teachers College record, v. i+ Jan. 1900+
New York City [Bureau of Publications]
344 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Teachers College, Columbia University. forum for teachers covering a broad range of topics,
6-14087 Ln.T4 it is a "journal of contemporary thought in the
Issued eight months a year, October through May. humanities and behavioral sciences as they illumi-
Edited (1965) by Maxine Greene. Primarily a nate the process of education." Book reviews.
XXII
Philosophy and Psychology
A. Philosophy: General Worths
B. Representative Philosophers
C. Psychology
2354-2366
2367-2403
2404
THE GENERAL works on philosophy range from broad histories and studies of specific philo-
sophical movements to introductory anthologies of the writings of eminent philosophers
and collections reflecting recent philosophical thinking. Nine of the 18 representative philos-
ophers chosen for Section B in the 1960 Guide are included in this Supplement. The other
nine were omitted because of the absence of books by or about them that are appropriate for
this chapter. One additional philosopher, Arthur O. Lovejoy, was selected for inclusion in
the Supplement. As in the 1960 Guide, the writings
of some of the philosophers are entered in other
chapters, especially Chapter I, Literature. Except
in the case of Lovejoy, for whom a biographical
headnote is provided, the entry for each philoso-
pher's name refers to the headnote in the 1960
Guide. A revised edition of a history of American
psychology entered in the 1960 Guide is the only
entry in Section C of this chapter. Works on psy-
chiatry appear in Chapter XVIII, Medicine and
Public Health.
A. Philosophy: General Works
2354. Anderson, Paul R. Platonism in the Mid-
west. Philadelphia, Temple University Pub-
lications; distributed by Columbia University Press,
1963. 216 p. 63-11694 B944.P5A5
One purpose of this monograph is to reinforce
the conclusion that "no one section of the country,
no one hereditary strain, and no one center of
population has given a definitive character to our
national life." Anderson argues that New England,
commonly considered the intellectual center of
19th-century America, was no oasis in the wilder-
ness; on the contrary, he finds that the social en-
vironment of the Mississippi Valley between 1860
and 1890 precipitated intellectual activity that sur-
passed the East in its youth, courage, and self-
confidence and, in fact, influenced the culture of
New England. In St. Louis was a well-known
Hegelian group, which the author discusses only
generally, and in Jackonsville, 111., was a Platonist
group, which is the main object of this study.
Anderson describes the organizations, including the
Plato Club led by Hiram K. Jones, that made
Jacksonville the center of midwestern Platonism.
Another group devoted to Plato flourished in west-
ern Missouri under Thomas M. Johnson, the "Sage
of the Osage." After 1888 the movement lost its
impetus. The author's conclusion is that the people
sought something germane to the American mind
and consequently rejected the readymade principles
of the ancient Greeks.
2355. Black, Max, ed. Philosophy in America,
essays [by] William P. Alston [and others]
Ithaca, N.Y., Cornell University Press [1965]
307 p. (Muirhead library of philosophy)
65-15046 6934.656 1965
Bibliographical footnotes.
The editor has assembled a group of papers repre-
senting the work of a number of young philosophers
teaching at American universities. Their contribu-
345
346 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
tions represent "work in progress," and Black states
that one main purpose of this collection is to
encourage others to make further progress toward
solving the problems dealt with by the authors.
Some, although not all, of the papers employ tech-
nical terminology and are most relevant for students
of philosophy. Among the topics included are
"Aesthetic Problems of Modern Philosophy," "Ex-
planations in Psychology," "Quantum Physics and
the Philosophy of Whitehead," and "Reasons and
Reasoning."
2356. Christy, Arthur. The Orient in American
transcendentalism; a study of Emerson,
Thoreau, and Alcott. New York, Octagon Books,
1963 [Ci96o] xix, 382 p. (Columbia University
studies in English and comparative literature)
63-20888 6905.05 1963
Originally published in 1932, this book is a study
of the beginnings of American interest in oriental
thought and its flowering in New England transcen-
dentalism. "The author concentrates upon Ralph
Waldo Emerson, Henry David Thoreau, and Amos
Bronson Alcott as representative of transcendental-
ism as a whole. His account shows how these
three men borrowed from the literature of India,
China, and Persia and from classical and European
thought, blending all together in an eclectic synthe-
sis thoroughly characteristic of transcendentalism.
The bulk of the work is devoted to Emerson and dis-
cusses the influence of the Orient on his philosophi-
cal ideas; Thoreau and Alcott are studied through
an examination of their application of orientalism
to their conduct of life. The volume includes an
annotated bibliography (p. 273—323) of the oriental
reading of these three transcendentalists.
2357. Frankel, Charles, ed. The golden age of
American philosophy. New York, G. Bra-
ziller, 1960. 534 p. 60—5612 6934^7
2358. Konvitz, Milton R., and Gail Kennedy, eds.
The American pragmatists; selected writings.
New York, Meridian Books [1960] 413 p. (Me-
ridian books, Mio5) 60—12329 6832X6
2359. Peterfreund, Sheldon P. An introduction to
American philosophy. New York, Odyssey
Press [1959] 291 p. 59-2030 6934^4
Frankel's compendium presents a "profile" of
American philosophy from the Civil War to the
Great Depression by means of extracts from the
major works of Chauncey Wright, Charles Peirce,
William James, Josiah Royce, George Santayana,
Ralph Barton Perry, Clarence Irving Lewis, and
Morris Raphael Cohen. The "golden age" of
American philosophy is defined as the time when
American philosophers took their places as full
partners with the great philosophers of other lands.
Another anthology for the beginner seeking a first
acquaintance with American philosophy is the com-
pilation by Konvitz and Kennedy, which includes
selections from the writings of Emerson, Justice
Oliver Wendell Holmes, and Sidney Hook. Peter-
freund's volume is designed as an introduction to
the major systematic philosophers and includes se-
lections from the works of Peirce, William James,
Royce, Santayana, and Dewey, arranged in an order
intended to display the logical progression of their
central ideas.
2360. Margolis, Joseph Z., ed. Philosophy looks at
the arts; contemporary readings in aesthetics.
New York, Scribner [1962] 235 p.
62-16652 BH2I.M3
CONTENTS. — Introduction. — What makes a situa-
tion aesthetic, by J. O. Urmson. — The concept of
expression in art, by Vincent Tomas. — The role of
theory in aesthetics, by Morris Weitz. — Aesthetic
concepts, by Frank Sibley. — The intentional fal-
lacy, by William K. Wimsatt, Jr., and Monroe C.
Beardsley. — The logic of interpretation, by Joseph
Margolis. — On the reasons that can be given for
the interpretation of a poem, by Charles L. Steven-
son.— Critical communication, by Arnold Isenberg.
— Reasons in art criticism, by Paul Ziff. — The lan-
guage of fiction, by Margaret MacDonald. — Implied
truths in literature, by John Hospers. — Metaphor,
by Max Black.
Esthetics as a separate discipline of American
philosophy was for years relatively neglected, but
the founding of the American Society of Aesthetics
and the Journal of Aesthetics and Art Criticism
(1942) signaled a change. The esthetician has be-
come interested in an analytical approach to the
philosophy of art and has focused his attention on
art and art forms. In this anthology Margolis
brings together samples of the writing of estheti-
cians of the analytic stamp, along with a wide
range of problems. An introduction by the editor
and a bibliography accompany each selection.
2361. Muelder, Walter G., Laurence Sears, and
Anne V. Schlabach, eds. The development
of American philosophy; a book of readings. 2d ed.
[Boston] Houghton Mifflin [1960] 643 p.
60-16272 685 1. M8 1960
A revised edition of no. 5259 in the 1960 Guide,
to which has been added a section on recent develop-
ments in American philosophy in relation to 20th-
century science, with extracts from the writings ol
such men as Alfred North Whitehead and George
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 347
H. Mead. The section on naturalism and realism
has been expanded by the addition of extracts from,
the writings of Arthur O. Lovejoy, Ralph Barton
Perry, and Evander Bradley McGilvary, and other
sections have been enlarged to include selected
writings of newly ascendant philosophers. The
selected bibliographies have also been brought up
to date.
2362. Reck, Andrew J. Recent American philoso-
phy; studies of ten representative thinkers.
New York, Pantheon Books [1964] xxiii, 343 p.
64—13268 6893^4 1964
The author maintains that the history of thought
is a "cooperative social process to which by means
of concurrence and dissent, countless obscure or
forgotten thinkers contribute" and that philosophic
thought can never gain perspective as long as it
focuses exclusively on a few such major figures as
Peirce, James, Royce, Santayana, Dewey, and White-
head. He chooses for analysis 10 less intensively
studied philosophers who reached the peak of their
intellectual activity between the two World Wars:
Ralph Barton Perry, William Ernest Hocking,
George H. Mead, John Elof Boodin, Wilbur
Marshall Urban, DeWitt H. Parker, Roy Wood
Sellars, Arthur O. Lovejoy, Elijah Jordan, and Ed-
gar S. Brightman.
2363. Schneider, Herbert W. A history of Ameri-
can philosophy. 2d ed. New York, Colum-
bia University Press, 1963. 590 p.
63—14114 6851.84 1963
A revised edition of no. 5261 in the 1960 Guide
with an additional section on the development of the
20th-century school of philosophic realism, entitled
"Emergence of Naturalistic Realisms."
2364. Smith, John E. The spirit of American phi-
losophy. New York, Oxford University
Press, 1963. 219 p. 63-12553 6851.848
An interpretation chiefly of the writings of Charles
Peirce, William James, Josiah Royce, John Dewey,
and Alfred North Whitehead. In the author's view
an understanding of the main contribution of each
man "requires that more attention be paid to basic
doctrines and their reflection of American convic-
tions than to the internal development of a philo-
sophical system." He omits George Santayana as
unrepresentative of the main drift of American
thinking and finds significant common convictions
held by the five philosophers he has chosen. The
spirit of American philosophy from the Civil War
to the 1930'$ is interpreted as a modern version of
ancient humanism. Although American philoso-
phers were interested in nature and science, their
true focus was on the use of knowledge and the
value of things for human purposes.
2365. Smith, Wilson. Professors & public ethics;
studies of Northern moral philosophers be-
fore the Civil War. Ithaca, N.Y., Published for
the American Historical Association [by] Cornell
University Press [1956] 244 p.
57-13532 BJ352.S56
Bibliography: p. 217—237.
An assessment of the relationship between Ameri-
can rationalistic moral philosophy, an inheritance
from the Enlightenment, and secular life in the i9th
century, as evidenced in pre-Civil War public af-
fairs. In the first of three essays, the author identi-
fies 48 academic moral philosophers (listed in the
appendix, p. 211—216), of whom at least 33 partici-
pated in public affairs outside their own church and
college. He indicates their religious affiliations (the
majority were clergymen) and describes their large
indebtedness to the English moral theologian Wil-
liam Paley. In the second essay he analyzes the
thought and public careers of John D. Gros of
Columbia, Francis Lieber of South Carolina Col-
lege, Charles B. Haddock of Dartmouth, and
Francis Wayland, president of Brown. The last
essay is devoted entirely to James Walker of Har-
vard, who, in untypical neutralism, would not com-
mit himself on partisan secular issues.
2366. Van Wesep, Hendrikus B. Seven sages; the
story of American philosophy: Franklin,
Emerson, James, Dewey, Santayana, Peirce [and]
Whitehead. New York, Longmans, Green, 1960.
450 p. 60—15278 B85I.V3 1960
This book sums up American philosophy as a
forward-looking, indigenous "excelsiorism." The
author's subjects all agreed in being realists, pluralists,
evolutionists, freedom lovers, and anti-absolutionists;
all stood for broadening the discipline of philosophy
to include elements once considered too everyday or
too practical; and all were secularly minded and
concerned for a better life in the New World.
348 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
B. Representative Philosophers
2367. MORRIS RAPHAEL COHEN, 1880-1947
No. 5267 in 1960 Guide.
2368. Rosenfield, Leonora D. C. Portrait of a
philosopher: Morris R. Cohen in life and
letters. New York, Harcourt, Brace & World
[1962] 461 p. 61-19591 B945.C54R6
Mrs. Rosenfield, author of books on French liter-
ature and the history of ideas, has based this biog-
raphy largely on her father's diaries and his corre-
spondence with his wife, the former Mary Ryshpan,
and with friends, students, and many eminent men
of his day, including Cardozo, Frankfurter, Learned
Hand, Einstein, Bertrand Russell, and John Dewey.
The account is enriched by the author's personal
reminiscences. She describes Cohen's social envi-
ronment, the intellectual and emotional aspects of
his life and work, his wide range of interests, his
effectiveness as a teacher, and his role as an inno-
vator in the realm of ideas, as well as life in New
York's lower East Side, Harvard at the turn of the
century, and the atmosphere of the City College of
New York in the twenties and thirties.
2369. JOHN DEWEY, 1859-1952
No. 5271 in 1960 Guide.
2370. Philosophy, psychology and social practice;
essays. Selected, edited and with a foreword
by Joseph Ratner. New York, Putnam [1963]
315 p. 63-16188 B945.D4iR22 1963
CONTENTS. — Knowledge and the relativity of feel-
ing.— Kant and philosophic method. — The new
psychology. — Soul and body. — The psychological
standpoint. — Psychology as a philosophic method.
— "Illusory Psychology." — Knowledge as idealiza-
tion.— On some current conceptions of the term
"self." — How do concepts arise from percepts? —
The superstition of necessity. — The ego as cause. —
The psychology of infant language. — The theory of
emotion. — The reflex arc concept in psychology. —
The psychology of effort. — Interpretation of the
savage mind. — Psychology and social practice.
Only two of these essays, "The Reflex Arc Con-
cept in Psychology" and "Interpretation of the Sav-
age Mind," are found in the collection Philosophy
and Civilization (1931), no. 5281 in the 1960 Guide.
In the early years of his career, Dewey was an
adherent of a form of Hegelian idealism. The first
nine essays, originally published during the period
1883—90, are products of this discipleship. The
remainder reveal the emergence of an original, cre-
ative thinker working on the foundations of his own
philosophic system. John Dewey and Arthur F.
Bentley: A Philosophical Correspondence, 1932— 1951
(New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers University Press
[1964] 737 p.), selected and edited by Sidney
Ratner and Jules Altman, contains approximately
2,000 communications, "the most extensive corre-
spondence of any two contemporary philosophers
published in America or Europe." Most of the
letters were exchanged during the years 1943—49,
when Dewey and Bentley were collaborating on
Knowing and the Known, no. 5286 in the 1960
Guide.
2371. Blewett, John, ed. John Dewey: his thought
and influence. New York, Fordham Uni-
versity Press [1960] 242 p. (The Orestes Brown-
son series on contemporary thought and affairs, no.
2) 60-10737 6945.044655
CONTENTS. — Introduction, by John Blewett. —
The genesis of Dewey 's naturalism, by James Col-
lins.— Democracy as religion: unity in human
relations, by John Blewett. — Dewey's theory of
knowledge, by Beatrice H. Zedler. — John Dewey
and progressive education, by Sister Joseph Mary
Raby. — Dewey and the problem of technology, by
John W. Donohue. — Dewey's ambivalent attitude
toward history, by Thomas P. Neill. — Process and
experience, by Robert C. Pollock. — Dewey's influ-
ence in China, by Thomas Berry.
Fordham University held a symposium in honor
of the centennial of Dewey's birth and assembled
this sympathetic but critical volume of essays upon
aspects of his philosophy and its influence. John S.
Brubacher's foreword says, "When his philosophical
critics and adversaries join in the celebration we
can take it as a great compliment to the length of
his shadow." In John Dewey and Selj-Realization
(Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall [1963,
Ci962] 152 p.), Robert J. Roth develops Dewey's
ideas without completely endorsing them.
2372. Geiger, George R. John Dewey in perspec-
tive. New York, Oxford University Press,
1958. 248 p. 58-9463 6945.04464
The author maintains that Dewey was the philo-
sophic spokesman of democratic social liberalism
and progressivism in education and that his views
have had a profound impact on psychological and
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY
349
social thought as well as pedagogy. His general
extension of the logical method of modern experi-
mental science to moral and social problems has
gained him a large audience. At the same time, his
thought has been rejected by those who discount the
authority of science, who do not agree with social
liberalism, or who attribute the shortcomings of the
public schools to educational progressivism. Geiger
suggests that too often a limited focus of discussion
is to blame for misconceptions of Dewey's ideas,
which he seeks to place in a wide context.
2373. Hendel, Charles W., ed. John Dewey and
the experimental spirit in philosophy; four
lectures delivered at Yale University commemorat-
ing the looth anniversary of the birth of John
Dewey. New York, Liberal Arts Press [1959]
119 p. 59~I5785 B945.D44H38
Lectures by members of the Yale philosophy de-
partment presenting enduring ideas in Dewey's
writing rather than a comprehensive statement or
reappraisal of his work. In a brief biographical
sketch, Hendel places the philosopher in his time
and environment and looks for precursors of his
empiricism in such philosophical traditions as
Hegelian idealism. The underlying theme of the
other lectures is Dewey's empirical spirit. Nathaniel
M. Lawrence develops the social basis of Dewey's
educational theories; Richard J. Bernstein relates
his naturalism to his epistemology, process of valua-
tion, and concept of freedom; and John E. Smith
summarizes, in "John Dewey: Philosopher of Ex-
perience," the pragmatist's views on evolution, ex-
perience, and metaphysics.
2374. WILLIAM ERNEST HOCKING, 1873-
No. 5310 in 1960 Guide.
\ 2375. Types of philosophy, by William Ernest
Hocking, with the collaboration of Richard
Boyle O'Reilly Hocking. 3d ed. New York, Scrib-
ner [1959] 340 p. 59—8019 BD2I.H6 1959
Includes bibliography.
A revised edition of Hocking's widely used text-
book, mentioned in no. 5310 in the 1960 Guide.
2376. ARTHUR ONCKEN LOVEJOY, 1873-
1962
An astute critic of American philosophy, Lovejoy
is recognized as a leader of the critical realists and
as a pioneer in the modern study of the history of
ideas, which grew to maturity under his influence
and with its own journal (The Journal of the His-
tory of Ideas). Lovejoy described his philosophy as
a "temporalistic realism." The "realism" grew out
of his reactions to idealism, evolutionism, and prag-
matism. In his presidential address to the Western
Division of the American Philosophical Association,
he explicidy rejected idealism and pronounced the
"obsolescence of the eternal." From this position
he developed an epistemological dualism that be-
came the essence of his critical realism. His
"temporalism" consists of an "emergent evolution-
ism," a theory that changes occur and new entities
come into existence. Lovejoy's philosophy has been
overshadowed by the influence of his studies in the
history of ideas, in which he probed behind past
systems and movements to discover primary and
recurrent units of thought. One of his most signifi-
cant contributions to intellectual history is The
Great Chain of Being, a Study of the History of an
Idea (1936); two other major works are Essays in
the History of Ideas (1948) and Reflections on Hu-
man Nature (1961).
2377. The reason, the understanding, and time.
Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press [1961]
210 p. 61-8177 B945-L583R4
A series of essays which originated as lectures
delivered at Princeton in 1939. Lovejoy critically
analyzes Henri Bergson's creative evolutionism, the
German Romantics as precursors of his philosophy,
and his claim to originality. Explicit throughout is
a contrast of Lovejoy's own temporalism with that
of the French philosopher.
2378. The revolt against dualism: an inquiry con-
cerning the existence of ideas. 20! ed. La
Salle, 111., Open Court Pub. Co., 1960. 405 p.
(The Paul Carus lectures, ser. 2)
60—53406 B8i2.L6 1960
Lovejoy here examines the main strands of the
revolt in the first quarter of the 2Oth century against
17th-century epistemological dualism. Included are
discussions of the roles of the "new realism," objec-
tive relativism, Whiteheadian epistemology, and
Bertrand Russell's attempt to unify mind and mat-
ter. The author concludes with a statement of his
own dualistic theory of knowledge, which stands at
the center of his "critical realism."
2379. The thirteen pragmatisms, and other essays.
Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press [1963]
290 p. 63—11890 6832X6
A compilation of essays largely concerned with
the vagueness of present-day pragmatism.
2380. CHARLES SANDERS PEIRCE, 1839-1914
No. 5345 in 1960 Guide.
2381. Moore, Edward C., and Richard S. Robin,
eds. Studies in the philosophy of Charles
35O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Sanders Peirce. Second series. Amherst, Univer-
sity of Massachusetts Press, 1964. 525 p.
65-3174
A sequel to no. 5353 in the 1960 Guide. Al-
though concerned with Peirce's philosophical sys-
tem as a whole, this volume emphasizes his role as
"scientist." The essays indicate an increase in for-
eign interest in Peirce. Among the contributors are
Arthur N. Prior of the University of Manchester,
Nynfa Bosco of the University of Turin, and
Thomas A. Goudge and David Savan of the Uni-
versity of Toronto.
2382. Murphey, Murray G. The development of
Peirce's philosophy. Cambridge, Mass.,
Harvard University Press, 1961. 432 p.
61—13739 B945.P44M8
Making extensive use of Peirce's manuscripts, the
author seeks to prove that his subject at all times
aimed to be a systematic philosopher. Despite an
inchoate appearance, the structure of Peirce's
thought is derived from an "architectonic" theory of
philosophy, which is in turn based on formal logic.
Murphey discovers four major phases in Peirce's
philosophical development. The first extended from
his earliest papers of 1857 until 1865 or 1866, a
period during which he was strongly influenced by
Kantian logic. "The second began with the dis-
covery of the irreducibility of the three syllogistic
figures in 1866, and extended until 1869 or 1870.
The third was inaugurated by the discovery of the
logic of relations and continued until 1884." The
last stemmed from the discovery of quantification
and set theory and continued until Peirce's death in
1914. Murphey 's book follows a chronological
scheme except for a section which is concerned
solely with Peirce's mathematics. In a more spe-
cialized study, Charles Peirce and Scholastic Real-
ism (Seattle, University of Washington Press, 1963.
177 p.), John F. Boler examines Peirce's relation
to the medieval realist John Duns Scotus, whom
Peirce acknowledged as a precursor but whose ideas
he did not hesitate to transform. Values in a
Universe of Chance (Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday,
1958. 466 p. Doubleday anchor books, Ai26),
edited by Philip P. Wiener, is made up of a num-
ber of Peirce's less technical papers and letters, some
of which are not included in his Collected Papers
(no. 5346 in the 1960 Guide).
2383. JOSIAH ROYCE, 1855-1916
No. 5354 in 1960 Guide.
2384. Buranelli, Vincent. Josiah Royce. New
York, Twayne Publishers [1964] 174 p.
(Twayne's United States authors series, 49)
63-20608 6945^6468
Bibliography: p. 160—166.
"This volume is an attempt to present Josiah
Royce as he has not been presented before — to
describe him through his multifarious aspects from
novelist and literary critic to logician and meta-
physician." It is a nontechnical introduction, omit-
ting detail in favor of a panoramic view of Royce's
thought. The author approaches the philosopher's
metaphysics largely through his literary and his-
torical achievements but devotes a chapter to his
logical methods and another to his system of abso-
lute idealism. Buranelli also estimates Royce's
relevance for Americans, selecting as the Nation's
foremost philosophers "Peirce, Royce, and Edwards
in that order."
2385. Costello, Harry T. Josiah Royce's seminar,
1913—1914: as recorded in the notebooks of
Harry T. Costello. Edited by Grover Smith. With
an essay on the philosophy of Royce by Richard
Hocking. New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers Univer-
sity Press [1963] 209 p. 62-18949 BD24I.C65
Recording secretary Costello and (excluding drop-
outs) nine other students, among them T. S. Eliot,
were enrolled in Royce's Tuesday evening seminar
on scientific methods at Harvard during the aca-
demic year reported here. The philosopher wel-
comed to his seminar, in addition to the regular
students, professional colleagues from other disci-
plines. Lawrence J. Henderson, biological chemist,
Elmer E. Southard, head of the Psychopathic Hos-
pital in Boston, and Frederick A. Woods, lecturer
at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, were
among the regular visitors. Royce was convinced
that the "community of scholars" was the best
laboratory for gaining new insight into scientific
questions. Possessing an argumentative but ami-
cable personality, he provoked lively discussions.
Costello summarizes the papers presented at the
seminar and notes remarks made in the discussion,
principally those offered by Royce. Costello's pub-
lished writings are listed in an appendix (p.
196—203).
2386. GEORGE SANTAYANA, 1863-1952
No. 5365 in 1960 Guide.
2387. Cory, Daniel. Santayana: the later years; a
portrait with letters. New York, G. Brazil-
ler [1963] 330 p. 63-19573 B945.S24C65
The author, Santayana's friend and secretary, has
written a memoir of the philosopher's life from
1927 until his death in 1952. He has woven his
reminiscences around the diary he kept during his
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY
/ 351
early association with Santayana, the more than 300
letters he received from him, and innumerable con-
versations with him. He makes observations on the
philosopher's work and associates, his daily routines
of life, and his personal habits and portrays him as
an "affable old-fashioned gentleman." He also
shows Santayana's productivity in old age, his dili-
gence in creating Realms of Being (no. 5371 in the
1960 Guide), and his satisfaction at the enthusiastic
reception given his bestselling novel, The Last Puri-
tan (no. 1736 in the 1960 Guide). In Santayana:
Saint of the Imagination ( [Toronto] University of
Toronto Press, 1961. 240 p.), Mossie M. W. Kirk-
wood interprets the philosopher's life and provides
concise summaries of his philosophy, following the
transition of his thought from the supernaturalism
of his youth to the naturalism of his maturity.
2388. Munson, Thomas N. The essential wisdom
of George Santayana. New York, Colum-
bia University Press, 1962. 224 p.
62—10453 6945.824^^85
Bibliography: p. 229—232.
The author's purpose is to "clarify Santayana's
philosophy, appreciate his methods, and make a
judgment regarding his contribution to philosophi-
cal knowledge." An appendix (p. 138—150) in-
cludes Munson's correspondence with Santayana
and an associate's interview with him. A special
aspect of Santayana's philosophy is analyzed in
Irving Singer's Santayana's Aesthetics (Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1957. 235 p.).
2389. PAUL WEISS, 1901-
No. 5378 in 1960 Guide.
2390. History: written and lived. Carbondale,
Southern Illinois University Press [1962]
245 p. 62—15006 Di6.8.W39
This study proceeds from a "conviction that phi-
losophy ought to be carried out on two levels. It
should have a speculative dimension, where the
whole of being and knowledge is in principle dealt
with systematically by a distinctive method and in a
distinctive style. There should also be an empiri-
cally oriented set of studies revealing the experi-
enceable significance of realities." Weiss' philosophy
of history belongs to the second field of investigation,
which he recognizes as a comparatively new and
distinct subject area, and he attempts to define its
limits and method of study. He inquires into the
historian's objectives and presuppositions and main-
tains that history cannot be studied through estab-
lished categories and methods but requires a fresh
empirical approach.
2391. Our public life. Bloomington, Indiana Uni-
versity Press [1959] 256 p.
59-9852 HM5I.W4
A statement of Weiss' social and political philoso-
phy, in which he has "tried to present a systematic
speculative account of the nature and need for such
important groups as society, state, culture, and civi-
lization." He examines man's role within social
divisions, depicts the kind of classes which should
constitute the ideal society, and considers such topics
as "native rights," sovereignty, natural law, and
"man's persistent drive to achieve a satisfying and
enriching public existence." Sections of this book
were delivered as the Mahlon Powell lectures at In-
diana University in 1958.
2392. The world of art. Carbondale, Southern
Illinois University Press [1961] 193 p.
61-5168 N66.W34
2393. Nine basic arts. Carbondale, Southern Illi-
nois University Press [1961] 238 p.
61-7164 N66.W32
2394. Religion and art. Milwaukee, Marquette
University Press, 1963. 97 p. (The Aquinas
lecture, 1963) 63-13170 N72.W4
Taken together, these works express Weiss' phi-
losophy of esthetics. In The World of Art he iso-
lates general principles, discusses problems inherent
in art, and examines its relationship to other fields,
such as science. Nine Basic Arts is an analysis of
the distinguishing features of selected major arts
(including both "musicry" and music), with the ob-
jective of stating the common properties of all fine
art. Art is seen as distinct from other endeavors in
that it "demands a fresh and unmistakable act of
creativity, terminating in the production of self-
sufficient excellence." In Religion and Art, Weiss
asserts that religious and artistic strivings alike pro-
vide "an answer to man's basic need to be perfected."
2395. ALFRED NORTH WHITEHEAD, 1861-
'947
No. 5383 in 1960 Guide.
2396. American essays in social philosophy. Edited
with an introduction by A. H. Johnson.
New York, Harper [1959] 206 p.
59-9943
CONTENTS. — The problem of reconstruction. —
The study of the past. — Memories. — England and
the Narrow Seas. — An appeal to sanity. — The im-
portance of friendly relations between England and
the United States. — The education of an English-
352 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
man. — Harvard: the future. — Historical changes.
— Universities and their function.
A collection of periodical articles, the majority of
which appeared originally in The Atlantic Monthly,
between 1926 and 1942.
2397. Christian, William A. An interpretation of
Whitehead's metaphysics. New Haven, Yale
University Press, 1959. 419 p.
59-6794
2398. Leclerc, Ivor. Whitehead's metaphysics: an
introductory exposition. London, Allen &
Unwin; New York, Macmillan [1958] 233 p.
58-4842 Bi674-W354L4
Whitehead's search for a cosmology equal in pro-
fundity to the Newtonian synthesis resulted in a shift
of interest in his later works, particularly Process
and Reality, from science to a new set of problems
with esthetic, ethical, and social implications. The
authors of these two monographs seek to clarify
some of his solutions to metaphysical problems.
Christian, guided by his own concern with how
"God transcends the world," is especially interested
in the theological implications of Whitehead's meta-
physics. Leclerc contributes a detailed exposition of
the categorical structure of Whitehead's system,
postponing evaluation to a projected second volume
of the study. In A Whiteheadian Aesthetic (New
Haven, Yale University Press, 1961. 219 p.),
Donald W. Sherburne examines the relationship be-
tween Whitehead's metaphysics and his philosophy
of art.
2399. Johnson, Allison H. Whitehead's philosophy
of civilization. New York, Dover Publica-
tions, 1962. 211 p.
62-51278 CBi9-W49J6 1962
A brief introduction, originally published in 1958,
to Whitehead's views of society, history, education,
and religion.
2400. Leclerc, Ivor, ed. The relevance of White-
head; philosophical essays in commemoration
of the centenary of the birth of Alfred North White-
head. London, Allen & Unwin; New York, Mac-
millan [1961] 383 p. (The Muirhead library of
philosophy) 61—3432 Bi674.W354L38 1961
CONTENTS. — Whitehead and contemporary phi-
losophy, by Charles Hartshorne. — Some uses of
reason, by William A. Christian. Sketch of a phi-
losophy, by Frederic B. Fitch.— Metaphysics and
the modality of existential judgments, by Charles
Hartshorne. — Whitehead on the uses of language,
by Allison H. Johnson. — Time, value, and the self,
by Nathaniel Lawrence. — Form and actuality, by
Ivor Leclerc. — The approach to metaphysics, by Vic-
tor Lowe. — Metaphysics as Scientia Univer satis and
as Ontologia Generalis, by Gottfried Martin. — The
relevance of "On Mathematical Concepts of the Ma-
terial World" to Whitehead's philosophy, by W.
Mays. — Aesthetic perception, by Eva Schaper. — In
defence of the humanism of science: Kant and
Whitehead, by Hermann Wein. — History and ob-
jective immortality, by Paul Weiss. — Whitehead's
empiricism, by William P. D. Wightman. — Deity,
monarchy, and metaphysics: Whitehead's critique
of the theological tradition, by Daniel D. Williams.
Essays which exemplify the continuing influence
and significance of Whitehead's thought.
2401. Lowe, Victor. Understanding Whitehead.
Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1962. 398 p.
62—15312 Bi674.W354L6
A nontechnical introduction that assumes no prior
knowledge of Whitehead's thought. The author
surveys the entire scope of the philosopher's system
(metaphysics, philosophy of science, and philosophy
of religion) and traces his philosophical develop-
ment from mathematics to the philosophy of science
and, ultimately, to a metaphysical system and a
philosophy of civilization. Lowe finds Whitehead
"immediately productive and constructively original
in each new field" and concludes that his cosmology
represents "a culmination of Western tradition."
Another book designed for the nonspecialist is
Whitehead's Philosophical Development (Berkeley,
University of California Press, 1956. 370 p.), by
Nathaniel M. Lawrence, who aims at providing
a foundation from which Process and Reality can
profitably be studied. A recent collection edited
by George L. Kline, Alfred North Whitehead, Essays
on his Philosophy (Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-
Hall [1963] 214 p. A Spectrum book), includes
1 8 papers.
2402. CHAUNCEY WRIGHT, 1830-1875
No. 5386 in 1960 Guide.
2403. Madden, Edward H. Chauncey Wright and
the foundations of pragmatism. Seattle,
University of Washington Press, 1963. 203 p.
63-9939 B945.W74M3
An introduction to Wright's moral philosophy,
epistemology, metaphysics, philosophy of science,
and psychology, with discussions of his agnosticism,
utilitarianism, and view of "self-consciousness" and
extensive references to his essays and letters.
Wright's empirical theory of knowledge led him to
the conclusion that sufficient evidence is not yet
available either to prove or to disprove the existence
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 353
of God. Madden is also the author of another in-
troductory work, Chauncey Wright (New York,
Washington Square press [1964] 170 p. The
Great American thinkers series.), as well as the edi-
tor of an anthology of Wright's works, Philo-
sophical Writings; Representative Selections (New
York, Liberal Arts Press [1958] 145 p. The
American heritage series, no. 23).
C. Psychology
2404. Roback, Abraham A. History of American
psychology. New, rev. ed. New York, Col-
lier Books [1964] 575 p.
64-16138 BFio8.U5R6
Bibliography: p. 539—546.
A revised edition of no. 5392 in the 1960 Guide.
The author has added chapters entided "E. W.
Scripture— Experimental Avant-Gardist," "Light-
ner Widmer, Pioneer in Clinical Psychology," "E. L.
Thorndike, the Connectionist," "Hull and his Be-
havior System," "Lashley — Iconoclast in Neuro-
psychology," "Boring and his Zeitgeist," and
"Operant Conditioning" as well as others on psy-
chobiology, the test movement, and the phenomenal
expansion of psychology in the United States. In
The Influence of Freud on American Psychology
(New York, International Universities Press, 1964.
243 p. Psychological issues, v. 4, no. i. Monograph
13), David Shako w and David Rapaport measure
the impact of psychoanalysis on the evolution of
psychology in this country.
XXIII
Religion
General Worths
Period Histories
Church and State
Religious Thought; Theology
Religious Bodies
Representative Leaders
Church and Society
The Negro's Church
2405-2417
2418—2421
2422—2430
2431-2436
2451-2456
2457-2465
2466
SECTION A, General Works, which contains more entries than the parallel section in the 1960
Guide, perhaps reflects an increased demand for basic books with a scope sufficiently broad
to reveal the identities of the various religious groups in the United States, past and present,
their origins, and their geographical distribution. Among the entries are three guides to the
modern denominations, three general histories of religion, two histories of Protestantism, two
studies of the current nature of Protestantism, a historical atlas of religion, and a documentary
history of Christianity.
Section C, Church and State, also containing more
entries than its counterpart in the 1960 Guide, sug-
gests the nature of recent interest in the applications
of the provisions regarding religion in the first
amendment to the Constitution. The entries in-
clude a documentary history of religious liberty, a
condensed and updated version of a three-volume
study of the same subject, two analyses of religion
and the political process, an examination of Protes-
tant concepts of church and state, a Jesuit theo-
logian's view of Catholicism and democracy, a
Methodist minister's appraisal of the relationship
between communism and the churches, an argument
for complete separation of religion and the public
schools, and a defense of neutrality as the proper
role for the state.
A. General Works
2405. Gaustad, Edwin Scott. Historical atlas of
religion in America. New York, Harper &
Row [1962] 179 p. illus.
Map 62-51 Gi2oi.E4G3 1962
An account of the growth of the larger religious
groups, accompanied by maps showing the location
of their principal adherents and graphs indicat-
ing their comparative size. The author comments
on the lack of reliable statistics (each church counts
its membership in its own way) and, wherever pos-
sible, provides both the number of churches and the
number of members as indications of size. The first
three sections treat the subject chronologically; the
last section concerns special groups (Indians, Jews,
and Negroes) and special areas (Alaska and
Hawaii).
2406. Hudson, Winthrop S. American Protestaoi
tism. [Chicago] University of Chicago
Press [1961] 198 p. (The Chicago history of
American civilization) 61-15936 BR5 15^78
"Suggested reading": p. 187—191.
354
RELIGION / 355
2407. Littell, Franklin H. From state church to
pluralism; a Protestant interpretation of re-
ligion in American history. Garden City, N.Y.,
Anchor Books, 1962. 174 p. (Anchor books, A294)
61-9530 BR5I5.L55
Two historical analyses of the growth and decline
of Protestant influence in America. Both authors
consider Protestantism today to be a culture religion
equating itself with Americanism; the major
denominations have liberalized their membership
standards and softened their theological differences.
American Protestantism completes the studies of
the principal religions of the United States in the
University of Chicago's series on American civiliza-
tion. Earlier volumes, no. 5448 and 5458 in the 1960
Guide, respectively, contain analyses of the growth
of Catholicism and Judaism. Hudson emphasizes
ideas and movements and minimizes dates and de-
tails. Littell attacks in his history the notion that
the United States was once a " 'Christian nation'
(i.e., Protestant controlled)" as a myth and a stum-
bling block in Protestantism's effort to assess its
current position and potential in today's religiously
plural society.
2408. Hudson, Winthrop S. Religion in America.
New York, Scribner [1965] 447 p.
65-28188 BR5I5.H79
Bibliographical footnotes.
A study of religion from colonial times to the
present. The author does not trace individual de-
nominations; rather, he concentrates on major re-
ligious forces working in the society in specific
periods and correlates the emergence of new re-
ligious groups with their environments and back-
grounds. Discussions of the Holiness movement,
Fundamentalism, Eastern Orthodoxy, Judaism, and,
to a more limited degree, Roman Catholicism are
deferred to the periods when those groups began to
loom large on the American scene. The post-Civil
War years receive as much attention as the longer
time interval preceding the war.
2409. McLoughlin, William G. Modern revival-
ism: Charles Grandison Finney to Billy Gra-
ham. New York, Ronald Press [1959] 551 p.
58—12959 BV3773.M3
"Notes on the sources": p. 531—535.
A history of revivalism from the early i9th cen-
tury to the present. The author sees revivalism as
a social, rather than a religious, phenomenon, aris-
ing from the need to adjust Protestantism to cultural
changes. Charles G. Finney "made revivalism a
profession," and Dwight L. Moody gave it the as-
pects of a well-organized business, employing plan-
ning, extensive advertising, and sound financing.
McLoughlin devotes most of his attention to Finney,
Moody, Billy Sunday, and Billy Graham and notes
in passing numerous minor evangelists. Revivalism
between 1840 and 1865 is explored in Timothy L.
Smith's Revivalism and Social Reform in Mid-
Nineteenth-Century America (New York, Abing-
don Press [1957] 253 p.). A biography of Dwight
L. Moody is Richard K. Curtis' They Call Him
Mister Moody (Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1962.
378 p.).
2410. Mayer, Frederick E. The religious bodies
of America. 4th ed., rev. by Arthur Carl
Piepkorn. Saint Louis, Concordia Pub. House,
1961. 598 p. 61-15535 BR5i6-5.M3 1961
An updated edition of no. 5397 in the 1960 Guide.
2411. Mead, Frank S. Handbook of denomina-
tions in the United States. New 4th ed.
New York, Abingdon Press [1965] 271 p.
65-21980 BR5i6.5.M38 1965
Bibliography: p. 246—256.
An updated edition of no. 5398 in the 1960 Guide.
2412. Olmstead, Clifton E. History of religion in
the United States. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,
Prentice-Hall, 1960. 628 p.
60-10355 BR5I5.O4
Essentially a theological history, this work never-
theless places religion against a background of politi-
cal, social, and economic developments. In an
annotated bibliography (p. 595—611), the author
suggests additional reading and evaluates some of
the more specialized studies. In 1961, he published
a brief survey, Religion in America, Past and Pres-
ent (Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall. 172 p.
A Spectrum book, S— 20).
2413. Osborn, Ronald E. The spirit of American
Christianity. New York, Harper [1958]
241 p. 57—9881 BR5i6.C>74
"Bibliographical note": p. 225—234.
2414. Marty, Martin E. The new shape of Ameri-
can religion. New York, Harper [1959]
1 80 p. 59~IO336 BR526.M35
Each of these volumes examines the current na-
ture of Protestantism. Osborn, professor of church
history at Christian Theological Seminary, writes
primarily for a European audience and concerns
himself largely with such aspects of religion as the
separation of church and state, denominationalism,
and the general indifference to theology and liturgy.
In his role of interpreter for interested foreigners,
the author tries to provide a factual but sympathetic
picture. Marty has a sharply contrasting objective;
he strives to arouse lethargic religious leaders at
356 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
home. The New Shape of American Religion is an
indictment of contemporary Protestantism, which,
the author contends, has been eroded by the social
environment, leaving only a "religion-in-general"
differing little from the secular "religion of democ-
racy." He urges Protestants to accept religious
pluralism and revitalize their religious outlook.
Other aspects of contemporary Protestantism are
analyzed in Sidney E. Mead's collection of essays,
The Lively Experiment: The Shaping of Chris-
tianity in America (New York, Harper & Row
[1963] 220 p.).
2415. Smith, Hilrie Shelton, Robert T. Handy,
and Lefferts A. Loetscher. American Chris-
tianity; an historical interpretation with representa-
tive documents. New York, Scribner [1960—63]
2v. illus. 60—8117 611514.555
CONTENTS. — v. i. 1607—1820. — v. 2. 1820—1960.
A collection of documents on Protestant and Cath-
olic history. The range of selection is wide, includ-
ing excerpts from Dale's Laws, Jefferson's views on
Christian orthodoxy, the report of John Carroll on
American Catholicism in 1785, the Plan of Union
of the Presbyterian and Congregational Churches,
essays by Reinhold Niebuhr, Paul Tillich, and John
Courtney Murray, and Martin Luther King's views
on the ethics of nonviolence. The compilers have
divided their material chronologically and topically.
Each chapter has a general introduction and a con-
cluding essay on bibliography, and each document
is prefaced by biographical and historical informa-
tion.
2416. Smith, James Ward, and Albert Leland Jami-
son, eds. Religion in American life. Prince-
ton, N.J., Princeton University Press, 1961. 3 v. in
4. illus. (Princeton studies in American civiliza-
tion, no. 5) 61-5383 BR5I5.S6
Volume 4 by Nelson R. Burr in collaboration with
the editors.
CONTENTS. — i. The shaping of American re-
ligion.— 2. Religious perspective in American cul-
ture.— 4. A critical bibliography of religion in
America. 2 v.
These volumes grew out of the experience of the
Special Program in American Civilization at Prince-
ton University in offering seminars during the aca-
demic years 1948-49, 1953-54, and 1957-58. The
program was devoted to the study of "the religious
dimensions of American culture, and the cultural
dimensions of American religion," and the essays
in the first two volumes cover a wide range of topics.
The author of the volumes devoted to bibliography
has woven the titles of books, articles, and unpub-
lished theses, along with critical and historical notes,
into a continuous narrative text. A projected vol-
ume 3, by Jacob Viner, is to be on the subject of
the European background of religious thought and
the economic society.
2417. Williams, John P. What Americans believe
and how they worship. Rev. ed. New York,
Harper & Row [1962] 530 p.
62-7308 BR5i6.5.W5 1962-
An updated edition of no. 5404 in the 1960 Guide.
B. Period Histories
2418. Bailey, Kenneth K. Southern white Protes-
tantism in the twentieth century. New York,
Harper & Row [1964] 180 p.
64-19493 BR535.B3
"A bibliographical essay": p. 169—172.
A survey of the positions taken by the three major
Southern Protestant groups (Baptist, Methodist, and
Presbyterian) on such basic issues as fundamental-
ism, evolution, prohibition, social reform, and race
relations. The author describes the antievolution
campaigns, the continuing vigilance against the en-
croachment of liberal theology, and the stand taken
by the churches against Al Smith in the 1928 presi-
dential election because of his Roman Catholicism
and his opposition to prohibition. Bailey notes that
denominational leaders have been ahead of their
congregations in favoring equal rights for the races.
He concludes that although religion remains a dom-
inant factor in the South today, the churches have
lost some of the influence they held at the beginning
of the century.
2419. Cavert, Samuel McCrea. On the road to
Christian unity; an appraisal of the ecumeni-
cal movement. New York, Harper [1961] 192 p.
61-12823 BX8.2.C3
"Selected bibliography": p. 177—187.
A former general secretary of the National Coun-
cil of Churches surveys the world ecumenical move-
ment as it has been influenced by, and as it has
influenced, the religious scene in the United States.
An account of the growth of cooperation through
State and local interdenominational effort is offered
by Ross W. Sanderson in Church Cooperation in
RELIGION / 357
the United States; the Nation-Wide Backgrounds
and Ecumenical Significance of State and Local
Councils of Churches in Their Historical Perspec-
tive ([New York] Association of Council Secre-
taries, 1960. 272 p.). The Challenge to Reunion
(New York, McGraw-Hill [1963] 292 p.), com-
piled and edited by Robert M. Brown and David
H. Scott, is a collection of essays dealing with the
historical, theological, and social aspects of the pro-
posed merger of the major Presbyterian, Episco-
palian, Methodist, and United Church bodies in
the United States.
2420. Gaustad, Edwin Scott. The Great Awaken-
ing in New England. New York, Harper
[1957] 173 p. illus. 57-9888 BR520.G2
A history of the wave of revivals that swept the
British colonies in the first half of the i8th century
as they affected New England. Led by Jonathan
Edwards, George Whitefield, and Gilbert Tennent,
the movement reached its peak between 1740 and
1742 and then quickly declined. The controversies
it generated caused a progressive hardening of church
doctrines, promoted the growth of separatism, and
led to the destruction of the parish system. In Re-
vivalism and Separatism in New England, 1740—
1800 (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1962.
370 p. Yale publications in religion, 2), C. C. Goen
surveys the churches which arose as a result of the
Great Awakening and traces the subsequent conver-
sion of most of them to Baptist principles.
2421. Miyakawa, Tetsuo Scott. Protestants and
pioneers; individualism and conformity on
the American frontier. Chicago, University of
Chicago Press [1964] 306 p.
64-22247 BR545.M5
Bibliography: p. 275—293.
A sociological study, extensively documented, of
western pioneer life, especially among the Metho-
dists and the Baptists, the largest and perhaps most
characteristic denominations. The Presbyterians
and the Quakers are included as extremes in belief
and polity. In the author's view, the pioneers were
members of disciplined religious groups and as
such helped to create a society in which people were
willing to cooperate to achieve objectives unattain-
able by individuals.
C. Church and State
2422. Blau, Joseph L., ed. Cornerstones of re-
ligious freedom in America. Rev. and enl.
ed. New York, Harper & Row [1964] 344, 9 p.
(Harper torchbooks. The Cloister library)
64-6727 BR5i6.B55 1964
"List of sources": p. 338-341.
An updated edition of no. 5418 in the 1960 Guide.
2423. Murray, John Courtney. We hold these
truths; Catholic reflections on the American
proposition. New York, Sheed & Ward [1960]
336 p. 60-12876 BR5i6.M84
"The question is sometimes raised," says the
author, "whether Catholicism is compatible with
American democracy." A Jesuit theologian at
Woodstock College, he offers here an affirmative
answer. In this collection of essays and occasional
papers published over a lo-year period, he discusses
the basic propositions of American political theory
and their relevance to Catholic ideas on education,
censorship, government support for religion, and
natural law. A more recent statement of the Cath-
olic position is Religion, the Courts, and Public
Policy (New York, McGraw-Hill [1963] 261 p.),
in which Robert F. Drinan confines his attention
to those problems which have become legal and con-
stitutional issues.
2424. Roy, Ralph L. Communism and the
churches. New York, Harcourt, Brace
[1960] 495 p. (Communism in American life)
60—10941 BR5I7-R64
An investigation of the relationship between com-
munism and religion in the United States from the
founding of the American Communist Party in
1919 through the 1950*5. The author, a Methodist
minister, discusses the reactions of the churches to
policies of the Soviet Government, the attitude of
the Communist Party of America toward religion,
and alleged Communist infiltration of the churches.
He concludes that the party never undertook a full-
scale campaign to subvert the churches, that the
number of party members among the clergy was
between 50 and 200 over a 3o-year period, that the
efforts of the party to enlist religious leaders were
made mainly through front organizations, and that
there is virtually no Communist influence in the
churches today.
358 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2425. Sanders, Thomas G. Protestant concepts of
church and state; historical backgrounds and
approaches for the future. New York, Holt, Rine-
hart& Winston [1964] 339 p. (Studies of church
and state) 64—11275 BV63O.2.S3
Bibliographical notes: p. 301—329.
2426. Blanshard, Paul. Religion and the schools;
the great controversy. Boston, Beacon Press
[1963] 265 p. 63—18730 LCm.B53
Bibliography: p. [2471—249. Bibliographical
notes: p. [250]— 260.
2427. Bennett, John C. Christians and the state.
New York, Scribner [1958] 302 p.
58-11638 BV630.2.B4
Historically, Protestants have advocated positions
on church and state ranging from total union to
complete separation. Sanders analyzes many of
these positions and isolates five distinct Protestant
attitudes. Beginning with the European origins of
each, he traces its development and current popu-
larity in America. An articulate and controversial
exponent of complete separation has been Paul
Blanshard. His early books, no. 5444 in the 1960
Guide and another title mentioned in the annota-
tion for no. 5444—5445, deal with what he regards
as Catholic threats to American freedom and have
been vigorously denounced and rebutted by Catho-
lic defenders. A subsequent work, God and Man
in Washington (Boston, Beacon Press [Ci96o] 251
p.), reveals his overall view of religion and its rela-
tionship to the American political system. Blans-
hard's Religion and the Schools is primarily con-
cerned with the U.S. Supreme Court's decisions on
the New York Board of Regents' prayer in 1962
and on Bible reading and the Lord's Prayer in
1963. Taking a more moderate stand in the church-
state debate, John C. Bennett, dean of the Union
Theological Seminary, sees complete separation as
undesirable and advocates a neutral rather than a
secular state. His book surveys the nature and func-
tions of the state in the light of Christian under-
standing against a background of the institutions
and problems of the United States.
2428. Stedman, Murray S. Religion and politics
in America. New York, Harcourt, Brace
& World [1964] 168 p. 64-19366 BR5i6.S8
Bibliography: p. 159—161.
2429. Geyer, Alan F. Piety and politics: Ameri-
can Protestantism in the world arena. Rich-
mond, John Knox Press [1963] 173 p. illus.
63-15198 BRii5.P7G44
Bibliography: p. [168]— 169. Bibliographical
notes: p. [1571—167.
Analyses of the interrelationships between religion
and political processes. Stedman is chiefly concerned
with domestic politics and the role of churches in
political decisionmaking. Many churches that are
too different to act together attempt individually
to influence government in the promotion of their
respective interests; in turn, government and eco-
nomic groups try to use the churches to provide
the moral justifications for secular purposes. The
author concludes that religious groups can best pro-
mote the public interest through their "judgmental
role" in assessing "the moral aspects of great politi-
cal issues." In Geyer's opinion, a nation's moral
and religious outlook plays an important part in the
development of its foreign policy, primarily by set-
ting restraints on the choices available to policy-
makers. He argues that "the Puritan ethos has
given Americans their most distinctive vision of
their role in international affairs" and finds ex-
amples in the moralistic approach to foreign rela-
tions of Woodrow Wilson and John Foster Dulles.
He concludes that unreasoning religious influence
has often promoted irresponsible or vindictive diplo-
macy and urges religious leaders to recognize their
importance as "decision influencers" and to acquire
the necessary knowledge of politics and economics
to exercise their function well.
2430. Stokes, Anson Phelps, and Leo Pfeffer.
Church and state in the United States. Rev.
one-volume ed. New York, Harper & Row [1964]
660 p. 64—14382 BR5i6.S85 1964
Bibliography: p. 623—631.
A condensed and updated edition of no. 5420 in
the 1960 Guide, with an added chapter on the deci-
sions of the U.S. Supreme Court in the area of
church-state relationships. The texts of the major
court decisions, including majority and minority
opinions, have been compiled by Joseph Tussman
in The Supreme Court on Church & State (New
York, Oxford University Press, 1962. 305 p.), and
are analyzed by Philip B. Kurland in Religion and
the Law of Church and State and the Supreme
Court (Chicago, Aldine Pub. Co. [1962] 127 p.).
RELIGION / 359
D. Religious Thought; Theology
2431. Carter, Paul A. The decline and revival of
the social gospel; social and political liberal-
ism in American Protestant churches, 1920—1940.
Ithaca, N.Y., Cornell University Press [ 1 956, c 1 954]
265 p. A56-5089 HN39.U6C35
Bibliography: p. 251—260.
2432. Meyer, Donald B. The Protestant search for
political realism, 1919—1941. Berkeley, Uni-
versity of California Press, 1960. 482 p.
60-9648 HN39.U6M45
Bibliography: p. 463—474.
These studies analyze neo-orthodox theology and
its relationship to the social gospel movement which
flourished at the turn of the century. Carter sees
in the growth of ecumenicalism and the views of
Reinhold Niebuhr the rise of a new social gospel,
highly theological in structure and realistic in out-
look. He describes the distinctive beliefs of the
theologians of the old social gospel movement and
of the neo-orthodoxy, with primary attention to their
social and political influence. Meyer examines the
theologians' views in much greater detail and con-
cludes that Niebuhr's ideas did not revive the social
gospel; rather, they destroyed it. Under his influ-
ence the "Protestant social concern ended as a criti-
cism of religion."
2433. Cauthen, Kenneth. The impact of Ameri-
can religious liberalism. New York, Harper
& Row [1962] 290 p. 62—14573 BRi6i5.C35
A systematic investigation of the dominant theo-
logical movement in American Protestantism dur-
ing the first 30 years of this century. The author
characterizes religious liberalism as an attempt to
"relate the enduring Christian message to a con-
stantly changing cultural situation." He distin-
guishes between "evangelical liberalism," which
sought a theology to continue the Christian tradition
without conflicting with the modern view of the
world, and "modernistic liberalism," which at-
tempted to use the methodologies of 20th-century
science and philosophy to preserve and reinterpret
what was valuable in Christian tradition. With the
1930*5 came the rise of the school of neo-orthodox
thought and the decline of the liberal movement, a
change attributed by Cauthen to the increasing rec-
ognition that "liberalism was in large part a cultural
faith expressed in Christian terminology and not a
genuine reinterpretation of the Christian revelation."
2434. Gasper, Louis. The fundamentalist move-
ment. The Hague, Mouton [1963] 181 p.
63-24282 BT82.2.G3
Fundamentalism reached its zenith in the 1920*5
with the Scopes trial and the formation of the World
Christian Fundamentals Association; then the asso-
ciation collapsed and bad publicity from the trial
seemed to signify the demise of the movement. This
study of fundamentalism since 1930 shows, how-
ever, that by midcentury the movement had again
achieved national prominence. The author describes
its division in the early 1940'$ into two national
groups: the conservative and militant American
Council of Christian Churches, dominated by Carl
Mclntire; and the more conciliatory and moderate
National Association of Evangelicals, led by Harold
John Ockenga. Gasper also discusses the aggressive
attacks on religious and political liberalism by the
American Council, the attempts of "neo-evangelical"
scholars to relate their conceptions of the Bible to
the scientific method, the growth of Bible Institutes,
and the resurgence of revivalism under the leader-
ship of Billy Graham.
2435. James, William. The varieties of religious
experience; a study in human nature. Enl.
ed., with appendices and introduction by Joseph
Ratner. New Hyde Park, N.Y., University Books
[1963] xlii, 626 p. (Gifford lectures on natural
religion, 1901—02) 63—14505 BRno.J3 1963
An updated edition of no. 5431 in the 1960 Guide.
2436. Morgan, Edmund S. Visible saints; the his-
tory of a Puritan idea. [New York] New
York University Press, 1963. 159 p.
63—9999 BX9322.M6
In this study the author argues that the New Eng-
land Puritans developed the notion of the church as
an exclusive body of those who had been demon-
strably "saved" through the conversion experience.
Although this idea had only a short life in the i7th
century, it was revived almost 90 years later by
Jonathan Edwards and remains influential today.
360 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
E. Religious Bodies
2437. [Baptist] Torbet, Robert G. A history of
the Baptists. With a foreword by Kenneth
Scott Latourette. Rev. Valley Forge, Judson Press
[1963] 553 p. 63-8225 BX623I.T6 1963
An updated edition of no. 5443 in the 1960 Guide.
2438. [Catholic] Cross, Robert D. The emer-
gence of liberal Catholicism in America.
Cambridge, Mass., Harvard University Press, 1958.
328 p. 58-5593 BXi407.A5C7
Bibliography: p. [295]— 312.
In the last half of the i9th century, Catholicism in
the United States was torn by controversy between
conservatives, who thought the church should as-
sume a defensive position against a Protestant world,
and liberals, who optimistically sought "a friendly
interaction between their religion and American
life." Cross, a non-Catholic, presents a study of the
liberal group. Against a background of the ac-
tivities of James Cardinal Gibbons, John Ireland
(Archbishop of St. Paul), and Isaac Hecker, the
founder of the Paulists, he describes the liberal
ideas on cooperation with Protestants, church and
state relationships, labor unions, socialism, and edu-
cation. He maintains that although the controversy
was disruptive, "in the long run the spirited de-
bate probably facilitated the orderly adaptation of
the church to a swiftly changing American society."
One of the concluding events of the struggle was
the condemnation of "Americanism" by the Pope
in 1899. This episode is examined by Thomas T.
McAvoy in The Great Crisis in American Catholic
History, 1895—1900 (Chicago, Regnery, 1957. 402
p.). The reaction of the Catholic Church to the
problems of urbanization and industrialization is
discussed in Aaron I. Abell's American Catholicism
and Social Action: A Search for Social Justice, 1865—
7950 (Garden City, N.Y., Hanover House, 1960.
306 p.).
2439. Ellis, John Tracy. Documents of American
Catholic history. [2d ed.] Milwaukee,
Bruce Pub. Co. [1962] xxii, 667 p.
62—12432 BXi4O5.E4 1962
An updated edition of no. 5449 in the 1960 Guide.
Michael V. Gannon has used original documents to
write The Cross in the Sand; the Early Catholic
Church in Florida, 1513—1870 (Gainesville, Univer-
sity of Florida Press, 1965. 210 p.), a history of the
oldest establishment of the Christian faith in the
United States.
2440. Scharper, Philip, ed. American Catholics:
a Protestant-Jewish view [by] Stringfellow
Barr [and others] With an afterword by Gustave
Weigel. New York, Sheed & Ward [1959] 235
p. 59—12093 6X1406.836
2441. Brown, Robert McAfee, and Gustave Wei-
gel. An American dialogue; a Protestant
looks at Catholicism and a Catholic looks at Protes-
tantism. With a foreword by Will Herberg. Gar-
den City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1960. 216 p.
60-13750 6X4818.3.67
In 1959, Sheed & Ward commissioned Stringfel-
low Barr, Martin E. Marty, Robert McAfee Brown,
Arthur A. Cohen, Arthur Gilbert, and Allyn P.
Robinson, representing Protestant and Jewish faiths,
to write essays on aspects of Roman Catholicism
which most concern other religious groups. The
essays in American Catholics: A Protestant-Jewish
View are characterized by candor and directness,
combined with an attempt to understand the Cath-
olic point of view. Catholic reluctance to partici-
pate in exchanges of views with non-Catholic groups
and the prevailing apprehension of the Catholic
Church's attitude on religious freedom are the two
dominant themes. In an appended essay, Gustave
Weigel, a Jesuit professor at Woodstock College,
calls on Catholics to use these "calm evaluations" as
an aid in promoting interfaith understanding. Wei-
gel and Robert McAfee Brown, professor of religion
at Union Theological Seminary, advance this pro-
gram of mutual evaluation in An American Dia-
logue. Brown discusses contemporary American
Catholicism, the issues dividing Protestants and
Catholics, and the attitude of the Catholic Church
toward the ecumenical movement. Weigel presents
a Catholic picture of Protestantism, its principles,
fears, and inconsistencies. The authors see little
chance of union or of complete resolution of differ-
ences, but they urge tolerance and cooperation.
2442. [Episcopal] Manross, William W. A his-
tory of the American Episcopal Church. [3d
ed., rev.] New York, Morehouse-Gorham, 1959-
420 p. 59-x356 6X5880^35 1959
2443- Albright, Raymond W. A history of the
Protestant Episcopal Church. New York,
Macmillan [Ci964] 406 p.
64-21168 6X5580^4
Bibliography: p. 382—397.
More than half of the volume by Manross, which
is a revised and updated edition of no. 5456 in the
1960 Guide, is devoted to the period before the
American Revolution. Albright's highly detailed
study devotes relatively more attention to recent
history. In Mitre and Sceptre; Transatlantic Faiths,
Ideas, Personalities, and Politics, 1689—1775 (New
York, Oxford University Press, 1962. 354 p.), Carl
Bridenbaugh discusses the conflicts generated by
the efforts to establish the Anglican Church in the
American Colonies and examines religion as a
fundamental cause of the American Revolution.
2444. [Jehovah's Witnesses] Whalen, William J.
Armageddon around the corner; a report on
Jehovah's Witnesses. New York, J. Day Co.
[1962] 249 p. illus. 62-10958 BX8526.W47
Bibliography: p. 235-238.
A brief account, written in a popular style, by a
Roman Catholic layman. The Jehovah's Witnesses,
one of the "three major indigenous religious move-
ments in this country," had their origins in the small
study groups organized by Charles Taze Russell in
the 1870*5. Russell's belief in the imminence of the
end of the world remains the dominant tenet of the
sect today. Renouncing worldly concerns, Witness-
es refuse to vote, salute the flag, or perform military
service. These ideas, in combination with their
militant evangelism, have often subjected them to
mob violence and prosecution in the courts.
2445. [Judaism] Wouk, Herman. This is my
God. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1959.
356P- 59-11617 BM56i.W65
A novelist's personal testament of the significance
of the Jewish faith. Wouk describes the essence of
Judaism, both for Jews who have fallen away from
the old observances and for interested Gentiles.
Although he treats Judaism in general, his point of
view is American and Orthodox. He offers infor-
mation on American Judaism as well as a plea for
recognition of the values to be found in conscien-
tious observance of the Mosaic law. Moshe Davis
describes the rise of Conservative Judaism in oppo-
sition to the spread of the Reform movement in
The Emergence of Conservative Judaism: the His-
torical School in igth Century America (Philadel-
phia, Jewish Publication Society of America, 1963.
527 p. The Jacob R. Schiff library of Jewish
contributions to American democracy, no. 15).
RELIGION / 361
2446. [Lutheran] Wentz, Abdel R. A basic his-
tory of Lutheranism in America. Rev. ed.
Philadelphia, Fortress Press [1964] 439 p.
64-12996 6X804 1. W38 1964
Bibliography: p. 398—421.
An updated edition of no. 5461 in the 1960 Guide.
2447. [Methodist] Harmon, Nolan Bailey. The
organization of the Methodist Church; his-
toric development and present working structure.
2d rev. ed. Nashville, Methodist Pub. House
[1962] 287 p. 62-12436 6X8388^3 1962
An updated edition of a study mentioned in the
annotation for no. 5463 in the 1960 Guide.
2448. The History of American Methodism. Edi-
torial Board: Emory Stevens Bucke, general
editor [and others] New York, Abingdon Press
[1964] 3 v. illus. 64-10013 6X8235^5
The first official history of American Methodism
since its beginnings in 1784. Authorized by the
General Conference of the Methodist Church in
1956, this multivolume work was written by 44
scholars and clergymen. From the arrival in Amer-
ica of the Wesleys and George Whitefield, the story
follows the founding of the early societies, the
activities of Francis Asbury as circuit rider and first
bishop, the schisms in the first part of the i9th
century, the growth of the various Methodist de-
nominations after the Civil War, and the union in
1939 of the three major groups which now form the
Methodist Church. Each volume of this history
includes bibliographies, and the whole is extensive-
ly documented and indexed. Francis Asbury's
Journal and Letters (London, Epworth Press; Nash-
ville, Abingdon Press [1958] 3 v.), edited by
Elmer T. Clark, J. Manning Potts, and Jacob S.
Payton, is an eyewitness account of the early days
of Methodism.
2449. [Mormon] O'Dea, Thomas F. The Mor-
mons. [Chicago] University of Chicago
Press [1957] 288 p. 57-6984 6X8611.03
A study of the Mormon Church by a non-
Mormon sociologist. After presenting a brief history,
the author discusses theology, institutional develop-
ment, and the characteristic Mormon way of life. A
final chapter analyzes the position of the church in
today's secular society. O'Dea lived in Utah for
several years while collecting material for this study
and openly displays his admiration for the Mor-
mons and their accomplishments. Accounts writ-
ten by some of the early travelers and curiosity
seekers who visited the Mormon settlements have
been collected and edited by William Mulder and
362 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Arlington Russell Mortensen in Among the Mor-
mons; Historic Accounts by Contemporary Ob-
servers (New York, Knopf, 1958. 482 p.).
2450. [Presbyterian] Thompson, Ernest Trice.
Presbyterians in the South, v. i. 1607—
1861. Richmond, John Knox Press [Ci963] 629
p. 63—19121 BX894I.T5 v. i
Bibliography: p. [597]— 608.
A professor of church history at the Union Theo-
logical Seminary in Virginia traces the institutional
and theological history of ante bellum Southern
Presbyterianism. Beginning with the first scattered
Presbyterians in Virginia, he follows the growth of
the denomination through adversity and persecu-
tion in colonial times, post-Revolutionary eminence,
and controversy and schism in the period before
the Civil War. He also discusses such topics as
slavery, missions, morals, and education. A more
limited study is Robert Hastings Nichols' Presby-
terianism in New Yor^ State; a History of the
Synod and Its Predecessors (Philadelphia, Published
for the Presbyterian Historical Society by the West-
minster Press [1963] 288 p.), issued in the
Presbyterian Historical Society's Studies in Presby-
terian History series. Another volume in the same
series is The Presbyterian Ministry in American
Culture; a Study in Changing Concepts, ijoo—
i goo (1962. 269 p.), by Elwyn Allen Smith, who
surveys theological ideas and educational practices
and shows how they influence the denomination's
conception of its mission.
F. Representative Leaders
2451. [Ballou] Cassara, Ernest. Hosea Ballou;
the challenge to orthodoxy. Boston, Univer-
salist Historical Society [1961] 226 p.
61—6545 6X9969.6303
Bibliography: p. 177—190.
Universalism was a product of the revolt of New
England's lower classes against Calvinist orthodoxy.
Its central idea of universal salvation first appeared
in the American Colonies with the arrival of John
Murray in New Jersey in 1770. Universalism
spread slowly at first but gained impetus after the
conversion, in 1789, of Hosea Ballou (1771—1852)
from Baptist Calvinism. Ballou possessed little
formal education, but his rough eloquence made
him the leading Universalist minister. In A Trea-
tise on the Atonement, mentioned in the annotation
for no. 5473 in the 1960 Guide, he introduced the
Unitarian ideas which were gradually accepted by
the Universalist congregations. This biography
analyzes his theology and supplies an extensive list
of his publications.
2452. [Graham] High, Stanley. Billy Graham;
the personal story of the man, his message,
and his mission. New York, McGraw-Hill
[1956] 274 p. 56-11952 BV3785.G69H5
2453. McLoughlin, William G. Billy Graham;
revivalist in a secular age. New York,
Ronald Press [1960] 269 p.
59—12122 BV3785-G69M3
High, a senior editor of The Reader's Digest,
was assigned to interview Graham in 1954, and his
account is the result of the interest and admiration
he developed at that time. Written in a popular
style and at the height of the Graham crusades, this
biography reflects the cooperation accorded the
author by Graham's family and associates and in-
cludes excerpts from letters and personal anecdotes.
McLoughlin's volume, published four years later, is
a critical analysis. The author, associate professor
of history at Brown University, describes the evan-
gelist's career and examines his theological, social,
and political ideas, his pulpit techniques, the me-
chanics of his campaigns, and the commercialism
surrounding his activities. McLoughlin has at-
tempted to present all sides in his investigation, al-
though his views are unsympathetic to Graham's
ideas and to revivalism in general.
2454. [Ingersoll] Larson, Orvin P. American in-
fidel: Robert G. Ingersoll, a biography. New
York, Citadel Press [1962] 316 p. illus.
62—10223 BL2790.I6L3
Bibliography: p. 286—290.
Ingersoll (1833—1899), one of the finest orators of
the 1 9th century, was an apostle of antireligion.
Inveighing against the Bible, organized religion,
and the clergy, he spoke to packed houses all over
the country on such topics as "Some Mistakes of
Moses," "Myth and Miracle," and "About the Holy
Bible." His ideas derived from a passionate belief
in freedom of thought, and he was active in political
affairs, supporting such causes as votes for women
and the abolition of obscenity laws. The interest of
his biographer, chairman of the department of
speech at Brooklyn College, centers on Ingersoll the
orator, but nevertheless a picture emerges of a man
who, while attacking religious beliefs and organi-
zations, helped to promote an atmosphere conducive
to critical research and thought. A general analysis
of the influence of atheistic, agnostic, deistic, and
theistic thought is made by Martin E. Marty in The
Infidel; Freethought and American Religion (Cleve-
land, Meridian Books [1961] 224 p. Living
age books, LA34).
2455. [Jones] Vining, Elizabeth Gray. Friend of
life; the biography of Rufus M. Jones. Phil-
adelphia, Lippincott [1958] 347 p. illus.
58-11131 BX7795.J55V5
"Books by Rufus M. Jones": p. 331—333.
Jones (1863—1948), sometimes called the modern
spiritual leader of Quakerism, combined a life
oriented toward intellectual pursuits with one of
active service in organized Quaker philanthropy.
He published more than 40 books on Quaker
philosophy and history and served for many years
as chairman of the American Friends Service Com-
mittee. Several accounts of his life and work have
appeared since his death. Friend of Life is the
most recent of these and one of the most detailed.
RELIGION / 363
2456. [Wise] Heller, James G. Isaac M. Wise:
his life, work, and thought. [New York]
Union of American Hebrew Congregations [1965]
xxi, 819 p. 64—24340 BM755.W5H5
Bibliography, including works of and about Rabbi
Wise: p. 677—692.
Rabbi Heller has written not only a biography of
a pivotal figure in Jewish history in the United
States but also a full account of the Reform Judaism
which Rabbi Wise (1819—1900) introduced into
this country. Most of the book is a straightforward
narrative of Wise's life and achievements, which
included the founding of the Union of Hebrew
Congregations, the Hebrew Union College, and the
Central Conference of American Rabbis. A sep-
arate section of the volume sets forth a systematic
outline of Wise's thinking on subjects that interested
and concerned him. Whenever possible the author
has allowed Wise to speak for himself through
excerpts from his letters and speeches. Among the
subjects discussed are religion in general, Judaism
and Reform Judaism, colonization and Zionism,
Christianity, and civil rights for Jews.
G. Church and Society
2457. Berger, Peter L. The noise of solemn as-
semblies; Christian commitment and the
religious establishment in America. Garden City,
N.Y., Doubleday, 1961. 189 p.
61-14587 BR526.B45
2458. Winter, Gibson. The suburban captivity of
the churches; an analysis of Protestant re-
sponsibility in the expanding metropolis. Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1961. 216 p.
61-7667 BV6377.W5
2459. Shippey, Frederick A. Protestantism in sub-
urban life. New York, Abingdon Press
[1964] 221 p. 64—20521 B ¥637.7.846
Bibliography: p. 203—212.
In a manual prepared for the National Student
Christian Federation, Berger sees the churches as a
"religious establishment" existing in American so-
ciety as a "segregated enclave, surrounded by ac-
tions that have little if any relationship to religious
motives." Maintaining that they are no longer able
to take the lead in forwarding the work of Christian
mission, he discusses alternative ways, including
new "organizational forms," in which this mission
might be carried out apart from existing organiza-
tions. In The Suburban Captivity of the Churches
Winter analyzes the role of the church in metro-
politan areas and stresses the exodus of the Protes-
tant churches from the socially disorganized inner
city to the middle-class suburbs. He contends that
although the minority and low-income groups in
midcity have the greatest need of religion, a ministry
here demands great outlay of money and personnel
with little tangible return. The suburbs, on the
other hand, are a fertile field for the growth of
financially prosperous, homogenous congregations.
Condemning this "exclusiveness," the author empha-
sizes the "inclusiveness" of the Christian mission
and advocates the enlargement of the lay ministry
and the reorganization of the parish to include both
suburban and inner city areas. He develops these
ideas further in The New Creation as Metropolis
(New York, Macmillan [1963] 152 p.). The
attempts of one group to deal with the problems of
the inner city by living and working among the
people are graphically depicted in Bruce Kenrick's
Come Out the Wilderness; the Story of East Har-
lem Protestant Parish (New York, Harper [1962]
220 p.). The author of Protestantism in Suburban
Life asserts that the suburbs are no longer the
exclusive domain of the Protestant middle class.
364 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Citing contemporary surveys, Shippey describes the
influx of Roman Catholics, Jews, Negroes, blue-
collar workers, and sect groups which have made
suburbia "the greatest American spiritual frontier
for all faiths." His book is a discussion of the
problems arising in the fringe areas of the city and
a defense of the activities of the organized churches.
Catholic suburbia is described in The Church and
the Suburbs (New York, Sheed & Ward [1959]
206 p.), by Andrew M. Greeley.
2460. Cox, Harvey G. The secular city; seculari-
zation and urbanization in theological per-
spective. New York, Macmillan [1965] 276 p.
65-16713 BRii5.W6C65
Bibliography: p. 271—276. Includes bibliographi-
cal references.
A theological essay calling for a reassessment and
redefinition of Christian thought and action in
order to make Christianity responsive to the de-
mands of urban secular society. The author,
associate professor of church and society in the
Divinity School of Harvard University, is viewed
in some quarters as one of the Nation's most radical
and respected young Christian thinkers. Although
he chooses the broad historical context of Western
civilization, his criticisms of modern Christianity
derive from his analysis of the dis juncture between
church and society in the United States. In its
adherence to outworn doctrines, institutions, and
ethical codes, he argues, modern Christanity has
diverged from the spiritual values which were at
the core of Christ's teachings. By recognizing that
other institutions have taken over economic, social,
political, and educational functions which were
once its province, the church can free itself to con-
tinue the process of spiritual fermentation.
2461. Herberg, Will. Protestant, Catholic, Jew;
an essay in American religious sociology.
New ed., completely rev. Garden City, N.Y.,
Anchor Books, 1960. 309 p. (A Doubleday Anchor
book, Ai95) 60-5931 BR526.H4 1960
Includes bibliography.
An updated edition of no. 5488 in the 1960 Guide.
2462. Lee, Robert. The social sources of church
unity; an interpretation of unitive move-
ments in American Protestantism. New York,
Abingdon Press [1960] 238 p.
60—9199 BX8.2.L4
Bibliography: p. 225—231.
In The Social Sources of Denominationalism
(1929), Helmut Richard Niebuhr, a pioneer in the
sociology of religion, argues that religious differen-
tiation in the United States is largely based on social
class rather than on theology. Lee's book, as its
tide suggests, is a parallel study conducted 30 years
later. Accepting Niebuhr's thesis, Lee contends
that in the period since 1929, cultural unity, rather
than diversity, has become increasingly apparent in
society and is a basic factor in the current ecu-
menical movement. After demonstrating the di-
minution of social and cultural distinctions, he
turns to the various aspects of ecumenicalism — the
National Council of Churches, local church coun-
cils, denominational mergers and reunions, com-
munity churches, and comity. He also examines
separatist movements, including the growth of the
Holiness sects and the rapid expansion of the
antiecumenical Southern Baptist Convention.
2463. Lenski, Gerhard E. The religious factor; a
sociological study of religion's impact on
politics, economics, and family life. Garden City,
N.Y., Doubleday, 1961. 381 p.
61—9197 BL6o.L44
Bibliographical footnotes.
The author presents and interprets the results of
personal interviews with a cross section of people
from metropolitan Detroit, conducted with the co-
operation of the University of Michigan's Detroit
Area Study. He shows a high correlation between
religious affiliation and attitudes, practices, and rela-
tive success in daily life. Reports and conclusions
of a similar survey conducted by the staff of the
Chicago Theological Seminary in an anonymous
rural midwestern county are included in The Church
and Faith in Mid-America (Philadelphia, West-
minster Press [1963] 174 p.), by Victor Oben-
haus, and Religion in American Culture; Unity
and Diversity in a Midwestern County ( [New
York] Free Press of Glencoe [1964] 254 p.),
by Obenhaus and W. Widick Schroeder. Reports
on a nationwide survey of religious belief are con-
tained in John L. Thomas' Religion and the Ameri-
can People (Westminster, Md., Newman Press, 1963.
3°7 P-)-
2464. Moberg, David O. The church as a social
institution; the sociology of American reli-
gion. Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall, 1962.
569 p. (Prentice-Hall sociology series)
62—10140 BV625.M6
Includes bibliography.
The influence of religion as a factor of sociological
significance was for many years discounted by soci-
ologists and political scientists. Around the turn
of the century Emile Durkheim and Max Weber
published studies that tried to identify the role
played by religion in influencing social institutions
and social change, but it was not until after World
War II that American social scientists in general
RELIGION / 365
came to recognize the sociology of religion as a valid
field of study in the United States. In this textbook,
one of several appearing in recent years, the author
argues that the church is an integral part of society
and that clearer knowledge of its institutional
characteristics is necessary to enable religious lead-
ers to plan wisely for the future.
2465. Pfeffer, Leo. Creeds in competition: a cre-
ative force in American culture. [New
York] Harper [1958] 176 p.
58-10373 BR5i6.5.P43
An analysis of the effects of religious pluralism on
American culture. The author, professor of con-
stitutional law at Yeshiva University, discusses the
efforts of Protestants, Catholics, Jews, and secular
humanists to promote their own ideas of society and
behavior through "governmental action either in the
enactment of laws or in the operation of govern-
mental institutions." In his opinion the conflicts
among the various religious groups generate "crea-
tive competition." He presents the views of each
group on such subjects as education, censorship,
morals, family life, and social reform.
H. The Negro's Church
2466. Weatherford, Willis D. American churches
and the Negro; an historical study from
early slave days to the present. Boston, Christopher
Pub. House [1957] 310 p.
57-9842 BR563.N4W4
A study of the relationship of the primarily white
religious denominations to the Negro in the United
States, both before and after the abolition of slavery.
The author avers that religious groups before the
Civil War took the Negroes into their churches
and considered their spiritual needs to be of primary
concern but that after the war the Negroes became
generally unwelcome. He notes that the churches
are belatedly beginning to resume their original
mission and calls for an end to segregation in
church membership and activities. In White Pro-
testantism and the Negro (New York, Oxford Uni-
versity Press, 1965. 236 p.), David M. Reimers
pursues his topic from the beginning of the i9th
century to the early 1960'$ and concludes that Pro-
testantism's treatment of the Negro was "no better
and no worse than that of American society as a
whole." In The Negro Church in America (New
York, Schocken Books [1964, Ci963] 92 p. Studies
in sociology), Edward Franklin Frazier contends
that, following the Civil War, the Negro church
became the most influential Negro institution, its
other-worldly emphasis providing a refuge from the
harsh realities of life.
XXIV
Folklore, Folk Music, Folk Art
A. Legends and Tales: General
B. Legends and Tales: Local
C. Folksongs and Ballads: General
D. Folksongs and Ballads: Local
E. Fo/y^ Art and Crafts
2467-2473
2474-2487
2488-2498
2499—2506
2507—2510
THE ENTRIES in Section A, Legends and Tales: General, include a treasury of anecdotes
and a dictionary of proverbs and proverbial phrases. Section B has entries for works on
local lore in Maine, Texas, North Carolina, Illinois, and Nebraska and among such social
groups as the folk associated with the oil industry and the Pennsylvania Dutch miners.
Murder ballads, Negro folk music, and chanteys are among the subjects of entries in Section C,
and in Section D are works on local ballads and songs from Virginia, Utah, Pennsylvania,
the Catskills, New England, and the Southwest, as
well as biographies of a folk composer of the on Games and Dances, which is Section E in the
Northeast woods and a folk hero of the Rio Grande 1960 Guide, appears in the Supplement. The section
borderland. on Folk Art and Crafts, Section F in the 1960
Because of the lack of suitable entries, no section Guide, is Section E in the Supplement.
A. Legends and Tales: General
2467. Beck, Horace P., ed. Folklore in action;
essays for discussion in honor of MacEdward
Leach. Philadelphia, American Folklore Society,
1962. 210 p. (Publications of the American Folk-
lore Society. Bibliographical and special series, v.
14) 62-12687 GRi5.B4
Includes bibliographical references.
For years professor of Middle English at the Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania, Leach became chairman of
the institution's graduate department in folklore in
1962. A group of his former students and close
friends, as well as past presidents of the American
Folklore Society, have here contributed what they
consider to be "their most worthwhile, definitive
work in a particular field." The essays are of a
general rather than a specific nature and cover a
number of major areas of folklore in an attempt to
represent Leach's multifarious interests. Several
366
of the essays are reprinted or adapted from other
publications. Studies in Folklore, in Honor of
Distinguished Service Professor Stith Thompson
( Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1957. 270
p. Indiana University publications. Folklore series,
no. 9), edited by Winthrop Edson Richmond, is a
tribute to a scholar probably best known for his
accomplishments in the area of comparative folk-
lore. The contributors include students and col-
leagues associated with the major phases of his
career both in the United States and abroad.
2468. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. A Civil War
treasury of tales, legends, and folklore; illu-
strated by Warren Chappell. New York, Random
House [1960] 625 p. 60—5530 £655.665
Bibliographical notes: p. 577—607.
"Before the Civil War became our writingest and
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 367
storytellingest war, it was our talkingest war." A
favorite campfire pastime in both armies was swap-
ping gossip and anecdotes. These sessions were
rituals in which all could take part and which
united each narrator with the group. "The soldier's
stories were his folk literature, leveling individual
differences, codifying his beliefs and attitudes, and
giving him a sense of belonging." The main
sources of this collection are reminiscences, personal
narratives, and unit histories, with additions from
letters, diaries, scrapbooks, newspapers, periodicals,
pamphlets, and miscellaneous ephemera. The edi-
tor presents it as "the first attempt at a Civil War
folk history and story history based on a wide va-
riety of contemporary sources." The selections have
been arranged in six parts, one devoted to each year,
1861—65, and a sixth t° the "aftermath." These
parts are in turn divided by content into sections, in
each of which the materials are offered as nearly in
chronological order as possible.
2469. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. A treasury of
American anecdotes; sly, salty, shaggy stories
of heroes and hellions, beguilers and buffoons, spell-
binders and scapegoats, gagsters and gossips, from
the grassroots and sidewalks of America. New
York, Random House [1957] 321 p.
57—10053 PN626i.B6
These anecdotes are "short, pointed, pithy, pun-
gent illustrative or attributed stories" which belong
to what the editor calls "floating literature — litera-
ture without known authorship or fixed form."
The collection includes tall tales, jokes, and region-
al lore arranged geographically in 14 sections (with
introductions) devoted to such types or motifs as
"Whopper Wit," "Barnyard and Barroom," and
"Wit's End." Botkin has gone to many kinds of
sources, oral and printed, old and new, in his
effort to make the book representative of the whole
range of the raconteur's art and repertoire. "If this
book proves anything about American storytelling,"
he observes, "it is that 'Old stories never die.' "
2470. Dorson, Richard M. American folklore.
[Chicago] University of Chicago Press
[1959] 328 p. (The Chicago history of American
civilization) 59—12283 GRio5-D65
"Bibliographical notes": p. 282—300.
2471. Dorson, Richard M. Buying the wind: re-
gional folklore in the United States. Chi-
cago, University of Chicago Press [1964] xvii,
573 p. 64—13010 GRio5.D66
Bibliography: p. [536] -[544].
Dorson contends that "the only meaningful ap-
proach to the folk traditions of the United States
must be made against the background of American
history, with its unique circumstances and environ-
ment." No "other history — or folklore — grapples
in the same measure with the factors of colonization,
immigration, Negro slavery, the westward move-
ment, or mass culture." The outline of American
Folklore follows, accordingly, the broad sweep of
the Nation's development. The author draws his
material from authentic collections and studies,
eschewing "fakelore," in which the raw data of
folklore has been refined and falsified to make it
more palatable and more marketable. Supplemen-
tary to this volume, and in particular to its chapter
on "Regional Folk Cultures," is Buying the Wind,
described as a "volume of texts." A "text" is
defined as an "inviolable document" that "comes
from the lips of a speaker or singer and is set down
with word for word exactness by a collector." For
each item the informant is named and the collector
is cited. Seven regional groups are represented:
Maine Down-Easters, Pennsylvania Dutchmen,
Southern Mountaineers, Louisiana Cajuns, Illinois
Egyptians, Southwest Mexicans, and Utah Mormons.
2472. Goldstein, Kenneth S. A guide for field
workers in folklore. Preface by Hamish
Henderson. Hatboro, Pa., Folklore Associates,
1964. xviii, 199 p. 64—24801 GR40.G6
Bibliography: p. 177—188.
If folklore studies are to achieve full academic
status, Hamish Henderson observes in the preface
to this book, the folklorists' reputation for "bizarre
waywardness and indiscipline" must be liquidated.
Goldstein's manual is designed precisely to meet
that objective. Its explicit aim is to raise the
discipline of folklore to the level of a science and to
turn amateur practitioners into professionals. The
author envisions a social science with close ties to
the humanities. He shows how folklore can bor-
row from the ethnographic approach to field work
and at the same time avoid its "extreme functional-
ist attitude." The reader does not need academic
training in folklore in order to understand the
instructions offered here. He is warned, however,
that the reading will not necessarily convert him
into a professional collector. If he lacks the re-
quired temperament, he will not become a success-
ful fieldworker even by using the recommended
methods and techniques.
2473. Taylor, Archer, and Bartlett J. Whiting,
camps. A dictionary of American proverbs
and proverbial phrases, 1820—1880. Cambridge,
Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 1958.
xxii, 418 p. 58—10406 PN6426.T28
Bibliography: xii— xxii.
In the opinion of the compilers, "There is no
368 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
exaggeration in the statement that at no other time
have so many American writers made proverbs so
obvious an ingredient in their style." The authors
whose writings are included in the dictionary were
chosen "as representative of various regions and for
their popularity." Two regional collections are
Proverbs and Proverbial Phrases of Illinois (Car-
bondale, Southern Illinois University Press [1965]
213 p.), edited by Frances M. Barbour, and A Dic-
tionary of Proverbs and Proverbial Phrases From
Boo\s Published by Indiana Authors Before 1890
(Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1961. 168
p. Indiana University folklore series, no. 15), com-
piled by Jan H. Brunvand.
B. Legends and Tales: Local
2474. Beck, Horace P. The folklore of Maine.
Drawings by Arthur K. D. Healy. Phila-
delphia, Lippincott [1957] 284 p.
57-8948 GRno.M2B4
Bibliography: p. 273—276.
"This is not a scholarly book in the pedantic
sense nor is it intended to be one. Neither is it
a complete collection of Maine folklore. Rather, it
is a selection of tales, beliefs, superstitions, songs,
and customs of people of English-speaking stock
in Maine. It is a book that attempts to give illu-
strations of most of the major aspects of folklore
that are, or have been within the last twenty years,
extant in the state." The materials are incorporated
into a historical setting in order that the reader
may see the folk record of history through the
centuries. Most of the stories have been para-
phrased to facilitate reading.
2475. Boatright, Mody C. Folklore of the oil
industry. With illustrations by William D.
Wittliff. Dallas, Southern Methodist University
Press ['1963] 220 p. 63-21186 TN872.A5B6
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 205-213).
"The oil industry is a little more than a hundred
years old — old enough to have generated a consid-
erable body of tradition, young enough to exempli-
fy the generation of tradition in a literate, industrial
society." Some of the more prevalent forms of this
tradition are examined here. Based largely on field-
work in Texas, the study is buttressed by research
in libraries and by additional fieldwork in Penn-
sylvania, West Virginia, Ohio, Kansas, and Okla-
homa. The author divides his discussion into
three parts: one on stories concerned with the
search for oil, another on figures already stereo-
typed in the industry (including the "promoter"
and the "shooter"), and a third devoted to miscel-
laneous tales and songs. Although the folk of the
oil industry created their own mythical heroes, they
also borrowed from other settings. Even Paul
Bunyan found time in his busy life to drill for oil,
building one rig so tall that it reached to heaven,
where his crew lived until the well was finished.
2476. Boatright, Mody C., Wilson M. Hudson,
and Allen Maxwell, eds. Singers and story-
tellers. Dallas, Southern Methodist University
Press [1961] 298 p. (Publications of the Texas
Folklore Society, no. 30)
60—15894 GRi.T4 no. 30
A collection of 28 articles, some of which are
collections of tales and most of which pertain to
Texas. The contributors are as varied as the sub-
jects about which they write. Articles by J. Frank
Dobie, MacEdward Leach, and editor Boatright are
intermixed with others by a senior English major
at the University of Texas, a geography teacher at
Louisiana State University, and a soil conservation-
ist. Boatright has also joined with Robert B.
Downs and John T. Flanagan as coauthor of The
Family Saga and Other Phases of American Fol^-
lore (Urbana, University of Illinois Press, 1958. 65
p. Sixth annual Windsor lectures, 1958), a small
volume consisting of one lecture by each man.
2477. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. A treasury of
New England folklore; stories, ballads, and
traditions of Yankee folk. Rev. ed. New York,
Crown Publishers [1965] xxii, 618 p. music.
64-17848 GRio6.B6 1965
A revised edition of no. 5524 in the 1960 Guide,
containing a new introduction and some additional
material.
2478. Brewer, John Mason. Worser days and bet-
ter times; the folklore of the North Carolina
Negro. With preface & notes by Warren E. Roberts.
Drawings by R. L. Toben. Chicago, Quadrangle
Books [1965] 192 p. 65-18245 GRio3-B72
Bibliography: p. 17—18.
A broad sampling of contemporary Negro folk-
tales and other folklore from North Carolina. Col-
lected while the author, a Negro folklorist, was
teaching at Livingstone College, Salisbury, the tales,
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 369
talk, superstitions, song texts, and verses were
chosen to illustrate characteristics which Brewer
considers typical of the North Carolina Negro.
Among the traits identified are an attitude of
superiority toward Negroes in States to the south,
especially South Carolina and Georgia; an absorbing
desire to go to New York City to live; seriousness
about religion and religious leaders; closely knit
family and neighborhood relationships; a "slow and
steady" and suspicious nature; and replacement of
the "other worldly" thinking of slavery days with
"reality thinking." Brewer makes less use of dialect
than in his earlier work, Dog Ghosts, and Other
Texas Negro Folf^ Tales (Austin, University of
Texas Press [1958] 124 p.) and keeps "editorial
interference" at a minimum "in order to preserve
the peculiar folk flavor of the individual offerings."
2479. Campbell, Marie. Tales from the cloud
walking country. Illustrated by Clare
Leighton. Bloomington, Indiana University Press
[1958] 270 p. 58—12212 GRno.K.4C3
Bibliography: p. 267—270.
Seventy-eight tales from the oral tradition of the
eastern Kentucky mountains. Narrated by six
"right main tale-tellers" who had a "fine sleight at
tale-telling," the items consist largely of what the
layman would call fairytales, even though few of
them are about fairies. All of them came originally
"from across the ocean waters" and were brought
to Kentucky by "our foreparents way back in time."
The author collected these materials, using a self-
devised system of shorthand, while teaching school
among the rural people in the 1920'$ and i93o's.
Up Cutshin and Down Greasy; Folkways of a Ken-
tuc\y family ( [Lexington] University of Kentucky
Press [1959] 165 p.), by Leonard W. Roberts,
is the history of Jim Couch and his relatives, with
one chapter consisting of their typical stories and
songs.
2480. Dorson, Richard M., ed. Negro tales from
Pine Bluff, Arkansas, and Calvin, Michigan.
Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1958. xviii,
292 p. (Indiana University publications. Folklore
series, no. 12) 58—63484 GRio8.D6
Bibliography: p. 289-292. Includes bibliographi-
cal references.
The editor has explored in two directions the
"incomparably rich" narrative lore of the Southern
Negro. Approximately half of the materials came
from a single outstanding storyteller, James D.
Suggs. Although Suggs had grown up in Missis-
sippi, he lived in Michigan at the time his stories
were recorded. The other half of the contributions
were collected from a number of narrators on a field
trip to a Negro community in southeastern Arkan-
sas. Dorson calls special attention to a small group
of "protest tales" which correspond to the better
known genre, "protest songs." These were solicited
from a man of mixed heritage (Indian and Negro),
who aroused some uneasiness in his own commu-
nity because — in Dorson's words — "his stream of
anecdotes sidestepped the conventional plots about
Brother Rabbit and Old Marster, to center on the
racial situation."
2481. Duke University, Durham, N.C. Library.
Franf^ C. Brown Collection of North Caro-
lina Folklore. The Frank C. Brown Collection of
North Carolina Folklore; the folklore of North
Carolina, collected by Dr. Frank C. Brown during
the years 1912 to 1943, in collaboration with the
North Carolina Folklore Society. General editor:
Newman Ivey White; associate editors: Henry M.
Pelden [and others]. Wood engravings by Clare
Leighton. Durham, N.C., Duke University Press
[1952—64] 7 v. illus., music. (Duke University
publications).
Includes bibliographies.
CONTENTS. — v. i. Games and rhymes. Beliefs
and customs. Riddles. Proverbs. Speech. Tales and
legends. — v. 2. Folk ballads from North Carolina.
— v. 3. Folk songs from North Carolina. — v. 4.
The music of the ballads. — v. 5. The music of the
folk songs. — v. 6—7. Popular beliefs and supersti-
tions from North Carolina.
52-10967 GRno.N8D8
With the publication of volumes 5—7, this collec-
tion, entered as no. 5536 in the 1960 Guide, is
complete. Volumes 6 and 7, edited by Wayland
D. Hand, are now the published model for the
arrangement of American folk beliefs. Another
major regional collection that follows the same ar-
rangement is Ray B. Browne's Popular Beliefs and
Practices From Alabama (Berkeley, University of
California Press, 1958. 271 p. University of Cali-
fornia publications. Folklore studies, 9).
2482. Hyatt, Harry M. Folk-lore from Adams
County, Illinois. 2d and rev. ed. [n.p.]
1965. 920 p. (Memoirs of the Alma Egan Hyatt
Foundation) 66-6468 GRno.l3H9 1965
The author interviewed his informants personally
and sought to obtain stories based on real experi-
ences rather than unsupported statements. Al-
though the text of the first edition, Folklore From
Adams County, Illinois, is enhanced by an extensive
index, the second edition has no index at all. Hyatt
points out that "one very special treasure of this
book, probably the only one in existence," is a
picture of a "Witch Wreath." Found in a child's
37° / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
cradle pillow, the wreath consisted of feathers set
in skin resembling a chicken breast and allegedly
nourishing the feathers so that they grew in size.
2483. Korson, George G. Black rock; mining
folklore of the Pennsylvania Dutch. Balti-
more, Johns Hopkins Press [1960] 453 p.
60-16892 GR900.K65
"Folk songs and ballads": p. 348—402. Biblio-
graphical references included in "Source notes" (p.
403-436).
Contrary to popular belief, the Pennsylvania
Dutch played a dominant role in the development
of the anthracite coal industry in the second half
of the 1 9th century. This survey of the miners
living in western Schuylkill County, Pa., portrays
an agricultural people adjusting to an industrial en-
vironment. The author was one of the first folk-
lorists to recognize the richness of the industrial
community's lore and tradition. After tracing the
geographical settlement and economic history of
the Pennsylvania Dutch in the region, he concen-
trates on daily activities as reflected through folk
habits in speech, medicine, games, cooking, religion,
tales, and a collection of songs and ballads. Here,
as throughout his field research and writing, Kor-
son emphasizes the intrinsic worth of the people
among whom he works and the rewards of winning
their confidence.
2484. Pound, Louise. Nebraska folklore. Lin-
coln, University of Nebraska Press, 1959.
243 p. 59-9868 GRno.N2P6
Scholar and athlete, the first woman president of
the Modern Language Association of America and
the first woman elected to the Nebraska Sports Hall
of Fame, the author was a professor at the Univer-
sity of Nebraska for 50 years and a recognized
authority in the field of folklore. Shortly before
her death in 1958, she prepared for publication this
collection of her writings on the folklore of her
home State. Included are selections on cave lore,
snake lore, and rain lore, as well as legends, hoaxes,
and folk customs. Three scholarly papers read by
the author at professional conferences are appended.
Kansas Folklore (Lincoln, University of Nebraska
Press, 1961. 251 p.), edited by Samuel J. Sackett
and William E. Koch, comes from a quantity of
lore, "identifiably Kansan," created within the
State's borders and revealing the nature of its land
and people.
2485. Randolph, Vance, ed. Sticks in the knap-
sack, and other Ozark folk tales. With notes
by Ernest W. Baughman. Illustrated by Glen
Rounds. New York, Columbia University Press,
1958. 171 p. 58-13670 GRno.M77R28 1958
Bibliography: p. 167—171.
2486. Randolph, Vance, ed. Hot springs and hell;
and other folk jests and anecdotes from the
Ozarks. Illustrated by William Cechak. Hatboro,
Pa., Folklore Associates, 1965. xxviii, 297 p.
65-26776 GRno.M77R274
Bibliography: p. 281—297.
"The Ozark Mountain region is a strange land,
and few outsiders know anything about it," Ran-
dolph asserts in the introduction to Sticks in the
Knapsac\. "The people who live in the Ozarks are
not like country folk elsewhere, and city dwellers
do not understand them." One of the differences
is in the use of leisure time, which is apparently
abundant for the backwoodsman. "When a city
slicker takes a holiday, he goes somewhere and does
something strenuous or debilitating. But the Ozark-
er just sits down, and talks with his neighbors.
He likes to crack old jokes and tell old stories."
These two books are composed of gleanings from
45 years of listening by the editor. At various times
he collected with the use of a pen or pencil, a stenog-
rapher, or recording equipment. Whatever the
method of collection, he attempts here to reproduce
each story essentially as it was told to him. He
leaves the idiom and the stylistic flaws and retains
sexual or scatological terms. He often cuts out
profanity, however, and he omits some stories that
he regards as unprintable without a censorship that
would ruin them.
2487. Wyld, Lionel D. Low bridge! Folklore
and the Erie Canal. [Syracuse, N.Y.]
Syracuse University Press, 1962. 212 p.
62—10627 Fi27.E5W9
Bibliographical notes: p. 182—206.
The Erie Canal, or "Clinton's ditch," is an inland
waterway 360 miles long, connecting the Hudson
River with Lake Erie. Since its construction early
in the i9th century, it has contributed directly to
the development of the region through which it
passes and to the growth of Buffalo, Albany, and
New York City. By 1900 railroad competition had
caused a decline in the use of the canal, but it is still
in service today as a part of the New York State
Barge Canal System. This volume surveys the "cul-
tural mosaic" that the Erie Canal helped to create.
The social historian, the folklorist, and the general
reader will each find chapters of interest. Wyld
discusses the building of the canal, the way of life
that was generated upon it as well as along it, and
the vocabulary, the ballads, and the tales that it
evoked. He also examines at length the role of the
canal as a subject for stories, novels, stage plays,
and motion pictures.
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 371
C. Folksongs and Ballads: General
2488. Bronson, Bertrand H., ed. The traditional
tunes of the Child ballads; with their texts,
according to the extant records of Great Britain and
America. Princeton, N.J., Princeton University
Press, 1959-62. 2 v. 57—5468 ML.365o.B82
In The English and Scottish Popular Ballads
(mentioned in the annotation for no. 5550 in the
1960 Guide), Francis James Child included 350 bal-
lads which he believed to represent, as he wrote in an
unpublished introduction, "everything in the Eng-
l[ish] language that by the most liberal interpre-
tation could be called a popular ballad, and all the
known versions of such." Bronson has elected to
complement and supplement the Child ballads with
the musical record where text and tune have both
survived. His introduction is "designed to answer
questions about the name and nature of the under-
taking as a whole, to justify its purpose, account
for its limitations, and describe its manner of pro-
ceeding." Each ballad is allotted a chapter detail-
ing its history and listing variants with their sources.
These are followed by tunes and full texts. The
two volumes, containing 1,000 variants of 113 bal-
lads, parallel the materials in the first two of Child's
five volumes, and Bronson indicates his hopes for
finding support that will enable him to continue
rbr work.
2489. Burt, Olive W., ed. American murder bal-
lads and their stories. New York, Oxford
University Press, 1958. 272 p.
58-5382 ML355i.B93
Includes unaccompanied melodies.
The editor traces her interest in this subject to the
sad ballads that she heard in childhood from her
mother. Later, while a journalist, she became in-
terested in true crime stories. Their frequent refer-
ences to ballads gradually led her to study the folk-
lore of murder. This collection is the product of
20 years of hunting, listening, and copying. "Here
are only American songs, composed on the spot, in-
digenous to this country. They cover the entire
period of our history and the whole area of the
United States. They relate murders committed
from all sorts of motives." They are "the voice of
the people, speaking authoritatively upon one of
the tragic but very real aspects of our civilization."
2490. Coffin, Tristram P. The British traditional
ballad in North America. Rev. ed. Phila-
delphia, American Folklore Society, 1963. xvii, 186
p. (Publications of the American Folklore Society.
Bibliographical series, v. 2)
63-22 loi/MN ML3553.C6 1963
Bibliography: p. 173—182.
A revised edition of no. 5550 in the 1960 Guide.
2491. Courlander, Harold. Negro folk music,
U.S.A. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1963. 324 p. 63-i8oi9/MN ML3556.C7
Bibliography: p. [2991—301; Discography: p.
[3021-308.
The author examines Negro folk music as a
whole and searches for cultural continuity and for
relationships with other kinds of traditions. In his
opinion, Negro music is probably the largest body
of genuine folk music still alive in this country and
merits "an effort to see it in the round." The melo-
dies and words of 43 songs are included in a special
section at the end of the text. Courlander has also
compiled Negro Songs From Alabama, rev. and
enl. 2d ed. (New York, Oak Publications [1963!
in p.). Examples of recent Negro folk music are
included in We Shall Overcome! Songs of the
Southern Freedom Movement ( [New York] Oak
Publications [1963] 112 p.), compiled by Guy
and Candie Carawan.
2492. Harlow, Frederick P. Chanteying aboard
American ships. Barre, Mass., Barre Ga-
zette, 1962. 250 p. 62-9370 ML.355i.H28
Includes unaccompanied melodies.
"A chantey (pronounced 'Shanty') is a song sung
by sailors aboard ship while doing various kinds of
manual work of a heavy nature," the author ex-
plains. It is a combination of chant and song. A
"chanteyman" (or more commonly, "shantyman")
leads off with a solo for one or two lines, and the
crew members unite in a chorus. The author was
a sailor on a square rigger in the 1870'$, and he of-
fers here the chanteys he joined in singing as he
worked at chores on the ship. He warns that dif-
ferent versions of the words are common. No one
was required to adhere to tradition, and impromptu
rhyming was frequent. Some songs of the sea and
of whaling supplement the chanteys. Songs the
Whalemen Sang (Barre, Mass., Barre Publishers,
1964. 328 p.), edited by Gale Huntington, is a
collection gathered largely from the journals and
log books of the whalemen of southeastern Massa-
372 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
chusetts, which was once the center of the whaling
industry.
2493. Laws, George Malcolm. Native American
balladry, a descriptive study and a biblio-
graphical syllabus. Rev. ed. Philadelphia, Ameri-
can Folklore Society, 1964. xiv, 298 p. (Publica-
tions of the American Folklore Society. Biblio-
graphical and special series, v. i)
64— lyooy/MN ML.355i.L3 1964
Bibliography: p. 281—288.
A revised edition of no. 5556 in the 1960 Guide. A
Pioneer Songster; Texts From the Stevens-Douglass
Manuscript of Western New Yori(, 1841—1856
(Ithaca, N.Y., Cornell University Press [1958]
203 p.), edited by Harold W. Thompson, contains
British and American ballads sung in English in
the United States.
2494. Lomax, Alan, ed. The folk songs of North
America, in the English language. Melodies
and guitar chords transcribed by Peggy Seeger, with
one hundred piano arrangements by Matyas Seiber
and Don Banks. Illustrated by Michael Leonard.
Editorial assistant, Shirley Collins. Garden City,
N.Y., Doubleday [1960] 623 p.
M 60—1043 Mi629.L83F6 19603
Bibliography: p. 597—600. Discography: p. 608—
615.
"The intention of this volume is to put a choice
selection of our folk songs into their historical and
social setting so that they tell the story of the people
who made and sang them — to compose, in a word,
a folk history, or a history of the folk of America."
The editor maintains that folksongs provide out-
lets for unconscious fantasies and for wishes and
emotional conflicts too disturbing to be openly
stated. They can be taken as signposts of persistent
patterns of community emotion and can project
light into dark corners of both past and present.
An ideal folksong study could be a history of popu-
lar feeling, Lomax asserts, and in this volume he
tries to suggest what such a history could reveal.
2495. Nettl, Bruno. An introduction to folk music
in the United States. [Rev. ed. with index]
Detroit, Wayne State University Press, 1962. 126
p. (Waynebook, no. 7)
62-i6346/MN ML355I.N47 1962
Includes 32 unaccompanied melodies, some with
words.
Bibliographical aids: p. 118—122.
Folklorist Richard M. Dorson suggested the idea
for this book, which is intended to be different from
the many other books in the field in that it offers
an overall survey or summary of the subject in its
entirety. It does not pretend to be definitive or
comprehensive, or to present new material. Its pur-
pose is merely to introduce the layman to the great
variety of forms and cultures represented in the
folk music of this country. Although many song
types, instruments, and ethnic groups are omitted,
a glimpse into each of the large categories of folk
music is provided. The emphasis is on the music
itself; words are a secondary consideration.
2496. Oliver, Paul. Blues fell this morning; the
meaning of the blues. With a foreword by
Richard Wright. New York, Horizon Press [ 1 96 1 ,
"1960] 355 p. 61-14275 ML356i.J304 1961
An examination of 350 lyrics derived mainly from
the country and urban folk blues rather than from
either the hollers (work songs improvised on the
job) or the classic blues. In Conversation With the
Blues (New York, Horizon Press [1965] 217
p.), the same author describes an extended tour of
the United States during which he interviewed
blues singers and musicians. The Country Blues
(New York, Rinehart [1959] 288 p.), by Samuel
B. Charters, is a study of early blues singers and
their recordings and includes a discussion of the
marketing and sales of blues records. Both urban
and country blues with accompaniments for guitar
and banjo make up the contents of The Boof( of
the Blues (New York, Leeds Music Corp. [1963]
301 p.), edited by Kay Shirley and annotated by
Frank Driggs.
2497. Silber, Irwin, ed. Songs of the Civil War.
Piano and guitar arrangements by Jerry Sil-
verman. New York, Columbia University Press,
1960. 385 p. M 60—1027 Mi 637.8586
Selections arranged by such subjects as songs of
the Union and of the Confederacy, sentimental
songs, songs of battles and campaigns, and songs
the soldiers sang. Each song is documented, and its
historical background is discussed briefly. Nearly
all the numerous illustrations in the book are from
wood engravings by artists of the Civil War period.
2498. Wilgus, D. K. Anglo-American folksong
scholarship since 1898. New Brunswick,
N.J., Rutgers University Press, 1959. xx, 466 p.
59-7517 ML3553.W48
"A selected discography of folk music perform-
ances on long-playing records": p. [365]— 382.
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
[383]-4°7)- Bibliography: p. [4091-427.
"This is a history of British and American schol-
arship devoted to ballads and folksongs in Eng-
lish." Although the scholars themselves are dis-
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 373
cussed, their personalities are subordinated to their
work. The author maintains that although 20th-
century scholarship has emphasized the ballad in
the narrow sense, the entire field has been broad-
ened by an interest in folksong study. The song
and the singer, the performance and the function —
all have become subjects of investigation. Two
chapters of this history (approximately half of the
volume) are devoted to the prolonged controversy
over the question of whether or not the ballad is
more nearly the product of the entire society than
of an individual. The other two chapters deal re-
spectively with the collection and publication of
folksongs and the methodology of folksong scholar-
ship, past, present, and future. In an appendix the
author discusses the origins of the Negro spiritual
and concludes that it must be viewed as a hybrid, a
folk music derived from African tradition combined
with elements of the songs that the Negro heard in
the United States.
D. Folksongs and Ballads: Local
2499. Cazden, Norman, ed. The Abelard folk
song book; more than 101 ballads to sing.
Edited and arranged for piano and guitar. Illus-
trated by Abner Graboff. New York, Abelard
Schuman, Ci958. 2 pts. in i v. (127, 127 p.)
M 58-1011 Mi629.C28A2
Bibliography: [pt. i], p. 124-127; [pt. 2], p.
125—127.
The editor divides his offerings into "Songs for
Every Day" and "Songs for Saturday Night." Those
in the first group were collected in the Catskill
Mountain region of New York State and treat a
range of topics "as varied and comprehensive as
human activity and human sympathy." A few of
these songs are indigenous to the Catskills, but
many are found in variant forms in other parts of
the United States and have origins in the British
Isles. A large number of them have rarely been
published in their present form, however. Love
with its attendant sorrows and joys is the theme of
most of the "Songs for Saturday Night." There
are "suggestive, uninhibited, often lusty passages in
many of these songs, expressed through imagery
that is at once bold and subde." Complete accom-
paniments for piano or guitar are provided with all
the songs, and notes on original sources are supplied
at the end of each of the two groups.
2500. Davis, Arthur Kyle, ed. More traditional
ballads of Virginia; collected with the coop-
eration of members of the Virginia Folklore Society.
Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press
[1960] 371 p. 60-51689 ML.355i.D2M7
Includes melodies.
Bibliography: p. [3611—366.
Forty-six traditional or Child ballads selected from
a large body of folksong collected by the Virginia
Folklore Society and housed at the University of Vir-
ginia. Each of the ballads is prefaced by an essay re-
lating the variant texts and tunes to the total known
tradition of the ballad. Sources are cited for each
transcription. This scholarly study, including sig-
nificant fresh material, is written to appeal to the
amateur and general reader as well as the specialist.
Two earlier volumes compiled by Davis establish
editorial continuity and provide background. Tradi-
tional Ballads of Virginia (1929) is a selection of
51 Child ballads, 35 of which are represented in
More Traditional Ballads of Virginia with addition-
al texts and tunes. Folksongs of Virginia (1949)
is a checklist of the almost 3,200 items in the Uni-
versity of Virginia collection, with a brief history
of the collection and its classification system.
2501. Flanders, Helen Hartness, ed. Ancient bal-
lads traditionally sung in New England,
from the Helen Hartness Flanders ballad collection,
Middlebury College, Middlebury, Vt. Correlated
with the numbered Francis James Child collection.
Critical analyses by Tristram P. Coffin. Music an-
notations by Bruno Netd. Philadelphia, University
of Pennsylvania Press [1960—65] 4 v.
M 59—1030 Mi629.F58A5
These texts and tunes, some of which have ap-
peared in earlier publications compiled by the edi-
tor, have been gathered in New England since
1930. Preceding each ballad is a note on its sym-
bolism, its relationship to other ballads, and its
sources. For some items there are many textual
versions, several of which are very rare. Texts are
printed and tunes are noted exactly as the singers
rendered them. For each tune the structure,
rhythm, contour, and scale are given. The musical
annotations express the tunes' characteristics and
facilitate comparative work.
2502. Hubbard, Lester A., ed. Ballads and songs
from Utah. Music transcription by Kenly
374 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
W. Whitelock. Salt Lake City, University of Utah
Press, 1961. xxi, 475 p.
M 61—1720 Mi629-H86
Unaccompanied melodies.
Bibliography: p. 464—466.
The Mormon experience in Utah in the i9th cen-
tury was distinctive. The practice of polygamy, al-
though relatively limited in time and extent, in-
spired the creation of such gently humorous songs
as "The Cohabs" and "In the Mormon Beds Out
West," as well as many that were not — in the lan-
guage of one source used for this compilation —
"nice." Forty-six of the 250 pieces selected from
the Hubbard collection for this volume are grouped
together under the heading, "Utah and the Mor-
mons." The remainder, imported from outside the
State, are similar to songs collected elsewhere in the
United States and are arranged in such familiar
categories as "Love and Courtship," "Youth and
Childhood," and "Domestic Relations."
2503. Ives, Edward D. Larry Gorman: the man
who made the songs. Bloomington, Indiana
University Press, 1964. xv, 225 p.
64— 63000/MN ML4 1 0.0645 I 9
Bibliography: p. 213—217. Bibliographical foot-
notes.
A biography of a folk composer and poet of the
northeastern woods. Gorman was a farmer, fisher-
man, woodsman, river driver, and millhand, "an
angular cantankerous individual who lived his lone-
ly life, dying as obscurely as he was born." But as
a writer and singer of satirical songs, he made men
laugh. His songs reflected the traditions and liv-
ing patterns of his fellow immigrants: the farmers,
fishermen, and woodsmen of Prince Edward Island,
New Brunswick, and Maine. This is a study of
his songs "in the context of his life," designed to
"shed some light on the creation of folksongs in
general and the relation of the individual song-
maker to his tradition." The author describes Gor-
man's compositions and the people who inspired
them and relates the whole of his work to Anglo-
American traditions of satirical song. All his ex-
tant songs and poems are included, with sources for
tunes, texts, and variants.
2504. Moore, Ethel, and Chauncey O. Moore,
comps. Ballads and folk songs of the South-
west: more than 600 titles, melodies, and texts col-
lected in Oklahoma. Norman, University of Okla-
homa Press [1964] xv, 414 p.
64— H329/M Mi629.M84B3
Bibliography: p. 393—396.
In the southwestern States, "a happy and tolerant
blend of peoples from the North, South, East, and
West" were assimilated into "an essentially West-
ern tradition." With the mingling of dissimilar
peoples occurred a cross-fertilization of folksongs.
A different type of music, "at once varied and demo-
cratic," was created, and new life was infused into
old songs. Words such as "lord" and "lady" were
replaced by "young" and "fair." Local place names
and personal names were substituted for traditional
ones. The Moores built their collection, from which
the pieces in this volume were selected, by a door-to-
door search over a period of 25 years, largely in the
city of Tulsa, where they lived.
2505. Paredes, Americo. "With his pistol in his
hand," a border ballad and its hero. Austin,
University of Texas Press [1958] 262 p.
58-10853 PQ7297.AiC63
Bibliography: p. 251—258.
The "corrido," or Mexican narrative folksong of
epic theme, evolved from the Spanish "romance,"
influenced by the Scottish medieval border ballad.
It depicted a story of resistance rather than of mili-
tary victory. In 1901 Gregorio Cortez killed a
sheriff under circumstances that a jury later agreed
had been self-defense, but in the intervening period
he was a fugitive who killed again in order to elude
unsympathetic "gringo" justice. The first half of
this book discusses the life of Cortez in fact and
legend. It also offers a study of relations between
English-speaking Texans and Texans of Spanish
origin in the isolated communities along the lower
border of the Rio Grande. The author then pro-
ceeds to a comprehensive treatment of the border
ballad form in general and of "El Corrido de
Gregorio Cortez" in detail. He traces the ballad's
origins, imagery, structure, and versification and
supplies textual variations in both Spanish and
English.
2506. Yoder, Don. Pennsylvania spirituals. Lan-
caster, Pennsylvania Folklife Society, 1961.
528 p. 62—13444 ML3555.Y6
Bibliography: p. 483—498.
"Much of what we call Pennsylvania Dutch folk-
culture is not a transplantation of Continental Euro-
pean practices onto Pennslyvania soil, but a new
American production shaped by acculturation with
the Scotch-Irish and English Quaker neighbors who
lived beside the Dutchman in i8th and i9th Cen-
tury America. That in brief is the theme of this
book." The chief emphasis is on a neglected re-
ligious pattern, that of the "Bush-Meeting Dutch."
"Bush-meeting" is an early Pennsylvania synonym
for "camp-meeting." "Bush-Meeting Religion" re-
fers to a family of revivalist sects that arose in the
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 375
State at the time of the Second Awakening. In-
fluenced by early American Methodism, these new
native sects began with the United Brethren, the
Evangelicals, and the Church of God. Yoder offers
150 song texts, with brief editorial notes. In addi-
tion he presents five chapters on the Pennsylvania
spiritual and the type of religion that produced it;
two chapters on sources and bibliography for the
specialist; and two more on the themes of the spiri-
tuals and their diffusion among other groups.
E. Folk Art and Crafts
2507. Christensen, Erwin O. American crafts and
folk arts. Washington, R. B. Luce [1964]
90 p. illus. (America today series, no. 4)
64-19601 NK805.C48
Bibliography: p. 88—90.
In this brief introductory guide, "crafts" and
"folk arts" are deliberately used in a loose sense.
Often both may be applied to a single object.
Pennsylvania German pottery, for example, is both
craft and folk art. The author states that although
the only native "American art" is that of the Indian,
today the expression ordinarily refers to the art de-
veloped by the European settlers and their descen-
dants. The modern meaning is the one followed
here. One chapter is on the art of the American
Indian; the rest of the chapters concentrate on the
white society. The chronological picture is sketched
in chapters on crafts of the colonial period, primi-
tive painters, and popular art in the i9th century.
Topical themes include "The American Eagle,"
"European Folk Art Transplanted," and "The
Handicraft Movement and Today's Leisure-Time
Craftsmen."
2508. Espinosa, Jose E. Saints in the valleys;
Christian sacred images in the history, life,
and folk art of Spanish New Mexico. [Albuquer-
que] University of New Mexico Press, 1960. 122
p. illus. 60-5656 N79IO.N6E8
Bibliography: p. 101—107.
In early New Mexico a sacred image was referred
to by the generic name "santo." A santo could take
any of several forms. It could be a figure carved
in the round from pine or cottonwood, a modeled
bas-relief, a flat painting on a pine panel, or a
group of such objects used as an altar screen. The
folk artists who created santos were "santeros,"
white men who adapted European and Mexican
religious art to the new environment. The golden
age of santo-making was approximately 1795 to
1860. After that time the art declined, fading out
completely in the last decade of the igth century.
Espinosa traces the santo and its place in New Mexi-
can life from the landing of Cortez on the coast of
Mexico in 1519 to the present. Forty-six black-and-
white illustrations of santos are included. Popular
Arts of Colonial New Mexico (Santa Fe, Museum
of International Folk Art, 1959. 51 p.), by Eliza-
beth B. W. Hall — writing under the pseudonym
of E. Boyd — is a brief survey, illustrated partly in
color.
2509. Stoudt, John J. Early Pennsylvania arts and
crafts. New York, A. S. Barnes [1964]
364 p. 64—21360 NK835.P4S72
An interpretive study of the period from the end
of the 1 7th century to the middle of the i9th, dur-
ing which, in the author's opinion, Pennsylvania
was the cultural center of the United States. The
distinction between folk arts and fine arts was re-
lated to the cultural, spiritual, geographic, and
economic differences between the Piedmont, home
of the "plain" Pennsylvania Dutch, and the Tide-
water, inhabited by Quakers who soon reflected
European elegance. Pennsylvania folk art came
from the hands of experienced craftsmen with a
religious point of view. Faced by a new environ-
ment, they produced imaginative and sophisticated
architectural structures, furniture, works of art, as-
sorted handicrafts, and illuminated manuscripts,
which Stoudt describes in turn. He views these
creations as "keys which unlock the spirit of those
who made them and of those who have used them."
Large in format, the volume is lavishly illustrated.
2510. Whaling Museum Society, Cold Spring Har-
bor, N.Y. Scrimshaw; folk art of the whal-
ers. Text by Walter K. Earle, curator. Illustra-
tions by Jane Davenport (Mrs. Jas. A. de Tomasi),
assistant curator. Cold Spring Harbor [1957]
36 p. 59-471 NK5903.W47
"Scrimshaw" is the name Yankee whalemen cre-
ated for the items they made at sea, mostly with a
jackknife. "Scrimshawing" provided diversion and
entertainment in the long and monotonous hours
when there was nothing to do. It was an art prac-
ticed only by sailors engaged in whaling. Similar
products are made today by Eskimos and Aleutian
376 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Indians, and others are machine-made in the United scarcity of literature on the subject, the Whaling
States and Europe; readily distinguishable from Museum Society offers this very short review of the
scrimshaw, the modern products are "beautiful and birth of scrimshaw and the nature of the art, illus-
in good demand although lacking the inherent trated with drawings of pieces in the museum at
charm" of the whalemen's art. Because of the Cold Spring Harbor.
XXV
Music
A. General Histories and Reference Worlds
B. Contemporary Surveys and Special Topics
C. Localities
D. Religious Music
E. Popular Music
F. Jazz
G. Orchestras and Bands
H. Opera
I. Choirs
]. Music Education
K. Individual Musicians
2511—2516
2517—2521
2522—2523
2524
2525-2530
2531-2534
2535
2536-2540
2541
2542-2543
2544-2546
THIS chapter's section on popular music is proportionately twice as large as its counter-
part in the 1960 Guide. In contrast, the respective sections on orchestras and bands
and on choirs are conspicuously smaller. These differences may reflect changing interests
in the society. No shift in public interest in music, however, accounts for this chapter's
proportionately small section on individual musicians. The section is open to works on
any person in any area of music, but the publications appropriate for inclusion are limited
to an autobiography of a jazz musician, a biog-
raphy of an opera singer, and a biography of a
composer-critic. Although semibiographical works
are entered in other sections, the contents of this
chapter clearly reveal that few eminent people
in the field of music, for whatever reasons, attracted
scholarly biographers in this period, and fewer
still published full, candid, and perceptive auto-
biographies.
A. General Histories and Reference Works
2511. Howard, John T. Our American music; a
comprehensive history from 1620 to the pres-
ent. 4th ed. New York, Crowell [1965] xxii, 944
p. illus. 65-i8697/MN ML,2oo.H8 1965
"Bibliography, rev. and brought up to date (1964)
by Karl Kroeger": p. 769—845.
A revised edition of no. 5607 in the 1960 Guide.
The author has also written, in collaboration with
George K. Bellows, A Short History of Music in
America (New York, Crowell [1957] 470 p.).
2512. Lowens, Irving. Music and musicians in
early America. New York, Norton [1964]
328 p. illus. 64— i75i8/MN ML2OO.L7
"A check-list of writings about music in the peri-
odicals of American transcendentalism (1835—50)":
p. 311-321.
The chief music critic for the Washington Eve-
ning Star has selected from his previous writings 18
scholarly but easily read articles on the history of
music in the United States, with emphasis on the
period to 1850. Some of the original articles were
377
378 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
revised and updated by the author for this compila-
tion. Lowens discusses such musical events as the
publication of John Tuft's Introduction to the Sing-
ing of Psalm-Tunes (1721), the first American music
textbook; major musical figures, including Benjamin
Carr, Joseph Hewitt, and Louis Moreau Gottschalk;
and diverse philosophical topics, among which are
"American Democracy and American Music (1830—
1914)" and "Music and American Transcendental-
ism (1835—50)." Commentaries on music from
1861 to 1961 are collected in One Hundred Years of
Music in America (New York, G. Schirmer; dis-
tributor to the book trade: Grosset & Dunlap [1961]
322 p.), edited by Paul H. Lang.
2513. Mattfeld, Julius. Variety music cavalcade
1620—1961. A chronology of vocal and in-
strumental music popular in the United States.
Rev. ed. With an introduction by Abel Green.
Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall [1962] xxiii,
713 p. 62—16317 MLi28.V7M4 1962
2514. Shapiro, Nat, ed. Popular music; an anno-
tated index of American popular songs.
New York, Adrian Press [1964—65] 2 v.
64 — 23761 /MN ML 120.11585
CONTENTS — v. i. 1950—59. — v. 2. 1940—49.
Two selective lists of popular music. Although
Variety Music Cavalcade includes very few composi-
tions for the years before 1800, it surveys virtually
the full period of American history. Following the
roster of each year's music, the concurrent political
and cultural events of major importance are noted.
Popular Music lists music titles chronologically by
year of publication or copyright and for each piece
shows its composer, lyricist, and publisher, as well as
its origin, such as motion picture or musical comedy.
Additional volumes for the years 1900—40 are
planned. Popular Music contains more entries per
year than does Variety Music Cavalcade; the latter
retains the usefulness of a comprehensive one-volume
work. A relatively brief reference to the identity
of more than 3,000 bestselling songs is Index to
Top-Hit Tunes, 1900-1950 (Boston, B. Humphries
[1962] 249 p.), compiled by John H. Chipman.
2515. Mellers, Wilfrid H. Music in a new found
land; themes and developments in the history
of American music. New York, Knopf, 1965
['1964] xv, 543 p. music.
64-i77o6/MN ML200.M44 19&5
Bibliography: p. [4501—451. Discography: p.
[4521-519.
"The nature of this book is accurately defined by
its sub-title — themes and developments in American
music." It is not an attempt at a comprehensive
history. Written by an English scholar and pub-
lished while he was a visiting professor at the Uni-
versity of Pittsburgh, it deals with comparatively
few composers, each of whom was chosen by avow-
edly arbitrary criteria. Representative chapters in-
clude "Realism and transcendentalism; Charles Ives
as American hero"; "Skyscraper and prairie: Aaron
Copland and the American isolation"; and "Orgy
and alienation: country blues, barrelhouse piano,
and piano rag."
2516. Wolfe, Richard J. Secular music in Amer-
ica, 1801—1825; a bibliography. Introduc-
tion by Carleton Sprague Smith. New York, The
New York Public Library, 1964. 3 v.
64— 25oo6/MN MLi2O.U5W57
A list of more than 10,000 compositions in alpha-
betical order by composer or arranger. The descrip-
tion of each entry includes "all title-page information
(or the caption title and imprint when a title-page
is absent), together with printed or supplied date of
publication, pagination, and size of the largest copy
encountered." If the music is known to be extant,
its present location in a library or private collection
is indicated; otherwise a contemporary announce-
ment of its publication is cited. Brief biographical
sketches of many of the composers are provided.
Volume 3 contains a general index as well as sep-
arate indexes of titles, first lines, publishers,
engravers, printers, and publishers' plate and publi-
cation numbering systems. Wolfe's compilation
supplements A Bibliography of Early Secular
American Music ( i8th Century), by Oscar George
Theodore Sonneck, revised and enlarged by William
Treat Upton (no. 5610 in the 1960 Guide}, and
contains an appendix listing items not recorded in
that work.
B. Contemporary Surveys and Special Topics
2517. Browne, Charles A. The story of our na-
tional ballads. Rev. by Willard A. Heaps.
New York, Cro well [1960! 314 p.
60—15255 ML355I.B88 1960
A revised edition of no. 5616 in the 1960 Guide.
2518. Read, Oliver, and Walter L. Welch. From
tin foil to stereo: evolution of the phono-
MUSIC / 379
graph. Indianapolis, H. W. Sams [1959] xvi,
524 p. illus. 59—15832 TS230I.P3R4
Bibliography: p. 495—502.
"No industrial development has had a more ro-
mantic past than the phonograph. Ingenuity, loyal-
ty, perseverance, and honesty have contended with
piracy, jealousy, rapacity, and treachery in many-
sided struggles for financial success." Thomas A.
Edison's original tinfoil phonograph was patented
in 1878. From this primitive beginning the authors
trace the evolution of the instrument and the history
of the industry that ultimately mass-produced it.
The story is "replete with strong and unusual per-
sonalities, intrigues, bitter litigation, corporate ma-
nipulations, and struggles for survival."
2519. Schickel, Richard. The world of Carnegie
Hall. New York, Messner ['1960] 438 p.
illus. 60—13802 ML200.8.N52C34
When the cornerstone of Carnegie Hall (then
known as Music Hall) was laid in 1890, Andrew
Carnegie expressed the hope that the building would
"intertwine itself with the history of our country."
Schickel reveals the extent to which Carnegie's hope
has been fulfilled. Blending anecdotes about debuts,
premieres, and lectures with references to social,
economic, and political trends, he places the "very
small world of Carnegie Hall" in perspective against
the "very large world" which has surrounded it. A
few of the many personages in the field of music
who appear in the book are Tchaikovsky, Paderew-
ski, Isadora Duncan, Yehudi Menuhin, Walter
Damrosch, Olin Downes, Fritz Kreisler, Arturo
Toscanini, and Leonard Bernstein. Among the
nonmusical performances described are Winston
Churchill's defense of Britain's role in the Boer War,
William Butler Yeats' plea for Irish independence,
and Clarence Harrow's ridicule of evolution and
prohibition.
2520. Wells, L. Jeanette. A history of the music
festival at Chautauqua Institution from 1874
to 1957. Washington, Catholic University of Amer-
ica Press, 1958. 310 p. A 58-6036 ML38.C53W4
"Selected bibliography": p. 300—304.
The Chautauqua Institution, known today for its
general educational program, was founded in 1874
as a summer institute for training Sunday school
teachers. There was little music other than group
singing that first year. The beginning of instruc-
tion in music in 1875 heralded the steady growth of
a music program. The Chautauqua School of
Music was organized in 1879. In 1906 a Music
Week for concerts and competitions was designated,
and in 1914 it was renamed Music Festival Week.
Concerts increased in number and variety. In 1957
the Chautauqua music season ran for 54 days with
more than 130 events, including operas, recitals,
and symphonic, chamber, and choral music. The
author discusses Chautauqua's music and reviews in
chronological order the significant episodes in the
history of the Nation's oldest continuous summer
music festival.
2521. Woodworth, George W. The world of
music. Cambridge, Mass., Belknap Press of
Harvard University Press, 1964. 207 p.
64-I3432/MN ML200.5-W65
Includes bibliographical footnotes.
"Music in our day is a vast subject. It is not
one subject, but many; not one field of activity, but
dozens. Music is an art, a science, a literature, one
of the humanities, and a field of learning. It is an
area of education from kindergarten to graduate
school, a craft, a business, an article of commerce.
It is bought and sold. It is a powerful tool of the
Madison Avenue advertiser, and it is an agent in
propaganda. It permeates our life." The modern
uses of music provoke the author into raising ques-
tions about its meaning to the people who make it
and those who hear it. Does it stimulate activity of
thought? Does it enlarge receptiveness to beauty?
Does it nurture humane feeling? An outgrowth of
lectures delivered at the Lowell Institute in Boston
during the spring of 1961, the book is directed
toward the amateur rather than the professional.
C Localities
2522. Reefer, Lubov B. Baltimore's music; the
haven of the American composer. Baltimore,
1962. xvii, 343 p.
62-53630/MN ML200.8.B 191^4
Bibliography: p. 298—312.
One of Baltimore's characteristics, manifest par-
ticularly in the period before the Civil War, was its
receptivity to all kinds of music. The city was "able
to strike a Golden Mean between the uplifting and
the pleasurable, the sacred and the profane, the
scholarly and the homely. There was a balance
between vocal and instrumental idioms, between
what expressed the common man and the indi-
vidual. Opera and oratorio, ditty and string quartet,
380 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
mature artist and prodigy — all peopled the scene
without dominating it." Of the numerous alien
influences, the strongest and longest lasting was
German. What "could have developed into a
strangle hold of German thought was aborted by
the indefatigable activity of Asger Hamerik," head
of the Peabody Institute. Hamerik encouraged
many American composers and arranged for the
performance of their works in Baltimore. Although
the author discusses music in Baltimore from colo-
nial times to the present, he concentrates on the
1 9th century, the period in which the city could
most appropriately be described as a "haven" for
native composers.
2523. Pichierri, Louis. Music in New Hampshire,
1623—1800. New York, Columbia Univer-
sity Press, 1960. 297 p. 60—13940 ML2OO.7.N4P5
Bibliography: p. [271]— 281.
New Hampshire was first setded in 1623. The
earliest sources indicating the presence of musical
instruments are dated 1633 and mention drums, re-
corders, and hautboys. Although the Colony ap-
parendy was never subjected to any Puritan restraints
on its musical life, development was slow and
documentary evidence is scarce. Delving into "un-
published wills, legal documents, letters, diaries,
contemporary newspapers, periodicals, and tune
books," the author collected his fragments of infor-
mation. In order to fill gaps, perceive relationships,
and gain perspectives, he turned to secondary
sources. In this probing study of music in one
American Colony, he strives primarily to present a
large body of data hitherto unknown or disregarded
by previous researchers, reserving critical examina-
tion of the music itself for a projected companion
volume.
D. Religious Music
2524. Barbour, James M. The church music of
William Billings. [East Lansing] Michigan
State University Press [1960] xvi, 167 p. music.
60—15105 ML,4io.B588B4
Bibliography: p. 159—163.
A tanner by trade, Billings (1756-1800), was
the "most important composer of the pioneer period
of American church music, the last third of the 1 8th
century." His first collection of hymns and an-
thems, The New England Psalm Singer, was pub-
lished in 1770. Five other collections followed.
The author of this study offers analytical chapters
entided "Texts," "Rhythm and Meter," "Melody,"
"Counterpoint and Harmony," "Modality and Ton-
ality," and "Texture and Form." He supplies
numerous examples from Billings' compositions and
also, for comparative purposes, from the composi-
tions of his American contemporaries and his Eng-
lish predecessors. Billings' critics have called him
musically illiterate. Barbour refutes this charge and
concludes that as a composer of church music,
Billings was superior both to other Americans of the
time and to the English composers whose works
were performed in iSth-century America.
E. Popular Music
2525. Dachs, David. Anything goes; the world
of popular music. Indianapolis, Bobbs-
Merrill [1964] 328 p. illus.
63— i8993/MN ML2OO.5.D32
The author views popular music today as a big,
money-hungry business. Sales promotion and sell-
ing techniques play a larger part than ever before,
and popularity is measured largely in terms of
sales of recordings. Dach's book is primarily about
the record business and how it functions. He deals
with all aspects — recording, distribution, and pro-
motion. Critical of both the music and the com-
merce, he bemoans the decline in esthetic standards,
a development that he attributes to the influence of
"hacks and puffed-up adolescents, teenage idols, and
their shrewd, calculating personal managers and
booking agencies."
2526. Ewen, David. Complete book of the Ameri-
can musical theater; a guide to more than
300 productions of the American musical theater
from The black crook (1866) to the present, with
plot, production history, stars, songs, composers,
MUSIC / 381
librettists, and lyricists. New York, Holt [1958]
xxvii, 447 p. illus. 58—11220 MLiyu.Ep
A reference book on musical productions. The
author's avowed purpose is twofold: "to satisfy
curiosity in regard to productions of the past about
which much still is said but litde remembered, and
to revive in theatergoers memories of enchanted
evenings." For each of 47 composers a brief
biography is provided, followed by information on
his most significant musicals, with plot summaries,
production histories, names of stars, principal songs
and writers, and numbers of performances. The
majority of the musicals were produced during the
2oth century. Other composers' works dating from
1866 to 1958 are discussed in an appendix. Also use-
ful for reference is The World of Musical Comedy;
the Story of the American Musical Stage As Told
Through the Careers of Its Foremost Composers
and Lyricists (New York, Grosset & Dunlap [1962]
397 p.), by Stanley Green.
2527. Ewen, David, ed. Popular American com-
posers from Revolutionary times to the pres-
ent; a biographical and critical guide. New York,
H. W. Wilson, 1962. 217 p. illus.
62—9024 ML39O.E845
A biographical directory ranging chronologically
from William Billings to Andre Previn and alpha-
betically from Richard Adler to Victor Young. The
representation of deceased composers is comprehen-
sive. In the case of those still living at the time of
publication — approximately one-third of the 130
included — the editor was necessarily selective. He
chose the ones, who in his opinion, were "of most
interest to most people by virtue of their success,
their productiveness, their contribution to our popu-
lar music." The majority of the sketches are
accompanied by a photograph, as well as references
to books or articles. A chronological list of com-
posers and an index of songs and other compositions
are included.
2528. Goldberg, Isaac. Tin Pan Alley; a chronicle
of American popular music. Introduction
by George Gershwin. With a supplement: From
sweet and swing to rock 'n' roll, by Edward Jab-
lonski. New York, Ungar ['1961] 371 p. illus.
60—53364 ML,28n.G65 1961
An updated edition of no. 5635 in the 1960 Guide.
2529. Mates, Julian. The American musical stage
before 1800. New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers
University Press [1962] 331 p. illus.
61—12409
Bibliography: p. 299—313.
Although The Elac\ Croo\ (1866) has often been
designated as the first American musical comedy,
Mates traces the lineage of the musical stage back to
The Archers (1796) and to many other entertain-
ments that were musical and closely related to the
theater. With The Archers as a focal point, he
reveals the beginning of a tradition of musical
drama in the i8th century. The Old American
Company, which put on the first performance of
The Archers at the John Street Theatre in New
York was "one of the two best acting companies
in the United States, and was composed of actors,
singers, and dancers renowned in England and
France as well as native-born Americans." The
orchestra "was composed of the best musicians of
the day and represented the culmination of efforts
to build a good, professional theatre band in
New York."
2530. Nathan, Hans. Dan Emmett and the rise
of early Negro minstrelsy. Norman, Uni-
versity of Oklahoma Press [1962] xiv, 496 p.
illus. 62-10769
Includes unaccompanied melodies.
"Bibliography of the works of D. D. Emmett":
p. 290—306; "Anthology" (principally melodies with
piano ace.): p. [311]— 491.
Many of the best-known songs, dances, and banjo
tunes of the mid-i9th century, including "Dixie,"
were composed by Daniel Decatur Emmett. The
son of a blacksmith in rural Ohio, he learned the
printer's trade but early abandoned it for a career
as an entertainer. For the rest of his active life he
made his living as a banjoist, fiddler, singer, and
comedian. His compositions are important in the
history of popular music and have intrinsic value
for "their hard-bitten humor, their naive freshness,
and their native flavor." He lived to be 88 years of
age and during the final decade depended for sup-
port upon a weekly stipend of five dollars from the
Actor's Fund of America. A simple, unassuming
man, he was nonetheless proud of his most famous
achievement; in signing his name he usually added
"author of Dixie." Nathan intermingles biography
with historical discussions and includes selections
from Emmett's works as well as from songs and
tunes of the time.
382 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
F. Jazz
2531. Blesh, Rudi, and Harriet G. Janis. They all
played ragtime; the true story of an Ameri-
can music, [ist rev. ed.] New York, Grove Press
[!959l 345 P- illus-
59-!3575 ML356i. 13649 1959
A revised edition of no. 5641 in the 1960 Guide.
2532. Feather, Leonard G. The encyclopedia of
jazz. Completely rev., enl. and brought up
to date. New York, Horizon Press, 1960. 527 p.
55—10774 ML356i.J3F39 1960
A revised edition of no. 5642 in the 1960 Guide,
containing new material as well as information
from the author's two yearbooks: The Encyclopedia
Yearboo^ of Jazz (New York, Horizon Press, 1956.
190 p.) and The New Yearboo^ of Jazz (New
York, Horizon Press, 1958. 187 p.).
2533. Leonard, Neil. Jazz and the white Ameri-
cans; the acceptance of a new art form.
[Chicago] University of Chicago Press [1962]
215 p. illus. 62—19626 ML356i.J3L46
Bibliography: p. 193—206.
In 1917, "phonograph records and a growing
number of bands introduced collectively improvised
jazz to the general public." Before long the new
music became a controversial issue. Many critics
called it distasteful and charged that it provoked
immoral behavior. In two decades, however, the
"mean of public opinion" had shifted from puzzle-
ment and dislike to tolerance and acceptance. Jazz
became respectable. It was taken into the "sanctums
of the concert hall and the conservatory." Books
were written about it. "A growing number of
Americans took pride in what some of them be-
lieved to be their country's greatest contribution to
the arts." Starting with the 19th-century back-
ground of the controversy, the author seeks to "illu-
minate the proper place of jazz both in American
life and in the world of art."
2534. Newton, Francis. The jazz scene. New
York, Monthly Review Press, 1960. 303 p.
illus. 60—8435 ML356i.J3N47
Bibliography: p. 296—298.
A British intellectual, critic for the New States-
man, offers a group of essays on an American
creation. His main object is "to survey the world
of jazz for the benefit of the intelligent layman,
who knows nothing about it, and perhaps also for
that of the expert who has hitherto overlooked
some of its non-technical corners." He observes,
however, that "it is impossible to look at jazz with
any sort of curiosity without trying to find out,
however crudely, how it fits into the general frame-
work of twentieth-century civilization." He renders
many judgments on the society that produced jazz,
the business that both sustains and is sustained by
it, the musicians from whom it emanates, the
people who are its public, and its reciprocal effects
on society.
G Orchestras and Bands
2535. Goldman, Richard Franko. The wind band,
its literature and technique. Boston, Allyn
& Bacon, 1961 ['1962] xvi, 286 p. illus.
62-8835 MLi3oo.G65
Bibliography: p. [2691—278.
Today there are nearly 30,000 bands of all types
in the United States. Until about 1925 bands were
formed largely by military units, municipalities, or
individual leaders. Since then, the sponsorship has
shifted largely to schools and colleges. The author
discusses the European origins of the modern band
and the history of band music in the United States.
An exrx*r: — -J conductor, he surveys the major
problems that bands encounter and offers sugges-
tions for coping with them. He also describes some
contemporary bands, including the concert band
founded by his father, Edwin Frarko Goldman.
MUSIC / 383
H. Opera
2536. Bloomfield, Arthur J. The San Francisco
Opera, 1923—1961. New York, Appleton-
Century-Crofts [1961] 250 p. illus.
61-16610 MLi7ii.8.S2B6
The San Francisco Opera has operated continu-
ously since its founding by Gaetano Merola in 1923.
Its record of achievement is long. It presented, for
example, the American premieres of Richard Strauss'
Die Frau Ohne Schatten, Maurice Ravel's L'Enjant
et les Sortileges, and William Turner Walton's
Troilus and Cressida. Renata Tebaldi and Richard
Lewis made their American debuts there. Leontyne
Price, Eileen Farrell, Mary Costa, and Elizabeth
Schwartzkopf have sung there often. The San
Francisco Opera now gives more performances each
year than any other company in the United States
outside New York. The author begins his story
with the organization's background and founding.
The significant events of each season, 1924—61, are
treated chronologically, year by year. Appendixes
list the company's complete repertoire and the entire
casts for all the San Francisco performances.
2537. Davis, Ronald L. A history of opera in the
American West. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,
Prentice-Hall [1965] 178 p. illus.
65-i2i68/MN MLi7iiX>4
Bibliographical footnotes.
A review of the development of opera in the West
that emphasizes Chicago, New Orleans, San Fran-
cisco, Dallas, Santa Fe, and Central City, Colo.
The author includes a brief discussion of the San
Antonio Opera Festival as representative of the
activities of small companies. New Orleans was the
site of the first opera performance in the United
States (circa 1793) and the home of the first Ameri-
can opera company. A regular feature of the city's
cultural life during the I9th century, opera declined
in significance with the rise of jazz. In the other
cities, opera appeared at a much later date. City by
city, Davis discusses the resident companies that de-
veloped and the traveling organizations that visited.
He concludes that the "American West, tradition-
ally the most culturally barren section of the coun-
try, has blossomed into a region frought with lyric
vitality."
2538. Eaton, Quaintance. The Boston Opera
Company. New York, Appleton-Century
[1965] xiv, 338 p. illus.
65— i
The Boston Opera Company, the city's first resi-
dent grand opera company, came into being in 1909
and lasted five seasons. During that time it pre-
sented Boston with grand opera that was long re-
membered. Among the leading divas were Nellie
Melba, Lillian Nordica, Emmy Destinn, and Mary
Garden, whose love scene with Vanni Marcoux in
the performance of Tosca was so passionate that the
city mayor issued instructions for restraint. In
May 1915 the company filed bankruptcy proceed-
ings. A revival under new management collapsed
early in its second year.
2539. Eaton, Quaintance. Opera caravan; adven-
tures of the Metropolitan on tour, 1883—
1956. New York, Farrar, Straus & Cudahy, 1957.
xv, 400 p. illus. 57—7116 MLi7ii.8.N3M425
The Metropolitan Opera House opened in Octo-
ber 1883 with Henry Eugene Abbey as the company
manager. The season was an artistic success but a
financial failure, as Abbey hired high-salaried sing-
ers for his elaborate and costly productions. Hoping
to recoup his losses, he took the company on tour.
Its first appearance away from home was in the
Boston Theatre, December 26, 1883. From 1883
through 1956, the Metropolitan went on tour an-
nually, with five exceptions. The tour of 1906
ended after the company experienced the earth-
quake in San Francisco. In 1910 came a successful
venture in Paris. This account, sponsored by the
Metropolitan Opera Guild, touches on the high
points of the company's travels and includes a
chronological list of tour casts, 1883—1956. The
Golden Horseshoe (New York, Viking Press
[1965] 319 p. A Studio book), by Frank Merk-
ling and others, is a pictorial history of the Metro-
politan Opera House.
2540. Graf, Herbert. Producing opera for Amer-
ica. Zurich, New York, Atlantis Books
[1961] 211 p. illus. 61—3898 MLi7oo.G75P7
"What is the place of opera in the cultural life of
the American community today, and by what meth-
ods can opera in America achieve artistic and
economic support?" In seeking answers to these
questions the author — for many years the stage
director for the Metropolitan Opera Company — first
turns to Europe, where opera originated. There it
384 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
is solidly entrenched in historic tradition; govern-
ments recognize and subsidize it as a cultural obli-
gation to the citizenry. In the United States, on
the other hand, opera has a very insecure artistic
and economic existence. It is not able to achieve
either a consistent artistic policy or modern stand-
ards of production. However, Graf offers reasons
for optimism. He describes new methods of spon-
sorship, a growing popularity of concert perform-
ances of operas, numerous projects for new theaters,
and the emergence of opera workshops, television
opera, and a wealth of operatic talent. "From these
foundations," he predicts, "opera in the United
States will rise and find its proper place in American
cultural life."
I. Choirs
2541. Johnson, Harold Earle. Hallelujah, amen!
The story of the Handel and Haydn Society
of Boston. Boston, B. Humphries [1965] 256 p.
illus. 65-1935 i/MN ML200.8.B7H34
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
244-248).
The Handel and Haydn Society "rests secure in
its status as America's oldest oratorio society."
Incorporated in 1816, it comprised, with few excep-
tions, tradesmen and musical amateurs. Member-
ship was then and has remained a male prerogative,
although women are permitted to sing in the
chorus. Discipline has been necessary to vitality
and quality. At intervals, indifferent members have
been suspended, and elderly members, suffering
from "impaired voice and musical ear," have re-
ceived tactful letters suggesting that they retire
from the chorus. Until comparatively recently, the
society retained choral works of the i8th and i9th
centuries as the staples of its repertoire. Within the
past few years, however, it has ventured to perform
contemporary music. The author was invited by
the society to write this "anecdotal history" for its
1 50th anniversary.
J. Music Education
2542. Bukofzer, Manfred F. The place of musi-
cology in American institutions of higher
learning. New York, Liberal Arts Press [1957]
52 p. 57-4920 ML3797.B8
Musicology, virtually unknown in the United States
in the early 1920*5, has developed in the intervening
years into a recognized field of study. Its ultimate
goal is "understanding." "Through understand-
ing, music becomes a more intense aesthetic experi-
ence with wider and richer associations, greater
sensual pleasure, and deepened spiritual satisfac-
tion." To obtain this understanding, the musicolo-
gist gathers all types of musical knowledge. He
tries to discover all the forms that music has taken
and sees each one as a manifestation of the human
mind. The author was a member of the Committee
on Musicology of the American Council of Learned
Societies and volunteered to write this brochure as
part of a series designed by the committee to ad-
vance the cause of musicology. The place for teach-
ing this relatively new discipline, he asserts, is the
graduate school, where the entering student should
have had a general education with courses in
language and history, as well as a broad orientation
in music and music history.
2543.
Riker, Charles C. The Eastman School of
Music, 1947-1962. Rochester, N.Y., Univer-
sity of Rochester, 1963. 1 19 p. illus.
49— 24I5/MN MT4.R6E247 Suppl.
A supplement to The Eastman School of Music;
Its First Quarter Century, 1921-1946, no. 5671 in
the 1960 Guide.
MUSIC / 385
K. Individual Musicians
2544. Bechet, Sidney. Treat it gentle. New York,
Hill & Wang [1960] 245 p. illus.
60—15935 ML.4I9.B23A3 19603
A jazz musician reminisces about his family, his
childhood in New Orleans, and his musical career.
Bechet (1897—1959) learned to play the clarinet as
a child and at 22 was an established virtuoso who
had performed in such cities as New Orleans, Chi-
cago, and New York. He went on tour to Europe
in 1919 and, over the next 30 years, alternated
between engagements there and in the United
States. For the last few years of his life he resided
in France and rarely left the continent. Among
the many musicians and singers who appear in his
story are Joe Oliver, Louis Armstrong, Clarence
Williams, Bessie Smith, and Duke Ellington. The
major portion of his highly imaginative autobiogra-
phy, including a romanticized account of the death
of Bechet's grandfather, was elicited from the author
by Joan Reid, who recorded his comments. She put
the material into writing, and he approved it. A
chronological catalog of every title known to have
been recorded by Bechet is included.
2545. Glackens, Ira. Yankee diva; Lillian Nordica
and the golden days of opera. With Lillian
Nordica's Hints to singers. New York, Coleridge
Press [1963] 366 p. illus.
63-22042/MN ML420.N733G6
Bibliography: p. 275—277. Discography: p. 292—
300.
Lillian Norton (1857—1914) of Farmington,
Maine, studied voice in the United States and went
to Europe to begin her career. She returned with
a reputation as an operatic soprano and the profes-
sional name of Nordica. After being acclaimed in
Milan, St. Petersburg, and Paris, she made her
American debut in 1883 at the New York Academy
of Music. Later she joined the Metropolitan Opera
Company and became especially noted for her
Wagnerian roles. Among opera singers born and
trained in the United States, Nordica was one of
the earliest to achieve world fame. In this biog-
raphy, the author traces the fortunes and misfor-
tunes of the girl who went from the New England
Conservatory of Music and Patrick C. Gilmore's
band to successive triumphs in the world's leading
opera houses.
2546. Hoover, Kathleen O., and John Cage.
Virgil Thomson: his life and music. New
York, T. Yoseloff [1959] 288 p. illus.
58—12144 ML4io.T452H6
Composer and critic, Thomson was born in 1896
in Kansas City, Mo., where he received his early
musical training. Subsequently he studied at Har-
vard, in Paris (with Nadia Boulanger), and in New
York. Having found the atmosphere of Paris con-
genial, he returned in 1925 and remained there for
much of the next 15 years. Friendship with
Gertrude Stein led to collaboration on Four Saints
in Three Acts, an opera which received its premiere
in Hartford, Conn., in 1934 with an all-Negro cast.
When Thomson returned to the United States in
1940, he joined the staff of the New Yor^ Herald
Tribune, and in the ensuing 14 years he distin-
guished himself as an adept, articulate, and contro-
versial music critic. He continued composing and
in 1949 received a Pulitzer Prize for his music for
the documentary film Louisiana Story. At the end
of the text of the biography is a list of Thomson's
compositions through 1957.
XXVI
Art and Architecture
A. The Arts
B. Architecture: General
C. Architecture: Special
D. Interiors
E. Sculpture
F. Painting
G. Painting: Individual Artists
H. Prints and Photographs
I. Decorative Arts
J. Museums
2547-2554
2561—2568
2569-2571
2572-2573
2574-2583
2584-2594
2597—2600
2601—2602
THE LARGE number of works appropriate for inclusion in Section A, The Arts, and Section
B, Architecture: General, help to offset the scarcity of publications suitable for such
specialized sections as those on sculpture, prints and photographs, and museums. Section H,
Prints and Photographs, consists merely of two works, each of which reproduces photographs
by a modern artist; the same section in the 1960 Guide emphasizes printmaking. Section J,
Museums, is limited to a history of the preservation movement and a guide to art museums
and galleries, in contrast to the same section in
the 1960 Guide, which is devoted largely to works
on individual museums. Although books on the
architecture of single cities were excluded from
the 1960 Guide, two such works have been included
here in Section C, Architecture: Special. Art and
History, Section K in the 1960 Guide, has been
omitted from this Supplement because of the lack
of books with a fitting blend of history and art or
a clear focus on history as revealed through works
of art.
A. The Arts
2547. Brown, Milton W. The story of the Armory
show, [n.p.] Joseph H. Hirshorn Founda-
tion; distributed by New York Graphic Society
[Greenwich, Conn., 1963] 320 p. illus.
63-13496 N50I5.A8B7
Bibliography: p. 303-306.
Originally planned as an exhibition of American
art, the Armory Show of 1913 was widened in scope
to include the best of the contemporary European
schools of painting. It thus became one of the most
influential art events ever held in the United States.
Crowds filling the New York Armory during the
386
month of the exhibition were exposed to the new
trends, and many American artists came away from
the European sections with new vision. Using re-
cently discovered records, the author wrote a de-
tailed history of the show, its organization, and its
results, to which he appends an amplified catalog
listing all the identifiable works in the exhibition, to-
gether with their prices in 1913 and their location
today. Much of this information was discovered by
the Munson-Williams-Proctor Institute in the course
of its research for a reconstruction of the Armory
show, which exhibited as many of the original en-
ART AND ARCHITECTURE
/ 38?
tries as could be assembled. The institute's catalog,
79/5 Armory Show; ^oth Anniversary Exhibition,
1963 ([Utica, 1963] 212 p.), includes colored as
well as black-and-white reproductions.
2548. Dunlap, William. History of the rise and
progress of the arts of design in the United
States. Introduction by William P. Campbell.
Newly edited by Alexander Wyckoff, incorporating
the notes and additions compiled by Frank W. Bay-
ley and Charles Goodspeed. [New ed., rev. and
enl. New York] B. Blom [1965] 3 v.
65—16236 N6505-D9 1965
Running title: History of the arts of design.
Bibliography: v. 3, p. 346—3776.
An updated edition of no. 5690 in the 1960 Guide.
2549. Larkin, Oliver W. Art and life in America.
Rev. and enl. ed. New York, Holt, Rine-
hart & Winston [1960] xvii, 559 p. illus.
60—6491 ^505.1^37 1960
"Bibliographical notes": p. 491—525.
An updated edition of no. 5693 in the 1960 Guide.
2550. Mendelowitz, Daniel M. A history of
American art. New York, Holt, Rinehart
& Winston [1960] 662 p. 60—10762 N6505.M4
Includes bibliography.
A basic factual text for the beginning art student
presupposing little knowledge of the visual arts.
The author begins his survey with Indian artifacts
and ornaments, then follows the development of art
from the colonial period to the present. He treats
painting, sculpture, architecture, and the decorative
arts, including furniture, metalwork, ceramics, glass,
and textiles. Nearly all the works discussed are il-
lustrated by small black-and-white photographs. In
1955, as an aid in art education, the Carnegie Corpo-
ration of New York provided the financial support
for compiling a collection of reproductions to repre-
sent American art in all phases; some 4,000 works
were selected for color photography, and the result-
ing slides are reproduced and cataloged in Arts of
the United States; a Pictorial Survey (New York,
McGraw-Hill [1960] 452 p.), edited by William
H. Pierson and Martha Davidson.
2551. New York. Museum of Modern Art. Amer-
icans 1963. Edited by Dorothy C. Miller,
with statements by the artists and others. Garden
City, N.Y., Distributed by Doubleday [1963] 112
p. illus. 63—17994 N65i2.N4i6
"Catalog of the exhibition, May 20 through Au-
gust 18, 1963": p. 106—112.
Since its founding in 1929, the Museum of Mod-
ern Art has periodically presented group exhibitions
of American painting and sculpture, featuring small
numbers of artists whose work is current and of
more than passing interest. Earlier exhibition cata-
logs in this series include Sixteen Americans (1959.
96 p.) and 12 Americans ( [1956] 95 p.), both ed-
ited by Dorothy C. Miller. The chief value of the
catalogs of the early shows lies in the wide range of
art represented. The latest catalogs, however, pro-
vide a survey of some of the newer and more contro-
versial art forms. Americans 1963 features the work
of 15 painters and sculptors, including the pop art
of James Rosenquist and Claes Oldenburg, the op
art of Richard Anuszkiewicz, the gray canvases of
Ad Reinhardt, and the welded steel and plaster
forms of Edward Higgins.
2552. New York Historical Society. Dictionary of
artists in America, 1564—1860, by George C.
Groce and David H. Wallace. New Haven, Yale
University Press, 1957. xxvii, 759 p.
57-6338 N6536.N4
A biographical dictionary arranged alphabetically.
The full name and dates and places of birth and
death of each artist are provided; the media in which
he customarily worked and subjects he most fre-
quently chose are identified; and the names of his
outstanding pupils, the dates and places of major ex-
hibitions of his creations, and, occasionally, the cur-
rent locations of representative works are supplied.
Each entry is documented, and an extensive "Key to
Sources" (p. 713— 759) is appended. Between 10,000
and 11,000 painters, draftsmen, sculptors, and print-
makers are listed. Architects are included only if
they also worked in one of the above artistic fields.
2553. Saarinen, Aline B. The proud possessors;
the lives, times, and tastes of some adventur-
ous American art collectors. New York, Random
House [1958] 423 p. illus. 58—9890 ^383.82
Includes bibliography.
Private art collectors in the United States have
done much to influence the development of Ameri-
can art. Most of the great collectors gratified their
personal tastes, but almost all were guided in their
selections by professionals in the art world. When
such a collector acquired a work of art, often its
value was enhanced and the reputation of the artist
was strengthened. The collectors functioned both
as tastemakers and benefactors of the public, for
most of the collections were eventually given to mu-
seums. Among the people whose lives and collec-
tions are discussed in this study are Mrs. Potter
Palmer, Isabella Steward Gardner, John G. Johnson,
the Stein family, John Quinn, Joseph H. Hirshhorn,
Electra Havemeyer Webb, and Peggy Guggenheim,
388 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
for each of whom "the collecting of art was a pri-
mary means of expression." The author describes
their artistic quests, their eccentricities, and their
contributions to the art world. In Art Collecting in
the United States of America; an Outline of a His-
tory (London, New York, Nelson [1964] 210 p.),
William G. Constable discusses deceased collectors
whose collections have passed into public hands.
2554. Whitney Museum of American Art, New
Yorf^, American art of our century [by]
Lloyd Goodrich, director, [and] John I. H. Baur,
associate director. New York, Praeger [1961]
309 p. 61—15642 N65I2.W46
A historical and critical analysis of American
painting and sculpture in the 20th century, based on
the collections in the Whitney Museum. Goodrich
deals with the period 1900—1939; Baur covers 1940—
60. All the significant schools of art are represented,
and the text is accompanied by numerous black-and-
white reproductions, as well as 81 color plates. Ap-
pendixes include a catalog of the 1,371 pieces in the
museum's collection and a list of the exhibitions
staged by the museum and its predecessors from
1941 to 1960.
B. Architecture: General
2555. Burchard, John E., and Albert Bush-Brown.
The architecture of America; a social and
cultural history. Boston, Little, Brown [1961]
595 p. illus. 61-5736 NA705.B8
Bibliography: p. [513]— 517.
This is a panoramic survey of the influence of
American geography, economic and social life, and
literary and artistic trends on the development of
distinctly American styles of architecture and engi-
neering. Commissioned as part of the centennial
celebration of the American Institute of Architects
in 1957, this study by two faculty members of the
Massachusetts Institute of Technology begins with
an essay on the nature of architecture, then describes
building and construction generally from 1600 to
the present. More than half of the book deals with
the last 85 years. Wayne Andrews' Architecture in
America; a Photographic History From the Colonial
Period to the Present (New York, Atheneum Pub-
lishers, 1960. 179 p.) is a brief pictorial survey.
2556. Fitch, James M. Architecture and the es-
thetics of plenty. New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1961. 304 p. illus.
61-8510 NA7O5-F53
The essays and lectures in this collection were
written over many years and cover such diverse top-
ics as the architectural ingenuity of Thomas Jeffer-
son, the esthetic concepts of Horatio Greenough, the
idealized architectural forms of Mies van der Rohe,
and the Gruen plan for the reconstruction of down-
town Fort Worth. A professor of history at the
Columbia University School of Architecture, the au-
thor is primarily concerned with the difficulty of
creating new architectural ideas and making them
effective in the United States, where material and
technical resources are abundant but where the citi-
zen is an "ignorant consumer," the designer is an
"isolated, powerless specialist," and both are con-
fronted with "properties, potentialities, and limita-
tions of almost stupefying complexity."
2557. Gowans, Alan. Images of American living;
four centuries of architecture and furniture
as cultural expression. Philadelphia, Lippincott
[1964] 498 p. illus. 63-17676 NA705-G6
A broad survey of American design from the first
settlement in Jamestown to the present. The au-
thor, chairman of the department of art and art his-
tory at the University of Delaware, maintains that
although most American architecture and furniture
was, until recently, based on European design, Amer-
ican craftsmen modified the original patterns to con-
form to native use and taste. These American
modifications provide tangible indications of the de-
velopment of American culture. This volume is not
encyclopedic; Gowans is interested in broad trends
and patterns. He describes the important architects,
the social and economic conditions which influenced
building forms, and the succession of styles which
dominated artistic thinking.
2558. McCallum, Ian R. M. Architecture U.S.A.
New York, Reinhold Pub. Corp. [1959]
216 p. 59—16224 NA7I2.M27
Bibliography: p. 213—216.
Largely because of the achievements of such men
as Wright, Mies van der Rohe, and Gropius, the
United States is in the forefront in the development
of contemporary architecture. The author, a British
architectural critic, maintains that "for the young
European architect an American Grand Tour is be-
ART AND ARCHITECTURE
/ 389
coming as important as the Italian was to the
eighteenth-century English gentleman." Addressing
himself primarily to architects outside the United
States, McCallum begins with a short historical essay
on the development of American architecture, then
discusses 33 architects from Sullivan, Wright, Mies,
Neutra, and Johnson to such lesser known figures as
A. Quincy Jones, Edward L. Barnes, and Ulrich
Franzen. Each architect is accorded a biographical
sketch, accompanied by numerous photographs with
explanatory notes. Other pictorial surveys of con-
temporary architecture include the American Insti-
tute of Architects' Mid-Century Architecture in
America (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press [1961]
254 p.), edited by Wolf Von Eckardt and listing the
institute's honor awards from 1949 to 1961, and The
Second Treasury of Contemporary Houses ( [New
York] F. W. Dodge Corp., Ci959. 216 p.), selected
by the editors of Architectural Record.
2559. Makers of contemporary architecture. [New
York, G. Braziller, 1962] 4 v.
The architects represented in this series are con-
temporary artistic or technical innovators whose
work has been watched with great interest but
whose place in the history of American architecture
had not been fixed at the time of publication. Each
volume consists of a critical essay followed by photo-
graphs, plans, and bibliographies. The volumes
which pertain to American architects are as follows:
Philip Johnson (127 p. 62—16264 NA737-J6J3), by
John M. Jacobus; R. Buc\minster fuller (127 p.
62-16263 NA737.F8M2), by John McHale; Louis
I. Kahn (127 p. 62-16265 ^^737X32838), by
Vincent J. Scully; and Eero Saarinen (127 p. 62—
16266 NA737.S28T4), by Allan Temko.
2560. The Masters of world architecture series.
Edited by William Alex. New York, G.
Braziller, 1960. 6 v.
Of the American architects in this series, only Sul-
livan and Wright were native born. The others
were naturalized citizens who, except for Neutra,
did considerable work in Europe before establishing
themselves in the United States. All, however, have
executed much of their finest work and have exer-
cised their greatest influence in this country. Each
volume consists of a critical essay, photographs,
plans, and a bibliography. The volumes on Ameri-
cans are as follows: Louis Sullivan (128 p. 60—
13306 NA737.S9B8), by Albert Bush-Brown;
Ludwig Mies van der Rohe (127 p. 60—6077
NAio88.M65E>7), by Arthur Drexler; Walter Gro-
pius (128 p. 60—13308 NAio88.G85F5), by James
M. Fitch; Richard Neutra (128 p. 60—13309
NA737-N4M3 19603), by Esther McCoy; Fran\
Lloyd Wright (125 p. 60-6075 NA737.W7S3),
by Vincent J. Scully; and Eric Mendelsohn (128 p.
60-14514 NAio88.M57V6), by Wolf Von Eckardt.
C. Architecture: Special
2561. Broderick, Robert C. Historic churches of
the United States. Drawings by Virginia
Broderick. New York, W. Funk [1958] 262 p.
58-7142 NA5205.B7
A study of notable church buildings currently in
use, ranging from early Spanish missions to recent
examples of contemporary architecture. The author
provides a brief history of each church, describes the
circumstances regarding its planning and construc-
tion, and notes unusual or especially beautiful
features. Photographs of many of the churches en-
hance the text. Intended for the general reader,
this survey contains little technical information. An
intensive study of a subject of more limited scope is
provided by Edmund W. Sinnott in Meetinghouse
&• Church in Early New England (New York, Mc-
Graw-Hill [1963] 243 p.); a "Check List of New
England Meetinghouses and Churches Built by 1830
and Still Standing" is appended. The Colonial
Houses of Worship in America, Built in the English
Colonies Before the Republic, i6oj—ij8<), and Still
Standing (New York, Hastings House [1964,
Cl9^3] 574 P-)» by Harold W. Rose, has numerous
photographs.
2562. Burnham, Alan, ed. New York landmarks;
a study & index of architecturally notable
structures in greater New York. Middletown,
Conn., Published under the auspices of the Munici-
pal Art Society of New York by the Wesleyan Uni-
versity Press [1963] 430 p.
63-17794 NA735.N5B8
Bibliography: p. 391—412.
A pictorial study based on the "Index of Architec-
turally Notable Structures in Greater New York"
compiled by the Committee on Historical Architec-
ture of the Municipal Art Society of New York.
Full-page photographs of 148 buildings (none later
than 1930) are presented, together with small maps
and short descriptive annotations. Chicago's Fa-
39O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
mous Buildings; a Photographic Guide to the City's
Architectural Landmarks and Other Notable Build-
ings ( [Chicago] University of Chicago Press [1965]
230 p.), edited by Arthur S. Siegel, contains photo-
graphs and plans of notable buildings selected by
the Commission on Architectural Landmarks of
Chicago, ranging from the oldest-known building
( 1836) still standing to the skyscrapers of the i96o's.
2563. Condit, Carl W. The Chicago school of ar-
chitecture; a history of commercial and
public building in the Chicago area, 1875—1925.
Chicago, University of Chicago Press [1964] xviii,
238 p. 196 illus. 64—13287 NA.735.C4C6 1964
Bibliography: p. 221-225.
A revised and greatly enlarged edition of the au-
thor's 1952 work, The Rise of the Skyscraper, no.
5705 in the 1960 Guide. Part of the new material
concerns the development of the second generation
of Chicago architects after World War I.
2564. Maass, John. The gingerbread age; a view
of Victorian America. New York, Rinehart
[1957] 212 p. 57—7370 NA7io.M3
Includes bibliography.
A sympathetic treatment of the Victorian architec-
ture which flourished between 1837 an<^ 1876. Di-
viding buildings into three distinct styles, Gothic,
Italianate, and Mansardic, the author maintains that
beneath the ornate decoration lay a strength of de-
sign and construction almost unknown today.
Drawings and photographs illustrate his thesis. A
prefatory chapter on manners, furnishings, and dress
reveals a close stylistic relationship between architec-
ture and other arts of the period.
2565. McCoy, Esther. Five California architects.
New York, Reinhold Pub. Corp. [1960]
200 p. illus. 60—10551 NA730.C2M3
Although California architects have worked in a
variety of styles, nearly all have been noted for a
natural and human approach, contrasting sharply
with the more austere designs of Mies van der Rohe
and Gropius. In this volume, the author discusses
the work of Bernard Maybeck, Irving Gill, Charles
and Henry Greene, and R. M. Schindler, all of
whom have died in recent years. Characterizing the
five as innovators who first conceived of many of the
principles and methods which are standard today,
she analyzes their most important structures and
their influence on contemporary styles.
2566. Pratt, Dorothy, and Richard Pratt. The
treasury of early American homes. New,
rev. and enl. ed. New York, Hawthorn Books
[1959] 144 p. col. illus. 59-12178 NA7205.P685
An updated edition of no. 5722 in the 1960 Guide.
The Second Treasury of Early American Homes
(New York, Hawthorn Books. 143 p.), by the
same authors, was also reissued in a revised and en-
larged form in 1959. Arnold Nicholson's American
Houses in History (New York, Viking Press
[1965] 260 p. A Studio book) reflects the rich and
varied heritage of the builders: Spaniards, English-
men, Dutchmen, Germans, and Swedes. Henry L.
Williams and Ottalie K. Williams present a popular
account in A Guide to Old American Houses, ijoo—
1900 (New York, A. S. Barnes [1962] 168 p.).
2567. Williamsburg architectural studies. [Wil-
liamsburg, Va., Colonial Williamsburg,
1958-60] 2 v. illus. 58-3504 NA.735.W5W47
CONTENTS. — v. i. The public buildings of Wil-
liamsburg, colonial capital of Virginia; an architec-
tural history, by Marcus Whiffen. — [v. 2] The
eighteenth-century houses of Williamsburg; a study
of architecture and building in the colonial capital
of Virginia, by Marcus Whiffen.
Studies prepared by the architectural historian of
Colonial Williamsburg and based on research con-
ducted for the restoration project. In volume one
the author concentrates on the construction of the
public buildings, their relation to contemporary Eng-
lish architecture, and their influence on architectural
design in Virginia. He briefly summarizes their
history from the time of the removal of the capital
to Richmond in 1780 to their reconstruction after
1928. Volume two is an examination of existing
houses on the basis of external evidence and build-
ing practices known to have been prevalent in Vir-
ginia at the time. Building materials, methods, and
design are discussed, and descriptions and pictures
of 32 of the restored houses are offered.
2568. Wright, Frank Lloyd. Writings and build-
ings. Selected by Edgar Kaufmann and Ben
Raeburn. [New York] Horizon Press [1960]
346 p. 60-8166 NA737.W7A48 19603
Considered by many as this country's greatest
modern architect, Wright (1869-1959) has been
the subject of numerous biographical and critical
surveys. This volume contains selections from his
many published writings, including An Autobiog-
raphy (1932), A Testament (1957), and various
articles and speeches revealing the development of
his ideas. Accompanying the text are photographs
of such notable buildings as the Coonley House, the
Imperial Hotel in Tokyo, the Price Tower, and the
Guggenheim Museum, a geographical list of struc-
tures completed between 1893 and 1959 and still
standing in 1960 (p. 333—346), and plans and
sketches for many unexecuted projects. Wright's
ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 391
Drawings for a Living Architecture (New York,
Published for the Bear Run Foundation and the
Edgar J. Kaufmann Charitable Foundation by Hori-
zon Press, 1959. 255 p.) features many reproduc-
tions in color. Franf( Lloyd Wright: [v. i] To
igio: The First Golden Age (New York, Reinhold
[1958] 227 p.), by Grant C. Manson, is the first
volume of a projected three-volume biography.
D. Interiors
2569. Boston. Museum of Fine Arts. American
furniture in the Museum of Fine Arts, Bos-
ton [by] Richard H. Randall. Boston [1965]
xvii, 276 p. 65—24149 NK.24o6.B65
A catalog of i7th- and iSth-century furniture
given to the Boston Museum of Fine Arts by col-
lectors and donors interested in preserving family
heirlooms. Each black-and-white plate is accom-
panied by detailed descriptive and historical notes.
Other volumes on various periods of American fur-
niture from the i7th through the i9th centuries are
Masterpieces of American Furniture, 1620—1840
(New York, Architectural Book Pub. Co. [1965]
256 p.), by Lester Margon; American Country Fur-
niture, Ij8o—i8j5 (New York, Crown [1965] 248
p.), by Ralph M. Kovel and Terry Kovel; and
American Furniture of the Nineteenth Century
(New York, Viking Press [1965] 229 p. A
Studio book), by Celia J. Otto.
2570.
Comstock, Helen. American furniture:
seventeenth, eighteenth, and nineteenth cen-
tury styles. New York, Viking Press [1962] 336
p. (A Studio book) 62-18074 NK24o6.C<58
Bibliography: p. 319— 324.
An introduction to American furniture design.
The author presents the various styles in relation to
their European backgrounds, pointing out local
variations and adaptations. She treats the Jacobean,
William and Mary, Queen Anne, Chippendale,
classical, and early Victorian styles in turn, con-
cluding with the 1870'$, when mechanization and
mass production became prevalent in the furniture
industry. Each chapter includes an introductory
essay, biographical sketches of the more important
cabinetmakers, a chart indicating principal woods,
techniques, and designs, and photographs. The
Cabinetmakers of America (Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1957. 252 p.), by Ethel H. Bjerkoe, is
a biographical dictionary of furniture craftsmen in
the i7th, i8th, and early i9th centuries.
2571. Iverson, Marion D. The American chair,
1630—1890. Illustrated by Ernest Donnelly.
New York, Hastings House ['1957] 241 p. illus.
57—11664 NK.27i5.I85
Bibliography: p. 231—232.
The author describes the most important types of
chairs, from the wainscot structures of the early
Puritans to the ornate pieces of the later i9th
century. Anecdotes about the owners of historic
chairs serve to relate chair design to the cultural
climate in which each style flourished. The Orna-
mented Chair: Its Development in America, I'joo—
1890 (Rutland, Vt., C. E. Tutde Co. [1960] 173
p.), edited by Zilla R. Lea, is a comprehensive pic-
torial history of decorated chairs, based on informa-
tion and pictures collected by Esther Stevens Brazer
before her death in 1945 and added to by seven
members of the Historical Society of Early Ameri-
can Decoration.
E. Sculpture
2572. New York. Metropolitan Museum of Art.
American sculpture; a catalogue of the col-
lection of the Metropolitan Museum of Art [by]
Albert Ten Eyck Gardner. Greenwich, Conn.,
Distributed by New York Graphic Society [1965]
192 p. illus. 65—10579 NB205.N38
A catalog of the Metropolitan's American sculp-
ture collection, which has grown to include 354
works by 176 artists since William B. Astor present-
ed the museum with its first piece of American
sculpture in 1872. The collection, treated in this
volume chronologically by the artists' year of birth,
is representative of sculptural trends during the I9th
and 20th centuries. The author provides a bio-
graphical sketch of each sculptor, a description of
each piece of sculpture, and lists of additional read-
392 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ings. The Literary Sculptors (Durham, N.C., Duke
University Press, 1965. 206 p.), by Margaret F.
Thorp, is a study of some of the American sculptors
who studied and worked in Rome between 1825
and 1875.
2573. Wright, Nathalia. Horatio Greenough, the
first American sculptor. Philadelphia, Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania Press [1963] 382 p. illus.
62-11261 NB237.G8W7
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
Greenough (1805—1852) was one of the first
American sculptors to receive national recognition.
Today his reputation rests on writings as art critic
and pamphleteer as well as on his works of art,
most of which consists of portrait busts done in the
classical style. One of his best-known portraits is
the half-draped sculpture of George Washington,
now in the Smithsonian Institution, which was com-
missioned through the influence of James Fenimore
Cooper. Avant-garde and traditional sculptures of
the 20th century are represented, respectively, in
William Zorach (New York, Published for the
Whitney Museum of American Art by Praeger,
1959. 116 p. Books that matter), by John I. H.
Baur, and Paul Manship (New York, Macmillan,
1957. 198 p.), by Edwin Murtha.
F. Painting
2574. 2574. Baur, John I. H., ed. New art in
America: fifty painters of the 20th century.
Greenwich, Conn., New York Graphic Society in
cooperation with Praeger, New York [1957] 280 p.
57-9100 ND2I2.B38
Biographical sketches and reproductions of repre-
sentative works of painters "who did the most" to
shape American art in the 2Oth century. The cover-
age extends from Sloan, Benton, and Wyeth and
their representational works to Pollock and De
Kooning and their abstract creations. One large
color plate and several small black-and-white repro-
ductions are provided for each artist. Morris Graves
(1956. 61 p.), Hans Hoftnann (1957. 66 p.), and
Arthur G. Dove (1958. 96 p.), written by Frederick
S. Wight and published in Berkeley by the Uni-
versity of California Press, and Arshile Gorky
([Ci962] 56 p.), Mar\ Tobey ([1962] 112 p.),
and Hans Hojmann ([1963] 64 p.), written by
William C. Seitz, published in New York by the
Museum of Modern Art, and distributed in Garden
City by Doubleday, are brief works issued on the
occasions of large one-man exhibitions.
2575. Belknap, Waldron P. American colonial
painting: materials for a history. Cam-
bridge, Mass., Belknap Press of Harvard University
Press, 1959. xxi, 377 p. 59-10313 NDi3ii.B39
Bibliography: p. 337-344.
At the time of his death in 1949, Belknap had
spent five years examining the works of painters
of the American Colonies and Bermuda in prepara-
tion for writing a history of colonial painting. This
volume contains some of his materials, which are
now in the collection of the Henry Francis du Pont
Winterthur Museum. Edited by the museum's li-
brarian, Charles Coleman Sellers, the selections in-
clude two previously published articles — "The Iden-
tity of Robert Feke" and "Feke and Smibert: Note
on Two Portraits" — as well as genealogical notes on
the New York portrait painters and diverse materials
on other painters and craftsmen and on such paint-
ing practices as the use of British mezzotints as
models for figures and backgrounds in portraiture.
2576. Boston. Museum of Fine Arts. M. & M.
Karolik collection of American water colors
& drawings, 1800— 1875. Boston, 1962. 2 v.
62—21319 N65io.B74
"Exhibition held . . . October 18, 1962-January 6,
1963."
Includes bibliographies.
From 1935 to 1962, Maxim and Martha Karolik
worked closely with the Boston Museum of Fine
Arts to assemble a collection of furniture, paintings,
and drawings representative of i8th- and igth-
century America. Eighteenth-Century American
Arts (1941), commemorating the achievements of
American artists and craftsmen, 1720—1820, and
M. and M. Karolif^ Collection of American Paint-
ings, 1815 to 1865 (no. 5745 in the 1960 Guide) are
catalogs of materials in the collection. This third
catalog lists about 1,500 of the 3,000 items in the
collection and includes works by academic artists,
foreign visitors, folk artists, and Civil War illustra-
tors. A few prints and statues are also listed. Each
item is described, biographical information about
the artist is supplied wherever possible, and a gen-
eral index and supplementary indexes are provided.
Numerous black-and-white reproductions and 24
color plates illustrate the text. Bartlett H. Hayes'
American Drawings (New York, Shorewood Pub-
lishers [1965] 141 p. Drawings of the masters)
is a survey of American compositions, with bio-
graphical notes on the artists, most of whom are
later than those in the Karolik collection.
2577. Flexner, James T. That wilder image; the
painting of America's native school from
Thomas Cole to Winslow Homer. Boston, Little,
Brown [1962] 407 p. illus.
62-16956 ND2IO.F6
"Selected bibliographies": p. 375—394.
The author surveyed the early years of American
painting in two previous works (no. 5750 and 5751
in the 1960 Guide). This volume is devoted to the
years 1825—1910, when American painting was rela-
tively uninfluenced by European ideas and methods.
Flexner begins with the romantic landscapes of
Thomas Cole and Asher B. Durand, includes such
genre painting as that of William Sidney Mount
and George Caleb Bingham as well as works of
artists who concentrated on Indians and the Far
West and those who belonged to the Hudson River
School, and ends with the naturalistic creations of
Winslow Homer. The text is accompanied by in
reproductions in black and white.
2578. Garbisch, Edgar W. 101 masterpieces of
American primitive painting, from the col-
lection of Edgar William & Bernice Chrysler Gar-
bisch. Foreword by James J. Rorimer. Preface by
John Walker. Introduction by Albert Ten Eyck
Gardner. New ed. [New York] American Fed-
eration of Arts; distributed by Doubleday [1962]
159 p. 64—6629 ND207.G-3 1962
The Garbisch collection of more than 2,000 pic-
tures is the most comprehensive collection of Ameri-
can primitive paintings in existence. This volume
is a catalog of an exhibition which was shown in
many of the major museums in the United States
from 1961 to 1964. The pictures were painted in the
1 8th and i9th centuries and range from the crude
efforts of unknown portrait painters to the relatively
polished work of Ralph Earl. Each painting is
reproduced in color, and biographical data is sup-
plied for 29 of the artists whose work is represented.
2579. The Great American artists series. New
York, G. Braziller, 1959. 6 v.
The volumes in this series are as follows: Albert
P. Ryder (128 p. 59-12227. ND237-R8G6) and
Winslow Homer (127 p. 59—12226. ND237-
H7G58), by Lloyd Goodrich; Stuart Davis (128 p.
59—12223. ND237.D333G6), by E. C. Goossen;
Willem de Kooning (128 p. 59—12224. ND237-
D334H4), by Thomas B. Hess; Jackson Pollocf^
(125 p. 59—12228. ND237-P73O4), by Frank
O'Hara; and Thomas Eafyns (127 p. 59—12225.
ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 393
ND237.Ei5P6), by Fairfield Porter. Each vol-
ume contains a critical essay on the artist and his
work, approximately 80 black-and-white or color
plates, a chronology of the painter's life, and a
selected bibliography.
2580. James, Henry. The painter's eye; notes and
essays on the pictorial arts. Selected and
edited with an introduction by John L. Sweeney.
London, R. Hart-Davis, 1956. 274 p. illus.
57-1066 N7445.J23
Includes bibliographies.
From 1868 to 1882 and in 1897, James contributed
essays on art to the Atlantic Monthly, Nation, New
Yor^ Tribune, Galaxy, Harper's Weekly, and other
serial publications. Thirty of these essays have
been collected and published together for the first
time. James was a painter during his early years
and studied with John La Farge. As an art critic,
he based his opinions of paintings on his "disposition
to enjoy them." These critical pieces discuss paint-
ers and exhibitions on both side of the Atlantic.
Included are comments on Whistler, Sargent,
Homer, Duveneck, and other American painters;
an account of the beginnings of the Metropolitan
Museum of Art; and reviews of several American
exhibitions. An appendix contains a list of James'
essays on art which were omitted from this volume.
2581. New York. Metropolitan Museum of Art.
American paintings; a catalogue of the col-
lection of the Metropolitan Museum of Art. v. i.
Painters born by 1819. [By] Albert Ten Eyck
Gardner [and] Stuart P. Feld. Greenwich, Conn.,
Distributed by New York Graphic Society [1965]
292 p. 65-16834 ND205.N364
Includes bibliographical references.
This first volume of a projected three-volume
catalog includes approximately 250 black-and-white
photographs of oil paintings by many masters and
a number of little-known or unidentified artists.
Wherever possible, each picture is accompanied by
a brief biography of the artist and historical and
technical information about the painting. Three
Hundred Years of American Painting (New York,
Time Inc., 1957. 318 p.), a popular history by
Alexander Eliot, art editor of Time, includes more
than 150 color reproductions and a guide to 100
permanent collections of American paintings.
2582. Nordness, Lee, ed. Arts: USA: now. Text
by Allen S. Weller. New York, Viking
Press [1963] 2 v. (475 p.) (A Studio book)
62—19607 ND2I2.N6
Convinced that American art critics and museums
have paid undue attention to "abstract expression-
ism" in the United States, Nordness set out to
394 / A GUIDE To ™E UNITED STATES
redress the balance by compiling a book that would
present a cross section of contemporary painting.
He interested S. C. Johnson & Son, Inc., in sponsor-
ing a traveling exhibition representative of the many
styles in modern American art. The works ob-
tained for the exhibition form the basis for this
study, which for each of 102 living artists (as of
April 1962) supplies a biographical sketch, photo-
graphs of the artist, small black-and-white repro-
ductions of some of his more important paintings,
and one large color reproduction.
2583. Richardson, Edgar P. Painting in America,
from 1502 to the present. New York,
Crowell [1965] 456 p. illus.
65-23777 ND205.R53 T9^5
Bibliography: p. 425—435.
An updated edition of no. 5756 in the 1960 Guide,
an updated and abridged edition of which has
been published under the title A Short History of
Painting in America; the Story of 450 Years (New
York, Crowell [1963] 348 p.).
G. Painting: Individual Artists
2584. [Bingham] McDermott, John F. George
Caleb Bingham, river portraitist. Norman,
University of Oklahoma Press LJ959] xxviii, 454 p.
59-13474 ND237.B59M3
Bibliography: p. 438—446.
Bingham (1811—1879) was one of the most im-
portant genre painters of the igth century. In this
extensively documented biography, the author, a
historian, debunks a number of legends about the
painter's early years. He describes the community
and surrounding countryside in which Bingham
grew up, offers a chronological narrative of his
painting career, and concludes with a critical analy-
sis of his work. The text is illustrated by 79 plates
and 112 sketches. A checklist of more than 350
of Bingham's paintings is appended.
2585. [Catlin] McCracken, Harold. George Cat-
lin and the old frontier. New York, Dial
Press, 1959. 216 p.
59-9434 ND237.C35M3 1959
Bibliography: p. [212]— 214.
Catlin (1796—1872) was the first artist of note to
travel widely among the Indians with the idea of
documenting their way of life. From 1830 to 1836,
often alone except for his horse, he journeyed from
the headwaters of the Mississippi to the far South-
west, producing colorful and detailed portraits of
Indians, collecting artifacts, and keeping a written
account of his experiences. Upon his return to the
East in 1836, he organized an unsuccessful Indian
Museum based on his collections. His paintings
and artifacts were ultimately donated to the Smith-
sonian Institution. This biography is illustrated
with many color and black-and-white reproductions
of Catlin's paintings. The Charles M. Russell Bool^;
the Life and Wor^ of the Cowboy Artist (Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1957. 236 p.), by the same
author, and Seth Eastman, Pictorial Historian of the
Indian (Norman, University of Oklahoma Press
[1961] 270 p.), by John F. McDermott, are biog-
raphies of other artists who painted people and
scenes of the West.
2586. [Feininger] Hess, Hans. Lyonel Feininger.
New York, Abrams [1961] xvi, 354 p.
61-9389 ND237.F33H43
Bibliography: p. 319—344.
Feininger (1871—1956) was born in New York
City but spent more than half his life in Germany,
where he first achieved prominence as a cartoonist
before turning to painting at the age of 39. From
1919 to 1932, he was associated with Walter Gropius
and the Bauhaus. He returned to the United States
to live in 1937. Feininger's paintings and drawings
are characterized by broken lines and repeated geo-
metric shapes related to early Cubism, Paul Klee's
fantasies, and Italian Futurist paintings. This study
by the director of the Museum of York, England, is
primarily an account of Feininger's artistic develop-
ment and an evaluation of his work. Twenty-eight
color and 72 black-and-white plates as well as
numerous small illustrations accompany the text.
An illustrated catalog of all of Feininger's known
paintings, prepared by his wife Julia, and a chrono-
logical list of exhibitions are appended. A more
detailed account of Feininger's career as a cartoonist
appears in Ernst Scheyer's Lyonel Feininger: Carica-
ture &• Fantasy (Detroit, Wayne State University
Press, 1964. 196 p.).
2587. [Glackens] Glackens, Ira. William Glack-
ens and the Ashcan group; the emergence
of realism in American art. New York, Crown
Publishers [1957] 267 p.
57-877: ND237.G5G55
In 1908, an exhibition at the Macbeth Galleries
brought to public attention the works of a group of
young American painters who diverged sharply
from the sentimental, anecdotal, and highly finished
style of the members of the National Academy.
Five of the "Eight" who exhibited — Robert Henri,
George Luks, Everett Shinn, John Sloan, and Wil-
liam Glackens (1870—1938) — were later known as
the "Ashcan School" (for their insistence on paint-
ing the realities of everyday life); and the paintings
of the other three — Arthur B. Davies, Ernest Law-
son, and Maurice Prendergast — deviated from the
prescribed forms in other ways. The friendship
which joined this group is warmly described in Ira
Glackens' account of his father and his father's
associates. Numerous drawings and photographs
of Glackens' family and friends, as well as some
reproductions of his work, accompany the text.
2588. [Gorky] Schwabacher, Ethel. Arshile
Gorky. With a preface by Lloyd Goodrich
and an introduction by Meyer Schapiro. New York,
Published for the Whitney Museum of American
Art by Macmillan, 1957. 159 p.
57—12946 ND237.G6i3S36
Bibliography: p. 153—155.
Gorky (1905—1948) was an Armenian who came
to America in 1920. Largely self-taught, he painted
in a succession of styles, following such modern
masters as Cezanne, Picasso, and Miro until, in the
1940*5, he developed his own distinctive form of
expression. After years of extreme poverty, he
seemed on the verge of receiving wide recognition
and financial security when he committed suicide
in 1948. The author was Gorky's pupil and friend
and based the biography on personal experience and
on the letters and memories of the artist's associates
and family. Eight illustrations in color and 70 in
black and white are included. Harold Rosenberg's
Arshile Gorfy: The Man, the Time, the Idea (New
York, Horizon Press [1962] 144 p.) is a blend
of biography and criticism.
2589. [Homer] Gardner, Albert Ten Eyck.
Winslow Homer, American artist: his world
and his work. New York, C. N. Potter [Ci96r]
262 p. 61—11762 ND237-H7G3
Bibliography: p. [235].
An enlargement of the author's introductory essay
in the catalog of the exhibition held by the National
Gallery of Art and the Metropolitan Museum of Art
in 1958 and 1959. Gardner, associate curator of
American art at the Metropolitan Museum, relates
Homer and his work to the main course of Ameri-
can cultural life and examines the artistic trends —
both American and foreign — which affected his art.
Special emphasis is placed on the influence of Japan-
ese art on Homer's sense of composition and design.
ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 395
The text is complemented by more than 200 illu-
strations in color as well as in black and white.
2590. [Prendergast] Rhys, Hedley H. Maurice
Prendergast, 1859—1924. Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1960. 156 p.
60-16756 ND237.P85R5
"Catalogue of the exhibition [October 26-Decem-
ber 4, 1960) prepared by Peter A. Wick": p. [65] —
1 08.
Bibliography: p. 64.
Largely unappreciated during his lifetime, Pren-
dergast was ultimately viewed by critics as this
country's first important postimpressionist. He was
one of the first American artists to emphasize artistic
form over subject matter, and his colorful pictures
of parties, promenades, and picnics serve as vehicles
for exquisite patterns of shape and color. This
small volume was prepared on the occasion of a
memorial exhibition, shown in various part of the
country in 1960 and 1961, and includes, in addition
to a long essay on the artist's life and work, a
catalog of the pictures exhibited. Most of these are
reproduced in color or in black and white. Sketches,
1899 ( [Boston, Museum of Fine Arts, 1960] 96 p.)
is a facsimile edition of one of Prendergast's
sketchbooks.
2591. Shahn, Ben. Paintings. Text by James
Thrall Soby. New York, G. Braziller, 1963.
144 p. 63-18187 ND237.S465S62
Bibliography: p. 139—144.
Shahn (b. 1898) was brought to the United
States from Lithuania when he was eight years old.
Employed in his youth as a lithographer's appren-
tice, he supported himself by this trade until he
was 30. When he turned to painting, this training
became evident in his attention to detail, sureness
of line, and love of lettering. In the beginning
Shahn saw his painting as a form of social protest,
and his first significant work was a series of gouache
paintings depicting the trial and execution of Sacco
and Vanzetti. During the depression and the early
forties, he was employed in painting murals, making
photographs, and designing posters for various Gov-
ernment agencies. After World War II, he pro-
duced many paintings and drawings notable for
their bitter reality and their compassion. This
volume contains 98 plates, many of which are in
color. Soby also wrote the text for Ben Shahn: His
Graphic Art (New York, G. Braziller, 1957. 139 p.)-
2592. [Stuart] Mount, Charles M. Gilbert Stuart,
a biography. New York, Norton [1964]
384 p. illus. 63-15881 ND237.S8M65
"The works of Gilbert Stuart": p. [357]— 379-
Bibliographical notes: p. [333]— 356.
396 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
A detailed biography of one of the great portrait
painters of the i8th and i9th centuries, whose
subjects included the notables of England, Ireland,
and the United States. The author, a portrait paint-
er in his own right, supplies insight into Stuart's
portraits through his knowledge of painting tech-
niques. Much of his account is based on research
in England and Ireland. Acknowledging the extent
to which Stuart borrowed from earlier masters,
Mount argues that the artist was a painter in the
"Georgian mode" and, like Reynolds and Gains-
borough, "systematically employed the best works of
other artists as sources for the perfection in his own."
A catalog of the painter's known works is appended.
2593. [West] Evans, Grose. Benjamin West and
the taste of his times. Carbondale, Southern
Illinois University Press, 1959. 144 p. 73 illus., col.
plate. 58-12322 ND237/W45E85
Bibliography: p. 129—138.
West (1738—1820) was one of the most influential
of the Anglo-American painters of the i8th and igth
centuries. Born in Pennsylvania, he traveled as a
young man to Italy, where he perfected his painting
techniques before settling in London for the rest of
his life. There he became a friend of royalty and,
through government subsidies, was able to devote
his time to historical canvases in the heroic mode.
Prominent in helping to found the Royal Academy,
he became its second president. American painters
often found a haven in his home, where they
absorbed his precepts and techniques. Appraising
West's art in the light of the artistic aims of the
1 8th century, the author asserts that the painter,
while upholding the ideals of the classicists, ab-
sorbed many of the new theories which appeared
in his time and in the end showed the way to
neoclassical and romantic art.
2594. [Whistler] Sutton, Denys. Nocturne: the
art of James McNeill Whistler. Philadel-
phia, Lippincott, 1964 ['1963] 153 p. illus. (part
col.).
64-22181 ND237.W6S84 1964
Bibliographical footnotes.
In his lifetime, Whistler's reputation as a painter
was enhanced by the public interest in his eccentric
personality and barbed wit. After his death, how-
ever, the critics of art turned their attention to
other radical innovators. This volume is a historical
account of Whistler's career as a painter rather than
a conventional biography. Details of his personal
life are included only where necessary to explain
his art. The author discusses the influences of
Velasquez, Courbet, and the Japanese artists on
Whistler's distinctive style — a kind of pictorial
shorthand characterized by carefully chosen, re-
strained color and by masterful understatement.
The World of James McNeil! Whistler (New York,
Nelson [1959] 255 p.), by Horace Gregory, is a
critical appraisal of the man and his work.
H. Prints and Photographs
2595. Steichen, Edward. A life in photography.
Published in collaboration with the Museum
of Modern Art. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday,
1963. i v. (unpaged) 249 illus.
63—11119 TR 1 40.868 A25
An autobiography in which brief chapters of text
are followed by reproduction of the author's best
photographs, some in color. Steichen (b. 1879)
became associated with Alfred Stieglitz in 1905 and
for many years produced "art" photographs char-
acterized by blurring of focus and alteration of
texture. From the beginning, however, he dis-
played a genius for portraits and an ability to get
important people to sit for his camera. In his
mid-sixties he photographed the carrier war in the
Pacific; on his return he became director of the
Department of Photography at the Museum of
Modern Art, where he organized his memorable
exhibition "The Family of Man." The museum has
also published Steichen the Photographer (Garden
City, N.Y., Distributed by Doubleday [1961] 80
p.), containing reproductions of 48 of his photo-
graphs, mostly portraits, and short essays by Carl
Sandburg, Alexander Liberman, and Rene d'Har-
noncourt.
2596. Thoreau, Henry David. In wildness is
the preservation of the world. Selections
& photographs by Eliot Porter. Introduction by
Joseph Wood Krutch. San Francisco, Sierra Club
[1962] 167 p. 62—20527 TR66o.T5
A photographic essay which captures the spirit of
Thoreau's "world of American Nature," as Krutch
calls it. Porter's full-color photographs and
Thoreau's word pictures evoke the moods of New
England's shifting seasons by focusing on the details
of nature. Not Man Apart; Lines From Robinson
Jeffers (San Francisco, Sierra Club [1965] 159 p.
Sierra Club exhibit format series, 10) depicts the
ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 397
Big Sur country in California through the poetry of
Jeffers and the photographs of Ansel Adams and
other west-coast photographers.
I. Decorative Arts
2597. Antiques. The Antiques treasury of furni-
ture and other decorative arts at Winterthur,
Williamsburg, Sturbridge, Ford Museum, Coopers-
town, Deerfield [and] Shelburne. Edited by Alice
Winchester and the staff of Antiques magazine.
New York, Dutton, 1959. 320 p. illus. (part col.)
59-12514 NK8o6.A5
A revised and updated compilation of seven spe-
cial issues of Antiques magazine which featured
early American furnishings. Each of the seven
museums is the subject of a separate chapter. A
comparative chronology of crafts, compiled by Helen
Comstock, is appended. The Treasure House of
Early American Rooms (New York, Viking Press
[1963] 179 p. A Winterthur book), by John A.
H. Sweeney, and 100 Most Beautiful Rooms in
America (New York, Studio Publications [1958]
210 p.), by Helen Comstock, reveal the manner in
which fine furniture has been used in rooms with
notable decor.
2598. Comstock, Helen, ed. The concise encyclo-
pedia of American antiques. New York,
Hawthorn Books [1958] 2 v. (543 p.) illus.,
facsims. 58-5628 NK8o5.C65
A description of various kinds of American arti-
facts now regarded as "antiques." The chapters
are written by specialists and are accompanied by
glossaries and short bibliographies. Some chapters
are limited to items made before 1830; others extend
to the end of the i9th century. The first volume
is devoted to such conventional antiques as furni-
ture, silver, and glassware. The second deals with
more unusual articles, including mechanical toys,
maps, ship models, stamps, dime novels, Valentines,
and Christmas cards. A Fortune in the ]un\ Pile
(New York, Crown [1963] 440 p.), by Dorothy
H. Jenkins, is a handbook intended to help the
average person identify antiques. In American
Antiques, 1800-1900, a Collector's History and
Guide (New York, Odyssey Press [1965] 203 p.),
Joseph T. Buder surveys the ornate furnishings
which characterized the igth century.
2599. Hay ward, Arthur H. Colonial lighting. 3d
enl. ed. With a new introduction and sup-
plement, "Colonial chandeliers," by James R. Marsh.
New York, Dover Publications [1962] 198 p.
illus. 62—6720 NK836o.H3 1962
An updated edition of no. 5786 in the 1960 Guide.
2600. Revi, Albert C. American pressed glass and
figure botdes. New York, Nelson [1964]
446 p. 64—14510 NK5H2.R.4
Bibliography: p. 413.
An encyclopedic survey of manufacturers, listing
74 firms, summarizing their respective histories, and
describing the patterns of their products. Numer-
ous illustrations and an index to patterns supplement
the text. American Cut and Engraved Glass (New
York, Nelson [1965] 497 p.), by the same author,
contains a roster of companies belonging to the
National Association of Cut Glass Manufacturers
and an illustrated list of trademarks and labels for
cutglass wares. Robert Koch's Louis C. Tiffany,
Rebel in Glass (New York, Crown [1964] 246 p.)
is a biography of a world-famous designer of exotic
colored glassware.
J. Museums
2601. Hosmer, Charles B. Presence of the past; a
history of the preservation movement in the
United States before Williamsburg. New York,
Putnam [1965] 386 p. illus.
65—13292 £159^77
Bibliography: p. 349—372.
A selective survey of historic preservation in the
United States from its beginnings in the mid- 1 9th
century to the 1920'$, when professionalization
began to overtake what had been primarily a field
for amateurs. Preservation originated as a grass-
roots movement motivated by a wide variety of non-
398 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
architectural considerations ranging from sentimen-
talism to commercialism. The establishment in 1910
of the Society for the Preservation of New England
Antiquities, which made architectural beauty or
originality its primary criterion, was a landmark in
the history of preservation. The author includes a
discussion of methods used in acquiring property
and of the fundamentals of preservation — criteria
for selection, techniques of restoration, and econom-
ics of maintenance. History of the National Trust
for Historic Preservation ( [Washington] National
Trust for Historic Preservation [1965] 115 p.), by
David E. Finley, one of the founders, covers the
period 1947—63.
2602. Spaeth, Eloise. American art museums and
galleries; an introduction to looking. New
York, Harper [1960] 282 p. illus.
60-10429 N5IO.S6
Bibliography: [265]— 266.
In this general guide, the author describes each
institution, relating pertinent historical facts and
indicating the scope of the collections and the most
important works of art. Few college and university
museums are included, and the large metropolitan
museums are mentioned only briefly on the grounds
that they have their own descriptive brochures.
More intensive analyses of specific museum collec-
tions are offered in A Guide to the Art Museums of
New England (New York, Harcourt, Brace [1958]
270 p.), by Samson L. Faison, and Guide to Art
Museums in the United States: [v. i] East Coast:
Washington to Miami (New York, Duell, Sloan &
Pearce [1958] 243 p.), by W. Aubrey Cartwright.
Museums, US. A.; a History and a Guide (Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1965. 395 p.), by Herbert
and Marjorie Katz, is a survey of the development
of all types of museums in the United States.
XXVII
Land and Agriculture
A. Land
B. Agriculture: History
C. Agriculture: Practice
D. Agriculture: Government Policies
E. Forests and Forestry
F. Animal Husbandry
G. Conservation: General
H. Conservation: Special
2603—2609
2610—2616
2617—2622
2623—2627
2628-2632
2633-2637
2638—2641
2642—2649
A GROWING concern about the deteriorating quality of the natural environment — the
-L±- pollution of air, water, and soil, the depletion of nonrenewable resources, the extinction
of numerous species of wildlife — suggested the possible desirability of modifying this chapter
to accommodate an aggregation of works on conservation, which in the 1960 Guide have no
designated place. In that publication, some works on conserving the environment are in
various sections in Chapter XXVII; others are in Chapter VI, Geography, and Chapter
XXVIII, Economic Life. In the Supplement such
subject heading. Forests and Forestry could readily
have been combined with Conservation: Special, but
because of its relatively large size and its nearness
in location to the conservation sections, it has been
retained. Furthermore, a number of publications
works have been placed together in two new sections
in this chapter: Section G, Conservation: General, and
Section H, Conservation: Special. Section E, which
in the 1960 Guide is entitled Forests, National
Parks, has been renamed Forests and Forestry, and
the subject of national parks is regarded as being
encompassed by Section H.
The new sections do not entirely solve the prob-
lem of placing each entry under a precisely suitable
dealing with natural science but not stressing con-
servation are included in the Supplement, and these
are entered by subject, as in the 1960 Guide, in such
sections as D, Plants and Animals, Chapter VI.
A. Land
2603. Bertrand, Alvin L., and Floyd L. Corty, eds.
Rural land tenure in the United States, a
socio-economic approach to problems, programs, and
trends. Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University
Press [1962] 313 p. 62—16212 HDii56.A3B4
Combining the approaches of rural sociology and
agricultural economics, this volume, which was
sponsored by the Southwest Land Tenure Research
Committee, presents a general synthesis of informa-
tion and an analysis of tenure problems in their
total social aspect. The editors wrote two chapters
each and teamed together as the coauthors of three
more. Although the book is intended primarily
for the specialist, basic terms are defined and funda-
mental concepts are explained. Aaron M. Sakolski's
Land Tenure and Land Taxation in America (New
York, R. Schalkenbach Foundation [1957] 316
p.) is a history of land settlement and the evolution
of land tenure.
399
4OO / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2604. Carstensen, Vernon R., ed. The public
lands; studies in the history of the public
domain. Madison, University of Wisconsin Press,
19&3 [C][962] 522 p.
62—21554 HD2i6.C3 1963
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
2605. Homestead Centennial Symposium, Univer-
sity of Nebraska, 7962. Land use policy and
problems in the United States. Edited by Howard
W. Ottoson. Lincoln, University of Nebraska Press
[1963] 470 p. 63-9096 HD205 1962^6
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
These two collections of papers on the history of
the public domain were published in recognition of
separate anniversaries. As the name suggests, the
Homestead Centennial Symposium celebrated the
looth anniversary of the Homestead Act. The
participants were drawn from diverse disciplines,
and their statements range over the social, economic,
and political aspects of public land policy and
administration. The Public Lands was prepared in
observance of the i5oth anniversary of the General
Land Office, predecessor of the Bureau of Land
Management. An advisory board selected represen-
tative articles on the history of public land from
among those that its members regarded as the best
published during the previous 50 years. Carstensen,
a member of the advisory board, notes that the
volume is intended to supplement, rather than
supplant, the standard histories of the public domain.
2606. Dana, Samuel Trask. Forest and range
policy, its development in the United States.
New York, McGraw-Hill, 1956. 455 p. (The
American forestry series) 55—11168 81)565.03
Bibliography: p. 426—434.
"Fur, fish, farms, and forest" were the basis of
the colonial economy, and forests on the east coast
conditioned the first policies relating to forestry
and range and resource management. Later influ-
ences were the westward expansion, the exploitation
of gold and silver, the rise of commercial agriculture
and forestry, the development of national parks and
forests, and the conservation movement. The au-
thor focuses on broad subjects, chronologically pre-
sented, and concludes with a view of the future.
He is coauthor of two pilot studies on land owner-
ship and its influence on land management, initiated
and published in Washington by the American
Forestry Association: California Lands (1958. 308
p.), by Dana and Myron Krueger, and Minnesota
Lands (1960. 463 p.), by Dana, John H. Allison,
and Russell N. Cunningham. A third pilot study
conducted under the same sponsorship is North
Carolina Lands (1964. 372 p.), by Kenneth B.
Pomeroy and James G. Yoho.
2607. Higbee, Edward C. The American oasis;
the land and its uses. New York, Knopf,
1957. 262 p. 56-5788 S44I.H6
Bibliography: p. 261—262.
2608. Resources for the Future. Land for the
future, by Marion Clawson, R. Burnell Held
[and] Charles H. Stoddard. Baltimore, Published
for Resources for the Future by the Johns Hopkins
Press [1960] xix, 570 p.
60—9917 HD205 1960^4
Bibliographical footnotes.
According to The American Oasis, such factors
as a large percentage of arable land and a high
degree of mechanization cause the United States to
be "an oasis of plenty in what is largely a hungry
world." The author views the general agricultural
picture, clarifies regional differences within the
country, describes the methods of the best agricul-
turists, and stresses the magnitude of the task of
feeding the world's population. Land for the
Future examines the need for agricultural lands
along with the demands for urbanization, recreation,
forestry, grazing, and other purposes. Many graphs
and tables and several appendixes illustrate and
support the text. The authors offer a projection of
expected land use to the year 2000. Marion Claw-
son's Man and Land in the United States (Lincoln,
University of Nebraska Press, 1964. 178 p.) is a
brief historical survey of land use, from conditions
that prevailed before European settlers arrived to
the modified landscape of today.
2609. Resources for the Future. The federal
lands: their use and management, by Marion
Clawson and Burnell Held. Baltimore, Published
for Resources for the Future by the Johns Hopkins
Press [1957] xxi, 501 p. illus.
57-12121
Bibliographical footnotes.
Clawson, who draws upon his experience as
Director of the Bureau of Land Management in
the Department of the Interior, 1948—53, and Held,
who studied pertinent agency records in detail,
question whether the business of administering the
Federal lands has kept pace with the social and
economic growth of the country and urge a critical,
imaginative reexamination of management policies.
Two interpretive histories of public policy toward
one type of land use are Phillip O. Foss' Politics
and Grass; the Administration of Grazing on the
Public Domain (Seattle, University of Washington
Press, 1960. 236 p.) and Wesley C. Calef's Private
Grazing and Public Lands; Studies of the Local
Management of the Taylor Grazing Act ( [Chicago]
University of Chicago Press [1960] 292 p.).
LAND AND AGRICULTURE / 40!
B. Agriculture: History
2610. Bogue, Allan G. From prairie to corn belt;
farming on the Illinois and Iowa prairies in
the nineteenth century. Chicago, University of Chi-
cago Press [1963] 310 p.
63—20913 HDi773.A3B6
Bibliography: p. 289—303.
In the upper watershed of the Mississippi River,
"there lies a great farming region where farmers
key their operations to the corn crop as they do
nowhere else in the United States." The author
analyzes the problems confronting the prairie farm-
er, 1830—1900, and portrays him breaking the land,
harvesting the crops, tending livestock, and amass-
ing capital. By 1900 the pioneer's work was done,
and his successors "were moving forward into the
golden age." Carefully detailed and more limited in
scope is Margaret B. Bogue's Patterns From the Sod;
Land Use and Tenure in the Grand Prairie, 1850—
7900 (Springfield, Illinois State Historical Library,
*959- 327 P- Collections of the Illinois State
Historical Library, v. 34. Land series, v. i). A
brief, easily read history of "the most important
plant in the United States" is Corn and Its Early
Fathers ( [East Lansing] Michigan State University
Press, 1956. 134 p.), by Henry A. Wallace and
William L. Brown.
261 1. Case, Harold C. M., and Donald B. Williams.
Fifty years of farm management. Urbana,
University of Illinois Press, 1957. 386 p.
56—6707 8561^317
Bibliographical footnotes.
The science of farm management is a product of
the commercial and capitalistic aspects of 20th-
century agriculture. Before that time the emphasis
was on production techniques. The authors make
special reference to research, extension, and teaching
as developed by the land-grant colleges and the U. S.
Department of Agriculture. Attention is directed
to the emergence of research procedures and to the
adoption of management practices rather than to
the evolution of the practices themselves. A special-
ized study of farm financing is Alvin S. Tosdebe's
Capital in Agriculture: Its Formation and Financing
Since i8jo (Princeton, Princeton University Press,
:957- 232 P« Studies in capital formation and
financing, 2), sponsored by the National Bureau of
Economic Research.
2612. Hargreaves, Mary Wilma M. Dry farming
in the northern Great Plains, 1900—1925.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1957. 587 p.
(Harvard economic studies, v. 101)
56—11281 8441^29
Bibliographical footnotes.
In the 20th century, dry farming, or "agriculture
without irrigation in regions of limited natural
precipitation," was an experiment. Begun by set-
tlers who were poorly suited to the venture, it was
sustained by diligence, scientific research, and rail-
road expansion. Although the author confines her
discussion to eastern Montana and the western
Dakotas in the first quarter of the 2Oth century, her
conclusions are broadly relevant to the problems
common to all dry areas.
2613. Holt, Rackham. George Washington
Carver, an American biography. Rev. ed.
Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday [1963] 360 p.
62-11430 S4I7-C3H6 1963
An updated edition of no. 5825 in the 1960 Guide.
2614. Rasmussen, Wayne D., ed. Readings in the
history of American agriculture. Urbana,
University of Illinois Press, 1960. 340 p.
60—8342 8441^34
Selected readings: p. 312—320.
When the Constitution was adopted, nine of
every 10 working persons were employed on farms.
By 1960, one farmer was growing food and fiber
for himself and 22 other persons. The interim
development was spectacular. The selections in this
volume, many of which are from obscure sources,
deal with such topics as the first planting of corn
by the colonists, the modification of Old World
practices by the environment of the New, the tech-
nological revolution at the time of the Civil War, the
impact of increasing industrialization, the growing
importance of domestic and foreign markets, the
further technological changes associated with World
War II, and current sales and distribution problems.
Harvest, an Anthology of Farm Writing (New
York, Appleton-Century [1964] 424 p.), edited by
Wheeler McMillen, is a collection of personal remi-
niscences and literary selections stressing the idyllic
aspects of farm life.
2615. Saloutos, Theodore. Farmer movements in
the South 1865-1933. Berkeley, University
of California Press, 1960. 354 p. (University of
California publications in history, v. 64)
60—63657 Ei73.Ci5 vol. 64
4O2 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Bibliography: p. 333—346.
This companion volume to Agricultural Discon-
tent in the Middle West, /poo— 1939, by Saloutos
and John D. Hicks (no. 5831 in the 1960 Guide), is
concentrated on the crusades to relieve numerous
farmer grievances. Socioeconomically oriented, it
is less a study of personalities than of the effective
agencies — the Grange, Agricultural Wheel, South-
ern Alliance, Populist Party, Farmers Union, South-
ern Cotton Association, and other cotton and tobacco
associations — which were able to express the south-
ern farmer's discontent. Occasionally in harmony
with the common needs of society as a whole, the
aspirations of these groups were broadly influential
and helped to determine trends throughout the
Nation. A brief historical account, with supporting
documents, is Fred A. Shannon's American Farm-
ers' Movements (Princeton, N.J., Van Nostrand
[1957] 192 p. An Anvil original, no. 28).
2616. Shideler, James H. Farm crisis, 1919—1923.
Berkeley, University of California Press,
1957; 345 P- 57-10502 HDi76i.S54
"Bibliographical notes": p. 297—301. Biblio-
graphical references included in "Notes" (p. 303—
330-
"The turning point in the great economic, politi-
cal, and social trends of agriculture" was the period
of economic dislocations in the years immediately
following World War I. Emerging from the con-
flict as a creditor nation, the United States could no
longer dispose of its surplus farm goods by sending
them abroad for repayment of debts. Overproduc-
tion, high production costs, burdensome distribution
charges, and the diminution of foreign markets — all
contributed to the development of agriculture's long-
lasting depression. The author examines changes in
outlook and leadership as the farmers, encountering
a "convergence of difficulties," attempted to improve
their status through self-help.
C. Agriculture: Practice
2617. Higbee, Edward C. American agriculture:
geography, resources, conservation. New
York, Wiley [1958] 399 p. 58—10803 8441^59
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
The author, a geographer and an agricultural
economist, blends his knowledge of both fields in a
textbook for students of the agricultural sciences,
vocational agriculture, conservation, and geography.
He discusses agricultural regions of the United
States, the underlying reasons for agricultural spe-
cialization within them, and selected farms which
illustrate wise use and conservation of their re-
sources. Two major topics are the West with its
governing problem of aridity and the East with its
humidity and resultant diverse focus. In Farms
and Farmers in an Urban Age (New York, Twen-
tieth Century Fund, 1963. 183 p.), the same author
examines for the layman the transformation of
agriculture from a way of life into a modern
capitalistic enterprise. Lauren K. Soth, in An Em-
barrassment of Plenty (New York, Crowell [1965]
209 p.), analyzes the dual farm problem: increasing
production and lagging income. The Farmer and
His Customers (Norman, University of Oklahoma
Press [1957] 99 p.), by Ladd Haystead, is a brief
picture of "just where farming is today, its prob-
lems, its weaknesses, and its place in the United
States of the future."
2618. Murray, William G., and Aaron G. Nelson.
Agricultural finance. 4th ed. Ames, Iowa
State University Press [1960] 486 p.
60—11129 HG-2O5I.U5M88 1960
References at the ends of chapters.
An updated edition of no. 5848 in the 1960 Guide.
2619. Shotwell, Louisa R. The harvesters; the
story of the migrant people. Garden City,
N.Y., Doubleday, 1961. 242 p.
61—9552 HDi525-S48
Bibliography: p. [215]— 237.
The author's purpose is "to portray the complex
setting in which migrant families of different ethnic
backgrounds live and work; to identify the thorny
issues their migrancy raises for themselves, for the
communities and the states that recruit their labor,
and for the national economy; and to attempt a
foreshadowing of what lies ahead for them." The
people are fictitious, but their experiences are au-
thentic. "Everything that happens to them has
happened to real migrant people somewhere." Two
other accounts are The Slaves We Rent (New York,
Random House [1965] 171 p.), by Truman E.
Moore, and They Harvest Despair; the Migrant
Farm Worker (Boston, Beacon Press [1965] 158
p.), based on award-winning articles published in
the New Yorf^ World-Telegram and Sun in 1961,
by Dale Wright.
2620. U.S. Dept. of Agriculture. Power to pro-
duce. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off.
[1960] 480 p. (Its Yearbook of agriculture, 1960)
Agr 60—362 S2I.A35 1960
Agriculture's contribution to and benefits from
the technological revolution in the United States are
the subject of this collection of relatively short
articles on the farmer's uses of power, which is
defined by editor Alfred Stefferud as ranging from
machines and oil to muscles and thought. The
history, potentialities, and physical effects of power
rather than its social, political, and humanitarian
aspects are emphasized. Clear, nontechnical lan-
guage traces power in the past and present — on the
land, in the harvest, in the market, and in research.
A section of illustrations juxtaposes old and new
tools, machines, and methods.
2621. U. S. Farmer Cooperative Service. Farmer
cooperatives in the United States. Washing-
LAND AND AGRICULTURE / 403
ton, 1955 [i.e. 1956] 252 p. (Its PCS bulletin i)
Agr 56-153 HDi484.A45
Bibliographical footnotes.
A revised edition of no. 5842 in the 1960 Guide.
Two related works are Agricultural Cooperation;
Selected Readings (Minneapolis, University of Min-
nesota Press [1957] 576 p.), edited by Martin A.
Abrahamsen and Claud L. Scroggs, and Farmers in
Business, Studies in Cooperative Enterprise (Wash-
ington, American Institute of Cooperation [1963]
450 p.), by Joseph G. Knapp, Administrator of the
Farmer Cooperative Service in the Department of
Agriculture.
2622. Wilcox, Walter W., and Willard W. Coch-
rane. Economics of American agriculture.
2d ed. Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall, 1960.
538 p. 60—10780 HDi76i.W435 1960
References at the ends of chapters.
An updated edition of no. 5850 in the 1960 Guide.
D. Agriculture: Government Policies
2623. Campbell, Christiana McFadyen. The Farm
Bureau and the New Deal; a study of the
making of national farm policy, 1933-40. Urbana,
University of Illinois Press, 1962. 215 p.
62—13210 HDi76i.C3 1962
Bibliography: p. [196]— 201.
The most influential of the farm organizations in
the period of the New Deal was the American Farm
Bureau Federation. Establishing and promoting a
sectional alliance between the farmers of the Mid-
west and those of the South, the Farm Bureau
concentrated on achieving compromises between
agriculture and other interest groups, such as labor
and business, in the making of national economic
policy. Price policy was the organization's chief
preoccupation. To raise the price of farm products
became the predominant objective. The author of
this monograph, winner of the Agricultural History
Society award for 1961, sets forth an array of both
facts and interpretations. William J. Block con-
centrates on a special controversy in The Separation
of the Farm Bureau and the Extension Service (Ur-
bana, University of Illinois Press, 1960. 304 p.
Illinois studies in the social sciences, v. 47). Roose-
velt's Farmer: Claude R. Wicfyird in the New Deal
(New York, Columbia University Press, 1961
[Ci955] 424 p.), by Dean Albertson, is a biography
of the man who was Franklin D. Roosevelt's Secre-
tary of Agriculture, 1940—45.
2624. Cochrane, Willard W. The city man's guide
to the farm problem. Minneapolis, Univer-
sity of Minnesota Press [1965] 242 p.
65-20831 HD 1761X^595 1965
Bibliographical footnotes.
A survey of farming populations and operations
for the "interested layman who wants to make sense
out of the farm problem." The author appeals to
the urban dweller who has the financial and political
means to be influential. Emphasis is on two aspects
of the problem: overproduction and rural unemploy-
ment. In The Great Farm Problem (Chicago,
Regnery, 1959. 235 p.), William H. Peterson advo-
cates as a simple solution the discontinuance of
support and subsidies and the restoration of a free
market. Geoffrey S. Shepherd's Farm Policy; New
Directions (Ames, Iowa State University Press
["1964] 292 p.) points to the oversupply of farm-
ers as the root of the problem and urges a massive
program to help those who want to choose a new
vocation.
2625. Hathaway, Dale E. Government and agri-
culture: public policy in a democratic society.
New York, Macmillan [1963] 412 p.
63-11797 HDi76i.H383
Bibliographical footnotes.
2626. Paarlberg, Donald. American farm policy, a
case study of centralized decision-making.
404 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
New York, J. Wiley [1964] xiv, 375 p.
64-14996
Two textbooks which analyze the costs and the
benefits of agriculture's technological success. The
authors review farm policies in terms of attitudes,
goals, and ideals, describe their consequences, and
speculate about their future. Government and
Agriculture, a study of farm policy in its political
setting, is focused specifically on price and income
patterns since World War II. The author explains
the industry's growth as well as its decline in rela-
tive economic importance. Assuming the inevi-
tability of Government intervention, he suggests
ways to raise farm income and to increase returns
from the physical and human investments. The
author of American Farm Policy traces the origins
and consequences of Government intervention.
Taking a pragmatic rather than a doctrinaire ap-
proach, he examines the present price support and
production control programs. In an outline for the
future, he urges, among other things, reduced price
supports and more fully individualized decision-
making. Who's Behind Our Farm Policy? ( [New
York] Praeger [1957, Ci956] 374 p.), by Wesley
McCune, is a journalistic description of "the people,
organizations and pressures involved in the running
national debate of farm policy."
2627. U. S. Dept. of Agriculture. Agricultural
History Branch. Century of service: the first
100 years of the United States Department of Agri-
culture. [By Gladys L. Baker, and others. Wash-
ington] Centennial Committee, U. S. Dept. of
Agriculture; [for sale by the Superintendent of
Documents, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1963] xv,
560 p. Agr 63-175 S2i.CS 1963
"Literature cited": p. 419—439.
Established in 1862, the Department of Agricul-
ture began inauspiciously. The news of its appear-
ance, and of the first Commissioner's appointment,
attracted relatively slight public attention. For 50
years the Department's growth was slow. This offi-
cial history is devoted largely to the period of rapid
development beginning with World War I and
emphasizes factual information rather than criti-
cism or interpretation. The appendix contains brief
biographies of Commissioners, Secretaries, Under
Secretaries, and Assistant Secretaries; a historical list
of heads of departmental agencies; a description of
each agency's organization; and a chronology of
major events. The Department's Yearbook^ of Agri-
culture for 1962, After a Hundred Years (Washing-
ton, U. S. Govt. Print. Off. [1962] 688 p.), is a
"sampler of progress" since 1862.
E. Forests and Forestry
2628. Allen, Shirley W., and Grant W. Sharpe.
An introduction to American forestry. 3d
ed. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1960. 466 p. (The
American forestry series)
60—6956 SD37I.A6 1960
References at the ends of chapters.
A revised edition of no. 5862 in the 1960 Guide.
The Society of American Foresters' publication,
American Forestry: Six Decades of Growth (Wash-
ington, 1960. 319 p.), edited by Henry Clepper
and Arthur B. Meyer, is a history of forestry after
1900 and a summary of the society's influence in the
field during that period. In Timber and Men; the
Weyerhaeuser Story (New York, Macmillan [1963]
704 p.), Ralph W. Hidy, Frank E. Hill, and Allan
Nevins have produced a scholarly history of the
Weyerhaeuser enterprise from its beginning in 1860,
when Frederick Weyerhaeuser and Frederick C. A.
Denkmann started, with a defunct sawmill, a lumber
business which grew into the largest wood products
empire in the world. The Weyerhaeusers were
pioneers in forest fire control and in planned for-
estry, demonstrating leadership in the practices of
selective logging and sustained yield through
reforestation.
2629. Carhart, Arthur H. The national forests.
New York, Knopf, 1959. 289 p.
59—5433 SD426.C2
Designed by the publisher as a companion to
Freeman Tilden's book, The National Parf^s; What
They Mean to You and Me (no. 5866 in the 1960
Guide) Carhart's volume surveys the national for-
ests, emphasizing their multiple resources and uses.
An introductory chapter identifies 150 forests —
which together encompass 18 million acres — in
terms of timber production, watershed protection,
resources and recreation, history, and administration.
The bulk of the text is devoted to nine forest regions
— their geological history, weather, climate, soils,
trees, management, preservation, economic uses, and
folklore. Michael Frome's Whose Woods These
Are: The Story of the National Forests (Garden City,
N.Y., Doubleday, 1962. 360 p.) explores selected
forests with sensitive attention to all their uses, from
tree farming to wilderness. In The Forest Ranger,
LAND AND AGRICULTURE / 405
a Study in Administrative Behavior (Baltimore,
Published for Resources for the Future by Johns
Hopkins Press [1960] 259 p.), Herbert Kaufman
describes the implementation of resource manage-
ment programs in the U. S. Forest Service.
2630. McGeary, Martin Nelson. Gifford Pinchot,
forester-politician. Princeton, N.J., Prince-
ton University Press, 1960. 481 p.
60—12232 E664-P62M2
Bibliography: p. 467—471.
Heir to wealth, Pinchot perplexed his Yale class-
mates by choosing to become a forester. Forestry
was an undeveloped field, and one so new that he
had to go to Europe for professional education.
Upon his return he traveled, loafed, and took odd
jobs for a year. Finally a genuine opportunity
opened. In 1892, he became forest manager on the
"Biltmore Estate" of George W. Vanderbilt, near
Asheville, N.C. From then on he was intensely
active, ultimately becoming head of the Forest Ser-
vice in the Department of Agriculture. He was
chosen for the chairmanship of the National Conser-
vation Commission in 1908 and for the presidency
of the National Conservation Association in 1910.
He also founded the school of forestry at Yale.
From forestry he turned to politics, serving twice as
Governor of Pennsylvania. Although this biography
emphasizes Pinchot's political career, the author
summarizes the contribution made by "America's
first trained forester." George T. Morgan's William
B. Greeley, a Practical Forester, 1879—1955 (St. Paul,
Forest History Society, 1961. 82 p.) is a brief biog-
raphy of one of Pinchot's disciples.
2631. Platt, Rutherford H. The great American
forest. Illustrations by Stanley Wyatt. En-
glewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall [1965] 271 p.
([Prentice-Hall series in nature and natural his-
tory] ) 65-25253 SDi40.P55
The first volume in a new series on nature and
natural history, illustrated with woodcuts and full-
page photographs and combining technical descrip-
tion and esthetic appreciation. The author discusses
the historical evolution of trees, their chemical and
physical makeup, and their importance in relation
to other natural resources. He also deals with the
significance of leaf shedding, the regional charac-
teristics of American forest types, and the variety of
forest-related living things. He concludes with a
plea for preservation of wilderness areas: "If only
people would catch a vision of our fabulous forests,
their ancient heritage, their beauty and beneficence,
their meaning for our lives today . . . before it is
too late."
2632. Shirley, Hardy L. Forestry and its career
opportunities. 2d ed. New York, McGraw-
Hill [1964] 454 p. (The American forestry series)
63—16468 80371.85 1964
References at the ends of chapters.
An updated edition of no. 5865 in the 1960 Guide.
The Society of American Foresters' Forestry Educa-
tion in America Today and Tomorrow (Washing-
ton, 1963. 402 p.), by Samuel Trask Dana and
Evert W. Johnson, is a progress report on profes-
sional education in forestry and related fields of
natural resource management.
F. Animal Husbandry
2633. Dale, Edward E. The range cattle industry;
ranching on the Great Plains from 1865 to
1925. [New ed.] Norman, University of Okla-
homa Press [1960] xv, 207 p.
60—10552 SFi96.U5Di8 1960
Bibliography: p. 187—200.
A revised edition of no. 5868 in the 1960 Guide.
2634. Frink, Maurice. When grass was king;
contributions to the Western Range Cattle
Industry Study. Boulder, University of Colorado
Press, 1956. xv, 465 p. illus.
56-13159 HD9433.U4F7
Bibliography: p. 124—131, 322—330, 442—450.
CONTENTS. — When grass was king, by Maurice
Frink. — British interests in the range cattle indus-
try, by W. Turrentine Jackson. — A "genius for
handling cattle": John W. Iliff,by Agnes W. Spring.
2635. Schlebecker, John T. Cattle raising on the
Plains, 1900—1961. Lincoln, University of
Nebraska Press, 1963. 323 p . illus.
63—14691 HD9433.U4S35
Bibliography: p. 291—310.
"Deeply rooted in the old world and ancient
times," Frink observes, "cattle growing as a com-
mercial enterprise on the western plains of the
United States has helped for a hundred years and
more to feed, clothe and otherwise nourish the
people of our own and other lands." When Grass
Was King covers the cattle industry in New Mexico,
Colorado, Wyoming, and Montana during the peri-
406 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
od 1865—95. Cattle Raising on the Plains encom-
passes all 10 of the States which have a portion of
the Great Plains within their boundaries and depicts
the adjustments which cattlemen of the 20th century
made to their environment. Paul C. Henlein's
Cattle Kingdom in the Ohio Valley, 1783—1860
(Lexington, University of Kentucky Press [1959]
198 p.) portrays a virtually forgotten period of im-
portance for the beef-cattle industry in the East. In
The Hereford in America, ad ed. (Kansas City, Mo.
[1960] 500 p.), Donald R. Ornduff traces the
story of one breed of beef cattle from its origins
in England.
2636. Lampard, Eric E. The rise of the dairy
industry in Wisconsin; a study in agricul-
tural change, 1820—1920. Madison, State Historical
Society of Wisconsin, 1963. 466 p. illus.
63-64496 HD9275.U7W66
Bibliography: p. [4291—446.
By the early 2Oth century, Wisconsin had become
the leading dairy State. Scientific research, educa-
tion, regulation, improved breeding, and progress
in marketing and transportation had helped to
convert dairying as a domestic and seasonal activity
into a year-round, factory-supplemented, production
system providing a stable income. A characteristic
of the enterprise was that "it shared both the tribu-
lations of agriculture and the triumphs of manu-
facture: it epitomized the industrial revolution."
This economic analysis is highly detailed and copi-
ously footnoted.
2637. Smithcors, J. F. The American veterinary
profession, its background and development.
Ames, Iowa State University Press [1963] 704 p.
63-16672 SF623.S65
A history of the veterinary profession from coloni-
al times to the present. The author describes the
slow development of American veterinary science
up to the mid-igth century, then traces the growth
of the organized profession, beginning with the
founding in 1863 of the United States Veterinary
Medical Association, now called the American
Veterinary Medical Association. He suggests that
the lack of a veterinary service in the early years of
the country and the apparent immunity of animals
to disease for a century or more led people to think
that animals needed little attention. Consequently,
the livestock industry was threatened with extinc-
tion before the value of veterinary science was
apparent. The book is illustrated with many repro-
ductions of paintings, photographs, and veterinary
advertisements.
G. Conservation: General
2638. Hays, Samuel P. Conservation and the
gospel of efficiency; the progressive conserva-
tion movement, 1890—1920. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1959. 297 p. (Harvard historical
monographs, 40) 59-9274 HCio3.7.H3
"Bibliographical note": p. [277]— 282. Biblio-
graphical footnotes.
The conservation movement was born in an era
characterized by Theodore Roosevelt's spirit of
management and administration. The author of
this history of Federal regulation defines conserva-
tion as "planned and efficient progress" in the devel-
opment and use of all natural resources. The
conservationists were concerned with resource use
rather than ownership. They endeavored to apply
scientific and technological means to limit the pat-
tern of exploitation in the use of raw materials.
Sharing the appreciation of big business for "large-
scale capital organization, technology, and industry-
wide cooperation and planning to abolish the
uncertainties and waste of competitive resource use,"
Roosevelt, Gifford Pinchot, and Francis G. New-
lands promoted the rationally planned development
and utilitarian use of water, forests, and rangelands.
Two historical monographs on other aspects of the
conservation movement are The Politics of Conser-
vation: Crusades and Controversies, 1897—1913
(Berkeley, University of California Press, 1962.
207 p. University of California publications in
history, v. 70), by Elmo R. Richardson and Federal
Conservation Policy, 7927— 7933 (Berkeley, Univer-
sity of California Press, 1963. 221 p. University
of California publications in history, v. 76), by
Donald C. Swain.
2639. Held, R. Burnell, and Marion Clawson.
Soil conservation in perspective. Baltimore,
Published for Resources for the Future by the Johns
Hopkins Press [1965] 344 p. illus.
65—22946 8624. A i H4
Bibliographical footnotes.
For more than 30 years, soil conservation has
been a major national program. The prime con-
cerns of this volume are the economics of soil use
and misuse and the social and political relationships
involved. The authors conclude that, despite major
LAND AND AGRICULTURE
407
accomplishments, "a big job remains to be done,
regardless of how that job is defined and measured."
Future successes will necessitate the resolution of
fundamental conflicts within current programs of
the Department of Agriculture, as well as adapta-
tion to the changing character of conservation
problems. A companion volume resulting from the
same general research project is Robert J. Morgan's
Governing Soil Conservation: Thirty Years of the
New Decentralization ([Baltimore] Published for
Resources for the Future by the Johns Hopkins Press
[1965] 399 p.), which deals with administrative
problems rather than conservation practices.
2640. Parson, Ruben L. Conserving American
resources. 2d ed. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,
Prentice-Hall [1964] 521 p. illus.
64—10843 8930^3 1964
Notes: p. 493—508.
Because it draws upon a number of disciplines
for its subject matter, an introductory course in the
conservation of natural resources can be approached
from any of several directions. This textbook is by
a resource geographer who offers a "development
of concepts rather than a recitation of facts; an
exhortation to think and participate rather than an
exposition on statistics and techniques." Employ-
ing a style calculated to lighten the weight of a
technical subject, he appeals for expanded citizen
involvement in conservation activities. A compila-
tion reflecting the wide variety of material to be
found outside the standard text is Readings in
Resource Management and Conservation (Chicago,
University of Chicago Press [1965] 609 p.), edited
by Ian Burton and Robert W. Kates. Resources in
America's Future; Patterns of Requirements and
Availabilities, 7960-2000 ( [Baltimore] Published
for Resources for the Future by the Johns Hopkins
Press [1963] 1017 p.), by Hans H. Landsberg,
Leonard L. Fischman, and Joseph L. Fisher, is a
study in depth supported by 500 pages of statistical
appendixes and notes.
2641. Udall, Stewart L. The quiet crisis. Intro-
duction by John F. Kennedy. New York,
Holt, Rinehartfic Winston [1963] 209 p. illus.
63—21463 8930.113
Bibliographical notes in "Acknowledgements":
p. 193-196.
"America today stands poised on a pinnacle of
wealth and power, yet we live in a land of vanish-
ing beauty, of increasing ugliness, of shrinking open
space, and of an over-all environment that is dimin-
ished daily by pollution and noise and blight. This,
in brief, is the quiet conservation crisis of the
1960*5." Aided by an outline suggested by Wallace
Stegner, Kennedy's Secretary of the Interior pre-
sents a vivid historical review of man's relationship
to land in the United States. The story evolves
largely through the exploits of key individuals —
ranging from Daniel Boone to Frederick Law
Olmsted — whose roles were influential in the devel-
opment and implementation of conservation philos-
ophies. The author concludes with a request for
the development of a land ethic to serve as a guide
to resource use. "A land ethic for tomorrow," he
maintains, "should be as honest as Thoreau's
Walden, and as comprehensive as the sensitive
science of ecology. It should stress the oneness of
our resources and the live-and-help-live logic of the
great chain of life."
H. Conservation: Special
2642. Carlson, Rachel L. Silent spring. Draw-
ings by Lois and Louis Darling. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1962. 368 p.
60—5148 86959X^3
List of principal sources: p. 301—355.
2643. U. S. President's Science Advisory Com-
mittee. Environmental Pollution Panel.
Restoring the quality of our environment. Report.
[Washington] The White House, 1965. 317 p.
66-60170 TDi8o.U55
Bibliography: p. 131—133.
The primary thesis of Silent Spring is that the
synthetic pesticides pose a threat to man and to
many species of plants and animals that are impor-
tant to his welfare. Such chemicals, even when
spread in diluted quantities, can be combined again
by the cells of the lower forms of life until they
reach densities far above the level of safety. As an
alternative to the use of synthetics to control pests,
the author advocates such biological solutions as
sterilization by X-ray and the introduction of enemy
species. One of the major papers in Restoring the
Quality of Our Environment is a discussion of the
biological methods of pest control and the need for
developing them further. Another of the papers
supports the Carson thesis that pesticides can ac-
cumulate in passing through the food chain. The
408 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
panel's concern extends far beyond the subject of
pesticides, however, to include the whole range of
pollutants — in air, soil, and water. Smoke from
chimneys, carbon dioxide from automobile exhausts,
wastes from industries, and nitrates from fertilized
fields are all within the range of the panel's inter-
ests. The general report, apart from appended
papers on special subjects, summarizes the effects
of pollution, the sources from which it comes, and
the directions in which pollution control should
now turn.
2644. Hart, Henry C. The dark Missouri. Madi-
son, University of Wisconsin Press, 1957.
260 p. 57-7704 HDi695.M5H3
Bibliographical notes: p. 230—253.
"In the heart of America civilized man has yet to
make his peace with nature, even after a century
of effort. For him the ways of the Missouri are
dark still." Examining the Missouri River Basin
from the anthropological, geological, and historical
points of view, the author reviews drought and
flood cycles, population changes, and the many
plans to enable man to achieve harmony with the
river and its power both to create and destroy.
Despite all that has been accomplished, he main-
tains, the area is still improperly developed and
"seems destined to pay the price of another Kansas
City flood, another drought throughout the North-
ern Plains." In Reclamation in the United States
(Caldwell, Idaho, Caxton Printers, 1961. 486 p.),
Alfred R. Golze discusses the problems of irrigating
desert lands in order to render them productive.
2645. Ise, John. Our national park policy; a
critical history. Baltimore, Published for
Resources for the Future by Johns Hopkins Press
[1961] 701 p. 60-15704 86482^1175
Bibliographical footnotes.
In 1960 the national park system comprised 180
areas covering nearly 23 million acres. It existed
"not as a result of public demand but because a
few farsighted, unselfish, and idealistic men and
women foresaw the national need and got the areas
established and protected in one way or another,
fighting public inertia and selfish commercial inter-
ests at every step." The author follows the system's
growth from the establishment of Yellowstone Park
in 1872 to the present. Early parks receive indi-
vidual treatment. After the creation of the Nation-
al Park Service in 1916, the story unfolds chrono-
logically through the administrations of the agency's
directors. "Most of our national parks should have
been much larger," Ise comments, "with far more
in wilderness or primitive areas." The National
Park Service publication, Par^s for America; a
Survey of Par\ and Related Resources in the Fifty
States and a Preliminary Plan ( [Washington, For
sale by the Supt. of Docs., U. S. Govt. Print. Off.]
1964. 485 p.), describes existing facilities and pro-
jects future needs.
2646. Matthiessen, Peter. Wildlife in America.
Drawings by Bob Hines. New York, Vik-
ing Press, 1959. 304 p. 59-11635 SK.36i.M36
Bibliography: p. 289—294.
"The finality of extinction is awesome, and not
unrelated to the finality of eternity." The author
begins his story with a documented account of the
death of the last two known specimens of the
great auk. They died needlessly, and for the first
time an animal species native to North America
was rendered extinct by the hand of man. "This
book is a history of North American wildlife, of
the great auk and other creatures present and
missing, of how they vanished, where, and why;
and of what is presendy being done that North
America may not become a wasteland of man's
creation, in which no wild thing can live." Three
thoughtful and well-illustrated volumes on wildlife
conservation are The Land and Wildltfe of North
America (New York, Time, Inc. [1964] 200 p.
Life nature library), by Peter Farb; Exploring Our
National Wildlife Refuges, 2d ed., rev. (Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1963. 340 p.), by Devereux
Butcher; and the U. S. Bureau of Sport Fisheries
and Wildlife publication Waterfowl Tomorrow
( [Washington, For sale by the Supt. of Docs., U.S.
Govt. Print. Off., 1964] 770 p.), edited by Joseph
P. Linduska.
2647. National Geographic Society, Washington,
D.C. Bool( Service. America's wonder-
lands; the scenic national parks and monuments of
the United States. Washington, National Geo-
graphic Society [1959] 510 p. (World in color
library) 59— 14338 Ei6o.N24
In this volume, as in a number of the National
Geographic Society's publications, articles by differ-
ent authors are integrated into a coherent whole,
with informal texts built around pictures of people
and landscapes. National Par\s of the West
(Menlo Park, Calif., Lane Magazine & Book Co.
[1965] 319 p.), by the editors of Sunset Books
and Sunset Magazine, is a briefer work, artistically
illustrated. Ansel Adams' These We Inherit; the
Portlands of America (San Francisco, Sierra Club
[1962] 103 p.) is an album by an acknowledged
master of natural landscape photography. Deve-
reux Butcher's Exploring Our National Parf^s and
Monuments, 5th ed. (Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1956. 288 p.) is an updated edition of a work
mentioned in the annotation for no. 5866 in the
1960 Guide.
LAND AND AGRICULTURE /
409
2648. Tilden, Freeman. The State parks, their
meaning in American life. New York,
Knopf, 1962. 496 p. 62—17547 Ei6o.T53
A companion volume to one of the author's
earlier works, The National Parf^s, What They
Mean to You and Me, no. 5866 in the 1960 Guide.
In 1921 the National Conference on State Parks
first met to urge legislation for "recreation areas
within states which would be comparable in pur-
pose, in choice, in administration, and in resultant
benefits" to the national parks. This warmly writ-
ten book shows the growth and results of the State
park movement. A discussion of the history, phi-
losophy, and management policies of State parks
is followed by descriptions of outstanding State
recreation areas, monuments, beaches, parks, and
parkways in four major geographical areas and by
"thumbnail sketches" of individual parks.
2649. Wilderness Conference, 8th, San Francisco,
1963. Tomorrow's wilderness. San Fran-
cisco, Sierra Club [1963] 262 p. (Its [Proceed-
ings]) 60-45889 QH75.W5 1963
The Sierra Club is a conservation organization
founded in 1892 by John Muir to explore, enjoy,
and protect the Nation's scenic resources of parks,
wilderness, and wildlife. Since 1949 it has spon-
sored biennial wilderness conferences which have
steadily broadened in concern, traversing the subject
from the practical problems of trip organization to
the theory, philosophy, and meaning of preserva-
tion. Like all the proceedings published since 1959,
this volume is the work of a diverse group of
wilderness enthusiasts and is illustrated with photo-
graphs by Ansel Adams and others. This Is the
American Earth (San Francisco, Sierra Club [1960]
89 p.), by Adams and Nancy Newhall, is a poetic
essay in word and picture and has been acclaimed a
masterpiece in nature appreciation.
XXVIII
Economic Life
A. General Worlds: Histories
B. Other General Wor^s
C. Industry: General
D. Industry: Special
E. Transportation: General
F. Transportation: Special
G. Commerce: General
H. Commerce: Special
I. Finance: General
J. Finance: Special
K. Business: General
L. Business: Special
M. Labor: General
N. Labor: Special
2650—2657
2658-2662
2663—2664
2665-2671
2672
2673-2683
2684-2686
2687—2693
2694-2698
2699—2710
2711-2715
2716-2723
2724-2732
IN THE Supplement and in the 1960 Guide, Section I, Finance: General, and Section J,
Finance: Special, considered together, form the largest unit devoted to a single topic in
Chapter XXVIII. Although the two sections on labor and the two on business, when respec-
tively combined, are equal in size in the 1960 Guide, in the Supplement labor has more
entries than business. The change perhaps reflects an increased interest in the problems
confronted by the workingman as well as in those created by him in his organized efforts
to improve his status. The number of entries in
Section A, General Works: Histories, in the Supple- striking decrease is in Section E, Transportation:
ment represent the most conspicuous proportion- General, which is limited to one entry in the
ate increase in an individual section. The most Supplement.
A. General Works: Histories
2650. Arrington, Leonard J. Great Basin King-
dom; an economic history of the Latter-Day
Saints, 1830—1900. Cambridge, Harvard Univer-
sity Press, 1958. xviii, 534 p. illus. (Studies in
economic history) 58—12961 HCio7.U8A8
Bibliography: p. [4151-420.
A study of Mormon concepts and the efforts of
the church leadership to develop an economy in
harmony with those concepts. The author points
up the strengths and weaknesses of attempting a
development program in an isolated, mountainous,
semiarid region without outside capital. Founded
for religious purposes and dominated by religious
leaders, the community practiced economic innova-
tions in establishing the pioneer settlements. De-
spite the external strains on their economy and the
410
ECONOMIC LIFE / 4! I
conflict of their policies with those of the govern-
ment, the Mormons worked out a financial system
which resulted in successful cooperative living.
Arrington concludes that the Mormon economic
experience was, "to use the words of Thomas
O'Dea, a heightening, a more explicit formulation,
and a summation of American experience generally."
2651. Conference on Research in Income and
Wealth. Trends in the American economy
in the nineteenth century. A report of the Na-
tional Bureau of Economic Research, New York.
Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1960. 780 p.
illus. (Its Studies in income and wealth, v. 24)
60—6680 HC 1 06.3 .0714 vol. 24
"Contains most of the papers presented at the
joint sessions of the Economic History Association
and the Conference on Research in Income and
Wealth held in Williamstown, Massachusetts, in
September 1957."
Includes bibliographical references.
Statistical studies of such economic magnitudes as
balance of payments, commodity output, and invest-
ment and income components. Each author at-
tempts to use existing statistics as the basis for a
comprehensive estimate of his particular subject.
The overall effort is experimental, and the findings
are tentative, but in his introduction to the volume,
William N. Parker concludes that utilizing national
income as the framework for the studies "appears
to give a certain form to economic statistics and
suggests a certain discipline and direction to further
quantitative work."
2652. Dorfman, Joseph. The economic mind in
American civilization. New York, Viking,
1946-59. 5 v. 45-11318 HBii9.A2D6
"Bibliographic notes" at the end of each volume.
CONTENTS. — v. 1—2. 1606—1865. — v- 3- 1865—
1918. — v. 4— 5. 1918—1933.
Volumes 4 and 5 conclude this series, of which
the first three volumes are no. 5876 in the 1960
Guide. In examining economic development as
influenced by sociology, philosophy, psychology, in-
dustrial management, and public policy, the author
emphasizes the works of professional economists
but does not neglect others who made contributions
to economic thought. He also includes brief refer-
ences to the influence of foreign economists. One
theorist whose views he discusses is John M. Clark,
author of Economic Institutions and Human Wei-
jar e (New York, Knopf, 1957. 285 p.), a collection
of essays dealing with community factors underly-
ing freedom of choice and individual liberty. In
Founders of American Economic Thought and
Policy (New York, Bookman Associates [1958]
442 p.), Virgle Glenn Wilhite discusses the doc-
trines of such representative thinkers as William
Douglass, Hugh Vance, Pelatiah Webster, Tench
Coxe, Alexander Hamilton, Benjamin Franklin,
John Taylor, and Albert Gallatin and shows how
their ideas have shaped the course of American life.
The Rise of American Economic Thought (Phila-
delphia, Chilton [1960] 202 p.), edited by Henry
W. Spiegel, is a combined sourcebook and interpre-
tive study that begins with the Puritans and ends
with the late 19th-century economists.
2653. The Economic history of the United States.
New York, Rinehart [1945—62) 8 v.
45—7376 HCio3.E25
In this cooperative series to be completed in 10
volumes, five of which are listed in no. 5877 in the
1960 Guide, three additional volumes have been
published: The Emergence of a National Economy,
1775—1815 (v. 2, 1962. 424 p.), by Curtis P.
Nettels, The Farmer's Age; Agriculture, 1815—1860
(v. 3, 1960. 460 p.), by Paul W. Gates, and Indus-
try Comes of Age; Business, Labor, and Public
Policy, 1860— iSqj (v. 6, 1961. 445 p.), by Edward
C. Kirkland. Harold U. Faulkner's standard one-
volume college text, American Economic History,
8th ed. (New York, Harper [1960] 816 p.
Harper's historical series) is an updated version of
a work mentioned in the annotation for no. 5877
in the 1960 Guide.
2654. Hickman, Bert G. Growth and stability of
the postwar economy. Washington, Brook-
ings Institution [1960] 426 p.
60-53654 HCio6.5.H48
Bibliographical footnotes.
Comparing the period from 1945 to 1958 with
the 1920*5, the author examines the business cycles
of the postwar period, the importance of the ab-
normal disturbances caused by war and cold war,
and the extent to which postwar developments were
affected by structural changes in the economy. He
also analyzes current conditions and offers predic-
tions for the future. Simon S. Kuznets, in Postwar
Economic Growth (Cambridge, Belknap Press of
Harvard University Press, 1964. 148 p.), seeks to
determine whether economic growth can be achieved
without domestic and international conflicts and
erosions of personal liberty. Postwar Economic
Trends in the United States (New York, Harper
[1960] 384 p. Massachusetts Institute of Tech-
nology. Center for International Studies. Ameri-
can project series), a collection of essays edited by
Ralph E. Freeman, covers such subjects as the evo-
lution of the economy, changes in specific industries,
international economic relations, income distribu-
tion, and analyses of fiscal, monetary, financial, and
labor policies. In The U.S. Economy in the 1950'$
412 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
(New York, Norton [1963] 308 p.), Harold G.
Vatter places the history of the decade in the
context of longrun economic growth.
2655. Kelso, Louis O., and Mortimer J. Adler.
The capitalist manifesto. New York, Ran-
dom House [1958] 265 p. 58—5268 HB50I.K-43
Kelso worked for a decade to devise a new
statement of capitalistic economics, while Adler
searched for an economic formulation to sustain
his concept of a sound political democracy. In this
volume they collaborate in advocating a positive
capitalistic program and rebutting partisans of the
welfare state. They reexamine the nature of pri-
vate property, production, distribution, economic
freedom, and economic democracy. In The Roots
of Capitalism, rev. ed. (Princeton, N.J., Van No-
strand [1965] 222 p.), John Chamberlain exhibits
a deep faith in free enterprise and its attendant bene-
fits as he surveys capitalistic systems from the i8th
century to the present.
2656. Resources for the Future. Energy in the
American economy, 1850—1975; an econom-
ic study of its history and prospects, by Sam H.
Schurr and Bruce C. Netschert, with Vera F.
Eliasberg, Joseph Lerner [and] Hans H. Lands-
berg. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press [1960]
xxii, 774 p. illus. 60—14304 HD9545-R45
Bibliographical footnotes.
The annual per capita consumption of energy
in the United States in the 1950'$ was about six
times the world average. The authors believe that
the high demands of the economy in 1975 can be
met if appropriate actions are taken. Their pur-
pose here, however, is neither to forecast nor to
guide; rather, they seek to provide a large body
of basic information which will be helpful to those
responsible for reaching policy decisions.
2657. Robertson, Ross M. History of the Ameri-
can economy. 2d ed. New York, Harcourt,
Brace & World [1964] 630 p. illus.
64—15591 HCio3.R58 1964
Bibliography: p. 661—677.
An introductory textbook by a professor of eco-
nomics at the University of Indiana. The author
traces and explains changes in economic institu-
tions, analyzes economic growth, and tests proposi-
tions of economic theory. He concludes that
although in the past the American market system
has performed the function of allocating basic
resources with a high degree of efficiency, in the
future increased government intervention will be
necessary. American Economic History (New
York, McGraw-Hill, 1961. 560 p.), edited by
Seymour E. Harris, is an anthology of articles
relating the past to the present. The Economic
Growth of the United States, 7790— /S6o (Engle-
wood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall, 1961. 304 p.), by
Douglass C. North, reveals the relationship between
growth and the evolution of a market economy in
which the behavior of prices of goods, services,
and productive factors was the major element in
any explanation of economic change. In The Roots
of American Economic Growth, 1607—1861; an
Essay in Social Causation (New York, Harper &
Row [1965] 234 p.), Stuart W. Bruchey finds
the origins of American industrialism to be in
"community will and acts of government, the
structure of society and its values, knowledge and
education, attitudes toward technological change,
the actions of private investors, and the effects of
widening markets."
B. Other General Works
2658. Berle, Adolf A. The American economic
republic. New York, Harcourt, Brace &
World [1965] xxi, 247 p. (A Harvest book,
HB83) 65-7509 HBii9.A2B4 1965
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 219-238).
An outline of the theory and practice of the
American economic system and the role of gov-
ernment in the economy. The author deals succes-
sively with theory, organization and structure, and
underlying social values. He strongly discounts
economic determinism. "Morals, culture, education,
and their development and expansion," he main-
tains, "are not the product of an economic system.
They are the motives, the drawing power, and the
causes of its being." The same author's Power
Without Property (New York, Harcourt, Brace
[1959] 184 p.) explores a relatively new trend in
American corporate organization — the separation
of ownership from control. In Challenge to Afflu-
ence, rev. and expanded ed. (New York, Vintage
Books [1965] 183 p.), Gunnar Myrdal proposes
reforms for the American economic system.
2659. Edwards, Edgar O., ed. The Nation's eco-
nomic objectives. [Chicago] Published for
ECONOMIC LIFE / 413
William Marsh Rice University by University of
Chicago Press [1964] 167 p. (Rice University
semicentennial publications)
64—15816 HCio6.5.E39
Bibliographical footnotes.
Eight previously unpublished essays by well-
known economists appraising economic objectives,
their origins and evolution, and the conditions
necessary for their fulfillment. The authors deal
with such national goals as full employment, sta-
bility, international cooperation, social and econom-
ic security, and economic freedom, and draw
comparisons between the United States and other
countries. Sumner H. Slichter's Potentials of the
American Economy; Selected Essays (Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1961. 467 p. Wertheim
publications in industrial relations), edited by John
T. Dunlop, reflects the major fields of interest
and the persistently optimistic views of a leading
American economist (1892—1959).
2660. Fainsod, Merle, Lincoln Gordon, and Joseph
C. Palamountain. Government and the
American economy. 3d ed. New York, Norton
[1959] 996 p. 59—6084 HD36i6.U47F3 1959
"Selected readings": p. 929—949.
An updated edition of no. 5885 in the 1960 Guide.
A textbook with a slightly different emphasis is
Business, Government and Public Policy (Prince-
ton, N.J., Van Nostrand [Ci964] 461 p. Van
Nostrand series in business administration and eco-
nomics), by Asher Isaacs and Reuben E. Slesinger.
2661. Fishman, Betty G., and Leo Fishman. The
American economy. Princeton, N.J., Van
Nostrand [1962] 822 p. (Van Nostrand series
in business administration and economics)
62—4085 HB 1 71.5^56
A textbook for introductory courses at the college
level, in which the authors concentrate on topics
viewed as likely to be most relevant to the everyday
life of the student after he leaves college.
2662. Tennessee Valley Authority. TVA: the first
twenty years; a staff report. Edited by
Roscoe C. Martin. [University, Ala.] University
of Alabama Press, 1956. 282 p. illus.
56—13072 HN79.Ai35A54
Essays analyzing the Tennessee Valley Author-
ity's legal foundations, general objectives, and
worldwide influence. Together, they summarize
what has been accomplished in flood control — the
main reason for the agency's establishment — as well
as in such areas as fertilizer research, reforestation,
farm cooperatives, malaria and stream pollution
control, and the development of recreational re-
sources. Because of its achievements, the TVA
project has been visited and studied by representa-
tives of many underdeveloped countries interested
in techniques of regional development.
C. Industry: General
2663. Adams, Walter, ed. The structure of Amer-
ican industry; some case studies. 3d ed.
New York, Macmillan [1961] 603 p.
61—5944 HCio6.A34 1961
Suggested readings at the ends of chapters.
An updated edition of no. 5901 in the 1960 Guide.
Alfred D. Chandler's Strategy and Structure: Chap-
ters in the History of the Industrial Enterprise
(Cambridge, M.I.T. Press, 1962. 463 p. M.I.T.
Press research monographs) reveals the evolution
of industrial organization citing four corporations
— General Motors, Standard Oil of New Jersey,
Du Pont, and Sears, Roebuck — which pioneered in
adopting new structures to meet changing needs.
In The Great Organizers (New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1960. 277 p.), Ernest Dale reexamines some
of the foundations of organization theory by analyz-
ing the work of several men who played leading
roles in organizing such companies as Du Pont,
General Motors, and Westinghouse.
2664. Glover, John G., and Rudolph L. Lagai, eds.
The development of American industries,
their economic significance. 4th ed. New York,
Simmons-Boardman [1959] 835 p.
59-7035 HCio3.G5 1959
An updated edition of no. 5906 in the 1960 Guide.
Wolfgang P. Strassmann's Risf^ and Technological
Innovation; American Manufacturing Methods
During the Nineteenth Century (Ithaca, N.Y., Cor-
nell University Press [1959] 249 p.) is con-
cerned with the interaction of two social forces —
business enterprise and technological change —
which produced the industrial revolution.
414 /A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
D. Industry: Special
2665. Belden, Thomas G., and Marva R. Belden.
The lengthening shadow; the life of Thomas
J. Watson. Boston, Little, Brown [1962] 332 p.
61—8065 £109999.694152
"A note on the sources": p. [319] "Selected
bibliography": p. [321] — [327]
Watson (1874-1956), founder and president of
IBM, started as a bookkeeper at $6 a week in
Painted Post, N.Y., after a year at a business college.
Following a stormy career with the National Cash
Register Company, he joined a small firm in a shaky
financial condition, the Computing-Tabulating-
Recording Company, of which he became president.
Changing the company name in 1924 to Interna-
tional Business Machines, he emphasized the im-
portance of the individual, internationalism, faith
in democracy and capitalism, and the family spirit
in business. Successfully opposing labor unions, he
advocated loyalty to the company. IBM prospered
during the New Deal years and especially during
World War II. Watson's personal assets reached
nearly a hundred million dollars. "World Peace
through World Trade" summarized his philosophy
and became the slogan of IBM and the International
Chamber of Commerce, of which he served as
president.
2666. Kogan, Herman. The long white line; the
story of Abbott Laboratories. New York,
Random House [1963] 309 p. illus.
63-19530 RS68.A2K6
Bibliography: p. 293—295.
Wallace C. Abbott (1857—1921) was a Vermont
farm boy who belatedly completed his education
and obtained his M.D. degree from the University
of Michigan at the age of 28. The next year he
bought a firm consisting of a medical practice and
a drugstore in Ravenswood, then a suburb of
Chicago. Here he embarked on the manufacture
of "dosimetric granules," each containing a pre-
cise quantity of an active drug within a sugar coat-
ing. By 1894 his business had grown into the
Abbott Alkaloidal Company with its own publish-
ing house and magazine. In 1914 the name was
changed to Abbott Laboratories. After World War
I the firm was in a position to build a new 26-acre
plant in North Chicago and to absorb other drug
manufacturers in Philadelphia, St. Louis, and Indi-
anapolis. Recent products include Sucaryl for diet-
ers and such antibiotics as Erythrocin and Spontin.
The Chemical Industry: Viewpoints and Perspec-
tives (New York, Interscience ['1963] 426 p.),
edited by Conrad Berenson, presents 47 selections
dealing with the commercial activities of the chemi-
cal process industries.
2667. Leeston, Alfred M., John A. Crichton, and
John C. Jacobs. The dynamic natural gas
industry; the description of an American industry
from the historical, technical, legal, financial, and
economic standpoints. Norman, University of
Oklahoma Press [1963] 464 p. illus.
62-16486 TP723.L37
Bibliography: p. 424—450.
The natural gas industry began in this country
in the village of Fredonia, N.Y., where the first well
was completed in 1821. Although natural gas had
been discovered and employed for fuel in the
Orient many centuries before, it first became a
primary source of energy in the United States.
The principal producers in the early stages were the
Eastern States, with the Pittsburgh area of western
Pennsylvania leading in the production and con-
sumption of natural gas in 1885. Today the South-
west is the Nation's chief source of supply. The
authors describe the gas industry "as it is, rather
than as it ought to be." Their basic economic
position is that "the most important factor in the
growth of the natural gas industry is the freedom
of the markets in which this industry operates."
Another major fuel-supplying industry is the sub-
ject of Carroll L. Christenson's Economic Redevel-
opment in Bituminous Coal; the Special Case of
Technological Advance in United States Coal Mines,
7930—7960 (Cambridge, Harvard University Press,
1962. 312 p. Wertheim publications in industrial
relations).
2668. McDonald, Forrest. Insull. [Chicago]
University of Chicago Press [1962] 350 p.
62-18110 CT275.I6M3
Bibliographical footnotes.
Samuel Insull (1859—1938), beginning his career
as Thomas A. Edison's private secretary, became
"America's most powerful businessman of the
twenties — and its most publicized businessman vil-
lain in the early thirties." Arriving in 1881 from
London at the inception of the electrical industry,
Insull assumed charge of Edison's business ventures.
He initiated the centralized electric business, orga-
ECONOMIC LIFE
/ 415
nized the Edison General Electric Company, and
worked out a system of product distribution which
much of American industry copied. David G.
Loth's Swope of G.E. (New York, Simon & Schu-
ster, 1958. 309 p.) is the biography of Gerard
Swope (1872—1957), who, as president of General
Electric, initiated the proposals of unemployment
insurance and social security which influenced the
New Deal. The Economics of the Electrical Ma-
chinery Industry ([New York] New York Uni-
versity Press, 1962. 374 p.), by Jules Backman, is
a study of the fourth-largest industry in the United
States.
2669. Riley, John J. A history of the American
soft drink industry; bottled carbonated bev-
erages, 1807—1957. Washington, American Bot-
tlers of Carbonated Beverages, 1958. 302 p. illus.
58—49342 HD9348.U52R49
Bibliographical references included in "Supple-
mentary notes to the chapters" (p. [2191—240).
PARTIAL CONTENTS. — pt. i. The evolution of the
American flavored soft drink, and of the terminol-
ogy.— pt. 2. The European development of simu-
lated effervescent waters during the early iSoo's. —
pt. 3. The early development of the flavored car-
bonated beverage in America, 1807—1900. — pt. 4.
The American industry in the twentieth century
and its commercial development, 1900—1957. — pt.
5. The American industry in the twentieth cen-
tury and its mechanical development, 1900—1957. —
pt. 6. The literature, trade press, and industry asso-
ciations.— pt. 7. Chronology of industry back-
ground and development: 1807—1957. The Big
Drin\; the Story of Coca-Cola (New York, Random
House [1960] 174 p.), by Ely J. Kahn, is an
account of an American soft drink which can be
found almost anywhere in the world today. In
Cornflake Crusade (New York, Rinehart LI957]
305 p.) Gerald Carson views the American cereal
industry as a direct offspring of the 19th-century
Seventh-day Adventist religious movement.
2670. Temin, Peter. Iron and steel in nineteenth-
century America, an economic inquiry.
Cambridge, M.I.T. Press, Massachusetts Institute of
Technology [1964] 304 p. (M.I.T. monographs
in economics) 64—22211 HD951 5/1*4
Bibliography: p. 286—297.
From 1830 to 1900 the production of rails and
the use of the Bessemer converter were the influ-
ences which determined the direction of the devel-
opment of the iron and steel industry. The author's
inquiry concerns the interaction of these two influ-
ences with gradual and cumulative processes that
typify much of the industrialization of the I9th
century and that demonstrate the increasing sophis-
tication in the use of heat and the growing demand
for iron and steel. In his analysis, Temin concen-
trates on three variables: quantity and composition
of production, methods of production, and the
nature of the firms in the industry.
2671. Williamson, Harold F., and others. The
American petroleum industry. Evanston
[111.] Northwestern University Press [1959—63]
2 v. illus. 59-12043 HD9565.W5
Bibliographical references included in "End-
notes."
CONTENTS. — v. i. The age of illumination,
1859—1899. — v. 2. The age of energy, 1899—1959.
The first volume "traces the story of American
petroleum, from its inception as the medicinal
by-product of salt well operations through the peak
of its subsequent development as a source of illumi-
nation for a large portion of the world's popula-
tion"; the second "is an account of the transforma-
tion of the industry from its primary role as a
producer of illuminants to its current status as a
major supplier of energy." Enterprise in Oil; a
History of Shell in the United States (New York,
Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1957. 815 p.), by Ken-
dall Beaton; History of Humble Oil & Refining
Company; a Study in Industrial Growth (New
York, Harper ["1959] 769 p.), by Henrietta M.
Larson and Kenneth W. Porter; and Formative
Years in the Far West; a History of Standard Oil
Company of California and Predecessors Through
79/9 (New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts [1962]
694 p.), by Gerald T. White, portray the develop-
ment of individual oil companies.
E. Transportation: General
2672. Pegrum, Dudley F. Transportation: eco-
nomics and public policy. Homewood, 111.
R. D. Irwin, 1963. 625 p. illus. (The Irwin
series in economics) 63—8442 HE2o6.P4
"Selected references for further reading": p. 60 1—
610.
The author reviews the historical development of
transportation systems, discusses transportation as
416 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
an economic activity, delineates its place in the
American economy, explains the basic economic
principles which bear on transportation, applies
them to an analysis of the present structure, traces
the development of regulation, describes national
transportation policy, and suggests solutions to the
basic problems of transportation in large metropoli-
tan areas. Issues in Transportation Economics
(Columbus, Ohio, C. E. Merrill Books [1965]
349 p.), edited by Karl M. Ruppenthal, is devoted
entirely to current problems in the field.
F. Transportation: Special
2673. Carr, Albert H. Z. John D. Rockefeller's
secret weapon. New York, McGraw-Hill
[1962] 383 p. 62—10598 CT275.R75C3
Bibliography: p. 361—368.
The first and crucial element of Rockefeller's
ascendancy in the oil industry was his deft manipu-
lation of his "secret weapon," the tank car. He
utilized the Union Tank Car Company to give the
Standard Oil Company a commanding lead over
independent refiners, who had to ship oil in costly
barrels. Although the Union Tank Car Company
became less dominant in the industry after World
War I, it experienced a renascence in the late 1950'$.
In The Development of American Petroleum Pipe-
lines; a Study in Private Enterprise and Public
Policy, 1862-1906 (Ithaca, N.Y., Published for the
American Historical Association [by] Cornell Uni-
versity Press [1956] 307 p.), Arthur M. Johnson
indicates the importance of the role of pipelines in
the formative period of the petroleum industry.
2674. Caves, Richard E. Air transport and its
regulators; an industry study. Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1962. 479 p. illus.
(Harvard economic studies, v. 120)
62—17216 TL52I.C39
Bibliography: p. [453]— 469.
An analysis of the operations of domestic passen-
ger airlines in the United States and of their regu-
lation by the Civil Aeronautics Board under the
authority of the Civil Aeronautics Act of 1938.
The author outlines the major economic elements
of the air transport industry's market structure,
examines the policies of the Civil Aeronautics
Board, describes the airlines' patterns of market
conduct, assesses the industry's efficiency, and sug-
gests changes in the Civil Aeronautics Board's
policies that might improve the airlines' perform-
ance.
2675. Cranmer, Horace Jerome. New Jersey in
the automobile age; a history of transporta-
tion. Princeton, N.J., Van Nostrand, 1964. 139 p.
illus. (The New Jersey historical series, v. 23)
65-293 HE2I3.N5C7
"Bibliographical note": p. 129—131.
"The history of America in the nineteenth
century may be told in terms of the impact of
transportation innovations on a predominantly agri-
cultural economy. The advent of turnpikes, canals,
steamboats, and above all, railroads worked a tre-
mendous transformation. The essence of this trans-
formation lay in so drastically reducing transport
costs as to create a single nation-wide market within
which all producers could compete." The author
stresses the importance of government planning
and regulation in the development of ports and
harbors; in the building of highways, tunnels,
bridges, and airports; and in the operation of rail-
roads and pipelines. He asserts that the solution to
New Jersey's transportation problem lies in mass
transit rather than in the expansion of highway,
river crossing, and parking facilities. "Diversion
of freight traffic from over-crowded roads to under-
utilized rails would provide the least expensive
solution to New Jersey's transportation problem in
the automobile age."
2676. Cutler, Carl C. Queens of the western
ocean; the story of America's mail and
passenger sailing lines. With a foreword by Chest-
er W. Nimitz. Annapolis, U.S. Naval Institute
[1961] xxi, 672 p. illus. 61—11247 HE745.C8
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 360-367).
The establishment of the Black Ball Line's first
regularly scheduled sailings in 1818 marked the
beginning of an era of travel for culture and
pleasure. In the following 4o-year period, mail and
passenger ships improved greatly in quality and
comfort. This history spans the period from 1607
to 1860, after which steamboats largely displaced
sailing ships. The author admires the sailing ves-
sels and their crews and considers their disappear-
ance a distinct loss. Six appendixes, totaling more
than 200 pages, offer details about American sailing
ECONOMIC LIFE
/ 417
vessels, their tonnages, owners, captains, and event-
ual fates. In Seaports South of Sahara; the Achieve-
ments of an American Steamship Service (New
York, Appleton-Century-Crofts [1959] 316 p.),
Robert G. Albion focuses on the Farrell Lines in
tracing the evolution of the United States-African
trade and describing American maritime policy
since 1914. In United States Shipping Policy (New
York, Published for the Council on Foreign Rela-
tions by Harper, 1956. 230 p. Publications of the
Council on Foreign Relations), Wytze Gorter
argues that Government policies toward shipping
need extensive revision.
2677. Goodrich, Carter. Government promotion
of American canals and railroads, 1800—
1890. New York, Columbia University Press, 1960.
382 p. map. 60—6546 HEio5i.G6
Bibliography: p. [3531-364.
Public promotion of internal improvements was a
national phenomenon throughout the i9th century
and played a role in the development of every part
of the Union. The author concentrates on the
controversial issues of competition and cooperation
between government and business in the creation
of canals and railroads. He is also the editor of a
later work, Canals and American Economic Devel-
opment (New York, Columbia University Press,
1961. 303 p.), which emphasizes the Erie Canal,
the Pennsylvania Mainline, and the New Jersey
Canals. The Long Haul West; the Great Canal
Era, 1817—1850 (New York, Putnam [1958] 320
p.), by Madeline S. Waggoner, is a colorful descrip-
tion of the canal era and especially of the planning,
financing, building, and operation of the Erie Canal.
2678. Hilton, George W., and John F. Due. The
electric interurban railways in America.
Stanford, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1960.
463. p. illus. 60—5383 HE445I.H55
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. [4271—436) "Bibliographical note": p. [437]
"The electric interburban railway played a major
but short-lived role in the development of intercity
passenger transport. Basically, it provided a transi-
tional step from almost sole reliance upon the steam
railroad to an almost equally complete dependence
on the automobile." The rapid growth of the inter-
urbans took place between 1901 and 1918. By
1918 a decline set in, and the industry was virtually
annihilated by the decade of the Great Depression.
Since the interburbans never experienced a period
of prolonged prosperity, their abandonment was
finally brought about by the need for increased
capital expenditures for repairs and replacements
and for the payment of major damage claims. This
study offers a general history of the industry and
capsule histories of individual lines. The Inter-
urban Era ([Milwaukee] Kalmbach [1961] 432
p.), by William D. Middleton, is a pictorial history
of the industry.
2679. McCague, James. Moguls and iron men;
the story of the first transcontinental rail-
road. New York, Harper & Row [1964] 392 p.
illus. 64—18061 HE279I.C455M3
Bibliography: p. 379—382.
As a financial and an engineering feat and as a
symbol of national unity, the building of the trans-
continental railroad was an event which stirred con-
temporaries deeply. The author describes this
formidable enterprise, which culminated in the
meeting of the Central Pacific, building eastward,
and the Union Pacific, building westward. He
questions the generally accepted story of the excess
profits made by the Credit Mobilier, the Union
Pacific's construction contractor. A Worf( of
Giants; Building the First Transcontinental Rail-
road (New York, McGraw-Hill [1962] 367 p.),
by Wesley S. Griswold, is extensively documented
and contains numerous photographs. In Burling-
ton Route; a History of the Burlington Lines (New
York, Knopf, 1965. 623 p.), Richard C. Overton
recounts the story of a 1 2-mile branch line that was
built near Chicago in 1849 and that grew to a
system of more than 8,500 miles. Rebel of the
Rockies; a History of the Denver and Rio Grande
Western Railroad (New Haven, Yale University
Press, 1962. 395 p. Yale Western Americana series,
[2] ), by Robert G. Athearn, is a study of railroad-
ing in the Colorado Rockies.
2680. Nevins, Allan. Ford. By Allan Nevins
with the collaboration of Frank Ernest Hill.
New York, Scribner, 1954— [63] 3 v. illus.
54-6305 CT275.F68N37
Bibliographical footnotes. Bibliography: v. i, p.
653—664.
CONTENTS. — i. The times, the man, the com-
pany.— 2. Expansion and challenge, 1915—1933.
— [3] Decline and rebirth, 1933—1962.
The first two volumes are no. 5939 in the 1960
Guide; the third concludes the study. In My Years
With General Motors (Garden City, N.Y., Double-
day, 1964 [Ci963] 472 p.), Alfred P. Sloan tells
of his long association with the organization as
president and as chairman of the board.
2681. Rae, John B. American automobile manu-
facturers: the first forty years. Philadelphia,
Chilton Co., Book Division [1959] 223 p.
59—5769
"Notes on sources": p. 209—212.
418 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
A study of management leadership and the way
it met challenges and problems in the automobile
industry. The author gives detailed information
regarding the inventors of some of the early cars
and the managers who formed the automobile
companies which emerged as industrial giants. He
considers the relationship between technological
change and industrial advance in the light of the
sources and availability of capital, the accessibility
of materials and markets, the organization of busi-
ness, and the supply of labor. Frank R. Donovan's
Wheels for a Nation ( [New York] Crowell [1965]
303 p.) reflects American enthusiasm for automo-
biles and reveals aspects of their influence on
American life. Profusely illustrated, Esquire's
American Autos and Their Makers ( [New York,
Esquire, Inc.; distributed by Harper & Row, 1963]
192 p.), by David J. Wilkie, begins with self-
propelled road vehicles in 1769, brings the story
to the present, and reveals designs for the future.
2682. Stover, John F. American railroads. [Chi-
cago] University of Chicago Press [1961]
302 p. illus. (The Chicago history of American
civilization) 61— 8081 HE275I.S7
"Suggested reading": p. 272—281.
A longtime student of railroad history, the author
examines the industry's growth and development,
its role in shaping the course of American history,
and its decline after World War I. He concludes
that a healthy railroad system is still needed and
urges the public, the railroad workers and managers,
and government at all levels to cooperate in re-
creating and maintaining it. Great Railroad Photo-
graphs, US. A. (Berkeley, Calif., Ho well-North
Books, 1964. 243 p.), by Lucius M. Beebe and
Charles Clegg, recalls the romance of the steam
age. In Transcontinental Railway Strategy, 1869—
1893 (Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania
Press [1962] 443 p.), Julius Grodinsky describes
the struggle for control of the limited natural facili-
ties and capital funds for the risky business of
providing pioneer railroad transportation.
2683. Taff, Charles A. Commercial motor trans-
portation. 3d ed. Homewood, 111., R. D.
Irwin, 1961. 701 p. illus.
61—12901 HE5623/T3 1961
Bibliography: p. 677—688.
An updated edition of no. 5942 in the 1960 Guide.
G. Commerce: General
2684. Converse, Paul D., Harvey W. Huegy, and
Robert V. Mitchell. Elements of marketing.
7th ed. Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall
[1965] xv, 710 p. 65—10330 HF54I5.C55 1965
Bibliographical foontotes.
An updated edition of no. 5945 in the 1960 Guide.
2685. Fortune. Marketing: change and exchange;
readings from Fortune. Edited by H. C.
Barksdale. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston
[1964] 322 p. illus. 64—19809 HF54I5.F567
These articles "describe and define the dramatic
changes that are taking place in markets and
products. They also report the adjustments being
made in marketing institutions and distribution
processes to adapt to new conditions. Together
they present a picture of marketing — change and
exchange — in four dimensions: markets, products,
institutions, and processes." In The Distribution
Revolution (New York, I. Washburn [1960] 150
p.), Walter Hoving maintains that the field of
distribution rather than that of production offers
the most promising source of solutions to the
economic problems of the world.
2686. Richert, Gottlieb Henry, Warren G. Meyer,
and Peter G. Haines. Retailing; principles
and practices. 4th ed. New York, Gregg Pub.
Division, McGraw-Hill [1962] 504 p. illus.
61-10138 HF5429-R52 1962
An updated edition of no. 5949 in the 1960 Guide.
ECONOMIC LIFE / 419
H. Commerce: Special
2687. Britt, Steuart H. The spenders. New York,
McGraw-Hill, 1960. 293 p. (McGraw-Hill
series in marketing and advertising)
60-1 4994 HC 1 1 0.C6B7
"Some suggested readings": p. 267—271.
A psychologist as well as a professor of marketing
and advertising, the author views American busi-
ness as the servant of the American consumer. He
outlines the motives, wants, and needs of the
typical consumer, his opportunities for spending
his money and leisure, and the way in which he
spends them. Brand images, packaging, advertis-
ing, and pricing are shown to affect the success or
failure of products. Britt also investigates the
present use and possible future applications of
marketing and motivation research. In The Waste
Makers (New York, D. McKay [1960] 340 p.),
Vance O. Packard demonstrates how waste and
consumption have become virtues in American
society. He is especially critical of industry's shoddy
construction of furniture; the planned obsolescence
of cars, electrical appliances, and other products;
and the consequent depletion of natural resources.
The Consumer in Our Economy (Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin [1962] 473 p.), by David B. Hamilton,
is a textbook that applies the tools of sociology
and anthropology along with those of economics.
2688. Fuller, Alfred C. A foot in the door; the
life appraisal of the original Fuller brush
man [by] Alfred C. Fuller as told to Hartzell
Spence. New York, McGraw-Hill [1960] 250 p.
illus. 60-14996 HD9999.B865F84
The autobiography of a poor farm boy who
founded the Fuller Brush Company, one of the
largest enterprises of its kind in the world. A
modest man and a devout Christion Scientist, the
author attributes his success to the unfailing guid-
ance of God. Imbued with an idealistic and dedi-
cated spirit, he considers himself to have been "a
benefactor to the housewives, a crusader against
unsanitary kitchens and inadequately cleaned
homes." He listened to suggestions for improve-
ments from his customers and manufactured his
wares accordingly. The Charles Ilfeld Company; a
Study of the Rise and Decline of Mercantile Capital-
ism in New Mexico (Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1961. 431 p. Harvard studies in
business history, 20), by William J. Parish, is a
history of a mercantile firm which operated in the
Southwest for almost a century, exemplifying the
contribution of businessmen in building and main-
taining the economic life of a region. In Bergdorfs
on the Plaza; the Story of Bergdorf Goodman and
a Half-Century of American Fashion (New York,
Knopf, 1956. 244 p.), Booton Herndon traces
simultaneously the rise of Edwin Goodman from a
modest tailor to an international fashion authority
and the history of a store representing 50 years of
good taste in women's fashions.
2689. Humphrey, Don D. The United States
and the Common Market; a background
study. New York, Praeger [1962] 176 p. (Books
that matter) 62-18585 HFi 455^83
Bibliographical footnotes.
An examination of the United States tariff and
trade program from the time of the Trade Agree-
ments Act of 1934 to the trade expansion bill
proposed by President Kennedy in 1962 and en-
acted into law. The author argues strongly in
favor of tariff reduction and trade expansion as the
chief devices for stimulating competition and eco-
nomic growth in this country. American Business
and Public Policy; the Politics of Foreign Trade
(New York, Atherton Press, 1963. 499 p. The
Atherton Press political science series), by Raymond
A. Bauer, Ithiel de Sola Pool, and Lewis A. Dexter,
covers the extensions of the Trade Agreements Act
under Presidents Eisenhower and Kennedy. In
Raw Materials; a Study of American Policy (New
York, Published for the Council on Foreign Rela-
tions by Harper, 1958. 403 p.), Percy W. Bidwell
recounts the postwar efforts of producers in the
United States to protect themselves from foreign
competition. In The European Community and
American Trade; a Study in Atlantic Economics
and Policy (New York, Published for the Council
on Foreign Relations by Praeger [1965, Ci964]
188 p.), Randall W. Hinshaw views the Common
Market and related developments in Europe from
the American standpoint.
2690. Lebhar, Godfrey M. Chain stores in Amer-
ica, 1859—1962. 3d ed. New York, Chain
Store Pub. Corp. [1963] 430 p. illus.
63-2856 HF5468.L332 1963
Bibliographical footnotes.
42O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
An updated edition of no. 5961 in the 1960 Guide.
In A History of the Department Store (New
York, Macmillan, 1960. 387 p.), John W. Ferry
states that the improved economic conditions of the
last century, the entrance of women into the
labor market, and the expansion of transportation
facilities have provided impetus for the department
store. The United States and the British Common-
wealth are regarded as having set the world pattern.
And the Price is Right (Cleveland, World Pub. Co.
[1958] 318 p.), by Margaret C. Harriman, is a
humorous account of the first hundred years of
R. H. Macy and Company, one of the largest and
best known department stores in the world.
2691. Pares, Richard. Yankees and Creoles; the
trade between North America and the West
Indies before the American Revolution. London,
New York, Longmans, Green [1956] 168 p. illus.
56—1249 HF3O74-P3
Bibliographical footnotes.
Without the trade which was carried on before
the American Revolution between North America
and the West Indies, "the sugar colonies could not
have existed and the North American colonies
could not have developed." The author's objective
is "to throw some new light on the people who
conducted this trade, the purposes for which they
conducted it, and the methods by which they did
so." In The Maritime Commerce of Colonial Phila-
delphia (Madison, State Historical Society of Wis-
consin for the Dept. of History, University of
Wisconsin, 1963. 312 p.), Arthur L. Jensen con-
cludes that the pre-Revolutionary period "saw most
Philadelphia merchants trying to walk gingerly on
a thin line between abject submission to British
policies which they considered unwise and unjust
and support of measures of opposition which they
feared could lead only to bloodshed, separation from
the mother country, and eventual economic ruin."
Robert A. Davison's Isaac Hicf^s; New Yor^ Mer-
chant and Quaker, 1767—1820 (Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1964. 217 p. Harvard
studies in business history, 22) is the story of a
businessman whose loyalty to Quaker values was
no handicap to financial success.
2692. Phillips, Paul C. The fur trade. With
concluding chapters by J. W. Smurr. Nor-
man, University of Oklahoma Press [1961] 2 v.
illus. 61—6499 HD9944-A2P47
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 577—656.
A study of the vast economic and geographical
extent of the fur trade from the i6th century
onward, of its effect on business and politics in the
Western Hemisphere, Europe, and Asia, and of the
international problems arising from it. "Rivalries
for the fur trade produced many diplomatic crises,
and there were indications that furs were important
in the economic and political imperialism that
guided much of the colonization of North Amer-
ica." The author, who was working on the book's
concluding chapters at the time of his death in
1956, interprets the roles of John Jacob Astor and
other major figures and describes the operations of
fur companies, trading organizations, and trappers.
In A Majority of Scoundrels; an Informal History
of the Rocl(y Mountain Fur Company (New York,
Harper [1961] 432 p.) Don Berry describes a fur
company which became a legend, although it was
short lived and never produced large profits.
2693. Sandage, Charles H., and Vernon R. Fry-
burger. Advertising: theory and practice.
6th ed. Homewood, 111., R. D. Irwin, 1963. 663 p.
illus. 63-16893 HF5823.S25 1963
Bibliographical footnotes.
An updated edition of no. 5962 in the 1960 Guide.
In The Responsibilities of American Advertising;
Private Control and Public Influence, 7920—7940
(New Haven, Yale University Press, 1958. 232 p.
Yale publications in American studies, 2), Otis A.
Pease analyzes the extent to which concepts of
public responsibility existed in national advertising
in newspapers and magazines for a 2O-year period.
In The Story of Advertising (New York, Ronald
Press [1958] 512 p.), James P. Wood traces the
long and varied history of advertising from its
origins with the simple street criers of ancient
Greece and Rome to the modern and complex
business it is today. The Golden Fleece; Selling the
Good Life to Americans (New York, Macmillan
[1963] 305 p.) is a critical examination of the
advertising business by Joseph J. Seldin, owner of
an agency.
ECONOMIC LIFE / 42!
I. Finance: General
2694. Chandler, Lester V. The economics of
money and banking. 4th ed. New York,
Harper & Row [1964] xiv, 606 p. illus.
64—12793 HG22I.C448 1964
Selected readings at the ends of chapters.
An updated edition of no. 5975 in the 1960 Guide.
In Money, Banking, and Economic Welfare (New
York, McGraw-Hill, 1960. 578 p.), Paul B. Tres-
cott offers an analysis intended in part to serve as a
guide for future monetary and financial policies.
The Management of Money; a Survey of American
Experience (Chicago, Rand McNally [1964] 422
p. Rand McNally economics series), by Harold
Barger, emphasizes the period from 1913, when the
Federal Reserve System was established, to the
present.
2695. Guthmann, Harry G., and Herbert E.
Dougall. Corporate financial policy. 4th
ed. Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall, 1962.
776 p. illus. 62-18830 HG40H.G85 1962
"Selected reference list": p. 693—747.
An updated edition of no. 5967 in the 1960 Guide.
2696. Hansen, Alvin H. Business cycles and
national income. Expanded ed. With a
revised bibliography by Richard V. Clemence.
New York, Norton [1964] xx, 721 p. illus.
63—21708 HB37ii.H3i2 1964
Bibliography: p. 699—710.
The author, an advocate of Keynesian economics
with its emphasis on investment as the strategic
element in business, brings together from his pre-
vious writings his most important ideas on business
cycles, national income, and proposed policies for
avoiding cyclical fluctuations. In Capital in the
American Economy (Princeton, N.J., Princeton
University Press, 1961. 664 p. National Bureau
of Economic Research. Studies in capital formation
and financing, 9), Simon S. Kuznets examines
long term trends in capital formation (since 1870)
and in financing (since 1900). In The National
Wealth of the United States in the Postwar Period
(Princeton, [N.J.] Princeton University Press, 1962.
434 p. National Bureau of Economic Research.
Studies in capital formation and financing, 10),
Raymond W. Goldsmith estimates the national
wealth in the period from 1945 through 1958 and
offers his findings in annotated, summarized tables.
2697. Sharp, Ansel M., and Bernard F. Sliger.
Public finance; an introduction to the study
of the public economy. Home wood, 111., Dorsey
Press, 1964. 411 p. illus. (The Dorsey series in
economics) 64—11715 ^257.847
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
"The study of economics is the study of man
making decisions in a world where there is a scar-
city of resources relative to human wants." This
general textbook surveys governmental decision-
making in regard to scarce resources. The author
inquires into the "facts, techniques, principles, the-
ories, rules, and policies" related to taxing, borrow-
ing, and spending, which are viewed as "the
operations of government pertaining to the use of
scarce resources." In Federal Lending and Eco-
nomic Stability (Washington, Brookings Institution
[1965] 185 p.), George F. Break explores the
economic consequences of direct lending by the
Federal Government, especially the possibilities of
its use to stabilize the economy.
2698. Studenski, Paul, and Herman E. Krooss.
Financial history of the United States: fiscal,
monetary, banking, and tariff, including financial
administration and State and local finance, ad ed.
New York, McGraw-Hill [1963] 605 p.
62-21575 HG 1 81.883 *963
Bibliography: p. 489—503.
An updated edition of no. 5973 in the 1960 Guide.
Milton Friedman and Anna J. Schwartz in A
Monetary History of the United States, 1867—1960
(Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1963. 860
p. National Bureau of Economic Research. Studies
in business cycles, 12) support the quantity theory
of money, which holds that the stock of money is
the major determinant of economic history. The
authors trace the changes in the stock of money in
the United States for almost a century and analyze
the reflex influences exerted on the course of events.
A History of the Dollar (New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1957. 308 p.), by Arthur Nussbaum,
is concerned with the political, economic, and psy-
chological factors underlying the monetary history
of the United States.
422 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
J. Finance: Special
2699. Aubrey, Henry G. The dollar in world
affairs: an essay in international financial
policy. New York, Published for the Council on
Foreign Relations by Harper & Row [1964] 295 p.
63-21750 HG3883.U7A85
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 264-277).
An interpretation of the relationship between the
strength of the dollar in world finance and the
role of the United States in world affairs. In the
author's opinion, the dollar "cannot be stronger —
and need not be weaker — than the purpose this
country has set itself in the world, and while these
tasks — toward the less developed countries, the
Communist bloc, and within the Western commu-
nity — are acknowledged as the West's common ob-
jectives, the dollar will serve as a common, not just
a national, financial instrument." Thirteen collabo-
rators offer their views in The Dollar in Crisis
(New York, Harcourt, Brace & World [1961]
309 p.), edited by Seymour E. Harris.
2700. Burch, Philip H. Highway revenue and
expenditure policy in the United States.
New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers University Press
[1962] xiv, 315 p. illus. 62-13759 ^£355.68
Bibliography: p. 288—305.
A description and analysis of policies pursued by
Federal, State, and local governments. Before 1934,
highway planning in the United States was con-
ducted on an intermittent basis. In that year
Congress passed the Hayden-Cartwright Act, sec-
tion ii of which stipulated that up to i!/2 percent
of a State's Federal aid allotment could be used for
highway planning and research. After World War
II, in particular, highway planning surveys served
as guides for remedying deficiences in State road
networks. The author focuses primary attention
on the problem of disbursement of funds, especially
at the State level. He observes that each State's
highway department is perhaps involved in more
bitter disputes than any other State agency. Public
emotion is readily aroused over questions of which
roads should be built or improved first and how
much money should be appropriated.
2701. De Bedts, Ralph F. The New Deal's SEC:
the formative years. New York, Columbia
University Press, 1964. 226 p.
64-14236 HG4556.U6D38
Bibliography: p. [2071—217.
The first Securities and Exchange Commission
was appointed by President Franklin D. Roosevelt
in 1934. Established to protect the investing public,
the SEC became one of the most influential of the
New Deal reform agencies. The author "attempts
to consider not only the historical origins and ante-
cedents of the SEC but also its growth and forma-
tive years in the light of the financial and political
happenings of the times and in relationship to the
many individuals involved." A Study of Mutual
Funds (Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1962.
595 p. 87th Congress, 2d session. House report
no. 2274), prepared by the Wharton School of Fi-
nance and Commerce of the University of Penn-
sylvania, describes the structure of the industry, the
growth of investment companies, the performance
and market impact of the funds, and the relation-
ship between the funds and their investment
advisers.
2702. Edwards, James D. History of public ac-
counting in the United States. East Lan-
sing, Bureau of Business and Economic Research,
Graduate School of Business Administration, Mich-
igan State University [1960] 368 p. illus. (MSU
business studies, 1960) 60—63369 HF56i6.U5E3
Bibliography: p. 308—327.
Legal recognition was first given the profession
of independent certified public accountant in 1896
in New York State, although the earliest activities
of public accountants antedated the American Revo-
lution. The American Association of Public Ac-
countants, founded in 1886, ultimately became the
American Institute of Certified Public Accountants.
The author develops his narrative chronologically,
beginning with the antecedents of American public
accounting in England and Scotland and conclud-
ing with the recognition of the CPA as a profes-
sional who is often called upon in matters of
business policy. The book is addressed especially
to accountants, students entering the accounting
field, and business historians.
2703. Kimmel, Lewis H. Federal budget and fis-
cal policy, 1789—1958. Washington, Brook-
ings Institution [1959] 337 p.
59—9512 HJ2O5O.K.5
Bibliographical footnotes.
From 1789 to the 1930'$ the Federal budget was
viewed chiefly in terms of money costs, and Gov-
ernment activities were considered a burden on the
ECONOMIC LIFE
/ 423
economy. The annually balanced budget was al-
most universally accepted as a prerequisite for
financial stability and economic growth. As a
consequence of the Depression of the thirties, how-
ever, a revolutionary change in theory and policy
led to the concepts of pump-priming, compensatory
fiscal policy, and the assumption by the Government
of responsibility for economic growth and cyclical
stability. Fiscal theorists today regard the budget
as an instrument of economic policy. A Primer on
Government Spending (New York, Random House
[1963] 120 p.), by Robert L. Heilbroner and
Peter L. Bernstein, attempts to clarify "the words
that frighten us — government spending, deficit
financing, the national debt, growth, inflation — in
clear, vivid, and, above all, simple terms." The
American Way in Taxation: Internal Revenue,
1862-1963 (Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall
[1963] 301 p.), edited by Lillian Doris, is a
historical survey of the Federal tax system and a
recognition of the centennial of the Internal Reve-
nue Service.
2704. Leffler, George L. The stock market. 3d
ed., revised by Loring C. Farwell. New
York, Ronald Press Co. [1963] 654 p. illus.
63—10640 HG455I.L35 1963
Includes bibliography.
A revised edition of no. 5982 in the 1960 Guide.
The Big Board: A History of the New Yor\ Stoc{
Market (New York, Free Press [1965] 395 p.),
by Robert Sobel, concentrates on the New York
Stock Exchange and the men who were central to
American investment banking and brokerage.
Leonard L. Levinson's Wall Street; a Pictorial His-
tory (New York, Ziff-Davis Pub. Co. [1961] 376
p.) is profusely illustrated with prints, photographs,
and cartoons. In Populists, Plungers, and Progres-
sives; a Social History of Stocf^ and Commodity
Speculation, 1890—1936 (Princeton, N. J., Prince-
ton University Press, 1965. 299 p.), Cedric B.
Cowing traces the ideological opposition to stock
market speculation from the efforts of the Populists
to the regulatory legislation of the New Deal.
2705. Maxwell, James A. Financing State and
local governments. Washington, Brookings
Institution [1965] xvii, 276 p. (Brookings Insti-
tution. Studies of government finance)
65—26007 HJ275-M39
Bibliography: p. 263—265.
A nontechnical analysis to help the interested
citizen understand the fiscal problems of his own
State and community. The author discusses the
various ways in which States and localities raise
and spend their money, most of which is allotted to
education, public welfare, health, roads, hospitals,
police, and sanitation; he also recommends courses
of action for the future. Statistical tables are
provided throughout the text and in the appendix.
2706. Mowbray, Albert H., and Ralph H. Blan-
chard. Insurance; its theory and practice in
the United States. 5th ed. New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1961. 617 p. (McGraw-Hill insurance series)
60—13767 HG8o5i.M75 1961
Bibliography: p. 591—597.
An updated edition of no. 5990 in the 1960 Guide.
Frank J. AngelFs Insurance: Principles and Prac-
tices (New York, Ronald Press [1959] 894 p.) is
a textbook suitable for the layman as well as the
college student. The Life Insurance Enterprise,
1885—1910; a Study in the Limits of Corporate
Power (Cambridge, Belknap Press of Harvard Uni-
versity .Press, 1963. 338 p.), by Morton Keller, is
concerned with the quest for power to which the
leaders of the great life insurance companies were
dedicated and with the life insurance business as
a social institution.
2707. Prochnow, Herbert V., ed. The Federal
Reserve System. New York, Harper [1960]
393 p. illus. 60-6767 HG2563.P7
Suggested readings at the ends of chapters.
A collection of articles that together narrate the
history of the Federal Reserve System, describe its
operations, evaluate its place in the Nation's finan-
cial and business structure, analyze its impact on
banks and other types of financial institutions, and
explore its relationship to the economy generally.
In The Federal Reserve and the American Dollar:
Problems and Policies, 1946-1964 (Chapel Hill,
University of North Carolina Press [1965] 321
p.), James L. Knipe traces and evaluates American
monetary management since 1946. In Nicholas
Biddle, Nationalist and Public Banker, 1786-1844
([Chicago] University of Chicago Press [1959]
428 p.), Thomas P. Govan recounts the efforts of
Biddle to influence Presidents Madison and Monroe
to establish the Bank of the United States and his
service as its director and president. Lester V.
Chandler's Benjamin Strong, Central Banker
(Washington, Brookings Institution [1958] 495
p.) is a biography of the Governor of the Federal
Reserve Bank of New York, 1914-28, who played
a strong role in shaping the Federal Reserve System
in its formative years.
2708. Trescott, Paul B. Financing American en-
terprise; the story of commercial banking.
New York, Harper & Row [1963] 304 p.
63-8006 HG247I.T7
424 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 283-292).
A publication commemorating the passage of the
National Currency Act of 1863, which created na-
tional banking in its modern sense and encouraged
the ultimate establishment of approximately 13,000
banks in the commercial banking system. The
author devotes a large portion of his study to an
exposition of the relation between bank credit and
the evolution of the Nation's economy. He deals
at length with the role of banks in the development
of important firms, industries, and categories of
business enterprise. Other aspects of the history of
banks, such as their monetary functions and the
evolution of government regulation, are also
discussed.
2709. Unger, Irwin. The greenback era; a social
and political history of American finance,
1865—1879. Princeton, N.}., Princeton University
Press, 1964. 467 p. 63-18651 HG604.U5
Bibliography: p. 417—441.
The Civil War brought about sweeping financial
changes and made problems of money and banking
the subject of vital national concern. The author
seeks to evaluate the neo-Populist economic theories
of post bellum America. These views, notably pro-
pounded by Charles A. Beard, are essentially dual-
istic (capitalist versus farmer and worker, debtor
versus creditor, East versus West, conservative ver-
sus radical, hard money versus soft money) and are
grounded in economic determinism. Unger argues
that both the dualism and the determinism are
oversimplifications. He also concludes that despite
the changes effected by the Civil War, much of the
prewar structure of power and social prestige
survived.
2710. Williamson, Jeffrey G. American growth
and the balance of payments, 1820—1913; a
study of the long swing. Chapel Hill, University
of North Carolina Press [1964] xviii, 298 p.
64-13563 HG3883.U7W5 1964
Bibliography: p. [288]— 294.
A study of the relationship between the Nation's
internal growth and its balance of payments. The
author examines the movements of goods, gold, and
capital during a period in which "this country's
domestic development was undergoing significant
long waves in its pace of growth." He believes
the accumulated evidence justifies the assumption
of the existence of Kuznets cycles (each approxi-
mately 15 to 20 years in duration) in the Nation's
domestic development, and he uses these cycles as
a chronological framework in his analysis. He
concludes that periods of rapid growth tended to
generate dollar scarcity and that periods of sluggish
growth resulted in dollar surplus. His analysis
is supported by 69 tables and 37 charts.
K. Business: General
2711. Chamberlain, John. The enterprising Amer-
icans; a business history of the United States.
New York, Harper & Row [Ci963] 282 p.
62-9886 HCio6.C52
Bibliography: p. 265—272.
A popular narrative of the achievements of
leading businessmen from the colonial period to the
present. The author treats business as a primary
creative force in this country's development. The
genius of "busy-ness" — the innovations of inventors
and technicians working with profit-seeking enter-
prisers— is viewed as a main factor in economic
growth. Initiative combined with Old World mer-
cantilist traditions and New World opportunities
resulted in a propitious environment for the success
of the American businessman. Much of this ac-
count appeared originally as a series in Fortune
magazine. Thomas C. Cochran's Basic History of
American Business (Princeton, N.J., Van Nostrand
[1959] 191 p. An Anvil original, no. 39) is a
brief survey coupled with documents relating to
the many facets of business life. In American
Business Cycles, 1865—1897 (Chapel Hill, Univer-
sity of North Carolina Press [1959] 244 p.),
Rendigs Pels, concludes that internal influences, as
opposed to influences of an international character,
were primarily responsible for cyclical fluctuations
in the economy.
2712. Dimock, Marshall E. Business and govern-
ment; issues of public policy. 4th ed. New
York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston [1961] 505 p.
illus. 61-7854 HD36i6.U47D5 1961
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
An updated edition of no. 6006 in the 1960 Guide.
Howard R. Smith's Government and Business; a
Study in Economic Evolution (New York, Ron-
ald Press [1958] 802 p.) chronicles "the step-by-
step process through which government acquired
the multitudinous responsibilities it now performs
ECONOMIC LIFE / 425
in connection with economic activities in the United
States."
2713. Eells, Richard S. F. The meaning of mod-
ern business; an introduction to the philos-
ophy of large corporate enterprise. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1960. 427 p.
60-8393 HD273I.E36
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(P- [34 1] -4°3)-
A study of the corporation and its philosophy
of business. The author used two models as the
framework for his analysis of the nature and
functions of the corporate form of enterprise: the
"traditional" corporation which serves the profit
motives of its stockholders and the "metrocorpora-
tion" which has broad social purposes and objec-
tives. As the ideal form of business, he proposes
the "well tempered" corporation, one "tempered to
its times, and more specifically to the requirements
of a pluralistic society grounded on the principles
of democracy, individual liberty, and the rule of
law as a safeguard to freedom."
2714. McGuire, Joseph W. Business and society.
New York, McGraw-Hill [1963] 312 p.
63—13013 HF5343.M2
Includes bibliography.
Business operations play a dominant role in con-
temporary society and broadly affect its culture
and values. The impact of business has produced
an abundance that has altered the American charac-
ter. The interdependence of business and govern-
ment in the modern age has radically transformed
the nature of the free enterprise system and tradi-
tional consumer habits. Struggling with the prob-
lem of goals, values, and ethics in a business world,
the author calls for a new ideology to guide busi-
nessmen in their decisionmaking. Business Policy
and Its Environment (New York, Holt, Rinehart &
Winston [1965] 368 p.), edited by Thomas
Moranian, Donald Grunewald, and Richard C.
Reidenbach, contains reprinted articles and lectures
on the effects of social environment on the forma-
tion of business policy. Business Enterprise in Its
Social Setting (Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1959. 286 p.), by Arthur H. Cole, attempts
"to extend a bridge between history and theory"
and to bring together economic, business adminis-
tration, sociology, and history as tools of analysis.
2715. Petersen, Elmore, Edward Grosvenor Plow-
man, and Joseph M. Trickett. Business
organization and management. 5th ed. Home-
wood, 111., R. D. Irwin, 1962. 341 p.
62-18175 HF535I.P48 1962
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
An updated edition of no. 6009 in the 1960 Guide.
In Business Management and Public Policy (Home-
wood, 111., R. D. Irwin, 1958. 402 p.), Richard
N. Owens considers the problems faced by manage-
ment in dealing with "stockholders, customers,
management personnel, employees, labor unions,
competitors, suppliers, and the general public."
Hugh G. J. Aitken's Taylorism at Watertown
Arsenal; Scientific Management in Action, 1908—
79/5 (Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1960.
269 p.) is a case study of the application of the
Taylor system of management and its impact at the
Watertown Arsenal.
L. Business: Special
2716. Collins, Orvis F., and David G. Moore.
The enterprising man. East Lansing, Bu-
reau of Business and Economic Research, Graduate
School of Business Administration, Michigan State
University, 1964. xvii, 254 p. (MSU business
studies, 1964) 64—63821 HB6oi.C5686
"Notes and References": p. 247—250.
A behavioral study of entrepreneurs. The au-
thors define an entrepreneur as a man "who has
developed an ongoing business activity where none
existed before" and base their study on research
into the origins, motivations, and patterns of be-
havior of successful entrepreneurs. After defining
their terminology and outlining the scope of their
study, they analyze the motivations of the typical
entrepreneur, applying the results of interviews and
Thematic Apperception Tests. They also compare
the entrepreneur with the managerial executive. In
Little Business in the American Economy (Urbana,
University of Illinois Press, 1958. 135 p. Illinois
studies in the social sciences, v. 42), Joseph D.
Phillips discusses the place and the problems of
small economic units in the American economy. In
The Politics of Small Business (Washington, Pub-
lic Affairs Press [1961] 150 p.), Harmon Zeigler
describes the activities of organizations such as the
National Small Business Men's Association, the
National Federation of Independent Business, and
the Small Business Administration.
426 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2717. Gordon, Robert A., and James E. Ho well.
Higher education for business. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1959. 491 p.
59-16886 HFii3i.G6
Bibliographical footnotes. "The literature on
personal qualities contributing to business success":
P- [4531-455-
A report sponsored by the Ford Foundation on
the current state of business education at the college
and university level. The authors studied the
curricula, educational methods, faculties, students,
and goals of schools of business administration.
They point out areas in which changes are needed
to effect a broader and more rigorous educational
program. Among their recommendations are the
following: the standards of admission and the per-
formance of students should be raised, research
should be emphasized, and the curricula should be
reorganized to stress courses of an analytical nature.
Another analysis of the same subject, financed by
the Carnegie Corporation, is The Education of
American Businessmen; a Study of University-
College Programs in Business Administration (New
York, McGraw-Hill, 1959. 740 p. The Carnegie
series in American education), by Frank C. Pierson
and others.
2718. Grodinsky, Julius. Jay Gould, his business
career, 1867—1892. Philadelphia, University
of Pennsylvania Press [1957] 627 p. maps.
56-12389 CT275.G6G7
"Bibliographical Note": p. 11—14.
A detailed examination of the business policies
and practices of a leading trader, businessman, and
capitalist in an era of unregulated business competi-
tion. A master of corporate negotiation and secur-
ity trading, Gould started as a speculator and at age
31 was on the Erie Railroad board of directors.
He gained control of several major railroads, includ-
ing the Union Pacific, the Wabash, and the Erie.
He manipulated unscrupulously, using "every stock-
rigging device then known." Despite his disregard
of business ethics, however, he introduced new
methods of corporate finance and "set precedents
which were later followed by investment bankers
and by state and federal legislators." Edward C.
Kirkland's Dream and Thought in the Business
Community, 1860—1900 (Ithaca, N.Y., Cornell Uni-
versity Press [1956] 175 p.) is a series of essays
on the attitudes of prominent businessmen toward
the economic, social, and political issues of their day.
2719. Kaplan, Abraham D. H. Big enterprise in
a competitive system. Rev. ed. Washing-
ton, Brookings Institution [1964] xv, 240 p.
64-8754 HCio6.5.K.36 1964
Bibliographical footnotes.
A revised edition of no. 6020 in the 1960 Guide.
The Corporation Ta\e-Over (New York, Harper &
Row 1/1964] 280 p.), edited by Andrew Hacker,
and Big Business and Free Men (New York, Harp-
er [1959] 205 p.), by James C. Worthy, are dis-
cussions of the place of big businesses in society and
the consequences of their use of power.
2720. Miller, William, ed. Men in business; essays
on the historical role of the entrepreneur.
With 2 additional essays on American business
leaders, not included in the original edition. New
York, Harper & Row [1962] 389 p. (Harper
torchbooks, TBioSi. The Academy library)
62-52879 HF3023.A2M5 1962
Bibliographical notes: p. [3391—389.
An updated edition of no. 6023 in the 1960 Guide.
2721. Patterson, Robert T. The great boom and
panic, 1921—1929. Chicago, H. Regnery
[1965] xiv, 282 p. ill us.
65-15267 HB37I7 1929^3
Bibliography: p. 247—264.
In this informal history of the economic boom
of the 1920'$ and the crash of 1929, the author
hypothesizes that inflation, prosperity, and mount-
ing speculation deluded people into believing that
everyone could grow rich by investing in the stock
market. The economy was shaped by the Federal
Reserve Board's policy of "easy money" and the
large quantity of stocks bought "on margin." In
the early autumn of 1929, the great boom collapsed
and was followed by an extended and painful defla-
tion, of which the panic of October and November
was only the beginning.
2722. Schriftgiesser, Karl. Business comes of age;
the story of the Committee for Economic
Development and its impact upon the economic
policies of the United States, 1942—1960. New
York, Harper [1960] 248 p.
60—5709 HBi.C573S3
Organized in 1942 as a representative of the
liberal and progressive elements of big business,
the Committee for Economic Development has
joined with scholars to perform research and pro-
pose policy. Its first program was to study the
prospects for the postwar economy and to identify
methods of preventing depression. The success of
its publications has assured it a role in shaping
public and private economic policy, and its influ-
ence is viewed by the author of this study as having
been highly beneficial.
2723. Wiebe, Robert H. Businessmen and re-
form: a study of the Progressive movement.
ECONOMIC LIFE
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1962. 283 p.
62-18718 £743^59
Bibliography: p. [2251-231. Bibliographical ref-
erences included in "Notes" (p. [233]— 271).
An analysis of the relationship between business-
men and Progressivism, based on research among
manuscripts of leading businessmen, congressional
reports, business publications, and trade journals.
/ 427
The author points out the diverse interests within
the business community at the beginning of the
20th century. Businessmen opposed many reforms,
but in the development of economic regulations
they supported major changes and laid "their claim
as progressives." At least one segment of the
business community supported such programs for
Federal control as railroad regulations, labor laws,
tariff revisions, and banking reforms.
M. Labor: General
2724. Barbash, Jack. Labor's grass roots; a study
of the local union. New York, Harper
[1961] 250 p. 61-14839 HD65o8.B352
Bibliographical footnotes.
A composite picture of the internal government
of local unions. After presenting the governmental
structure as a whole, the author analyzes each of
the major working parts and discusses the roles of
the business agent, the steward, and the rank and
file worker. The Worker Views His Union ( [Chi-
cago] University of Chicago Press [1958] 299 p.),
by Joel I. Seidman and others, includes many ex-
cerpts from interviews with workers.
2725. Barbash, Jack, ed. Unions and union lead-
ership: their human meaning. New York,
Harper [1959] xxii, 348 p.
59-9937 HD65o8.B354
Bibliographical footnotes.
A collection of writings relating the union to
contemporary industrial society and emphasizing
the ordinary, "non-glamorous" aspects of the union
experience. To ensure a balanced presentation,
the editor includes essays by such academic writers
as Selig Perlman, Daniel Bell, and Irving Bernstein
along with articles by labor reporters. The volume
encompasses a broad view of the American labor
movement, biographies of labor leaders, discussions
of styles of unionism, and analyses of problems
encountered by labor in society today. In Intellec-
tuals in the Labor Unions; Organizational Pressures
on Professional Roles (Glencoe, 111., Free Press
[1956] 336 p.), Harold L. Wilensky appraises the
functions and influences of intellectuals in the unions
and their role in the decisionmaking process.
2726. Dulles, Foster Rhea. Labor in America, a
history. 2d rev. ed. New York, Crowell,
1960. 435 p. 60—14543 HD8o66.D8 1960
"Bibliographical Notes": p. 414—422.
An updated edition of no. 6034 in the 1960 Guide.
2727. Kerr, Clark. Labor and management in in-
dustrial society. Garden City, N.Y., Anchor
Books [1964] xxvi, 372 p.
64— 1 9279 HD6g6 1 .K43
Bibliographical footnotes.
Four issues recur in the area of industrial rela-
tions: the maintenance of freedom in a machine-
dominated society; the achievement of peace among
labor, management, and the state; the possibilities
for progress in a highly organized and bureaucrat-
ized nation; and the role of technology in the
interaction of managers and workers. The author
discusses manifestations of these questions as they
appeared on the American labor front from 1953
to 1961. He aims as well at attaining an overall
view of economic development and reverts often to
such themes as the impact of industrialization on
the course of world history and the wisdom of
looking beyond the American system in the 2Oth
century. In Automation and Industrial Relations
(New York, Holt, Rinehart, & Winston [1963]
360 p. Modern management series) Edward B.
Shils explores the effects of modern technology on
jobs and on management and union policies.
2728. Leiserson, William M. American trade
union democracy. With a foreword by
Sumner H. Slichter. New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1959. 354 p. 59—8112 HD65o8.L43
Bibliographical footnotes.
In his study of the normal operations of trade
union governments, the author concentrates on
national unions as the power centers of the union
movement. He considers the question of whether
or not the great influence exerted by the unions in
political and economic life is becoming a threat to
freedom. To enable the reader to form his own
opinion, Leiserson describes in detail the work of
the union convention, the division of the executive
power, and the operation of the judicial process
428
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
and draws analogies between union government
and the governments of church and state.
2729. Peterson, Florence. American labor unions,
what they are and how they work. 2d rev.
ed. New York, Harper & Row [1963] 271 p.
63—10629 HD65o8.P42 1963
An updated edition of no. 6035 in the 1960 Guide.
2730. Reynolds, Lloyd G. Labor economics and
labor relations. Ath ed. Englewood Cliffs,
N.J., Prentice-Hall [1964] 568 p. illus.
64—22311 HD49OI.R47 1964
Selected readings at the ends of chapters.
An updated edition of no. 6037 in the 1960 Guide.
In a similar work, The Labor Sector (New York,
McGraw-Hill ['1965] 758 p.), Neil W. Chamber-
lain deals with comparable topics but also devotes
a section to the household's position in the economy.
Using labor as a source of income, the family unit
regulates the labor supply by deciding the amount
of time each member will exchange on the market
for remunerated employment. With its wages, the
family purchases goods and services; its buying
power is thus another influence on the economy.
Furthermore, in its strivings for financial security,
the household is partly responsible for the rise of
the labor unions with the problems and benefits
they bring to society.
2731. Taylor, George W., and Frank C. Pierson,
eds. New concepts in wage determination.
New York, McGraw-Hill, 1957. 336 p. (McGraw-
Hill labor management series)
56—11057 HD49O9.T3
Bibliographical footnotes.
Realizing the need for a systematic treatment of
wage theory, the contributors to this volume wish
to establish a common frame of reference. They
depart from the traditional view in which wages
form an integral part of general economic theory.
The editors point out in the preface that "wage
theory should be closely, but not exclusively, tied
to general theory." Contrary to the usual narrow
outlook, maximum gain is not the only goal of
economic activity; the men who determine wages
operate from several perspectives and seek diversi-
fied ends in their economic dealings. In addition,
"institutional environment," government interven-
tion in industrial relations, and community attitudes
and social customs affect the wage-setting process.
Consequently, the editors maintain, the traditional
restrictive analysis, which does not take these vari-
ables into account, cannot provide a full understand-
ing of wage economics.
2732. Updegraff, Clarence M., and Whitley P. Mc-
Coy. Arbitration of labor disputes. 2d ed.,
by Clarence M. Updegraff. Washington, B[ureau
of] N[ational] A [flairs, 1961] 321 p.
60—16683 KF3424-U5 1961
Bibliographical footnotes.
An updated edition of no. 6058 in the 1960 Guide.
N. Labor: Special
2733. Baker, Elizabeth F. Technology and wom-
an's work. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1964. xvi, 460 p. 64—22559 HD6o95-B3
Bibliography: p. [4431-450.
In the 1 8th century, American women first left
their spinning wheels at home for the spinning jen-
nies in the factories. Women have been finding
employment outside the home in increasing num-
bers ever since. The author traces the historical and
economic factors which have taken women out of
household manufactures into offices, factories, and
shops. Although primarily concerned with women
in nonprofessional jobs, the author also discusses
women in teaching, nursing, social work, and other
professional fields. Finally, she considers the rela-
tionship between women and labor unions and the
impact of protective labor legislation on the female
work force.
2734. Bernstein, Irving. The lean years; a history
of the American worker, 1920—1933. Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1960. 577 p. illus.
60-9143 HD8o72.B37
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(P- 5*7-559)-
The author's direct style and the photographs of
riots, breadlines, and life in the "urban jungle" re-
create the demoralization of workers during the
twenties and early thirties. Characterizing the pe-
riod as one of economic disparity between the great
mass of poor workers and the wealthy few, he ex-
amines the laborer's place in this unbalanced society,
the disorganized state of the labor movement, the
power tactics used by employers to quash any poten-
tial union strength, and the position of labor in rela-
tion to the law. He then discusses several aspects of
the country's ordeal following the stock market
ECONOMIC LIFE
429
crash and describes the policies of the Hoover ad-
ministration during the early years of the Depres-
sion. Labor and the New Deal (Madison, Univer-
sity of Wisconsin Press, 1957. 393 p.), a collection
of essays edited by Milton Derber and Edwin Young,
indicates what present-day labor institutions owe to
developments in the New Deal period.
2735. Chamberlain, Neil W., and James W. Kuhn.
Collective bargaining, zd ed. New York,
McGraw-Hill [1965] 451 p. illus.
64—23640 HD6483.C48 1965
Bibliographical footnotes.
An updated edition of no. 6046 in the 1960
Guide. In Strategy and Collective Bargaining Ne-
gotiation (New York, McGraw-Hill [1963] 192 p.
Publications of the Wertheim Committee), Carl M.
Stevens develops a theoretical framework for labor-
management bartering. In The Impact of Collec-
tive Bargaining on Management (Washington,
Brookings Institution [1960] 982 p.), Sumner H.
Slichter, James J. Healy, and Edward Robert Liver-
nash draw upon their intensive field research in ac-
tual union-management confrontation. The Impact
of the Professional Engineering Union (Boston, Di-
vision of Research, Graduate School of Business
Administration, Harvard University, 1961. 419 p.),
by Richard E. Walton, is a study of the significance
of collective bargaining engaged in by scientists and
engineers.
2736. Saposs, David J. Communism in American
unions. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1959.
279 p. (McGraw-Hill labor management series)
59-7318 HD65o8.S24
After brief mention of the early radicalism pre-
ceding the Communist movement, the author traces
Communist infiltration of the American Federation
of Labor and the Congress of Industrial Organiza-
tions. He states that, because Communist organiz-
ers could penetrate the CIO at its formation, they
managed to reach the national level of leadership.
Although less successful in the well-established AFL,
they did infiltrate some of its affiliates. Saposs con-
cludes that in spite of exposures, expulsions, and
defeats, Communism continues to undermine de-
mocracy in the unions.
2737. Taft, Philip. The A. F. of L. in the time of
Gompers. New York, Harper [1957] xx,
508 p. 57—6741 HD8o55-A5T3
Bibliographical footnotes.
2738. Taft, Philip. The A. F. of L. from the death
of Gompers to the merger. New York,
Harper [1959] 499 p. 59—7064 HD8o55-A5T28
Includes bibliographical references.
Drawing on official and private records, minutes
of conventions and executive council meetings, and
letters of federation officials, the author presents a
sympathetic history of the AFL. In the first of these
two publications, he examines the problems inherent
in the organizing activities of the federation and in
the formation of policies concerning immigration
and Negro labor. He also evaluates the quality of
leadership provided by Samuel Gompers. In the
second work, Taft analyzes the structure and juris-
diction of the AFL and delineates the steps leading
to the merger with the CIO. In American Labor
Unions and Politics, 1900— 1918 (Carbondale, South-
ern Illinois University Press, 1958. 358 p.), Marc
Karson discusses such topics as the role of the Ro-
man Catholic Church in the labor movement, the
AFL's support of the Democratic Party, and the rea-
sons for the absence of a national labor party in the
United States.
XXIX
Constitution and Government
A. Political Thought
B. Constitutional History
C. Constitutional Law
D. Civil Liberties and Rights
E. Government: General
F. The Presidency
G. Congress
H. Administration: General
I. Administration: Special
}, State Government
K. Local Government
2739-2747
2748-2755
2756—2761
2762—2772
2773-2780
2781-2786
2787-2796
2797-2799
2800—2803
2804—2807
2808-2812
THE INTRODUCTION to Chapter XXIX in the 1960 Guide noted the growing literature on
American political thought. That scholars have continued to probe this area is evident
from the number of entries in the present Section A, treating such topics as conservatism, the
democratic tradition, and patterns of antidemocratic thought. The history of the Constitu-
tion (Section B) has also held the attention of scholars, several of whom have placed
particular emphasis on the document's origins. Works on government in general (Section
E) are likewise numerous, especially in the category
of textbooks, which are represented here by a con-
ventional descriptive survey, an analysis of the
dynamics of government, an examination of inter-
governmental relations on the Federal, State, and
local levels, and a compilation of readings. Two
publications are devoted to general appraisals of the
Presidency (Section F), and related works are
focused on such special topics as assistants to the
President, Presidential succession, and the transition
that occurs when a President belonging to one
political party is succeeded by one who belongs to
another party. Three of the works on Congress
(Section G), are by men who discuss their experi-
ences as members. Proportionately fewer publica-
tions appear in the sections on administration and
State and local government in the Supplement than
in the 1960 Guide. Perhaps the major reason for
the difference is that most scholarly monographs in
these fields are too limited in scope to be appropriate
for this bibliography; almost half of the works
chosen for Sections H, I, J, and K are textbooks,
which have the appropriate breadth of coverage.
A. Political Thought
2739. Auerbach, M. Morton. The conservative
illusion. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1959. 359 p. 59—10698 JA84-U5A9
Bibliography: p. [3333-337.
430
"Conservatism has no way of making the crucial
transition from values to reality, from theory to
practice; and in the limited periods of history when
it seemed to make this transition, it was able to do so
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 431
only for reasons which contradicted its premises."
The author bases this statement on an examination
of European conservative thought from Plato to
Edmund Burke and of the "new conservatism" in
the United States as represented by Russell Kirk,
Peter Viereck, Clinton Rossiter, and Reinhold Nie-
buhr. Having thus dismissed the conservative form-
ulation, Auerbach suggests a critical examination of
three alternatives: liberalism, radicalism or equali-
tarianism, and authoritarianism.
2740. Ekirch, Arthur A. The American demo-
cratic tradition: a history. New York, Mac-
millan [1963] 338 p. 63—18793 JK-3I.E5
Bibliography: p. 317—321.
In an attempt "to survey and analyze both the
idea and practice of democracy for the entire sweep
of American history," the author traces the Ameri-
can democratic tradition from colonial times to the
Cold War period. He notes an increasing popular
emphasis on social and economic rather than merely
political democracy and identifies two factors that
help to explain the origin and growth of American
democracy — the heritage of dissent and the hope
that every grievance could be redressed in the
American environment. Democracy has become
part of almost every aspect of American life, "a
new kind of secular religion." The emphasis in
American democratic thought is shifting, however,
"from individual freedom and liberty to the collec-
tive security of the group." Ekirch concludes that,
with the threat of nuclear war, the future of the
democratic tradition depends "as never before upon
the achievement of world peace and international
understanding."
274 1 . Grimes, Alan P. American political thought.
Rev. ed. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Win-
ston [1960] 556 p. 60-7493 JA84.U5G7 1960
Includes bibliography.
A revised edition of no. 6062 in the 1960 Guide.
The Essential Lippmann; a Political Philosophy for
Liberal Democracy (New York, Random House
[1963] 552 p.), edited by Clinton Rossiter and
James Lare, is a selection from the political writings
of Walter Lippmann over the period 1913—63.
2742. Mason, Alpheus T. Free government in the
making; readings in American political
thought. 3d ed. New York, Oxford University
Press, 1965. xix, 929 p.
65—10151 JKn 1965.1^3
Includes bibliographies.
An updated edition of no. 6065 in the 1960 Guide.
2743. Mason, Alpheus T., and Richard H. Leach.
In quest of freedom; American political
thought and practice. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,
Prentice-Hall, 1959. 568 p. 59—11129 JK.3i.M35
Includes bibliography.
An interpretation of American political thought
from John Locke through the Supreme Court's
decision on school segregation in 1954. Noting that
American politics "esteems aggressive, self-reliant
individuals" and that "the doers are also the think-
ers," the authors highlight the writings of James
Otis, John Adams, Thomas Jefferson, John Taylor,
John C. Calhoun, Thorstein Veblen, Woodrow Wil-
son, and Franklin Roosevelt. They define various
enduring political principles in the United States
and note that American political thought is constant-
ly making new adjustments so that individual free-
dom and initiative can be combined with the necessi-
ties of social cohesion.
2744. Nagel, Paul C. One nation indivisible; the
Union in American thought, 1776—1861.
New York, Oxford University Press, 1964. 328 p.
64—11235 JK.3ii.N2
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
289-318).
A discussion of the significance of the concept and
ideology of "Union" from the Revolution to the
Civil War. The author quotes from a variety of
sources indicating the widespread intellectual and
emotional appeal of the Union cult and contends
that Union served as a verbal icon until the Civil
War dispelled the spiritual illusion of unity and
advanced technology and communications demon-
strated the impossibility of physical disunity.
2745. Rossiter, Clinton L. Conservatism in Amer-
ica; the thankless persuasion. 2d ed., rev.
New York, Vintage Books [1962] 306 p.
62—2229 JK.3i.R58 1962
Includes bibliography.
An updated edition of no. 6067 in the 1960 Guide.
2746. Schattschneider, Elmer E. The semisover-
eign people; a realist's view of democracy in
America. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston
[1960] 147 p. 60—14798 JK27I.S23
The author describes his book as "an attempt to
work out a theory about the relation between
organization and conflict, the relation between politi-
cal organization and democracy, and the organiza-
tional alternatives open to the American people.
The assumption made throughout is that the nature
of political organization depends on the conflicts
exploited in the political system." He discusses the
"contagiousness of conflict" in a free society, the
scope and bias of the pressures under which the
system operates, and "the displacement of conflicts,"
which is a prime instrument of political party strat-
432 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
egy. The election of 1896 is interpreted as "the best
example in American history of the successful sub-
stitution of one conflict for another." American
democracy is considered to be "a competitive politi-
cal system in which competing leaders and organi-
zations define the alternatives of public policy in
such a way that the public can participate in the
decision-making process." The people profit by this
system but, according to Schattschneider, they can-
not do the work of the system — that is, govern.
They are "powerless if the political enterprise is not
competitive" and are thus semisovereign rather than
sovereign.
2747. Spitz, David. Patterns of anti-democratic
thought; an analysis and a criticism, with
special reference to the American political mind in
recent times. Rev. ed. New York, Free Press
[1965] 347 p. (A Free Press paperback)
62—21616 10481.865 1965
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 297-334).
An updated edition of no. 6069 in the 1960 Guide.
B. Constitutional History
2748. Brown, Robert E. Reinterpretation of the
formation of the American Constitution.
Boston, Boston University Press [1963] 63 p.
(The Caspar G. Bacon lectures on the Constitution
of the United States) 63-I3735 JKi 19.67
Includes bibliography.
2749. McDonald, Forrest. We the people; the eco-
nomic origins of the Constitution. Chicago,
University of Chicago Press [1958] 436 p. (A
Publication of the American History Research
Center) 58—14905 JK.i46.M27
Bibliographical footnotes.
Two studies of An Economic Interpretation of the
Constitution of the United States (1913), by Charles
A. Beard. Using the same basic approach that
Brown applied earlier to his Charles Beard and the
Constitution (cited in the annotation for no. 3046 in
the 1960 Guide), McDonald employs a highly de-
tailed statistical analysis and presents a mass of
evidence indicating that Beard's thesis is not valid.
His method is that which Beard himself proposed
for verification. McDonald concludes that Beard's
"dynamic element," the holding of public securities,
is without significance and outlines instead a method
for the "pluralistic study of the Constitution" which
he thinks will offer sounder possibilities. In his
1963 study, Brown supports his reinterpretation of
the Constitution and its ratification by reexamining
the nature of American colonial society and the
American Revolution. He portrays American co-
lonial society as "predominately middle-class, with
much economic opportunity, a broad franchise,
representation that favored the agricultural areas,
educational facilities for the common man, and
much religious freedom." Colonial America was
"much more liberal than we have previously be-
lieved," and the Revolution was an attempt "to
preserve an already democratic middle-class society."
2750. Dietze, Gottfried. The Federalist, a classic
on federalism and free government. Balti-
more, Johns Hopkins Press [1960] 378 p.
60—11204 JK.i55.D5
Bibliography: p. 355—358. Bibliographical foot-
notes.
An interpretive analysis of The Federalist as a
classic of Western political thought and as the out-
standing American contribution to the literature of
constitutional democracy and federalism. The au-
thor's purpose is to demonstrate how The Federalist
advances "beyond the orthodox conception of the
purpose of federation, by advocating federalism not
only as a means for maintaining the security of the
federating states from foreign powers or peace
among the members, but also — and especially — as a
means for securing the individual's freedom from
governmental control." The ideal implicit in the
papers is that "the democratic principle of popular
participation in government, as a mere means, is
subordinate to the liberal principle of the protection
of the individual, as the end." Two recent editions
of the classic volume by Hamilton, Madison, and
Jay are The Federalist (Middletown, Conn., Wesley-
an University Press, 1961. 672 p.), edited by
Jacob E. Cooke, and The Federalist (Cambridge,
Mass., Belknap Press of Harvard University Press,
1961. 572 p. The John Harvard Library), edited
by Benjamin F. Wright.
2751. Kelly, Alfred H., and Winfred A. Harbison.
The American Constitution; its origins and
development. 3d ed. New York, Norton [1963]
1 125 p. 63-8030 JK3I.K4 1963.
Includes bibliography.
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 433
An updated edition of no. 6077 in the 1960 Guide.
In The Reins of Power; a Constitutional History of
the United States (New York, Hill & Wang [1963]
216 p.), Bernard Schwartz describes the impact of
major Supreme Court decisions on the evolution of
constitutional government.
2752. Lee, Charles R. The Confederate Constitu-
tions. Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press [1963] 225 p.
63—4415 KFZ9000.L4
Bibliography: p. [201]— 220.
A study of the framing and adoption of the two
Confederate Constitutions, the provisional and the
permanent. In the author's view, the South's con-
ception of the Union as a compact between indi-
vidually sovereign states culminated in secession and
was embodied in these Confederate Constitutions,
which included conspicuous provisions to protect
minority rights and preserve State sovereignty. The
"most significant constitutional guarantee of the
position of the minority" is provided by Article V,
which enables a minority of three States to initiate
the process of amending the basic law. Lee notes
that, besides representing the ultimate constitutional
expression of the philosophy of States' rights, the
Confederate Constitutions made "a valuable contri-
bution through the legacy of government reform,"
inasmuch as they contained provisions aimed at
correcting the spoils system, maintaining the Gov-
ernment's fiscal integrity, and providing for an
executive budget and the appearance of Cabinet
officers on the floor of Congress. The U.S. Consti-
tution and the permanent Constitution of the Con-
federacy are compared in parallel columns in an
appendix.
2753. Main, Jackson Turner. The antifederalists;
critics of the Constitution, 1781—1788.
Chapel Hill, Published for the Institute of Early
American History and Culture at Williamsburg,
Va., by the University of North Carolina Press
[1961] 308 p. 61—17904 JKn6.M2
"Historiographical and bibliographical essay": p.
293—297. Bibliographical footnotes.
A detailed study of the antifederalist critics of the
Constitution. The author regards antifederalism as
a mixture of two points of view: advocacy of a weak
central government by wealthy, usually agrarian,
interests, and preference for a government demo-
cratically controlled by the many, principally among
small farmers. The origins and intensity of anti-
federalist sentiment are discussed, but primary
attention is devoted to the months between the
publication of the Constitution and its adoption.
Two books containing selections from the writings
and speeches against ratification of the Constitution
are The Antifederalist Papers ( [East Lansing,
Mich.] Michigan State University Press, 1965. 258
p.), edited by Morton Borden, and The States
Rights Debate: Antifederalism and the Constitution
(Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall [1964] 206
p. A Spectrum book), edited by Alpheus T. Mason.
2754. Rossiter, Clinton L. Alexander Hamilton
and the Constitution. New York, Harcourt,
Brace & World [1964] 372 p.
64—11540 KF363-H3R6
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
259-348).
An analysis of Hamilton's role in the struggle for
ratification and implementation of the Constitution.
On the basis of research in letters, diaries, and public
statements of Hamilton and his contemporaries,
Rossiter discusses Hamilton's contributions to the
Constitution, his exposition of constitutional law and
theory, and the political philosophy which crowned
his efforts. In particular, the author analyzes the
importance of Hamilton's efforts toward obtaining
a broad construction for the Constitution, his advo-
cacy of a strongly instituted Presidency, his insist-
ence on Supreme Court primacy over the courts of
the States, and his role in the establishment of the
first Bank of the United States. The study includes
a comparison of Hamilton's ideas and objectives
with those of Thomas Jefferson.
2755. Smith, James M., and Paul L. Murphy, eds.
Liberty and justice; a historical record of
American constitutional development. New York,
Knopf, 1958. 566 p.
59—5061 KF454I.A7S6 1958
A collection of 276 American historical documents
dated from 1606 to 1956, selected to illustrate the
integral role of constitutional evolution in the major
transformations of the American social order. The
material consists of statutes, reports, resolutions,
petitions, Presidential messages, court decisions, and
other official documents, as well as letters, pamph-
lets, newspaper commentaries, and sermons. Twelve
chapters deal with developments up to the Civil
War, eight are devoted to the period from the Civil
War through the 1920*5, and eight concentrate on
recent changes in such areas as government-business
relations and civil liberties. A short introductory
essay begins each chapter.
434 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
C. Constitutional Law
2756. Columbia University. Legislative Drafting
Research Fund. Constitutions of the United
States, national and State. Dobbs Ferry, N.Y.,
Oceana Publications [1962] 2 v.
61—18391 KF453O.C6
Prepared under the direction of John M. Kerno-
chan as part of a broad program of State constitu-
tional studies developed jointly by the Brookings
Institution, the National Municipal League, and
Columbia University, this compilation includes the
texts of constitutions in force in the United States,
with amendments through December 31, 1960. A
historical note on the present and earlier constitu-
tions precedes each text.
2757. Forkosch, Morris D. Constitutional law.
Brooklyn, Foundation Press, 1963. xxi,
541 p. 63-1348 KF4550.F6
Bibliographical footnotes.
An introduction to Federal constitutional law,
geared to the special requirements of students.
Among the topics discussed are the Constitution
and its background, judicial review, the Federal
system, the amending process, Federal powers and
limitations, State powers, Federal-State conflicts, and
the rights of persons as against both Federal and
State Governments. The author describes the
commerce clause as "the greatest single peacetime
source of federal power, especially as against the
states," and the due process clause as the greatest
single peacetime limitation on the States as regards
individual rights. A comprehensive casebook aimed
at providing a body of basic material for college
upperclassmen or first-year law school students is
Cases in Constitutional Law, 2d ed. (New York,
Appleton-Century-Crofts [1963] 945 p. ACC
political science series), by Robert E. Cushman and
Robert F. Cushman.
2758. Hirschfield, Robert S. The Constitution
and the Court; the development of the basic
law through judicial interpretation. New York,
Random House [1962] 257 p. (Studies in politi-
cal science, PS4o) 62-10672 KF455O.Z9H55
"Cases and selected bibliography": p. 240—252.
A demonstration of what the author believes is
the "essential element in the dynamism of American
government" — the process of constitutional develop-
ment and change through judicial interpretation of
basic law. The bulk of this paperback is devoted
to the Supreme Court's activity in the fields of
economic regulation, racial equality, civil liberty and
national security, and wartime government.
2759. Schmidhauser, John R. Constitutional law
in the political process. Chicago, Rand
McNally [1963] 544 p. illus. (Rand McNally
political science series) 63—7578 KF87OO.A7S3
A behavioral study of the role of the Supreme
Court in the American political process. As back-
ground for his analysis of the political significance
of the Court's role as an instrument of government,
the author cites articles, essays, judicial decisions,
legislative debates, and election campaign documents
chosen primarily for the social and political issues
involved. Among the topics covered are democratic
theory and the administration of justice, the Con-
stitution and the status of individuals and groups,
Federal judicial authority, the hierarchy of Ameri-
can courts, the traditions and procedures of judicial
institutions, the selection of Federal judges, the
crucial role of the bar, the Supreme Court and social
change, and the roots of judicial behavior. In
Constitutional Politics (New York, Holt, Rinehart
& Winston [1960] 735 p.), Glenclon A. Schubert
focuses on the decisionmaking behavior of Supreme
Court Justices and their role in the development
of national policy.
2760. Schwartz, Bernard. A commentary on the
Constitution of the United States. New
York, Macmillan [1963—65] 2 pts. in 3 v.
62—19994 KF4550.S3
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(pt. i, v. 2, p. 307—437). "Table of Cases": pt. i,
v. 2, p. 439-472.
CONTENTS. — pt. i. The powers of Government:
v. i. Federal and State powers, v. 2. Powers of
the President. — pt. 2. The rights of property.
The initial volumes in a planned comprehensive
study of the Constitution. The first part deals with
the powers of the Federal Government which enable
it to fulfill its designated purpose; part 2 discusses
the rights of property; subsequent volumes will
cover the rights of the individual. The author bases
his analysis on two significant characteristics of the
Constitution — its role as a source of governmental
authority and its emphasis on the restrictions of
governmental power.
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 435
2761. U.S. Constitution. The Constitution of the
United States of America; analysis and
interpretation. Annotations of cases decided by the
Supreme Court of the United States to June 22,
1964. Prepared by the Legislative Reference Serv-
ice, Library of Congress, Norman J. Small, editor,
and Lester S. Jayson, supervising editor. [Rev.
ed.] Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1964. 1693
p. (88th Congress, ist session. Senate. Document
no. 39) 65—61050 Law
An updated edition of no. 6102 in the 1960 Guide.
D. Civil Liberties and Rights
2762. Abernathy, Mabra Glenn. The right of
assembly and association. Columbia, Uni-
versity of South Carolina Press, 1961. 263 p.
61—9384 K-4778.A3 1961
Includes bibliography.
The purpose of this analysis is "to outline the
scope of the right of assembly in the United States
and to point out those areas in which it might be
practicable to permit a freer exercise" of this right
and its cognate right of association than is now the
general rule. Governmental restrictions on these
rights are considered "constitutionally permissible"
in several areas. The most substantial restriction
lies in the law of unlawful assembly. "Assemblies
in the public streets" is another situation which has
caused conflicts between constitutional rights and
local legal restrictions. In the author's view, extra-
ordinary efforts must be made to ensure that local
authorities "be as well schooled as possible in the
subject of individual rights." He emphasizes that
the right of assembly is primarily designed to protect
and encourage the interchange of opinions and
ideas. Noting that there is a wide range of dis-
criminatory practices concerning assemblies in pub-
lic parks by local authorities, Abernathy calls for
revision of municipal ordinances in line with Su-
preme Court decisions. Federal protection of the
right of assembly derives from the Court's broad
power of review under the i4th amendment and
from existing Federal civil and criminal remedies,
but the latter, the author indicates, are meager,
insufficient, and in need of expansion.
2763. Brant, Irving. The Bill of Rights; its origin
and meaning. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill
[1965] 567 p. 65-21401 KF4749.B7
"Bibliographical notes": p. 527—544.
The origins of constitutional liberties in the
United States are approached through an examina-
tion of the English and American background to
the rights identified in the first 10 amendments to
the Constitution. Protections provided in the fifth
and sixth amendments against self-incrimination,
arbitrary arrest, and secret trial have roots in abuses
perpetrated under the King's Star Chamber tribunal.
The idea of freedom of the press, embodied in the
first amendment, was strengthened in America by
the successful defense in 1733 of Peter Zenger
against Crown charges of libel. The author uses
early court and legislative records of both England
and the Colonies to support his lines of argument
and, in the light of this evidence, reviews and
evaluates historical arguments contained in major
opinions of the U.S. Supreme Court.
2764. Caughey, John W. In clear and present
danger; the crucial state of our freedoms.
[Chicago] University of Chicago Press [1958]
207 p. 58—10815 JC599.U5C36
Traditional freedoms in the United States, the
author believes, were put "in clear and present
danger" by the national demand for security against
communism. The "narrowing of our freedom" is
identified in the laws enacted, cases decided, con-
gressional and executive behavior, and the growth
of demagoguery. The author traces the security
measures taken in the years after World War II,
the growth of McCarthyism, the "orgy of Commu-
nist baiting," the investigating committees, and
"decline and fall of the Fifth Amendment," and
the attacks upon academic freedom, noting that all
of these contributed to a wholesale decline in indi-
vidual freedoms. Supreme Court decisions subse-
quently did much to temper the excesses of the
early 1950'$, but many of the restrictions upon
individual liberties had been institutionalized and
continued to operate. The author advocates con-
tainment of the Communist minority "without
violating or sacrificing the freedoms which are the
American birthright."
2765. Cornell University. Cornell studies in civil
liberties. Robert E. Cushman, advisory edi-
tor. Ithaca, Cornell University Press, 1946—65. 19 v.
Four new studies and one revised edition have
been added to no. 6no in the 1960 Guide. They are
Tenure in American Higher Education: Plans, Prac-
tices, and the Law ([1959] 212 p. 59—10438.
436 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1,62334.695), by Clark Byse and Louis Joughin;
Henry W. Edgerton's Freedom in the Balance:
Opinions Relating to Civil Liberties ( [1960] 278 p.
60-3038. KF4748.E3), edited by Eleanor Bon-
tecou; The Presidency and Individual Liberties
([1961] 239 p. 61-8206. JK5i8.L6), by Richard
P. Longaker; First Amendment Freedoms: Selected
Cases on Freedom of Religion, Speech, Press, As-
sembly ([1963] 933 p. 63-18091. KF4770.
A7K65), edited by Milton R. Konvitz; and Bill of
Rights Reader: Leading Constitutional Cases, 30!
ed., rev. and enl. ( [1965] 941 p. 65-19199.
KF4748.K6 1965), edited by Milton R. Konvitz,
a revised edition of no. 6121 in the 1960 Guide.
2766. Dumbauld, Edward. The Bill of Rights and
what it means today. Norman, University
of Oklahoma Press [1957] xv, 242 p.
57-5954 KF4749.D8
Bibliography: p. 223—235.
Study of the adoption of the first 10 amendments
to the Constitution and of their adaptation to cur-
rent conditions. After presenting a detailed account
of the contributions of the several States and of the
successive congressional drafts of the Bill of Rights,
the author discusses the function of current judicial
interpretation in determining the implementation of
the amendments. He concludes that the Bill of
Rights has served as the conservator of the spirit of
the Declaration of Independence in the Constitution
and that its specific provisions continue to demon-
strate their practical utility. Sources of our Liberties
([Chicago] American Bar Foundation [1959] 456
p.), edited by Richard L. Perry, is a collection of the
major legal sources of individual freedoms in the
United States. The Supreme Court and Civil Liber-
ties, 2d ed. (Dobbs Ferry, N.Y., Published for the
American Civil Liberties Union [by] Oceana Pub-
lishers, 1963. 189 p.), by Osmond K. Fraenkel, is a
concise summary of Supreme Court decisions in
cases involving civil liberties.
2767. Gellhorn, Walter. American rights; the Con-
stitution in action. New York, Macmillan,
1960. 232 p. 60-5408 KF475O.G43 1960
An examination of the ways in which the Consti-
tution has protected individual rights. The author
considers the Constitution itself to be a vague bul-
wark against oppression. Its principles acquire so-
lidity and significance "through the erratic, some-
times conflicting currents of judicial decision," but
"in the end, the Constitution always becomes what
the People of America will it to be." In Individual
Freedom and Governmental Restraints (Baton
Rouge, Louisiana State University Press [1956] 215
p. The Edward Douglass White lectures on citizen-
ship), Gellhorn traces the increasing tendency for
judicial responsibilities to be transferred to adminis-
trative agencies.
2768. Hudon, Edward G. Freedom of speech and
press in America. Foreword by William O.
Douglas. Washington, Public Affairs Press [1963]
224 p. 62—22380 KF4770.H8
"Table of Cases": p. 213—217.
The author believes that first amendment free-
doms have been subject to severe strains because the
history of this amendment "has been one of uncer-
tainty although it was adopted to end uncertainty."
By recourse to iSth-century thought and principle,
as well as to the events which "provoked men to act
as they did when the Amendment was adopted," he
expects that a more stable interpretation can be
found. The adoption of the amendment is dis-
cussed, its English and colonial background is out-
lined, and the history of cases and decisions relating
to it is traced from the Alien and Sedition Laws to
the present. Hudon concludes that the theory of
natural law motivated the creation of the Bill of
Rights but has never governed Court interpretations
of its provisions. He advocates a return to natural
law principles as the best approach to the meaning
of the first amendment.
2769. Johnson, Donald O. The challenge to
American freedoms; World War I and the
rise of the American Civil Liberties Union. [Lex-
ington] For the Mississippi Valley Historical Asso-
ciation, University of Kentucky Press, 1963. 243 p.
63-12388 JC599.U5J58
Essay on bibliography.
A study of the American Civil Liberties Union
(ACLU) and its predecessor organizations and of
their attempts to defend civil liberties in the years
during and immediately after the First World War.
Specific issues discussed include the treatment of con-
scientious objectors by the Army, prosecutions under
the Espionage Acts, deportation of alien radicals by
the Justice Department, and censorship of socialist
and pacifist publications by the Post Office Depart-
ment. The author considers that the civil liberties
movement had its origin among pacifist and anti-
militarist groups in 1914 and was formalized
through the founding of the National Civil Liberties
Bureau (NCLB) in 1917 and the ACLU in 1919.
"Few Americans have ever been so intolerant of
their fellow men as Americans in the First World
War," according to Johnson, and it was not only
acts of the Government that kept the NCLB occu-
pied but also direct action by "gangs of angry patri-
ots." Although led by men of moderate views who
were able to unite fragments of the Progressive
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 437
movement, the NCLB-ACLU gained a reputation
for radicalism which the author regards as unwar-
ranted; he notes that even in the 1920'$ the ACLU
never publicly defended any doctrine other than its
own of unlimited freedom of speech, press, and
assembly.
2770. Kauper, Paul G. Civil liberties and the Con-
stitution. Ann Arbor, University of Michi-
gan Press [1962] 237 p. 62—7723 KF4 749X37
An analysis of recent major decisions of the Su-
preme Court in the area of civil liberties, based on
the author's lectures at the Special Summer School
for Lawyers held in June 1961 at the University of
Michigan Law School. Among the topics covered
are the church-state controversy, censorship and ob-
scenity legislation, the right of association, civil
rights for Negroes, and the Federal Government's
role in restricting as well as protecting civil liberties.
Supreme Court decisions in these areas are consid-
ered important not only for their intrinsic signifi-
cance but also because they "reveal the fluidity and
movement that characterize the whole process of
constitutional interpretation." In Frontiers of Con-
stitutional Liberty (Ann Arbor, University of Michi-
gan Law School, 1956. 251 p. The Thomas M.
Cooley lectures, 7th sen), Kauper discusses law in
relation to the flexibility of interpretation of the
Constitution.
2771. Levy, Leonard W. Jefferson & civil liberties;
the darker side. Cambridge, Belknap Press
of Harvard University Press, 1963. 225 p. (A pub-
lication of the Center for the Study of the History of
Liberty in America, Harvard University)
63-19140 JC599.U5L45
Bibliography: p. 179—186.
The author regards Jefferson as one of the greatest
American politicians and the foremost spokesman of
his generation but considers his libertarian standards
"too shallow to prevail as more than rhetoric when
pitted against the acid test of experience and crisis."
Finding "a strong pattern of unlibertarian, even
anti-libertarian thought and behavior extending
throughout Jefferson's long career," Levy notes that
this unfamiliar Jefferson "at one time or another
supported loyalty oaths; countenanced internment
camps for political suspects; drafted a bill of attain-
der; urged prosecution for seditious libel; trampled
on the Fourth Amendment; condoned military des-
potism; used the army to enforce laws in time of
peace; censored reading; chose professors for their
political opinions; and endorsed the doctrine that the
means, however odious, were justified by the ends."
These acts, according to the author, resulted not
from hypocrisy but from the fact that Jefferson was
simply not as libertarian as later Americans liked to
think and was willing to sacrifice civil liberties for
what he believed were more urgent political causes.
2772. Levy, Leonard W. Legacy of suppression;
freedom of speech and press in early Ameri-
can history. Cambridge, Belknap Press of Harvard
University Press, 1960. xiv, 353 p.
60—8449 JC59I.L2
Bibliography: p. [321]— 339.
An interpretation of the origins and early signifi-
cance of the freedom of speech and press clause of
the first amendment. The author examines early
English legal theory and the experience of the Amer-
ican colonists between 1735 and the Revolution. He
concludes "that the generation which adopted the
Constitution and the Bill of Rights did not believe
in a broad scope for freedom of expression, particu-
larly in the realm of politics." Freedom of speech
developed very late, as an offshoot of freedom of the
press and had no legal recognition in England or
America before the ratification of the first amend-
ment in 1791. Only in 1798 did a modern and ma-
ture doctrine of these freedoms as championed by
the followers of Jefferson appear in America. In
The Case for Liberty (Chapel Hill, University of
North Carolina Press [1965] 254 p.), Helen D. H.
Miller summarizes colonial court cases utilized by
the proponents of the Bill of Rights.
E. Government: General
2773. Anderson, James E. The emergence of the
modern regulatory state. Washington, Pub-
lic Affairs Press [1962] 172 p.
62-18336 JK.9oi.A75
An examination of the theories of regulation de-
veloped during the years from 1887 to 1917. The
author notes that within this 3O-year period a con-
siderable body of legislation dealing with railroads,
trusts and monopolies, impure foods and drugs,
banking, labor conditions, and tariffs was proposed
and much of it enacted into law. He discusses the
shift from State to national control in many areas of
438 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
regulation and interprets the entire regulatory move-
ment as "an effort to extend democratic control over
the economic system and to infuse it with a social
conscience."
2774. Burns, James MacGregor, and Jack W. Pelta-
son. Government by the people; the dynam-
ics of American national, State, and local govern-
ment. 5th ed. Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-
Hall, 1963. 914 p. 63—11089 JK.274.B855 1963
First edition published in 1952 as two separate
works under titles: Government by the People; the
Dynamics of American National Government, and
Government by the People; the Dynamics of Ameri-
can State and Local Government.
An updated edition of no. 6134 in the 1960 Guide.
The same authors have edited a book of supplemen-
tary readings, Functions and Policies of American
Government (Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall,
1962. 450 p.). In a succinct study, Congress and
the President (Chicago, Scott, Foresman [1965]
197 p. Scott, Foresman American government se-
ries), Louis W. Koenig explores the pluralistic na-
ture of policymaking.
2775. Graves, William Brooke. American inter-
governmental relations: their origins, histori-
cal development, and current status. New York,
Scribner [1964] xx, 984 p. ill us.
64-11248 JK.325.G75
Includes bibliographical references.
A textbook treatment of the evolution of Ameri-
can federalism. The author traces the origins and
development of intergovernmental relations on the
Federal, State, and local levels. The Structure of
American Federalism ( [London] Oxford Univer-
sity Press, 1961. 206 p.) is a study by an English
political scientist, Maurice J. C. Vile. In The Ameri-
can Partnership ( [Chicago] University of Chicago
Press [1962] 358 p.), Daniel J. Elazar develops the
thesis that the cooperative character of Federal-State
programs has changed relatively little since the i9th
century despite the increase in the "velocity of gov-
ernment." In The Cities and the Federal System
(New York, Atherton Press [1965] 200 p.), Ros-
coe C. Martin comments favorably upon the increas-
ing interaction between the Federal Government
and the cities.
2776. McKay, Robert B. Reapportionment; the
law and politics of equal representation.
New York, Twentieth Century Fund, 1965. 498 p.
65—26764 KF49O5.M3
Bibliography: p. [4771—485.
This appraisal of representative government in the
United States seeks to clarify the implications of the
constitutional principles announced by the Supreme
Court in 1964 regarding legislative apportionment
and congressional districting. The author discusses
the political theory upon which the legislative as-
pects of representative government are based and re-
views the series of cases in which the "one man, one
vote" principle evolved, including Bather v. Carr
(1962) and Reynolds v. Sims (1964). Against this
background, McKay explores the prospects for the
future, placing final emphasis on the possibilities for
local diversity among State apportionment formulas.
Legislative Apportionment (New York, Harper &
Row [1964] 181 p.), edited by Howard D. Hamil-
ton, is a collection of readings.
2777. Ogg, Frederic A. Ogg and Ray's Introduc-
tion to American Government [by] William
H. Young. i2th ed. New York, Appleton-Century-
Crofts [1962] 957 p. illus.
62—15133 JK42I.O5 1962
Includes bibliography.
An updated edition of no. 6137 in the 1960 Guide.
2778. Powell, Norman J., and Daniel P. Parker,
eds. Major aspects of American Govern-
ment. New York, McGraw-Hill [Ci963] 369 p.
(McGraw-Hill series in political science)
62-19250 JK3I.P6
Includes bibliography.
Readings for college students, organized under
such topics as "The American Value System," "Con-
gress in Action and Interaction," "The Presidency as
Power and Myth," "Politics, Parties, and Politick-
ing," "Public Opinion, Pressure Groups, and Propa-
ganda," "The United States in the World Context,"
and "Public Administration." Most of the selections
are taken from public documents, congressional de-
bates, legal opinions, and speeches and articles by
political figures and scholars. Short editorial com-
ments introduce the selections. Politics and Govern-
ment in the United States, national, State, and local
ed. (New York, Harcourt, Brace & World [1965]
1004 p.), edited by Alan F. Westin, is a compilation
covering a wider range of problems and viewpoints.
2779. Rourke, Francis E. Secrecy and publicity;
dilemmas of democracy. Baltimore, Johns
Hopkins Press [1961] 236 p.
61-10736 JK468.S4R6
A study of the conflict inherent in a democracy
between the Government's need to regulate the flow
of information to the public and the public's need to
know. Although Rourke acknowledges the neces-
sity for secrecy to protect national security, he sees in
government control of information the grave danger
that public opinion "may become all too submissive
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT
/ 439
or inadequately critical of the follies and fallacies by
which it is often led." Two unique characteristics
of American society are cited as compounding this
dilemma — the "passion for publicity" and the lack
of a tradition to sustain governmental privacy such
as is common in Western European democracies.
The author describes the growth of secrecy in Amer-
ican bureaucracy; the dilemma of Congress, caught
between its antagonism to executive secrecy and its
desire to protect national security; the Presidential
power to control information; and government ma-
nipulation of public opinion. The most reliable de-
fense against the excesses of government propaganda
and official secrecy is found in political pluralism
and governmental balance of power, as well as in an
independent and aggressive press. In the end, how-
ever, "there is no simple way of reconciling the con-
flicting claims of publicity, secrecy, and democracy."
2780. Schmeckebier, Laurence F., and Roy B. Eas-
tin. Government publications and their use.
Rev. ed. Washington, D.C., Brookings Institution
[1961] 476 p. 61-7718 21223.7783 1961
An updated edition of no. 6138 in the 1960 Guide.
F. The Presidency
2781. Binkley, Wilfred E. President and Con-
gress. 3d rev. ed. New York, Vintage
Books [1962] 403 p. 62—2230 JK.5i6.B5 1962
An updated edition of no. 6140 in the 1960 Guide.
In Presidential Power; the Politics of Leadership
(New York, Wiley [1960] 224 p.), Richard E.
Neustadt analyzes the President's personal power on
the basis of an examination of the ways in which it
was wielded by Franklin D. Roosevelt, Truman,
and Eisenhower. Theodore C. Sorensen's Decision-
Mal(ing in the White House (New York, Columbia
University Press, 1963. 94 p.), two lectures first de-
livered at Columbia as the Gino Speranza lectures
for 1963, illuminates the decisionmaking process
during the years of the Kennedy administration.
2782. Corwin, Edward S. The President, office
and powers, 1787—1957; history and analysis
of practice and opinion. 4th rev. ed. New York,
New York University Press, 1957. 519 p.
57-11573 KF5o5i.C6 1957
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
315-496).
An updated edition of no. 6143 in the 1960 Guide.
The Ultimate Decision (New York, G. Braziller,
1960. 290 p.), edited by Ernest R. May, is a collec-
tion of nine essays on the ways in which wartime
Presidents have managed their immense responsi-
bilities under the constitutional provision making
the President the Commander in Chief of the
Armed Forces.
2783. Feerick, John D. From failing hands; the
story of Presidential succession. Foreword by
Paul A. Freund. New York, Fordham University
Press [1965] xiv, 368 p. 65—14917 JK6c>9.F4
Bibliography: p. 349—361.
A history of the formulation and execution of the
Presidential succession acts of 1792, 1886, and 1947.
The author examines the critical moments surround-
ing the succession of Vice Presidents to the Presi-
dency, discusses the increasing importance of the
Vice Presidency, and suggests improvements in the
succession mechanism. Donald Young's American
Roulette, the History and Dilemma of the Vice Pres-
idency (New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston
[1965] 367 p.) is an anecdotal account of the Vice
Presidents of the United States from John Adams to
Lyndon B. Johnson.
2784. Henry, Laurin L. Presidential transitions.
Washington, Brookings Institution [1960]
xviii, 755 p. 60-53252 £743^4
Bibliographical footnotes.
A study of four occasions on which the Presidency
has passed from one major party to the other in this
century: the Taft- Wilson transition of 1912—13; the
Wilson-Harding transition of 1920-21; the Hoover-
Roosevelt transition of 1932—33; and the Truman-
Eisenhower transition of 1952—53. In each case the
author describes how the President and President-
elect prepared for the transfer, how the new Presi-
dent organized his administration and fulfilled his
commitments, and how the institutions of Govern-
ment contributed to and were affected by what
occurred. The author identifies two broad re-
quirements for effective transitions: continuity of
leadership and administrative performance and re-
sponsiveness of Government to the new leadership.
Changing Administrations (Washington, Brookings
Institution [1965] 147 p.), by David T. Stanley,
concentrates on the transfer of responsibility in six
Federal organizations in the early 1960*5.
440
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2785. Koenig, Louis W. The invisible Presidency.
New York, Rinehart [1960] 438 p.
60-5341 Ei76.K6
Includes bibliography.
An investigation of the personalities, activities,
and accomplishments of important Presidential as-
sistants and favorites. Among the careers consid-
ered are those of Alexander Hamilton, Martin Van
Buren, William Loeb, Edward M. House, Thomas
C. Corcoran, Harry Hopkins, and Sherman Adams.
In general, the relationship between a President and
his aides has been deeply personal, with the latter
performing a variety of important tasks for him.
The author concludes with a criticism of the recent
growth of committees and of the staffs of Presiden-
tial assistants. In The President's Cabinet (Cam-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1959. 327 p.
Harvard's political studies), Richard F. Fenno ap-
proaches the cabinet as an "advisory, decisionmak-
ing and coordinating body," analyzing its close
relationship with the President as well as its role
within the larger political system. In The Cabinet
and Congress (New York, Columbia University
Press, 1960. 310 p.), John S. Horn explores an area
often neglected in political studies.
2786. Rossiter, Clinton L. The American Presi-
dency. With a new introduction by D. W.
Brogan. New York, Time, Inc. 1/1963] xxi, 319 p.
63-25745 JK.5i6.R6 1963
Bibliography : [309] —311.
An examination of the sources and limits of power
in the Presidency, which the author considers to be
"one of the few truly successful institutions created
by men in their endless quest for the blessings of
free government." Constitutional provisions, cus-
tom, the practice of other nations, and the logic of
history have created a variety of Presidential func-
tions, among which the author cites the following as
major roles: chief of state, Chief Executive, Com-
mander in Chief, chief diplomat, chief legislator,
chief of party, protector of the peace, manager of
prosperity, and world leader. On the other hand,
the uses of Presidential power are circumscribed by
numerous constitutional provisions, institutional ar-
rangements, political pressures, and nongovernmen-
tal sources of power. Rossiter uses this structure in
evaluating the performance of various Presidents. In
The Man in the White House, rev. ed. (New York,
Harper & Row [1964] 274 p. Harper colophon
books, CN/46), Wilfred E. Binkley traces transfor-
mations in the Presidential office from Washington
to Eisenhower. The Chief Executive (New York,
Harcourt, Brace & World [1964] 435 p.), by Louis
W. Koenig, emphasizes the limitations on Presiden-
tial power.
G. Congress
2787. Beck, Carl. Contempt of Congress; a study
of the prosecutions initiated by the Commit-
tee on Un-American Activities, 1945—1957. New
Orleans, Hauser Press [1959] 263 p. [The Gal-
leon series in economics, history, and political
science] 59-15941 ^9405.64 1959
"Selected bibliography": p. [253]— 258. Biblio-
graphical footnotes.
The origin and development of the power of Con-
gress to prosecute for contempt are reviewed and
specific cases are traced through the House Commit-
tee on Un-American Activities, the Congress, and
the courts. Among the constitutional issues dis-
cussed are the questions of fourth-amendment re-
straints on the power to subpoena the documents of
private organizations, first-amendment limitations
on the power to compel disclosure of political opin-
ions, and the degree of protection against self-
incrimination available to witnesses under the fifth
amendment. A synopsis of contempt citations from
1787 to 1943, a list of contempt citations from 1944
to 1958, and a statistical analysis of the citations are
appended.
2788. Berman, Daniel M. In Congress assembled;
the legislative process in the National Gov-
ernment. New York, Macmillan [1964] xv, 432 p.
64—14974 JKio6i.B44
Bibliography: p. 405—412. Bibliographical
footnotes.
A critical appraisal of the U.S. Congress in its
dual aspects as a legislative body and an organiza-
tion of politicians. In support of his contention that
Congress as now constituted bears little resemblance
to the legislative body envisaged by the framers of
the Constitution, the author examines various politi-
cal influences on the legislative process, including
campaign procedures, political organization in Con-
gress, activities of pressure groups, and the relation-
ships between the executive and legislative branches
and between individual Congressmen and their con-
stituents. The same author offers a case study of the
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 441
legislative process in A Bill Becomes a Law: The
Civil Rights Act of 7960 (New York, Macmillan
[1962] 143 p.). The two branches of the national
legislature are discussed in Forge of Democracy:
The House of Representatives (New York, D. Mc-
Kay [1963] 496 p.), by Neil MacNeil, and Citadel,
the Story of the U.S. Senate (New York, Harper
[Ci957] 274 p.), by William S. White.
2789. Burnham, James. Congress and the Ameri-
can tradition. Chicago, H. Regnery Co.,
1959. 363 p. 59-9849 JKio6i.B78
A discussion of the distribution and limitations of
power under the American system of government,
with particular reference to the role of Congress.
According to the author, expansion of the Govern-
ment and its increasing intervention in social life
have been at the expense of the lawmaking, fiscal,
and investigatory powers of Congress and its control
of warmaking and foreign affairs. He concludes
with a discussion of the future position of Congress
within the American political system. Congressional
Control of Administration (Washington, Brookings
Institution [1964] 306 p.), by Joseph P. Harris,
examines congressional efforts to control govern-
mental operations and the difficulties involved in
exercising such control owing to the growth of ex-
ecutive functions. In Congressional Control of Fed-
eral Spending (Detroit, Wayne State University
Press, 1960. 188 p.), Robert A. Wallace reviews the
influence exerted by Congress through its control
over appropriations.
2790. Clapp, Charles L. The Congressman; his
work as he sees it. Washington, Brookings
Institution [1963] 452 p. 63—23202 JKi02i.C55
Bibliographical footnotes.
An examination of the Congressman's role within
the framework of the established procedures of the
House of Representatives, based on extensive inter-
views and a series of panel discussions. The study
covers such topics as the choice of House Speaker
and floor leaders, the traditions of seniority, party
discipline, intraparty blocs, and interpersonal rela-
tionships within the House and between Congress-
men and their constituents. In U.S. Senators and
Their World (Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press [1960] 303 p.), Donald R. Mat-
thews studies background, performance, and work
patterns of the men who served in the Senate during
the years 1947—57.
2791. Clark, Joseph S. Congress: the sapless
branch. New York, Harper & Row [1964]
xviii, 268 p. 64—12669 JKio6i.C57
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
An examination of formal and real party structure
in the U. S. Congress. A serious discrepancy exists
between these, according to the author, owing to
outworn organization and procedures, which in turn
serve to invalidate publicly approved party plat-
forms. Senator Clark considers that the Congress is
neither effective nor representative and calls for re-
forms in congressional procedures. His analysis
includes characterizations of both the House and
Senate and a discussion of relationships between
Congress and the President and between Congress-
men and their constituents. In House Out of Order
(New York, Dutton, 1965. 253 p.), Representative
Richard W. Boiling suggests ways of restructuring
the House of Representatives. New Perspectives on
the House of Representatives (Chicago, Rand Mc-
Nally 1/1963] 392 p. Rand McNally political sci-
ence series), edited by Robert L. Peabody and Nel-
son W. Polsby, is a collection of recent studies of the
House as a political institution. The Congress and
America's Future (Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-
Hall [1965] 185 p. A Spectrum book S-AA-I3),
edited by David B. Truman for the American As-
sembly, consists of essays on the functions of Con-
gress in dealing with current and potential needs
and problems.
2792. Congressional Quarterly Service, Washing-
ton, D.C. Congress and the Nation, 1945—
1964; a review of government and politics in the
postwar years. Washington [1965] xxii, 1784,
2313 p. illus. 65—22351 KF49.C653
A summary of major legislation and the national
political scene for the years after World War II, cov-
ering such areas as foreign relations, national securi-
ty, economics, labor, agriculture, education, welfare,
and natural resources. Included are a biographical
index of the Members of the 79th through the 88th
Congresses, a record of key votes, a report on na-
tional and State elections during the period, and a
review of 216 major Supreme Court cases. Con-
gressional politics during the immediate post-Civil
War period are discussed by the English historian
William R. Brock in An American Crisis: Congress
and Reconstruction, 1865—1867 ([New York] St.
Martin's Press [1963] 312 p.). Information on
Senatorial graft during the same period can be
found in Of Snuff, Sin, and the Senate (Chicago,
Follett Pub. Co., 1965. 360 p.), by Robert Rienow
and Leona T. Rienow.
2793. Evins, Joe L. Understanding Congress.
New York, C. N. Potter [1963] 304 p.
63-18878 JKio6i.E85
Includes bibliography.
The author, for 16 years a Congressman from
Tennessee, notes the "lack of true appreciation of
442 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the work of Congress" and attributes it not only to
the fact that Congress is "a highly complicated in-
stitution with a unique character and little similarity
to any other body, political, civil, or private" but also
to the failure on the part of Congressmen themselves
to fully explain their work to the country. A vivid
and detailed description of the Congressman's life
on Capitol Hill is included, as well as discussions of
the functions, organization, and procedures of Con-
gress, its place in domestic and world affairs, and its
relationships with the political parties, the Presi-
dency, and the Supreme Court. .Member of the
House (New York, Scribner [1962] 195 p.), a
collection of constituent-oriented newsletters written
by Representative Clem Miller of California over a
three-year period and edited by John W. Baker,
provides insights into the activities and problems of
a U.S. Congressman.
2794. Galloway, George B. History of the United
States House of Representatives. [Rev. ed]
Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1965. 218 p.
(89th Congress, ist session. House document no.
250) 65—65604 JKi3i6.G22
A study of administrative growth and procedural
change in the House of Representatives, prepared
for the House Committee on House Administration
of the 89th Congress. The author traces the evolu-
tion of the structure and organization of Congress,
with particular reference to the development of the
committee system and the pattern of leadership.
Other aspects considered include party government,
the performance of legislative functions, relations
with the Senate and the President, and the role of
the individual Representative. The United States
Senate, 1787-1801; a Dissertation on the First Four-
teen Years of the Upper Legislative Body (Wash-
ington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1962. 325 p. Syth
Congress, ist session. Senate Documents no. 64),
by Roy Swanstrom is a detailed history of the early
years of the upper house.
2795. Green, Harold P., and Alan Rosenthal.
Government of the atom; the integration of
powers. New York, Atherton Press, 1963. 281 p.
(The Atherton Press political science series)
63-8916 HD9698.U52G7 1963
Bibliographical footnotes.
The authors cite the Joint Committee on Atomic
Energy as a notable exception to the pattern of in-
creasing ascendency of the executive branch over
Congress in the fields of foreign and defense affairs.
Since its creation under the Atomic Energy Act of
1946, the committee has played an unprecedented
role in the formulation of national policy. The
study covers not only the evolution and functions of
the committee but also such broad areas as executive-
legislative relations and the performance of congres-
sional committees as institutions. The Truman
Committee (New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers Univer-
sity Press [1964] 207 p.), by Donald H. Riddle, is
a study of the history and performance of the Senate
Special Committee Investigating the National De-
fense Program. In The House Rules Committee
(Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill [1963] 142 p. The
advanced studies in political science), James A. Rob-
inson assesses the powers and procedures of that
committee through an analysis of its documents.
2796. Kofmehl, Kenneth T. Professional staffs of
Congress. [West Lafayette, Ind., 1962] 282
p. (Purdue University studies: humanities series)
62-63211 JKio83.K6
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
231-268).
An analytical and descriptive study of the en-
larged professional staff created to assist Congress
during the first six years following enactment of the
Legislative Reorganization Act of 1946, which pro-
vided for the enlargement. In the author's view,
these years were the formative period for most of the
professional staffing subsequently available to mem-
bers of Congress. He concentrates on committee
staffs, office staffs, and the Office of the Legislative
Counsel. His conclusion is that the increased staff-
ing was desirable but that Congress should resist
tendencies to expand it still further. A postscript is
devoted to major trends in congressional staffing
from 1953 through 1961.
H. Administration: General
2797. Kilpatrick, Franklin P., Milton C. Cum-
mings, and M. Kent Jennings. The image
of the Federal service. Washington, Brookings In-
stitution [1964] xvii, 301 p.
64—13789 JK69I.K44
Bibliographical footnotes.
An analysis of the results of a cross-sectional poll
of public attitudes toward the civil service and the
Federal Government as an employer, prompted by
growing competition between private and Federal
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 443
organizations for talented manpower. The authors
suggest a number of changes in Federal personnel
organization, policies, and procedures. The data
themselves are presented in a companion volume,
Source Boo^ of a Study of Occupational Values and
the Image of the Federal Service (Washington,
Brookings Institution [1964] 681 p.), by the same
authors. In The Job of the Federal Executive
(Washington, Brookings Institution [1958] 241
p.), Marver H. Bernstein analyzes various factors
involved in effective Federal administration.
2798. Millett, John D. Government and public
administration; the quest for responsible per-
formance. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1959. 484 p.
(McGraw-Hill series in political science)
58-13883 JK42I.M5
A study of the ways in which American political
institutions operate "to keep the great apparatus of
public administration subject to some degree of po-
litical responsibility." The author notes the separate
identity of government bureaucracy and its position
of tactical superiority over the decisionmaking
branches but considers that these branches, acting in
concert, provide the instrumentalities for keeping
bureaucracy responsible: the legislative by determin-
ing public policy through laws, the executive by its
supervisory role and its part in determining national
policy, and the judicial by its concern for constitu-
tional limitations and its share in political power.
2799. Nigro, Felix A. Modern public administra-
tion. New York, Harper & Row [1965]
531 p. 65—11140 JFi35i.N5
Bibliographies at ends of chapters.
A textbook on the problems of administration at
all governmental levels, with emphasis on adapt-
ability to current developments and needs. Edward
W. Weidner's Technical Assistance in Public Ad-
ministration Overseas (Chicago, Public Administra-
tion Service [1964] 247 p.) is a review of programs
sponsored by the United Nations, the Ford Founda-
tion, consulting firms, and American universities.
I. Administration: Special
2800. Karl, Barry Dean. Executive reorganization
and reform in the New Deal, the genesis of
administrative management, 1900—1939. Cam-
bridge, Mass., Harvard University Press, 1963. 292
p. 63—13813 JK69I.K.35
Includes bibliography.
In 1936 President Franklin Delano Roosevelt
created the Committee on Administrative Manage-
ment and appointed Louis Brownlow, Charles E.
Merriam, and Luther H. Gulick as its members.
The committee was instructed "to make a study of
the relation of the existing regular organizations of
the Executive Branch of the Government," includ-
ing the many new agencies created to cope with the
depression. The committee's report led to passage
of the Administrative Reorganization Act of 1939,
which set up the Executive Office of the President
and a White House staff, enabled the President to
appoint administrative assistants, and authorized
him to effect additional reorganization. In this
study, the author combines biographies of the com-
mittee members with historical narrative and theo-
retical analysis. In Congress and the Challenge of
Big Government (New York, Bookman Associates
[Ci958] 129 p. Bookman monograph series), Oscar
Kraines examines the "first comprehensive Congres-
sional investigations into administration," begun in
1885.
2801. Powell, Norman J. Personnel administra-
tion in government. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,
Prentice-Hall, 1956. 548 p. 56—9003 JK.42i.P6
Bibliography: p. 487—510.
A textbook study of the "principal ideas and data
fundamental to thinking out and working out ef-
fective personnel programs and policies in the public
service." In addition to discussing general prin-
ciples and problems of government personnel ad-
ministration, the author covers such specific matters
as program guidelines, recruiting, selection, em-
ployee relations, position classification, pay sche-
dules, career service, and in-service training. He
notes that research is providing the administrator
with new and objective means for dealing with his
problems but that in practice these usually have
limitations. Public personnel administration thus
remains "a value-laden area of study with compon-
ents both of science and art."
2802. Stahl, Oscar Glenn, William E. Mosher, and
]. Donald Kingsley. Public personnel ad-
ministration. 5th ed. New York, Harper & Row
[1962] 531 p. 62-19728 ^765.868 1962
Includes bibliography.
An updated edition of no. 6188 in the 1960
Guide.
444 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2803. Warner, William Lloyd, and others. The
American Federal executive; a study of the
social and personal characteristics of the civilian and
military leaders of the United States Federal Gov-
ernment. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1963.
xvii, 405 p. illus. 63—7952 JK.723.E9W3
A sociological study of Federal executive person-
nel, based on an anlysis of questionnaires sent to
more than 12,000 military and civilian administra-
tors. The authors devote particular attention to the
executives' family and educational backgrounds, the
career routes leading to their present positions, and
their social and occupational mobility as compared
to that of leaders in private industry. The Assistant
Secretaries (Washington, D.C., The Brookings In-
stitution [1965] 310 p.), by Dean E. Mann with
Jameson W. Doig, is a study of recruitment and
appointment on one executive level.
J. State Government
2804. Adrian, Charles R. State and local govern-
ments, a study in the political process. New
York, McGraw-Hill, 1960. 531 p. (McGraw-Hill
series in political science) 59—15042 JK.24o8.A3
"For further reading": p. 517—521.
An examination of the general patterns of State
and local parties and election campaigns, the charac-
teristics of executives, legislatures, and judiciaries,
and their performance in such fields as education,
public welfare, and water supply. The author de-
fines the political process as "a method by which
individual wants, which become social wants, are
met by government and social-political policies
emerge as imperfect compromises among the con-
flicting interests of society," and his analysis draws
heavily on the social sciences and humanities. State
and Local Governments: A Case Eoo\ ( [University]
University of Alabama Press, 1963. 669 p.), pre-
pared by a group of political scientists for the Inter-
University Case Program and edited by Edwin A.
Bock, is a collection of 25 case studies which portray
situations, atmospheres, processes, and tactics in
American government below the Federal level.
State and Local Government &• Politics, 2d ed., rev.
& enl. (New York, Random House [1962] 425
p.), by Robert S. Babcock, is a textbook which fo-
cuses on specific political problems and the dynamics
of the political process. In The Office of Governor
in the United States (University, Ala., University of
Alabama Press, 1956. 417 p.), Coleman B. Ran-
sone concentrates on executive functions at the State
level.
2805. Anderson, William, Clara Penniman, and
Edward W. Weidner. Government in the
fifty States. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston
[1960] 509 p. illus. 60—9131 JK.24o8.A7 1960
Includes bibliography.
An updated edition of State and Local Govern-
ment in the United States, no. 6196 in the 1960
Guide.
2806. Jewell, Malcolm E. The State legislature:
politics and practice. New York, Random
House [1962] 146 p. (Studies in political science,
PS37) 62-10673 JK2488.J4
A paperback study of the State legislatures in the
United States, with emphasis on the political char-
acter of these institutions. Since political patterns
vary widely among the States, the author develops
a theoretical model legislature, based on a vigorous
two-party system as an analytical aid in clarifying
the actual functions of the party system in legisla-
tures and estimating the likelihood of achieving in-
creased party responsibility in the legislative process.
Specific topics discussed include the election of leg-
islators, voting alignments in the legislature, its
political organization, and the Governor as legis-
lator. The author considers a lack of political re-
sponsibility to be the fundamental weakness of some
legislatures and concludes that a strong two-party
system within a State offers the greatest possibility
of achieving responsible government. He notes a
recent weakening of Republican strongholds in the
North and inroads by the Republicans in the South
and border areas, a situation which has resulted in
there now being "probably more state legislatures
where politics is based on the competition of closely
balanced parties than at any other time in American
history."
2807. Pennsylvania. University. Pels Institute of
Local and State Government. Government
studies, Pels Institute series. Philadelphia, Univer-
sity of Pennsylvania Press [1958—63] 5 v.
A series commemorating the 2oth anniversary of
the Pels Institute of Local and State Government
and the 75th of the Wharton School of Finance and
Commerce, both of the University of Pennsylvania.
The Pels Institute was founded in 1937 under the
direction of Stephen B. Sweeney, professor of gov-
ernmental administration at the University of Penn-
sylvania, as an affiliate of the Wharton School. The
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 445
series is made up of five scholarly monographs de-
voted to "problems of current and long-range sig-
nificance which are of particular interest to students
of local and state goverment." Case studies of Penn-
sylvania situations predominate, but the analyses
have broad applications. The individual volumes
are as follows: Education for Administrative Careers
in Government Service ([1958] 366 p. 58—12719.
JFi338.A259), edited by Stephen B. Sweeney; Met-
ropolitan Analysis ([1958] 189 p. 58-8137.
HTio9-S9), also edited by Sweeney; Planning
Municipal Investment, a Case Study of Philadelphia
([1961] 293 p. 61-5540. HJ9307.P4B7 1961),
by William H. Brown and Charles E. Gilbert; State
Government in Transition; Reforms of the Leader
Administration, 1955—1959 ([1963] 309 p. 63—
7864. JK3638 1959.857), by Reed M. Smith; and
Four Cities; a Study in Comparative Policy Making
([1963] 334 P- 63~7853- 18323^53), by Oliver
P. Williams and Charles R. Adrian.
K. Local Government
2808. Banfield, Edward C., and James Q. Wilson.
City politics. Cambridge, Harvard Univer-
sity Press, 1963. 362 p. illus. (Publications of the
Joint Center for Urban Studies of the Massachusetts
Institute of Technology and Harvard University)
63—19134 JS33I.B28
Bibliographical footnotes.
An introductory study of urban government as a
political rather than an administrative process.
Among the topics considered are the effects of a
greater or lesser concentration of authority within
the city, ways in which power is accumulated, and
"the fundamental cleavage between the public-
regarding, Anglo-Saxon Protestant, middle-class
ethos and the private-regarding, lower-class, immi-
grant ethos." Urban Government ([New York]
Free Press of Glencoe [1961] 593 p.), a collection
of readings on urban politics and administration
edited by Banfield, is intended to serve as a sup-
plementary text.
2809. Blair, George S. American local govern-
ment. New York, Harper & Row [1964]
619 p. illus. 64-12787 JS33I.B48
Includes bibliographies.
A textbook in which a comparative and function-
al approach is taken to various divisions of local gov-
ernment, including counties, cities, townships, towns,
and schools. Another textbook, concentrating on
rural governments, is Local Government in Rural
America (New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts
1^957] 584 p- ACC political science series), by
Clyde F. Snider. A study of recently formed local
government units is Robert G. Smith's Public Au-
thorities, Special Districts, and Local Government
(Washington, National Association of Counties Re-
search Foundation [1964] 225 p.).
2810. Connery, Robert H., and Richard H. Leach.
The Federal Government and metropolitan
areas. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1960.
275 p. (Government in metropolitan areas)
60—7990 18323.058
Includes bibliography.
This study, conducted by the Government in Met-
ropolitan Areas Project, explores governmental prob-
lems "thrust to the fore by the revolutionary expan-
sion of urban populations in the United States and
the resulting new patterns of metropolitan setde-
ment." Among the topics discussed are the effects
of existing Federal programs on metropolitan areas,
representation of metropolitan interests in Washing-
ton, and ways in which Congress and the executive
branch have failed to meet metropolitan problems.
Arguments for and against the creation of a De-
partment of Urban Affairs are also reviewed. The
authors note that although any approach must take
into account the American federal system under
which the primary responsibility for solving urban
problems lies with local and State governments, in-
terstate and international situations which neither
the local community nor the States can handle alone
are also involved. The Federal Government must
therefore "take the initiative in meeting the chal-
lenge of the metropolis." Specific recommendations
are presented concerning highways, water resources,
water and air pollution, airports, military installa-
tions and defense industries, civil defense, and hous-
ing and urban renewal.
2811. Phillips, Jewell C. Municipal government
and administration in America. New York,
Macmillan [1960] 648 p. illus.
60—5247 JS33I.P46
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
A textbook covering the functions and operation
of municipal governments within the context of in-
tergovernmental relations. Particular attention is
devoted to the effectiveness of governmental struc-
446 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
tures in dealing with urban problems. The dynam-
ic quality of urban populations and the consequent
effects on the functions of city government are
emphasized in another textbook, Benjamin Baker's
Urban Government (Princeton, N.J., Van Nostrand
[1957] 572 p. Van Nostrand political science
series). In a report entitled Governmental Man-
power for Tomorrow's Cities (New York, McGraw-
Hill [1962] 20 1 p.), the Municipal Manpower
Commission, organized under a Ford Foundation
study grant, discusses the difficulties experienced by
American urban governments in their attempts to
attract and retain qualified administrative, profes-
sional, and technical personnel.
2812. Smith, Thelma E. Guide to the municipal
government of the city of New York. 8th
ed. New York, Record Press, 1960. 278 p.
60-9986 JSi228.S6 1960
An updated edition of Rebecca B. Rankin's Guide
to the Municipal Government of the City of New
Yorf(, no. 6214 in the 1960 Guide.
XXX
Law and Justice
A. History: General
B. History: The Supreme Court
C. General Views
D. Digests of American Law
E. Courts and Judges
F. The Judicial Process
G. Administrative Law
H. Lawyers and the Legal Profession
2813-2817
2818-2834
2835—2841
2842
2843—2850
2851—2859
2860-2862
2863-2870
I
THE WORKS classified under History (Sections A and B) in this chapter are for the most
part scholarly monographs on relatively narrow topics. In Section A are publications
devoted to such topics as British statutes in American law, 1776—1836, and law and authority
in early Massachusetts. Section B, which is almost twice as large as any other section in the
chapter, includes biographies of six Supreme Court Justices. Also in the same section,
however, are a general history of the Court, an examination of its role in American life, and
a discussion of its function as guardian of funda-
mental freedoms. With the exception of a five-
volume work on jurisprudence, Section C, General
Views, consists largely of essays and addresses.
Monographic digests of American law of the type
entered in Section D in the 1960 Guide appear to
have been superseded in many instances by other
kinds of publications; as a consequence, a text on
civil procedure is the single entry in this section of
the Supplement. Studies of what takes place in the
courtroom are divided between Section E, Courts
and Judges, and Section F, The Judicial Process. In
the former are books emphasizing the role of the
judges; in the latter are works dealing primarily
with arrests, lawyers, and juries. The law as a pro-
fession falls within Section H, which includes the
writings of three trial lawyers.
A. History: General
2813. Brown, Elizabeth G. British statutes in
American law, 1776—1836. In consultation
with William Wirt Blume. Ann Arbor, University
of Michigan Law School, 1964. 377 p. (Michigan
legal studies) 64-64845 ^366.67
The American Colonies were denied the right to
incorporate the whole of Anglican law in their legal
process, but once independence was declared and
such restrictions were nullified, the adoption of suit-
able British statutes offered a solution to the need for
a body of laws in the new Republic. This study,
intended primarily for the scholar, explores the
extent to which such statutes, without reenactment,
were either declared or considered to be in force.
Law and Authority in Colonial America (Barre,
Mass., Barre Publishers [1965] 208 p.), edited by
George A. Billias, is a collection of essays which take
a more general approach to the same subject.
2814. Haskins, George L. Law and authority in
early Massachusetts; a study in tradition and
447
448 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
design. New York, Macmillan, 1960. 298 p.
60-6416 KFM2478.H3 1960
Bibliographical notes: p. 232—287.
The introductory volume in a planned series,
covering the first 20 years of the Massachusetts Bay
settlement. Noting that "in early Massachusetts the
law appears both as an anchor to tradition and a
vehicle for change," the author traces the evolution
of the Colony's institutions and instruments of gov-
ernment and describes in broad outline the develop-
ment of substantive law in these first two decades.
The study includes a discussion of the influence
exerted by Puritan doctrines and aspirations and of
the more general topic of state-church relations in
society.
2815. Hurst, James W. Law and social process in
United States history; five lectures delivered
at the University of Michigan, November 9, 10, n,
12, and 13, 1959. Ann Arbor, University of Michi-
gan Law School, 1960. 361 p. (The Thomas M.
Cooley lectures, 9th ser.) 61-62695 KF358.H8
The author discusses four features which, he
maintains, have been greatly responsible for shaping
the distinctive roles and character of law in the
United States: force — the Government's "legitimated
monopoly of violence"; constitutionalism — the be-
lief in law based on a fundamental document; pro-
cedure— the formal steps through which the law is
executed; and resource allocation — reliance upon
law as a major means of determining how natural
and human resources will be used. American ex-
perience has been characterized by change rather
than stability, according to Hurst, a situation which
places heavy demands on legal order, and inertia has
tended to prevail over deliberated decision in pro-
ducing this change. The same author analyzes the
effect that law and court decisions may have on a
particular type of activity in Law and Economic
Growth; the Legal History of the Lumber Industry
in Wisconsin, 1836— 1915 (Cambridge, Mass., Belk-
nap Press of Harvard University Press, 1964. 946
p.). Samuel Mermin's Jurisprudence and State-
craft; the Wisconsin Development Authority and Its
Implications (Madison, University of Wisconsin
Press, 1963. 252 p.) demonstrates the interplay of
the many factors that influence legal and social
reform.
2816. Morris, Richard B. Studies in the history of
American law, with special reference to the
seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. 2d ed. Phila-
delphia, J. M. Mitchell Co., 1959 [Ci958] 285 p.
59—14510 KF36i.M67 1959
Includes bibliography.
A revised edition of no. 6230 in the 1960 Guide.
2817. Paul, Arnold M. Conservative crisis and the
rule of law; attitudes of bar and bench,
1887-1895. Ithaca, N.Y. Published for the Ameri-
can Historical Association [by] Cornell University
Press [1960] 256 p. 61— 88 KF5I30.P3 1960
Bibliography: p. 238—247.
In the late i9th century, a "new judicialism"
emerged as the principal bulwark of defense against
demands for economic adjustment, according to the
author. Judicial intervention in economic conflict
was aimed at circumscribing reform movements and
legislation which had been stimulated by the effects
of intense industrialization. Court decisions were at
times major factors in perpetuating the inequalities
that accompanied this socioeconomic growth. In
support of his position, the author discusses specific
instances relating to income tax legislation, trusts
and entrenched capital, injunctions against labor,
and delimitation of police power in the name of due
process of law and freedom of contract.
B. History: The Supreme Court
2818. Frank, John P. Marble palace; the Supreme
Court in American life. New York, Knopf,
1958. 301 p. 58-12628 KF8748.F65
A former law clerk to Associate Justice Hugo L.
Black discusses the Supreme Court as a government-
al institution which plays a vital balancing role be-
tween conflicting interests. After reviewing the
Court's jurisdiction, enforcement of its decisions,
selection of its members, and techniques used by
lawyers and justices during litigation, the author
examines special functions of the Court in such areas
as civil liberties, the economy, international affairs,
and maintenance of a balance between the National
and State Governments. The Judiciary (Boston,
Allyn & Bacon, 1965. 122 p. The Allyn & Bacon
series in American Government), by Henry J. Abra-
ham, is a concise survey of the Supreme Court's
role in government. In The Least Dangerous
Branch (Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill ['1962] 303
p.), Alexander M. Bickel considers the Court's im-
pact on society, using the idea of judicial supremacy
as a point of departure. The problems of judicial
LAW AND JUSTICE / 449
selection, the external forces operating upon the
Court, and the evolution of its procedures and cus-
toms are discussed by John R. Schmidhauser in
The Supreme Court: Its Politics, Personalities, and
Procedures (New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston
[1960] 163 p.).
2819. Harper, Fowler V. Justice Rutledge and the
bright constellation. Indianapolis, Bobbs-
Merrill [1965] xxv, 406 p.
64-8430 KF8745.R87H37
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(P- 379-398 )•
In his initial inaugural address, Thomas Jefferson
referred to the first eight amendments to the Con-
stitution as the "Bright Constellation." During his
six-year service on the Supreme Court, 1943—49,
Associate Justice Wiley B. Rutledge promoted recog-
nition of the basic American liberties inherent in
those amendments. The author describes Justice
Rutledge's origins, gives the background of his ap-
pointment to the bench, and discusses key judicial
decisions involving fundamental freedoms and pro-
cedural rights. Noting that Rudedge's views, often
expressed in dissent, did not prevail until after his
death in 1949, Harper traces the influence of the
Justice's opinions to 1965.
2820. Howe, Mark De Wolfe. Justice Oliver
Wendell Holmes. Cambridge, Belknap
Press of Harvard University Press, 1957—63. 2 v.
57-6348 KF8745.H6H65
CONTENTS. — i. The shaping years, 1841—1870.
2. The proving years, 1870—1882.
Volume i of this projected multivolume biogra-
phy is no. 6241 in the 1960 Guide. The second
volume continues the "account of a young man's
progress towards intellectual accomplishment," with
primary emphasis on an analysis of Holmes' classic
study, The Comm&n Law (no. 6222 in the 1960
Guide). This work occupied much of Holmes'
time and energy for six years before its publication
in 1 88 1, although during the period covered by the
second volume in this biography he also managed
to serve as an editor of the American Law Review
and to lecture at Harvard and at the Lowell Insti-
tute, in addition to practicing law. In 1882 he was
appointed a professor at Harvard Law School, and
in December of that year he accepted a seat on the
Massachusetts Supreme Judicial Court. Howe has
also prepared a special edition of The Common Law
(Cambridge, Belknap Press of Harvard University
Press, 1963. 338 p. The John Harvard library).
2821. Lewis, Anthony. Gideon's trumpet. New
York, Random House [1964] 262 p.
64—11986 Law
Bibliographic references included in "Notes" (p.
[239]— 252). "Suggested readings": p. [2533—256.
A study of two judicial issues, federalism and the
right to counsel, as they apply in the case of Clarence
Gideon, an indigent convicted of breaking and
entering with the intent to commit petty larceny.
Gideon appealed his case to the U.S. Supreme Court
on the grounds that he had not been represented by
counsel. The case is traced from the forma pauper is
petition and arguments by the court-appointed coun-
sel to Justice Hugo L. Black's opinion that the
sixth amendment's general guarantee of counsel in
criminal prosecutions is extended to cases in State
courts by the i4th amendment. This decision
broadened an earlier Supreme Court interpretation
requiring counsel for indigents in capital cases.
Gideon eventually won a verdict of not guilty in the
same Florida court which had originally convicted
him. The account includes a discussion of the
problems confronting the attorney for the State of
Florida and of the questions of States' rights raised
by the case. Another fundamental decision is chron-
icled by Alan F. Westin in The Anatomy of a Con-
stitutional Law Case: Youngstou/n Sheet and Tube
Co. v. Sawyer; the Steel Seizure Decision (New
York, Macmillan [1958] 183 p.). The entire
1962—63 term of the Court is discussed by James E.
Clayton in The Making of Justice (New York,
Dutton, 1964. 319 p.).
2822. Lewis, Walker. Without fear or tavor; a
biography of Chief Justice Roger Brooke
Taney. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1965. 556 p.
65—18490 KF8745.T3L4
Bibliography: p. [5391-546.
Taney (1777—1864) succeeded John Marshall in
1836 to sit as the fifth Chief Justice of the U.S.
Supreme Court, a post in which he served until his
death. The author reviews Taney 's activities before
the appointment, noting that a high point of his
career was his support, as Secretary of the Treasury,
of Andrew Jackson's "war" against the Bank of the
United States. Taney's judicial opinions on many
key subjects, according to the author, "provided the
creative hypothesis around which a whole branch
of law developed," particularly in the field of com-
mercial law. The Dred Scott decision (1856),
which held in effect that a Negro could not be a
citizen of the United States, subjected Taney to
severe criticism. His opinion in ex parte Merry man
(1861), on the other hand, which ruled against
executive suspension of the writ of habeas corpus
without legislative approval, is often praised as one
of the greatest expositions of individual liberty in
the Nation's history.
450 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2823. Magrath, C. Peter. Morrison R. Waite; the
triumph of character. New York, Macmil-
lan [1963] 334 p. 63-14340 KF8y45.W27M3
The author describes the pervasive corruption of
the Grant era from which Chief Justice Waite
emerged, briefly reviews Waite's early life and ca-
reer, and discusses in detail the difficulties confront-
ing the Supreme Court during his tenure (1874—
88). Two categories of problems were of primary
concern to the Court, according to the author,
reintegrating the South with the rest of the Nation
and coping with the advances in technology and
finance. The i3th, i4th, and i5th amendments
were designed to protect the newly freed Negro,
but the Court interpreted them narrowly, believing
the States could adequately handle the issue of race.
Maintaining a suitable climate for the reconciliation
was considered the paramount judicial obligation.
Although later the Court denied the States the right
to regulate business and stricdy construed Congress'
power as well, in Munn v. Illinois (1877) it declared
a State regulatory statute valid. The author con-
cludes that Chief Justice Waite's major achievement
was "personal." By "quiet dignity and careful ob-
servance of the judicial proprieties he did much to
add new luster to the Court's tarnished reputation."
2824. Mason, Alpheus T. The Supreme Court
from Taft to Warren. Baton Rouge, Louisi-
ana State University Press, 1958. 250 p.
58-10292 KF8748.M3 1958
James Madison envisioned that one function of
the Supreme Court would be to protect individuals
and minorities while permitting government by the
majority. The author examines this role as reflected
in the legal philosophies of the four Chief Justices
preceding Earl W. Warren. He notes that for
William Howard Taft, the concept of property was
bedrock; the commerce clause of the Constitution
was designed to accommodate change facilitating the
growth of business. The primary value in Charles
Evans Hughes' philosophy was stability, but he
modified his views quickly to maintain judicial
supremacy against Franklin D. Roosevelt's "court-
packing" proposal. Harlan Fiske Stone, who had
"an acute awareness of the role the Court must and
should play in the American scheme of govern-
ment," advocated judicial restraint. Relatively little
attention is devoted to the seven-year term of Fred
M. Vinson, upon whose death in 1953 Warren was
appointed Chief Justice. In Politics and the Warren
Court (New York, Harper & Row [1965] 299 p.),
Alexander M. Bickel examines the interaction be-
tween Supreme Court decisions and public policies
during the 1 2-year period beginning in 1954, with
emphasis on civil rights, legislative reapportionment,
and public education.
2825. Mason, Alpheus T. William Howard Taft,
Chief Justice. New York, Simon & Schuster
[1965] 354 p. 65-11166 KF8745.T27M3
Although Taft's tenure as Chief Justice consti-
tuted only one phase in a long career, he left as a
legacy for the people of the United States a judiciary
better able to cope with society's needs. Among his
proposals, only reorganization of the lower Federal
courts and alteration of the Supreme Court's juris-
diction were accepted immediately, Mason notes, but
he laid the groundwork for more extensive reform,
especially in the rules of procedure which were
finally adopted in 1938. Taft was a consummate
lobbyist, according to the author, and campaigned
hard for a seat on the high bench, for reform
measures, and for candidates for vacant seats on the
Supreme Court. Mason sees Taft as a dominant
personality whose views were well founded, deep
seated, and basically conservative. He finds it
ironic that Taft should be best remembered for
judicial reforms that facilitated a progressivism
which he distrusted and that his broad construction
of the commerce clause has permitted widespread
experimentation of a kind that disconcerted him.
In A Supreme Court Justice Is Appointed (New
York, Random House [1964] 242 p. Random
House studies in political science, 1*846), David J.
Danelski describes Taft's role in the nomination of
Pierce Buder.
2826. Pfeffer, Leo. The liberties of an American;
the Supreme Court speaks. 2d ed. enl.
[Boston] Beacon Press [1963] 328 p. (Beacon
paperback, 168) 63-14156 ^4749^45 1963
Bibliography: p. [305] -307.
A discussion of the Supreme Court's function in
defining and protecting constitutional privileges.
The author compares decisions made before 1937
with those which have been handed down since
and concludes that the Court has become the chief
guardian of fundamental freedoms. This role is
illustrated most clearly in its increasing willingness,
particularly since midcentury, to handle issues
involving civil rights. In general, Pfeffer maintains,
the Court's vigor has resulted in a clearer, more
precise definition of the freedoms basic to the
American experiment in government.
2827. Pfeffer, Leo. This honorable Court; a his-
tory of the United States Supreme Court.
Boston, Beacon Press [1965] 470 p.
65-13536 KF8742.P34
Bibliography: p. 429—434.
LAW AND JUSTICE / 451
The author views the role of the Supreme Court
as a threefold paradox: the Court uses customs and
instruments of a judicial nature but performs impor-
tant political and legislative functions; while so
acting, it is beyond effective attack upon its status or
powers; and its decisions impinging upon the politi-
cal and legislative processes are accepted despite its
inability to compel compliance. This history of the
Court is intended as a starting point in the develop-
ment of an understanding of the paradox and thus
of the functioning of our governmental system.
The author reviews the treatment accorded each of
the three branches in the Constitution and discusses
some of the Court's crucial decisions against their
historical background. In The American Supreme
Court ( [Chicago] University of Chicago Press
[1960] 260 p. The Chicago history of American
civilization), Robert G. McCloskey also reviews
the relationship between the Court and American
society.
2828. Schmidhauser, John R. The Supreme Court
as final arbiter in Federal-State relations,
1789-1957. Chapel Hill, University of North Caro-
lina Press [1958] 241 p.
58-3675 KF8748.S275 1968
Bibliography: p. [231]— 235.
A study of the origins of the Supreme Court's
power in Federal-State relations and of the manner
in which that power has been exercised. The au-
thor defends the Court against recent States' rights
charges of "judicial usurpation" of power, asserting
that the records of the Convention of 1787 and of
the State ratifying conventions, as well as the legis-
lative history of the first Judiciary Act, indicate
unmistakably that the Founding Fathers intended
to give the Supreme Court the responsibility for
monitoring the Federal system. The crises and
difficulties subsequently faced by the Court are
understandable, he finds, in part because it has fre-
quently been either behind the times, as in the early
period of the New Deal, or ahead of the times, as in
recent years. In addition, personal preferences of
the judges have led to the adoption of doctrines
which violated or strained constitutional proprieties,
according to Schmidhauser.
2829. Schubert, Glendon A. The Presidency in
the courts. Minneapolis, University of Min-
nesota Press [1957] 391 p.
57-5803 KF5o5o.S35
2830. Murphy, Walter F. Congress and the Court;
a case study in the American political pro-
cess. [Chicago] University of Chicago Press
[1962] 307 p. 62-9739 KF8748.M84
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 269-296).
The Presidency in the Courts is an analysis of
judicial behavior as it relates to the powers of the
Presidency. Schubert concludes that the most sig-
nificant aspect of judicial review of Presidential
orders is its ineffectiveness and argues that "the
elected representatives of the people — the President
and the Congress — must decide the great questions
of constitutional law." The author of Congress and
the Court examines the Supreme Court's decisions
under Chief Justice Earl W. Warren and the
response of Congress to those decisions. He notes
that the Court handed down a number of decisions
which had significant effects in shaping public
policy and that Congress then considered — but in
only one instance adopted — proposals to reverse the
Court's policies. In the end, however, the Court
withdrew from policymaking activities. In Con-
gress Versus the Supreme Court, 7957—7960 (Min-
neapolis, University of Minnesota Press [1961]
1 68 p.), Charles Herman Pritchett concentrates on
efforts of the 85th and 86th Congresses to curb the
Court.
2831. Shapiro, Martin. Law and politics in the
Supreme Court; new approaches to political
jurisprudence. [New York] Free Press of Glen-
coe [1964] 364 p. 64-23078 KF8748.S5
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(P- 334-356).
As an aid to law students, the author provides
background in political concepts which clarify the
sources and implications of Supreme Court doc-
trines and decisions. The study is intended to
bridge the gap between political and legal learning.
On the basis of an approach which combines judi-
cial realism and sociological jurisprudence, Shapiro
defines the major roles of the Court and analyzes
each of them in detail. In The Supreme Court on
Trial (New York, Atherton Press, 1963. 308 p.),
Charles S. Hyneman uses Brown v. Board of Edu-
cation (1954) as a case study in examining the place
of the Court in the political system.
2832. Silver, David M. Lincoln's Supreme Court.
Urbana, University of Illinois Press, 1956.
272 p. (Illinois studies in the social sciences, v. 38)
56-5688 H3I.I4 v. 38
Bibliography: p. 241—249.
Taking a basically historical rather than legalistic
approach, the author describes and evaluates the
Supreme Court's relationship to Lincoln and to the
Union during the Civil War. The study covers
radical attempts to "modify, pack, or destroy the
Supreme Court," as well as "the attitudes of the
452 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
various members of the Court as the war opens,
the politics behind the appointment of four Asso-
ciate Justices and a Chief Justice, decisions of vital,
war-related cases, examination of the normal busi-
ness of the wartime Court, proposals to lure aged
Democratic Justices into retirement, the role of the
Justices on circuit, the revamping of the Court
under its new Republican Chief Justice, Salmon P.
Chase, and the absolution of its former Democratic
head, Roger B. Taney." In the Prize Cases,
according to the author, the Court handed down its
most significant decisions of the period: Lincoln's
proclamation instituting a blockade of the entire
coastline of the Confederacy, based solely on Presi-
dential authority, was upheld as constitutional.
2833. Thomas, Helen S. Felix Frankfurter; schol-
ar on the bench. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins
Press [1960] 381 p. 60-11571 KF8745.F7T44
Bibliographical footnotes.
A biography which includes an examination of
Justice Frankfurter's writings, speeches, and judi-
cial opinions. Displaying great faith in the legisla-
tive branch, Frankfurter advocated a limited role
for the judiciary in trying to solve the problems of
an evolving society, according to the author, and
legislative intent based on policy was thus accorded
great weight in his findings. Although sudden
breaks in the nature of the Court's decisions were
not desirable, stare decisis was not to be blindly fol-
lowed where new bodies of knowledge, not extant
at the time of earlier decisions, had become avail-
able. The Constitution, although written, only set
up bounds within which great flexibility could be
exercised to accommodate new developments.
Frankfurter believed that the court's function was
to direct the Constitution, which he referred to as
a stream of history.
2834. Westin, Alan F., ed. An autobiography of
the Supreme Court; off-the-bench commen-
tary by the Justices. New York, Macmillan [1963]
475 p. 63—10707 Law
Bibliography: p. 35—47.
An anthology of out-of-court commentary by U.S.
Supreme Court Justices from 1790 to 1962. Assert-
ing that the public "can profit from as much explan-
atory commentary in speeches and books as the
Justices can produce without disrupting the sense of
corporate privacy and the reputation for impartial
judging," the author presents a variety of selections
which include statements about the Court as an
institution, about constitutional law issues, and
about fellow Justices. Each item represents the
thinking of the Justice after he joined the Court
and secured a view from the inside. The Constitu-
tion and the Supreme Court, 2d ed. (New York,
Dodd, Mead, 1965. 681 p.), edited by Wallace
Mendelson, uses actual decisions to reveal the cur-
rent status of constitutional law.
C. General Views
2835. Association of American Law Schools. Se-
lected essays on constitutional law, 1938—
1962. Compiled and edited by a committee of the
Association of American Law Schools: Edward L.
Barrett, Jr. [and others] St. Paul, West Pub. Co.,
1963 971 p. 63-4245 KF4550.A2A782
Bibliographical footnotes.
A supplement to No. 6090 in the 1960 Guide.
2836. Griswold, Erwin N. Law and lawyers in
the United States; the common law under
stress. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1965
["1964] 152 p. 65-2274 KF298.G7 1965
Bibliographical footnotes.
A series of lectures delivered in London by the
dean of the Harvard University Law School. Vari-
ous aspects of the law of the United States are
discussed, including the American legal profession,
problems of federalism, and civil rights.
2837. Hand, Learned. The spirit of liberty; pa-
pers and addresses. Collected and with an
introduction and notes by Irving Dilliard. 3d ed.,
enl. New York, Knopf, 1960. xxx, 310 p.
60—10956 KF2I3.H3 1960
A revised edition of no. 6264 in the 1960 Guide.
2838. Henson, Ray D., ed. Landmarks of law;
highlights of legal opinion. New York,
Harper [1960] 461 p. 60—7558 Law
A collection of essays which provide a variety of
20th-century views on the subject of jurisprudence,
including those of Oliver Wendell Holmes, Roscoe
Pound, and Felix Frankfurter. The substance of
law is illustrated with comments on such topics as
evidence, right to privacy, and proof, as well as on
legal guidelines governing insurance, community
property, and compensation. Of particular interest
is the article in which Samuel D. Warren and Louis
LAW AND JUSTICE / 453
D. Brandeis laid the foundations for modern recog-
nition of the "right to privacy."
2839. Mendelson, Wallace. Justices Black and
Frankfurter: conflict in the Court. [Chi-
cago] University of Chicago Press [1961] 151 p.
61-5781 KF8748.M4 1961
"The main trouble with the Supreme Court is a
general misunderstanding of its role in American
government," according to the author, who seeks to
dispel at least a part of that misunderstanding in
this book. Emphasis is placed on Justices Hugo
L. Black and Felix Frankfurter "not because they
must be accepted as heroes" but because they
"represent with uncommon ability two great, if
differing, traditions in American jurisprudence."
Mendelson notes that both consider it inevitable that
the Court must make laws as well as interpret them.
The difference between the two views lies in the
extent to which each asserts the lawmaking should
be carried. Frankfurter is pictured as an advocate
of restraint, as one who would keep judicial legisla-
tion to a minimum. Black is portrayed as an
activist, one to whom the making of law is the
heart of the judicial process. The former position
tends to produce dispersion of governmental power
and the latter centralization, the author believes, and
"eventually, perhaps, we will have to choose be-
tween them."
2840. Pound, Roscoe. Jurisprudence. St. Paul,
West Pub. Co., 1959. 5 v. 59—3463 Law
CONTENTS. — v. i. Jurisprudence. The end of
law. — v. 2. The nature of law. — v. 3. The scope
and subject matter of law. Sources, forms, modes
of growth. — v. 4. Application and enforcement of
law. Analysis of general juristic conceptions. — v. 5.
The system of law. Index.
A preeminent legal scholar surveys the philosophy
of law and the science of its administration. This
monumental study represents a summation of and,
to some extent, supplement to the author's prolific
writings. The discourses cover a wide variety of
areas, including legal philosophy, analytical juris-
prudence, legal history, comparative law, technical
or professional elements in law, and sociological
jurisprudence. The scope of the study, which
Pound worked on intermittently for 47 years, ex-
tends from about 1750 B.C. through the late 1930*5.
Throughout the work runs the theme of "the
difference between law and a law, that law is not a
mere aggregate of rules of law nor the legal order a
glorified system of policing." In Rascoe Pound and
Criminal Justice (Dobbs Ferry, N.Y., Published for
National Council on Crime and Delinquency by
Oceana Publications, 1965. 261 p.), Sheldon
Glueck has brought together a selection of the
jurist's articles and addresses on criminal justice,
probation, and court organization which have been
long out of print or to which access is difficult.
2841. S wisher, Carl B. The Supreme Court in
modern role. Rev. ed. [New York] New
York University Press, 1965. 221 p. (James
Stokes lectureship on politics)
65-19522 KF8748.S93 1965
Includes bibliographies.
As the Nation moves further from conditions
existing in 1789, the Supreme Court must rely more
on its estimates of current society than on history
in its search for constitutional meaning. When
situations with which it is faced are novel and
lack effectively authoritative precedents, the author
asserts, the Court must be particularly dynamic or
creative. Modern problems "occur not so much
in connection with the scope of property rights, as
in earlier years, as with the rights of persons and
groups of persons in relation to the law." Critical
circumstances are discussed in which the Court has
dealt with such problems as subversion, race, and
the changing place of the military in our tradi-
tionally civilian culture.
D. Digests of American Law
2842. James, Fleming. Civil procedure. Boston,
Little, Brown, 1965. xx, 747 p.
65-17621 KF8840.J3
A textbook for basic courses in civil procedure,
by a professor of law at Yale University. On the
basis of his experience in teaching such a course for
more than 30 years, James summarizes subjects
given extensive treatment in large works unsuitable
for use as textbooks and includes new developments
that have significantly changed the nature of pro-
cedure. Of particular interest to the layman is the
author's step-by-step review of the progression of a
civil action.
454 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
R Courts and Judges
2843. Goldfarb, Ronald L. The contempt power.
New York, Columbia University Press, 1963.
366 p. 63—20342 KF94I5.G6 1963
Bibliography: p. [351]— 356.
The author explores the ramifications of the
power to punish contempt, which he defines in a
general sense as "an act of disobedience or dis-
respect toward a judicial or legislative body of
government, or interference with its orderly process,
for which a summary punishment is usually exact-
ed." Various related topics are discussed, including
the extralegal significance of the contempt power.
2844. Justice for the child; the juvenile court in
transition. Edited by Margaret Keeney
Rosenheim. New York, Free Press of Glencoe
[1962] 240 p. 62—15349 KF9709.J86
Bibliographical notes and selected references at
the ends of chapters.
A collection of articles which examine various
aspects of the treatment accorded juvenile offenders
and the functioning of the courts which administer
this treatment. Among the topics considered are
constitutional rights in the juvenile court, juvenile
courts and due process, and the origin, purpose, and
failings of the American juvenile court system.
2845. Llewellyn, Karl N. The common law tra-
dition: deciding appeals. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1960. 565 p. 60—14465 KF905O.L58
An examination and defense of the role of the
appellate courts of the United States. According to
Llewellyn, "The bar is so much bothered about
these courts that we face a crisis in confidence
which packs danger." Lawyers lament the "death
of stare decisis" and complain that legal opinions
are products of uncontrolled judicial will. The
decisionmaking of the appellate courts, however, is
"more reckonable and stable than is the deciding
done in most other phases of American life on most
other types of fighting issue." Many of the existing
deficiencies in the appellate system, the author
asserts, are effects rather than causes of an unfavor-
able image and obscure true characteristics. The
numerous factors which have grown or been built
into the system are reviewed, with specific attention
to such special aspects as the meaning and use of
precedent and the craftsmanship and style of judges.
Everyday case situations rather than landmark deci-
sions are cited in support of the author's argument.
Appendixes provide additional illustrative material
and commentary.
2846. Mayers, Lewis. The American legal sys-
tem; the administration of justice in the
United States by judicial, administrative, military,
and arbitral tribunals. Rev. ed. New York, Harp-
er & Row [1964] 594 p.
63—17711 KF87OO.M36 1964
Bibliography: p. 568—573. Bibliographical foot-
notes.
A revised edition of no. 6289 in the 1960 Guide.
2847. Murphy, Walter F., and Charles Herman
Pritchett, eds. Courts, judges, and politics;
an introduction to the judicial process. New York,
Random House [1961] 707 p.
61-9678 KF8700.A7M8
A collection of cases and essays which analyze
and illustrate the functioning of the judiciary in
the context of the American political process,"
intended for students of government, law, and
public affairs. Materials were selected with a view
to developing "a clearer understanding of the role
which American judges and courts, as they perform
their historic function of settling disputes and dis-
pensing justice, play in the process of democratic
policy formation." In addition to cases and essays,
the editors have included excerpts from personal
letters, books, legal codes, and fiction. In The Role
of Domestic Courts in the International Legal Order
( [Syracuse, N.Y.] Syracuse University Press, 1964.
184 p. The Procedural aspects of international law
series), Richard A. Falk argues that foreign policy
considerations must not be allowed to control the
outcome of judicial proceedings in international law
cases litigated in domestic courts.
2848. Schubert, Glendon A., ed. Judicial behav-
ior; a reader in theory and research. Chi-
cago, Rand McNally [1964] 603 p. ill us. (Rand
McNally political science series)
64-17638 KF8775.A7S3
Bibliographical footnotes.
An anthology of materials illustrating the devel-
opment of the behavioral approach to the study of
the judicial process. In contrast to traditional
empirical approaches, this type of investigation
represents "a fusion of theories and methods devel-
oped in various social sciences in order to study
scientifically why judges make the decisions that
they do." The studies are divided into three major
categories: historical background; relationships be-
tween judicial behavior and the social sciences,
specifically cultural anthropology, political sociol-
ogy and social psychology; and prediction of judicial
behavior. The relative newness of this analytical
method is reflected in the fact that more than half
of the 45 contributions were published after 1961.
A pioneer work in the field is Schubert's Quantita-
tive Analysis of Judicial Behavior (Glencoe, 111.,
Free Press [1960, Ci959] 392 p.). He also em-
ploys a behavioral approach in The Judicial Mind;
the Attitudes and Ideologies of Supreme Court
Justices, 1946-1963 (Evanston, 111., Northwestern
University Press [1965] 295 p.).
2849. Schulman, Sidney. Toward judicial reform
in Pennsylvania; a study in court reorgani-
zation. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania,
the Law School, Institute of Legal Research, 1962.
281 p. (Studies in law and administration)
62-18050 KFP5o8.S3
A comprehensive survey of "courthouse govern-
ment" in Pennsylvania in which the author dis-
cusses the system's deficiencies and offers a plan for
court reorganization. Schulman's investigation
covers a broad sphere, from traffic court operations
to the selection of State supreme court judges, and
his proposals range from a draft for constitutional
reform to the organization of small citizen pressure
groups as a means of stimulating change. State
court procedure is also the subject of Dispatch and
Delay; a Field Study of Judicial Administration in
Pennsylvania (Philadelphia, Institute of Legal Re-
search, Law School, University of Pennsylvania,
1961. 426 p. Studies in law and administration),
by A. Leo Levin and Edward A. Woolley.
LAW AND JUSTICE / 455
2850. Virtue, Maxine B. Survey of metropolitan
courts; final report. Prepared for the Uni-
versity of Michigan Law School and the Section of
Judicial Administration of the American Bar Asso-
ciation. Ann Arbor, University of Michigan Press
[1962] xxv, 523 p. (Michigan legal studies)
62—9960 KF8737.V5
Bibliography: p. 475—491.
Tremendous growth in jurisdictional area and in
population mobility and diversity have produced
metropolitan judicial structures of confusing variety
and characterized by overlapping and conflicting
responsibilities, according to the author, and as a
result the courts have become inefficient, overbur-
dened, and chaotic. Initiated by the University of
Michigan Law School, this survey investigates the
composition, machinery, and functions of courts in
communities that have outgrown city and county
boundaries. On the basis of the results, general
conclusions are offered and solutions for problems
are suggested. The author recommends consolida-
tion and streamlining of the "hodge-podge of scat-
tered tribunals" existing within the metropolitan
structure and notes that the "entrenched judiciary
must guard against permitting their respect for
traditional structures to offer a block to needed
administrative change." She commends the trend
toward the use of specialized judges within the
framework of a flexible general court. In Urban
Justice; Municipal Courts in Tennessee (Knoxville,
Bureau of Public Administration, University of
Tennessee, 1964. 101 p.), a study of administrative
justice in city courts, Richard G. Sheridan criticizes
municipal judiciaries for laxity in adhering to due
process.
F. The Judicial Process
2851. Busch, Francis X. Law and tactics in jury
trials. Encyclopedic ed. Indianapolis,
Bobbs-Merrill [1959—63] 5 v.
59-1175 KF89 15.68
A revised and greatly enlarged edition of no. 6296
in the 1960 Guide, accompanied by a General Index
([1964] 514 p.) and kept up to date by cumula-
tive supplements.
2852. Cheatham, Elliott E. A lawyer when need-
ed. New York, Columbia University Press,
1963. 128 p. (James S. Carpentier lectures, 1963)
63-19857 KF9646.A75C44
Bibliographical footnotes.
Six lectures delivered at Columbia University by
the Charles Evans Hughes professor of law emeritus
at that institution. Cheatham explores the practical
and ethical factors which underlie the call for
measures to make counsel more readily available,
examines the special problem of providing counsel
for defendants who are highly unpopular, and dis-
cusses the need for counsel in various kinds of civil
456 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
cases. One aspect of the problem is examined by
Lee Silverstein in Defense of the Poor in Criminal
Cases in American State Courts (Chicago, 1965.
276 p.), an American Bar Foundation field study.
2853. Jacob, Herbert. Justice in America; courts,
lawyers, and the judicial process. Boston,
Little, Brown [1965] 215 p.
65—16550 KF8yoo.Z9J3
Bibliographical footnotes.
A political analysis of the administration of
justice in the courts, with a description of overall
court structure and operations. The author defines
two broad functions of the courts — enforcing norms
and making policy — and takes the position that
the courts, although directed by different decision-
making rules, act as political institutions perform-
ing functions similiar to those of legislative and
executive bodies. The roles played by lawyers,
judges, and juries are reviewed, recent suggestions
for judicial reform are assessed, and the inade-
quacy of legal research upon which to base improve-
ments is noted.
2854. LaFave, Wayne R. Arrest; the decision to
take a suspect into custody. [Boston] Lit-
tle, Brown, 1965. xxxiv, 540 p. (American Bar
Foundation. Administration of criminal justice
series) 65—16283 KF9625-L3
Bibliographical footnotes.
The first report of an American Bar Foundation
survey of criminal justice. The decision to arrest,
the first step in the administration of justice, was
the subject of a pilot study, conducted in Michigan,
Wisconsin, and Kansas, which covered the choices
and subsequent forms of action at all stages of the
arrest procedure. The report stresses "those issues
which are important and difficult for the well-
staffed, competent, and honest police department,
prosecutor's office, trial court, or correctional
agency." A more general study, written principally
for the layman, is From Arrest to Release (Spring-
field, 111., C. C. Thomas [1958] 235 p.), by
Marshall Houts.
2855. McCart, Samuel W. Trial by jury; a com-
plete guide to the jury system. [2d ed.]
rev. Philadelphia, Chilton Books [1965] 204 p.
65—9292 KF8972.M3 1965
The author traces the jury system from its begin-
nings in English history, noting its gradual emer-
gence as an instrument of justice superior to a
system of trial by judge. He considers the right
to trial by jury to be a cornerstone of individual
freedom and encourages citizen awareness as a
means of preventing its erosion. Charles W. Join-
er's Civil Justice and the Jury (Englewood Cliffs,
N.J., Prentice-Hall, 1962. 238 p.) examines the
history and structure of the American system of
justice and appraises its success in upholding the
Nation's ideals.
2856. Rosenberg, Maurice. The pretrial confer-
ence and effective justice; a controlled test
in personal injury litigation. With a preface by
Tom C. Clark. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1964. xvi, 249 p. illus.
64-8492 KFN2337.R6
Bibliography: p. [2301—242.
Advocates of the pretrial conference consider it to
be the answer to docket congestion; opponents
argue that it bypasses, and thus weakens, the adver-
sary system. At such a conference, the attorneys
inform the judge of matters which might unfold
in the forthcoming trial. A judicial order specify-
ing further steps to be taken is then prepared.
When this study began, the New Jersey Rules of
Civil Practice required that a pretrial conference
be held at a certain point in every personal injury
case filed in the State's major courts. In response
to criticism of the rule, the chief justice of the State
supreme court asked the Columbia University Proj-
ect for Effective Justice to plan a controlled experi-
ment testing the effect of the pretrial conference.
Rosenberg reports the results of that study, as a
consequence of which the pretrial conference was
made optional in negligence cases.
2857. Rubin, Sol. Psychiatry and criminal law:
illusions, fictions, and myths. Dobbs Ferry,
N.Y., Oceana Publications, 1965. xvi, 219 p.
64—19354 KF9242.Z9R8
Bibliographical footnotes.
In 1843 the House of Lords ruled in the case of
Daniel M'Naghten that "to establish a defence on
the ground of insanity, it must be clearly proved
that at the time of committing of the act, the party
accused was laboring under such a defect of reason,
from disease of the mind, as not to know the
nature and quality of the act he was doing; or if
he did know it, that he did not know he was doing
what was wrong." The author contrasts this ruling
with Durham v. United States (1954), in which the
U.S. Court of Appeals in the District of Columbia
held that "an accused is not criminally responsible
if his unlawful act was the product of mental
disease or mental defect." Under the more widely
applied M'Naghten rule an insane person who at
the time of the act knew right from wrong is sub-
ject to punishment for his crime; under the Durham
rule he is not. Rubin's view is that more leniency is
desirable than is available under the M'Naghten
LAW AND JUSTICE / 457
rule but that the Durham rule achieves that leniency
in the wrong way. He advocates a Model Sentenc-
ing Act under which the M'Naghten rule would be
combined with expanded judicial discretion. In
Psychiatric Justice (New York, Macmillan [1965]
282 p.), Thomas S. Szasz uses the case approach to
show the distortions that have sometimes occurred
when the psychiatrist has served as a gatherer of
evidence.
2858. Russell, Francis. Tragedy in Dedham; the
story of the Sacco-Vanzetti case. New York,
McGraw-Hill [1962] 478 p.
62-13822 KF224.S2R85
Noting that the meaning of the Sacco-Vanzetti
trial for law and society today lies not so much in
the question of innocence or guilt as in its implica-
tions for legal process and justice, the author details
the crime, the trial, the appeals, the executions, and
the reaction, with emphasis on the political and so-
cial forces which influenced the case. On the basis of
his analysis of pressures to which the judicial process
and those responsible for its execution are contin-
ually subjected, Russell raises a number of questions
regarding an individual's rights before the law.
Another famous trial and the issues of legal process
that arose in connection with it are discussed in Ed-
ward D. Radin's Lizzie Borden: The Untold Story
(London, Gollancz, 1961. 269 p.).
2859. Younger, Richard D. The people's panel;
the grand jury in the United States, 1634—
1941. Providence, American History Research Cen-
ter, Brown University Press, 1963. 263 p.
63—12993 KF9642.Y6
A history of the grand jury in the United States,
the movements to abolish it, and its resurgence and
renewed practice since a low point in the late 1920'$.
Demonstrating the important role the grand jury
has played within the context of American social
and political development, Younger stresses its effec-
tiveness against imperial interference during the
colonial period, against outside pressures in the
Western territories, and in the South during Recon-
struction. He advocates grand jury investigations
in cases involving alleged fraud or corruption in pri-
vate or public life.
G. Administrative Law
2860. Nelson, Dalmas H. Administrative agencies
of the USA, their decisions and authority.
Detroit, Wayne State University Press, 1964. 341 p.
(Wayne State University studies, no. 13)
63-13433 KF5407.N4
Bibliography: p. 326—334.
The author examines the growth of the quasi-
judicial authority of Federal agencies and analyzes
the argument that administrative adjudication is a
violation of the constitutional separation of powers.
Specific types of administrative law interpretation
are reviewed and recommendations are made for
the reform of agency procedures. In The Lawyer
and Administrative Agencies (Englewood Cliffs,
N.J., Prentice-Hall, 1957. 331 p.)> Frank E. Cooper
discusses the numerous problems attorneys face in
representing clients before administrative tribunals.
2861. Woll, Peter. Administrative law, the in-
formal process. Berkeley, University of Cali-
fornia Press, 1963. 203 p.
63—10409 KF54O2.Z9W6
Bibliographical notes.
2862. Forkosch, Morris D. A treatise on admin-
istrative law. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill
[1956] 856 p. 56-58483 KF5402.F65
Woll develops the hypothesis that administrative
adjudication, because of the requirements of public
policy and the demands for speed, has become pri-
marily informal in its process. In analyzing the sig-
nificance of this development, he discusses the
growth of administrative law and the role of admin-
istrative agencies within our legal system. Forkosch,
a professor of law at Brooklyn Law School, offers a
broad survey of the entire field of administrative
law, which he considers to encompass both the law
administered by an agency and the law that binds it.
His comprehensive monograph stresses the legal
and constitutional principles involved in administra-
tive law. In The Language of Dissent (Cleveland,
World Pub. Co. [1959] 314 p.)» Lowell B. Mason,
a former member of the Federal Trade Commis-
sion, argues against the "vagaries and injustices of
Federal administrative law."
458 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
H. Lawyers and the Legal Profession
2863. Chroust, Anton Hermann. The rise of the
legal profession in America. Norman, Uni-
versity of Oklahoma Press [1965] 2 v.
65—11230 KF36i.C47
Bibliographical footnotes.
CONTENTS. — v. i. The colonial experience. — v. 2.
The Revolution and the post-Revolution era.
A history of the legal profession in the United
States from its colonial beginnings to the mid- 1 9th
century. The author discusses the varying paths
along which American legal systems emerged in the
New England, Middle Atlantic, and Southern Col-
onies under the influence of English law. He finds
in his study that by 1776 wide differences existed
among the three areas. The period between the
Revolution and 1840 is referred to by the author as
the "Golden Age" for both the law and the lawyer
in the United States. In spite of the demanding
conditions created by this unsettled period, it was
distinguished by the breadth and quality of the for-
mative law established and by the number of out-
standing individual lawyers. Under such men as
John Marshall of Virginia, Daniel Webster of Mas-
sachusetts, and Thomas Ruffin of North Carolina,
the concept and range of law greatly expanded.
2864. Darrow, Clarence S. Attorney for the
damned, edited and with notes by Arthur
Weinberg. Foreword by William O. Douglas.
New York, Simon & Schuster, 1957. 552 p.
57-12408 KF2I3.D3W4
Bibliography: p. 547—548.
It was Lincoln Steffens who applied the title of
"attorney for the damned" to Clarence Darrow.
Among the "damned" for whom the lawyer pleads
in this selection of his addresses are Nathan F. Leo-
pold and Richard A. Loeb (1924) and Lt. Thomas
H. Massie (1932). Darrow also defends himself
against a bribery charge before a Los Angeles jury
(1912) and attacks the Tennessee anti-evolution law
in the Scopes trial (1924). Each selection is accom-
panied by a foreword giving the setting, legal back-
ground, and human factors involved and an after-
word disclosing the verdict and subsequent effects of
the trial.
2865. Gertz, Elmer. A handful of clients. Chica-
go, Follett Pub. Co., 1965. xv, 379 p.
65—16544 Law
A personal account of clients and causes repre-
sented by the author. Among the topics covered are
the stratagems and techniques employed in guiding
Nathan F. Leopold's unsuccessful appeal for execu-
tive clemency in 1956 and his successful plea for
parole in 1958. Gertz carries the Leopold story on
through his winning of a judgment of liability
against Meyer Levin's novel Compulsion (1958)
and the motion picture and play based upon it for
having appropriated Leopold's name, likeness, and
personality. Other causes discussed include the suc-
cessful defense of Henry Miller's Tropic of Cancer
(1935) against bans based on charges of obscenity.
Life Plus 99 Years (Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday,
1958. 381 p.) is Nathan F. Leopold's autobiography.
2866. Grossman, Joel B. Lawyers and judges; the
ABA and the politics of judicial selection.
New York, J. Wiley [1965] 228 p.
65—16409 KF8776.G7
Bibliographical footnotes.
An examination of the American Bar Associa-
tion's role in the selection of Federal judges. Be-
cause of the specialized professional background of
its members, the ABA believes that it deserves a
voice in the staffing of the Federal courts. Working
through its Standing Committee on Federal Judici-
ary, the ABA seeks to diminish political considera-
tions in judicial appointments and to influence the
standards to be employed in the selection process.
To date, according to Grossman, these efforts have
had a diffuse impact: the most import achievements
have been in establishing a liaison with the Attorney
General's office and in advocating minimal stand-
ards of selection; the greatest disappointment has
stemmed from an inability to build a similarly close
relationship with the Senate. The author concludes
that the ABA's function as adviser and consultant
in the process of recruiting judges "certainly makes
sense" but warns that there is "reason for grave con-
cern" when that organization's influence results in
the veto of a prospective judicial nomination.
2867. Hamilton, Alexander. The law practice of
Alexander Hamilton; documents and com-
mentary. Julius Goebel, Jr., editor. New York,
Published under the auspices of the William Nelson
Cromwell Foundation by Columbia University
Press, 1964. 898 p. 64—13900 KF363.H3G6
Bibliographical footnotes.
Volume one of a projected two-volume documen-
tary reconstruction of the law practice of the man
who became the Nation's first Secretary of the
LAW AND JUSTICE / 459
Treasury. Each group of documents is prefaced by
an introductory commentary and many individual
documents are accompanied by summaries of rele-
vant circumstances. In attempting to establish
Hamilton's professional capacities and to chronicle
his possible contributions to the growth of law, Goe-
bel uses briefs wherever possible to uncover the
lawyer's learning, acumen, resourcefulness, and dis-
cipline of mind. A further goal of the study is to
illustrate the type of litigation which was pressing
in the early years of the Nation's independence.
One conspicuous category concerned the property
rights of Loyalists. Goebel notes that, motivated by
views of national honor, safety, and advantage,
Hamilton strongly opposed statutes that were de-
signed to penalize the Tories. By appealing to in-
ternational law in several instances, he helped to set
important precedents for its acceptance and use in
the United States.
2868. Nizer, Louis. My life in court. Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday [1961] 542 p.
61—12563 KF220.N5
A prominent trial lawyer reviews seven of his ma-
jor cases and, in so doing, paints a graphic picture
of the courtroom attorney at work. "The lawyer's
task is to reconstruct past events and adduce the per-
suasive facts for his client. He is like the archeolo-
gist who must find and exhume old evidence."
Asserting that real trials are far more dramatic and
far more challenging to the attorney's intellect than
stereotyped presentations on the stage or in motion
pictures and television indicate, Nizer introduces
the reader to various critical problems encountered
in the courtroom, such as those relating to opening
statements, the admissibility of evidence, cross-
examination, and the judge's charge to the jury. Of
particular interest is a discussion of the libel suit
brought by Quentin Reynolds against Westbrook
Pegler. As Reynolds' attorney, Nizer won an un-
precedented kind of settlement: in compensatory
damages, $i, a sum which was subject to taxa-
tion; in punitive damages, $200,000, which was
nontaxable.
2869. Smigel, Erwin O. The Wall Street law-
yer: professional organization man? [New
York] Free Press of Glencoe [1964] 369 p.
64—16968 KF297.S45 1964
A sociological study of the large law firms of Wall
Street, the attorneys that work for them, and the
effects of these organizations on the lawyers them-
selves, on their clients, and on the law. Smigel con-
cludes that, despite the size of these firms, individ-
ual creativity not only survives but in some ways
thrives, and that the firms in fact have a tendency
to lead into the frontiers of new law. A useful com-
plement to The Wall Street Lawyer is Jerome E.
Carlin's Lawyers on Their Own; a Study of Indi-
vidual Practitioners in Chicago (New Brunswick,
N.J., Rutgers University Press [1962] 234 p.).
2870. Williams, Edward Bennett. One man's free-
dom. Introduction by Eugene V. Rostow.
New York, Atheneum, 1962. 344 p.
62-11689 KF373.W466A32
Asserting that every man's right to counsel must
be respected and that the work of a lawyer must
transcend the identity of his client, the author de-
votes a large segment of this work to the undesirable
effects which, he maintains, many congressional
committee investigations have had on fundamental
liberties, particularly the privilege of refraining from
testifying against oneself and the right to trial by
due process. He supports the view that the proper
role of hearings is one of obtaining information nec-
essary for intelligent legislation and not one of ex-
posure for its own sake.
XXXI
Politics, Parties, Elections
A. Politics: General
B. Politics: Special
C. Political Parties
D. Local Studies
E. Machines and Bosses
F. Pressures
G. Elections: Machinery
H. Elections: Results
I. Reform
2871—2873
2874-2881
2882—2900
2901—2906
2907—2909
2910—2912
2913—2916
2917-2922
2923
C ECTION B, Politics: Special, in the Supplement has more entries than its counterpart in the
^ 1960 Guide. Books on State legislators, Jews in politics, Negroes in politics, the Ku Klux
Klan in politics, and the reasons for which people in general become involved in politics
are among the works chosen to represent the increased number of publications appropriate
for inclusion as special studies of politics. As in the 1960 Guide, Section C, Political Parties,
in the Supplement is more than twice as large as any other section in this chapter; the
entries include four works on American commu-
nism, four on the Republican Party, two on the Jef-
fersonian Republicans, one on the Democratic Party,
and one revealing a four-party structure in modern
American politics. Although Section I, Reform, is
limited to one entry — an analysis of the movement
culminating in the Civil Service Act of 1883 —
works on other types of reform appear in Section D,
Local Studies.
A. Politics: General
2871. Adrian, Charles R., and Charles Press. The
American political process. New York,
McGraw-Hill [1965] 756 p. illus.
64—25164 JK.274-A5294
Bibliographies at the ends of chapters.
A descriptive survey of politics in the United
States, based on a behavioral approach to an analysis
of the relationship of political events to the individ-
ual and to the society. The authors discuss the po-
litical process by which public policy is made,
devoting special attention to the influence of public
ideology or "folk philosophy." Projections of cur-
rent demographic, social, economic, and political
trends are reviewed from the standpoint of their
460
possible implications for a democratic system of gov-
ernment. Lectures by eight scholars representing
both the traditional and behavioral approaches to
political science are presented in Continuing Crisis
in American Politics (Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Pren-
tice-Hall [1963] 174 p. A Spectrum book, 8-54),
edited by Marian D. Irish.
2872. Key, Valdimer O. Politics, parties, & pres-
sure groups. 5th ed. New York, Crowell
[1964] 738 p. 64-11799 JF205I.K.4 1964
Bibliographical footnotes.
A revised edition of no. 6335 in the 1960 Guide.
2873- Piano, Jack C., and Milton Greenberg. The
American political dictionary. New York,
Holt, Rinehart & Winston [1962] 383 p.
62-18757 JK9.P55
More than 1,100 entries covering terms, agencies,
court cases, and statutes considered "most relevant
for a basic comprehension of American government,
institutions, practices, and problems." For each
entry, a basic definition and a statement of its signif-
icance are provided. The arrangement of chapters
closely parallels that followed in most textbooks on
American government; for example, there are chap-
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / 461
ters dealing with the Constitution, political parties,
and each of the three basic governmental branches.
The historical origins and uses of approximately a
thousand political terms, including some employed
in Europe, are outlined in American Political Terms
(Detroit, Wayne State University Press, 1962. 516
p.), by Hans Sperber and Travis Trittschuh. A
shorter dictionary, emphasizing current terms and
illustrated with reproductions of political cartoons, is
The Crescent Dictionary of American Politics (New
York, Macmillan, 1962. 182 p.), by Eugene J.
McCarthy.
B. Politics: Special
2874. Bar,ber, James D. The lawmakers: recruit-
ment and adaptation to legislative life. New
Haven, Yale University Press, 1965. 314 p. (Yale
studies in political science, 1 1 )
65—11172 JK.i976.B3
Bibliography: p. 262—263. Bibliographical refer-
ences included in "Notes" (p. 285—310).
By examining politics "as a personal experience
of the politician," Barber seeks to describe the types
of persons attracted to political candidacy in the
United States. His analysis is based on information
obtained through 27 intensive interviews with State
legislators, replies to questionnaires, direct observa-
tion of committee meetings, caucuses, and plenary
sessions, and books, newspapers, and official docu-
ments. The two major variables measured in the
appraisal are the level of activity and the degree of
commitment to office by the individual politician.
Barber identifies four types of legislators: the "Spec-
tator," characterized by modest achievement, limited
skills, and restricted ambition; the "Advertiser,"
high in activity, yet viewing the office as the basis
for another career; the "Reluctant," low in activity
and in willingness to return — serving, under pro-
test, through his commitment to civic duty; and the
"Lawmaker," who seeks the nomination, campaigns
hard, and, if elected, finds important roles to play.
The nature of leadership in general is examined in
Barber's compilation of readings from the works of
a number of prominent scholars, Political Leader-
ship in American Government (Boston, Little,
Brown [1964] 360 p.).
2875. Fuchs, Lawrence H. The political behavior
of American Jews. Glencoe, 111., Free Press
[1956] 220 p. 56—6875
Bibliographical footnotes.
The author asserts that ethno-religious block vot-
ing is virtually a thing of the past and, although
acknowledging an unusual cohesiveness and soli-
darity within the Jewish community, points out that
individuals within that community belong to a va-
riety of interest groups. He notes that American
Jews have historically been identified with move-
ments and parties stressing civil liberties and gen-
eral equality. Their early political allegiance to the
party of Jefferson and Jackson was lost in the con-
troversy over slavery. The advent of Wilsonian
idealism instigated a movement back to the Demo-
cratic Party. Fuchs also examines the independent
behavior of Jews who have been attracted to minor
parties, particularly those with socialist creeds. A
clear illustration of the influence that group identifi-
cation may exert is presented in The Political World
of American Zionism (Detroit, Wayne State Uni-
versity Press, 1961. 431 p.), by Samuel Halperin.
2876. Lane, Robert E. Political life: why people
get involved in politics. Glencoe, 111., Free
Press [1959] 374 p. 58-6485 JA74.L25
A comprehensive study of electoral participation
in voting and officeholding in the United States.
Among the specific topics discussed are acquisition
and use of the franchise, changing voter patterns,
the individual's political motives and attitudes, and
the influences exerted by social institutions such as
churches, professional organizations, and mass me-
dia. In conclusion, the social and individual conse-
quences of popular participation in government are
evaluated, ways to obtain a higher degree of politi-
cal participation are suggested, and the social disad-
vantages which some of them might entail are noted.
2877. Lubell, Samuel. The future of American
politics. 3d ed., rev. New York, Harper &
462 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Row [1965] 270 p. (Harper colophon books,
CN74K) 66-1177 £743.1,85 1965
A revised edition of no. 6346 in the 1960 Guide.
2878. Mitchell, William C. The American polity;
a social and cultural interpretation. New
York, Free Press of Glencoe [1962] 434 p.
62-15346 JA84.U5M65
Bibliography: p. 421-426.
A sociological approach is taken in this attempt
to synthesize institutional and behavioral data in an
overall examination of the American political sys-
tem. Among the questions considered are those
pertaining to the polity's integration, its mainte-
nance, societal goals, allocation of values and costs,
and distribution of benefits.
2879. Rice, Arnold S. The Ku Klux Klan in
American politics. Introduction by Harry
Golden. Washington, Public Affairs Press [1962]
150 p. 61—8449 HS233O.K63R5
References: p. 130—139.
An introductory evaluation of the Klan in the
20th century. Concentrating on Klanism in the
South, Rice describes the nature and sources of the
movement in its various stages of success and failure.
He notes that the year 1915 marked the new begin-
ning of a Ku Klux Klan organization patterned
after the original order which flourished during the
Reconstruction era. Political involvement was a
prominent part of Klan activity in the 1920*5, but by
1942, according to the author, aroused public wrath,
politically unskilled leaders, and dissipated energies
had brought the order into disrepute and decline.
The movement reappeared after World War II,
however, and beginning in 1954 achieved new mo-
mentum through its opposition to civil rights.
2880. Ulmer, S. Sidney, ed. Introductory readings
in political behavior. Chicago, Rand Mc-
Nally [1961] 465 p. (Rand McNally political
science series) 61—10183 JA74.U5
A selection of essays in which behavioral data are
applied to the study of government and politics.
Among the topics considered are the psychological
and social bases of political behavior, characteristics
of groups, factors influencing decision, and prob-
lems of communication, power, and individual re-
sponse to varying roles. A broader study, in which
an attempt is made to define the origins of political
behavior, is James C. Davies' Human Nature in
Politics (New York, Wiley [1963] 403 p.).
2881. Wilson, James Q. Negro politics; the search
for leadership. Glencoe, 111., Free Press
[1960] 342 p. 60—10906 JKi924-W5
Bibliographical notes: p. 319—333.
An analysis of political leadership in major Ne-
gro communities outside the South. Among the
several large cities studied, Chicago is singled out
for detailed analysis. Separate sections are devoted
to a description of Negro community political or-
ganization, an analysis of civic life and Negro-white
relations, and a discussion of the principal dimen-
sions of leadership. The author believes that, within
the Northern Negro community, the "omnicompe-
tent" men — often ministers — who have dealt with
a wide range of issues are being replaced by repre-
sentatives of the middle class who specialize by area
of interest and competence. A study of community
leadership in a Southern city is The Negro Leader-
ship Class (Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall
[1963] 171 p. A Spectrum book), by Daniel C.
Thompson. In The Negro Politician (Chicago,
Johnson Pub. Co., 1964. 213 p.), Edward T. Clay-
ton assesses the role of leaders at various levels of
political affairs throughout the United States.
C. Political Parties
2882. Binkley, Wilfred E. American political par-
ties, their natural history. 4th ed., enl. New
York, Knopf, 1962. 486 p.
62—52807 JK226i.B5 1962
Bibliography: p. 469—486.
An updated edition of no. 6347 in the 1960 Guide.
2883. Bone, Hugh A. Party committees and na-
tional politics. Seattle, University of Wash-
ington Press, 1958. xv, 256 p.
58-10481 JK2276.B6
Bibliography: p. 245—249.
An examination of the structure and operations
of eight committees of the two major political par-
ties at the national level. Included in the discussion
are the Republican and Democratic National Com-
mittees, the four House and Senate campaign com-
mittees, and two Senate policy committees. Noting
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / 463
the amorphous, decentralized character of the party
system, the author emphasizes that each committee
is only a part of the greater structure of the national
parties, sharing responsibilities in such vital areas as
finance, patronage, publicity, and public relations.
He concludes that committee powers are both un-
predictable and questionable. Another study which
delineates the important role played by national
party committees is Politics Without Power (New
York, Atherton Press, 1964. 246 p. The Atherton
Press political science series), by Cornelius P. Cotter
and Bernard C. Hennessy.
2884. Burns, James MacGregor. The deadlock of
democracy; four-party politics in America.
With revisions. Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-
Hall [1963] 376 p. (A Spectrum book, 8-95)
64—4219 £183.696 1963
Bibliographical references included in "Sources"
(P- 343-368).
According to the author, the political system of
the United States has become entrapped by the
Madisonian system, in which conflicting interests
check each other and in turn check national power.
In the first half of the book, Burns analyzes Ameri-
can political history in terms of this Madisonian
model and its Jeffersonian opposite, based on mod-
erate majority rule. The remainder of the text is
devoted to a reassessment of American democracy
in action. This country's polity is described as be-
ing characterized by a four-party system (two con-
gressional parties, motivated by local interests, and
two presidential parties, which emphasize matters
of national and international concern) that necessi-
tates government by "consensus and coalition,"
rather than a two-party arrangement that "allows
the winning party to govern and the losers to op-
pose." The author proposes a restoration of the
Jeffersonian system with two-party competition and
improved, revitalized leadership.
2885. Chambers, William N. Political parties in
a new Nation: the American experience,
1776—1809. New York, Oxford University Press,
1963. 231 p. 63—12551 E302.I.C45
Summary of sources: p. 209—218.
An interpretive essay tracing early American poli-
tics from nonparty beginnings to the emergence of
the modern two-party system. After reviewing the
factional politics which characterized the Nation
from the time of the Revolution until adoption of
the Constitution, the author concentrates on the
Federalist-Republican conflict of the 1790'$. The
adoption of a federal government in lieu of the Con-
federation created a political arena on a national
scale and led to the appearance of national parties,
Chambers observes. Although several issues made
this situation all but inevitable, he notes that debate
over international affairs — and over Jay's Treaty in
particular — greatly stimulated the formation of
issue-oriented parties. Joseph Charles deals with
party politics during the same period in three essays
published under the title The Origins of the Ameri-
can Party System (Williamsburg, Va., Institute of
Early American History and Culture, 1956. 147 p.).
The subject is further explored in The Making of
the American Party System, 1789—1809 (Englewood
Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall [1965] 177 p. A Spec-
trum book, 8-115), edited by Noble E. Cunningham.
2886. Cunningham, Noble E. The Jeffersonian
Republicans; the formation of party organi-
zation, 1789—1801. Chapel Hill, Published for the
Institute of Early American History and Culture at
Williamsburg by the University of North Carolina
Press [ci957J 279 p. 58-1263 JK.23i6.C8
"Bibliographical note": p. [2643—266. Biblio-
graphical footnotes.
2887. Cunningham, Noble E. The Jeffersonian
Republicans in power; party operations,
1801—1809. Chapel Hill, Published for the Institute
of Early American History and Culture at Wil-
liamsburg, Va., by the University of North Carolina
Press [1963] 318 p. 63-21074 JK.23i6.C82
"Bibliographical note": p. [306] -310. Biblio-
graphical footnotes.
The first volume reviews the events surrounding
the germination of political parties in the evolving
Nation and outlines the gradual progression of party
growth. The second volume discusses the formative
years in the development of the Nation's political
system. The author notes that, even with Jeffer-
son's election in 1800, the role of political parties
had not yet become fully established. The second
volume also covers State components in the national
party structure and includes a State-by-State survey
of party machinery. A general history of early party
development is The Democratic Party: Jefferson to
Jackson (New York, Fordham University Press
[1962] 240 p.), by Herbert J. Clancy. Shaw Liv-
ermore relates the political history of the Federalist
Party during the transitional period between Madi-
son and Jackson in The Twilight of Federalism; the
Disintegration of the Federalist Party, 1815-1830
(Princeton, N.J., Princeton University Press, 1962.
292 p.).
2888. De Santis, Vincent P. Republicans face the
Southern question: the new departure years,
1877—1897. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1959.
275 p. (The Johns Hopkins University studies in
464 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
historical and political science, ser. 77, no. i )
59—10767 H3I.J6 ser. 77, no. i
Bibliographical footnotes.
2889. Hirshson, Stanley P. Farewell to the bloody
shirt; Northern Republicans & the Southern
Negro, 1877—1893. Introduction by David Donald.
Bloomington, Indiana University Press [1962]
334 p. 62-8975 E66i.H58
Bibliography: p. 259—273.
In an introduction to Hirshon's book, David Don-
ald of Princeton University notes that the funda-
mental problem facing the Republican Party after
1877 was the apparently permanent Democratic na-
tional majority. In an effort to destroy this suprem-
acy in the South, Republican leaders significantly
modified the party position on the race question, ac-
cording to Hirshson. He analyzes the shifting po-
litical position taken by Northern Republicans
toward the Negro between 1877 and 1893 and re-
calls that some Republicans advocated a party in the
South based on the Negro vote, whereas an oppos-
ing school urged the development of a white Repub-
lican organization in the South. De Santis covers
much the same period, concentrating on Republican
policy and strategy within the South. Witnessing
the end of military reconstruction and the restora-
tion of "home rule," the party leaders failed to
conciliate the Southern whites and deemed it in-
creasingly expedient to abandon the Negro alto-
gether. The author points out that the " 'lUy- white'
movements of the 1920*5 had their origins in the
i88o's."
2890. Draper, Theodore. The roots of American
communism. New York, Viking Press, 1957.
498 p. (Communism in American life)
57-6433 HX83.D7
Bibliographical notes: p. 399-458.
2891. Draper, Theodore. American communism
and Soviet Russia, the formative period.
New York, Viking Press, 1960. 558 p. (Commu-
nism in American life) 60—7672 HX83-D68
Bibliographical notes: p. 445—531.
These two separate but sequential works cover the
political history of communism in the United States
through 1929. The first study analyzes the back-
ground and growth of the movement which led to
formal organization of the American Communist
Party in 1919. Draper observes that the impetus for
polarization and formal organization of the pro-
Communist left, originally absorbed within earlier
leftwing movements, was supplied by American
participation in World War I, combined with the
success of the Bolshevik revolution in Russia. He
uses Communist source materials to trace the emer-
gence of a specific Russian influence on the Ameri-
can leftwing after 1917. In the later study, the
author concentrates on the first decade of the party's
existence as basic to an understanding of its funda-
mental nature. He re-creates the party personalities
and the intraparty struggles which culminated in
1929 with complete Soviet domination over "nation-
alists" in the movement. A general account of the
party's history is presented by Irving Howe and
Lewis Coser in The American Communist Party, a
Critical History, 1919-1957 (Boston, Beacon Press
[Ci95?] 593 P-)-
2892. Eldersveld, Samuel J. Political parties; a
behavioral analysis. Chicago, Rand McNally
[1964] 613 p. (Rand McNally political science
series) 64—17633 JK.2265.E4
Bibliographical footnotes.
"The disparity between our firm philosophical be-
lief in party organization and our imperfect and un-
certain knowledge about party organization can
only be resolved by persistent behavioral research
into the party structure," asserts the author. Using
this approach, he systematically appraises the politi-
cal party in the United States as a distinct social
group operating within society. Data for the study
were obtained from an investigation of the structure
and activity of the Democratic and Republican Par-
ties of Wayne County (Detroit), Mich., during the
1956 presidential campaign. Eldersveld character-
izes the party as a miniature political system with
distinctive patterns of power distribution. A suc-
cinct monograph on party politics and electoral be-
havior in the United States is The American Party
System and the American People (Englewood Cliffs,
N.J., Prentice-Hall [1963] 115 p. Foundations of
modern political science series), by Fred I.
Greenstein.
2893. Glazer, Nathan. The social basis of Ameri-
can communism. New York, Harcourt,
Brace [1961] 244 p. (Communism in American
life) 61—11911 JK.239I.C5G55
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 196-238).
A sociological study of the kinds of groups from
which the American Communist Party has recruited
its members. Membership, observes the author, has
been the "treasure" of the party. Members were
recruited in distinct ways, subjected to special train-
ing, and treated as a deployable resource. Party
ideology and strategy determined that the major tar-
gets for recruiting were native-born industrial work-
ers and Negroes. Social realities in America re-
vealed over the years, however, that these groups
did not fit the traditional Communist theoretical
categories, and enormous efforts to capture them
ended largely in failure. Meanwhile, the greatest
and most significant responses came first from the
existing Socialist Party and later from immigrant
workers whose backgrounds made membership nei-
ther eccentric nor exceptional. An unexpected re-
sponse came from middle class and professional
groups, which became prominent in the late 1930*5.
Wilson Record makes a more thorough appraisal of
the lack of American Negro response to commu-
nism in Race and Radicalism; the NAACP and the
Communist Party in Conflict (Ithaca, N.Y., Cornell
University Press [1964] 237 p. Communism in
American life). The actual process by which a
Communist member is trained is examined by
Frank S. Meyer in The Moulding of Communists
(New York, Harcourt, Brace [1961] 214 p. Com-
munism in American life).
2894. Hollingsworth, Joseph R. The whirligig of
politics; the democracy of Cleveland and
Bryan. Chicago, University of Chicago Press [1963]
263 p. illus. 63-18846 £661.072
"Bibliographical notes": p. 242—250. Bibliographi-
cal footnotes.
A history of the Democratic Party from the begin-
ning of Cleveland's second administration through
the elections of 1904. By 1893 the party had fully
recovered from the "maladies" bred by the Civil
War, Hollingsworth asserts, but the financial panic
and severe economic depression which followed
Cleveland's inauguration produced a wide diver-
gence of opinion as to remedies and strengthened
new divisive forces within the party. The insistent
presence of the Populist Party heightened the tur-
moil and, reflecting the violent tensions between
agrarian and industrial values, the Democratic Party
entered the 2Oth century in disastrous disarray. In
an era of new political leaders, such as William Jen-
nings Bryan, John Peter Altgeld, and Theodore
Roosevelt, both parties became increasingly aware
of the Nation's growing international involvement,
and world affairs became a primary issue. In The
Presidential Election of 1896 (Madison, University
of Wisconsin Press, 1964. 436 p.), Stanley L. Jones
discusses the importance to the Democratic Party of
the urban vote and the futility of "free silver" as a
winning issue, decisively demonstrated with McKin-
ley's first victory over Bryan.
2895. Mayer, George H. The Republican Party,
1854—1964. New York, Oxford University
Press, 1964. 563 p. 64—11232 JK.2356.M3
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 521-548)-
2896. Moos, Malcolm C. The Republicans; a his-
tory of their party. New York, Random
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / 465
House [1956] 564 p. 56—5195 JK.2356.M6
Two studies of the development of the Republi-
can Party, with emphasis on the national organiza-
tion and only limited coverage of State and local
politics. Mayer analyzes the operations of Republi-
can administrations, assessing the Presidents, tracing
the records of the party's Congressmen, and seeking
to clarify the impact of social and economic forces
on the party and its leaders. Among the major sub-
jects discussed are secession, Reconstruction, tariffs,
expansion, the League of Nations, and the depres-
sion. In his 1956 study, Moos seeks to ascertain and
evaluate the ambitions and achievements of the Re-
publican Party throughout its history, augmenting
factual reporting with human interest sidelights.
Donald B. Johnson examines a unique period in
party history in The Republican Party and Wendell
WHH(ie (Urbana, University of Illinois Press, 1960.
354 P-)
2897. Porter, Kirk H., and Donald B. Johnson,
comps. National party platforms, 1840—
1960. [2d ed.] Urbana, University of Illinois
Press, 1961 [Ci956] 640 p.
61-65727 JK.2255.P6 1961
Supplement 1964. Urbana,
University of Illinois Press, 1965. 58 p.
JK.2255.P6 1961 Suppl.
A revised edition of no. 6367 in the 1960 Guide.
2898. Remini, Robert V. The election of Andrew
Jackson. Philadelhpia, Lippincott [1963]
224 p. (Critical periods of history)
63—17677 £380^4
Bibliography: p. 221—224.
An essay on the "profound changes" which oc-
curred in the politics of the United States during
the 1828 presidential election. Particular attention
is given to the transformations in the structuring of
the party organizations as they sought to create mass
support for their candidates. The victory which
placed Andrew Jackson in the White House is large-
ly attributed to the Democratic Party's revitalization,
brought about by Martin Van Buren and other party
leaders. The real significance of the 1828 election,
the author concludes, lay not in the "rise of the com-
mon man" but in the return of active competition
between two national parties. This development in
turn offered the ordinary citizen an elaborate party
machinery "through which he could more effec-
tively control the operation of government and shape
public policy." An earlier study by the same author,
Martin Van Buren and the Making of the Democra-
tic Party (New York, Columbia University Press,
1959. 271 p.), focuses on the New York leader as
the man giving direction to new political forces in
466 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the shaping of the Democratic Party and as one
of the first "professional politicians" in American
history.
2899. Rossiter, Clinton L. Parties and politics in
America. Ithaca, N.Y., Cornell University
Press [1960] 205 p. 60-16163 Ei83.Ry
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
189-198).
A series of lectures delivered at Cornell University
in 1960. The existence of a persistent and "tyran-
nic" two-party system, Rossiter observes, is particu-
larly obvious in the instinctive way in which one
major party or the other moves to absorb the most
challenging third party in a given period. Another
marked feature of the system is the lack of ideologi-
cal or programmatic commitment on the outer edges
of each party. Thus organizational loyalty and serv-
ice tend to blur, and programs and voters overlap.
William Goodman analyzes party organization and
the bases of bipartisanism in The Two-Party System
in the United States, 3d ed. (Princeton, N.J., Van
Nostrand [1964] 672 p. Van Nostrand political
science series). A selection of supplementary read-
ings on the subject is presented in The American
Party System (New York, Macmillan [1965] 466
p.), edited by John R. Owens and P. J. Staudenraus.
2900. Shannon, David A. The decline of Ameri-
can Communism; a history of the Commu-
nist Party of the United States since 1945. New
York, Harcourt, Brace [1959] 425 p. (Commu-
nism in American life) 59—11770 JK.239i.C5S5
Bibliographical essay: p. 375—378. Bibliographi-
cal notes: p. 379—411.
The author discusses the postwar readjustments
of the U. S. Communist Party, its dealings with the
Progressive Party of 1948, and its problems during
the anti-Communist drive of the late forties and
early fifties. Particular stress is placed on the devas-
tating effects on party morale occasioned by the
Soviet denunciation of Stalin in 1956 and the crush-
ing of the Hungarian Revolution. The account
ends with the losing struggle for power in the Amer-
ican party by the unorthodox "nationalist" elements,
highlighted in 1958 by the death of the Daily Wor\-
er and the simultaneous resignation of editor John
Gates from the organization. These events, states
the author, accompanied by an 85-percent drop in
membership, signified the passing of an era in Com-
munist history. In The Story of an American Com-
munist (New York, Nelson [1958] 221 p.), John
Gates tells of his long membership in the party and
of his final disenchantment.
D. Local Studies
2901. Garrett, Charles. The La Guardia years;
machine and reform politics in New York
City. New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers University
Press [1961] 423 p. 61—10262 Fi28-5.G25
Bibliographical note: p. 403—405.
A history of municipal reform in New York City,
with emphasis on the three-term Fusion Party ad-
ministration of Fiorello La Guardia. Set in an era
of depression and urban expansion, this study covers
the welfare, policies, administrative reorganization,
and coalition politics which strengthened a counter
movement to the growing chaos in New York and
established hopeful precedents for action against
modern city problems. In Governing New Yorl(
City (New York, Russell Sage Foundation, 1960.
815 p.), Wallace S. Sayre and Herbert Kaufman ex-
amine current political processes in the city.
2902. Litt, Edgar. The political cultures of Massa-
chusetts. Cambridge, Mass., M.I.T. Press
[1965] xiv, 224 p. 65—26663 F64-L58
Bibliography: p. 213—217.
Massachusetts government is analyzed as a highly
decentralized system serving innumerable interest
groups. A transformed political order has emerged,
according to the author, based on coalitions led by
new managerial professional groups, with added
academician influence. These groupings have cut
across the old alignments based on social class and
ethno-religious background. Four current cultural
identifications, with their historical settings, are de-
fined by the author: the Patrician and the Yeoman,
urban and smalltown professionals of old-stock line-
age; the Worker, of the new-stock, low-income
groups; and the Manager, a member of the high-
income, professional-technical class of increasingly
new-stock heritage. Although the traditional group-
ings still wield influence, Litt observes a strong trend
away from urban industrial centers and toward sub-
urbia. The evolution of Massachusetts party politics
in the early years of United States independence is
traced by Paul Goodman in The Democratic-
Republicans of Massachusetts (Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1964. 281 p. A publication of the
Center for the Study of the History of Liberty in
America).
2903. Lockard, Duane. New England State poli-
tics. Princeton, N.J., Princeton University
Press, 1959. 347 p. 59—5600 JK.2295.Ai 1216
A political analysis of the States of New Hamp-
shire, Vermont, Maine, Massachusetts, Rhode Island,
and Connecticut. The author notes that, despite a
common "Yankee" heritage and many regional sim-
ilarities, the six States vary widely in their politics.
Lockard examines the historical coalitions in New
England, and evaluates the increasingly complex
ethnic, social, and economic factors in the politics of
the area, relating recent trends to current problems
and to transitions taking place in State political sys-
tems throughout the Nation.
2904. Lockard, Duane. The politics of State and
local government. New York, Macmillan
[1963] 566 p. 63—13569 JK.24o8.L6
Bibliography: p. 544—558.
A general descriptive textbook. Noting the new
demands placed on democratic government by
changes in society, as well as the increasing concern
over the proper distribution of power among gov-
ernmental units, Lockard first reviews the adjust-
ments taking place in Federal-State-local government
relations and then devotes the major portion of his
text to the structure, functions, and political dy-
namics of State and municipal governments. He
identifies four basic challenges to be faced in the
next few decades: population expansion, social in-
stability, economic transition, and subsequent politi-
cal pressures. A collection of essays undertaking a
comparative analysis of State institutions is Politics
in the American States (Boston, Little, Brown
[1965] 493 p.), edited by Herbert Jacob and Ken-
neth N. Vines. An insight into intermittent move-
ments toward municipal reform in major American
cities is provided by Lorin W. Peterson in The Day
of the Mugwump (New York, Random House
[1961] 366 p.).
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / 467
2905. Sindler, Allan P. Huey Long's Louisiana:
State politics, 1920-1952. Baltimore, Johns
Hopkins Press, 1956. xv, 316 p.
56—11664 F375.L846
"Bibliographical essays": p. 287—302. Bibliograph-
ical footnotes.
A study of Huey Long's career as Governor, Sena-
tor, and political boss, with an analysis of the major
political events in Louisiana over a period of three
critical decades. Sindler discusses the movement
for reform in the 1920'$, which paved the way for
Long and his "Share-Our-Wealth" program, des-
cribes the rise of the "Long faction," and notes its
dominance even after Long's assassination at the
State Capitol in 1935. In The Louisiana Elections
of 1960 (Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University
Press, 1963. 126 p. Louisiana State University
studies. Social science series, no. 9), William C.
Havard, Rudolf Heberle, and Perry H. Howard de-
scribe what they consider to be the almost complete
breakdown of the Long and anti-Long bifactional
system, identifying the gubernatorial campaign of
1960 as a possible major turning point in Louisiana
politics.
2906. Sorauf, Francis J. Party and representation,
legislative politics in Pennsylvania. New
York, Atherton Press [1963] 173 p. (The Ameri-
can Political Science Association series)
63—13840 JK.2295.P43S6
A study of the interaction of legislator, party, and
constituency in State government, based on an analy-
sis of Pennsylvania politics. The author considers
that the degree to which discipline is fostered in
party-backed candidates depends upon the party's
success in controlling the issues and character of an
election, and he therefore concentrates on the party
function, beginning with the finding and recruiting
of a candidate. The extent of party domination over
the direct primary and the general election is dis-
cussed, and an attempt is made to judge the re-
sponses of the successful candidate to the competing
demands of party, constituency, and person-
al philosophy.
E. Machines and Bosses
2907. Curley, James M. I'd do it again, a record
of all my uproarious years. Englewood
Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall [1957] 372 p.
57-8558 F7o.C83
Beginning in 1896, James M. Curley engaged in
Boston-Irish politics for half a century. In addition
to holding many minor municipal posts, he was four
times mayor of Boston, once Governor of Massachu-
setts, and twice a U.S. Congressman. With lan-
guage and humor suggesting the skilled stump rous-
er, Curley recalls episodes from his long and colorful
career. From an ethical point of view, many of the
468 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
maneuvers he recounts are marginal at best, but they
are considered by some to have been necessary in
view of the intolerable and unyielding conditions
that faced Boston's immigrant groups. A novel
which is thought by many critics to be based on
Curley's life and which focuses on the circumstances
surrounding contentious boss manipulations is Ed-
win O'Connor's The Last Hurrah (Boston, Litde,
Brown ['1956] 427 p.).
2908. Martin, Ralph G. The bosses. New York,
Putnam [1964] 349 p.
64—18010 £183^25
"Notes and references": p. 331—336.
A discussion of the techniques of "bossism" as
developed and utilized by six major 20th-century
politicians in the United States. Mark Hanna is
depicted as the first and, to date, the last, national
boss, one who largely created the framework of na-
tional political campaign tactics used today. Ed-
ward H. Crump of Memphis gained State as well as
city power on a program of civic improvement. Jer-
sey City under Frank Hague, according to the
author, "was among the most ruthlessly ruled, among
the most corrupt, cities in the country." Boston's
James M. Curley is shown as unique for the power
of his personality above that of his machine. The
career of Jordan Chambers in St. Louis exemplifies
the independent Negro leadership emerging in the
1940*5. Quiedy persuasive John M. Bailey of Con-
necticut is used to illustrate today's new breed of
political boss. Crump and Anton J. Cermak are the
respective subjects of William D. Miller's Mr. Crump
of Memphis (Baton Rouge, Louisiana State Univer-
sity Press, 1964. 373 p. Southern biography series)
and Alex Gottfried's Boss Cerma\ of Chicago (Seat-
tle, University of Washington Press, 1962. 459 p.).
2909. Steele, Robert V. P. A debonair scoun-
drel; an episode in the moral history of San
Francisco by Lately Thomas [pseud.] New York,
Holt, Rinehart & Winston [1962] 422 p.
62-12137 JSl449-S75
Bibliography: p. 407-411.
Bossism is seen in its most unprincipled aspects in
this presentation of an "unforgotten, avoided chap-
ter"— an "uneasy memory, primly swept under the
carpet of civic consciousness" — in the "flamboyant"
history of San Francisco. The author traces the bi-
zarre career of Abraham Ruef, who purportedly
ruled the city through Mayor Eugene F. Schmitz,
elected in 1901. Ruef built an empire of graft based
firmly on his control of the Union Labor Party, the
account recalls. Aided and abetted by railroad mag-
nates and other "robber barons," he paralyzed San
Francisco's political echelons through systematic cor-
ruption and threat. These maneuvers touched every
part of the city government and extended into
picaresque private enterprises, such as elegant
restaurant-brothels, which for an extorted fee re-
ceived Ruef's "protection." The story is seasoned
further with murder, attempted assassination, and
suicide. In a protracted series of prosecutions, 1906-
10, which the author emphasizes heavily and from
which he extracts much of his information, a few
dedicated reformers finally caused Ruef's downfall.
He was convicted of bribery and imprisoned.
F. Pressures
2910. Key, Valdimer O. Public opinion and
American democracy. New York, Knopf,
1961. 566 p. 61—14321 HM26i.K.4
Noting that "governments must concern them-
selves with the opinions of their citizens, if only to
provide a basis for repression of disaffection," the
author undertakes to explain the character and force
of public opinion in a democratic political system.
He discusses the various influences which affect
opinion at all levels of society and examines the be-
liefs, outlooks, faiths, and conditions conducive to
the maintenance of government. Most important in
understanding "the puzzle of how democratic re-
gimes manage to function," Key concludes, are the
hazily articulated motives, values, rules, and expec-
tations prevailing at the highest political levels.
2911. Milbrath, Lester W. The Washington lob-
byists. Chicago, Rand McNally [1963]
xiv, 431 p. (Rand McNally political science series)
63-8243 JKni8.M5
Bibliography: p. 399—421.
"Lobbyist" is used in American politics to desig-
nate an individual — other than a citizen acting on
his own behalf — who seeks to influence the actions
of a government decisionmaker. The present study
is based on personal interviews with Washington
lobbyists and some of the persons toward whom they
direct their efforts. It seeks to establish lobbyists as
a special political skill group, denote their purposes
and characteristics, and analyze their impact on
governmental decisions at a national level. In an
effort to dispel a general public uneasiness regarding
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / 469
professional lobbyists, the author underscores their
activity as an important link between organized in-
terests and government — the means through which
the desires of special groups are channeled into the
decisionmaking process.
2912. Monsen, R. Joseph., and Mark W. Cannon.
The makers of public policy: American
power groups and their ideologies. New York,
McGraw-Hill [1965] 355 p.
64-7938 HN58.M6
Bibliographical footnotes.
In their analysis of political participation in a
democracy, the authors point out that unless an indi-
vidual is associated with some organized group he
is unlikely to influence the course of government.
They note that major power groups play a predom-
inant role in making public policy at the national
level ind the diversity of interests among various
segmt nts of the population must be reconciled with
such groups. Negotiation and compromise among
comptting groups are meaningful and expected
functions of government. In the present study, the
authois concentrate chiefly on occupational groups
and their broad ideologies, dividing them into two
categories based on degree of organization and char-
acteristic programs. In the category of formally
organized power groups fall the representatives of
business, the professions, labor, agriculture, and
public school teachers; informally organized groups
are the intellectuals, the civil bureaucracy, and the
military bureaucracy (allied with veterans' organi-
zations); they "compose, with Negroes, the major
makers of public policy." The effects of these
groups on domestic policies are given priority over
their influence on foreign issues in this study.
G. Elections: Machinery
913. David, Paul T., Ralph M. Goldman, and
Richard C. Bain. The politics of national
party conventions. [Washington] Brookings Insti-
tution [1960] xv, 592 p. 60—7422 JK.2255-D39
Bibliographical footnotes.
After reviewing the origins of the national party
convention during the Jacksonian era, the authors
analyze this institution as a means of selecting presi-
dential nominees. An updated and condensed ver-
sion for the general reader, edited by Kathleen
Sproul, was also published under the title The Poli-
tics of National Party Conventions (New York,
Vintage Books [1964] 368 p.). Both versions in-
clude detailed information on the delegates, their
organization, their decisionmaking processes, and
their voting patterns. Richard C. Bain's Convention
Decisions and Voting Records (Washington, Brook-
ings Institution [1960] 327, [127] p.) provides a
running account of convention proceedings of the
two major parties since 1832 and a record of im-
portant convention votes.
2914. Eaton, Herbert. Presidential timber; a his-
tory of nominating conventions, 1868—1960.
[New York] Free Press of Glencoe [1964] 528 p.
64—16971 E66i.E2
Bibliography: p. 511—518.
A study of 32 presidential nominees from 1868 to
1960, in which the author attempts to determine
how and why they were selected by their parties.
Emphasizing the specific steps leading to nomina-
tions in the national conventions, Eaton examines
political issues and events largely for their effects on
these choices. He notes that some of the conven-
tions raised little conflict, renominating incumbent
Presidents by acclamation, but that others involved
controversy, surprise, and compromise. In 1924,
for example, the Democrats required 103 ballots to
nominate John W. Davis. Drama and irony also
appear in the account, for example, in James G.
Blaine's oratory in Congress to clear his reputation
before the Republican convention of 1876 and in the
classic political misplay in 1900, when Thomas C.
Platt, hoping to elevate Theodore Roosevelt into
political oblivion, helped him to win the Republican
vice-presidential nomination.
2915. Heard, Alexander. The costs of democracy.
Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina
Press [1960] xxv, 493 p. 60—10532 JKi99i.H39
Bibliographical footnotes.
One way to study the complex relationships exist-
ing in politics, asserts the author, is to analyze the
financial linkages by which people and groups are
connected. Exploring the highly controversial realm
of campaign financing, he illuminates both the
nature of the American political system and the atti-
tudes of many citizens toward it. Among the areas
examined are the sources of political funds, their
effects on elections, past efforts to control campaign
financing, and proposals for future action. Heard
concludes that in national politics today money is
indispensible to nomination of a candidate but in
itself is insufficient to guarantee his election. A final
470 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
chapter suggests measures which might be adopted
to ensure greater equality among the parties and
their candidates, including direct public subsidies
to party activities, State support to political publicity,
and Federal-State tax incentives for political
donations.
2916. Kelley, Stanley. Political campaigning;
problems in creating an informed electorate.
Washington, Brookings Institution [1960] 163 p.
60—14637 JF205I.K.38
In an attempt to define standards for evaluating
campaigning in contemporary politics, the author
examines current campaign practices, identifies devi-
ations from the customary guidelines, and advances
suggestions for reform. Campaign discussion serves
primarily an informative function, according to the
author, helping voters to make rational decisions at
the polls. Earlier practices which curtailed this dia-
log, he maintains, have largely disappeared: political
machines, for instance, have declined in strength,
and fraud is restricted. Two areas of current con-
cern are the problems surrounding unfair personal
attacks and those involving the often unidentifiable
authorship of campaign statements. A portrait of
the 1964 presidential election from primary to final
vote is offered by the National Broadcasting Com-
pany's news staff in Somehow It Wor\s (Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday [1965] 233 p.), edited by
Gene Shalit and Lawrence K. Grossman.
H. Elections: Results
2917. Michigan. University. Survey Research Cen-
ter. The American voter [by] Angus Camp-
bell [and others] New York, Wiley [1960] 573 p.
60-11615 JK.i976.M5
Bibliographical footnotes.
An effort to identify the major factors which bring
a voted to his decision at the polls. The study is
based on nationwide surveys of large samples accu-
mulated as early as 1948 but with major emphasis
given to the 1952 and 1956 elections. Smaller sam-
ples recorded in midterm elections are also consid-
ered. The range of the study extends from the
immediate determinants of voter attitudes to broad-
er, more remote factors such as party identification,
group membership, population movement, and per-
sonality. A chronological and analytical survey of
behavior in national campaigns after World War II
is Presidential Elections, 1948—1960 (Salt Lake City,
Institute of Government, University of Utah, 1961.
58 p. Research monograph no. 4), by Robert Blan-
chard, Richard Meyer, and Elaine Morley.
2918. Roseboom, Eugene H. A history of presi-
dential elections. [2d ed.] New York,
Macmillan [1964] 600 p.
64—17369 £183^69 1964
Bibliography: p. 573—586.
An analysis of 44 contests for the position of Chief
Executive, through the 1960 campaign. The con-
ventions and events subsequent to them are re-
viewed, with particular attention to the actions and
interactions of the candidates, party leaders, bosses,
and others immediately involved in the political con-
tests. The author sees special significance in the
course of presidential campaigns in the decades im-
mediately preceding and following the Civil War,
the period of the sectionalist breakdown of the
Democratic Party and the rise of the Republican
Party. Statistics on presidential elections are avail
able in A Statistical History of the American Presi
dential Elections (New York, Ungar [1963] 247
p.), compiled by Svend Petersen.
2919. Schmidt, Karl M. Henry A. Wallace, quix-
otic crusade, 1948. [Syracuse] Syracuse
University Press, 1960. 362 p. (Men and move
ments series) 60—16440 £815.835
Bibliography: p. 336—347.
A chronicle of the Progressive Party and its ac-
tivities from Wallace's 1946 break with President
Truman over foreign policy to the party's organiza-
tional disintegration in 1950. Primary attention is
devoted to the 1948 campaign and to Wallace's per-
sonal philosophy and characteristics as a presidential
candidate. Schmidt identifies a number of factors
which he considers essential for a successful third
party movement and notes the extent to which they
appeared in the cycle of the Progressive drive. He
also discusses special handicaps faced by the party,
particularly its underlying doctrine stressing peace-
ful coexistence and its attempt "to introduce tolerant
politics into a period of intolerance."
2920. Thomson, Charles A. H., and Frances M,
Shattuck. The 1956 presidential campaign.
Washington, Brookings Institution [1960] xv,
382 p. 60-12085 £839/148
Bibliographical footnotes.
One of the first attempts to prepare a single-
volume study of the presidential election process in
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / 471
its entirety, with emphasis on the major interests,
values, and activities combined in a campaign. The
authors review the years of preparation preceding the
nominating convention in 1956, including the im-
portant midterm elections of 1954 and the immedi-
ate preconvention activities, and then analyze the
various convention maneuvers carried out in commit-
tee meetings, corridors, and "smoked-filled rooms."
The post-convention electioneering is viewed as
having had three distinct phases, which are treated
separately. The first phase consisted of each candi-
date's initial "swing" around the country; the second
phase drew the major issues closer around foreign
policy; and the last seven days of campaigning were
filled with the candidates' reactions to the crisis over
the Suez-Sinai invasion by England, France, and
Israel. Morris Janowitz and Dwaine Marvick an-
ticipated the combined use of theory and empirical
research in their interpretation of the 1952 presiden-
tial election, Competitive Pressure and Democratic
Consent, 26 ed. (Chicago, Quadrangle Books, 1964
[Ci956] 123 p.). A brief comparative study, which
tests possible Republican inroads into sectional
Democratic solidarity, largely in 1952 and 1956, is
Donald S. Strong's Urban Republicanism in the
South (University, Ala., Bureau of Public Adminis-
tration, University of Alabama, 1960. 69 p.).
2921. White, Theodore H. The making of the
President, 1960. New York, Atheneum Pub-
lishers, 1961. 400 p. 61—9259 E840.W5
An account which conveys much of the drama
and significance of the 1960 presidential contest from
the planning stages in 1959 through John F. Ken-
nedy's election in November 1960. The author
examines the issues of race, religion, leadership, na-
tional growth, and national defense and evaluates
the unprecedented television debates in which Ken-
nedy and Republican candidate Richard M. Nixon
confronted each other. An appraisal of the political
developments resulting from the campaign is offered
in The Presidential Election and Transition, 7960—
7967 (Washington, Brookings Institution [1961]
353 P-)> a collection of 12 essays edited by Paul T.
David. The background and effects of the television
confrontations of the candidates are examined in The
Great Debates ( [Bloomington] Indiana University
Press [1962] 439 p.), a series of readings edited
by Sidney Kraus.
2922. White, Theodore H. The making of the
President, 1964. New York, Atheneum Pub-
lishers, 1965. 431 p. 65-18328 £850^5
In a companion volume to the preceding entry,
White chronicles the 1964 presidential campaign
and the election in which Lyndon B. Johnson over-
whelmingly defeated Barry Goldwater. Although
lacking much of the drama of 1960, the 1964 elec-
tion was nonetheless significant in many respects.
The split which developed in the Republican Party,
for example, is characterized by the author as reflect-
ing "a bitterness which reached a point of morbid
intensity." This mood was manifest in the pri-
maries, in which the party's liberal and moderate
elements failed to stop the conservative drive. The
subsequent nomination went to Goldwater at the
San Francisco convention in what the author terms
a political coup d'etat, but the intraparty conflict con-
tinued. For the Democrats, on the other hand,
there was no nomination issue, although a brief dra-
ma was enacted over the choice of a vice-presidential
candidate. The author describes the campaigns
waged by each party, outlining the various strate-
gies and their subsequent successes or failures, and
devotes a special section to the development and
meaning of the civil rights question.
I. Reform
2923. Hoogenboom, Ari A. Outlawing the spoils;
a history of the civil service reform move-
ment, 1865—1883. Urbana, University of Illinois
Press, 1961. 306 p. 61—6537 JK686.H7 1961
Bibliography: p. 269—278.
The conflict over civil service reform in the United
States is traced from the Presidency of Andrew John-
son to the passage of the Pendleton Act under Ches-
ter A. Arthur. The author suggests that "the civil
service reform movement fits into an 'out' versus
'in' pattern." The "outs," he maintains, found that
the period following the Civil War failed to measure
up to their expectations, and, frustrated, turned to
reform. Specific attention is devoted to Representa-
tive Thomas Allen Jenckes, who was the recognized
congressional leader of the movement until 1871,
and to the move by Rutherford B. Hayes to displace
Roscoe Conkling as the controller of patronage in
the New York customhouse. Hoogenboom notes
that the triumph of the reformers was short lived
but that after 1900 the movement was revived in the
broad spectrum of Progressive ideology.
XXXII
Books and Libraries
A. Printing and Publishing: General
B. Individual Publishers
C. Bool^ Production: Technology and Art
D. Boof( Selling and Collecting
E. Libraries
F. Librarianship and Library Use
2924—2926
2927-2930
2931-2932
2933-2935
2936-2937
2938-2943
1
IRONICALLY, the book trade, which produces and distributes an ever increasing number of
publications on a wide variety of topics, is itself the subject of relatively few volumes.
Because of the dearth of scholarly studies of the field as a whole, most entries on book
production deal with individual publishers, printers, or bibliophiles.
The lack of scholarly research in book form extends into the area of library literature.
For example, librarians' views on such current issues as intellectual freedom, censorship, and
the social responsibility of libraries are more likely
to be found in professional journals than in books.
Two of the most significant directions of develop-
ment, in the library field, however, are represented
in Section F, Librarianship and Library Use. That
librarians are increasingly aware of the importance
of both community involvement and computer tech-
nology is reflected respectively in a collection of re-
ports on library service and community relations and
in the proceedings of a conference on libraries and
automation.
A. Printing and Publishing: General
2924. Gross, Gerald, ed. Publishers on publishing.
New York, R. R. Bowker Co. [1961] 491 p.
61-19878 2278.6778
An anthology of 36 self-portraits of great Ameri-
can and British publishers, past and present, selected
"to reveal the publisher as a man — and as a man of
business." The nature of the portraits varies con-
siderably: some are solely personal reminiscences;
some offer discussions of the philosophical, moral,
and commercial aspects of publishing; and some
comment on such diverse topics as censorship, book
reviewing, and author-publisher relationships. A
briefer and more cohesive collection of essays on
publishing is Now, Barabbas (New York, Harper
& Row [1964] 228 p.), by William Jovanovich, the
president of Harcourt, Brace & Company.
472
2925. Smith, Roger H., ed. The American read-
ing public: what it reads, why it reads; from
inside education and publishing, view of present
status, future trends; the Daedalus symposium, with
rebuttals and other new material. New York, R. R.
Bowker [1964, '1963] 268 p.
63—22265 21003.8646
A collection of 20 articles, 13 of which originally
appeared in the winter 1963 issue of Daedalus.
Written chiefly by publishing executives, the essays
attempt to define the character of contemporary
book publishing, selling, and reviewing as well as
the services they render to the "engaged segment of
the American Reading Public." Each chapter is
preceded by brief summaries of the essays included
in it, and a detailed index is appended.
BOOKS AND LIBRARIES
/ 473
2926. Sutton, Walter. The western book trade:
Cincinnati as a nineteenth-century publish-
ing and book-trade center; containing a directory of
Cincinnati publishers, booksellers, and members of
allied trades, 1796—1880, and a bibliography. Colum-
bus, Ohio State University Press for the Ohio His-
torical Society, 1961. 360 p. illus.
60—16600 7473.893
A history of publishing in the "Literary Emporium
of the West" from the early i9th century until the
beginning of the Civil War. Cincinnati flourished
as the American book trade center west of the Alle-
gheny Mountains during this period, largely owing
to its advantageous geographical position in the
steam age — at the center of the Ohio River Valley.
With the development of the railroad, however, a
few Eastern publishing centers were able to supply
books to the entire Nation, river trade declined, and
Chicago surpassed Cincinnati as chief distributor of
books west of the mountains. Among the publish-
ing houses discussed are the firms of J. A. and U. P.
James, H. W. Derby, and Robert Clarke.
B. Individual Publishers
2927. Exman, Eugene. The brothers Harper; a
unique publishing partnership and its im-
pact upon the cultural life of America from 1817 to
1853. New York, Harper & Row [1965] xvi, 415
p. illus. 65—14651 Z473.H29E9
"Bibliographical notes": p. 363—377.
A review of the first 36 years of the publishing
house created by the four Harper brothers. The
author traces the development of the Harper enter-
prise from its beginnings as a job printing opera-
tion with two handpresses to its eventual status as
the largest book-printing establishment in the United
States. Exman notes that the firm not only de-
veloped a strong list of original American books
(including Moby Dicl( and Two Years Before the
Mast) but also became the Nation's leader in pub-
lishing reprints of English books. The history is
divided topically rather than chronologically. Ap-
pendixes include a complete list of the books in the
Harper's Family Library and the Harper's School
District Library, two series which helped to estab-
lish the company's reputation and prosperity.
2928. Kogan, Herman. The great EB; the story
of the Encyclopaedia Britannica. [Chicago]
University of Chicago Press [1958] 338 p. illus.
58-8379 AE5.E44K6
An anecdotal history covering the 14 numbered
editions of the encyclopedia published between 1768
and 1929, when a policy of continuous revision was
adopted. The author devotes particular attention to
the business maneuvers responsible for perpetuating
the Encyclopaedia Britannica and its image as the
ultimate in reference works, noting that before be-
coming an autonomous corporation in 1957, the
encyclopedia had been associated with such diverse
organizations as The Times (London), the Cam-
bridge University Press, and Sears, Roebuck and
Company. A different view is presented in The
Myth of the Britannica (New York, Grove Press
[1964] 390 p.), by Harvey Einbinder, who concen-
trates on the encyclopedia's weaknesses and argues
that it is not the paragon of authoritativeness it pur-
ports to be.
2929. Portrait of a publisher, 1915—1965. With
an introduction by Paul A. Bennett. New
York, The Typophiles, 1965. 2 v. (Typophile chap
books, 42—43) 65—28266 Z473.K-72P6
CONTENTS. — i. Reminiscences and reflections, by
A. A. Knopf.— 2. Alfred A. Knopf and the Borzoi
imprint: recollections and appreciations.
Selections from Alfred A. Knopf's own writings
and addresses, essays written to commemorate earlier
anniversaries of Knopf and his company, and new
pieces by librarians, book designers, other publishers,
and authors currently published under the Borzoi
imprint. The collection, which marks the 50th an-
niversary of the publishing house established by
Knopf when he was 23 years old, provides many
insights not only into the career of a publisher who
has contributed significantly to the improvement of
the design and content of American books but also
into many facets of contemporary book publishing.
2930. Tryon, Warren S. Parnassus Corner; a life
of James T. Fields, publisher to the Victor-
ians. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1963. xiv, 445 p.
illus. 62—14207 Z473.F5T7
Bibliography: p. [413]— 431.
The biographer characterizes James Thomas
Fields as a man with a keen business sense coupled
with amiability and intense literary interests which
enabled him to guide the evolution of Boston's ob-
scure Old Corner Bookstore into one of the Na-
tion's greatest publishers of fine literature. Fields'
company was the first to publish such American
classics as Evangeline (1847) and The Scarlet Letter
474 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
(1850); he was himself a published poet; and when
Ticknor & Fields purchased the Atlantic Monthly,
he proved an able successor to James Russell Lowell
as editor. When Fields retired, he sold his interest
in the company to a partnership headed by James
Ripley Osgood. Only two years later, a new part-
nership was formed with Henry O. Houghton's
Riverside Press and its publishing subsidiary, Hurd
& Houghton. In 1880, Osgood retired, and Hough-
ton, Mifflin & Company was established. Osgood's
career in publishing is traced by Carl J. Weber in
The Rise and Fall of James Ripley Osgood (Water-
ville, Me., Colby College Press, 1959. 283 p. Colby
College monograph no. 22).
C. Book Production: Technology and Art
2931. Bennett, Paul A., ed. Postscripts on Dwig-
gins, essays & recollectons, by Dorothy Abbe
[and others] With a selective check list com-
piled by Dorothy Abbe and Rollo G. Silver. New
York, The Typophiles, 1960. 2 v. (271 p.) illus.
(Typophile chap books, no. 35, 36)
60—4471 2232.097564
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 255—268.
William Addison Dwiggins (1880—1956) was one
of this country's most distinguished artists in the
areas of calligraphy, lettering, typography, book
illustration, and book design, and this "biography
by recollection and reminiscence" reflects his varied
interests. He worked with a number of trade pub-
lishers— notably Alfred A. Knopf — as well as with
such publishers of deluxe editions as the Limited
Editions Club. Among the better known of his
typeface designs are Electra, in which Postscripts on
Dwiggins is set, and Caledonia. Specimens of his
graphic work are presented in the final pages of
volume i. Elmer Adler in the World of Booths (New
York, The Typophiles, 1964. 114 p. Typophile
chap books, 39), also edited by Bennett, is a study
of another prominent figure in 20th-century book
design.
2932. Eckman, James R. The heritage of the
printer, v. i. Philadelphia, North Ameri-
can Pub. Co., 1965. 209 p. illus.
65—22399 Z2o8.E23
These articles, which originally appeared in var-
ious numbers of the periodical Printing Impressions,
describe both original and imported tools of the
printer in America — composing machines, printing
presses, and typefaces — and provide an informal ac-
count of major figures in the printing world. Pri-
mary attention is given to the last half of the i9th
and the first third of the 2oth centuries. A related
work which traces the beginnings of the typefound-
ing industry in the United States is Rollo G. Silver's
Typefounding in America, 1787—1825 (Charlottes-
ville, Published for the Bibliographical Society of
the University of Virginia [by the] University Press
of Virginia [1965] 139 p.).
D. Book Selling and Collecting
2933, Powell, Lawrence C. Books in my baggage;
adventures in reading and collecting. Cleve-
land, World Pub. Co. [1960] 255 p.
59-11538 Z992.P64
As university librarian on the Los Angeles campus
of the University of California and director of the
William Andrews Clark Memorial Library, the
author has been an avid collector of books both for
his university and for his personal library. These
23 essays about books, book collecting, and reading
have been drawn in part from three earlier volumes
published in limited editions by the Ward Ritchie
Press of Los Angeles — Islands of BooJ(s, The Al-
chemy of Boof^s, and Booths West Southwest — and
were written to describe the satisfactions "derived
from a life in which reading and living have become
inseparably blended."
2934-
Rogers, William G. Wise men fish here;
the story of Frances StelofT and the Gotham
Book Mart. New York, Harcourt, Brace & World
[Ci965] 246 p. illus. 64-18293 Z473.G63R6
Founded in 1920 by Frances Steloff, the Gotham
Book Mart in New York City's theater district early
became a haven for litterateurs. Readers and writers
alike met at GBM, where the conversation, books,
and little magazines they wanted were available. In
addition to selling to such frequent visitors as Chris-
BOOKS AND LIBRARIES
/ 475
topher Morley, Theodore Dreiser, H. L. Mencken,
and Marianne Moore, Miss Steloff organized a fund
from which needy writers (of whom Henry Miller
was one of the more prominent) could draw.
Rogers' history concentrates on the first 25 years of
the Gotham Book Mart and its exceptionally color-
ful clientele, but the final pages reveal that its pro-
prietress, at the age of 78, still demonstrates, accord-
ing to Marianne Moore, that "the way to handle
books best is to have parties and get the writers and
readers together."
2935. Wolf, Edwin. Rosenbach; a biography, by
Edwin Wolf, 2nd, with John F. Fleming.
Cleveland, World Pub. Co. [1960] 616 p. illus.
60—15992 Z473.RyW6
Abraham Simon Wolf Rosenbach grew from a
"baby bibliomaniac" to one of the world's best-
known antiquarian booksellers, according to his
biographers. Among his early patrons were J. Pier-
pont Morgan and the Widener family, who estab-
lished the Widener Library at Harvard. Rosen-
bach's sound critical perception enabled him to stand
above the fashionable literary preferences
and prompted him to buy for a low price the orig-
inal manuscript of James Joyce's Ulysses when the
work was less than two years old and had a limited
audience. Among his more spectacular purchases
were the certified copy of the Declaration of Inde-
pendence, various copies of the Gutenberg Bible,
and the original manuscript of Alice in Wonder-
land. Henry Stevens of Vermont, American Rare
Boo^ Dealer in London, 1845—1886 (Amsterdam,
N. Israel, 1963. 348 p.), by Wyman W. Parker, is
the biography of a 19th-century antiquarian dealer
whose "greatest services to scholarship were the
transfer of rare books from Europe to America and
the supplying of English libraries with large num-
bers of American books." The Grolier Club publi-
cation, Grolier 75 ([New York, 1959] 240 p.), a
collection of biographies of past members, was pre-
pared to mark the 75th anniversary of "the oldest
American club devoted exclusively to the arts of the
book."
E. Libraries
2936. Eaton, Thelma, ed. Contributions to Amer-
ican library history. Champaign, 111., Dis-
tributed by Illini Union Bookstore [1961] xvii, 277
p. illus. 61—3095 Z73I.E25
This collection of articles, written by historians
and librarians during the last quarter of the I9th
century and the first few years of the 2Oth century,
deals with various kinds of libraries in a number of
cities and States from the colonial period onward.
The book is intended to provide students of librar-
ianship with a historical background for under-
standing the library movement. An American
Library History Reader (Hamden, Conn., Shoe
String Press, 1961 [Ci96o] 464 p. Contributions to
library literature), compiled by John D. Marshall,
is a source collection of recent historical and bio-
graphical essays.
2937. Woodford, Frank B. Parnassus on Main
Street; a history of the Detroit Public Library.
With a foreword by Ralph R. Shaw. Illustrated by
Donald G. Blaney. Detroit, Wayne State Univer-
sity Press, 1965. 487 p. 65—11820 Z733.D49W6
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 442-465).
The Detroit Public Library, described as one of
the first free public libraries in the United States,
opened in 1865 and developed as an integral part of
the Detroit educational system. The author traces
the expansion of the functions and facilities of the
library from 1865 to 1965 against the broad back-
ground of local and national social and political
events. He emphasizes two aspects of the library's
development which were in occasional conflict: the
library's increasing importance as a central cultural
and intellectual institution and its position as a
public institution subject to local political influence.
476 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
F. Librarianship and Library Use
2938. Conference on Libraries and Automation,
Airlie Foundation, 1963. Libraries and auto-
mation; proceedings, edited by Barbara Evans Mark-
uson. Washington, Library of Congress, 1964. 268
p. illus. 64-62653 Z699-C6 1963
The report of a conference sponsored by the Li-
brary of Congress, the National Science Foundation,
and the Council on Library Resources, Inc. Among
the objectives of the meeting were the establishment
of a dialog between computer experts and profes-
sional librarians engaged in automation research,
identification of areas in which there was overlap-
ping or duplication of effort in library automation
programs, and familiarization of librarians with the
most recent technical advances in the field. The
proceedings are divided into seven sections covering
the library of the future, file organization and con-
version, file storage and access, graphic storage, out-
put printing, library communications networks, and
the automation of library systems. Automation and
the Library of Congress (Washington, Library of
Congress, 1963 [i.e. 1964] 88 p.) is the report, by
Gilbert W. King and other technical experts, of a
two-year survey undertaken for the Library of Con-
gress to determine the desirability and feasibility of
automating bibliographic operations in large research
libraries, with particular emphasis on the Library of
Congress.
2939. Coplan, Kate, and Edwin Castagna, eds.
The library reaches out; reports on library
service and community relations by some leading
American librarians. Dobbs Ferry, N.Y., Oceana
Publications, 1965. xiv, 403 p. illus.
65—22164 Z665.C755
Includes bibliographical references.
A survey of library service and communication,
written by librarians who, according to the editors,
were selected to contribute because of their distin-
guished professional stature and their outstanding
record of accomplishment in their respective fields.
Although emphasis is placed on the public library,
one article each is devoted to school, university,
State, and regional libraries. One aspect of public
library service is treated comprehensively in Library
Adult Education, the Biography of an Idea (New
York, Scarecrow Press, 1963. 550 p.), in which
Margaret E. Monroe discusses the evolution of the
library's role in community adult education in the
United States between the early 1920'$ and the early
1960*5. Out of the Symposium on Library Func-
tions in the Changing Metropolis, held in Dedham,
Mass., in 1963, came The Public Library and the
City (Cambridge, M.I.T. Press [1965] 216 p.
A Publication of the Joint Center for Urban
p. A Publication of the Joint Center for Urban
Studies of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
and Harvard University), edited by Ralph W. Con-
ant; it provides a new look at the urban library by
urban social scientists, economists, historians, sociolo-
gists, political scientists, planners, communications
experts, library scholars, and library administrators.
2940. Holley, Edward G. Charles Evans: Ameri-
can bibliographer. Urbana, University of
Illinois Press, 1963. 343 p. (Illinois contributions
to librarianship, no. 7) 63-10315 Zioo4-E85H6
Bibliography: p. 323-330.
2941. Williamson, William L. William Frederick
Poole and the modern library movement.
New York, Columbia University Press, 1963. 203
p. illus. (Columbia University studies in library
service, no. 13) 63—14110 Z720.P6W5
Bibliography: p. [1931—196.
Charles Evans held a variety of positions in Amer-
ican libraries of the late i9th century, but his most
significant contribution to scholarship was his Amer-
ican Bibliography; a Chronological Dictionary of
All Booths, Pamphlets, and Periodical Publications
Printed in the United States of America From the
Genesis of Printing in 1639 Down to and Including
the ^Year 1820 (1903—34. 12 v.). Evans did not
reach the goal announced in the title of his work,
but he did carry through the letter "M" of 1799.
"Almost singlehandedly," Holley observes, "he ac-
complished what one of his colleagues has hailed as
'one of the greatest bibliographical compilations of all
time.' " William Frederic^ Poole and the Modern
Library Movement is the biography of a mentor of
Charles Evans. Poole headed the Boston Athe-
naeum, the Cincinnati Public Library, the Chicago
Public Library, and the Newberry Library. He pre-
pared Poole's Index to Periodical Literature, the
pioneer index to American and English periodicals,
served as president of both the American Library
Association and the American Historical Associa-
tion, and wrote numerous articles, reviews, and
books.
BOOKS AND LIBRARIES / 477
2942. Schick, Frank L., ed. The future of library
service: demographic aspects and implica-
tions. Urbana, University of Illinois, Graduate
School of Library Science, 1962 ["1961] 286 p.
illus. (Illinois contributions to librarianship, no. 6)
62—62687 ^731.83
Includes bibliographies.
Demographic projections are cited which indicate
that, in addition to being 37 percent larger than in
1960, the population of the United States in 1980
will be more urbanized and better educated. The
average age will be younger, but the proportion of
people 65 years of age and over will have increased.
The library's function in the light of these and other
demographic projections is the central topic of this
group of articles reprinted from the July and
October 1961 issues of Library Trends. The con-
tributors discuss characteristic services to be expected
in various kinds of libraries and also give considera-
tion to documentation and to books, serial publica-
tions, and audiovisual materials as library resources.
The concluding article reflects the point of view of
the American Library Association concerning appro-
priate governmental action for adequate library
development. Verner W. Clapp, in The Future of
the Research Library (Urbana, University of Illinois
Press, 1964. 1 14 p. Phineas L. Windsor series [i.e.
lectures] in librarianship [no. 8] 1963), discusses
possible means by which the general research library
of the future can meet the increasing need for it to
make available to users the persistently multiplying
"informational records of mankind."
2943. Shores, Louis. Mark Hopkins' log, and
other essays. Selected by John David
Marshall. Hamden, Conn., Shoe String Press, 1965.
383 p. 65—12144 2665.848
Includes bibliographical references.
Articles, essays, addresses, and lectures by the
dean of the Florida State University Library School.
Selected from Shores' publications in journals and
anthologies during the years from 1928 to 1964,
these writings stress the role of the librarian in
fostering a "continuous communicability" between
books and people. Of, by, and for Librarians
(Hamden, Conn., Shoe String Press, 1960. 335 p.
Contributions to library literature), compiled by
John D. Marshall, is an anthology of miscellaneous
articles and essays on books, libraries, and the
library profession. Essays on reference librarianship
exclusively have been brought together by Arthur R.
Rowland in Reference Serf ices (Hamden, Conn.,
Shoe String Press, 1964. 259 p. Contributions to
library literature, no. 5).
Index
AEF. See Army. American Expedi-
tionary Force
AFL. See American Federation of
Labor
Aaron, Daniel, 1157
ed., 1225
Abbe, Dorothy, 2931
Abbot, William W., 1466
Abbott Laboratories, about, 2666
Abel, Robert H., ed., 1309
The Abelard Folk. Song Book., 2499
Abell, Aaron I., 2438
Abernathy, Glenn, 2762
Abernethy, Thomas P., 1766
ed., 46
Ability grouping in education, 2337
Abolitionism, 73, 1515, 1517, 1520,
1523-24, 1529
See also Antislavery movement;
Slavery
About Those Roses, 2191
Abraham, Henry J., 2818
Abrahamsen, Martin A., ed., 2621
Abrahamson, Julia, 2028
Abrams, Charles, 2029
Abrams, Richard M., ed., 1565
Academy awards, 2194
Accounting, hist., 2702
Acculturation, 1409
Acheson, Dean, 1271—72
about, 1272
Ackerman, Edward A., 2121
The Act of the Mind, 665
Act One, 526
Actors and actresses, 2175
biog. (collected), 2171, 2197
Adair, Douglass, ed., 1479
Adams, Abigail, 1496
Adams, Andy, 221—22
about, 223
Adams, Ansel E., illus., 2596, 2647,
2649
Adams, Charles Francis (1807—1886),
1427
about, 1286, 1427
Adams, Henry, 224—25
about, 226—29, I225
Adams, James Truslow, ed., 1426
Adams, John, 1427, 1496
about, 1427, 1496, 2743
Adams, John C., 1709
Adams, John Quincy, about, 1501
Adams, John R., 183
Adams, Maude, about, 2188
Adams, Ramon F., 1820
Adams, Richard P., tr., 214
Adams, Samuel Hopkins, 342—43
Adams, Thomas R., 1470
Adams, Walter, ed., 2663
Adams County, 111., folklore, 2482
Adams family. Archives, 1427
The Adding Machine, 1130
Ade, George, 230—32
about, 233
Aderman, Ralph M.
comp., 1117
ed., 163
Adler, Elmer, about, 2931
Adler, Mortimer J., 2345, 2655
Administrative agencies, 2860
Administrative law, 2860—62
Administrative procedure, 2860—61
Adolescents. See Youth
Adrian, Charles R., 2804, 2807, 2871
Adult education, 2326
Adventurers, outlaws, etc. See Outlaws
The Adventures of Captain Bonneville,
125
The Adventures of Colonel Sellers, 250
The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn,
249
about, 261, 1165
Advertisements for Myself, 889
Advertising, 2693
hist., 2693
psychol. aspects, 2687
radio, 2073
television, 2073
Advice to a Prophet, 1089
Aeronautics, military, 1667
hist., 1666
Aeronautics and state, 2674
Aeroplanes, military, hist., 1667
Aesthetics. See Esthetics
An Affair of Honor, 1551
Afghanistan, fiction, 909
Africa
relations with, 1575, 1618
trade with, 1727
After the Fall, 914
After the Genteel Tradition, 1175
After Thirty Years: The Daring Young
Man on the Flying Trapeze, 995
Afternoon of an Author, 489
Against Wind and Tide, 1524
Agassiz, Elizabeth Gary, about, 1300
Agassiz, Louis, 2106
about, 1300, 2106
The Age of Happy Problems, 833
Aged. See Old age
Agee, James, 718—20, 2198
Agee, Warren K., 2082
Agency for International Development,
about, 1647
Agnosticism, 2454
Agrarianism, 1539
The Agrarians (literary group), 1251
Agribusiness. See Agriculture — econ.
aspects
Agricultural credit, 2618
Agricultural economics. See Agricul-
ture— econ. aspects
Agricultural extension work, 2623
Agricultural labor, 2619
Agricultural machinery, 2620
Agricultural organizations, 2615
Agriculture, 2607, 2610—27
cooperatives, 2621
econ. aspects, 2018, 2610-12, 2615—
17, 2622, 2624, 2653
hist., 2610—16, 2627
to 1860, 1893
igth cent., 2610
20th cent., 2612
Great Plains, 2612
111., 2610
Iowa, 2610
Middle West, 2615
Southern States, 2615
Agriculture and state, 2615—16, 2623—27
Aiken, Conrad Potter, 344—50
about, 351—52
Aikman, Lonnelle, 1756
Air, pollution, 2160
Air Force
about, 1667
hist., 1666
Korean War, 1695
Air Force. USAF Historical Division,
1692
Aircraft, military. See Aeroplanes,
military
Airlines, 2674
Aitken, Hugh G. J., 2715
Akers, Charles W., 1451
Alabama
folklore, 2481
folksongs & ballads, 2491
Indians, 1382
Alama, Malcolm R., 2261
Alarms and Diversions, 678
Alaska, 1397, 1869
Albee, Edward, 721—26
Albertson, Dean, 2623
Albion, Robert G., 1660, 2676
Albright, Raymond W., 2443
Alcorn, John, illus., 593
Alcott, Amos Bronson, about, 1259,
2356
479
480
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Alcott, Louisa May, 58—59
about, 60
Alden, John R., 1765
Aldridge, Alfred O., 13, 1273—74,
Alexander, Carter, 2275
Alexander, Gerard L., 1375
Alexander, James, 1352
Algeria, relations with, 1575
Algonquin Indians, legends and tales,
1398
Alienation (soc. psychology), 2002
Alienation in literature, 1209—10
Aliens, 1556, 1927
All Honorable Men, 2000
All the King's Men, 1075
about, 1210
Allan, W. Scott, 2042
Allen, Arthur A., 1366—67
Allen, Donald M., ed., 1127
Allen, Dwight W., 2278
Allen, Evie A., 213
Allen, Fred, 2209
about, 2205, 2209
Allen, Gay W., 213
Allen, Harry C., 1602
Allen, James Lane, 234
about, 235
Allen, Lee, 2228
Allen, Philip J., ed., 1995
Allen, Shirley W., 2628
Allen, Steve, 2205
Allen, Walter E., 1158
Allied and Associated Powers (1914—
1920). Supreme War Council,
about, 1688
Allison, John H., 2606
Allison, William Boyd, about, 1545
Almquist, Don, illus., 1847
Alpert, Hollis, 2185
Alsberg, Henry G., ed., 1725
Alsop, Joseph W., 1326
about, 1326
Alsop, Stewart J. O., 1326
about, 1326
Altman, Jules, ed., 2370
Alvarez, Alfred, 1159
Alvarez, Walter C., 2139
about, 2139
Always Young for Liberty, 70
Amacher, Richard E., 43
The Ambassadors, 306
Ambler, Charles H., 1776
Ambrose, Stephen E., 1659, 1684
American Academy of Political and So-
cial Science, Philadelphia, 2222
American Assembly, 1618, 1621, 1628,
2791
American Association for the Advance-
ment of Science. Committee on
Desert and Arid Zones Research,
1362
American Association of Junior Col-
leges, about, 2305
American Ballet Theatre, about, 2206
American Bar Association, about, 2866
American Bar Foundation, 2852
American Bell Telephone Company,
about, 2063
American Civil Liberties Union, about,
2769
American Council of Christian Churches,
about, 2434
American Council on Education, 2303,
2349
American Dental Association, about,
2145
American Dialect Society, 1 1 20
The American Dream, 723
The American Earthquake, 1985
American Educational Research Associa-
tion, 2276, 2331
American Essays in Social Philosophy,
2396
American Expeditionary Force. See
Army. American Expeditionary
Force
American Farm Bureau Federation,
about, 2623
American Federation of Labor, about,
2737-38
American Fur Company, about, 1817
American Heritage, 1353, 1976
American Historical Association, about,
1422
American Indians. See Indians, Ameri-
can
American Infidel, 2454
American Institute of Architects, 2558
American League of Professional Base-
ball Clubs, about, 2228
American Medical Association, about,
2125
American Opinion, about, 1328
American Party, about, 1508
American Revolution, 1470—83, 1668—
7i
campaigns & battles, 1668-71
causes, 1441, 1460, 1472—73, 1476,
1479, 1481—83, 2443, 2691
bibl., 1470
claims, 1479
commerce, 1474
diplomatic hist., 1599
finance, 1474
foreign public opinion, 1472
hist., 1452
sources, 1472, 1489, 1670
military hist., 1479, 1482, 1668—71
naval operations, 1670
Negroes, 1480
personal narratives, 1472, 1670
religious aspects, 2443
American Revolution in literature
fiction, 176, 811
pamphleteering works, 1470
American Roulette, 2783
American Samoa, hist., 1873
American Studies Association, 1702
American studies programs, 1720
The American Way of Death, 1990
Americanism (Catholic controversy),
2438
Americanisms (language), 1111—13,
in 5—1 6
See also Language
Americans in foreign countries, 1709
Americans in Italy, 1169
America's Cup races, 2236—37
Ames, Fisher, about, 1484
Amory, Cleveland, 1986
Ancients and Axioms, 2302
And Promenade Home, 2206
And the Price Is Right, 2690
Ander, Oscar Fritiof, 1922
ed., 1922
Anderson, Archibald W., ed., 2340
Anderson, Charles R., 275
Anderson, Frederick, ed., 255, 257
Anderson, James E., 2773
Anderson, Maxwell, 353
about, 354
Anderson, Odin W., 2159
Anderson, Oscar E., 2112
Anderson, Paul R., 2354
Anderson, Quentin, 311
Anderson, Robert H., 2337
Anderson, Robert W., 1130
Anderson, Sherwood, 355—57
about, 358
Anderson, William, 2805
Andre, Sam, 2244
Andrews, Charles M., about, 1416
Andrews, Frank Emerson, 2035
Andrews, J. Cutler, 1753
Andrews, Ralph W., 1825
Andrews, Wayne, 2555
ed., 697
Andrist, Ralph K., 1399
Angel Levine, 892
Angell, Frank J., 2706
Angelopolous, Angelo, 2226
Anger in the Room, 688
Angle, Paul M., 1525
Anglo-American folksongs and ballads,
24—25, 2488, 2493
bibl., 2490
theories, methods, etc., 2490, 2498
Anglo-French War. See French and
Indian War (1755—63)
Angoff, Allan, ed., 1256
The Angry Scar, 1514
Animals, 1369
See also Birds; Fishes; Wildlife con-
servation
Another Country, 737
Antarctic expeditions, 1377—78
Anthropology, 1385
See also Ethnology
Antiques, 2597—98
Antiques, 2597
Antiquities. See Archeology and pre-
history
Antislavery movement, 1515, 1517.
1523—24, 1528—29
See also Abolitionism; Slavery
An Ape of Gods, 290
Appel, Alfred, 1083
Appellate procedure, 2845
Appleman, Roy E., 1695
Apportionment (election law), 2776
April Morning, 8 1 1
April Twilights, 388
Arab countries, relations with, 1578,
1623
Arbitration, industrial, 2732
Arbitration and award (law), 2846
Archeology and prehistory, 1386—91
The Archers (opera), about, 2529
Architects, 2558-60, 2563, 2565
Architectural Record, 2558
INDEX / 481
Architecture, 2555—68
colonial, 2567
conservation & restoration, 2601
domestic, 1992, 2566—67
hist., 2555, 2557
1 9th cent., 2564
Calif., 2565
Chicago, 2562
Minn., 1808
New England, 2561
New York (City), 2562
Williamsburg, Va., 2567
Archives, 1417, 1423
Arctic expeditions, 1376
Ardennes, Battle of the (1944—45),
1691
Argentina, relations with, 1616
Arid regions, 1362
Aristocracy. See Upper classes
Aristotle and the Hired Thugs, 831
Arizona, 1844, ^55
hist., 1856
Ar% of Empire, 1801
Arkansas, pol. & govt., 1787
Armageddon Around the Corner, 2444
Armed Forces
officers, 1650
organiaztion, 1648
See also specific branches, e.g., Navy
The Armory Show, 2547
Arms, George, ed., 296
Armstrong, Edwin Howard, about, 2069
Army, 1655—59
hist., 1655, 1659
sources, 1655
World War II, 1693
organization, 1659
personnel management, 1656
recruiting, enlistment, etc., 1656
supplies & stores, 1658
Army. American Expeditionary Force,
about, 1687
Army. Artillery, hist., 1658
Army. Corps of Topographical Engi-
neers, about, 1502
Army. Signal Corps, about, 1658
Army Air Forces, about, 1692
Arndt, Karl ]. R., 1331
Arnold, Benedict, about, 1668
Arnold, Edmund C., 1333
Arnow, Harriette L. S., 1782—83
Around About America, 385
Arrington, Leonard ]., 2650
Arsenal, Watertown, Mass., 2715
Art, 2392-94, 2547-54, 2576, 2580
and literature, in, 302
and religion, 2394
collectors & collecting, 2553
criticism, 2580
exhibitions, 2547, 2551, 2576
hist., 2548—50
Indian, 1396
museums. See Museums
philosophy of. See Esthetics
private collections, 2553, 2576
Minn., 1808
See also Architecture; Artists; Arts
and crafts; Cartoons; Comic strips;
Decorative arts; Painting; Sculpture
Art by Subtraction, 656
Arthur, Timothy Shay, 61-62
Arthur Mervyn, 39
Artie, 231
The Artificial Nigger, 943
Artists, 2548, 2551, 2576, 2584-94
dictionaries, 2552
See also Painters; Sculptors
Arts and crafts, 2507—10, 2576
Eskimo, 1397
hist., 2507, 2509
Indian, 1396-97, 2507
Spanish-American, 2508
themes, motives, 2507
N.M., 2508
Pa., 2509
See also Decorative arts
Arvin, Newton, 142
As I Lay Dying, 456
Asbury, Francis, 2448
Ashcan school, 2587
Ashley, Annabel, 1123
Ashley, William H., 1823
about, 1823—24
Asinof, Eliot, 2229
Ask. Your Mama, 543
Asprey, Robert B., 1687
Asselineau, Roger, 214
Assembly, 954
The Assistant, 891
about, 1 210
Associated Press, about, 1319, 1321
Association of American Law Schools,
2835
Association of American Medical Col-
leges, 2154
Astaire, Fred, 2208
Astor, John Jacob, about, 1817
Astor Place Riot, New York (City)
(1849), 2186
Astoria, Oreg., 124
Astronautics, 2101
Athearn, Robert G., 1442, 1836, 2679
Atheism, 2454
Athletics, college, 2223—24, 2261
The Atlantic Monthly, 1149
Atlantic seaboard. See Eastern seaboard
Atlases and maps, 1372—74, 1654, 1835,
2405
Atomic bomb, hist., 2104
Atomic energy, hist., 2104
fiction, 374
Atomic Energy Commission, about,
1564
Atomic ships, 1665
Atomic warfare, 1441, 1643, 2090
Atwood, Elmer Bagby, 1121
Aubrey, Henry G., 2699
Auchincloss, Louis, 727—34
Auden, Wystan Hugh
ed., 1129
about, 1216, 1228
Audiences, television, 2077—79
Audio-visual methods in education,
2075, 2333
Audubon, John James, about, 2107
Auerbach, M. Morton, 2739
Ault, Phillip H., 2082
Austin, James C., 66, 139
Authoritarianism, 2747
Authors and authorship, 496, 1164,
1175, 1182, 1196, 1203, 1205,
121 1, 1224, 1229, 1243, 1247,
1260
bio-bibl., 1127, 1152, 1174
dictionaries, 1174
satire, 1024
New England, 1259
Southwest, 1191
Authors as journalists
(1764-1819), 48-49
(1820—70), 66, 76, 80, 169—70, 175,
178
(1871—1914), 255—56, 270, 284, 287,
309—10, 387
(1940-65), 530, 574, 814, 1025
Autobiography. See Biography and
autobiography; Biography, collected
The Autocrat's Miscellanies, 119
Automation, 2089, 2938
econ. aspects, 2727
Automobile industry, 2681
Automobile racing, 2225—27
Automobile Racing Club of America,
about, 2225
Automobiles, hist., 2681
Averitt, Jack N., 1779
Avery, Mary W., 1866
Aviation. See Aeronautics
Au/a^e and Sing! 1130
Award (law). See Arbitration and
award (law)
Axelrod, George, 1130
Aydelotte, William O., 1420
Aztec culture, 1389
Babbidge, Homer D., 2346
Babbitt, Irving, about, 1259
Babcock, Robert S., 2804
Baby Doll, 1091
Back hind, Jonas O., tr., 1 899
Backman, Jules, 2668
Bacon, Eugene H., 1652
Bad Characters, 1028
Baehr, Harry W., 1419
Baer, Helene G., 73
Bagley, William Chandler, about, 2294
Bailey, Hugh C., 1529
Bailey, Kenneth K., 2418
Bailey, Mabel D., 354
Bailey, Thomas A., 1440, 1581
ed., 1428
Bail lie, Hugh, 1319
about, 1319
Bailyn, Bernard, 2277
ed., 1470
Bain, Richard C., 2913
Bainbridge, John, 1849
Baird, James, 152
Baird, Spencer Fullerton, 2106
Baker, Benjamin, 2811
Baker, Carlos H., 530
ed., 529
Baker, Elizabeth F., 2733
Baker, Gladys L., 2627
Baker, Harry ]., 2324
Baker, John W., ed., 2793
482 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Baker, Paul, 2193
Balakian, Nona, cd., 1211
Balance of payments, 2699, 2710
Balanchine, George, about, 2206
Bald, Frederick C., 1806
Baldwin, James, 735—39
about, 1209
Baldwin, Leland D., 1440
Balinky, Alexander, 1492
Ball, Robert, illus., 2113
A Ballad of Love, 964
The Ballad of the Sad Cafe, 725
Ballads. See Folksongs and ballads;
Songs
Ballet, 2206
Ballet Theatre, New York. See Ameri-
can Ballet Theatre
Ballets Russes de Monte Carlo, about,
2206
Ballistic missiles, 1667
Ballou, Hosea, about, 2451
Baltimore Gazette, about, 1320
Baltzell, Edward Digby, 1987
Bancroft, Frederic, 1416
about, 1416
Bancroft, George, about, 1425
Bands (music), 2535
Banfield, Edward C., 2808
ed., 2808
Bank of the U.S., second, 2707
Banks, Don, music arr. by, 2494
Banks and banking, 2694, 2707
hist., 2708
Bannon, John F., ed., 1446
Baptists
hist., 2437
Southern States, 2418
A Bar Cross Man, 623
Baratz, Morton S., 2057
Barbash, Jack, 2724
ed., 2725
Barber, James D., 2874
comp., 2874
Barber, Rowland, 2210
Barbour, Frances M., ed., 2473
Barbour, James M., 2524
Barbour, Philip L., 21
Barck, Oscar T., 1452, 1547
Bardolph, Richard, 1935
Barger, Harold, 2694
Barker, Shirley Frances, 740-43
Barkin, George, ed., 241
Barksdale, Hiram C., ed., 2685
Barlow, Joel, 34
about, 35
Barnes, Harry E., 2047
Barnum, Phineas T., about, 2212
Barrett, John G., 1674
Barrie, James M., about, 2188
Barren, Milton L., ed., 1933
Barry, Philip, 1130
about, 1170
Barrymore-Drew family, about, 2185
Earth, Gunther P., 138, 1960
Barth, John, 744—47
Bartlett, Irving H., 1275—76
Bartlett, Richard A., 1810
Bartlett, Ruhl ]., 1586
ed., 1582
Bartram, William, 1880-81
Baruch, Bernard M., 1558
about, 1558
Baseball, 2228—35
econ. aspects, 2232, 2235
fiction, 890
hist., 2228, 2230-31, 2233, 2235
Negroes, 2234
soc. aspects, 2235
The Baseball Magazine, 2233
Basketball, 2266
Baskin, Samuel, ed., 2318
Easier, Roy P., ed., 208
Bass, Herbert J., 1542
Bates, Edward, about, 1513
Bates, Ralph S., 2088
The Bathtub Hoax, 574
Battle of Angels, 1093
Battle '-Pieces, 147
Battles. See Campaigns and battles
under names of wars, e.g., Ameri-
can Revolution — campaigns and
battles; Civil War — campaigns and
battles
Baudelaire, Charles, about, 171
Bauer, Raymond A., 2689
Baum, Stanley V., ed., 409
Baumbach, Jonathan, 1210
Baur, John I. H., 2554, 2573
ed., 2574
Bay Psalm Boo\, 1194
about, 1194
Bayley, Frank W., comp., 2548
Beal, Merrill D., 1394, 1868
Beals, Carleton, 1528
The Bean Eaters, 765
Beard, Charles A., 2749
about, 1413
Beard, James F., ed., 80
Beardsley, Edward H., 2105
Beardsley, Monroe C., 2360
Beat generation, 1712
See also Bohemianism
Beat generation in literature, 767, 814,
823, 861
hist. & crit., 1230
Beaton, Kendall, 2671
Beatty, Jerome, comp., 1149
Beatty, Richmond C., ed., 107, 249,
267, 1132
Bechet, Sidney, 2544
about, 2544
Beck, Carl, 2787
Beck, Horace P., 2474
ed., 2467
Beck, John M., ed., 2327
Beck, Robert N., ed., 1700
Beck, Warren A., 1854
Becker, Carl L., about, 1413, 1424
Becker, Howard S., 2152
about, 1998
Becker, Stephen D., 1309
Beckinsale, Robert P., 1356
Beebe, Lucius M., 2682
Beers, Henry P., 1412
The Beginning & the End, 550
The Behavior of Titans, 901
Behold the Key, 892
Behrman, Samuel Nathaniel, 359—63,
1130
Belden, Marva R., 2665
Belden, Thomas G., 2665
Belknap, Ivan, 2149
Belknap, Waldron P., 2575
Bell, Alexander Graham, about, 2062
Bell, Coral, 1604
Bell, Millicent, in, 698
Bell, Whitfield J., 1456, 2136
Bell Telephone Company, about, 2063
Bellaire, Arthur, 2073
Bellamy, Edward, 236
about, 237—38
Belleau Wood, Battle of (1918), 1687
Bellevue Hospital, New York (City),
about, 2151
Bellow, Saul, 748—52, 1196
tr., 1016
about, 1195, 1209
Bellows, George K., 2511
Bellush, Bernard, 1419
Beloff, Max, 1609
Bemis, Samuel Flagg, 1583, 1585
ed., 1584
Bend Sinister, 925
Bendix, Reinhard, 2003
Benet, Stephen Vincent, 364—66
about, 367
Benet, William R., ed., 1237
Benito Cereno, 875
Benjamin, Israel Joseph, 1904—5
Bennett, James Gordon (1795-1872),
about, 1307
Bennett, John C., 2427
Bennett, Marion T., 1 926
Bennett, Mildred R., 390
Bennett, Norman R., ed., 1727
Bennett, Paul A., ed., 2931
Benny, Jack, about, 2205
Bensman, Joseph, 2019
Benson, Lee, 1413, 1497
Bent, Arthur C., 1365
Bentley, Arthur F., 2370
Bentley, John, 2225
Bereday, George Z. F., ed., 2280
Berelson, Bernard, 2304
Berenson, Conrad, ed., 2666
Bergdorf Goodman, New York (City),
about, 2688
Berger, Dorothy, ed., 1428
Berger, Josef, ed., 1 428
Berger, Peter L., 2457
Bergson, Henri, about, 2377
Berkeley, Dorothy S., 2108
Berkeley, Edmund, 2108
Berkson, Isaac B., 2283
Berland, Theodore, 2093
Berle, Adolf A., 2658
Berle, Milton, about, 2205
Berman, Daniel M., 2788
Berman, Milton, 1416
Bernardo, C. Joseph, 1652
Bernhard, Winfred E. A., 1484
Bernstein, Irving, 2734
Bernstein, Marver H., 2797
Bernstein, Peter L., 2703
Bernstein, Richard J., 2373
Berry, Brewton, 1963
Berry, Don, 2692
Berry, Edmund G., 96
Berry, Thomas, 2371
Berryman, John, 753—55
INDEX / 483
Berthoff, Warner, 153, 324, 1183
cd., 39
Bertrand, Alvin L., 2603
The Best Man, 1059
Bettmann, Otto, 2216
Bewley, Marius, 1160
Beyer, Glenn H., 1920
Bezanson, Walter E., ed., 148
Bibliography, 1162, 1237, 1411, 2940
See also Books — and reading; and
under specific subjects, e.g., Criti-
cism, literary — bibl.
Bickel, Alexander M., 2818, 2824
Bicycles and tricycles, 2265
Bid Me To Live, 417
Biddle, Francis B., 1277—79
about, 1278—79
Biddle, Nicholas, about, 2707
Bidwell, Percy W., 2689
Bierce, Ambrose (Gwinnett), 239—42
about, 243
The Big Board, 2704
Big business, 2719
The Big Drink, 2669
Big Sur, 86 1, 868
Big Sur and the Oranges of Hieronymus
Bosch, 578
The Big Wave, about, 376
Bigelow Gordon E., 1 161
Bilingualism, 1120
Bill, Alfred Hoyt, 1748
The Bill, 892
Bill of Rights, 2763, 2765-66
Billias, George A., ed., 1668, 2813
Billings, William, about, 2524
Billington, Ray Allen, 1429
Billy Budd, 149
Bingham, Edwin R., ed., 1816
Bingham, George Caleb, about, 2584
Bingham, Julia S., ed., 621
Binkley, Wilfred E., 2781-82, 2786
Biograph, 2195
Biography, 1130
Biography (as a literary form), 1281
Biography (collected)
dictionaries, 1434
See also under particular subjects,
e.g., Civil War — biog. (collected)
Biography and autobiography, 1271—
1303
Bird, Harrison, 1464
Bird, Robert Montgomery, 63
about, 64
Birds, 1365-68, 2107, 2113, 2646
Birren, James E., ed., 2046
Birth control, 1916—17, 2014
The Birth of a Grandfather, 998
Birth of a Hero, 828
Bishop, Elizabeth, 756—57
Bishop, Jonathan, 97
Bitter Strength, 1960
Bittner, William R., 499
Bjerkoe, Ethel H., 2570
Bjork, Kenneth, 1922, 1966
Black, Hugo L., about, 2839
Black, Max, 2360
ed., 1996, 2355
Black, Robert C., 1419
The Black Crook (musical comedy),
about, 2529
Black I* My Favorite Color, 894
Black Muslims, 1937, 1942
Black Rock, 2483
Blacker, Irwin R., ed., 1826
The Blackfeet, 1392
Blackmur, Richard P., ed., 1128
Blackstock, Paul W., 1633
Blaik, Earl H., 2254
about, 2254
Blair, George S., 2809
Blair, Walter, 261, 1253
ed., 1131
Blake, Caesar R., ed., 276
Blake, John B., 2163
Blake, Nelson M., 1440, 1547
Blanchard, Ralph J., 2706
Blanchard, Robert, 2917
Blanck, Jacob N., 1162
Blaney, Donald G., illus., 2937
Blanshard, Paul, 2426—27
Blau, Herbert, 2181
about, 2181
Blau, Joseph L., ed., 2422
Blay, John S., 1537
Blechman, Burt, 840
Blegen, Theodore C., 1808
Bleiler, Everett F., ed., 242
Blesh, Rudi, 2531
Blewett, John, ed., 2371
Blind, law & legislation, 2042
The Blithedale Romance, no
Blochman, Lawrence G., 2132
Block, William J., 2623
Blocker, Clyde E., 2305
Blodgett, Harold W., ed., 207
Bloemker, Al, 2226
Bloom, Edward A., 391
Bloom, Lillian D., 391
Bloomfield, Arthur J., 2536
Bloomfield, Lincoln P., 1642
Blue Cross Association, about, 2166
The Blue Hen's Chick, 524
Blue Voyage, 350
Bluem, A. William, 2075
Bluemel, Elinor, 2133
Blues for Mister Charlie, 738
Bluestone, George, 2199
Blum, Daniel C., 2064, 2177
Blum, John M., 1551, 1539, 1753
Blum, Virgil C., 2339
Blume, William W., 2813
Blumenson, Martin, 1691
Blumenthal, Henry, 1610
Ely, Nellie, about, 1320
Boatner, Mark M., 1677
Boatright, Mody C., 2475—76
ed., 2476
Boats and boating, 2236—40
Bock, Edwin A., ed., 2804
Bodde, Derk, 1420
Bode, Carl, 1163, 1707
ed., 190—91, 1163
Bodine, A. Aubrey, 1773
Body of Waking, 981
Boehm, Eric H., ed., 1411
Bogart, Leo, 2077
Bogue, Allan G., 2610
Bogue, Donald J., 1921
Bogue, Margaret B., 2610
The Bohemian Girl, 389
Bohemianism
hist., 1708, 1713
in literature, 1199
San Francisco, 1713
See also Beat generation
Bohner, Charles H., 132
The Bold Brahmins, 1517
Boler, John F., 2382
Boles, Donald E., 2339
Boles, Paul, 1196
Bolinger, Dwight L., n 20
Boll, Eleanor S., 2007
Bollaert, William, 1900-1901
Bollens, John C., 2021
Boiling, Richard W., 2791
Bolton, Herbert E., 1446
Bone, Hugh A., 2883
Bone, Robert A., 1164
Bonner, Thomas N., 2153
Bonneville, Benjamin de, 125
Bontecou, Eleanor, ed., 2765
Bontemps, Arna W., ed., 1145
Boodin, John Elof, about, 2362
Book reviews (literary). See Criticism
literary — essays; Literature — peri-
odicals
Book Week, 1265
Books, 2943
and reading, 2925, 2933
teaching methods, 2335, 2347
clubs, 2935
collectors & collecting, 2933
design, 2931
industries & trade, 2925—26
Booksellers and bookselling, 1237, 2935
New York (City), 2934
Boorman, Jane, 1830
Boorstin, Daniel J., 1430-31, 1717, 1977
Borden, Lizzie, about, 2858
Borden, Morton, ed., 2753
Borg, Dorothy, 1626
Borgeson, Griffith, 2227
Borning, Bernard C., 1413
Borome, Joseph A., 1419
Borowitz, Eugene B., 2278
Bossard, James H. S., 2007
Bostelmann, Clarissa S., tr., 1887
Boston
descr., 1732
historic houses, etc., 1731
hist., 1731—32
colonial period, 1455
intellectual life, 2930
Irish, 1923
Italians, 1929
pol. & govt., 2907
public health, 2163
Boston. Museum of Fine Arts, 2569,
2576
Boston Opera Company, about, 2538
Boston Post Road, 1728
Boston Tea Party, 1460, 1471
Botanical Society of America, 2100
Botany, 1371, 2100, 2108
Botkin, Benjamin A., 1820
ed., 2468—69, 2477
Bottorff, William K., 235
The Bourgeois Poet, 1009
Bowden, Edwin T., 1165
ed., 53, 122
484 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Bowen, Catherine Drinker, 1280—81
about, 1281
Bowen, Ezra, 2262
Bowen, Merlin, 154
Bowles, Paul Frederic, 758-59
Bowman, Sylvia E., ed., 1152
Boxing, 2241—47
biog. (collected), 2244
fiction, 2246
heavyweight, 2241—43, 2245
hist., 2241—47
Negroes, 2241, 2243
Boyd, E. See Hall, Elizabeth B. W.
Boyd, Julian P., 1489
ed., 1491
Boyle, Kay, 368
Boyle, Robert H., 2214
Boynton, Mary F., ed., 2107
Bracher, Frederick G., 401
Brackenridge, Hugh Henry, 36—37
Bradbury, John M., 1240, 1251
Bradbury, Ray, 760—63
Bradley, Edward Sculley, ed., 107, 207,
249,267,427, 1132
Bradley, Francis Herbert, about, 441,
448
Bradstreet, Anne Dudley, i
about, 2
in poetry, 754
Brady, Robert A., 2089
Braeman, John, 1472
ed., 1565
Braisted, William R., 1661
Brameld, Theodore B. H., 2283
Brann, William Cowper, about, 1343
Brant, Irving, 1485, 2763
Brasher, Thomas L., ed., 211
The Bravo, 78
Break, George F., 2697
Breakfast at Tiffany's, 773
Breakfast foods. See Cereals, prepared
Breakthrough, 1144
Bremner, Robert H., 2036, 2044
ed., 1565
Brennan, Louis A., 1390
Bretz, Rudolf, 2075
Brewer, John Mason, 2478
Brick, Michael, 2305
Bridenbaugh, Carl, 2443
The Bridge (Crane), about, 1216
A Bridge For Passing, 376
Bridges, Leonard Hal, 1419, 1678
The Bridges at Tokp-ri, 907
Briefs, Henry W., ed., 1644
The Brigadier and the Golf Widow, 778
Bright, John D., ed., 1833
Brighter Than a Thousand Suns, 2104
Brightman, Edgar S., about, 2362
Brings, Lawrence M., ed., 1808
Brinnin, John M., 655
ed., 1136
Brissot de Warville, Jacques Pierre,
1888-89
British ballads. See Anglo-American
folksongs and ballads
British immigrants, 1973, 1975
Britt, Steuart H., 2687
Broadcasting. See Radio broadcasting;
Television broadcasting
Brock, William R., 2792
Broderick, Robert C., 2561
Broderick, Virginia, illus., 2561
Brodie, Fawn M., 1512
Brodie, Jack, illus., 1831, 1842
Brodtkorb, Paul, 155
Broeg, Robert M., 2230
Bronner, Edwin B., 1453
Bronson, Bertrand H., ed., 2488
Bronstein, Arthur J., 1124
Brooke, John, 1473
Brooks, Cleanth, 464, 1166
ed., 1133
Brooks, George E., ed., 1727
Brooks, Gwendolyn, 764-66
Brooks, Jerome E., 2236
Brooks, John, 1196
Brooks, Van Wyck, 262, 298, 1167,
1169
about, 1167—68, 1 1 86, 1348
Broom, Leonard, 1943
Brosnan, Jim, 2232
Broussard, Louis, 1170
Brown, Andrew T., 1794
Brown, Arthur W., 70, 103
Brown, Ashley, ed., 663
Brown, Bartley F., 2337
Brown, Charles Brockden, 38—39
about, 1173
Brown, Claude, 1937
Brown, Deming B., 1171
Brown, Elizabeth G., 2813
Brown, Ernest Francis, ed., 1149
Brown, Esther L., 2149
Brown, Frank C., 2481
Brown, Gerald S., ed., 1435
Brown, Gilmor, 2193
Brown, James W., 2333
Brown, John Mason, 646
Brown, Kimbrough S., comp., 1667
Brown, Milton W., 2547
Brown, Richard M., 1454
Brown, Robert C., 1607
Brown, Robert E., 2748
Brown, Robert M., 2441
ed., 2419
Brown, Roger H., 1486
Brown, Stuart G., ed., 1495
Brown, Wallace, 1479
Brown, William H., 2807
Brown, William L., 2610
Brown, William Norman, 1572
Browne, Charles A., 2517
Browne, Charles Farrar, 65
about, 66
Browne, Ray B., 2481
Brownlow, Louis, about, 2800
Brubacher, John S.. 2306
Bruchey, Stuart W., 2657
Brucker, Herbert, 1334
Bruner, Jerome S., 2334
Bruno, Frank J., 2037
Brunvand, Jan H., comp., 2473
Brustein, Robert S., 2178
Bryan, William Jennings, about, 1539,
1548, 2894
Bryant, Margaret M., ed., 1 1 1 1
Bryant, Samuel H., illus., 1681
Bryant, William Cullen, 67
about, 68
Bryn Mawr College, about, 2321
Bryson, James Gordon, 2137
about, 2137
Buchanan, Albert R., 1689
Buchanan, James, about, 1505
Buchanan, William W., ed., 2088
Buck, Paul H., ed., 2320
Buck, Pearl Sydenstricker, 371—77
about, 378
Buccaneer's Choice, 796, 800
Bucke, Emory S., ed., 2448
Budka, Metchie J. E., ed. & tr., 1891
Buechner, Frederick, about, 1195
Buffalo Bill. See Cody, William F.
Building, 2123—24
Bukofzer, Manfred F., 2542
Bulge, Battle of the. See Ardennes,
Battle of the
Bulletin of the Atomic Scientists, 2090
Bunzel, Ruth L., ed., 1385
Buranelli, Vincent, 167, 2384
ed., 1352
Burbank, Rex J., 358, 706
Burch, Philip H., 2700
Burchard, John E., 2555
The Burden of Time, 1251
Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife,
2646
Bureau of the Census, 1444
The Burglars and the Boy, 83 1
Burke, Arvid J., 2275, 2295
Burke, Kenneth, about, 1186
Burke, Robert E., 1437
Burke, William J., 1237
Burks, John B., 2300
Burlesque, 2210
Burlingame, Merrill G., 1839
ed., 1841
Burlingame, Roger, 1324, 1988
Burnette, O. Lawrence, comp., 1415
Burnham, Alan, ed., 2562
Burnham, James, 2789
The Burning Glass, 916
Burns, Eveline M. R., 2045
Burns, James MacGregor, 2774, 2884
ed., 2774
Euros, Oscar K., ed., 2338
Burr, Nelson R., 1749, 2416
Burroughs, William S., 767-71
Burrow, James G., 2125
Burt, Nathaniel, 1752
Burt, Olive W., ed., 2489
Burton, Ian, ed., 2640
Bus Stop, 1130
Busch, Francis X., 2851
Bush-Brown, Albert, 2555, 2560
Business, 2711—23
soc. aspects, 2005, 2714
Business and politics, 2716, 2723
Business cycles, 2696, 2711
Business education, 2717
Business ethics. See Social and business
ethics
Business journalism. See Journalism —
commercial
Businessmen, 2718, 2720
But For Whom Charlie, 362
Butcher, Charles P., 245
Butcher, Devereux, 2646—47
Butler, George D., 2221
Butler, Joseph T., 2598
INDEX / 485
Butler, Margaret Manor, 1802
Butler, Pierce, about, 2825
Butler, Ruth L., ed., 1901
Butterfield, Lyman H., ed., 1427, 1491
Buttons, Red, about, 2205
Buying the Wind, 2471
By Love Possessed, 399
Byerly, Kenneth R., 1335
Byrd, William, 3—4
Byrnes, James F., about, 1584
Byse, Clark, 2765
Cabell, James Branch, 379—80
about, 381
Cabell, Margaret F., ed., 380
Cabinet officers, 1549, 2785
See also specific offices, e.g., Secre-
taries of State; also names of in-
cumbents, e.g., Hull, Cordell
Cabinet- workers, 2570
Cable, George Washington, 244, 1938
about, 245
Cables, submarine, 2061
Cabot, John, about, 1449
Cabot, Sebastian, about, 1449
Cady, Edwin H., 57, 299—300
Caesar, Sid, about, 2205
Cage, John, 2546
Cahn, Ralph, ed., 2254
Cahn, William, 2060, 2169
Caidin, Martin, 2101
Cain, Alfred E., ed., 1950
Cain, Marvin R., 1513
The Caine Mutiny Court-Martial, 1130
Cairns, Huntington, ed., 576
Caldwell, Erskine, 382-85
Caldwell, Virginia M., illus., 385
Calef, Wesley C., 2609
Calhoun, Daniel H., 2122
Calhoun, John C., 1498
about, 1498, 2743
California
architecture, 2565
disc. & explor., 1860
hist., 1857-58, 1861-62
Indians, 1398
Japanese, 1961
literature, 1857
travel & travelers, 1905
Callahan, North, 1668
Callahan, Raymond E., 2293
Calvin, Mich., folklore, 2480
Cambon, Glauco, 1153, 1172
Camino Real, 1847, 1861
Camino Real, 1134
Campaigns, political. See Political
campaigns
Campaigns and battles. See under
names of wars, e.g., American
Revolution — campaigns & battles
Campbell, Angus, 2917
Campbell, Arthur A., 1916
Campbell, Charles S., 1603
Campbell, Christiana M., 2623
Campbell, John C., 1612, 1621
Campbell, Marie, 2479
Canada
hist., 1438
relations with, 1607
Canals, 2677
Cancer, 2164
Canham, Erwin D., 1315
Cannon, Mark W., 2912
Cantor, Eddie, about, 2205
The Cantos, 611—12
Cantwell, Robert, 2113
Canyons, 1844
The Cape Cod Lighter, 956
Cape Fear River Valley, hist., 1462, 1726
Capers, Gerald M., 1498
Capital, 2696
Capitalism, 2655
Capitalists and financiers, 2720
Capitol Building, Washington, D.C.,
17563
Caplow, Theodore, 2328
Capote, Truman, 772—73
about, 1195, 1218
Cappon, Lester J., 1496
Caravans, 909
Carawan, Candie, comp., 2491
Carawan, Guy, comp., 2491
Carbonated beverages, 2669
Carey, James C., 1614
Cargill, Oscar, 312
ed., 600
Carhart, Arthur H., 2629
Caribbean region, relations with, 1613
Caricatures. See Cartoons
Carlin, Jerome E., 2869
Carlisle, Henry C., ed., 1156
Carlson, Reynold E., 2222
Carlyle, Thomas, 95
Carman, Harry J., 1437
Carmer, Carl L., ed., 1726, 1738
Carmichael, Oliver C., 2304
Carnegie, Andrew, about, 2519
Carnegie Hall, New York (City), 2519
Carpenter, Charles H., 2290
Carpenter, Frances, ed., 1757
Carpenter, Frank G., 1757
Carpenter, Margaret H., 676
The Carpentered Hen, 1047
Carr, Albert H. Z., 2673
Carrick, Robert W., 2237
Garrison, Daniel J., 1665
Carroll, Holbert N., 1637
Carruth, Gorton, 1432
Carson, Gerald, 1993, 2669,
Carson, Rachel L., 2642
Carstensen, Vernon R., ed., 2604
Cartels. See Trusts, industrial
Carter, Betty W., 1847
Carter, Hodding, 1514, 1847, 2020
Carter, Paul A., 2431
Carter, Richard, 2130, 2165
Carter, Wilmoth A., 1951
Cartography, 1372
Cartoons, 1309, 1313
Cartter, Allan M., ed., 2303
Cartwright, W. Aubrey, 2602
Cartwright, William H., ed., 1414
Carver, Charles, 1343
Carver, George Washington, about, 2613
Gary, John H., 1471
Gary, Richard, ed., 323
Case, Harold C. M., 2611
Casey, Ralph D., ed., 1336
Casper, Leonard, 1079
Cassara, Ernest, 2451
Cassedy, James H., 2163
Castagna, Edwin, ed., 2939
A Casual Past, 1278
Caswell, Hollis L., 2297
Caswell, John E., 1376
Cat on a Hot Tin Roof, 1130
The Catcher in the Rye, about, 1165,
1210
Gate, James L., ed., 1692
Cater, Douglass, 1349
Catesby, Mark, about, 2113
Catfish and Crystal, 1792
Gather, Thomas, 1896—97
Gather, Willa Sibert, 386-89
about, 390—92, 1255
Catholic Church
hist., 2415, 2438
sources, 2439
relations, 2440—41
schools, 2313
soc. problems, 2438
soc. thought, 2423, 2461
Fla., 2439
Catholics, 2440
Catlin, George, about, 2585
Cat's Cradle, 1069
Catskill Mountains, folksongs & bal-
lads, 2499
Cattell, Jaques, ed., 2087
Cattle and cattle trade, 1826, 2634-35
ranges, 2606, 2633
Calif., 1860
Cattle trails, 1826
fiction, hist. & crit., 223
short stories, 222
Catton, Bruce, 1354, 1675
Catton, William B., 1565
Caughey, John W., 2764
ed., 1857
Caughey, LaRee, ed., 1857
Cauthen, Kenneth, 2433
The Cave, 1074
The Cave Dwellers, 993
Cavert, Samuel M., 2419
Caves, Richard E., 2674
Cayton, Horace R., 1941
Cazden, Norman, ed., 2499
Gechak, William, illus., 2486
A Celebration for foe, 831
Censorship, motion pictures, 2202
Census, 1920—21, 2006
See also Population
The Centaur, 1046, 1052
Central Intelligence Agency, about,
1629, 1633
Central Pacific Railroad, about, 2679
Cereals, prepared, 2669
Cerebrovascular disease, 2164
Ceremony in Lone Tree, 921
about, 1210
Cerf, Bennett A., ed., 1134
Cermak, Anton J., about, 2908
Cerny, Karl H., ed., 1644
Chain stores, 2690
Chairs, 2571
Chamberlain, John, 2655, 2711
486
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Chamberlain, Neil W., 2730, 2735
Chambers, Lenoir, 1683
Chambers, William N., 2885
The Champagne Pool, 955
Chandler, Alfred D., 2663
Chandler, Lester V., 2694, 2707
Channing, William Ellery, 69
about, 70—71
Chapel Hill, N.C., civil rights, 1945
Chapin, Charles V., about, 2163
Chapin, Richard E., 2084
Chappell, Warren, illus., 2468
Charities, 2035, 2037, 2040, 2043—44
hist., 2036—37
See also Medicine — charities
Charles, Joseph, 2885
Charles, Searle F., 1559
Charlotte Observer, about, 1323
Charlotte Temple, a Tale of Truth, 51
Charvat, William, 1216
ed., no
Charleston, S.C., literature, 203
Charters, Samuel B., 2496
Chase, Mary C., 1130
Chase, Mary Ellen, 324, 393—96
about, 397
Chase, Richard V., 1173
Chase, Stuart, 1978
Chastellux, Francois Jean, marquis de,
1882-83
The Chateau, 896
Chattanooga, hist., 1789
Chautauqua Institution, Chautauqua,
N.Y., 2520
Chautauquas, 2170
Chayefsky, Paddy, 1134
Cheatham, Elliott E., 2852
The Checkered Flag, 2225
Cheek, Leslie, 2193
Cheever, John, 774—79
about, 1195
Chein, Isidor, 2048
Chemical industries, 2666
Chemistry, 2105
Chemists, 2105
Cherokee Indians, 2187
Chesapeake Bay, 2274
Chesney, Alan M., 2147
Chessman, G. Wallace, 1554
Chester, Giraud, 2065
Chevalier, Michel, 1894-95
Chicago
architecture, 2562
fiction, 231
Negroes, 1941, 1953
pol. & govt., 2908
Chicago. Burlington and Quincy Rail-
road Company, about, 2679
Chicago. Hyde Park, 2028
Chicago. Kenwood, 2028
Chicago Review, 1149
"Chicago school" of architecture, 2563
Child, Francis James, ed., 2488
Child, Lydia Maria Francis, 72
about, 73—74
The Child Buyer, 844
Child study, 2007
Childhood and youth in literature, 1261
Children and Others, 400
Children of Darkness, 1 1 30
Children of the Levee, 287
Childs, Marquis W., ed., 1326
Chile, relations with, 1617
Chimayo, N.M., 2020
China
fiction, 372
relations with, 1574, 1628
Chindahl, George L., 2211
Chinese, 1960, 1962
Chipman, John H., comp., 2514
Chippewa Indians, 1388
Chisolm, Lawrence W., 1721
Chitwood, Oliver P., 1452
A Choice of Profession, 894
Choirs (music), 2541
Cholera, Asiatic, 2163
The Chord of Steel, 2062
Chorley, Richard J., 1356
Choteau, Mont., 2020
Christensen, Erwin O., 2507
Christenson, Ade, 2223
Christenson, Carroll L., 2667
Christian, William A., 2397, 2400
The Christian Science Monitor, about,
1315
Christian union, 2419, 2462
Christianity in literature, 1252
Christie, Ian R., 1473
Christie, John A., 192
Christman, Henry M., ed., 1911
Christy, Arthur, 2356
Chronicle of a Generation, 1288
Chroust, Anton Hermann, 2863
Chuang-tzu, 906
Church and education, 2339, 2423, 2426
Church and race problems, 2466
Church and society, 2457-65
Catholic Church, 2459, 2461
Judaism, 2461
Protestant churches, 2457—59, 2461
Church and state, 2422-30
educational aspects, 2339
Church architecture, 2561
Church councils, local, 2419
Church history, 2405—7, 2409, 2412,
2414-15, 2418, 2433, 2454, 2457,
2561
colonial period, 2420
sources, 2415
Church music, 2524
Church of Jesus Christ of Latter Day
Saints. See Mormons and Mor-
monism
Churchill, Allen, 1708
Churchill, Winston (1871-1947), 246
about, 247, 1243
Ciardi, John, 780-86
Cincinnati
book trade, 2926
Negroes, 287
The Cincinnati Enquirer, about, 1320
Cinematography, hist., 2195
Circus, 22 1 1— 12
Citadel, 2788
Cities and towns, 2016, 2020, 2023,
2807
growth, 2025—26, 2034
hist., 2026, 2030
planning, 2028—32, 2034
soc. condit., 2017, 2024, 2026
Cities and towns — Continued
Atlantic States, 2025
Mississippi Valley, 2026
Ohio Valley, 2026
Southern States, 1534
See also Communities, urban; Metro
politan areas
Cities and towns in literature, 231, 343
. 774
Citizen Kane (motion picture), aboul
2203
The City and the Pillar Revised, 1062
City churches, 2458—60
City government. See Local govern
ment
City Lights Bookstore, San Franciscc
814
The City of the Living, 1030
City planning. See Cities and towns—
planning
Civil Aeronautics Board, about, 2674
Civil Disobedience, 188
Civil engineering, 2123—24
Civil engineers, 2122
Civil liberties and rights, 1934, 193^
1938-39, 1945, 2762-72
cases, 2765
hist., 1556, 2769, 2772
Negroes, 1936, 1938—39, 1942, 1944-
47, 1951, 2881
songs, 2491
Chapel Hill, N.C., 1945
Miss., 1945
Southern States, 1944
Civil procedure (law), 2842, 2855
Civil rights. See Civil liberties an
rights
Civil Rights Act (1960), 2788
Civil service, 1540, 2797, 2801—2
reform, 2923
Civil supremacy over the military, 1640
1653, 1697, 2782
Civil War, 1674-84, 2832
biog. (collected), 1682-83
campaigns & battles, 1540, 167;
1678, 1681, 1684
causes, 1526
dictionaries, 1677
diplomatic hist., 1607
econ. aspects, 1530
folklore, 2468
foreign public opinion, 1532
hist., 1525, 1528, 1535, 1675, 1677
sources, 1525
hospitals, charities, etc., 208
naval operations, 1536, 1679
Negro troops, 1 676
personal narratives, 1674
pictorial works, 1675
regimental histories, 76, 1540, i68(
1682
reporters & reporting, 1310
songs & music, 2497
Civil War in literature
drama, 518
editorials, sketches, etc., 59, 76
fiction, 267, 1077, 1150, 1179
personal narratives, 208
poetry, 147, 1151
short stories, 240
INDEX / 487
Civilization. See Culture
Civilization, philosophy of, 2399
Claassen, Harold, 2252
The Clairvoyant Eye, 666
Clancy, Herbert J., 2887
Clapp, Charles L., 2790
Clapp, Verner W., 2942
Clarel, 148
Clarence, 1130
Clark, Burton R., 2305
Clark, Elmer T., ed., 2448
Clark, Harry Hayden, 1253
ed., 48
Clark, John M., 2652
Clark, Joseph S., 2791
Clark, Leonard H., 2300
Clark, Paul F., 2102
Clark, Thomas D., 1760, 1790, 2020
ed., 1875—76
Clark, Thomas H., 1358
Clark, William B., ed., 1670
Clarke, Arthur C., 2061
Clarke, Dwight L., 1499
Clarkson, Roy B., 1776
Class distinction, 1477, 1981, 1987,
200 1
Classical influences on authors, 96, 419
Clavers, Mary. See Kirkland, Caroline
Matilda Stansbury
Clawson, Marion, 2608—9, 2639
Clay, Henry, 1500
about, 1501, 1504
Clayton, Edward T., 2881
Clayton, James E., 2821
Clayton, John, about, 2108
Cleaveland, Frederic N., 2114
Cleaves, Freeman, 1684
Clegg, Charles M., 2682
Cleland, Robert Glass, 1858
Clemence, Richard V., 2696
Clemens, Samuel Langhorne. See
Twain, Mark
Clendenen, Clarence C., 1615
Clepper, Henry E., ed., 2628
Cleveland, Grover, about, 1542, 2894
Cleveland, Harlan, 1709
The Cleveland Leader, about, 1329
Cleveland Press, about, 1329
Clift, Virgil A., ed., 2340
Cline, Gloria G., 1837
Cline, Howard F., 1573
Clinton, Sir Henry, about, 1669
Cloud, Stone, Sun, Vine, 1001
Clock. Without Hands, 886
Closed circuit television, 2076
Clough, Wilson O., 1190
Clover, John G., ed., 2664
Cloward, Richard A., 2049
Clubb, Oliver Edmund, 1624
Clune, Henry W., 1726
Clurman, Harold, ed., 1134
Coal mines and mining, 2667
W. Va., 1776
Coast Guard, about, 1690
Cobb, Tyrus R., 2230
about, 2230
Cobbett, William, 1892—93
Coben, Stanley, 1556
Coca-Cola Company, about, 2669
Cochiti, N.M., 1409
Cochran, Thomas C., 1420, 2711
Cochrane, Willard W., 2622, 2624
Cockerill, John A., about, 1320
The Cocktail Party, 439
Cody, William F., about, 2213
Coffin, Frank M., 1647
Coffin, Tristram P., 2490, 2501
Cohane, Tim, 2254
Cohen, Bernard C., 1638
Cohen, Hennig, ed., 146—47, 151
Cohen, I. Bernard, 2103
Cohen, Morris R., 2357, 2367
about, 2368
Cohen, Nathan E., 2037
ed., 2038
Cohn, Isidore, 2134
Coit, Joshua, about, 1484
Coit, Margaret L., 1558
The Cold Wind and the Warm, 360
A Colder Fire, 1081
Cole, Arthur H., 2714
Cole, Donald B., 2022
Coleman, James S., 2008
Coleman, Peter J., 1733
Coleman, Roy V., ed., 1426
Coleridge, Samuel Taylor, about, 168
Coles, Harry L., 1672
Coletta, Paolo E., 1548
Collective bargaining, 2735
College presidents, 2310
Colleges and universities
administration, 2318, 2328
bibl., 2314
criticisms, 2287, 2307, 2315
development & innovations, 2310,
2318
directories, 2303
finances, 2308
govt. relations, 2346
graduate instruction, 2304
hist., 2306, 2308—9, 2314, 2316—18
in literature, 1217, 1222
needs & objectives, 2310-11, 2315,
2318
organization, 2318
periodicals, 2349
soc. aspects, 2306, 2315
Southern States, 2311
See also Athletics, college; Forestry
schools and education; Junior
colleges; Music — education; and
names of individual colleges and
universities, e.g., Smith College
Collins, Carvel, 384
comp., 461
Collins, Henry H., ed., 1365
Collins, James, 2371
Collins, Orvis F., 2716
Colon, Fernando, 1447
Colonial life in literature
fiction, 130—31
short stories, 130
Colorado, hist., 1843
Colorado River Valley, 1844
Colton, John, 1130
Colum, Padraic, ed., 380
Columbia University, about, 2307
Columbia University. Legislative Draft-
ing Research Fund, 2756
Columbia University. School of Medi-
cine, about, 2153
Columbus, Christopher, about, 1447
Columnists, 1326, 1328
Comandini, Adele, 2133
Come Out the Wilderness (Baldwin),
739
Come Out the Wilderness (Kenrick),
2459
Comedians, 2169, 2183, 2205, 2530
Comedy
(1820-70), 2183
(1940—65), 361, 1041, 1096, 1104
See also Drama
Comic strips, 1309
Commager, Henry Steele, 1437, 1753
ed., 1433, 1472
Command the Morning, 374
Commerce, 2684-93
govt. regulation, 2862
hist., 2691
sources, 1727
N.M., 2688
Philadelphia, 2691
Commercial journalism. See Journal-
ism— business
Commercial policy, 2689
Commission on Civil Rights, 1934
Commitment to Freedom, 1315
Committee for Economic Development,
about, 2722
A Commodity of Dreams, 937
Common Council for American Unity,
1927
The Common Law, 2820
Common Market. See European Eco-
nomic Community
Common Sense, about, 49
Communications, 1334, 2057—86, 2172
See also Mass communications; also
individual means of communica-
tion, e.g., Books and reading; Lan-
guage; Newspapers; Television
Communism, 2736, 2890—91, 2893,
2900
and literature, 1157, 1235
See also Marxist interpretation of
literature
and religion, 2424
in education, 2341
Communist countries, relations with,
1612
Communists and the Communist Party,
2890—91, 2893, 2900
Communitarian experiments. See Uto-
pias ( settlements)
Communities, rural, 2015, 2017—19
See also Farm and rural life
Communities, suburban. See Suburbs
Communities, urban, 2017, 2021,
2024—26
See also Cities and towns
Community life, 2016—17
Community newspapers, 1335
Community organization, 2028
A Company of Heroes, 1801
Comparative literature. See Literature
— comparative
/ A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Composers, 2515—16, 2524, 2526—27,
2546
See also Musicians
Composition, literary. See Literary
composition
Compromise of 1850, 1503, 1508
Compulsion, about, 2865
Comstock, Helen, 2570, 2597
ed., 2598
Conant, James B., 2299, 2318, 2327,
2329
Conant, Ralph W., ed., 2939
Concise Dictionary of American Biog-
raphy, 1434
Conclusive Evidence, 925
Concord River, descr. & trav., 186
Condit, Carl W., 2123—24, 2563
Condon, Grattan, ill us., 1797
A Coney Island of the Mind, 815
The Confederacy, 518
Confederate States
biog., 1683
for. rel., 1532
hist., 1528
military hist., sources, 1681
pol. & govt., 1528
Confederate States. Constitution, 2752
Confederate States. Navy, 1679
Confederate States. Provisional Con-
gress (1861-62), 2752
Confederate States. War Dept., 1 678
The Confederation (1781—89), 1452,
2753
hist., sources, 1489
Conference of Negro Writers, 1164
Conference on Freedom and Responsi-
bility in Broadcasting, 2081
Conference on Libraries and Automa-
tion, 2938
Conference on Poverty in America, 2044
Conference on Research in Income and
Wealth, 2651
Conference on the History of Western
America, 1811—12
Confidence, 1880, 305
The Confidence-Man, 146
The Confidential Cler\, 439
Confrey, Eugene A., ed., 2156
Congress, 2787—96
committees, 2795—96, 2800
employees, 2796
foreign affairs, 1640
functions, 2789, 2793
hist., 2781, 2792
See also Legislative branch
Congress. Joint Committee on Atomic
Energy, about, 2795
Congress. House, 2788, 2790
foreign affairs, 1637
hist., 2794
reform, 2791
Congress. House. Committee on Edu-
cation and Labor, 2346
Congress. House. Committee on In-
terstate and Foreign Commerce,
2080
Congress. House. Committee on
Rules, about, 2795
Congress. House. Committee on Un-
American Activities, 2900
about, 2787
Congress. Senate, 2788, 2790
hist., 2794
Congress. Senate. Special Committee
Investigating the National Defense
Program, about, 2795
Congress. Senate. Special Committee
on Aging, 2166
Congressional Quarterly Service, Wash-
ington, D.C., 2792
Congressmen, 2790, 2793
Conkin, Paul K., 2015
Connecticut, hist., 1735
Connery, Robert H., 1660, 2810
Connolly, Jerome, illus., 1354
Conover, Merrill B., 2041
Conrad, Joseph, about, 1249
Conrad, William C., 1316
Conscientious objectors, World War I,
1555
Consciousness in Concord, 189
Conservation of natural resources, 2111,
2607, 2617, 2638-49
Conservation of wildlife. See Wildlife
conservation
Conservatism, 2739, 2745
Considine, Robert B., 2242, 2254
Constable, William G., 2553
Constitution, 2749, 2752, 2756
amendments
ist, 2765, 2768, 2772
5th, 2764
i4th, 1512
See also Bill of Rights
Constitutional Convention (1787), 2749
Constitutional history, 2748—55
sources, 2742
Constitutional law, 2750, 2755—61,
2767, 2770, 2835, 2839, 2841
cases 2757, 2765
Constitutions, state, 2756
Construction industry, 2034
Consumers, 2687
Consumption (economics), 2687
Contempt of court, 2843
Contempt of legislative bodies, 2787,
2843
Continued Next Wee\, 2197
Conventions, political. See Political
conventions
Conversation, 350
Converse, Paul D., 2684
Conway, Alan, ed., 1967
Cook, Reginald L., 504
Cooke, Jacob E., 1416, 1419
ed., 1489, 2750
Cooke, John Esten, 75—76
Cookery, 1976
Coolidge, Grace Goodhue, about, 1298
Coombs, Philip H., 1641
Cooney, David M., 1665
Coons, John E., ed., 2081
Cooper, Burton L., tr., 214
Cooper, Frank E., 2860
Cooper, James Fenimore, 77-80
about, 81—82, 1173, 1207
Cooper, Kent, 1321
about, 1321
Coplan, Kate, ed., 2939
Copley, James S., 1860
Corbino, Jon, illus., 2267
Corcoran, William W., about, 1503
Corlew, Robert E., 1788
Corn, 2610
Cornell University, 2765
Corner, George W., 2126, 2138, 2153
Cornflake Crusade, 2669
Cornish, Dudley T., 1676
Cornwell, Elmer E., 1350
Corporations, 2663, 2713, 2719
finance, 269^
Corporations, government, 2809
Corruption (in politics), 1327, 2000,
2792, 2908-9
fiction, 88—89
Cortez, Gregorio, about, 2505
Corty, Floyd L., 2603
Corwin, Edward S., 2782
Cory, Daniel, 2387
Coser, Lewis A., 2891
Cosgrave, John O'Hara, illus., 1730,
1778
The Cost of Living, 894
Costain, Thomas B., 20,62
Costello, Harry T., 2385
Cotter, Cornelius P., 2883
Cotton, John, 5
about, 6—7
Couch, Jim, about, 2479
Coulter, Ellis Merton, 1780
ed., 1466, 1764
Coulter, John W., 1872
A Country in the Mind, 1149
Country life. See Farm and rural life
The Country of the Pointed Firs, 324
Country Without Maps, 822
County government. See Local govern-
ment
Courlander, Harold, 2491
com p., 2491
Courts, 2843—50, 2853
decisions & opinions, 2847
reform, 2849
Pa., 2849
Tenn., 2850
See also Supreme Court
Courts, juvenile, 2844
Courts, military, 2846
Courts, municipal, 2850
Courts, state, 2849
Courts-martial and courts of inquiry,
2846
Covington, James W., 1781
Cowan, Louise S., 1251
Cowing, Cedric B., 2704
Cowley, Malcolm, ed., 205, 1175, 1229
Cox, Harvey G., 2460
Cox, James M., ed., 505
Cox, John F., 2075
Cox, John H., 1522
Cox, La Wanda C. F., 1522
Cox, Wallace, about, 2205
Coyle, Lee, 233
Cozzens, James Gould, 398—400
about, 401, 1188
Crabb, Cecil V., 1639
Crafts. See Arts and crafts
Cramer, Clarence H., 1922
INDEX / 489
Crampton, Charles Gregory, 1844
Crane, Hart, 402—3
about, 1216
Crane, Stephen, 266—70
about, 1243, 1249
Cranmer, Horace Jerome, 2675
The Crater, 79
Craven, Wesley Frank, 1745
ed., 1692
Cremin, Lawrence A., 2291
Crevecoeur, Michel Guillaume St. Jean
de, 1886-87
Crews, Frederick C., 313
Crichton, John A., 2667
Crime and criminals, 2047, 2056
Rehabilitation, etc., 2047, 2054
Kan., 1828
S.C., 1454
Crimea Conference, Yalta, Russia,
1592-93
Criminal justice, 2854
Criminal law, 2857
administration, 2840
Criminal procedure (law), 2857
Criminology, 2047
Critical realism, 2376
Criticism, literary
anthologies, 529, 1211, 1236—37
bibl., 1237, 1264
drama, 600-2, 670, 883, 1180, 1260
essays, 1184, 1205, 1208, 1211, 1213,
1225, 1233, 1254, 1256
fiction, 81, 306, 333, 1196, 1215,
1224, 1227, 1249
foreign, 1232, 1256
hist., 169—70, 178, 1253—55
Marxist, 1249
methods, 1264
"New Criticism," 1249
periodicals, 1229, 1265—70, 1348
periods when written
(1820—70), 165, 175
(1871-1914), 297, 306, 308-9,
333
(I9I5-39), 347, 437. 442, 465,
670, 699
(1940-65), 22, 81, 347, 437,
442, 465, 505, 532, 561, 568,
665, 796, 799, 883, 934, 940,
974-75, 1008, 1055
poetry, 437, 568, 665, 799, 1159,
1203, 1216, 1228, 1245
techniques, 1338
theory, 940, 974-75, 1252
Crittenden, John J., about, 1504
Croghan, George, about, 1469
Cronkhite, G. Ferris, 1216
Cronon, Edmund David, ed., 1549
Cronquist, Arthur, 1371
Crooks, Ramsey, about, 1817
Cross, Jack L., ed., 1855
Cross, Robert D., 2438
The Cross in the Sand, 2439
Crosthwait, William L., 2137
about, 2137
Crowder, Richard, 28, 644
Crowe, Frederick C., 313
Crowe, Samuel J., 2135
Crowley, Alice L., 2182
Crowther, Bosley, 2200
Crozier, Emmet, 1310
The Crucible, 1130
Crumbling Idols, 284
Crump, Edward H., about, 2908
Cubbedge, Robert E., 2089
Cuber, John F., 2039
Cue for Passion, 625
Cullom, Shelby M., about, 1545
Cults, 2408, 2410—11, 2417
Cultural exchange, 1641
Culture, 833, 1698—99, 1977, 1980,
1983
and religion, 2416
foreign criticism & interpretation,
1719—20
foreign influence, 1220, 1232, 1703,
1717—18, 1721—22
hist., 1440, 1445, 1707, 1718, 1988
colonial period, 1431, 1452, 1703
1 8th cent., 1431
igth cent., 1163, 1431, 1537,
1541, 1706—7
2oth cent., 1163, 1541, 1565,
1700, 1704, 1984—85
societies, etc., 1711
study & teaching, 1720
See also Indians, American — culture;
Intellectual life; Popular culture;
also under regional names, e.g.,
Middle West — culture
Cumberland River, 1782—83
Cumberland Valley, Ky. & Tenn.,
1782-83
Cummings, Edward Estlin, 404-8
about, 409—11
Cummings, Milton C., 2797
Cummings, Parke, 2255
CunlifTe, Marcus, 1176
ed., 55
Cunningham, James Vincent, about,
1203
Cunningham, Noble E., 2886-87
ed.. 2885
Cunningham, Russell N., 2606
Curley, James M., 2907
about, 2907
Current, Richard N., 1437
Current American Usage, 1 1 1 1
Current-Garcia, Eugene, 336
Curti, Merle E., 1415, 1698, 2036, 2308
Curtis, Richard K., 2409
Cushman, Robert E., 2757
ed., 2765
Cushman, Robert F., 2757
Cutler, Carl C., 2676
Cutlip, Scott M., 2040
Cycling, 2265
D
D., H. See Doolittle, Hilda
Dachs, David, 2525
Daedalus, 2086
Dahl, Curtis, 64
Daily Missouri Democrat, about, 1317
Dain, Norman, 2140
Dairying, 2636
Dakotas, politics (igth cent.), 1830
Dale, Edward E., 2633
Dale, Ernest, 2663
Daley, Arthur, 2252, 2264
Daley, John M., 2319
Dallmann, Martha, 2335
Daly, Augustin, about, 2190
Daly, George, illus., 1729
Dana, Richard Henry (1815-1882),
83-84
about, 85
Dana, Samuel T., 2606, 2632
Dance to the Piper, about, 2206
Dancing, 2172, 2206-8
hist., 2206-7
pictorial works, 2207
See also Ballet
Dandelion Wine, 761
Danelski, David J., 2825
Dangerfield, George, 1487, 1501
A Dangerous Woman, 450
Daniels, Jonathan, 1322, 1784
Daniels, Josephus, 1549
about, 1323
Daniels, Roger, 1961
Dannett, Sylvia G. L., 1950
Danzig, Allison, 2235
The Daring Young Man on the Flying
Trapeze, 995
The Dar\ at the Top of the Stairs, 848,
1134
The Dark Dancer, 966
Darling, Frank C., 1619
Darling, Lois, illus., 2642
Darling, Louis, illus., 2642
Darrow, Clarence, 2864
Darwinism, 1710, 2108
Daughter of the Legend, 1037
Davenport, Basil, ed., 365
Davenport, Jane, illus., 2510
Davenport, Walter, 1343
David, Henry, 1753
David, Paul T., 2913
ed., 2921
Davids, Jules, 1591
Davidson, Edward H., 168
ed., 165
Davidson, Martha, ed., 2550
Davidson, Robert L. D., 1453
Davie, Donald, 614
Davies, Arthur B., about, 2587
Davies, James C., 2880
Davis, Allison, 1940
Davis, Arthur K., ed., 2500
Davis, Audrey W., 2135
Davis, Burke, 1681
Davis, Calvin D., 1597
Davis, Charles T., ed., 635
Davis, David B., 1177
Davis, Donald, 1130
Davis, Edwin A., 1786
Davis, Elmer, about, 1324
Davis, Frederick B., 2338
Davis, Hallowell, ed., 2042
Davis, Harold Lenoir, 412—14
Davis, Joe L., 381
Davis, Kenneth S., 1689
Davis, Kingsley, about, 1998
Davis, Merrell R., ed., 150
Davis, Moshe, 2445
Davis, Owen, 1130
490
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Davis, Richard B., 22, 1715
cd., 1463
Davis, Ronald L., 2537
Davis, Stuart, about, 2579
Davison, Robert A., 269 1
Dawson, Raymond H., ed., 1634
Day, Alice T., 1917
Day, Arthur Grove, 1871
ed., 326, 1870
Day, Lincoln H., 1917
Days of the Phoenix, 1167
Deafness, 2042
Death Comes for the Archbishop, about,
391
Death in literature, 1184
A Death in the Family, 719
about, 2198
The Death of Bessie Smith, 721—22
The Death of Me, 894
De Bedts, Ralph F., 2701
De Boer, John J., 2335
De Bow, James D. B., about, 1347
De Bow's Review, about, 1347
De Camp, Lyon Sprague, 2119
De Conde, Alexander, 1586, 1611, 1631
Decorative arts, 2597—2600
See also Arts and crafts
Decorative design, 2571
Deep River, 640
The Deerslayer, about, 1165
Defender of the Faith, 1548
The Defense, 933
Defenses, 1648
De Forest, John William, 86-89
about, 90, 1183
De Grazia, Alfred, 2043
De Haan, Robert F., 2325
Deism, 2454
Dekker, George, 615
De Kooning, Willem, about, 2579
De Mille, Agnes, 2206
about, 2206
De Mille, Cecil B., 2204
about, 2204
Democracy, 1415, 2423, 2740, 2746—
47, 2884
See also Liberty; Politics
Democratic ideals in fiction, 79
Democratic Party
hist., 1522, 1542, 2886—87, 2894,
2898
National Committee, 2883
Mass., 2902
Democratic-Republican Party. See Re-
publican Party (Jeffersonian)
Dempsey, William Harrison (Jack),
2242
about, 2242
Dennett, John Richard, 1910—11
Denniston, Elinore, 2192
Denominations. See Cults; Religion;
Sects
DeNovo, John A., 1620
Dentistry, 2145, 2155
Denver, hist., 1318
Denver and Rio Grande Western Rail-
road, about, 2679
The Denver Post, about, 1318
Dept. of Agriculture, 2620
about, 2627
Dept. of Agriculture. Agricultural
History Branch, 2627
Dept. of Defense, about, 1648, 1651
Dept. of Labor. Office of Policy Plan-
ning and Research, 2007
Dept. of State, 1 593
about, 1632
Dept. of the Army. Office of Military
History, 1693
Department stores, 2690
Deportation, 1556, 1927
Deppe, Theodore R., 2222
Depression (1929), 1570, 1594, 1985,
2721
Depression (1933), 1559
Derber, Milton, ed., 2734
Derieux, James C., 1343
Derleth, August William, 787-95
De Santis, Vincent P., 2888
Deserts, 1362
Desolation Angels, 86 1, 870
Destler, Chester M., 1484
Detroit. Public Library, hist., 2937
Detzer, Karl, 2170
Deutsch, Babette, 1178
Deutsch, Hermann B., 2134
Deutscher, Irwin, 2150
De Vane, William C., 2318
The Devil's Backbone, 1784
De Voto, Bernard A., 262
ed., 260
Dewey, John, 2369—70
about, 2284, 2364, 2366, 2371—73
Dexter, Charles, ed., 2234
Dexter, Lewis A., 2689
The Dharma Bums, 861, 863
Dialects. See Language— dialects & re-
gional isms
Diamond, Edwin, 2101
Diamond, Sigmund, ed., 1537, 1907
Diaries, journals, personal records, etc.
(Chap. I, Literature)
(colonial), 4, 16
(1820—70), 80, 92, 94, 125, 189
(1871-1914), 339
(1940-65), 793, 795, 881, 899, 1033
The Diary of Anne Fran%, 1130
Dickey, James, 796—800
Dickey, John S., ed., 1607
Dickinson, A. T., 1179
Dickinson, Emily, 272—74
about, 275—78, 1 1 88
Dickson, William Kennedy Laurie,
about, 2195
Dictionaries (language). See Language
— dictionaries
Dictionary of American Biography,
1 434
A Dictionary of Modern English Usage,
III2
Dietze, Gottfried, 2750
A Different Valor, 1683
Dilliard, Irving, ed., 2837
Dillon, Merton L., 1529
Dillon, Richard H., 1490
Dimock, Marshall E., 2712
Diplomatic and consular service, 1632,
1635
Diplomatic history (to 1945), 1489,
1571—1628, 1661
Diplomatic history — Continued
Civil War, 1532
See also Foreign relations
Discoveries, 288
Discrimination
in education, 2311, 2340
in employment, 1951
in housing, 1953, 2033
The Dissertation on Liberty and Neces-
sity, Pleasure and Pain, 42
The Distant Music, 413
District of Columbia. See Georgetown,
D.C.; Washington, D.C.
Divine, Robert A., 1591, 1593
Divorce, 2009
Dobie, James Frank, about, 223
Dobriner, Wiliam M., 2023
ed., 2023
Dobzhansky, Theodosius G., 2160
Dockstader, Frederick J., 1396
Doctor Sax, 86 1, 866
Doctors. See Physicians and surgeons
Dodd, Arthur H., 1967
Dodds, Harold W., 2310
Dodge, Bertha S., 2150
Dodge, Ernest S., 1727
Dodge, Natt N., 1820
Dog Ghosts, 2478
Doherty, William C., 2058
Doig, Jameson W., 2803
Doings and Undoings, 1233
Donahue, Gilbert E., 2297
Donald, Ai'da D., ed., 1427
Donald, David H., 1515, 1528, 1768
ed., 1427, 1528
Donleavy, James Patrick, about, 1195
Donnelly, Ernest, illus., 2571
Donnelly, Ignatius, about, 1544
Donnelly, Walter A., ed., 2322
Donohue, John W., 2371
Donoughue, Bernard, 1473
Donovan, Frank R., 2681
Don't Let Them Scare You, 1324
Don't Stop the Carnival, 1106
Dooley, Mr., pseud. See Dunne, Finley
Peter
Doolittle, Hilda, 415-18
about, 419
Doomed Road of Empire, 1847
The Door in the Wall, 556
Dorfman, Joseph, 2652
Doris, Lillian, ed., 2703
Dorson, Richard M., 2470—71
ed., 2480
Dos Passos, John, 420—23
about, 424, 1255, 1257
Dotzenko, Grisha, illus., 791, 793
Dougall, Herbert E., 2695
The Doughboys, 1687
Doughty, Howard, 1416
Douglas, Stephen A., 1516
about, 1503
Douglas, Wallace W., 1216
Douglas, William Orville, 1282—84,
1354, 2020
Douglass, David, about, 2176
Douglass, Harl R., 2300
Dove, Arthur G., about, 2574
Dowdey, Clifford, 1681
ed., 1 68 1
INDEX / 491
Dowie, J. Iverne, 1922
Downer, Alan S., 1153
cd., 1128, 1 1 80
Downey, Fairfax D., 1658
Downey, Jean, ed., 141
Downey, Lawrence W., 2300
Downs, Robert B., 2476
Doyle, Paul A., 378
Drago, Harry S., 1826
Drake, Daniel, about, 2136
Drake, Sir Francis, about, 1448
Drake, St. Clair, 1941
Drake, William E., 2278
Drama
anthologies, 1128, 1130, 1134
bibl., 1130
hist. & crit., 284, 883, 1128, 1153,
1170, 1 1 80— 81, 1234—35, 1260,
2173-75. 2178-79
periods
(1871—1914), 296
(I9I5-39), 439
(1940-65), 345, 360, 362, 438-39,
518-19, 544, 567, 598-99» 625,
662, 684, 721-26, 738, 749, 752,
813, 818-19, 839-40, 848-52,
885, 912, 9M-I5. 934. 939,
955, 993, 1058-59, 1075, 1091,
1093-95, 1097-99
verse. See Verse drama
See also Comedy; Theater
Dramatists, 2173
Draper, Theodore, 2890—91
Drawbaugh, Daniel, about, 2063
The Dream of Arcadia, 1 169
Dreiser, Theodore, 425-27
about, 428—29, 1243
Dressier, David, 2050
ed., 2047
Drexler, Arthur, 2560
Driggs, Frank, 2496
Drinan, Robert F., 2423
Driver, Harold E., 1383
ed., 1383
Drowning With Others, 797
Drug addiction, 2048
in literature, 767, 823
Drug trade, 2132, 2157
Dry farming, 26 1 2
Dualism, 2378
Duberman, Martin B., 1285—86
ed., 1517
Du Bois, William Edward Burghardt,
about, 1939
Due, John F., 2678
The Duel for France, 1691
Duff, John J., 1518
Duhl, Leonard J., ed., 2024
Duke University, Durham, N.C. Library.
Frank C. Brown Collection of
North Carolina Folklore, 2481
Dulles, Allen W., 1629
Dulles, Foster Rhea, 1595, 1622, 2215,
2726
Dumbauld, Edward, 2766
Dumke, Glenn S., ed., 1858
Dunbar, Willis F., 1807
Duncan, Beverly, 1953
Duncan, Isadora, about, 2208
Duncan, Otis D., 1953
Duncan, Paul, ed., 2092
The Dungeon of the Heart, 1165
Dunlap, William, 2548
Dunlop, John T., ed., 2659
Dunlop, Richard, 2136
Dunn, Antony J., 1356
Dunn, Gordon E., 1363
Dunn, James T., 1726
Dunn, Richard S., 1455
Dunne, Finley Peter, 279—80
Dunne, Finley Peter, Jr., ed., 2134
Dunning, James M., 2155
Duns, Joannes, Scotus, about, 2382
Dupre, Joseph Stefan, 2114
Dupree, A. Hunter, 2108, 2114
Dupuy, Richard Ernest, 1655, I^77
Dupuy, Trevor N., 1677
Durant, Alice, 2211
Durant, John, 2211, 2216, 2229, 2235,
2245, 2264
Durkin, Joseph T., 2319
Duroselle, Jean B., 1591
Durr, William K., 2325
Durrell, Lawrence, ed., 579
Dusenbury, Winifred L., 1181
Dutch in New Jersey, 1747
Dutch, Pennsylvania. See Pannsylvania
Germans
Dutton, Geoffrey, 215
Dwiggins, William A., about, 2931
The Dybbuk., about, 2182
Dyer, Murray, 1630
Dynes, Russell R., 2039
Eakins, Thomas, about, 2579
Eardley, Armand J., 1360
Earle, Walter K., 2510
The East
physiography, 1356
See also Eastern seaboard; New Eng-
land
East Harlem Protestant Parish, New
York, 2459
Easterlin, Richard A., 1918
Eastern seaboard, language (dialects,
etc.), 1123
Eastin, Roy B., 2780
Eastman, Seth, about, 2585
Eastman School of Music, Rochester,
N.Y., University, about, 2543
Easton, Robert, 1820
Eaton, Clement, 1716, 1761
Eaton, Herbert, 2914
Eaton, Leonard K., 2148
Eaton, Quaintance, 2539
Eaton, Thelma, ed., 2936
Eaves, Thomas C. Duncan, ed., 177
Ebbitt, Wilma R., ed., 1114
Eberhart, Richard, 430—35
about, 1203, 1228
Ebert, Marian, illus., 1818
Eble, Kenneth E., ed., 301
Eby, Cecil D., 1902
ed., 1903
The Eccentric Design, 1 160
The Eccentricities of a Nightingale,
1098
Ecclesiastical geography, 2405
Ecclesiastical law, 2430
Echeverria, Durand, ed. & tr., 1889
Eckman, James R., 2932
The Eclipse of Community, 2016
Ecology, 1371
Economic assistance to foreign nations,
1642, 1646—47
Economic conditions, 2091, 2651, 2653
2657, 2677, 2704, 2711
hist., 1437, 1541
20th cent., 1562, 2654, 2658—59,
2661, 2685, 2719
See also Geography — economic; also
subdivisions History and Economic
conditions under names of places
and regions, e.g., Indiana — hist.;
Southern States— econ. condit.
Economic History Association, 2651
An Economic Interpretation of the Con-
stitution of the United States, about,
2748-49
Economic policy, 2652, 2655, 2659—60,
2715
Economics, 2650—2738
hist., 2652—54, 2658
sources, 2652
See also Commercial policy1; Foreign
economic relations
Ecumenical movement, 2419, 2462
Eddy, Edward D., 2308
Eddy, Mary Baker, about, 1315
Edel, Leon, 314
ed., 307—8, 310, 1135
The Edge of Darkness, 394
The Edge of Glory, 1680
Edgerton, Henry W., 2765
Edison, Thomas Alva, about, 2195,
2518
Editing, 1344
See also Journalism
Editorials, sketches, etc.
(1820—70), 59, 76, 119, 138
(1871-1914), 241, 255-56, 259, 287,
310
(1915-39), 458
(1940-65), 528, 574, 980
See also Essays; Journalism; Short
stories
Education, 2275—2353
administration, 2293
aims & objectives, 2334, 2348
bibl., 2275—76
developments & innovations, 2337
finances, 2346
foreign countries, 2344
foreign influence, 2278
hist., 2277-78, 2280-82, 2291-92,
2294, 2296, 2326
methods & techniques, 2333—38
Negroes, 2340
periodicals, 2349—53
philosophy, 2283—89, 2345, 2348
problems & controversies, 2339—48
reference books, 2275—76
research, 2275—76
soc. aspects, 2280, 2292, 2296
Ohio, 1802
492 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Education — Continued
See also Motion pictures — in educa-
tion; Television — in education; also
types of education, e.g., Secondary
education; under school subjects,
e.g., Music — education; and subdi-
vision Study and teaching under
special subjects, e.g., Geography —
study & teaching
Education and church, 2278, 2284, 2339
Education and state, 2281, 2299, 2346
Education in Violence, 1680
Educational anthropology, 2287-88
Educational measurements and testing,
2336, 2338
Educational media personnel, 2333
Educational psychology, 2287
The Educational Record, 2349
Educational research, 2331
Educational sociology, 2008, 2287, 2296
Educational television. See Television
— in education
Edwards, Edgar O., ed., 2659
Edwards, James D., 2702
Edwards, Jonathan, 8—12
about, ii, 13—14, 1225, 1273, 2420
Edwards, Newton, 2292
Eells, Richard S. F., 2713
Eggenhofer, Nicholas, illus., 2270
Eggleston, Edward, 281
about, 282
Egmont, John Perceval, ist Earl of,
1466
Ehle, John, 1945
Ehlers, Henry, ed., 2345
Ehre, Edward, ed., 2218
Eichner, Alfred S., ed., 2091
Eight Men, 1109
Eight Men Out, 2229
The Eighth Art, 2066
Einbinder, Harvey, 2928
Einstein, Charles, ed., 2233
Eisenhower, Dwight D., 1560, 1569
about, 1560, 2781
Eisenstadt, Abraham S., 1416
ed., 1435
Eisinger, Chester E., 1182
Eisner, Simon, 2031
Ekirch, Arthur A., 1649, 2740
El Paso, Tex., hist., 1318
El Paso Times, about, 1318
Elazar, Daniel J., 2775
Elbers, Gerald W., ed., 2092
Elder, Donald, 558
Elder, Robert E., 1632
The Elder Statesman, 438—39
Eldersveld, Samuel J., 2892
Eldridge, Hope T., 1918
Elections, 1501, 2914-15, 2917
hist., 2918
of 1826, 2898
of 1876, 1540
of 1896, 1539, 2894
of 1948, 2919
of 1952, 2920
of 1956, 2920
of 1960, 2905, 2921
of 1964, 2916, 2922
Southern States, 2920
Electric machinery industry, 2668
Elementary education, 2294
administration, 2298
developments & innovations, 2237,
2297
hist., 2297-98
organization, 2298
Elfenbein, Julien, 1337
Elias, Robert H., ed., 427
Eliason, Norman E., 1122
Eliot, Alexander, 2581
Eliot, Thomas Stearns, 436—42
about, 443—48, 1 1 66, 1170, 1255
Elizabeth Appleton, 957
Elkins, Stanley M., 1521
Elliott, George P., ed., 1136
Ellis, David M., 1739
Ellis, John Tracy, 2439
Ellis, Lewis Ethan, 1594
Ellison, Ralph, 801—2, 1196
about, 1195, 1209
Ellmann, Richard, 1216
Elson, Ruth M., 2290
El wood, Douglas J., 14
Embalming, 1990
Emblems of a Season of Fury, 904
Emerson, Everett H., 6
Emerson, Ralph Waldo, 91—95
about, 96—98, 1225, 1253, 1259,
2356, 2366
Emery, Edwin, 1304, 2082
Emery, Walter B., 2080
Emmett, Daniel Decatur, about, 2530
Empty Mirror, 826
Encounter in Haiti, 831
Encyclopaedia Britannica, about, 2928
Encyclopedia of Educational Research,
2276
The End of the Road, 746
Endecott and the Red Cross, 875
Endowments, 2035
Engel, Bernard F., 587
Engineers and engineering, 2121-24,
2735
Engle, Paul Hamilton, 803-6, 1131,
1354
ed., 1137
The English and Scottish Popular Bal-
lads, about, 2488
English in America, 1450
English language. See Language
English literature, 309
English Traits, about, 98
The Enormous Radio, 774
Entertainment, 2169—2213
See also specific types, e.g., Opera;
Sports
Entrepreneurship, 2714, 2716, 2720
Epidemics, 2136
See also Yellow fever epidemic, Phil-
adelphia (1793)
Episcopal Church, hist., 2442—43
Equal Time, 2071
Equality, 1979, 1981
Erickson, Charlotte, 1922
Erie Canal, folklore, 2487
Ernst, Alice H., 2183
Erskine, Albert, ed., 1 141
Eskimos, 1393, 1397
Espinosa, Jose E., 2508
Espionage, 1629, 1633
Esposito, Vincent J., ed., 1654
Essays
anthologies, 1128, 1138
bio-bibl., 1138
hist. & crit., 1128, 1138
periods
colonial, 9
(1820—70), 119, 165
(1871-1914), 232, 253, 259, 284,
297, 387
(I9I5-39), 423, 437, 453, 489,
492, 602, 699
(1940—65), 288, 363, 409, 414,
423, 437, 453, 505, 532, 561,
580, 602, 665, 672, 678, 680,
685, 785, 791, 799, 802, 828,
833, 845, 855, 889, 900-901,
903, 940, 1026, 1060, 1062,
1073, 1168, 1180, 1184, 1196,
1200, 1202—5, 1208, i2ii, 1213,
1215-16, 1218, 1225, 1227,
1233, 1245, 1248-49, 1253,
1264
See also Editorials, sketches, etc.
Essays in the History of Ideas, 2376
Essien-Udom, Essien U., 1942
Esthetics, 2360, 2388, 2392-94, 2397-
98, 2400
'Earn: e e c, 409
Ethan Frame, 1130
Ethics, 2365
See also Social and business ethics
Ethnology, 1383
See also Anthropology; Archeology
and prehistory
Europe
descr. & trav., 256
relations with, 1609, 1612, 1623
travel & travelers, 387
European Economic Community, about,
2689
European influences
culture, 1717, 1722
literature, 127, 309, 1169, 1220
European War, 1914-18. See World
War I
Evangelists, 2409, 2452—53
Evans, Bergen, mi, 1125
Evans, Charles, about, 2940
Evans, Cornelia, mi
Evans, Grose, 2593
Evans, Laurence, 1623
Evans, Lester J., 2154
Evans, Oliver W., 887
Evening Picayune, San Francisco, 1859
Everett, Edward, 136
Everson, William K., 2194
Every Other Bed, 2141
Everyone but Thee and Me, 593
Everything That Rises Must Converge,
946
Evins, Joe L., 2793
Evolution and philosophy, 2377
Ewen, David, 2526
ed., 2527
Ewers, John C., 1392
Excavations (archeology), 1387
Exceptional children, education, 2324
Executive branch, 2788-89, 2795, 2798,
2800
Executive power, 2765, 2781—82, 2785—
86, 2829
INDEX / 493
Executives, 1005
Existentialism in literature, 861, 1166,
1195, 1209—10
Exman, Eugene, 2927
Expansionism, 1538, 1595
See also Territorial expansion
The Expense of Vision, 316
Experience and the Objects of Knowl-
edge in the Philosophy of F. H.
Bradley, about, 448
Ex-Prodigy, 1302
The Eyes, 688
Ezell, John S., 1762
ed., 1885
The Face on the Cutting Room Floor,
2202
The Faces of Blood Kindred, 836
The Faded Banners, 1150
Fagin, Nathan Bryllion, ed., 600
Fainsod, Merle, 2660
The Fair Sister, 837
Fairbank, John King, 1574
Faison, Samson L., 2602
Falk, Doris V., 60 1
Falk, Richard A., 2847
Falk, Robert P., 1183
ed., 1139—40
Falk, Signi L., noo
Family, 1920, 2007, 2012—14
The Family Masqat, 1015
A Family Party, 950
The Family Reunion, 439
Family size, 1916
Fanshawe, no
Far East, relations with, 1628, 1661,
1721
The Far Field, 973
The Far Side of Paradise, 495
The Faraway Country, 1 240
Farb, Peter, 1354, 2646
Farewell to the Bloody Shirt, 2889
Farm and rural life, 2059, 2614, 2624
fiction, 1 22 1
Middle West, 1221
See also Communities, rural
Farm management, 2611
Farm mechanization, 2620
Farmer Cooperative Service, 2621
The Farmers Hotel, 955
Farmers' movement. See Agrarianism
Farming. See Agriculture
Farmhouses, 1920
Farnsworth, Marjorie, 2210
Farr, Finis, 584, 2241
Farrell, James Thomas, 449—54
Farrell Lines, Inc., about, 2676
Farwell, Loring C., 2704
Fast, Howard Melvin, 807—813
Faulk, John H., 2205
Faulk, OdieB., 1851
Faulkner, Harold U., 1538, 2653
Faulkner, William, 455—63
about, 464—70, 1166, 1173, 1226,
1249, 1255, 1257
dictionaries, indexes, etc., 467—68
Fauna. See Animals; Birds; Fishes
Faxon, Nathaniel W., 2148
Fear on Trial, 2205
Feather, Leonard G., 2532
Federal Bureau of Investigation, hist.,
2053
Federal Communications Commission,
about, 2071, 2080
Federal Extension Service, about, 2623
Federal government. See Government
Federal Reserve banks, 2694, 2707
Federal Street Pastor, 71
Federal Writers' Project, 1723
The Federalist, 2750
about, 2750
Federalist Party, 1484, 1488, 2885,
2887
Federalists, 1484, 1488, 1493
Federigo, 934
Feerick, John D., 2783
Feidelson, Charles, ed., 145
Feininger, Lyonel C. A., about, 2586
Feis, Herbert, 1592-93, 1646
Feld, Sheila, 2142
Feld, Stuart P., 2581
Felheim, Marvin, 1216, 2190
Fels, Rendigs, 2711
Felton, Jean S., ed., 2162
Fenelon, Franfois de Salignac de la
Mothe-, about, 1259
Fenin, George N., 2194
Fenno, Richard F., 2785
Fenollosa, Ernest F., about, 1721
Fenton, Charles A., 367
ed., 366
Ferber, Edna, 471—74
about, 473—74
Ferguson, Elmer James, 1474
Ferguson, Rowena, 1344
Ferlinghetti, Lawrence, 814—19
Ferman, Louis A., ed., 2044
Ferrell, Robert H., 1584, 1594
Ferri-Pisani, Camille, 1908—9
Ferris, Robert G., ed., 1812
Ferro, Walter, illus., 1036
Ferry, John W., 2690
Fertility, 1916—17, 1921
Fey, Harold E., 1407
Fiction
anthologies, 1128, 1137, 1139, 1143,
1150, 1183
bibl., 1179, 1182, 1221
hist. & crit., 81, 297, 306, 308, 333,
940, 1128, 1131, 1133, 1153, 1158,
1160, 1164—65, 1169, 1173, 1177,
1179, 1182—84, 1187, 1189, 1191,
1193, 1195—97, 1202, 1207, 1209—
II, 1215, I2I7—l8, I22O— 22, 1224,
1226—27, 1241, 1243, 1249, 1257,
1261, 1266, 2199
humorous, 943, 976
picaresque, 86 1
realistic, 1183
social questions, 1207
stream of consciousness writing, 828
techniques, 1229
theories, 940
periods
(1764-1819), 37, 39, 51
(1820-70), 62, 78-79, 87-89,
107—10, 130—31, 134, 145—46,
149, 173—74, 176, 181—82
Fiction — Continued
periods — Continued
(1871-1914), 231, 249-50, 254,
260, 267, 294, 305
(1915-39), 356, 426, 456, 492,
694, 713
(1940-65), 343, 350, 369, 372-74,
377, 394-96, 399, 413, 421-22,
451-52, 457, 459-6o, 462, 472,
478-83, 485-86, 515, 523, 553,
570-71, 581, 596, 606, 629-30,
652, 658, 668, 719, 728-32, 734,
736-37, 741-43, 744-47, 749-
51, 761-62, 767-69, 77i, 773-
74, 788-89, 794, 808-13, 816,
828-30, 832, 834, 836-37, 842-
44, 846, 859-64, 866-70, 878,
882, 886, 890-91, 893, 896,
907-10, 913, 919-23, 925-27,
929, 931-35, 943-45, 951-53,
957, 964—66, 976, 978, 991—92,
995-96, 998, 1002—3, ion,
1013—15, 1017, 1019, 1031,
1037, 1039, 1046, 1048, 1050,
1052, 1054, 1061—63, 1067—70,
1074, 1077—78, 1086, 1105—6,
1108, mo
Fiedler, Leslie A., 1184
ed., 1138
Field, James A., 1695
Field and Stream, 2268
The Field of Vision, 919
Field sports, 2268—74
Fields, James T., about, 2930
Fifield, Russell H., 1624
Filler, Louis, 1419
Fillmore, Millard, about, 1503, 1508
Film adaptations, 2199
The Final Challenge, 1801
Finance, 2694—2710
public, 1474, 1492, 1530, 1540, 1559,
2694, 2697—99, 2703, 2705, 2707,
2709
Finch, James K., 2122
Fine, Sidney A., ed., 1435
Fink, Arthur E., 2041
Finkelstein, Dorothee M., 1 56
Finkelstein, Sidney W., 1210
Finley, David E., 2601
Finley, M. L, 1420
Finns, 1969
Firearms, 2270
Firmage, George J., ed., 408
The First Seven Years, 892
Fiscal policy. See Finance — public
Fischer, David H., 1488
Fischer, Ernest G., 2137
about, 2137
Fischman, Leonard L., 2640
Fisher, Dorothea Frances Canfield,
475-76
Fisher, Joseph L., 2640
Fisher, Vardis Alvero, 477—86
about, 487
Fisher, William J., ed., 600
Fisheries, 1366
Fishes, 1366, 1370, 2269, 2271-73
Fishing. See Hunting and fishing
Fishman, Betty G., 2661
Fishman, Leo, 2661
Fishwick, Marshall W., 1774
494 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Fiske, John, about, 1416
The Fist in the Wilderness, 1817
Fitch, Frederic B., 2400
Fitch, James M., 2556, 2560
Fitch, John, 2227
about, 2227
File, Gilbert C., 1555
Fitzgerald, F. Scott, 488-93
about, 494—97, 1173, 1 1 88, 1226,
1249
Fitzgerald, Robert, 946
Fitzhugh, William, 1463
Flaherty, Tom, 2257
Flanagan, John T., 1922, 2476
Flanagan, Sue, 1853
Flanders, Helen H., ed., 2501
Fleischer, Nathaniel S., 2243—45
Fleming, John F., 2935
Flexner, Abraham, 2330
about, 2330
Flexner, Eleanor, 1989
Flexner, James T., 1400, 2577
Flexner, Stuart B., 1126
Flint, Emily, ed., 1149
Flint, Timothy, 99
about, zoo
Flintlock, and Tomahawk^, 1402
Floan, Howard R., 1185
The floating Opera, 745
Flood, 1078
Flora, Joseph M., 487
Flora, Snowden D., 1 364
Flora. See Plants
Florida
governors, 1467
hist., 1781
pol. & govt. (colonial), 1467
soc. condit., 1327
Flory, L. E., 2076
Floyd, Joe S., 1919
Flye, James Harold, 720
Foerster, Norman, ed., 1139—40
Fogle, Richard H., 112, 157
Folk art and crafts. See Arts and crafts
Folk heroes, 2475
Folk literature. See Folklore; Legends
and tales; Tales, folk; Tall tales
Folk singers, 2476, 2496
Folk tales. See Tales, folk
Folklore, 2467, 2470—71, 2476
Indian, 1398
literary influence, 1197, 1204
mining, 2483
petroleum industry, 2475
theory, methods, etc., 2471
See also Folkways
Folksongs and ballads, 2475, 2488—
2506
analysis, 2493-94, 2501
bibl., 2493, 2495, 2500
definitions, 2493
discography, 2496, 2498
hist., 2493—94
sources, 2501
themes, motives, etc., 2493—94
Catskill Mountains, 2499
Ky., 2479
Maine, 2474
New England, 2477, 2501
N.C., 2481
Pa., 2506
Folk songs and ballads — Continued
Schuylkill County, Pa., 2483
Southwest, 2504
Utah, 2502
Va., 2500
See also Anglo-American folksongs
and ballads; Religious folksongs
Folkways
Ala., 2481
Kan., 2484
Ky., 2479
Maine, 2474
Neb., 2484
N.C., 2481
Schuylkill County, Pa., 2483
See also Folklore
Follmann, Joseph F., 2166
Folmsbee, Stanley J., 1788
Folsom, James K., 100
Fontana, Hazel, illus., 1406
Fontanne, Lynn, about, 2189, 2192
Food adulteration and inspection, 2112
Food and Drug Administration, about,
2157
Food supply, 1976
A Foot in the Door, 2688
Football, 2248-54
biog. (collected), 2252, 2254
fiction, 2254
hist., 2250—54
Foote, Shelby, 1677
Footlights on the Border, 2183
For the Iowa Dead, 804
For the Union Dead, 874
Ford, Alice E., 2107
Ford, Henry, about, 2680
Ford Foundation, about, 2799
Ford Motor Company, about, 2680
Foreign correspondents, 1312
Foreign economic relations, 2658, 2689
Foreign-language periodicals, 1331-32
Foreign population, 1438, 1924—25,
1928, 1964-65
New York (City), 1929
See also names of national groups,
e.g., Chinese; Italians
Foreign relations (since 1945), 1543,
1548, 1551, 1560, 1562—63, 15683,
1571, 1583, 1587-93, 1601, 1629—
47. 1653
See also Diplomatic history; and
names of countries, e.g., Great
Britain — relations with
Foreign reputation of authors, 171, 237,
1171—72, 1176, 1232
Foreign service. See Diplomatic and
consular service
Forensic psychiatry. See Psychiatry, fo-
rensic
Forest Service, about, 2629
Forester, Cecil S., 1672
Foresters, 2629—30
Forestry as a profession, 2632
Forestry schools and education, 2632
Forests and forestry, 2628—29, 2631—32
policy, 2606
Forgue, Guy J., ed., 575
Forkosch, Morris D., 2757, 2862
Forks, Wash., 2020
Form, William H., 2003
Forrest, Edwin, about, 2186
Forrestal, James, about, 1651, 1660
Forster, Walter O., 1922
Forsyth, Bryan, illus., 1829
Forsyth, David P., 1311
Fort Duquesne, Pa., 1754
Fort Pitt, Pa., 1754
Forth to the Wilderness, 1801
Fortune, 2024, 2093, 2685
Foscue, Edwin J., 1357
Fosdick, Raymond B., 1287-88
about, 2546
Foshay, Arthur Wellesley, 2297
Foss, Phillip O., 2609
Fossier, Albert E., 1786
Foster, Margery S., 2320
Foster, Stephen, drama, 519
Four Saints in Three Acts (opera),
about, 2546
The F ourposter, 1130
Fourth and One, 2252
The Fourth Branch of Government,
1349
A Fourth of a Nation, 2348
Fowler, Henry Watson, 1112
Fox, Charles P., 2212
Fox Indians, 1388
Fraenkel, Osmond K., 2766
Fraiberg, Louis B., 1186
Frampton, Merle E., ed., 2324
France, relations with, 1610— n
France. Armee. Escadrille Lafayette. See
Lafayette Escadrille
Francis, Withrop N., 1115
Frank, John P., 2818
Frank, Waldo David, 498
about, 499
Frankel, Charles, ed., 2357
Frankfurter, Felix, about, 2833, 2839
Franklin, Benjamin, 40—42, 1456
about, 41, 43—44, 1225, 1273, 1456,
2103, 2366
Franklin, Joe, 2197
Franklin, John Hope, 1519, 1768
Franny and Zooey, 984
Frazer, Robert W., 1815
Frazier, Edward F., 1943, 2466
Free thought, 2454
Freedley, George, 2189
Freedman, Lawrence Z., 2078
Freedman, Ronald, 1916
Freedom of assembly, 2762
Freedom of association, 2762
Freedom of information, 2080
Freedom of religion, 2422, 2430
Freedom of speech, 2768, 2772
Freedom of the press, 1321—22, 1327,
1351-52, 2768, 2772
Freedom of the will, 10
Freedom of thought, 1716
Freeman, Fred, 1663
Freeman, Ralph E., ed., 2654
Freeman, Ruth B., 2156
The Freeman, about, 1348
Freidel, Frank B., 1437, 1685, 1687
Freitas, Lima de, ill us., 1447
Fremont, John C., about, 1499
French, Warren G., 334, 986
ed., 659
French and Indian War (1755—63),
1464, 1754
French literature, 309
INDEX / 495
Freneau, Philip Morin, about, 1225
Frenz, Horst, cd., 1 1 80
Freud, Sigmund, about, 2404
Freudian concepts in literature, 1198
Frey, David G., ed., 1361
Frick, George F., 2113
Friedan, Betty, 2011
Friedelbaum, Stanley H., 1436
Friedenberg, Edgar Z., 2010
Friedman, Milton, 2698
Friedman, Norman, 410
Friends, Society of (Pa.), 1453
See also Quakers and Quakerism
Fries, Charles C., 2335
Frink, Maurice, 2634
Fritz, Henry E., 1405
Frohock, Wilbur M., 1187-88
From Failing Hands, 2783
From the Cannon's Mouth, 1674
From the Depths, 2044
From the Shadow of the Mountain,
1168
From the Terrace, 951
Frome, Michael, 2629
Frontier and pioneer life, 1415, 1429,
1801, 1826
case studies, 1415
religion, 2421
Cumberland Valley, Ky. & Tenn.,
1782-83
Ky., 1782-83, 1791
Northwest, Old, 1798
Tenn., 1782-83
The West, 1816, 1826
Frontier and pioneer life in literature
descr., 123
fiction, 134
hist. & crit., 1190
Okla., 123
Frost, Orcutt W., ed., 287
Frost, Robert, 500—503
about 505-8, 1216, 1255
Fruman, Norman, ed., 988
Frumkin, Robert M., 2278
Fryburger, Vernon R., 2693
Fuchs, Daniel, 664
Fuchs, Lawrence H., 2875
Fuertes, Louis Agassiz, about, 2107
Fugitive slaves, 1520
The Fugitives (literary group), 1251
Fuller, Alfred C., 2688
Fuller, Edmund, 1189
Fuller, Richard Buckminster, about,
2559
Fuller, (Sarah) Margaret (Marchessa
d'Ossoli), TGI— 2
about, 103
Fuller, Wayne E., 2059
Fuller Brush Company, about, 2688
Fund raising, 2040
Fundamentalism, 2434
Funeral rites and ceremonies, 1990
Funf( & Wagnalls New Standard Dic-
tionary of the English Language,
1114
Fur trade, 124, 1817, 1823, 1837, 2692
Furnas, Joseph C., 1993
Furniture, 2571, 2597
hist., 2557, 2569—70
Fussell, Edwin S., 1190, 1216
Futrell, Robert F., 1695
Futterman, Robert A., 2030
Gage, Nathaniel L., ed., 2331
Gale, Zona, 509
about, 510
Gall, Elena D., ed., 2324
Gallagher, Charles F., 1 575
Gallatin, Albert, about, 1492
Gallegly, Joseph, 2183
Gallico, Paul, 2263
Gal lion, Arthur B., 2031
Galloway, George B., 2794
Gambell, Alaska, 1393
Gangs, 2049
Gannon, Michael V., 2439
Cans, Herbert ]., 1929
Gara, Larry, 1520
Garbisch, Bernice C., 2578
Garbisch, Edgar W., 2578
Card, Robert E., 2193
Card, Wayne, 1820
The Gardener, 702
Gardiner, Harold C., ed., 1252
Gardner, Albert Ten Eyck, 2572, 2581,
2589
Gardner, Burleigh B., 1940
Gardner, John W., 1979
Gardner, Mary R., 1940
Gardner, Richard N., 1642
Garland, Hamlin, 283—84
Garraty, John A., 1289—90
Garrets and Pretenders, 1713
Garrett, Charles, 2901
Garrigue, Jean, 820—22
Garrison, Garnet R., 2065
Garrison, William Lloyd, about, 1524
Garry, Ralph, ed., 2078
Gas industry, 2667
Gasper, Louis, 2434
Gassner, John, 2173
ed., 602, 1130
Gaston, Edwin W., 1191
Gastronomy, 1976
Gates, Charles M., 1863
Gates, Horatio, about, 1668
Gates, John, 2900
Gates, Paul W., 2653
The Gathering of Zion, 1845
Gaustad, Edwin S., 2405, 2420
Gazzo, Michael V., 1130
Geiger, George R., 2372
Geismar, Maxwell D., 315, 1215
ed., 357
Gelb, Arthur, 603
Gelb, Barbara, 603
Gelber, Leonard, 1426
Gelber, Lionel M., 1604
Gelfand, Lawrence E., 1596
Gellhorn, Walter, 2767
Gelpi, Albert J., 277
General Electric Company, about, 2668
General Motors Corporation, about, 2680
General Land Office, about, 2605
Generals
American Revolution, 1668
Civil War, 1682-84
Generation Without Farewell, 369
Genesee River, 1726
Genesee Valley, N.Y., hist., 1726
Genovese, Eugene D., 1521
"Genteel tradition" in literature, 1175
The Gentle Legions, 2130
The Gentle Puritan, 2330
Gentlemen, Scholars, and Scoundrels,
"49
Geography, 1353-78
economic, 1357
historical, 1429
maps, 1372-73. 1835, 2405
physical, 1354, 1356
regional, 1357
study & teaching, 1355
Geological Survey, about, 1810
Geology, 1356, 1358—61, 2111
Georgetown, D.C., 59
Georgetown University, Washington,
D.C., about, 2319
Georgia
biog., 1779
governors, 1466
hist., 1779—80
colonial period, 1458, 1466
sources, 1466
pol. & govt.
colonial period, 1466
1 9th-20th cent., 1550
Georgopoulos, Basil S., 2149
Gerberich, Joseph Raymond, 2338
German- American newspapers, 1316,
i33i
German influences
culture, 1232
literature, 127
scholarship, 1425
The German Refugee, 894
Germany
fiction, 369
travel & travelers, 127
Gertz, Elmer, 2865
Gettysburg Address, about, 136
Gewehr, Wesley M., ed., 1440
Geyer, Alan F., 2429
Ghost stories, 242
Gibbons, Don C., 2054
Gibson, John M., 1674
Gibson, William, 2191
Gibson, William M., ed., 257, 296
Gideon, Clarence, about, 2821
The Gift, 932
Gifted children, education, 2325
Gilbert, Charles E., 2807
Gilbert, Felix, 1422, 1600
The Gilded Age, 250
Gilkes, Lillian, ed., 269
Gill, Irving J., about, 2565
Gilliam, Harold, 1354
Gilman, Rhoda R., ed., 1809
Gilman, William, 2094
Gilman, William H., ed., 94, 150
Gilpin, Robert, ed., 2118
Gilroy, Frank D., 2191
Gimbel, Richard, 49
Gimpel, Herbert J., 1665
Gimpel the Fool, 1016
Ginger, Ray, 1541
ed., 1537
The Gingerbread Age, 2564
Ginsberg, Allen, 770, 823—27
496 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Ginzberg, Eli, 1656
ed., 2091
Giovanni's Room, 736
Gipson, Lawrence H., 1457
The Girl of My Dreams, 892
The Girl on the Baggage Trucf(, 953
Give Me Liberty, 1463
Glackens, Ira, 2545, 2587
Glackens, William J., about, 2587
Glad, Paul W., 1539, 1548
Gladwin, Harold S., 1386
Glaser, Robert, ed., 2333
Glasgow, Ellen, 511—12
about, 513
Glassware and glassmaking, 2600
Glazcr, Nathan, 1929, 1997, 2893
Gleason, Henry A., 1371
Gleason, Henry A., Jr., 1115
Gleason, Jackie, about, 2205
Glenn, Norval D., 1943
Click, Paul C., 1920
Glicklich, Martha, tr., 1018
Glines, Carroll V., 1666
Glover, John G., ed., 2664
Glueck, Eleanor T., 2051
Glueck, Sheldon, 2051
ed., 2052, 2840
A Goat For Azazel, 479
Gobel, George, about, 2205
God and Golem, Inc., 1301
God Bless You, Mr. Rose water, 1070
Goddard, Robert H., about, 2093
Godfrey, Arthur, about, 2205
God's Oddling, 1035
Goebel, Julius, ed., 2867
Goen, C. C., 2420
Goctzmann, William H., 1502
GofTman, Erving, 1983
Gohdes, Clarence L. F., 1192
Going To Meet the Man, 739
Gold, Herbert, 828, 1196
about, 1195
Gold, Milton J., 2325
Gold in the Sun, 1860
Goldberg, Alfred, ed., 1666
Goldberg, Isaac, 2528
The Golden Fleece, 2693
The Golden Horseshoe, 2539
The Golden Road, 1861
Goldfarb, Ronald L., 2843
Goldman, Edwin Franko, about, 2535
Goldman, Leo, 2336
Goldman, Ralph M., 2913
Goldman, Richard Franko, 2535
Goldman, Richard P., ed., 2218
Goldschmidt, Walter R., ed., 1618
Goldsmith, Raymond W., 2696
Goldstein, Kenneth S., 2471
Goldwater, Barry M., about, 2922
Golf, 2256-58
Golze", Alfred R., 2644
Gonzales, Pancho, 2255
about, 2255
Good, Harry G., 2277
"Good Evening!" 1324
A Good Man Is Hard To Find, 943
Goodbye, Columbus, 976—77
Goode, William J., 2009
Goodlad, John L, 2337
Goodman, Paul (i9ii + )> 2010, 2307,
2342
Goodman, Paul (1934 + ), 2902
Goodman, Walter, 2000
Goodman. William, 2899
Goodrich, Carter, 2677
ed., 2677
Goodrich, Frances, 1130
Goodrich, Lloyd, 2554, 2579
Goodspeed, Charles Eliot, comp., 2548
Goossen, E. C., 2579
Gordon, Albert I., 1957
Gordon, Caroline, 514—16
ed., 1141
Gordon, John, ed., 1740
Gordon, Lincoln, 2660
Gordon, Margaret S., ed., 2044
Gordon, Robert A., 2717
Gorky, Arshile, about, 2574, 2588
Gorman, Lawrence, about, 2503
Gorman, Mike, 2141
Gorter, Wytze, 2676
Gossett, Louise Y., 1193
Gossett, Thomas F., 1930
Gotham Book Mart, New York (City),
2934
Gottehrer, Barry, 2248
Gottfried, Alex, 2908
Gottlieb, Elaine, tr., 1017
Gottmann, Jean, 2025
Gottschalk, Louis R., 1420
ed., 1420
Gould, Jay, about, 2718
Gould, Joseph E., 2170
Gouldner, Alvin, about, 1998
Govan, Gilbert E., 1683, 1789
Govan, Thomas P., 1768, 2707
Gove, Philip B., ed., 1114
Government, 2773—80
appropriations & expenditures, 2703,
2789
hist.
1 8th cent., 1484, 1493
sources, 1427, 1456, 1485, 1489,
1491, 1495-96, 1498
igth cent., 1493, 1501, 1503, 1522,
1526. 1533
sources, 1427, 1485, 1498, 1500,
1540
2oth cent., sources, 1549, 1560
See also Executive branch; Indians,
American — govt. relations; Judicial
branch; Legislative branch
Government, democratic. See Democracy
Government, local. See Local govern-
ment
Government, State. See States — govt.
Government and science. See Science
and state
Government and the press, 1321, 1327,
1349-51. 1638
Government corporations. See Corpora-
tions, government
Government in Metropolitan Areas Proj-
ect, 2810
Government information, 2779
Government lending, 2697
Government officials and employees,
2797, 2802—3
Government publications, 2780
Governors, 1466—67, 2804
Govorchin, Gerald G., 1968
Gowans, Alan, 2557
Goyen, William, 835—37
Grabo, Norman S., 26
ed., 24
Graboff, Abner, illus., 2499
Graebner, Norman A., ed., 1587, 1631
Graf, Herbert, 2540
Graham, William Franklin (Billy),
about, 2452—53
Graham, Frank, 2231
Granger, Bruce L, 44
Grant, Charles S., 1465
Grant, Ulysses S., about, 88-89, 1675
Grantham, Dewcy W., 1550, 1768
The Grapes of Wrath, about, 659, 1165
The Grapes of Wrath (motion picture),
about, 2199
Grattan, Clinton Hartley, 1576
Graves, Morris, about, 2574
Graves, William Brooke, 2775
Gray, Asa, 2108
about, 2108
Gray, James, 2020
Gray, John A. C., 1 873
Gray Fox, 1 68 1
Grazing, 2609
Great Awakening, 2420
Great Basin, descr. & trav., 1837
Great Basin Kingdom, 2650
Great Britain
colonial policy, 1457—60, 1464, 1466,
1473, 1476, 1482-83, 1607
hist, 1448
relations with, 1457—60, 1468, 1470,
1476, 1481-83, 1486, 1489, 1510,
1602—6, 1772
War of 1812, 1605-6
World War II, 1592-93
Great Britain. Vice-Admiralty Courts,
1476
The Great Chain of Being, 2376
Great Circle, 350
The Great Days, 421
Great Depression (1929). See Depres-
sion (1929)
The Great Gatsby, 492
Great Lakes region, 1796
Indians, 1388
Great Plains, 1826—35
cattle & cattle trade, 2633, 2635
folklore, 1829
hist., 1391, 1829
Indians. See Plains Indians
outlaws, 1828
Great Praises, 43 1
The Great World and Timothy Colt,
728
Greco-Turkish War (1897), 270
Greeks, 1971
Greelcy, Andrew M., 2459
Greeley, William B., about, 2630
Green, Constance McLaughlin,
2026
Green, David B., 324
ed., 324
Green, Edith, 2346
Green, Harold P., 2795
Green, Paul, 517-19, 1130, 2193
1758,
INDEX / 497
Green, Stanley, 2526
A Green Bough, 463
Green Grow the Lilacs, 1130
Greenbackers, 1530, 2709
Greenberg, Milton, 2873
Greenberg, Selig, 2125
Greenblatt, Milton, ed., 2141
Greene, Charles S., about, 2565
Greene, Harry A., 2338
Greene, Henry M., about, 2565
Greene, Jack P., 1458
Greene, Maxine, ed., 2353
Greene, Nathanael, about, 1668, 1671
Greenfield, Kent R., 1693
ed., 1693
Greenough, Horatio, about, 2573
Greenstein, Fred I., 2892
Greenwich Village
Bohemianism, 1708, 1713
hist., 1708
Greer, Scott A., 2021
Greer. Thomas H., 1567
Gregg, Alan, 2127
Gregory, Dick, 1291—92
about, 1292
Gregory, Horace Victor, 520-21, 565,
2594
Gregory, Paul M., 2232
GrifTen, Jeff, 2274
Griffith, Richard, 2194
Grigsby, William G., 2034
Grimes, Alan P., 2741
Grinager, Patricia, 2278
Griswold, Erwin N., 2836
Griswold, Wesley S., 2679
Grob, Gerald N., ed., 1700
Groce, George C., 2552
Grodinsky, Julius, 2682, 2718
Grodzins, Morton, ed., 2090
Grolier Club, New York (City), 2935
Gropius, Walter, about, 2560
Gros, John D., about, 2365
Gross, Gerald, ed., 2924
Gross, John J., 572
Gross, Neal C., 2293
Gross, Richard E., ed., 2278
Grosscup, Lee, 2252
Grossman, Joel B., 2866
Grossman, Lawrence K., ed., 2916
Grosvenor, Melville B., ed., 1370
The Grotesque, 1227
The Group, 882
Groves, Leslie R., 2104
Growing Up Absurd, 2010
Gruen, Victor, 2032
Grunewald, Donald, ed., 2714
Grunwald, Henry A., ed., 987
The Guardsman, about, 2192
Guess, William Francis, 1778
Guidance in education, 2336
Gulf Coast Stories, 383
Gulick, Luther H., about, 2800
Gullason, Thomas A., ed., 268
Gummere, Richard M., 1703
Gurin, Gerald, 2142
Gurr, Ted, 2043
Guthmann, Harry G., 2695
Guthrie, Alfred B., 522—24, 2020
about, 524
H
Habenstein, Robert W., 1990
Haber, Alan, ed., 2044
Hacker, Andrew, ed., 2719
Hackett, Albert, 1130
Hackett, James H., about, 2183
Haddock, Charles B., about, 2365
Hagan, William T., 1401
Hagemann, Edward R., ed., 270
Hague. International Peace Conference
(1899), about, 1597
Hail, 1364
Haines, Peter G., 2686
Hale, John P., about, 1529
Haley, Alex, 1937
Hall, Ben M., 2201
Hall, Bernard H., ed., 2143
Hall, Claude H., 1509
Hall, Donald, ed., 1142, 1247
Hall, Elizabeth B. W., 2508
Hall, James, 104
about, 105
Hall, Michael G., 1459
ed., 1459
Hallam, Lewis, about, 2176
Hallam, William, about, 2176
Halleck, Henry W., about, 1684
Haller, Robert S., ed., 663
Halliday, Ernest M., 1608
Halperin, Samuel, 2875
Halsey, Margaret, 2000
Halsted, William S., about, 2135
Hamerik, Asger, about, 2522
Hamilton, Alexander, 1489, 2750, 2867
about, 1489, 1493-94, 2754» 2867
Hamilton, David B., 2687
Hamilton, Edward A., ed., 2258, 2273
Hamilton, Edward P., 1464
Hamilton, Holman, 1503
Hamilton, Howard D., ed., 2776
Hamilton, James M., 1841
The Hamlet, 462
Hammond, Paul Y., 1 648
Hand, Learned, 2837
Hand, Wayland D., ed., 2481
Handel and Haydn Society, Boston,
about, 2541
Handicapped, rehabilitation. See Re-
habilitation
Handicrafts. See Arts and crafts
Handlin, Oscar, 1438, 1753, 1923, 1929,
i93i
ed., 33, 1542, 1924
Handy, Robert T., 2415
Hanna, William S., 1456
Hansberry, Lorraine, 1134
Hansen, Alvin H., 2696
Happy Families Are All Alike, 1042
Haraszti, Zoltan, 1194
Harbison, Winfred A., 2751
Harcleroad, Fred F., 2333
Hardee, William J., about, 1678
Harder, Warren J., 2063
Harding, Walter R., 187, 193-94
ed., 186, 190, 195
Hardy, Thomas, about, 1249
Hargreaves, Mary W. M., 2612
ed., 1500
Harlem, N.Y.
poetry 1045
soc. condit., 1937
Harlem Gallery, 1044-45
Harlow, Frederick P., 2492
Harmon, Nolan B., 2447
Harnoncourt, Rene" d", 2595
Harper, Fowler V., 2819
Harper, Francis, ed., 1881
Harper, Robert A., 2039
Harper and Brothers, about, 2927
Harper's Magazine, 1149
Harriman, Margaret C., 2690
Harrington, Michael, 2044
Harris, Brayton, 1665
Harris, Chester W., ed., 2276
Harris, Joseph P., 2789
Harris, Mark, 1196
Harris, Richard, 2157
Harris, Seymour E., 2167, 2308, 2657
ed., 2699
Harris, William Torrey, about, 2284
Harrison, Benjamin, about, 1546
Harrison, Harry P., 2170
about, 2170
Harrodsburg, Ky., 2020
Hart, Henry C., 2644
Hart, Herbert M., 1813—15
Hart, James D., 1237
Hart, Jim Alice, 1317
Hart, Moss, 525—26
about, 526
Hartle, Paul J., ill us., 1813-15
Hartog, Jan de, 1130, 1354
Hartshorne, Charles, 2400
Harvard College, about, 2320
The Harvard Educational Review, 2350
Harvard University
athletics, 2224
curriculum, 2320
Harvey, 1130
Harwell, Richard, ed., 76
Haskins, George L., 2814
Hassan, Ihab H., 1195
Hassler, Warren W., 1682
Hassrick, Royal B., 1380
The Hat on the Bed, 958
Hatch, Alden, 2212
Hatcher, Harlan H., 1796
A Hatful of Rain, 1130
Hathaway, Dale E., 2625
Haugen, Einar L., 1 1 20
Hauser, Philip M., 1917
Havard, William C., 2905
Havighurst, Robert J., 2287, 2325
Havighurst, Walter, 1785, 1797—98
Hawaii
fiction, 907—8
hist., 1870—71
short stories, 326
Hawkes, John, about, 1218
Hawthorne, Nathaniel, 106-10, 875
about, 111-17, 1173, 1207, 1213,
1225, 1253
Hay, John, about, 1603
Hayden, Ferdinand, about, 1810
Hayden, Sterling, 1293-94
about, 1294
Hayes, Bartlett H., 2576
Hayes, Rutherford B., 1540
Hayford, Harrison, ed., 149, 1140
/ A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Hayne, Donald, ed., 2204
Haynes, Frank Jay, about, 1825
Hays, Samuel P., 1541, 2638
Haystead, Ladd, 2617
Hayward, Arthur H., 2599
Head, Sydney W., 2067
Health
education, 2161
insurance, 2166—67
services, administration, 2156
Healy, James J., 2735
Healy, K. D., illus., 2474
Heaps, Willard A., 2517
Heard, Alexander, 2915
Hearing, 2042
Hearn, Lafcadio, 286—87
about, 288—90, 1320
Hearst, William Randolph, about, 1307,
1325
Heart, diseases, 2164
A Heart for the Gods of Mexico, 350
The Heart Is Like Heaven, 73
The Heart of the Artichoke, 831
Heberle, Rudolf, 2905
Heckewelder, John Gottlieb Ernestus,
1878-79
Hedges, James B., 1429
Hedges, William L., 126
Heffner, Richard D., ed., 1433
Heilbroner, Robert L., 2703
Heinl, Robert D., 1662
Heinz, Wilfred C., 2249
ed., 2246
Helburn, Theresa, 2192
about, 2192
Helck, Peter, 2225
Held, R. Burnell, 2608-9, 2^39
Helen in Egypt, 418
Heller, James G., 2456
Hellman, Lillian, 838—40, 1134
Helmets, 798
Helper, Hinton Rowan, about, 1529
Hemingway, Ernest, 527—28
about, 529—32, 1166, 1226, 1249,
1255, 1257
Hemingway, Leicester, 531
Hemley, Cecil, tr., 1019
Hemphill, William Edwin, ed., 1498
Hendel, Charles W., 2373
ed., 2373
Henderson, the Rain King, 750
Hendrick, George, 608
Hendricks, Gordon, 2195
Hendricks, King, ed., 327
Henlein, Paul C., 2635
Hennessy, Bernard C., 2883
Hennessy, Juliette A., 1666
Henri, Robert, about, 2587
Henry, Laurin L., 2784
Henry, Nelson B., ed., 2325
Henry, O., pseud. See Porter, William
Sydney
Henson, Ray D., ed., 2838
Hentoff, Nat, 1952
Her, 816
Herald to Chaos, 633
Herber, Elmer C., ed., 2106
Herberg, Will, 2461
Herbst, Jurgen, 1 425
Here Come the Clowns, 1130
Here Comes, There Goes, You Know
Who, 994
Here To Stay, 845
Hereford cattle, 2635
Hergesheimer, Joseph, 533
about, 534
Herman, Lewis H., 2075
Herndon, Booton, 2688
Herndon, William H., about, 1518
Heroes, legendary. See Folk heroes
Heroes Without Glory, 1826
Herrick, Robert, 291
about, 292
Hersey, John Richard, 841—46
Hershfield, Leo, illus., 1026
Herzberg, Max J., ed., 1237
Herzog, 751
Hess, Hans, 2586
Hess, James W., comp., 1753
Hess, Thomas B., 2579
Hesseltine, William B., 1763
ed., 1417, 1528
Hetherington, Hugh W., 158
Hewes, Henry, ed., 1134
Hewett-Thayer, Harvey W., 1232
Hewitt, Barnard, 2174
Hibben, Frank C., 1387
Hickman, Bert G., 2654
Hicks, Granville, ed., 1196
Hicks, Isaac, about, 2691
Hicks, John D., 1437, 1561
The Hidden God, 1166
Hidy, Ralph W., 2628
Higbee, Edward C., 2607, 2617
Higginbotham, Don, 1668
Higgins, Benjamin H., 1642
Higgins, Trumbull, 1697
High, Stanley, 2452
High Country Empire, 1836
High schools. See Secondary education
High Tension, 1319
Higham, John, 1422, 1928
Highways, finance, 2700
Hill, Daniel Harvey, about, 1678
Hill, David Bennett, about, 1542
Hill, Frank E., 2628
Hill, George E., 2336
Hill, George H., about, 2183
Hill, Herbert, ed., 1145
Hill, Jim D., 1652
Hill, Philip T., about, 2227
Hill, Ralph Nading, 1729
The Hill, 813
The Hill of Venus, 589
Hills, L. Rust, ed., 1740
The Hills Stand Watch, 789
Hill way, Tyrus, 159
Hillyer, Robert Silliman, 535—37
Hilton, George W., 2678
Himelstein, Morgan Y., 1235
Hindle, Brooke, 2110
Hine, Robert V., ed., 1816
Hines, Robert W., illus., 2646
Hinshaw, Randall W., 2689
Hirsch, Mark D., 1419
Hirschfeld, Albert, 2177
Hirschfield, Robert S., 2758
Hirshson, Stanley P., 2889
Historic houses, 2566, 2601—2
Historical museums, 1423
Historical research, 1417
Historical societies, 1422—23
Historical themes in fiction, 1179
Historiography, 1411—25, 1446
bibl., 1411—12, 1420
Canada, 1411—12
Southern States, 1425
History, general American, 1411—1570
chronology, 1432, 1436, 1439
dictionaries, 1426, 1439
philosophy, 1242, 1413, 1415, 1435,
2390
sources, 1428, 1433, 1537
statistics, 1444
study & teaching, 1414
See also History under names of
History, local, 1723—1874
places and regions, e.g., Illinois —
hist.
History of Education Quarterly, 2351
History of Education Society, 2351
History: Written and Lived, 2390
Hitsman, J. Mackay, 1672
Hobbies, 2217
Hobbs, Samuel H., 1777
Hochfield, George, 226
Hocking, Richard B. O., 2375, 2385
Hocking, William Ernest, 2374—75
about, 2362
Hodge, Carle, ed., 1362
Hodge, Francis, 2183
Hodges, Harold M., 2001
Hoeltje, Hubert H., 113
Hoffman, Daniel G., 271, 1197
Hoffman, Frederick J., 351, 1198, 1215
ed., 465, 1199—1200
Hofmann, Hans, about, 2574
Hofstadter, Richard, 1699, 1710
ed., 2309
Hogan, Robert G., 627
Hoglund, Arthur William, 1922, 1969
Hohenberg, John, 1312, 1338
ed., 1313
Holbrook, Stewart H., 1728, 1991, 2131
Hold April, 1036
Holden, Raymond P., 1726
Holland, Laurence B., 316
Holley, Edward G., 2940
Hollingsworth, Joseph R., 2894
Hollon, William Eugene, 1848
ed., 1901
Holloway, Jean, 285
Holly Springs, Miss., 2020
Holman, Clarence Hugh, 1768
ed., 173, 175, 713
Holmes, Edward M., 2156
Holmes, Maurice G., 1446
Holmes, Oliver Wendell, Sr., 118-19
about, 120
Holmes, Oliver Wendell, Jr., 2820
about, 2820
Holmquist, June D., ed., 1809
Holt, Rackham, 2613
Holt, Robert T., 1630, 2068
The Holy Barbarians, 1712
Homage to Mistress Bradstreet, 754
Homans, George C., about, 1998
The Homecoming Game, 934—35
Homer, Winslow, about, 2579, 2589
Homestead Act (1862), 2605
Homestead Centennial Symposium, 2605
INDEX / 499
Homicide, Philadelphia, 2056
Homicide in literature, 1177
Honest John Vane, 88
Honey and Salt, 643
Hoogenboom, Ari A., 2923
Hoover, Edgar M., 2027
Hoover, Herbert Clark, about, 1566,
1570, 1594
Hoover, Kathleen O., 2546
Hope, Bob, about, 2205
Hopkins, Harry L., about, 1559
Hopkins, James F., ed., 1500
Hopkins, Mark, about, 2323
Horine, Emmet F., 2136
Horn, John S., 2785
Hornberger, Theodore, ed., 1131
Hornsby, Rogers, 2230
about, 2230
Hornung, Clarence P., 1820
Horror tales, 242
The Horse Knows the Way, 959
Horse-racing, 2259—60
Hosack, David, about, 2136
Hosmer, Charles B., 2601
Hospers, John, 2360
Hospital Sketches, 59
Hospitals, 2149
New England, 2148
New York (City), 2151
See also Psychiatric hospitals
Hot Springs and Hell, 2486
Hough, Emerson, about, 223
Hough, Frank O., 1662
The House of Connelly, 1130
The House of Fiction, 308
The House of Five Talents, 731
The House of the Seven Gables, 109—10
The House on the Mound, 788
The Housebreaker of Shady Hill, 776
Houses, historic. See Historic houses
The Houses That James Built, 1 249
Housing, 2028—29, 2034
discrimination, 1953, 2033
Negroes, 1953, 2034
rural, 1920
Houston, Sam, about, 1853
Houts, Marshall, 2854
Hoving, Walter, 2685
How Much? 840
How Not To Do a Play and Succeed,
2191
How To Write Without Knowing Noth-
ing, 1024
Howard, John T., 2511
Howard, Leon, 1201
ed., 9
Howard, Perry H., 2905
Howard, Roy, about, 1318
Howard, Sidney Coe, 1130
Howarth, Herbert, 443
Howe, Edgar Watson, 293—94
Howe, Hartley E., 1663
Howe, Henry F., 1730
Howe, Irving, 466, 2891
ed., 699
Howe, Louis M., about 1567
Howe, Mark De Wolfe, 2820
ed., 2820
Howe, Will D., 1237
Howell, James E., 2717
Howells, William Dean, 257, 295—97
about, 298-303, 1183, 1243
Howl, 823-24
Howl of the Censor, 814
Hubach, Robert R., 1877
Hubbard, Lester A., ed., 2502
Hubbell, Jay B., 1202, 1253
Huber, Richard M., ed., 1742
Huckleberry Finn, The Adventures of,
249
about, 261, 1165
Hudon, Edward G., 2768
Hudson, Wilson M., 223
ed., 222, 2476
Hudson, Winthrop S., 2406, 2408
The Hudson Review, 1149
Hudson's Bay Company, fiction, 480
Huegy, Harvey W., 2684
Huftel, Sheila, 916
Hughes, Charles C., 1393
Hughes, Charles Evans, about, 2824
Hughes, Everett C., 2150
Hughes, Helen M., 2150
Hughes, Henry Stuart, 1577
Hughes, Jane M., 1393
Hughes, Langston, 538-45, 1943-44
about, 539
Hughes, Nathaniel C., 1678
Hugins, Walter E., 1511
Hull, Cordell, about, 1584
Hull, Nell M., 1436
Hullfish, H. Gordon, cd., 2340
Hulme, Thomas, 1892-93
Hulse, James W., 1846
Humble Oil and Refining Company,
about, 2671
Humor
anthologies, 1155, 2469
hist. & crit., 1263, 1309
periods
(1820-70), 138
(1871-1914), 231-32, 249-56,
258-59, 280
(1915-39), 540, 592-94, 678, 680
(1940-65), 744, 890, 943, 976,
1022—26
N.C., 2478
Ozark Mountains, 2486
See also Cartoons; Comedians; Com-
edy; Comic strips; Tall tales
Humphrey, Don D., 2689
A Hundred Camels in the Courtyard,
759
Hungerford, Edward B., ed., 1203
Hunt, Rockwell D., 1862
Hunter, Edward, 1332
Hunter, John Marvin, 1828
Hunting and fishing, 1366, 2268—74,
2646
Hunting dogs, 2274
Huntington, Gale, ed., 2492
Huntington, Samuel P., 1649, 1653
Hurd, Charles, 2060
Huron Indians, 1388
Hurricanes, 1363
Hurst, James W., 2815
Hutchins, Stilson, about, 1320
Hutchinson, Edward P., 1922
Hutchinson, Robert, ed., 280
Hutchinson, William Henry, 623
Hutchinson, William T., ed., 1485
Hutson, Percival W., 2336
Hyatt, Harry M., 2482
Hygiene, public. See Public health
Hyman, Harold M., 1533
Hyman, Mac, 1130
Hyman Stanley E., 1204
Hyneman, Charles S., 2831
I
/ Am a Camera, 1130
I Am a Mathematician, 1302
I Have a Thing To Tell You, 713
/ Knew a Phoenix, 1000
/ Marry You, 781
"/ Will Fight No More Forever," 1394
/ Wonder As I Wander, 539
Ice Palace, 472
The Iconoclast, about, 1343
Idaho, hist., 1868
Idiots First, 894
The Ignorant Armies, 1608
Ilchman, Warren F., 1632
Ilfeld (Charles) Company, about, 2688
Iliff, John W., about, 2634
II lick, Joseph E., 1453
Illinois
folklore, 2471
hist., 1797, 1805
proverbs, 2473
The Image, 1977
The Imagination of Loving, 318
Imagine Kissing Pete, 953
Imitations, 873
Immigration, 1922—25
British, 1973, 1975
Chinese, 1960, 1962
Finns, 1969
Greeks, 1971
Irish, 1972
Japanese, 1961
Jews, 1956
Norwegians, 1966
Poles, 1974
policy, 1926-28
Puerto Ricans, 1964-65
Scotch-Irish, 1970
Welsh, 1967
Yugoslavs, 1968
Imperial Woman, 372
Imperialism, 1506, 1538, 1595, 1597,
1613
In Brief Authority, 1279
In Clear and Present Danger, 2764
In Defense of Ignorance, 1008
In Defense of the Earth, 969
In Fact, 784
In Many Voices, 1332
In Support of Clio, 1417
In the Clearing, 501
In the Stoneworks, 783
In the Winter of Cities, 1092
In Time Li^e Air, 999
In White America, 1285
In Wildness Is the Preservation of the
World, 2596
Incident at Vichy, 915
The Inclusive Flame, 1 172
Income, 2696
The Incurable Wound, 2128
50O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Independent regulatory commissions,
2773
India, relations with, 1572
Indian Reorganization Act (1934),
1407
Indiana
hist., 1797, 1804
proverbs, 2473
Indianapolis Speedway Race, 2226
Indians, American, 1379—1410, 1879,
1881
biog. (collected), 1394
culture, 1379, 1383
govt. relations, 1401, 1405, 1407,
1469, 1483
in art, 1384, 2585
legends & talcs, 1398, 1887
missions, 1860
mixed bloods, 1963
origin, 1390
tribes & tribal groups, 1392-95, 1398
wars & warfare, 1314, 1394, I399>
1401—3, 1801
See also names of tribes, e.g., Chero-
kee Indians
Indians, American, in literature
annals, journals, etc., 123
biog. (collected), 1394
fiction, 173—74
hist. & crit., 1404
Individuality, 1979, 2005
Industrial arbitration, 2732
Industrial arts. See Arts and crafts;
Decorative arts
Industrial hygiene, 2146
Industrial management, 2629, 2663,
2715-16, 2735
Industrial Medical Association, about,
2146
Industrial medicine, 2146
Industrial mobilization, 2795
Industrial organization, 2089, 2663
Industrial psychology. See Psychology
— industrial
Industrial relations, 1951, 2003, 2727,
2730. 2735
Industrial sociology. See Sociology —
industrial
Industrialization, 1537—38, 1541, 2043
Industries, location of, 1918
Industry, 2663-71, 2685, 2687, 2711,
2715, 2718
hist., 2664
soc. aspects, 2003
Industry and state, 2660, 2689, 2712
The Infidel, 2454
Information storage and retrieval sys-
tems, 2938
The Informer (motion picture), about,
2199
Inge, William, 847—52, 1130, 1134
Ingersoll, Robert G., about, 2454
Inherit the Wind, 1130
Inland water transportation, 2677
The Inland Whale, 1398
The Innocents Abroad, about, 256
The Inquiry, 1 596
Insanity, jurisprudence, 2857
Insular possessions. See Overseas pos-
sessions
Insull, Samuel, about, 2668
Insurance, 2706
Intellectual life, 1060
bibl., 1698
foreign influence, 1600, 1717, 1722
hist., 1243—44, *445> J537> 1600,
1698-1722, 1982, 2376
See also Culture; also subdivisions
Intellectual life and History under
names of places and regions, e.g.,
New England — intellectual life; Inr
diana — hist.
Intelligence service, 1633, 1689
Interdenominational cooperation, 2419
Internal Revenue Service, about, 2703
Internal security, 2764
International agencies, 1642
International Association for Quaternary
Research, 1361
International Business Machines Corpo-
ration, about, 2665
International Exhibition of Modern Art
(1913), 2547
International law, 2847
International relations. See Foreign
relations
Interstate Commerce Commission,
about, 1545
Inter-University Case Program, 2804
Interuniversity Summer Research Semi-
nar, 1409
Inventions, 2119—20
Inventors, 2119
Investment trusts, 2701
Investments, 2704
Invisible Man, about, 1210
Invitation to a Beheading, 929
Inward Sky, 113
Iris, Federico Scharmel, 546—48
Irish, Marian D., ed., 2871
Irish, 1923, 1972
Iron industry, 2670
Irony in literature, 943
Iroquois Indians, 1400, 1410
Irving, Jules, about, 2181
Irving, Washington, 121—25
about, 126—28
Isaacs, Asher, 2660
Isaacs, Harold R., 1942
Ise, John, 2645
Isenberg, Arnold, 2360
Is hi in Two Worlds, 1408
Ishmael, 152
Ishmael's White World, 155
Isolationism, 1591, 1594, 1598
Island in the City, 1965
Israel
fiction, 910
relations with, 1580
Italians, 1929
Italy
fiction, 1169
relations with, 1 577
travel & travelers, 1169
Iversen, Robert W., 2341
Iverson, Marion D., 2571
Ives, Edward D., 2503
Izenour, George C., 2193
J
/. B., 567
Jablonski, Edward, 1667, 2528
Jackson, Andrew, about, 1501, 2898
Jackson, David, about, 1824
Jackson, Donald D., ed., 1490
Jackson, Esther M., noi
Jackson, Thomas Jonathan (Stonewall),
about, 1683
Jackson, W. Turrentine, 2634
Jacksonian democracy, 1497, 1511
See also Democracy
Jacob, Herbert, 2853
ed., 2904
Jacobs, Jane, 2032
Jacobs, John C., 2667
Jacobs, Norman, ed., 2086
Jacobs, Wilbur R., ed., 1415—16
Jacobus, John M., 2559
Jacques, Robin, illus., 930
Jaeger, Edmund C., 1362
Jaffe, Bernard, 2095
James, Fleming, 2842
James, Henry (1811-1882), about, 311,
1259
James, Henry (1843—1916), 304—10,
2580
about, 311-21, 698, 1173, 1183,
1226, 1249, 1253
James, Reese D., 2183
James, William, 2357, 2435
about, 2364, 2366
Jamison, Albert Leland, 2416
Janis, Harriet G., 2531
Janowitz, Morris, 1650, 2920
Japan
in literature, 376
relations with, 1579, 1622, 1625—26
Japanese, 1961
Jaques, Francis L., illus., 1283-84
Jarrell, Randall, 853—57
about, 1203
Jarrett, Henry, ed., 2098
Javits, Jacob K., 1932
Jay, John, 2750
Jay's Treaty, 1583
Jayson, Lester S., ed., 2761
Jazz music, 2496, 2515, 2531—34
bibl., 2531
discography, 2531—32
Jeffers, Robinson, 549—50, 2596
about, 551
Jefferson, Thomas, 45—46, 1491, 1496
about, 1492-93, 1715, 2743, 2754,
2771
JefTersonian democracy, 1488
See also Democracy
Jehovah's Witnesses, about, 2444
Jenkins, Dorothy H., 2598
Jennewein, John Leonard, 1830
Jennings, M. Kent, 2797
Jensen, Arthur L., 2691
Jensen, Jay W., 2083
Jesus Came Again, 478
The Jewbird, 894
Jewell, Malcolm E., 1639, 2806
Jewett, Sarah Orne, 322—24
about, 324
INDEX / 501
Jews, 1955-59, 2184, 2875
in literature, 890, 976—77, 1015—20,
1144, 1158
Polish, 1015—20
New York (City), 1956
Jim Crow's Defense, 1930
Jim the Man, 831
Johansen, Dorothy O., 1863
Johannsen, Robert W., ed., 1516
The John Wood Case, 668
Johns Hopkins Hospital, about, 2147
Johns Hopkins University. School of
Medicine, about, 2147
Johns Hopkins University Conference
on Drugs in Our Society, 2157
Johnson, Allison H., 2399—2400
ed., 2396
Johnson, Andrew, about, 1522, 1536
Johnson, Arthur M., 2673
Johnson, Chuck, 2249
Johnson, Donald B., 2896
comp., 2897
Johnson, Donald O., 2769
Johnson, Evert W., 2632
Johnson, Gerald W., 1313, 1753
Johnson, Harold Earle, 2541
Johnson, Jane, ed., 284
Johnson, John A. (Jack), about, 2241
Johnson, Kenneth M., 1859
Johnson, Lyndon B., 1569
about, 2922
Johnson, Philip C., about, 2559
Johnson, Robert E., 1661
Johnson. Thomas H., ed., 273—74, "47
Johnson, Sir William, hart., about, 1400
Johnston, Herbert, 2284
Johnston, Joseph E., about, 1683
Johnstone, John W. C., 2326
Joiner, Charles W., 2855
Joint Information Service of the Amer-
ican Psychiatric Association and
the National Association for Mental
Health, 2141
Jonathan Gentry, 688
Jones, Archer, 1678
Jones, Arthur R., 2018
Jones, Bessie Z., ed., 59
Jones, Bobby. See Jones, Robert T.
Jones, Evan, 1726
Jones, Genesius, 444
Jones, Howard Mumford, 1205—6, 1718
bibl., 1216
Jones, James, 858—60
Jones, John Paul, about, 1478
Jones, Joseph, ed., 138
Jones, LeRoi, ed., 1143
Jones, Maldwyn A., 1924
Jones, Margo, 2193
Jones, Robert T. (Bobby), 2256
Jones, Rufus M., about, 2455
Jones, Stanley L., 2894
Jones, Virgil C., 1679
Jordan, Elijah, about, 2362
Jorgensen, Albert N., 2338
Jorgenson, Chester E., ed., 42
Joseph, Franz M., ed., 1719
fosephy, Alvin M., 1394
ed., 1353
Joughin, George Louis, 2765
Journal of a Tour in the Western Coun-
tries of America, 1892—93
The Journal of the History of Ideas,
about, 2376
Journalism, 1305, 1334
business, 1311, 1337
hist., 1304, 1306—8
policies & practices, 1333—42, 1344
See also Magazines; Newspapers
Journalists. See Authors as journalists;
Newspapermen; Reporters and re-
porting; and names of individual
journalists
A Journey to Boston, 396
Jovanovich, William, 2924
Joyaux, George J., tr., 1909
Jubilee, 1149
Judaism, 2445, 2456
conservative, 2445
Reform, 2456
relations, 2440
soc. thought, 2461
Judges, 2819—20, 2822—25, 2833—34,
2837, 2839-40, 2843-50, 2866
Judicial branch, 2798
Judicial decisions. See subdivision De-
cisions and opinions under Su-
preme Court
Judicial power, 2817, 2830—31
Judicial process, 2848
Judicial review, 2758, 2817, 2829, 2831
Julian, 1961
Jungk, Robert, 2104
Junior colleges, 2305
Junior high schools. See Secondary
education
Junkie, 767
Juries, 2851, 2855, 2859
Jurisdiction (international law), 2847
Justice, 2813—70
administration of, 2846—47, 2849—50,
2853
See also Law
Juvenile delinquency, 2047-49, 2051—
K
Kaddish, 825
Kahn, Ely J., 1330, 2669
Kahn, Louis I., about, 2559
Kainah Indians, 1392
Kallich, Martin, ed., 1472
Kamakau, Samuel M., 1870
Kammen, Michael G., ed., 1459
Kandel, Isaac L., 2294
Kane, HarnettT., ed., 1767
Kane, Joseph N., 1375
Kansas
folklore, 2484
hist., 1828, 1832-33
pictorial works, 1833
Kansas City, Mo., hist., 1794
Kant, Immanuel, about, 2400
Kantor, MacKinlay, 552—53
Kaplan, Abraham D. H., 2719
Kaplan, Harold, 2033
Kaplan, Norman, ed., 2115
Karl, Barry D., 2800
Karolik, Mr. & Mrs. Maxim, 2576
Karson, Marc, 2738
Kast, Fremont E., ed., 2096
Kate Beaumont, 87
Kates, George N., 387
Kates, Robert W., ed., 2640
Katz, Alfred H., ed., 2162
Katz, Herbert, 2602
Katz, Joseph, 2278
Katz, Marjorie, 2602
Katz, Stanley N., ed., 1352
KaufTer, Edward McKnight, illus., 542
Kaufman, George Simon, 1130
Kaufman, Herbert, 2629, 2901
Kaufmann, Edgar, comp., 2568
Kaufmann, William W., 1651
Kaul, A. N., 1207
Kauper, Paul G., 2770
Kavanagh, 141
Kay, Barbara A., ed., 2054
Kazin, Alfred, 1208
Kearny, Stephen Watts, about, 1499
Keats, John C., 2342
Keefer, Lubov B., 2522
Keen, Benjamin, tr., 1447
Keepers of the Past, 1 423
Kellar, Herbert A., about, 1417
Keller, Morton, 2706
Kelley, Robert L., 1440
Kelley, Stanley, 2916
Kellogg, Frank B., about, 1584, 1594
Kellogg, Peter Paul, 1367-68
Kellogg- Briand Pact, 1594
Kelly, Alfred H., 2751
Kelly, Howard Atwood, about, 2135
Kelso, Louis O., 2655
Kemble, John H., ed., 84
Kendall, Patricia L., ed., 2152
Keniston, Kenneth, 2002
Kenkel, William F., 2039
Kennan, George F., 1608, 1612
Kennedy, Gail, ed., 2358
Kennedy, John F., 1569, 1924
about, 1568-683, 2781, 2921
Kennedy, John Pendleton, 129—31
about, 132
Kennedy, Richard S., 714
Kenner, Hugh, 445
ed., 446
Kenrick, Bruce, 2459
Kent, Donald H., ed., 1755
Kent, Conn., hist., 1465
Kentucky
folklore, 1791, 2479
frontier & pioneer life, 1782—83
1791
hist., 1790
Kephart, William M., 2007, 2053
Kernochan, John M., 2756
Kerouac, John (Jack), 861—70
about, 1 1 88
Kerr, Clark, 2310, 2727
Kerr, Don, illus., 1846
Kerr, Elizabeth M., comp., 1117
Kerr, Walter, 2179
Kertesz, Stephen D., ed., 1612
Kessler, Jascha F., ed., 1142
Ketchum, Richard M., ed., 1675
Kettle of Fire, 414
Key, Valdimer O., 2872, 2910
Kidd, Charles V., 2116
Kieran, John, 2264
Kiger, Joseph C., 1711
Kilpatrick, Franklin P., 2797
502 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Kimmel, Lewis H., 2703
A Kind of Magic, 474
Kindergartens, 2297
Kindilien, Carlin T., 1258
Kinetoscope, 2195
King, Clarence, about, 1303, 1810
King, George S., 2137
about, 2137
King, Gilbert W., 2938,
King, Homer W., 1320
King, Martin Luther, 1945, 1950
King, Philip B., 1359
King Coffin, 350
King Philip's War (1675-76), 1402
Kingsley, J. Donald, 2802
Kingsley, Sidney, 1130
Kirk, Clara M., 302—3
ed., 51, 297
Kirk, Rudolf, ed., 51, 297
Kirk, Samuel A., 2324
Kirker, Harold, 1731
Kirker, James, 1731
Kirkland, Caroline Matilda Stansbury,
133-34
Kirkland, Edward C., 2653, 2718
Kirkwood, Mossie M. W., 2387
Kirschten, Ernest, 1792
Kirwan, Albert D., 1504
Kissinger, Henry A., 1643
Klah, Hasteen, about, 1381
Klapper, Joseph T., 2083
Klarman, Herbert E., 2151
Klein, Marcus, 1209
Klein, Martin, 1420
Klein, Philip S., 1505
Klein, Raymond L., 2300
Kline, George L., ed., 2401
Klose, Nelson, 1429
Knaplund, Paul, 1966
about, 1966
Knapp, Joseph G., 2621
Kneller, George F., 2287
Knight, Arthur, 2196
Knight, Oliver, 1314
Knight of the White Eagle, 2110
Knipe, James L., 2707
Knollenberg, Bernhard, 1475-76
Knopf, Alfred A., 2929
Knowledge, theory of, 441
Knowledge and Experience in the Phi-
losophy of F. H. Bradley, 441
Knowledge of the Evening, 942
Knowles, Horace, ed., 1149
Knowles, Katharine, illus., 1732
Knowles, Malcolm S., 2326
ed., 2326
Knox, Henry, about, 1668
Knutson, Andie L., 2158
Koch, Donald A., ed., 62
Koch, Robert, 2600
Koch, William E., ed., 2484
Koenig, Louis W., 2774, 2785—86
Koerner, James D., 2343
ed., 2343
Kofmehl, Kenneth T., 2796
Kogan, Herman, 2666, 2928
Kohlbrenner, Bernard J., 2278
Koller, Lawrence R., 2273
Konvitz, Milton R., ed., 2358, 2765
Korea, fiction, 377
Korean War, 1695-97
aerial operations, 1695
naval operations, 1695
Kornbluh, Joyce L., ed., 2044
Korson, George G., 2483
Kostelanetz, Richard, ed., 1211
Koury, Phil A., 2204
Kovel, Ralph M., 2569
Kovel, Terry H., 2569
Kozelka, Paul, ed., 1134
Kraft, Stephen, illus., 2030
Kraines, Oscar, 2800
Kramer, Judith R., 1957
Kraus, Sidney, ed., 2921
Krich, Aron M., ed., 2012
Krieger, Leonard, 1422
Krieghbaum, Hillier, 1338
Kroeber, Theodora, 1398, 1408
Kroeger, Karl, 2511
Krook, Dorothea, 317
Krooss, Herman E., 2698
Krout, John A., 1419
Krueger, Myron E., 2606
Krug, Edward A., 2301
Krutch, Joseph Wood, 2175
about, 1 1 86
Ku Klux Klan, 2879
Kiichler, August W., 1371
Kuhn, James W., 2735
Kull, Irving S., 1436
Kull, Nell M., 1436
Kung, Shien-woo, 1962
Kunitz, Stanley J., about, 1203, 1228
Kunzog, John C., 2211
Kurath, Hans, 1123—24
Kurland, Philip B., 2430
Kursh, Harry, 2279
Kuykendall, Ralph S., 1871
Kuznets, Simon S., 1918, 2654, 2696
ed., 1918
Labaree, Benjamin W., 1460
Labaree, Leonard W., ed., 41, 1456
Labor and laboring classes, 2724—38
hist., 2726
Labor economics, 2730
Labor relations. See Industrial relations
Labor supply, 1918
Laboratories, directory, 2088
Lader, Lawrence, 1517
The Lady, 629
The Lady of the Lake, 892
Laemmar, Jack W., 2073
La Farge, Oliver, 554—56, 1384
LaFave, Wayne R., 2854
Lafayette, Marquis de, about, 1668
Lafayette Escadrille, about, 1686
LaFeber, Walter, 1595
La Follette, Robert M., about, 1553
Lagai, Rudolph L., ed., 2664
La Gorce, John O., ed., 1366
La Guardia, Fiorello H., about, 2901
Lahue, Kalton C., 2197
LakofT, Sanford A., 2114
Lamar, Howard Roberts, 1830
Lamers, William M., 1680, 1990
Lampard, Eric E., 2636
Lampman, Robert J., ed., 2045
Land, 2603—9
hist., 2608
law. See Land tenure
reclamation, 2644
taxation, 2603
Calif., 2606
111., 2610
Minn., 2606
N.C., 2606
Land-grant colleges, 2308
Land of Giants, 1864
Land of the Long Horizons, 1798
Land tenure, 2603
Indian, 1382
law, 2816
Calif., 2606
111. 2610
Minn., 2606
N.C., 2606
Landsberg, Hans H., 2640
The Landscape and the Looking Glass,
392
The Landscape of Nightmare, 1210
Lane, Charles, 188
Lane, Robert E., 2876
Lane, Wheaton J., ed., 1742
Laney, Al, 2258
Lang, Paul H., ed., 2512
Lange, Charles H., 1409
Langford, Gerald, 337
Langland, Joseph, ed., 1137
Langner, Lawrence, about, 2192
Langsdorf, Edgar, 1833
Language, 1 1 1 1—26, 2400
atlases & maps, 1115
dialects & regionalisms, nu, 1115,
1117, 1120—24
dictionaries, 1111—14, "26
essays & studies, 1117
grammars, 1115, 1118—19
slang, 1117, 1119, 1126
Lanier, Sidney, about, 1212
Lankford, John E., 2035
Lanterns & Lances, 680
Lantz, Herman R., 2019
Lardner, Ring, 557
about, 558
Lare, James, ed., 2741
Larkin, Oliver W., 2549
Larrabee, Eric, ed., 1702, 2217
Larson, Henrietta M., 2671
Larson, Orvin P., 2454
Larson, Taft A., 1842
Lasagna, Louis, 2127
Laser, Marvin, ed., 988
Lass, William E. 1827
The Last Alternatives, 674
The Last Analysis, 752
The Last Days of Lincoln, 684
The Last Gentleman, 742
The Last Hurrah, 2907
The Last Mohican, 892
The Last of the Yemassees, 173
The Last Tycoon, 492
Latimer, John F., 2343
Latin America, relations with, 1613
Laurenti, Luigi, 2034
Lavender, David S., 1817—18, 1864,
2020
Laves, Walter H. C., 1641
INDEX / 503
Law, 2813—70
colonial period, 2813—14, 2816
digests, 2842
hist., 2813, 2816, 2840
Mass., 2814
Wis., 2815
philosophy, 2838, 2840
Law, administrative, 2860—62
Law, constitutional. See Constitutional
law
Law, criminal. See Criminal law
Law, international. See International
law
Law, land. See Land tenure
Law, municipal. See Municipal law
Law and politics, 2853
Law enforcement, 2053
Lawd Today, 1 1 1 o
Lawrence, David L., 1753
Lawrence, Jerome, 1130
Lawrence, Nathaniel M., 2373, 2400—1
Lawrence, Mass., foreign population,
2022
Laws, George Malcolm, 2493
Lawson, Ernest, about, 2587
Lawson, John Howard, about, 1170
Lawton, Sherman P., 2067
Lawyers, 2836, 2853, 2863—70
See also Judges
Lea, Zilla R., ed., 2571
Leach, Douglas E., 1402
Leach, MacEdward, 2467
Leach, Richard H., 2743, 2810
Leadership, 1979
Learned institutions and societies, 1711
Leary, Lewis G., 219, 1253
ed., 37, 262, 468, 1128, 1248
Leatham, Barclay, 2193
Leaves of Grass, 205—7, 209
about, 216
Leavitt, Jerome E., ed., 2297
Lebeaux, Charles N., 2043
Lebhar, Godfrey M., 2690
Lebowitz, Naomi, 318
Leckie, Robert, 1694, 1696
Leckie, William H., 1399
Leclerc, Ivor, 2398, 2400
ed., 2400
Lectures and lecturing, 93, 160, 208
Leder, Lawrence H., 1461
ed., 1459
Lee, Charles, General, about, 1668
Lee, Charles R., 2752
Lee, Enoch Lawrence, 1462
Lee, Everett S., 1918
Lee, Gordon C., 2280
ed., 2345
Lee, Gypsy Rose, 2210
about, 22 1 o
Lee, Robert, 2462
Lee, Robert E., 1681
about, 1 68 1
drama, 518
Lee, Robert Edwin, 1130
Lee, Rose Hum, 1962
Lee, William Storrs, 2020
Leech, Margaret, 1543
Leeston, Alfred M., 2667
Leffler, George L., 2704
Lefler, Hugh T., 1452, 1777
ed., 1777
Legal aid, 2852
Legal profession, 1518, 2836, 2863—70
Legends and tales, 2467—87
See also Folk heroes; and under re-
gions, ethnic groups, etc., e.g., In-
dians, American — legends & tales
Legislation, 2792
Legislative branch, 2788, 2795, 2798
Legislative power, 2785, 2830
Legislative Reorganization Act (1946),
2796
Legislatures, 2806
Lehman, Milton, 2093
Leibniz, Gottfried Wilhelm, Freiherr
von, about, 441
Leiby, Adrian C., 1747
Leighton, Alexander H., about, 1393
Leighton, Clare, illus., 2479, 2481
Leighton, Dorothea C., about, 1393
Leisure. See Recreation
Leiserson, William M., 2728
The Lengthening Shadow, 2665
Lenhart, Charmenz S., 1212
Lenski, Gerhard E., 2463
Leonard, George, 2254
Leonard, Michael, illus., 2494
Leonard, Neil, 2533
Leopold, Nathan F., 2865
about, 2865
Leopold, Richard W., 1588
Lerner, Max, 1700
Lerner, Monroe, 2159
Lerski, Jerzy Jan, 1974
Lessing, Lawrence P., 2069
Let the Crabgrass Grow, 1023
Letter From Peking, 373
Letters
(1820—70), 80, 92, 95, 102, 150, 163,
*73> i9°> 208, 210
(1871-1914), 257, 269, 274, 323,
327. 332, 339
(I9I5-39), 366, 380, 427, 493,
502-3, 575, 582, 623, 635, 649,
670, 720
(1940-65), 427, 575, 582, 649, 704,
711,720,770, 905
Letters From the Earth, 260
Letting Go, 978
Leuchtenburg, William E., 1562-63
Levant, in literature, 256
Levenson, Jacob C., 227
Levenson, Samuel, about, 2205
Leventman, Seymour, 1957
Levin, A. Leo, 2849
Levin, David, 1425
Levin, Harry, 1213
Levin, Harvey J., 2080
Levin, Ira, 1130
Levine, Lawrence W., 1548
ed., 1565
Levinger, Lee J., 1955
Levinson, Daniel J., ed., 2141
Levinson, Leonard L., 2704
Levy, Leonard W., 2771—72
Lewis, Allan, 1260
Lewis, Anthony, 1945, 2821
Lewis, Clarence Irving, 2357
Lewis, Gordon K., 1 874
Lewis, Howard R., 2160
Lewis, Jerry, about, 2205
Lewis, Meriwether, about, 1490
Lewis Oscar, 1820, 2020
ed., 1859
Lewis, Richard B., 2333
Lewis, Sinclair, 327, 559
about, 560—61
Lewis, Walker, 2822
Lewis and Clark Expedition, 1490
fiction, 483
Lewisohn, Ludwig, about, 1 1 86
Lewison, Alice, about, 2182
Lewison, Irene, about 2182
Leyburn, James G., 1970
Leyda, Jay, 278
Liberal education, 2316
Liberalism, 1716
Liberalism (religion), 2433
Liberia in literature, 1044
Liberman, Alexander, 2595
Liberty, 2000, 2763
See also Democracy; Politics
The Liberty Line, 1520
Liberty of the press. See Freedom of
the press
Libraries, 2936—39, 2941—43
and community, 2939
automation, 2938
hist., 2936
reference dept., 2943
Detroit, 2937
Library of Congress, automation, 2938
Library of Congress. Legislative Ref-
erence Service, 2116, 2346, 2761
Library science, 2939, 2942—43
Libretto for the Republic of Liberia,
1044
Lie Down in Darkness, about, 1210
Lieb, Frederick G., 2229
Lieber, Francis, about, 2365
Lieberman, Myron, 2332
Liebling, Abbott J., 2246
The Life and Times of the Late Demon
Rum, 1993
Life as 1 Find It, 259
Life insurance, 2706
Life Is Better Than Death, 894
Life Plus 99 Years, 2865
Life Studies, 872
Lifson, David S., 2184
Lifton, Robert J., ed., 2011
Light, James F., 90, 695
Light in August, about, 1165
Lighting, colonial, 2599
Lilienthal, David E., 1564
Lincoln, Abraham, 135
about, 136, 208, 1513, 1518, 1536,
1684, 2832
relations with Negroes, 1527
Lincoln, Benjamin, about, 1668
Lincoln, Charles Eric, 1942
Lind, Use D., ed., 310
Lindsay, Nicholas Vachel, 562
about, 563
Lindstrom, Carl E., 1305
Linduska, Joseph P., ed., 2646
The Lines Are Drawn, 1313
Link, Arthur S., 1551, 1565, 1596
The Lion's Share, 2200
Lippincott, Bertram, 1734
Lippmann, Walter, 2741
about, 1326
504 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Lipset, Seymour M., 2003
ed., 1997
Lipsyte, Robert, 1292
Lipton, Lawrence, 1712
Lisca, Peter, 660
Liska, George, 1646
Literary form, 1128
Literary History of the United States,
1214
Literature, i-mo
and art, HI, 302
and Communism, 1157, 1235
and morals, 1189, 1252
anthologies, collections & series,
1127—56, 1199, 1700
bibl., 1127, 1162, 1164, 1206, 1214,
1237, 1253
bio-bibl., 1174, 1237
comparative
British, 1159, 1176
German, 1232
Japanese, 1223
dictionaries, handbooks, etc., 1174,
1206, 1237
experimental writing
drama, 818—19
poetry, 814, 823
hist. & crit., 152, 175, 940, 974—75,
1008, 1157—1264
bibl., 1192
foreign, 1171, 1232
periodicals, 1229, 1265—70, 1348
psychology, 1198
theory, 1206
See also Folklore; Legends and tales;
also forms of literature, e.g., Fic-
tion; and names of individual
authors
Litt, Edgar, 2902
Littell, Franklin H., 2407
Little, Malcolm, 1937
The Little Clay Cart, about, 2182
Little Ham, 544
Little magazines, 1344. See also Criti-
cism, literary — periodicals; Litera-
ture— periodicals
Little Miami Valley, hist., 1803
Little theaters. See Theater — little the-
ater movement
Littlefield, Arthur W., 1 426
Litton, Gaston L., 1834
Litwack, Leon F., 1946
Litz, A. Walton, ed., 1215
Lively, Robert A., 1179, 1670
The Lively Experiment, 2414
Livermore, Shaw, 2887
Livernash, Edward Robert, 2735
The Living Reed, 377
Livingood, James W., 1683, 1789
Livingston, Robert, about, 1461
Livingston, Robert R., about, 1487
Llewellyn, Karl N., 2845
The Loan, 892
Lobbying, 2689, 2872, 2911
Local church councils, 2419
Local finance, 2705
Local government, 1915, 2021, 2774—
75. 2777» 2804-5, 2808—12, 2904
case studies, 2804, 2807
functions, 2021
officials 8c employees, 281 1
Local government — Continued
reform, 2904
See also subdivisions Politics and gov-
ernment and History under names
of places and regions, e.g., Chi-
cago— pol. & govt.
Local history, 1375, 1723—1874
See also History under names of
places and regions, e.g., California
— hist.
Lockard, Duane, 2903—4
Locke, David Ross (Petroleum V.
Nasby), 137-38
about, 139
Lof, George O. G., 2121
Loetscher, Lefferts A., 2415
Loew's Incorporated, about, 2200
Logan, Rayford W., 1947
Lolita, 925, 927
Lomax, Alan, ed., 2494
Lomax, Louis E., 1936
Lombardi, Vince, 2249
London, Jack, 325—27
about, 328
Loneliness in literature, 1 1 8 1
The Lonely Crowd, about, 1997
Long, Esmond R., 2144
Long, Eugene Hudson, 263
ed., 107, 249, 267, 1132
Long, Everette B., 1675
Long, Huey, about, 1786, 2905
Long Day's Journey Into Night, 598
The Long Death, 1399
The Long Dream, 1 108
The Long Encounter, 1 54
The Long Stay Cut Short, 1091
The Long White Line, 2666
Longaker, Richard P., 2765
The Longest Day, 1691
Longfellow, Henry Wadsworth, 140—41
about, 142, 1225
Longley, John L., ed., 1080
Look Homeward, Angel, about, 1165
Loomis, Charles P., 1998
Loomis, Zona K., 1998
Lorant, Stefan, 1552, 1753
ed., 1753
Lord, Clifford L., cd., 1423
Lord, Walter, 1984
Lord Pen go, 361
Loria, Achille, about, 1413
A Loss of Roses, 849
Lost Tribes & Sunken Continents, 1390
The Lost World, 857
Loth, David G., 2668
Lottich, Kenneth V., 1802, 2278
Louis, Joe, about, 2243
Louisiana
elections, 2905
folklore, 2471
hist., 1786, 1847
pol. & govt., 2905
Louisiana Story (motion picture),
about, 2546
Love Among the Cannibals, 920
Love and Death, 484
Love & Li^e, 83 1
Love in literature, 1184
Lovejoy, Arthur O., 2376—79
about, 2362
Lovejoy, Elijah P., about, 1529
The Lovely Ambition, 395
Low Bridge! 2487
Lowe, Victor, 2400—2401
Lowell, Amy, 564
about, 565, 1203, 1228
Lowell, Robert, 871-75
about, 876
Lowens, Irving, 2512
Lowenstein, Edith, ed., 1927
Lowenthal, Leo, ed., 1997
Lowry, Robert, 877—79
Loyalists. See Tories
Loyalty, 2005
Lubell, Samuel, 2877
Lubove, Roy, 2041
Lucy Crown, ion
Ludlum, David M., 1363
Ludwig, Jack B., 1153
Ludwig, Richard M., 1206, 1216
ed., 1216
Lueders, Edward G., 690
Luks, George, about, 2587
Lumber industry
law, Wis., 2815
W. Va., 1776
Lumsdaine, Arthur A., ed., 2333
Lunar probes, 2101
Lunny, Robert M., 1372
Lunt, Alfred, about, 2189, 2192
Lurie, Edward, 2106
Lutherans, 2446
Lyceums, 1163
Lyde, Marilyn J., 700
Lyle, Jack, 2078
Lynen, John F., 506
Lynes, Russell, 1992
Lynn, Kenneth S., ed., 181
Lyon, Peter, 1346
Lyons, John O., 1217
Lyons, Louis M., ed., 1340
M
Maass, John, 2564
MacArthur, Douglas, about, 1697
Macartney, Clarence E. N., 1679
McAvoy, Thomas T., 2438
ed., 1800
McCague, James, 2679
McCallum, Ian R. M., 2558
McCandlish, George, 1147
McCann, William, ed., 240
McCart, Samuel W., 2855
McCarthy, Eugene J., 2873
McCarthy, Mary, 880-83
McClellan, George B., about, 1682
McCloskey, Robert G., 2827
McCluggage, Robert W., 2145
McClure, Samuel S., 1346
about, 1346
McClure' s Magazine, about, 1346
McCluskey, Neil G., 2284
McConnell, Frederic, 2193
McCord, William M., 1945
McCormick, Richard P., 1743
McCoy, Esther, 2560, 2565
McCoy, Whitley P., 2732
McCracken, Glenn, 2347
McCracken, Harold, 2585
INDEX / 505
McCuIlagh, Joseph B., about, 1317
McCullers, Carson, 725, 884-86
about, 887, 1195, 1218
McCunc, Wesley, 2626
McCutcheon, John T., illus., 231
McDavid, Raven I., 1115, 1123
ed., 1117
McDermott, John F., 2584—85
ed., 123
McDonald, Forrest, 2668, 2749
MacDonald, Margaret, 2360
McDonnell, Thomas P., ed., 903
Macdougall, Allan R., 2208
MacDougall, Curtis D., 1339
McDowell, Frederick P. W., 513, 632,
1216
McElderry, Bruce R., ed., 1183
McEntire, Davis, 2033
M'Fingal, 53
McGeary, Martin Nelson, 2630
McGee, Recce J., 2328
Macgowan, Kenneth, 2196
McGrath, Earl J., 2311
McGuire, Joseph W., 2714
McHale, John, 2559
The Machine in the Garden, 1219
Machine politics, 2877, 2901, 2907-9
McHugh, Robert, ed., 574
McKay, Robert B., 2776
McKean, Keith F., 1252
McKeithan, Daniel M., ed., 256
McKelvey, Blake, 1741, 2026
McKenna, Rosalie T., illus., 1136
McKeown, William T., ed., 2238
Mackesy, Piers, 1669
McKinley, William, about, 1539, 1543,
2894
McKinney, Francis F., 1680
McKitrick, Eric L., 1522
McKnight, Tom L., 1357
McKown, Robin, 2140
Maclachlan, John M., 1919
McLean, Alan A., 2146
McLean, Albert F., 68, 2209
MacLean, Janet R., 2222
MacLeish, Andrew, ed., 1472
MacLeish, Archibald, 566-68
about, 1170
McLoughlin, William G., 2409, 2453
MacMahan, Harry W., 2075
McMillen, Wheeler, ed., 2614
McNamara, Robert S., about, 1651
McNeil, Donald R., ed., 1417
MacNeil, Neil, 2788
McNickle, D'Arcy, 1407
McNitt, Frank, 1406
McPherson, Gene, 2075
McPherson, James M., 1 523
McPherson, Robert G., ed., 1466
Macready, William C., about, 2186
McReynolds, Edwin C., 1793, 1835
McWhiney, Grady, 1768
Macy (Rowland H.) and Company,
about, 2690
Madame Bovary (motion picture),
about, 2199
Madden, David, 924
Madden, Donald, illus., 1023
Madden, Edward H., 2403
ed., 2403
Madison, James, 1485, 2750
The Madness of Art, 321
Magazines, 1343—48
business, 1311
foreign-language, 1331—32
hist., 1343, 1345
Southern States, 1347
See also Criticism, literary — periodi-
cals; Literature — periodicals
The Magic Barrel, 890, 892
The Magician of Lublin, 1017
The Magnificent Ambersons (motion
picture), about, 2203
Magnuson, Paul B., 2134
about, 2134
Magrath, C. Peter, 2823
Mahood, Ruth I., ed., 1825
The Maid's Shoes, 894
Mailer, Norman, 888-89
about, 889, 1195
Main, Jackson Turner, 1477, 2753
Maine
descr. & trav., 1736
folklore, 2471, 2474
hist., 1736—37
soc. life & cust., 1737
Makris, John N., 2058
Malamud, Bernard, 890—94
about, 1195, 1209
Malcolm X. See Little, Malcolm
Male, Roy R., 114
The Male Animal, about, 2185
The Malefactors, 515
Malin, Irving, 1144, 1218
ed., 1144, 1218
The Mallot Diaries, 596
Malmstrom, Jean, 1123
Malone, Dumas, 1437, 1492
Malta Conference, 1592—93
Mama, I Love You, 991
Man, 1714
The Man Child, 739
The Man in the Mirror, 1343
Man of Reason, 1274
The Man Who Was Not With It, 829
Management, 2096
Manchild in the Promised Land, 1937
Mandate for Change, 1 560
Mangone, Gerard J., 1709
Manhattan Project, 2104
Manierre, William R., 16
Manifest Destiny, 1506, 1516
Mann, Dean E., 2803
Mann, Floyd C., 2149
Mann, Horace, about, 2284
Manpower. See Labor supply
Manross, William W., 2442
Mansfield, Harvey C., 1653
Manship, Paul, about, 2573
The Mansion, 459
Manson, Grant C., 2568
Manufactures, hist., 2664
Maps. See Atlases and maps
Marble, Dan, about, 2183
The Marble Faun (Faulkner), 463
Marble Palace, 2818
Marckwardt, Albert H., 1116
Marcy, William L., about, 1510
Marden, Charles F., 1933
Marginal Manners, 1199
Margolis, Joseph Z., ed., 2360
Margon, Lester, 2569
Marine Corps, 1694—95
hist., 1662
Korean War, 1 695
World War II, 1694
Marine on St. Croix, Minn., 2020
Mar\ Twain's America, about, 262
Marketing, 2684—85
See also Retail trade
Marketing research, 2687
Markuson, Barbara E., ed., 2938
Maroon, Fred J., illus., 1759
Marquand, John Phillips, 569-71
about, 572
Marriage counseling, 2012-13
Marriage Lines, 594
Marsh, Irving T., ed., 2218
Marsh, James R., 2599
Marshall, F. Ray, 1951
Marshall, George C., about, 1657
Marshall, John D., comp., 2936, 2943
Marshall, Max L., ed., 1658
Marshall, Samuel L. A., 1691, 1696
Marson, Philip, 2343
Marti Ibanez, Fe"lix, ed., 2129, 2157
Martin, Barry, illus., 1033
Martin, Gottfried, 2400
Martin, Harold H., 1657
Martin, Jay, 352
Martin, Michael R., 1426
Martin, Ralph G., 2908
Martin, Ronald E., 534
Martin, Roscoe C., 2775
ed., 2662
Martin, Terence, 115
Marty, Martin E., 2414, 2454
Marvick, Dwaine, 2920
Marvick, Elizabeth W., ed., 2017
Marx, Groucho, about, 2205
Marx, Leo, 1219
Marxist interpretation of literature, 1249
Maryland
hist., 1459
literature, 131, 744
pictorial works, 1773
Mason, Alpheus T., 2742—43, 2753,
2824-25
Mason, Edward S., 1646
Mason, Herbert M., 1686
Mason, Lowell B., 2862
Mass communications, 2082—86
directories, etc., 2082
research, 2083
social aspects, 2083
societies, etc., 2082
stat., 2084
Set also Communications
Mass culture. See Popular culture
Mass media, 2082—83, 2086
Massachusetts
hist., 1730
colonial period, 2814
sources, 16
in literature, 8 1 1
legal hist., 2814
pol. & govt., 2902. 2907
Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston,
about, 2148
Masters Golf Tournament, 2257
Matas, Rudolph, about, 2134
The Matchmaker, 1130
Mates, Julian, 2529
506
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Mathematics, 2400
-Mather, Cotton, 15—16
about, 17
Matson, Floyd W., 2042
Mattfeld, Julius, 2513
Matthews, Donald R., 2790
Matthiessen, Peter, 1354^2646
Matza, David, 2052
Maule, Hamilton (Tex), 2250
Maury, Matthew Fontaine, about, 2109
Maxwell, Allen, ed., 2476
Maxwell, Desmond E. S., 1220
Maxwell, James A., 2705
Maxwell, Robert S., 1553
Maxwell, William, 895—96
May, Edgar, 2043
May, Ernest R., 1597—98
ed., 2782
May, Henry F., 1704
Maybeck, Bernard R., about, 2565
Mayer, Arthur, 2194
Mayer, Edwin J., 1130
Mayer, Frederick E., 2410
Mayer, George H., 2895
Mayer, Louis B., about, 2200
Mayer, Martin, 2348
Mayer, Milton S., 2345
Mayers, Lewis, 2846
The Mayfield Deer, 688
Mayhew, Jonathan, about, 1451
Maynard, Olga, 2206
Mays, Wolfe, 2400
Mazzaro, Jerome, 876
Mead, Frank S., 2411
Mead, George H., about, 2362
Mead, Margaret, ed., 1385
Mead, Sidney E., 2414
Meade, George G., about, 1684
Means, Richard K., 2161
Meany, Thomas, 2231, 2233
Medicine, 2125—68
care & treatment, 2166—67
case studies, 2128
charities, 2130
cost, 2125, 2165—68
education, 2152—54, 2330
foreign influence, 2153
hist., 2129, 2136
colonial period, 2129, 2153
1 8th- 1 gth cent, 2129
practice, 2125
schools, 2152—53
See also Industrial medicine; Quacks
and quackery
Medicine, veterinary. See Veterinary
medicine
Medsker, Leland L., 2305
Meeker, Richard K., ed., 512
Mehling, Harold, 2070
Meier, August, 1948
Meigs, Cornelia L., 2321
Meigs, Montgomery C., about, 1682
Meiners, R. K., 674
Mellers, Wilfrid H., 2515
The Melodramatists , 934
Meltzer, Milton, 74, 264, 1943
ed., 195
Melville, Herman, 144—51, 875
about, 152—61, 1173, 1207, 1213,
1226, 1253
Memphis, Tenn., pol. & govt., 2908
Men and Women, 384
Men in White, 1130
Mencken, Henry L., 573—76, 1117
Mendelowitz, Daniel M., 2550
Mendelsohn, Erich, about, 2560
Mendelson, Wallace, 1934, 2839
ed., 2834
Menninger, Charles Frederick, about,
2143
Menninger, Karl A., 2143
about, 2143
Menninger, William, about, 2143
Menninger Clinic, Topeka, Kan., about,
2143
Menninger Foundation, Topeka, Kan.,
about, 2143
Menominee Indians, 1388
Mental hygiene, 2140, 2142
Mentally handicapped children, educa-
tion, 2324
Mentally ill
care & treatment, 2141
hist., 2140
Merchant marine, hist., 1690, 2676
Meriam survey (1928), 1407
Meriwether, Robert L., ed., 1498
Merk, Frederick, 1506
Merkling, Frank, 2539
Mermin, Samuel, 2815
Merola, Gaetano, about. 2536
Merrens, Harry R., 1462
Merriam, Charles E., about, 2800
Merrill, Horace S., 1 542
Merrill, James M., ed., 1655
Merrill, Walter M., 1524
Merrimac River, 1726
descr. & trav., 186
Merrimac Valley, hist., 1726
Merlins, Marshall Louis, 507
Merton, Robert K., ed., 2152
about, 1998
Merton, Thomas, 897—906
Merwin, William S., about, 1203
Meserve, Walter J., ed., 296
Messersmith, James C., 1927
Messiah, 1063
Metaphysics, 2397—98, 2400
Methodists
hist., 2447-48
Southern States, 2418
Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer, about, 2200
Metropolitan areas, 2810—11
Metropolitan government. See Local
government
Metzger, Walter P., 1420
Mexicans in literature, 1238
Mexico
descr. & trav., 1022
hist., 1847
relations with, 1238, 1573, 1615
Mexico City Blues, 865
Meyer, Adolph E., 2277
Meyer, Arthur B., ed., 2628
Meyer, Donald B., 2432
Meyer, Duane G., 1794
Meyer, Frank S., 2893
Meyer, Gladys E., 1933
Meyer, Richard, 2917
Meyer, Roy W., 1221
Meyer, Warren G., 2686
Meyersohn, Rolf, ed., 2217
Meyerson, Martin, 2034
Miami Indians, 1388
Miami Valley, Ohio, hist., 1803
Michael, Paul, comp., 2194
Michener, James A., 907—10
Michigan, hist., 1806—7
Michigan. Supreme Court, 2848
Michigan. University, about, 2322
Michigan., University. Survey Research
Center, 2917
Microbiology, 2102
Micronesia, 1872
Mid-American Chants, about, 1216
Midcentury, 422
Middagh, John, 1318
Middle Atlantic States, 1738-59
Middle classes, 1943, 2877
Middle East, relations with, 1620-21,
1623
Middle West
culture, 1799—1800, 2354
descr. & trav., 1798
bibl., 1877
hist., 1798
literature, 1221
pol. & govt., 1518, 1544
religion, 2463
Middlebury, Vt., 2020
Middlekauff, Robert, 1452, 2302
Middleton, William D., 2678
Midland, 1137
Miers, Earl Schenck, 1525
ed., 1744
Mies van der Rohe, Ludwig, about, 2560
Migdalski, Edward C., 2269
Migrant labor, 2619
Migration, internal, 1918, 1922, 2617
Milbrath, Lester W., 2911
Miles, Charles, 1397
Miles, Edwin A., 1497
Miles, Matthew B., ed., 2337
Militarism, 1649
Military Academy, West Point. Dept.
of Military Art and Engineering,
1654
Military assistance to foreign nations,
1646
Military history, 1652, 1655, 1658, 2782
American Revolution, 1670
French and Indian War (1755-63),
1464
War of 1812, 1485, 1672
maps, 1654
sources, 1655
See also specific branches of the
Armed Forces, e.g., Army — hist.
Military life, 1650, 1655
in literature, 76
Military policy, 1441, 1633, 1643—44,
1648, 1651—53, 1659
Military posts, 1655
Northwestern States, 1813
Southwest, 1814
The West, 1815
Military psychiatry. See Psychiatry —
military
Military research, congresses, 2096
Military service as a profession, 1650
Militia, 1652
The Milk Train Doesn't Stop Here
Anymore, 1099
Millay, Edna St. Vincent, about, 1188
Miller, Ann R., 1918
Miller, Arthur, 911—15, 1130
about, 916—17, 1170, 1260
Miller, Banner I., 1363
Miller, Clem, 2793
Miller, Delbert C., 2003
Miller, Dorothy C., ed., 2551
Miller, Edwin H., ed., 210
Miller, Helen A., 2346
Miller, Helen D. H., 2772
Miller, Henry, 577—78
about, 578
Miller, James E., 216-17, 494
ed., 209
Miller, John C., 1493—94
Miller, Joseph, ed., 1725
Miller, Joseph Hillis, ed., 665
Miller, Nyle H., 1828, 1833
Miller, Perry, 30, 1705
ed., 10, 102, 189, 1146—7
Miller, William, 1438
ed., 2720
Miller, William D., 2908
Millett, Fred B., 2328
Millett, John D., 2798
Millgate, Michael, 1222
Millis, Walter, 1652-53
Mills, Charles Wright, 1999—2000
Mills, Ralph J., ed., 974
Milton, John, influence, 1244
The Milwaukee Journal, about, 1316
The Mind, 9
Miner, Earl R., 1223
Mines and mineral resources, 2689
folklore, 2483
Minnesota, hist., 1808—9
Minnesota History, 1809
Minnesota River and valley, 1726
Minorities, 1929—34
A Minority of Scoundrels, 2692
Minority Report, 626
Minot, George R., about, 2138
Minow, Newton N., 2071
Mintz, Morton, 2157
Miranda, Francisco de, 1884—85
The Mirror, St. Louis, about, 1343
Mirrows & Windows, 936
The Misfits, 913
Miss Leonora When Last Seen, 1043
Missions, Spanish. See Indians, Ameri-
can— missions
Mississippi
civil rights, 1945
Indians, 1382
pol. & govt., 1795
hist., 1497
race question, 1795
Mississippi River, navigation, 1785
Missouri, hist., 1793—94
Missouri Compromise, 1501
Missouri River and valley, 2644
hist., 1827, 1836, 2644
Mr. Arcularis, 345
Mr. Dooley on Ivrything and Ivrybody,
280
Mrs. Stevens Hears the Mermaids Sing-
ing, 1003
Mitchell, Broadus, 1494
Mitchell, Enoch L., 1788
Mitchell, Howard E., 2013
Mitchell, Jack, 2207
Mitchell, Joseph, 1410
Mitchell, Margaret, 583
about, 584
Mitchell, Robert V., 2684
Mitchell, William, General, 1686
Mitchell, William C., 2878
Mitford, Hon. Jessica, 1990
Mitre and Sceptre, 2443
Mitterling, Philip I., 1377
Miyakawa, Tetsuo Scott, 2421
Mizener, Arthur, 489, 495, 1224
ed., 492
Moberg, David O., 2464
Moby Dick., 145
about, 155, 1165
Modern Chivalry, 37
Modoc Indians, 1399
Moehlman, Arthur H., 2278
Moguls and Iron Men, 2679
Mohawk Indians, 1410
Monaghan, James (Jay), ed., 1820
Monetary policy. See Finance — public
Money, 2694, 2698
Monroe, James, 1495
about, 1495
Monroe, Margaret E., 2939
Monroe Doctrine, 1501
Monsen, R. Joseph, 2912
Montana, hist., 1839—41
Montessori method of education, 2297
Monuments, public, preservation, 1423,
2601
Moody, Dwight L., about, 2409
Moody, Ralph, 1821
Moody, Richard, 2186
A Moon for the Misbegotten, 1130
Moore, Arthur K., 1791
Moore, Chauncey O., comp., 2504
Moore, David G., 2716
Moore, Edward C., ed., 2381
Moore, Ethel, comp., 2504
Moore, Harry T., 1713
ed., 1 21 1
Moore, John R., ed., 1241
Moore, Marianne, 585—86
about, 587
Moore, Merrill, 588—90
Moore, Rayburn S., 341
Moore, Truman E., 2619
Moorings Old and New, 1966
Moos, Malcolm C., 2896
Moral philosophy. See Ethics
Morals, 2000
Moranian, Thomas, ed., 2714
Mordell, Albert, 288
comp., 1536
ed., 119, 309
More, Paul E., 1225
Morgan, Dale L., 1373, 1820
ed., 1822—23
Morgan, Daniel, about, 1668
Morgan, Edmund S., 33, 2330, 2436
Morgan, Frederick, ed., 1 1 49
Morgan, George T., 2630
Morgan, Howard Wayne, 1543, 1595
ed., 1537
Morgan, John, about, 2136
Morgan, Robert J., 2639
Morgenthau, Hans J., 1645
Morgenthau, Henry, about, 1559
INDEX / 507
Morison, Elting E., 1566
ed., 1980
Morison, Samuel Eliot, 1437—38, 1478,
1690, 17363
ed. & tr., 1447
Morley, Blaine, 2917
Morley, Charles, ed. & tr., 1913
Mormon Trail, 1845
Mormons and Mormonism, 2449
econ. life, 2650
folksongs & ballads, 2502
hist., 1845
sources, 2449
Morning and Noon, 1 272
The Morning Song of Lord Zero, 349
Morning's at Seven, 1130
Morocco, relations with, 1 575
Morris, Everett B., 2237
Morris, John W., 1835
Morris, Richard B., 1599, 2816
ed., 1439, 1472
Morris, Van Cleve, 2285
Morris, Wright, 918—23, 1196, 1226
about, 924, 1209
Morrison, Joseph L., 1323
Morsberger, Robert E., 68 1
Morse, Dean, ed., 2091
Morse, Samuel French, ed., 662
Mort, Paul R., 2295
Mortal Summer, 688
Mortensen, Arlington Russell, ed., 2449
Morton, Richard L., 1463
Moses, Prince of Egypt, 809
Mosher, William E., 2802
Moss, Sidney P., 169
Motion pictures, 2172, 2194—2204
actors & actresses, 2171, 2195
censorship, 2202
criticism, 2198
hist., 2194—97
in education, 2075
pictorial works, 2194, 2197
plays, 813, 850, 1091, 2198
serials, 2197
theaters, 2201
Motion Picture Production Code, 2202
Motley, John L., about, 1425
Mott, Frank Luther, 1306
ed., 42
Mount, Charles M., 2592
Mount Desert Island, Me., 17363
Mountain Man, 486
The Mourners, 892
A Moveable Feast, 528
Movius, Geoffrey H., ed., 2224
Mowbray, Albert H., 2706
Mowry, George E., 1437, 1554, 1565
Moynihan, Daniel P., 1929
Much Ado About Me, 2209
Mudd, Emily H., 2013
ed., 2012
Muelder, Walter G., ed., 2361
Muessig, Ray H., 2278
Muhlenberg, Henry Melchior, about,
2446
Muir, John, 329
about, 330
Mulac, Margaret E., 2217
Mulatto, 544
Mulattoes, 1963
Mulder, William, ed., 2449
508 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Mulkcarn, Lois, comp., 1753
Mumford, Lewis, about, 1348
Municipal budgets, 2807
Municipal government. See Local gov-
ernment
Municipal law, 2847
Municipal Manpower Commission, 2811
Munro, Dana G., 1613
Munson, Thomas N., 2388
Munson-Williams-Proctor Institute, Uti-
ca, N.Y., 2547
Murder in the Cathedral, 439
Murphey, Murray G., 2382
Murphy, Paul L., ed., 2755
Murphy, Robert D., 1601
about, 1 60 1
Murphy, Walter F., 2830
ed., 2847
Murray, Iain H., 1 1
Murray, John C., 2423
Murray, John J., ed., 1799
Murray, Keith A., 1399
Murray, William G., 2618
Murtha, Edwin, 2573
Muse, Benjamin, 2340
Museums, 1423, 2601—2
Musial, Stanley F., 2230
about, 2230
Music, 2172, 2511—46
and poetry, 1212
bibl., 2513—14, 2516
criticism, 2546
discography, 2515, 2544
econ. aspects, 2525
education, 2542—43
hist., 2511—16, 2526—30
Baltimore, 2522
Boston, 2541
Minn., 1808
N.H., 2523
New York (City), 2519
See also Opera
Music festivals, 2520
Musical comedy, 2526, 2529
Musicians, 2496, 2530, 2544, 2546
biog. (collected), 2532
See also Composers
Musicology, 2542
Mutoscope, 2195
My Antonia, about, 1165
My Holy Satan, 482
My Kinsman, Major Molineux, 875
My Mother, My Father and Me, 840
My Wilderness: East to Katahdin, 1284
My Wilderness: The Pacific West, 1283
Myers, Louis M., 1118
Myers, Robert J., 2045
Myrdal, Gunnar, 1949, 2658
Myths. See Legends and tales
N
Nabokov, Dimitri, tr., 929
Nabokov, Vladimir V., 925—33
Nacogdoches, Tex., 2020
Nagel, Paul C., 2744
Naismith, James, about, 2266
The Nailed Lunch, 767-68
Na\ed Nude, 894
Names, geographical. See Place names
Nance, William L., 609
Nannes, Caspar H., 1235
Napoleon, Joseph Charles Paul Bona-
parte, Prince, about, 1909
Narcotics, 2048
The Narrative of Arthur Gordon Pym
of Nantuc^et, 1 65
Narrative poetry. See Poetry — narrative
Nasby, Petroleum V., pseud. See
Locke, David Ross
Nash, Ogden, 591-94
Nash, Roderick, 2308
Nashville, literature, 1251
Nast, Thomas, illus., 138
Natchez Trace, 1784
Nathan, Hans, 2530
Nathan, Martin, illus., 2262
Nathan, Robert Gruntal, 595-96
The Nation, about, 1348
National Advanced-Technology Man-
agement Conference, 2096
National Association for the Advance-
ment of Colored People, about,
1944, 2893
National Association of Educational
Broadcasters, 2074
National Association of Evangelicals,
about, 2434
National Association of Letter Carriers,
about, 2058
National Broadcasting Company, Inc.,
NBC News, 2916
National Bureau of Economic Research,
2651
National characteristics, 1128, 1184,
1188, 1201, 1246, 1431, 1700,
1702, 1717, 1719, 1761, 1768,
1774, 1791, 1977-78, 1980, 1983,
1988
National Civil Liberties Bureau, about,
2769
National Council of Teachers of English.
Committee on Literary Scholarship
and the Teaching of English, 1248
National Education Association, about,
2282
National Education Association. Com-
mittee of Ten on Secondary School
Studies, 2301
National Football League, about, 2250
National Geographic Society, Washing-
ton, D.C., 1366, 1370
Book Service, 1366—70, 2647
National Guard, about, 1652
National League of Professional Baseball
Clubs, about, 2229
National Park Service, 2645
National parks and reserves, 2629, 2645,
2647-48
National Recreation Congress, 2222
National Science Foundation, about,
2116
National Society for the Study of Ed-
ucation, 2325
National Trust for Historic Preserva-
tion in the United States, about,
2601
National Tuberculosis Association,
about, 2130
Nationalism, igth cent., 1501
Nationalism in literature, 98
hist., 1246
Nationality, 1925
See also Foreign population
Nativism, 1928
The Natural, 890
Natural Affection, 852
Natural history, 1283—84, 1354, 2113,
2646
Pacific Northwest, 1 283
See also Animals; Birds; Fishes;
Plants
Natural monuments, 1353, 2647
Natural Numbers, 970
Natural resources, 2089, 2098, 2640,
2649
See also Conservation of natural
resources
Naturalism in literature, 161
fiction, 1255, 1257
See also Realism in literature
Naturalization, 1927
Nature in literature, hist. & crit., 1190,
1219
Nature's Way, 1104
Navaho Indians, 1380
Naval History Division, 1664, 1670
Navy, 1660-65
hist., 1 66 1, 1663, 1665
chronology, 1665
Civil War, 1665, 1679
Korean War, 1695
sources, 1549, 1670
lists of vessels, 1664
Navy Dept., hist., 1660
Navy League of the United States,
about, 1663
Near East in literature, 156
Nebraska, folklore, 2484
The Necessary Earth, 1190
Negroes, 1527, 1768, 1929-30, 1932-
33. 1935-54, 2893
athletes, 2234, 2241, 2243
bibl., 1954
biog. (collected), 1935, 1950
businessmen, 1951
civil rights, 1932, 1936, 1938-39,
1942, 1944-47, J950, 2879, 2881
colonization, 1416
econ. condit., 1941
education, 2311, 2340
employment, 1951
folklore, 2478, 2480
hist., 1935, 1943, 1946—48
American Revolution, 1480
Civil War, 1523, 1676
pictorial works, 1943
sources, 1950
housing, 1953, 2034
intellectual life, 1948
moral & social condit., 1521, 1941,
1943, 1949, 2007
musicians, 2530
politics & suffrage, 2881, 2889
psychology, 1948—49
religion, 2466
songs, 2491, 2496, 2530
spirituals, 2498
Chapel Hill, N.C., 1945
Chicago, 1941, 1953
Mississippi, 1945
New Orleans, 2881
Northern States, 1946
INDEX / 509
Negroes — Continued
Southern States, 1768, 1933, 1940,
1944, 2889
See also Slavery
Negroes in literature, 1950
drama, 544, 738, 1134
editorials, essays, sketches, etc., 287,
802, 1145
fiction, 181—82, 736—37, 1108, 1 1 10,
1145
hist. & crit., 1158, 1164, 1195—96,
1209
poetry, 538, 542-43, 764-66, 1044-
45, "45
short stories, 540, 545, 739, 1109
Neider, Charles, ed., 250-54, 258-59
Neighborhood Playhouse, 2182
Neill, Thomas P., 2371
Neilson, Francis, about, 1348
Neilson, James W., 1545
Neilson, William A., about, 2321
Nelson, Aaron G., 2618
Nelson, Dalmas H., 2860
Nelson, William H., 1479
Nemerov, Howard, 934—40
about, 1203
Netschert, Bruce C., 2656
Nettels, Curtis P., 1452, 2653
Nettl, Bruno, 2495, 2501
Neugarten, Bernice L., 2287
Neumann, William L., 1622
Neustadt, Richard E., 2781
Neutra, Richard J., about, 2560
Neutrality, 1591
Nevada, hist., 1846
Nevins, Allan, 1525, 2628, 2680
about, 1419
Nevius, Blake, 292
New American Gothic, 1218
The New Creation as Metropolis, 2459
"New Criticism," 1249
New Deal, 1559, 1563, 1567, 2623, 2800
The New Empire, 1595
New England, 1727—37
biog. (collected), 1259
church architecture, 2561
church hist., 2420
descr. & trav., 1728
folklore, 2477
folksongs & ballads, 2501
historic houses, 2602
hist.
colonial period, 1403, 1455
sources, 1459
1 9th cent., 1517
hospitals, 2148
intellectual life, 1259, 2330
museums, 2602
pol. & govt., 2903
schools (i8th cent.), 2302
soc. life & cust., 2561
theology, 1259, 1451, 2436
New England in literature, 1185, 1225,
1259
diaries, journals, etc., 16, 94, 189
essays, 119
fiction, 107-10, 324, 774
poetry, 24—25
prose, 186-88
theology, 14, 30
The New England Psalm Singer, about,
2524
New England Saints, 1259
The New Equality, 1952
New Hampshire, hist., 1729
New Harmony, Ind., 2020
A New Home — Who'll Follow?, 134
New Jersey, 1891, 2675
hist., 1742—51
New Jersey. State Prison, Trenton,
2054
A New Life, 893
New Mexico, 1499
arts & crafts, 2508
commerce, 2688
econ. condit., 2688
guidebooks, 1725
hist., 1854, 2508
New Mexico. Work Projects Adminis-
tration. Writers' Program, 1725
New Netherland. See New York (Col-
ony)
New Orleans
hist., 1786
in literature, 458
soc. life & cust., 1786
The New Republic, about, 1326
New Seeds of Contemplation, 902
The New World, 1446-50
colonization, 1448
disc. 5c explor., 1446—47, 1449—50
sources, 1447
New York (City)
architecture, 2562
foreign population, 1929
hospitals, 2151
in art, 1740
Jews, 1956
minorities, 1929
pol. & govt., 2812, 2901
hist., 1511
Puerto Ricans, 1964-65
theater, 1235
See also Greenwich Village; Harlem,
N.Y., New York metropolitan area
New York (City) in literature
fiction, 343
short stories, 1740
New York (City) Metropolitan Museum
of Art, 2572, 2581
New York (City) Metropolitan Opera,
about, 2539
New York (City) Museum of Modern
Art, 2551, 2595
New York (City) Stock Exchange,
2704, 2721
New York (Colony)
hist., 1405
sources, 1459
pol. & govt., 1461
New York (State)
descr. & trav., 1728, 1738
hist., 1739
pol. 8t govt., hist., 1487, 1497, 1510,
1554
Presbyterians, 2450
travel & travelers, 1887
New York (State) in literature, 1185
anthologies, 1738
humor, 122
New York Call Girl, 879
New York City Ballet, about, 2206
The New York Herald, about, 1307
New York Herald Tribune, about, 1326
New York Historical Society, 2552
New York Hospital — Cornell Medical
Center, New York (City), about,
215!.
New York metropolitan area, 2027
New York Metropolitan Region Study,
2027
The New York Review of Books, 1267
The New York Times, 1945
The New York Times Book Review,
"49
New York Weekly Journal, about, 1352
The New Yorker, about, 679
Newby, Idus A., 1930
Newcomb, Franc J., 1381
Newcomb, Kate P., about, 2133
Newcomb, William W., 1395
Newcombe, Jack, ed., 2254
Newcomer, Mabel, 2312
Newhall, Nancy W., 2649
News agencies, 1319, 1321
The News and Observer (Raleigh,
N.C.), about, 1323
News broadcasting. See Radio jour-
nalism
Newsome, Albert Ray, 1777
Newspapermen, 1308, 1312, 1319—30
biog. (collected), 1343
See also Reporters and reporting
Newspapers, 1304—18
American Revolution, 1481
business, 1311
community, 1335
foreign-language, 1331-32
hist., 1304, 1306—8
layout & typography, 1333
policies & practices, 1335, 1338—9,
1341-2
Newton, Francis, 2534
Newton, Sir Isaac, about, 2103
Newton, Virgil M., 1327
about, 1327
The Next Room of the Dream, 939
Nez Perec* Indians, 1394
Nicholas, Herbert G., 1604
Nichols, Robert H., 2450
Nichols, Roy F., 1420, 1507, 1526
Nichols, Stephen G., cd., 1254
Nicholson, Arnold, 2566
Nicholson, Margaret, 1112
Nicoloff, Philip L., 98
Niebuhr, Reinhold, about, 2431
Nielsen, Waldemar A., 1618
Nieman, Louis W., about, 1316
Nieman Reports, 1340
Niemcewicz, Julian Ursyn, 1890-91
Nietz, John A., 2290
Nigger, 1292
Night Drop, 1691
The Night of the Iguana, 1097
The Night They Raided Minsk's, 2210
Nigro, Felix A., 2799
Nims, John Frederick, 941—42
Nin, Anais, 582
Nine Basic Arts, 2393
Nixon, Richard M., about, 2921
Nizer, Louis, 2868
No! In Thunder, 1184
510
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
No Door, 713
No Featherbed to Heaven, 28
No plays, translations, 613
No Stone Unturned, 1390
No Time for Sergeants, 1130
Noble, Jeanne L., 2311
Noble, Peter, 2203
Nock, Albert Jay, about, 1348
Nocturne, 2594
The Noise of Solemn Assemblies, 2457
Nolan, William F., 2227
Norberg, Kenneth D., 2333
Nordica, Lillian, 2545
about, 2545
Nordness, Lee, ed., 2582
Norfolk, Va., hist., 1775
Norgren, Paul H., 1951
Norman, Charles, 411, 616
Norris, Benjamin Franklin, 331—33
about, 334, 1173, 1243
North, Douglass C., 2657
North, Frederick North, Baron, about,
M73
North, Henry Ringling, 2212
North Atlantic Treaty Organization,
hist., 1644
North Carolina
econ. condit., 1462, 1777
folklore, 2478, 2481
folksongs & ballads, 2481
hist., 1777
colonial period, 1458, 1462
sources, 1777
historical geography, 1462
language (dialects, etc.), 1122
pol. & govt., 1323
soc. life & cust., 1777
North Carolina. University, about,
2322
North Carolina Folklore Society, 2481
North Pole expeditions. See Arctic
expeditions
Northrup, Herbert R., ed., 1951
Northwest, Old, 1796—1809
frontier & pioneer life, 1798
hist., 1429, 1483, 1797—98, 1801
sources, 1412
Northwest, Pacific, 1863-68
descr. & trav., 1283
hist., 1863-65
travel & travelers, 124—25
Northwestern States
descr. & trav., 124—25, 414
military posts, 1813
Norton, Charles Eliot, about, 1225,
1259
Norwegians, 1966
Not Man Apart, 2596
Notes on the State of Virginia, 46
Notre Dame, Ind. University, football,
2253
Nova Express, 767, 771
Novels. See Fiction
Now, Barabbas, 2924
Now It Can Be Told, 2104
Nowell, Elizabeth, 715
Nugent, Elliott, 2185
about, 2185
Nursery schools, 2297
Nurses and nursing, 2150
Nussbaum, Arthur, 2698
Nye, Bill, about, 1320
Nye, Russel B., 1544
Nyren, Dorothy, ed., 1237
O
O Strange New World, 1718
Obenhaus, Victor, 2463
Occasions and Protests, 423
Oceanica, trade with New England,
1727
Oceanography, 2109
O'Connor, Edwin, 2907
O'Connor, Flannery, 943—46, 1196
about, 1218
O'Connor, Raymond G., ed., 1652
O'Connor, Richard, 328
O'Connor, William Van, 1227
ed., 1128, 1153, 1808
O'Dea, Thomas F., 2449
Odell, Alfred T., ed., 177
Odets, Clifford, 947, 1130
about, 948
Of Snuff, Sin, and the Senate, 2792
Of the Farm, 1054
Office of Education, about, 2279
Office of War Information, about, 1324
Offit, Sidney, ed., 2233
Ogg, Frederic A., 2777
O'Hara, Frank, 2579
O'Hara, John, 949-59
Ohio
education, 1802
hist., 1797
pol. & govt., 1553
Ohio. State University, Columbus,
athletics, 2224
Ohio Infantry. 23d Regt., 1861-65,
1540
Ohio River and valley, 1469, 2634
Ohlin, Lloyd E., 2049
Ohlsen, Merle M., 2336
Oil industry. See Petroleum industry
Oklahoma
descr. & trav., 123
guidebooks, 1724
historical geography, 1835
hist., 1834
Indians, 123
maps, 1835
Oklahoma, about, 2192
Olan, Ben, 2233
Old age, 1920
medical care, 2166
soc. aspects, 2046
The Old Glory, 875
Old Red, 51 6
Oldfield, Barney, about, 2227
Olds, Henry F., ed., 2337
Oliphant, Mary C. S., ed., 177
Oliver, Paul, 2496
Oliver, Peter, 1479
Olmstead, Clifton E., 2412
Olmsted, Frederick Law, 1760
Olson, Elder, ed., 1148
Olson, May E., 1331
Olson, Philip, ed., 2004
Olsson, Nils W., ed., 1899
Olympic games, 2264
O'Meara, Walter, 1754
On Borrowed Time, 1130
On My Own, 1295
On the Divide, 389
On the Road, 861-62
about, 867
Once in a Lifetime, about, 526
One Day, 923
One Day in the Afternoon of the
World, 996
One Hour, 652
One Hundred Dollars & a Horse, 2157
One Life, 980
O'Neill, Eugene, 597-99, 1130
about, 600—604, 1170, 1255
Opera, 2536—40
hist., 2529, 2537, 2545
Boston, 2538
New York (City), 2529
San Francisco, 2536
The West, 2537
See also Theater
Opotowsky, Stan, 2070
Oppenheimer, George, ed., 2175
The Optimist, 830
The Ordeal of Mark. Twain, about, 262
Oregon
descr. & trav., 414
travel & travelers, 124
Oregon Trail, 1818—19, 1822
O'Reilly, John, 2219
The Organization Man, 2005
Orient, in literature, 907
Orientals, 1960—62
Ornduff, Donald R., 2635
Ornithology. See Birds
Orphans in Gethsemane, 485
Orpheus Descending, 1093
Osborn, Barbara M., 2162
Osborn, Paul, 1130
Osborn, Ronald E., 2413
Osborne, William S., ed., 130—31
Osgood, James Ripley, about, 2930
Osgood, Robert E., 1644
Ossman, David, 1228
Ossoli, Sarah Margaret Fuller, mar-
chesa d'. See Fuller, (Sarah)
Margaret (Marchesa d'Ossoli)
OstrofT, Anthony, ed., 1228
Otis, James, about, 2743
Ottawa Indians, 1388
Otto, Celia J., 2569
Otto, Don, 1131
Otto, Henry J., 2298
Ottoson, Howard W., ed., 2605
Our Public Life, 2391
Ourselves to Know, 952
Outdoor life, 2219
Outdoor Life, 2270
Outdoor Recreation Resources Review
Commission, 2222
The Outing, 739
Outlaws, 1828
Outlines From the Outpost, 76
Overland journeys to the Pacific, 1821—
22
Overmyer, Grace, 2 1 87
Overseas possessions, 1872—74
Overton, Richard C., 2679
Owens, John R., ed., 2899
Owens, Richard N., 2715
INDEX / 511
The Ox-Bow Incident (motion picture),
about, 2199
Ozark Mountain region, folklore,
2485-86
Paarlberg, Donald, 2626
Pacific Coast States, disc. & explor.,
1446
Pacific Islands, 1872
Pacific Northwest. See Northwest,
Pacific
Pacific Ocean region, fiction, 907
Pack, Robert, ed., 1142
Packard, Vance O., 2000—2001, 2005,
2687
Padilla, Elena, 1964
Paine, Thomas, 47—48
about, 49, 1274
Painters, 2551, 2574-75, 2579> 2587
biog. (collected), 2574, 2578, 2582
See also Artists
Painting, 284, 2574—94
colonial period, 2575
exhibitions, 2551, 2578
hist., 2554, 2577, 2581, 2583
primitive, 2578
private collections, 2578
See also Art
Pakistan, relations with, 1572
Palacios, Rafael D., illus., 1399
Palamountain, Joseph C., 2660
Pale Fire, 931
Paleontology, 1358
Palestine in poetry, 148
Palmer, Alexander Mitchell, about,
1556
Palmer, Arthur J., 2265
Palmer, Robert R., 1420
The Panic Button, 831
Papa, You're Crazy, 992
Paperbound books, 814
Paredes, Americo, 2505
Pares, Richard, 2691
Paris
Americans in, 528, 1229
descr., 310
Paris and Cleveland Are Voyages, 831
The Paris Review, 1 229
Parish, William J., 2688
Parisian Sketches, 310
Parker, Daniel P., ed., 2778
Parker, DeWitt H., about, 2362
Parker, Edwin B., 2078
Parker, Wyman W., 2935
Parkes, Henry Bamford, 1440
Parkinson, Thomas F., ed., 1230
Parkman, Francis, 1416
about, 1416, 1425
Parks, Aileen W., ed., 202
Parks, Edd W., 170, 178, 203
ed., 202
Parks, Joseph H., 1683
Parks, 2645, 2648
See also National parks and reserves
Parnassus Corner, 2930
Parnassus on Main Street, 2937
Parole, 2050
Parry, Albert, 1713
Parson, Ruben L., 2640
Parsons, Talcott, about, 1996, 1998
The Party at jack's, 713
Partisan Review, 1149
The Pat Hobby Stories, 491
Patchen, Kenneth, 960—62
Patent medicines, 2131
Paterson, 708
Pathology, hist., 2144
Paths to the Present, 1443
Patrick, John, 1130
Patterson, Robert T., 2721
Paul, Arnold M., 2817
Paul, Sherman, 196
ed., 1 88
Paulding, James Kirke, 162-63
A Pause in the Desert, 555
The Pawnbroker, about, 1210
Paxton, Harry T., ed., 2218
Payne, John Howard, about, 2187
Payton, Jacob S., ed., 2448
Peabody, Robert L., ed., 2791
Peace in Their Time, 1 594
Peace Life a River, 481
Pearce, Mrs. John N., 17563
Pearce, Roy Harvey, 1231, 1404
ed., 206, 665
Pearl Harbor, attack on, 1 689
Pease, Marguerita J., 1805
Pease, Otis A., 2693
Pease, Theodore C., 1805
Peckham, Howard H., 1464, 1670
A Peculiar Treasure, 473
Peden, William H., 1262
Peek, J. Eldon, 1724
Pegler, Westbrook, about, 1328
Pegrum, Dudley F., 2672
Peirce, Charles Sanders, 2357, 2380,
2382
about, 2364, 2366, 2381—82
Peltason, Jack W., 2774
ed., 2774
Pemmican, 480
Penick, James L., ed., 2118
Penn, William, about, 1453
Penniman, Clara, 2805
Pennsylvania
arts & crafts, 2509
courts, 2849
fiction, 1046
folklore, 2471
folksongs & ballads, 2506
hist., 1469, 1755
pol. & govt., 2807, 2906
bibl., 1755
hist., 1453, 1456, 1497
travel & travelers, 1887
Pennsylvania. Historical and Museum
Commission, 1755
Pennsylvania. University. Pels Insti-
tute of Local and State Govern-
ment, 2807
Pennsylvania. University. School of
Medicine, about, 2153
Pennsylvania. University. Wharton
School of Finance and Commerce,
2701, 2807
Pennsylvania Dutch. See Pennsylvania
Germans
Pennsylvania Germans
folklore, 2483
folksongs, 2506
hist., 2483
religion, 2506
Penology, 2047
People's Party, 1 544
Peplow, Edward H., 1856
Period of Adjustment, 1096
Periodicals. See Literature — periodi-
cals; Magazines; Newspapers
Perkin, Robert L., 1318
Perkins, Bradford, 1605—6
Perkins, Dexter, 1589, 1591
Perkins, George W., about, 1290
Perry, Matthew C., about, 1622
Perry, Milton F., 1679
Perry, Ralph Barton, 2357
about, 2362
Perry, Richard L., ed., 2766
The Persimmon Tree, 1065
Person to Person, 786
Personal injuries, 2856
Personnel administration, 2801—2
Peru, relations with, 1614
Pest control, 2642—43
Peterfreund, Sheldon P., 2359
Petersen, Elmore, 2715
Petersen, Svend, 2918
Peterson, Florence, 2729
Peterson, Harold F., 1616
Peterson, Horace C., 1555
Peterson, Lorin W., 2904
Peterson, Merrill D., 1715
Peterson, Theodore B., 1345, 2083
Peterson, Wilbur, comp., 2082
Peterson, William H., 2624
Petroleum industry, 2671, 2673
folklore, 2475
Pettigrew, Thomas F., 1949
Pfeffer, Leo, 2430, 2465, 2826-27
Phenix, Philip H., 2286
The Phi Delta Kappan, 2352
Philadelphia
commerce, 2691
homicide, 2056
public works, 2807
soc. life & cust., 1752
Philanthropy, 2035—36, 2330
See also Charities
Philbrick, Francis S., 1429
Philbrick, Thomas, 81
ed., 79
Philippine Islands, relations with, 1627
Phillips, Jewell C., 2811
Phillips, Joseph D., 2716
Phillips, Paul C., 2692
Phillips, Wendell, about, 1276
Phillips, William, ed., 1149
Philosophers, 1701, 2367—94
Philosophy, 1700—1701, 2354—2403
and religion, 2435
as literature, 97—98
hist., 2357-59, 2363
Philosophy, Psychology and Social Prac-
tice, 2370
Phonographs and records, 2518
Photography, 1825, 2595—96
Physicians and surgeons, 2132—39, 2146
Physics, hist., 2103
Phytogeography, 1371
512 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Pichierri, Louis, 2523
Pickard, John B., 220
Picnic, 1130
Pictures From Brueghel, 709
Pictures of the Gone World, 814
Pieces at Eight, 2179
Piegan Indians, 1392
Picpkorn, Arthur C., 2410
Pierce, Franklin, about, 1507
Pierce, Philip N., 1662
Piercy, Josephine K., 2
Pierson, Frank C., 2717
ed., 2731
Pierson, William H., ed., 2550
The Pig in the Barber Shop, 1022
Pigeon Feathers, 1051
Pike, Fredrick B., 1617
Pilat, Oliver R., 1328
Pinchot, GifTord, about, 2630
Pinckney's Treaty, 1583
Pine Bluff, Ark., folklore, 2480
Pine Grove, Pa., 2020
Pink Marsh, 231
Pioch, Ray, illus., 2270
Pipe lines (industry), 2673
Piper, Henry D., 496
The Pistol, 859
Pitney-Bowes, Inc., about, 2060
Pitt, William, ist Earl of Chatham,
about, 1473
Pittsburgh, 1753
hist., 1754
Pizer, Donald, ed., 333
Place names, 1375
Plains. See Great Plains
Plains Indians, 1399
Piano, Jack C., 2873
Plants, 1371
Platonists, 2354
Platt, Robert S., ed., 1355
Platt, Rutherford H., 2631
Player Piano, 1067
Playing the Mischief, 89
Plays. See Drama
Fletcher, David M., 1597
Plowman, Edward Grosvenor, 2715
Plowshare in Heaven, 1034
Plummer, Robert H., 2305
Plutarch, about, 96
Pnin, 296
Pochmann, Henry A., 1232
Podhoretz, Norman, 1233
Poe, Edgar Allan, 164-66
about, 167-71, 1212—13, 1216, 1225,
"53
Poems in Praise, 805
Poetry
and rhetoric, 1161
anthologies, 1127—29, 1136—37, 1139,
1142, 1145, 1148, 1151, 1154
dictionaries, handbooks, etc., 1178,
1247
experimental, 1009
hist. & crit., 568, 785, 796, 799, 940,
974, 1008, 1128, 1131, 1153,
1159, 1161, 1172, 1178, 1203,
1212, 1216, 1228, 1231, 1239,
1245, 1250, 1258
lyric, 1065, 1148
music in relation to, 1212
narrative, 688
Poetry — Continued
pastoral, 1065
periodicals, 1268
periods
colonial, 25
(1764-1819), 53
(1820—70), 147-48, 151, 165-
66, 173-74, 19*1 202, 205-7,
209, 211
(1871-1914), 241, 271, 273,
388
(I9I5-39), 365, 370, 405-7,
416, 432, 435, 440, 454, 461,
463, 501, 521, 536-37, 542,
547-48, 550, 589-90, 592-94,
636, 640, 687, 717
(1940-65), 346, 349, 370, 405-
8, 416-18, 431-32, 434-35,
440, 454, 521, 536-37, 542-
43, 547-48, 550, 589-90,
592-94, 611-13, 619, 635,
640, 643, 662, 673, 687-88,
702, 708-10, 717, 754-55,
757, 765-66, 781-84, 786,
790, 796-98, 800, 804-6,
814—15, 817, 821-27, 854,
856-57, 865, 872-74, 898,
904, 925, 930, 934, 936, 938-
39, 942, 961—62, 969, 970,
972-73, 980-82, 999, 1001,
1005, 1009, 1036, 1044—45,
1047, 1053, 1065, 1072, 1076,
1088-89, 1092
satiric, 1156
theories, 940, 974-75
See also Folksongs and ballads; Verse
drama
Poetry Northwest, 1268
Pogue, Forrest C., 1657
The Points of My Compass, 704
Polar exploration, 1376—78
Poles (Polanders), 1974
Police, 2053
Political bosses, 2877, 2907-9
Political campaigns, funds, 2915-16,
2920-21
Political conventions, 2913—14
Political machines. See Machine poli-
tics
Political parties, 1541, 1639, 2872,
2875, 2882—2900, 2906
hist., 2882, 2885-87
platforms, 2897
Mass., 2902
New England, 2903
New York (State), 1497
Southern States, 2889
Political psychology, 2876, 2880, 2892
Political science, 1645, 2741
hist., 2281, 2739, 2743, 2747, 2878
Political themes in literature
drama, 1059
hist. 8c crit., 1234—35
satire, 138
Political thought, 2739-2747
hist, 2741
colonial period, 1451, 1470
i8th cent., 1484, 1493
sources, 1427, 1456, 1491,
1495-96, 1498
Political thought — Continued
hist. — Continued
igth cent., 1488, 1493, 1501,
1506
sources, 1498
20th cent., 1567
Politician, 166
Politics, 1060, 2871—81
corruption. See Corruption (in poli-
tics)
hist.
colonial period, 1453
i8th cent., 1484, 1493, 1611,
2885-87
sources, 1456, 1485, 1489,
1491, 1495-96, 1498
igth cent., 1486, 1488, 1493,
1501, 1503, 1511, 1522, 1526,
1538, 1543-45, 1597, 1757,
1895, 2792, 2884-89, 2898,
2923
sources, 1427, 1485, 1498,
1500, 1540, 1542
2oth cent., 1544, 1559, 1562—63,
1565, 1645, 2792, 2830, 2884
sources, 1549, 1560
See also subdivisions History and
Politics & government under names
of places and regions, e.g., Penn
sylvania — hist.; Southern States —
pol. & govt.
Politics and business. See Business and
politics
Politics and the press
cartoons, 1300, 1313
See also Presidency — and the press
Polk, Leonidas. about, 1683
Polk, William R., 1578
Pollack, Norman, 1544
Pollard, James E., 1350, 2224
Policy, John W., 2295
Pollock, Jackson, about, 2579
Pollock, Robert C., 2371
Polls. See Public opinion — research
Pollution, 2160, 2641—43
Polsby, Nelson W., ed., 2791
Pomeroy, Earl S., 1 865
Pomeroy, Kenneth B., 2606
Pomfret, John E., 1746, 1750-51
Pool, Ithiel de Sola, 2689
Poole, William Frederick, about, 2941
The Poorhouse Fair, 1048
Popular culture, 2086
Popular music and songs, 2513—15,
2525-30
hist., 2526—30
See also Jazz music
Population, 1916—21
Southern States, 1919
See also Foreign population; Migra-
tion, internal
Por^ Chop Hill, 1696
Pornography, 767, 814, 823
"Porte Crayon," 1902
Porter, Eliot, illus., 2596
Porter, Fairfield, 2579
Porter, Katherine Anne, 605-7
about, 608—9
Porter, Kenneth W., 2671
Porter, Kirk H., comp., 2897
INDEX / 513
Porter, William Sydney (O. Henry)
335
about, 336—37
Portrait in Brownstone, 732
The Portrait of a Lady, about, 1165
A Portrait of Bascom Hawk?, 713
Portraits, 2573, 2575, 2592, 2595
Posner, Ernst, 1417
Post Office Dept. and postal service,
2057—60
Postal Inspection Service, about, 2058
Potawatomi Indians, 1388
Potsdam Conference, 1592
Potter, David M., 1420
Potter, George W., 1972
Potts, J. Manning, ed., 2448
Pound, Ezra, 610—13
about, 614-17, 1188, 1216
Pound, Louise, 2484
Pound, Roscoe, 2840
Pourade, Richard F., 1860
Poverty, 2044
Powell, John Walker, 2074
Powell, John Wesley, about, 1810
Powell, Lawrence C., 2933
Powell, Norman J., 2801
ed., 2778
Powell, Sumner C., 1465
Power, Edward J., 2313
Power (social sciences), 1999, 2912
Power, 812
The Power Elite, 2000
The Power of Blackness, 1213
The Power of the Purse, 1 474
Power, Politics, and People, 1999
Power resources, 2656
Powers of Attorney, 733
Pragmatism, 2358, 2366, 2379, 2403
Pratt, Dorothy, 2566
Pratt, Fletcher, 1663
Pratt, Richard, 2566
Prehistory. See Archeology and pre-
history
Prendergast, Maurice B., about, 2587,
2590
Presbyterians
hist., 2450
Southern States, 2418
Preschool education, 2297
See also Kindergartens
Prescott, William H., about, 1425
Presence of the Past, 2601
Presidency, 1569, 2765, 2781-86
and the press, 1350
foreign affairs, 1636
succession, 2783
transition periods, 2784
See also Executive branch; Executive
power
Presidential elections. See Elections
Presidents, U.S. See names of Presi-
dents, e.g., Adams, John
President's Commission on Heart Dis-
ease, Cancer and Stroke, 2164
President's Science Advisory Committee.
Environmental Pollution Panel,
2643
Press, Charles, 2871
Press, 1304-6, 1336, 1339, 1349
associations, 1321
business, 1311, 1337
Press — Continued
foreign-language, 1331-32
See also Freedom of the press; Gov-
ernment and the press; Journalism;
Magazines; Newspapers; Politics
and the press
Presses, printing. See Printing
Pressure groups, 2626, 2689
See also Lobbying; Power (social
sciences)
Preston, Charles, ed., 2258, 2273
Preston, William, 1556
Pretrial procedure, 2856
Previous Condition, 739
Price, Charles, 2258
ed., 2258
Price, Don K., 2117
Pride and Prejudice (motion picture),
about, 2199
Primary education. See Elementary
education
Primitivism in art, 2578
Primitivism in literature, 152
Printing, hist., 2932
The Prison, 892
Prisons, 2047, 2054
Pritchett, Charles Herman, 2829
ed., 2847
Privacy, right of, 2000
Probation. See Parole
Process and Reality, about, 2401
Prochnow, Herbert V., ed., 2707
Programmed instruction, 2333
The Progress of Dulness, 53
Progressive education, 2291, 2294
Progressive Party, 2919
Progressivism and the Progressive
movement, 1544, 1553—54, 2723
Prohibition, 1993
Prokosch, Frederic, 963-66
about, 967
The Promised City, 1956
The Promised End, 1204
Promises, 1072
Propaganda, 1321, 1630
The Prospect Before Us, 828
Protestant churches
hist., 2406
relations, 2440—41
segregation, 2466
soc. problems, 2431—32, 2461
The Protestant Establishment, 1987
Protestants and Protestantism, 1987,
2406—7, 2413—15, 2418, 2421,
2425-29
Proverbs, 2473
Prucha, Francis P., 1405, 1655
The Pseudo-Ethic, 2000
Psychiatric hospitals, 2141
Psychiatrists, 2140
Psychiatry, 2142—43
forensic, 2857
hist., 2140
military, 1656
research, 2141
Psychoanalysis and literature, 1186,
1218
Psychological influences and themes in
literature, hist. & crit., 1198
Psychological warfare, 1630
Psychology, 2370
hist, 2404
industrial, 2146
political. See Political psychology
social. See Social psychology
Public administration, 2798—99, 2802,
2807
Public defenders, 2852
Public education, 2280, 2343, 2348
criticism, 2332
finances, 2295
Public finance. See Finance — public
Public health, 2155-64
administration, 2156
costs, 2168
Boston, 2163
Public Health Service. Committee on
Environmental Health Problems,
2160
Public lands, 2604, 2609
Public libraries, 2939
Public opinion, 1978, 1988, 2082, 2910
research, 1978
Public opinion polls. See Public opin-
ion— research
Public relations, 2082
Public welfare, 2037, 2043—45
hist., 2037
services, 2156
Publishers and publishing, 1237, 2924—
25, 2927-30
Cincinnati, 2926
Puerto Ricans, 1964-65
Puerto Rico, 1874
Pulitzer, Joseph, about, 1307, 1313,
1320
Pulitzer prizes, 1313
Pumphrey, Muriel W., ed., 2037
Pumphrey, Ralph E., ed., 2037
Purdy, James, about, 1218
Pure Food and Drug Act (1906), 2112,
2132
Puritans and Puritanism, 1147, 1403,
2436
Puritans and Puritanism in literature,
1-2, 5-19, 23-33, "59
anthologies, 1147
poetry, 24
sermons, 11—12, 24
Pursuit of the Prodigal, 730
Putzel, Max, 1343
The Pyramid Climbers, 2005
Quacks and quackery, 2127, 2131
Quaife, Milo M., ed., 1674
Quaintance, Eaton, 2538
Quakers and Quakerism, 2455
See also Friends, Society of
Qualey, Carlton C., 1419, 1922
Quarles, Benjamin, 1480, 1527, 1946
The Quarry, 434
Quartermaster Corps, about, 1658, 1682
Quattlebaum, Charles A., 2346
Queens of the Western Ocean, 2676
The Quest for Paradise, 1242
The Quest for Power, 1458
Questions of Travel, 757
The Quiet Crisis, 2641
5^4 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Quimby, George I., 1388
Quinn, Patrick F., 171
Quinn, Vincent G., 403
Quirk, Robert E., 1551
Rabbit, Run, 1050
Rabinowitch, Eugene, ed., 2090
Rabkin, Gerald, 1234
Raby, Joseph Mary, Sister, 2371
Race question, 1768, 1795, 1930, 1932—
34, 1936, 1938-39, 1942-43, 1949,
1952, 1963-65, 2466, 2889, 2893
Race question in literature, 98, 828
See also Slavery in literature
Rachal, William M. E., ed., 1485
Racing. See America's Cup races;
Automobile racing; Horse-racing
Rackemann, Francis M., 2138
Radcliffe College, about, 1 300
Radiation, physiological effect, 2160
Radical Innocence, 1195
Radin, Edward D., 2858
Radio and radio broadcasting, 2065,
2067—68, 2080—81, 2172
advertising, 2073
laws & regulations, 2080—81
pictorial works, 2064
Radio Free Europe, 2068
Radio journalism, 1324
Radio programs, 2064
Rae, John B., 2681
Raeburn, Ben, comp., 2568
Rahv, Philip, ed., 1149, 1236
Railroads
atlases & maps, 1373
hist., 2677, 2682
pictorial works, 2682
See also Street-railroads
Rain, 1130
Rainsberry, Frederick B., ed., 2078
Rainwater, Lee, 2105
Raise High the Roof Beam, Carpenters,
?8.5 .
A Raisin in the Sun, 1 134
Raisz, Erwin, illus., 1478
Raleigh, John H., 604
Raleigh, N.C., Negroes, 1951
Ramberg, E. G., 2076
Rambusch, Nancy M., 2297
Rand, Christopher, 1965
Rand, McNally and Company, 1373—74
Randall, James G., 1528
Randall, John H., 392
Randall, Randolph C., 105
Randel, William P., 282
Randolph, Edward, about, 1459
Randolph, John W., ed., 2268
Randolph, Vance, ed., 2485—86
Ranis, Gustav, ed., 1647
Rankin, Hugh F., 1670, 2176
Rankin, Rebecca B., 2812
Ransom, Harry H., 1633
Ransom, John Crowe, 618—19
about, 1228, 1251
Ransone, Coleman B., 2804
Rapaport, David, 2404
Rappaport, Armin, 1625, 1663
Rasmussen, Wayne D., ed., 2614
Ratner, Joseph, ed., 2370, 2435
Ratner, Sidney, 1419
ed., 2370
Rauch, Basil, 1437
Raw materials, 2689
Rawley, James A., 1419
Rawlings, Marjorie Kinnan, 620—21
Ray, Clark, illus., 1684
Ray, David, ed., 1149
Ray, Perley O., 2777
Rayback, Robert J., 1508
Read, Bill, ed., 1136
Read, Oliver, 2518
Reader, George G., ed., 2152
Reading. See Books — and reading
The Real Life of Sebastian Knight, 925
The Real Voice, 2157
Realism in art, 2587
Realism in literature, hist. & crit., 1183
See also Naturalism in literature
Reality Sandwiches, 1953—60, 827
The Reason, the Understanding, and
Time, 2377
Reck, Andrew J., 2362
Reclamation of land, 2644
Reconstruction, 1512, 1514, 1519,
1522-23, 1526, 1528, 1530—31,
1536, 1540, 1768, 1911, 2792
Record, Wilson, 2893
Recreation, 2214—74
areas, 2645
See also Parks
bibl., 2217
community, 2221
hist., 2215
soc. aspects, 2217
The Rector of ] us tin, 734
The Red Badge of Courage, 267
Red Bluff. Calif., 2020
Reddick, Lawrence D., 1768
Redskins, Ruffleshirts, and Rednecks,
1382
Reedy. William M., about, 1343
Rees, David, 1696
Reese, Trevor R., 1466
Reflections on Human Nature, 2376
Reform and reform movements, 2791,
2901, 2904, 2923
Reformatories. See Prisons
Regionalisms (language). See Langu-
aee — dialects & regionalisms
Rehabilitation, 2042
Rehabilitation, rural, 2015
Reichart, Walter A., 127
Reichler, Joe, 2233, 2235
Reid, Benjamin L., 656
Reid, Joan, 2544
Reidenbach, Richard C., ed., 2714
Reimers, David M., 2466
Reineold, Nathan, ed., 2097
Reischauer, Edwin O., 1579
Reiss, Albert J., ed., 2017
Reissman, Leonard, 1981
The Reivers, 460
The Relic, 536
Religion, 2405—66
and art, 2394
and communism, 2424
and public education, 2284, 2339.
2423, 2426
atlases & maps, 2405
Religion — Continued
bibl., 2412, 2415—16, 2431-32
hist., 2405—21
Negroes, 2466
East Harlem, N.Y., 2459
Fla., 2439
Middle West, 2463
New England, 2420
New York (State), 2450
Pa., 2506
Southern States, 2418, 2450
The West, 2421
See also Sects; Cults; and names of
individual religious bodies
Religious folksongs, Pa., 2506
Religious leaders, 2451—56
Religious music. See Church music
Religious themes in literature
conversion, 11—12
doctrinal, 10
fiction, 943
hist. & crit., 1166, 1252
meditations, 901—3, 905—6
psychological, 10— n
See also Sermons; Theology — in lit-
erature
Religious thought. See Theology; Reli-
gion; Philosophy, etc.
Remini, Robert V., 2898
Rendezvous With America, 1044
Reporters and reporting, 1312, 1319—20,
1324, 1326, 1328, 1330, 1334,
1338
anthologies, 1313
Civil War, 1310
Indian wars, 1314
World War I, 1310
See also Newspapermen
Reps, John W., 2031
Republican Party, 2888-89, 2896, 2920
hist., 1522, 1540, 2895-96
National Committee, 2883
Republican Party (Jeffersonian), 2885—
87
Research. See specific subjects, e.g.,
Historical research
Reserves, national. See Forests and
forestry; National parks and re-
serves
Resources for the Future, 2098, 2608-9,
2640, 2656
Reston, James B., ed., 1326
Retail trade, 2686
Return to Paradise, 907
Reusser, Walter C., 2295
Revi, Albert C., 2600
Revivals and revivalism, 2409, 2452—53
See also Great Awakening
The Revolt Against Dualism, 2378
Revolutionary War. See American
Revolution
Rexroth, Kenneth, 968-70
Reynolds, Lloyd G., 2730
Reznikoff, Charles, tr., 1905
Rheem Valley, Calif., 385
Rhetoric, 1161
Rhode Island
econ. condit., 1733
hist., 1733-34
Rhodes, Eugene Manlove, 622—23
about, 223, 623
INDEX / 515
Rhys, Hedley H., 2590
Rice, Arnold S., 2879
Rice, Cy, 2255
Rice, Dan, about, 2211
Rice, Elmer L., 624—26, 1130, 2180
about, 626—27, 1170
Rice, F. Philip, 2269
Rice, Howard C., ed., 1883
Rice, Madeleine H., 71
Rich, Louise Dickinson, 1736—37
Richardson, Edgar P., 2583
Richardson, Edward H., 2135
about, 2135
Richardson, Elmo R., 2638
Richardson, Richard C., 2305
Richardson, Rupert N., 1850
Richert, Gottlieb Henry, 2686
Richey, Herman G., 2292
Richmond, Robert W., 1833
Richmond, Winthrop Edson, ed., 2467
Richter, Conrad Michael, 628—30, 2020
Rickard, George L. (Tex), about, 2247
Rickels, Milton, 200
Rickey, Branch, 2235
Rickover, Hyman G., 2344
Riddel, Joseph N., 666
Riddle, Donald H., 2795
Ridenour, Nina A., 2140
Rideout, Walter B., 1216
Ridge, Martin, 1544
Ridgely, Joseph V., 179
ed., 174
Ridgway, Matthew B., 1657
about, 1657
Riegel, Robert E., 1442
Rienow, Leona T., 2792
Rienow, Robert, 2792
Ries, John C., 1648
Riesenberg, Felix, 1690, 1861
Riesman, David, 2287
about, 1997
Riessman, Frank, 2327
Riger, Robert, 2250
illus., 2249
Riggs, Lynn, 1130
Right-hand Man, 1290
Right to counsel, 2852
The Right To Know, 1321
Riker, Charles C., 2543
Riley, John J., 2669
Ring the Night Bell, 2134
Ringe, Donald A., 82
ed., 78
Ringling Brothers, about, 2212
Risch, Erna, 1658
Rischin, Moses, 1956
The Rise of Silas Lapham, about, 1165
Rittenhouse, David, about, 2110
Rivera, Ramon J., 2326
Rivers, William L., 2083
Rivers, 1726
See also specific rivers, e.g., Minne-
sota River
The Road to H, 2048
Roads, finance, 2700
Rob of the Bowl, 131
Roback, Abraham A., 2404
Robbins, Christine C., 2136
Robbins, Phyllis, 2188
Roberts, Elizabeth Madox, 631
about, 632—33
Roberts, Leonard W., 2479
Roberts, Paul, 1119
Robertson, Ross M., 2657
Robertson, William H. P., 2259
Robin, John P., 1753
Robin, Richard S., ed., 2381
Robinson, Cecil, 1238
Robinson, Edwin Arlington, 634—36
about, 637, 1255
Robinson, James A., 1640, 2795
Robinson, John R. (Jackie), 2234
about, 2234
Rochester, N.Y., hist., 1741
Rockefeller, John D., about, 2673
Rockefeller Brothers Fund, 2172, 2345
Rockefeller Institute, about, 2126
Rocking the Boat, 1060
Rockne, Knute, about, 2253
The Roct(pile, 739
Rocky Mountain Fur Company, about,
2692
The Rocf^y Mountain News, about,
1318
Rocky Mountain region, 1836—46
Rodabaugh, James H., 1922
Roe, Yale, 2072
Roelker, Nancy L., tr., 1591
Roethke, Theodore, 971—74
about, 975, 1203, 1228
Rogers, George C., 1484
Rogers, William G., 2934
Rogow, Arnold A., 1651
Rolle, Andrew F., 1862
Rollins, Alfred B., 1567
Rolo, Charles J., ed., 2142
Roman Catholic Church. See Catholic
Church
Romanticism in literature, 1173
Romasco, Albert U., 1570
Roosevelt, Eleanor, 1295—96
about, 1296
Roosevelt, Franklin D., about, 1419,
1558-59, 1563, 1566-67, 2743,
2781, 2800
Roosevelt, Theodore, about, 1552, 1554
Roscoe, Theodore, 1663
Rose, Arnold M., 1949
Rose, Harold W., 2561
Rose, J. Hugh, 1920
Rose, Noah H., 1828
The Rose Tattoo, 1130
Roseboom, Eugene H., 2918
Rosecrans, William S., about, 1680
Rosenbach, Abraham S. W., about,
2935
Rosenbaum, Stanford P., ed., 306
Rosenberg, Charles E., 2163
Rosenberg, Harold, 2588
Rosenberg, Maurice, 2856
Rosenfeld, Morris, illus., 2239
Rosenfeld, Stanley, 2239
Rosenfield, Leonora D. C., 2368
Rosenheim, Margaret K., ed., 2844
Rosenthal, Alan, 2795
Rosenthal, Macha L., 1239
Rosenzweig, James E., ed., 2096
Rosenzweig, Robert M., 2346
Ross. Clav C., 2338
Ross, Danforth R., 1153
Ross, Harold W., about, 679
Ross, Helen, 2171
Ross, Ishbel, 1297—98
Ross, Lillian, 2171
illus., 2171
Ross, Malcolm H., 1726
Rossiter, Clinton L., 2745, 2754, 2786,
2899
ed., 2741
Rostow, Walt W., 1645
The Rosy Crucifixion, 581
Roth, Philip, 976-78
Roth, Robert J., 2371
Rothschild, Salomon de, baron, 1906—7
Roucek, Joseph S., 2278
Roueche, Berton, 2128
Rounds, Glen, illus., 2485
Rourke, Francis E., 2779
Routines, 819
Rovit, Earl H., 633
Rowan, Richard L., ed., 1951
Rowing, 2261
Rowland, Arthur R., 2943
Rowntree, Leonard G., 2139
about, 2139
Rowson, Susanna Haswell, 50—51
Roy, Ralph L., 2424
Royce, Josiah, 2357, 2383
about, 2364, 2384—85
Rubin, Louis D., 1240
ed., 1241
Rubin, Sol, 2857
Rucker, Frank W., 1341
Rudolph, Frederick, 2314, 2323
Rudwick, Elliott M., 1939
Rudy, Solomon Willis, 2306, 2345
Rueckert, William H., 692
Ruef, Abraham, about, 2909
Rueter, John C., 2225
Ruggles, Eleanor, 563
Ruhm, Herbert, ed., 305
Rukeyser, Muriel, 979—82
Rumford, Count. See Thompson, Ben-
jamin
Run to Daylight! 2249
Runyan, Harry, 467
Ruppenthal, Karl M., ed., 2672
Rural government. See Local govern-
ment
Rural life. See Communities, rural;
Farm and rural life
Russ, William A., 1871
Russell, Charles M., about, 2585
Russell, Charles Taze, about, 2444
Russell, Don, 1820, 2213
Russell, Francis, 2858
Russell, Fred, 2254
Russia
relations with, 1589, 1591
2oth cent., 1592—93, 1608
Ruth, Kent, 1815
ed., 1724
Rutledge, Archibald, 638-40
about, 639
Rutledge, Wiley, about, 2819
Rutman, Darrett B., 1455
Ryan, Betty G., illus., 1841
Ryan, Cornelius, 1691
Ryder, Albert P., about, 2579
516
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Saarinen, Aline B., 2553
Saarinen, Eero, about, 2559
Sabin, Florence R., about, 2133
The Sable Arm, 1676
Sac Prairie, Wis., in literature, 791,
793, 795
Sacco-Vanzetti case, 2858
Sackett, Samuel ]., ed., 2484
Sacks, B., 1856
A Sad Heart at the Supermarket, 855
Safran, Nadav, 1580
Sage, Leland L., 1545
Sailing After Knowledge, 615
Sailors, 1663
songs, 2492
St. Croix Valley, Minn. & Wis., hist.,
1726
St. James, Warren D., 1944
St. Johnsbury, Vt., 385
St. Louis, Mo., hist, 1792
St. Louis Globe, about, 1317
St. Louis Globe-Democrat, about, 1317
St. Louis Post-Dispatch, about, 1317,
1320, 1330
Saints in the Valleys, 2508
Sakolski, Aaron M., 2603
Salinger, Jerome David, 983—85
about, 986-88, 1195, 1218
Salley, Alexander S., 177
Saloutos, Theodore, 1922, 1971, 2615
Salt, 834
The Same Door, 1049
Samuels, Charles, 2247
Samuels, Ernest, 228—29
San Diego, Calif., hist., 1860
San Francisco
hist., 1859
politics, 2909
San Francisco Actor's Workshop, about,
2181
San Jose Junior College, San Jose,
Calif., 2305
San Lorenzo Treaty (1795). See Pinck-
ney's Treaty
Sdnchez, Nellie Van de Grift, 1862
Sandage, Charles H., 2693
The Sandbox, 721—22
Sandburg, Carl, 641-43, 2595
about, 644
Sanders, David C., 2298
Sanders, Irwin T., 2017
Sanders, Marion K., ed., 2127
Sanders, Thomas G., 2425
Sanderson, Ross W., 2419
Sandoz, Mari, 1829
Sanford, Charles L., 1242
ed., 1706
Sanford, Nevitt, ed., 2315
Sanitation, 2163
Santayana, George, 2357, 2386
about, 2366, 2387-88
San tee Paradise, 639
Saposs, David J., 2736
Saroyan, William, 989—96
about, 994
Sarton, May, 997—1003
about, 1000
Satan in Goray, 1015
Satire
anthologies, 1156
drama, 721
editorials, sketches, etc., 138, 241
fiction, 37, 934, 1067
periods
(1764-1819), 37, 53
(1820—70), 138
(1871-1914), 241
(1940-65), 934, 1067
poetry, 53, 241
The Saturday Evening Post, 2218
Saturday Review, 1149, 2280
Sauk Indians, 1388
Savelle, Max, 1452
Saveth, Edward N., 1419
ed., 1418
Saving and investment, 2696
Sawrey, James M., 2287
Saxe, Richard W., ed., 2327
Sayonara, 907
Sayre, Wallace S., 2901
Scammell, Michael, tr., 932—33
Scammon, Richard M., 2006
Scanlon, John, ed., 2280
The Scarlet Letter, 107-8, no
about, 1165
Schaap, Richard, 2264
Schaefer, Jack W., 1826
Schaper, Eva, 2400
Scharper, Philip, ed., 2440
Schary, Dore, 1134
Schattschneider, Elmer E., 2746
Scheifele, Kathleen, ed., 1855
Schell, Herbert S., 1831
Scheyer, Ernst, 2586
Schick, Frank L., ed., 2942
Schickel, Richard, 2519
Schindler, R. M., about, 2565
Schlabach, Anne V., ed., 2361
Schlebecker, John T., 2635
Schlegel, Marvin W., ed., 1775
Schlesinger, Arthur M., Jr., 1567, 15683
ed., 1982
Schlesinger, Arthur M., Sr., 1443, 1481
Schmandt, Henry J., 2021
Schmeckebier, Laurence F., 2780
Schmidhauser, John R., 2759, 2818,
2828
Schmidt, George P., 2316
Schmidt, Karl M., 2919
Schneider, Alan, 2193
Schneider, Herbert W., 2363
Schneider, Robert W., 1243
Scholes, Robert E., ed., 1254
School boards, 2293
Schoolcraft, Henry Rowe, 1398
about, 1398
Schools
management & organization, 2293,
2298
superintendents & principals, 2293
New England, 2302
See also Education; and specific types
of schools, e.g., Medicine — schools
Schoor, Gene, ed., 2253
Schorer, Mark, 560
ed., 561
Schorr, Alvin L., 2028
Schrag, Peter, 2348
Schramm, Wilbur L., 2078, 2085
ed., 2074, 2084
Schrier, Arnold, 1972
Schriftgiesser, Karl, 2722
Schroeder, W. Widick, 2463
Schubert, Glendon A., 2759, 2829, 2848
ed., 2848
Schulman, Sidney, 2849
Schumach, Murray, 2202
Schur, Edwin M., ed., 2014
Schurr, Sam H., 2656
Schutz, John A., 1451
ed., 1479
Schuyler, Philip, about, 1668
Schwabacher, Ethel, 2588
Schwartz, Anna J., 2698
Schwartz, Bernard, 2751, 2760
Schwartz, Delmore, 1004—6
Schwiebert, Ernest G., 1667
Science, 2091—92, 2094, 2096, 2098
hist., 2095, 2097
Science and civilization, 2090, 2115
Science and state, 2114—18
Scientific method, 2385
Scientific research, 2116
Scientific societies
directory, 2088
hist., 2088
Scientists, 2093, 2095, 2104, 2106—13,
2735
directory, 2087
Scotch-Irish, 1970
Scott, Andrew M., ed., 1634
Scott, David H., ed., 2419
Scott, Harry, illus., 1687
Scott, Winfield, about, 1508
Scott, Winfield Townley, 2020
Scottish folksongs and ballads, 2488
Scrimshaws, 2510
Scripps, Edward W., about, 1319, 1329
Scroggs, Claud L., ed., 2621
Scully, Vincent J., 2559-60
Sculptors, 2551, 2572-73
Sculpture, 2572—73
exhibitions, 2551
hist., 2554
Sea in literature, 81
Seafaring life
diaries, journals, etc., 84
fiction, 149
Seager, Robert, 1509
Sealts, Merton M., 160
ed., 149
The Searching Sun, 955
Sears, Laurence, ed., 2361
A Season of Dreams, 1083
Seasons of Discontent, 2178
Seaver, Richard, ed., 1143
Secession movement, 1528
Secondary education, 2008, 2287, 2294,
2343
administration, 2300
comprehensive high schools, 2299
criticism, 2300
curricula, 2300
developments & innovations, 2237
hist., 2301—2
junior high schools, 2299
objectives, 2008
See also Public education
INDEX / 517
Secretaries of State, 1584, 1588, 1623,
1631
See also Diplomatic history; names
of individual Secretaries, e.g., Hull,
Cordell
Section: Roc% Drill, 611
Sects, 2407—8, 2410—11, 2417, 2462,
2465
Secularism, 2406—7, 2413—14, 2438,
2457, 2460—61
Securities and Exchange Commission,
about, 2701
Sedgwick, Theodore, about, 1484
Seeds of Destruction, 905
Seeger, Peggy, music arr. by, 2494
Seehafer, Eugene F., 2073
The Seesaw Log, 2191
Segregation, 1946, 1953, 2466
in education, 23 1 1 , 2340
See also Discrimination; Minorities;
Race question
Seiber, Matyas, music arr. by, 2494
Seidenberg, Mel, comp., 1753
Seidman, Joel I., 2724
Seitz, William C., 2574
Seize the Day, 749
Seldes, Gilbert V., 2172
Seldin, Joseph J., 2693
Sellars, Roy Wood, about, 2362
Selleck, Henry B., 2146
Sellers, Charles G., 1768
ed., 1768
Sello, 831
Seltzer, Isadore, illus., 594
Seltzer, Louis B., 1329
about, 1329
Senate, U.S. See Congress. Senate
Senators, 2790
Sendak, Maurice, illus., 592
Senior, Clarence O., 1965
Sensabaugh, George F., 1244
Sergeant, Elizabeth S., 508
Sermons, colonial, 11-12, 24
hist. & crit., 6
Sermons and Soda-Water ', 953
Set This House on Fire, 1039
Settel, Irving, 2064
Sevareid, Arnold Eric, 1759
The Seven Hills of the Dove, 547
Seven Sages, 2366
The Seven Sisters, 965
The Seven Year Itch, 1 130
Seven Years' War in America. See
French and Indian War (1755-63)
Seventh-Day Adventists, 2669
77 Dream Songs, 755
Sewall, Samuel, 18
about, 19
Seward, William H., about, 1508
Sewell, Richard H., 1529
Sex and the Law, 1062
Sexual behavior (human), 2014
Seymour, Harold, 2235
Seymour — an Introduction, 985
Shackford, Martha H., 324
Shadow and Act, 802
The Shadow in the Glass, 794
Shahn, Ben, 2591
illus., 754
Shakow, David, 2404
Shalit, Gene, ed., 2916
Shanley, James L., 197
Shannon, David A., 2900
ed., 1915
Shannon, Fred A., 2615
Shannon, William V., 1972
Shapiro, Charles, 428
Shapiro, Karl J., 1007-9
about, 1009, 1228
ed., 1128, 1245
Shapiro, Martin, 2831
Shapiro, Nat, ed., 2514
Shapiro, Samuel, 85
Shaplin, Judson T., ed., 2337
Sharkey, Robert?., 1530
Sharp, Ansel M., 2697
Sharpe, Grant W., 2628
Shattuck, Frances M., 2920
Shaw, Earl B., 1357
Shaw, Elizabeth H., ed., 1855
Shaw, Irwin, 1010—14
Shaw, Wilfred B., ed., 2322
Shawn, Ted, 2208
Shea, Andrew J., 2346
Sheehan, Donald H., 1419
ed., 1419
Sheepfold Hill, 346
The Sheepskin Psychosis, 2342
Shelburne Essays on American Litera-
ture, 1225
Sheldon, Henry D., 1920
Shelford, Victor E., 1371
Shell Oil Company, about, 2671
Shenton, James P., 1419
Shepard, Irving, ed., 327
Shepard, William P., 2146
Shepherd, Geoffrey S., 2624
Shepherd, Jean, ed., 232
Shepperson, Wilbur S., 1922, 1973
Sherburne, Donald W., 2397—98
Sheridan, Richard G., 2850
Sherman, Charles Bezalel, 1959
Sherman, William Tecumseh, about,
1674
Sherwood, Elizabeth J., comp., 1491
Sherwood, Morgan B., 1 869
Sherwood, Robert Emmet, 645
about, 646—47, 1170
Shideler, James H., 2616
Shils, Edward B., 2727
Shinn, Everett, about, 2587
Ship of Fools, 606
Shipbuilding, 2676
Shippey, Frederick A., 2459
Shipping, Mississippi River, 1785
Shirley, Hardy L., 2632
Shirley, Kay, ed., 2496
Shirley, William, about, 1451
A Shooting Star, 1031
Shores, Louis, 2943
The Shores of America, 196
Short Friday, 1020
A Short History of Fingers, 1026
Short stories
anthologies, 1128, 1141
hist. & crit., 1128, 1153, 1262
periods
(1820-70), no, 130, 165, 2ii
(1871-1914), 222, 232, 240, 242,
251-52, 259, 268, 307, 324, 3*6,
389
Short stories — Continued
periods — Continued
(1915-39), 357, 375, 384, 476,
484, 489, 490—92, 512, 516, 540,
555-56, 607, 697
(1940-65), 348, 383-84, 400, 450,
476, 484, 516, 545, 555-56, 607,
680, 686, 733, 739, 749, 759,
763, 773-74, 776-78, 792, 828,
831, 836, 855, 861, 879, 889-90,
892, 894, 907, 925, 928, 934,
937, 943, 946, 950, 954, 956,
958-59, 967, 977, 980, 984-85,
990, 995, 1006, 1012, 1015—16,
1018, 1020, 1028, 1030, 1034,
1042—43, 1049, 1051, 1057,
1109
Shotwell, Louisa R., 2619
Shryock, Richard H., 2129—30
Shulman, Harry M., 2052
Shuman, Robert Baird, 647, 948
Shy, John W., 1482
Sibley, Frank, 2360
Sickal, Kenneth, 1131
Siegel, Arthur S., ed., 2562
Siegel. Stanley, 1851
Sienkiewicz, Henryk, 1912—13
Siepmann, Charles A., 2333
Sierra Club, 2649
Sievers, Harry J., 1546
Siksika Indians, 1392
Silber, Irwin. cd., 2497
Silberman, Charles E., 1952
The Silence of History, 451
Silent Spring, 2642
Silsbee, Joshua, about, 2183
Silver, David M., 2832
Silver, James W., 1795
Silver, Rollo G., 2931—32
The Silver Dons, 1860
Silverman, Al, ed., 2218
Silverman, Jerry, music arr. by, 2497
Silverman, Sol Richard, ed., 2042
Silvers, Phil, about, 2205
Silverstein, Lee. 2852
Simkins, Francis Butler, 1769—70
Simmons, Charles, ed., 1211
Simms, William Gilmore, 172-77
about, 177—79
Simonini, Rinaldo C., ed., 1240
Simonson, Harold P., 510
Simple Stages a Claim, 540
Simple's Uncle Sam, 545
Simply Heavenly, 544
Simpson, Claude M., 1216
ed., 294, 426
Simpson, Louis A. M., ed., 1142
Sinclair, Andrew, 1989, 1993
Sinclair, Upton, 648—50
about, 649—50
Sindler, Allan P., 2905
ed., 1760
Singer, Irving, 2388
Singer, Isaac Bashevis, 1015—20
Singer, Joseph, tr., 1017
Singers, operatic, 2545
A Singing Reed, 548
A Single Pebble, 842
Singletary, Otis A., 1673
Sinnott, Edmund W., 2561
518
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Sino- Japanese Conflict, 1626
Sioux Indians, 1380
Siple, Paul, 1378
The Sirens of Titan, 1068
Sister Carrie, 426
Six Nations. See Iroquois Indians
Six Tales of the Jazz Age, 490
Sizer, Theodore R., 230 1
Skard, Sigmund, 1720
Skelton, Raleigh A., 1449
Skelton, Richard B. (Red), about, 2205
Sketches. See Editorials, sketches, etc.
Skiing and ski resorts, 2262
Skinner, Constance Lindsay, 1726
Skipper, Ottis C., 1347
Sklare, Marshall, ed., 1958
Skornia, Harry J., 2071
Skyscrapers, 2563
Slang. See Language — slang
Slater, Joseph L., ed., 95
The Slave, 1019
Slavery, 1520—21, 1534, 1716, 1768,
2466
See also Abolitionism
Slavery in literature, fiction, 181—82
See also Civil War in literature; Race
question in literature
The Slaves We Rent, 2619
Sledd, James H., ed., 1114
Slesinger, Reuben E., 2660
Slichter, Sumner H., 2659, 2735
Sliger, Bernard F., 2697
Sloan, Alfred P., 2680
Sloan, John, about, 2587
Slocum, Bill, 2242
Slote, Bernice, ed., 388
Small, Miriam R., 120
Small, Norman J., ed., 2761
Small business, 2716
The Small Room, 1002
Smalley, Webster, ed., 544
Smelser, Marshall, 1663
Smigel, Erwin O., 2869
Smiley, David L., 1763
Smith, Alson J., 1824
Smith, Arthur Robert, 1759
Smith, Bradford, 1983
Smith, Bruce, 2053
Smith, Carol H., 447
Smith, Chard P., 637
Smith, Charlotte W., 1424
Smith, Daniel M., ed., 1590
Smith, Don, 2248
Smith, Elwyn A., 2450
Smith, Gaddis, 1593
Smith, Grover C., ed., 2385
Smith, Harry Allen, 1021—26
about, 1025
Smith, Henry Nash, 265
ed., 255, 257
Smith, Herbert F., 330
Smith, Hilrie Shelton, 2415
Smith, Hoke, about, 1550
Smith, Howard R., 2712
Smith, James M., ed., 2755
Smith, James W., ed., 2416
Smith, Jedediah S., about, 1824
Smith, John, Captain, 20
about, 21—22
Smith, John E., 2364, 2373
Smith, Lillian E., 651—52
Smith, Nila B., 2335
Smith, Ophia D., 1803
Smith, Page, 1496
Smith, Paul H., 1479
Smith, Ralph Crosby, illus., 2270
Smith, Red. See Smith, Walter W.
Smith, Reed M., 2807
Smith, Robert G., 2809
Smith, Robert M., 2235, 2251
ed., 2218
Smith, Roger H., ed., 2925
Smith, Thelma E., 2812
Smith, Timothy L., 2409
Smith, Walter W., 2218
Smith, William E., 1803
Smith, William Loughton, about, 1484
Smith, Wilson, 2365
ed., 2309
Smith College, about, 2321
Smithcors, J. F., 2637
Smurr, J. W., 2692
Snead, Samuel, 2257
Snell, Joseph W., 1828
Snider, Clyde F., 2809
Snodgrass, William De Witt, about,
1203
Snyder, Charles M., 1497
Sobel, Bernard, 2209—10
Sobel, Robert, 2704
Soby, James Thrall, 2591
Social and business ethics, 2000
Social change, 1998—99, 2091, 2099
Social classes. See Class distinction
Social conditions, 1917, 2000—2001,
2004, 2006, 2017, 2024, 2026,
2028, 2038-39, 2043, 2091, 2877,
2912
hist., 1437, 1541, 1984—94
colonial period, 1477
1 9th cent., 1537, 2817
20th cent., 1563
Negroes, 2007
women, 2011
See also Church and society; also sub-
divisions History and Social condi-
tions under names of places and
regions, e.g., Southern States — soc.
condit.; New York (State) — hist.
Social influences on literature
hist. & crit., 1159, 1165, 1184, 1188,
1200, 1207, 1209—10, 1220
Social insurance. See Social security
Social isolation in literature, 1165,
1209—10
Social life and customs, 1712, 1992,
1999, 2020, 2214—15
hist., 1982, 1986
colonial period, 1477
1 9th cent., 1893
See also subdivisions History and
Social life & customs under names
of places and regions, e.g., San
Francisco — hist.; Virginia — soc. life
& cust.
Social life and customs in literature,
hist. & crit., 1222, 1224
Social medicine, 2158, 2168
Social mobility, 2003
Social psychology, 1983, 2158, 2880
Social questions in literature
essays & studies, 1243
fiction, hist. & crit., 1177
poetry, 1258
Social reformers, 1991
Social Science Research Council, 1920—
21 ,
Social Science Research Council. Com-
mittee on Economic Growth, 2120
Social Science Research Council. Com-
mittee on Historical Analysis, 1420
Social sciences, 1999, 2396
and history, 1418
research, 2028
study & teaching, 2320
Social security, 2045
The Social Sources of Denominational-
ism, about, 2462
Social status, women, 1989
Social values, 2000
Social work, 2037—38, 2041
hist., 2041
Socialism, 237
fiction, 79
Socially handicapped children, educa-
tion, 2327
Society and the press, 1349—52
Society for the Preservation of New
England Antiquities, about, 2601
Society, Manners, and Politics in the
United States, 1895
Society of American Foresters, 2628,
2632
The Sociological Imagination, 1999
Sociology, 1996—99, 2006, 2391
educational. See Educational sociol-
ogy
hist., 1710
industrial, 2003, 2727
urban, 1929, 2023—24, 2460
Soft drinks. See Carbonated beverages
The Soft Machine, 767, 769
Soil conservation, 2607, 2639
Soldiers, 1656
The Solid Gold Cadillac, 1130
Solitude in literature, 1190
Solomon, Eric, ed., 1150
Some People, Places, and Things That
Will Not Appear in My Next
Novel, 777
Somers, Anne R., 2167
Somers, Herman M., 2167
Something Wicked This Way Comes,
762
Songs
national, 2517
See also Folksongs and ballads;
Popular music and songs
Sonny's Blues, 739
Soon, One Morning, 1145
Sorauf, Francis J., 2906
Sorensen, Clarence W., 1922
Sorensen, Theodore C., 1568, 2781
Sorokin, Pitirim A., 1995
about, 1995, 1998
Sosin, Jack M., 1483
The Sot-weed Factor, 747
Soth, Lauren K., 2617
Soul Gone Home, 544
INDEX / 519
The Source, 910
The South. See Southern States
South African War (1899—1902), per-
sonal narratives, 270
South America. See Latin America
South Carolina
hist., 1778
colonial period, 1454, 1458
in fiction, 87, 173—74, 17&
South Dakota, hist., 1831
South Dakota. Dakota Territory Cen-
tennial Commission, 1830
South of the Angels, 1086
South Pacific Islands
in literature, 907
trade with New England, 1727
South Pole expeditions. See Antarctic
expeditions
South to the Nafyong, North to the
Yalu, 1695
Southeast Asia, relations with, 1624
Southern, Terry, ed., 1 1 43
Southern Historical Association, 1771
Southern States, 1760—81
church hist., 2418
civil rights, 1944
culture, 1760—62, 1767—70, 1772
econ. condit., 1521, 1940
folklore, 2471
historiography, 1425, 1768
hist., 1761-66, 1769—71, 1784
intellectual life, 1716
pol. & govt., 1760, 2888, 2920
population, 1919
Presbyterians, 2450
race question, 1768
slavery, 1534
soc. condit., 1760, 1940
soc. life & cust., 1903
travel & travelers, 1875—76, 1881,
1903, 1911
See also Confederate States
Southern States in literature, 1185
anthologies, 1141, 1767
essays, 1240
fiction, 943, 1193, 1202
hist. & crit., 178, 1240, 1251
Southwest, 1847—56
descr. & trav., 1825
disc. & explor., 1824
folklore, 2471
folksongs & ballads, 2504
hist., 1446, 1865
in fiction, 555—56, 1191
Indians, 1396, 1406
military posts, 1814
Southwest, Old, 1782-95
hist., 1386, 1429
See also Southern States
Southwest Land Tenure Research Com-
mittee, 2603
Southwest Pacific, relations with, 1576
Soviet Union. See Russia
Space flight to the moon, 2101
Spache, George D., 2335
Spaeth, Eloise, 2602
Spalding, Romalda B., 2335
Spalding, Walter T., 2335
Spanier, John W., 1645, 1697
Spanish-American War
diplomatic hist., 1597
personal narratives, 270
pictorial works, 1685
Spanish missions. See Indians, Ameri-
can— missions
Spanish North America, colonization,
1446
Sparrow, W. J., 2110
Speak^, Memory, 925
Speculation (stocks), 2704
Speeches, addresses, etc., 136
See also Lectures and lecturing
Spence, Hartzell, 2688
Spencer, Benjamin T., 1246
Spencer, Ivor D., 1510
Spencer, Robert F., 1383, 1393
Spender, Stephen, ed., 1247
Sperber, Hans, 2873
Spergel, Irving, 2049
Spicer, Edward H., 1406
ed., 1409
Spiegel, Henry W., ed., 2652
Spies, 1629
Spiller, Robert E., 1248, 1253
ed., 93, 427, 1214, 1702
The Spinoza of Market Street, 1018
Spirit La%e, 553
Spirituals. See Negroes — spirituals;
White spirituals
Spitz, David, 2747
The Splendid Little War, 1685
Splendor in the Grass, 850
Sport, 2218
Sports, 2216, 2220, 2263, 2268—74
fiction, 2218—19, 2233
hist., 2233
soc. aspects, 2214
See also Athletics, college; Recrea-
tion; and particular sports, e.g.,
Baseball
Sports Illustrated (Chicago), 2218—19
Sports Illustrated (New York), 2219
Sprague, Marshall, 1838
Spring, Agnes W., 2634
Springer, Anne M., 1232
Sproul, Kathleen, ed., 2913
The Square Root of Wonderful, 885
Squibb, Edward Robinson, about, 2132
Squires, James Radcliffe, 551, 967, 1216
Staff, Frank, 2060
Stafford, Jean, 1027—28
Stage. See Theater
Stagestruc^, 2189
Stagg, Amos Alonzo, about, 2254
Stahl, Oscar Glenn, 2802
The Stakes of Power, 1526
Stallings, Laurence, 1687
Stallman, Robert W., 1249
ed., 269—70
Stampp, Kenneth M., 1531
Stand Still Lif^e the Hummingbird, 580
Standard Oil Company, about, 2671
Stanford, Donald E., ed., 25
Stanford University. Institute for Com-
munication Research, 2074
Stanley, David T., 2784
Stanley, Julian C., 2338
Stanton, Edwin M., about, 1533
Stare decisis, 2845
Stark, Irwin, ed., 1144
Starr, Chester G., 1420
Starr, John, 2151
Starting From San Francisco, 817
Stasheff, Edward, 2075
The State. See specific subjects "and
state," e.g., Church and state; Sci-
ence and state
State rights, 1498, 2753
States
archives, 1417
constitutions, 2756
govt., 2774-75, 2777, 2804-7, 2904,
2906
See also names of individual States,
e.g., Alabama
Statistics, 1444
See also Census; Vital statistics; and
under specific subjects, e.g., Public
health — stat.
Statues. See Monuments
Staudenraus, P. J., ed., 2899
Steamboat lines, 2676
Steam-navigation, Missouri River, 1827
Steam, Colin W., 1358
Stearns, Harold, about, 1348
Stearns, Raymond P., 2113
Stedman, Murray S., 2428
Steel industry, 2670
Steele, Robert V. P., 2909
Steere, William C., ed., 2100
Stefferud, Alfred, ed., 2620
Stegner, Wallace E., 1029—31, 1354,
1845
Steichen, Edward, 2595
about, 2595
Stein, Arnold S., ed., 975
Stein, Gertrude, 653—54
about, 655—56
Stein, Harold, 1653
ed., 1653
Stein, Maurice R., 2016
Steinbeck, John, 657-58
about, 659—60, 1257
Steinberg, Charles S., 2082
Steiner, Gary A., 2079
Steinle, John G., 2149
Steinmetz, Lee, ed., 1151
Steloff, Frances, about, 2934
Stengel, Casey, 2231
about, 2231
Stepanchev, Stephen, 1250
Stephens, William, 1466
Stephenson, Wendell Holmes, 1425
ed., 1764
Stern, Milton R., 161
Stern, Philip Van D., 1532
ed., 182
Sterner, Richard, 1949
Sternsher, Bernard, 1559
Stettinius, Edward R., about, 1584
Stevens, Carl M., 2735
Stevens, David H., ed., 2193
Stevens, Georgiana G., ed., 1621
Stevens, Henry, about, 2935
Stevens, Sylvester K., 1753, 1755
ed., 1755
Stevens, Thaddeus, about, 1512
Stevens, Wallace, 661-62
about, 663—66, 1216, 1255
Stevenson, Charles L., 2360
520 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Stevenson, Elizabeth, 289
ed., 225
Stewards of Excellence, 1159
Stewart, Edgar L, 1 867
Stewart, George R., 1354, 1375, 1819
Stewart, John L., 1251
Stewart, Randall, 1252
ed., 1131
Sticks in the Knapsack., 2485
Stiles, Ezra, about, 2330
Still Life, 894
Stimson, Henry L., about, 1566, 1584,
1594. 1625
Stock, Noel, 617
Stocks and stock-exchange, 2704
Stoddard, Charles H., 2608
Stokes, Anson Phelps, 2430
Stoller, Leo, 198
Stone, Edward, 319
Stone, Harlan Fiske, about, 2824
Stone, Herbert L., 2237
Stookey, Byron P., 2153
Stopover: Tokyo, 570
Stores. See Chain stores; Department
stores
Storms, 1363
Story, Hal M., illus., 1395
The Story of a Country Town, 294
The Story of Lola Gregg, 808
Stoudt, John J., 2509
Stovall, Floyd, 1253
ed., 166, 212, 1253
Stover, John F., 2682
Stowe, Harriet Beecher, 180-82
about, 181, 183-84
Strandberg, Victor H., 1081
The Strange Islands, 898
Strange Wives, 743
Strangers in the Land, 1928
Strangers to This Ground, 1188
Strassmann, Wolfgang P., 2664
Strategy, 1693
Strauss, Anselm L., 2105
Strauss, Lewis L., 1564
about, 1564
Stream of consciousness writing, fiction,
828
Street Scene, about, 2 1 80
Street-railroads, 2678
Striker, Laura Polanyi, ed. and tr., 22
Strong, Benjamin, about, 2707
Strong, Donald S., 2920
Strother, David Hunter, 1902—3
Strout, Cushing, 1413
Stroven, Carl, ed., 1870
Structural frames, 2123—24
The Struggles of Petroleum V. Nasby,
138
Struik, Dirk Jan, 2097
Stuart, Gilbert, about, 2592
Stuart, Jesse, 1032—37
Stuart, John T., about, 1518
Stuart, Mick, about, 1035
Studenski, Paul, 2698
Student Nonviolent Coordinating Com-
mittee, about, 1944
Stuhlmann, Gunther, ed., 582
Stump, Al, 2230, 2257
Styron, William, 1038—39
about, 1195
The Subject Was Roses, 2191
about, 2191
Sublette, William, about, 1824
The Subterraneans, 86 1, 864
Suburban churches, 2458—59
Suburban life in literature, 774, 1023
Suburbs, 2023
Successful Love, 1006
Suckow, Ruth, 667-68
Sudbury, Mass., hist., 1465
Suddenly Last Summer, 1094
Suffrage, 1989
Suggs, James D., 2480
The Sullen Art, 1228
Sullivan, John, about, 1668
Sullivan, Louis Henry, about, 2560
Sullivan, Walter, 1378
Summer and Smoke, 1098
Summer Brave, 851
Summer Knowledge, 1005
Summerfield, Arthur E., 2060
Summers, Festus P., 1776
ed., 1542
Summers, Harrison B., 2064
A Summer's Reading, 892
Sumner, Charles, about, 1515
Sunrise at Campobello, 1134
Sunset, 2647
The Super- Americans, 1849
Superstition
Adams County, 111., 2482
Maine, 2474
N.C., 2478, 2481
Suppose a Wedding, 894
Supreme Court, 1441, 2758—59, 2818—
34, 2839, 2841, 2848
decisions & opinions, 2430, 2761,
2821, 2824, 2826, 2830—32, 2834
influence in pol. & govt., 2818
Surface, Bill, 2230
Surgeons. See Physicians and surgeons
Susanna at the Beach, 831
The Suspended Drawing Room, 363
Sussman, Marvin B., ed., 2016
Sutton, Denys, 2594
Sutton, Walter, 2926
Sutton, Walter E., 1254
Swados, Harvey, 1196
about, 1195
Swain, Donald C., 2638
Swallow Barn, 130
Swanberg, W. A., 429, 1325
Swann, Thomas B., 419
Swanstrom, Roy, 2794
Swear by Apollo, 741
Swedes, 1747, 1899
Sweeney, John A. H., 2597
Sweeney, John L., ed., 2580
Sweeney, Stephen B., ed., 2807
Sweet Bird of Youth, 1095
The Sweet Science, 2246
Swing, Raymond, 1324
Swisher, Carl B., 2841
Swope, Gerard, about, 2668
Swope, Herbert B., about, 1330
The Sword and the Distaff, 176
Sykes, Gresham M., 2047, 2054
Symbolism in literature, 152
drama, 721
Symposium on Library Functions in the
Changing Metropolis, 2939
Syracuse University, rowing, 2261
Syrett, Harold C., 1437
ed., 1419, 1489
Szasz, Thomas S., 2857
TVA. See Tennessee Valley Authority
Taeuber, Alma F., 1953
Taeuber, Conrad, 1921
Taeuber, Irene B., 1921
Taeuber, Karl E., 1953
Taff, Charles A., 2683
Taft, Philip, 2737-38
Taft, William Howard, about, 1566,
2824—25
Taf^e Pity, 892
Talalay, Paul, ed., 2157
A Tale of Two Husbands, 831
Tale of Valor, 483
Tales. See Legends & tales; Short
stories; Tales, folk; Tall tales
Tales, folk, 2471, 2474—76
Calvin, Mich., 2480
Ky., 2479
New England, 2477
N.C., 2478, 2481
Ozark Mountains, 2485
Pine Bluff, Ark., 2480
Tex., 2476
Tales From the Cloud Walking
Country, 2479
Tales of a Traveller, about, 127
Tales of the South Pacific, 907
Tall tales, 2469
Ky., 1791
Tambourines to Glory, 544
Tamiment Institute, 2086
Tampa, Fla., 1327
The Tampa Tribune, about, 1327
Tarns, W. P., 1776
Taney, Roger B., about, 2822
Tannenbaum, Frank, ed., 2307
Tanner, Clara L., 1396
Taper, Bernard, 2206
Tarkington, Booth, 669—70, 1130
Tate, Allen, 671-73
ed., 1141, 1153
about, 674, 1216, 1251
Taubin, Sara B., 2013
Taubman, Hyman Howard, 2177
Taxation, 2603, 2698, 2700, 2703, 2705
Taylor, Archer, comp., 2473
Taylor, Edward, 23—25
about, 26, 1259
Taylor, Frederick W., about, 2715
Taylor, George E., 1627
Taylor, George W., ed., 2731
Taylor, Graham C., 2146
Taylor, John, about, 2743
Taylor, Miller Lee, 2018
Taylor, Peter Hillsman, 1040—43
Taylor, William H., 2237, 2239
Tea and Sympathy, 1130
Tea tax (American colonies), 1460
Teachers and teaching, 2294, 2328-32,
2343
colleges & universities, 2328
tenure, 2765
education & training, 2329, 2343
INDEX / 521
Teachers and teaching — Continued
methods & techniques, 2333, 2335,
2337
Teachers College Record, 2353
Teaching machines, 2333
Teaching teams, 2337
The Teahouse of the August Moon,
1130
Teasdale, Sara, 675
about, 676
Tebbel, John W., 1307
Technical assistance, 2799
Technological innovation, 2664
Technology, 2091, 2094, 2096, 2098-99
in literature, hist. & crit., 1219
Teeters, Negley K., 2047
Teichmann, Howard, 1130
Telephone, 2061—63
Telephone Poles, 1053
Television, 2065
actors & actresses, 2171, 2205
advertising, 2073
and children, 2078
audiences, 2077—79
broadcasting, 2067, 2072, 2075,
2077, 2079-81
criticism, 2066, 2070—71
pictorial works, 2064
soc. aspects, 2071
in education, 2065, 2074
industry, 2070, 2072
laws & regulations, 2080—81
plays, 1058
production & direction, 2075
programs, 2075
Telford, Charles W., 2287
Telluride, Colo., 2020
Temin, Peter, 2670
Temko, Allan, 2559
Temperance movement, 1993
fiction, 62
Ten Nights in a Bar-Room, 62
Ten Broek, Jacobus, 2042
Tender Is the Night, 492
about, 1198
Tenderloin, 343
Tennent, Gilbert, about, 2420
Tennessee
courts, 2850
frontier & pioneer life, 1782—83
hist., 1788
Tennessee Day in St. Louis, 1041
Tennessee Valley Authority, 1 564
about, 1564, 2662
Tennis, 2255
The Tenth Man, 1134
TePaske, John J., 1467
Terman, Sibyl, 2347
Terrett, Barbara, 2034
Territorial Enterprise and Virginia City
News, 255
Territorial expansion
overseas, 1506, 1595, 1597
the West, 1429
The Territory Ahead, 1226
Terry, Walter, 2207-8
Texas
culture, 1849
descr. & trav., 1853
folklore, 2476
Texas — Continued
hist., 1847, 1850—51, 1901
sources, 1852
Indians, 1395
language (dialects, etc.), 1121
pol. & govt., hist., 1851
travel & travelers, 1901
upper classes, 1 849
Text-books, 2290
Thailand, relations with, 1619
Thalberg, Irving, about, 2200
Tharp, Louise Hall, 1299—1300
That Wilder Image, 2577
Thayer, Theodore G., 1671
Thayer, Vivian T., 2296
Theater, 2172—93
criticism, 2178—80, 2193
hist., 1260, 2173—77, 2183—84, 2190,
2192
little theater movement, 2182
pictorial works, 2177
political aspects, 1234—35
Minn., 1808
Nev., 2183
New York (City), 883, 1235, 2173,
2177, 2179, 2182, 2184, 2186,
2192
Oreg., 2183
Philadelphia, 2183
Tex., 2183
See also Drama; Musical comedy;
Opera
Theatre Guild, about, 2189, 2192
Theology, 2413
hist., 2454
in literature, 10, 97
See also Religious themes in litera-
ture
New England, 1451, 2436
See also Philosophy — and religion
Therefore Be Bold, 832
These Thousand Hills, 523
They Harvest Despair, 2619
They Will Be Heard, 1322
The Thin Red Line, 860
Things of This World, 1088
The Third Dimension, 1248
Third party movements. See Political
parties
The Third Rose, 655
Thirlwall, John C., ed., 711
A Thirsty Evil, 1057
The Thirteen Colonies, 1451—69
hist., 1452, 1464, 1468
pol. & govt., 1458—59
The Thirteen Pragmatisms, 2379
This Glorious Cause, 1 670
This Hallowed Ground, 1 675
This High Man, 2093
This I Remember, 1295
This Is My Story, 1295
This Is the American Earth, 2649
This Morning, This Evening, So Soon,
. 739
Thistlethwaite, Frank, 1722
Thomas, Benjamin P., 1533
Thomas, Dorothy S., 1918
ed., 1918
Thomas, George H., about, 1680
Thomas, Helen S., 2833
Thomas, John L., 2463
Thomas, Lately, pseud. See Steele,
Robert V. P.
Thompson, Benjamin, about, 2110
Thompson, Daniel C., 2881
Thompson, Eric, 448
Thompson, Ernest T., 2450
Thompson, Harold W., ed., 2493
Thompson, Kenneth W., 1635
Thompson, Lawrance R., ed., 503
Thompson, Mickey, 2227
about, 2227
Thompson, Stith, 2467
ed., 2046
Thomson, Charles A., 1641
Thomson, Charles A. H., 2920
Thomson, Virgil, about, 2546
Thoreau, Henry David, 185—91, 2596
about, 1225—26, 1253, 2356
bibl., 194
Thornbrough, Emma L., 1804
Thornbury, William D., 1356
Thornton, Richard H., 1113
Thorp, Margaret F., 2321, 2572
Thorp, Willard, 1253, 1255
Thorp, Willard L., ed., 1628
Thorpe, Earl E., 1948
Thorpe, Thomas Bangs, 199
about, 200
Those 163 Days, 1674
A Thousand Days, 15683
Thrones, 612
Thurber, James Grover, 677—80
about, 679, 68 1
Thurgood, Malcolm, illus., 222
Tibbitts, Clark, 1920
Tiffany, Louis C., about, 2600
Tilden, Freeman, 1825, 2648
Tillich, Paul, about, 1166
Time of the Bells, 1860
Time, the Weekly News-Magazine,
2581
The Times Literary Supplement, 1256
Timrod, Henry, 201—2
about, 203
Ti-Moune, 831
Tin Pan Alley, 2528
Tindall, George B., 1768
ed., 1771
Tinling, Marion, ed., 4
Tiny Alice, 726
Tip on a Dead Jockey, 1012
Tischler, Nancy M. P., 1102
Tisdale, E., illus., 53
Tittle, Yelberton A., 2248
about, 2248
Titus, Warren I., 247
To Hell in a Handbasl^et, 1025
The Toadstool Millionaires, 2131
Toben, R. L., illus., 2478
Tobey, Mark, about, 2574
Todd, Edgeley W., ed., 124-25
Toland, John, 1691
Tolson, Melvin B., 1044—45
Tomas, Vincent, 2360
Tomorrow a New World, 2015
Tongue of Flame, 74
Toohey, John P., 670
Toole, Kenneth R., 1839—40
ed., 1811
Torbet, Robert G., 2437
Tories, 1479
522 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Torts, 2816
Tostlebe, Alvin S., 2611
A Touch of the Poet, 599
A Tour on the Prairies, 1 23
Towley, Louis, 2037
The Toum, 457
The Toum and the City, 86 1
Towns. See Cities and towns
Toys in the Attic, 839, 1134
Trace, Arther S., 2347
Trade regulation. See Commerce —
govt. regulation
Trade unions, 1951, 2724—25, 2728—30,
2734, 2736-38
hist., 2726
Trading posts, Indian, 1 406
Tragedy in Dedham, 2858
Trails, western, 1821
Transcendentalism, 196, 2356
fiction, 1257
Translations from foreign literature, 22,
613, 854, 906, 929, 932-33, 1015-
20, 1883, 1885, 1889, 1891, 1894,
1899, 1905, 1907, 1909, 1913
Transportation, 2672—83
automotive, 2683
laws & regulations, 2672
N.J., 2675
See also Travel and travelers
Trappists, 899
Trask, David F., 1688
Travel and travelers, 123—25, 192, 256,
258, 385, 658, 1022, 1875—1915
bibl., 1875-77
See also subdivisions Guidebooks and
Travel & travelers under names of
places and regions, e.g., Oklahoma
— guidebooks; Southern States —
travel & travelers
Traveling With the Innocents Abroad,
256
Travels With Charley, 658
Treacy, M. F., 1671
Treat It Gentle, 2544
A Treatise on the Atonement, about,
2451
Treaty of Paris (1783), 1599
The Tree Witch, 1066
Trelease, Allen W., 1405
Trempealeau Co., Wis., soc. condit.,
1415
Trescott, Paul B., 2694, 2708
Trial practice, 2851
Trials, 2868
Tricycles. See Bicycles and tricycles
Trickett, Joseph M., 2715
Trilling, Lionel, about, 1186, 1188
Trittschuh, Travis, 2873
Trocchi. Alexander, ed., 1143
The Troll Garden, 389
The Troubled Calling, 2125
Truman, David B., ed., 2791
Truman, Harry S., 1569
about, 1558, 1566, 1697, 2781
Trumbull, John (1750—1831), 52—53
The Trumpet Soundeth, 1548
Trusts, industrial, 2773
Tryon, Warren S., 2930
Tsou, Tang, 1628
Tuck, Dorothy, 468
Tugwell, Rexford Guy, about, 1559
Tumult on the Mountains, 1776
Tunis, John R., 2220
Tunisia, relations with, 1575
Turkey, relations with, 1623
Turnbull, Andrew, 497
ed., 493
Turner, Arlin, ed., 1938
Turner, Frederick Jackson, 1415
about, 1413, 1415
Turner, Susan J., 1348
Tussman, Joseph, 2430
Twain, Mark, 248—60
about, 261-65, 1173, 1183, 1207,
1226, 1253
illus., 253
Twentieth Century Literature, 1269
27 Wagons Full of Cotton, 1091
Two for the Seesaw, 2191
about, 2191
Two 'Years Before the Mast, 84
Two Wee^s in Another Town, 1013
Tyler, George C., 670
Tyler, Gus, ed., 2047
Tyler, Harry, illus., 1897
Tyler, John, about, 1509
Tyler, Julia Gardiner, about, 1509
Type and type-founding, 2932
Types of Philosophy, 2375
U
Ubbelohde, Carl, 1476, 1843
Udall, Stewart L., 2641
Ulich, Robert, 2288
ed., 2288
Ulmer, S. Sidney, ed., 2880
Ulrich, Heinz, 2271—73
An Uncertain Tradition, 1631
Uncle Tom's Cabin, 181—82
Under Their Vine and Fig Tree, 1891
Underground railroad, 1520
Undertakers and undertaking, 1990
Unfair Arguments With Existence, 8 1 8
The Unforgettable Americans, 1 289
Unger, Irwin, 2709
Ungerer, Tomi, illus., 1125, 2198
Union Pacific Railroad, about, 2679
Union Tank Car Company, about, 2673
Unions, labor. See Trade Unions
United Nations
about, 2799
U.S. participation, 1642
United Nations Atomic Energy Com-
mission, about, 1558
United Press, about, 1319
United States. For official agencies of
the U.S. Government, see the
name of the agency, e.g., Congress;
Dept. of State
United States Capitol Historical Society,
Washington, D.C., 17563
United States Independent Telephone
Association, about, 2063
Universalism, 2451
Universities. See Colleges and univer-
sities
Universities-National Bureau Commit-
tee for Economic Research, 2120
Unonius, Gustaf Elias Marius, 1898-99
Untermeyer, Louis, 502
ed., 1154
Up Cutshin and Down Greasy, 2479
Updegraff, Clarence M., 2732
Updike, John, 1046—55
Upper classes
hist., 1986
Philadelphia, 1752
Tex., 1849
Upshur, Abel P., about, 1509
Upton, Emory, about, 1659
Urban, Wilbur Marshall, about, 2362
Urban blight, redevelopment, etc. See
Cities and towns — planning; Hous-
ing
Urban communities. See Cities and
towns; Communities, urban
Urban government. See Local govern-
ment
Urban life in literature. See Cities and
towns in literature
Urbanization, 1565, 2018, 2026, 2034
Urmson, J. O., 2360
Useful arts. See Decorative arts; Arts
and crafts
Utah, 1844
econ. condit., 2650
folklore, 2471
folksongs & ballads, 2502
Mormons, 1845
Utopian themes, fiction, 79
Utopias (settlements), 237, 1994
Utpatel, Frank, illus., 795
Vaid, Krishna B., 320
Vail, Robert W. G., 2211
Vaillant, George C., 1389
Vaillant, Suzannah B., 1389
Values in a Universe of Chance, 2382
Vamos, Mara S., tr., 1889
Van Buren, Martin, about, 2898
Vance, Maurice M., 2111
Vande Kieft, Ruth M., 1084
Vander Zanden, James W., 1934
Van Deusen, Glyndon G., 1511
ed., 1591
Van de Velde, Robert W., 1630
Van Doren, Mark, 682-88
about, 683
Van Druten, John, 1130
Van Dusen, Albert E., 1735
Van Every, Dale, 1801
Van Hise, Charles Richard, about, 2111
The Vanishing Adolescent, 2010
Van Nostrand, Albert, 1216
Van Tassel, David D., 1421
Van Vechten, Carl, 689
ed., 654
about, 690
Van Wesep, Hendrikus B., 2366
Varg, Paul A., 1600
The Varieties of Religious Experience,
2435
Vatter, Harold G., 2654
Vaudeville, 2209
Vaughan, Alden T., 1403
Veblen, Thorstein, about, 2743
INDEX / 523
Vedder, Clyde B.
comp., 2046
ed., 2054
Venice, fiction, 78
Venice, Calif., Bohemianism, 1712
Venus in Sparta, 729
Vera Cruz, Mexico (City), American
occupation (1914), 1551
Verlin, Bob, 2226
Vermont, hist., 1729
Vernon, Raymond, 2027
Veroff, Joseph, 2142
Veronique, 955
Verse drama, 166, 433, 567, 875, 1066
Ver Steeg, Clarence L., 1468
Veterinary medicine, 2637
Veysey, Laurence R., 2317
Vice-Presidents, 2783
See also Presidency; Presidents, U.S.;
also names of Presidents and Vice-
Presidents, e.g., Adams, John; Cal-
houn, John C.
Vickery, Olga W., 469
ed., 465
The Victim, about, 1210
The Victor and the Spoils, 1510
Vidal, Gore, 1056—63
Vidich, Arthur J., 2019
Viereck, Peter, 1064—66
A View From the Bridge, 912, 1130
Vigilance committees, S.C., 1454
Vile, Maurice J. C., 2775
Villa, Francisco, about, 1615
Viner, Jacob, 2416
Vines, Kenneth N., ed., 2904
Vining, Elizabeth G., 2455
Vinson, Fred M., about, 2824
Violence in literature, 1187, 1193
The Violent Bear It Away, 944
Virginia
descr. & trav., 1774
econ. condit., 1463
folksongs & ballads, 2500
hist., 46, 1774
colonial period, 1458, 1463
sources, 1463
in literature, 130
intellectual life, 1715
pictorial works, 1773
pol. & govt., hist., 1463, 1509
soc. life & cust., 4, 1774
Virginia Folklore Society, 2500
The Virginian, about, 339
Virtue, Maxine B., 2850
Visible Saints, 2436
Visions of Cody, 867
Visions of Gerard, 86 1, 869
Visit to a Small Planet, 1058
Vital statistics, 1920
See also Census
Vocational rehabilitation, 2042
Voice Across the Sea, 2061
Voices of a Summer Day, 1014
Voices on the River, 1785
Volpicelli, Luigi, ed., 2280
Von Eckardt, Wolf, 2025, 2560
ed., 2558
Vonnegut, Kurt, 1067—70
Voters and voting, 2917
Vroman, Adam C., 1825
W
Waco, Tex., 1343
Wade, Herbert T., 1670
Wade, Richard C., 1534, 2026
ed., 1591
Wagenknecht, Edward Charles, 1 1 6,
128, 184, 2197
Wages, 2731
Waggoner, Hyatt H., 117, 324, 470
Waggoner, Madeline S., 2677
Waging Peace, 1560
Wagner, Ray, 1667
Wahlke, John C., ed., 1441
Wainwright, Nicholas B., 1469
Waite, Morrison R., about, 2823
Waiting for the End, 1 184
Wakefield, Dan, 1965
Walcutt, Charles C., 1257, 2347
ed., 2347
Walden, 187-88, 197
about, 197
Walden West, 791
Walker, Franklin D., ed., 332
Walker, Gil, illus., 1655, 1909
Walker, James, about, 2365
Walker, Robert H., 1258
Wall Street, 2704
Wallace, Bruce, 2160
Wallace, David H., 2552
Wallace, Ernest, ed., 1852
Wallace, Francis, 2253
Wallace, Henry A., 2610
about, 2919
Wallace, Irving, 2212
Wallace, Paul A. W., 1755
ed., 1879
Wallace, Robert A., 2789
Wallace, William N., 2240
Walsh, Roy E., 2274
Walter, Erich A., 1796
Walters, Everett, 1419
ed., 1565, 2304
Walton, Richard E., 2735
Wanderer, 1294
The Wapshot Chronicle, 774—75
The Wapshot Scandal, 774, 779
War correspondents. See Reporters and
reporting
War Dept., hist., 1659
The War Lover, 843
War of 1812
causes, 1486
diplomatic hist., 1605—6
military hist., 1485, 1672
naval operations, 1672
The War of the Worlds (radio broad-
cast), about, 2203
War with Mexico, 1 673
War Within a War, 1528
Ward, Artemus, pseud. See Browne,
Charles Farrar
Ward, Harry M., 1659
Ward, John W., ed., 1895
Ward, Theodora, ed., 274
Warner, Aaron W., ed., 2091
Warner, Charles Dudley, 250
Warner, Ezra J., 1682—83
Warner, Hoyt L., 1553
Warner, William Lloyd, 2803
Warntz, William, 1355
Warren, Austin, 1259
Warren, Harris G., 1570
Warren, Joseph, about, 1471
Warren, Louis A., 136
Warren, Robert Penn, 1071—78, 1535
ed., 1133, 1141, 1153
about, 1079—81, 1 1 66, 1251
Warren, Roland L., 2017
Warren, Sidney, 1636
Washburn, Wilcomb E., ed., 1401
Washington, Booker T., about, 1948
Washington, George, about, 55, 1475,
1489, 1611, 1668
Washington (State), hist., 1866-67
Washington, D.C.
descr., 1757, 1759
fiction, 88-89
hist., 1758
soc. life & cust., 1757
The Washington Post, about, 1320
Waskow, Arthur I., ed., 1441
Waste (economics), 2687
Water resources, 2121
Missouri River, 2644
Water-supply engineering, 2121
A Water Walk by Villa d'Este, 821
Waterlily Fire, 982
The Waters of Kronos, 630
Watertown Arsenal. See Arsenal,
Watertown, Mass.
Watson, Aldren A., illus., 1737
Watson, James Wreford, 1357
Watson, Margaret G., 2183
Watson, Richard L., ed., 1414
Watson, Thomas J., about, 2665
Wallenberg, Ben J., 2006
Wauchope, Robert, 1390
Waud, Alfred R., illus., 147
The Way It Was, 955
The Way of Chuang-tzu, 906
The Way Some People Live, 774
Wayland, Francis, aboul, 2365
Wayne, Anthony, about, 1668
A Wayward Quest, 2192
We Shall Overcome! 2491
Weales, Gerald C., 1260
The Weapon on the Wall, 1630
Weatherford, Willis D., 2466
Weaver, Robert C., 2034
The Web of Earth, 713
Webb, Bealrice Potter, 1914—15
Webb, Walter Prescott, about, 223
Webber, Everett, 1994
Weber, Brom, ed., 1155
Weber, Carl J., 2930
Weber, Elmer W., 2324
Webster's Third New International Dic-
tionary of the English Language,
1114
about, 1114
Wedel, Waldo R., 1391
Weed, Thurlow, about, 1508
A Week, on the Concord and Merri-
mack. Rivers, 186
Weeks, Edward, ed., 1149
Weeks, Robert P., ed., 532
Weems, John E., 2020
Weems, Mason Locke, 54—55
Wegener, Frank C., 2289
Weidenaar, Reynold, illus., 1807
Weidner, Edward W., 2799, 2805
524 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Wcigel, Gustave, 2440—41
Weigley, Russell F., 1659, 1682
Wein, Hermann, 2400
Weinberg, Arthur, ed., 2864
Weinberg, Samuel K., 2039
Weinstein, Robert A., illus., 84
Weisberger, Bernard A., 1308
Weisbrod, Burton A., 2168
Weisenburger, Francis P., 1922
Weiss, Irving R., 1 237
Weiss, Paul, 2389—94, 2400
Weitz, Morris, 2360
Welch, Henry, ed., 2157
Welch, Richard E., 1484
Welch, Robert, about, 1328
Welch, Walter L., 2518
Welfare. See Public welfare
Welland, Dennis S. R., 917
Wellek, Rene, 1254
Weller, Allen S., 2582
Welles, Gideon, 1536
Welles, Orson, about, 2203
Wells, Carlton F., ed., 276
Wells, L. Jeanette, 2520
Wells, Merle W., 1868
Welsch, Erwin K., 1954
Welsh, 1967
Welter, Rush, 2281
Welty, Eudora, 1082
about, 1083—84
Wendell, Barrett, 17
Wentworth, Harold, 1126
Wentz, Abdel R., 2446
We're Friends Again, 953
Wertenbaker, Thomas J., 1463, 1775
Wescott, Glen way, 691
about, 692
Wesley, Edgar B., 2282
West, Benjamin, about, 2593
West, Jessamyn, 1085—86, 1196
West, Nathanael, 693-94
about, 695
West, Ray B., ed., 1128, 1149
West, Richard S., 1679
The West, 1810-26
atlases & maps, 1373
biog., 1826
descr. & trav., 125, 1815, 1825
disc. 8t explor., 1502, 1810, 1823
frontier & pioneer life, 1816, 1826
fur trade, 1823, 1837
geology, 1356
historiography, 1811—12
hist., 1429, 1442, 1499, 1811— 12,
1815, 1821, 1826, 1828
pictorial works, 1825
sources, 1490, 1816, 1823
military posts, 1815
physiography, 1356
religion, 2421
surveys, 1810
travel 8c travelers, 1 905
The West-Going Heart, 563
The West in literature
descr., 339
fiction, 222, 486
hist. & crit., 1190
West Indies, 1 447
West of Morning, 790
West Virginia, 1776
Westbrook, Perry D., 397
Western Reserve, hist., 1802
The Western Review (Iowa City), 1149
Westerns (motion pictures), 2194
Westin, Alan F., 2821
ed., 2278, 2834
Westoff, Charles F., 1916
Wetmore, Alexander, 1367-68
Weyand, Alexander M., 2254, 2266
Weyerhaeuser Company, about, 2628
Whalen, William J., 2444
Whaling
fiction, 145
songs, 2492
Whaling Museum Society, Cold Spring
Harbor, N.Y., 2510
Wharton, Edith, 696-97
about, 698-700, 1255
Wharton, Henry, 22
Wharton School of Finance and Com-
merce. See Pennsylvania. Univer-
sity. Wharton School of Finance
and Commerce
What a Way To Go, 922
What Time Collects, 452
What's Become of Your Creature? 831
What's Left of April, 878
Wheaton, William L. C., 2034
Wheeler, George M., about, 1810
Wheeler, Gerald E., 1661
Wheeler, Thomas C., ed., 2020
Wheelock, John Hall, 701-2
Wheelwright, John B., about, 1259
Whelpton, Pascal K., 1916
When We Were Here Together, 961
Where the Light Falls, 637
Whicher, Stephen E., ed., 92-93
Whiffen, Marcus, 2567
Whig Party, 1511
Whipple, George Hoyt, about, 2138
Whiskey, 1993
Whistler, James McNeill, about, 2594
White, Charles Langdon, 1357
White, David M., ed., 1309
White, Elwyn Brooks, 703-4
White, Gerald T., 2671
White, Lonnie J., 1787
White, Morton G., ed., 1982
White, Newman T., ed., 2481
White, Theodore H., 2921-22
White, William S., 2788
White civilization and the American
Indians, 1400-1403, 1405-7. X4°9
White House, about, 17563
White House Historical Association,
17563
The White House Years, 1560
White Lotus, 846
White spirituals, 2506
Whitefield, George, about, 2420
Whitehead, Alfred N., 2395-96
about, 2364, 2366, 2397-2401
Whitehead, Don, 2053
Whitehill, Walter Muir, 1423, 1732
Whitelock, Kenly W., music arr. by,
2502
Whiting, Bartlett J., comp., 2473
Whitman, Walt, 204-12
about, 213-17, 1 21 2, 1216, 1225-26,
1253
bibl., 213
Whitney Museum of American Art
New York, 2554
Whittemore, Charles P., 1668
Whittemore, Reed, 1344
Whittemore, Robert C., 1701
Whittier, John Greenleaf, 218
about, 219—20, 1225
Who Killed Society? 1986
Who Needs People? 2089
The Whole Voyald, 990
Who's Afraid of Virgina Woolf? 724
Why the Chisholm Trail For^s, 222
Whyte, William H., 2005
Wick, Peter A., 2590
Wickard, Claude R., about, 2623
Wiebe, Robert H., 2723
Wiener, Norbert, 1301
about, 1302
Wiener, Philip P., ed., 2382
Wiesner, Jerome B., 2118
Wiggins, James R., 1351
Wigglesworth, Michael, 27
about, 28
Wight, Frederick S., 2574
Wightman, William P. D., 2400
Wilbur, Richard, 1087-89
about, 1203, 1228
Wilcox, Walter W., 2622
Wilder, Thornton, 705, 1130
about, 706, 1170
Wilderness, 1077
Wilderness areas, 1283—84, 2649
Wilderness Conference, 2649
Wildlife conservation, 2642, 2646
Wilensky, Harold L., 2043, 2725
Wiley, Harvey W., abcut, 2112
Wilgus, D. K., 2498
Wilhite, Virgle G., 2652
Wilkie, David J., 2681
Wilkins, Burleigh T., 1424
Wilkins, Thurman, 1303
Wilkinson, Norman B., 1755
Willcox, William B., 1669
Williams, Alpheus S., 1674
Williams, Cecil B., 143
Williams, Daniel D., 2400
Williams, Donald B., 2611
Williams, Edward B., 2870
Williams, Frances L., 2109
Williams, H. Beaumont, illus., 1238
Williams, Henry L., 2566
Williams, Herbert Lee, 1341
Williams, John P., 2417
Williams, Kenneth P., 1684
Williams, Mentor L., ed., 1398
Williams, Oliver P., 2807
Williams, Ottalie K., 2566
Williams, Richard H., ed., 2141
Williams, Robin M., 2006
about, 1998
Williams, Roger, 29—30
about, 30—31
Williams, Stanley T., 1253
Williams, Tennessee, 1090—99, 1130,
1134
about, 1 1 oo— 1 1 02, 1170, 1260
Williams, Thomas Harry, 1437, 1540
ed., 1540
Williams, William Carlos, 707—11
Williams College, about, 2323
Williamsburg, Va., architecture, 2567
INDEX / 525
Williamson, Harold F., 2671
Williamson, James A., 1448—49
Williamson, Jeffrey G., 2710
Williamson, William L., 2941
Willis, Edgar E., 2065
Willkie, Wendell L., about, 980, 2896
Willoughby, Malcolm F., 1690
Wilson, Alexander, about, 2113
Wilson, Charles M., 2267
Wilson, Dale, 1316
Wilson, Edmund, 1410, 1985
about, 1 1 86
Wilson, Everett E., 2041
Wilson, James Q., 2808, 2881
Wilson, Kathleen F., 1316
Wilson, Logan, ed., 2318
Wilson, Louis R., 2322
Wilson, Orlando W., 2055
Wilson, William E., 2020
Wilson, William L., 1542
Wilson, Woodrow, about, 1549, 1551,
1558, 1562, 1596, 1623, 2743
Wimsatt, William K., Jr., 2360
Winchester, Alice, ed., 2597
The Window of Memory, 714
Winesburg, Ohio, 356
about, 1165
Winick, Charles, ed., 2078
Winks, Robin W., 1607
Winnebago Indians, 1388
Winslow, Ola E., 19, 31
Winslow, Walker, 2143
The Winston Affair, 810
Winter, Gibson, 2458
A Winter Diary, 688
Winther, Oscar O., 1820, 1922
Winthrop, John, Sr., 32
about, 33, 1455
Winthrop family, 1455
Wirt, William, 130
Wirth, Louis, 2017
Wisconsin, 793, 795, 2636, 2815
in fiction, 788-89, 791-92, 794
pol. & govt., 1553
travel & travelers, 1899
Wisconsin. State Historical Society,
1415
Wisconsin. University, 1270
Wisconsin Development Authority,
about, 2815
Wisconsin in Their Bones, 792
Wisconsin Studies in Contemporary Lit-
erature, 1270
Wise, Claude M., 1124
Wise, Isaac M., about, 2456
Wise Blood, 943, 945
about, 1210
Wise Men Fish Here, 2934
Wisehart, Marion K., 1853
Wish, Harvey, 1425, 1445, 1557, 1922
Wishy, Bernard W., 1437
Wister, Fanny K., ed., 339
Wister, Owen, 338—39
"With His Pistol in His Hand," 2505
With the Ears of Strangers, 1238
Witham, W. Tasker, 1261
Without Fear or Favor, 2822
Witte, Edwin E., 2045
Wittke, Carl F., 1925
about, 1922
Wittliff, William D., illus., 2475
Wohlstetter, Roberta, 1689
Wolf, Edwin, 2935
Wolf, Luna, ed., 453
Wolfe, Don M., 1714
Wolfe, Richard J., 2516
Wolfe, Thomas, 712—13
about, 714-15, 1226
Wolfgang, Marvin E., 2056
Woll, Peter, 2861
Wolseley, Roland E., 1338, 1345
The Woman at the Washington Zoo,
854
A Woman Unashamed, 806
Women
education, 2311—12
employment, 2733
in society, 2011, 2014
legal status, 1989, 2816
Negro, 1950, 2311
physicians & surgeons, 2133
status. See Social status — women
Women and Thomas Harrow, 571
Wood, James P., 2693
Wood, Judson P., tr., 1885
Wood, Norton, ed., 2219
Woodcraft, 176
Woodford, Frank B., 2937
Woodress, James L., 35, 1192
Woodring, Paul, 2348
cd., 2280
Woodruff, Stuart C., 243
Woods, Allan, 1342
Woods, David F., ed., 2260
Woodward, Comer Vann, 1772
Woodward, William T., illus., 1806
Wood worth, George W., 2521
Woolley, Edward A., 2849
Woolman, John, 56
about, 57
Wool son, Constance Fenimorc, 340
about, 341
Words for the Wind, 972
Work relief, 1559
Workers. See Labor and laboring
classes
Workingmen's Party of New York,
1511
The World (New York), about, 1320,
1326, 1330
World Christian Fundamentals Associ-
ation, about, 2434
The World of Art, 2392
The World of Dunnett Landing, 324
World politics, 1642—45, 2090
World series (baseball), 2228—29
World War I, 1686-88
aerial operations, 1686
conscientious objectors. See Consci-
entious objectors
diplomatic hist., 1596, 1598, 1608
econ. aspects, 1562
pacifism, 1555
reporters & reporting, 1310
World War II, 1689-94
aerial operations, 1692
campaigns. 1693
Normandy, 1691
causes, 1592—93
diplomatic hist., 1592-93, 1625—26
in fiction, 843, 859-60
naval operations, 1690
Worser Days and Better Times, 2478
Worthington, Marjorie M., 60
Worthy, James C., 2719
Wouk, Herman, 1103-6, 1130, 2445
Wrenn, John H., 424
Wrestling, 2267
Wright, Arthur F., 1420
Wright, Austin M., 1 262
Wright, Benjamin F., ed., 2750
Wright, Chauncey, 2357, 2402
about, 2403
Wright, Christopher, ed., 2118
Wright, Dale, 2619
Wright, Frank Lloyd, 2568
about, 2560, 2568
Wright, Herbert E., ed., 1361
Wright, Louis B., 1450
ed., 4
Wright, Nathalia, 2573
Wright, Richard, 1107—10
Wright, Walter F., 321
Wriston, Henry M., 2310
Writers' Program, 1723
Wroth, L. Kinvin, ed., 1427
Wnthering Heights (motion picture),
about, 2199
Wyatt, Stanley, illus., 2631
Wyckoff, Alexander, ed., 2548
Wyld, Lionel D., 2487
Wyoming, hist., 1842
Wytrwal, Joseph A., 1974
X, Malcolm. See Little, Malcolm
Yachting, 2236—37, 2239
The Yage Letters, 767, 770
Yalta Conference, 1 592—93
Yana Indians, 1408
Yankee Science in the Making, 2097
Yankees
folklore, 2477
theater, 2183
A Yankee's Odyssey, 35
Yates, Brock W., 2226
Yates, Norris W., 1263
The Year of My Rebirth, 1033
The Year 2000, 238
Yearley, Clifton K., 1975
The Years Were Good, 1329
Yeats, William Butler, about, 1166
Yellow fever epidemic, Philadelphia
(1793), fiction, 39
Yellow Jack, "3°
The Yemassee, 173
Yiddish theater, 2184
Yoder, Don, 2506
Yoho, James G., 2606
Yoscloff, Thomas, ed., 1897
Yost, Edna, 2150
You Can't Get There From Here, 592
You, Emperors, and Others, 1076
You Have To Pay the Price, 2254
Young, Andrew S. N. (Doc), 2234
Young, Donald, 2783
Young, Edwin, ed., 2734
526 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Young, James H., 2131 Z Ziff, Paul, 2360
Young, Mary E., 1382 Zinn, Howard, 1944
Young, William H., ed., 2777 Zabel, Morton D., ed., 636, 1264 Zionism, 2875
Youngblood Hawke, 1105 Zaturenska, Marya, 716-17 Zisowitz, Milton L., 2 1 5 1
Younger, Richard D., 2859 ^^[TV7'6, Zobc1' Hiller B" ed" ^7
Youth, 2002, 2008, 20x0 gjj£ STeS" SSt 1352 Z°lot°W' MaUricC' 2I*9
Sec also Childhood and youth in SSS5ft£rS $ T he Zoo Story , ^-^
literature Ziegler, Benjamin M., ed., 1441 Zorach' Wllham» about' 2573
Yu, Beongcheon, 296 Ziff, Larzer, 7 Zornow, William F., 1832
Yugoslavs, 1968 ed., 108 Zworykin, Vladimir K., 2076
U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFF1CB: 1976 O — 428-227
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11